CONTENTS

JOURNAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, Vor. XLIX, Parr IG

FOR 1880.

—eeeeESeSEe SO

No. I.

Description of the Great Siva Temple of Gangai Kondapuram and

of some other places in the Trichinopoli District.—By Lreur.-

Cot. B. R. Branriit, (with a Plate), .........

Rude Megalithic Monuments in North Arcot. a Tiga Cis

B. R. Branrit, (with a Plate), Bron

The Coins of the Uae ae of Kangra. —By C. St Ronan,

(with a Plate),.. : :

Note on an Inen pion’ founds aya a vatone i ing near eNO ruins oe a

Masjid on Lanka Island, Wular Lake, Kashmir.—By Masor

H. 8S. JarRert,, SacBee

Coins on the Sune ¢ or Mitra ciypraste, founden near e Ranahasar or

Ahichhatra, the ancient Capital of North Panchala, in Rohil-

khand:—the property of H. Rrverr-Carnac, Esq., C. S. L,

F.S. A., &. Described by A. C. CarnnErte of the Archzolo-

gical Survey of India, (with a Plate), Be

Coins of Ghias-ud-din zint! Mu’az-ud-din bin Sam. 2559 C. R. Sram.

WAG DT ee AG Se. cQwith: ai blate)Mamscrccccsscavesiscec. snes cocres

No. II.

A Collection of Hindi Roots, with Remarks on their Derivation and

Classification —By Dr. A. F, Rupoitr Horrnie, (with an

Appendix, containing an Index of Sanskrit roots and words,

occurring in the Collection), ..........6....04 FCORCOOTE EE CURE ECE ETS

Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles of the Pathan kings of

Dehli.—By C. J. Roperrs, (with two Plates), .........0....0..,

Memorandum by H. Rrverr-Carnac, C.8., C. 1. E., F.S. A., on Coins

of the Sunga Dynasty, (with 3 Plates),..........csssssosssscernences

Page

iv Contents.

Page

No. III.

Remarks on the Afghans found along the Route of the Tal Chotiali

Field Force, in the Spring of 1879. Part I—By Lrevt. R. C.

Temete, B. S.C, F.R.G.8., M. R. A.S., &., (with three

Plates, and two maps), .... Sit

On the Stryaprajiapti. Part I. By Da G. inseam, Paneer 1

Benares College, ......... , ; ‘ 107

Memorandum on Clay Discs calles Ge Hgpindle ‘Whorls” aad Youre

Seals found at Sankisa, Behar, and other Buddhist ruins in the

North Western Provinces of India.—By H. Riverr-Carnac,

Hsq., C. S., C. I. E., F. S. A., (with three Plates), ............00 127

Supplementary Memorandum.—By the same, (with a Plate),......... 137

Note on some Copper Buddhist Coins—By H. Riverr-Carnac,

C.8.,C., 1. E., F.8. A., (with two Plates); (s.. cis. csssctees cee oS

No. IV.

Remarks on the Afghans found along the route of the Tal Chotiali

Field Force, in the Spring of 1879. Part II.—By Lieut. R. C.

Tremere, B.8.C., F. R. G.S., M. R. A.S.; &., (with 3 Plates

and: 2 sMlaps) semacsne: 143

On the Stiryaprajiapti. Part TI. By Dr. G. “ida am, Prinipal

Benares College, ......... 181

Coins supplementary to Tine ¢ i Gino wicles aie aN Pano ines

of Dehli.”—By Cuas. J. Roperrs, (with two Plates), : 207

Copper Coins of Akbar.—By Cuas. J. Roparrs, isonet ete (with

twor Plates); ccascsseeme sislelere.eteino ae aeeiae a salad olne cloitslarapuietsteilee stearate 213

LATS IE (Que JSG NG aS)

JOURNAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, Parr I,

FoR 1880.

Pl. I (pp. 5, 8). Rude Monuments in Arcot.

Pl. II (p. 14). Coins of the Maharajahs of Kangra.

Pl. III (p. 24). Coins of the Mitra Dynasty.

Pl. IV (p. 28). Coins of Ghias-ud-din and Mu’az-ud-din bin Sam.

Pls. V & VI (pp. 81, 84). Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles of

the Pathan kings of Dehli.

Pls. VII, VIII, IX (pp. 87-90). Coins of the Mitra or Sunga Dynasty.

Pls. X, XI, XII (pp. 155-163). Sketches from Afghanistan.

Pls. XII, XIV, XVa (pp. 127, 1387). Spindle Whorls, &c., found at Sankisa,

Behar and other Buddhist Ruins.

Pl. XV (p. 185). Clay Seals, &., found at Sankisa.

Pls. XVI, XVII (p. 188). Copper Buddhist Coins.

Pls. XVIII, X¥XIIIa (pp 208, 210). Coins supplementary to Thomas’

Chronicles of the Pathan kings of Dehli.

Pls. XIX, XX (p. 218). Copper Coins of Akbar.

Maps, Nos. 1 & 2, (p. 92). Sketch Map of the March of the Tal Chotiali

Field Force.

ERRATA.

Page 207, line 2, read (With two Plates)

5 PAR by UG om ) LET OWN O

py 2097) fy L,, -Blate XVILE. a:

» 210, ,, 11, ,, Plate XVIII, a.

CONTENTS.

Description of the Great Siva Temple of Gangai Kondapuram and

of some other places in the Trichinopoli District.—By Lirvt.-

Cou. B. R. BRanrinn, (with a Plate), ....... siclaveleraisl riiehonete

Rude Megalithic Monuments in North Arcot.—By Lrevur.-Cot.

B. R. BRANFILL, (with a Plate), soc. .s sats c ew een eons 560.0

The eee of the Maharajahs of Kangra, (with a Plate).—By

Ci y ARODGER Sarvs aceon ae etele Pater eealans SEE ARTE al Drovelea tema oebemete

N noe on an Inscription found upon a stone lying near the ruins of a

Masjid on Lanka Island, Wular Lake, Kashmir.—By Mason

HS PARBEET, soc. 2s oe Co cesenereres av efeiel nies! ollie, siete ale

Coins on the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty, found ‘near Rémanagar or

Ahichhatra, the ancient Capital of North Panchala, in Rohil-

khand :—the property of H. Riverr-Carnac, Hise, Cs.) 5.

F.s. A., &c. Described by A. C. CanttEyte of the Archzo-

logical Survey of India, (with a Plate),......00....- Sood0s °

Coins of Ghids-ud-din and Mu’az-ud-din bin Sam.—By C. RB. Saure-

WAGED, MR. A, 8), (witha Plate),). sss cence «sieees eee e ate

Page

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—o-—

Part I.—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &e.

No. J.—i880O.

Description of the Great Siva Temple of Gangai Kondapuram and of

some other places in the Trichinopoli District.—

By Urevt.-Cou. B. R. Branrruy. (With a Plate.)

During the past season I visited and examined the great Siva temple

of Gangaikonda (-Shola-) puram (Gangacondapuram of A. S. 79), situate in

the extreme E. N. E. part of the Trichinopoly District, 20 miles S. W.

from Chidambaram.

As this is the largest* and best specimen of a South Indian temple

proper I have ever met with, I venture to offer a short description of it.

Roughly speaking it is a facsimile of the great Tanjore Temple, possibly

its prototype, or perhaps more probably a copy ; but never having been

“restored,” as the Tanjore example has, and being built throughout in a

very hard kind of stone, it retains much of its pristine appearance and

purity of design, which has been lost there.

I made notes of my observations on the spot and took measurements,

sketches and some impressions of the inscriptions with which its base is

covered, as specimens of the character, which is mostly old Tamil, very

similar to that at Tanjore.

Gangaikondapuram is the site ofa deserted town supposed to have

been the city or chief town of Gangaikonda Chola.

* The largest Indian sanctuary towers mentioned by Fergusson (Hist. of Arch.

Vol. ITI.) are those of Jagandth at Puri and the great Tanjore Pagoda, which are 80

and 82 feet square at base respectively.

2 B. R. Branfill—Deseription of the Great Siva Temple. [No. 1, |

Most of the inscriptions appeared to be mere statements of gifts

ade to the temple by private persons. The western and southern

(side) inscriptions appeared to be mostly in the Tamil character and

language with occasional Sanskrit formule to begin and end with. Those

on the northern side were said to be chiefly in Grantha and Telugu or 4

other (than Tamil) characters.

The temple consists of a grand stone “ stubi” (as they called it), a

sanctuary steeple or Vimanam ona raised basement or terrace, decorated

by a rail ornament below, having the upright posts engraved with griffins

(or Ya/i), and an elaborate scroll-enveloped animal or figure on every

third or fourth post, but no cross-bars or horizontal rails between.

The Alédai or terrace-path is 33 feet wide, surrounding the entire

temple, including the great Veli-mandapam or Outer court, at a height of

about 5 feet above the (original) ground level.

The great pyramidal Vimana is 100 feet square* at base and about

165 feet high. The double story below the pyramid and immediately

above the terrace basement is vertical, with five compartments or towers

on each face (north, west and south) of the temple, separated by four

deep recesses, with a handsome sculptured ornament (purdna kumbam)

i. in each recess. Each projecting compartment has a fine sculptured figures

chiefly Saiva but not without important Vaishnava figures, and the plain

intervals of flat wall are covered with (?) historical scenes of rishis, kings,

worshippers and attendants, celestial as well as terrestrial, in low relief.

Above the double vertical story rises the pyramidal stubi in seven

stories to the neck which is spacious and supports four bulls (as at

Tanjore) below the dome or semi-dome.

The whole temple is of stone throughout, and the domed top is

| apparently earved to represent a copper tile or leaf-pattern covering, like

that of the five halls (sabha) at Chidambaram.

The only or chief ornament of the pyramidal portion of the tower is

the square and oblong cells of “ Rath” (= car) or Gépuram (= spire-roofed)

pattern, with their elaborate fan-shaped windows, like spread peacocks’

tails.

There is little if any stueco to be seen, the whole being of pure

stone.

On the east side and attached to the great stwbi is the Méle-

Mandapam (=a high court or west court), a three-storied portico or

j transept covering the cross aisle between the north and south entrances to

| the Temple ; this is built to match the Vimana, as at Tanjore.

To its east again and attached to it, is the west wall and end of the

great Outer court (Veli-mandapam), begun in the same magnificent scale

* Seo note above.

1880. ] B. R. Branfill—Description of the Great Siva Temple. 3

and style, but never completed: for it is broken down or left off rather

abruptly, and finished by a plain large hall, completely enclosed by its

four walls and flat roof, only half the height originally designed.

It measures 80 feet wide, North and South, and 163 fect long, West

to Hast, with a plain doorway in the middle of the east end, having huge

stone warders (dwdrapdl), but otherwise devoid of any fine ornamenta-

tion. It is 18 or 20 feet in height, and the roof is supported by four

rows of plain stone pillars.

There is a large uncovered and incomplete portico in front (Hast) of

the Veli-mandapam, approached by a double flight of steps from North

and South and 10 or 12 feet above ground level, which is the level of the

interior of the mandap and temple.

The court-yard of the temple is about 610 feet Hast and West, by 350

feet North and South, with a fine gdpuram or entrance tower built entirely

of stone (fast falling down) on the Hast, of grand but suitable proportions,

not half the height of the temple itself. Usually the gépuram is 8 or 10

times as high as the temple sanctuary.

The court-yard or quadrangle was once surrounded by a double-storied

open cloister of plain but solid stone work, said to have contained 365

cells (in the two stories), but only a few of these remain in the centre of

the north wall there is a small plain doorway.

The surrounding wall was of stone and must have been about 25 feet

high.

The sculptures round the base of the temple are very good in design

and execution.

The architecture struck me as grand, simple and pure, with many

traces of the wooden construction of which it is, in many respects, a copy ;

especially in the projecting beam-heads at the angles, each of which is

surmounted by a rude lump roughly resembling a flattened spiral (conch-)

shell, perhaps intended for the salagram (black ammonite or serpent-stone) ;

only this is a Saiva temple.

I did not notice the Naga, but saw traces of trees with umbrellas

over them.

The (proper) right hand Dwarapal has the right foot raised and

resting on a stump (of a tree), encircled by a serpent with a half-swallowed

elephant in its mouth, at all three doorways alike.

The projecting stone cornice of single convex flexure is massive, but

does not stand out so far as in many more modern cases I have noticed

elsewhere, but is, I should say, more free and prominent than some to be

seen at Chidambaram.

I did not see the imitation of wooden rafters and laths, with nail

heads &e., to be seen at Tinnevelly.

4 B. R. Branfill—Deseription of the Great Siva Temple. [No.-1,

The usual Bull (Mandz) in front of the temple is a poor one, compar-

ed with that at Tanjore.

The minor temples and shrines in the court-yard are inferior and

mostly in ruins.

One of the more conspicuous of the sculptures represents Siva coming

out of an opening (yéni or split) in a cylindrical stone column (or

lingam).

This figure is represented at Tanjore and elsewhere, and is to be seen

repeated here several times in various parts of the Gangaikonda Shola-

puram temples.

A figure of a rishi (Mdarkanda) on his knees, with forehead on the

ground, is below.

The pillars and pilasters are very plain, square in the four towers

(or rath-like portions), forming the four corners of the s¢iéb7, orna-

mented by pointed leaves below the capitals, which are very fine large

tabular slabs.

The square pillars or pilasters are not cut away to the octagon

form leaving square blocks, as is common. The pillars and pilasters of

the next, intermediate, partitions or towers are octagon throughout, with

similar lanceolate ornamentation and (octagonal) capitals.

The central partitions or towers have 16-gonal pillars and pilasters

with similar ornaments and capitals.

The plinth moulding is very grand, bold and chaste. It re-called to

my mind the pattern of the plinth moulding of an unfinished temple at

Kuttalam (Cowrtallam) in Tinnevelly.

The flat portions of the walls are covered with (?) historical scenes

in which rishis and country folk, herdsmen &c., figure largely.

There are three or four wells in the Temple court, one of which

(the Sin(g)ha Tirtham) is connected with the legend of the founding of

the temple and possesses a never-failing supply of very good water.

I noticed that the name on the Tamil inscriptions was Gangaikonda

Sholapuram and Gangaikondapuram. The inhabitants now call it Gangai-

kandapuram. They told me that the Stalapurdna or local historical

record of Gangaikondapuram had been taken to Tanjore and a copy placed

in the Rajah’s library there, whilst a copy (or the original) was taken and

kept by the copyist who now resides at Nachaiydrkévil (or at Tirichirai)

near Kumbakdénam.

Another place of interest I visited may be worth mentioning though

quite modern, and that is Ramalinga-pillai-sdlai, a remarkable church or

college building, called variously Pardésimadam, and Sanmarga-Sabai,

situate on the high road from “ Cuddalore” to Vriddhichalam, a mile or

1880. ] B. R. Branfill—Deseription of the Great Siva Temple. 5

so west of the point where the high road from Madras (vid Panrutti) to

Kumbakénam crosses it.

A few years since, one Ramalingapillai collected followers and money

and attempted to establish a new religion. He appears to have taught

the ethics of Christianity without its theology. But I could not get at

any precise particulars. Having collected some hundreds of followers

(2000 was stated) and built his college, Ramalingapillai retired with some

ceremony into concealment in a house, now styled “ Tirwmaligaz,”’ in the

village of Mottukuppam, a few miles distant from the College.

He is said, by his followers who now await his re-appearance at “ the

last day,” to have never come forth from the room in which he disap-

peared, or to have been seen again.

I think the true facts of the case are worth eliciting and putting on

record. The building is a remarkable one of brick and chunam in the

modern Eurasian composite style, and the domed part of the roof or cupola

appears to be covered with sheet metal.

T also visited Chenji or Sanji-Kottai (Anglice Gzngee), a remarkable

precipitous bluff rock, covered with and surrounded by fortifications of no

very ancient date apparently. It is just the kind of stronghold that was

likely to be seized on and held as a citadel by the successive conquering

armies that have overrun the Carnatik for some centuries past.

The most interesting thing I observed here, beside the natural

fastness (a notice of which is to be found in the South Arcot Gazetteer),

was a very rudely carved stone lying in front of a small shrine halfway

up the rock on the south side, dedicated to a local goddess called

Kamala-kanni-y-amman to whom human sacrifices were formerly offered.

Plate I shows copy of a rough pencil sketch taken hurriedly on the

spot. Four human heads occupy a square raised shield, with two parallel

bars in the centre like a pair of dumbells with small knobs, which might

stand for footprints. Each pair of heads is separated by a ¢risul-

like mark immediately above and below the pair of bars in the centre.

Above these in the centre at top isa pair of ram’s (?) horns, surmounted by

a short transverse bar and appendage which I could not make out, and in

the centre below, a corresponding pair of buffalo (? Aulgd), horns and

head, A bow to the right and five arrows to the left on the lower part of

the stone, at each side of the raised part, complete the carving. The arrows

are club-headed and feathered, and one of them is furnished with a hole at

one end, as if to hold a line. The entire stone is an oblate circle about 33

feet high and 43 feet wide, and not very thick, lying flat on the ground.

Close to it is an upright figure of “ Minudaiyan Virappan,” with hands

together in the attitude of respect or supplication, and a sacrificial post

stood near.

6 B. BR. Branfill—Deseriptcon of the Great Siva Temple. [No. 1,

The grim-munsif said that this “ kévil’ or chapel was held in great

respect by the country-folk and was originally there before the present

fortifications were built. Sacrifices are still made in times of drought and

dearth and are supposed to be very efficacious.

The temples at the base of Chenji and some of the sculptures and

remains are very interesting, extensive and well wrought, but apparently

modern, though quite deserted and going to ruin. The monkey god

Hanuman is to be seen in several places sculptured on the rocks.

Since the road was made which passes through part of the Chenji

fortress, it has been frequently visited and despoiled of its sculptured

treasures. I was informed that the fine columus which adorn the “ Place”

at Pondicherry were removed hence by stealth, by an enterprizing

Frenchman. But we need not grudge them, for they are appreciated

highly where they are, instead of being neglected and lost sight of in the

spot where they formerly lay.

Some very handsome sculptures have been removed and set up at

Chittamur, a few miles distant to the eastward, near a new temple built

by a neighbouring chief.

The traditional founder of the fortress is said to be one Supdlaka (or

perhaps rather Zupakala) Nayak.

I may here mention that the Stalapurana of Senji-K6éttai was stated

to have been taken away by the Collector of the District (S. Arcot), a few

years ago, and never returned.

At Mailam (=Wayitrastalam) near Tindivanam, the Tamburan (or

abbot) informed me that his temple was founded by King Jayamba or

Jayambaga Maharaja, from the north, who also founded or built Senji-

Kottai. This old fellow is a very fine specimen of a man who never

touches flesh or any cooked food, but lives on fruit and milk only. He has

repaired and restored his temple and is now building a fine stone gépuram on

which I was shown a sculpture of himself in the style of an old bearded

Rishi. He reminded me of the Tamburdn (or abbot) of Tiru(p)pan-

andal near Kumbakdénam.

Another very interesting place I visited near Tindivanam is Peru-

mukkal (“ Permacoil’”’ of Orme and of the Indian Atlas, sheet No. 78).

Perumukkal is the common pronunciation in the district. At the place

itself it is called, and written also, Perumukkil.

Like Senji-K6ttai it has been a fortified stronghold for some centuries.

It has a fine large stone mandap on the summit and some small temples or

shrines, but the ruins of some larger ones strew the summit, sides and base.

The rock is an isolated one of dark granitic boulders, very precipitous

in most places. It is the last to the 8S. 8. Hastward of the rocky masses

that stud the plain of the Karnatik to the south-west of Madras.

1880. ] B. R. Branfill—Description of the Great Siva Temple. 7

I noticed stone circles at its eastern base, as well as at other stony

places to the west and south-west, on both banks of the Ponniyar (S.

Pennar or Pinakini.)

Mr. Garstin in the 8S. Arcot District Manual gives Peru-mukal (=great

travail), from a legend of Sitadévi having here given birth to twins. There

are two villages near, called Nalmukktl (or Nanmukkil) and Palamuk-

kil, names having reference to the same legend. Mr. Garstin also men-

tions Janikipéttai, and I may add Ramandthapuram, all in the immediate

vicinity. But the old Sanniyasi or hermit sent for the stalapurana (kept by

an artizan in the neighbourhood) and wished to show me from it that the

proper name of the hill is Mukkiyachalam, and that it is therein styled

Madhyakasi (Middle Kasi) and is the scene of Rishi Valmiki’s penance,

death and burial. A ruined shrine attached to the mandap is pointed out

as the spot where he was interred.

There are the remains of many fine sculptures here, destroyed by the

Muslim, and many inscriptions on the base of the temples.

The fort was held and besieged repeatedly in the wars of the Karnatik

in which much damage was done by the roundshot.

The following observation may be worthy of record.

At Gangaikondapuram the wells are said to have a perennial supply

of good water near the surface, that fails not in the driest seasons ; and

at Chidambaram the same is said of the great tank in the temple enclosure.

At Tiruvadi (A.8. 79), close to Panrutti, I noticed in the bed of the Gedilam

or Garudanadi (the ‘* Cuddalore” river) a natural spring or fountain of

clear water, welling up with some vidlence in the midst of the muddy

river-water. It is said to be perennial and to be as good as Kavéri water,

whence it is locally called Kolladattwmélat = Kolladam or “ water-spring”’.

In connection with these I may mention the artesian wells that have

recently been opened at Pondicherry and suggest that the perennial supply at

Gangaikondapuram, Chidambaram and Tiruvadi may be explained by there

being at those places a connection with the water-bearing stratum which

is the source of the artesian wells, underlying the extensive laterite beds

of the Cuddalore or S. Arcot district. I have heard of other places, parti-

cularly near Villapuram on the South Indian Railway, where the subjacent

springs have been tapped by the natives and the outflowing water long since

utilized for wrigating their fields,

8 B.R. Branfill—Rude Megalithic Monuments in North Arcot. [No. 1,.

Rude Megalithic Monuments in North Arcot.—

By Urrvt.-Cotronet R. B. Brayrrin. (With a Plate.)

T have just had an opportunity of visiting the disused tomb-field at

Tralabanda Bapanattam, in the Palmanér taluk of North Arcot.

The tombs here are of unusual interest from the size, shape and ar-

rangement of the slabs of which they are composed, and the rarity of their

chief characteristic.

The usual kistvaen or megalithic sepulchral cell is enclosed by three

concentric rings of upright stone slabs, each slab having its top rudely

worked (chipped or hammer-dressed) into a semicircular or a rectangular

shape, and set closely side by side alternately, the round-heads standing

higher than the intermediate flat-heads by the amount of their semi-diame-

ter, 2. e., the height of the rounded portion, so as to form a parapeted wall

of rounded merlons with flat silled embrasures.

These walls or parapets rise in three concentric tiers on a slight

mound or cairn, a foot or so above the general ground level.

The outer circle or tier consists of some 24 slabs, nearly 8 feet wide,

half of them being semicircular at top and standing about 3 feet high, the

whole forming a ring fence or enclosing wall about 30 feet in diameter.

The second tier has 16 slabs, 8 of them round-headed, rising to a

height of 5 or 6 feet above the cairn or mound ; the whole forming an in-

termediate ring-wall about 22 feet in diameter.

The third or inner wall is composed of four prominent round-topped

slabs, 8 to 10 feet wide, and 12 or 15 feet high above the cairn, and 4 or 5

feet higher than the other four flat-headed slabs that stand between them

and complete the inner ring, an octagon of some 16 feet in diameter, or

rather a square of 12 to 15 feet, with the corners cut off.

The kistvaen or sepulchral chamber nearly fills up the internal space,

the capstone or covering slab of which sometimes projects horizontally

beyond the chamber below it, so as to fit closely to the four great round-

headed slabs that enclose it, the 4 flat-headed corner stones being only

about the same height as the capstone, and narrower than the others.

The only entrance to the interior was apparently intended to be solely

by small holes broken in the two or three central slabs on the east front,

and nearly opposite to the similar hole in the eastern wall-slab of the kist.

There is a kind of antechamber or closed portico between the inner

chamber and the inner enclosing wall, provided with a moveable shutter

stone or slab,

The stone slabs used throughout are comparatively very thin, being

usually about 8 inches thick, and even the great capstones seldom exceed 6

inches,

Journal, As: Soe: of Bengal, Vol, XLIX, Pt. 1. for 1880.

PLL

(‘‘ Gingee”) S, Arcot.

KR indely sculptured (sacrificial) stone, lying before Temple 6f Kamala-kanni-y-amman al Chergi or Sanji-kotlii

fercmagaenann :

Re metet On ee OTS og ese tee

ORIEN, sate a Catan

Rude sepulchral monument of stone slabs at lralabanda—Bipanattam, in North Arcot District of Madras.

Restored slightly.

Litthy: & Printed - Newman & C2 Coscat ther

1880.] 8B. Branfill—Rude Megalithic Monuments in North Arcot. 7)

The whole forms an imposing structure, and recalls the idea of a small

citadel or fortification.

There are many examples, perhaps a score or more of this pattern, still

partly standing, and about as many more of a very similar kind, only with-

out the round-headed projections, all the slabs in each ring or tier being of

the same height, about 7 feet above ground level, and completely hiding

the enclosed kistvaen.

Dividing the tombs into three classes according to size, and counting

the fallen and half buried, as well as those standing, there are 170 of the

1st or biggest, 210 of the 2nd, and 200 of the 3rd or smallest sort, a simple

kist composed of slabs from 2 feet square and upwards, more or less buried

in the earth, and without any enclosing walls or circle of stones remaining.

Most of the tombs in this nekropolis are much ruined and overgrown

by jungle so that I suppose there may well have been many more than 600

tombs here, within a space 500 yards long and 800 wide. The interments

have but a shallow covering of soil, sometimes less than one foot.

On excavating they were found to yield the usual sepulchral relics, ex-

cept that iron weapons were very scarce or entirely absent, whilst the terra-

cotta coffers were more abundant than in the similar tombs of Mysore. In

one, a few ornamental beads, similar to some taken out of the Coorg tombs,

were found lying near the remains of a human skull.

Some of the coffers, sepulchral troughs or trays, were ornamented

with a chain ornament in festoons and furnished with projecting rings or

loops and prominent hooks, asif to hang garlands on, Some were mere small

flat oval troughs, whilst others ranged up to 4 feet long, 2 feet wide and

high, and were furnished with four or five pairs of legs

Perhaps however I need only further mention the chief novelty that

struck me, and this may be no novelty to others.

Two or three Tamil letters were found scratched on a fragment of a

little bowl. They seem to spell the words sadwma or chathum or chadud ;

the final letter (? m) is very doubtful and may be intended for a terminal

d or ¢, if that were admissible.

I have some rough notes and sketches of a few of the monuments, but

had no leisure to explore further. A careful collection and close scrutiny

of every fragment of the pottery (which is abundant and of the rude but

antique and polished kind) would probably yield some valuable and curious

information as to the habits, &c. of the tomb builders.

The locality has a bad character for being feverish and is in a very

retired part of the country just above the Hastern Ghats.

The way to it lies through Chitttir and Palmanéri whence there is a

good road for 15 miles co the S, W. to Baireddipalle, and thence a bridle

path for 6 miles vid Neilipatla to Bapanattam. The nearest name marked

10 C. J. Rodgers—The Coins of the Maharajahs of Kangra. [No. 1,

on the old Indian Atlas, Sheet No. 78, is “ Yerlabundah’’ (? Irala-rock).

The Ivala are the wild folk who roam the jungle in search of forest pro-

ducts and a free silvan life. During the rainy season some of them are said

to dwell in these tombs, many of which would afford them perfect dwelling-

houses, and the marks and relics of their recent occupation are to be seen

frequently and unmistakeably.

I know of but three or four other places where these peculiar rounded

slabs are to be seen, but they will probably be found to be more common

when looked for.

The Coins of the Mahérdjahs of Kdngra.—By ©. J. Ropeurs.

(With a plate.)

Kangra is the name of a fort and town situated at the junction of two

mountain streams which form a tributary of the Bids on its right bank ere

it leaves the hills. The coins in the accompanying Plate II go by the name

of Kangra coins now-a-days. Bnt the rAjahs whose coins they are were known

in history by the name of the Rajahs of Trigartta, the country of the three

rivers, the Ravi, Bids and Sutlej. The family of these Rajahs claims its de-

scent from Susarma Chandra, governor of Multan at the time of the Mahabha-

rata. After the war was over they went to the hills for refuge and erected

the fort of Kangya for their protection. The district under the Rajahs of

Kangra seems to have been like all districts governed by such Rajahs in old

unsettled times. Kangra was their mountain stronghold. The neigh-

bouring district of Jalandhar was subject to them, and must have furnished

a considerable portion of their revenue. So the Rajahs of Kangra would be

known at that time as Rajahs of Jalandhar. Being of the lunar race they

kept the title Chandra after their names.

The Indo-Scythians conquered the fort of Kangra. When Mahmtd

conquered it “the genealogical roll of the Indo-Seythian princes of Kabul

for sixty generations was found in the fortress of Nagarkot by Mahmiud’s

soldiers”* (Kangra is known in the history of India by the name of

Nagarkot). From this fact, and from the immense amount of wealth

taken from Kangra by Mahmiid, General Cunningham infers that “ Kang-

ra must have belonged to the Rajahs of Kabul for several generations, and

* General Cunningham’s Archeological Report, Vol. V, for 1872-3, p. 155. The

General quotes Abu Rihan’s statement as contained in Al Biruni. I may here state

that I am indebted to this report for nearly all my facts concerning the Maharajahs of

Kangra and to General Cunningham for much valuable aid generously given when I

began to collect the coins drawn in the plate.

1880.] ©. J. Rodgers—The Coins of the Maharajahs of Kangra. iLL

that it was their chief stronghold in which they deposited their treasures.” *

‘Not only this, but General Cunningham thinks that the wealth accumula-

ted in Kangra at that time consisted of the silver pieces of the Hindu

Rajahs of Kabul which are even now found so plentifully throughout the

Panjab—the coins of Samanta Deva, Syalapati Deva, Bhim Deva and Kha-

davaya Deva.+

One fact bearing strongly on this view the General seems to have over-

looked. All the coins of the Kangra Rajahs with some few rare exceptions

are of the horseman type. Some are of the bull and horseman type with

the names of the Rajahs over the bulls. Nay more than this, the earliest

Kangra coins bear the name of Samanta Deva over the bull. That they

were coined in Kangra no one will doubt who will cast his eye over the

coins of the Rajahs in the plate. I once attributed the first two coins to

Susarma Chandra. But a careful examination of the letters together with

the results of a comparison of the letters of other coins with these, has

convinced me that they are the coins of Samanta Deva.

The list of names of the Rajahs of Kéngra from Susarma Chandra

down to the last Rajahs is of course obtainable. There is no reason for

doubting its correctness.. But as yet no coins have been found going fur-

ther back than Prithvi or Pithama to whom. General Cunningham assigns

the year 1830 A. D. This is an approximation only, but based on fair rea-

soning. Judging by the number of coins obtainable of any prince we may I

think fairly infer the length of his reign. The fewness of the coins argues

that the reign was short. Before Pithama I believe the coins of Samanta

Deva were coined and used at Kangra. There are immense numbers of

these coins found yearly in the Panjab. Some of them have the horseman

after the usual type, horse well shown and the whole body of the rider with

letters on either side his head. The bull is well developed too and the

name above it is generally legible. But the Kangra type of Samanta Deva,

which the die-cutters of the mints of the Rajahs of Kangra seem to have

slavishly adhered to, is unmistakeable, after it is once studied and known.

The other well drawn coins are probably those of the Kabul or some other

mint,

We must not be surprised if the coins of all the Rajahs are not obtain-

able. The coins of Kashmir, though very abundant, have many kings

unrepresented. The coins of Chumba aneighbouring state to Kangra bear

only the names of a few Rajahs, although the list of kings numbers no less

than 170 sovereigns. Coining seems to have always been considered the

peculiar privilege of paramount sovereigns or of independent rulers. Bear-

ing this in mind, we need not wonder if any hiatus occurs in the lists of

* bid, p. 156.

Tt I have seen several hundreds of these coins this year,—C. J. R.

coins as compared with that of the Rajahs.

C. J. Rodgers—The Ooins of the Mahdrdjahs of Kangra.

[No. 1,

Nor must we wonder if a small

number of coins turns up bearing names of rulers to whom we cannot attri-

bute any country. Jalandhar and Kangra must have been subject at dif-

ferent periods to Kashmir as well as Kabul and perhaps to Kanauj.

Gene-

ral Cunningham gives the following list :—*

Accessions. nae he Nae en REMARKS.

1330. Prithvi. Pithama.

1345. Purva. Apurvva.

1360. Rupa. Rapa. Contemporary of Firoz.

1375. Sringara. Singdra.

1390. Megha. Megha.

1406. Hari. Hari. Broth

1420. Karmma. Karmma. \ poeeaace

1435. Sansara. Sansara. Contemporary of Muhammad Sayid of

Delhi, A. D. 1433—1446.

1450. Devanga. Avatara. There is ove coin known of Devanga.

1465. Narendra. Narendra.

1480. Suviras, Cela wecces

1495. Prayacas | aii A.) saves

1510. Rama. Rama Died 1528, A. D.

1528. Dharmma. | Dharmma

1563. Manikya. fo

1570. Jayant oo) | mhegscce

1585. Viriddbt. = | fire...

1610. Triloka. Triloka. Rebelled against Jahdngir, 1619 A. D.

Triloka was the last king who coined.

Thereare 12 morenames given in thelist.

A little study of Plate II will show that the coins are of several kinds.

The commonest is that which has a bull on the obverse, with the name of

Rajah above the bull. The reverse in every case except one has on it what

is intended for an image of the horseman and horse. But asa rule there are

only the legless hind-quarters together with the thigh and boot of the rider

visible. The one mark on nearly all of them is the spear the horseman carries.

First of all fixing this and remembering that the spear is carried close

behind the man’s thigh, to the right should come the horse’s head and to

the left the bind-quarters. But in reality only portions come on the coin.

The die must have been as large as the silver coins of Samanta Deva which

are a little broader than a four-anna piece. The boot is in some cases fully

visible. But the head of the horseman is nowhere to be found. The spear

has a notch on it near the bottom and a flag at the top. Soit was a regu-

lar lance. Whether the man wore armour or not we can’t say.

These coins are found in considerable numbers not in Kangra itself, but

in Ludidna, Jalandhar and Umritsur. Vast quantities of them are how-

* Vol. V, Archeological Report, p. 162.

1880.] ©. J. Rodgers—The Ooins of the Maharajahs of Kangra. 13

ever annually melted down and very soon there will be no more obtainable.

Some of them may contain a very small amount of silver. It is very

seldom I now meet with any in Umritsur. It is so with everything. I do

not know what provision Government may be making to secure a cabinet of

coins for the museums of the country. I believe no provision whatever is

being made. A few private collectors are at work for their own cabinets

which in the course of a few years will find their way to Europe. The

coming generation will have to receive history on mere hearsay. The nu-

mismatic monuments are fast disappearing. The old Rajahs in many cases

are known already only by name. No records are obtainable of them. One

would think that before it is too late Government should interest itself in

the matter. The British Museum is far richer in the coins of India than

any Museum in India. This isa mistake. If India is to be for the In-

dians, it is a pity to export from the country all those mementoes of former

things and dynasties. Patriotism and loyalty go hand in hand with us. It

would surely be wise in our Government to create a love of country in the

hearts of the people of India. We want something to displace the grasp-

ing and selfishness which everywhere show themselves. The historic

remains which lie round about us are not understood, or are rather misun-

derstood and not valued. History is taught as a matter of dates and

names and is useless. Museums are collections of odd things which are to

the educated and uneducated alike voiceless. The teachers of history can-

not read the coins which would add interest to their lessons.

Of all the provinces of India, the Panjab has more historic associations

than any other. From the time of Darius to that of the Empress of India,

the Panjab has been an arena on which great struggles have taken place.

Yet the coin cabinet of the Lahore Museum is wretchedly poor. A few

Greco-Bactrian coins, a few Indo-Scythian coins and a few odds and ends

with the names attached to them of the persons who presented them (!) are

all that are visible to the ordinary visitor. The curator, in whose charge are

the valuable coins which are always kept under lock and key, is generally

engaged during the day. So visitors passing through Lahore see next to

nothing of what ought to be visible at all times. There is no catalogue of

the coins, and many valuable ones have been already lost. This is again a .

mistake. It is exactly the same at Delhi, where the coins are all in a box !!

These remarks are made not in a captious spirit, but with a real desire

to direct attention to the proper use of museums and provincial coin cabi-

nets, and also with the hope that both be made more use of in the

education of the people for whom the museums were built and with whose

money they are supported.

I will now proceed to make a few notes on the coins represented in

Plate II.

14 —-G,.:J. Rodgers—The ‘Coins of the Mahdrdjahs of Kingra. [No. 1,

No. 1. is a coin of Samanta: Deva. Obverse above bull Syz Sam: reverse

horseman.

No. 2. is a coin of thé same prince, with Sr¢ Samanta above bull, reverse

horseman.

No. 38. Pithama. Obverse Sri Pithama Chandra (Deva), reverse horse-

man.

No. 4. Ditto Obv. ditto., rev. do.

No. 5. Ditto. Obv. ditto., rev. do. Horse’s neck ornaments shown and

whole leg with pointed boot.

No. 6. Apurvea. Obv. Maharajah Sri Apurvva Chandra (Deva), rev.

horseman plain and horse’s eye visible.

No. 7. Ditto. Obv. Sri Apu(rvva) Chandra Deva Maharajah, reverse

horseman.

No. 8. Ditto. Obv. Sri Apurvva Chandra, rev. horseman.

No. 9. Ditto. Obv. (Sri Apu)rvva Cha(ndra) Deva, rev. horseman.

No. 10. Ditto. Obv. bull, above which Sri Apu(rvva), rev. horseman.

No. 11. Rupa. Obv. bull, above which Sri Rupa Cha(ndra), rev. horse-

man,

No. 12. Obv. bull, above which Sri Rupa Chandra, rev. horseman. The

horses of Nos. 10, 11 and 12, have beads round their necks.

No. 18. Apurvva. Obv. (Apurvva) Chandra Deva Maha(rajah), rev.

horseman.

No 14. Simgara. Obv. Maharajah Sri Singdra Chandra Deva, rev,

horseman. Very poor.

No. 15. Megha. Obv. Maharajah Sri Megha Chandra Deva, rev. horse-

man.

No. 16. Hari. Obv. Maharajah Sri Hari Chandra Deva, rev. horseman,

Neck ornaments and eye of horse visible.*

No. 17. Ditto. Obv. Maharajah Sri Hari Cha(ndra Deva). The letters of

the first line are all suspended from one line drawn across the

coin as in Hindu letters. Rev. horseman, Head of horse, very

much deteriorated.

(This king Hari soon after his accession tumbled into a well while out

hunting. He was rescued after an interval of several days had elapsed. In that

* Since I wrote this article I have come across a coin of Hari =z}. The coin

in the paper is of Hari =fx. Now in conversing a few days ago with General

Cunningham on this matter I said that I was inclined to ascribe this rare coin to the

king who was the brother of Karmma and who was hidden in a well for some days.

He quite agreed with me. The coins of the paper which as I say are found in great

numbers, would then resolve themselves into the coins of the king Hari who lived

after Triloka, A. D, 1630-450, whose coins those of Hari resemble in make and letters.

ournal, As: Soc: of Bengal, Vol, XLIX Pt 1.for 1880.

Po,

aS te: 14:

Bey

COINS OF THE MAHARAJAHS. OF

1880.] OC. J. Rodgers—The Ooins of the Mahdardjahs of Kangra. 15

interval however he was accounted dead: his brother ascended the throne,

and his wives mounted the funeral pile.. When he came back he found

Karmma reigning, and he went and took up his abode in the outskirts of

his brother’s dominions. J cannot account for Hari’s coins being so plenti-

ful. Out of several thousands I have seen, I have seen only one of Karm-

ma, while at least one-fourth of the whole must have been Hari’s. A Hari

succeeded Triloka: perhaps these or at least some of them may be his coins

although General Cunningham’s list closes with Triloka.)

No. 18. Karmma. Obv. bull, above which Sri Karmma, rev. horseman.

No. 19. Sinsdra. Obv. Sri Sansdira Chandra Deva, rev. horseman with

a large flag on which is a peculiar mark.

No. 20. Avatira. Obv. Maharajah Sri Avatara Chandra Deva, rev.

horseman.

(There is one coin of Devanga, the god-bodied, known ; I gave one to

General Cunningham.)

No. 21. Narendra. Obv. Maharajah Sri Narendra Chandra Deva, rev.

horseman.

No. 22. Dharmma. Obv., in a square area which is surrounded by a circle

of dots, Dharmma Chandra ; rev., in a circle surrounded with

‘a circle of dots, Durga Devi.

No. 23. Driloka. Obv. Maharajah Sri Triloka Chandra Deva. All the

lines have the letters suspended from one line going across

the coin. This coin and No. 3. are alike in this matter.

Rev. horseman.

No. 24. Ditto. Obv. ditto without lines, each letter separate, rev. horseman.

Hinder part of leg and thigh visible and hind-quarters and legs

of the horse.*

The coins of Megha, Avatira Karmma and Dharmma are very rare.

«The coins of Rupa, Singéra, Sansara and Narendra are rare. Those of

Pithama, Apurvva, Triloka and Hari are common. The Kangra types of

Samanta Deva are very common.”

* Where the whole name is not on the coins, the part omitted is in brackets.

EEO

16 H. S. Jarrett—Note on an Inscription found in Kashuntr. [No. 1,

Note on an Inscription found upon a stone lying near the ruins of a Masjid

on Lanka Island, Wular Lake, Kashmtr—By Mason H. 8S. Jar-

RETT, B.S. C.*

The inscription which is in Persian, is as follows :—

oe ple yo 23 wrdetvo ol pS Ely Why ye dads oral

ob > Lro5> gees Kimog as Oss wee 9 yh elas wis Ke

May this edifice be as firm as the foundations of the heavens,

May it be the most renowned ornament of the universe,

As long as the monarch Zayn [bad holds festival therein

May it be like the date of his own reign,—* happy.”

As is well-known the letters of the Arabic alphabet, like those of the

Hebrew or Phenician and consequently of the Greek, are used as numerals, and

the grouping of certain letters into a suitable word is frequently made to serve

as a memoria technica among the Hasterns to recall a date. In the above

inscription, the numerical value of the letters in khurram (e¢y% happy)

is 847 which is the year of the Hijra it is intended to record. ‘This

date is equivalent to A. D. 1443-4 during which Zayn-tl-Adbidin (the

Zayn Ibad of the inscription—for both have the same meaning, viz., orna-

ment of the Adorers) ruled in Kashmir.

It may be interesting to glance cursorily over the events which pre-

ceded the accession of this prince from the period of the close of the last

Hindu dynasty in the eleventh century of our era.

The Hindu history of that country has been discussed in a short Essay

by Horace Hayman Wilson which will be found in the XVth Vol. of the

Transactions of the Asiatic Society. He takes as his guide the first of the |

series of the Raja Tarangini, by Kalhan Pandit who commences his history

with the fabulous ages and carries it down to the reign of Sangrama Deva

the nephew of Didda Rani in Saka 949 or A. D. 1027 approaching to

what Wilson considers to be the Pandit’s own time Saka 1070 or A. D.

1148. The next two works of the series, véz., the Rajavali of Jonah Raja

and the Sri Jaina Raja Tarangini of his pupil Sri Vara Pandit, continue the

record to the accession of Fath Shah, which Wilson places in A. H. 882,

but is given by Muhammad Aazam author of the Persian history of Kash-

mir, as in A. H. 897 (A. D. 1491-2).

* [A rubbing of this inscription was sent to the Society by Mr. Arch. Constable.

The stone bearing the inscription is apparently a slab of black slate, well polished

and finished, and measures 213 by 12 inches and 23 inches thick. The rubbing was

taken on the 22nd September, 1874. The inscription, as shown in the rubbing, con-

tains several inaccuracies; thus in the 2nd line re) is wrongly spelled wd ; the 1st

and 4th lines have 5= instead of x=, two dots being omitted apparently for want of

space. Ep.]

«=

1880.] H. 8. Jarrett—Wote on an Inscription found in Kashmir. nee,

In the following survey I have followed the narrative of this last men-

tioned historian who calls himself the son of Khayr tiz-Zaman and who

commenced writing his history in the year 1147 A. H. (A. D. 1734-5)

during the reign of Muhammad Shah of Hindustan. His work follows the

order of the Sanskrit and is divided into three periods, the first treating

purely of the Hindu dynasties, the second of the Muhammadan, and the third

of the subjugation of the country by the House of Timtr, with some con-

eluding remarks on the features and curiosities of the country.

_ With the second period alone is this Note concerned, and the narrative

is taken up at the accession of the last Hindu Rajah Sahdeo in A. H. 705

(A. D. 1805-6). During his reign occurred an irruption of the Turks

under Zulju whose ravages left for generations the traces of his incursion.

Forced to leave the country in the winter after a stay of eight months, the

army, betrayed by guides, perished in the mountain snows. Many of the

inhabitants of the country had fled in fear of their lives, some to Tibet,

others, including Rajah Sahdeo, to Kishtwarah where he remained in hopes

of some day recovering his crown. His General Ram Chand who had been

among the fugitives returned to Kashmir with a refugee from Tibet named

Ribja to whom in former times he had accorded his protection. The coun-

try was now in a state of anarchy, each petty chief asserting his own inde-

pendence. Ram Chand and his people occupied the fortress of Lar, Rijhi*

or Rinji (for the name is indistinctly written) seeing his opportunity

gathered a few followers round him, made himself master by stratagem, of

Lar, put Ram Chand to death and took his family prisoners. He now

(A. H. 725 A. D. 1324) openly assumed the sovereignty, married the

daughter of Ram Chand and won to his side the son of that Chief by grant-

ing him the government of Lar and Tibet and appointing him to a high

command in the army. Though Buddhism was nominally the prevailing

religion at this time, the country was distracted by the dissensions of secta-

ries, whose hostile and contending claims to religious truth perplexed the

inquirer dissatisfied with the national religion. Such an inquirer was Raja

Rinju, who after much perturbation of spirits and constant prayer, was led

by divine inspiration—so runs the simple narrative—to watch a Moslem at

his devotions. He saw, admired and believed, and soon led his court and

people to embrace the Muhammadan faith. This monarch died in A. H. 727,

after a reign of a little more than two years and a half, and the ruins of a

once noble alms-house and a splendid mosque attest his reverence for the faith

of his adoption. His widow Kotahrinit married Udayn Deo, brother of the

last Raja, who continued with his consort to carry on the government till

the year A. H. 742, when he died. One of the Generals of the army coming

* The Rajatarangini has the name Rinchan.

t+ In the Rajatarangini Kotah Rani.

18 H. S. Jarrett—Wote on an Inscription found in Kashmir. (No. 1,

of aroyal stock, named Shahmir who, settling in Kashmir in the reign of

Sahdeo as a merchant, had fast risen to place and power, now thought him-.

self strong enough to marry the twice-widowed queen and to usurp the

crown. She refused his overtures, but he made himself master of her per-

son, and she was forced to yield a reluctant consent to the espousals. She,

however, slew herself during the marriage festival and Shahmir now be-

came undisputed master of the crown (A. H. 743 A. D. 1842-3) and

assumed the title of Sultén Shams-uw’d-din. He died in 747 A. H, (A. D.

1346-7) leaving two sons, Jamshid and Ali Sher.

The reign of Jamsbid was short. He was defeated and slain in battle

by his brother who succeeded him in 748 under the title of Ala-u’d-din.

Alé-ud-din’s rule of ten years is marked by no important event. He

died in A. H. 748 (A. D. 1856-8) and was buried at Alé-u’d-dinptra.

His son Shahab-u’d-din succeeded to the crown on the death of his

father. He employed his energies in clearing the country of rebels and

marauders, and annexed Pakli, Dantaur and the tract, called the Sawad

Kabir, to the crown. He wrested Tibet from the ruler of Kashghar and

ventured to march towards India, then ruled by Firtiz Shah. After a

campaign in which the victory was with neither party, peace was concluded. ,

on these conditions that the country from Sirhind to Kashmir should ap-

pertain to Shahab-’ud-din, while all to the eastward should acknowledge the

sovereignty of Firiz Shah. Muhammad Aazam* notes with surprise that

this fact, which he says is mentioned by many historians, is left unnoticed

by the author of the Tarikh-i-Firuz Shahi. I may add that it is equally

omitted by Elphinstone. (A. H. 758, A. D. 1356-7.)

On his return to Kashmir, he built the capital of Shahdb-w’d-dinptira

of which now not a trace but the ruins of a mosque remain, and he destroyed

the large idol temple at Bijarah.y In the year A. H. 778 (A. D. 1876-7)

he died.

Kutb-td-din his brother succeeded him in A. H. 780 (A. D. 1878-9).

He ruled with justice and moderation and was celebrated as a scholar

anda poet. Kutb-tid-dinptira commemorated his name and the metropo-

lis of his kingdom. He died in A. H. 796 after a reign of sixteen years.

During his time occurred the advent to the court of Sayyid Ali Hamadani,

the sixteenth in direct descent from Ali-b-Abi-Talib, the son-in-law of

Muhammad. He was revered for his sanctity and eminent virtues, and his

influence guided the counsels of the monarch, The Sayyid bestowed on him

his own cap which Kutb-id-din wore in the royal crown. It is feigned that

* His son Muhammad Aslam, who is the author of the History of Kashmir entitled

the Gohar-i Adlam and has made considerable additions to his father’s work, goes so

far as to say that the conquests of Shahab-tid-din were carried northwards beyond the

Oxus and southwards beyond Lahore.

¢ Called also Biharah or Bij Biharah.

1880.] H.S. Jarrett—Note on an Inscription found in Kashmir. 19

its efficacy secured the throne to the monarch’s successors until the reign of

Fath Shah who directed it to be buried with him, from which period dates

the decline of the dynasty.

His son Sultan Sikandar, better known by the title of the Iconoclast

from the number of idols he destroyed, assumed the sovereignty in A. H.

796 (A. D. 1893-4). During his reign, the rapid advance of Timtr

on his march to India, induced Sikandar to conciliate the Tartar conque-

ror by despatching his son Shahi Khan known afterwards as Zayn-w’'l Adbi-

din to his court with presents and friendly letters. Timér gratified by this

conduct, left him im possession of his territory but detained Shahi Khan in

Samarkand which he never left until Timtr’s death. Sikandar after a

reign of twenty-five years and nine months, died in A. H. 822. A superb

mosque which contained 372 columns, each 40 cubits in height and 6 in

circumference, was begun and completed by him in the space of three years

under the direction of two famous architects Khwajah Sudr-tid-din Khora-

sani, and Sayyid Muhammad Nuristani. To his piety was also owing the

erection of the great mosque of Bijérah, and with the exception of the

rattle of the royal kettle-drums, no profane music was permitted to disturb

the austere tranquillity of his capital. Through his munificence the walls

of the romantic gardens of Shalimar were extended as far as the Parganah

of Phag and their stability was assured or blessed by the burial beneath

their foundations of all the Hindu works that could be collected. As these

treated either of idolatrous rites, astrology or history that was fabulous,

they were considered by the monarch as condign objects for destruction.

He was succeeded by his son Ali who reigned but six years and nine

months. This prince bent upon performing the pilgrimage to Mecca

resigned his kingdom in A, H. 828 into the hands of his famous brother

Zayn ti) Aadbidin and set out on his journey. <A. H. 822. (A. D. 1419).

A H. 828. (A. D, 1424-5.) Zayn ul Adbidin was noted early in life

for his abilities. He employed the time he had spent in Samarkand in

adding to his store of knowledge, and on his return to his country he

brought with him a number of artificers, such as paper-makers, book-binders,

carpet-weavers, saddlers and others to improve the industries of his own

land. His brother Ali having reached the territory of his father-in-law

the Jammu Chief, was persuaded by him to abandon his pilgrimage and re-

sume his sovereignty. Returning therefore with an army, he was met by his

brother Zayn ul Adbidin, who gave him battle, defeated him and placed

him in confinement wherein he shortly after died. The powerful faction of

the Gurjis who in the time of his father possessed great influence in state

affairs, and who favoured the cause of his brother, was exterminated by him

at Naushahr, at which palace he erected a place for his own residence.

His time was now spent in promoting the prosperity of his country

20 H. 8. Jarrett—Wote on an Inscription found in Kashmir. [No. 1,

and in repairing the ravages of the irruption of the Turks under Zulju

which the lapse of more than a century had not yet been able to efface.

He was a liberal patron of men of letters and encouraged the progress of

the arts, especially favouring the artificers whom he had introduced from

Samarkand. He travelled much over his dominions and his Hindu and

Muhammadan subjects lived at peace with each other undisturbed by

religious dissensions, which if they arose were amicably settled by puncha-

yets at which the monarch himself would preside. This conduct gained

for him the title of the Great King.

According to tradition in the vicinity of the Wular lake once stood a

city of which the Raja was Sudrasen. By reason of the enormity of his

crimes, the waters of the lake rose and drowned him and his subjects.

Tt was said that during the winter months, at low water, the ruins of a

submerged idol temple might be seen rising from the lake. Zayn ul Adbi-

din constructed a spacious barge which he sank in the lake and upon which

he laid a foundation of bricks and stones till it rose high enough to be level

with the water. Upon this he erected a mosque and other buildings and

gave the islet the name of Lanka, The expense of the work was defrayed

by the fortunate discovery of two idols of solid gold which had been |

brought up from the lake by divers. On the completion of Lanka the

king ordered a great festival to be held wherein great sums were distribut-

ed amongst the poor. Verses were written by the poets to commemorate

this event, and among these the inscription under notice by Ahmad Allamah

Kashmiri was engraved upon a stone and placed above the Mihrab or sane-

tuary of the mosque. This Ahmad Kashmiri was the author of the Nir-

nama, a Persian translation -made in the time of Zayn ul Adbidin of an an-

cient History of Kashmir in the Kashmirian language by Shaikh Nur-tid-din

Wali. His translation was made use of by Muhammad Aslam the son of

Muhammad Aazam, in amending the omissions of his father’s History.

Mention of the slab with its inscription is made by Muhammad Aazam

who gives a faithful transcript of the verses Muhammad Aslam states

that he visited Lanka in 1167 A. H. (A. D. 1758) and observing the

inscription carried it in his memory and records it in his work. His

second line runs thus—

sh ple yo crt) 9 5 & yoo

which shows that either his memory failed him or he was unable to decipher

the line more correctly given by his father.

The further history of Zayn ul Adbidin it is perhaps unnecessary to

record. He died in A. H. 880 (A. D. 1475) and was succeeded by his

son Hydar Shah. His tomb may still be seen below the Zayna Kadal, the

fourth of the thirteen bridges that span the river Jhelam in its course

through the valley of Kashmir.

18S0.] A. C. Carlleyle—Cotns of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty. 21

Ooins of the Sungaor Mitra Dynasty, found near Rémanagar or Ahichhatra,

the ancient Capital of North Panchala, in Rohilkhand :—the proper-

dy of H. Riverr-Carnac, Hs@., c. 1. E., F. 8. A., &e. Described by

A. C. CariuEviz, of the Archeological Survey of India.

(With a Plate.)

The great ruined site of Ahichhatra, the ancient capital of North

Panchala and now known as Rdmanagar, has of late been yielding a plenti-

ful supply of the coins of the Sunga or Mitra dynasty. Mr. H. Rivett-

Carnac has been so fortunate as to procure a considerable number and

variety of these coins from that find-spot, and he kindly placed them in my

hands for examination and identification.

The fact of so many coins of this dynasty having been found so far

to the north-west from their proper capital city, Pushpapura (or Patalipu-

tra), may perhaps be held to be a proof of the wide extent of their sway.

While making some excavations at Bhuila, the site of the ancient city of

Kapilavastu, in the Basti district, I obtained a considerable number (pro-

bably about a hundred) of the coins of the Mitras, dug newly from the

soil, in deep excavations, while I was present on the spot; they were

mostly of Agni Mitra and Indra Mitra, with a few of other later kings of

this dynasty. These coins were mostly of small size ; but the coins obtain-

ed by Mr. Rivett-Carnac, from Réamanagar, are mostly of the largest size,

with three or four only of the smallest size.

About one hundred and ten of these coins, belonging to Mr. Rivett-

Carnac, have passed through my hands; and of these, several bear names

of kings which are either new, or of rare occurrence, such, for instance,

as Bhadraghosa, Phagtni-mitra, Surya-mitra,* and Anu-mitra,—besides

several coins of Bhdni-mitra, which were already known. The most nu-

merous coins were those of Bhiimi-mitra, and the next numerous were

those of Phaguni-mitra,—after whom, in the descending scale of number,

followed Agni-mitra, Bhanu-mitra, Surya-mitra, Bhadra-ghosa and Indra-

mitra ; with also a very few, from other localities, of the later kings,

whose coins are of quite a different type, such as Vijaya-mitra, Jaya-mitra,

Satya-mitra and Saya-mitra.

From the numerical proportion in which the coins of various kings are

found in a hoard, we can generally make a pretty good guess as to who

were the earliest, and who the latest, of the series. Thus, the king of

* [This name was at first read Srayan-mitra by the author. General A. Cunning-

ham first suggested the true reading Saya or Surya-mitra ; see Proceedings As. Soc.

Beng., January 1880; see also below p. 28, Ed.]

22 A. C. Carlleyle—Cotns of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty. [No. 1,

whom the greatest number of coins are found in a hoard, may be accepted

as being either the latest, or the contemporary king, of the dynasty, at the

time when the hoard was buried or lost ; while the king of whom the fewest

and most worn coins are found may be accepted as the earliest, in point of

time, of the series. But a similar numerical proportion of coins of differ-

ent kings may, sometimes, also have been brought about by accidental

circumstances; and therefore we must, in all cases, be guided by the older

or later forms of the alphabetic characters, which appear in the legends on

the coins.

But if we follow the rule enunciated above, in a general sense, with

sufficient judgment and discrimination, we may apply it in the present case.

Thus, as the coins of Bhtimi-mitra are the most numerous, in propor-

tion, in the hoard found at Ramanagar, we may suppose that he was the

latest king of the dynasty, at the time when the hoard was buried, and that

the hoard was buried during his reign. :

In like manner, as the coins of Phaguni-mitra are the next in point

of number, to those of Bhtimi-mitra,—or in fact nearly equalling them,—

and were, at the same time, far in excess of the coins of any of the other

kings, we may conclude that Phalguni-mitra, was the immediate prede- ,

cessor of Bhttmi-mitra.

The coins of Agni-mitra and Bhanu-mitra follow next behind, in

numerical proportion. But as the coins of these two kings are nearly

equal in number, it becomes difficult to decide which of them was prior to

the other. There is, however, one marked distinction about the coins of

Bhanu-mitra and that is, that the central symbol, of the three symbols

above the name, is always punched into the coin, with a square punch ; and

the symbol in this square punch-mark depression is generally a repetition

of the raised symbol to the right of it; while on the coins of other kings,

the central symbol is generally different from either of the other two. Now

this central square punch-mark depression I have also found on a few coins

of Surya-mitra, who, from the greater rareness of his coins and the rather

more antique form of the alphabetic characters of the legend, I consider to

have been a predecessor of Bhanu-mitra,—and from these two kings’ coins

having the square punch-marked depression in common, I should say that

Bhanu-mitra must have been the immediate successor of Stirya-mitra.

Agni-mitra must therefore be of later date, and should probably follow

immediately after Bhanu-mitra.

The coins of Bhadra-ghosa are the fewest and the most scarce of

all. And the alphabetic characters of the legend, are of an older type

than on any of the other coins, and more nearly approach the forms of the

old Lat character of Asoka. Moreover the large coins of Bhadra-ghosa

are very much worn, so much so that the legend is blurred and indistinct.

1880. ] A. C. Carlleyle—Coins of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty. 93

But Mr. Rivett-Carnac has one most beautiful little coin of Bhadra-

ghosa, of very small size, on which the legend is as clear and distinct as

possible,—really wonderfully clear for such a small coin.

The occurrence of only one undoubted coin,—besides one doubtful

one,—of Indra-mitra, in this collection, is somewhat puzzling to me,—

because, from the style of the alphabetic characters on his coins, I do not

think they are so ancient as those of some of the other kings; and I would

be inclined to place him certainly after Agni-mitra. The only reason

that I can offer for this comparative (and perhaps only apparent or local)

scarceness of the coins of Indra-mitra, is that his reign may have been a

short one, and either that his residence was in some different part of the

country, or that the distribution of his coinage was partial I did not find

that the coins of Indra-mitra were any more scarce than those of other

kings, among the coins of this dynasty which I obtained at Bhuila (Kapi-

lavastu).

But, in the present case of the Ramanagar coins, I think there may be

another way of accounting for this, probably merely temporary or local,

scarceness of Indra-mitra’s coins. I would suggest that Indra-mitra was

the son and immediate successor of Bhimi-mitra, and that the Ramanagar

hoard was buried immediately after the death of Bhimi-mitra, and in

the early part of the first year of the reign of Indra-mitra. This would

account for the plentifulness of Bhiimi-mitra’s coins, and the scarceness of

Indra-mitra’s, in the Ramanagar find.

I will now give a list of those Mitra kings whose names have been in

any way authenticated; and I will place them in the chronological order.in

which I think they should be placed ; and opposite to the names of those

of whom coins were found in the Ramanagar hoard, I will place the number

of each found, respectively.

Initial Date. Names of Kings. ee OE Comms

ound at Ramnagar.

B. C.

178. Pushipannitta jue coadssestrcsect tees: (None.)

Bhadraghosa, ....... ndedadooussdodock adonees| hv 6

Surya-maitras scenes: Ceara sct ca aad

ISJORHMUONNE), “ ooc00tc09000 onbo0enoo ond8D0DE . | 10

PNSTOVES HONNBTES © noo oop odang0 HoOUsacoANAoAadoose ||ilalE

INTUTE, | BeGodC cq0 acd oDOsoud0dde bed ooo Dae Weal

Phaguni=mitra,y a eeeeeeccse Shahn nacHoratn Ress

Te oWETNA TNE. cooaaodagogouob anoacdnocdcsoE || Oe!

Indyva-mitra, ..... S cd0 doco neonbenobo Ber acaeta Lin MAN kezA 1270005

1, doubtful.

24 A. C. Carlleyle—Ooins of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty. [No. 1,

I will now proceed to give a detailed description of the coins them-

selves, see Plate IIT.

T.— BuApDRAGHOSA.

1. Coin, very small.

Obverse.

A square depression, caused by a die, containing the legend, with three

symbols above it,—Bodhi Tree, Linga, and Serpents.

Legend—Bhadraghosasa.

Reverse.

A curious dumpy figure, as broad as long, of Buddha standing teach-

ing. :

2. Coin, large.

Obverse. A square depression, containing the Legend, with three

symbols above it.

Legend—Bhadraghosasa.

(Note.—The three symbols above the legend are, to the left a Bodhi

Tyree standing on a square base or in a square railing ;—in the centre, a

linga guarded by two serpents (Nags) which rise up on each side of it— ; to

the right, two serpents intertwined, forming a circular knot in the centre,

with their two heads extending out, right and left, above, and their two

tails extending out, right and left, below. This same description will apply

to all other coins bearing these symbols.)

Reverse.

Two objects, not distinct.

ii.—Suvrva-Mi7ra.

8. Coin, middle-sized, pretty large.

Obverse.

Tn a square depression, the legend, with three aymvels above it.

Legend—Surya-mitrasa.

Symbols above legend :—To left, Bedhit Tree, as before. To right,

two serpents intertwined, as before. In centre, a square punch-marked

depression, containing a symbol, which appears to be composed of several

snakes intertwined.

Reverse.

Device indistinct. (But, on another coin, it appears to be the symbol

of Sangha with the Buddhist Wheet of the Law, below it.)

4, Coin same size as the former.

Obverse.

In a square depression, the legend below, with three symbols above it.

Legend—Surya-mitrasa.

Oh. & Printal by W. Navman © 0° Coleutter

COINS OF THE MITRA OR SUNGA DYNASTY.

1880.] A.C. Carlleyle—Cons of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty. 25

Symbols above the legend:—To left, Bodhi Tree, as before. To

right, two serpents intertwined, as before. In centre, linga guarded by

two serpents (Ndgs) whose heads rise above it on each side.

Reverse.

Apparently the symbol of Sangha, with the Wheel of the Law

of Buddha. (This was referred to, in describing the previous coin, the

reverse of which is defaced.)

IJI.—Busnv-mirra.

5. Coin pretty large.

Obverse.

In a square depression, the legend below, with three symbols above it.

Legend—Bhanu-mitrasa.

(Sometimes the last part of the name appears to be mitrasa.)

Symbols, above the legend. To the left, the Bodhi Tree, as before.

To the right, two serpents intertwined, as before. In the centre, a square

punch-mark depression, containing a symbol composed of four snakes

intertwined, and forming a squarish shaped figure.

Reverse.

The symbol of Sangha surmounted by the Wheel of the Law of

Buddha. But it is possible that it may be intended for a figure of the

Sun (Ghdnu) placed above a pedestal.

IV.—AGNI-MITRA.

6. Coin, large.

Obverse.

Tn a square depression, the legend below, with three symbols above it.

Legend.—Agimitasa.

Symbols above legend. To left, Bodhi Tree, as before. To right, two

serpents intertwined, as before. In centre, Linga, guarded by two ser-

pents (Nags), one on each side.

Reverse.

Figure of Buddha standing, with right hand raised, and rays radiating

from his head. He stands on a Buddhist Railing, between two trees.

7. Coin, middle-sized, rather small.*

Obverse.

Legend and symbols the same as in the preceding.

Reverse.

. Buddha standing, with right hand raised, and flames ascending from

* [This is a mistake; coin No. 7 in the Plate is not one of Agni-mitra, but of

Bhiimi-mitra, like No. 10. By a mischance the wrong coin seems to have been sent

to be figured ; Ep. ]

26 A. C. Carlleyle—Coins of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty. [No. 1,

his head and shoulders. He stands on a sort of ornamental pedestal, pro-

bably representing the Lotus.

V.—ANU-MITRA.

8. Coin, very small.

Obverse.

Surface of obverse of coin, concavely depressed. Legend in a line

below. Three symbols in a line above.

Legend—Anu-mitasa.

Symbols, the same as on the coins of Agni-mitra.

Reverse.

A Buddhist Railing. Above it, a large round ball, surrounded by a

- eirele of dots. On each side below, a small round ball, with a curved semi-

circular figure below it, the concavity of the curve being turned downwards;

these two latter symbols resemble in shape the later modified old Indian

form of the letter “T”’, just preceding the Gupta period. I think

the central symbol above (namely the round ball surrounded by a circle

of dots) may be intended to represent the Sun.

VI.—PHAGUNI-MITRA.

9. Coin large.

In a square depression, the legend below, with three symbols above it.

Legend—Phagtni-mitrasa. a

Symbols, above the legend. To left, Bodhi Tree standing on a square

pedestal. To right, two serpents intertwined. In centre, a Linga, with two

serpents (Nags) twined round it, their hoods raised up on each side of it.

Reverse.

Buddha standing on a lotus, with a canopy over his head.

VIL—BuvMi-MitRa.

10. Coin, large.

Obverse.

In a square depression, legend in one line below, with three symbols

in a line above.

Legend—Bhiini-mitasa.

Symbols, Bodhi Tree, Linga with serpents (Nags), and two serpents

intertwined in a knot,—as on the coins of Phaguni-mitra and Agni-mitra.

Reverse.

Buddha standing between two trees, on a Buddhist Railing. Rays or

flames ascend from the head of Buddha.

1880.] A.C. Carlleyle—Coins of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty. 27

VITI.—Inpra-Mirra.

11. Coin, rather small.

Obverse.

Legend and three symbols in a square depression, as on the other

coins,

Legend,—Indra-mitasa.

Symbols, the same as on the two preceding coins.

Reverse.

A squat figure of Buddha, above a Buddhist Railing.

(Wote :—The legend on some other coins of Indra-mitra, which I

have seen, appeared to read simply as “Inda-mitasa,” while on a few it

seemed to have the still more mutilated form of ‘ Ida-mitasa.”’

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTH.

Since my Paper on the coins of the Sunga or Mitra Dynasty was

forwarded to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, I have seen in the collection

of Mr. Rivett-Carnac, another apparently unique coin of a king of this

dynasty called Ayu-mitra, which I believe to be a new name. ‘This

king must have been one of the latest of the dynasty, as the letters of

the legend belong to the later Gupta period.

Description.

Coin, round, middle sized, copper.

Obverse. Bull.

Inscription, underneath, A-yu mi-ta-sa.

Reverse. Apparently a Peacock and Palm-tree ?

The legend on this coin is clearly and distinctly just as I have given

it above, and there can not be any doubt whatever about it. This coin

therefore must not be confounded with the common, though similar, coins

of Saya-mitra, with which I am well acquainted.

In order to complete the list, I may mention that I have heard from

General Cunningham that he has a coin of a king of this Dynasty named

Dhruva-mitra. But as I have not seen General Cunningham’s coin

and therefore I do not know its age, I can not tell where to place Dhruva-

mitra in the line of succession. But no doubt General Cunningham will

deseribe the coin himself.

With the sole exception of the last named king, I think I feel pretty

certain of the place which the rest of the Mitra kings respectively should

28 C. R. Stiilpnagel— Coins of Ghids-ud-din, Se. [No. 1,

oceupy in the order of succession. We now know of fourteen kings of

this dynasty, and I would place them as follows :—

1. Pushpa-mitra. 8. Bhtmi-mitra.

Bhadraghosa. 9. Indra-mitra.

3. Surya-mitra. 10. Vijaya-mitra.

4. Anu-mitra. 11. Satya-mitra.

5. Bhanu-mitra. 12. Saya-mitra.

6. Agni-mitra. 138. Ayu-mitra.

7. Phaguni-mitra,

The fourteenth king would be General Cunningham’s Dhruva-mitra ;

but not having seen the coin, I can not tell in what position to

place him.

Of course I have never seen any coin of Pushpa-mitra; but he is

nevertheless sufficiently authenticated otherwise; but I have seen and

examined coins of all the remaining twelve kings.

With regard to the name Surya-mitra, I may now state that I have

since. seen several other coins of this king, and that the result of my

examination of these other and more perfect specimens is that the name.

must be read Suya or Surya Mitra; and in this I agree with General

Cunningham. On most of these coins the name appears to read as Suya,

with a dot (anuswara?) above the y; but on at least one coin, the

name reads. clearly as Surya, the repha appearing quite plainly on the top

of the y.

Coins of Ghids-ud-din and Mw az-ud-din bin Sdm.—By C, R. SruLPNAGEL,

M. R. A. 8.

(With a Plate.)

The extracts from the Tabakat-i-Ndsiri made by Sir Henry Elliot in

his History of India contain but little information concerning Ghids-ud-

din of Ghér, nor is this want of details much to be regretted except for the

fact that the coins obtained hitherto generally join the name of this ruler with

that of his younger brother Mu’az-ud-din whois looked uponasthe first Pathan

king of Delhi. It is stated that when ’Al4-ud-din Husain, surnamed Jehan-

soz, ascended the throne of Firdz-kdh, he imprisoned his two nephews

Ghias-ud-din Muhammad S4m and Mu’az-ud din Muhammad Sam in a fort

of Wahiristan, and settled an allowance for their maintenance. He took

Ghazni, but did not make it his permanent residence. After his death he

was succeeded by his son Sultan Saif-ud-din. This king released the two

irnal, As: Soc: Bengal. Vol. XLIX, Pt: 1, 1880 Pl: IV.

1880. ] C. R. Stiilpnagel—Coins of Ghids-ud-din, Se. 29

princes, his cousins, of whom Ghids-ud-din dwelt peacefully at Firoz-koh,

taking service with the Sultan Saif-ud-din, whereas the more adventurous

Prince Mu’az-ud-din proceeded to Bamian and there found employment

under his uncle Fakhr-ud-din Mas’id. But when Ghids-ud-din succeeded

to the throne of Ghor after Saif-ud-din’s tragical death, Fakhr-ud-din in-

stigated his nephew Mu’az-ud-din to bestir himself and likewise acquire a

regal position. The latter accordingly started in all haste to his brother’s

court where he was received in a friendly spirit. He served Ghids-ud-din

one year, after which the countries of Kasr-kajiran and Istiya, between

Herat and Ghazni, were assigned to him; and at a subsequent period he obtain-

ed possession of the city Takinabad, specially noted as the largest town in the

Garmsir. In 569 A. H. (1173 A. D.) Sultan Ghids-ud-din conquered the

town of Ghazni, but returned to Ghor after placing his brother Mu’az-ud-

din upon the throne, who secured in addition the territories of Ghazni and the

country round about in 570 A. H. Inthe third year after this time, Mu’az

ud-din led his forces to Multan, and henceforth his history becomes merged in

that of India. Of Sultan Ghids-ud-din scarcely anything more is known,

but it should be remembered in his favour that, instead of getting his bro-

ther murdered, he treated him with the greatest kindness, and always

associated his name with his own on the coins of the realm. Ghids-ud-din

died at Herat in 599, and Mu’az-ud-din was murdered by the Gakkars at

Rohtak in 602 A. H.

Coins in the joint names of Ghids-ud-din and Mu’az-ud-din have already

been published by Mr. Edward Thomas in his ‘“ Chronicles of the Pathan

Kings of Delhi,” two of which are of gold and two of silver, the latter being

ingraved in the first plate and numbered one and two, the latter being iden-

tical with the one described by Wilson.in the Ariana Antiqua, pl. XX, 29.

I have lately acquired eight specimens of dirhems of these Ghori brothers,

all of them different from those already described. Of these, three are

similar to No. 1, pl. I of Mr. Thomas’s book ; see Plate IV. They are of

silver weighing, on an average, 74 grains and have their legends arranged in

three concentric circles, the patronymic occupying the centre. The first,

however, differs in this that the outer circle containing the date (597) is

found in the obverse with the name and title of Ghids-ud-din, and not on

the reverse as on Mr, Thomas’s coin. I thought it at first just possible that

the engraver might have committed a mistake, and changed the outer circles

of the obverse and reverse, but such a supposition is unlikely from the

transcript of the coin in the body of the book, which clearly shows that the

date belongs to the reverse. Moreover it is totally immaterial on which

side the date is actually placed, and it is actually found on the reverse

together with Mu’az-ud-din’s name, on two of the coins described in the

——

30 C. R. Stiilpnagel—Coins of Ghids-ud-din, Se. [No. 1,

sequel of this paper. Although the margins are both a little abraded, they

can with ease be supplied from the next coin. I may, however, remark that

this coin could not have contained the name of the month of the year, as

there is not sufficient space for its insertion.

The following is the transcript :

Date 597.

Obverse.

&yLo Lro™ 9 wares 9 ee Shwe ee & a dso! * First circle,

pecdt oleledt Ut yee oes sl! SY aI Y Second circle.

eis x! oiodl y ol} eas = Third circle.

plo Ey dns” Centre.

Reverse.

*e & seb) Goel wid 9 oodls dS gu) ws ts x » First circle.

590 bred yleldt allt Got pelt Second circle. _

pebeed} et G2ott s Wood} Third circle.

cls yf oes Centre.

The last two of the three coins with concentric inscriptions referred to

above, differ from the first in this that they have the arrangement of date

just as in the Thomas’s pl. I, No. 1; viz., the date (596) is placed on the

reverse containing the name of Mu’az-ud-din. The size, however, is smaller,

and the letters tess bold. The Ariana Antiqua, pl. XX, 35 is probably a

similar coin to my two; but as Wilson, owing to the worn condition of the

coin in his possession, was unable to describe it, I include it in this paper.

The outer circle of the obverse contains the Strah common to all Ghori

coins ; the second has half the Kalima, which is afterwards continued in

the second circle of the reverse ; and the third circle and centre show the

names and titles of Ghids-ud-din. The reverse has in the first or marginal

circle the place of mintage and the month and year in which the dirhem

was struck. Part of the second and the third circles and the centre, like

those of the obverse, contain the titles and names, but of Mu’az-ud-din,

Ghazni, month Zi-ul-hajja, A. H. 596.

Obverse.

ys aly e204! uss Sreb os) wid 3 coedls dS yao) uw ds » First circle.

wa5 pine] | XS

1880. | C. R. Stilpnagel—Ooins of Ghids-ud-din, Se. ol

PBEM wlbled! MUI God poly al) My att Y Second circle.

ci ot Gt g Wot She Third circle.

ple uy? One® Centre.

Reverse

Catmdig Caw Shes sal 8 is S355 Sols os? pay 1d Gyr First circle.

Lo ure

580 psd! wlblest Ut guy aos” Second circle.

prea! gt Godt g lot Third circle.

ple Uy One” Centre.

The other five coins have never been described before, as far as I know,

and are quite of a new type. They were obtained from an itinerant Kabu-

li who was very shy in speaking of the place where they had been original-

ly procured ; but as in his conversation he said that he had been in Ghazni

and Kabul, and had lately come to Lahore by way of Jellalabad, it may be

reasonably presumed that they were not found in the Panjab, but in the

Kabul valley, or perhaps in or near Ghazni. All of these coins are likewise

binominal, The weight is between 56 and 79 grains. The area on either

side is a square composed of double lines, with the inscription arranged in five

lines. The enclosing margin is of course in four sections. It is bounded by

double circles. |The margins are partially abraded, but fortunately one coin

is sufficiently well preserved and the following inscription can be therefore

made out with accuracy : i

Dates 597 and 598. ;

Obverse.

Area :— wld Mt att ¥

as; Js) Og” d

pelse dh Uales

Cot g liad} elas j

else wy +s” Sat oh

Margin :— lS gro! le syed Gl oro 9 tgoely yy Lowy dsl 90 f

Reverse

Area :— BI) yg prcliJ} |

pesedl wy abind

9 Wo} 5200 |

prbadt gt) pol

Margin :— le (pad 9 Wares y wees dws) 94% ea rool [do yd

32 C. R. Stiilpnagel—Ootns of Ghids-ud-din, ec.

Of these five dirhems, four have the date on the reverse together with ~

the name of Mu’az-ud-din, and one on the obverse. None contains the place

of mintage.

All these coins, bearing evidence to the joint rule of the two brothers, are

dated 596, 597 and 598 A. H., and must have been issued towards the end of

their reigns, for Ghias-ud-din died in 599 and his brother three years after-

wards. Comparing the titles of the two sons of Bahd-ud-din Sam, the

elder, Ghids-ud-din, is always called “ul’azam” the greatest, Sultan, ul nasr-

l-din illah and abtil fath, whereas to his younger brother are applied

mu’azm, “ great,” Sultan, nasr-l-din and abtil muzafr. It was only after

the death of Ghids-ud-din that Mu’az-ud-din called himself by the higher

sounding title of ’azam.

Ce re ae ed

CONTENTS

OF THE

JOURNAL, Pr. I, For 1879.

No. 1.—Rivett-Carnac, Prehistoric Remains in Central India.—

Rivett-Carnac. The Snake Symbol in India, especially in con-

nection with the worship of Siva—Pratapa ChandraGhosha

Note on the articles exhibited by Mr. Rivett-Carnac.—G rierson,

Some Further Notes on Kalidasa.

.2.—Irvine, The Bangash Nawabs of Farrukh4bid—A Chronicle,

(1718—1857).—G rowse, The Sect of the Pran-nathis.

.3.—T em ple, Rough Notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes

about Kandahar.—Brajanatha Bandyopadhyaya, Hamir

Rasa, or a History of Hamir, prince of Ranthambor.

.4.—Barbe, Pali Derivations in Burmese.—Peal, A peculiarity of

the river names in Asam and some of the adjoining countries.—

Grow se, Bulandshahr Antiquities —Rajendralala Mitra’s

Note to the above—Rodg ers, Copper Coins of the old Mahardajas

of Kashmir.—Rodgers, The Copper Coins of the Sultans of Kash-

mir.—S mith, Observations on some Chandel Antiquities.

ee eee

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XVII (1843

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to XXII (1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XXVI,

XXVIT (1857, 1858), and Vols. XXXIII to XLIV, (1864 to

1875).

Asiatic Researches, from Vols. VI to XII and Vols. XVII to XX,

each at... 5... SOUOOOOODD OOO OOOO Onde coe ceeeceeseevece

Mattox dattos lind ex. isv. siclerevevacre chcieverencvonie ssehetoole rs) iene

Catalogue of the Books and Maps in the Library of the Asiatic

Society, 1856, . Sood o0 60GB Sci evoleivolecle) stohokelerate 5 bua

of Sanskrit Books ead IMIS Se unydisbomeeyepsiatstciorereiatertenteteicrets

—— of Books and MSS. in Arabic, Persian, and Urdu,..........

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated into English, with notes and

indexes, by H. Blochmann, M. AOS ha eee Spetetars :

The Prosody of the Persians—By H. Blochmann, M. A. ......

The Tabaqat-i-Nagiri. Translated by Major H. G. Raverty, 8 fase.,

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodgson, Hsq., B. C.8.,..... sees

The Antiquities of Orissa, Vol. I—By Rajendralala Mitra,,.....

BS. AS.

ooocek ooo os

NEW SERIES, VOL. XLIX, No, COXXUL.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Vol. XLIX, Part I, No. II1.—1880.

EDITED BY

JHE PHILOLOGICAL p ECRETARY.

« The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

man or produced by nature.”—Sir WILLIAM JONES,

*,.* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India ; or, m Lon

don, care of Messrs. Tritbner and Oo., 57 5 59, Ludgate Hill.

’

~~~—~:

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED BY }. W. JHoMas, 4T THE PaPrist Mission PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, FARK STREET,

1880.

¥ a

Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—To Non-Subscribers, Rs. 2,

Price in England, 4 Shillings.

CONTENTS.

Page

A Collection of Hindi Roots, with Remarks on their Derivation and

Classification.—By Dr. A. F. Rupour Horryin, ....... 33

Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles of the Pathan nee

(Wath a; Plate); —By. C.J; ROnGBES,...).cseees-. eae eee 81 |

Memorandum by H. Rivert-Carnac, C.S., C. I. E., F. S A. on

Coins of the Sunga Dynasty. (With isha Plates) sven: con Ome

JOURNAL

OF THE

POUATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—)-—

Part I—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &ce.

No. 11.—1880.

AWW ——

A Collection of Hindi Roots, with Remarks on their Derivation and

Classification. By Dx. A. F. Rupotr Horne.

This Collection was prepared by me some years ago and was originally

intended to form part of my Comparative Grammar of the Gaudian Lan-

guages, and to illustrate the Chapter on Roots. ‘The present introductory

remarks give the substance of that chapter.

The Hindi, like any other language, possesses roots. By this term

T here mean the constant element in any series of sense-related words.

Thus in the Hindi words bol-¢ “speech,” bol-dhat “ calling,” bol-ana

“speaking,” bol-d “spoken,” bol-at “he speaks,’ &c. the constant ele-

ment bol is the root ; the remainder are suffixes and vary according to

the meaning which is to be expressed by means of the root.

A root may be determined in Hindi, or for that matter in any Gaudian

language, by detaching the suffix of the 8rd person singular present a

(or ¢) from the word, when the remainder will be the root. Thus in bol-az

“he speaks,” kar-ai “he does,’ bujh-at “he understands,” bol, kar and

bujh are the roots respectively.

For comparing Hindi roots with Sanskrit, this is the most con-

venient rule. Fora large number of Hindi roots are not derived from

the pure Sanskrit root, but from that modified form of it, which is con-

fined to the present tense (or the so-called special tenses generally).

Thus the Sanskrit root budh ‘understands,’ takes the form budhga in

the present tense, whence arises the Hindi form dz%jh. From the Sanskrit

budh comes the 3rd person sing. present budhyate, in Hindi béjhac ; but

from it comes also the participle future passive boddhavya “to be under-

stood” ; in Hastern Hindi this form is béjhab or bujhib, Western Hindi

a0)

34 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

bujhibau, which transliterated into Sanskrit would be budhyitavya. This

shows that in Hindi the form du%jh acts as a root, precisely as budh

does in Sanskrit.

Putting aside mere phonetic differences, as in the Hindi szkh or stkh,

Marathi sik “learn,’’ Eastern Hindi char, Western Hindi chal “ walk,” the

Gaudian languages differ very little with regard to their roots. There are,

however, a few exceptional cases of roots which are confined to some

particular Gaudian language. Thus “see” is in Sindhi pas, Marathi pdh,

but in Hindi dis or dekh, the Sanskrit pas, preksh and dris ; again ‘“ come”’

is in Sindhi ach, Bangali dis or ds, but in Hindi dv or 4, the Sanskrit

dgachh and ayd.

Roots, as a rule, do not undergo any change, when entering into con-

junction with suffixes; except in the formation of the Causal Verb, in

which case a long vowel is always shortened; thus bol-and “to speak,’

but bul-dnd “to call’; chhor-and “to loose,” but chhur-dna “ to cause to

loose” ; ghiim-ané “to turn,” but ghtim-dné “to cause to turn” ; pi-nd

“to drink,’ but pi-lind “to cause to drink”, &c. There are, however,

a few exceptional cases of changeable roots. These are har “ do,” dhar

“place,” 7a “go,” le “ take,” de “give,” mar “die.” These roots assume

a considerably different form in the formation of the past participle and

past tense ; viz., the first five become ha or hi, dha or dhi, ga or gt, la or li,

da or di respectively, and mar becomes mu. The regular, unchanged

forms, however, also occur, and generally these three forms are peculiar

to some one or other of the Hindi dialects. Thus the High Hindi has

the past participle #i-ya “done,” Eastern Hindi ha-il or ka-yal, but

Western Hindt. kar-aw; Hastern Hindi also has the radical form #7 in

ki-his “he did,”.ki-hin “they did.”* So also High Hindi mu-dé or mar-d

“ dead,” Hastern Hindi mu-tl or mu-al.

Roots, when determined as above explained, may be divided into two

classes, primary and secondary. To the former class belong all those roots,

the originals of which, though sometimes more or less disguised by subse-

quent phonetic modifications, exist in Sanskrit. Secondary roots are those,

which have no Sanskrit original, though their origin can be traced to Sans-

kkrit elements. Thus the Hindi root hd “eat” isa primary one; for its

original is the Sanskrit root Ahad; but the Hindi root paith “enter”

is secondary ; for there is no Sanskrit root pravisht, though there is a

Sanskrit participle pravishta “entered” (of the root pra-vis), from which

it is derived.

Among the primary roots there are a few which have suffered no

phonetic modification. Thus, the common root chal “walk”; W. H.

chalai, H. H. ehale, Sky. chalati, “he walks.” (The E. H., however, has

charai). But most of them have passed through some sort of phonetic

* }, is a euphonic insertion, for the sake of assimilation to Vih-is “he took”, dih-tn

“they took’.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 35

change. These changes are of seven kinds, of which sometimes one, some-

times several have affected the same root. They are—

1. Simple phonetic permutation, consisting in the elision or softening

of a consonant, the contraction of adjacent vowels, and the like. JZ. 4.,

kha “eat,” Skr. khdd; chi “leak,” Skr. chywt ;—tor “ break,” Skr. trot

(causal of trut) ; par ‘ fall,” Skr. pat ;—paros “ distribute,” Skr. parivesh ;

ho “be,” Skr. bhi (bhava), &e.

2. Incorporation of the “ class-suffiv,” that is, the suffix, which in

Sanskrit is inserted between the root and the personal endings, and

according to which Sanskrit roots are divided into ten classes. In Hindi

these suflixes are incorporated with the roots. Thus, bih “ understand,”

Skr. budh + ya (budh IVth class) ; kop “be angry,” Skr. kup + ya (kup

IVth) ; nach “dance,” Skr. nrit + ya (mrit IVth) ; sun “hear,” Skr.

srt + nu (sru Vth); bhanj “break,” Skr. bhanay (bhanj VIIth); jan

“know,” Skr. 7¢ + nd (jd [Xth), &e.

3. Incorporation of the passive suffix ya. Thus, lag “belong,”

Skr. lag + ya; sich “irrigate,” Skr. sich-ya; de “ give,” Skr. di + ya

(da), &e.

4. Change of “class.” In Sanskrit all roots are divided into ten

classes, partly according to the various suffixes which some take before the

personal endings in conjugation, partly according to internal phonetic

changes which some undergo. The simplest roots are those of the VIth

class ; they are not subject to any internal change, but merely add the

suffix a. In Hindi all roots alike are reduced to the simple form of the

VIth class. This is done (@) by sometimes substituting the suffix @ of the

Vith class, for another sutlix; or (b) by changing the final vowels of

other class-suffixes (w in the Vth and VIIIth classes, @ in the [Xth class)

to a Thus (a) pava “obtain” (VIth), Skr. prap + nw (Vth; asif it

were prép + a VIth); manga “ask” (VIth), Skr. marg + aya (Xth) ;

again (6) kara “do” (VIth), Skr. kar-w (VIIIth, kri) ; jana “ know”

(VIth), Skr. ga + na (1Xth, pid). That is, the Hindi roots paz,

ming (ata), kar, jdn, all of the VIth class, correspond to the Sanskrit

roots prip, mirg, kri, jd, of the Vth, Xth, VIIIth and IXth classes

respectively, &c.

5. Change of “voice.’ Some Hindi roots are derived from the

passive base of a Sanskrit root. Thus, bhaj “ break’ (active), Skr.

bhajy + ya “be broken” (passive of bhanj) ; de “ give,’ Skr. di-ya “ be

given” (dd) ; sak “can,” Skr. sak + ya(sak) ; bik “sell” (act. intrans.),

Sky. vikri-ya (vikrt), &e.

6. Change of tense. Some Hindi roots are derived from the future

base of a Sanskrit root. Thus dekh “see”, Skr. drakshya (future of dris) ;

(old H.) nakh or nankh “destroy” or “throw away”, Skr. naikshya

(future of xus) ; (old H.) krakh “ draw”, Sky. krakshya (future of krish) ;

khech ov khaich “ draw,” Sky. krakshya (future of krish).

—

36 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Opllection of Hind< Roots. [No. 2,

7. Addition of the pleonastie suffic apt. Thus suhdv “ please,”

Skr. swkh (as if it were swkhdpi). In causal roots this is the universal

rule; @. ., kardv (or shortened hard) “cause to do,” as if it were derived

from a Sanskrit root kardpi (instead of kéri).

It will be observed that the laws 2 and 4, and again 3 and 5 are

closely connected.

The preservation of a final single consonant (especially a hard con-

sonant) in a Hindi root is a sure sign of its having been affected by the

3rd or 5th law. The final gy of such a very common root as lay would

not have been able to escape elision during its passage through Prakrit,

unless it had been protected by another consonant following it; Skr.

lagatt “he belongs” would become Pr. laai, H. Jai; but Skr. lagyate is

Pr. laggai, H. lagai or lage.*

The termination aya of Sanskrit roots (or rather bases) of the Xth

class and of causals is contracted in Prdékrit to e. This e is changed to @

in Hindi, by the 4th law. Thus Skr. mdérgaya “ask” is Pr. magge,

H. minga (ata) ; Sky. trotaya “break” is Pr. tode, H. tora. On the same

principle the Skr. vikriya “sell” (pass.), which in Pr. becomes vikke, is H.

bika; thus Sky. vikriyate “it sells,” Pr. vikkei, H. bikui or (contracted) bike.

Secondary roots may be divided into three sorts, according to the

manner of their derivation; whence they may be called derivative, de-

nominative and compound roots.

1. Derivative roots are those which are obtained by the shortening

of a radical vowel. Fi. g., nah “ flow” from nahd “bathe”, Skr. snd. It

will be observed that this process is the exact reverse of the well-known

method by which Causals are formed in Sanskrit. These are made by

lengthening a radical vowel ; e. g., from the simple root kar “ do” Sanskrit

forms the causal root hkdéri “cause to do,” for which, by the 7th law,

Hindi places kardv or kard. Now, mistaking nahd, which really is a

simple root, to be a causal root (as if it meant “cause to flow”), Hindi

re-derives from it a simple root nah ; the pair of roots nahd and nah being,

in outward appearance, exactly like the pair haré and kar.

2, Denominative roots are made by treating nouns, as if they were

roots. The nouns which may be treated in this way are either substantives

or participles. To the former class belong such roots as jam “ germinate,”

derived from the Sanskrit substantive janma “birth” (of the Skr. root

jan “be born’). Of the other kind are paith “ enter,” derived from the

* This process is expressly mentioned by Prakrit Grammarians, in the case of

a few roots; as Pr. rujyhai (or rubbhai) act. “he hinders” as well as pass. “he is hin-

dered,”’ from Skr. pass. rudhyate “he is hindered,’? while the Skr. act. is runaddhi

(VIIth cl.); sce H. C. 4, 218, 245, 248. But it clearly occurred in more cases, than

they recognized; thus, in all those cases enumerated in H. C. 4, 230. The case of the

Hind{ root bhaj “ break” is exactly similar. See also §. Goldschmidt in J. G. O. Soc.,

Vol, XXIX, p. 492. and Weber Saptasataka, p. 64.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 87

Sanskrit participle pravishta “entered” (of the Skr. root pra-vis “ enter’) ;

baith “sit” and pith “beat”, derived respectively from the Sanskrit

participles wpavishta “sitting” and pishta “beaten” (of the Skr. roots

upavis and pish).*

3. Compound roots consist of the Sanskrit root kri “do” or

“make,” and some noun governed by it in the accusative case; in fact,

they represent phrases in a contracted and much corrupted state. They

ean easily be recognized by their terminal consonant /, which alone remains

of their original radical element rz. Thus ehuk “ cease” is derived from

chyut + kri, which is a compound of the Sanskrit noun ehyut “ flowing

away” and fri “make ;” e. g., the Sky. drd pers. sing. pres. chywt-kriyate, lit.,

“he is made a flowing away,” is Pr. chukket, H. chukat (or chuke) “he

ceases.” Similarly rwk “stop” or “be hindered” comes from rué + kri,

z.e., from the Sanskrit noun swdh “hindrance” and root kri “make ;”

again kasak “be pained” or “ suffer pain” from kasham + keri, 7. e., from

the Skr. noun kasha “ pain” + kri “make.” It is probable, I think, that

the Prakrit termination (8rd sing. pres.) “et, Hindi had or ke, is phoneti-

eally derived from the Sanskrit passive Arfyate “he is made,” Skr. rué

karott would mean “he makes a hindrance”; this phrase, being treated

as a compound word, would form the passive rutkriyate,s “he is made a

hindrance” or “he is hindered,” whence would regularly arise the Prakrit

rukkei, and the Hindi rukkai or rukke “he is hindered.” Many of these

compound roots are intransitive, which would naturally agree with their

derivation from a Sanskrit passive root or base. Others which are tran-

sitive could, however, be no less easily derived in the same way, by the

aid of the fifth of the above-mentioned laws, the “ change of voice.”’

By far the largest number of Hindi roots can be brought under one

or the other of the above-mentioned classes. Still there remains a small

number of roots, the derivation of which, as yet, cannot be satisfactorily

explained ; e. g., dho “ carry,” Jaut “return.” Even these, further research

will probably show to belong to one of the two great classes.

The root dekh claims some special consideration on account of the

controversy regarding its origin to which it has given rise. Various

* Beames in his Comp. Grammar, Vol. III, p. 37 (footnote) says about me that “he

discussed this as if it was his own discovery in Indian Antiquary, Vol. I, p. 357.”’ The

word “if” is superfluous. The fact is, my article appeared in the December number

of that Journal in 1872, and was written some months previously. Beames’ Ist Vol. ap-

peared towards the end of that year, and I did not receive it till after some time in

1873; so that when I wrote the article, it was impossible for me to know, that my

views had been anticipated by Beames; though, indeed, it may be questioned, whose

the merit of the first discovery is, if such a matter can be dignified by that name.

Moreover my theory has a much wider application than Beames’, as it includes nouns

as well as participles.

+ A mongrel form, no doubt, but nothing unusual in colloquial speech,

38 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi. Roots. [No. 2,

theories have been put forward,* among which that of Childers is now

probably more generally accepted than any other. Stated briefly, his theory,

as first applied to the Pali root-form dakkh, is that this root is derived

from the Sanskrit future base drakshya (Skr. drakshyati = Pali dakkhati),

its original future meaning having been forgotten in later times}. The

theory, if true, must, of course, equally apply to the root in its Prakrit

and Gaudian form dekh. In this form, however, it can hardly be directly

connected with the future base. But there is, both in Prakrit and

Gaudian, another very common root pekh, also meaning “see’”’. It

appears to me most probable that the original form dakh was in course

of time changed to dekh, in order to assimilate it to pekh.t The forma-

tion of such, more or less unintentional, assimilations is quite in keeping

with the genius of vernacular languages. There are some very striking

instances in Hindi. For example there is in E. Hindi the pair of roots

de “give”, and le “take”, representing the Sanskrit roots dé and /abh.

The 8rd singular present are dey, ley, Pr. dei, lei ; here ley and lei “he

takes’? are formed in assimilation to, or after the analogy of dey and det

“he gives”. Prakrit has also the regular form lahat “he takes’, from

Skr. Jabhate. Again the EH. Hindi has the past participles dihal “ given”,

lihal “taken’’; here dihal is formed after the analogy of lihal, from

Prakyrit Jahida. From the transitive pair of roots pekh and dekh, ano-

ther, similarly assimilated, pair pih and dikh is derived with, generally,§

an intransitive meaning “be seen”, “ appear”. A more serious objection

to Childers’ theory, in my mind, was the fact, that the origin assigned to

* The whole subject of this controversy willbe found briefly, but lucidly reviewed

in Beames’ Comp. Grammar, Vol. ITI, pp. 45, 46. He does not mention, however,

the ingenious theory of the two Goldschmidts (Paul and Siegfried), who explain

dekkh asa denominative root derived from the past participle drishta, by assuming

the well-known modern pronunciation of % sh as & kh to have already existed in

Prakrit ; (see 8. Goldschmidt’s Pracrtica, pp. 6—8, and P. Goldschmidt’s Essay in Got-

tinger Nachrichten, 1874, pp. 518—420). But there is no evidence, really, of the existence

of that usage in Prakrit; moreover in the modern vernaculars, 4 would not be pro-

nounced @, when it stood first in a conjunct, but only when it stood singly or second

in a conjunct; thus one might hear purukh (4&4) or barkhdé (AT), but not jekhth

(Siz, always jeshth).

t+ In Kuhn's Beitrige zur vergleichenden Sprachforschung, Vol. VII, p. 450;

also in a private letter to myself.

t Beames also was of this opinion in his Comp. Gr. Vol. I, p. 162, where he

remarks: “it is perhaps worth notice that in scenic Prakrit a very frequent word for

‘seeing’ is pekkh, and that possibly the existence of this verb may have had some in-

fluence on the creation of the somewhat anomalous form deéh. The idea is based on

the well-known fondness of the Indians for jingling words of similar sound.” He

now appears to have abandoned it, in Vol. III, p. 46. But it cannot be dispensed

with ; so far at least, as the relation of the later dekh to the earlier dakkh is concerned.

§ In the old Hindi of Chand’s Prithiraja Rasau, dizh and pikh are commonly used

in a transitive sense (see, e. g., the verse on p. 39) ; also in modern Hindi occasionally.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 39

dekh seemed to be an unique one. So far as I know, no parallel case of such

a process of creation of a new root from the future base has hitherto been

shown to exist.* Quite lately, however, in my reading of Chand’s Prithi-

raja Rasau, preparatory to my edition of it in the Bibliotheca Indica,*

I have come across two other striking instances of that process, so that

I now incline to consider Childers’ theory to be fully proved. For this

reason, I have nowy inserted it in the list of laws of formation of roots,

above enumerated. Those two instances are the roots nakkh or naikh

“destroy” or “throw away” and krakkh “draw” or “ pull.’’ The former

occurs, é. g., in the following verses :

wefa waat AT Fa (or AW ) 27, 88.

7. e. “impatiently he throws away his rosary with his hand” ; again

STMT UG fqUaa Avs |i 27, 84.

a. e. “the chiefs of the cavalry he fearlessly destroyed.”

The root krakkh occurs in the following lines :

frat ws ate eat dfs fren |

wai feue sitar ara wT I

z. e. “unblushingly searching for a partner, Sachi (wife of Indra) espied

him, and, like as the fish her young, so she drew him to herself.”

Now the origin of these two curious roots-finds a very easy explana-

tion, by applying to them Childers’ theory. The future of the root nas

“nerish” is in Sanskrit nankshyati, which would be Pr. nanikhai or

nakkhat, whence in Hindi nankhai or nakkhai with meaning of the present,

It is to be noted, that in Hindi the meaning of the root has become tran-

sitive (by the 5th law). Similarly the Sanskrit future of the root

krish “draw” is krakshyati, Apabhramga Pr. krakkhai, whence in Hindi,

with meaning of present tense, krakkhat. Jt should be observed, that the

rhyme in the above lines would require krikhyaw or a root krikh. This

may serve to illustrate the process by which assimilations of radical forms

are brought about in the vernaculars.

But further there is a another well-known Hindi root, the origin of

which, hitherto very puzzling, now finds an easy solution and thus serves

as an additional confirmation of Childers’ theory. This is the root khech or

khaich ov khench (%™q) or khainch (aq) “draw.”’ The Sanskrit conjunct

ksh may change in Prakrit to Lk) or chehh ; thus the Skr. root preksh “ see”’

becomes pekkh or pechchh in Prakyrit; the Sanskrit future base drakshya

* Three fasciculi of this Epic have been published, one of the 1st Vol. by

Mr. Beames, and two of the 2nd Vol. by myself; a fourth fasciculus (8rd of Vol.

If) as well as an annotated English translation of the 1st fase. of Vol. IT will appear

in the course of this year.

+ It is not in the list given in my Comparative Grammar, pp. 161—171,

40 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

“ will see” becomes dakkha or dachchha in Prakrit (see H. C. 8, 171).*

Similarly the Sanskrit future base krakshya or karkshya would, in Prakrit,

become kakkha or kachchha; and the Sanskrit compound future base

akarkshya (of root a + krish “ draw’’) would become dakkha or dachchha.

With the insertion of the usual euphonic y, the latter would become

dyachchha. The Prakrit 8rd singular future accordingly might be

dyachehhat or (with the not unusual nasalization instead of the redupli-

cation of a consonant) dyanchhai ; and, assuming Childers’ theory to be

true, this form might occur as a present, equivalent to the Sanskrit

karshati. Now what I have thus constructed theoretically, is an actual

fact, as testified by Hema Chandra in his Grammar (4, 187). He gives

the following forms dyaichhai, ayanchhai, diichhait as Prakrit equi-

valents of the Skr. karshati. The last form diachhai (SIeeeZ) has arisen

by contracting ya into 7, and is that form which has immediately passed

into Hindi, with this difference only, that chh has been disaspirated (a

process not uncommon in the modern vernaculars). Hindi has a¢nchai or

enchatr (ae or wa). Now to return to khech and its compeers ; the uncom-

pounded root krish would yield a Prakrit form hachchhai or kaiichhai,

which in Hindi, by transferring the lost aspiration of ehh to k and by

assimilation to ainchai and enchai, would result in the modern forms

khainchat or khenchat (aq or ae ), or without nasalization, khaichat and

khechat. It will be observed that the later forms khenchai or khainchai are

related to what would be the earlier forms khaiichai or kaiichhai, just as

the modern dekhai and Prakrit dekhhai are to the Pali dakkhatzé.

There are two other roots which also deserve a special word. One is

the root hokh “be” or “become.” It is an equivalent of the commoner root

ho by the side of which it is very commonly used in Eastern Hindi. In

Western Hindi, I believe, it is unknown. It is regularly conjugated, through

all tenses. Its origin is obscure. I am inclined to look upon it as formed

by the same (practically pleonastic) suffix sé which also occurs in such roots

as achchh “be’’, gachchh “go, yachchh “hold”, the element sk would

change in Prakrit either to Akh or to chchh ; so that bhishk (or bhavash)

would become Pr. hokkh, H. hokh, just as dsk (of ds) becomes Pr. achchh,

H. achh, or gask (of gam) becomes Pr. gachehh. Possibly—though I do not

think it, probable—the origin of dekh might be accounted for in a similar

way.

* See also footnote on page 49. The Prakrit word savichehha ‘similar’ exhibits

the root-form dichcha, which is to dekkh (or dikkh), as pechehh is to pekkh. On the

other hand its Sanskrit equivalent sadriksha exhibits the Prakrit root dekh or dichh in

its Sanskrit dress driksh, and is, I believe, the only instance of the admission of

that mongrel Prakvrit root into Sanskrit.

+ The MS. readings vary. 4H. C. also gives the forms anachchhai and iachhai ;

in the former the nasal has been transferred to fill up the hiatus, in the latter di ig

contracted into a

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi roots. 41

The other is the still more common root dv (or H. H. @) “come.”

Its origin has, I think, not yet been satisfactorily explained. One would

naturally connect it with the Skr. root d-yd, from which, clearly the

Marathi root ye “come” is derived. But this does not explain the termi-

nal consonant v in the Hindi dv. Now it is a curious fact, that the root

dv imitates, in every respect, the conjugational forms of the root paév (Skr.

prép = pra-dp), instead of those of the root ja “go” (Skr. yd) which one

would expect it to follow. Thus, present participle E. H. dvat or W. H.

dvatu “coming,” HK. H. pavat or W. H. pdévatu* “ obtaining,” but EK. H.

jdt or W. H. gatu “ going ;” past participle EK. H. dil or dyal or dvd,

W. H. dyaw “come,” E. H. pail or payal or pava, W. H. payaw “ ob-

tained,” but HE. H. gail or gayal or gaya, W. TL. gayau “ gone ;” 8rd sing.

present H. dvai, H. H. dve “he comes,” H. pdavai, H. H. pave “he

obtains,” but H. jay, H. H. gée “he goes.” JT incline, therefore, to think

that there is here another instance of the, already noticed, tendency of

the Indian Vernaculars to assimilate verbal forms, so that the v in dv is

due to the influence of pév; an influence, natural enough, when it is

remembered that v, equally with y, is often inserted between two adjacent

vowels for the sake of euphony.+ ‘This assimilation is a very old one.

There are traces of it in Prakrit as well as in the Gipsy dialects. In Pra-

krit there is the 3rd sing. pres. dvei,{ and shortened davai (H. C. 4, 367)

“he comes.” The regular Prakrit form would be ddai or shortened adi

(see H. C. 4, 240) ; but just as there is wfthet or shortened wtthai (H. C.

4, 17) for utthdai or utthai (see Vr. 8, 25) “ he stands up” (of root wé-sthd),

so there might be de? or dai (of root a-yé), from which, by the insertion of

the connecting consonant v, there would arise dvei and dvai.§

The following List of Hindi Roots is arranged alphabetically, in two

parts. Part I contains primary roots, while Part II consists of secondary roots.

* Pdyatu in Kellogg’s Hindi Grammar, p. 202, § 377, is a misprint.

+ This influence of pdv even intrudes occasionally into the conjugation of ja

“oo”; thus the E. H. has sometimes javd “ gone,” like dvd, pdvd ; and the 8rd sing.

pres. jdve is rather common in H. H. beside jae or jaye.

{ This form is quoted by Dr. R. Mitra from the Pingala in the Vocabulary appended

to his edition of the Sankshipta-sara. I have not been able to verify it; but the form

is not intrinsically improbable.

§ It is just possible to connect dv with the Skr. root api-i ; thus 8rd sing. apyeti

Pr. appei or dpei or dvei (cf. kadun “to do’’ for kattwm). HH. C..4, 400 seems to refer

it to Skr. d-pad (or better d-pat ?). The Bangali uses an altogether different root, wis

or ds. Beames, in his Comparative Grammar (III, pp. 44, 45) rightly refers this root,

as well as the Sindhi ach, to the Skr. root d-gachh (of d-gam). Disaspiration of an

aspirate and pronunciation of chh as s are not uncommon in the Indian vernaculars

(see my Comparative Grammar, §§ 11, 145, exc, 2). The root dgachh would become

in Pr, dachh (see Delius, Radices Pracriticae, pp. 69, 70) or dyachh ; by contraction in

Pengali, the former would become ds (for dekh), the latter dis (for dichh). The root

ais might, however, be also referred to the Sanskrit root d-v’s.

A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection af Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

Part I.—Primary Roots.*

Bz roam = Skr. Wz, Passive zZyJaq (with active sense), Pr. WEez

(H. C. 4, 230), H. a2.

HAST resemble = Skr. wq+<,Lel. gaecfa, Pr. swety (H.C.

4, 259 = Skr. wewtiwafa), EB. H. wae.

BTA come, see introductory remarks, p. 41.

wret feed = Skr. w-z, I. dl. srecta, Pr. arete (i. C. 4, 259

= Skr. etzfa), E. H. arez.

wats_ pluck up = Skr. gq ay, I. el. wmifa, Pr. Sa ST (H. C. 4,

187), H. gare (with transfer of aspiration, as in @, see p. 40

and my Comp. Gramm. § 132) ; see No. 28.

wars reveal = Sky. WE-we, X. cl. |. Sqreata, Pr. urate or VI. cl.

wrrtsg (H. C. 4, 33), H. was.

VS_rise = Skr. Ga-B, Passive waraa (with active sense), Pr. ¥Z=

(cf. E. M. p. 27 and Ls. p. 345, also vas) or VI. cl wee (H.C.

4,17), H.we. In Pr. also VI. cl. waraz or contr. ware (Vr.

8, 26), in H. deest.

BE fly = Sky. BE-sy, IV. cl. _wstaa, Pr. 3Sz (Cw. p. 99, Spt. v.

923) or VI. cl. Bye, H. vs.

wat CS = Skr. Tad, I. cl. wacfa, Pr. ware (H. C. 4, 339),

H. gaz.

Tue intr. upset, come off from, come down = Sky. JANA, eels

Va-nefa (waRfa), Pr. vas (H. 0. 4,174), H. owe.

Bat or Yura tr. upset, take down = Sky. VeUR, Causal ¥a-

wieata, Pr. gareg or Vi. cl. varas, H. vara or vars.

2 VIS grow up = Sky. waa, IV. cl. waged, Pr. vusig (cf. H. C.

3, 142), H. wast.

waa boil =Skr. vee, Lc. ussufa, Pr. yaw, H. wae;

ef. root Fea.

watt keep in reserve = Skr. Bea, Causal vattafa, Pr. wares or

Vi. cl. ware, H. gare.

5 GTX raise up, excite — Skr. we-w, Causal vgrcafa, Pr. vaarts

or VI el weatts, H. Ture,

Wor vat grow up, also reprove = Sky. Vea, J. cl. waua,

Pr. saee_(T. V. 3, 1. 183 = fawcfa, H. C. 4, 259 has gaz),

E. H. uv=, W. H. vee. In the sense “reprove” perhaps con-

nected with Yay ?

BUT subside = Sky. Wa-e, I. cl. Baatfa, Pr. Stece (H. C. 4, 85

Src, v. 1. Bexx (with euphonic ¥), H. BEE.

Sq be drowsy=Skr. ? , Pr. vag (H.C. 4, 12 = fagrafa),

* See List of Abbreviations at the end of this article.

1880. | A. F. R. Hoernle—A Oollection of Hindi Roots. 43

wu be excited, raised up =Skr. SEH, I. cl. sygafa, Pr. weuas

(Vr. 8, 8) or SEN (cf. wfa for wdfa H.C. 4, 365), H. BHR; or

denom. from w8q, Pr. wau, cf. H. C. 2, 59.

ST] see secondary roots.

Siz burn = Skr. 4a-gz, IV. cl. wagzifa, Pr. Gress, H. Se.

Sta rot = Skr. yq-au, I. cl. qyaafa, Pr. saaax or Fae, H.

Sra (for 3rs4).

aq do = Skr. a, VILL. cl. @tifa, vedic also I. cl. atfa, Pr. az

(Vr. 8, 13), H. ae. In Pr. also X. cl. atx (H. C. 4, 337);

Vedic also V. cl. @uifa, Pr. FUE (Vr. 8, 18), deest in H.

aq test = Skr. ay, I. cl. aafa, Pr. wag, H. aq.

aa tighten = Skr. ay, I. cl. aufa, but also VI. cl. @ufa, whence Pr.

aa, H. we.

3 aE say = Skr. wy, X. cl. ayafa, Pr. mez (Spt. v. 35) or VI. cl.

aes (H.C. 4, 2. eS p- 99), H. ae.

até cut =Skr. aa, Causal aaata, Pr azz or VI. cl. agg,

(cf. 1. sg. gu H. C. 4, 385), H. az.

are draw see secondary roots.

ATT or Hq tremble = Skr. aq, I. cl. aruta, Pr. aqe (H.C. 1, 30),

H. &1a or Ha.

faa or ata Oe ae mt, IX. cl. arura, Pr. fawe (Vr. 8, 30)

or faus (D1. p. 2 ee ook faa or aa.

Re pound = Skr. #z, X. cl. Fzafea, Pr. FFE or VI. cl. Fez, H. Re.

RE or BX jump = Sky, && (or MS), 1. cl. <a, Pr. fax, H. Ke

or Re.

ATS or @TT serape, dig = Skr. a2, X. cl. arzaa, Pr. atez or AIST,

W. H. aTS or E. H. are.

a@Tq be angry =Skr. Gu, IV. cl. quta, Pr. qug (H. C. 4, 230),

H. a@rq.

way be eapended, sold = Skr. aq (X. cl or Causal of fa), Passive

aya, Pr. aug, H. aq.

w@ cat = Skr are, I. cl. arafa, Pr. araz or (contracted) arg (H. C.

4, 228), H. ara.*

wie cough = Sky. ara, I. cl. aaa, Pr. atag or arag, (cf. H. O. 1,

181, wifasi = arfad), H. aia.

88 faa be delighted, flower =Skr. WYS, Pass. WIA, Pr. fasE or

feast (ct. H. C. 4, 168 Gg and 4, 382 Ga), H. fee.

* In Prakrit also the Passive Gla is used, apparently in an active sense; ec. g.

asifa “they eat?’ (D1. p. 54, quoted from the Mrchchhakatika; R. M. p. 87, seem-

ingly quoting the same, gives waste).

or Ov OU Or OTF CI

ON ONE

A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

@tH or aA be vexed = Skr. fae, VI. cl. faeafa; but also VII. cl.

fai or IV. cl. faga, Pr. fase (H. OC. 4, 224), H. Ft or

(corrupted) ala.

we be opened or open = Sky. GS, Passive aaa, Pr. @gt or aaz,

H ae. See Nos. 41, 44.*

we pluck = = Skr. are, Passive Breqa actively), Pr. azz (H. C. 4,

TG) said to be a substitute for Skr. ats@ of root ge ), jeu ee.

waa play = Skr. WTS (cp. TA and Ga), L el. mitsfa, Pr. @gg

(H. C. 4, 188) or wag (H. C. 4, 382), H. aa. (Pr. also Htee

DI. p. 47).

I throw away, lose = Skr. Faq, VI. cl. faafa, Pr. faas, H. arg

(with Sit for g4, see my Comp. Grammar, § 122).

ae open = Skr. WS divide, X. cl. aieata, Pr. @re< or VI. cl.

WSF or Areas, He ara. See Nos. 40, 41.

a fie = Sky. gel IX. cl. Farfa, also I. cl. wafa, Pr. dog (H. C. 4,

120), H. as.

ave or is form, grave = Skr. ge, I. el. za, Pr. wee (H. C. 4, 2)

H. cies or a. See Nos. 54, 59.

aeta form = Skr. ve, Caus. atzafa, Pr. werTag or wetag (H.C. 4,

340), H. wera.

wa or faa count = Skr. au, X. cl. awata, Pr. ubks (S) Bei 22)

or VI. cl. awe (H. C. 4, 358), H. aa or (corr.) fart (see my Comp.

Grammar § 35, note).

m3 be spent = Skr. aH, Pass. waa, Pr. wae (Vr. 7, 9. 8, 58) H. ma.

afcara or af@ara to abuse = Sir. ae or axe, X. cl. aeata, Pr.

afceraz (cf. H. C. 2, 104) or afasraz, E. H. afcare for afcera.

aa melt = Sky. wa, I. cel. aafa, Pr. wes (H. C. 4, 418), H. Wea.

We seize =Skr. ay, 1X. el. wetter, Pr. VI. el. tive (Vr. 8, 15) or

wee (T. V. 2, 4.157), H. az.

at sing = Skr. 3, I. cl. arafa, Pr. mE or (contr.) arg (Vr. 8, 26),

H. aq.

are or are, or KH. HH. ae form ; see secondary roots.

fat fall = Ske. q, VI. cl. facfa, Pr. facz, H. fae

az thread = Sk. We, VI. cl. aufa, Pr. ee (H.C. 1, 236), H. wz.

ws catch = Sky. “aa (or 74), Tc} gata, Pr. Wag, HE ate.

uz decline = Sky. a& depress, Passive aia, Pr age. az.

as form, happen = Skr. 92, I. cl. qeq, Pr. asx (H.C. 4, 112)

H. 9s. See Nos. 46, 54.

* The roots ae, ae, Ge are all connected with one another and with the San-

skrit roots ale, al 1d, ag, aie, Qe, GE, ae, aq, MS which all mean 1, “limp,”

2, “divide” or “ break,” ‘The original form, appa oaks is Wz, or St, or rather

1880. | A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 45

60 aa or faa rub, be worn away = Skr. 89,1. cl. avfa, Pr. VI. cl.

gas (= Bufa) or faag (H. C. 4, 204, where it is said to bea

substitute of qafa), H. aa or faa.

61 ate throw, destroy, mix = Sky. az, 1. cl. aga, Pr. aye or waz

(H. C. 4, 334, T. V. 3, 4. 6 where it is said to be a substitute of

auia), 4H. aa.

62 ae or Be mix with a liquid, dissolve = Sky. hl (also FY and

i =e ); I. and VI. el. aufa (also ated, ata, areata), Pr. Yas

or areas (Vr. 8, 6. H. ©. 4, 117), H. ae or are (see also Bs. Ts

p. 56).

63 A revolve = Skr. qu, VI. cl. guia, Pr. sag (H. C. 4, 117), H. ga

(also Bs. I, 344).

64 AC gather, surround = Skr. We?; compare H. ¥e house with Sky.

Wz.

65 We mount, increase = Sky. Fa-H, VI. el. w=aafa, Pr. (dropping 3)

qSE or Wes (T. V. 3,1. 128), H. we.*

66 qua_ be abashed = Skr. Gq press, Passive Wad, Pr. qaE (see

H. C. 4, 395. <fasiz, T. V. 3, 4, 65. afaaz), H. aa. The

transitive form is 4a or ATq.

67 GX graze = Sky. Bt, I. cl. atfa, Pr. ez, H. ae.

68 We or WS walle = —Skrs 34, I.cl. gata, Pr. qaz or qazg (H. C.

4,231), H. qa or are. ‘

69 Wa drip = Skr. 7g, I. el. wad, Pr. wag (H. C. 4, 233), H. 9a.

See No. 74.

70 Sta masticate = Skr. Wa, I. cl. gata, Pr. aagz, H. aa (see also

Bs. III, 40.)

V1 Faia think = Sky. fea, X. cl. Fawrafa, Pr. Peas (Spt. 156, H. C.

4, 265) or fdas (H. C. 4, 422), H. fea.

72 Fae gather = Sky. fa, V. cl. faatfa, Pr. VI. cl. Fawe (Vr. 8, 29.

H. ©. 4,241), H. faa.

73 bit gather, choose = Sky. T4, V. cl. Fyatfa, Pr. VI. cl. aug (H. C,

4, 238), H. wa.

74% leak = Sky. ya (or ya), I. el. <rafa, Pr. SIye or sas

~ (H. ©. 2,77), H. xe

* Ga+ LS lit. fall upwards, an unusual word in Skr., but formed exactly like

the common compound 34 -+ 44.—The final & of WS becomes S in Pr., see H.

C. 4,130 WSF and Vr. 8,51. H. O. 4, 219 HSS. The initial J is dropped, and

the aspiration of @ transferred to & or lost altogether, just as in the root 41S

desire, from GRIS = Ge-VIS or from FT (see my Comp. Grammar § 132). In

old H. the root is —aS5 M. has both FE and FE; but G., 8. and B. have FS,

which is the form given by H.C, 4, 206 (AS). T. V. 3, 128 gives both FRE and

WSs.

46 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

75 9a kiss = Skr. 44,1. cl. qaafa, Pr. qag (Vr. 8,71), H. qa.

76 et thatch = Sky. RE, X. cl. areafa, Pr. arez (cf. Dl. 54) ¢ or VI.

el. amaz (T. V. 2, 4. 110 or araz in H. C. 4, 21) or are (by

contraction ; cf. a 8, 26), H. ary.

V7 faq or faq or aq be hidden = =uSier fa dwell secretly, Causal

Passive Wud, Pr. guz or faux, H. fea or (corr.) fea or aq.

78 at or ale eee wa, VI. el. wate, Pr. faze or faag (H. C.

4, 182), H. @B or @3. See No. 80,*

79 Cars| waste aay i= = Skr. fee, Passive faqa, Pr. fasiz (H.C. 4,

434), H. ata.

80 K or EY touch = Sky. x4, VI. cl. eufa, Pr. waz, H. et or ae.

NS ie) Sy qj a

* See ‘No. 78.

81 Re or hi be released = Sky. ez cut, Pass. @eyd, Pr. &&%,

2: ae or ee. > >

82 ae release = “Skr. RE. Causal geuta, Pr. aree or VI. cl. QISs,

iF, zs (see also Bs. III, 52).

83 sa give birth = Skr. aa, Causal saafa, Pr. swe (Spt. 75) or

VI. cl. sug, H. siq. Skr. also IV. cl. stad, Pr. waz (H. C.

4, 136), H. deest.

84 sq recite =Skr ae, I. cl. weufa, Pr. saz (Vr. 8, 24), H. sag.

85 wt, be feverish = Skr. AX, L. cl. Atha, Pr. ax, H. we

86 we burn = = Sk. wa, I. cl. mata, Pr. wag (H. C. 4, 365),

H. we.

87 st go=Skr. a, Il. cl. atfa, Pr. Vi. cl. smgz or (conty.) sie

(H. ©. 4, 240), H. srg.

88 STA or HAT watch =Skr. srw, II. el. stata, Pr. I. cl. arace

and VI. cl. watz (H. C. 4, 80), H. sae or aa.

89 Bra know = Sky. at, IX. cl. svatfa, Pr. VL. cl. srwe (H.C. 4,

7), H. a, (also Bs. III, 41).

90 sit live = Skr. @ta, IL. cl. Mata, Pr. we (H.C. 1, 101),

ste.

91 sy fight = Skr. qy, IV. cl. qua, Pr. Gowe (Vr. 8, 48), spa

(also Bs. I, 828). In old H. also wy.

* H.C. 4, 182 identifies the roots F@% and FRA with Skr. WR, for which he

gives the Pr. Pass. faug (H. C. 4, 257). The latter is merely a hardened form of

fea, which would be the regular Pass. of feaz or rather of fas. Now Skr.

WH = Pr. FRE or, on account of labial Y, = &Z (see No. 80); again in Pr.,

Q=W=A—4. Hence Skr. Ua = Pr. “faus — ‘fear = feus. rt

follows that the radical forms f@4 and eq (fH. at and &) are derivative roots, made

from the Passives fR@ and xq, and that the Skr. Ne RW is merely the Pr, root

Bq in a Skr. dress (cf. Pr, WAT Ke., and see S. Goldschmidt in J, G, O. 8, 29, 4938).

1880. ] A F. R. Hoernle—-A Oollection of Hindi Roots. 47

92 wz be joined = Sky. az, Passive BeIa, Pr. azx, 4H. He ; a very

old secondary denominative root of aai p. p- of Sler. root Bay.

93 sITS join = Skr. wz, X. cl. Srzafa, Pr. atse or VI. cl. Slsz,

H SIs,

94 weargue, dispute =Skr. we, I. cl. wefa, Pr. wes, H. wiz. See

No. 96.

95 we or AT fall off = Skr. Wy, VI. cl. (wef), Pr. weg (H.C. 4,

180 for asg), H. ae or we. See No. 97.

96 wie rush about = Skr. we, Passive wz1a (used in active sense), Pr.

weg (H. C. 4, 161. for wee), H. wie.*

97 WS sweep off = Skr. wx, Causal weafa, Pr. wrsg or VI. cl. warez,

H. wre. See No. 95.

98 wre a =Skr =e shine (?), Causal =reafa, Pr. *earee or

VL . *arag, H. WTS ; ef. Skr. eat brilliancy, WaRT flame.

99 Sa or ne ea, I. cl. egfa, Pr. dag, H. EH or Th.

Probably a compound root of &.

100 Zz or TE break = Sky. az, VI. cl. 4zta, but also IV. cl. acta, Pr.

“aX CH. C. 4, 280) or fez (Pingal, as quoted by R. M. p. 99),

H. az or Zz. 2

101 3a cheat =Skr. wa, L. cl. wafa, Pr. saz, H. aa.

102 STt or STe throw Gey = Skr. S be scattered, Causal etcafa, Pr.

*s1tq or VI. cl. *srce, H. Sz or Stet (cf. H. C. I, 217 sa).

103 sta or STH or Ta bite = Skr. EM or za, L. cl. <afa or uta,

Pr. saz (H. C. 1, 218) or Sag, H. Sta or sta or wa.

104 STS swing = Skr. Sa, X. cl. ereafa, Pr. etree (H. C. 4, 48) or

Stas (see H C.1, 217 sre) or VI. cl. Stag, H. ste.

105 ea cover =Skr. Ba, Pass. wWrad (used actively), Pr. waz,

(Spt. A. 54 for swig ) or VI. cl. eax (H. C. 4, 21, where it

* In B. this root is confounded with was. “sweep.” It is closely connected

with the root ®2 , the original meaning of which is preserved in Marathi “rush

violently into contact with,” and in the Hindi WZ “quickly.” Hence it comes to

mean, on the one hand, ‘dispute, argue”; on the other hand, “‘ become intermixed

confusedly’’, “‘ be entangled.” With the latter meaning the root W2 has been received

into Sanskrit ; from it comes the Skr. *T@ “shrub,” “ underwood,” the H. TZ or "TS.

The original meaning it has preserved in the Skr. *wfefa « quickly.’ The root may

possibly be derived (as Bs. I, 177 says) from Skr, afa+ ae, though the sense of

“roam about very much” would be expressed rather by sift + Se. But ayzta

or Pass. WET A (in act. sense) would regularly give Pr. REF or YRAZT or (by

elision of wy) MZ or MFT, whence modern we or We. In the case of the root

Sz, = does not change to S. (sce H, C. 1, 195).

li Roots. [ No, 2,

is said to be a substitute of ere), H. Sa. (See Wb. p. 43, 64,

67). Perhaps compound root of wya-a.

106 @fa accuse = Skr.? Pr. gag (H.C. 4, 118 where it is said to be

a substitute for Skr. faga), H. ef@. Perhaps a modification of

sia, No. 103.

107 en approach = Skr. STA, leyclk ead, Pr. CaS, H. ea.

108 ee search = Skr. €@, VI. el. ewia, Pr. Ses, 0. EL. gz.

109 a burn = Skr. aq, L el. arate, but also LY. el. aaa, Pr. que

(see H. C. 4,140 aaug), 4H. aq.

110 ak cross = Skr. gL. cl. wef, Pr. atx (H.C. 4,86), H. at.

111 aK attend = Sky. aa, x cl. anata, Pr. was (EL. C. 4, 370) or

VI. cl. quae, H. ae

112 ara stretch = Sky. aq, Causal avaafa, Pr. atwe or VI. cl. arug,

H. ara.

113 ATX save = Skr. ¥ cross, Causal attafa, Pr. atte or VI. cl. arze,

H. are.

114 qua intrans. weigh, be weighed = Skr. qa, Passive Gad, Pr. gas,

H. ae.

115 aS or at break = Sky. az be torn, Causal areata, Pr. ase or

VI. cl. atse (see H. C. 4, 116, where however it is given as

intrans.), W. H. at@ or E. H. az.

116 ara or Ta weigh = Skr. qa, X. cl. ataafa or I. cl. atefa, Pr.

rag or areas (T. V. 2, 4.97), H. ara or ata.*

117 ya or BRE be arrested, be supported =Skyr. @u, I. cl. aaa, Pr.

gag, 4H. ga or Be See my Comp. Grammar § 120.

118 Ura or BT or YTH]_ or BA stop = :Skr. wir be firm, Causal zwaata,

Pr. yz or VI. cl. Guz, H. aid, &e.

119 aq pile, prop = Skr. Eq, IV. cl. quarter, Pr. yug, H. aq.

120 au be pressed dow ne be cowed = Skr. aa, Passive aa, Pr. aaz

*eeqz, H. 24 (?)

21 es Less au, I.cl. gafa, Pr. gaz (H. 0. 4,176), Hee.

122 @¥ intrans. burn = Skr. ez, I. cl. Exta, Pr. ex (Pingala, as

quoted by R. M. p. 118; H. C. 2, a allows only s¥z; but the

root S¥ does not occur bod De? slp ze.

123 att split = Skr. = Causal ertafa, Pr. ete or VI. cl. ate,

H. aie.

* H.C. 4, 25 gives Pr. ¢¥& ; but the root Fa in a trans. sense does not occur

in H., though it is foundin M. qe °F qed. In Sky, the root GM admits a X. cl.

form quata, from which the Pr, and M. trans, root @ is apparently derived.

1880.] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 49

124 are trans. burn = Skr. ee, Causal ereafa, Pr. ereq or VI. cl.

area, H. az, see No. 122

125 fea show = Skr. few, VI. cl. faufa, Pr. feaz, H. fee.

126 fea. or ta to appear = Skr. ER see, Passive ead, Pr. fewer or

alas (H. C. 3,161), H. feaor Ba.

127 3 give = Sky. @t, Passive eta (used actively), Pr. 2 (Cw. p. 99,

a C. 4, 288), H.@aore. In Pr. also VI. cl. eg (Spt. v. 216),

Hi. deest.

128 a see = Skr. EX, aes x <ifa (used in sense of present), Pr. eeaq

(H. C. 4, 181), H.Z&@. See introductory remarks. *

129 ut place or seize = Sky. & I. cl. uxfer (setze) or Axa (place), Pr. ace

(H. C. 4, 284), H. az.

130 Wa or Ha sink, be pierced, run into = Skr. 4,1. cl. waa, Pr.

Yaz or yar (Pingala in R. M. p. 118, said to be a substitute for

uraia), H. dq or Wa.

131 4re hold = Sky. w, Causal urcafa, Pr. a= or VI. cl. ace, H. 9X.

132 8 wash = Skr. ura, IL. cl. arafa (or wy, VI. cl. yafa), Pr. aris

(DL. p. 77) or (with euphonic ED Brak, or wae (Spt. v. 133,

283) or Hag (H. C. 4, 238), H. are or Bra.

* The Skr. conjunct A may in Pr. become ¥@ or *®. This will explain the

origin of the synonyms of FGF, which are enumerated in H. C. 4, 181; viz. with

Hd are formed BAW*AT =Skr. yaxeata (from root Fa-EN) ; the same, contracted,

becomes BIARAT (with BT for WA, see H. C. 1,172); and the latter, expanded,

becomes WAIT (with Ae for Sil, see my Comp. Gramm. § 48). With *@ are

formed FA9RRZ = Skr. wazwata (for AIARF, with euphonic 4, see H. C. I, 180),

and fas=Re = Skr, farzuata (from fa-ex ) . Again =® appears to be softened in

BAASAZ, which is probably identical with BAYRZ. From the manner in which

Hemachandra_ places Gae between TABRE and WIFE, it would almost seem

as if he looked upon it as a contraction of WAX = Skr. WAwWta (of TER). In

classical Sanskrit the future of EL takes the irregular guna © (instead of BU,

see Panini VI, 1, 58); but in the ordinary speech, no doubt, both forms zmala and

aata were used. It is the latter of the two, from which the Prakrit forms are

derived; thus WaWRaT—WaewRaT (not = Waeras) = yaeRita. The alterna-

tive form of frye would be TaWRAT; this seems to be intended by the form

FWHRS in Vr. 8, 69 (with ® disaspirated for FF). The Pr. AAs is regularly

formed from Skr. Wala = Pr. YUE (see Delius Rad. Prac.) or WS (H.C. 1,

43); and Pr. WAYTAE is the Skr. HITWfa. In Maréthi, the Pr. root Y# becomes

We. Tho Pr. YALE is derived from Skr, Wfawtaafa (with Bfa contracted to

SJ, seo my Comp. Gramm. § 122); and Pr. Tals is probably a mere corruption of it.

None of all theso forms, as far as Iam aware, has left any representative in modern

Hindi.

50 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2, |

133 az dance, see secondary roots.

134 a4 or at intr. bend, bow = Skr. aa,I. cl. aafa, Pr. aaz (see H.

C. 1, 188, afaa 1. pl.) or waz (H. ©. 4, 226), H. a3 or az.

135 aara or faara trans. bend, fold = Skr. aa, Causal awafa, Pr.

aaa or Vi.cl. aaraz, H. sara or faara (with = for 4, see my

Comp. Gramm. § 55).

136 aet bathe = Skr @t, II. cl. @ifa, Pr. IV. cl. waves (cf. DI. 20)

or (contr.) wetz (H. C. 4,14), H. aera.

137 ara dance = Skr. wa, IV. cl. eafa, Pr. vax (Vr. 8, 47. H. C. 4,

925), H. are. :

188 faare or frat pull out, see secondary roots.

139 faate expel = Sky. faa-wa, Causal faeqraufa, Pr. ferarae or VI.

cl. famqraz, H. fanaa; cf. No. 188, the Skr. root w@ being

perhaps adopted from Pr. @# for Skr. Ay.

140 faare. or fate peel ; see secondary roots.

141 faa be cleaned, be peeled = Sky. fa-az, I. cl. feracta, Pr.

fares, H. frat.

142 faatc clean, peel =Skr. fa-at (or fa-ae), Causal faatcafe,

‘Pr. fararts or VI. el. Parcs, H. faere.

143 faa swallow ; see secondary roots.

144 faare to make clear = Sky. free, Causal fasraafa, Pr. frees or

VI. cl. faares, H. faure, applied to water, which is made clear by

letting it stand still, till the impurities have settled down, and then

pouring it off ; hence the root has also the meaning “ pour off.”

145 faas be separated, be decided, be accomplished = Sky. fat-ae divide,

(X. cl. faazafa), Pr. fasase or faces (H.C. 4, 62, where it is

said to mean vam WT atuafa), H. faas. It is the pass. or

intrans. form of No. 147. The Skr. root is transitive.

146 faat]e or fat accomplish = Sky. faa-ae, Causal faa.eafa, Pr.

frais or VI. cl. fasares, H. feats or faaty (with trans-

ferred aspiration; see my Comp. Gramm. § 182).

147 faars separate, divide, accomplish = Sky. fatae divide, Causal

faaizafa, Pr. facaqres or VI. cl. faaates, H. fasts. See No. 145.

148 fads separate, div ide, accomplish = Sky. fatas, I. cl. faaea, Pr.

facies, H. faas (with ¢ for ¥, see my Comp. Gramm. § 148),

This is merely another form of No. 147.

149 faatx hinder = Skr. fa-2, Causal _racata, Pr. farts. (H. C. 4,

92) or VI. cl. fates, H. faare.

150 frat come out = Skr. fawe, I. cl. fawatfa, Pr. fawze (see R.

M. p. 107; or arate H. C. 1, 93. 4, 79), H. faa.

151 ary pinch —'Ske. fa-gaq contract, VI. cl. fagata, Pr. fasas

H. 419 (with Gr for £3).

1880.] _ A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 51

152 4 be digested = Skr. qa digest, Passive aaa, Pr.aaz, H. U3.

153 qara send=Skr. 3-wT, Causal yerqafa, Pr. agraz or VI. cl.

qgrag (H, C. 4, 37), H. qara.

154 aS or qt fall =Skr. qa, I. cl. qafa, Pr. wes (Vr. 8, 51),

W.H.us, HE. H. ue. |

155 We read = Skr. 7, 1. cl. gefa, Pr. weg (H. C.1, 199), H. ue.

156 qtvq@ or YER examine, test = Skr. gfcza, I. el. aaaa, Pr. ufcaag,

H. qz@. It also has the secondary meaning “become habituated”,

owing to repeated trial.

157 uty become acquainted = Sky. afe-f4, Pr. VI. cl. *afeag, H. aTy,

158 Get or WaT run away =Skr. Geary, I. cl. quad, Pr. qatee or

(contr.) wars (Pingala, quoted by R. M. p. 129),* H. qara or

qua.

159 ufeet forsake = Sky. aft-¢, I. cl. ofeetfa, Pr. qfcere (HH. ©. 4,

259 said to be = wsifa ), H. qfrez.

160 Gita offer food = Skr. afc fay, Causal ufcavate, Pr. qitaagy

or VI. cl. ufcaaz, H gtr (with t= <4, see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 122).

161 at be spread = Sky. 9-2, I. cl. yatfa, Pr. gate (H. C. 4, 77),

H. qaz.

162 qart spread —Skr. 9, Causal yattafa, Pr. yates or VI. cl.

qaitsg, HH. gare.

163 Gast perspire = Skr. 3-Feag, IV. cl. afa@afa, Pr. afasiz (see H.

©. 4, 224), H. wats.

164 Gast stitch = Skr. y-faa, IV. cl. satarter, Pr, *q@siz (perhaps con-

tracted for *ufafasiz), H. Wasl.

165 yfeata or fawara cause to put on, cause to dress = Sky. fr-ae,

Causal faareafa, Pr. faretas or VI. cl. faaetaz, H. fazara

(with transposition of q and %) or gfeata (with transposition of

Zand ¥Y, see my Comp. Gramm. § 1383). See also Nos. 166, 167

for a similar transposition. From this root is formed the derivative

root fae or Ufea_put on, dress.

166 yfex put on, dress = Sky. yf<-ut, Passive ufcataa (with active

sense), Pr. afcue (see Cw. p. 99, stitra 21 ¥z) or afc (see Wh.

p- 59 € and eg of root St) or afte, H. ufec (with transposi-

tion of < and ¥, see No. 165). This root, however, might be also

a derivative root from qfetta No. 167. In the Gujarati form

Geet the < of the second syllable has modified the vowel of the

first.

167 yfetta. cause to put on, cause to dress = Sky. aft-at, Causal yfcarq-

* GaTY, I suppose, is a misprint for FATS.

52 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

afa, Pr. afcyrag or VI. cl. ofcurag or ofeetas, H. afecra (with

transposition of < and %, as in Nos, 165, 166).

168 Is4 or Usa or THR obtain, arrive — Skr. 3-4, L el. sata, Pr.

+USEE or Weaz (H. C. 4,390), H. gee or usgor deg. It is

formed with the pleonastic suflix @, like the root ¥T@, see intro-

ductory remarks ; only in this case, & changes to = and is after-

wards disaspirated. Marathi has Wee or GTeta, where the J of

the second syllable has modified the first.

169 ars let fall =Skr. a, Causal wiaata, Pr. ast (H. C. 4, 22) or

Vivel. agree (Hi C.-TIL 153), A. as.

170 atx accomplish = Sky. 2 Causal qi<afa, Pr. arte or VI. cl. ize

(H. C. 4, 86), H. are.

171 qa cher ish =Skr. qt, Causal qreafa, Pr. qtee or VI. cl. ares,

Hi. ata.

172 ara obtain, Jind = Sky. sam, V. cl. gruifa, Pr. VI. cl. ataz

(H. C. 4, 239), H. ula.

173 faa melt =Skr. yfa- or fa-we, I. cl. afqaafa, Pr. tomes

H. faa? See my Comp. Gramm. § 131.

174 GY drink = Skr. at, I. cl. foafa, Pr. fess (H. C. 4, 10),

H. ae.

175 at3 tread down = Sky. fay, Future qwfa, (with meaning of pre

sent), Pr. Gee or fame, H Howe (with disaspiration, as in aa,

see introductory remarks, p. 40).

176 Gs be pained = Sky. Gs, IL. cl. Hea, Pr. Hex, H. We.

177 Wa grind = Sky. fay, VII. cl. faaiz, Pr. X. cl. foae or Has

(cf. Ls. p. 347) or VI. cl. fdas or Taz (H. C. 4, 185), H.@We.

178 qua fill, thread — Sky. q, Causal qata, Pr. FUas or VI. el.

Gua, Jal qua (or Ww. H. also facta in the sense of thr eading,

str inging).

179 ya ask = Skr. 9@, VI. cl. ueefa, Pr. qx (H.C. 4, 97), H. ae.

180 Ga or G & wipe = Sky. TVR, ai or VI. el. yisata, Pr. tige or

FRE (H. C. 4, 105), H. F® or aa.

181 9st wor ship = Skr. qa, X. cl., but also Lel. ysifa, Pr. asz,

“HL qt = 2

182 you or at swim = Spe y+ a, x el. yacfa or VI. cl. sfacfa,

Br TERS, i= Eli, get or W. a a.

183 4=4 or a enter = Sky. fax, v1 cl. ufaufa, Pr. ofaaz (H.C.

4,183) or wzag H. a<a or 4&.

184 Ga squeeze out, Shove = Skr. We, I.cl. Gea, Pr. tag (H.C.

4,143), H. Ga. See No. 42, @@ from root WS. Perhaps a

denominative of fag = 4s = Gq = Ta.

185 Uta nowrish = Sky. Ty, I.cl. arafa, Pr. dae, H. ag.

1880.] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Obdilection of Hindi Roots. 53

186. we or we burst =Skr. ae, Passive aera, Pr. wes, H. we

or Gz.

187 Wa bear fruit =Skr. wea, I.cl. wafa, Pr. wag (Spt. 17), H.

we, Connected with roots wezand qe; see No. 189.

188 Wa or WI stich, be ensnared = Sky. aa, VI. el. wuta, Pr. Was

or wrae (H. C. 4, 182, probably “denom, of Ga or WTA = wR

China. lo. HH: ©.2; 92), we or aie, This root is also used

transitively, in the sense of “ensnare’’, “deceive”, see H. C. 4,

129, where Was is said to be a substitute of fadaefa.

189 WTS cleave, split =Skr. qe, X. cl. _ areaia, Pr. wires or VI. cl.

mies, (H. C. 1, 198, 2382), H. GTS. Hemachandra refers it to root

qz, X cl. qzafa.

190 wre jump = Ske. we shake, Causal weafa, Pr. weg or VI. cl.

wes, H. we. Observe the same transition of meaning as in No.

191. Its also used transitively, in the sense of “ ensnare”, “im-

prison”, corresponding to the intransitive root We, see secondary

roots. H.C. 4, 127 gives Wes in its original sense of “ shaking’,

“quivering” = Skr. ae; its eymonym TIES which H. C. also

gives, still exists in H. que or TaIe or qaue or wayera,

&e., “he is fidgety.”

191 ys as Ro shake, Causal areata, Pr. wre or VI. cl.

wa; 4H. wha. Probably connected with root No. 189; H. C.

a Woe 232 give WIM as an other form Wise.

192 fwe be paid off, be discharged = Sky. fame, X. cl. feazufa, Pr. fuss

(H. ©. 4, 177, said to be = ¥w_“ cease’, “decline”), H. faz;

cf, R. wie and ae.

193 qe or He expand, inerease, be broken, be dispersed = Sky. we,

Passive Hea, Pr. zz (Vr. 8, 58. H. C. 4,177, where it is said

to be § a substitute of 4x, in the sense of ‘being broken”), H. we

or We. See No. 194.

194 aa on ae blossom = Sky. we, VI. cl. wzfa, Pr. Wet or WSs

(Vr. 8, eS) or Gaz (1. C. 4, ‘387 whence Skr. R. hice adopted),

H. Te or He. See No. 193.

195 WX or Tac turn, move round = Skr. aft + <, I. cl. qafa, Pr. ats

or ARE (with change of q to wand of Ya to UW, asin FCAT for

_ Tae), H. a

196 Fa spread, be dispersed = Sky. fame, X. cl. vizafa, Pr. GSE or VI.

cl. WEE (H. C. 4, 358; in H. C. 4, 177 the simple form fasz is

given asa sels of ww) or tie (whence Skr. R. Ge),

H. tia See Nos. 189, 192, 193; the original meaning “ split’,

hence “ expand”, may change either to “increase” or to “ decrease’’,

to growth or to decay.

213

214:

215

216

217

A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

wl wnfasten = Skr. -Aq, VI. cl. yaefa, Pr. qysE (cf. H. C. 4,

91), H. wre (for qre = qe).

WTS break = Skr. Rez, Causal earzafa, Pr. wree (H.C. 4, 350) or

VI. cl. GIse, H. ae.

aq go away, escape = Skr. ast, I. cl. azifa, Pr. aaz (Vr. 8, 47),

H. 43. More likely from root aq, or from Pass. saya of Skr.

R. ga.

GBI or FTST sound = Skr. 7% Causal Passive arqa@, Pr. aare (H. C.

4, 406), H. af or ara.

ava be ensnar ed = Skr. dq, Passive gaya, Pr. que (H. C. 2, 26.

4,247), H. ata.

qe tr. and intr. twist, divide =Skr. qe, Passive qeja, Pr. 73,

H. qe.

ag or E. Hy aS grow = Skr, #4, I. cl. aea, Pr. age (Vr. 8,

44), HH. qe or H. H. ae.

4 qera_ enlarge, complete = Skr. Zu, Causal quafa, Pr. asStaz or

VI. cl. agrax, H. aera. (T. V. 3, 1. 182 has agrfay =

aaitad).

qata show, relate = Skr. Za, Causal aaafa, Pr. aaraz or V1. cl.

autag, H. aqata.

aa kill = Sky. 44 (or ara, I. cl. aTaa); Pr. 44g, H. au.

aa be made = Sky. 44, Passive qaqa, Pr. awe, H. aa. In Sindhi it

means “go, come,” cf. the Magadhi agfe (H. C. 4, 294) which the

Prakrit Grammarians derive from the Skr. R. asi go or become.

qt marry = = Sky. z, V. cl. ewifa, but also I.cl. atfa, Pr. axe (Vr.

8,12), Hae

afca or ata rain = Sky. au, I. cl. afar, Pr. aftag (Vr. 8, 11. ;

perhaps denom. of ag), EH. H. af<@ or W. H. aca.

ae burn =Skr. we, I.cl. Safa, Pr. awe (H.C. 4, 416 adfa),

H. az.

94 dwell = Skr. aq, I. cl. aafa, Pr. aa, HH. qe.

az flow = Sky. a, I. cl. aefa, Pr. azz (H. C.1, 38), H. a2. The

root qwa glide happily, be diverted is a passive or intrans. of a

causal ¢¥eta formed like fyara from Ta drink.

aTH recite, read ; see secondary roots.

ata wish = Sky. aig, I. cl. asafa, Pr. atez (T. V. 3, 1. 183), H. ate.

ate bind = Ska. au, IX. cl. aytfa, Pr. VI. cl. dag (H. C. 1, 187),

H. aria.

aTe_or q1t kindle, Lig ght = Sky. Sa, Causal =reafa, Pr. atez or

ates, W. H. ara or E. H. ate. See No. 210.

ate perfume =Skr, aq, X. cl, arwata, Pr. aaz or VI. cl. atax,

H. 91a.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 55

218 faa be sold =Skr. fa-mi sell, Passive famtaa, Pr. fams or famg,

H. faa (see Vr. 8, 81. H. C. 4, 240, where however the form

fag&z is given as act. trans; in the moderns it is intrans. or pass.,

and the trans, root is a9, cf. No 242.

219 faars_ or a H. fare be at variance, be spoiled = Skr. feu, I. el.

fagza, . fanez (cf. H.C. 4,112), H. faas (for fane). See

No. 46.

920 fans make discord, spoil = Skr. fa-qz, Causal faurzafa, Pr. fates

or VI. cl. faares, H. fame (for faare). See No. 54.

221 fasic reflect = Skr. fa- aC, Causal fagixafa, Pr. faaqrce or VI.

cl. fagizs, H. fare.

222 fast scatter = Skr. fez, IX. cl. feeurfa, Pr. I. cl. fasta (cf. No.

102), H. fase.

223 fastx drive away = Sky. fa-€, Causal frarcafa, Pr. fastts or VI.

cl. fasicz, H. fagr®. See No. 102.

224 fant grant = Skr, fa-q, I. cl. faacfa, Pr. faces, H. Faas

225 faure tr. spread = Sky. . faa, Causal faettafa, Pr. farts or VI.

cl. fats, H. faure.

226 fatta mock ; see secondary roots.

227 faze or fa@R see, be confused = Sky. ARP -aa, X. cl. faqaata,

Pr. fawtas or VI. cl. fawaas, H. faqa or (corrupt) fawa.

228 faaa intr. separate = Sky. fa- -wWa, Passive f faama (with active sense),

Pr. faars (cf. Vr. 8,52), H. fawa.

229 fawa ascend = Skr. fa-wag, I. cl. fawgfa, Pr. fades, H. fawa (for

fade).

230 Taare be pleased = Sky. fa-a4, I. cl. fawafa, Pr. fawas, H. fawa,

231 fauta tr. and intr. disperse, vanish = Skr. fa-@t, Causal faaraata,

Pr. fawtaz or VI. cl. faaras, H. faera.

232 fast enjoy one’s-self = Sky. fa-g, I. cl. faexfa, Pr. faeces (H. C. 4,

259 where it is said to be a saints of Skr. Wrefa), H. faze.

233 fasta or fat leave, spend —=Skr. fa-=t, III]. cl. fasetfa, Pr. I.

cl. faze or faetaz or (contr.) faete, H. fasta or fasta ;

ef. Vr. 8, 26.

234 fra forget = Sky. faq, I. cl. faucfa, Pr. faace (cf. H. C. 4, 74),

H. fat.

235 Sew tear, break i Skr. fag, P assive fuga (used actively), Pr.

fusiz, H. dae (for Wes, with aspiration transferred ; see my

mag ee § 182), or perhaps Skr, ay, IV. cl. faata,

. faswg, H. ain.

236 aa pass ; see secondary roots.

237 ata or fae choose =Skr. Ft, 1X. c

_ 1. atufa or fawfa, Pr. VI. cl.

atug or faws, H. HF or faa.

56 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

238 aq be eatingwished = Skr. fa-34- a, I. cl. qaarafa, Pr. aise or

7 adteaz (or ge), H. am. See Weber Spt. p. 32.*

239 + or as dive, sink = Ske. ag, VI. cl. asta Pr; Se (H. C:

4, 101), H. qs or qs or W. H. transposed sa or =.

240 Fe Be extinguished = Sk. fa-a-ea come to an end, ieee areata,

Pr. ¢.a0g or @twz or Aus, H. aa. Compare H. aati = afar

light, lit. wieh.

241 Fett gather, sweep = Skr. Fass -€, Causal qazicafa, Pr. arette

or VI. cl. ateTtz, H. q<Tt.

242 Ti wnder stand = Sky. a4, IV. cl. Fad, Pr, qwaz (Vr. 8, 48),

Pore aa

243 FZ sell = Sky. aq cheat, VI. cl. faafa, Pass. aaa (used actively),

Pr. aq (H.C. 4, 419, T. V. 3, 3. 4, transl. sq=gfa ?), E. H. $9;

or perhaps Skr. fe-ifa + <= spend, Il. cl. @ata, Pr. a¥e or

dag?

244 ae. surround ; see secondary roots.

245 aa or aga sit = Skr. wa-fay, VI. cl. voranfa, Pr. vafaes

Hi. asa or 3a (with loss of initial ¥, see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 173).

246 4T sow = Skr. aq, I. cl. aqfa, Pr. ataz or are (formed like @raz

of ag, H. C. 1, 64), H. ¥te.

247 aS immerse = Skr. qs, Causal atsafa, Pr. atsz or VI. cl. ates,

Ft, are.

248 Stata or Fara or Fars call = Sk. ae, Causal ategfa, Pr. srarae

or VI. el. atarax, H. arara, &e. See No. 249.

249 STH wheedle = = Skr. 4, Causal amauta, Pr. araq or VI. cl. ars

H. ara.

250 Ie speak = Sky. aX, IL. cl. aefa, Pr. areae (H. C. 4, 2.) or aTaS

(Cw. 99); aa: - are. (cf. No. 245 4a = aa, so dq = ae ).t

* The simple root qi would form Pr. TZ and contracted ATE, after the

analogy of SISA, STS from QT, WAT & MTF from a (Vx. 8, 26); this is born

out by Péli *Tafa, and by Pr. TasTT (H.C. 2, 283—=Skr. faatafa) ; but in

compounds the Pr. form might be oT or CT, just like oS or CSF in WET, VET

form Ga+ Rl (H. C. 4, 17); thus we should have regularly aTSAT or (as o is short

before a conjunct) waz > GAT.

+ This root is usually connected with Skr. 7 by Prakrit Grammarians, see Cw.

p- 99, where a1ae or alae, of root 4, is mentioned as an analogous formation. Now

the latter is derived from the passive *qad (saa), in an active sense, as appears

from H. C. 4, 161. Similarly, I am inclined to derive aTa= from the passive ‘qua foe

gua of root qs used actively. The conjunct q becomes @, as in Faw = > are,

asad = VHATS (Ve. 3, 21).

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 57

: Ny

251 wa cat, devour = Sky. wa, I. cl. aafa, Pr. waz, H. ue.

252 ust worship = Skr. us, I. cl. usifa, Pr. wsig, H. aa.

253 US or Hist flee = Slr. WSL break, Passive wsqa (used actively),

Pr. usqz, HH. wai or ater.

254 wer br veal <= Skr. wiz, VIL. cl. wat, Pr. VI. cl. Wag (H. C. 4, 106),

H. wot A

255 wa speak = Sky. uu, I. cl. wufa, Pr. wag (H. C. 4, 239), H. wa.

256 ux fill = Skr. w, III. cl. fauft and I. cl. wcfa, Pr. xz (cf. Spt.

288 ucte ) ay Lleaatate

257 wa or *t revolve = Skr. wa, I. cl. wafa, Pr. wag (H.C. 4,

161) or waz (cf. H. 0.4, 401), H. wa or Ute. See No. 184

4 or ar.

258 wa float = Sky, ws, I. cl. wma, Pr. daz, H. wa.

259 ate see = Skr. we, X. cl. wreaa, Pr. ate or VI. cl. wreaz, H. aia.

260 ag appear =Skr, wa, L cl. wtad, Pr. urag (H. C. 4, 203), H.

area. Pr. has also the form fwaz which is preserved in the Hindi

root fawe dazzle.

261 wat be aflicted — Skr. fue break, Passive faga, Pr. faa,

H. we. See ay 934. Or from 3fH- “ye afflict, Pass. ZwUaa,

Pr. yfwers, H. ast (with loss of |, see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 172).

262 Wisi be wet; see secondary roots.

263 WaT pot Ser ie VII. cl. wafs, Pr. VI. cl. tsre (H.C. 4,

110), H. US.

264 wet fry ; see secondary roots.

265 as close, for §@ with transposed aspiration, see No. 244, a

266 We meet, visit = Skr. Bfu-ye, I. cl. Gaefa, Pr. swags, H. ve

(with loss of initial | ; and with ¢ for ¢; see my Comp. Gramm.

§§ 148, 172).

267 ay be raised up, be made, be stirred up, be excited = Skr. WH or HS ,

Passive aaa, Pr. aax (H. C. 4, 230 where it is referred

to the Skr. root wz), H. ay From it are derived many

Hindi nouns, all meaning lit. “an erection”, ATT or HAT or WAlA

or agtet «@ large bedstead or stage, atqa a small bed, stool,

Hq drowsiness; also many secondary roots, as WHAAA creak

in the joints (as a bedstead, &e.), WAR creak or pain in the joints,

agate wink, AGa or Haeta be fidgety, be perverse, feel

nausea.

268 asi clean = Sky. wai, IT. cl. are and I. cl. wafa, Pr. dsiz (whence

Sir. R. asi X. cl.), H. dai.

269 He cover = Skr, WS; see secondary roots.

58 A. F, R. Hoernle—A Oollection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

270 wa be propitiated = Sky. HH, Causal Passive atayd, Pr. waz,

H. aa. See No. 277.

271 at die = Sky. a, VI. cl. faaa, but Vedic also I. cl. axfa, Pr. ate

(Vr. 8,12), H. az

272 aa rub = = Skr. we, IX. el. warfa Pr. VI. cl. wag (Vr. 8, 50),

H. wa.

273 az churn = Sky. au, I. cl, aufa, Pr. agg (cf. D1. 53), H. az.

274 ata ask for = Skr. ar, X. cl. amiafa and I. cl. arifa, Pr. wars

(Spt. 71), H. aaa. Cp. Skr. R. wa, IV. cl. wrafea, which would

give the Pr. amg equally well; but the denom. R. ata is the

more probable source, as Pr. and Gaud. have a preference for

denominative verbs.

275 ts scour =Skr. atat, X. cl. atsvafa (or R. wai, X. cl. atstafa, see

remarks on No. 274), Pr. dag or VI. cl. uz, H. ata.

276 ATS or ATS rub = Sk. ze] IX. cl. zalta or I. cl. aefa, Pr. wee

(H.-C. 4; 126)5* ats or ae.

277 ara honor, heed = Skr. aa, Causal araafa, Pr. arag or VI. cl.

alag, ral ara, See No. 270.

278 ATW or ATT measure = R. at, Causal Passive wiga (used actively),

Pr. aug, H. ard. The form arg is either a mere corruption of

amy, or it may be similarly derived from the Causal Passive aga

(of root HT), Pr. aug, H aid.

279 att beat, kill = Sky. 4 Causal arcafa, Pr. araz (H. C. 4, 337)

or VI. cl. reg (A. C. 3, 158), HH. are.

280 faa meet = Sky. fae, VI. cl. fawfa, Pr. frees (H. C. 4, 332),

H. faa. 4

281 faa be pulverised = Skr. #u, VI. cl. wufa, Pr. faag, H. Tae.

982 ae or ae wink =Skr. fag, future awfa (used in sense of

present), Pr. az or fasz, H. Me or (corrupt) Ha. See

introductory remarks pp. 87—40, and No. 175.

283 aia or AA rub = Sky. west, I. cl. atfe or I. cl. eafa, Pr. fas,

lal wa or waa.

284 HS shave = Skr. HE, L cl. gua, Pr. ysx (H.C. 4, 115), HH.

285 aa steal = Sky. 44, I. cl. qufer, Pri Fez (Do Vi. 254169) els aa.

286 ar< allure = Sky. qe, Causal areata, Pr. azz or VI. cl. Stes,

H. az.

287 <a keep, place = Sky. ta, I. cl. cafa, Pr. wag (H.C. 4, 489),

H. ta.

288 <a intr. be made or tr. make = Skr. ta make, Passive cada (used

actively), Pr. wag (cf. H. C. 4, 422,23 cafe. Spt. 363 ay

=u), Ha.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Oollection of Hindi Roots. 59

289 Ta noun, enjoy = Sky. va, I. cl. waa, Pr. cag (H.C. 4, 168),

H. <a. |

290 TS stop, remain == Skr. TR, Passive waa Pr. wadg, H. te

(for <a)*

291 «st be adorned = Sky. tH or TH, IV. cl. cata, Pr. tare, H. Ist

292 <TH or <8 cook = Skr. wy, Causal carafa, Pr. zug or VI. cl <uz,

H. %1 or (corr.) a.

293 fra be vexed = Sky. fr4, IV. cl. (or Pass. ) fowa, Pr. fies, H. fra.

294 way be agreeable — Skr. wa, Passive aga, Pr. wax (H. C. 4, 341),

H. aa. ie Z

295 xq intr. be fived, stop = Skr. WE, Causal Passive trya, Pr. tmz

or eug, H. aq.

296 <q or BE be ONG TY = = Skr. ay, IV. cl. wafa, Pr. weg or wag (Vr.

8, 46), H. wa or BH; cf. No. 302.

297 ¥& or BQ or US or RZ trample on, probably a corrupt spelling

of the following, Ng 298.

298 WY or SH or CTH or Ty enclose, restrain — Sky. Nel VII. cl. wufe,

Pr. ug (Vr. 8, 49), H. HF or SY or TiS or Tia.

299 <a creep = Skv. fia, Ic. feafa, Pr. frag or fore CH. C. 4, 259),

H. ta.

300 & weep = Skr. we. IL. cl tfefa, Vedic also VI. cl. xafa, Pr. «ag

(H. C. 4, 226. 238) or waz (Spt. 311) or I. cl. rag (H. C. 4,

226. 238) or t1H=x (K. 1.4, 69), H. Zr or Te.

301 tral roll, plan = Skr. Wa, I. cl. @iefa, Pr. Graz, H. treat

See Nos. 318, 314.

302 VE be angry = Sky. wa, Vedic I. cl. trafa, Pr. Crag, H. Ue ;

cf. No. 296.

303 Wa see = Sky. wa, Lcl. aaa, Pr. wraz, Bb wa.

304 wa be applied =Skr. waa, Passive qd, Pr. wag (Vr. 8, 52),

H. wai.

305 zor wre jump over = Sky. Wa, I. cl. wafa, Pr. waz, H. aa

or Ta.

306 as or KE. H. at dispute, fight = Sky. ae, X. cl. asata, Pr. ase

* The derivation is somewhat obscure; but it can hardly be referred (as Bs.

IIT, 40) to the Skr. root TX which has a very different meaning “ desert’. The

derivation from TW is supported by the Marathi form WY = @. On the change of

@ to ¥, see my Comp. Gramm. § 116.

+ There is a large number of Skr, roots, all closely connected in meaning ; viz.

We, Xs, TS, Us ; aq, ws, ae, aS, &e,

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314:

315

316

317

318

323

A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

or VI. cl. wuz, W. H. a or BE. H. ae.

Wa or ata shine, be fit= Ske. a4, I. cl. @afa or X. cl. eraufa,

Pr. wag or waz, H. wa or Te.

ae find, avail, get on well = Skr. @u, I. cl. wud, Pr. wee (H.C. 4,

335), -H. az.

wat feel ashamed = Sky. aaa, I. cl. aaifa, Pr. wae (H.C. 4,

103), H. wrt

fea write = Sky. faa, VI. cl. feafa, Pr. fees, H. faa The

ordinary Pr. root fee CH. C. 1, 187 f@ex) does not exist in

Hindi.

faa be smeared = Skr. faa, Passive feud, Pr. fawe. H. faa.

aa or we smear = Skr. far, VI. cl. faeufa, Pr. feag (H. C. 4,

149), H. wig or wa. As to the change of © to Y% see my

Comp. Gramm. § 148.

ay roll = Skr. es, VI. cl. asta, Pres. Le ag. See Nos.

301, 314, 317.

icy roll == Sky. Us, VI. cl. wofa, Pr. qez, H. a.

a or a rob = Skr. Se or WaT. cl. aeia or qatar, Pr. Sez or

eax, H, we or as.

& take = Ske. “au, 1. cl wad, Pr. a@ez or we (H.C. 4, 238),

H. @4 or @. The syllable ae is contracted into @; similarly ae

speak is sometimes pronounced @, and az bear, a.

ae roll about = Skr. We, VI. el. qi fa, Pr. weg (H. C. 4, 146

in the sense “ rolling about i in sleep”), H. ale.

wate be enamour ed = Skr. aH, IV. cel. seuara, Pr Rs (H. C.

4158), EL. aia. As to the change of & to ST, see my Comp.

Gramm. § 148.

art surround = Slr. zZ, Causal aitafa, Pr. are or VI. cl. aite,

H. a®&

qa cant == Sir. wa, Passive ward (used actively), Pr. wag (Vr. 8

52), Hi. aa.

PANT or PTT (or TAIT) destroy =Skr. aa-€, Causal detcata,

Pr. Seitz or Harty, (cf. i. Cx 264) or VI. cl. @etcx or

dates, H. dare or Gere (or Gulez). Or a denominative of

Oert.

We collect == Sky. wa-fa, Passive aaiaa (used actively), Pr. ab

(ef. H. C. 4, 241 gaz) or VI. cl. dae (as Vee for vzz), H

da.

wa or we be combined = Skr. wWa-@t, Passive dqaa (used

actively), Pr. dsgor VI. cl. das (like Zz and wee), H. de

or (corr. ) ue.

]

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 61

324 we or BC rot—=Skr. aE (or we), I. cl. Wea, but Vedic also

wefa, Pr. usg (H. C. 4, 219; in Vr. 8, 51 it is ascribed to

Nq), W.H. work. Hat

325 Wala persecute, tor ment — Skr. aa-aq, Causal eatqafa, Pr. daraz

or VI. cl. Garas, H. aara.

326 we leak =Skr. Be, I. cl. qed, Pr. deg, H. ae. As to elision

of the nasal, see my Comp. Gramm. §§ 143, 146. See No. 3538.

327 BATS or WETS or VATA sustain = Skr. aa-wz, Causal wancufa, Pr.

durtz or VI. cl. durcg HH. dure, &e. Or demon. root of Ware.

328 vata be contained = Sky. qa-3IG, V. cl. aaratta, Pr. X. cl. aarag

H. ©. 4, 142) or VI. cl. wataz, H. aaa See No. 172.

329 War or Si understand == Else aa-qy, IV. cl. aay, Pr. Wasz,

‘E. 18[, wat or W. H. wutn. See No. 242.

880 AX tsswe, Be ended = Sky. €, I. cl. axfa, Pr. weg (Vr. 8, 12),

H. wt.

331 ame commend = Skr. a, I. cl. qtaaq, Pr. aateg, (H. C. 2, 101

has waves 2). HH. etre.

332 Wa pierce ==Skr. Ka or ae, L. cl. wafa or wafa, Pr. waz, H ch

333 Wart or Wart or BAIL prepare == Sky. aa-B, Causal ce Pr:

Waltz or VI. cl. darez, H. datz, &e.

334 ae endure = Sky. 4, I. cl. wea, Pr. azz (H.C. 1,6), H. a8.

335 Bet arrange =Skr. wa+ =, I. cl. aetfa, Pr. dere (HL. C. 4,

259 = Skr. dzutfa, in H. C. 4, 82 also BTETE ), E. H. az.

336 aT settle = Sky. aty, Causal araafa, Pr. BTRE (cf. Spt. 188 aTzz)

or VI. cl. ataz (cf. Spt. 260 etez), H. ete. The form aT does

not oceur in Hindi.

337 FIX accomplish = Skr. @, Causal arcafa, Pr. arte or VI. cl. ares

H. ae*

338 Wet pierce — Skr, W, Causal wreafa, Pr. atcz or VI. cl. arts;

H. ata. Or from (Caueall of we, see No. 332.

339 ata threaten, distress = Sky. aa, Causal @uufa, Pr. daz or VI. cl.

daz (H. C. 4, 197 where however it is = waa), H. wa.

340 at sew = Sky. faa, IV. cl. Mtafa, Pr. VI. cl. fare or fags, H. ae.

H. ©. 4, 230 gives fasax which would be @a in H., but it does

not exist; there is, however, another reading faae, H. ay

which does exist, see No. 842.

341 ata learn = Skr. fwe, I. cl. faa, Pr. fares (cf. Spt. 353), H aya.

342 ad or at ¥ or aly irrigate = Sky. faq, VI. cl. faafa, Pr. faaz,

* The root means also “polish” (by rubbing, striking); perhaps this is the

SIXZ mentioned by H. CO. 4, 84 as equivalent to the Skr. Texfa,

62 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

(H. ©. 4, 289) or fuzz (H. C. 4, 230), H. @S or HF or (corr.)

QS (cf. Vr. 2, 41 eae = aye, Ls. 199.)

343 ater exude, at i Skr. fae, IV. cl. feafa, Pr. fasiz (H. C. 4,

224), H. Ms. See also No. 344.

344 Pst seethe, boil, Luude, sweat = Skr. 4Y (or at), Passive Baa, Pr.

fas, H. ast.

845 Ast be received (as money) be liquidated (as debt) =Skr. fa, Pas-

sive 14a, Pr. fasix, H. as.

346 @ytt adorn =Skr. Gwe, Causal gaurcafa, Pr. gyrce or VI. cl.

eu, H. gare .

347 ga hear = Skr. 4, V. cl. wutfa, Pr. VI. cl. ewe (Vr. 8, 56),

H. 3.

348 Gat remember = Sky. ay, I .cl wafa, Pr. gatz (Vr. 8,18), H. gue.

349 @era be agreeable = Skr. 8 X. cl. gaagfa Pr. Gees (Spt. 169) or

VI. cl. @etaz, H. aera.

350 Sa smell at =Skr. wearat, I. cl. warfsrafa or II. cl. waryrfa,

Pr. aavaz or VI. cl. wavaz, H. ee.

351 SA swell = Sky. fy, Passive waa, Pr. ast, H. aa.

52 Sew appear = Ske, ma, IV. cl wafa, Pr. qa, (cf H.C. 4,

Dil) 52 EL, ai. ;

353 FEZ irrigate = Skr. aq, Causal @afa, Pr. féee or VI. cl. faag,

H.@ v2 cf, No. 326.

354 Bq or GF serve, worship = Skr. G4, I. cl. Sad, Pr. daz (A. C. 4,

396), H. ada or ae (with euphonic ¥, see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 69),

355 ara regret, meditate—Skr. HA, Passive WHA (used actively)

Pr. gaz, H. ara.

856 aS shine, be fit = Skr. WH, I. cl. Rrae, Pr. erez (H. C. 1, 187),

dale are.

357 aig deliver == Skr. qa-a, Causal aagqata, Pr. aaqug or VI. cl.

waug, HH. Giq. See No. 349, footnote.

858 wa kil/ = Sky. ea, II. cl. | ef, but Vedic also I. cl. wafa, Pr. ewe.

(H. C. 4, 418), H. <a.

359 et take away = Skr. = I. cl. etfa, Pr. xz (H. C. 4; 284), H. et.

* SIT would form eva or WF in Pr., auust as oss or °Ss of ORT; and WA

would contract to a in Hindi, just as in a q for Pr. WHUT, see No. 3857; the

intermediate form being WAIIT (cf. H. C. 4, 397). The root, however, might ibe

derived from Skr. frig, I. cl. feafa, Pr. faag; only the Hindi ought to be ata ; ;

and the change of © to H would be very anomalous. (Dr. R. Mitra in his vocabulary

quotes Y WATARTA P ).

1880. | A. F. R. Hoernle—A Oollection of Hindi Roots. 63

360 sfca or eta be glad=Skr. Fy, I. cl. eu(a, Pr. sfrag (Vr. 8,

11; perhaps denom. of afta — vs Vr. 3, 62), E. H. efca or

W. H. ex. See No. 209.

361 way toss about =Skr. Se, (Causal Passive Sarma), Pr. was,

H. <a.

862 ~al seream = Skr. S, I. cl. Safa, Pr. VI. cl. warsz or (contyr.)

wag, H. waa.

363 4 or eta laugh = Skr. ea, I. cl. wafa, Pr. wag (7. V. 2, 4. 69)

or Swe (Passive), H. <a or Sa.

864 BTW or wim blow = = Sky. “at, Causal qrqufa, Pr. vagor Vicl. tae

or 4g, H. <iq or (corr.) <zik.

365 BT intr. shake ==Skr, 3, Passive Saad (used actively), Pr. waz,

( H xtra. See No. 68,

366 fea intr. shake = Sky. %, I. cel, #tfa, Pr. VI. cl. fexg or feuz,

H. fea.

867 Ba sacrifice = Skr. ¥, V. cl. yatta, Pr. VI. cl. YRS or SUT (H.

C. 4, 241 where it is referred to Skr. root S), H. Sa.

368 xa drive, goud = Skr. ze go, Causal esata, Pr. sez or VI. cl.

esc, H. eq.

869 St be = Skr. 4! I. cl. wafa, Pr. wax or wag or Bag or Vs (H.C.

4,60), H. ra

Part II.—Secondary Roots.

Comp. = compound root; den. = denominative ; der. = derivative ;

N. = noun; P. P. P. = past participle passive.

The Sanskrit equivalents are not given, unless when they actually

exist ; what theoretically they might have been, has been explained in the

introductory remarks ; see also my Comparative Grammar, §§ 851—854.

Some of the explanations attempted in this list, are, of course, only

tentative ; a few such have been indicated by a mark of interrogation.

1 comp. yzaH be hindered, stopped =Skr. JZ +8, Pr. WERT or

gar, H. sea.

2 comp. Salat be raised, rise =Skr. Ja-+ A, Pr. VaRe or VaR,

H. saa.

3 comp. VIK vomit = Skr. Ve-aa +a, Pr. Vang or vans, H. wan.

4 comp. SR or Bra vomit = Sk. au --&, Pr. aaaE or sams,

Ap. Pr. aaqz, H. Sia or Sa (with at for 4a or BH, see my

Comp. Gramm, § 122),

64 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

5 der. Yas be pulled out, slip out, a passive or intransitive, derived

from vars, see No. 6.

6 den. VATE or VUE pull out, uproot = Skr. .P. P. P. veg, Pr. RST

(ckH. Cr4, 187); H. vais (for Bare; with transferred aspira-

tion, see my Comp. Gramm. § 1382) or gas (for Bae with change

of a to e, see my Comp. Gramm. § 148). See No. 18.

7 den. BTS. put on, dines ie. wads, I. cl. yaaga, Pr. Wass.

(cf. H.-C. 4, 221), H. He (contracting %T4 to 31). Probably

from a P. P. P. of the root fax.

8 comp. aH crackle, thunder = Sky. we +a, Pr. wyRy or aeaHE,

H. aga.

9 den. aaTa_ carn = Skr. N. aa; Pr. wares or waa, (H. C. 4,

111 has awas and gives it as a substitute of the root SINS ; the

a is shortened to a, by H. C. 8,150), H. aata.

10 comp. aaa be peinful, be pained = Sky. HI+8, Pr. HARE or

quae, H. awa.

11 der. wz be cut, a passive or intransitive, derived from root @TZ, see

primary roots, No. 27.

12 der. ae be pulled out, escape, a passive or intransitive, derived from

root are. See No. 13.

13 den. are pull owt =Skr. P. P. P. aes; Pr. age (H. C. 4, 187),

H. ae.

14 comp. Bt or ASR, make a tremulous noise, rustle, rattle = Sky.

Rag t+a; Pr. wag or asag, LH. UTH or GER. There is also

a reduplicated root @t@t or @gaET of the same meaning. They

also occur in Marathi and Panjabi. The primary meaning of the

root is; slip or glide along with a sound ; this is preserved in the —

Marathi wa or BER which is used of the running ofa stream,

or the crashing of a boat, dragged over gravel, &c. The simple

root @g occurs in Marathi with its original meaning be shed,

full off; also in Panjabi, where however it has become transitive,

carry off. The change of @ or t to S or J is anomalous ; but it

already took place in Prakrit; thus in Spt. 44, qmasg or Skr.

greaafa, Spt. 195 afsy for Sky. wafea. Perhaps there may be

a connection with the root @&; compare also the roots wt and

awa. See also roots ta and WTA.

15 der. ae be hollowed, be sunk, a passive or intransitive, derived from

root ars; see No. 16,

16 den. ate hollow, bury = = Skr. N. aq, Pr. wy (Vr. 8, 25), Pr. wz

oraygs, H. mg. Or possibly a mere corruption of root tre, No.

17, by disaspiration.

1880. | A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 65

den. ave dig in, fim in, bury = Sky. P. P. P. are (of root are),

Pr. avez, HH. ae.

den. at mark, brand = Sky. N. me; Pr. ez or ez, H. ite @y5

brands being made on the forehead or bosom.

den. yatta be alarmed, agitated, perhaps corrupted form agagTa

with the same meaning, a reduplicative or alliterative form, made

from ay = Skr. N. ae noise, eries of alarm (2).

den. faata or fafrara, be disgusted =Skr. N. gut or deminutive

afwat (of root wu), Pr. fawt (H. C. 1, 128) or fatwa; Pr.

fauras or fafusiag or fauras or fafwsraz, H. faara or faferena.

der. fat be collected, surrounded, gather, a passive or intransitive of

root ax. See primary roots, No. 64.

comp. FIR be compr: essed, collapse = Skr, 44 or 94 + G, Pr. GuaT

or qua, H. gaa.

comp. @aax glitter = Skr. Jaa + G, pass. Waferya (with active

meaning), Pr. qamz or qamz, H. gaa.

den. SIG wish, corrupted for RT, see No. 40.

der. Faq be torn, split, a passive or intransitive, derived from root

atx ; see No. 31.

den. Faaata smooth, polish = Skr. N. feau (or fafa; perhaps

itself a compound word of faa br Lane = faa, and a = Pr. fau;

lit. made clear); Pr. fFaRurasg or faRuas, H faanara.

den. faera or fagra abuse, vew = Skr. P. P. P. Fag (from root Faq

abuse); Py. festa, H. faera (with transfer of aspiration) or

fagia (with loss of aspiration). As to the changes of aspiration,

see No. 47 &¥ or YY, where it is preserved ; also primary root,

No. 65 qe (footnote, p. 45). As to the change of ¥ to w to S

(or ¥), compare root sgrTa from P. P. P. ya; and primary roots

Nos. 92, 93 ste and sig.

den. fqara neice known to, warn, admonish = Sky. P. P. P. faa;

Pr. faaas or fantaz (cf. S. B. 11, 1), H. faara. In Setu-

bandha 11, 1 oceurs the past participle faufasi (with @ for d, by

H. C. 8, 150), which is correctly explained by the commentator

as meaning afadt made known to, or fata restrained, warned (or

fazed), afcatfud admonished, comforted; (see 8S. Gdt. pp. 84, 156).

den. tq paint = Skr. N. faa; Skr. faaafa, Pr. fag or faws,

H. Sq.

Aa ata or PtH recognize = Sky. N. pe Pr. . Fave I. C. 2, 50) ;

Skr. fagafa, Pr. faxes or favex, H. #S or WF.

den. ike tear, cleave = Skr. N. @tt (rag), whence Skr. @cafa,

Pr, is or @ixs, H. eee

A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

32 comp. Fa be finished, cease = Skr. Ba + @; Pr. Taz (H. C. 4,

WET) sag El. qa. H. C. gives it as a substitute of the Skr. root

an fall down, decay, a synonym of =; so also the commentator

to Spt. 828, see Wh. p. 184. The correct derivation from aa is

given by the commentator on Setubandha 1, 9. The Skr. root TE

inflict pain, X. cl. aaata, is doubtlessly reintroduced from the

Prakrit. See No. 33.

comp. 3a blunder, miss = Sky. Sq+ 8; Pr. aqas, H. a. This

is clearly identical with the former, as regards. origin. The original

meaning “ fall,” “drop,” (from the truth) would easily lead to

“blunder.” In this sense it is well-known to Prakrit ; e. g., Spt. v,

323, aHAayT “ blundered or missed meeting” ; again Spt. v. 199,

Setubandha 1, 9, where the commentary correctly explains it 9aTé

aut tfa afaa, z. e., according to some itis a desi word meaning

“blundering”’ (See S. Gdt., p. 157). pee No. 32.

den. ata steal = Skr. N. IX or Sic ; ; Pr. @t7agz or BIRTaE,

H. aera.

comp. ata start (from fright) = = Skr. quqt+ @, He wataaa

(used actively), Pr. age or Gam, Ap. Pr. qaas, H. sta.

der. Ra be strained, filter, a passive or intransitive derived from ara,

No. 38.

den. @& deceive, cheat = Skr. N. aa; Skr. guafa, Pr. geez or

aus, HH. aa.

den. @f@ strain, search = Sky. P. P. ,P. aq (of root Be), Pr. eae

or Raz (Ls. 199) or eas, H. aia (?).

den. @Ty stamp, print ; an active or transitive derived from root @q ;

perhaps merely another form of root yIq3 see Appendix Nos. 4

and 18.

den. QI or MTS wish = Skr. N. gare; Pr. SHRISE (cf He C23

22) or URIeS, H are or (disaspirated) Sie: or from Skr. N.

gaat, Pr. serve or taerys, H. ae (with transferred aspira-

tion) or ale. As to the elision of initial ¥ or ¥, see my Comp.

Gramm. § 173 (cf. Addenda) ; and as to the change of aspiration,

abidem § 182.

comp. fea be disperse sed, be scattered = Sky. fau-+a; Pr. fagag

or fazaz, H. faze. See No. 46.

den. fag be vexed, take offence, a passive or intransitive, derived

from R. @t¥_ or J, No. 46,

3 comp. taza sprinkle = Sky. WE + a; Pr: fasar or fasae,

H. faga. As to the derivation of fae from Skr. wa, see No. 45

@tz ; and as to the softening of the final, ate is to faz, as SE to

SiS, q. Vv.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 67

44 den. &ta sneeze = Sky. N. feat; Skr. faqafa, Pr. fame or fags,

H. ta. The word feat, however, is itself a compound from fea

sneezing and @; and the word faq is probably another form of

wa sneezing, from Skr. root @ sneeze.

45\ den. giz or BTS or KS sprinkle = Sky. P. P. P. ge sprinkled,

Pr. fag (with fs for wy, as in fazs or faag or faug, HL. C. 4, 182.

257; see also primary roots Nos. 78, 80); Pr. fage or fags,

H. aa or eS" or & (on disaspiration see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 145, Exc. 2; on the anunasika, § 149; and on the change of

= to &, § 148). Or from Skr. N. aa (of root faa), see primary root

No. 342.

46 den. ats or &S abuse, vew = Sky. P. P. P. Fag abused; Pr. &SF

or gee, H. ae or as. See Nos. 27, 42. Probably from fay

was derived a root faz, just as Skr. root TS from UA 5 the causal

of fee would be &fz, just as causal strife of SI _whence we should

have Pr. @8%, just as Pr. sss, and Ee ae just as H. STs.

The root fgé which would correspond to sTZ does not exist in

Hindi, except in the compound faze, see No. 41. A similar series

of roots are Rez or KE and ats.* Possibly also Nos. 43 and 45,

may be derived from fay.

47 den. aia take away, snatch=Skr. P. P. P. faa (of root fa),

Pr. faaz or f€az, H. Ba.

48 den. ES or HS be let off, be released = Sky. P. P. P. Faq, Pr. ea

(H. ©: 2, 138) or RE (S. C. 1, 3, 142 Re Wt SED, wee or Rx,

H. Ke or we. See Nos. 46 and 50. The roe &E or az has “not

been. adopted into Sanskrit, except in its causal or transitive form

ae. t

* There would be the following series of forms :

Skr. aa, Pr. Sim or Stes; Roots Sky. wz, Pr. TE or aS, HH. TS or TS Caus. SNS

» far, » aa » ee; Beets, Re, 5 az BS zs, az 5 as, » ag

iG cite, (ez; 4 faz, ,, faz ,, fzs, ie faz 55 fas, » ae.

The Pr. roots in would seem to be the original derivatives from the Skr.

P. P. P.; they were reintroduced into Sanskrit with one final €, and afterwards gave

rise to the alternative Pr. root in S, by the ordinary phonetic change of € to ©.

The two alternative Pr. roots in @ and S, reappear in H. as roots in & and $_-

As to the Skr. root ®; see footnote to No. 48. The root faz appears to have been

little used; it is not mentioned among Skr. roots, nor does it survive in Hindi,

except in feca, see No. 41.

+ The root Wie does exist in Skr., but it has assumed a somewhat different,

though Wrnccted 3 meaning “ ext” (whence H. ast knife). The same transition of

68 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. — (No. 2,

49 a 8g perforate = Sky. N. fax (of R. fa@&) ; whence Skr. fagafa,

r. fate or faces, H. Ge.

50 see ae release, an active or transitive, derived from R. RE No. 48.

Compare Skr. root ale.

51 den. sara pair off labor (i. e., assist another with labor, in expecta-

tion of similar assistance being returned hereafter) =Skr. N. av,

Pr} ST (B., ©2278) ;. Pr: Aas or SINNAS, H. sara. The

root comes to mean generally: be provident, be careful of:

52 den. saTa make known, warn = Sky. P. P. P. wa (of caus. of R.

Bt); Pr. sarag or saraz, 1H. Sas.

53 den. 31H Lg Orme N. wa, Pr. Has or THE (H. C. 4, 186),

H. wa

54 den. Sta overpower, win = Skr. P. P. P. sta (of R. wt); Pr.

fartiz or farns, HH. ata.

55 der. SS be joined, a passive or intransitive, derived from root sy

see No. 57.

56 den. SZ unite = Skr. P. P. P. am, Pr. om CHL. C. 1, 42) or Sz,

(see Nos. 46, 48), Pr. wet or HES, H. si. Compare Skr. root siz.

57 der. SITS join, an active or transitive, derived from root we, see

No. 56.

58 den. sta yoke = Skr. N. ar@, Skr. Staafa, Pr. stax or sing,

H. ira.

59 den. STS or Sia or BT see = Skr. N. Bifaa eye, sight; Pr. sitwsz

(H. ©, 4, 422, 6) or saz (cf. H. C. 4, 332 sirsifae), H. sire

or STS or BTS (with euphonic 4 and ¥, see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 69).

60 comp. wea ty. Hianich; intr. shake = Skr. W2-+ 4; Pr. weHe or

waza, H. wza. As to the derivation of WZ, see primary root

watz No. 96.

G1 comp. waa intr. spring ; tr. throw on, move to and fro, snatch = Sky.

wag+a; Pr. wave or was, H. waa. Hemachandra 4, 161

notices the corresponding uncompounded verb waz, but only as an

intransitive “move to and fro” (said to be = Sky. wafer). Hindi

and Marathi have the same uncompounded verb W4, but as a

transitive, “cover with a thatch” (lit, throw on, i. e., bundles of

meaning may be observed in another series of Skr. roots, which also are derived from

faa. The latter becomes in Pr. faa (H.. ©. 2,127) vor aa (Spt. v. 278) or Uz 5

whence Pr. den. roots az or ae (H. C. 4, 116 EAN and ast he breaks), H. Se

(ay. does not exist). This ene ae as well as ita corresponding causal or anciine

forms Gz or ae have been adopted into Sanskiit. See primary root No. 41.

1880. | A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 69

67 d

grass.)* As to the derivation of wa, see Appendix No. 6. Hindi

has an adverb wy quickly ; it has also another kind of compound

root wye with the same meaning as WIA On these obscure com-

pound in € roots, see my Comp. Gramm. § 354, 2.

comp. WIA shine, glare = Skr. wet + B; Pr. MART or MARKT,

H. waR. As to the derivation of we, see primary root No. 98.

den. aA peep, spy = Sky. N. Sara ; Pr. aanqag, HH. aia (with

loss of initial 4, and disaspiration) ?

comp. a a sigh, lament = Sky, ne +8; i Passive Wirantaa (used

actively), Pr. fares or fans, H. ara.

comp. a or WTA stagger, nod, bend = Sky. SH (ace. sg. neub. BY L) +

a; Pr. wag, H. wa or Hite.

comp. MIA or aT throw, cast =Skr. Way (or wa)+ a3 Pr.

mage, H. aia or Wa. As to ST = ¥a, see my Comp. Gramm.

. 122 P

. Fear be propped, stay, a passive or intransitive, derived from No. 68.

comp. em. prop, support = Skr. ara (of root 3) + @; Pr. e1ameg,

H. 2a ?

den. 3 fix, CONG Skr. P. P. P. qaq (of root Wu); Pr. oss

or ose, H. 3g. The hardening of @ to & is probably caused by

the influence of the initial ¢ In old Hindi sg oceurs in the sense

of “stopping short”, ‘standing amazed’’. When the past parti-

ciple is used as such (not as an element of a denominative verb),

the original @ is still preserved in Hindi; thus old Hindi st@,

modern Hindi st “ standing”’.

comp. SSR or feom stop short, stand amazed = Skr. @a+ 8;

Pr. gaz, H aoa orfasa. As to the derivation of aa, see No,

69; as to = for ¥, see my Comp. Gramm § 35.

comp. saH jingle, tinkle, Sc. = Skr. wa sounding + @; Pr. SaRT

or sags, H. saa. Compare Skr. eat clang, twang, &c. from

&+ 8; for gs means any “ sound.”

comp. saa strut = Skr. qa+a; Pr. saRr or seg, H. sua.

Skr. <q becomes Pr. yu or su (H. C. 2, 9, whence H. ata prop,

pillar and 31a place, residence. 'The change of @ to % to @ may

be observed in the primary roots Nos. 117, 118.

comp. sax knock, HS = Skr. aw + &, see root Ca No. 10. in

Appendix. Hindi has an interjection #4, imitating the sound of

knocking or hammering ; also saat rammer (an instrument).

den. B¥X be fixed, remain, another form of No. 75; possibly arisen by

* Panjabi has ®4, with 4 for U1; and Wi TH thatch, with ® for Y. The former

‘might be referred to the Skr. root H4,

70 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots, [No. 2,

a mere transposition, #¢ tharh = age tharah = Bee thahar

= set thahar. Or the element < may be the same as { or @ in

Zzt or FY, Ke. (see my Comp. Gramm. § 354, 2), and oe = Pr.

oe =Skr. @ey. Hindi has the noun etet place.

75 den. SI@_or 3tg be fixed, be erect, stand=Skr. P. P. P. way,

Pr. sg (H. ©. 2,39); Pr. e$xor sys, H. ae or aid.

76 den. St fear = Skr. N. ex, Pr. et (H.C. 8, 217); Pr. sxx (H.

C. 4,198), H. ee.

77 den. et be hot, burn = Sky. N. are, Pr. ere (H. ©. 1, 217);

Pr. erezor wtes, H. wre.

78 comp. S& cover = Skr. N. wa (ace. sing. neut. BR covering) +B;

Pri ems. (a. 'C) 4,21) oH ea See primary root No. 105.*

79 der. S@ or Et flow, a passive or intransitive of root STS or SIX,

see Appendix No. 11.

80 comp. Ya or BTA be wearied, be fatigued = Sky. @¥ (ace. sing. neut.

wq) +a; Pr. war (H.C. 4, 370) or VI. cl. wag (H. C. 4, 87.

259; where it is said to be a substitute of Skr. wafa move slowly

Srom fatigue), H. ga or ura. In H.C. 4,16 the root is given

as an equivalent of wr stand; the Bangali has gta (pronounced

thak) stay, remain. The original meaning of the Hindi is to come

to a stop (from fatigue). The Skr. passive ead (= 444 "19a )

means “to be made firm or rigid, be paralysed, be stopped. The

original meaning of “rigidity” is preserved in the Hindi ya or BR

a congealed lump, a clot. The stoppage may be owing to fatigue

or to wonder ; hence Hindi fara stopped or wearied or astonished.

Other derivatives of the Hindi root are WaR wnwearied, Batra

weariness, RIM perplexed. : E

81 comp. 44H strike, slap, tap from BY + #; as to the derivation of yg,

see root ¥Tq in the Appendix No. 13.

* It might be also derived, as a primary root, from Skr. aq, I. cl. auta,

Pr. TAGS = WRT (with transfer of aspiration) = SRF (softening and cerebralising

=u). Compare the roots ata , oa, 3Ia, ST&_in the Appendix, which show that the

Skr. roots WW and @@ had a tendency in Prdkrit to transfer the aspiration (4)

and cerebralise the initial (). The Skr. root T@ means chipping off (by striking)

and covering ; a similar change of meaning appears in the Hindi root W@ cover from

Skr. WW rub, strike.

+ S. Goldschmidt, Prdhritica, No. 7, p. 5 derives it, as a denominative root,

from P. P. P. YF of a root Uy, which he identifies with the root @*¥, and assumes a

change of 74 to F. This theory is based on three hypothetical steps : the identity of Bq

and iH, the existence of a P. P. P. YI, the change of 74 to R- Pischel in Bes

zenberger’s Beitrage III, 285 derives it simply from a hypothetical Skr. root WI,

880. | A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 71

82 comp. YAR or UTA tremble, flutter ; probably a mere various pronun-

ciation of BTA or WA, q. v.; the interchange of Wand ¥ is shown

by the Pr. wae and yRE (H. CO. 4, 87), and that of @ and | by Gut

and wat (H. C. 2,8). There is also a reduplicated root @@qUye or

UAT corresponding to CC ECE © and WCHL.

83 comp. Puce be set, be settled, well postured (e. So in dancing) =

Skr. fare + a; Pr. furtaee or fucas, = fuck.

84 den. fatta intr. settle (as liquor) =Skr. N. fat; Skr. fequafa

Pr. facras or furas, H. facra.

85 comp. wut spit = Skr. a (or Wa) + a; Pr. way or Baz,

H. aa. ‘As to the contraction of vq to Zor &, see my Comp.

Gramm. § 122.

86 den. Z¥¥ or Card run = Skr. N. 34, Pr. diminutive zas; Pr. case

or zasg, EK. H. zus or W. H. 213. In Chanda’s Prakrit

Lakshana C D, II, 27h, there is noticed a root sasq run about

with lowering face (@fatHae HEAVY TATA THA STSa); Marathi

has both wasq and sae in the same sense; it has also eae run ;

these two roots are probably identical, the change of initial = to §

being not uncommon ; see H. C. 1, 217.

87 comp. qa intr. spli¢t==Skr. at +a; Pr. ecHg or St HZ,

H. ava.

88 comp. TER intr. burn = Skr. e+ a; Pr. ewRe or eeReT,

H. ER.

89 den. | intr. pain = Skr. N. e:q@; Skr. q:ayfa, Pr. Saag or

grax, H. <a.

90 comp. USH blaze, be hot (from any passion), be distr essed, tremble

(from fear), = Skr. eva +4, Pr. esa, H. wea (for zea,

with transfer of aspiration). There is also reduplicated root

asus.

91 den. Mig Pour — Skr. N. ait; Pr. ettz or wits, H. ae.

92 comp. Bia. or OTe. blow, Op, eathe upon = Skr. ya+a; Pr. waar

or Ap. Pr. wame, H. aia.

93 den. @2Z dance = Skr. N. ad ; Skr. adata, Pr. a2 or VI. cl. qt

(H. ©. 4, 230. 2,30), H. az. The Skr. root az (1. cl. azefa

or X. cl. atezafer) is adopted from the Prakrit.

94 der. @¥ flow, a passive or intransitive, derived from primary root @=T

No. 186.

95 den. AWE flee = Skr. P. P. P. @@ (of R. @a eject); Pr. wees,

E. H. aziz. Compare Pr. qaz< (H. C. 4, 200) from Skr. qa.

* Hindi has a word US body, and WS firm, strong, sound. This is probably

deriyed from Skr, €3 =~ Pr. SS —= Hi, YT.

100

101

102

103. der

104:

105

106

107

108

A. F. R. Hoernle

y Roots. [No. 2,

der. faa or fant be pulled out, come out ; a passive or intransitive,

derived from root faatTa. See No. 98.

der. faaa. be expelled, come out ; a passive or intransitive, derived

from root faata. See primary root No. 139.

den. faare or Tratc pull out, eject = Skr.-P.-P. P: fare ; Pali

and Pr. faas<, Pr. faares or faaras, W. H. faata or E. H.

Faas. As to the change of @ to =, see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 115.

den. foe or fart peel, extract = Skr. P. P. P. fare ; Pr,

faatss (with o for u, by H. C. 1, 116) or farares (with transfer

of aspiration, as in waares H. C. 4, 188 = Satgy, a denominative

of yIqZ extracted).

den frat grin = Skr. N. fagewa (from root fa + A + fa) ;

Skr. faqaaa, Pr. fawreats or VI. cl. fares (cf. H.C. 1, 116),

H. faatg. See my Comp. Gramm. § 148.

den. fara swallow = Skr. N. fara; Pr. faaae or VI. cl. fares,

H. fare it might, however, be a primitive root = Skr. fa +z,

VI. cl. fafaafa, with change of € to ¥.

den. fawe terminate = Sky. N. fauta (from root f#q+ ae); Pr.

fawze or VI. cl. Fain H. faye (?). As to the change of

dental 7 to cerebral , compare Pr qgw for Skr. qua, Vr. 8, 23;

cf. also Pr. yee for Skr. qafa Vr. 8, 51.

. fae or fau be accomplished, succeed, a passive or intransitive

root, derived from the primary root faare, No. 146.

den, ¥<@ or 7s enter =Skr. P. P. P. yfau,. Pr. gag (H. Crag

340); Pr. age or VI. cl. geez, E. H. aee or W. H. as.

den. wa ripen = Sky. P. P. P. wa, Pr. wa (H. C. 2, 79) ; Pr. q&z or

war, H. aa.

den. Tas seize — Skr. P. P. Powe; Pr. was (cf. H. C. 4, 187),

H. qae (for Whe, with lost aspiration, as in root arg No. 16,

wars No. 6, atg No. 75, and others).

den. G=RaTa repent = Sk. N. qarmy; Pr. qeguree or VI. el.

qeentag, H. qeara.

den. 4S be paid, be roofed, be watered — Skr. N. Wa or We or ye;

Pr. qez or VI. cl. Weq, H. ae Skr. qa is any “ vessel’, used

for irrigating ; TZ is the table or leaf on which the accounts of

payments are kept ; 7 means a “ roof.”

* So also Bs. I, 354. III, 58. The Hindi root frare is, of course, referable

to the Skr. root Tara + 2; but the latter is most probably itself adopted from the

Prékrit; Skr. faeqreaafa = Pr. faRres. The Pr. form fare@rete, quoted by

Bs. ILI, 58, is misspelt for TARTS.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi: Roots. 73

109 den. aq expand, grow, prosper = Skr. N. ya@ (of root y-4= ),

Sky. yqgafa, Pr. qaae or qyws (cf. Pr. qwat= Skr. qarwa

H. C. 2, 42), H. qaq (transposed from qa, see my Comp. Gramm.

§ 133, see also primary roots Nos. 165, 166).

110 den. afaara trrigate = Skr. N. arata, Pr. aifaway (H. C. 1, 101),

Pr. wifwaras or oafwaraz, H. ufaara (see my Comp.

Gramm. § 25).

111 den. uft@ or WH touch = Skr. N. ww, Pr. wita (Vr. 3, 62); Pr.

witag (H.C. 4,182), H. afc or awa (with lost aspiration, and

change of ¢ to a; see my Comp. Gramm. §§ 58 note, 180).

112 den. wae or Gay intr. turn over = Skr. P. P. P. qq, Pr. qag

or aq (Vr. 3, 21. H.C. 2, 47), Pr. wage or yaas (H. C. 4,

200), H. gee or uve. In _. C. 4, 200.258 yea and qeeaet

are spelled so; see my Comp. Gramm. § 161.

113 den. ufeaqra or WeATA recognise = Skr. N. afeaaa ; Pr. afeqywe

or Ufeayug, H. ufeqra or aeala (for asaia ; with elided t

and inserted euphonic ¥, see my Comp. Gramm. §§ 69, 124) (?).

114 der. foea or ufea. intr. dress, put on, a passive or intransitive,

derived from the primary root faeara or ufeata, No. 165.* See

also primary root afet No. 166.

115 comp. fama be squeezed, be shrivelled =Skr. faat+a; Pr. frame

or faaas, H. faqa Compare Skr. fufye squeezed; and

as regards the derivation of fas or fa, see primary root ata

No. 175. ‘The word has been adopted into Skr. from the Prakrit.+

116 den. faR@ or fawe slip —Skr. N. faiwe or foe slippery ;

Pr. fasez or fous, H. faze or fuae. (transterring the

aspiration to q and changing @ to #; see my Comp. Grammar §

11). See No. 125.

117 der. faz be beaten, a passive or intransitive, derived from root Wz

No. 119.

118 der. fae be beaten, bruised, a passive or intransitive, derived from root

7, No. 121. See also No. I, 184.

119 den. ¥te beat = Sky. P. P. P. fae; Pr. faze (Spt. 173) or fase

(with g for g, as in gags for wage (H. C. 4, 200), H. Wa.

See No. 121.

120 den. yar call, shout = Sky. N. SHAT or RAT or Yee; Pr. WRT

* In Bengali the root is fray » which is a denominative of the Skr. P. P. P,

FIAT dressed. Possibly the Hindi root may be explained in the same way by a

further change of & to ©.

t+ In the Sky, word fafae pressed down a metathesis of Y and | appears to have

taken place.

121

122

123

124

129

130

131

132 d

133

134

1385

A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

Ly el ve.

or YRICE or GRITS, H. Gatt. A similar change of @ to 4Y,

in root afta No. 111. An intransitive or passive form of this

root occurs in the old Hindi of Chand’s Prithiré) Rasau: qaq

be called.

den. qa squeeze, beat = Sky. P. P. P. faz ; see primary root No. 184.

den. 4 revile, perhaps = Skr. N. yw blessed ; euphuistically.

comp. WER tr. separate, winnow, or “intr. be separated = Skr. eRe +

a; Pr. wane or weag, H. wea. The Pr. doubles the radical

Z; see primary root we No. 186.

comp. WR or WEA tr emble = = Skr. wc + @; Pr. wees or

wmtag, H. WTR or Wee. The reduplicated root WIWT or WCAC

also occurs. See roots yta No, 82 and aca No. 14.

den. faa, slip, slide, see No. 116. For asimilar transfer of aspiration

on account of change of & to 4, see root # @ in Appendix No. 8.

comp. HA blow = Sky. Wa + Bi; Pr: WE or WHE, 138 Hat. See

HC, “4, 422, 3. wpfasia, and Spt. 178 WRT.

der. WA be blown, a passive or intransitive, derived from root HA

No. 126.

den. 4¥S or as sit = Skr. PP. Py. P: wuts, Pr. Bass (like 4,

No. 104) or S1xg (cf. H. C. 1,178), H. qzB or Fe (as to change

of ST to 4, see my Comp. Gramm. § 71). The initial 4 for @ is

somewhat anomalous, as such an ‘‘ expansion” @ does not ordinarily

harden to q. Another way of explaining the Hindi 9¢e is to

assume that the initial ¥ of Pr. ¥ya¢g_ has been dropped (so in my

Comp. Gramm § 173, and Bs. I, 179. III, 38); but this does no

more obviate the anomaly ; for a Pr. 4, softened from Skr. ¥, does

not, as a rule, harden in Hindi.

comp. aq talk, chatter = Skr. ava=+ @; Pr. vee, H. aq. Or

possibly a mere corruption for Faq, Pr. sax or Ga (H. C. 4, 98),

Skr. gata or qqata a comp. of gt &. Hindi does not possess

the form qh, but it has a derivative of it, TART 5 Marathi has

both cial and qa.

den. 4 ¥_ read, recite =Skr. N. ary; Pr. agg, H. aia.

comp. §¥R go beyond bounds, stray = Sky. afea+ a; Pr. afeae

or afeag, H. away.

rv. faut be spread, a passive or intransitive, derived from the pri-

mary root fayrTt No. 225

den. fatta mock, jeer = Sky. N. fara sound, noise; Pr. faxtae or

fatraz, H. facta.

den. faz become bad, perhaps connected with P. P. P. faataa

(faa?) wasted.

den. #tz scatter, spill = Skr. P. P. P. Sa; Pr. fags (for fag, as

wag for yag, see No. 112); Pr. faggzor fags, H. ae.

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 75

136 den. §t@ pass = Skr. P. P. P. ata, Pr. faw (like fate for Skr.

fafea, H. C. 2, 99; otherwise the preservation of @# is not expli-

cable) ; Pr. fav or fanz, H. aa.

137 den. 4 enclose, UG Jase a2, Causal duafa or I. cl. Gua,

Pr. az (H. C. 4, 51) or yx (H. C. 4, 221), H. az. The root

is probably a denominative of an anomalous P. P. P. or some other

derivative of the root fax or fa4. The so-called Causal shows its

denominative form.

138 den. ayaa or FiTTE I mad = Skr. N. arqa; Pr. argwrag or

qigwias, H. agaraor ara. See my Comp. Gramm. § 25.

139 den. wa flee=Skr. P. P. P. wy, Pr. way (cf. H. C. 4, 354),

Pr. wag or wae, H. ata.

140 den. ara or ata be wet = Sky. seaw; Pr. Bfarig, or Bfataz, H.

Pe a or aa (2). As to the loss of initial Y, see my Comp. Gramm.

172. Compare the primary root Wst in the Appendix No, 21

141 der. ya be fried, be cooked, a passive or intransitive, derived from

wa No. 143.

142 den. We or WTA or WT Songer, blunder — mS) eng 12 _P. iP: eB > Pr. way

Corer 4a 177), “WV. EL. wei or ara, E. H. Ae or ate. Skr. ae =

Pr. Wy = Wee == Va; the change of a to w caused by the labial

bh. As to the change of uw to 0, see my Comp. Gramm. § 148.*

143 den. uy fry, cook ram} (Sy Go, VEL DES od Be wr (Pan 8, 2. 44) ; Pr. HE or

ugg, dH. Wa.

144 den. He cover, gilt (¢. e. encase by rubbing on) = Skr. P. P. P. wa,

Pr. wg or (disaspirated) ag; Pr. age or weg (H. C. 4, 126),

H. He. The Skr. root @S cover is adopted from the primitive

Prakrit or Pali Hy (= Wz), whence as a covering, hut, H. a or

wgi. Similarly are formed the roots we, FZ, &e.

145 den. Ha consult =Skr. N. aq; Pr. daz or das (cf. H. C. 4, 260

ufaer), 4H. aa (with elided nasal, see my Comp. Gramm. § 143).

146 der. fue be effaced, cease to exist, a passive or intransitive, derived

from the root az, No. 153.

147 der. HS be shaved, a passive or intransitive, derived from the primary

root us, No. 284.

148 der. a& be closed, a passive or intransitive, derived from the root

u&, No. 151.

* This derivation I owe to 8. Goldschmidt, Prdzkritica, No. 8, p. 9. Formerly,

looking upon HT@ or HT{ as the more primitive form, I was inclined to consider it

a denominative of Skr, WAT, whence comes Hindi HILT or ATAT « simpleton.

76 A. F, R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

149 den. a die = Skr. P. P. P. wa, Pr. a (H. C. 4, 442); Pr. aa,

H. ai.

150 den. ae discharge urine = Sky. N. ae 5 Sky. aaa, Py. ane or

ane, H. aa.

151 den. a Bose. (lit. with ae seal ring) = Skr. N. aa 5 Sky. qaata,

Pr. q@¢ or Gee, HH. He. See H. C. 4, 401 feat aE sealed.

152 den. us be silent = Skr. P. PP. aa (of root a); Pr: Hug or Hug,

H. ua, (or from N. ata)

153 den. Be 6j.ace—= kr. P. P> PB. we; “Pr. fae = or fag< (disaspirated for

fags, ef. Pali a or @F = @e), H. az, (with e for 7, see my

Comp. SLE. § 148).

154 den. ae or It blossom — Skr. N. are; whence ar@afa, Pr. area

or are, W. H. are or EK. H. aq.

155 den. arate or Brera blossom = Skr. N. 1a ; ; Pr. atataz or ataras,

W. #H. aera or E. H. €reta.

156 den. ta be attached =Sky. P. P. P. wa, Pr. wa (H. C. 2, 10);

Pr. wage or wars, HH. a.

157 den. ta dye = Skr. N. ta; Skr. twafa, Pr. <i< or tas, H. Gi.

158 der. wa be hindered, a passive or intransitive, derived from root UT?

No. 162.

159 der. WH or WE be restrained, a passive or intransitive, derived from

the primary root ey No. 298.

160 den. €& or &E be angry = Sky. P. _P. EB. St, Pr. wz (H. C. 4, 414)

or ws, Pr. aggorwgg, H. @S or Re.

161 comp. Ca bray = Skr. TH (ace, sg. neut. TZ) + A; Pr. TeE or

tax, H. ta.

162 comp. tra hinder = Sky. €# (ace. sg. neut. WL) + A; Pr. WARE or

waz, H. ta

163 der. t1y stop, plant; a transitive or active, derived from primary

root «q, No. 295.

164 den. wag limp = = Skr. N. a@¥, Pr. diminutive wae; Pr. Wass or

PaAsSs, HH. was.

165 den. wa or aI veap = Sky. N. aa; Skr. waafa, Pr. wee or waz,

H. wa or &e.

166 comp. SH LESTE conceal oneself = wa + @y- Pr: VAT (H. C.

4, BB), 138 ae. The word ay properly means “ dropping out”’,

“ elision”’ ; it j is derived from the Skr_ root qq break. This ori-

ginal meaning of the root is still preserved by the Pr. @az, which

means both break, cut of, (H. C. 4, 116, where it is said to be =

1880. ] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 77

Skr. qs) and disappear, conceal oneself (H. C. 4,56, where it is

given as an equivalent of the Skr. fat) *

167 den. Sata or Geta covet, be ELEDE TE ed witha = Skr. N. wy;

Pr. arnaz or wtetas, H. aura or Sera, (with w for 0, see my

Comp. Gramm. § 25),

168 der. wai be adorned, be prepared, a passive or intransitive, derived

from root aTst, see Appendix No, 24.

169 comp. WH or BSA yet away, disappear, conceal oneself = Skr.

aq orva+a; Pr. weng or asag, H. UR or aTa. The

word @4 means covering, concealment. The root we becomes we

in Pr.; see Vr. 8, 51. H. C. 4, 219.

170 der. a4 be settled, a passive or intransitive, derived from the primary

root aTy No. 336.

171 den. WaeTa be in presence of = Skr. N. Waa; Pr, dawlas or

daqeras, -H. aera.

172 comp. TR be Hoed: move =Skr. at +a; Pr. acHx or VHS,

H. ucm. Possibly it is a mere variety of the root wea.

173 den. WtIq curse, denom. made from the Hindi waty a corruption

of the Skr. wIy ; see my Comp. Gramm. § 135.

174 der. WIS or ATs or ATS combine, a transitive or active, derived from

the primary root #3, No. 323.

175 den. #we moisten = Skr. N. Taw; Pr. Haag or Haast, H Hea.

on the absorption of a after 7, see my Comp. Gramm. § 97.

176 der. GX be correct, mend, a passive or intransitive, derived from

the primary root yT<, see No, 346.

177 den. Bera be pleased or give pleasure = Skr. N. ga; Pr. qeraz or

Getaz, H. gera.

178 den. Gera be beautiful or make beautiful = Skr. N. ata; Skr.

miata, Pr. aretas or ereras, H. aera. This might, how-

ever, be a primary root, from the causal of root Wu.

179 den. Bq or Bq be dry = Skr. N. wea, Pr. Gras or gaas, Hae

or Ga.

180 den. waa. sleep = Skr. P. P. P. BH; Pr. Gus or ez, H. aa.

181 den. @ a or Gq adjust = Skr. P. P. P. aatfea, Pr. aartfen (cf. H.

C. 2, 99 Ketter Skr. fafea), Ap. water or was, H. (con-

tracted) $a ; whence Pr. watfeus, H. @@ or Wa.

182 comp. 4 evacuate = Skr. E+ a; Pr. eae, H. <a (for wa ) ?

* The root YR might also be derived from wa +, from the root aa which

(like WI) means both cut of and disappear, Or it might be derived from ae + @;

the root aa meaning become invisible,

78 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

183 comp. wate or Pata baw/, drive away or keep off (with shouts) =

Skr. a+ a; Pr. warae or waraz, H. zara or vara. This

is a pleonastie form of No. 187.

184 den. YaTT bawl, drive away or keep off (with shouts) = = Skr. Tart ;

Skr. eaitata, Pr. wRIts or warts, H. SATE. Connected

with roots Nos. 183 and 187.

185 wa slay =Skr. P. P. P. wa, Pr. ew (like fafeu H. C. 2, 99);

Pr. waz or wae, H. Za.

186 comp. aR move = Skr. sa + GB; Pr. was or was, H. zue.

187 comp. Sia baw, drive (with shouts) = = Skr. wa + 8; Pr. wee or

wag (H. C. 4, 184), H. st&. See Nos. 183, 184. Probably con-

nected with root wu or Wat or MTG talk + @.

188 den. ¥TE lose, be beaten, be unsuccessful = Skr. N. rt, Pr. Bee

or wes, H. wre. H.C. 4,31 has wrcax (for wTtag by H. Cc.

3, 150), said to be = anfa ; it is merely a pleonastic form of Bre,

Hindi has zua or fect.

189 comp. wa blow = Skr. 4a + &; Pr. yams or Waa, Ap. waRs,

H. Zia (for Uis). See No. 92.

AppEnDIx.— Primary Roots.*

1 &Y or ty pull, attract = Sky. at + BY, future Frawifa (used in the

sense ot the present), Pr. 91d@q or BI¢ag (H. C. 4, 187), H. © 3

or ty (with loss of aspiration). See introductory remarks,

pp. 89, 40. This root occurs in the shortened form 3—@ both in Pr.

(H. C. 4, 187 S4=) and in old Hindi (Prithiraj Rasau 27, 38

2) see No. 2.

2 ay or @q or aq or Ga pull = Skr. #4, future rate (used i in

the sense of the present) ; Pr. wz or wag, H. ay, ay or aq ?

aa (with transfer of aspiration, see my Comp. Gramm. 132).

On the inserted nasal, see zbidem §§ 149, 158, H. C. 1, 26, 28. On

the change of a@ to ai or e, see my Comp. Gramm. § 148; here it

occurred by assimilation to root #| or ty No. 1. See introductory

remarks pp. 89, 40. In old Hindi this root occurs in the form aq,

which is much nearer the original Prakrit form @@&; and corre-

sponding to it, the old Hindi has a root-form 34 which has

evidently been modified from the original form tq (see No. 1),

in order to assimilate it to @4; just as the original form Wy has

* These are roots which I was at first inclined to consider to belong to the se-

condary class.

1880.] A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. 79

been modified to @ q in order to assimilate it to @q. Thus the

two forms aa and 3a occur in the Prithira aj Rasau 27, 38.

at dare aac sta eat st ia |

SAM wars aa Bit wa GIS 2. e,

“The Mangol Khan Lalari draws twenty ddgsee and the four-

sworded Sabbaj pulls out the enemy’s life with his arrows.”

3 ars vomit, let g a release = Skr. Be, I. el. Rafa, Pr. age (H.C.

4,91), 4H. ate. The root is also spelled are ; and it might be

derived from wa, VII. cl. pula, Pr eeg or eeg, H. ais or tz

(as Pr. dsig for Skr. wafai). It might also be derived from the

Skr. denominative root RR, X. el. ais: as it seems to have

been done in H. C. 2, 36 (@gx from @fe).

4 aq be pressed down, be stamped, be printed = Sky. aq, I. cl. aia,

Pr. uz, H. eq. Or perhaps from wa, IV. el. araqia.*

5 Wa or Wa or WH sigh, chatter (wildly), lament, be sorry for = = Skr.

said, I. cl. cat ata, Pr. waz (H. C. 4, 140), H. W&, we or

(disaspirated) wa. As to the change of & to %, compare Pr. wat

for Skr. tqa (H. C. 2, 27). As to the meaning, compare the

~ English “ croak.’’+

6 wa throw on, cover = Skr. wq throw, Passive waa (used actively),

Pr. wae, 4H. wig. The w for @ is as in fasta for iraq H. C.

2, 3, and the inserted anusvara, as in sive (H. C. 4, 2. 1, 26, for

sue). Or it might be derived from Skr. Wa + #2, Causal

gguata, Pr. was or wae (for BRHGS, with loss of initial |

see my Comp. Gramm. § 172).

7 sa knock, hammer = Skr. +a, I. cl. wate, Pr. zeae (with & for

@ as in cact H. C. 1, 205), H. oH (for Zq with transfer of aspl-

ation). Compare Skr. RC. See No. 9.

8 sta ram, hammer = Skr. a I. el. wate, Pr. Zz (as to & for a,

see H.C. 1, 205), H. sia (for 2, with transfer of aspiration

from & to 2, and change of @ to 4, see my Comp. Gramm. §§ 11,

132). See No. 10, also Nos. 7 and 9.

9 STA or sta ram, hammer, drive in, (nail, ee = Olan. aa, I. el.

ata, Pr. aera (as foreiior a, see H. C. 1, 205), H. StH or

aia (for z1a, with transferred aspiration). See No. 7.

10 Sr4 or Sta ran, hentgeT = ask Sih I el, a@afa, Pr. Suz (cf. H.

C. 1, 205), H. S18 or sia (for S12). See No. 8.

* The root Q¥ also might produce a Pr. passive (used actively) RUZ, analogous

to TRUE (H. C. 4, 257).

+ This verb is noted by Hemachandra not less than five times; in 4, 140 as =

WAG repent, in 4, 148 =—faaq lament or prattle, in 4, 166 = GUTH scold, in 4, 201

= TAH sigh, and in 4, 259 = ATF talk,

80 A. F. R. Hoernle—A Collection of Hindi Roots. [No. 2,

11 STS or SIT send forth, pour out, cast, a modification of urs_, No. 14

q. v., cerebralisation eae to the initial ¥ from ¥.

12 yy fix, settle = Sky. 1; Passive ewa (used actively), Pr. yuz

(formed similarly to ae from wud H. ©. 4, 257), H. ua.

See footnote on p. 46; M= Y= AqA=Y.

13 ya or Sq slap, strike, pat = = Skr. IE; Passive aad (used actively),

Pr. wag or sug, H. Ula or BF. See footnote on p. 46; ™g=~a

=Fy=Aq=,

14 Bs send forth, pour out, cast = Sky. ytg, I. cl. urea, Pr. uree

(H. C. 4,79), H. ais. See No. 11. The Skr. yTS is adopted

from the Pr., and is probably a denominative of yz, P. P. P. of

ya glide, flow, Pr. us =4y=us.

15 wea leap = Sky. 9+-9_, L cl. seafa, Pr. wees, H. wean (with

transfer of aspiration).

16 Wa or WHA hurl, fling, throw away = Skr. 9-<4, Future sate

(used in sense of present), Pr. URIS or Wag, H. aa or wae

(with transfer of aspiration).

17 faa weave = Sky. g, 1X. cl. euifa, Pr. fauz, HH. faz; see No. 19;

also No. I, 237. The Skr. root for weave is a, I. cl. aagfa or IV.

cl. Haq; ib seems impossible to derive the H. root fae from it;

but the roots € and @ are probably connected ; both mean cover.

18 fag be spread = Sky. fa-q, Passive fafeana (for faatad ; like

fad, fava), Pr. fase or faa, H. fag. Compare Pr. fated

in Chanda 2, 21 for Skr. faata’.

19 aa weave = Skr. a, V. cl. Zutfa, Pr. aug, H. aa, formed like

ga No. I, 347. See No. 17.

20 are load = Skr. az, Passive Ga (used actively) or Causal Passive

araa, Pr. asas (cf. H. C. 4, 245 aaqzg), H. are.

21 ws, or aa be wet = Sky. Bia +95, Passive Besa, Pr.

afarers, H. wa or aa (with loss of initial 4; see secondary

root ata No. 140).

22 ya or WIR or Wia talk foolishly, bark =Skr. wa, Future weafa,

Pr: WaE (H. C. 4, 186, with dices piration for Hage), H. wa, &e.

The “original aspirate form 4T@ occurs in Hindi. There is an

identically spelled root, meaning thrust, drive, which probably has

a different origin and may be a compound root.

23 Ust send = Skr. ata + 437, Passive sad (used actively), Pr.

farsa, Fl. aa (with loss of initial 3 and change of ¢ to e, see

my Comp. Gramm. §§ 172, 148. As to the change of ya to 7, see

tbidem, § 121.

24 ars adorn, prepare = Skr. #7, Passive aa (used actively), Pr.

asaz, H. ats. The Skr. root aajhas been adopted from the Prakrit.

Ba.

{ V/ achh 40.

/ aj; abhi—80.

V/ any ; abhi— 80.

WV at 42; abhi—o7.

N. atta 63.

_N. adhyaksha 69.

N. abhyanga 75.

| / ard; abhi—s7.

Sl a.

WV bp ; pra—s36, 41, 52.

sam—61.

zi.

| N. ichchha 45, 66.

| a/ ish; pra—8s0.

| Vi; pari—s3.

Son

| ti.

| V/ iksh ; pari—-d1.

Ju.

N. uchcha 63.

P. utkrishta 64.

_ N. utstha 45, 66.

| N. udvam 63.

P, upavishta 37, 74.

2 ri.

V/ ri; adhi—79.

sam—62,

aw ik.

WV kath 43.

J/ kamp 43.

N, karda 64,

APPENDIX

TO “A COLLECTION OF HINDI ROOTS.”

IN PAGES 383—80.

N. karma 64.

V/ kal; nis—72.

/ kash 43.

N. kasha 37, 64.

J/ kas ; nis—50.

VJ kari (causal) 36 bis.

/ kas 43.

/ kunch ; ni—40.

/ kut 43; ava—43.

V/ kutt 43.

V/ kup 35, 43.

W Iexi 35, 37, 43, 47, 48.

J krit 43.

d/ krish 35, 39, 43, 78;

ut—42.

&—40, 78.

P. krishta 64,

V/ kri 43; vi—35, 36, 55.

VW krid 44.

a/ kshap 43, 79.

/ ksham 79.

/ kshamp 79.

»/ kshar 64; ni—50.

/ kshal 64.

r/ kshi 43, 46.

/ kship 44, 65.

P. kshipta 65, 66, 67 dvs.

/ kshu 67.

N. kshut 67.

N. kshubh 69.

V/ kshur 44,

N. kshepa 69.

V/ kshai 56 ; vi—ava

/ kshot 44 dis, 67, 68.

56.

INDEX OF SANSKRIT ROOTS AND WORDS OCCURRING

@ kh.

/ khad 34, 35, 43.

/ khid 44.

/ khud 44 tris.

/ khund 44.

/ khur 44.

/ khot 44.

/ khod 44.

/ khor 44.

/ khol 44.

ag.

/ gachh 40; 6—34, 41.

/ gan 44.

/ gam 44,

N. garta 64.

N. garda 65.

/ garh 44.

V/ gal 44; api—s2.

/ galh 44.

P. gddha 65.

/ guph 44.

J/ ari 44.

N. gorda 65.

r/ gai 44.

/ granth 44,

o/ grah 44, 45,

»/ glunch 44.

a gh.

V/ ghat 44 bis ; ud—42,

vi—55 bis,

o/ ghatt 44, 45.

V ghun 40.

J ghirm 465 bis,

/ ghrin 65.

N. ghrina 65.

N. ghrinika 65.

»/ ghrish 45.

/ ghol 45.

V ghra ; sam—a—62.

= ch.

J chap 45.

N. chapa 65.

N. chamat 65, 66.

d/ char 45 ; vi—55.

N. charpa 66.

/ charv 46.

/ chal 45.

A chi 45; pari—s1.

sam—60.

N. chikkana 65.

N. chikkina 65.

P. chitta 65.

N. chitra 65 d7s.

a/ chint 45.

N. chipita 73.

N. chihna 65.

N. chira 65.

/ chukk 66.

/ chumb 46.

P. chetita 65.

N. chora 66.

N. chaura 66,

/ chyu 45.

A/ chyut 35, 45, 66.

N. chyut 37, 66 dis.

@ chh.

/ chhad 46.

N. chharda 79.

N. chhala 66.

N. chhikké 67.

AV chhit 67.

/ chhid 46, 68.

N. chhidra 68.

P. chhinna 69.

/ chhut 46.

/ chhup 46 bis.

/ chhrid 79.

SH i.

v/ jan 36, 46.

N. janma 36, 68.

a/ jalp 46.

A/ jagri 46.

P. jita 68.

AV jiv 46.

a/ jut 47 bis, 67, 68 bis.

/ jd 35 bis, 46, 58.

P. jadpta 68.

N. jyotis 68.

/ jvar 46.

A/ jval 46, 47, 54 bis ;

ud—42.

a jh.

V/ jhat 47 Lis.

N. jhata 68.

N. jhampa 68.

N. jhallé 47, 69.

N, jhallaké 47.

zt.

/ tank 47.

N. tankara 69.

wd.

/ di; ud—42.

~ dh.

/ dhundh 48.

r/ dhauk 48.

a t.

V/ taksh 70, 79 dis.

N. taksha 69.

AV tan 48.

V/ tap 48; sam—61, 79.

V/ tark 48.

AJ/ tal 48 tris.

J/ tri; ava—42.

A/ tri 48 bis ; ut—42.

pra—52.

vi—5é.

N. traya 69.

AW troti (causal) 35, 36.

d/ trut 35, 47, 48.

V/ tvaksh 70, 79 bis.

zd.

N. dagdha 71.

/ dam 48.

N. dara 70, 71.

/ dal 48.

/ dams 47.

/ das 47.

/ dah 48.

N. daha 71.

/ da 35 bis, 49.

N. daha 90.

WV dis 49.

/ dal 47.

N. duhkha 71.

N. dridha 71.

A/ dris 34, 35, 38, 49 dis;

ava—49.

ni—49.

pra—49.

J/ dri 47, 48; vi—56.

N. drava 71.

¥y dh.

N. dhama 71, 78.

/ ana ; pari—od1 dis.

N. dhara 71.

V/ dhav 49 dis.

/ dhii 49, 63,

J dhri 49 bis; su—62,

2 ot

/ dhmé 63.

V dhraj 80.

P, dhrashta 80.

V dhrad 80.

/ dhvams 49.

V dhyénksh 79.

qn.

WA nam 50 dis.

N. narta 71.

WV nas 35, 39, 78.

WV nah ; api—51.

N. nikusmaya 72.

N. nigala, 72.

P, nivrita, 65.

P. nishkushta 72.

P. nishkrishta 72.

N. nishpatti 72.

VW nrit 35, 50.

7 p.

P. pakva 72.

V pach 51.

/ panch ; pra—73.

N. pata 72.

N. patta 72.

V path 61.

A/ pat 35, 51, 52; ut—45.

6—4l.

N. patra 72.

J pad ; ut—42.

4—4l.

N. parichayana 73.

P. paritoshita 65.

P. paryasta 71, 73.

/ palay 51.

V pas 34, 49.

N, paschattapa 72.

V pa 52.

/ pa 52 (drink).

N. pantya 73.

N. pichcha 73,

lil

N. pichchita 73.

N. pichchhala 73.

N. pichchhila 73.

N. pinaddha 73.

V/ pish 37, 52 dis.

P. pishta 37, 73, 74.

A/ pid 52 dis.

N. punya 74,

/ push 52.

VW puj 52.

N. pitkara 73.

WV pri 52.

P. prakrishta 72.

o/ prachh 52.

N. prapancha 73.

P. pravishta 34, 37, 72.

V preksh 34, 38.

® ph.

/ phal 53.

N. phiit 74.

N. phitkara 73.

A phel 53.

aq b.

WV badh 54.

WV bandh 54 bis.

V/ badh 54.

W budh 33, 35, 36 dis ;

sam—6]1.

J brit 56, 74.

a bh.

/ bhaksh 57.

P. bhagna 75.

V/ bhaj 57.

/ bhanj 35 bis, 57 bis.

/ bhan 57.

WV phal 57.

/ bhash 80,

V/ bhas 57.

VW bhid 55, 57.

VW bhuj 57.

/ dni 35, 40, 63;

ud—43.

pra—52.

P. bhiirna 75.

V/ bhyi 57; ud—49.

sam—61.

V bhrims 57.

/ bhram 57.

V/ Dhrams 53 bis, 66.

P. bhrashta 75.

qm.

VA mach 57.

VA manch 57.

J math 58.

J man 58 dis,

N. mantra.

/ ma 58.

/ marg 35, 36, 58.

/ marj 58.

WV mil 58.

V/ mish 58.

/ much ; pra—o4.

/ mund 58.

N. mudra 76.

/ muh 58.

/ mu 76.

N. mitra 76.

P. mina 76.

/ mish 58.

V/ mri 58 bis.

/ mrij 57. 58.

P. mrita 7o.

J/ mrid 58 dis.

/ mris 57, 58, 70.

P. mrishta 75, 76.

N. mauna 76.

N. maula 76 dis.

ay.

W/ yh 41, 46; 4—34, 41.

P. yukta 64, 67, 68.

N. yugma 68.

/ yudh 46.

N. yoktra 68.

ct x.

P. rakta 76.

a/ vaksh 58, 59.

N. ranga 76.

a/ rach 58.

a/ raj 59.

V/ ranj 59:

/ ram 59.

/ vadh 59.

/ ring 59.

~ / rish 59.

»/ rach 59.

a/ rut 59.

/ rad 59.

»/ radh 59.

N. rudh 37, 76.

o/ rush 59 bis.

P. rushta 76.

a/ ruh 59.

N. resh 76.

a/ rod 59.

/ rand 59.

wa i.

A/ laksh 59; vi—55

r/ lag 33, 36, 59; vi—55.

N. langa 76.

/ langh 59; pra—s0.

vi—5d.

4/ lajj 60.

r/ lad 59.

J lap ; vi—79.

WV labh 60 bis ; ud—42.

upa—a—79.

N. lava 76.

V/ las 60 ; vi—55.

/ likh 60.

V/ lip 60 bis.

WV ik; vi—55.

ni—77.

V/ Tanch 77.

v/ Tut 59, 60.

r/ taunt 60.

r/ lath 60.

r/ tanth 60.

V/ tud 59, 60.

/ iup 76.

N. lup 76.

a/ tamb 77.

r/ labh 60.

/ lal 59.

/ lok ; pra—vi—49.

/ lod 59.

N. lobha 77.

qv.

s/ vach 56.

/ vanch 54.

a/ vat 54; nir—50 bis.

/ vand; nir—a0.

/ van 54.

/ vad 54, 56 bis.

a/ vap 56.

N. vama 68.

/ vas 54; apa—43.

/ vah 54, 80; nir—50.

N. vahis 74.

N. vach 74.

N.-vachya 74.

/ vanchh 54.

N. vatula 75.

r/ vas 54.

N. virava 74,

P. vilambita 74.

WV vis 75; pra—34, 87, 52.

upa—7, 56.

/ vish 75; pari—35, 51.

P. vita 75.

o/ vri 54, 60, 88 Bis ;

ud—42.

ni—40.

sam—61.

A/ vrit 54; vi—48.

vi—a—ao6.

/ vridh 54.

/ vrish 54,

/ ve 80.

r/ vesht 75; upa—64.

d/ vyach 56.

/ vyadh 55.

P. vyasta 74.

V/ vraj 54 bis.

V/ vri 55.

V/ vrud 56 bis,

Ws.

/ sak 35, 60.

/ sad 47 tris, 61; ud—46.

/ samb 69.

/ sal 61 dis ; ut—42,

N. sdpa 77.

d/ siksh 61.

d/ singh 62.

N. sit 69.

N. sitala 77.

r/ such 62,

/ sudh 62.

/ subh 62, 77.

N. sushka 77.

AV sri 61.

r/ sobha 77.

o/ schyut 45.

AV sr 62.

o/ sri 62.

V/ sri 62.

V/ sr 35, 62.

/ slagh 61.

/ svas ; nih—79.

A svi 62.

Wy sh.

N. shteva 71.

as.

V/ sanj 80.

N. satra 77.

AW sad 51, 77.

N. sada 77.

N. sadriksha 40.

P. samahita 77.

N. sammukha 77.

N, sara 77.

‘o/ sal 61.

/ sah 61.

A/ sidh 61.

A sich 36, 61.

V/ siv 61; pra—l.

A sukh 36, 62.

N. sukha 77.

P. supta 77.

AV/ sri 61 bis ; nis—5O.

pra—ol dis.

N. sektra 67.

/ sev 62.

/ skand 43, 64.

/ skund 43.

/ skhal ; 4—64.

N. skhala 64.

N. stana 69.

P. stabdha 69 dis, 70 bis.

a/ stabh 80.

N. stabh 70.

/ stambh 48 bis, 69.

N. stambha 69.

/ stup 48.

/ stri; vi—55, 80.

d/ strih 80.

N. sthag 70.

A/ sthal ; ni—s0.

d/ stha ; ut—41, 42, 56.

pra—dl.

sam—60.

N. sthira 71 dis.

P. snasta 71.

/ sna 36, 50.

r/ spand 53.

N. sparsa 73.

AV/ spris 46 bis, 53, 79.

P. sprishta 66, 67.

V/ sphat 53 dis.

N. sphata 74.

N. sphara 74.

o/ sphal 53.

EEE OEOSOSOSSeeeeeY

/ sphit 53.

/ sphitt 53.

V/ sphut 53, 54.

N. sphitkara 73.

WV smi; ni—ku—72,

/ smri 62; vi—55.

/ syand 61, 63, 66.

N. syanna 66.

a/ srams 61.

V svid 62; pra—51,

wh.

N. hak 78 dis.

N. hakkara 78.

P. hata 78.

N. had 77.

W/ han 62.

WV has 63:

J ha; vi—55.

N. hara 78.

V/ hu 63.

/ hud 63.

/ bri 62; 46—42.

anu—42,

pari—dl.,

vi—55.

vi—ava—s6.

sam—60, 61,

VW hrish 63.

V/ hval 63 bis.

N. hvala 78.

V/ hvri 63.

V/ hve 63.

Page 88,

» 85,

” 44,

» 47,

59,

» 97,

” 57,

» (99,

» 99,

» 66,

» 15,

» 16,

» 77,

els

” 78,

ERRATA.

———=

line 22, read budhya

» A

» 4;

» 80,

” 1%,

» 19,

» 41,

» 33,

» 89,

» 80,

32,

34,

35,

» 18,

» 39,

” 28,

» 87,

» 24,

Skr. sak

fag

WIE

Skr. N.

Prithiraj

for bulhgd.

”

Eee

Skr. sak.

Skr.

’

aya.

Skr.

Prithiraj.

CORRIGENDA ET ADDENDA.

Page 1, for Trichinopoli, read Trichinopoly.

» 2, for stubi (passim), read stabi.

» 2, line 19, for purana, read pirana.

» 2 4, 20, (first word) for n read in.

» 2 4, 5, from bot., for a high, read high.

» 8) 3, 12, from bot., add the following note :—

‘The projecting beam ends are perhaps carved to represent Vali (? Griffins’)

heads, and the spiral lumps noticed may be the Yali’s trunk coiled up above.’

Page 4, line 6, from bot., for Nachaiyar, read Nachaiyar.

» 5) 5, 14, after metal add, somewhat like the Sabha (halls) at Chidambaram,

» 5, 5, 8, from bot., insert an asterisk (*) with foot note :—

On a 2nd visit the former (upper) head appeared to be that of a ram with very

curved horns, and its leg and foot cut off and put in its mouth as they still often do at

village sacrificial feasts. The buffalo’s head below has its tongue hanging out of its

mouth.

Page 6, line 1, after Grim-munsif, insert or village oflicer.

» 6, 5 1%, after new, insert Jaina,

» % » 12, for Kasi read Kasi.

» 7) 4, 10, from bot., after or, cnsert Coleroon.

2nd paper p. 8.

8, line 12, for flat silled read flat-silled.

» 8 4 9, from bot., for shutter stone vead shutter-stone.

9, 4, 18, for nehropolis read necropolis,

9, ,, 19, for similar read kistvaen,

» », 18, from bot., for chadud read chathut.

» 9, last line, for Neilipatla read Nellipatla.

5, 10, line 7, for three or four vead six or seven,

ie)

B, R. BRANFILI,

Lah & Printed by Wo Newnan

SUPPLEMENTARY TO THOMAS GHRONICLES OF PATHAN KINGS.

‘| JADE

{E>

fees

\ N l@

1880. ]

©. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary of the Pathan kings.

ABBREVIATIONS,

Bs.=Beames’ Comparative Grammar.

Cw.=Cowell’s edition of the Prdkrita

Prakasa.

Dl. =Delius’ Radices Pracritice.

EH. M.=E. Miiller’s Bettraége zur Gramma-

tik des Jainaprakrit.

H, C.=Hema Chandra’s Prdkrit Gram-

matik (ed. Pischel).

8. B. =Setubandha (ed. 8. Goldschmidt).

S. C.=Subha Chandra’s Prakrit Grammar.

S. Gdt. = S. Goldschmidt’s edition of the

Setubandha.

Spt. =Saptasataka des Hala (ed. A.Weber).

T. V.=Trivikrama’s Prakrit Grammar.

Vr. =Vararuchi’s Prdékrit Grammar.

Wh. = Weber’s edition of the Saptasataka,

K. I, = Kramad Isvara’s Prdékrit Grammar.

R. M.=Dr. Rajendralala Mitra’s Prahrit

Vocabulary.

G. = Gujarati. 8.

M. = Marathi.

= Sindhi.

Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Ohronicles of the Pathan kings.—By

C. J. Ropaers.

(With two Plates.)

The “Chronicles of the Pathan kings” is a very full work. But it is

an enlargement of a smaller previous work. Further search brought more

coins to light, and the description of these coins has swollen the original

treatise to its present size. But large though the work be, it is not

exhaustive. Winality in our knowledge of the coins of the Pathans has

not yet been attained. Continued search will bring out still further coins

which from time to time will have to be described. Owing to the nature

of my duties I have few opportunities of obtaining fresh coins, but as

I have during the past year come across about forty unpublished ones,

I thought I might venture to put them forward as a small contribution

to a further knowledge of the coins of India,

The word adi figures largely on the coins of the Gazni rulers. In

some modern coins this word occurs together with the sword on several

coins of towns in Afghanistan. It must have been for the reason, that

might is right, that the early conquerors of India stuck this word on their

coins. In Plate V, Nos. 1 and 2 have adi on the obverse and mumallik¢

on the reverse. I am inclined to ascribe this coin to Muhammad Sam

or his general Hibek. The word I have transliterated as mumallikt may

‘be mumlakat. No. 6 I regard as a coin of Muizz-ud-din Muhammad

Sam. The word Muizz on this coin is written more like the same word

on the coins of Hldoz and of Muhammad Sém, than that on the coins of

Muizz-ud-din Kaikubad or Muizz-ud-din Bahram Shah. There is a coin

in the “ Ariana Antiqua,’ Pl. XX. fig. 14 which is not mentioned by

Thomas. Now I got a good specimen of this same coin from Neshaptir

with a lot of the coins of A’la-ud-din Khwarizmi. A glance at No, 15

i 82 C. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary of the Pathan kings. [No. 2,

of Plate V, will show that this very king A’la-ud-din struck coins of

the very same type, using the square area for his name and titles and

dividing the latter similarly to Muizz-ud-din. No. 7, Pl. V, I claim also

for Muhammad Sam. It has Muizzi on obverse and on reverse in Hindi,

Sri Samanta Deva.

| Nos. 3 and 4, Pl. V, are undoubtedly new types of Shams-ud-din

i| Altamsh. No. 38 has obv. a’dl, rev. Shamst. No. 4 has the same with a

i star underneath each word. Neither has any ornament.

i No. 9 is, I believe, also Shams-ud-din’s. The star seems to indicate

this. A’d/ « Sultan ul Muazzim, the inscription on the obverse is found

also on a large quantity of coins of size similar to this one of which

Thomas takes no notice. But the Zarb ba Lahore with star above it

i is not on them. They have always Zarb ba hazrat Dehli. No. 9 is to

me unique. But the other kind I mention are very common indeed. In

my own small collection I have no less than 12 duplicates. One of them

has A’dl i Sultdén i Muazzim ; the alif and lam are altogether missing.

No. 10 is undoubtedly Shams-ud-din’s coin. Obverse : A’dl us Sultdn

(ul A’zim) ; Reverse: (Sha)ms ud Dunya (wa) ud din. This is a very

coarse coin.

Nos. 11, 12 and 13 are I think Shams-ud-din’s. The obverse and

reyerse are simple A’d/ and Dehli. No. 11 has these words in square

areas; No. 12 in round ones with ornaments; No. 13 in a hexagonal star,

with dots in the angles.

No. 5 is a very rare coin weighing only the same as No. 109 in

Thomas, and half the weight of his No. 52, the inscriptions of which

latter coin it possesses. So we may regard this coin as the smallest hither-

to discovered of Shams-ud-din’s. It is exceedingly rare as is the one

double its size. Thus in all I have had the pleasure of unearthing no

less than 10 new types of coins of Shams-ud-din.

No. 8 I ascribe to Reziah. In the rayed circle is the name Reziah.

| On the reverse is the dw// with Samanta Deva above it in Hindi. The

whole coin is similar to No. 7 of the same plate.

| No. 14, Plate V is evidently a coin of the same king the No. 15

belongs to. And No. 15 is obv. A’la ud Dunya, rev. Wa ud din. This

| is a coin of A’laud din Khwarizmi. No. 14 has similar inscriptions to

those on No. 5; but the fortunate discovery of No. 15 settles the ascrip-

tion.

No. 16 is a new coin of the same king. In the central area is the word

Sultan and on the margin Ul A’zim A’la ud Dunya wa ud din Muham-

mad (bin us Sul)tan. Reverse: the Kalimah. The whole is in Kufie

characters.

Not one of these three coins is in the British Museum or is noticed

by Thomas.

1880.] C. J. Rodgers—Ooins supplementary of the Pathan kings. 83

No. 17 is a coin of Firoz Shah Zafar, son of Firoz Shah, The obverse

has on it in square area Firoz Shah. The margin reads Zafar ibn Kiroz

Shah Sultdn, the reverse has naib ¢ amir ul Mominin 791. No. 18 is

exactly the same in date and inscriptions, but the latter are arranged

differently on the obverse. Zafar beginning above the area and not on the

left hand side as in No. 17. They are both of silver and copper. This

Zafar Khan, son of Firoz Shah, died in Gujrat in 775, A. H. But he had

_ason also named Zafar Khan, and this coin may have been struck in his

honour after the death of Firoz Shah.

No. 19 is a coin of Muhammad Shah, son of Firoz Shah. It is not

in Thomas in this size. This coin is very light. In reading the margin of

the large coin of this type, Thomas omits the word Sultdn which is always

on the best preserved specimens. The centre area is Muhammad Shah.

The margin reads from the outside and is Sultdn, zarb bahazrat «+ Dehli.

The reverse of this coin is Naib i Amir ul Mominin 792.

No. 19@ is a coin of similar type without any date on the reverse.

Inasmuch as the margin of this coin reads from the inside, I am inclined

to ascribe this to Muhammad bin Farid Shah, whose coins, when similar

in type to the coins of the son of Firoz, have always some difference in the

arrangement of the words.

No. 20 is a coin of Muhammad Shah son of Farid Shah. The in-

scriptions are, obverse Sultén Muhammad Shah, Farid Shéh zarb Dehli.

Reverse Khalifah Amir ul Mominin Khallad Khildfotahu. There is

no date, There is some uncertainty as to the date of the death of this

king. Thomas, quoting Badaovi?, gives his death as 847. I gota coin of

this king’s during the time this plate was being prepared, dated 848. But

| this does not prove much; for from the time of Firoz Shah, the mints kept

on coining in the names of kings who had been long dead; e. g., Mubarak

Shah died in 837. And I have coins bearing the date of 840 and 854.

A whole series of posthumous coins of these kings might easily be made.

No. 21 is a coin of Bahlol Shah. The inscriptions are, substituting

Bahlol Shéh for Muhammad Shah, similar to those on the last coin. Coins

bearing these inscriptions are somewhat rare in the smaller size. This

large-sized coin is to me unique, and it has not as yet been published.

This is the third new type of Bohlol’s that I have brought to light.

No. 22 has no business in this plate. It was put in to fill up a gap,

| and because I saw that the coin is new to numismatists, as it is not in

the British Museum Catalogue or in Thomas’ work on the Gazni coins.

Tt is a binominal coin, struck evidently by Bahram Shah. Obverse :—A’dl

_ us Sultan ul Azim Bahram Shéh. Reverse :—A’zd us Sultén ul Muazzim

Sanyjar. Here Bahram seems to arrogate to himself the title of A’zim “ the

greatest” and to give his ally (A’zd) Sanjar who had helped him to retain

84 C. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary of the Pathan kings. [No. 2,

his throne only the title AZwazzim “ the great,” or “ great,” simply. Gram-

matically there is an apparent slight, but conventionally the title of Sanjar

is as honorable as that of Bahram. There is a difference, we know, for

Muizz ud din Muhammad bin Sém during the lifetime of his elder brother

Gyds ud din Muhammad bin Sam always used in his coins Muazzim for

himself, until his brother’s death when he took the title wl A’zim. But as

T have shown above, Shams ud din used the title Mwazzim, as did also

A’laud din Masaud ; for I have two unedited small coins of his. Some two

months ago I came across a find of Gazni coins in the Umritsur bazaar.

There were about 500 in all. They contained several new types of

Masaud III, Malik Arslan and Bahram Shah. The present war should

cause some thousands to be unearthed and we may expect novelties for

some time to come.

I now proceed to examine the coins in Plate VI. The first one is a

small Kashmiri coin with the date (8)74 on it. It is a coin of Haider

Shah and confirms my statement in my paper on the Kashmir Sultans,

that this king was reigning at that time, although his accession is usually

marked in 878.

Nos. 2 and 8 are very pretty little novelties, of Muhammad Shah and

Sikandar Shih. They are of copper. Obverse:—names of kings. Re-

verse :—the title Shah. They are much smaller than Gyas ud din’s coins

with similar inscriptions. They were evidently a revival of the small coins

of Shams ud din and Nasir ud din Mahmiid and Muizz ud din.

Nos. 4. and 5 are two anonymous coins of Humaydin, bearing the date

946. No. 4 was struck at Agra.

No. 7 a rupee, full sized, of Humaytin’s, struck after his return in 962.

It resembles very closely, in its get up, the rupees of Muhammad Str. As

yet all the silver coins of Humaytn which have been described have been

thin and light, after the fashion of the tankahs of Central Asia. The

inscriptions are very distinct. Obverse Area :—Muhammad Humdyin.

Bidshah Gazi 962. Margin:—Us Sultan ul Adil Abi ul Muzaffar,

Zirb (Dehli ?). Reverse Area:—the Kalimah. Margin ;—names and

titles of the four companions of Muhammad.

No. 8 is a rupee of Muhammad Shah of Bengal. Obverse Area :—

Muhammad Shah Sultan Gdazt, Khallad allah mulkahu wa Sultanahu ;

margin :—Shams ud Dunya wa ud din abu ul Muzaffar, Zarb, Satgdon.

Reverse Area:—the Kalimah, with a star; margin :—the names of the

four companions and their titles together with the date 962. There is a

difference between the titles of Umr in the above two rupees. In Huma-

ytin’s it is Al Fartiq, in the Bengal one al Khattab.

No. 9, a new type of Baber’s silver coins. It 1s of the tankah kind,

but of uniform thickness and well struck, unlike most of the coins of

ournal. As:Soc: Bengal. Vol. XLIX, Pt. 1. 1880. PU:WV.

co)

} Cz) ie

pe @ Privted by Wo Novrmoor & C2

COINS SUPPLEMENTARY TO THOMAS’ CHRONICLES OF PATHAN KINGS.

1880.] ©. J. Redgers—Ooins supplementary of the Pathan kings. 85

Baber. Obverse :—Zahir ud din Muhammad Babar, Bédshah Ghézt (9)37.

Khallad allah mulkahu wa Sultanahu, zarb Agrah. (The bars and knots

are not peculiar to the Kashmir coinage. They are found on the anony-

mous coins of both Baber and Humdyiin). Reverse Area :—the Kalimah ;

Margin :—names and titles of the four Companions.

Nos 10, 11, 12, are three varieties of a new type of Humaytin’s anony-

mous coinage. They were all struck at Champdnir. Firishtah spells this

word yiluile, The coins all agreein giving it ,3il.o. The inscriptions of

these coins give a new feature—a title to acity. Champdnir is entitled the

noble city Shahr i Mukarram. It speaks well for Humaytin’s nature that he

could so style a city he had just conquered ; for the date of the coins is that

of the conquest of the city 942. These coins too introduce a second new

feature in Humdaytin’s anonymous coinage. Instead of EY¥ ut tarikh, they

have ba tartkh. Obverse :—Zarb Shahr i Mukarram. Reverse :—Cham-

panir ba térikh 942. No. 11 belongs to Day. Ross, Esq.

No. 13 is another of the anonymous coins of either Baber or Huma-

yun. I give it for two reasons: (1) It has full inscriptions. (2) The

bar running across the Jaunpur anonymous coins resolves itself into a

word Mutabarrak, the title of the city—the Blessed. Obverse, Ba Ddr

ul zarb Khitta i Jaunpir Mutabarrak. Reverse:—VHi ut tartkh san 937 ;

ornaments at the top and bottom. Most of the coins of Jaunpur have a

star on the obverse of one kind or other. But all have the bar, with the

first letter and last one missing. All I have, have dar ul zarb on them

too, although this is omitted by Thomas. The bars on some of the other

anonymous coins may by the discovery of fuller specimens turn out to be

some words or other.

Nos. 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 are small copper coins of the Stiri family,

forming of themselves a little set, out of which only one, No. 17, has been

noticed by Thomas. No. 15 is the first of the set. Obverse :—Khalifah

uz Zamin 947, Reverse :—Sher Shah us Sultan. This is a very small

coin indeed for Sher Shah.

No. 16 is also Sher Shah’s, but it is larger and heavier than 15 and

has a different inscription. Obverse:—Sultdn Khalifah uz zamdn,

Reverse :—Sher Shéh ul A’dil Sultan. .

No. 17 is Islam Shah’s, noticed by Thomas, No. 364, p. 413. I have

given it here to complete the set at one view. No. 18 is Muhammad

Shah’s Stiri. Obverse :—Sultin Muhammad A’dil Shih: Reverse :—Kha-

lifah uz zaman Abii (ul Muzaffar).

No. 14 is Sikundar Stri’s. Obverse :—Khalifuh uz zamién 962. Re-

verse: Stkandar Shah us Sultén 962. Thomas does not notice any halves

of the large copper coins of any of the five Stiri kings. Halves of Sher

Shah are common, those of Islam Shah are rare, those of Muhammad Adil

86 C. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary of the Pathan kings. [No. 2,

Shah are extremely rare, while I have only seen one of Ibrahim Shah and not

one of Sikandar Shah’s. General Cunningham had a large copper one of

Sikandar Shah. Mr. Delmerick published one of Ibrahim’s. The large

coins of the other three are common, the greater numbers of course being

Sher Shah’s and Islam’s. I have not as yet come across a small coin of

Tbrahim’s. This is one of the things I am looking for. The Sikandar

Shah, whose coin is given in this plate No. 2, I believe to be the one who

reigned in 795 for 45 days. A comparison of this coin with No. 275,

p. 811 of Thomas, of which I have a most perfect specimen, leads me to

this conclusion. Now if a king who reigned only 45 days could in that

short time get out no less than five kinds of coins, I think we have a right

to look out for the same number of varieties in the coins of kings who

reigned longer. Scientific and systematic search with duly chronicled

results ought to lead to much fuller knowledge respecting the coins of the

Pathan’s and their successors, and indeed with respect to the whole of the

coins of the Empire of India from the time of Alexander the Great and

Chandra Gupta to the times of Her Most Gracious Majesty the Empress of

India and Queen of England.

As old coins are found, they find their way into the bazaars, where,

if there is no purchaser at other than bullion rates, they are ruthlessly

melted down, the silver being good, in order to supply metal to the makers.

of jewels. In this way undoubtedly thousands of coins disappear annually

of which our museums and cabinets are standing in need. Meanwhile

inasmuch as no Indian museum has its coins catalogued, no one knows

what any collection may contain or may be in need of. Collectors would

undoubtedly often present coins to museums which want them, if these

wants were known. Students cannot use our Indian museums profitably

until they know what the museums contain: and yet the end and object

of all museums is an educational one. Hence I cannot help bringing this

matter forward as one of the greatest importance in making our museums

more useful in the promotion of historical studies.

Several other new varieties of coins including a rupee of Shams ud

din Altamsh, a tankah of silver of the same king with rays round one side

to represent the sun (Shams), a new variety of Reziah’s and one of Kutub

ud din Mubarak Shah’s together with several others must stand over to a

future paper, in which I hope to be able to show that No. 158, p. 190 of

Thomas was struck in Zalang (Telingana), just the same as No. 11 of

Plate IV of the Society’s Journal of last year.

Journal. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XLIX.Pt.1,1880.

Lit: & Printel by WO Naonan & C°

COINS OF THE MITRA OR SUNGA DYNASTY.’

1880. ] H. Rivett-Carnac—Coins of the Sunga Dynasty. 87

Memorandum on Coins of the Sunga Dynasty.—By H. Riverr-

' Carnac, Hse, C. S., C. I. E., F. S. A.

(With three Plates.)

I have to offer a few remarks on some more coins of the Sunga Dynas-

ty submitted for the inspection of the Society.

Plate VII, No.1 is a coin of quite a different type from those

already sent. Mr. Carlleyle reads the inscription on it as Ramadata.

No. 2, A and B are 2 small coins with the legend Achya or Bhan-

ya. (Mr. Carlleyle.) On the other side is what looks like the Buddhist

wheel.

No. 8. The legend on this coin of Bhanu Mitra corresponds with

that on the large coins already submitted to the Society and described by

Mr. Carlleyle. The shape of the coin is, however, different, and a figure

which Mr. Carlleyle takes for the Nirvana has been stamped in above the

legend. ‘There may, however, perhaps be some doubt whether this is

intended for a recumbent figure of Buddha. It looks indeed more like a

standing female figure on a low platform, a figure somewhat resembling

that on the coin of Phaguni Mitra to be noticed later.

No. 4 is a similar coin. The legend not being in quite such good

preservation.

No.5 is acoin of Agi.or Agni Mitra of the same type. In this

specimen, however, the figure would seem to be that of a female, the bosoms

being distinctly shewn. It is not unlike the rough representation on the

Kanauj series of coins, see Plate XXIV, Vol. I, Prinsep.

No. 6, A, B, C are 3 small coins of the same type. The figures are

distinct enough, but the inscription in each case is undecipherable.*

I have already sent to the Society, in illustration of Mr. Carlleyle’s

paper, specimens of each of the various coins of the Sunga Dynasty. The

specimens sent were specially selected on account of the legend and the

marks stamped on the obverse. The design on the reverse is hardly of so

much importance, but it may be interesting to notice the Monogram or

device chosen by each king. From a large number of specimens I have

selected those now sent to illustrate as far as possible these points. Un-

fortunately none of the specimens are in very good preservation. The

coins when found looked most hopeless. (See No. 7 specimen in its origin-

al condition now sent.) But by a careful process of boiling and cleaning

the legends and stamps on the reverse have been rendered sufliciently clear.

* [They are probably coins of Stirya Mitra. On No. 6 B, the letters s, y, m, and

on No. 6 A, the letter s can be distinguished. Ep. ]

88 H. Rivett-Carnac— Coins of the Sunga Dynasty. [No. 2,

It is a curious fact that in hardly any case has it been possible to

preserve the design on the reverse. Under the process of cleaning, what

I may call the back of the coin has almost invariably flaked away. And

this will hardly be wondered at when the condition in which the coins were

originally found is seen.

The devices of the different monarchs may be noticed as follows:

Bhumi Mitra. The coins of this king, besides being very numerous, are

nearly all in fairly good preservation. The device on the reverse is distinct.

A standing figure on a platform, between two poles or pillars of victory,

or whatever they may be called, each staff surmounted by three cross-bars,

and the head surrounded by rays or flames. In the specimen No. 8 the

figure holds what looks like a snake in its hand. The snake or line is not

so distinct in all the coins (see Nos. 9, 10).

Agior Agni Mitra. The coins numbered Nos. 11, 12 in Plate VIII bear

nearly the same device as those of Bhwmi Mitra, And of this king also it

is to be noticed, that the coins, besides being numerous, are, comparatively

speaking, in excellent preservation. Here alsois a figure with rays or flames

issuing from the head. ‘This figure also stands on a platform between poles

or staffs of victory. But in this case each staff is surmounted by what

looks like a thistle or a ghara, whereas in Bhumi Mitra’s coins at the

summit of each staff are, as already noticed, three cross-bars. The

smaller of Agni Mitra, Nos. 18, 14, 15, exhibit a different device. The

standing figure has in its hand what would seem to be a snake. There. are

no square platform and no side poles. At the base are rays or flames.* In

fact the device is nearly the same as that on the coins of Phaguni Mitra

now to be noticed.

Phaguni Mitra, Nos. 16,17, 18, 19. These coins also are numerous

and fairly well preserved. The device shews a standing female figure sur-

rounded by what look like rays or flames.* In the right hand is a club (?),

lower down and also on the right side a device or monogram is clearly

distinguishable.

The coins of Bhadraghosa, Surya Mitra and Bhanu Mitra, which,

together with Phaguni Mitra, are, I understand, not only new coins, but

also record the names of kings hitherto unknown, are much less numerous

than those first noticed and are not generally in such a good state of preserva-

tion as those of Bhumi, Agni and Phaguni. Those of Bhadraghosa indeed

are in most cases scarcely legible. And had it not been for the beautiful

little specimen which came into my hands before the find in Bareilly, there

might have been some difficulty at first in establishing the legend on these

* [The base rather resembles the lotus-seat on the reverse of some Gupta coins,

Ep. ]

jurnal,As, Soc. Bengal. Vol. XLIX Pt.11880. PL VI

COINS OF THE MITRA OR SUNGA DYNASTY. -

1880.] H. Rivett-Carnac—Coins of the Sunga Dynasty. 89

coins. Not one single specimen shows, with any distinctness, the design

on the reverse. T'wo of the best in this respect that I have, are marked

Nos. 20, 21. On these a female figure, resembling that on the coins of

Phaguni Mitra can just be made out.

Bhanu Mitra. The device on Nos. 22, 28 is tolerably clear. The

sun with pointed rays surmounts a semicircle which may be intended to

represent a serpent. Below is what may be taken for a squat figure sup-

porting the sun (?) but the device is perhaps hardly sufficiently distinct to

admit of any very satisfactory conclusion being drawn. This may possibly

be aided by coins of other types in the possession of the Society or figured

in books which are not at my disposal.

Surya Mitra, Nos. 24, 25. Here, as the name denotes, is the

sun surmounting what would seem to be a triangular-shaped altar

with the staff of victory on either side. Here also the staff has the

cross-bars as in Bhumi Mitra’s coins.

To these I have added a coin of Indra Mitra, No. 26, similar to those

already sent. This coin has I believe been found before. The device on

the reverse is somewhat different from those already noticed, and shows a

standing figure on a square platform, like that on the coins of Bhumi and

Agni Mitra. In the right hand of the figure is a sceptre? The Staff of

Victory noticed in the other coins is wanting here.

Tt will be seen that of the seven kings whose coins are noticed above,

six of them adopted a different device. As regards the coins of Bhadra-

ghosa, it is not possible to speak with certainty. It will be noticed too that

these six Mitras have all included the sun, or the rays of the sun on their

coins, suggesting possibly their Mctra or Mithraie origin. The symbols on

the obverse of the coins have been described by Mr, Carlleyle, and in all

eases the design is the same or nearly the same. There is little or no

difference in the shape of the letters used. The legend is surmounted by

three symbols which are in all cases the same, although in the coins of

Bhadraghosa and Bhanw Mitra the central symbol appears to have been

punched in separately. All this would seem to suggest that these seven

kings belong to the same dynasty. Mr. Carlleyle has attributed them

to the Sunga kings, who, according to Prinsep and other authorities,

commenced to reign over Magadha about 172 B. C.

I shall be glad if the Society can afford me any information regarding

these kings—the succession in which they reigned and the probable dates

of the coins.

In Prinsep’s list Agni Mitra appears next after Pushpa Mitra the

first of the line. And this arrangement coincides with that given by

Wilford and others in the Asiatic Researches. If the condition of the coin

and the quantity in which it is found are of any significance, then Agné

90 H. Rivett-Carnac—Coins of the Sunga Dynasty.

Mitra might fairly be supposed to be one of the most recent of these

kings.

I have no suggestions to offer regarding any of them, save Bhadra-

ghosa. It will be seen from Prinsep’s list and also from Wilford’s Essay

in Asiatic Researches, Vol. XI, that one Ghosa Vasu preceded Vajra Mitra.

Regarding this Vajra Mitra, Wilford in his Essay on Vikramaditya and

Salivahana (see Asiatic Researches, Vol. IX, page 145,) writes as follows :

“The first Vicramaditya is mentioned in the Cuméaric4-c’handa; in

which it is declared that after 8020 years of the Cali-yuga had elapsed,

then would Vicramarca appear. He reigned fourteen years, and of course

died in the year 3034, when the era of Yudhishtir ended and his own began.

Jn the list of the kings, who were to appear in the Cali-yuga, to be found

in the Bhagavata, Brahmanda, Vayu and Vishnu Puranas, there are two

kings, the seventeenth and eighteenth in regular succession from Chandra-

gupta, who reigned seven years each. ‘The first is called Vicrama, and the

other Mitra ; and they are supposed to have been originally meant for

Vicrama mitra who, according to some, reigned fourteen years; and in

these lists, the father, or predecessor of Vicrama, is called Ghosha Raja or

the king of thickets, which is another name for Gandharupa, or Gadha-raja

in the west. This looks like an interpolation; and the more so, as it will

appear hereafter, that Ghosha-Raja died in the year 440 of our Era.”

The Vajra Mitra. of Prinsep’s list is here supposed to be Vikrama Mitra

or Vikramaditya, whose father and predecessor is Ghosa Raja. Wilford

thinks that this name Ghosa looks like an interpolation. But perhaps the

discovery of a coin belonging to this period, bearing the name of Ghosa,

may help to establish the correctness of the entry ?

It is perhaps also worthy of notice that Prinsep’s list of the Kanwa

Dynasty gives the name Bhumi Mitra, a contemporary of Vikramaditya,

The coins of Bhumi Mitra and Bhadraghosa are certainly of about the

same period, and possibly of the same dynasty. 1am aware that since

Wilford and Prinsep wrote, Mr. Thomas, General Cunningham and _ others

have done much to clear up the doubts existing in respect to early Hindi

Chronology. I am in hopes that those who are better informed than my-

self on the subject may be able to draw some practical conclusion from the

coins which J have been able to collect.

I may add that the mass of them have now been tolerably well cleaned.

They have been carefully examined and read by Mr. Carlleyle and myself,

but no new types save those sent to the Society have been found. They

are entirely at the disposal of the Society if they wish to see them, and I

hope that a complete set may be accepted for the Society’s Museum. The

only reservation I have to make is, that a complete selection of the best

specimens should be reserved for the British Museum, which Institution

ought, I think, to have the first choice.

fe S0c Beng al. Vol. XLIX,Pt.1,1880. PU.

DID by Ic Newrmane OF : Calenllan,

COINS OF THE MITRA OR SUNGA DYNASTY.

CONTENTS

OF THE

JOURNAL, Pr. I, ror 1879.

No. 1.—Rivett-Carnaec, Prehistoric Remains in Central India.—

No.

Rivett-Carnac. The Snake Symbol in India, especially in con-

nection with the worship of Siva—Pratapa ChandraGhosha

Note on the articles exhibited by Mr. Rivett-Carnac.—G rierson,

Some Further Notes on Kalidasa.

2.—Irvine, The Bangash Nawabs of Farrukh4bid—A Chronicle,

(1718—1857).—Growse, The Sect of the Pran-nathis.

No. 3.—T em ple, Rough Notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes

No.

about Kandahar.—Brajanatha Bandyopadhydya, Hamfr

Rasa, or a History of Hamir, prince of Ranthambor.

4,—Barbe, Pali Derivationsin Burmese.—Peal, A peculiarity of

the river names in Asam and some of the adjoining countries.—

Grow se, Bulandshahr Antiquities.—Rajendralala Mitra’s

Note to the above.-—Rodg ers, Copper Coins of the old Maharajas

of Kashmir.—Rodgers, The Copper Coins of the Sultans of Kash-

mir.—S mith, Observations on some Chandel Antiquities.

Os eee

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XVII (1843

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to XXII (1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XXVI,

XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols. XX XIII to XLVIIT, (1864

to 1879).

Asiatic Researches, from Vols. VI to XI and Vols. XVII to XX,

each at. CCC Oo T TA OCHOHO HOC CHO HOZORE OBO ECEe Onetoeegoorarece

Ditto: ditto; Indexss ssc yiusis acievs somite aes anes eee Byetstrer tele

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in ae. Persian, ad Wrdusty ae

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated into English, with notes and

indexes, by H. ‘Blochmamnnt, MEGAN ( « <ccicrateteleatalal saistie ete eines

The Prosody of the Persians.—By H. Blochmann, M. A., ......

The Tabagat-i-Nagiri. Translated by Major H. G. Raverty,

JOM Gono dudDDonKDOdUtO DOOD ON SOOO INON DO OONLS SOnGooo

Aborigines of India, by B. EL Hodgson, Esq., B.C.S. syerelalersiere levels

BS. ASs

NEW SERIES. VOL. XLIX. No, CCXXXY.

Oe OOOOeaeee<u—oereeseee eeeOeeeeeS5—rereen eeeeaeeeeeeereeeeerreeeeeee_ureeeeaeeeeee Ee eee

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASTATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Vol. XLIX, Part I, No. III].—i880.

EDITED BY

EO eee a

JHE J HILOLOGICAL PECRETARY.

eee ee

SZ BOLL NORO pay: ter ETRE BEE DONT SLE 29 VALET LENS incon man

a )

Dy |

« The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

man or produced by nature.”—Sir WiLLIAM Jones.

*,* Communications should be sent wnder cover to the Secretaries, Asiat, Soc.,

to whom wll orders for the work are to be addressed in India ; or, in Lon.

don, cone of Messrs. Tritbner and Co., 57 5 59, Ludgate Hill,

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED BY }. Ww. J HOMAS, AT THE PAPTIST Mission FPREss,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 5J, PARK STREET.

1880.

eee ee es

=—t Ee DRDO PSS EEE

| Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—'To Non-Subseribers, Rs. 2.

Price in England, 4 Shillings.

CONTENTS.

Remarks on the Afghans found along the Route of the Tal Chotiali

Field Force, in the Spring of 1879.—By Lirur. R. C. Tempe,

B.S. C., F. R. G.S., M. R. A.S., &c., (vith three Plates, and

wo Maps) peor a ceapeec esis aan Aenoeetai ae Nan conse Gerncae mee mers Selves

On the Stryaprajnaptii—By Dr. G. Tuipavt, Principal, Benares

Collate ger iiss ccss. ce cetonase acces ccsiass Sanja cste nici solsiet ae eee tees

Memorandum on Clay Discs called ‘Spindle Whorls’’ and Votive

Seals found at Sankisa, Behar, and other Buddhist ruins in the

North Western Provinces of India.—By H. Riverr-Carnac,

Esg., C. S., C. I. E., F. 8. A., (with three Plates), ...............

Note on some Copper Buddhist coins.—By H. Riverr-Carnac, Hsq.,

©) SiC. TBE. Ss A. .(@with two Blates)-) <n mencsemeyeerees os

Page

107

127

138

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

—>—

Part I.—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &c.

eee

No. I1I.—i880.

Remarks of the Afghins found along the Route of the Tal Chotiali Field

Force, in the Spring of 1879.—By Lixnvur. R. C. Tempxe, B. 8. C.,

F. R.G.S., M. R. A. S., &e. (With 3 Plates and 2 Maps.)

Part I.

This is the last of a series of papers on the march of the Tal Chotiali

Field Force in the spring of last year, and closes my observations on the

subject.* As the range of observations to be made along an entirely new

and unknown route such as this is necessarily large, I found it impractica-

ble to connect them all into one paper, and this has obliged me to repeat

in the several papers certain remarks which were necessary to the exposition

of the subject-matter of each, and I trust therefore to be excused for repeat-

ing here much that is to be found elsewhere. I have also again to make

* Journal of the march of the 2nd Column of the Tal Chotiali Field Force com-

municated to the Quarter Master General in India.

An account of the march of the 2nd Column Tal Chotiali Fieid Force, to the

R. G. §., with map.

Sketch Map of the march of the Tal Chotiali Field Force, published by the Surveyor

General of India.

Notes on the Formation of the Country passed through by the Tal Chotiali Field

Force, and Rough Notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes about Kandahar, to

this Society.

92 R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. [No. 8,

the excuse to be found in all my papers on this subject that my notes were

from the nature of the circumstances under which they were made necessa-

rily of a rough and hurried kind and contain doubtless many mistakes, but

as it seems the route is to be abandoned, it is likely to be a long while

before it is again traversed throughout, and I hope therefore my notes will

be found to be of value.

The geography of the route, thanks to the exertions and reports of the

officers of the Survey of India* who accompanied the Force, is now well

known and needs no remark here. Suffice it to say that the Force was sent

from the Pishin valley towards Dera Ghazi Khan via the Kakar country

and Ba’rKu0’M to open up what is known as the Tal Chotiali Route,

and that the present writer was attached to the 2nd or principal column of

the Force. The route taken and referred to herein is shewn in detail in

the map attached, which was published for me by the Surveyor General of

India, and in its general aspect in the map attached to my paper on the

Geology of the Route in a former number of this Journal.+

Il. The Tribes en route.

Before proceeding to discuss what was seen of the various tribes of

Afghans along this march, it may be as well to give a brief account of what

is known of the vexed question of the origin of the Pathan and Afghan

Tribes.

The people of the nation known in India as the Pathan Tribes call

themselves Bani’ Isra’r't or Puxuru’n (pl. Puxura’na), and the Afghans,

as a race of these Pathan Tribes, claim descent from Ta’tu’rt or Sa’Rv’L (the

Saul of the Bible) as their ancestor. According to native accounts Sa’Ru’L

had two posthumous sons Baraxt’a (BaracHian) and Trami’a§ (JERE-

mtaH), both born in the same hour of different mothers of the tribe of

La’wi’ (Levr). They rose to high postitions under David, Saul’s successor ;

thus Barakia became prime minister and Iramia Commander-in-Chief. In

Sutima’n’s (Solomon’s) time they were suceceded in their posts each by his

son, Barakia by Asar and Iramia by AraHa’na, and Afghana is said to

have had the building of the Barru-t-mugappas or Temple of Jerusalem.

Asaf left 18 and Afghaéna 40 sons, and these founded important families or

tribes. When the Barru-t-mugappas was destroyed by BAKHTU-N-NASR

(Nebuchadnezzar) the Afghana Tribe, adhering to their forefathers’ religion,

were banished from Sua’ (Palestine) and took refuge in Koutsta’N-I-GHOR

and Kou-1-rrroza. Here their neighbours called them Afghan (or Aoghan)

A. 8. B., for 1879, paper by Major Waterhouse.

A S. B., for 1879, Vol. XLVIII, Part II.

averty. Gram. of Pushto. Introd. 1860.

Brrxiya and Armiau according to Raverty.

* J

Ti)

Ha dat

1880.] R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 93

or Bani Israil. From Guor by degrees the Afghans extended to the

Koursra’y-1-Ka’puL, Kanpana’r and Guaznt.

Until the advent of Muhammad the Afghans followed the religion of

the Pentateuch or Tavret Kuwa’n. But in the 9th year of the announce-

ment of Muhammad’s mission they heard of him from one of the Bani

Israil by name Kwra’tip-Brin-(or 1BN)-Watt'p. A deputation was sent to

Medina under one Kats (also Kisu, Kes or Katsn) a leading Afghan,

who became a zealous Muhammadan and received several special marks of

the Prophet’s favour, among which the title of malik or king, originally

conferred by the Almighty on Saul, their great ancestor, was conferred

individually on the Afghans.* Arabic names also were given them; thus

Kais was called ABpU-R-RASHI'D (Servant of the Wise). And to him was

also given the title of Pruva’n (ParuHa’N) meaning in Syriac a rudder, signi-

fying that he, Kais, was the pilot of his people. From this Kais are de-

scended all the Afghan Tribes properly so called, and all Afghans are

Pathans, the name by which the nation is most generally known in India.

But there are many tribes who are Bani Israil and Pukhtén (Pukhtana)

who are not Afghans.

The Pukhttin, erroneously known in India as the Pathan Tribes, then

are divided into those descended from Kais and those who are not. Those

who .are so descended are generally known as Afghans and the others as

merely Pathans, though the whole nation is also known as Pathdns.+

The following is a list of the principal tribes of the present day

generally acknowledged to be Afghans :

1. Duranis. 8. Tris. 15. Mangals.

2. Tarins. 9. Zaimukhts. 16. Jadraus.

3. Kakars. 10. Orakzais. 17. Shinwaris.

4. Ghilzais. 11. DaAwaris. 18. Médmands.

5. Povindas, 12. Khoéstwals. 19. Yusutzais.

6. Waziris. 13. Afridis. (Kohistanis.)

7. Shiranis. 14, 'Tajis.

Kais married a daughter of Kaa’L1p-BIN-wWALt'D by whom he had three

sons, SARABAN, Baran and GurauusH® and from them descend some of

the principal. tribes above mentioned, as may be seen by the accompanying

genealogy.

* At the present day the head of a Pathan family or tribal subsection is called

malik.

+ There are several legends to account for the names of Afghan and Pathan, that

above given in the text is the commonest. The following are, however, worth notic-

ing.

The word Pukhttin (Pukhtana) is said variously to be of Inra/nf or Ipra’amt

(Hebrew) and of Sv’ria/ni (Syrian) origin, and ‘to signify ‘* delivered” or “ set free.”

94: R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. [No. 3,

KAIS = d. of KHALID-BIN-WALID.

SARABAN. Batan. GuRGHUSHT.

SHARE-UD DIN. Bini MAro = Suin Htshn = Bint MAnt DAni.

d, of KAcu.

_Suindnt Tanin. Guitzat. Inrsnm | | KAxar, PAnizat.*

joined the | Lop1, KacGuzar, SarwAnl.

Kakars. |

Tortarin. Spinrarin ABpAL, SURI, BANGAsSH.

The above genealogy which must of course be taken for what it may

be worth, includes a good many of the ancestors of the present Afghan

Tribes, but not by any means all. Each, however, has its own genealo-

gical legend. It will be observed that the Duranis, the chief or largest tribe

are not included in the above genealogy.

The Pathan Tribes we have to deal with in this paper are the Duranis

slightly, and with the Tarins, Kakars, Linis and Zarkhans more fully. Of

The common tradition about A’gh4n is, that the mother of their ancestor Afghana gave

him the name because of her exclamation on the favourable answer to her prayers in

the pangs of childbirth for a quick delivery, for she said on the birth of the child,

“‘ Afohana (I am free), this being the traditional interpretation of the expression,

Another tradition is, that she called out in her pangs “ AreuSn” or “ FrcH4n” an —

expression of pain in the Persianlanguage. According to the Kakar legends “ Pathan” —

is a corruption of Prur Kun, the title given to the Kats above mentioned by the Pro- —

phet. Raverty in the Introduction to his Grammar of Pushto gives an extract from the —

TazkiRAt-UL-MULUK or History of the Sappozats according to which the words Pusuro |

(or Puxuro) and Pusurtn (or Puxurtn) are derived from Pusur or Pasur the name

of the place Afghana first fixed on as his residence on leaving Palestine. In the same |

work a characteristically oriental derivation of the word Afghéna is thus given. ‘The

original meaning of Afghanah is fighan, a. Persian word which means complaint,

lamentation, because he (Kats) was a cause of lamentation to the devil, the jinns and

mankind. From the constant use of the word the vowel point Kasrah was dropped

after which the other letters could not be sounded without the aid of a vowel and

alif-.-wasl was placed before the gz and thus made Afghanah.” And the term Pathén

is further derived: from batan or patan which in Arabic (wlby) signifies the keel

(Raverty says keelson) of a vessel, “ without which it cannot sail, neither can the ship

of war sail along without the keel of battle.” “ |

* The true Afghan descent of the posterity of the 2nd son Baran is more than |

doubtful. It appears that Bibi Mato (or Matu) the daughter of Batan formed an illicit

connection with Shah Husein, (or Hussén, called also Masr’atr) a Persian Prince of

Ghor and wasmade to marry him. The offspring resulting was named Ghalzai that is

“ the child of theft.’””. She, however, also bore him a son [brahim Lédi from whom the

former Pathan rulers of Delhi sprung. This Shah Hussein was also by a fraud induced

to marry Bibi Mahi (or Mir) daughter of the KAcu or bard who managed his

marriage with Bibi Mato, and from her are descended the present Kaghzai, Bangash

and Sarwani Pathans,

1880.] BR. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Ohotiali Field Force. 95

these the Duranis, Tarins and Kakars are Afghans proper and so probably

are the Linis, but the Zarkhans are merely known as Pathdns.

First then regarding the Duranis, the chief of the Afghanelans. The

origin of this tribe is apparently unknown, but it seems to be generally

believed that it emigrated from the mountains of Ghér. According to the

TAzKIRA‘L-UL-MULU’K above quoted, the Durani descent is as follows :

KAIS or ABD-UR-RASHID.

SARABAN,

eldest son.

SHARKABUN. KaarsHaBtn.

eldest son. |

ABDAL, YUsurzals. Moumanps. Kuatfts,

chief of the Afghans,

whence after 300 years.

Matix Rasar ABpDALI.

2 Niner Nur.* Kanoxir* MAxt.*

| whence the

; Khokaris

Maik Zfrax Appdut. Isuix.* ’Xut.* called also

| Khigianis,

Porau.* BArax,.* AxaKo’.*

Matix Hapis AnpAui.* Bapu.* Aryts.

Mazix BAme AppaAui.* IsmArn.* Hasan.*

Sauin.* ’Aus.* Zaryin.* Waraka,*

Matix Sapo AxspAut,*

whence

AumMApD SuHAn ABDALI

and afterwards Durant.

The old name of the Durdnis was Abdali, till Ahmad Shah, an Abdali

of the Sadozai family or subsection of the Pdpalzai section of Abdalis, the

hero of Panipat, in1747 took the title of purR-1-Durra’n, the Pearl of Pearls,

and named his tribe after himself Durdnis. The two great divisions of the

Duranis are Zi’raK and Panspa’o, and of these the most honorable by de-

scent are the Zir’naxs. The Zi’Raxs are usually divided into 4 sections (1)

* Those marked with an asterisk with the addition of Zai are the names of present

Durani sections or subsections.

96 R. C. Temple— Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. [No. 8,

Popanzat, (2) AnaxKo’zat, (3) Ba’raxzat, (4) AcHaxzatand the Pans-

pa‘os into 5 sections, thus, (5) Nu’rzat, (6) Anr’zat, (7) IsHa’Kzat, (8)

Kuv’eta’nt, (9) Ma’kv’.* Along our present route, however, only the

Achakzais were found in any numbers, but a few of the Pdpalzais and

Barakzais were also found in the Pishin. As far as I know there is but one

Poépalzai village and one Barakzai village in Pishin, but there are a good

many Barakzais scattered about the valley formerly concerned with the late

government there. The Pdpalzais of the valley are of the Sapozat sub-

section +

The Ba’rakzats met with in the Pishin are all MunamManzats,f{ con-

nected in some way with the late government of the valley. Sirdar

Kuv’supit Kua’ of the royal house seems to have been Governor of the

* There is also a low class of Durdnis called SAezar found in the ArcutsAn val-

ley.

+ The Sadozais were the old ruling family of the Pépalzais and under Asap-uL-

tan (of the Tribe ABpAut, sec. Pépalzai, subsec. Sadozai) threw off the yoke of the

Persian at Herat in 1716, soon after Mir Vars, the Ghilzai, began to assert the inde-

pendence of the Afghan nation. On the assassination of NAprr Sau in 1747, AHMAD

Kun, a Sadozai (afterwards Ahmad Shih Durdni) gradually conquered for himself

all Afghanistan and most of the Panjab, and at his death in 1773 he was ruling from

the Sutlaj to the Oxus and from the Himalayas to Khordsén. Till 1793 Tatmv’r Sua’

his son reigned, but at his death his kingdom was fought for among his children in the

way so common in oriental history, mainly resulting in the loss of the Panjab to the

Sikhs. The brothers who were ruling at the time of Tarmu’r Sua’n’s death were

ZaMA‘’N Sua’H in Kabul.

Hama’un Sua’a in Kandahar.

Maumu'p Sua’n in Herat.

Axppa’s Mfrza’ in Peshawur.

Ko’nanpit Mirza’in Kashmir.

Of these ZAMAN SuAu and Maumtp SuAn obtained the throne of Afghanistan with the

usual bloodshed, and after them another brother, the famous SHAn Sutsau-uL-Mutx,

about 1809. Mahmud Shah, however, ousted him and again ruled till 1818, when he

was deposed by the Ba’raxzar brothers, sons of Patnp KuAn, his Wazir, and son of

HAsi JamAu KuAn (a Munammapzar BAraxzar), the Sird4r who had helped Ahmad

Shah in the early days of his sovereignty. Since that date the Mohammadzai Barak-

zais have fought among themselves for the throne resulting in the victory and sover-

eignty successively of the Amirs Dost Mohammad Khan, Shér Ali Khanand YaStb Khan

thelateruler. In1839 the first Afghan war, the history of which is of course still fresh

in our memories, was undcrtaken to restore Shah Shijah-ul-mulk. the Sadozai, to his

throne at Kabul. The Sadozais are still highly respected, and the Popalzais from which

they sprung are the most honoured among Afghin Tribes. During the greater part

of the Sadozai ascendancy, the ministers were chosen from the BAmn’zai subsection of

the Pépalzais. The chief other subsections of the Popalzais as far as I could ascertain

are (3) Marsinezais, (4) Kua’nzats, (5) AtytUszats, (6) Mapozais, (7) No’azats.

{ The other subsection of the Barakzais as far as I could ascertain were (2)

ACHALZAIS, (3) SutimAnzats, (4) Kuunser’zais, (5) Batanzais.

1880.] R.C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. 97

Pishin under Shér Ali, but never to have lived there, and I was quite

surprised to find how little appeared to be known about him locally. His

fort, called Khishdil Khan, is in the north-east corner of the Pishin, and from

it his Naib or Lieutenant Nu’R MunamMap Kaa’n (Muhammadzai_ Barak-

zai) seems to have ruled and collected the revenues. This last fled at our

advance into the Pishin in 1878, and the valley -was handed over for govern-

ment under Sir R. Sandeman, agent for Beluchistan, with the fort Khush-

dil Khan, to another Nu’r Munamman Kua’y, Luea’r’, a Beldch in our

service as Nazim orruler.* This Khtshdil Khén’s descent was given me

locally, thus :

HAJY JAMAL KHAN (temp. Ahmad Shah Durani.)

Srrpa’r Paryp Kua’y (Muhammadzai Barakzai )

Minarpin Kuan. Po’rpin Kna’y. Dost MunamMmap Kuan,

Amir of Kabul.

Kuvu’supin Kua’‘n. Mir Arzu’n Kuan.

Governor of Governor of Kan- Suer Ani’ Kua’n,

Pishin, 1878. dahar, 1878. Amir of Kabul.

Yaxu's Kwan,

Amir of Kabul +

* Another and perhaps the most true local story is that Khitishdil Khan died about

7 years ago, say 1872, and in former days Asp-ut-Karim Kuin (Muhammadzai

Barakzai) was his Naib, but on Shér ’ Ali’s final accession in 1869, Khiishdil Khan lost

his government and went to reside in Kandahar, while Nu’r Munammap Kua/’n

(Muhammadzai Barakzai) was sent to govern the Pishin direct from Sher ’ Ali himself.

¢+ Paind Khan’s sons by 5 mothers were—

( Faren Kua’n Wazir of Mahmiid Shah,

1. ( Mcnammap Azim Kua’n,

Tarmu’r Kua’n.

( Pu’rpit Kua’n, Governor of Kandahar,

SuerpiLt Kua’n, Governor of Kandahar,

Konanpin Kxa’n, Governor of Kandahar,

| Ranimpit Kwa/n,

( Minarpr Kuan.

Do’sr Munammap Kua’x, Amir of Kabul,

3. ( Am’r Munammap Kuan,

JaMAu Kun,

(Surr4x Munammap Kun,

} YAr Munammap Kun,

‘. Pin Munammap KnAn,

Sayan Munammap Kuan.

Nawip Asap KuAn,

6. ) NawAp Sama’t Kua’n,

NawAs Javan Kuan.

98 R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. [No. 8,

The Acwaxzat section of the Duranis is the tribe inhabiting the

mountains known as the Ktosa Amra’n Range, the Tosa Plateau, and the ~

Pisury and Kapaner valleys in part. They are said to have been divided

off from the Barakzais by Ahmad Shah, as that tribe was getting too power-

ful, and I have met Pathans about Kandahar, who classed the Achakzai

as a Barakzai subdivision. The Achakzais are divided into BaHa’puRZAIS

and GAJANZAIS.

BAHADURZAIS.

GIABEZAIS. SHAMUZAIS. Ba’/KARZAIS.

Ka’Kozals. Fa’Mzats. Isupa’NIZAIS.

GAJANZAIS.

ATMADZATS. HaAMZats. ALOZAIS.

ASHEZAIS. MAntixkzats. JULIZAIS.

Bu’ RHANZAIS. La’LIZAIs. MUSsHKIZAIS.

SHAMAKZATIS. Ma’PIzats. Ba’DAZAIS.

Ma‘nizalrs. Hov’senzats. SHAKARZATs.

Ka/MILZAIs. SULIMA’NZAIS. UsMa’/NZAlIS.

ADAZATIS. ABDULLAZAIS.

ADRAKZAIS, Ba zZAMZAIs.

T, however, came across two subsections of Achakzais not here mention-

ed called Hapi’pzats* and ABDALS in the Pishin. This name Abdal may

perhaps only be the title of the malik or chief as the present Sirdar Mrr

Astam Kwa’n of the Achakzais is locally called Mir Aslam Khan Abdal or

Abdali, as also is Mapa Kua’, the head of an Achakzai village in the

Pishin, called after him. All the inhabitants of the last village, however,

are called Abdals.

The next clan we have to deal with are the Tarins. These are the

second of the Afghan Tribes in point of importance and national estima-

tion. Their legendary descent from Kais is clearly made out. SaraBan,

Kais’s eldest son, had five sons of whom the second was Tarin. Tarin had

three sons, Tér Tarin, Spin Tarin and Abdal, and from the two eldest are

descended the modern Tarin Tribe. According to a legend Tarin’s dark son

was called Spin Tarin or Fair Tarin, and his fair son Tor Tarin or Dark

Tarin. The Tér Tarins inhabit the Pishin valley and the Spin Tarins the

country about Tal and Chotiali. Lumsden subdivides this clan as follows :

* Lumsden, however, makes out the Hasr’szats to be Tor Tarins, but as far as

I could ascertain, they are Achakzais.

1880.] Rk. C. Temple—Rouwte of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 99

TOR TARINS.

BAtAzats. ALIZAIS. Huapfpzars.

HAtrKALzals. NGRzAIS. HAMRANZAIS.

MAuizats. KUnLAZATrS. KARBELAS.

KADAZAIS. Mustzalts. SAZATIS.

KHANIZATS. ABDURRAHMANZAIS.

KHAMZAIS.

SPIN TARINS.

SHADIZAIS. LAasrsnis. ADWANIS.

Marpanis.

This list agrees with that given me en route as far as the Spin Tarins

are concerned, but as regards the Tor Tarins mine differs considerably.

First I would remark that the Hapfpzats are, as far as I could make out,

Achakzais and not Tarins at all. Next as regards the Karbélas, who have

been hitherto put down as, Tarins somehow connected with the Pishin

Sayads, I have ascertained the following particulars. The Karbélas inhabit

a village of the same name near Sayap Patyp in the Pishin and call them-

selves Sayads. They are, however, disowned by the Sayads and also by the

Tarins, Kakars and Duranis. The local legend regarding their origin is

this. In days gone by, a little child by name Karbéla, was travelling

through the Pishin in a kafila. He lost his party and was seen running

along the road, erying, by a kind-hearted Sayap who took him in and

nourished him, but declined to admit him into his family or sect. On

growing up, he married a Tarin woman, and from him there sprang by Tarin

intermarriages the present race of Karbélas, now said to be 600 strong in

men. This is the Sayad version of the story, the Tarin legend is the same

except as regarding intermarriages with themselves. They say the mother

of the original Karbélas came from no one knows where and disown the

whole race. The probabilities are, they sprung from Pathans who had

to take refuge in the Pishin from some other distant place. The KuAntzats

are divided into LUr Kudnizais and Das Kudytzats according to my

information. In the list of Tér Tarins which I collected, the following do

not appear in Lumsden.*

MAnixydrs MANZAKAIS KAaMALZATS.

MAnzats HArv'ns.

While his list contains the following which are not found in mine.

KADAZAIS Niozais HAMRANZATS.

KKHAMZAIS ABDURRAHMANZATIS

* There are a few trifling variations in some names regarding which see below on

Language.

100 R. C. Temple—Loute of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. (No. 3,

The probabilities are that a combined list would reach nearest the true

statement of their subsections.*

Like the Tarins, after whom they rank, ¢. e., third on the list of clans,

the Kakars claim direct descent from Kats. Firstly, Kais’s third son was

Gurauusur who had three sons DAnfi, BAni and Manpf. Of these DAnf

had four sons, KAxar, NAauar, DApf and PAni.f Secondly Suirdni the

eldest son of Suarfr-uD-DI/N, eldest son of Sarapan Kais’s eldest son, on

account of family squabbles joined the Kakars and called himself a Gur-

GHusHtTAt. Such is the common legend. The Kakars themselves vary it

thus. Kais went to Mecca and there obtained the name of Prer Kain

(elsewhere Prurdn). His eldest son SHarfr-up-DIN or SARABAN had five

sons Sufrdni, Tarin, Myunf, Barecuit and Umar-up-pfx. The mother

of SuirAnf, who was a Kakar, finding that her husband intended making

Tanrin, his second son, his heir, left his protection and returned to her own

tribe. Her descendants have therefore been included among Pathans and

with them the whole of the Kakars under one name. This subverts the

other legends which make the Kakars claim descent through GureHUsHT

from Kats.

The following clans claim relationship with or descent from the Kakars.

The GAxars of Kashmir along the Jhilam, the Tarmunts (Ermaxs) of

Guor, the FrrozKoni Hazdras (Ermaxs) of Herir, the Kayants of

Sutst4y,§ and lastly the K4xars and Guinzars also consider themselves

nearly related in blood. ‘Taking into consideration the unquestionably

mixed blood of the Ghilzais and their legendary relationship with the

Kakars, as also that of such pure Ermaxs as the HazAras and Tarmunis, ||

the Kakar descent from Kais would seem to be doubtful.

* Among the tribes of Tarin descent are said to be the Zaimuxuts.

¢ This would make the Pa’n1’zats separate from the Kakars, but they seem to be

considered a section of them at the present day.

~ Whence the Barn’cur’ Pathans of SHora’wak.

§ Usually called Belochis, but really descendants of Sanpar Kup’t Kakars.

|| A pure Ermax is perhaps, however, a misnomer. The origin of the race

being quite obscure. By features they are Ta’rars and by language Persians. They

are divided into Tarmu’nt’s, Haza’ras, Taimvu’ri’s and Zvu’ri’s. It may help towards

the solution of the Eimak origin to quote the following from Yule’s Marco Polo, I, 94.

“‘ Contemporaneously with the Karaunaus (or Kara’wrnans the celebrated robbers of

medizval Persia) we have frequent mention of predatory bands known as Nieu’parts

who seem to be distinguished from the Karaunaus, but hada like character for trucu-

lence. Their head-quarters were about Susrsra‘N, and Quatremére seems disposed to look

upon them as a tribe indigenous in that quarter. Hammer says they were originally

the troops of Prince Nieu’par, grandson of Cuacarar (CHAGATAI was the ruler and

curse of Turkistan and a son of Curneiz and therefore brother to OkKopat and uncle to

Manexu, Kusrarand Huxa’xv), and that they were a rabble of sorts, Mongols, Turk-

mans, Kurds, Shils and what not. We hear of their reyolts and disorders down to

1880. ] R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. 101

The Kakar Territory extends from the Pishin valley to the Borai

valley and from the Zhéb valley to Quetta, the line of the Bolin Pass and

the Marri (Beldch) country. They are divided into two main divisions,

the Great Kakars (Lown KAxar) and the Lesser Kakars (Kucunat

KAxkar). As regards the Great Kakars, the present writer had but little

opportunity of learning much. They occupy the Zhéb valley and appa-

rently are divided into—

Kuwarpipzals, AKTARZATS, MEHTARZAIS,

MuRSIANGZATIS, AWAZAIS, SARGARAIS.

And probably also the Janacgais, Mv’sa Kuen and Karizats belong to

this division.

The Lesser Kakars are divided into SuntmAn Kuets ; AmMAND Kuets ;

Menrarzats ; P&nfzats; BAzars; Suamozats; Surgarais; Manaaats;

Isk KuELs ; Sara’nazars, of which Mundzais and TARANS are subsections ;

ZAKHPELS, subdivided into AMAKAIS, Kanozats and Ndozars; Dumars ;

UrmAn Kuens; and Sanpar Kuens, whose known subdivisions are Anf-

ZAIS, SHABOZAIS, Mv’rs, Darcars, Wands and Tenrzars.* The Kakars

about Kuuncnagar near Mt. Kann, variously called the Sanarfa and

Stmanrua Kakars, are I believe the Amanp Kuen above mentioned. They

were formerly, under the name of Taraudnis, under HAsi Kun of infamous

memory during the war of 1839, and his son KAmrnm Kun is now chief of

the Amanp Kwet. -

The next clan met with en route was the Lu’nt (properly Lonat) Kuen,

about whom very little is known. ‘They are generally supposed to be

Kakars by descent, but I should say from what I heard from the Lu’nrs

themselves and from the Kakars, this is not the case. ‘They call themselves

of DurAnt descent, a claim which is allowed by their neighbours. The

Hamzazats are the only known subdivision of this Tribe, but there are

1319, up to which date Mirxuonp says that there had been 21 fights with them in 4

years. Again we hear of them in 1336 about Herat, whilst in Baber’s time they turn

up as Nuxparis fairly established as tribes in the mountainous tracts of Karnu’p and

Guor to the west of Kabul, and coupled with the Hazaras who still survive both in

name and character. Among them, says Baber, are some who speak the Mongol lan-

guages. The Hazaras are eminently Mongol in feature to this day, and it is very

probably that they or some part of them are descendants of the KARAUNAuS or NiGu’-

pARIs or of both, and that the origination of the bands so called from the scum of the

Mongol inundation is thus in a degree confirmed. It is worthy of notice that Ab-ul-

Fazl who mentions the Nuxparis among the nomad tribes of Kabul says, the Hazdras

are the remains of the Chagataian army which Manexu Kua’n sent to the aid of

| Huxa’ku under the command of Nicu’par Ocuza’n.

* The Eséts of the Dr’rasa’r are sometimes called Kakars but this is doubtful.

Ka/s’ Ka’kars are said to inhabit the Sua’t Valley (Quetta), but I did not see any

there, i

102 R. C. Temple-—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. [No. 3,

doubtless more, and I think it would be safe to include Sardears amongst

them. They inhabit a largish extent of country, for the most part consider-

ably deserted, and used merely as grazing-ground. Their villages are most-

ly found in what is called the Lu’nr Valley to the south of the Bérai, 2. e.,

between it and the Tal Valley. All the country from the Bérai Valley east of

the Tal Valley as far as the Beléch Border and the Mv’sa Kuen country

belongs to them, except the small portion occupied by the ZarKHa’Ns near

Chotiali.

Of the Zarxwa’ns nothing more is known except that they are Pathans

and not of Kakar, Tarin er Lini extraction. They are to be found about

the mountains to the east and south of Chotiali, in the Hanoxat Pass and

Ba’ts’ Dua’Ka’. The Marris have nearly wiped them out as a race by con-

tinual raids. In Leech’s time* there were three villages belonging to them

near Chotidli, v7z., Dosr MunamMap, Faz Kuan and Arf Kuan, but I do

not know if they still exist.

Perhaps the origin of the Linis and Zarkhans and even of some of

the Kakars, especially the Sandar Khél, should be sought with that of the

neighbouring Beldch Tribes, if one could only ascertain what that is, In-

deed the Kayants of Srtstan usually called Beldchis, are Sandar Khél

Kakars, and there is nothing repugnant in the history of the Beloch Tribes

to the idea of some of them being of the same descent as their deadly

enemies the Pathans. For the Katufris about CHarrar and PuLEsr in

Kacut, now acknowledged to belong to the Beldch Tribes, are of unques-

tioned Pathdin descent. And, although the presence of many Beldchi

words in their dialects may be the result of propinquity, the similarity of

face and figure of the Lu’n1s, Sanpar Kuers and Zarkua’ns to the neigh-

bouring Beldch Tribes of Ba’rKuo’m is quite remarkable, and they might

well have a common origin with them, especially as the Beldéchis can hardly

be called a nation, being rather an agglomerate of heterogeneous tribes.

Thus the Brawo’ts are probably aboriginal, the GuRcHa’NIs a Sindian Tribe,

the Rryps and Lu’mris probably of Hindu (Rajput) origin and the Ga’puRs

of Las of Arab descent, while the tribes of Maxnra’n are Arabs, Sikhs,

Sindhis, Persians, Jats and what not.{

* Major Leech’s journeys were made about 1839.

+ Hughes’s Beluchistan,

+ In connection with the probable Turkman or Mongol origin of the bulk of the

Bel6éch Tribes, the words Tuman and Tumanpa’R are interesting. Tuman or Toman

was a Mongol division of the army, viz., 10,000, and hence in the Mongol dominions

it came to mean 10,000 generally, Wassa’r describing Kinsay (Krnassx’ or Hanecnav)

states it had “70 Tomans of soldiers and 70 Tomans of Ravats.’’ Marco Polo states its

revenue in Tomans of gold and Friar Odoric in Tomans of Batisu (paper money).

Tan or TMA is still used in Russia for 10,000. In Beluchistan TumMAN means a camp

and Tumanpa’r the commander of a camp and thence the chief of a tribe, but whether

1880.] R.C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 103

While discussing the Pathin Tribes something should be remarked

about the Sayaps found in every part of Afghanistén* and in some

numbers in the Pishin where they own several villages. Wherever they

may happen to be, they are a sect apart from the surrounding in-

habitants, are always respected and seem to be more intelligent than

the Pathans in general. They are not considered Pathans and claim

to be of Arab descent as their name implies. ‘This claim, however,

is I think of a slender description among the Sayads in the Pishin with

whom we have now to do. Their sympathies are all Afghan, they are

subdivided in a suspiciously similar manner, and the story of their descent

confirms the suspicions as to their separate origin from the Pathdns about

them. The story is that Ha’rv’n, fifth in descent from Kais, had a daughter

who married an Arab Sayad who visited him, and from her are said to be

descended all the Pishin Sayads, notably the Sua’pizats and HArIpARzaAts.f

The present subdivision of the Pishin Sayads appear to be—

GANGALZATIS. SHa’D{ZAIs. Ya’/sINGZAIS.

BAGARZAIS. BRAHAMZAIS. URUMZAIS.

AJABZAIS. HAIDARZAIS.£

The following table shows the subdivisions of the tribes above dis-

cussed as far as known.

No, Tribe. No. Division. No Section. Subdivision. No. Subsection.

I. Dura’nt or 1 Zirax. 1 Popawzat. 1 Sapozat.

ABDA‘LI, 2 Ba’Me’ ZAt.

3 MarsiIneazat.

4 Kua’/nzat.

5 Atyu’Bzal.

6 Mapozat.

7 Noazat.

2 ALAKO’ZATI. 1 JaLuzat.

2 Mernazat.

3 SaRKA’/NI.

4 SANDARZAT.

5 Ka’Rezat.

6 NAvsAzal.

this is due to the passage of the Mongols through their country on towards Hindustén

or to their Central Asian origin does not appear. Yule’s Marco Pole, I, 94, 281 and II,

169, 171.—Hughes’s Beluchistan.

* I saw one village of them in Ba’rxuo’m among the Independent Belo’ch Tribes.

+ According to one legend, the Kar’enas are descended from a waif picked up

by this Ha’ru’n. See above,

{ Among the Pishin Sayads faces of a Si’pi’ type are not uncommon, and I saw

one woman with purely African features near A’ni’zAr. This may result, however,

from their wandering habits and be no indication of descent,

104

No. ‘Tribe.

I. Dura’NtI or

ABDA’LI.

I. Dura’/NI or

ABDA LI.

No. Division.

1) ZiRAK.

2 Panspa’o.

No, Section.

3 Ba’/RAKZAI.

4 ACHAKZAI.

5 No’rzal.

6 A’LIZAL.

7 IsHa’KzZAl.

Bata’ DURZALI.

AST aE. See (Gee OS

GAJANZAT.

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiah Field Force.

oF 0

room NOOB WDE

[No. 3,

Subdivision. No. Subsection.

MUnaMMADZAT.

ACHALZAI.

SULIMA‘NZAT.

KHU/NSEZAI.

Batanzat.

GHA’BEZATI.

KaA’KOZAT.

SHAMUZAT.

BFa/’Mzat.

Ba’KARZAT.

ISHDANIZAT.

ABDAL.

AHMADZALT.

ASHEZAT.

BuRHAMZAT.

SHAMAKZAT.

Ma’tiIzAt.

KC a’MILZAT.

ADAZAT.

ADRAKZAT.

Ha’ zuzat.

Ma’‘LIKZ Al.

LA‘TIZAL.

Ma’Przat.

HUSENZATI.

SULIMA/NZAT.

AB’DULAZAT.

Ba’/ZAMZAT.

ALOZAL.

TULIZAT.

MUsikIzAt.

Ba‘pDIzat.

SHAKARZAT.

UsMA’NZAT.

Hapr’szat.

CHA’LAKZAT.

Ba’pDIzat.

HIASSANZAL.

ATAKZAI.

GWARAZAT. |

HAwaZat. |

TEROZAT.

MANDARZATI.

T’pzAt.

1880.]

No. Tribe.

I, Dura’Nt or

ABDA’‘LI.

I]. Tanr'n.

II. Tarin.

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force.

No. Division.

2 Pansea‘o. 8

1 Tor Tarr’y.1

2 Spin Tari’n.

105

No, Section. Subdivision. No. Subsection.

Kyv’G@ta/Nt. 4 a 1 Ra‘’nt Kuen.

BY 2 Nant,

Ww S 3 AGA.

—

H (4 Pr’ra Kuen.

ee AHMAD.

o 246 Kuyozen.

& § 7 Nasrst.

3 (8 Kayarat.

S¢- 9 BANTPAT:

B ‘10 Dopat.

77)

11 Kuarpar Kaet.

Ma’xv.

Sa’Gzal.

BatazaAt or

Bapozat.

Kwa’/NIZat. 1 Lou’r Kaa’/nNizat.

A/LI'ZAT. 2 Dap KHaA’NIZAI.

NU’RZATI.

KULA’ZAT.

Mv’stIzat.

SEGAT.

Ma‘tikya’R.

MAEZAI.

HArKALZAT.

MANZAKAT.

Ma’nrIKAtr,

Ha’rv'n.

KAMA‘LZAT.

KADAZAT.

Ka’/MEZAT.

Naozat.

ABDURRAH-

MA’/NZAT.

HLAMRA/NZAT

SHA/DIZAT,

Marpa’nt,

LaAsra’NI,

23 ADWA‘NI.

106 R. C, Temple— Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. [No. 3,

No. ‘Tribe. No. . Division. No. Section. Subdivision. No. Subsection.

ITI. Ka’kar. 1 Lowe’ Ka’Kar 1 Kuwatpa’p-

ZAI,

2 Mursta/nazat.

3 AKTARZAI.

4 AWAZAT.

5 MeEnrarzat.

6 SURGARAT.

7 JALAGAL.

8 Mv’sa KuHEtL

9 Kapr’zat.

10 Ba/RAKZAT.

2 Kucunat 11 Sunima’n 1 TRAGARAT.

Ka’Kar. KEL.

12 AMAND

KHELOor SIMAN-

THA or SANATI’A,

18 MEnHTARZAI.

14 Pa’NIZAT. 1 AbDIzat.

15 Ba’Zat.

16 SHAMOZATI.

17 SURGARAI.

18 ManaGat.

19 T’sa’ KHEL.

20 SaRA/NGZAT. 1 Mota’zat.

2 Ta’Ra’n. |

21 ZAKHPT’L. 1 AmaAKat, |

2 KaNnozat. |

3 NAozat. |

22 DuMAR.

23 Urma’n

KEL.

24 SANDAR 1 A’LYZAtr.

KHEL,

2 SHABOZAL.

3 Mur.

4 DarGat.

5 WaAHAR.

6 TENIZAI.

7 KAYANI.

LV. Lu’nt Kuen. 1 Hamzazat.

2 SaRa’Gt.

V. ZARKHA'N.

1880. ] - @. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapte. 107

Tribes of doubtful Afghan descent.

GANGALZAT.

BAGARZATI.

AJABZAT.

SHA’DIZAT.

BRAHAMZAT.

HAIDARZAT.

Ya’SINGZATI.

URUMZAI.

I. Savap.

ON AaOoOPRPr WD EH

I]. Karena.

(To be continued).

See

On the Stiryaprajiapti.cBy Dr. G. Turpaut, Principal, Benares College.

Parr I,

Until recent times our knowledge of the cosmological and astronomi-

cal system of the Jainas was very limited and founded not on‘an indepen-

dent investigation of the original Jaina literature, but only on the occasional

references made to Jaina- doctrines by the orthodox Hindu writers on

astronomy. For a long time the short account of the subject given by

Colebrooke in his “ Observations on the sect of the Jainas” (Asiatic Re-

searches, 1807; Essays, Vol. II), remained the only one, and although

accurate as far as it goes, it is very insufficient since it chiefly refers to the

one doctrine of the Jainas only, which has at all times struck outsiders as

peculiarly strange and absurd, vzz., the assertion that there exist two suns,

two moons and a double set of constellations. This is indeed the doctrine

by which the system of the Jainas could most easily be distinguished from

similar old Indian systems, and it is consequently referred to and contro-

verted with preference in the Siddhantas. The best known passage from

the latter is the one quoted by Colebrooke from Bhaskara’s Siddhdénta-

Siromani. “ The naked sectaries and the rest affirm that two suns, two

moons and two sets of stars appear alternately ; against them I allege this

reasoning. How absurd is the notion which you have formed of duplicate

suns, moons and stars, when you see the revolution of the polar fish.”

| This passage of Bhaskara’s is manifestly founded on a passage found

| in Brahmagupta’s Sphuta-Siddhanta where we read in the so-called Disha-

| nadhyaya :

wifa aq: vara ST qlaanrear fatia aa |

YAW AAU Wald Geswl AATLIG I

| Oo

108 G Thibaut—On the Stryaprajnapti. [No. 3,

“There are fifty-four nakshatras, two risings of the sun; this which

has been taught by Jina is untrue, since the revolution of the polar fish.

takes place within one day.”

And a passage to the same effect occurs in the 18th adhyaya of Varaha

Mihira’s Pafichasiddhantika.

In 1868 Professor A. Weber, to whom we are indebted for our first

acquaintance with so many works of Indian literature, published in the

tenth volume of the “ Indische Studien” a paper on the Stiryaprajiapti,

being apparently the most important astronomical book whose authority the

Jainas acknowledge, and it then appeared that the doctrine of the existence

of two suns, moons, ete. constitutes only one feature of a comprehensive

system which on the whole is much less fantastical than might have been

expected and which, fantastical or not, shows intimate relations to the

astronomical and cosmological views which appear to have prevailed all

over India before Greek science began to influence the Hast. Especially —

it appeared—as pointed out by Professor Weber—that the doctrine pro-

pounded in the Stiryaprajiapti shows in many points an unmistakable

resemblance with that contained in the Jyotisha-Vedaiiga the presumably

oldest specimen of Indian astronomical literature, and it thus became mani-

fest that the astronomical books of the Jainas do not only furnish informa-

tion about the opinions held by a limited religious sect, but may, if rightly

interrogated, yield valuable material for the general history of Indian ideas.

The writer of the present paper has therefore thought it worth while to

submit the Stryaprajiiapti to a renewed detailed investigation, whereby we

should be enabled rightly to esteem its position in the astronomical litera-

ture of India, clearly to conceive the peculiar features distinguishing the

astronomical system of the Jainas from other systems, and on the other

hand to point out what the Jaina system has in common with other systems,

and in what way therefore it may be employed for the elucidation of the

latter. Professor Weber’s paper gives in the main only a short summary

of the contents of each chapter of the Stryaprajfiapti, following the order

of the chapters as found in the work itself and omitting none of them.

This was of course the right plan to adopt in a paper giving the first

account of a hitherto unknown book. In the present paper it has on the

other hand been preferred to give a connected account of the chief doctrines

only which are found in the Stryaprajiiapti, to combine hints found in the

various parts of the work wherever this appeared necessary for the sake

of greater clearness, and again altogether to omit relatively unimportant

matter. It must be stated at the outset that this paper—like that of Pro-

fessor Weber—is based more on Malayagiri’s commentary on the Stirya-

prajiapti than on the text of the latter work itself ;. which apparently ||

anomalous proceeding finds its explanation in the fact of the Manuscripts

1880.] _ G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajiapti. 109

of the Stiryaprajiapti, commonly met with, containing the commentary only

an extenso, while as a rule only the first words of the passages commented

on are given. As it, however, appears that the commentary faithfully

follows the text, and as on the otherhand the latter, devoid of a commentary,

would be hardly intelligible, the absence of a complete text of the Strya-

prajnapti is less inconvenient that might at first be assumed. At any rate

we may obtain at present a sufficiently full and accurate knowledge of the

contents of the book; and in works of the class to which it belongs the

interest attaching to the form is a comparatively small one. As already

stated, the present paper is by no means intended as an exhaustive review

of the contents of the Stryaprajfapti ; it is rather meant as an introduction

to a complete edition of the work itself which, on account of the various old

materials it contains, well deserves to be published 7m ewtenso. And an

introduction of this kind could not well be missed, even if we possessed a

complete edition or translation of the book, as the reader of the text of

the work or of a literal translation of the text would find it by no means

an easy task unaided to reconstrue the leading features of the system.

‘The Stiryaprajfiapti is written in Jaina-prakrit, and divided into twenty

books called prabhritas, some of these again into chapters, called prabhrita-

prabhritas. The arrangement of the matter treated of is by no means

systematical, and the text, still more the commentary are full of tedious

reiterations. Malayagiri, the commentator, has done his work most con-

scientiously ; too conscientiously, the reader afflicted by his extraordinary

diffuseness often feels tempted to say. specially he delights in illustrat-

ing the numerical rules given in the text by at least half a dozen examples,

where one would have sufficed, dwelling with evident complacency on each

step even of the simplest calculation. But his comments are very per-

spicuous and certainly deserve to be extracted, although not to be repro-

duced in extenso.

Proceeding now to our proposed task, let us dispose at the outset of the

distinctive doctrine of the Jainas according to which there are two different

suns, two moons and two sets of constellations. When inquiring into the or1-

gin of this certainly peculiar notion, we are led toa very simple reason, an im-

partial consideration of which makes the Jaina system appear much less

fantastical and arbitrary than we at first are inclined to think. This reason

has already been pointed out by Colebrooke, Asiatic Researches, Vol. LX,

p. 321, where he says “ They (the Jainas) conceive the setting and rising of

stars and planets to be caused by the Mountain Sumeru and suppose three

times the period of a planet’s appearance to be requisite for it to pass

round Sumeru and return to the place where it emerges. Accordingly they

allot two suns, as many moons, and an equal number of each planet, stax

and constellation to Jambudvipa; and imagine that these appear on alter-

110 G. Thibaut— On the Stiryaprajanapte. [No. 3,

nate days south and north of Meru.” ‘These words scarcely require anything ~

added to be to them in the way of comment. The Jainas hold (as will be |

seen in detail further on) the old Indian idea of sun, moon and stars

revolving round Mount Meru. To anybody holding this opinion, the ques-

tion must have suggested itself ‘“ In what time is one such complete revo-

lution performed?” The prevailing opinion, represented for instance by

the Puranas, was that the whole revolution is performed in twenty-four

hours, so that the sun describes during the time when it is day in Bharata-

varsha the southern half of his circle, and during the time when it is night

to the south of Mount Meru, and day in the countries north of it, the northern

half. The Jainas, however, took a different view of the matter. To them it

seems to have appeared more appropriate that as there are four directions—

south, west, north and east—the sun’s circle should be divided into four

quarters corresponding to the four directions, and that he should bring day

in succession to the countries to the south, west, north and east of Meru

But then, as it must be supposed that his passing through each of the four

quarters occupies the same time, how can it come about that he again

appears to rise to the Bharatavarsha after the lapse of a period only suf-

ficient to advance his place by one quarter of the circle? Out of this

difficulty the Jainas extricated themselves by simply assuming that the

sun rising on a certain morning is not the same sun which had set on the

preceding evening, but a second sun similar in every way to the first one.

The whole circle is thus described by two suns separated from each other

by half the circumference, each of which appears in the Bharatavarsha on

alternate days. ‘The same reasoning lead to the assumption of two moons

and two sets of stars.

Great as appears to be the difference produced by this hypothesis

between the system of the Jainas and the commonly received opinions, it

practically is of very small importance and may—as will be done in the

following—as a rule be left altogether out of account whenever we have

to consider the motions of sun and moon. When for instance the sun having

started from Aégvini has passed through the twenty-eight nakshatras, he

enters, according to the generally received opinion, again into the same

nakshatra Asvini, according to the Jaina opinion into a second nakshatra

called Asvini too ; but as this second nakshatra has the same name, the

same extent, and the same relative position as its namesake, as like the

latter it is preceded by Revati and followed by Bharani, and as at the same

time when the sun has entered into the second Agvini, another sun the

exact and indistinguishable counterpart of the former one has entered into

the former Asvini, it is clear that we may, when speaking of the motion

of the heavenly bodies, save ourselves the trouble of continually referring

to two suns, two moons and two sets of nakshatras and, remembering

1880. ] G. Thibaut—On the Siryaprajnapti. 111

that there are two of each kind, express ourselves as if there were

only one. ‘To proceed.

The astronomic-chronological period on which the system of the

Suryaprajnapti is based, is the well-known quinquennial yuga or cycle

with which we have long been acquainted from the Jyotisha Veddfiga.

The same cycle is described in the Garga Samhita as we see from

the extant fragments of the latter work, and we learn from Vardha

Mihira’s Pafichasiddhantika that it likewise formed the fundamental

doctrine of a Paitimaha Siddhanta which, according to Vart4ha Mihira’s

judgment, was one of the more important Siddhantas known at his

time. It is alluded to and rejected in a few words by Brahmagupta

in the dtshanidhyaya of the Sphuta Brahma-siddhdnta. References

to this cycle are met with in the early history of Buddhism. Whether

the so-called Vedie literature is acquainted with a cycle of this nature

is doubtful.* It will not be necessary to dwell in this place at length

on the constitution of the yuga; it will suffice to state that it is based

on the assumption of five sidereal revolutions of the sun being exactly equal

in duration to sixty-seven periodical revolutions of the moon and to sixty-

two synodical months, while one complete revolution of the sun is supposed

to be performed in three hundred and sixty-six days. 'That a cycle of this

nature based as it is on an utterly wrong assumption could maintain itself

for a considerable time as it manifestly has done is a matter for legitimate

wonder, and does not find a parallel in the history of chronological systems

among any other civilized nation. At the end of one yuga already the

quantity of the error induced by the mistaken estimation of the length of

the solar year amounts to nearly 5 x { = 38} days, the accumulation of

which quantity after the lapse of a few yugas could not escape the atten-

tion, we should think, of even the most careless observers. The matter

would indeed lie altogether differently if a conjecture (or as it stands we

might almost say, an assertion) of Colebrooke referring to this point had

been verified. He—after having given an account of the manner in which

the Jyotisha-Vedanga manages to maintain harmony between civil and

lunar time—continues “and thus the cycle of five years consists of 1860

lunar days or 1830 nycthemera, subject to a further correction, for the

excess of nearly four days above the true sidereal year: but the exact

quantity of this correction and the method of making it, according to this

calendar, have not yet been sufficiently investigated to be here stated.”

The fact is that of this correction which Colebrooke considered so indis-

pensable, that he speaks of it as being actually found in the Vedanga, no

* The question referred to in the text cannot be discussed here. The writer

hopes shortly to find an occasion fully to treat it elsewhere.

112 G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 3,

traces are to be found either in the Veddnga itself or—and this is of great

importance as the Vedanga is still partially unexplained—in the Stiryapraj-__

fiapti which illustrates the constitution of the quinquennial yuga in the

most diffuse manner, but has nothing to say about a correction of the kind

mentioned.—The subdivisions of the yuga are in the Stiryaprajiiapti de-

scribed with great fulness ; what is really essential admits, however, of being

stated in a few words. Lach solar year is divided into two ayanas of one

hundred and eighty-three days each. Hach ayana in its turn comprises

six solar months, each of which lasts 80} days. ‘Two of these solar months

constitute a solar season ; the reckoning of the seasons starts, however, not

from the beginning of the yuga, but the latter is made to mark the middle

of a season, so that the rainy season which counts as the first begins a

month, before the beginning of the yuga. Again the yuga comprises five

years of 360 days each, each year in its turn being divided into twelve

months of 30 days each ; in the Stryaprajfiapti this kind of year—com-

monly known as the savana year—is called the harma-year or ritu-year

which latter name would more properly be given to the solar year.

The six days by which this year is shorter than the solar year are called

atirdtras, Again the yuga comprises sixty-two synodical months, the first

of whom begins with the moon being full in the first point of Abhijit.

Each of these months is divided into a light and a dark half; each half

comprises fifteen tithis or lunar days of equal duration. Sixty-two of these

months being equal in duration to sixty-one karma-months of 80 days

each, it follows that sixty-two tithis are equal to sixty-one natural

days; in order therefore to maintain harmony between the numbers

of the natural days and those of the tithis, a break in the count-

ing of the tithis is made whenever two tithis terminate during one

natural day, ze. according to the Stryaprajiapti on the occurrence

of each sixty-second tithi. The details of this process are not stated

in the Stryaprajiapti, but there can be no doubt that mutatis mutandis it

was managed as it has been managed in India ever since. To give an

example, the sixtieth natural day, counting from the beginning of the

yuga, during which the sixtieth tithi terminated was counted as pancha-

dasi (fifteenth tithi), the next following day as pratipad (first day of th®

new lunar half month) and then the day after that not as dvitiya, second

lunar day, but as tritiya third lunar day, the second lunar day having

already terminated together with the preceding sixty-first natural day,

These sixty-two lunar months are divided among five lunar years, the first,

second and fourth of which comprise twelve lunations each, while the third

and fifth count thirteen each. The technical name of years of the latter

kind is abhivardhita-samvatsara, the increased year. The method accord-

ing to which the two thirteenth months are intercalated in the yuga is

1880. | - G. Thibaut—On the Stryaprajnapti. 113

not described in detail; it is however clear enough how it proceeded.

The thirty-first lunation and again the sixty-second one were not counted,

but formed together with the month immediately following a kind of

double month taking its name from the second constituting member. Thus

there is nominally no thirteenth month, and a proper name for the latter is

therefore not required.

Again the yuga consists of sixty-seven periodical lunar months, the

moon during it returning sixty-seven times to the place from which she

had started at the beginning. No attempt is made in the Stryaprajiiapti

to group these months into years nor are they subdivided into days of

equal duration ; they are simply said to comprise 27 2+ days each. They

are, however, subdivided into two ayanas each, analogously to the division

of the solar year into ayanas. ‘This division is indeed legitimate enough

as it is based on the alternate progress of the moon towards the north and

south, about which details will be given later on. Less comprehensible is

on the other hand the division of each periodical month into six lunar

seasons, whose names answer to those of the solar seasons beginning with

the rainy season; a division of this kind is of course utterly gratuitous

and purposeless, and to us interesting only as a specimen of the Indian’s

excessive tendency to systematize.

If we now proceed to an examination of the account given in. the

Stryaprajnapti of the revolutions of sun and moon, we find at the outset

that it differs from the statements made by Garga and in the Veddnga in

one important point. According to the latter authorities (see Jyotisha-

Vedanga, v. 6 ; this Journal for 1877, p. 415; Weber, Nakshatras I], pp. 28,

33), the yuga begins with the winter solstice, at the moment when it is new-

moon, sun and moon being in conjunction in the beginning of the nakshatra

Dhanishthd; according to the Stiryaprajfiapti the yuga begins with the

summer solstice, at the moment when the moon is full in the beginning

of Abhijit and the sun consequently stands in Pushya. The coincidence of

the winter solstice with new moon marking, according to the Vedanga, the

beginning of the yuga may of course actually have taken place at the time

when the doctrine of the quinquennial yuga was first established and will

have recurred later on from time to time; but it is evident that it could

not regularly recur every fifth year. To this fact, however, as well as to

the change which in consequence of the precession of the equinoxes gra-

dually took place in the position of the sun at the time of the winter

solstice, the eyes of the Hindus seem to have remained shut during a

considerable period. Now it is curious to see that in this one point at

least the author of the Stiryaprajiapti who, on the whole, faithfully adheres

to the old system and does not hesitate to take over the quinquennial yuga

itself with all its glaring imperfections, considered himself entitled or

114 G. Thibaut—On the Stryaprajnapti. [No. 3,

obliged to deviate from the received tradition. For once the testimony of

the eyes was placed above old authorities. In the first place, the winter _

solstice had so far receded from the beginning of Dhanishth4 that the

change could not be ignored ; in the second place, it must have so happened

that at the time of the author of the Stryaprajfiapti no new moon took

place together with the winter solstice, while—as we may presume—some

full moon happened to coincide or nearly to coincide with some summer

solstice. Accordingly the beginning of the yuga was changed. Faute de

mieux the summer solstice coinciding with full moon was taken as the

new starting-point, and the sun’s place at the time was removed from the

middle of Aslesha which it had occupied in the old system to a point in

Pushya. The moon’s place at the time of the summer solstice, being sepa-

rated from the sun’s place by half the circumference, is then at the begin-

ning of Abbijit; the latter point marks at the same time the sun’s place

at the time of the winter solstice.

The account given in the Stryaprajfiapti of the position of the sun at

the two solstices enables us to enter into a consideration of the approximate

time at which either the work itself or some older work on which it may have

been based was composed. ‘The expression “approximate” is used on purpose

as the general difficulties besetting an estimation of this kind referring to

Indian astronomical works are well known, and asin our case special difficul-

ties arise in addition to them. As willbe seen later on, the Stryaprajiapti

throughout employs twenty-eight nakshatras of unequal extent, while the

Vedadnga as well as the bulk of the later astronomical literature make use of

twenty-seven nakshatras of equal extent. The relation of these two systems

to each other necessitates a short excursus, for the starting-point of which

we take a passage in Bhaskara’s Siddhanta Siromani (Grahaganita, Spash-

tadhikara, 71-74, p. 93 of Bapu Deva’s edition) and a parallel passage from

Brahmagupta’s Sphuta-siddhanta. The former of the two, translated, runs

as follows :

“ This method of finding the Nakshatras which has thus been taught

in a rough manner by the astronomers for the purposes of common life, I

shall now teach in an accurate form as it has been proclaimed by the rishis

for the purpose of processions, marriages, etc. The experts have declared

six (nakshatras) to have one portion and a half, véz., Visakha, Punarvasu

and the (four) nakshatras called dhruva; six to have half a portion, v7z.,

the constellations presided over by the Sarpas, Rudra, Vayu, Yama, Indra,

Varuna; the remaining fifteen to have one portion each. The portion of

one nakshatra is called the mean motion of the moon (during one ahoratra).

The minutes of the circle lessened by the portions of all (the 27 mentioned)

nakshatras are the portion of Abhijit, lying beyond the nakshatra of the

Visve Devas, etc.” These statements are repeated in Bhaskara’s own

1880. ] G. Thibaut—On the Siryaprajnapti. 115

commentary, the Vasand, where the common names of the nakshatras

(Visékhd4, Punarvasu, Rohini, the three Uttaras ;— Aéglesha, Ardra, Svati,

Bharani, Jyeshtha, Satabhishaj) are given and where Pulisa, Vasishtha,

Garga and others are said to be the Rishis alluded to in the text. The

rough mode of computation referred to in the beginning of the above quo-

tation is the one contained in v. 67 of the same chapter and agrees with

the rule given in the Strya Siddhanta, II, 64. According to it, when

we wish to find the place of sun or moon or one of the planets in the circle

of the nakshatras, we have to divide the longitude of the heavenly body ex-

pressed in minutes by 800 ; the quotient then shows the number of naksha-

tras through which the planet has already passed, and the remainder the

traversed part of the nakshatra in which it is at the time. This rule there-

fore bases on the assumption of twenty-seven nakshatras each of which

extends over one twenty-seventh part of the circle. Now, according to

Bhaskara, the Rishis taught that whenever greater accuracy is required, the

nakshatras have to be considered as being of unequal extent. In the first

place only fifteen of them are to be regarded as having the average extent,

while six exceed that amount by one half and six others remain below it

by one half; and in the second place the twenty-seven nakshatras are no

longer to occupy the whole circle, but only that part of it which corresponds

to twenty-seven times the mean daily motion of the moon, while the

remaining part of the circle is assigned to a twenty-eighth nakshatra Abhijit.

Bhaskara’s statements are manifestly founded on a passage met with in

the 14th chapter of the Sphuta Brahmasiddhaénta which gives the same

details regarding the different extent of the nakshatras, and is introduced

by the following verse—

Tifemtraaa fare caa ass TaTA |

TAIAMAIS AANSTa TSfATA Il

“The calculation of the nakshatras, which has been taught in the Paulisa,

Romaka, Vasishtha, Saura, Paitimaha Siddhdntas, is not mentioned by

Aryabhata ; I therefore proceed to explain it.”

And later on—

Syufeaatta dfearatafeattar ware: |

que sala Aaa aHS IH AeTAITA Il

The explicit statement about number and extent of the nakshatras in

the older period of Indian astronomy, which is contained in the two pas-

sages quoted from Brahmagupta and Bhaskara, is of considerable interest.

Ifthe account given by these two writers is correct and there is no reason

to doubt of that, it appears in the first place that the mere circumstance

of only twenty-seven nakshatras being mentioned in some detached frag-

ment of an astronomical work which we do not possess in-its entirety,

116 G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 3,

would not justify the conclusion of the author of the work having been

acquainted with twenty-seven nakshatras only. Nay, even the author of a

treatise like the Vedanga who throughout speaks of 27 nakshatras only

may have done this simply because he meant his work to be an elementary

one, unencumbered by the assumption of 28 nakshatras of unequal extent.

In the second place the distinct statement that the old writers on astronomy

made use of Abhijit solely when greater accuracy was aimed at, and that

they then made its extent to correspond to the excess of a sidereal month

above twenty-seven days, certainly seems to point to the conclusion that

the introduction of Abhijit into the circle of the nakshatras was an after-

thought, consequent on the improved knowledge of the length of the moon’s

periodical revolution. With regard to the books in which, according to

Bhaskara and Brahmagupta, the division of the sphere into 28 nakshatras

of unequal extent was taught in addition to the simpler division into 27

equal nakshatras, we have to remark that the Strya-siddhanta known to us

contains no such statement; the Saura-siddhanta of Brahmagupta may

have been a different work. We are unable to control the statement with

regard to the Romaka, Paulisa, Vasishtha-Siddhantas. Of Garga, how-

ever, we know from quotations several passages bearing on the point in

question: in the first place, the passage quoted by Bhattotpala (in his com-

mentary an Varéha Mihira’s Brihatsamhita, IV, 7 ; see Weber, Nakshatvas,

T, p. 809), which corroborates Bhdskara’s statement regarding the different

extent of the Nakshatras, is, however, silent about Abhijit. As the passage

stands, it would lead us to infer that Garga divided the whole circle into

twenty-seven parts, the extent of fifteen of which is equal to one, of six to

one half and of six to one anda half. The quotation may, however, be

incomplete, and at any rate we have Brahmagupta’s and Bhaskara’s word

for Abhijit having been acknowledged by Garga too. However this may

be, that Garga, as a rule, introduced into his calculations neither Abhijit

nor the inequality of the extent of the twenty-seven nakshatras, appears

from the places which he assigns to the sun at the two solstices, viz., at

the beginning of Dhanishthé and the middle of Aslesha ; for if we calculate

the place of the summer solstice by starting from the beginning of Dha-

nishtha and making use of the unequal extent of the nakshatras, we obtain

as place of the summer solstice not the middle of Aslesha but rather the

end of it or the beginning of Magha.

To return. The special difficulty by which we are met when attempting

to compare the places assigned to the solstices in the Suryaprajfiapti with

the places which they occupy according to Garga and the Vedanga on one

hand and the Siddhantas on the other hand, lies in the circumstance of our

not knowing exactly how the two divisions of the sphere—the one into 27

nakshatras of equal extent, the other into 28 of unequal extent—were made

1880. ] G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. 117

to correspond with each other. If we suppose—and this seems the most like-

ly supposition—that each of the 27 nakshatras was curtailed by the twenty-

seventh part of the small portion assigned to Abhijit and that the reckon-

ing started from the beginning of Abhijit, (which according to the system

_ of the Stiiryaprajiapti is the first of the series, as at the beginning of the

yuga it is in conjunction with the moon), we may hazard an hypothesis

with regard to the time lying between the Vedanga and the Stryaprajiapti,

or rather between the observations of the solstices recorded in the two-

works. According to the Vedanga the winter solstice takes place in the

beginning of Dhanishtha, according to the Stryaprajiapti in the beginning

of Abhijit (which is the place of the full moon on the day of the summer

solstice at the beginning of the yuga, and consequently the place of the

sun on the day of the winter solstice); the two places are there-

fore separated by the whole of Sravana and Abhijit. Having, according to

the hypothesis stated above, reduced the extent of Sravana (= 13°°83)

by the 27th part of the extent of Abhijit, which extent is equal to about

4°°12, we obtain for Sravana 13:°18 ; to this we add Abhijit = 4°°12; the

sum viz., 17°°3 indicates the extent of the displacement of the solstice

during the intervening period. Allowing seventy-two years for 1° of pre-

cession, the length of this period would be about 1246 years. If we there-

- fore knew the absolute date of the Vedinga we might state the approxi-

mate absolute date of the observation recorded in the Stiryaprajiapti, on

the supposition always of the manner in which the two divisions of the

sphere have been adjusted to each other being the right one. But, as

Professor Whitney has shown, itis scarcely possible to form any satisfactory

conclusion with regard to the date of the Vedanga, and we therefore abstain

from giving a positive opinion about the date of the Stryaprajfiapti.

We now proceed to a detailed consideration of the hypothesis by which

_ the author of the Stryaprajfiapti tries to account for the appearances pre-

sented by the various motions of the heavenly bodies, beginning with the

| sun.

The three different motions of the sun which he endeavours to explain

are firstly, the daily motion in consequence of which the sun seems to

_ approach us from the East, passes through our field of vision and finally

disappears in the West; secondly, the annual motion in consequence

of which the sun seems to pass in the course of a year through the circle

of the nakshatras, proceeding from the West towards the Hast; and thirdly

the motion in declension according to which the sun ascends towards the

north during one half of the year and descends towards the south during

the other half. As in all systems which consider the daily motion of the

| sun to be real (not an appearance produced by the revolution of the earth

118 G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 3,

round its axis), the annual motion of the sun through the circle of the

nakshatras is said to be apparent only, and produced by the cireumstance of

the motion of the sun being somewhat slower than that of the nakshatras,

so that he daily lags behind by a certain quantity which accumulated during

a whole year amounts to an entire revolution. How the Stryaprajiapti

supposes the first and third motions to take place will appear from the

following.

Tt must be remembered at the outset that the general conception of

the configuration of the world which we find in the Stryaprajiapti is the

same as that known from the Puranas. The earth is considered to be an

immense circular flat consisting of a number of concentric rings, called

dvipas, separated from each other by ring-shaped oceans. In the centre

of the earth stands Mount Meru; around it runs the first dvipa—Jambu-

dvipa, the only one which will concern us in the following. It is sur-

rounded by a circular ocean, the water of which is salt (the lavana-samudra).

The southern segment of the Jambudvipa is occupied by the Bharatavarsha,

the northern segment by the Airavata-varsha ; east and west of Mount

Meru are the two portions of the Videha-varsha. Sun, moon and stars

revolve round Mount Meru, in circles of different height above the Jambu-

dvipa, the same heavenly body, however, always keeping the same height.

The detailed features of these motions are now according to the Strya-

prajiapti as follows.

The circumstance of the sun seeming during one half of the year to

approach daily more and more the north, while during the other half he

seems to descend towards the south is explained in the following manner.

On the longest day of the year which at the beginning of the cycle coincides

with the first day of the lunar month S‘ravana, the sun describes round the

mountain Meru a circle, the diameter of which is 99,640 yojanas. The dis-

tance of the sun from the centre of Meru amounts therefore to 49,820

yojanas. On the next day the sun describes a circle concentric with the

first, and having a diameter greater by 5 8% yojanas, so that the distance

of the sun, from Mount Meru now amounts to 49,820 + 2 48 yojanas. In

the same manner the diameter of the circle described by the sun increases

by 5 88 on the third day, fourth day, etc., up to the day of the winter

solstice, which according to the system is the 1883rd day after the summer

solstice. On this day the sun describes round Mount Meru a circle, the

diameter of which is equal to 100,660 yojanas, so that his distance from

Mount Meru amounts to 50,330 yojanas. Beginning from this day the

solar circles contract again, by the same quantity daily by which they had

expanded during the southern progress of the sun. During the 182 days |

intervening between the day of the winter solstice and the day of the fol-

lowing summer solstice the sun describes again the same 162 circles in

1880.] _ G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. 119

which he had descended towards the south, only in reverse order, until, on

the day of the second summer solstice, he has again reached the innermost

circle, from which he had started a year ago. During the second year the

same expanding and contracting of the solar circles repeats itself and so on.

The fact of the sun seeming to ascend towards the north during one half

of the year, while he seems to descend towards the south during the other

half is therefore explained by the-supposition that he approaches us during

the former half, while he recedes from us during the latter half. The

system does not assume that he actually ascends or descends; for all the

circles described by him are at an equal height above the Jambudvipa; he

only appears to us to stand lower at the winter solstice than he does at the

summer solstive, because at the former period he has receded from us to

the amount of five hundred and fifty yojanas. The exact localities too above

which the sun describes his daily circles are defined. The innermost circle,

4. é., the circle nearest to Mount Meru, which the sun describes on the

longest day, would, when projected upon the earth, be distant 180 yojanas

from the outer margin of the Jambudvipa. The second circle approaches

nearer to that margin, the third still nearer, and so on, until the circles

of the sun are no longer above the Jambudvipa itself but above the salt

ocean, the lavanoda, which surrounds the Jambudvipa. Finally on the

shortest day of the year the sun describes a circle which, in projection, is

distant 330 yojanas from the edge of the Jambudvipa. After that he again

approaches the Jambudvipa, and on the next summer solstice he has again

entered into it to the amount of 180 yojanas. The technical term by

which this recurring progress of the sun towards the Jambudvipa and the

salt ocean is denoted in the Stiryaprajiiapti, is gaTez or Waarefa (-a) ;

the sun is said to merge himself, or to enter to a certain distance into the

Jambudvipa or into the salt ocean accordingly as his circles are vertically

above the land or the surrounding sea.

In connexion with the sun’s motion in circles of different diameter, the

Stiryaprajfiapti treats of the increase and decrease of the length of the day.

As in the Jyotisha-Vedanga, the length of the day of the summer solstice

is estimated at eighteen muhitrtas, that of the shortest day at twelve

muhirtas. The days between the two solstices are erroneously supposed

to decrease or increase by a uniform quantity, which is easily found to be

equal to ~85 == {4 of a muhtrta.

A number of opinions of other teachers agreeing with the theory stated

above in its general features, but differing in the figures, are likewise given

by the Stiryaprajfapti.

Different opinions regarding the extent of the solar circles are given

in I, 8 and, which comes to the same, different opinions about the distance

of the two suns from each other in I, 4. According to this chapter there

120 G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 3,

were six different opinions about the distance of the two suns from each

other on the longest day when the sun—or the two suns—describe the inner-

most and smallest circle. According to some teachers, the distance of the

two from each other, or in other words the diameter of the circle they

describe amounts to 1,133 yojanas, according to others to 1,134 yojanas ;

according to others again to 1,135 yojanas. Most probably we have to

combine with these statements the statements given in the next chapter

(1, 5) regarding the different opinions prevailing on the extent to which

the sun “ immerges” himself into the Jambudvipa and into the salt ocean.

There we read that, according to one opinion the sun moves on the

longest day in a circle which projected on the Jambudvipa is dis-

tant 1,133 yojanas from the edge of the latter, while on the shortest

day he describes a circle above the salt ocean at the distance of 1,133

yojanas from the Jambudvipa. According to the opinions of two other

sets of teachers, the number of yojanas in both cases is 1,184 and

1,135. If we combine these measures with the measures of the diameter

of the innermost solar circle given above (and the sameness of the figures

seems to entitle us to do so, although this is by no means explicitly stated),

we get for the diameter of the whole Jambudvipa 1,183 (= diameter of the

innermost circle) + 2 x 1,183 ( = distance of the innermost circle from

the edge of the Jambudvipa on both sides), therefore altogether 3,399 yoja-

nas ; or, starting from the numbers 1,134 and 1,185, 3,402 or 3,405 yojanas.

These are very moderate dimensions compared with the 100,000 yojanas,

which length the author of the Stryaprajiapti himself attributes to the

diameter of the Jambudvipa, and we shall not be mistaken in ascribing to

opinions of this nature a considerably greater antiquity than to those

represented by the Stryaprajfapti. Besides, there is another circumstance

in favour of such a view. The Stryaprajiapti throughout makes use of

the relation 4/10 : 1 for calculating the circumference of a circle. Thus

for instance the diameter of the Jambudvipa being 100,000 (yojanas), its

circumference is said to amount to 316,227 yojanas 3 gavy. 128 dhan. 13}

aig. But those teachers who stated the diameter of the innermost solar

circle to amount to 1,183 or 1,134 or 1,185 yojanas stated at the same time

that its circumference amounts to 3,399 or 3,402 or 3,405 yojanas, 7. e., they

made use of the relation 3: 1 for calculating the circumference of a circle

from its diameter. The adoption of this very rough approximate value

seems to point back to a comparatively ancient time.*

* It seems that all Jaina books take 1: 4/10 as expressing the relation of the

diameter to the circumference. See for instance Bhagavati Stitra II, 1. 45 (Weber,

p. 264), where, however, some confusion seems to have crept into the figures. The old

and simple relation 1: 3 is found for instance in the Bhtimiparvan contained in the

Bhishmaparvan of the Mahabharata. There the circumferences of the planets are

1880. ] _ G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. 121

Three more opinions concerning the distance of the two suns from

each other on the longest day are quoted. According to the first, one whole

dvipa with the addition of the surrounding ocean intervenes between the

two; according to the second two dvipas and two oceans; according to

the third three dvipas and three oceans. The distance in yojanas is not

given. ‘Two more opinions concerning the extent to which the sun enters

into the Jambudvipa are stated ; according to some the sun enters on the

longest day into half the Jambudvipa and on the shortest day into half the

salt ocean; the distances in yojanas are not mentioned. And according to

others the sun enters neither into the Jambudvipa nor into the salt ocean,

but moves in the interval (apantarala) of the two ; how we have to imagine

this interval does not appear.

The eighth chapter of the first book contains a long exposition

of the dimensions of the circles described by the sun. Four different

dimensions are stated. Instead of simply giving the length of the

diameter, the length and breadth (ayama and vishkambha) are given ;

these two are of course equal in a circle. Then the circumference

of the circle is given, according to the ratio 4/10 : 1, and finally the

“ vahalya,”’ the thickness of the circle, 7. e., the diameter of the space

filled by the mass of the sun or more simply the diameter of the sun himself.

This amounts according to the Stryaprajiapti to 48 of a yojana. The

diameter and the circumference of the circles are of course continually

changing, the circle described on the longest day having the smallest

dimensions and that described on the shortest day having the greatest.

The dimensions of the small circle and the amount of the daily increase

have been mentioned above ; it is therefore not necessary to follow the

Commentator into the very tedious calculation of the dimension of each

daily circle. The opinions of three other teachers on the dimensions of

the circles, according to which the diameter amounts to 1,183 yojanas etc.,

have already been mentioned ; the thickness of the circle; z. e., the diameter

of the sun is held by them to amount to one yojana.

We turn now to the statements regarding the velocity with which the

sun moves in his different circles, and among these at first to those made

by the Stiryaprajfapti itself. The calculation is a very simple one. Each

daily circle being described by two suns, each of which travels through half

of it in thirty muhtrtas, the whole circle is described by one sun in sixty

muhtirtas, and consequently we have, in order to find the velocity of the

sun, to divide the periphery of the daily circle by sixty ; the quotient is

the number of yojanas travelled through by the sun in one muhtrta. Thus

the sun, when travelling in the smallest innermost circle, the cireumference

stated in numbers which are the threefold of the numbers expressing the diameters :

Fas Vey UHM SH Ga | faa Faas ayia awayq ete.

122 G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 3,

of which is 315,089 yojanas long, passes in one muhtirta through 5,251 2%

-yojanas. On the following day both suns travel in tle second circle which

is somewhat larger than the first one, and consequently the suns having to

describe a larger space in the same time, 7. e., during the duration of a

nycthemeron travel somewhat faster, pass in one muhtrta through 5,251

47 yojanas. Thus day after day the speed of the two suns is increasing in

accordance with the continually increasing extent of the diurnal circles,

until on the day of the winter solstice both suns travelling in the outmost

circle pass through 5,805 25 yojanas in one muhtrta. Beginning from this

day their speed diminishes as they are again approachiug the innermost

circle, until on the day of the next summer solstice their rate of speed is

again at its minimum. In connexion with this discussion of the swiftness

of the sun, the Stryaprajnapti treats of the question of the distance from

which the light of the sun becomes visible to the inhabitants of the Bhara-

ta-varsha. By this distance we have, however, to understand not the dis-

tance of the sun from the Bharata-varsha in a straight line, but rather that

part of the sun’s daily circle which les between the point of the sun’s

rising and the meridian. It is well known, says the Commentator, that the

sun becomes visible to the eye of man at a distance equal to half of the

extent (kshetra) over which he travels during the whole day, 2. e., at the

time of his rising, his distance from us (=from our meridian, although this

is not expressly stated in the Stryaprajfiapti) is half of the are which he

describes during the whole day. The length of this are has to be

measured simply by the time which the sun takes to travel through it.

Thus, for instance, on the longest day the sun is visible to the inhabitants of

the Bharata-yarsha during eighteen muhtrtas out of thirty ; from the

moment of his rising he will therefore take nine muhtrtas to come up to

the point straight in front of us (to the meridian), Now we have seen

before that on the longest day the sun travels over 5,251 2% yojanas in one

muhtrta ; consequently he travels in nine mubhtrtas over 47,263 23 yojanas.

This therefore is the distance—expressed as an are of the diurnal circle

—at which he becomes visible to the eye of man. On the shortest

day on the other hand the sun is visible for twelve muhurtas only ; we have

therefore to multiply the amount of his motion in one muhurta by six in

order to find the distance at which he first appears to the eye of man on

that day.

Regarding the swiftness of the sun four other opinions are recorded

by the author of the Saryaprajiapti. According to some teachers, the sun

travels in one muhtirta over six thousand yojanas, and as far as it appears

this rate of motion is the same in whatever circle the sunismoving. How

these teachers accounted for the fact of the sun taking the same time to

travel through a large circle as through a small one is not explained. The

1880. | eG: Thibaut—On the Stryaprajnapte. 123

amount of space illuminated on each day (the tapakshetra), expressed as are

of the diurnal circle of the sun, they calculated in the same manner as the

author of the Stiryaprajiiapti, v7z., by multiplying the amount of motion

in one muhtrta by the number of the muhtrtas of the day. Thus the

tapakshetra on the longest day would amount to 108,000 yojanas, that on

the shortest day to 72,000 yojanas. According to the opinions of two other

schools, the motion of the sun in one muhtrta amounts to 5,000 yojanas or

4,000 yojanas. Here too nothing is said about any variation in the sun’s

speed at different times of the year. The tapakshetra is calculated in the

manner stated above. The last opinion mentioned is that of some teachers

who held the rate of speed of the sun to be different during different

periods of the day. According to them, the sun passes over six thousand

yojanas in the muhitrta after his rising and in the muhtrta preceding his

setting, over four thousand yojanas during the muhtrta in the middle of

the day and over five thousand yojanas in all other muhtrtas.

The various opinions prevailing with regard to the rising and setting

of the sun are detailed in the first chapter of the second book. The opinion

of the author clearly appears from what has already been stated. ‘There is

no real sunrise or sunset ; the sun or rather the two suns revolving round

Mount Meru appear to rise to the inhabitants of some particular place at

the moment when they enter their field of vision, and they appear to set

when they leave it. In reality they always move above the Jambudvipa at

the same height, estimated by the Suryaprajiiapti to amount to eight hun-

dred yojanas. At the beginning of the yuga at sunrise on the first of

Sravana the Bharata sun becomes visible to the Bharata-varsha having

reached the south-east point of his diurnal circle ; diametrically opposite to

it, viz., in the north-west point of the same circle the Airavata sun appears

to rise to the inhabitants of the tracts north of Mount Meru. During the

| course of this day the Bharata sun therefore illuminates the countries to

the south; the Airavata sun those to the north of Meru. At the time of

sunset the Bharata sun having passed through the southern segment of his

circle disappears from the view of the people south of Meru and enters the

| view of those west of Meru; these latter therefore have their day while it

is night in Bharata-varsha. At the same time the Airavata sun appears to

have set to the people north of Meru and to have risen to those east of

Meru. On the second day the Bharata sun rises to the countries north of

Meru and the Airdvata sun to the Bharata-varsha. On the third morning

the Bharata syn has completed a full circle and therefore again rises to the

Bharata-varsha while the Airavata sun again rises to the regions north of

Meru. And so on ad infinitum. We may recall here a parallel passage

from the Vishnupurana (II, 8), tending to illustrate how sunrise and sun-

| set were conceived to take place on the hypothesis of the sun (the Puranas

124 G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 3

know of one sun only) moving round Meru. “The sun is stationed at all

times in the middle of the day (@. e., it is always midday at that place

above which the sun is) and over against midnight in all dvipas. In the

same manner rising and setting are at all times opposite to each other in

all the cardinal and intermediate points. When the sun becomes visible to

any people, to them he is said to rise, and wherever he disappears from the

view there his setting is said to take place. Of the sun which is always

(above the earth) there is neither setting nor rising; his appearance and

disappearance are called his setting and rising.”’*

The Stiryaprajfiapti adds an interesting account of other views regard-

ing the sideway-motion (tiryag-gati) of the sun. According to some the

sun is not a divinity, but only a mass of rays which in the morning form

themselves in the East into a globular shape, pass sideways along this visible

world, and in the evening dissolve again in the West. This process repeats

itself daily. According to others the sun is the well-known divinity ; but

each morning he is born anew according to his nature in the ether in the

East (svabhavad akasa utpadyate), passes along this world and dissolves

(vidhvamsate) at evening in the ether in the West. According to others

the sun is the mighty everlasting god known from the Puranas; in the

morning he rises in the East, passes over this world, and at evening sets in

the West ; from thence he returns below to the East, illuminating the parts

below. This—the commentator says—is the opinion of those who hold the

earth to be a globe ; it finds great favour at present among the tirthantari-

yas and is thoroughly to be studied in their Purdnas. This opinion has

three sub-divisions. Some say the sun returning at daybreak from the

parts below rises in the ether (akase) and sets in the ether; others say he

rises or originates (uttishthati utpadyate) in the morning on the summit

of the mountain of rising (udaya-bhtdhara-sirasi) and perishes (? vidhvam-

sate) in the evening on the summit of the mountain of setting (astamaya-

bhidhara-girasi) ; this repeats itself daily. (But, if he ‘ utpadyate” and

“ vidhvamsate,”’ how can he pass under the earth during the night ?).

Others say he rises in the morning on the mountain of rising and enters in

the evening into the mountain of setting, illuminates during the night the

subterraneous world and rises again from the mountain of rising. Others

say, he rises, that is, originates from the eastern ocean in the morning, pe-

* Mr. Fitz-Edward Hall (Wilson’s Vishnu Purana, Vol. II, p. 242) directs

our attention to the “heliocentricism” taught in this passage. But clearly there is

no trace of heliocentricism to be found in it. He apparently is misled by the words

BA Wad: Aa: which he translates “of the sun which is always in one and the

same place.” But this translation is quite untenable, since the Vishnu Purana most

unambiguously teaches the sun’s revolution round Mount Meru,

1880. ] - G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapte. 125

yishes at evening in the western ocean (same objection as above); others again,

he rises from the eastern ocean, enters at evening into the western ocean,

passes during the night through the subterraneous world, rises again from

the eastern ocean. The last opinion mentioned is not very clear and an

account of it is therefore not given in this place.

The third and fourth books contain particulars about the tapakshetra,

i. €., that part of the Jambudvipa which on each day is illuminated by the

sun or rather by the two suns. The shape of this tapakshetra the Stirya-

prajiapti compares to that of a kalambuka-flower turned upwards, a com-

parison which has to be understood in the following manner. Hach of the

two suns illuminates a sector of the large circle formed by the Jambudvipa.

These sectors are, however, not complete, but a piece is cut off from each

by Mount Meru which standing in the middle of the circle repels by its

own superior radiancy the rays proceeding from the two suns and therefore

is not included in the tapakshetra. The interior border of the sectors is

thus formed by a part of the circumference of Mount Meru, their outward

border by a part of the circumference of the Jambudvipa. Between these

two sectors of light there lie two sectors of shade (andhakdra) ; whatever

part of the Jambudvipa is covered by the two former enjoys day at the

time while it is night in the regions covered by the dark sectors. As the

two suns revolve these four sectors revolve with them, sweeping over the

whole extent of the Jambudvipa and producing alternate day and night in

all its parts. The relative magnitudes of the tapakshetra during the differ-

ent parts of the year is estimated in accordance with the statements about

the relative length of night and day. On the longest day the two suns,

_ moving in the innermost circle, together illuminate three-fifths of the Jam-

| budyipa, each of them three-tenths ; on the shortest day they illuminate

two-tenths each, together two-fifths. On the day after the summer solstice

| when the suns have entered into the second circle, and are moving at a

greater distance from the centre, the extent of the tapakshetra decreases

accordingly, so that it then equals ; —— = = — ae of the

_ whole Jambudvipa only ; the same decrease repeats itself daily up to the

_ day of the winter solstice when the extent of the illuminated portion of

the Jambudvipa has reached the minimum stated above. From that period

| it again begins to increase by the same portion daily. From this the

| absolute dimensions of the tapakshetra or, to express it more conveniently,

}of one of the two sectors composing the tapakshetra are easily derived.

| The two straight lines by which it is limited are equal in length to the

'vadius of the Jambudvipa less the radius of Mount Meru (50,000 — 5,000

= 45,000 yojanas). ‘To this we find in one passage of the Stiryaprajnapti

added the sixth part of the breadth of the salt ocean surrounding the Jam-

126 +. Thibaut— On the Siryaprajiapti. [No. 3,

budvipa, up to the end of which the light of the sun seems to reach, on the

longest day at least ; this gives altogether 78,3835 yojanas (= 45,000 +

200,000

): In the statements regarding the measure of the two ares

limiting the sector, no reference is made to the salt ocean. We find these

measures for the longest day by dividing the circumference of Mount

Meru as well as that of the Jambudvipa by ten; three of these ten parts of

the first kind give the interior are of the truncated sector, three of the

second kind the exterior arc. On the shortest day we have to take two-

tenths instead of three, and there is no difficulty in finding the corresponding

increase or decrease on all days between the summer and winter solstice.

In the same manner the dimensions of the andhakara, the dark portion of

the Jambudvipa, are readily ascertained. Finally some statements are made

about the distances to which the light of the two suns reaches above, below

and towards both sides. Itis said to reach to a thousand yojanas above

(above the chariot of the sun, svavimanad trdhvam). Further it is said

to reach down to the depth of 1,800 yojanas, for which the following expla-

nation is given. The sun is at the height of 800 yojanas above the earth,

and below the surface of the earth at the depth of 1.000 yojanas are the

subterraneous regions (adholaukikagramah), down to which the sun’s rays

are penetrating. No further details about these subterraneous dwellings

are given. Towards both sides, the east and the west, the light of the sun

is said to extend to the distance of 47,263 23 yojanas.

For the sake of completeness, the various other opinions with regard

to the subjects treated in the last paragraphs are added. Some say that

the sun and moon illuminate one dvipa and one ocean ; while according to

others the numbers of dvipas and oceans illuminated are 3, 81, 7, 10, 12,

42, 72, 142, 172, 1042, 1072. No details are given. One chapter contains

the enumeration of a number of very fanciful opinions about the form of

the tapakshetra, which it would, however, be purposeless to extract in this

place.

On the assumption that the sun describes every day a circle which is

at the distance of 2 #8 yojanas from the circle described on the preceding

day, the question naturally suggested itself, how the sun passes over from

one circle into the next one. This question is treated in J, 6, and II, 2

where two different opinions are expounded which, although the account

given of them is not altogether clear, appear to be of the following

nature. According to some the sun enters from one circle into the other,

“ phedaghatena’”’ which (bheda being explained to signify apaéntardla) seems

to mean that the sun passes from one circle into the next one by moving

over the distance separating the two allat once. Thus the sun would really

move in perfect circles and the motion across from one circle into the

Journal.As. Soc. B engal. Vol XLIX. Pv.Li8so.

, From Alab asters .,

The wheel of the Law.

From Gastaldés

Italian ‘Antiqucties.

(See NQ42,)

Lith. & Printed by W.Newnian d C2 Codcutto. H. Riv ett — Carnae-

SPINDLE WHORLS ETUC. FUUND AT SANKISA BEHAR

AND OTHER BUDDHIST RUINS.

1880.] H. Rivett-Carnace—On Clay Discs called “ Spindle Whorls.” 127

other would be a momentary one only. ‘The other opinion, and to this the

Stiryaprajiapti seems to adhere, is that the sun does not in reality move in

separate perfect circles, but rather in an uninterrupted spiral line. As the

Suryaprajiapti expresses it, the sun begins from the moment he has entered

the first circle to move “ ganaih ganaih” across towards the second circle,

and as soon as he has reached the second circle, he begins to move towards

the third circle, ete. The term “ karna” which occurs in this description

of the sun’s motion seems to denote the spiral line which passing across

the whole room between the two circles connects the two ; a line which

might properly enough be called “ karna,” ¢. e., diagonal. On this hypothe-

sis then we should have to remember that the sun is only for convenience

sake said to describe a separate circle on each day, and that in reality he is

supposed to describe a continuous spiral line.

After having thus given a succinct account of the Stryaprajiapti’s

theory concerning the motion of the sun, we now proceed to consider the

statements referring to the motion of the moon,

(To be continued.)

Menorandum on Clay Dises called “ Spindle Whorls” and votive Seals

found at Sankisa, Behar, and other Buddhist ruins in the North

Western Provinces of India.— By H. Rrvert-Carnac, Esgq., C. S.,

C.J. E., F.S. A. (With three Plates.)

Last year I submitted for the inspection of the Asiatic Society speci-

mens of stone and clay discs, similar to what are called “spindle whorls”

by the Antiquaries of Europe, found by me at the Buddhist ruins of

Sankisa, Behar, &c. in the Fatehgarh District, N. W. Provinces of India.

Certain clay seals stamped with the Buddhist formula found in the same

localities were also exhibited. 'The resemblance between these “ spindle

whorls” and those described and figured by Dr. Schliemann in his work

“Troy and its Remains” was briefly noticed by me at the time. Since

then I have obtained some more specimens of these discs and seals,

and I think it well that they should be submitted for the inspection of the

Asiatic Society, and that the attention of its Members and of other Anti-

quaries should be directed to the resemblance to be traced between these

remains and those found in the ruins of Hissarlik and in many parts of

Europe.

First as regards so called “ spindle whorls.” When we were encamped

at Kanouj, Sankisa and Behar Khas in the Fategarh district, the village

urchins were encouraged to bring to us everything in the shape of “ Anti-

quities” that could be grubbed out from these extensive ruins and from

neighbouring mounds. ‘These sites, as is well known, present many features

128 H. Rivett-Carnac—On Clay Dises called “ Spindle Whorls,.” [No. 3,

of resemblance to those which Dr. Schliemann dug through at Hissarlik,

described at length in his work upon Troy. That is to say, it is generally

found in the case above-mentioned that the site has been selected on

account of some Kunker Hill which, rising out of the flat alluvial soil of

the Doab, offers a point of vantage for the building of a fort or city.

Here, as at Hissarlik, these sites often bear the traces of several distinct

colonies. The mud buildings of one set of colonists have been razed by

their conquerors or successors to build thereon houses and temples which

have again been levelled to form the foundations of the habitations of

later settlers. The high mounds, on which part of the present town of

Kanouj is perched, is to be accounted for in this way, and there can

be little doubt that if shafts were to be carried through the ruins there,

after the manner adopted by Dr. Schliemann at Hissarlik, the traces of

several distinct periods might be unearthed. What has been said of Kanouj

holds good in regard to Sankisa, Ramnuggur and other ruins. Much has

not yet been done to explore these localities, and the recent interesting

find of Mitra coins, reported by me to the Society, indicates that careful

investigation might prove remunerative to antiquarian research. The heavy

rains of India are, however, of much assistance in running amateur sections

through the ruins, and in exposing from time to time relics of more or less

interest. Amongst these may be classed the ‘ spindle whorls’ now to

be noticed, many of which together with coins, beads, etc. are collected and

set aside by the villagers as possessing some mysterious significance, and are

brought out for sale when the District Otlicer or some occasional visitor

camps near the place.

Of these clay dises and their stone prototypes four distinct classes

are to be noticed :

A. Terra Cotta Discs, plain and ornamented.

B. Ditto with a hole through the centre.

C. Terra Cottas “in the form of a top and the crater of a volcano”

(1 use the words of Dr. Schliemann, Troy, p. 38 to describe these peculiar

specimens).

D. Clay Balls, plain and ornamented.

With respect to A, Clay or Terra Cotta discs, these were brought to us

in enormous quantities, and, if disposed to do so, we might have purchased and

carried off several elephant loads of this description of relic. At the time

I did not attach much importance to them, and am sorry now that no care-

ful selection was made of those bearing different styles of ornamentation.

They are all of red or black clay well baked. In size they vary from 1 ineh

to 2 inches in diameter and are about + of an inch in thickness. The

majority of them bear a rough ornamentation at the edges only, see

Plate XIII, sketches 1 and 2. Others again show traces of more elaborate

design and workmanship. Some of these are figured in sketches 3 to 7,

Journal, As. Soc. Bengal. Vo! “iT. Pt.1,1889.

LU. Pram

Sch lee ua,

(P 137)

19, Glass

Enamelel

bead.

Hl Riv tt —Cormae }

Lua Printed bv W Newman & O89 Coleushea

‘PINDLE WHORLS ETC. FOUND AT SANKISA BEHAR

AND OTHER BUDDHIST RUINS. :

}

1880.] H. Rivett-Carnac—On Clay Dises called “ Spindle Whorls.”’ 129

On one, No. 5o0f my sketch, will be seen the broad arrow noticeable on

Schliemann’s No. 458. On another, No. 6, is what looks like the sign of

Saturn or what Dr. Schliemann calls the “mystic rose,” well known on

Buddhist coins and in Buddhist art. They all have more or less orna-

mentation at the edges, resembling the spokes of a wheel or possibly the

rays of the sun.

I also obtained at Sankisa several stone discs of nearly the same

shape as the Terra Cottas. They are all highly polished. One is of black

marble, another of crystal. Several are of red marble, and the material must

have been brought from a distance, as no stone save kunkur is to be found

within many miles of Sankisa. It will be noticed that all these stone speci-

mens are grooved at the edges, see the section in sketch No. 8, whereas

but few of the clay specimens have received such treatment.

Type B, sketch No. 9, on Plate XIV consists of clay discs similar in

most respects to the foregoing, save that a hole has been drilled through

the centre of each. I did not pay any particular attention to the propor-

tion in which these different classes were brought to mein camp. But I

find that I have many more of the plain discs than of those which have

been pierced. There can be little doubt, however, that many hundreds of

the pierced ones might have been obtained on the spot, and I am sending

to ascertain whether any more ornamented specimens are procurable.

The specimen marked and figured in sketch No. 10 is of grey granite. It

bears the same relation to the pierced clay discs as the stone and crystal

discs mentioned above bear to the clay whorls of type A. In the centre is

a hole, round which are six concentric circles.

The specimen figured in sketch No. 11, is of a somewhat different

type from the foregoing, as a section of the sketch will explain. The

impressions of the spokes of a wheel with dots between each spoke appear

to have been made in a stamp or mould. JI find I have only two of this

elass in my collection. But doubtless hundreds more might have been

obtained had ‘I not been afraid of burdening myself during the march with

too large a collection of such specimens,

Of type C, Sketches Nos. 12 and 13, on Plate XIV, which may be

described in Dr. Schliemann’s words as being in the form of a “top or

erater of a volcano” I have, I find, but 4 or 5 specimens ; I have little

doubt that large numbers were offered to me, but at the time they did not

appear to possess any particular significance. It was only in tumbling out

a large number of discs from the box, in which they had long been kept,

that I recognised this type of the illustrations of Dr. Schliemann’s book,

just consulted with reference to the Discs A and B mentioned above. The

specimens I have with me do not bear any marks of ornamentation.

Further search may perhaps bring better specimens to light. (Since this

was written some ornamented ones have been found.)

130 H. Rivett-Carnac— On Clay Discs caiied “ Spindle Whorls.” [No. 3,

Lastly we have type D, Clay Balls, Plate XIV, sketches Nos. 14, 15, 16, »

resembling somewhat those figured by Dr. Schliemann. Several of them

are roughly ornamented, and the designs, such as they are, will be seen

from the sketches.

I hardly know how it happened that these specimens were carried

away by me. Certainly no importance was attached to them at the time ;

and they would have escaped my notice altogether, had I not seen, when

comparing the clay discs, the sketches of somewhat similar balls figured

in the last pages of Dr. Schliemann’s book.

Lastly, I have also figured two specimens Nos. 17 and 18 which seem

to approach type C. And an enamelled glass bead No. 19.

This bead is similar to that figured in Thomas’ Prinsep, Pl. IV, No. 18.

These beads are found in large quantities together with crystal, onyx

cornelian and others at Sankisa and similar ruins. It seems desirable to

figure the specimen with this paper in order to ascertain whether similar

ones are found in Europe or elsewhere. The village urchins during the

rains make a practice of collecting these beads, and they are usually given

to fukirs or devotees. Seeing such a necklace worn by an old fakir led me

to enquire whence the beads came. And IJ had little difficulty in procuring

a variety sufficient for about nine necklaces.

I have now to direct attention to the resemblance between the speci-

mens above described and figured, and those discovered by Dr. Schlie-

mann at Hissarlik and noticed at great length and figured in large numbers

in his well known work upon Troy.

As regards type A, clay discs more or less ornamented, without the

central hole, I cannot be quite certain that this type was found by Dr.

Schliemann. I do not see that any distinct mention is made of unpierced

dises, and it is not quite clear from the sketches in Dr. Schliemann’s work,

whether, what is referred to as the Central Sun on the Dises figured in

plates 22 and 23, is a hole drilled through the centre or is a depression or

ornamentation representing the sun. Still, even if this particular type was

not found at Hissarlik, it is found in Italy, and, as will be shewn further on,

the resemblance between the remains found at Hissarlik and those of Italy

is referred to by Dr. Schliemann.

Dr. Schliemann writing of his discoveries at page 187 of his work

above quoted, thus refers to the discs:

“ During the last few days we have also found, in the strata next above

the primary soil, at a depth of from 46 to 36 feet, a number of round brilliant

black terra cottas of exquisite workmanship ; most of them much flatter than

those occurring in the higher strata and resembling a wheel; many are in the

shape of large flat buttons. But we also meet with some in the form of tops

and voleanoes which differ from those found in the higher strata only by the

Ant

1880.] H. Rivett-Carnac—On Olay Dises called “ Spindle Whorls.” 131

fineness of the terra cotta and by their better workmanship. The decora-

tions on these very ancient articles are, however, generally much simpler

than those met with above a depth of 10 meters (33 feet) and are mostly

confined to the representation of the sun with its rays, or with stars be-

tween the latter, or of the sun in the centre of a simple cross, or in the

middle of four or five double or treble rising suns. At a depth of 6 meters

(20 feet) we again fonnd a round Terra Cotta in the form of a volcano,

upon which are engraved three antelopes in the circle round the sun,

“At a depth of from 5 to 8 meters (164 to 26 feet) a number of

terra cotta balls were found, the surface of each being divided into eight

fields ; these contain a great many small suns and stars, either enclosed by

circles or standing alone. Most of the balls, however, are without divisions

and covered with stars ; upon some I find the swastica and the tree of life,

which, as already said, upon a terra cotta ball found at a depth of 26 feet,

had stars between its branches.” (Schliemann’s Troy, p. 187.)

The above extract embraces not only the so-called spindle whorls, but

mentions the volcano-shaped “ whorls” of type C found at Sankisa and

type D brought away by me from the same place. The discs were found

by Dr. Schliemann of terra cotta, of marble and of crystal. So at Sankisa

did we find clay, marble and crystal discs.

A comparison of the Plates appended to Dr. Schliemann’s volume with

the specimens submitted by me and the sketches which accompany this

paper will, I think, shew that there is at least some resemblance between

the remains found at Hissarlik and those at Sankisa.

On nearly all these dises will be seen what are constantly referred to

as the spokes of the wheel or the rays of the sun. I have placed side by

side with my sketches a copy of the whorl engraved by Dr. Schliemann at

page 137. It might fairly be taken to be a representation of the whorl

given in Plate XIV, Sketch 10 appended to this paper.

Then my collection is unfortunately in no way large or complete.

When at Sankisa, I had little idea of the significance of these remains or their

resemblance to well known types, and I only purchased a few of them in

the manner that I collect everything that seems to be unusual or strange.

Purther search may possibly bring out even more remarkable points.

The few specimens that I have succeeded in obtaining bear, however, a

_ resemblance, not only in shape, but also in ornamentation, to those figured

| by Dr. Schliemann, sufficient to render the subject interesting. The broad

arrow of my Sketch No. 5 and the Mystic Rose or sign of Saturn, or the

numeral four of my Sketch No. 6, are all to be traced among Dr. Schlic-

mann’s specimens ; and then again on the balls some similarity in ornamen-

tation is to be traced.

It would perhaps hardly be right to attach much importance to the

182 H. Rivett-Carnac—On Olay Dises called “ Spindle Whorls.” (No. 8,

fact, that one or two clay discs were found in Buddhist remains in India, —

and that discs of somewhat the same type were unearthed at Hissarlik. But

here we have, not only pierced dises of type B, but the Volcanoes © and the

Balls D, all three types resembling in some degree the three types of Hissarlik

and all three types bearing somewhat similar forms of ornamentation.

Again it is to be noticed that the remains at Sankisa are undoubtedly

Buddhist. Sankisa as is well known was a celebrated place of pilgrimage,

being sacred as the spot at which Buddha is supposed (as described by

General Cunningham, Vol. I, Archzological Reports) ‘to have descended

from the Trayastrinsa heaven by the ladder of gold or gems, accompanied

by the gods Brahma and Indra.”

The place was visited and described by the Chinese pilgrim Fa Hian

early in the 5th century, and by Hiouen-Thsang in the 7th century A. D.

A detailed account. of these interesting ruins will be found in General

Cunningham’s Archzological Report above alluded to.

Now the ornamentations on the Terra Cottas of Hissarlik, if they are

not Buddhist, certainly bear a close resemblance to the ornamentations on

coins, buildings, ete., which in India are generally supposed to be Buddhist.

Thus the wheel continually recurs in Schliemann’s sketches, together

with the Swastika, And what Schliemann calls the Mystic Rose, and Fergus-

son the Trisul ornament is quite as frequent. The Sacred Tree, the Fire

Altar and the Deer are also almost as common, In fact, we have every one

of the Buddhist symbols of the well known type of the so-called Buddhist

coin, figured in No. 1, Plate IV, Thomas’ Prinsep, and of which an engraving

is given at page 17 of Fergusson’s Indian and Hastern Architecture. Mr.

Fergusson points out, however, that there is some doubt whether these

symbols really are Buddhist, and at the page above referred to, writes,

“One coin of the period is well known. It belongs to a king called

Kunanda or Krananda generally assumed to be one of the nine Nandas

with whom this dynasty closed. In the centre on one side, is a dagoba

with the usual Buddhist Trisul emblem over it, and a serpent below it: on

the right the sacred Tree, on the left the Swastika with an altar (?) on the

other side a lady with a lotus (Sri?) with an animal usually called a deer,

but from its tail more probably a horse, with two serpents standing on their

tails over its head which have been mistaken for horns. Over the animal is

an altar, with an umbrella over it. In fact a complete epitome of emblems

known on the monuments of the period, but savouring much more of Tree

and Serpent worship than of Buddhism as it is now.”

Dr. Schliemann at page 88 of his work refers to the resemblance

between the Terra-Cottas of Hissarlik and those of Italy. This directed

my attention to Gastaldi’s work. The following extract will show that te

it be considered that the resemblance between the remains at Sankisa |

1880.] H. Rivett-Carnac—On Clay Dises called “ Spindle Whorls.” 133

and Hissarlik is not established, such doubt can hardly exist regarding the

Indian and Italian remains.

Gastaldi says: “There are very many of these objects, for the

greater part of ‘Terra-Cotta, more or less discoidal, or conical, or

spheroidal, pierced in the centre, to which the Archzologists of France

and Germany, as well as our own, have given the name of spindle-

whorls, ‘The paste of the spindle-whorls is not, for the most part equal

to that of earthenware ; instead of the grains of sand, we find powdered

carbon and ashes ; the colour is ashy in the internal parts, and ash colour

varying into yellow and red on the outside. Some few spindle-whorls are

black, and of a substance probably similar to the thinner vases, and, like a

great number of these, are shining externally as if with varnish. ‘They

ave very various in form; and although eight different ones have been

represented by you, from those which, in the course of the summer, we

sent from Campeggine, courteously presented by the brothers Cocconi, not

one represents the other six, collected in the sequel, in the marl-beds. Some

few bear marks scratched upon them, and are among those you have had

engraved (Fig. 25).

“ Besides all the spindle-whorls of earth, there were dug up from

the marl-beds of Castellazzo .di Tontanellato, three others, which are

cut out of different substances. One was made out of a stag’s horn,

it is in the shape of a cone, and is very highly polished ; the second

of stratite, of a greenish tint, and spheroidal; the third, of a whitish

limestone (caleare), is disc-shaped, brought to a high degree of polish,

-and certainly manifests an advanced epoch in art among the people

who used such implements. Among the objects in the Museum of Anti-

quities at Parma, which are of uncertain derivation, there are twenty

spindle-whorls, some in limestone, stratite, and even amber, but the greater

part of earth ; some are polished, some are ornamented with circles, concens

trie with hole pierced in them, or in concentric lines disposed in groups on

the back of the spindle-whorl. We find among these the transition from

the more depressed discoidal form, almost medallion (nummulik) to the

acute conical. Some one of those in terra cotta is said to have been col-

lected from the ruins of the Roman City of Velieia. The different forms,

finish and substances of the spindle-whorls would lead us to suppose that

they must have served for various uses in proportion to their diversity ;

perhaps the most beautiful and carefully worked were amulets, or else but-

tons; the others weights, used either for nets or in weaving.”

“ Besides all the earthenware and all the spindle-whorls which we have

spoken of, we meet in the marl-beds with other small objects in earth,

badly baked, in form disc-shaped, without any hole, sometimes ball-shaped

(pallottola), of which it is impossible to divine the use which they served.”’

134 H. Rivett-Carnac—On Clay Discs called “ Spindle Whorls.” (No. 3,

(Lake Habitations and Prehistoric Remains in Northern and Central Italy.

B. Gastaldi, pp. 44, 45, 46, 4:7.)

In Italy these mysterious articles are found of clay and marble, as in

India. The ornamentation is the same and in Italy also are found the

dise-shaped Terra Cottas without any hole similar to those of North Wes-

tern India. It is hardly necessary to burden this paper with any more

sketches. The Italian remains are almost exactly the same as those of

Schliemann, but I cannot resist the temptation of copying the specimen

marked 8 B which will be found figured at p. 45 of Gastaldi’s work.

It is almost identical with No. 12 of those figured by me.

Next as to the use to which these remains were placed. Dr. Schlie-

mann discusses the subject at length in several places in his valuable work on

Troy. And it will be seen that Gastaldi is puzzled as to their significance.

Dr. Schliemann arrives at the conclusion that, although some of them may

have been used as spindle-whorls, the greater number of them were votive

offerings. And Gastaldi considers that some at least were amulets. The

symbols on most of those found at Hissarlik would seem to leave little

doubt of their religious character. Of the Indian specimens, it is not easy

to say why some should have the central hole and others should be

unpierced. But, if they are votive offerings, the fact that the pierced ones

were found in smaller quantities at Sankisa than those without the hole,

may possibly be explained by a practice, which was noticed by me years ago -

at some shrines of pilgrimage in the Central Provinces. There the pilgrim,

when he makes a vow or implores a favour, smeares his right hand with red

colouring matter, and impresses it, fingers upwards, on the wall of the temple,

leaving there a mark like the Red Hand of Ulster. If the favour, the birth _

of a child or whatever it may be, is granted by the presiding deity, the

pilgrim is supposed to return to the shrine the following year, and to

impress on the wall a similar mark, the fingers of the hand this time point-

ing downwards. It was very noticeable that the latter marks were well

in the minority, and it was carefully explained by the local priests that

this was not to be accounted for by the supposition that the deity was slow

in his favours, but that, in truth, the suppliants, when they had obtained

what they wanted, were not always mindful to return and to fulfil their

vows. Perhaps in this way the proportion of the unpierced to pierced

discs may be explained, ‘The unpierced ones being offered when a favour

was implored, the pierced ones when it was obtained.

Be this as it may, the view that these discs are votive offerings is

supported by the religious character of the symbols, already alluded to, found

on the whorls of Hissarlik and Sankisa. Since I commenced to write

this paper, I have received a copy of Alabaster’s ‘‘ Wheel of the Law.” At

Fig. 8 A will be found a copy of the sketch of the Buddhist wheel of the

Length Jb inches

& Printed by Wo Nama c2Z

CLAY SEALS ETC.

(All full size, ecccept N? 7)

Cale

FOUND AT SANKISA AND OTHER BUDDHIST

RUINS IN N. W. PROVINCES OF INDIA

1880.] H. Rivett-Carnac—On Clay Discs called “ Spindle Whorls.” 135

law given in that work. And it is almost unnecessary to point out the

resemblance which the highly ornamented Dise No. 7 bears to this sketch.

The other. discs, though not so elaborately ornamented, seem to adopt

the same idea. No. 11, as far as ornamentation is concerned, undoubtedly

resembles a wheel, though, as the section will show, it can never have been

used, as some of my friends have suggested, as the wheel of a toy cart ;

nor indeed are there any marks of wear on any of the wheel-shaped discs

to support the view that they were used for miniature playthings of this

description. It seems much more probable that they were votive offer-

ines intended to represent, more or less the Buddhist wheel of the law,

similar to that stamped on some of the coins recently submitted by me to

the Society.

The view that these were indeed votive offerings, and not toy cart

wheels or pachis¢ or draughtsmen, as some have suggested, is further borne

out by the large numbers of clay discs, of a somewhat similar type, but

bearing on them the well known Buddhist formula, found in the same

neighbourhood. ‘These seals, as they have sometimes been called, from their

bearing a seal-like impress, have been figured by Moor in his Hindu Pan-

theon and have been described by General Cunningham, by Dr. Rajen-

dralala Mitra, C. I. H. and others. General Cunningham, if I remember

right, found large quantities of such “ seals” made of lac in the Buddhist

ruins of Behar. Though my stay at Sankisa was short, I succeeded in ob-

taining a considerable number of these seals. Many of them are from the

same stamp. Others from different moulds bear the same well known for-

mula commencing “ ye dharma hetavo.” The character of the legend in all

these cases 1s comparatively modern. ‘Those, however, marked 1 and 2

Plate XV bear the formula in the Gupta character. Others again marked

3 to 6 are deserving of notice from the variety of their ornamentation.

They would seem all to have been made and stamped, in what I may call, a

eushion-like fashion, after the manner of the quaintly-shaped Mitra coins

recently submitted by me to the Society. Some of these seals are I think

worthy of being figured in the Society’s Journal.

There can be little doubt that these so-called seals, bearing the Buddhist

formula, are votive offerings. A friend of mine, Mrs. Murray-Aynsley who

recently travelled through a portion of Ladakh, brought me thence two

stones, one inscribed with a portion of the Buddhist Formula, Plate XV,

No. 7, the other bearing a conventional ornamentation. That these stones

are offered in the present day, will be seen from the following extract from

Mrs. Murray-Aynsley’s work entitled “ Our Visit to Hindostan, Kashmir

and Ladakh,” p. 88.

“We there first saw some of the walls called Manés, which are form-

ed of stones placed one upon the other without any mortar, and are -

ing

186 H. Rivett-Carnac—On Clay Dises called “Spindle Whorl.” [No. 8,

usually about four feet high, and four feet wide. Some of these walls are

as much as a quarter of a mile in length, and are made, we were informed, .

with the following object. When a Buddhist undertakes a journey, or

makes a vow, he chooses a flat stone, takes it to a monastery, and gets a

lama (or monk) to engrave some rude characters upon it, which are said to

be usually, ‘Om mani padme Om,’ which has been translated to mean,

‘ All hail to the jewel in the flower of the lotus!’ though some give other

interpretations to these words. When his stone is thus prepared, the in-

dividual places it on the top of one of these walls, which on their upper

surface are almost covered with such engraved stones. Thibetans when

passing these walls, always keep them on their right hand, and frequently

go out of their direct road in order to do this.”

There would seem, then, to be little doubt that the Terra-Cottas, plain

and ornamented, and those also bearing the formula of the Buddhist faith,

were votive offerings of a by-gone age.

In what little I can do to further the objects of the Society, I generally

try to content myself with bringing facts to notice, and pointing out the

resemblance between the remains found in India and those discovered in

other parts of the world. It must be left to those who are better informed

than myself, or who are more fortunate in being able to consult what has

been written by authorities on the subject, to determine whether there is

any real significance in the resemblance between the remains found at

Sankisa and those of Hissarlik and Italy. I am not unprepared

for the argument that a knife is a knife all the world over, and that this

form of implement must have suggested itself to all people at an early

stage of civilisation; and that the fact of implements in the form of

knives having been found at Hissarlik and at Sankisa would not be sufficient

to establish any connection between the settlers at these widely separated |

sites. It may also be urged that earthen spindle-whorls might naturally

enough suggest themselves to different races situated far apart from one

another. But surely there is something more than a chance resemblance

in the several types of these remains and the style of their ornamentation ?

And does not the continual recurrence of, what we call, the Buddhist sym-

bols on the Hissarlik finds, suggest the possibility of Hissarlik and Sankisa

having been colonized by branches of the same race, be it Buddhist or not,

one of which striking west from some point in Central Asia, found its way

to the shores of the Mediterranean, whilst another, taking a southerly

course, established itself in the Gangetic valley ?

Journal.As. Soc. Bengal. Vol. XLIX. Pt.1. 1880.

(AW half-size)

Litke. & Printed by W. Newmror & C2

SPINDLE WHORLS ETC. FOUND AT SANKISA BEHAR

AND OTHER BUDDHIST RUINS.

i wed

1880.] H. Rivett-Carnac—On Clay Discs called “ Spindle Whoris.” 137

Supplementary Memorandum.

(With a Plate.)

Since writing this Memorandum on spindle-whorls, I have received

from Sankisa a further consignment of these peculiar remains.

In my paper recently read before the Society I mentioned that the flat

discs, plain and perforated, were to be found in large quantities. I have

yeceived a further large consignment. But the perforated ones are much

less numerous than the others. It is unnecessary to send any more of

these types.

Of what Schliemann calls the voleano-shaped Terra Cottas I have

received several more. ‘This bears out my view that they are numerous.

Nos. 1 and 2, Plate X Va, are interesting from their decoration. The one

it will be seen is decorated on the top. The other is decorated on the base

with what would seem to be a flower and in a manner resembling the

Hissarlik types,

I send also three more balls, Nos. 38-5. These are ornamented with

stars, crosses and with lines. Several others of the same type have since

reached me.

I have obtained many more clay seals of the same type as those already

sent. One only marked No. 6 is different in its character from those

already submitted to the Society.

No. a, is a fragment of pottery highly ornamented with the. rosette

or wheel of the law, or whatever it may be, common on Buddhist remains.

I should be glad of any explanation of the peculiar piece of soapstone

marked No. 8. Its ornamentation is curious. The grooves at the top will

be noticed. It may possibly have been worn as an amulet.

Further enquiries are being made at Sankisa, and I hope to be able

to obtain many more specimens showing various forms of ornamentation.

It has been suggested that the curious balls of various sizes with their

different markings may have been intended to represent the sun, moon and

stars.

I see that the genuineness of the antiquities found at Sankisa and

Behar is doubted by some. But these sites do not see on an average one

Buropean visitor a year; as yet no one save myself has collected there these

specimens, and so it is hardly to be supposed that the native mind has yet

been sufficiently prepared to attempt to provide forgeries for a possible

future trade in such articles.

138 Hi. Rivett-Carnac—On some copper Buddhist coins. [No. 3,

Note on some copper Buddhist coins —By H. Rrvrr-Carnac, Hsq., C. S.,

Cal Eiuk Gas

(With two Plates.)

I send for the inspection of the Society, some coins, mostly Buddhist

from my Cabinet, some of which may perhaps prove of interest. They will

not all, I think, be found described or figured in the works most readily

accessible to Members, and it is possible some of them may be new types.

Tam indebted to Mr. A Carlleyle of the Archeological Survey for the

readings on the coins.

Plate XVI, Nos. 1, 2. Legend Vatsakha Devasa. Two coins, if they

may so be called, of the same type differing in size. They are evidently

casts, t. e., have been made in a mould prior to the time the art of stamping

was discovered. On one side is the Bull taking here the place of the

Elephant common to the earlier coins. The name tolerably clear above the

Bull. On the obverse what looks like the Trisul of the Sanchi Topes, and _

the snake. I should be glad to know if this coin is known to the Society ?

No. 3. Legend Raja Kamuda Senasa, This coin resembles the pre-

ceding ones in several respects. The Bull again occupies the most promi-

nent place. The legend is beneath the Bull; near the head of the Bull is

the sacred tree. Behind the Bull is the snake. At first sight this has the

appearance of an elaborate tail of the Bull. But a careful inspection will

show that the tail is separate and quite distinct. On the obverse is the

well known ornament which I think Fergusson calls the “‘lrisul,”’ though

it is different enough from Shiva’s trident. It will be noticed that the

marks on these coins have apparently béen stamped in the same manner as

those of the Mitras, found near Barelli and recently submitted by me to

the Society. The Bull and Legend have been stamped in, as if witha

square seal, and cover but a portion of the circular piece of metal.

Perhaps these coins represent some of the earliest attempts at coining ?

No. 4. Legend Aja Varmma or Asha Varmma; a coin of the same

type as above; the legend differing.

No. 5. Legend Maphaba Varma. The same remarks apply here also.

The coin has been cut in two, and was just going to the melting-pot when I

was fortunate enough to rescue the two pieces from a quantity of rubbish,

It is to be feared that a good many coins are thus lost to us. All the above

were obtained by me at Faizabad.

No. 6. aha Satama. A coin apparently of the same type as above

but in bad preservation.

No. 7. Satya Mitrasa.

Pie Soc Bongal Vol. XLIX. Pu). 1880.

Colette.

Predad ty Wo Nevmoow & CA

COPPER BUDDHIST COINS.

qmeal. As. Soc. Bengal. Vol. XLIX. Pt. 1. 1880

PU, XVI.

PERRO

COPPER BUDDHIST COINS.

ned by Wo Newmar g

1880. ] H. Rivett-Carnac—On some copper Buddhist coins. 139

No. 8. Ayu Mitrasa.

No. 9. Saya Mitrasa,

All of the well known “ Cock and Bull” type, but new names I believe.

No. 10. Yaya Mitra (two specimens).

Plate XVII No. 11. Vyaya Mitra.

These coins seem much older than the preceding ones.

No. 12. (Lion) Laranga or Larata or Lajasa. (Tree) Stigdta- Yana-

This coin is quite a different type from the preceding. On one side is a

Lion much resembling the carvings found among the ruins of old Buddhist

Temples.

No. 138. A pretty little Buddhist coin of a type Ihave not yet seen

figured. The sacred tree is encircled by the snake forming a sort of

rosette. in the centre of the coin.

No. 14, These three little oddly-shaped specimens have all weil

stamped on one side what looks like the conventional Heraldic Lion. On

the other side may be traced marks somewhat resembling the sign Pisces of

the Zodiac.

No. 15. Two specimens of a coin which is perhaps new. On one side

what looks like a Fish as in the preceding coins, on the other a Thor’s

Hammer (?) or perhaps the sign of Saturn combined with some other sign

in such a manner as to form a monogram ?

No. 16. ‘Three little coins of sorts.

I should be glad for information regarding the dynasties, dates, &c., of

these coins.

31.00. es,

CONTENTS

OF THE

q JOURNAL, Pr. I, ror 1879.

-1—Rivett-Carnac, Prehistoric Remains in Central India.—

Rivett-Carnac, The Snake Symbol in India, especially in con-

nection with the worship of Siva—Pratapa ChandraGhosha

Note on the articles exhibited by Mr. Rivett-Carnac.—G rierson,

Some Further Notes on Kalidasa.

.2.—Irvine, The Bangash Nawabs of Farrukhabad—A Chronicle,

(17183—1857).—G rowse, The Sect of the Pran-nathis.

.8.—Temple, Rough Notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes

about Kandahar.—Brajanatha Bandyopadhyaya, Hamfr

Rés4, or a History of Hamir, prince of Ranthambor.

/4.—Barbe, Pali Derivations in Burmese—Peal, A peculiarity of

the viver names in Asam and some of the adjoining countries.—

Growse, Bulandshahr Antiquities—Rajendralala Mitra’s

Note to the above.—Rodg ers, Copper Coins of the old Mahardjas

of Kashmir.—Rodgers, The Copper Coins of the Sultans of Kash-

| mir.—S mith, Observations on some Chandel Antiquities.

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

a SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

0. O7, Park Street, Calcutta.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XVII (1843

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to XXII (1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XXVI,

XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols. XXXIII to XLVIII, (1864

to 1879).

Asiatie Researches, from Vols. VI to XI and Vols. XVII to XX,

CACHeAU ere rcioveeisiore epareheleiies c(i eter nettle opaggacs sbo00dar

Ditto ditto; Pndex jt co sas Peed S5d Bice we sm iptenee ee peretntame eiehel eee

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in Arabic, Persian, and Urdu,......

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. 'Translatedinto English, with notes and

indexes, by H. Blochmanmny Me pACs oie scseiao rien aneieteie helene

The Prosody of the Persians. —By H. Blochmann, M, RG 180528

Vhe Tabagat-i-Naciri. Translated ay Major H. G. ’ Raverty,

10 fasc., SUdUDGOROdOONGGbUCd00G UGC odbOob0NINI0000 Sac

NEW SERIES. VOL. XLIX. No, CCXXXVII. |. so

NNN NNN NNN IIe

JOURNAL

OF THE

—

ome

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Mol. XLIX, Part I, Nov [V.—18s0.

EDITED BY

JHE PHILOLOGICAL PECRETARY,

SC pyri NE - —_

Se panera (i : :

TPA te = MUSEUM ASIATIC SOCIETY CA:

fithin these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

n or produced by nature.”—Si1x WiLLiAM JonEs.

%~* Commannications should be sent wnder cover to the Secretaries, Asiat, Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work wre to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

don, cure of Messrs. Tritbner and Co., 57 J 59, Ludgate Hill,

CALCUTTA:

'P INTED BY jf, VW. THOMAS, AT THE PAPTIST Mission PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1880.

e) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—To Non-Subscribers, Rs, 2,

elusive of postag

‘ Price in England, 4 Shillings.

CONTENTS.

Remarks on the Afghans found along the Route of the Tal Chotiali

Field Force, in the Spring of 1879.—By Linvt. R. C. Temps,

B.S.C., F.R.G.S., M.R.A.S. &. (with 8 Plates and

2 Maps), Temey JU ea pap oqodecnan

On the Stryaprajiapti—By Dr. G. eam, Pernepall WBeaures

College, Part II, anotineSosGoa IO

Coins supplementary By ioe? a Chinas ae the Pane ae

of Delhi.”—By Cras. J. Ropexrs, (with a Plate),...............

Copper Coins of Akbar.—By Czas. J. Roparrs, Arata, (with

two" plates), icecses<ccassouermactens cenen guuantaee

eevee

eee

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

——<p—

Part I.—HISTORY, LITERATURE, &e.

ee EEEEEEEEEEEEEEE—EEEeEeEEEEEEEeEOeEOEOEOEOSTEOe

No. IV.—1880.

Remarks on the Afghans found along the Route of the Tal Chotiali Field

Force, in the Spring of 1879.—By Linvut. R. C. Temps, B.S. C.,

F.R.G.S8., M. R.A. S. &. (With 3 Plates and 2 Maps).

(Concluded from page 107.)

Parr II.

III. Distribution of the Tribes.

In the above description of the Tribes along the Tal Chotiali Route

their distribution en rowte has been but briefly referred to. In the next

Table the names of the tribes inhabiting the villages on the accompanying

map are shown. And it will be seen that as a rule the Pathan Tribes and

Sections stick pretty well together and are generally to be found in certain

compact districts and nowhere else.* Thus Achakzais are confined to the

region about To’Ba and the Kuo’sa AmRAN range, and the To’r Tarins

to the Pishin Valley. Among the Kakar sections the same thing is to be

observed. The Amanp Kuz‘ occupy the country about the north of the

Pishin to Mt. Kanp and the Sunrmdn Kue’s the range dividing the Pishin

and Do’r Valleys, the Mrnrarzats all the country to the north of the R.

Ro’ Gorge and the PAnizars that to the south of it and soon, Even where

the country seems to be pretty well divided between sections, as the Do’r

* Villages of mixed populations are to be found in the more settled parts, such as

the Pishin, Do’r, and Gwa/’t Valleys, though not commonly, and when it is said that

a certain village is occupied by a certain subsection or section it is meant that the

main portion of the inhabitants belong to it. As a rule, however, villages are not mixed.

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotial Field Force.

142

[No. 4,

-o

‘NIHSTG

“pourysty

oq} Yysnoyy “poxtur ®

ayy Jo YIMos oy 0

-m109 OU aq 04 su1o0s 9

JO oovypIA uo st efor} Yor rvou

‘uorysonb ut sqoriystp oq} Ut punos 9

‘STVPVIV]K, ‘SIVEVOUNY ‘SIVZONVES

NVIG

IVZ, ON

IVZNVad0g

QVNWVHOJ Yay

IVZ ITV

IVZNVAVG

INAV

IVZINVHY 2Vq

TINVA

CVNNVHOT LV'T

NIC VG CGVWNVHOT

NVACVG,

vitog 1aVqL

LVGV IT

IVONV,

NVM VITACEY VIVI

IVZON,VYL

VEY WVIVIE TPL

NV TICHS,OH yy

NVHY avsy

IVZIVd,Od

“OSRTTLA.

q Sayunos 073 [[z@ Adnoo0 Ayqeqo

IVZIN VHS AV

IVZIN VEY, 2,07

IVZLIAV EL

TVGLy

IVZON,V¥L

(74

IVZCVNWNVHOT

IvZz0avg

“moTpoasqug

90°

IVZNVLEVD

(14

IVZUOG,VEV

200

“HOISTATPANS

IVZYTOAYy

IVZU, ON

IVZIN VAY NAVY,

Ivzoqvg Oy, NIGV I],

(14

IVZIVHOV

“

IVZEVE,VG

IVZIVd Og WVU Iwvaad

‘uoNpog = HOISTATCE. “OIL,

“Toyyo80y Sug oF pur yxedv uorqoos v aq 04 UNOES SIVYEY Kora £0HZ

ad suvwad eq,

q 0} Uses soqity oyy Koyea L,0Hg ong Ur yng ‘LoyVA TV], OY} OF QOMHZVIT “IT WorZ Lov A LHS

‘SNJUVY, LOT, oy} pur Niag oyy TaeMyoq WOryvoranuL

soyy Aypeowovrd yaq “UIystg Oo} UL IvZITV qnoqe oq oF pres ote SNPUV IL, NJdg Moy B pur ‘woTy

Coy oy puokeq Saqunoo vy yy OY] OFUT poyerqgoued oar 09 woes Jou Op speieg

Ie SIVZINVG PUL SIVZEVLNATY Surptmosins oy ple SIVZON VAVG pue STAY VS]

‘srvzyg quo sv ‘oy v Suoure A[uo poprarp st At ‘asI0H doary Coy oy pur Soqe a

143

1880.]

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force.

IVOVHONOHY

NVHY WIV

NWHY 12,VH

IVHDUOTL

NTIVNT

NVUVHG

IVUOHY

TOHSUVg

CALA ESE

SVHDEV AM

HOV AGNI

IVUVWVGNOHS)

IVMH YT

LVI y IVZNVHVag

OT Oy

TT VIL,OHO

TV,

Z,SINIHG

IVZL VV

IVZT,VIA,AHS

VIHy ug

IVIIT VI

IVIVZNV J

IVZIVIIVET

VIVY Nverug

a VANITY

WVZ,Vq VON

TVMDGY(L

KYHY TOWVAVYy

IVUVOVU],

page OVE alas

IVZIVINGA YY

“

Tay INVINY

(ia

VI V

THHY NVNITOSIVNAODY

pourru ouou

IVZIVEV

TONY ,VS,AT

IVZUVLNAT

IVaVOUAG

IVZDN VISUOP UVUV

IVZGVQIVAHY AM OT

NIUV,

poulva suou NIdg

IVZTVNV YL

IVZG, VIL

aU YY

AVL VIL

[No. 4,

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiah Field Force.

144

qouyystl

HOVY, HS,OY

LOD VaVZCNonTy

WVUVY

IVIIN

ZAUV N,VHMAvg

a OHSTICL

IVHNUOT

NVWInVUg

HOVY, VIEV A

NVis,og

TOAMAVHO

IVUVZNVIY

TV MD

aVUVAG

ZALVY IVZIN VAY

ZdUVY IVZO1IVg

IVHD,VQ

NVA,VINVHS

IVNG,O%F

IV),09

NOavity

HOV, NVOVZ

UVANVUG

LOO wave

HOadvg

IVUVT],

IVNUVg

IVZUVLHG YL

"OSUTTLA

pourrn worjoesqns Ou

IVZIGY

‘moroosqng “MOISTATPUS,

IVZIN, Vd

AVIVIT

‘UOISIATE «= ‘OQ LT,

IVZUVLTG FAL

"MOI}OEg

145

1880. |

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force.

‘NTU AHG

"UOHS

‘od

“a VHX

-sNIag “HT

“OL

tal CURE

WY THSAHYy

fat

NIG AHS

TOMS

HOVYL

IVHDUVZ,

IVANVHZ dg

IVZONVAVS

TVOVNG

IVS,

ATIVHY CVNNVHOTL

ZIUVy NAHDAVZ

IVONV], HVCV

NIGaAyy

IVZVIO}

IVNVHY

IVOTOAMA

ZAUVY Lousy

NVH VY

IVAVI,

Igo y

IVEOHU,YNHQ

WVIHS AHS

aNvaoug

IVOUV AA

HOVY Lys]

VIHNVHOOM

NVEU ATL

PNYONY 2,03,

PNVONY UOT

HOV 12.V.L

IVZONV 3]

IVIVICY

powru uwoTyZoaSqnNs ou

NVayViL

IVZ,VIO

«c

TTI HUVZ,

IVZONVUVS

“ce

TAHY ,YS]

“

IVOVIV IL

IVavoUng

IVYZONVHS

“

146

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Hield Force.

IVOZVHD

‘Oo

‘NVIVING

“Loug

“IVAW

-SNIAG “9

“Od

IVPZVE

poUysid

TVMIONVZ,

IVINVH J

IV) ,VIEV MA.

LOW

NISVALVY

NITCLOY

Z,TU VIVA

ZC VETV

IVLHSWT

avove

NVWEIVY

LVUOHY

IVDNVZ, IVIUVY

Vu Vita Nt

HD,Va NVIV

aNVONIN

VM VHOVQ

%CX,VIVEG

NVIVIVG

IVAVZNIQ

IVULHSALC

IVZONIG VY

TLVNIHO

IVOUV(T

NYVLNIHO

HZVLVS

TALULA

IVWUnYy

VMHNUTH

IVN,VIVG

‘OSUTTIA

pourvu WoTJoosqus OU

IVZV,ON

“MoTpoasqNg

"WOISLATpQng

«c

TANY WaANVY

dvVWaAG

iis

“ec

“

TAdHIVZ UVLVY

"HOYOeS = WOISIATY.« “OQIa,

B,C, Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force.

LOY NVEY INIvg

TVADIV NT

LOY VNIHO

IVNINUVG

UVHYAVG

HOV

ZALVy NVUVHS

N,Va,VH9

NVUVHY

IVOVS

wOuVy]

LVIT AT

VIVAAIDAVN

IVOVHO

Va],

_ WNYM

IVHOVY

TOLVvd

IVAVHDAVS

IVNIHO

ZTXVAIAVG

IVGNVM,OM

Ivavpny,

IVUVZO 3

IVLId

VIVAALDAVN,

UVAVM OT

aUVHVM NOV

- £0 IVNHOAy

Tsn yf

fo oes powmvu SUOTyaS OU IN,OT

“

pouteu uorjoesqns ou

‘. ee:

a3 eo. oe

aVHVM ,

TOW aoe me 74 : 5 7 e . *

IVZOVHS

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force.

148

‘“NIHSIG.

‘od

‘og

‘od

“od

“pUTystql

NTHOVHG

T CHU,

AZILVEL

aNIVg avivg

ava

‘HVITW VITA avVAVS

OTVS aVAVS

LVIUAHG AVAVE

IL,0J, @VAVG

IVZUVGIV

avin

-NVHOPT is,oq avavg

IVONVNVHY avAvg

TV] avivg

IVZ,IG,VHS

IVZaV£V

aviy avivg

OLIV avAvg

avq HHS

IVLALIV YT

{LOVES

NVHY UVaNVNVY

AUSITL

IVS IHO

LVL

TVMDAVHY

aviy

NVHY UON

IN,O'T

NVHY UUW

“OSUTTTA

powreu wooosqns ou

IVZWOU—)

IVZONIS,VX ere

IVZUVALV Wy

“ce

if4 coe

IVZNVHVU

IVZ,IC,VHS

IVZEVLEY

“cc

IVZUVOVE, age

IVZTIVONVY ;

“moTpsqng “MOISTAIPGNG

avivg

VIAGIvVy aVvivg

“ce

poweu suo TAUAY,

IN, O'T

TEOTJOIG ‘HOISTAI(T

‘OqhL

1880.] 8. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Meld Force. 149

IV. Polity.

The portion of Afghanistan along the route may be divided into that

formerly subject to the Amir of Kabul, and that acknowledging no superior

authority, into, in fact, the Amir’s Territory and the country of Independent

Tribes. The Amir’s power never seems to have extended beyond the Do’F

Valley to the eastwards further than [sar Kacu, or further north in that

direction than Mt. Kann, 7. e., the inhabitants of the ZHo’p Valley and all

the country south of it eastwards of the Do’r Valley have never recognised

him as their ruler. The tribes then under the Amir’s sway were the Dura-

nis, the Tér Tarins and such Kakars as inhabited the Do’r and Gw4z Valleys,

have always been independent. For the purposes of this paper the country

| will be divided into Amir’s Territory and Ya’aursra’y or Independent

}

| while the bulk of the Kakars, the Linis, the Zarkhans and the Spin Tarins

Territory.

Under the Amir, Government in our sense of the term there was none,

though the head of the Govérnment nominally ruled through his Sirdars

| or heads of tribes and sections, having, however, little real control over

‘them. And how this system was worked has been thus deseribed.* ‘* The

Sovereign is absolute and makes any and every change which may appear

to him necessary or proper in the government and administration. He can

dispose of the lives and property of his subjects and is kept within certain

bounds in these respects only by the calculations which prudence dictates.

| Religion is the counterpoise to his authority. ‘This gives the clergy great

‘influence, one that he might try in vain to subject to his will and pleasure,

and vainer still would be the attempt to infringe and invade the rights and

| privileges of the sirdars or chiefs of tribes, who would never consent to

‘resign a certain influence in the affairs of government. It may be said in

Afghanistan that there are as many sovereigns as sirdars, for each of them

governs after his own fashion. They are jealous, turbulent and ambitious,

and the sovereign can restrain and keep them in some order only by taking

advantage of their rivalry and feuds and opposing one to the other. There

is no unity, nothing is permanent, everything depends on the pleasure or

caprice of a number of despots always at variance with each other and mak-

ing their tribes espouse their personal quarrels. A constant feeling of

irascibility is the result which finally leads to sanguinary civil wars and

throws the country into a state of anarchy and perpetual confusion. The

‘sirdars are at one and the same time the strength and the curse of the

‘\monarch. Prompt to take arms and defend him when a good understand-

‘ing between them exists, they are as ready to revolt against him when they

} . . . . .

find or think they have the smallest interest in doing so, In anything,

| * Macgregor’s Gazetteer,

150 - R&R. C. Temple—Route of the Lal Chotiali Bield Force. [No. 4

however, to which they are disinclined, they would not obey even the |

sovereign of their choice but with reluctance ; moreover they are always |

impatient to see him replaced by another from whom they hope to obtain |

greater advantages. Each subdivision of a tribe is, aecording to its numeri- —

eal force and extent of territory, commanded by one or more sirdars, |

These chiefs may be compared to the dukes and barons of the middle ages |

in France, the more powerful to the knights bannerets, and those having |

authority over only a few families to the esquires who in time of war |

enrol themselves and their men under the orders of the chief that inspires

them with the greatest confidence and can pay them best.* The

most powerful amongst them are caressed by the sovereign who attaches them

to his interests much more by the concessions he makes than by the fear

he inspires. Ordinarily and with a view to preserve a nominal authority

over them, he remits the whole of the taxes and imposes in their stead the

obligation to furnish a contingent of troops in the event of war being |

declared against him by his neighbours. This wretched system gives too

much power to the Sirdars. The sovereign is at their mercy, and it is the |

ambition of these men that gives birth to the numerous civil wars in |

Afghanistan ; for they are constantly in revolt.” |

Such being the state of civil government in the Amir’s Territory, the |

only difference to be observed in the Independent Territory is, that the

local Sirdar, or whatever other local chief happens at the time to be the most |

powerful, is absolutely uncontrolled even by the semblance of superior power. |

The above-mentioned independence of the Sirdars and their impatience of |

superior control is to be observed in numerous instances even in the Khang

or rulers of villages, being of course more pronounced in Ya’entsta’N than

in the Pishin and other portions of the Amir’s Territory. To give an |

example. In the Pishin the ruins of a village called Sayan Sa’no or

Urumzal were passed. It had been but recently destroyed by a more |

powerful neighbouring village called Sayan Parnp in a quarrel between the |

two Khans. The Uruuzats had to fly altogether out of Afghan Territory |

across the Belo’ch Border. to Kuu’saua’K where they settled. They ap-

pear to have been hunted across the Border by the other village without

any attempt at interference on the part of the neighbours. Again not far |

from this last were two villages, Old and New Ma‘trrya’r, the old village}

having been deserted on account of an internal dispute and a new site

selected a few miles off. The same thing was to be observed at a place!

called Warta’eat in the Bo’rat valley, where an evidently lately ruined |

village called Old Warta’Gat was passed. I was informed it had become

so about five years before on account of an internal squabble. Like the}

* The very remarkable parallel to be observed politically between the Afehans j

and the Mainotes of Greece I have elsewhere pointed out. J. U.S. I. of India, 1880,

1880.]_ K. C. Temple—LRoute of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. 151

Barons of European feudal times these village Khans seem to exercise the

right of private war on their neighbours without control or interference.

Certain villages have aequired an evil name for this kind of truculence.

Kacw in the Suo’r valley is such avillage. Nor isa fight or quarrel always

a necessary reason for a change of site, any caprice or change of owners is

sufficient. A case in point is the fort of Ha’si Kua’n (Amanp Kun’r) in

the Pishin. And towards the Border by the Han Pass, in the long stretch

of disputed land about the passes, ruined villages are naturally to be seen

in the more exposed parts of the Lu’nt Kun’t, Zarxua’n and Spin Tarin

country on the Afghan side and in Ba’rKHo’m on the Beloch side, the

result of endless border raids. The lawlessness of the Guinzats along the

roads between Kandahar and Kabul has been noticed by former travellers,

one of whom has written :* ‘“ Every man distrusts his neighbour or is at

open feud with him. It is the custom of the country to throw a heap of

stones over murdered travellers, and in the ravine leading from Suriaar to

—Zurmat (Ghilzai country) the frequency of these heaps is sickening. In

many cases they are to be found at the closed end of the ravines showing

how the poor travellers have run as far as possible and then been cut

down.” ‘The same may be remarked of almost any part of the Kakar

}eountry, and in that portion about Mts. Ma’zuw6 and Sprysxuar where

_ the heights are crossed between the Us and Nan@anvu’na Passes, there is

a long narrow valley between low hills to be crossed, and in this it is hard-

| ly any exaggeration to say that these heaps may be seen but a few yards

_apat. The reason appears to be that persons going from the SHo’r and

Go’rat Valleys or the Duman country from the south towards the Pishin must

| pass this way through a country which is for some thirty miles utterly unin-

habited. In the wild uninhabited border tract about the Han, Hanoxat

and Triku Kuram passes they may be seen in clusters in many places

telling of some fights either among the local tribes themselves or with the

, Belodchis.

}

The mutual distrust among the tribes and even sections inhabiting

\different districts is so great as to result in an almost absolute ignorance

(of each other. They appear to have a real fear of going into each other’s

country and invariably give one another a bad character. Thus Ka’kars

jare an abomination to Tarins and AcwaKkzArs and Lu’nts to Ka’Kans,

| while the wretched Zarxkna’n is harried on all sides. The Isa’ Kne’h

i Sa and the inhabitants of the Gwa’t valley manifested an extraordi-

nary fear of the Pa’nizat Kakars of the hills to the east of them. Sanpar

Kine’, Kakars could not be induced to venture into the neighbouring Lunt

territory and I did not personally meet a man who had been towards

\Guaznt by the To’na Plateau or along the Tal Chétidli Route. A guide

* Macgregor’s Gazetteer.

152 R. C. Temple— Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. [WNo. 4,

from the Do’r Balley an I'sa’ Kun’t, showed the liveliest anxiety to get

back again from Isprra Ra’aua and would not venture into the ZaKupn’t

Territory and an old Urma’n Kun't guide told me he had never ventured

beyond the territories of his section of the Kakars.

The structure of the houses in the more civilized parts, which in the

hills consist of nothing more than rough mud and thatch, is a further proof

of the general lawlessness of the population. In the GHazear, Bo’RAtr

and Lu’nt Valleys, among the Urmi’y, Sanpar and Lu’nt Kue’ts a house

is nothing less than a fort round which, frequently within walls, is the

cultivation necessary to support life, and when the crops are gathered they

are stored in little round mud towers which I have shown elsewhere to

contain just enough grain for one family for a year. Inthe Do’r Valley,

however, I only saw one fort in a village called Kua’ntzat Ka’re’z and in

the Pishin the villages were all open. Life in the Pishin among the Tarfns

and Sayaps seems to have been much more settled than elsewhere, but the |

AcHakzais have a bad name as thieves and robbers.

Government among the Duranis differs considerably from that of the

other tribes, noticeable chiefly in its regularity and order. Each section

of the Durdnis is governed by a sirddr and each subsection by a MautxK or

Musuir. ‘The principle is election qualified by hereditary claims, 2. e., the

sirdar is elected from the chief family of the clan or section, and the malik

from the chief family of the subsection. ‘The sirddr has a deputy or naib

always a near relative appointed by himself. Their occupation of the land |

is directly from the Amir on the condition of military service. Among 4

themselves the Duranis do not as a rule resort to private revenge, hence

internal blood-feuds de not exist among them as among other tribes. Their

disputes are settled by the “Jrraa” backed up by the sirdaér, by the inter=

position of the elders, by friends of the parties, by the priests (Munuas),

or by the civil and ecclesiastical judges (Ka’zi’s). The AcHaxzats, the |

section of the Durdnis met with en route, are the wildest of those inhabit-—

ing South Afghanistan and are entirely a nomad race, hardly ever living ina

house. They inhabit the To’Ba Plateau and during the summer roam over

it with their flocks and spread themselves over the lower slopes of the

Kno’sa Amra’N Range about the Kapaner and Pishin Valleys during the

winter, where their black tents or K1zupars are to be seen everywhere.

Their Sirdar is at present Mfr Astam Kia’n, son of Mir Appunta Kua’

who built the well known fort or village of that name at the Pishin

entrance of the Kio’sax Pass.

The Kakars and Independent Pathans do not apparently recognise

any particular sirdér or chief, and probably any man rules who has the

requisite force of character, though birth, on which an Afghan always sets |

such an extravagant value, is pretty sure to exercise considerable weight in

1880.] R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. 153

the selection of aruler. Thus Samanpar Kua’n of the Lu’nts, now their

leader, is the son or near relative of Paryp Kwa’n their late ruler. Sia’n

Joua’n of Knasno’s (Zu0’s valley) is a great man among the Kakars and

Gwarat Kia’n among the Sanpar Kun’t.

V. Civilization.

As regards civilization, except as to dress, methods of cultivation and

dwellings, but little could be observed in such a hurried journey as mine.

On the first point there is little to be noticed beyond what has been

already written about it by the authors of the following:* “ The Afghans

wear their clothes long. They consist of two large very ample robes and

are either of cotton or a cloth made of camel’s hairf called BareK: this is

the dress of -the people. ‘The only difference in the garments of the rich

is the material, which is silk, cloth or Kashmir. In summer they are made

without lining, but in winter they are wadded with cotton or lined with

fur. The under-garment is confined by a piece of muslin or long-cloth

which is wound round the body. The outside one, and sometimes a third

robe, is used as a cloak, and a person would be considered as wanting in

politeness if on visiting a superior he did not put it on. The shirt is very

full and the sleeves which reach below the hands particularly so.t The

former is open to the sides from the neck to the waist and falls over the

trousers, and these which are excessively large, open at the foot and are

drawn in at the waist with a string. The head is covered by an enormous

blue or white turban and the feet with slippers without quarters. The

upper classes are for the most part simply dressed and consider luxury in

this respect as enervating, but some young chiefs have their robes embroider-

ed with gold thread and ornamented with gold lace. This is done in the

harems by the women who excel in this kind of work, particularly in Kanda-

har. The Afghans are not careful of their clothes and soil them the

very first day they are put on, for they squat on the ground without taking

the least thought whether the spot on which they sit is clean or dirty.

They never change their garments, not even the shirt, until they are com-

pletely worn out, and as they rarely wash themselves they are constantly

covered with vermin great and small.”

In the matter of dress excepting the Achakzais, the Duranis show as

usual a considerable superiority over the other tribes. The following was

found to be a fairly true description of their dress.§ “The Durdnis about

* Maceregor’s Gazetteer.

t+ A thick white material like felt for the outer cloak is common about Kandahir

and the Pishin, and to this is often added a “ poshtin” or coat of skin with the hair

turned inwards.

{ The cloaks about Kandahir and all over the South haye frequently long false

sleeves reaching nearly to the ground,

§ Macgregor’s Gazetteer,

154 R. C. Temple—LRoute of the Tul Chotiali Field Ferce. [No. 4,

towns, most of those in villages and all those of the shepherds who are in

easy circumstances wear a dress nearly resembling that of Persia, which.

though not very convenient is remarkably decorous and with the addition

of a beard gives an appearance of gravity and respectability to the lowest

of the common people. The poorer Duranis, particularly among the shep-

herds, wear a wide skirt and mantle. ‘The poor only change their clothes

on Fridays and often only every other Friday, but they bathe once a week

at least, and their prayers require them to wash their faces, beards and

hands and arms many times in the course of the day. The little Khans

all over the country wear the Persian dress. Their coats are made of silk,

satin, and a mixture of silk and cotton called Garmsut, and sometimes of

brocade, and they all wear shawl girdles and a shawl round their caps.

Their cloaks also are of broadcloth often red or of silk of different colours.”

To the Achakzais the above remarks hardly apply except in a very general

way. Their manner of dress is the same, but they seldom or never change

their clothes as long as they last, and consequently go about in filthy rags

often half tumbling off them. They are in dress as in everything else the

most uncouth and uncivilized of the great clan to which they belong.

With regard to the Sayads, Tarins and Kakars, ete. met with en route

there is little to be remarked except that they all wore the unmistakeable

Afghan dress. In the more civilized valleys as the Pishin, Déf, Gwal,

Ghazgai and the Borai the dress was better and more respectable answering

to the above given description of the Durani dress.* But in the hill dis-

tricts especially in the elevated region about Mt. MAzuw6 the dress mere-

ly appeared to be a collection of dirty rags, the remains of what was origin-

ally the national costume. The PAnizats, Mrnrarzats, SarAnezats,

Amanp and Sunmm4n Kur’ts, Dumars and Zakupe’ts among the Kakars

bear off the palm for dirt and squalor. The Iss, Urm4n and Sanpag

Kur’ts are much cleaner and neater in appearance and altogether better

dressed. The Lu’nts and ZarKudys met with wore the dirtier and more

ragged class of dress, but with the exception of the Sanpar Kue’ Kakars

the Pishin Sayads were the best-dressed people I recollect to have seen on

the road.

The dwellings were found to differ considerably in different parts of

the route. Those about the Pishin and Dof valleys were apparently con-

structed on the same principles, whether Sayad, Tarin, Achakzai or

Kakar. Tribe indeed does not apparently affect the construction of

dwellings so much as locality.

The most noticeable construction of hut is that to be found every-

* Among the Sayads it was to be observed that the articles of dress were not

homespun but of foreign manufacture, obtained probably during their many visits to

Hindustan.

cunt «KA PWS SFG seed ee .

yreupuey &) 499 000'6 “re8lyhg “aN "L Sta agion soddy an yy OT "9 Bt

yy e194) ey

Seiad

(-yoey Jest) POU “A Out Jo :

29.105) TOMOrT qnyY Leyey AOTIZ A ulysiq ‘“Weelys poxuequia Yim ({[ru1aye) ghsy 2 ‘Sia

see

RG oe

“sate A

jouepey = pue uUIystd

°qudy uoUeMIAd-TULaS 10

repyziy ezyeyoy uy '¢e “SIy

cee ma ats

Ye oo Z,

(OM sy oe gcmabeaprree OT EE A ce to eee

eel ae nl a aa oe

‘AayeA urystg “MY upyed ‘8 ‘oUysiq( zeyepuey "INA UPUIed 1 ‘8a

OSB ‘I Wed ‘XITX ‘TOA ‘eSueg ‘00S aE ‘yeuIMo f

1880. ] R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 155

where to the west of the Kno’sa Amran Range. ‘These are square dwellings

of mud (kachcha) bricks about 20 feet by 12 feet and some 6 to 8 feet

high surmounted by one or more small domes. In this method of construc-

tion wood is not required for the roof, a great consideration in a treeless

country like South Afghanistan (v7de fig. 1). But the hut ef the Pishin

Valley and neighbourhood has a sloped roof (fig. 2) supported on strong

rafters, thatched and finally covered with mud. This roof is by far the

most valuable part of the structure, and during their numerous migrations

they carry away the wood-work to be set up in the new site. The usual

measurements of such a hut are roughly: length 18 feet, breadth 6 feet,

height of wall 6 feet and of roof 10 feet. They have no windows but

usually three small holes at either end for air and smoke. A hut generally

stands in a small yard surrounded by a rough stone or mud wall and some-

times there are two or three huts in the same enclosure.

As the mountainous regions between the Pishin and Shor Valleys are

approached, the huts become much rougher though constructed on the same

principles. They are irregular structures of mud over foundation walls of

large unhewn and uncemented stones from the nearest stream or hill-side,

and frequently also the back wall is the hill-side itself. The roof as before

is of thatch covered with mud. ‘There is also often a small window hole

| and the door frequently stands out from the roof on the principle of a

dormer window (fig. 5). The general dimensions are height 10 to 12

| feet, height of rough stone-work 8 feet, of mud wall 1 to 2 feet, length 10

to 12 feet.

Up in the mountains and in the upper gorge of the R. Ro’p the dwell-

ings degenerate into a mere irregular thatch of leaves and brushwood of

a pyramidal or conical form supported by a centre pole and having a door

or entrance at one side. Frequently a hole is scooped out from the hill-

| side and thatched in, so as to form a rough kind of hut or dwelling. These

conical huts measure generally: height 10 feet, diameter at base 10 feet

(vide fig. 4).

On reaching the lower lands about O’busHTKar, Kuwira and

| Curmshn, a hut very similar in appearance to that of the lower Ro’p

i |

“+

Gorge is to be seen, the roof of which is irregular and of thatch covered

with mud and supported on irregular rough stone walls cemented, so to

speak, with mud. ‘There is usually no gap for a window (vide fig. 8). The

measurements are: length about 12 feet, height of wall 3 feet, total height

8 feet.

(| In the mountainous tract between the SHo’r and Zuo’p valleys the

huts are very wretched and have the appearance of being of-a temporary

_eharacter. The floor is scooped out of the ground on the hill-side so as

, to save a back-wall, and a wall about 3 feet high is built up on three sides

156 R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Ohotiali Field Force. [No. 4,

surmounted by the usual mud-and-thatch roof The interior height is

about 6 feet and the length some 10 or 12 feet, breadth 6 feet.

But on reaching the Guazear and Bo’Rar Valleys, 7. e., the territories

of the Urmdw and Sanpar Kun’t Kakars, a notable difference in dwelling

structure is observable. The houses, rather than huts, now to be seen are of

mud, as in Belochistan, Sind and the Panjab.* In the Guazaat Valley

they are all fortified after the fashion of these people, having frequently a

look-out tower, which is sometimes square but generally circular, attached

to them. The body of the building has the sloped thatch-and-mud roof of ©

the Pishin valley. The entrances or doors are very low, being only 3 feet

or so in height; the tower has also a separate entrance of a similar

construction, and round the top of it is a row of loop-holes. The usual

dimensions are: height of wall 4 feet, of hut 8 feet, of tower 12 feet, base

of tower 6 feet square (diameter, if round, 6 feet), length of hut 16 feet

(wide fig. 9).

In the Bo’rat and Lu’nt Valleys were the best dwellings (figs. 10, 11,

13) I saw outside Kandahar in all 8. Afghanistan, and I can hardly do

better regarding them than repeat what I have elsewhere said.+ ‘“ They

are no longer huts, but have become houses with dimensions varying consi-

derably ; fig. 10 represents one of the smaller ones. They are built entirely

of mud with flat roofs from which the water is carried by projecting

spouts. ‘They are generally fortified and have towers attached and usually

only one door. Fig. 11 represents one of these fortified houses. The

bulk of the houses, however, in the Bo’rat Valley are much larger than

those above mentioned, and may be described as fortified structures of mud,

surrounded by a mud wall some 12 feet high and covering sometimes nearly

an acre of ground (vide fig. 18). They have usually several towers attach-

ed and one door; within the outer wall are a quantity of fruit trees, and the

house probably contains a whole family. Generally also there is a low 38

foot mud wall extending round the fields belonging to the house probably

for their protection. Three or four such houses often constitute a village.

The fortifications of an Urmdy Kue’t village are often supplemented by

a small regular square mud fort or redoubt with corner towers. Forts of

a similar description are also to be observed about the Sanpar Kue’t and

Lu’nr Yerritory, where the villages are generally a straggling collection of

* Tn the Panjab the walls of such a house (kachché makdn) are built simply of

wet mud (géndha) without foundation (bunyad), then smoothed over with liquid mud

(kaigal) and finally covered with a wash of cowdung and mud (g6ébri) and often also

with whitewash (sufédi) or a coloured lime-wash (rang). The roof (chhat) is of rafters

(hari) covered with a light reed thatch (sirki), plastered over with mud or earth

(mitthi) and cowdung (g6bri),

t J. R.G.S., 1880.

1880.] RB. C. Temple— Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 157

the large fortified houses above described. They have a well-built, sub-

stantial and prosperous appearance not often seen in the Hast. Sometimes

a Mark or petty chief will build himself a fort apparently as much for

show as anything else. Cuind Ko’r in the Bo’rat valley (fig. 14) is such

a fort. The main interest in it is that it is quite new, not more than 20

years old, and so is a specimen of the modern method of Kakar fortifica-

tion. It is on a small isolated hillock rising out of the valley, and is

constructed as usual of mud on a rough stone foundation. ‘The owner is

one Matix Sanpi, an Anfizar Sanpar Kun’t. The approach is by a

causeway of very rough construction, and it is entered as usual by a single

door so situated as to be easily commanded. The whole structure covers

about an acre of ground’,

The nomadic habits of the Durdnis and especially of the Achakzai

section of that tribe have been frequently noticed by former writers.

Among the Kakars, too, are found several nomad sections, such as the SuLI-

mAN and Amann Kuer‘ts of the Pishin and the bulk of the PAnizats,

Domars, and Zakupr ts; even the more fixed and agricultural sections of

the Kakars, as the Sanpar and UrmAn Kue'ts, and the Lvu’nts have the

nomadic instinct strong in them and spend all the hotter weather roaming

with their flocks in the neighbouring hills. By far the greater part of the

ActAkzAtTs have no fixed abode, but live in a curious kind of hut called

a Kazmpat, which has been thought peculiar to the Duranis, but as far as

I could ascertain, it is common to all the nomad sections whether Durant

or KAxar. The Kizirpatr isa structure of bent willow rods or withies

covered over with black felt-like blankets and sometimes with black mat

ting (vide fig. 3), There are generally four or five of these willow supports

in a row over which the covering is stretched. I saw one in the course of

construction near Axnfzar in the Pishin and the method of putting up the

supports is that shown in fig. 15. The Kizhdais are very warm in winter

and can be made, by opening out the sides, cool and pleasant in summer,

and are also, from the closeness of the strands of the covering which swell

with moisture, impervious to rain. They have for a nomad race the advan-

tage of being as easily moved as an ordinary tent. In several Kizhdais of

a permanent kind near villages I saw a regularly railed in space in the

middle for goats and sheep. ‘The usual dimensions are: height 4 feet,

length 12 feet, opening or doorway 3 feet by 3 feet.

There are two other kinds of structure which are interesting in this

connection. In the Bo’rar valley the Sanpar Karn’ts build small circular

mud towers of peculiar make (vide fig. 12), raised on piles about 2 feet

from the ground, in which they store grain containing as I have elsewhere

shown* about enough for five persons for one year. Buusa (chaff or chop-_

* J. R.G.S.. 1880.

158 R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Ohotiali Field Force. {No A,

ped straw for fodder) is kept in round mud-covered heaps containing about

100 to 200 maunds, as are turnips ete. in England for the winter. Grain

of all sorts is also stored in sacks weighing about 100 seers, which are kept

in the huts and sometimes buried in some place known only to the owner

to save them from the rapacity of the numerous hangers-on of the Sirdars

or of the Amir.

-Secondly, AsyAs or watermills are noticeable objects everywhere.

Their general features have been frequently before described, as they are

common to Afghanistan, Persia and Turkistén, and the following from

MacGregor will answer the internal description of them all: “The wheel

is horizontal and the feathers are disposed obliquely so as to resemble the

wheel of a smoke-jack. It is within the mill and immediately below the

mill-stone, which turns on the same spindle with the wheel. The water is

introduced into the mill by a trough so as to fall on the wheel. The

wheel itself is not more than 4 feet in diameter.”* Externally they have

always the appearance of the ordinary habitations round them, whatever

the prevailing construction may be. They are to be found along the line

of a Kv’tor of a natural running stream, and often, to give the water greater

power, a portion of the stream will be banked up for some distance before

it reaches the mill (fig. 4). The roof is usually on a level with the banks

of the stream. In places, as at Afzart in the Pishin, long lines of

AsyA4s and embankments are to be seen along the same stream (fig. 17).

There is little to be remarked under the head of cultivation beyond a

notice of such methods of irrigation, ete., as came prominently under obser-

vation, for my journey was of too hurried a nature to admit of any inves-

tigation. In irrigation considerable skill is everywhere evinced in 8.

Afghanistan, especially in the direction of Ku’ss or artificial water-courses,

of KArn’zes or underground water-courses, and of groins and river dams.

Wells are not seemingly in use for cultivation as in the Panjab and Persia.

The Ku’t is well-known in all the northern districts of India and there

is little to be added here, except to notice the general prevalence of this

style of irrigation in S. Afghanistan, where along the Tarnax Valley it is

used to such an extent as to dry up and disperse the water of the river:

a state of things also noticeable along the rivers running towards the Indus

and the Kacuf Plain of Belichistan. ‘The entire flow of many mountain

streams is frequently thus utilised, and great skill is often to be observed

in the preservation of the levels; and in one place in the Bo’Rar Valley I

observed a Kv’t carried under the stony bed of the R. To’R Katze’ by

rough but practicable syphon.

* Such watermills are common enough in the Himalayan districts, and Ihave in

my possession a wooden bowl turned by a lathe worked by a water-wheel in a remote

valley in Ku/xv’.

‘NVLSINVHDAV WOU STHOLAYS

‘weSeifem “faye reipg -esnoyy (aeyyy) 19UM Iepueg “1 “Sty :

‘ee ‘eldmes ‘0 8

WRTRY ‘@oYFO s[erauer) swofoume ety ye peydeagoouy 7 .

Aap

Dacs>

rhea tee an bal SO

reserie yy “Aare rer0 gf ‘puesutrn, § “Aaye A reszeqyH

wesptiv yy =“ AOye A TIO

reuein (1eyey) [PYM Jepueg "BT “PL

RRLON TIA ETSI ST os ah moe

a Ser art HSligg Ct ia! RAL EON ere et

‘ie Faq, BERT sg, SNe eens

Og sarees

7% sivta ‘oggT ‘T Wed ‘XITX ‘TOA ‘Tedueg ‘oog ‘sy ‘TeuMor

1880.] R. C. Temple— Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 159

The KAre’z has been frequently noticed by travellers in Central Asia

beginning with Marco Polo, who, according to Ramusio’s version, writes

about “ the wearisome and desert road in Krermd4n (KrrmAn)’, that*

“after those days of desert you arrive at a stream of fresh water running

underground, but along which there are holes broken in here and there, per-

haps undermined by the stream, at which you can get sight of it. It has

an abundant supply and travellers worn with the hardships of the desert

here rest and refresh themselves and their hearts.”” Col. Yule remarks on

this (p. 116) “the underground stream was probably a subterraneous canal

(called Kandr and KArw’z) such as is common in Persia, often conducted

from a great distance. Here it may have been a relic of abandoned culti-

vation”. Ihanikoff on the road between KirmAn and Yuzp, not far west

of that which I suppose Marco to be travelling, says: “ At the fifteen

inhabited spots marked on the map they have water which has been

brought from a great distance and at considerable cost by means of sub-

terraneous galleries to which you descend by large and deep wells. Al-

though the water flows at some depth its course is marked upon the surface

by aline of more abundant vegetation.’’ Elphinstone says he has heard

of such subterranean conduits 36 miles in length”? MacGregor describes

the construction of a Kruz thus: “ashaft 5 or 6 feet in depth is sunk at

the spot where the stream is to issue on the surface, and at regular intervals

of from 20 to 50 or more paces in the direction of the hill, whence it has

been previously ascertained that a supply of water will be obtained, other

shafts are sunk and the bottoms of all connected together by slightly slop-

ing tunnels. The depth of the shafts increases with their distance from

the original according to the slope of the ground. Their number and the

length of the Ka/rn’z depends on the supply of water met with, the

quantity required and the distance of the habitable or cultivable spot.

The position of the shafts is marked by circular heaps of earth on the

surface and their orifices are usually closed, the covering being removed

at intervals of a year or more for the purpose of cleaning and repairing

the shafts and tunnels. Much experience is required to select a spot from

which a plentiful and lasting supply will be obtained. Some K<Aru’zus

afford a constant supply of water for ages whilst others become exhausted

before they have paid for the cost of construction.” To this I may add

the advantage of the K4rn’z is the prevention of the rapid evaporation

the water would undergo in such a climate if freely exposed to the air.

Kiru’/zns are frequently very deep, 40 feet and more below the surface.

Judging from one seen under construction in the Pishin, the shafts or

wells are sunk as usual with pick and shovel and with crate and windlass,

and the water-passage tunnelled out afterwards. One cause of the per-

* Yule’s Marco Polo I, 116.

160 R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. (No. 4,

manent drying up of Kfrezes is the shifting of the subterraneous water

lodgment, and it is not uncommon to see parallel lines of K4re’z wells close

to each other. K<nr’z digging is a special occupation, the Guruzais being

famous for it.

The system of irrigation by tanks or open reservoirs so successfully

used in Matsu’R and many parts of the Madras Presidency is only sparing-

ly used in Afghanistan, and I only observed a few small irrigation tanks in

the Pishin and Kapaner Valleys, though from the universal presence of

uneven country in Afghanistan it would appear that the Matsu’r system

of bands and tanks should succeed as a means of irrigation if regularly in-

troduced.

The method of irrigation by means of groins and reclamation of

river-beds to be observed in the high lands along the valley of the R.

Ro’p and in the Suo’z Valley in the neighbourhood of CHumws4N is very

remarkable. These groins are constructed at a great cost of labour with

rough stones and tree trunks and are frequently turfed over and planted

with willows and small bushes. In the Ro’ Gorge the main portion of

the cultivable land has been obtained in this way.

There is one more point to be noticed in this connection. Elphinstone

states (Kingdom of Kabul) that it seems to be only in the very poorest

parts of the country that land is allowed to lie fallow for a year. This,

however, is apparently not the case in the Kakar Country generally, espe-

cially in the Bo’rar Valley, where the large area under cultivation is only

to be accounted for by a large portion of it being allowed to lie fallow

every year.

Madder, which, as MacGregor observes, is common in the west of Afch4-

nistan and sold all over India by Pathans as Masir or Mansit, is to be found

in the Do’F Valley in highly cultivated lands deeply furroughed and

manured. The leaves are used for cattle and the roots for the dye. This

cultivation is elaborate, good and costly, and the yield in the Do’r Valley ~

is saidto be worth Rs. 1000. The people there believe apparently that it is

not grown elsewhere ; it is, however, to be seen about TaKut-1-Pu’L near

Kandahar.

Graveyards deserve mention in this place. These are to be found

scattered over the land in places quite remote from population. In fact

the dead are frequently carried to long distances from their place of decease

in order to be buried at a particular spot. This system of carrying the

dead to certain places belonging to the family is prevalent among the

Panjab Muhammadans, the Yu’surzats and other such Pathdns as inhabit

British Territory. I saw the body of a Supanp{e of the 26th Panjab

Native Infantry who had died at Quetta being carried down the Bolan —

Pass to be buried in the Peshawar District, and on the Panjab Railways

eee ac ey

1880.] R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 161

there are special rates and arrangements for the carriage of corpses.

On the other hand among the Pathans travellers and often the dead

on a field of battle are buried where they die, and the Gurnzats are always

so buried. The reason given for conveying corpses to certain burial grounds

is, that a Pathan should be buried by the tomb of the Pfr or Saint he

followed in life, at whatever distance it may be. This accounts for grave-

yards on the summits of mountains, as on Mt. Kuwisa Amrdy in the

GwAsa Pass, and in the Trixm Kuram and PdérKar Passes miles away

from habitations.* I was told that parties on the road to and from a

burial place were never molested. MacGregorft states with reference to

the Gurnzais that it is the custom of the country to throw a heap of

stones over a murdered traveller and that the road leading from SuHinreHaRr

to Zu’rmat the frequency of these heaps is sickening, in many cases being

found at the closed ends of ravines, showing that the poor travellers have

run as far as possible and then been hewed down. The same remarks

would be perfectly true of the long and narrow To’poparcu Valley near

Mt. MAzuwo6 in the highlands separating the country of the Zaxupn’ts

and PAnizatrs, a place particularly favourable for such murders, and the

large number of such heaps as above described, sometimes three or four

together, is horrible to contemplate. This method of forming cairns is

common also in the Himalayan Districts, and I have seen Gurends in

passing these Pathan cairns throw stones on them from sheer habit.

The Lu’nts form little pillars of rough stones to mark the spots of

victories over the Beltchis, and several such pillars (fig. 16) are to be

found in the Han Pass and about the Debatable Lands.

As might have been anticipated, of historical remains there are practi-

eally none. Indeed such could hardly be expected in a country which has

no history to speak of, beyond petty internal squabbling, and no means of

constructing buildings on any scale or of durable materials. In the Pishin

there is an old ruined fort of the HArv’ns (Tarfns) on a hill called Srrw’

Kurta deserted about 60 years ago; and near SamAnzat, not far from

Kuv’supm Kin, a small artificial mound with some fortifications on if

like those at Quetta, with which it has probably a similar origin. It is

ealled Spin Kuria (White Fort) but has apparently no local history. The

only distinctly historical traditions which the K4kars appear to have relate

to NAprr SuAn’s time, z. e., only a century back, and in the Bo’rar all

* The Zaxxa Kur’ts, a wild troublesome tribe about the Kamar, who have a

bad name, are said to have stolen a saint from the Yu’surzais and murdered him

to obtain the Pi’r round whose grave they bury their dead. Tradition says that they

are such scoundrels, that no man among them could be found whom even they could

reverence after death as a saint.

+ Quoted above in the section on Polity.

162 R. C. Temple— Route of the Tal Ohotiali Field Force. [No. 4,

remains are locally referred to him. In the centre of the Valley a fort of

some size built on the same principle as that at Quetta, but not so high and

much more extensive, is called SHaHR-I-NAptr. It is now deserted and

considerably ruined. The principle on which these forts were built is a

very sound one in such a country, as the most desirable position from

which to watch a valley is from an eminence so situated that all parts of

the valley are visible at once, and at the same time that an enemy advane-

ing from the hills must show himself. As it is very seldom that such

eminences are natural they had to be constructed where necessary. This is

the governing principle in the selection of the sites of Quetta and Kanda-

har, in fact the attempt to build Kandahar alongside one of the apparent-

ly strongly situated hills near it failed as a military measure.

In the Bo’rar Valley and along the route thence, v7é the Hanumpir,

Trixn Kuram and Haw Passes, towards BARKHO’M a remarkable set of

remains are found everywhere in the shape of large quantities of pieces of

burnt bricks and pottery* of a manufacture and excellence not now known

in these parts. These are found in all kinds of places, on the hill tops, in

the valleys and passes and alongside streams. The inhabitants say they

are the remains of NAprr Sudu’s army, but as this was an old KArrna

route, the present one vd Muxuvar being not far distant, it is as likely

that the presence of the remains is due to this as to NAprr Sudn’s march

in this direction ; itis, however, more than likely that he and his successor

Aumap SuAu, the first Durdnt and hero of PAnipat, or portions of their

forces made more than one march along this route.

The state of civilization varies considerably with the locality, the in-

habitants of the valleys being of course more civilized than their hill

neighbours. As has been above observed, the more hilly the country the

more scarce and rough the dwellings become, a sure indication of the

general civilization of the occupants. The Zarkudns and among the K4é-

KARS the Dumars, Zakupn’ts, PAnizats and Amano Kur'ts bear off the

palm for wildness, and their civilization is merely nominal. The Urmdy

and Sanpar Kue’ts present a substantial, though rude, form of civilization

of the patriarchal type, as shown in their buildings, their husbandry, their

better class of wearing apparel and the quantity’ of food supply, much of

it foreign, which they possess, and the same is true of the Lunt Kue’ss.

The Kakars of the Do’r and GwA4t Valleys resemble their Pishin neigh-

bours in almost everything, even to their habit of visiting foreign countries,

and many an sk Kien or Suamozar Kakar is to be found, who has been

in Karachi and Bombay and even served as a sailor. In the Pishin there

are many indications of a superior civilization, notably in the presence of

* Several specimens were sent to this Society by the present writer with the Geo-

logical collection he made in the districts under discussion,

Journal As. Sec. Sengal, Vol. ELIT, Part J, 1890. Scale 12 Feet = 1 Inch, ere

12 a 6 3 ° Ru a4 36 48

Fg NN SN

Han Pass

Fig. 14. Borai Valley House. Ching Két,

i raat

A iar. 6

Ms = ee LET

Bérai Valley. Sandar Khé

No Scale. Hillock about 50 Feet high.

Gadiwar Hills in the distance.

Fig. 15. Showmg construction of a Kizhdai.

I Shawing method of placing the bent withics or main props,

seer

Fig. 17. A line of Msyds (watermills) along a Kil near Alizai, Pishih Valley.

Znwogenphed at the Surveyor General's Office, Valenita

SKETCHES FROM AFGHANISTAN.

1880.] R. C. Temple—Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. 163

women and children in the villages passed by the army, the knowledge of

Hindtstani, which is there so frequent as to carry one anywhere through

the valley, and the travelling habits of the people. ‘These traits are more

specially to be observed among the Pishin Sayans, than among the Tarins,

though many of these speak Hindtstanf fluently, as also can some of the

Do’r and Gwin Valley Kakars. Many of the so-called Pathins who travel

to all parts of India and even to Burmah selling horses are Pishin Sayads,

some of whom make it a yearly practice to do so, keeping regular agents

at BanGanvu’r (in Matrsv’r) and other horse marts. When the field tele-

graph was first opened at Guutsr{n KAre’z in the Pishin, all private

messages had to be countersigned by the Political Agent, whose tent was

besieged by applications for telegrams from the Sayads and Tarins, who sent

messages to all parts of India, one being addressed to Kandy in Ceylon.

VI. Language.

My observations under this head were the most unsatisfactory of all,

as I was enabled to do little more than observe the variations in the pro-

nuneciation of place names.

The language spoken is Pusuto* in dialects not, however, differing

so much from the standard Pushto of our army as to prevent the soldiers

from being readily understood. Its most prominent feature, the excessive

gutturalness, seen in such words as Guwazu, UkumMuGHDAI, Zuizua TAn-

GAI, is apparently such as is commonly to be found in the language, as

also are the harsh cerebral t, d and r, so frequently heard all along the

route.} f

The next most important feature for the purposes of this paper is the

interchange of consonants in place names. Those that came under obser-

vation are the following, some of which are doubtless due to local dialectic

variation, f

Changes of J.

mto d and z. NG@ANDEH = Nednsgen: SydAscgatr — Sykpaat =

SAZDAI.

into zh and y. Zuo’R = Jo's = Yo's.

into z. Zax (the termination) = Zo’r = Jat = Ji.

into sh. KutsuusK = Kuusndn,

* Or Puxuto, KH (¢) and si (S) are conyertible sounds in the language.

t This is especially the case in the Bo’rar Valley and in the country approaching

the Beléch Border. But this might be due to the propinquity of the Beléchhi dialects

in which t and d are very hard.

{ All such interchanges are valuable for comparing and identifying the names

given by various authors to places along the same route,

164

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. (No. 4,

anto ch, KnHUNCHAGAT = KWUNJAGAT.

Changes of Z.

into d. Dargar = Zargat: Manzakat = Muonpaxkar: SaNpAR

Kurt = Sanzarn Kuper,

into d. To’R Kuatzn’ = To’r Kuan’.

into zh. Zawarn = Zuawan: Zaptvn = ZHavwn.

into g. Mundzat = Mataaat.

Changes of Rand R.

r into r. Bo’rat = Bo’rat: WarthGat = WaRtrdGat.

rand r mto l. Minrar => Mourtat: Kata = Kir = Kine’:

SHNAGAL = SHNAGHAR = SHNAGHAL,

ritod. WKawkra = Kuwipa.

r into zh. KizHpat = Kirpat.

Changes of D.

into g. ANGAND = NeAneé == Nigdnp: SyAseat = SyAspAT.

Changes of G.

into k. Ko'r = Go’r.

into gh. Sunacdt = Sunacust: Gowanp = Gund: GHUNDAMARAL

== GUNDAMARAL.

into kh. Gwhkta = Kawasa.

Changes of KH.

into k. WKsno’t Kkrn'z — Kusno’'t KAre’z.

into gh. JTanpare == Iknpare.

Changes of F.

into vand b. Ysar = Ysap = Igav.

Changes of B.

into p. AULAB = ALIP.

Changes of 8.

into sh. Lastat == LAasHrat.

Changes of TS.

into ch. TSAMAULANG = CHAMALANG.

Changes of V.

into w. WVATA'KRI = WaAtTA’KARI.

Instances of the loss and addition of consonants are :

of G. Pua’nezHaRs = Pua’NZHARA.

of Dand G. AncGa’ND = Niea’nN = Naa'ne.

of R. Dumar = Duma’: Baeua’wa = Bacuawar.

of K. Lasurat = LasurKat.

And instances of the transposition of syllables and consonants are:

of R. SuRGHWAND = SRAGHA’ND.

of Gh. GmoBarcal = Ocuparcal: ZageLun = GHAZLUN.

of V. Anga’ND = Nica’ND = In@a'ND.

1880.] RR. C. Temple—Rouwte of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. 165

From the above examples it will be observed that the most unstable

consonants are J, Z, ZH, R, D, G, KH, F, B, 8, TS, and v, with their counter-

parts SH, CH, ZH, K, GH, B, and w.

Regarding consonantal interchanges peculiar to the Pushto language,

Raverty (Gram. Pushto, p. 3) has noticed that kh ( ¢ ) is changed into sh

(%), ¢ (4%) into zh (4), ts and dz intochand j. And of the Kwar-

BARIS he observes that they so transpose their letters as to be almost

unintelligible. In his Dict. of Pushto (xxii) he further notices the inter-

change of z into dz.

Of vowel sounds I noticed as peculiar an 0 pronounced in several

words as the close German 6, thus, Uzupd, Ma’zuwo. And also the common

termination ai (written by Raverty aey) which is sounded with a closed

mouth and sharply as one syllable, though it partakes of the nature of two;

thus, ai. The frequent recurrence of this last gives the language an uncouth

sound, and, coupled with the prevalence of guttural consonants, an unpleasant

harshness to English ears.

The vowel changes are not important, the following being the most

noticeable.

Changes of A and A’,

aintot. ANGAND = Inednpo: Kazapar = Kiznpar: Kata =

Kin’ = Kirn’: TsamavLana = CuimAtana: ALAB =

Auip.

aimtou. Mupdzat = Matacgat: Manzaxat = Munpaxkat,

a and & into au. TSAMAULANG = CHIMALANG = CHIMALANG.

Changes of AT.

into t and o% Zat = Zot = Zi: LAxat = LAnt: Bo’rat =

Bo’ri: LUwat = Liuni: Daraar = Danrat.

into a. Mangan = MaInGgaL.

Changes of U.

into o. LtNat == Lo’Nat.

Changes of I.

into e. Ysar = H’sar.

Changes of WA.

into au. Waris = AurRiA.

into u and aw. Guwanpn = Gunp: Wartscar = Uriscar =

AURIAGAT.

into 4d. SURGHWAND == SURGHAN.

intoo. BaguAwa = Baauao.

Among local peculiarities a tendency to shorten and nasalize long

vowel syllables was frequently to be noticed, thus—

Amanptn for AmaptUn: Avrnzat for Apizat: BAnzat for BAzar: Assi

Kun for Ha’si Kin: Hanumpar = Anusar: AnGAND and NInGAND =

166 R. C. Temple—Ftoute of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. (No. 4,

Niea’n: Banea’wa = BaeHawar: and numerous other instances could

be adduced.

The Persian silent w Raverty (Gram. Pushto 4) observes is always

sounded in Pushto; thus ety» is pronounced Kuwa’s, not Kia’s, oles;

is Kmwa’y, not Kua’y. My observations in Kakar-land did not quite

bear him out in this; for the following I found to be synonymous

pronunciations. AxKiunp and AKHWAND: ZARKHA’N and ZWARKHA’N:

Surkuwa’s and Surxua’s, (where the w is a gratuitous insertion, the

word being SurkH+A/B, red water): Sur@Hwanp and SuraHa/n.

Before leaving the vowels a curious insertion of y in the following

word is worthy of remark. CHo’rra’Lt is locally CHo’ranat: ZaKHPE’L

and ZaKHpyn’t are synonymous and so are Sya’s@at and Sa z@an.

The following is a list of the various forms under which place names

were found by myself and on which the foregoing observations are based.

1. Anaa’np = Nea’nsen, Nicga’nueH, Niaa’n, Incan, Ninaa’y,

Nea’na, Niaa’yp, ANGAND, N@a’NDEH.*

2. Muzarat = Mzarat.

3. Assi Kua’n = Ha’si Kuan.

4. Gwa’sa = Kuwasa.

5. SKAN == Isxan.

6. Zar = Jat, Ji, Zo'i+

7. ZuHo'R = Jo's, Yo.

8. Vsar Kacnw = Ysap Kacn, E’sas Kacu, E’sar Kacn, Yusur

Kacu.t

9. Kuarzancal = KHABARZANGAT.

10. Avta’HDA’D = Kua’taKpa’p.§

11. Kauvsuta’x = Kuvsta’K.

12. Kizupat = Krrpat, Kazupatr, Kizupf.||

13. Kata = Kite’, Kire’, Ko’a.||

14. SurkHwa’B = SURKHA'B.

15. Kuuncouacar == Kuunsaqat.

16. Got = 160"7%||

17. Kusno’t Ka’Rr’z = Ksno't Ka’rv’z.

* Jen is for Dru, a village. These words represent the Lir Ancine and Ktz

AnGAne of the map (Do/’r Valley).

+ To show pronunciations of ai: this is a termination not a word.

{ These names arise from the confusion between Tsay and Ytsur (Esau and

Joseph).

§ These words have the same meaning, viz, God-given: there is a similarly named

village near Kandahar.

|| These are not place names.

3A.

35.

nanan CN

NOE i)

R. C. Temple— Route of the Tul Chotiali Kield Force.

ZHAWAR = ZAwar.

IgHpara = IKHBARG.

AmMAapDUN = AMANDUN.

Apizat = ADINZAT.

Zsptun = ZWavwn.

Mangan = Matnaat.

Ba’zat = Ba’nzat.

167

SurgHwaNnp = Suraua’n, SuRGHA’ND, Sracua’Np, SURGHAN,

SURGHAND, SRAGHAND.

SuNaGca’L = SHNAGHAR, SHNAGHAL, Sunacar, Suna’ Kwonat.

Warfa Kach = Auria Kacu.

Waragar = Baraat.

Mouta/zat = Manaaat.

ZAKHPH’L = ZAKaPyn’L = ZAKHWAL.

GHOBARGAI = OGHBARGAL.

Dumar = Duma’.

Sya’saa1 = Sya’paf, Sya’pa@at, Sa’zat, Sya’spal, Sazpat.

Kuwa/ra = Kuwa/pa, Kuwa’r.

ZAGHLUN = GHAZLA’NA, GHAZLUN.

Darear = Zarear, Dare.

GHUNDAMARAI = GUNDAMARAI.

GuHwanp = GUND.

Puawzwara = Poanezuara. ee

SURMASTAILI = SURMASTA/LI.

Bata/‘nat = Bra’Ni.

SaANDAR Kuen’, = Sanzarn Kue’t,.

To’r Katze’ = To’r Kuarpe’.

Cuo’/rra’Lr = CHo’na’nat.

Bo’rt = Bo’rat, Bo’rat.

Lasurar = Lasrat, LasnrKat.

Waria’Gar = Waria’Gal, Unia’aat, AURTA’GAL.

HanumBa’r = AnvuBa’r, AnUMBA’R, HanusBa‘r.

Mtxurar = Murra.

Lunt = Lo’nat, Lunat.

La’Kat = La’Ki.

TSAMAULANG = CHIMALANG, CHAMALANG, CHAMAULANG, CHA-

MA’LANG, CHA’MALANG.

AtaB = ALIP.

Sopa’n = Sosa’r.

Baeua’wa = Bacua’o, Baguawwa’r.

Vara’KRI = WaAtTA’KARI,

ZankuHa’N = ZwarKHAN.

168 R. C. Temple— Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. (No. 4,

58. To’r Tsappar = To’r Tsurpri.*

59. > Pasrm’ = Pasro’.

60. Manzarat = MunpaKat.

The frequent recurrence of certain names on the map leads to the

supposition that many of them are merely descriptive and on examination

the meanings of a great portion become apparent, the descriptive words

having changed very little on becoming names of places.f And though it

is always treading on dangerous ground to give derivations of place names,

I think the following are worth hazarding :

1. TanGat means a gorge or pass, so Spfr Tane@at would be the White

Gorge (Spir for Spin) and Tur Tanear the Black Gorge (TUr for To’r.)

2. Guunn is round, globular and the Guunp Peak would mean the

Round Hill, and Mt. SurenHwanp the Red Round Hill. Again Guunpa is

a detached hill and GuunpamaRratis Adam’s apple in the throat, and as

applied to a village would mean the village by the round detached hill.

3. Lwa’ra means hilly and as applied to a valley would signify the

hilly or upland valley.

4, Cor means a ravine or water furrow and is applied to a steep-

banked stream in the Pishin.

5. Sree’ Kurna would be the Inn or Caravanserai Fort. It was the

old rendezvous of the H&rtn Tarts in the Pishin. This is probably also

the meaning of Zara Kura in the Pishin.

6. The Gaz Hills might mean the Long Hills from 58 a yard-measure

or the Tamarisk Hills from _5* a tamarisk.

7. Mzanrat means a particular kind of reed and is applied to a river,

a valley, and some marshy springs and the hills near these last.

8. Surya’ is the Red River.

9. ZaRGHUN means green, verdant, fresh and is applied to a range of

mountains covered with forest in the heights and to a village by a stream.

10. Ltr means Upper and Ktz, Lower, when found in composition

with place-names. Lo’wn’ and Lo’ mean Greater: Kucunar and Kavn,

Lesser.

11. In Menrarzar, Menrar is Persian meaning “ master, ruler,”

MrnTarzat would mean the Ruling Clan.

12. Guwazn means a sluice and also the ear, and is found applied

to a stream and a range of the hills, the Spin Guwazu, (?) the White Har

Hills. ZuwazH means the murmuring of a brook and may be the deriva-

* A corruption of Kani Cuuprrf the Beléch name for the same place with the

same meaning, viz., Black Rock. Thus Trixkm Kuram is called also So’r Kuram, which

has the same meaning, Salt Springs.

+ I do not here refer to such purely men’s names as Haninuttan, Kutsupin

Kuan, transferred to the villages owned by the persons of these names.

1880.] kh. C. Temple— Route of the Tul Chotiali Field Force. 169

tion of the river name, whence perhaps also Zuizua Tanaar(?) the Rip-

pling Pass.

13. Mt. Kanp may derive its name from Kanp a chasm or Kanpat

broken ground.

14. Mt. Pit from its fancied resemblance to an elephant, Pi or Fin.

15. Saran Ka’rn’z and SHARAN occurring two or three times and

once as SHE’rin, are probably for Suirt’n, sweet.

16. Str or Surat is red and is met with in several words. Surat

also means a passage and the so-called SuRANa’RI Pass (the Surat Pass of my

maps) is for Surat Narat, the Slender Passage. Cf. also Laynpar Surat (?)

the Lower Passage. Mo’manp Sarat (?) the Momand’s Passage.

17. The word GupBare, as in OanBare, IkuBare, IneGBare and in

the plural forms GHoBarRGAar and OGHBARGAT, occurs several times. It

means the flat land between two hills, and upland valley: also double, two,

twins. In which latter sense it is probably used when applied to hills.

And hence also NarnatauBara Hills may mean the Narrow Valley Hills.

18. Ro’p means merely a river: Ro’pBa’R, a valley stream.

19. Ksuat means in, between, etc. and Kswo’r Karez might mean

the Middle Kavréz.

20. Kuwara is probably for Kwara, a sandy stream-bed, as

several such beds debouche into the Suor valley at the spots so named.

21. Sagar, SRAGHAR, SARGHAR, SURGHAR all common names mean

the Red Hills (Sur+Guar). So the SagarBanp Pass would be the Red

Hulls Pass.

22. SurKar Zan@at is the Red Forest.

23. DanrGat, a very common name, is the plural of Dar@a, a copse, a

place where trees and brush-wood grow together. Dar@a also means a

shrine and this may account for its application to villages.

24. GURKIAL is applied to a mountain stream and its defile and may

mean rattling, noisy, as GaRKAt is the rolling of a carriage and GarKanpa

a rolling stone from a mountain.

25. Zawar or Ziawar (Zawan) is a slope, declivity. Lwar Zwar is

uneven ground. Zmwawar also means a deep or hollow place.

26. Usn or Uxn is the camel. The Us Pass means the Camel’s

Pass, and the UkuMu@Hpar Pass the Camel’s Mouth Pass. (UkuH+ Maku).

27. Uzupd, the name of a peak, is apparently the plural of Uzun,

Uzup and Up, long, lengthy, stretched out.

28. Tsa’nu Peak = ? the Look-out Peak.

29. The Mo’sar Pass may derive its name from Mo’sat, a child’s

marble, a round stone, or from Mo’z1’, troublesome.

30. Kacn is the-cultivation by a stream-bed and is seen not only by

itself as a name for a stream, a village and a hill, but constantly in compo-

170 R. C. Temple—Route of the Lal Ohotiali Field Force. [No. 4,

sition, as fyar Kacu, Hsau’s Plot, Ta’zr’ Kacu, Greyhound Plot, Ko’sx

Kacu, Crooked Plot, Waria Kacu, the Free Plot, Sér Kacu, the Red

Plot, Zagan Kacu(?) the Rough Plot.

31. SHo’r which constantly appears as a name is probably for Smo’ra

or Kio’RA, saltpetre, nitre: a common property of the soil along the

route, It appears again in So’r Kram, the Salt Springs.

32. Suna’ Kuorar occuring as a synonym for Sunagua/t, a village

name, would mean a Mastic Hater.

33. ‘Tri’kH is salt, bitter, and appearsin TrikHa’pAGH, the Salt Hill-

side, if Da’a is for Ta’K, or the Salt Plain, if Da’e@u is for Da’a: and in

-Trir’ka Kram, the Salt Springs.

34. CHappar or Tsappar, a corruption of Hind. CHHappar a thatch-

ed roof appears as a hill name in Mt. Cuappar and in To’r Tsappar, the

Black Roof, a hill in the Han Pass. Both peaks have rounded tops. It is

worth mentioning here that Tsapa means a wave, billow.

35. CHI’NAI is a common village name and is the plural of Cui’na, a

spring, fountain.

36. Guar, a hill, appears in Mt. Sprysxuar, the White Hill: Spe’ra-

eHaR Hills, the Grey Hills: Tana Guar, the Narrow Hills. Znar,

appearing in several hill names, is probably for Guar: Zuarerrav Peak,

the Sunny Peak, Pra’nzuara Hills, the Broad Hills; ZuarvBanp Peak,

Hills End, is given to the last hill of a line in the SHo’r Valley.

37. Isprra Ra’aua, the Open Meadow (Sparart + Ra’en) ; the place

is an open spot near Mt. Ma‘znw6. SPARat, open, also turns up once or

twice as SAPURAL.

38. Mt. Surto’(?) the Red Tablet.

39. Tana To’r Peak, the Narrow Black Peak.

40. Surrax Peak, the Red Precipice.

41. Mae’wa Peak (?) The Camel Sack (Manav).

42. Watnpat Peak, the Lower Peak.

43. Pua’n Springs, the Wide Springs.

44. Kutyi’ Hills, the Bloody Hills.

45. Swaxa’rn’z (?) The Back Karézand JatKa’re’z, the Thorn Karéz ;

two villages near each other in the Bo’rar valley. SHaka’RE”% occurs twice.

46. Kursa or Kucua Valley means perhaps the Little Valley.

47. Tsa’HaN Wells. Tsa’Han is the plural of Ts’, a well, pit. The

word appears again as Ucusama’N Springs. (?) The Upper (ts) Springs.

48. Ba’auu To’R Peak (?) The Black Bogie. Ba’at is a bugbear, bogie.

49. Ba’ta Dua’Ka(?) The Upper Plain (pa’e).

50. Hanoxat is probably a diminutive of Han, the two passes being

near each other.

51. Toauat, a river name, is Turki for a reedy plain.

1880.] RB. C. Temple—Rowte of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 171

In a former paper in this Journal* I remarked that a village may be

ealled by six different names by guides, those thoroughly acquainted with

the locality would recognise it by any one of them, others less well acquainted

will only know it by some of them. Thus a village may be called (1) after

the district or tract of land in which it is situated. Taxnr-1-PUr issuch a

name, Msn Manpa is another ; villages 10 miles apart are called Taxut-t-

pUt and Men Manpa simply because they are situated in the tracts so

called. (2) It may be called after the section of the tribe which inhabits

it, thus, Ba’Rakzar; (8) after the subdivision, thus, Kuunsn’zat or

MonamManzal, (4) after its late owner if recently dead, (5) after its

present owner, thus, Kana-I-NUr-UD-pI’N Kwa’n merely means NUr-vp-pI'N

Kin’s village, and the owner’s is usually the proper name of a village, (6)

after its own name. ‘To give an example; the village marked Ami’y Kata

in my map of the Arautsa’y valley was named to me as Ba/RaKzl,

MunamMmapzar, Ami’N Kuan and Lati’r Kuan. Lari’r Kua is its

present owner: Ami’N Kuan was the late owner, MunamMapzatr is the

subdivision and Ba’raxzat the section of the tribe inhabiting it. It will

be easily seen that the more general terms are known at a distance and the

more specific ones only in the immediate neighbourhood of a village.

Complicated as this system of nomenclature looks, it is natural enough in

a country where the individual occupies such an important place in men’s

minds and nationality so little. It is not difficult to deal with in practice,

after a slight knowledge of the country is acquired, but it accounts for the

great apparent discrepancy in names and distances met with on maps and

in routes. These remarks are true also of the Tari’N and Ka/Kar country.

Thus in the Prsuin, GANGALZAT and SHAvyHDA’D are names for the same

place, and so are Urumzat and Sayap Sa’to and also Briga’n Kana and

Auta Kata. Several villages are called Brawamazat, viz., Sayan Do’st

Monammap, Sayap Kwama’npat, Sayap La’n. Three are called Lire

(Upper) Kua’ntzat, v¢z., MonamMan Sa’prk, Vakrn, and La’n MonamMMapD

and two BaG@arzat, viz., Sayap AnaABand Sayap Patryo; two Ya’stnezat,

viz., SAYAD Sup’/RBAT and Sayap To’r1. The more specific are the malik’s

(or owner’s) names. In the case of the Branamazar villages, that of Do’sr

MonamMap may be called Branamzar proper, and the same is to be

observed of the three Ka’xozar villages in the same neighbourhood, one is

ealled Ka’kozat and the other two also Manav and Ava’ Monammap.

On entering the Do’r valley the two villages known in the Pishin by

several variations of the word AnGa’n@ or Nin@a’np are found to be

locally LUrand Kz Anaana, Upper and Lower Ana@a’na. Names, however,

are more specific in the Do’r, and villages of the same name are distin-

guished by the tribal name in addition, thus Tuarar (Ish Kn’L) and

* Rough notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes about Kandahar. Vol,

XLVIII, pt. I, 1879.

172 R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. [No. 4,

TraRrat (Mernrarzar). In the Bo’rat valley, however, Wazta’@ar and

Kuankat seem to be general names for groups of villages and we have

two Murs and two Waua’rs. In the wilder parts names become more

general and merely descriptive, everything in the neighbourhood, valley,

river, village and hills, all being known by the same name. Such are,

O’pusurKal, Kuwa’ra, Cuimsa’y, Kacu, Bars’nai in the SHo’r valley,

and in still wilder regions ‘Nayeattna, To’roparau, Trike Kv’ram,

Tsamavunane and Ba’ta Dua’ka. Towards the Beléch Border double

names, the Pathd4n and the Belédch are met with, as To’r Tsarpar and

Ka‘ti’ Cuuprri, both of the same meaning, the Black Hill: and Ba’aan

Kunp (Pathan) = Banr’wa’ta’ Kacu (Beloch).

Some names are corruptions and abbreviations ; such as Sayan Sa’rto and

Sa’yap Aru probably, and perhaps Skan and IsKawn for Alexander (Iskan-

par): Ass for Ha’sr’: Sama’nzat for Isma’tnuza’t: Branamaat for

Ipra’Himzart: Axrp and AvaB for HataB (AtEppo): and perhaps Sopa’n-

ZAI for IsFAHA’NZAT.

In places there seems to be a tendency to call villages after the names

of celebrated places, thus we have Di’nat, La’Ho’R and Murat in the

Bo’rat valley.

Before leaving this point I would remark that across the Beldch

Border in Ba’rxuo’m (or Ba’rkwa‘N) a similar if not a greater confusion

of nomenclature exists. Thus the place called Luaa’rr’ Ba’rKna’n is also

called Banaata’: Hasni’ Ko’r = Ta’nykur Suaur: Cua’nn’N = Ba’sun

Kua’n ka Ko’r or Sane: Na’npua’ = Sue’kn Ko’r while all the

Na ‘war villages are sometimes grouped as Na’Har Ko’r, and finally the

valley itself is variously called Ba’rKuo’M, Ba’rxua’n, Luea’rt BARKHAN,

Linopr‘a’n and Kano.

Having now explained as far as possible the reasons why the nomen-

elature of travellers* along the same route in Afghanistan should differ

so greatly, and in order to clear the way for future students of this parti-

cular route, I close this paper by a comparison and identification of names

found in the journals of other travellers with those to be found in my maps.

Included among these are the nomenclature in Capt Holdich’s plane-table

sketch-map of the Route and in the Quarter Master General’s Depart-

mental sketch-map, and also the names given in Major Waterhouse’s paper

in this Journal.+

* Capt. Heaviside remarks on the difficulty of obtaining Afghan names, in Major

Waterhonse’s report, pp. 53. J. A. 8. B. Vol. XVIII, pt. IT, 1879.

+ The works referred to in the comparison are Notes on the Survey Operations

in Afghanistan in connection with the Campaign of 1878-9 by Major Waterhouse, J. A.

8. B. 1879. Mackenzie's Routes in Asia, Sec. II, Afghanistin. Macgregor’s Gazetteer,

Afghanistin, Leech’s Route: Dera Ghazi Khan to Kandahar. Lumsden’s Mission

to Kandahar. A more detailed identification of the names along the route will be

found in the appendix to my paper in the J. R. G. 8. above referred to.

173

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force.

1880.]

‘NVENE

“ONVT,VINVEHO

‘VV VILV

“NVEOY AXIUY,

“IVIONV A

*OSNLOY.TOIL AV

N,VHNGV

DNVIVNVHO

HVTMOH(

N,VUaN ve

av, PE 10H

VV VLVQ

WVAOY HAAN,

IOMVNNV ET

VINV

NVHUaLV

ONVLVILVHO

VIMOH(T

NVECN,VP

VVC V1Vq

WVaAY WAG,

IVSONNV FT

VAY adVG

coe

WIT

“WIPO

pooymmoqybany puw ssvugq wyT—'T

VIVE V1Vq

‘urulopueg

NVHULV

AVAV] Wy yy

PNVLYVWANO

VHVY ‘iT

VIO,VHQ

NVUCN,Ve

Iva], 10HD

VILVG VIVG

aGHVHS HACNIVG

INDY

LOY VAY HACNIVG

YHVHY NYY HACNIV

IND] N,VHY HAGNIVG

AOY NVHY HAGNIVG

WVvaay 1,09

VIOA yy

avg TXNV]

WdVHO VLVY

ALIVHY VIVI

LOY AMNVT

AN,VS]

“IOSOISOVTL

1 NYHUUV

W,OHNU VI

DLV] a

PNVTOVWVST,

NVELV YY ‘37

STITH. VIOVHG

STITH N,VaHan ve

dVUV I, LOHD

ALVA VLYq

VUE Viv

fees NVHY CNIVG

WVEAY HAW,

AolpeA Vsuayy

SSVq IVHONV]]

Audio) AT YS

uVddvVsJ, 2,0],

(VEU) Yq

IN,VHS J

SSVg YI

‘ojduia gy,

iS)

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force.

174

‘EM, VOVO IM,VENVS IM,VONIS TA,VENIHG

aco IZVTONIG AZVINIHG IVZ,V£NIHG

“NVIVILG NVIVING NVIVNG oe

‘O,VHOVE, O,VHOVG O,VHOVG eae

‘THAY THY VH,VY cee

“IVE, TTA, TIO, IVIL,

as ATO, ATO, ATO

‘IT VIL,OHO TT,VIL,OHO IT,VIL,OHO ITVL,OHO

“OSNOY.LOZE MA. Oo W'O "TOPO “ULIMIpULs

NVIVNS

OVHOVG

j TH Vy

TVG

OT, OS

IT VL,OHQ

*IOBILSOV]

pooytnogybraar pun ‘ypn0yg 1%L— IL

ose eco

rey HO,VX,VI,VMNVH,V

voy NVA VO NVH

“OSLO LOPE AA. ‘) WO “GoEPLOH “‘UBUepUBs

IVHONVE ¢

UVHONING ¢

o,VHOVG

ZOOL

Z,OLUV

Lorivg

HOVY VLVANVAL VD

HOY VIL]

“LOSaISOV]L

IVA,VZNIG

ZAINTHG

“ NVIVING

Va VEDVEy

VHVY

IVL

ALO,

ITVIL,OHQ

so dua, y,

(oT INT)

UVHOVUg

OVHOVG

StH 22aavg

aNoy NVHVE

NIQUY JHLLIPL

‘otdunay,

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Ohotiali Field Force. 175

1880. ]

*N,VENIHO

“OSNOY LOFT AA

"N/VONIN,

"a, VaNVNV

‘TL Og

“OSNLOY.10}0 AA

a VuWEaAg

coe

eee

NVeNTHO

I'T,VNIHQ

IVDUV

DW 'O

a@,VHYUAS

SVENIHO

TTVNIHO

Ivaavd

“GOIPIOH

eae plod ¢vuwwaAs ae

NVZVS d phe

N,VENTIHO NV£&MBgO ose

a, Vouvray aoe Fes

‘uopsuuny *qooory ‘uvmlepueg

‘hava uysig 02 hayng “oyg— AT

IVNAN Vg

NVONIN

ooo

IVZOAVHS

IVNANIVG

N,VONIN

a, VaNVNy

(a0g

2a |G a)

“qooory

18,0

a,Vanany

1a,0H

“WIPO

‘pooyinogybiary pun kayoyg wiog—TIT

} laavHy

adVAO

IL,VNIHO ¢

Uva

Iveuyd

*IOSOLOOC

IVZOANVHY

AIVIVAOO'T

TYMD ¢

VNGT ¢

IVNVNUV

@,VONT

HON, VIN

AVLAL APL

aVaIvNy

It,og

Vag

*IOSILSOe

(AozeA T,0q)

CVHNAIG 3

HOV NVOVZ

i avdvHO ‘OL

NVLNIHO

TT,VYNIHQ

(AoTIvA wong)

Iveavg

-o[ dura J,

IVZO@VHS

IVIVU,OT WY

TYMDIVN

ssteq IN ayy

IVY

; CN ,VONIN,

UVIHL ATL

WViONV EAL

aVaNoHvy ‘WY

yx0g

AayeA IVLOg

‘oT dura, y,

[No. 4,

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force.

176

Nivarve

ae wae ove sae Vvivy NIV, aNIVG aviv

Nwjwatvg N,Vatvg M NIvd d $

ie a * TOUSEvg $F es Vu,OHSUVg U,OHSUVg

“IV £,OHY MVL/OV nee NVLHOy UV OHY, XVL,OHY MVL ONY, MVL,OHY

*‘NIHSIG NIHSag NIDS AG NHS Aq NIHSTG NyUS aq NJHS Aq NIHSI

‘VI NVHY VI ei ae VITACEY VII as st NVHY,

-“Tnday VII ~Taday VII “VITOIC&LY-I-VIV yy

oes ons a,Vvan,VHSs eats fae axe ed ava vag

coe ore VHINVINNIG che ae id VALVNVS TANS CnvICW

*OSNOYIOIT AA, Oy WO ‘uopsmun'y *yooo'y, “TOIplOH ‘UBUIOpULy *TOSOIDOV] ‘ojdma Ty,

‘pooysnogybrany pun hayywg mystg— A

' "CVV IL To VY Tay Vy UN,LYy avy,VY ava VH aVLVY

*NVONIN aN VONIN aN VON oe eee aX, VOVNN Ae | ae

/VD3

e000 oo0 ( HOVY avs]

‘HOLVJLAVSAQ HOVY Avs,AX HOV 108,0K HOVY avs] | MOVE AVS,AX HOVY avs

on IVGNVZGdg IVGNVZadg at ase IVGNVZNIdG ae IVONVHZ, dag

3 606 avNag se ves wee avmon(y avnag

ee, a SLVY eae Cin oe HVDLVY ¢ HOV

“osOY1o}E AA ‘WW 'd “WOIploH ‘uemleputg *1OSIISOCY ‘ejdmoy,

1880.] R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Ohotiali Field Force. Alyy

A comparison of the names to be found on the three latest maps of

this route, namely, those of my own, Capt. Holdich, and the Quarter-

Master General’s Department, will complete my observations.

From the Pishin eastwards.

Holdich.

KAapDANAL

Temple. Quarter-Master General,

KADANEI.

Kno’sin AMRA’N.

Kapanet Valley

Kuo’sa Amra’n Hills Kauo’sa Amna’n

Kuwa’ss AmMran Peak Kwa’sa AMRAN

Kara Appuntan Kua’n Kinia ABDULA Kita Appuna Kua’s.

Gwa’sa Pass Gwa’JA GWAJA.

TANGAL Tanai Bae

Kuo’sak Pass Kno’sak Ko’sax.

ARAMBI ARUMBI ARUMBI.

RawAMDIL KHa’n Ra’mMoin Kwan eh

Bapwa’N Bupwa’N Bapwan.

TURKEHE'L TURKHE'L TURKHAIL.

Briga’N Kata Matsat & Patzi te

Sia’HDA'D GANGALZAI Aa

GANGALZAI

ASABZAT AJABZAI AJABZAT.

SaAYAMZAT Sr’MZAI Sr’MZAT.

ATIZAT ATAZAT ALY ZAl.

R. To’@Hat To’GHat a

R. Muzarat MuzaRat Le

Sopa’NzAI Zy’Rv es

BRAWHAMZAT

BRAHAMZAI Bon i ah

Ma’tiKat Ma’tizat ae

BaGaRrzat BaGGARZAt BAGARZAt.

Sama’LzZat SMA/LZAT Sma’LZAt.

Sayap Paty Sarpa’n & Satpatn Sarpa’n & Patn Kata,

Noa’ Ba’za’R oe Noa’ Ba’za’r.

MANZAKAL MaAnzAKAt MANZAKAL.

Koaua/NIzAt Kna/NZAT Kra’NZAt.

Sn’ KA’ LZAT SHEIKHA’RI SHEIKHAHA’RI.

Kuv’supin Kua’n Kusupin KHUSHDIL.

R. Barso’ Barso Barso’.

Ma’ tikya’r Ma’LIKYA'R

Ma’Likya’r.

178 R. C. Temple— Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. [No. 4,

Temple.

KAMA’LZAT

Nv’RZAT

Ya’/SINGZAT

Tari'n

Surat Pass

ANGA’NG

R. SurKia’B

MonaMMAD SHARFI

Mr. Kanp

MEHTARZAT

TLARAL

MurcHat

SHARAN

Nanri’n

Baozat Ka’Rn’z

Sa’/GHAl

SAMA’ WAN

Kua’ntzat Ka’rn’z

SHAKAR

ZARGHUN Ka’Re’z

Ksno KArn’z

R. Ro’p

— Gwa'h

PIsHIN

Mr. Tarato’

WocHAKHLA

UKHMUGHDATI Pass

R. Zapu'n

AMADU’N

Mr. Zarquv’N

Ka’Ksr

Vsar Kacn

Usu Pass

Mr. Mazuwo

SPE’ZHANDAL

Isprra Raaua

Mr. SPINSKHAR

DuMmMar

Mr. SurGHWwAND

Zuo’B Valley

Holdich.

KAMA’LZAT

Na/Ria’/N

ASIMZAL

Turi’n

SURINA’RI

ANGA'ND

SURKHA’B

Sarra’psa Ka’rn’z

Kunp

Mer’tRaZat

TALARAL

Morena’

SHIRAN

BaLozat

SARGAT

ZEMIRSTA'N

Kua’nzat

SAKKAR

ZERGU'N Ka’Rn’z

Kuso'i

To’GAr

Gwa'h

PiIsHiIn

TAKATU’

Tura Kata

OKHMUKHZAT

AMADU’N

ZERGHU'N

Ka’xur.

Yusur KacH

Usata’Ra

Masuxkwark

SPE ZANDAT

SPIRARGH

SPIRARAGIA

DUMAR

SURKAND

Zu0’B

Quarter-Master General.

KaAMa’LZal.

Na’RIA’N.

ASIMZAT.

TURIN.

SuRUNA’RI.

NINGA’ND.

SURKHA’B.

Sarna’DA Ka’ReE’z.

KAND.

Me’rRAZAt.

Larat. |

Mure’.

NaRrr'n.

BULOZAT.

SARGAT.

ZEMIRSTA‘N.

KuA’/NZAL.

SAKKAR.

Kuso’.

To’cat.

Gwa't.

Pe’sor’n.

Ta’TUCKA.

UcHMUCHZAI.

ZERDUN.

AMADU'N.

ZERGHUN.

Ka’kurR.

Yusar Kacn.

Usuta’RAn.

MASHEKWAR.

SPE/ZANDAT.

SPIRARA’GHAH.

SPINSKHAR.

ZERGU’N.

Zuo’s.

1880.]

Temple.

Nanaatu’na Pass

Mo’Mann Sara’t

Mo’manp

O’BUSHTKAI

Carmsa’N

Pa’tKat Pass

WARrGHAS

Hinpvu Ba’eu

GURMAL

Mo. Markninar

Mr. Sya’s@ar

DaARGAt

CHINA’LI

SUNGALU’N

Ka’sat Hill

Kacn

Bata’Nat

SARKAT ZANGAL

NinGA’ND

GuoparG@ar Hill

SMALAN

SINZAWATI

SHINLE’Z

Bagua’wa

JALKA REZ

SHAKA’REZ

To’r Kuatzer’ Hills

LASHuTAL

W ARIA’GAT

ZANGIWA’L

KWANKAL

_——

Ro'pr’n

NAvG@rvya’LA

La’nHo’R

Di'tat

Mov’nrar

DarGat

SUABOZAT

SHARAN ‘

Holdich.

Mo’MANDGALI

O’/BOSKOI

CHIMJA’N

Pa’tKr

Weraus

Hinpvu Ba’an

GurRMY

MaAsHKHILAR

Sra’sGaL

Daraat

CHINA’LI

SHUNDLU'N

Mana’Rra

Kars

Bra‘Nt

SKAISANGAL

Nimaa’n

Gobarer

SMALAN

Sinea’v1

SINGLAZE

Bagua’o

Ka’Re’z

SHAHKA’RE’Z

DURGAINNI

DARMANGARH

LASHTAL

URTASGALI

ZANGIWA’L

KOoNKAL

CHAPLAT

KupIsat

MaAnaryamM

La’HoR

Drnut

Muppvuk

Daraal

SHABOZAT

SHo’RA‘N

R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force. 179

Quarter-Master General.

MamManaat.

O’BOS8KOL.

Curnga’N.

Pa‘uxr’.

Hinpoo Ba’au.

GuRMI’.

MASHKILAR,

STA’SGAT.

DarGat.

CHINA LI.

Suu’n Lu’y.

Mana’ra’.

Kars.

Bra‘Nt.

SKAIJANGAL.

NInGaA’N.

GOBARGI’.

SMALAN,

Sanga’vi.

SINGLAZI.

Baaua’o,

Ka‘RE’zZ.

SHAHKA’RY’Z.

DURGUNNY.

LuUsHTAt.

URIAGAI.

ZANGIWA’L.

KonKkat.

CHAPMAI.

MAnArAn.

LAHORE.

DELHI.

Muppvun.

DarGat.

SHABOZAT,

SHORAN. .

180 R. C. Temple—Route of the Tal Chotiali Field Force.

Temple.

BAarMINAI

Da’to’'R

SAGHARAT

Cana’ Ko'r

KAacHat

Kana’

Kacn

SHARAN

Sua’Ba'N

Kaun WanA’R

Kuru

HanumBa’R

GaAaDIWA’R

SarcHar Peak

Lu’n1

SHAUGWA’L

Tri'ku Kuram

Rava

Tan

Cno’TIA’LI

Ko’

Bravamzar KyeEna’s

Ma’r Pass

TSAMAULANG

PANoKArT Pass

Ba’ta Dia’KA

Mirrny’ Kuv’l/n

Hawn Pass

Ja’NDHRA’N Hills

Cuo’R TaraP

Ba’nan Kunp

Cuapar Hills

Holdich.

BARANMAI

Ba’MEMALI

Datw’R

SAGReE’

CHINNA

KAarsat

KHANA

Kats

SHAMURLAK

AWAHA’R

Kuru

ANUMBA’R

GADBA‘R

Tatrri

» Lu’nNt

SHAHGOLAT

TREKH Kvuram

RAHA

TULL

Cuo’Tra’Lt

Ko’tu

Pa’RAMZAI

Ma‘r

CHAMA’LANG

HANNOKAT

Ba’‘Lapa’KA

Hanku’s

Hawn

J A’NDRA'N

CHAPAR

Quarter-Master General.

BAaMEMAI.

Datur.

Sacre’.

CHINNA.

KATs At.

Kana.

Kaas.

SHORAN.

SHAMARLAR.

AWA’HAR.

Kuvrv.

ANAMBAR.

GADBAR.

TATARI.

Lvu'NI.

SHAHGOLAT.

Trek Kourram.

ReEut.

TAL.

Cro’Tra’Lt,

Ko’.

Ba’RAMZAT.

Ma’r

CHAMA’LANG.

HANNAKOTL.

Ba’LuADA’KA.

Hanxv’a.

Han.

JA'NDRA’N.

Cuo’r Kr’ Tar.

Ba’nanwa’a’ Kacn.

CHAPAR,

[No. 4,

1880. } Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Séryaprajnapti. 181

On the Stiryaprajnapti.—By Dr. G. Turpavr, Principal, Benares College.

Parr II.

(Continued from p. 127.)

Although ancient Indian astronomy was chiefly interested in

the moon and although the greater part of the Suryaprajfiapti treats

of her, especially of the places she occupies at different times in the

circle of the nakshatras, a detailed connected account of her motions

is not given anywhere, and we must combine the hints we meet with

here and there, in order to understand the theory by which the old tirthan-

karas tried to explain to themselves her motion. In doing this we are

of course greatly aided by the full and unambiguous account given of the

sun’s motion, since it will not be presuming too much that the theory

which had been applied to the one luminary would be applied to the

other one also. As we have seen above, the sun’s daily apparent motion is

regarded to be his true one and considered to take place round Mount

Meru ; his yearly motion is the consequence of his moving more slowly

than the stars; his motion in declination is the result of his describing

round Mount Meru circles of varying diameter. All this is applied to the

moon too. The moon describes (or the two moons describe) circles round

Mount Meru at the height of eight hundred and eighty yojanas above the

earth, so that her place is eighty yojanas above that of the sun. She moves

slower than the stars and slower than the sun ; while the latter describes

during one yuga 1,830 (or strictly speaking 915) circles, the moon describes

only 1,768 (or again on the assumption of two moons 884) such circles ;

the difference of the two numbers = 62 indicates the number of times the

moon enters into conjunction with the sun, During the same period, vzz.,

the quinquennial yuga, the moon completes sixty-seven sidereal revolutions.

Hach of these revolutions is, analogously to the sun’s revolutions, divided

into two ayanas, an uttardyana anda dakshindyana, according as the moon

is proceeding towards the north or the south (of the equator as we should

add). In reality, it is true, the motion of the moon is much more compli-

eated, as it is not only oblique to the equator, like the ecliptic in which the

sun is moving, but also inclined to the ecliptic itself at an angle of about

5°, while moreover at the same time the points in which the moon’s path

euts the ecliptic are continually receding. One of the consequences of the

revolution of the nodes did, as we shall see below, not escape the observation

of the author of the Stryaprajiapti, but he was manifestly unable to

account for it by a modification of his theory. According to him the moon,

like the sun, simply describes concentric circles round Mount Meru, some-

182 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. [No. 4,

times approaching it sometimes receding fromit. While, however, the period

of the sun’s progress from and towards Mount Meru comprises one year—

the time which the sun employs in arriving again at the same star—the cor-

responding period of the moon embraces one nakshatra month = 27 days,

947 muhirtas, From this it is easy to find the number of the circles the

moon describes. She performs during one yuga 1,768 complete revolutions,

laf

consequently during one nakshatra month eS 26 = revolutions, and

; F 13 :

during one ayana or sidereal half month 13 — revolutions. The moon

therefore proceeds towards the north during the time which she wants for

aes loam

describing 18 a7 circles, and after that she proceeds towards the south for

the same length of time. From this it follows that, while the sun has 184

different circles to describe, the moon has fifteen such circles only. At the

beginning of the yuga she leaves the outermost circle and begins her utta-

rayana, describes the thirteen circles intermediate between the outermost

and the innermost ones and enters into the fifteenth (innermost) circle,

through 67 parts of which she passes. After that the sidereal half moon

has elapsed, and the moon has to retrace her steps towards the south. She

therefore leaves the innermost circle unfinished, returns into the next one,

passes again through the 13 intermediate circles and enters into the 15th

: 13

(outermost) cirele. After she has passed through 67 parts of the latter,

the sidereal half moon is again over and the progress towards the north

recommences. Thus the moon moves in 15 circles of different diameter,

but only 13 she passes through in their entirety while a fractional part

only of the two exterior circles are touched by her. We have seen above

that the vikampa-kshetra of the sun, z. e., the extent to which the sun

moves sideways in his northern and southern progress is estimated at 510

yojanas ( = 183 x 2 o the latter quantity being the amount of the

daily vikampa) ; the vikampa-kshetra of the moon is estimated at nearly

the same amount, viz., 509 x yojanas (it has been already remarked that

the inclination of the moon’s path to the ecliptic is not known to the Stirya-

AO. He ‘ : : 56 :

prajhapti). The diameter of the moon herself is estimated at pu yojanas,

the interval between consecutive circles described by the moon at

30 4 Tiles 25

85 + 61 + 7x 6l yojanas ; the sum of these two quantities is 86 + ai

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Suiryaprajirpti. 183

, which multiplied by 14, gives the above stated amount

7 all

[rs

(509 ~) as the whole vikampakshetra during one lunar half month.

Here—as likewise above with reference to the sun—the Stiryaprajfiapti does

not directly speak of the diameter of the moon, but of the measure of the

breadth of the circle described by the moon; but the two things come to

the same. The manner in which the moon, after having completed one of

her circles, passes over into the next one is not expressly detailed ; we must

imagine it similar to that of the sun,

In connexion with this account of the moon’s motion, the Stiryapra-

jiapti enters into a curious calculation, of no practical, and it can hardly be

said any theoretical interest, which, however, may be mentioned here as a

specimen of the accuracy with which the system is worked out into its

minutest details. The question is raised: what circles are common to the

sun and moon and how far are those of the moon’s circles which belong to the

sun also touched by the latter? As the moon’s circles are elevated above

those of the sun by the amount of eighty yojanas, strictly speaking not

any circle is common to both; common to both are, however, said to be

those circles of the moon which when projected upon the plane in which

the sun describes his circles partially or entirely coincide with the latter.

The vikampa-kshetras of the two being nearly equal, while 15 circles of the

moon correspond to 184 circles described by the sun, the consequence is

that the by far greater portion of the sun’s circles do not coincide with the

moon’s circles, but fall into the wide intervals separating the latter, one from

another. ‘Thus for instance the first (innermost) circle of the sun coincides

with the first circle of the moon, so that when both luminaries move in

their innermost circles their distance from Mount Meru is equal; only the

: Buperes ; 5

circle of the moon overlaps that of the sun by Gr Yojanas, this being the

difference of the breadth of the circles described by the two (of the diame-

ters of the two bodies). The next twelve circles of the sun all fall into

the interval between the first and the second circle of the moon; for this

Site < ; s 38

interval (plus the overlapping él of the first circle) amounts to 85 + Al

+ — 61 yojanas, while the vikampa-kshetra of twelve solar circles

27 :

amounts to 33 Ai yojanas only. After that twe yojanas are occupied by

the interval between the 138th and the 14th solar circles, and then the four-

teenth solar circle begins, which therefore partly coincides with the second

lunar circle. By continuing these calculations for all lunar circles, it is

184 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Siryaprajnapti. [No. 4,

found that the first up to the fifth inclusive, and again the eleventh up to

the fifteenth inclusive are “ stirya-sammisrani,” 7. e., partly coincide with

solar circles, while the sixth up to the tenth do not coincide with solar circles,

the latter falling entirely into the intervals between the named lunar cir-

cles. To reproduce here all the details of the calculation would be purpose-

less.—That the preceding account of the moon’s motion agrees with the

ideas of the author of the Stryaprajfiapti is to be concluded from the formulas

given in different parts of the work for the performance of certain calcula-

tions. Thus for instance the question is raised, in what ayana and what circle

each parvan takes place, ¢. e., how many ayanas have elapsed at the different

times when the moon enters into conjunction or opposition and in which

of the fifteen circles she is moving just then. This question is answered

by some ancient gathas quoted in the commentary, according to which the

calculation has to bemade asfollows. ‘The constant quantity —the yautia—

which is to be used for the calculation of each parvan, is equal to

1 + = 7 aEGy? vizg., of one of the circles described by the moon.

This quantity is of course easily found by the following consideration. The

moon which describes in one yuga 1,768 circles describes in one parvan

= = 14 s circles and in one ayana 13 = circles; the difference of

these two quantities is the above mentioned constant quantity. The rule

for finding the places of the parvans is now as follows: The way accom-

plished by the moon during one parvan being equal to the way accomplish-

eee 4 9

ed during one ayana plus 1 + 67 + 3D00 67

ayanas as the number of the parvan whose place is wanted indicates, multi-

ply then the constant quantity by the number of the parvan, and if the

circles, take at first as many

13 : ; 5 : ;

result exceeds 13 ae deduct it from this latter quantity (which subtraction

if necessary has to be repeated until the remainder is less than 13 =):

as often as this subtraction is performed as many unities are to be added

to the number of ayanas found above and—unless the subtraction leaves

no remainder—one additional unity is to be added ; add two to the remain-

der ; the resulting sum will indicate the circle in which the moon stands

at the parvan. Regarding this latter point it is to be remembered that

the circles are to be counted from the innermost circle when the number of

the parvan is an even one and from the outermost circle when it isan odd

one. ‘To illustrate this let us take one of the many examples given by the.

Commentator. Required the place of the moon at the fourteenth parvan.

Multiply at first one by fourteen, that means: fourteen ayanas have elapsed

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. 185

; 4 9

he time. Then multiply 1 = ———.. by fourteen : oe

at the time hen multiply 1 + 67 + a1 x G7 by fourteen ; the result

p 56 126 | 60 2 eats

is 14 + 67 + 3. x 67 —— eA = 67 + 31 x 67 This is the number

of circles which the moon has passed through during fourteen parvans in

addition to fourteen ayanas. As this number exceeds the number of circles

6 4 13

passed through in one ayana (viz, 13 a the latter number has to be

deducted from it.and one has to be added to the number of ayanas. So

we see that the moon has performed 15 ayanas at the end of the 14th parvan.

The remainder left after the above deduction shows the number of circles

which the moon has passed through in addition to the 15 complete ayanas ;

47 2 :

in our case these amount tol + — + ——. Asthereis an excess

67 dl x 67

above 15 complete ayanas, we have according to the rule to add one to

their number, 7. e., the parvan takes place in the sixteenth ayana, And

since the moon enters at the beginning of the ayana into the second circle

(the circles being counted from the innermost as well as the outermost)

and since in our case the moon has completed more than one full circle,

two has to be added to the number of circles found above in order to obtain

the ordinal number of the circle in which the moon stands at the expiration

of the 14th parvan. The full answer is therefore: the 14th parvan takes

place in the sixteenth ayana, in the third circle (reckoning from the inner-

3l x 67

through. In the same manner the places of all other parvans may be easily

found; the commentator gives the places of parvan I—XV; but it would

serve no purpose to extract them here. What has been given will suffice

to justify the hypothetical account of the moon’s motion detailed above.

The question regarding the relative velocity of sun, moon and stars

which is raised in the 15th book finds its answer in accordance with the general

principles of the system. The apparent daily motion being considered as

the real one, it follows that the nakshatras travel faster than the sun, and

most circle), a + of this circle having already been passed

the sun again faster than the moon; the space passed through by

each of these bodies during a month, day, muhtrta, ete. is caleulated and

exhibited in detail; we need, however, only remember that the sun describes

in one yuga 1,830 circles, while the moon deseribes only 1,768 and the nak-

shatras—through whose circle the sun passes five times—describe 1,835.

From these relations all special values can be easily derived. It is just

mentioned—no details being given—that the planets (graha) travel faster

than the sun and the stars (tarah) faster than the nakshatras. It is need=

less to discuss the former of these two assertions; the latter is of course

186 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajiiapti. [No. 4,

entirely indefensible and no reason leading to it can well be imagined.

This is the only time that the stars—excluding the nakshatras—are mention-

ed in the Stiryaprajiiapti as far as we can judge from the commentary.

The next point to be considered is the information the Suryaprajiiapti

furnishes with regard to the nakshatras. Incidentally it has already been

remarked that the number of the nakshatras is invariably stated as being

twenty-eight, and that the nakshatras are as invariably treated as being

of different extent. The particulars are as follows:

According to their extent or, to look at it from another point of view,

according to the time during which sun and moon are in conjunction with

them, the nakshatras are divided into four classes. Firstly, those with

which the moon is in conjunction during one ahoratra = thirty muhirtas ;

to this class belong Revati, Asvini, Krittika, Mrigasiras, Pushya, Magha,

Pirvaphalguni, Hasta, Chitra, Anuradha, Mula, Ptrvashadha, Sravana,

Sravishtha, Parvabhadrapada. ‘The one ahoratra for which the conjune-

: 10 : ;

tion lasts may be expressed as 67 muhurtas, the convenience of which

expression will appear at once. The second division comprises those nak-

shatras which are in conjunction with the moon for half a nyethemeron =

fifteen muhtrtas = a

ASleshd, Bharani, Jyeshtha, Ardra, Sva4ti. To the third division belong

those nakshatras with which the moon is in conjunction for one and a half

3015

Uttarashadha, Uttaraphalguni, Uttara-bhddrapada, Punarvasu, Visakha,

Rohini. ‘The fourth division comprises one nakshatra only, viz., Abhijit, with

: De é A ers 27 630 5

which the moon is in conjunction for 9 67 — 67 muhurtas. We see now

for what reason the time of conjunction has been expressed throughout in

sixty-sevenths of a mubtrta; it was done for the purpose of obtaining

homogeneous expressions for all nakshatras. At the same time these frac-

tions furnish us with an easy means for calculating the time during which

the sun is in conjunction with each nakshatra; for five revolutions of the

sun occupying the same time as sixty-seven revolutions of the moon, we

have only to replace the denominator of the above fractions by five. The

result of this operation having been turned into nycthemera, we find as the

expression for the time during which the sun is in conjunction with the

nakshatras of the four divisions the four following terms: 18 days, 12

muhirtas ; 6 days, 21 muhtirtas ; 20 days, 3 mubhtrtas ; 4 days, 6 muhtr-

tas.—According to the space the nakshatras occupy they are either sama-

kshetra, occupying a mean (medium) field or apardhakshetra, occupying

muhurtas ; to this division belong Satabhishaj,

nycthemeron = 45 muhtrtas = muhtrtas; these nakshatras are

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stryaprajinpti. 187

half a field or dvyardhakshetra, occupying one field and a half. There is

no special name for the extent of Abhijit.

Tn connexion with this division of the nakshatras into different classes

according to the space they occupy or the time during which they are in

conjunction with the moon, there is another one referring to the time of

the day or the night at which they enter into conjunction. This classifica-

tion is, however, connected with considerable difficulties. It is nowhere

clearly stated on the conjunctions of what particular month this

division is based ; that such a statement ought to have been given, appears

from the consideration that the periodical month during which the moon

fore in the second, third, fourth, etc. months the times at which the moon

enters into conjunction with the single nakshatras will all differ from the

times of the first month. If for instance the moon at the beginning of

the first month enters into conjunction with Abhijit in the early morning,

she will at the beginning of the second month again enter into conjunction

passes through all nakshatras comprises 27 days plus

days, and that there-

with it 9 = muhtrtas later, that is, in the afternoon and so on. Other

difficulties will appear from the following detailed reproductiou of the

Stiryaprajiapti’s account concerning this point. The nakshatras are either

“ptirvabhaga” ¢. e., such as enter into conjunction with the moon during

the forenoon ; or “ paschadbhaga” ¢. e., such as enter into conjunction dur-

ing the afternoon or “ naktambhaga” 7. e., such as enter into conjunction

during the night or “ ubhayabhaga” which term will be explained further

on. The nakshatras of the two first classes are the samakshetras, those of

the third class the apardhakshetras, those of the fourth class the dvyardhak-

shetras. It certainly does not appear why the samakshetras should enter

into conjunction with the moon during the day only and the apaérdhakshe-

tras during the night only; in reality there is no connexion between the

extent of a nakshatra and the time when the moon enters into it. Let us,

however, follow the detailed statements about each single nakshatra. The

first aphorism of the Stryaprajiiapti appears to be “ Abhijit and Sravana

are paschadbhaga samakshetra.” 'T'o this the commentator rightly objects

that Abhijit is neither samakshetra, since it occupies only 9 2 muhtrtas of

the moon’s periodical revolution, nor paschadbhaga, since at the beginning

of the yuga the moon enters into conjunction with it in the early morning.

At the same time he tries to obviate these objections by remarking that

Abhijit is called samakshetra and paschadbhaga, because it is always con-

nected with Sravana to which both these attributes rightly belong, or that

it may be called paschédbhaga with a view to conjunctions other than the

188 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajiapti. [No. 4,

first one which may take place in the course of the yuga. But these both

attempts at reconciling contradictions are very unsatisfactory. Howsoever

this may be, the commentator goes on to explain that Abhijit and Sravana,

after having finished their conjunction with the moon, hand her over to

Dhanishtha at evening (Abhijit-sravano dve nakshatre s&yam-samayéd

drabhya ekam ratrim ekam cha sdtirekam divasam chandrena sdrddham

yogam yuktah etavantam kalam yogam yuktva tad-anantaram yogam anu-

parivartayatah atmanas chyavayatah yogam chanuparivartya séyam divas-

asya katitame paschadbhage chandram dhanishthayah samarpayatah). For

this reason Dhanishtha also is paschadbhaga. After having been in con-

junction with it for thirty muhtrtas the moon enters Satabhishaj at the

time when the stars have already become visible (parishphutanakshatramanda-

lavaloke) ; Satabhishaj is therefore naktambhaga. How Satabhishaj

enters into conjunction at night, while exactly one ahoratra before Dhanish-

tha has been said to enter into conjunction during the afternoon, is not

explained. Satabhishaj being apardhakshetra, the moon remains in con-

junction with it for fifteen muhtrtas only and enters on the next morning

into conjunction with Ptrva-proshthapada, which being samakshetra remains

in conjunction during one whole ahoratra, On the following morning the

moon enters Uttara-proshthapada, which therefore would be ptirvabhaéga,

But the matter is looked at in a different light, Uttara-proshthapada is

dvyardhakshetra, z. é., remains in conjunction for 45 muhtrtas. If we now

deduct from this duration the fifteen first muhtrtas and imagine Uttara-

proshthapada to be samakshetra, the conjunction of the moon with it—

looked at as samakshetra—may be said to take place at night and in conse-

quence one—the real—conjunction taking place during the day and the

other—the fictitious one—taking place at night the nakshatra is called

ubhayabhaga (idam kilottarabhadrapadakhyam nakshatram uktaprakarena

pratas chandrena saha yugam adhigachchhati, kevalam prathaman paficha-

daga muhtrtén adhikan apaniya samakshetram kalpayitva yada yogag

chintyate tad4 naktam api yogo ’stity ubhayabhigam avaseyam). Uttara-

bhadrapada remains in conjunction for one day, one night and again one

day, on the evening of which the moon enters Revati; Revati is therefore

paschadbhaga. After it has remained in conjunction for one nychtheme-

ron the moon passes into Asvini at evening time. Asvini is therefore like-

wise pagchadbhaga. From it the moon passes on the next evening into

Bharani, at the time, however, when the stars have become visible and

night may be said to have begun; Bharanf is therefore naktambhaga.

Being at the same time apardhakshetra, the moon leaves it on the next

morning to enter Krittika, which therefore is pirvabhdga. On the next

morning the moon enters Rohini which is dvyardhakshetra and, on account

of that, ubhayabhaga. Mrigasiras which she enters forty-five muhtrtas

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Siryaprajiapti. 189

later at evening is paschadbhaga; Ardr& which enters into conjunction

thirty muhurtas later, at the time when the stars have come out, is naktam-

bhaga; Punarvasu into which the moon enters on the next morning, being

dvyardha, is ubhayabhaga. Pushya comes into conjunction on the evening

of the following day and is paschédbhdga; Aglesha thirty muhitrtas later,

when the stars have come out, and is naktambhaga; Magha and Pirva-

phalguni into which the moon enters on the mornings of the two following

days are pirvabhaga ; Uttara-phalguni which comes into conjunction on

the morning after that is ubhayabhdga, because it is dvyardhakshetra.

Hasta and Chitra enter into conjunction on the evenings of the two follow-

ing days, before night has set in, and are therefore paschddbhaga. Then

again follows one naktambhaga nakshatra, v7z., Svati which enters into

conjunction after nightfall, and upon this a dvyardhakshetra and conse-

quently ubhayabhaga nakshatra, viz., Vistkh4. Then Anuradha pagchad-

bhaga, after this Jyeshtha, apardhakshetra and naktambhaga, remaining in

conjunction from nightfall to the morning only ; after this two samakshe-

tra and purvabhaga nakshatras, viz., Mula and Pirvashadha. And finally

Uttarashadha, which enters into conjunction on the morning, is, however,

asa dvyardhakshetra, reckoned among the ubhayabhaga. It remains in

conjunction for one nycthemeron and the following day, in whose evening

the moon arrives at Abhijit whence she had started a (periodical) month

ago.

The difficulties involved in all the preceding statements are increased

by an assertion made in another chapter of the Stryaprajnapti, vzz., that no

nakshatra always enters into conjunction with the moon at the same time of

the day. ‘This is indeed true, but it contradicts the preceding statements.

It may be that this whole classification of the nakshatras according to the

time of the day at which they enter into conjunction with the moon is a

remainder of an earlier stage of knowledge, when the periodical month

was supposed to last just twenty-seven days without an additional fraction,

and when it therefore was possible to assign to each nakshatra one fixed

hour at which it entered into conjunction during each periodical revolution

of the moon. It is true that actual observation would speedily have shown

the error of such an assumption, but this remark would apply to almost all

hypotheses of the Indians of that period, and we may therefore suppose

that in this point too the desire of systematizing prevailed during a certain

period over the testimony of the eyes. Later on when the duration of the

periodical month had become better known, the old classification lost its

foundation entirely and ought to have been dropped; but through the

force of custom it maintained its place and was justified some how, although

not with the best success, as we have had occasion to observe above.

On the places of the nakshatras with regard to the moon we receive

190 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapte. [No. 4,

the following information (X. 11). Six nakshatras, v7z., Mrigasiras, Ardva,

Pushya, Aslesha, Hasta, Mila always stand to the south of the moon when-

ever she enters into conjunction with them. Twelve nakshatras—Abhijit,

Sravana, Dhanishtha, Satabhishaj, Parva-bhadrapada, Uttara-bhadrapada,

Revati, Asvini, Bharani, Ptrva-phalguni, Uttara-phdlguni, Svati always

stand to the north of the moon. Seven nakshatras—Krittika, Rohini,

Punarvasu, Magha, Chitra, Visakha, Anuradha—sometimes stand to the

north of the moon entering into conjunction with them; sometimes, how-

ever, the moon enters into conjunction with them ‘“ pramardartpena”’ viz.,

in such a manner that she passes right through them. To this class, the

commentator remarks, some teachers holding an opinion different from that

of the Stryaprajfiapti add also Jyeshtha. Two nakshatras, viz., the two

Ashadhas stand at the time of conjunction either to the south of the moon

or the latter passes right over them. Both these nakshatras consist of

four stars each, two of which are situated inside, viz., to the north of the

fifteenth circle of the moon, while the two remaining ones are placed out-

side, vzz., to the south of the same circle. Now whenever the moon enters

into conjunction with either of the two nakshatras, she passes right between

the former pair of stars and may therefore be said to be in conjunction

* pramardartipena.”” Finally one nakshatra, viz., Jyeshtha, always enters

into conjunction with the moon pramardartipena. Regarding the relation

of the nakshatras to the fifteen circles of the moon, the following state-

ments are made. Hight circles always are “ undeprived”’ (avirahitani) of

nakshatras. The twelve nakshatras mentioned above, beginning with Abhi-

jit, are in the first circle; in the third circle there are Punarvasu and

Magha ; in the sixth, Krittika ; in the seventh, Rohini and Chitra ; in the

eighth, Visakha ; in the tenth, Anuradha ; inthe eleventh, Jyeshthé; in the

fifteenth, Mrigasiras, Ardra, Pushya, Asleshé, Hasta, Mila and the two

Ashadhas. For although the first six of the last mentioned class in reality

move outside the fifteenth circle, they are—the commentator says—so near

to it that they maybe said to be in it. In order to form a right estimate

of the meaning and the value of these statements, we must recall to our

mind what has been remarked above about the Stiryaprajiiapti’s theory of

the moon’s motion. The moon is supposed to proceed alternately towards

the south and the north in the same way as the sun does, following—as the

Stryaprajfiapti seems to assume—the same path; that she in addition to

the movement in declination has a movement in latitude, and that the points

in which her orbit cuts the ecliptic are continually receding is ignored,

theoretically at least, although it had been observed that the position of

the moon with regard to some nakshatras is different at different times,

that she sometimes passes on the north or south-side of a constellation and

at other times moves right through it. Now comparing ‘the particulars

1830. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajitapte. 191

with the information given about the position of the nakshatras in the

Siddhantas, we find that the Stryaprajiiapti agrees with the latter with

regard to five out of the six nakshatras said always to stand south of the

moon (Mrigasiras, Ardra, Asgleshé, Hasta, Mila), the latitude of all of them

considerably exceeding the highest latitude the moon ever reaches. The

ease lies differently with regard to Pushya, which according to the Siddhan-

tas lies in the ecliptic, so that it almost appears as if the Pushya of the

Stryaprajiapti were an altogether different asterism. From among the

twelve nakshatras said to stand always north of the moon ten (Abhijit,

Sravana, Sravishtha, Ptrva-Bhadrapadé, Uttara-Bhadrapadé, Asvint,

Bharani, Pirva-Phaleuni, Uttara-Phalguni, Svati) may be identified with

the nakshatras of the Siddhantas whose latitudes—excluding Abhijit—vary

from 9° to about 39° north. Strange it is only that these nakshatras occupy-

ing a zone of about 21° breadth are said to be in one and the same circle

of the moon, and still stranger that Abhijit too is classed among them, the

latitude of the latter—if identical with the Abhijit of the Siddhantas—ex-

ceeding the latitudes of the other nakshatras, with which it is here thrown

into one class, by about 30°. The Satabhishaj and Revati of the Siddhan-

tas are situated in and close to the ecliptic ; here too therefore we might

doubt if the Suryaprajiapti denotes by these two names the same stars as

the Siddhantas. ‘The remaining nakshatras may be identified with those

of the Siddhantas, the latitude of none of the latter much exceeding the

greatest latitude reached by the moon; a considerable margin must of

course be allowed for the inaccuracy of the observations on which the state-

ments of the Stiryaprajiapti are based. Quite unfounded is the statement

about the moon always passing right through Jyeshtha ; it looks as ifit had

originated at some period when one of the moon’s nodes had about the

same longitude as that asterism.

The order of succession of the nakshatras is treated in X, 1. Of

five different pratipattis regarding this point the author details only one,

viz., that one according to which Krittika stands first. ~The author of the

Stiryaprajfiapti for his part calls Abhijit the first nakshatra, since accord-

ing to his system at the beginning of the yuga on the day of the summer

solstice early in the morning the moon which is full at that time stands in

Abhijit. He therefore altogether abandons the principle, sometimes fol-

lowed, according to which the enumeration of the nakshatras begins with

that nakshatra in which the sun stands on the day of the vernal equi-

nox; if he too had chosen this principle he would of course have begun

his enumeration with Agvini. It may here be mentioned by the way that

the Stiryaprajiapti does not occupy itself at all with the equinoxes,

the name of which is not even mentioned in the whole work,

We now proceed to consider some specimens of the numerous cal-

192 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnrup te. [No. 4,

culations, rules for the performance of which are contained in the Strya-

prajfiapti itself as well as ina great number of old karana-gathas quoted

by the commentator ; remarking at once that the rules contained in the

gdthds presuppose exactly the same system as the rules of the Stryapra-

jaapti itself. A comparison of these calculations with those contained in

the jyotisha-veddiga shows the extreme likeness and in many cases the

complete identity of the two sets ; a result which supplies another reason

for looking on the Sttryaprajiapti as—in all essential points—a fair re-

presentative of Indian astronomy anterior to the period of the Siddhantas.

Several of these calculations have already been reproduced above incidens

tally ; in the following a detailed account of the more important ones

among those not yet touched upon will be given.

It appears that before the influence of Greek astronomy made itself

felt in India, the division of the sphere into 27 or 28 nakshatras was the

only one employed and that no independent subdivisions of the nakshatras

were made use of. ‘This want was, however, supplied by a simple transfer

of the subdivisions of time to the nakshatras. In accordance with this

being the duration of the periodical revolution of the moon, and allots to each

principle the Styaprajfapti divides the sphere into 819 muhirtas, this

nakshatra a certain number of muhtrtas according to its greater or smaller

extent. Fixed subdivisions of the muhtrta such as are commonly met in

Indian astronomical works are, however, nowhere employed by the author

of the Stryaprajiiapti; he apparently preferred to keep himself perfectly

free from restrictions of this kind and uses throughout those fractions of

the muhtrta only which were immediately suggested by the various cal-

culations in hand. From the general nature of the yuga it is manitest at

once which fractions will present themselves most readily ; they are sixty-

seconds and sixty-sevenths (62 = number of synodical months in a

yuga, 67 = number of periodical months) and, whenever lunar months of

both kinds enter into the calculations, sixty-sevenths of sixty-seconds.

One of the most important rules is that which teaches how to find the

place of the moon on any parvan. In the following the details of the

calculation furnished by the commentator will be stated in extenso, so that

at least one complete specimen of computations of this kind may be exhi-

bited—If we wish to devise a rule for calculating the place of the moon in

the circle of the nakshatras at any parvan, we must at first find the

constant quantity—the dhruvarasi—entering ag a multiplicand into all

calculations of this kind. This in our ease is clearly the space passed

through by the moon during the lunar month, or more simply, because

entire revolutions which bring the moon back to the same place can be

neglected, the excess of the lunar synodical month above the periodical

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. 193

month. From what is known about the general constitution of the yuga

this quantity is of course readily found to be equal to 66 + = -{

_ ; lk: : ie ,

62 x 67. The commentator calculates this quantity as follows. If the

sun performs during 124 parvans five complete revolutions, how much does he

j : 5 xX

perform during 2 parvans (= one synodical month) ; answer : So

= rev. ‘This therefore is the excess of the synodical month above the

aS, sepa ‘ 5

periodical one. In order that the division can be carried out, the 5 rev.

183

are turned into nakshatras by multiplying them by 67

(4. e. by 27

the duration in ahordtras of the periodical month or, if we like, the

extent of the nakshatras ; 27 entire nakshatras plus the fractional nak-

m0 nee OOO.

shatra Abhijit). Result of the multiplication m54"

turn the days or nakshatras into muhtirtas—the numerator is multiplied

by 30. Result = Zee

A154

66 muhirtas. The remainder 336 is multiplied by 62 and the product

Again—in order to

This division being performed gives as result

again divided by 4154, Result = 5 muhtrtas. The remainder—62—

should again be multiplied by 67 (the fractions employed being through-

out sixty-seconds and sixty-sevenths) and divided by 4154; but 4154

being itself = 62 x 67, it is seen at once that the result is 1. Thus the

— muhirtas. If now the place of

the moon at any amdavasyd or pirnamasi is wanted, the above quantity

has to be multiplied by the number of the parvan; for instance, by one if

the moon’s place at the first full moon after the beginning of the yuga is

wanted. The product shows how far the moon at the time has advanced be-

yond the place she had occupied at the beginning of the yuga, if full moons

whole quantity is 66 + = a5

are concerned, or beyond the place she had occupied at the new moon preceding

the beginning of the yuga, if new moons are concerned, (the new moon im-

mediately antecedent to the beginning of the yuga having been selected

as starting-point for all calculations concerning new moons). So far the

place of the moon is expressed in muhdrtas only ; now in order to find

from these the nakshatra in which the moon stands at the time, we should

194. Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajiapti. [No. 4,

have to deduct from the muhtrtas found the extent of all the nakshatras

through which the moon has passed one after the other, until the sum would

be exhausted. Thus, for instance, if we wanted to find the place of the

moon at the third new moon after the beginning of the yuga, the constant

j 5 1 meee

quantity 66 + 63 ap 62 G7 would have to be multiplied by 38, so

that we should have 198 + = + Lee eee muhtrtas. Now the moon

62 62 x 67

standing at the new moon preceding the beginning of the yuga in Punar-

5 46

vasu, of which she has still to pass through 22 — muhtrtas, we should

have to deduct this last quantity from 122 + i) + a ; fr th

f ee en “oc! 62 | 62 167 eae

remainder we should have to deduct 30 muhtrtas (the extent of Pushya) ;

from the remainder again 15 (Asleshé) ; again from the remainder 30

(Magha), and so on, until in the end the fact of the remainder being

smaller than the next following nakshatra would show that new moon takes

place in that nakshatra.—In order, however, to shorten this somewhat

lengthy process, certain subtrahends are formed out of the sum of the extent

of several nakshatas, which materially alleviate the work-by substituting

one subtraction for a number of subtractions. Thus with reference to new

moon—the subtrahend (Sodhanaka) for Uttara-phalguni is said to be 172,

for Visékha 292, for Uttara-dshadha 442; ¢. e., if from the product of the

constant quantity by the number of the new moon 172 can be deducted,

we see at once that the moon has advanced beyond Uttara-ashadhah ; if 292

can be deducted, she has passed the limits of Visakha and so on. The sub-

trahends are not carried on from Punar-vasu beyond Uttara-ashadha, but

make a fresh start from Abhijit, apparently in order to make them available

for the calculation of the places of the full moons too. Thus the subtrahend

for Abhijit is 9 and a fraction, of Uttara-bhadrapada 159, of Rohini 809,

of Punarvasu 399, of Uttara-phalguni 549, of Visakha 669, of Mila 744,

of Uttara-ashadha 819.

The places in which the different full moons of the yuga occur are

found by an exactly similar proceeding ; only all calculations have to start

not from Punarvasu, but from the beginning of Abhijit where the first full

moon which coincides with the beginning of the yuga takes place. The

text enumerates the places of all full moons and new moons of the yuga at

length, carrying in cach case the calculations down to sixty-sevenths of

sixty-seconds of muhtrtas. It is needless to reproduce these lists here in

extenso, as any place wanted can be calculated with ease from the general

rule given above.

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajiapti. 195

The same result, v2z., to find the place of the moon on a given parvan

is obtained by following another rule contained in some gathas quoted by

the commentator. Their purport is as follows. Multiply sixty-seven (the

number of periodical revolutions which the moon makes during one yuga)

by the number of the parvan the place of which you wish to find and divide

this product by one hundred and twenty-four (the number of parvans of

one yuga). The quotient shows the number of whole revolutions the moon

has accomplished at the time of the parvan. The remainder is to be multi-

plied by 1830 (v7z., 1830 sixty-sevenths which is the number of nycthe-

mera of one periodical month) or more simply by 915 (reducing 1830 as

well as the denominator viz., 124 by two). From the product (remainder

multiplied by 915) deduct 1802, which is that part of a whole revolution

which is occupied by Abhijit (Abhijit occupies = days, but as this amount

is to be deducted from the numerator of a fraction the denominator of

which is 62, 21 is to be multiplied by 62; product = 1302). The portion

of Abhijit, from which the moon’s revolutions begin, is deducted at the

outset, because it is greatly smaller than the portion of all other naksha-

tras and would disturb all average calculations. After itis has been de-

ducted the remainder is divided by 67 x 62; the quotient shows the

number of nakshatras beginning from S'ravana which the moon has_ passed

through, in addition to the complete revolutions. The remainder is again

multiplied by thirty, the product divided by 62; the quotient shows the

number of muhtrtas during which the moon has been in the nakshatra in

which she is at the time. And so on down to small fractions of nakshatras.

The following isan example. Wanted the place of the moon at the end of the

second parvan. Multiply 67 by 2; divide the product by 124. The quo-

tient (1) indicates that the moon has performed one complete periodical

revolution. The remainder (i0) is multiplied by 1830 or more simply by

915 (see above) ; from the product (9150) the portion of Abhijit (1802)

is deducted. The remainder (7848) is divided by 67 x 62 = 4154; the

quotient (1) shows that after Abhijit the moon has passed through one

complete nakshatra, véz., Sravana. The remainder (8694) is multiplied by

80; the product (110820) again divided by 4154; the quotient (26) shows

that the moon has moreover passed through 26 muhtrtas of Sravishtha.

By carrying on this calculation we arrive at the result that at the end of

the second parvan the moon stands in Sravishtha, of which she has passed

through 26 + = a — muhitrtas.

Analogous calculations are made for the sun too. For instance, in

what circle does the sun move at the time of each parvan? The rule here

is very simple. Multiply the number of the parvan by fifteen (the number

———E eo

196 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 4,

of tithis of one parvan) and from the product deduct the number of avama-

ratras (excessive lunar days) which occur during the period in question.

If the parvan occurs during the first ayana of the sun, the remainder im-

mediately indicates the number of the solar circle which is in fact the same

as the number of tbe civil day on which the parvan happens; if the par-

van takes place during one of the other nine ayanas, the remainder must

at first be divided by 183 (number of circles described by the sun during

one ayana) ; etc. The rule is simple and needs no illustration.

The rule for finding the nakshatra in which the sun stands at the time

of each parvan (the stryanakshatra) is quite analogous to the rule given

above for the moon. The sun makes in one yuga five complete revolutions,

in one parvan oe revolutions. ‘This quantity is to be multiplied by the

number of the parvan and then we have as above to descend by continued

multiplication and division to nakshatras, sixty-second parts of nakshatras

and sixty-seventh parts of sixty-second parts. Instead of deducting the

portion belonging to Abhijit at the beginning of which the moon stands

on the first day of the yuga, we have to deduct that part of Pushya which

the sun has not yet passed through at the beginning of the yuga; it

amounts to of anychthemeron. All the remainder of the calculation is

the same as in the moon’s case and illustrative examples are therefore not

wanted.

Besides there is another and considerably simpler method for finding

the sun’s place at the end of a parvan ; it is likewise contained in some old

karana-gdthas. The rule again assumes a “ dhruvardasi”, a constant quan-

: alee 2

tity, to be used in all calculations of this kind. This quantity is 83 + 69

+ Goes Bt G7 muhtirtas ; for if we divide the whole circle of the nakshatras

into 819 a muhtrtas (which is the time occupied by a complete revolution

of the moon) the above amount expresses the way the sun accomplishes

during one parvan. This quantity has therefore to be multiplied by the

number of the parvan required, and by subtracting from the product at first

43 33

the 1, ent Grimes

15 muhtirtas of Xdlesh4, after that the 80 mubtrtas of Magha etc., we find

in the end the nakshatra in which the san completes the parvan. In order

to facilitate these somewhat lengthy subtractions, the muhirtas of a cer-

tain number of nakshatras are again added and presented in a tabular form.

So for instance 189 muhtrtas (19 + 15 + 380 + 30 + 45) lead us up to

mubirtas belonging to Pushya, after that the

1880. | Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. 197

the end of Uttara-phdleuni, and if therefore the product found in the man-

ner shown above exceeds 139, we may at once subtract 189 instead of

performing five separate subtractions and know that the sun has at the time

passed beyond Uttara-phalguni, The procedure is analogous to the one

described above and needs no further illustration.

For finding how many seasons have elapsed on a certain tithi, the

commentator quotes some gathas of the old teachers. The rule they

contain is as follows Multiply the number of the parvans which have

elapsed since the beginning of the yuga by fifteen, and add to the result

the number of tithis which have elapsed in addition to the complete par-

vans ; deduct from this sum its sixty-second part; multiply the remainder

by two and add to the product sixty-one ; divide the result by one hundred

and twenty-two ; the quotient shows the number of seasons elapsed (which

when exceeding six will have to be divided by six, since so many seasons

constitute a solar year) ; the remainder divided by two shows the number

of the current day of the current season. This rule seems not very well

expressed, although it may be interpreted into a consistent sense. At first

it must be remembered that the yuga does not begin with the beginning

of a season, but with the month sravana, while the current season—the rainy

season—has begun a month earlier with dshadha. The calculation would

hen, strictly expressed, be as follows. ‘Take the number of parvans which

have elapsed since the beginning of the yuga, add to it the tithis which

have elapsed of the current parvan and add again to this sum 80} tithis

(the tithis of 4shadha plus half a tithi of the month preceding ashadha)

and deduct from this sum its sixty-second part, viz., the so-called avamara-

tras, 7. e., the lunar days in excess of the natural days (according to the

Stryaprajnapti’s system each sixty-second tithi is an avamaratra). The

remainder of the calculation needs no explanation ; the formula enjoins the

addition of 61 instead of 304 and division by 122 instead of 61 (the num-

ber of days of a season) in order to get rid of the fractional part of 303.

In order to find the number of the parvan during which an avamaratra

occurs and at the same time the tithi itself which becomes avamaratra, the

following rule is given. ‘The question is assumed to be proposed in the

following manner. In what parvan does the second tithi terminate while

the first tithi has become avamaratra, or in what parvan does the third tithi

terminate while the second is avamaratra? and so on, (kasmin parvani

pratipady avamaratribhitayam dvitiya samaptim upayati, ete.) The an-

swer is: if the number of the tithi which becomes avamaratra is an odd one,

one has to be added to it and the sum to be multiplied by two; the result

shows the number of parvans elapsed before the first tithi becomes avama-

ratra. If the number is an even one, one is added to it, the sum multiplied

by two, and to the product thirty-one is added ; the result again shows the

198 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Siryaprajnapti. [No. 4,

number of parvans elapsed. Thus for instance if it is asked: when does

the first tithi become avamaratra ? add one to one (number of the tithi)

result two ; this multiplied by two gives four; therefore pratipad is avama-

ratra in the fifth parvan, after four parvans have elapsed. Or again it may

be asked: when does the second tithi become avamaratra? add one to two;

result three ; this multiplied by two gives six, to which thirty-one are

added. The result—thirty-seven—shows that in the thirty-eighth parvan

the second tithi is avama-ratra. Thus all the avama-ratras for the first

half of the yuga are found and the same numbers recur during the second

half. The rationale of this rule is obvious.

A simple rule is given for finding the tithis on which the Avrittis of

the sun, @. e@., the solstices take place. Multiply the number of the solstice

whose date you wish to know by 188 and add to the result three plus the

number of the solstice ; divide this sum by fifteen ; the quotient shows the .

number of parvans elapsed, the remainder the number of the tithi of the

current parvan. This rule—being based on the relation of tithis to savana

days needs no explanation. The following list for the whole yuga results

from these calculations.

1st Summer solstice ( = 10th solstice of the preceding yuga).

Ist dark half of sravana.

Ist. Winters solstice, ss.205 wceesh cn den tee-aelecsan Cubes we) pppmaghay

2 NG Seiwa arate ae tie eee eee oe lobes » 99 Sravana.

2 ndewWa io meien ncester seated abiorselaehee sieiecnuice 4th light half of méagha.

Bird Segin. csepsbac icc loah akan ene ea 10th ,, +) 5) STavema)

BIC. WisisBa5.) .cvinisietsa sth sales valecesesocmaueenece WIL Su darks bal trotemaoien

ASS 3955 alae leach haces wabvelanes Gene eeees Withee » » stavana,

Abhi WikiSeyergeaetves se aa riietdeieiosutewstaceres 13th ,, 3) 5) ae har

{Hot SbE Sbaoshosecoe eSe.crdocecserers ese evssee. “4th ight ohalt tot isravanam

Di hig Wiha sivsmesitees gaccttas he vexeaceee caer 10th. ., » >» magha.

The places which the sun occupies in the circle of the nakshatras at

the time of the solstices have been mentioned before; the places of the

moon at the same periods can of course be easily calculated when it is re-

membered that at the beginning of the yuga the moon just enters Abhijit.

It is unnecessary to reproduce here the rule given for that purpose ; if may

only be mentioned that the = of a sidereal revolution which the moon

performs during one solar ayana in excess of six complete revolutions con-

stitute the “dhruva rasi” for our case. The Stiryaprajnapti likewise states —

the places in which the lunar dvrittis take place ; from the circumstance

that at the beginning of a yuga the moon is full in the first point of Abhijit

and at the same time commences her progress towards the north, it follows

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnaptt. 199

that her next progress towards the south takes place exactly on the same

spot on which the sun was standing at the beginning of the yuga. At all

following lunar dvrittis the places of the two first ones of course recur.

Incidentally another rule is mentioned which certainly was of frequent

application, viz., how to find on what natural day and at what moment of

time during that day a given tithi terminates. The rule which is contain-

ed in an old karana-gatha is of course very simple. Add together all tithis

which have elapsed from the beginning of the yuga up to and including the

tithi in question; divide this sum by sixty-two ; multiply the remainder by

sixty-one and divide again by sixty-two. The remainder is then the wanted

quantity. The first division by sixty-two has the purpose to shew by its

quotient—the number of complete avamaratras elapsed since the beginning

of the yuga ; this number has therefore to be deducted from the number of

tithis elapsed. The remainder of the above division shows the number of

tithis which have elapsed since the occurrence of the last avamaratra ; to

find by how much they remain behind the same number of natural days,

they are multiplied by 61 and divided by 62 (61 natural days = 62 tithis) ;

the remainder then indicates how many sixty-second parts of the current

natural day have elapsed at the moment when the tithi in question terimi-

nates.

Another old rule has the purpose of teaching how to find the number

of muhurtas which have elapsed on the parvan-day at the moment when

the new parvan begins. When the number of the parvan divided by four

yields one as remainder (in which case it is called kaly-oja) we must add

ninety-three to it ; if divided by four it yields two (in which ease it is

called dvapara-yugma), we add sixty-two to it; if it yields three (treta-oja),

we add thirty-two ; if there is no remainder (krita-yugma), we add nothing.

The sum which we obtain in each case is halved, then multiplied by thirty,

finally divided by sixty-two. The quotient shows the number of muhtrtas

of the parvan-day which have elapsed at the moment when the new parvan

begins. The rationale of this rather ingenious rule is as follows. The

A ‘ 94: x : :

duration of one parvan is 14 14 days. The first parvan therefore termi-

94, xcs On ATexG30

DAs P

nates when 194 of the day = muhutrtas have elaps-

12 124 iy 62

ed. The number 94 may be obtained by adding 93 to 1, the number of

64: bane

the first parvan. The second parvan ends 29 a days after the beginning

of the yuga ; 64 equals 62 + 2, the number of the second parvan. The

c : od .

third parvan terminates 44 24 days after the beginning of the yuga; 34

fad

200 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 4,

equals 81 + 8, the number of the third parvan. The fourth parvan termi-

nates 59 ot days after the beginning of the yuga ; 4 without any addition

is the number of the parvan. The fifth parvan again terminates 73 oi

days after the beginning of the yuga ; 98 is equal to 93 + 5, the number

of the parvan. And so on through the whole yuga.

The above examples fairly represent the more important rules contain-

ed in the Stryaprajnapti. Now it will be apparent to every one who is to

some extent familiar with the Jyotisha-vedanga* that the rules contained

in the, as yet partly unexplained, verses of the latter refer to calculations

exactly analogous to those contained in the Suryaprajfiapti and the old

gathas quoted by the commentator.

From this it might be concluded that it is now easy for us to explain

whatever has up to the present remained unexplained in the Vedaiga,

possessing as we doubtless do a clear insight into the general nature of the

calculations for which it furnishes rules. But close as the connexion be-

tween the contents of the two treatises manifestly is, there are two reasons

which preclude the direct application of the rules of the Stryaprajfiapti to

the elucidation of the Vedanga. In the first place the Veddiga divides the

sphere into twenty-seven nakshatras only and, as far as has been ascertain-

ed up to the present, these twenty-seven nakshatras are considered to be

of equal extent ; while as we have seen above the Stiryaprajiiapti through-

out employs the division of the sphere into twenty-eight nakshatras of

unequal extent. In the second place the starting point for all calculations

(viz., the places of the winter and summer solstice) is not the same in the

two works. The consequence of these two fundamental discrepancies is

that although the questions treated of are essentially the same and although

the modes of calculation are strictly analogous the results arrived at in the-

two treatises necessarily differ in all cases, that for instance the place of a

certain full or new moon during the quinquennial yuga can never be the

same according to the Stryaprajfiapti as it is according to the Vedanga, ete.

Nevertheless it is highly probable that somebody who should apply himself

to the study of the obscure portions of the Vedanga after having made him-

self thoroughly conversant with the contents and methods of the Stryapra-

* Since the publication of the paper on the Jyotisha-vedafiga in the 46th volume

of this Journal, the writer has received some very important contributions to the ex-

planation of the Vedanga from Dr. H. Oldenberg, the well-known editor of the Vinaya-

pitakam, who working altogether independently had succeeded in explaining a number

of hitherto obscure rules. The writer intends to revert to the Vedanga before long

and will then avail himself of the new results most kindly placed at his disposal by Dr.

Oldenberg.

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Suryaprajnapte. 201

jfapti, would succeed in solving some more of the riddles presented to us by

the former work.

It must be remembered that there is no indissoluble connexion between

that part of the system of the Siryaprajiapti, which might be called the

chronometrical one, viz., the doctrine of the quinquennial yuga and its

various subdivisions and that part which propounds the theories accounting

for the apparent motions of the sun and the moon; it might therefore be

that the Vedanga agrees with the Suryaprajfapti only in the former point

and follows a different course with regard to the latter. There occurs, how-

ever, one expression in the Vedaiga which makes it appear likely that the

analogy between the two books extends to the second point also, viz., the

“ suryamandalani’’ mentioned in verse 22.

galaamaia: wee feaut farsa)

ay asquiay fafaiaat war ws: I

It certainly looks as if by these ‘‘ sun circles” in which the sun is said

to be at the end of a tithi, we had to understand daily circles of the same

kind as those which, according to the Stryaprajiapti, the sun describes

round. Mount Meru.

A few words may here be added on the principal feature common to

the cosmological systems of the Purdnas, Buddhists and Jainas, viz., the

doctrine of sun, moon and constellations revolving round Mount Meru. In

order rightly to judge of these conceptions we must remember that they

arose at a time when the idea of the sphericity of the earth had not yet

presented itself to the Indian mind, at a time (—if we may assume that

the Puranic-Buddhistic cosmological system is not later than the period

of the rising of Buddhism—) when this then truly revolutionary idea

first suggested itself to the early Greek philosophers. And if we carry our

thoughts back to that early stage of the development of scientific ideas and

try to realize the conceptions which then were most likely to present them-

selves to enquirers, the old Indian system will lose much of its apparent

strangeness and arbitrariness. How indeed could men ignorant of the fact

that the earth is a sphere freely suspended in space explain to themselves

the continually recurring rising and setting of the heavenly bodies? what

could their ideas be regarding the place to which sun and moon went after

their setting, and the path which unseen by man they followed so as to

return to the point of their rising? Certainly the difficulty was a very

great one to those as well who had some vague notion about the earth

extending in all directions to an unlimited distance as to those who imagin-

ed it to be bounded at a certain distance by a solid firmament surrounding

and shutting it in on all sides. We may recall, as one of the fancies to

which the difficulty of this question gave rise, the old poetical idea, pre-

202 Dr. G. Thibant—On the Suryaprajnapti. [No. 4,

served, for instance, in a beautiful fragment of Stesichorus, of Helios when

he has reached Okeanos in the west embarking in a golden cup which car-

ries him during the night round half the earth back to the east whence he

rises again. Under these circumstances we must admit that the old Indian

idea of the constitution of the world, according to which the rising and

setting of sun, moon and stars is only apparent, cannot by any means be called

an unnatural one, and it is interesting to consider the counterparts it finds

among what is known of the opinions of the oldest Greek philosophers.*

So it is reported of Anaximenes that he supposed the sun not to descend

below the earth, but to describe circles above it and to pass during the night

behind high mountains situated in the north; an exact parallel to the

Indian conception. Of Xenophanes we hear that he declared the sun, moon

and stars to be only accumulations of burning vapour, fiery clouds kindling

and extinguishing themselves by turns, that these clouds move in reality in

straight lines and only appear to us to rise and to set in consequence of

their varying distance, in the same way as the common clouds seem to rise

from the horizon when they first become visible to us and seem to sink

under the horizon when they pass out of our field of vision. These opinions

too find their exact counterpart in the Stiryaprajiapti and kindred works

where the rising and setting of the heavenly bodies is declared to be an

appearance caused by their consecutive approaching and receding, and where

their movement is said to take place not indeed in a straight line but at

any rate in a plane parallel to the plane of the earth. The first mentioned

opinion of Xenophanes about the constitution of the heavenly bodies finds

its analogon in one of the different pratipattis, mentioned in the Strya-

prajiapti, according to which the sun is nothing but a “ kiranasamghata,”

an accumulation of rays forming itself every morning in the east and dis-

solving itself in the evening in the west. The cognate views held by |

Heraclitus concerning the nature of the sun are well known. Of Xeno-

phanes it is further reported that he supposed different climes and zones of the

earth, far distant from each other, to have different suns and moons; which

is another striking parallel to the view held by the Jainas with reference to

the different suns, moons and stars illuminating the different concentric

dvipas of which the earth consists. In both cases the assumption of the

rising and setting of the heavenly bodies being an appearance, caused by

their becoming visible and invisible in turns when having approached us

or receded from us by a certain amount, seems to have lead to the conclu-

sion that the light of the one sun and the one moon appearing to us can-

not illumine the whole vast earth, since it only reaches to a certain limited

* For the particulars mentioned in the following : comp. Mullach’s collection of the

fragments of the Greek philosophers, Zeller’s history of Greek philosophy, Lewis’s

historical survey of the Astronomy of the Ancients.

1880. | Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stryaprajnapti. 203

distance.—On the other hand it is true enough that, notwithstanding these

similarities of Indian and Greek ideas, books of the nature of the Stryapra-

jiapti serve clearly to show the difference of the mental tendencies of the

two nations. Both in an early age conceived plausible theories, in reality

devoid of foundation, by which they tried to account for puzzling pheno-

mena ; but while the Greeks controlled their theories by means of continued

observation of the phenomena themselves and replaced them by new ones,

as soon as they perceived that the two were not in harmony, the Hindus

religiously preserved the generalisations hastily formed at an early period,

and instead of attempting to rectify them, proceeded to deduce from them

all kinds of imaginary consequences. The absurdity of systems of the

nature of the Jaina system lies not in the leading conceptions—these can

as a rule be accounted for in a more or less satisfactory manner—but in the

minute detail into which the followers of the system have without scruple

and hesitation worked it out.

Before this paper is brought to a conclusion, the writer wishes to draw

attention to the—in his opinion very striking—resemblance which the

cosmological and astronomical conceptions, contained in an old Chinese book,

bear to the early Indian ideas on the same subject, more particularly to the

Jaina system as expounded in the Stiryaprajnhapti. The Chinese book

alluded to is the Tcheou-Pei of which a complete translation was published

for the first time by Edward Biot in the Journal Asiatique for 1841,

pp. 592—639. It consists of two parts of different ages ; the first part which

apparently is of considerable antiquity, has been known since the time of

Gaubil, who inserted a translation of it into his history of Chinese astro-

nomy, published in the Lettres éd fiantes ; that part, as is well known, shows

that the ancient Chinese were acquainted with the theorem about the

square of the hypothenuse of a right-angled triangle. The second and more

recent part, which H. Biot thinks cannot be later than the end of the second

century of our era, contains a sort of cosmological and astronomical system,

and here the traits of resemblance alluded to above are to be found. As

the arrangement of topics in the Tcheou-Pei is by no means systematic, so

that it is not easy to form a clear conception of the essential points, a

short abstract of the work, as far as it lends itself to a comparison with the

Jaina system, is given in the following.

According to the Techeou-Pei the sun describes during the course of

the year a number of concentric circles of varying diameter round the pole

of the sky. On the day of the summer solstice the diameter of this circle

is smallest ; it then increases during the following months, up to the day of

the winter solstice when it reaches its maximum. Beginning from this

day the solar circles again decrease, until on the day of the next summer

204 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. [No. 4,

solstice they have reached the original minimum. On the day of the win-

ter solstice the diameter of the solar circle amounts to 476,000 li (the li is

a certain Chinese measure of length) ; its circumference to 38 x 476,000=

1,428,000 li. The corresponding numbers for the circle, described on the

day of the summer solstice, are 238,000 and 714,000. Between the inner-

most and the outermost circle there lie five other circles, which the sun

describes in the months intervening between the two solstices, so that there

are altogether seven circles; the six intervals between these are said to

correspond to the months of the year (2 x 6 = 12). So it appears that

the Tcheou-Pei assumes separate solar circles for each month only, not for

each day. Lach circle is at the distance of 19,8334 li from the two neigh-

bouring circles.

The terrestrial place for which all the calculations of the Tcheou-pei

are made is said to have such a situation that it is distant 16,000 li from

the spot lying perpendicularly under the sun on the day of the summer

solstice and 135,000 li from the spot lying perpendicularly under the sun

on the day of the winter solstice ; the distance of the place of observation

from the pole, z. e., the spot at the centre of the earth which lies perpendi-

cularly under the celestial pole, is said to amount to 103,000 li. Round the

terrestrial pole there extends a circle of 11,500 li radius, which is the terres-

trial counterpart of the circle described by the polar star round the celes-

tial pole. The light of the sun extends 167,000 li in each direction, so

that on the day of the winter solstice when the sun moves in the exterior

circle it extends at midday only 32,000 li beyond the place of observation

and so does not reach up to the polar circle. On the days of the two

equinoxes when the sun is moving in the fourth circle—the diameter of

which amounts to 857,000 li—the rays of the sun just reach up to the

polar circle. On the day of the summer solstice when the sun moves in

the interior circle his rays reach beyond the pole to the extent of 48,000 li,

so that then the whole polar circle is continually illuminated. When the

sun in his daily revolution has reached the extreme north point, it is midday

in the northern region and midnight in the southern region ; when he has

reached the east point, it is midday in the eastern, midnight in the western

region ; when he has reached the south point, it is midday in the southern,

midnight in the northern region ; when he has reached the west point, it is

midday in the western, midnight in the eastern region. As the light of

the sun always reaches 167,000 i each way, we must add 2 x 167,000 to

the diameter of the circle, described on the day of the winter solstice, in

order to obtain the diameter of the circle representing the outmost limit

reached by the rays of the sun; the diameter of this circle is therefore

810,000 li.

On the day of the winter solstice the space illuminated by the sun

1880. ] Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapti. 205

stands to the space not reached by his rays in the relation of three to nine ;

this proportion is to be reversed for the day of the summer solstice. The

day of the winter solstice is the shortest during the year; the day of the

summer solstice the longest. On the day of the winter solstice the shadow

of the gnomon is 13°5 feet long; beginning from this day it goes on

diminishing by equal quantities during equal spaces of time up to the day

of the summer solstice when its length is reduced to 1°6 feet. It then

increases again in the same uniform manner up to the day of the next

winter solstice. :

The circumference of the sky is divided into twenty-eight stellar

divisions of unequal extent, through the circle of which sun and moon are

performing their revolutions. Kien-nieou is the asterism in which the sun

stands at the winter solstice ; Leou the asterism of the vernal equinox ete.

A procedure is taught how to find the place of the sun at any time. The

whole circle of the asterisms is divided into 865% degrees corresponding

to the number of the days of the year. A year is the period which the sun

requires for returning to the same star from which he had set out. The

meeting of sun and moon constitutes a month. <A period of nineteen years

of 365% days each contains 235 lunations. Arithmetical rules are given

how to find the place of the moon at the beginning of each year etc.

The Tcheou-pei contains some additional matter about observations of

the polar star ete., but by far the greater part of the topics it treats have

been touched in the above summary. The similarity of this system and the

old Indian systems particularly, as far as some details are concerned,

the Jaina system is obvious. The same supposition is made use of in

both to account for the alternating progress of the sun towards the north

and the south. In the Jaina system the sun revolves round Mount Meru,

in the Chinese system, to which the idea of a central mountain seems to be

foreign, round the pole of the sky ; Mount Meru finds, however, a curious

counterpart in the Chinese polar circle, the projection of the circle described

by the polar star. Both systems state the dimensions of the circles de-

scribed by the sun; both state in figures the extent to which the rays of

the sun reach. Both hold the same opinion about the alternation of day

and night in the different parts of the earth. Both are interested in find-

ing out what places sun and moon occupy in the circle of the nakshatras.

Both teach the increase of the shadow by an equal quantity in each month.

On the other hand there are important points in which the two systems

differ, The Chinese appear from comparatively ancient times to have had

a knowledge of the fact that the approximate duration of the solar year

amounts to 38651 years and that a period of nineteen years comprises 325

lunations. This of course makes the system of the Tcheou-pei to differ

from the Jaina system in all those details which depend on the fundamen-

206 Dr. G. Thibaut—On the Stiryaprajnapte. [No. 4,

tal period and the advantage is of course altogether on the side of the

Chinese. On the whole the Tcheou-pei is much superior to works of the

stamp of the Stryaprajfiapti, as in midst of all the fantastical and unfound-

ed ideas it contains there are found some positive elements, observations of

stars which admit of control etc., features altogether absent in the Strya-

prajfiapti. But in spite of these points of difference the similarities of the

two works remain striking, especially if we take as one member of the

comparison not the Stiryaprajiapti itself but some hypothetical older work

of the same class, less elevate and more moolerate in the statement of

dimensions, figures etc. That such works if not existent at present must

have existed at same earlier period is manifest from the remarks the Strya-

prajfiapti in many places makes about the opinions of other teachers,

several of which have been extracted above, That two different chronolo-

gical periods, the quinquennial yuga and so called Metanic cycle, from the

foundation of the two systems does after all not interfere very much with

their similarity. We might imagine the Jainas adopting the more correct .

cycle of nineteen years instead of the quinquennial one and work out all

the new details necessitated by such a change, calculate all the places of

moon and full moon during nineteen years instead of five ete., nevertheless

the new system would immediately suggest the idea of the old one. An

essential feature in the resemblance of the Chinese and the Hindu system

is more over the circumstance of both limiting themselves to the treatment

of a certain number of topics. The following paragraph of the Tcheou-

pei (p. 603) which shortly states the questions to be treated in the work,

might with hardly any change be taken as a summary of the contents of

the Stiryaprajiapti.

“TY have heard people speak of the knowledge of the great man. I

have heard it said that he knows the height and the size of the sun, the

extent which his light illuminates, the quantity by which he moves in the

course of one day, the quantity be which he recedes and approaches, the

extent which the eye of man embraces, the position of the four extreme

(cardinal) points, the divisions of the stars arranged in order, the breadth

and length of the sky and the earth.”

The questlon whether the similarity of the two systems justifies us in

assuming a historical connexion between the two or would be an interest-

ing one, but cannot be treated in this place, especially as its solution could

only be attempted together with the solution of a number of cognate

problems.

1880.] ©. J.’ Rodgers—Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles. 207

Coins supplementary to Thomas’ “Chronicles of the Pathin kings of

Dethi.”—By Cuas. J. Ropaurs. (With a Plate.)

Steady research is always followed by constant results. These results

are asarule insignificant discoveries which are individually small, but col-

lectively they all go to swell the sum of human knowledge. In my last

small supplement to Thomas’ “ Chronicles of the Pathén kings of Delhi”

I promised to give some additions which I had then in hand. But as I

went on with two other papers and my researches for them, I found that

incidentally my matter for the second supplement grew more interesting,

and at last I found to my surprise that I had more coins in hand than

would fill two plates ; so I began to draw at once and simultancously to put

away for a third supplement all coins for which I could not now find a

place. Strange to say just as I had made up my mind about these plates

a find of about 500 coins of five Ghazni kings, all struck at Lahore,

came to hand, some quite new and unpublished, and after that a batch

of silver coins of Ala-uddin Khwarizmi of whose coins I gave three

new types in my first supplement and of whose I give one great

beauty in my present paper. ‘These silver coins were struck at Ghazni

and Furwdén or as Thomas calls it ‘ Perwdn.’ He gives no drawings

of them and only alludes to them as giving us the mint of Perwan. These

Ghazni kings’ and the Khwarizmi king’s coins must stand over for the

present. I scarcely dare make a promise about them. About a year ago

I came across a find of Ghazni coins, in number about 500, and up till now

I have had no time to work at them and say what was in them, although

there were several novelties of historic value. As I personally go to the

bazars I see for myself what comes into them. And when I see what

comes into them and what finds a lodgement in our museums, I am

astonished and dumb-foundered to think that coins of whose existence we

are unaware are daily being brought in from the villages and fields and

ruins which abonnd here and there in the country and are simply handed

over to the smelting pot as common silver,—bullion in fact which is pur-

chased at a little less than its intrinsic value. And all this, while there is

in India no Imperial Cabinet of Coins and no one appointed to collect for

it and arrange it and make it a thing worthy of the historical associations,

India as an Empire and as a collection of ancient kingdoms and states,

possesses. India is a continent: but it is too poor to possess one Imperial

Cabinet of coins which would serve as a metallic record of past emperors

and rulers, past glories and shames, in fact, which would be a history of

the past in metal manuscripts. With the present rage for melting down

’

208 OC. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles. [No. 4,

everything it is high time something were attempted. Our only relics will

soon be empty, worn out, burnt up smelting pots.

In the present supplement the coins I give are chiefly varieties of

coins already known. ‘The inscriptions are sometimes longer than those

given in Thomas: sometimes they correct his readings; sometimes the

coins reveal new mints, sometimes they are quite new types of coins.

Plate I, No.1. Obv. Zuj ud daulat Khusrau Malik.

Rev. Bull with new mark on its jhul.

This coin is quite a new type of Khusrau Malik’s coins.

No. 2. Obv. (As sultan ul) Azim Taj ud Daulat Khusraw Malik.

Rev. Bull with new mark on its jhil.

No. 3. Obv. (Us sultin al) Azim Rukn ud dunyt wa ud Din

Firoz (Shah),

Rev. Remains of a horseman and his steed.

Thomas gives three coins belonging to this king (Pl. I, fig. 24, 25, 26).

I ascribe these three to Rezia. The Lukn is unmistakeable in my coin.

I give in No. 4a drawing of a coin I have, which is exactly like one of

Thomas’ (No. 24). A careful study of it will at once show that it reads

Obv. “Us sultan al Muazzim Rezia ud Dunyd wa ud Din.” Rev.

Horseman and steed, exactly like Thomas’. In my coin the zwdd (4) is

more fully developed and it must be a coin of Rezia’s.

In Pandit Ratan Narain’s list of coins I find a rupee of Rukn ud Din

Firoz Shail’s. Obv. As sultin ul’ Azim Shams ud Dunya wa ’d Din, abi’l

Muzaffar Rukn ud Dunyé wa’d Din Firoz Shih. Rev. Fi ahd ul Imam

Al Mustansir, Amir ul Mominin, fi shahir i san thalath wa thalathin wa

sita miata. In this rupee the letters of Awkn are exactly as in my coin.

It has no margins, the date is given in the square area. ‘This rupee is quite

unique. I should very much like to know its whereabouts. Such a coin

should by no means leave the country. I may add that Ratan Narain

gives in his list a copper coin like mine, and, being misled by ‘Thomas, gives

also two of Rezia’s coins as Rukn ud Din’s. Ihave four coins of Rezia’s

of this kind, as well as four of the type I published in my last paper, and

one each of Thomas’ Pl. I, figs. 28 and 29. On comparing them I have no

hesitation whatever in assigning Thomas’ Pl. I, Nos. 24, 25, 26 to Rezia.

Tn my last paper I gave a coin of Sanjar and Bahram Shah. In it the

title of Mwazzim was given to Sanjar. In my present paper I give coins

which shew that this title was given to several kings, who rejoiced however,

as is shown by their numerous coins, in the title al Azim.

No. 5. Obv. “As sultdn ul Muazzim, Ald ud Dunyt wa ’d Din.”

Rey. Horseman and steed.

No 9. Obv. As sultan ul Muazzim Eltatamsh as Sultan. Rev. Horse-

man and steed and remains in Hindi of Sr? Hamirah.

qin ye = aaa = z = W Newman \ in

COINS SUPPLEMENTARY TO THOMAS CHRONICLES OF PATHAN KINGS.

1880.] C. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles. 209

Plate II, No.2. Rev. Us sultén wl Muazzin.

Obv. Gyds ud Dunyé wa ud Din.

Tn these three coins Alé ud Din (Masaud Shah) and Shams ud Din

Altamsh and Gyds ud Din (Balban) we have the title Mwazzim. And it

comes also in No. 6 which I now proceed to describe.

No. 6. Obv. in florid Kufie “As sultin ul Muazzim Shams ud dunya

wa ’d din Abi *l Muzaffar (Lltamash ?). Rev., in a rayed circle, the

Kalimah, under which (41 Mustansir) biamri Ullah Amir ul Mominin.

This coin weighs 62 grs. only. It is therefore a tankah. It came to hand

with three Bahé ud Din Scm’s silver tankahs.

No. 7. A rupee of Shams ud Din Altamsh.

Obyv. ‘As Sultan ul Azim Shams ud Dunya wa ’d Din Altamsh as

Sultan Nasir i Amir ul Mominin.” Rev. Fé ahd il Imim Al Mustansir

Amir ul Momanin. Margin illegible alas !

No. 8. Obv. in Hindi above bull, Samasa Din.

Rev. above horse Ha and no other letter of Hamirah.

This type is quite new.

No. 10. Obv. As Sultin ul Azim Shams ud Dunyd wa’d Din.

Rev. Horseman, to right of which Hltatamsh, and above horseman

us Sultan. Thomas’ coin had not any inscription in front of the horse,

I have seen several of this type.

No. 11. Obv. (Shams) ud Dunya wa (ud Din) Lltatamsh as Sultan.

Rev. Horseman and Sri Hamirah.

No. 12. Obv. As swltin ul’ Azim Eltatamsh as sultan.

Rev. Horseman at charge.

No. 18. Obv. Shams ud Dunyt wa ’d Din Abi ?l Muzaffur us

Sultan.

Reverse, not given.

These three coins Nos. 11, 12 and 13 give more than do Thomas’ Nos.

47, 46, and 48. A comparison of them with Thomas’ coins will at once

show the additional information these supply.

No. 14. This is the same as Thomas’ No. 50, with the addition of the

word as Sultdn on the obverse plainly visible.

Nos 15, 16, 17, 18 show at one view four types of coins of Elduz, the

general of Muhammad bin Sim. Three of them are binominal.

No. 15. Obv. Muizz ud Dunya wa’d Din, Abd Yalduz.

Rev. Bull over which “ Sr¢ fw,” in Hindi.

There cannot be much doubt about the reading of the Hindi. Sri

Hamirah it cannot be. It is an attempt I think by a Musalman at Srz

Muizz.

No. 16. Obv. Muizz ud Dunyt wa’d Din.

Rev. Abd Yalduz.

210 C. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles. [No. 4,

There are floral ornaments about the inscriptions.

No. 17. A similar coin to Ariana Antiqua, Pl. XX, fig. 18, but much

fuller.

Obv. “ As Sultan ul Azim Muizz ud Dunyé wa’d Din.”

Rev. ’Abdu ’l Malik ul Muazzim, Taj ud Dunyt wa ’d Din

Valduz. :

No. 18. Obv. “ As sultan ul Muazzim Abi 1 Fath Yalduz as

Sultan.

Rev. Horseman with remnants of Sré Hamirah and Star under-

neath horse.

Plate II. No. I. Gold Mobur of Sher Shah. Oby. in Mahrabi area

“ As Sultan Sher Shah, khallad Allah Mulkahu.” Rev., in square area,

the Kalimah. Both margins are illegible: this is a great pity, as the coin

is in every other respect one of great beauty.

No. 3. Obv.—* Sultan Sher Shah, zarb « Sambhal.” Margin obli-

terated. Rev. not given.

No. 4. Obv.— Sultdin Sher Shah, zarb i Alwar.”

These are two new mints of Sher Shah.

No. 6. Rupee of Sher Shah. Circular areas on both sides. Obv.

“ Sher Shah Sultan, khallad Allah &e.

Margin :—* Farid ud Dunyé wa’d Din abi ’?l Muzaffar”

and in Hindi, Sher Shah, and in Arabic figures 949. Rev. the Kalimah:

Margin, the names of the four companions: and “As Sultén ul Adil,

zarb Ujain. ‘This is also a new mint of Sher Shah’s.

No.6. Rupee of Sher Shah’s: Square areas surrounded by double

lines.

Obv. Sher Shah Sultin, khallad Allah mulkahu.’ Margin “ Farid

ud Dunyt wa’d Din, zarb t Shergarh, in Hindi “ Sher Shahi.”

Rev., kalimah in area. Margin, the names of the four companions and

their titles. This coin has not been figured before. Unfortunately mine

has lost a piece out of its centre and it has not been mended very cleverly.

But the workmanship is very superior.

No. 7. Rupee of Kutub ud Din Mubarak Shah. New type.

Obverse: “ Al Imam ul Azim, Kutub ud Dunya wa ’d Din, Abi 71

Muzaffar, Khalifatw lah.”

Rev. central area: ‘“ Mubdrak Shih as Sultan, ibn us Sultan Al

Wasig billah, Amir ul Mominin.”

Margin. —“ Zarb hézd il Fizzat bi Hazrat dir il Khildfat, Hi sanat,

saba ashrata wa saba miata.

This coin has on it exactly the same as Thomas’ No. 146. But his is

asquare piece. On Mr. Delmerick’s coin are similar inscriptions, with the

mint place however termed “ dar wl mulh,” not “ dar ul khilafat.”

nal As. Soc Bengal, Vol, XLIX, Pt.1 1880

Dl Zh la)

———— : ———— - ee

INS SUPPLEMENTARY TO“THOMAS CHRONICLES OF PATHAN KINGS

fers. ¢

1880.] C. J. Rodgers—Oboins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles. 211

No. 8. Gold coin of Gyds ud Din Tuglaq. This coin is the same as

Thomas’ No. 158. In his coin the margin stops short when it gets to the

mint. This goes on three words “fi mulk « Talang.” It was struck in

Telingana.

No.9. A gold mohur. Rev. Mahmud Shah, bin Muhammad Shéh

bin Luglag Shah as Sultan 752.”

Obv. &/ zaman i Amir ul Mominin, Gyds ud Dunya wa’d Din, Abi

*L Muzaffar.”’

When Muhammad Tuglaq died, Firoz Shah was with him at Tatta in

Scinde. Ahmad Aydz Khwajah i Jahan set up in Dehli a boy of six years

of age as king. Ferishta says that he was called Gyés ud Din Muhammad,

but the coin shows that his name was Iahmid. On Firoz Shah’s arrival in

Dehli Mahmtid was deposed.

No. 10. New type of Alé ud Din Khwarizmi’s coin struck at Adéshm.

Obv. “ Kishin, Ala ud Dunya wa ’d Din, Muhammad bin us Sultan.”

Rev. horseman by side of spear “ (4)mdr.”? Above the horse “wl Azim.”

No. 11. Obv. “ (Saif) ud dunya wa ’d Din, Abi ul Muzaffar, al

Hasn, bin Muhammad.”

Rev. Bull on which “ Avrmdn,” over it in Hindi Sr? H ?”

No. 12. Obv. “ Nasir ud dunya wa’d Din, Abi’! Muzaffar.

Rev. “ Muhammad bin Hasn Karlagh.”

No. 18. Obv. in Hindi round a bull “ Sré Jaldl ud Din.” On the

bull in Arabic “ Aiérmdn.”

Rey. Horseman over which words which may be Hindi “ Sr? Ham/-

rah, but they look like Persian “ Karmén rawd.”

These last four coins are all new types. Avrmdn* may be the Persian

province and town. Jalal ud Din Khwarizmi went there by way of

Mekran after he left India. At least so says the author of the “ Rauzat

us Sufa.”

No. 14. Obv. “ Khalifatu Rabb il Alamin Kutub ud Dunyé wa ’d

Din.”

Rev. “ Abu ’l Muzaffar Mubdérak Shih as Sultan ibn us Sultén Al

wisig billah.”

No. 15. Obv. “ Al Mujahid fi sabil i ’llah Muhammad Tuglag.”

Above, ‘‘ Abubakr ;” to right, “ Al” ;” to left “ Umr’” under “ Othindn.”

Rev. the Kalimah in a cirele. Margin: “Zarb hizd us Sikka, bi

Hazrat Dehli, fi sanat Khams asharin wa saba mtata. This coin is a very

* Thomas idontifies it with Mwwrwn near Bunnu. Kishmis I suppose the island

and town at the entrance to the Persian Gulf. If so, there is no reason why KKirmdan

should not be the Persian one, except this one, that here we have coins struck in

Hindi,

SS Se

212 C. J. Rodgers—Coins supplementary to Thomas’ Chronicles. [No. 4,

much better specimen than the one given in Thomas which was struck in

Dar ul Islam.” Thomas calls his wnigue, but I have one also struck at

“ Dar ul Islam,” and during the last five years I have seen about half a

dozen of them. Dehli and Dar ul Isldém were favourite mints of Muham-

mad Tuglaq, but I have coins of the type of No. 159 in Thomas that were

struck at not only these two places, but at ‘‘ Zakhtgah i Dehli,” “ Arsa ¢

Satgawn,”’ and at “Iglim t Luglagpir urf (known = %. e.) Tirhut.”

There are coins extant which were struck at Daulatabad. Thus there

were six mints of this one type of coins. The simply Deki marked coins

and the Tuglagpir and Satgéwn types have not yet been published.

Thomas’ No. 173 was struck at Dehli. The Uahore Museum possesses

three similar gold mohurs. Of these, two were struck in 734 and one in

735 and all at Satgiwn in Bengal.

In Sir Alexander Burnes’ “ Travels in Bukhara’ Vol. II, two plates of

coins are given. This book was printed in 1834. Masson’s researches in

Afghanistan produced over 60,000 coins. From them Wilson compiled the

Ariana Antiqua which contains 21 plates of coins, Grecian, Greco-Bactrian,

Indo-Scythian, Sassanian and Indian. General Cunningham in his “Coins

of the Successors of Alexander in the East’’ gives fourteen plates which deal

only with Grecian and Greco-Bactrian coins. Late discoveries have produced

so many new coins that a supplement equal in size to the original book might

easily be published. ‘The coins of each dynasty that has reigned in India

supply matter enough for a volume. These coins are purchased by private

individuals and of course kept in their cabinets, each new type being hailed

with numismatice delight. When these private individuals go home, of

course they take their acquisitions with them. So that private enterprise

in Indian numismatics simply robs the country of its treasures. When a

poor student wishes to see the coins about which he reads, he cannot do it.

The museums have not got them. The Calcutta Museum is Iam credibly

informed destitute of coins. It seems to me there is only one way of

meeting this difficulty. The Museums of India must have grants made to

them for the purchase of coins just the same as Museums at home have.

The Berlin museum gets everything good in Europe, simply because it

gives good prices. Here in India those who can pay get the best coins.

And if the Government of India desires that the museums should possess

cabinets of coins, men must be appointed and money granted, or nothing

will ever be done except opportunities lost.

I have shown above how our knowledge of the different kinds of coins

has increased. What I desire to see is an increase in the number of coins

in our museums.

A\ °

\ \

964 ah

; 3H1 GTS

oOo.

/ \

ARR .

Lop ofah

312 GES.

COPPER COINS OF AKBAR.

Journal, As. Soc. Bengal, Vol, XLIX. Pt.1.188] PERG

COPPER COINS OF AKBAR.

1880. ] C. J. Rodgers—Copper Coins of Akbar. 218

Copper Ooins of Akbar. By Cuas. J. Roparrs, Amritsar.

(With two Plates.)

In this paper I propose first to make a list of the coins I have drawn

in the two plates accompanying this paper and secondly to offer a few

remarks which seem to suggest themselves from a study of the inscriptions

on the coins,

No. Wt. in gers.

1 108 Obv. Do tinke t Akbar Shahi. A

Rev. Zarb i Agrah, (Shahrewar ?) 50 Llahe.

9 109 Obv. Do tanke t Akhbar Shahi. ;

Rev. Zarb i Agrah, Azr 46 Llaht.

3 59 Obv.. Yak tdnke t Akbar Shaht.

Rev. Zarb i Lahor (?) 46 Llahe.

Obv. Dam.

a 76 Rev. 33 Llahi.

5 396 Obv. Zarb ) Bulis 2 Narnol,

Rev. Vv san i Nuhsad wa shast, 963.

G 318 Obv. Zarb d Fulis i dar us saltanat, Ahmadabéd.

Rev. Ev san i Nuhsad wa hashtad wa shash.

Obyv. Zarb i Fulis i Dehli.

Rev. Nuhsad wa hashtad wa yak.

Obv. Zarb i Lulis it Dir us saltanat, Kathpur.

Rev. Lv san i nuhsad wa hashtad wa nuh, 989.

Obv. Fults i Dar us saltanat Ldhor.

Rev. F% san i nuhsad wa hashtéad wa haft, 987.

Obv. Zarb i Fulis i Hissar Firozah.

Rev. FY san i nuhsad wa nawad wa shash, 996.

Oby. Fulisi Dar ul Khildfat, Lakhnau.

Rev. £7 san i nuhsad wa hashtad wa nuh, 989.

Obv. Urdi Zafarfarin.

Rev. Zarb ¢.Fulis. Alif = 1000 A. H.

Oby. Zarb i Fults « Lahore.

Rev. Harwardin, 39 Llahi.

Obv. Zarb i Fults ¢ Multan.

Rev. Urd i bihisht, 41 Llahi

Obv. Zarb i Llahabas.

Rev. San 2, 86 Llahd.

Obv. Zarb i Lulis i Dehli.

Rev. Farwardin, 38 Llaht.

Obyv. Zarb i Fults i Urdu 2.

Rev. Zafarfarin, 42 Llahe.

Obyv. Zarb i (Gobi)ndpur, Sikka i Akbar Shahv.

Rev. Urd i Bihisht, 46 Llahi. ; :

Oby. Dokdanié ? or Doginw ? Sikha i Akbar Shahi.

Rev. Urd i Bihisht, 44 Llahi.

18 327

19 315

—

(Ju)

—

(P9590 mB oS nn ssn sn aeons ees ee se i essa aso een a een aeee=g=:=SaOeeenNn cee eee

214 C. J. Rodgers—Oopper Coins of Akbar. [No. 4,

No. Wt. in grs.

te eee

91 995 Obyv. Zarb i Luliis t Lahor.

Rev. Shahrewar, 43 Llaht.

fs ea

93 37 Obv. Zarb i Fulis i Narnol.

a Rev. Nuhsad wa shast wa nuh.

Obv. Fulus i Kabul.

a4 1, Rev. San, 33 Llaht.

a Obv. FPulis.

ZS aly Rev. Urdu zafarfarin.

26 140 § Obv- Zarb i Dar ul Khildfat, A’grah.

de Rev. FV san i nuhsad wa shast wa.

} Oby. Damrz.

HE et tev. 83 Llaht,

28 625-5 Oby. Zarb i Dehli, Sikka t Akbar Shaht.

Rev. Mahi zt, 43 Llaht.

28a. The space between the two lines shows the thickness of No. 28.

It will be at once seen that each of these coins with the exception of

No. 26, has its own designation upon it. Thus Nos. 1 and 2 are called

do ténke pieces; No. 8 is a yak tanke piece. No.4 is a dam. Nos.

5—17 inclusive and Nos. 22—25 inclusive are fulis pieces. No. 27, isa damrv.

Nos. 18, 19 and 28 are called Sikhkai Akbar Shaht. The term fulus is

applied to coins varying from 37 to 826 grains, one struck at Kabul weigh-

ing 149. The word falas in Arabic means want, indigence, hence fals or

fils, a small coin, an obolus, money given to relieve poverty, or small change

or copper, as we say in English.* #wlus is the plural of fals. The first

coin I have seen with fulés upon it is dated 946 A. H. It is evident that _

a term used so loosely as is this one could never have been brought for-

ward in accounts or revenue statements.

Again the sikka has three weights 625°5 grains and 327 and 315 grs.

T have three which I have not figured which weigh little more than 37

grains each. Hence sekka could not well be used as a definite value.

We have left the dam, damri and tdnke. We know that the last of

these was a name applied to coins from the time of Mahmtd of Ghazni.

We know also that ¢dnkes were of two kinds, silver and copper. ‘The

weights of ¢dkes varied as did also their values. The takes of Sikandar

Lodi were of different mixtures of silver and copper. Sometimes they

contained only a little more than a grain and a half of silver in each,

sometimes as much as eight grains and sometimes as much as sixteen,

seventeen or even thirty-two. Hence it is evident that such coins could

* [This derivation is doubtful. For fa/s signifies a fish scale as well as a copper

coin. Ep,]

1889. ] C. J. Rodgers—Copper Coins of Akbar. 215

not be used in revenue returns. It became incumbent on Akbar, therefore,

when he made a demand from his ministers for revenue returns to fix

astandard. The yak tinkei Ahbar Shaht seems to be such a standard

value. In the Ain z Akbar’ we are told that the ddim was a coin of

the value of five ¢dénkes. And further we are told that there were forty

dams to the rupee. Hence we may judge that there were 200 ténkes to

the rupee. Now the total revenues of Akbar are put down by Nizim-uddin

at 640,00,00,000 ténkes. This at the rate of 200 to the rupee would be

equal to 3,20,00,000 rupees or £3,200,000.

Now in our list of coins we have a dém which weighs only 76 grains.

And Abil Fazl gives Akbar’s revenues as 5,67,63,83,383 ddms. Now

if a coin of 59 grains is valued at 200 to the rupee, a coin of 76 grains

would be worth about 160 to the rupee. According to this account Abtl

Fazl’s statement stands at about 3 krors 54 lacs of rupees or £3,540,000.

These statements are small compared with those arrived at by Thomas

who makes the first equal to 32 millions and the latter to 16 millions, a

discrepancy rather startling. And the magnitude of the sums is somewhat

appalling. For when we turn to the prices of the produce of the land we

are astonished to find that wheat sold for two maunds per rupee, barley at

four maunds, mutton at about a fortieth of a rupee per Ib. And we must

remember that nearly all Akbar’s revenues were from land.

Now if things sold so cheaply there must have been a vast amount of

land under cultivation, in order to realize a revenue of £32,000,000, which

is only a fractional part of the value of the whole of the crops. And India

in those days must have been an enormously rich country, for Akbar had

only a fraction of it in hand.

Thomas in his calculations does not give one coin of Akbar’s. He

gives statements from contemporary writers. These men were often wrong.

Certainly five yak tanke pieces of 59 grains could not be equal to the dam

of 76 grains.*

Akbar’s copper coins seem to follow the copper coins of the Stiri dynas-

ty. Sher Shah put an end to a mixed currency. But on no one of Sher

Sh4h’s copper coins have I as yet been able to find a coin-name,

Abitl Fazl’s statement is for the year 1003 A. H. or Akbar’s 40th year

and Nizdm-uddin’s is for 1002 or for his 39th year. The dam I figure is

for the 33rd year and the yak tdnke piece is for the 46th year. It is quite

possible that these values were those the authors had in view.

I leave this part of the subject. It is one of great importance and one

on which authorities differ widely. If Akbar out of the portion of India

which he conquered could realize three hundred years ago 32 millions

sterling, he in fact realized more than the English Goverument of India

now does. For if we take away from the revenue all the extra sources

* See note on page 191.

216 C. J. Rodgers—Copper Coins of Akbar. [No. 4,_

which have accrued to it since the time of Akbar we leave a much smaller

amount for land revenue simple than that realized by the third Mogul. I

strongly suspect that the whole of these returns are paper sums which were

never realized.

Let us now look at some other features in the coins :—the mint towns

claim a word. They are A’grah, Lahor, Narnol, Ahmadabad, Dehli, Fath-

pwr, Hissar Firozah, Lakhnau, Urdu Zafarfarin, Multan, Ilahabds, Go-

bindpur, Doganw (?), Attak Banaras, Kabul, in all sixteen mints. I

have in my cabinet some half dozen to-me-illegible mints more of Akbar.

In the Lahore Museum is a great heap of Akbar’s large copper fulis, as

yet unarranged.

Narnol is not given in Thomas, neither is Fathptr or Dogaénw or

Gobindptr. Fathpir is Fathptir Sikri near Agrah. It rejoices in the title

of Dar us Saltanat on both gold and silver coins of Akbar. I have one rupee

of Shahjahan struck at the same place. Attak Banaras is undoubtedly

Attock on the Indus; for interesting remarks on this place I must refer

the reader to General Cunningham’s Archeological Survey Report, Vol. II,

pp. 98, 94.

The years and months deserve notice. No sooner had Akbar pro-

claimed the change in the year than he began to strike coins according to

his new system. The coins of the year 30 Ilahi are very rare indeed. I

have two rupees of that year but no copper coins, (This was the year of

the change.) Akbar reverted to Kalimah rupees after this. His square

rupees with alif (= in Arabic 1000) are somewhat common. ‘They all have

the Kalimah on them. TI have two square rupees of 1000 and 1001, with

the date in figures, and with the Kalimah on them. The months also figure

on the coins. Thus we have Shahrewar, Azr, Furwardin, Urd i Bihisht,

Amr Dédd, and Zi, or six months out of the twelve on the few copper coins

here put forward. In rupees I have all the months. 1 am going to try

to complete one year, having already of some years four months. I sup-

pose the dies used must have needed constant replacing. Some of them were

very sharp and deep and would soon be the worse for wear.

Of some places I have only figured one coin. I have several of most of

them. Thus of Narnol I have four and five of 963, and one of an illegible mint

of 966. The whole of the 50 years of Akbar’s reign are I believe obtain-

able in all the metals, gold, silver and copper. JI have every year in rupees,

except 965. During the last five years I have come across many mohurs

of different years. Some of these are of rare beauty. Systematic research

ought to bring these to light. The British Museum has dirhams of the

Khalifahs which go year by year from the commencement of their minting

to the time when they ceased striking. And what makes these series the

more interesting is the fact that each mint is thus represented year by

year, sometimes for nearly a hundred consecutive years. In India, one

1880.] C. J. Rodgers—Copper Coins of Akbar. 217

object to be had in view is a complete series of coins of all the Sultans

whether Pathan or Mogul, and of the Maharajahs and Rajahs. Another

object should be series of local mints. Thus Lahore, from the time of

Mahmiid of Gazni to that of the latter Moguls, was a very famous mint

town. But in the museum of that city no attempt has been made to

secure complete series of Lahore coins. Those of the early Moguls are of

great beauty and deserve to be gathered. The large mohurs and square

rupees of Jahangir struck at Lahore are most especially worthy of notice.

Of course the price of such coins would amount to a large sum. But if a

museum is worthy of being kept up, surely the things in it should be worth

looking at. The coins in the Lahore Museum are now being catalogued,

and when the catalogue is issued, the deficiencies and redundancies of the

collection will be seen at once, It is to be hoped that when the deficien-

cies are made manifest, some attempt will be made to make them good.

For coins Nos. 1 and 3, I am indebted to Dav. Ross, Esq., Traffic

Manager, Scinde, Punjab and Dehli Railways for permission to make copies

of them. For permission to draw No. 28, I am indebted to Mr. Ibbettson,

C. 8. of Kurnal.

With respect to the fwlis coins I may add that these are probably the

the coins of which Bernier says that Aurungzib had bags of 1000 peyssas

ready for distribution. In a loose fashion the term dam seems also to have

been given to the large fwlus pieces. And generally we see that with re-

spect to Akbar’s copper coins there was a want of definiteness which pre-

cludes the possibility of arriving at exactness with respect to his revenues.

For we must always remember that copper was the standard of value in

Akbav’s time.

Note.—There is some confusion in the names of the copper coinage of the Hast India

Company. Accounts are kept in rupees, annas and pies. There are 12 pies to an

anna. But on the quarter anna we have in Persian distinctly (s ly “J onepie. Ac-

cording to this therefore there are only four pies in an anna. The coin we call a

pie has on it in Persian cs! eds suls pat, the third part of a pie. If the accounts

of the Company had been kept in pies only, there would have been tremendous con-

fusion until the value of the pie had been fixed.

The modern pice weighs about 100 grains. Hence a rupee is worth about 6400

grains. If a dam weighed 320 grains and a rupee were worth forty ddéms then in

Akbar's time a rupee represented 12,800 grains. But if also the ddém weighed 80 grains

only, and there were 160 of them, the same result is arrived at. Now nearly the same

result is arrived at with reckoning the rupee to be worth 200 tankes at 60 grains each.

If the relative values of silver and copper were the same in Akbar’s time as now,

then taking our coins the ¢déxke and dém at 60 and 80 grains we have 106 and 80 to

the rupee respectively. Taking these values, which are probably the correct ones, the

revenues of Akbar according to Nizim-uddin and Abiil Fazl are £6,000,000 and

£7,095000 respectively.

—S— Eee eee

CONTENTS

OF THE

JOURNAL, Pr. I, For 1879.

Jo 1.—Rivett-Carnac, Prehistoric Remains in Central India.—

Rivett-Carnac. The Snake Symbol in India, especially in con-

nection with the worship of Siva—Pratapa ChandraGhosha

Note on the articles exhibited by Mr. Rivett-Carnac.—G rierson,

Some Further Notes on Kalidasa.

Jo. 2.—Irvine, The Bangash Nawabs of Farrukhabéd—A Chronicle,

(1718—1857).—G ro wse, The Sect of the Pran-nathis.

fo. 3.—T em ple, Rough Notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes

about Kandahar.—Brajanatha Bandyopadhyaya, Hamir

Rasa, or a History of Hamir, prince of Ranthambor.

lo. 4.—Barbe, Pali Derivations in Burmese.—Peal, A peculiarity of

the river names in Asam and some of the adjoining countries.—

Growse, Bulandshahr Antiquities —Rajendralala Mitra’s

Note to the above.—Rodg ers, Copper Coins of the old Maharajas

of Kashmir—Rodgers, The Copper Coins of the Sultans of Kash-

mir.—S mith, Observations on some Chandel Antiquities.

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XVII (1843

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to XXII (1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XXVI,

XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols. XXXIII to XLVIIL, (1864

to 1879).

Asiatic Researches, from Vols. VI to XI and Vols. XVII to XX,

GAIN GG cro odou soo ond oon NG OO0GbOa nds GoocpobdD os 4o556

Dittorditbo Mian des ci.75 Usteeccrs steversisvcie cis eect pitas ters eae eee Noi

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in Arabic, ania, ae (Windle ete

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translatedinto English, with notes and

indexes, by H. Blochmann; MAG. sist a te sie eee

The Prosody of the Persians. —By H. Blochmann, M. A Se

The Tabaqat-i-Nagiri. ‘Translated by Major oe Raver ty,

TOs PS craeiiniac aoio DOCOMO OME AE OB OS 6 o4.54. Rae

Aborigines of India, by B. ee Hodgson, Esq., B. C. ‘S. Mp OLAO Sa95¢

BS. AS

TING 1D) xX

JOURNAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, Vou. XLIX,

Part J, ror 1880.

A FGHANS along the Route of the Tal

Chotiali Field Force, pp. 91, 141

Agni-mitra, coins of, pp. 21, 22, 26, 87, 88

Ahichhatra, the modern Ramanagar, an-

cient capital of North Panchala, p. 21

Akbar, copper coins of, p. 213

Anu-mitra, coins of, pp. 21, 26

Artesian wells at Pondicherry, p. 7

Astronomy of the Jains, pp. 107, 181

Ayu-mitra, coin of, pp. 27, 139,

Buapra-cuosa, coins of, pp. 21, 22,

24,88,89

Bhénu-mitra, coins of, pp. 21, 22, 25, 87,

Bhuila, site of the ancient city of Kapila-

vastu, p. 21; coins of the Mitras found

at, p. 21

Bhiimi-mitra, coins of, pp. 22, 26, 87

Branfill, Lt.-Col. B. R., Description of the

Great Siva Temple of Gangai Konda-

puram, p. 1.—Rude Megalithic Monu-

ments in North Arcot, p. 8

Buddhist Ruins, clay discs found in,

p. 127, clay seals found in, p. 185; cop-

per coins, p. 138

Cantrrvte, A. ©., Description of

coins of the Mitra dynasty, pp. 21, 87

Carnac, H. Rivett, coins of Mitra dynasty

belonging to, p. 21; memorandum on

coins of the Sunga dynasty, p. 87;

on clay discs, p. 127 ; note on Buddhist

copper coins, p. 138

Chenji or Sanji Kottai, a remarkable

precipitous bluff rock, pp. 5, 6

Chittamir, handsome sculptures at, p. 6

Civilization of Afghan Tribes, p. 163

Classification of Hindi roots, p. 33

Clay Discs found in Buddhist ruins,

Memorandum on, p. 127

Clay seals, Buddhist, p. 135

Coins of Kashmir, p. 11; of Chumba, p. 11;

of the Maharajas of Kangra, pp. 10—

15; of Rajas of Kabul, p. 11; of

Samanta Deva, pp. 11, 12; of Susarma

Chandra, p. 11, of Prithvi or Pithama,

p. 11, of the Sunga or Mitra dynasty,

pp. 21, 87; found at Ramanagar or

Ahichhatra, p. 21, at Bhuila, p. 21; of

Ghias-ud-din and Mu’az-ud-din bin

Sam, p. 28; supplementary to Thomas’

Chronicles of Pathan kings, pp. 81, 207 ;

Buddhist copper, p. 138; copper of

Akbar, p. 213

Coorgs, tombs of, p. 9

Cunningham, General A, list of Rajas of

Kangra, p. 12

Denrrvarton of Hindi roots, p. 33

Description of the Great Siva Temple of

Gangai Kondapuram, pp. 1—7; of

megalithic Monuments in North Arcot,

pp. 8—10

Dhruva-mitra, coins of, p. 28

Distribution of Afghan ‘Lribes, p, 141

220

Ganear Kondapuram, Great Siva

Temple at, p. 1

Ghias-ud-din, coins of, p. 28

Hospr Roots, collection of, pp. 83—81

History of Kashmir, Muhammadan period,

p.17

Hoernle, Dr. A. F. Rudolf, collection of

Hindi roots, p. 33

[wvo-scyratay princes of Kabul

and Kangra, p. 10, coins in the Lahore

Museum, p. 13

Indra-mitra, coins of, pp. 21, 23, 27, 89

Inscription, on Lanka Island, Wular

Lake, Kashmir, pp. 16, 20

Tralabanda Bapanattam, tomb-field at, p. 8

J AIN Astronomy, pp. 107, 181

Jalandhar, Rajas of, p. 10

Jarrett, Major H. 8., Note on an Inscrip-

tion on Lanka Island in Kashmir, p. 16

Jayamba Maharaja, founder of the Temple

at Mailam, p. 6

K astana-Kawnr-y-Amarau, a

goddess, carved stone dedicated to, p. 5

Kamuda Sena, coins of, p. 188

Kangra, fort and coins of, p, 10

Kashmir coins of, p. 11; inscription found

on Lanka Island, p. 16; Muhammadan

history of, p. 17

Kistvaen in North Arcot, p. 8.

Lanevacr of Afghan Tribes, p. 163

Lanka Island in Wular Lake, Kashmir,

Inscription found on, p. 16

Letters, Tamil, on old pottery, p. 9

ii! Greearaay conquers Kangra, p. 10

Megalithic Monuments in North Arcot,

pp. 8—10

Mitra dynasty, coins of, pp. 21, 87; list

of kings of, pp. 23, 28

Mw’az-ud-din bin Sam, coins of, p. 28

Muhammad Aazam, author of Persian

History of Kashmir, p. 17

Index.

Nacarxor, fortress conquered by

Mahmid, p. 10

North Arcot, megalithic Monuments in,

pp. 8—10

Pancwata ancient capital of, p. 21

Pathin kings, supplementary coins of,

pp. 81, 207

Perumukkal, stronghold near Tindiva-

nam, pp. 6, 7

Phaguni-mitra, coins of, pp. 21, 22, 26, 87,

88.

Pithama, see Prithvi

Polity of Afghan tribes, p. 149

Pondicherry, artesian wells at, p. 7

Ponniyar, stone circles at, p. 7

Prithvi, coins of, pp. 11, 14

Pushpapura or Pataliputra, capital of the

Mitra dynasty, p. 21

Rasx Tarangini, History of Kashmir,

p. 16

Rajds of Kangra, pp. 10—12; of Tri-

gartha, p. 10; of Jalandhar, p. 10, of

Kabul, p. 11

Ramadatta, coin of, p. 87

Ramalinga-pillai-salai, a remarkable col-

lege building, p. 2

Ramanagar or Ahichhatra, ancient capital

of North Panchala, p. 21

Rodgers, Chas. J., coins of the Maharajas

of Kangra, p. 10; Coins supplementary

to Thomas’ Chronicles of Pathan kings,

pp. 81, 207; copper coins of Akbar,

p. 213

Roots, Hindi, p. 33.

Svoranra Deva, coins of, pp. 11, 12,

Sanji-Kottai, see Chenji

Satya-mitra, coin of, p. 138

Saya-mitra, coin of, p. 139

Spindle Whorls, Memorandum on, p. 127

Stiilpnagel, C. R., Description of coins of

Ghids-ud-din and Mu’az-ud-din bin

Sam, p. 28

Sunga dynasty, coins of, pp. 21, 87

Strya-mitra, coins of, pp. 21, 24, 28, 87,

Stryapraphapti, pp. 107, 181

Susarma Chandra, coins of, p, 11

Indes. 221

Tan letters on a fragment of a bowl, V atsxxwa Deva, coing of, p. 188

jah (8)

Tanjore, great Temple at, p. 1

- Temple, Lieut. R. C., Remarks on the

Afghans found along the Route of the W ELLS, artesian near Pondicherry,

Tal Chotiali Field Force, pp. 91, 141 p.7

Terra Cottas, volcano-shaped, p. 137 Wralarhiinicen : ais

Thibaut, Dr. G., on the Suryaprajiiapti, Be ako ashi, pple), 20

pp. 107, 181

Tombs at Iralabanda in North Arcot,

| p. 8; of the Coorgs, p. 9 ee Ibad, of Kashmir, p. 16

Trichinopoli district, remarkable places Zayn-tl-Aabidin, Sultén of Kashmir,

in, pp. 1—7 pp. 16, 19

Trigartta, Rajas of, p. 10

21,/0-81,

NEW SERIES. VOL. XLIX.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Extra Number to Part I for 1380.

EDITED BY.

JHE PHILOLOGICAL SECRETARY,

Oey

| ) © The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

a4 within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

{ man or produced by nature.”—Siz WinL1am Jonzs,

*,* Commumications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat, Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, im Lon-

don, cure of Messrs. Tritbner and Co., 57 5 59, Ludgate Hill,

CALCUTTA:

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

PSIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1880. ee

trios (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—To Non-Subscribers Bs.2.

“ Price in England, 4 Shillings.

CONTENTS.

An Introduction to the Maithili Language of North Bihér con-

taining a Grammar, Chresomathy and Vocabulary.—By Groner

A. GRIERSON, B. C. Snyuce 000088 coc cee Cec eaoeoe OR Cen see eee @06 080 ece coeces

AN INTRODUCTION

TO THE

MAITHILI LANGUAGE

NORTH BIHAR

CONTAINING

A GRAMMAR, CHRESTOMATHY & VOCABULARY.

GEORGE A. GRIERSON, B.C. §.

PART I.

GRAMMAR.

EXTRA NUMBER TO JOURNAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY, BENGAL,

PART I. FOR 1880,

Sa coe —

Calcutta:

J. N. BANERJEE & SON, 119, OLD BOYTAKHANNA BAZAR ROAD.

PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET.

1881,

Owing to the delay in printing which has been found

unavoidable, it has been thought advisable to issue the

Grammar separately. The Chrestomathy and the Vocabulary

are in the press and will be issued shortly.

LN LARA LA LALA LN KILN LN TAN EM OO ED

Pl el

oe)

§ 15.

§ 16.

§ 17.

§ 18.

§ 19.

§ 20.

§ 21.

§ 22,

§ 23.

§ 24.

al SO eo So

be So ws

TABLE OF CONTENTS. |

InrRoDUCTION.

PART I.

Cuapter [.—Tur ALPraABer.

The three alphabets in use. The Deva-Nagri Alphabet.

The Maithili Alphabet.

The Kayathi Alphabet.

Comparative Table of Alphabets.

Vowels. aa une

The Vowel a. ns es

Quiescent Vowels, a, 7, and wv, when final.

The Vowel @ quiescent and medial.

Graphic representation of quiescent Vowels.

Pronunciation of a.

Anundsika and Anusvara. oy Se

Consonants.

Pronunciation of na.

Pronunciation of sha.

Pronunciation of ha.

PART II.

NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, & PRONOUNS.

Cuarter [I.—Grnour, Numeper, anp Case,

Gender and Number.

The eight cases.

The Nominative case.

The Accusative case.

The Instrumental case.

The Dative case.

The Ablative case.

The Genitive case.

The Locative case. mn

The Vocative case. Use of Interjections. 500

Page.

wae)

Cuaptrer I1].—Numper.

Formation of the Plural of nouns

Of Pronouns.

Forms shown in this Grammar.

Cuapter IV.—Derciension or Novns.

Declension.

Three classes of nouns.

Nena.

Katha.

Phal.

Péni.

Neni.

Raghis. Fey

CHAPTER V.—ADJECTIVES.

Changes owing to Gender. es

Rules for formation of feminine of Adjedtives & Nouns.

What words are liable to changes according to Gender,

Ka, Ke, & Ket

A final short vowel in Maithili is equivalent to a final long

vowel in High Hindi.

Prakrit-derived terminations in Maithili bia High Hindi.

Formation of Feminines of Prakrit-derived terminations. ...

Prakrit-derived words ending in a.

Samskrit-derived words ending in a.

Prakrit-derived words ending in é.

Prakrit-derived words signifying colour.

Samskrit-derived words ending in 7, and z.

Samskrit-derived words ending in van.

Nomina agentis ending in ak.

Gerundials and Past Participles Passive.

Miscellaneous forms.

Irregular forms.

CoMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

Comparative.

Superlative.

Forms borrowed from Samskrit,

a Oa mann eos

(ut)

Cuaprer VI.—Pronovwn.

Peculiarities of declension of Pronouns.

The Inflected base. ie cee ose

Points of discrepancy between the declensions of Nouns and

Pronouns. ni

Gender and Number of Pronouns.

Vocative case of Pronouns.

PrersonaL Pronovns.

The six kinds of Personal Pronouns. ...

Honorific forms. ae

List of Personal Pronominal forms. ...

Ham.

Mé.

Toh

Ahi and Ap’ne.

Ap nal n.

LI’. Non-Honorifie.

I’, Wonorific.

O, Non-Honorific.

O. Honorifie.

CORRELATIVE Pronotns.

The relative Pronoun.

Je. Non-Honorifie.

Je. Honorifie.

Se. Non-Honorifie.

Se. Honorific.

{NTERROGATIVE Pronouns.

Ke. Non-Honorifie. . bee en

Ke. Honorifie.

IG,

Kon.

94.

95.

96.

98.

99.

§ 100.

Car LO? CHD LA EL COD.

§ 101.

§ 102,

§ 103.

§ 104.

§ 105.

§ 106.

§ 107.

§ 108,

97.

COs. 9)

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

Keo. oes

KichW’, any thing: and Kichh’, something.

ADJECTIVE Pronowtns.

L'. Adjectival.

O, Adjectival. 34

Other Pronominal forms used Adjectivally.

Examples.

Derivative Pronominal forms.

Cuapter Vil.— Numerats.

Cardinals.

Ordinals.

Fractional Numbers.

Aggregate Numbers.

PART ITI.

THE VERB.

Cuaprrer VITI.—Preniminary.

Luxuriance of Verbal forms. ‘

Active, Neuter, and Passive Verbs. ...

Moods.

Tenses.

Personal Forms.

Gender of the Verb. ibs :

Eight forms in Transitive Verbs for each person.

Honorific forms.

Their names.

The Intransitive verb. Sa

Formation of the Transitive verb. ...

The Infinitive.

The Present Participle.

The Past Participle.

Formation of Tenses.

Page.

DP 2 8? 6) MD

The Verb Personal. are

Its various Roots.

Tur AUXILIARY VERB.

Present Tense.

Another form of the Present.

Note on the above.

Imperfect Tense.

Another form of the Imperfect.

Note on the above.

Remaining forms of the Auxiliary sions

Cuarter [X.—THe Transitive Vers.

Preliminary.

Formation of the Prospective Conditional.

Formation of Future.

The Second Form of the Future.

Suggestion.

Formation of the Imperative.

Formation of the Retrospective Conditional.

Formation of the Present and Imperfect.

Formation of the Past Tense.

Formation of the first Conjugational form of és iets

Formation of the second Conjugational form of the Perfect.

Formation of the Pluperfect.

Order of Tenses observed.

Consua@ation or dekhab, to see.

Principal Parts.

Prospective Conditional.

Future.

Imperative.

Retrospective Conditional.

Present.

Imperfect.

Past.

CO OW? CONN UMM

mo” tn

VAR NOH OI’ EO OO’ MD_ LOM O_O

139.

140.

141.

142.

145.

144.

145.

146.

147.

148.

149.

150.

151.

152.

153.

154.

155.

156-

157.

158.

159.

160.

161.

182.

(ivies)

Perfect. First Conjugational form.

Second Conjugational form.

Pluperfect. aes

Declinable Participles.

Indeclinable Participles.

Precative or Respectful forms.

Infinitive or Verbal Noun.

Carrer X.—TuHE InrRANSITIVE VERB.

Tense forms of the 2nd Conjugational Form.

Points of difference between Transitive and Intransitive verbs.

Shortening of the long penultimate of certain verbs.

CoNJUGATION OF THE VERB siéfab, to sleep.

Principal Parts.

Prospective Conditional.

Future.

Imperative. eee eee

= Retrospective Conditional.

Present. ase aes

Imperfect.

Past.

Perfect.

Pluperfect.

Declinable Participles.

Indeclinable Participles.

Precative, or Respectful forms.

Infinitive, or Verbal Noun.

Cuaprer XJI.—OBSERVATIONS ON THE FoREGOING.

The two Conjugational Forms.

Conjugational Terminations. ae =e

Cuarrer XII.—VeErzps wire Roots ENDING IN, VOWELS.

Preliminary.

Stab, to sew.

Paéb, te obtain.

LM KN 6a OIL

TAA HA AAA MN MME

168.

169.

170.

ily(als

172.

173.

174,

175.

176.

ILA

178.

179.

180.

181.

182.

183.

184.

185.

186.

187.

188.

189,

190.

191,

192.

193.

194.

195.

196.

197.

Carivan on)

Craptrer XITI.—Tne Passtve Vorce.

Formation of the Passive.

Its Conjugation.

Jaeéb, to go.

CHarter XIV.—Irrecubar Verss.

List of Irregular Verbs.

Karab, to do.

A’'éb, to come.

Deb, to give.

Leb, to take.

Hoéb, to become.

Craprer XV.—AcTIVE AND Causal VERBS.

Formation of Active and Causal Verbs from Neuter Verbs.

General Rule. Nae

Monosyllabiec roots containing a short Vowel.

Double Actives and Causals.

Neuter Verbs containing a short Vowel.

Irregular Forms. ,

Duplicate forms of Aahab.

Cuarrer XVI.—Compounp Vurss.

Preliminary.

Intensives, first form.

Intensives, second form.

Potentials.

Completives.

The three forms of the Verbal Noun.

Desideratives.

Permissives.

Acquisitives.

Frequentatives

Inceptives.

Continuatives.

Staticals.

Other Compound Verbs.

( viii )

Page-

PART IV.

INDECLINABLES.

Cuarrer XVII—Apverss, PRepostrions AND ConJUNCTIONS.

§ 198. Preliminary. 38 ss. 408

§ 199. Adverbs of Time. nad Berrian LI

§ 200. Adverbs of Place. Ets seo LOD

§ 201. Adverbs of Manner. see vast ODS

§ 202. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation, a seo LO

§ 203. Compound Adverbs. oy ses =) 00s

§ 204. Adverbs taking case signs. as se Oe

§ 205. Particles of Emphasis. aes cee EE

§ 206. Prepositions. ns eee shinnats

§ 207. Conjunctions. sai emnacdUs

ADDENDA ET CoRRIGENDA. ase sos web

APPENDIX I.

Comparative Table of Alphabets.

Example showing the use of the three Alphabets.

APPENDIX II.

The Parable of the Prodigal Son, in Hindi, Maithili and Bangali.

INTRODUCTION.

Iy submitting the following somewhat full Grammar of the Maithili

dialect to the Society, I wish to explain the sources of my information.

They may be divided into two classes.

1st.—Forms obtained by translating into Maithilf.

2nd.—-Forms obtained by translating from Maithili.

The first I obtained as follows. I printed paradigms of all the forms in

Hindi and Samskrit Grammar and circulated them as widely as possible

amongst the Pandits, Village School Masters and educated Native Gentlemen

of Northern Mithila, with directions to give the exact translation of each of

these forms in their own native language.

I was enabled in this way, to collect some fifty most useful books of

forms, supplied by representatives of all classes of society, from the village

guru, who knew little more than the herd-boys he taught, to the most

learned Pandits of Mithila. I am glad to say that the utmost interest was

taken in my design, for the people are proud of their language and were

pleased at the idea of its being made a polite one, by obtaining the honour

of print. I shall have more to say on this point bye and bye. These books

of paradigms formed the basis of this Grammar. 'They were compared with

each other; and where one was found wanting, another supplied the deficiency.

At the same time, it must not be imagined that they showed many mutual

discrepancies: on the contrary, considering the many varied sources from

which they were derived, their unanimity was wonderful and justifies me in '

hoping that what I here publish will be found fairly accurate.

With regard to the forms obtained by translating from Maithili, they

were obtained in various ways. In cutcherry I collected myself a large

number of words from the mouths of the witnesses who came in from a

distance. These I found very useful in checking the books of forms above

referred to. I also collected a number of country songs, which afforded in-

valuable materials when properly sifted.

From these two sources, aided by the practical knowledge possessed by

myself and one or two native friends, the following grammar has been

compiled. I wish I could believe that it is thoroughly accurate; all I

can say is that we have done our best to make it as accurate as possible.

Our greatest difficulty has been experienced from the luxuriance of the

language. The verb, especially, much tried our patience. Maithili is a

bolt in the literal sense of the word. Beyond a History of MKyishna and

2 INTRODUCTION.

the songs of Vidyépati. Thakur, I know of no literary work which it pos-

sesses. It is emphatically a spoken language. ‘There is no standard to

which it can be referred, and hence no form can be put aside as vulgar

orimpure. It is hoped, not only by myself, that the publication of a

treatise like the present will tend to fix a standard and to foster a literature

which might easily arise in so racy and fluent a language.

For Maithilf 7s a language and not adialect. It is the custom to look

upon it as an uncouth dialect of untaught villagers, but it is in reality the

native language of more than seven and a quarter* millions of people, of

whom, as will be borne out by every official having experience of North

Bihar, at least five millions can neither speak nor understand either Hindi,

or U'rdai without the greatest difficulty. It differs from both Hindf and

Bangali, both in Vocabulary and in Grammar, and is as much a distinct

language from either of them as Maréth{ or Uriyé. It isa country with its

own traditions, its own poets, and its own pride in everything belonging to

itself.

For this reason, I hope that this grammar may be found useful

to the officials who are brought into every day contact with the country,

and that the too often, I fear, contemptuous ignorance exhibited of the

gdowdri, may be superseded by a desire to learn a language, which cannot

fail to be useful to them, and the acquirement of which is now made easier.

Maithili is spoken by all the Hindtés and Muhammadans, who in-

habit the great plain which is bounded on the North and South by the

Himalayas and the Ganges, and on the East and West by the Kosi and

Gandak respectively. It is thus the native language, not only of the 72

millions of North Bihar, but also of the wnnumbered millions of the Nepal

Tarai, bordering on the districts of Champéran, Tirhut and Bhagalpér. It

has various dialects, differing slightly from each other, the two extremes

being that of Champaran on the west, which approaches the language of

Chapra, and that of Bhagalptr on the east which contains a few forms tend-

ing towards Bangali. 'The dialect which I have adopted as a standard is

that of the Madhubani Sub-division, which is centrally situated, and which

is admitted by all Brahmans to be the head-quarters of Mithila. I have

a practical and personal knowledge of the dialects of North Bhagalpdér,

* POPULATION oF—

Champédran es bie ws 500 506 inn ws 14,40,815

Tirhut an oe ah ee ae Pe a0 43,84,706

Begu Sarai Sub-Division of Munger ann ate see 6,37,725

Supaul is » Bhagalptr ee ag aon 5,65,747

Madhaiptré ,, 3 A se ao wee 3,91,086

ToraL ts '73,20,079

INTRODUCTION. 3

Darbhanga (including Madhubani) and Muzaffarpdér districts. The dialect

of Champaran I only know through writings, and through information

acquired from natives of that district whom I have met.

As to the character of the language, it is comparatively free from ad-

mixture with foreign words. It abounds in words of Hindi origin, is composed

mainly of words derived through Prakrit from Samskrit, and at the same time

borrows freely from Samskrit itself. Even the Musalmans, while of course

using more Arabic and Persian words than the Hindis, abstain from using

them to anything like the extent to which their U'rdi speaking brethren

of the north-west affect them, not excepting their sacred hymns connected

with their religion. I give a few examples of these in the Appendix, and

it will be noticed how extremely free they are, for their subject, from foreign

words.

In conclusion, I have only to put on record my indebtedness to Mr.

Etherington’s excellent Hindi grammar. I have had it constantly by my

side, and I have made its arrangement the skeleton which I clothed with

Maithili forms. In some paragraphs I have actually used Mr. Etherington’s

language ; and I offer no excuse for doing so, as it would be impossible for

me to express the subject-matter in clearer language, or in fewer words.

MAITHILE GRAMMAR.

ENA aoa

PART I.

CHAPTER I.

THE ALPHABET.

§ 1. The Alphabets in use in Mithila are three.—The Deva-nagari, the

Maithili, and the Kayathi. The first is familiar to every reader of this, and

need not be described here. It is not much used in common life, and seldom

even in manuscripts.

§ 2. The Maithili is the character used by the Maithil Brahmans,

both in the affairs of common life, and in their sacred books. Few of the

Brahmans, who are not professed pandits, can read the Deva-nagari charac-

ter. The Maithili character is also affected by Maithil Kayasthas, who

pretend to be better educated than their fellows. The Maithili character

is nearly the same as Bangali, differing only in one or two letters.

§ 3. The Kayathi character is that in general use throughout

Mithila by all educated persons who are not Brahmans. Jt is a corruption

of the Deva-nagari, and can be written much faster than the latter, or even

than shikasta U'rdi. ‘There is a clerk in my office in Madhubani, who can

write excellent Kayathi much quicker than even the most practised of the

old “ Persian” muharrirs. Besides the speed with which it can be written, it

has the advantage of thorough legibility. It is being gradually introduced

by Government into official documents and with considerable success, in spite

of the opposition of the old Persian School of Government officials.

§ 4. <A lithographed comparative table, giving specimens of these three

alphabets, will be found at the end of this grammayr.

Pronunciation.

(a.) Vowels.

§ 5. The vowels should be pronounced as in Samskrit, with the fol-

lowing exceptions.

§ 6. The pronunciation of the vowel 4 @ is peculiar. It is not so

broad as that of the corresponding vowel in Bengali, but on the other hand

it is broader than that of the neutral vowel in High Hindi. I know of no

6 ALPHABET. [S§ 7.10.

sound exactly equivalent to it in any language with which I am acquainted.

The best way of describing it is by saying that it is half way between the

o in not, and the w in nut, when preceded by a hard guttural check, and fol-

lowed by a soft labial check. It thus may be said to be the w in cud,

rounded, or the o in cob, neutralized.

§ 7. In words of more than one syllable—the short vowels 3 a,

7, and J w, when final and preceded by consonants are not pronounced in

prose and conversation. This is absolute in the case of 4 a. E.g., wa,

is pronounced phal, and not phala. With respect to ¥7 and 3 wu, the sound

of the vowel, when written, does not entirely disappear. It however is

pronounced very slightly indeed, being little more than an aspirate with the

colour (timbre, tonfarbe ) of the vowel.* When % 7 and 3 wu are thus pro-

nounced, I shall throughout this grammar represent them (in transliteration)

by a simple apostrophe, and not by @ or w, in order to prevent a tendency

to mispronunciation. E.g. ¥fes, will be written hank’. It must be

remembered however that this apostrophe must, in pronunciation, be coloured

by the omitted vowel. Thus the pronunciation of the apostrophe in héinh’,

for Efe, is very different from that of the apostrophe in ah’ for we. In

the first it is coloured by the tone of the palatal vowel ¢, while in the second

it is coloured by the tone of the labial vowel w. This final apostrophe can

be nasalized by anunasika. Hug. afé nahn.

As in High Hindi, 4 a, when unaccented and falling between two

consonants, is frequently omitted in pronunciation in prose and conver-

sation. ‘This is especially noticeable in the conjugations of verbs. Through-

out this grammar, I shall represent this unpronounced, unaccented ¥ a, in

transliteration, by an apostrophe, ’, which in this case will have a slight

colour of the tone of the guttural vowel 3 a. E.g. @afat, dekh’liat.

§ 8. It will thus be seen that I shall employ this apostrophe(’) to

represent three distinct colours of tone, a guttural colour, when medial and

representing a medial & a, and a palatal or labial colour, when final and

representing a final or nasalized final = 7 or Zw, respectively. And logi-

cally, I ought to represent the inert final 4 @ also by a guttural apostrophe,

but this is neither customary nor necessary and would only tend to confusion.

It is simpler to remember that medial apostrophe stands for guttural 4 a,

and that a final apostrophe or a final apostrophe nasalized, stands for a

palatal = @ or a labial & w, either simple or nasalized, respectively.

§9. ai is pronounced like the English word “I,” and ‘never, like 02.

It thus differs from 4 ay which has a broader sound. E.g. ea haib is pro-

nounced very differently from #44 hay b.

§10. (° )Anundsika is pronounced like the nasal sound in the French

word “bon”. 1¢ will, throughout this grammar, except when final after a

* A similar peculiarity is observed in Sindhi and Telugu.

§§ 11-13. ] ALPHABET. 7

short vowel which is not pronounced, be represented in transliteration by a

circumflex over the qualified vowel. Thus 3 will be represented by @, aT by @’,

& by 7%, & by 7, and so on. E.g. atfe ba’h’.. When final, after a short

vowel which is not pronounced, as explained in §7, it will be represented

by %. Thus, afe nahi.

Anusvéra(’) will only be used throughout this grammar as a compendium

seripturae for En, AH, UN, AN, or 4 m before another consonant of the

same class. Thus ¢@t instead get bundd. It will hence be represented

in transliteration by 2°, 7, n,n, or m, according to circumstances. This dis-

tinction between anunasika and anusvara is adopted in order to prevent any

misapprehension as to pronunciation.

(b). Consonants.

§ Hae we k, q@ kh, TY, a gh, S nv, a ch, ® chh, tT Ds mh, ST nt, ~ t,

ath sd,¢7r,cdh,grh,at, ath, ed, adh,an, tp, ph, 4b, a bh,

am, ay, <7, Al, av, Hs’, a s,andg h’ areusually pronounced as in Sams-

krit. As usual in modern A'ryan languages, 3 and q, and 4 and @q are fre-

quently confounded both in pronunciation and in writing. I shall endeavour

throughout this grammar to represent all 7 soundsby either 4 or 4, y

sounds by 4, b sounds by either ¥ or 4, and v and w sounds by q respectively.

It is not usual, however, to make these distinctions in writing.

§ 12. The pronounciation of wn is peculiar. The lingual nature of

its sound is much more marked than in the Samskrit of Western India. It

has more the sound of a muffled lingual 7 followed by a lingual n; e.g. trae

is pronounced almost like Rdbarn, the 7 in rn having a peculiar muffled

sound, impossible to describe in writing. #7 is occasionally substituted for

wm and is then pronounced as 2.

§ 18. 4sh,when standing alone and not compounded with another con-

sonant, is always pronounced as ahh. Thus 48 shashth “sixth” is pronounced

khashth. This pronunciation is universal: the vulgar even write sucha ¥ sh,

phonetically @ kh. In the compound consonant ¥ rsh, ¥ sh is also always

pronounced as @ kh; eg. ataaw dkarshan is pronounced dharkhan. A

similar pronunciation is optional in the compound ay lsh; e.g. the word

gay (Sams. loc. plur of yqaq) is pronounced either swvalshw or swvalkhu.

By some this @ £h sound of 4 sh is pronounced as a guttural breathing, and not

as a guttural check,—something, but not quite, like the Persian rd kh, or

the ch in loch. This pronunciation is, however, condemned by the best

pandits. The compound letter @ ksh is pronounced like = chchh, which is

occasionally written for it by the vulgar; e.g. q@at is so written, and is

pronounced as Lakshmt by purists, but is commonly written and pronounced

wandt Lachchh’mi. The compound ¥ shp is peculiar. It is pronounced

something like h/p; eg. 4 pushp “a flower” is pronounced puhfp.

GENDER, NUMBER, CASE. [S§ 14-19.

(0.0)

§ 14. The letter ¥ h, when compound with q y, becomes = hy,

which is pronounced in a peculiar way. If zh be taken to represent the

Persian 4 zh, the pronunciation of this compound can best be represented

by zhjy; eg. Are, fit to be accepted, is pronounced grazhjya, the final 4a

being retained in pronunciation, though usually inert, for the sake of

euphony.

PART IT.

NOUNS, ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

CHAPTER II.

PENDER, NumBeR AND (ASE.

§ 15. The noun has two Genders,—Masculine and Feminine. Words

derived direct from the Samskrit, which were originally neuter, become

masculine in Maithilt.

There are two numbers, the Singular, and the Plural.

§ 16. There are (counting the vocative) eight cases,—viz., Nominative

Accusative, Instrumental, Dative, Ablative, Genitive, Locative and Vocative.

§ 17. The nomryartve has one invariable form, which is the same

before all kinds and before all tenses of verbs. The vulgar, however, capri-

ciously add the termination 3=T wé or 4T & to all nominatives, especially to

those of proper names. E.g. at ghar or Feat gharud, a house ; wy Raghi

or Tat Raghud, a proper name: Fat nent or Afaat nenia, a girl.

§ 18. The accusarrvn is formed by adding the postposition % 4é to

the nominative. This postposition is however commonly dropped in writing

and conversation, when no ambiguity is hkely to arise. It is forbidden,

however, to drop this postposition in this way, inthe case of the pronouns of

the first and second persons, for which special forms are provided. Through-

out the ensuing paradigms, the termination is always given, but it must be

understood, that, except in the cases above mentioned, it can optionally be

discarded. In different parts of Mithila the postposition is written & he,

a ké, & kai, and ai k@. The oldest form, which is met with most

frequently in poetry, is # £@7, but the one most commonly used nowadays

is @ Ké.

§ 19. The rstrUMENTAL denotes the instrument, means, cause, or

agent by which a thing is done. It in no way corresponds to the so-called

agent in Hindi, which is used before the past tenses of transitive words. It

§§ 20—23 | CASE. 9

is usually formed by adding @ s@, of which @f sd is an occasional variety.

i sd is the poetical and older form. There is another form of the instrumental

made by the addition of the syllable v @. This is formed in two ways.

A. by the substitution of & é for the final vowel in,—

(1) all nouns ending in 3a, which is not pronounced; e.g. Ha phal,

Srutt, has for one of the forms of its instrumental we phalé.

(2) Allnouns ending in at 4, whether directly borrowed from Samskrit,

or from Prakritie sources. K.g. Hat katha, a saying, makes one of its

instrumental forms He kathé, and sat nend, a boy, similarly makes #4” nené.

B. In all other nouns by the simple addition of w é, before which a

final long vowel is shortened. Thus utft pani, water, becomes in one form

of the instrumental singular q1f#@ panié, and 42% betz, a daughter, similarly

becomes afeu betié.

§ 20. The Dative “is the case of the recipient or that form of the

noun which indicates that in which the object ofan action rests.” It is simi-

Jar in form to the Accusative, but the postposition & ke, % hé, & kUi or

ail ka’ is not liable to be dropped.

§ 21. The Axptatrive indicates separation or removal from. It is

formed by adding the postposition @ s@, of which €j sd is an occasional

variety. €tsd is the poetical and older form,

§ 22. The Grnrrive “ denotes connection generally, whether arising from

origin or possession.” Its sign is #%. An older form, but still in occasional

use, is #t ker. In the pronouns, too, the distinguishing termination of the

genitive is the letter <7. None of these three postpositions, #4, at ker or

<7, shows any symptom of being influenced by gender, as is the case with the

corresponding Hindi postpositions at kd, # ke and at ki. Although really

ending in an inherent short % a, this final vowel is not pronounced in prose

or in conversation, so that a &, AX ker and tr are usually pronounced as

if they were qk, Ht ker and x r. In order to prevent mispronunciation,

throughout the following paradigms, the postpositions #@ and < are written

as part of the qualifying word. Thus sata nenak, eat hamar, and not

aa a nena k, ea t ham r, which would be the more logical way of writing

them. But it must never be forgotten that # and < are postpositions and

have not yet been so amalgamated with the principal word, that the whole

forms one inflected base.

§ 23. The Locattve indicates the place in, or the time at which a thing

is done. It is formed usually by the postposition # mé, of which 4 m@ and

at mod are optional forms. Of these three forms, 4f md is the oldest and

is usually found in poetry. An old form of the Locative ended, like

the Samskrit, in te. It now, however, appears in only a few adverbial sen-

tences, such as qt qt ghare ghare, in every house.

10 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [ §§ 24—29.

§ 24. The VocaTrvE usually takes the same form as the Nominative.

In speaking to a person of lower rank or age, the termination aT vd or 314

is used as follows. 441 mend, a boy, becomes tt Waar raw nen’va. Fat

neni, a girl, becomes 4 Afaat gat nenia. wy Raghi, a proper name, becomes

at wqat raw Raghud.

The following interjections are used with the vocative.

(a.) With masculine inferiors,—or familiarly, tt rau, & re.

(b.) With masculine equals or superiors, At aw, ¥t hau, = he.

(c.) With feminine inferiors,—or familiarly, # gaz.

(d.) With feminine equals or superiors, = hai.

Cuapter ITT.

N NUMBER.

§ 25. The plural number of nouns in Maithili is simply formed by the

addition of a noun signifying multitude. Those most commonly used are aa

sabh and wafe sabah’ meaning all, and rafa lokani* meaning people. The

last is only used with animate objects. aa sabh and aafe sabah’ can be used

indifferently either before or after the qualified noun. Thus #at a#wH nend

sabhak, wat dafea nend sabvhik, aa Fata sabh nenak, eats sara sabah’

nenak and at stata vend lokanik are all possible forms of the genitive

plural of sat nena, a boy. atafa lokani be it observed, can only be used

after the qualified noun. In all cases, whatever be the order of the words,

the postposition deciding the case comes last.

§ 26. The same rules partially apply to pronouns: but, in addition to

the word signifying plurality, many of them have entirely new bases for their

plural forms.

§ 27. Throughout the following Paradigms, I shall generally only use

the word #¥ to designate the plural; but it must always be understood that

unless specially forbidden, aaf% sabah’ and atafa lokani can also be used.

CHAPTER IV.

PECLENSION OF Nouns,

§ 28. There is in Maithili really only one declension, but as the forms

of some classes of nouns vary slightly from each other before some of the

postpositions, it will be convenient to consider nouns in three classes.

§ 29. I. The first class will consist of all nouns ending in 41 4.

II. The second class will consist of all nouns ending in inherent % a,

when it is not pronounced.

III. The third class will consist of all other nouns.

The difference between these three classes will be noticed on comparison

of the Instrumental and Vocative singular.

* The final 7 in this word is pronounced.

§ 30] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 11

CLASS I.

ALL NOUNS ENDING IN Jt 4d.

§ 30. (1) Example of a Masculine noun ending in 47 4.

aat nend, a boy.

SINGULAR waqua Lk'vachan.

Nom. @at nend, a boy.

aat nend,

Acc. oe ; a boy.

aat a nend ke,

AA =

aq nene,

Tnst. Ree ane boy a boy.

aat & nend sd,

Dat. aat a nend ke, to a boy.

Abl. #at a nend sd, from a boy.

aware nendk,

Gen. 27. 8 ; of a boy.

AATRE nendker,

Loc. ata nend mé, in a boy.

EN y ;

Voc. <raaatrau nen’vd,O boy,(or respectfully At wat au nend.

PiuRAL qequa Bahuvachan.

Nom. @at aa’ nend sabh, boys.

= ¢

aat aa nend sabh,

NGG. 94. 5 ie BONS boys

aat aan’? nend sabh ke,

SN had ¢ ms

wal aa? nend sabhé,

Inst. 2°. i ; _ tby boys.

aqat Ga a nend sabh sda,

Dat Hat aaa’ nend sabh ké, to boys.

Abl. #at eat & nend sabh sa, from boys.

aat man’ nend sabhak,

Gen me a ; . of boys.

AAT BARE nend sabh’ ker,

Loc. dat aaa’ nend sabh mé, in boys.

EN re

UI AaaT Ba’ raw nen’va sabh,

aA SD ¢ oys

Al AAT Hy aw nend sabh,

Nom.

Acc.

Loc.

Voc.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [§3L

Other forms are @a Fat sabh nend, aati aafs nend sabah’, aafe Aart

sabal’ nena and Fat arafa nena lokant.

Other forms are @at qafen nena sabah’ ké, and Fat atafa RH nena

lokani ké.

Other forms are @at aafet nena sab’hié, Hat aafe A nena sabah’

s@, at aratau nend lok’nié and aat atafa a nend lokani sa.

Other forms are Hat aafe H nend sabahl’ hé and Aa arala H nena

lokant ké.

Other forms are aat aafe a nend sabah’ sé and Aat Arata &

nena lokant sa.

Other forms are #41 aafen nena sab’hik, Aart arvataa nena lokanik.

Other forms are @at aafe @ nena sabah’ mé and Fat arafa a nena

lokani mé.

ar Fat wate rau nend sabah’, A Fat Arata au nend lokani.

31. (2) Mxample of a feminine noun, ending in 41 4.

Hat kathd, a story.

SINGULAR waa Lk’ vachan.

aut hatha, a story.

Kat kathd,

Rata hathd ké,

aa hathé,

Rat a hatha sd,

(a story.

by a story.

aat a hatha ké, to a story.

aut @ kathé sd, from a story.

( wat hathak,

| weaaz hathdher, seg

Hata kathd mé, ona story.

@ Hut he kathd, O story.

§ 32. | DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 13

PruraL wequa Bahuvachan.

Nom. aut aa kathd sabh, stories.

wat aa hatha sabh,

Ace.

wat era hkathd sabh ke,

aut aa hkathd sabhé,

Inst g i ie ' by stories.

aat aa a hatha sabh sa,

Dat. RIT waa kathd sabh ké, to stories.

Abl. wat aa a kathé sabh sd, from stories.

aut aan kathé sabhak,

HAT MARL hathd sabl’ker,

Loc. wmutaaa kathd sabh mé, in stories.

Voc. aut aa he kathé sabh, O stories.

CLASS II.

ALL NOUNS ENDING IN INHERENT 3d, WHEN THIS LETTER

IS NOT PRONOUNCED.

stories.

Gen. of stories.

§ 32. (1) Example of amasculine noun, ending in ¥ a.

ma phal, a fruit.

SINGULAR waaqaa Lk’ vachan.

Nom. wa phal, a fruit.

ma phal

Acc. a % ' a fruit.

ma a phal ke,

met phalé

Seana ' by a fruit.

me a phal sa,

Dat. wat a phal ke, to a fruit.

Abl. 9 wa & phal sd, from a fruit.

maa phalak,

Gen. ne

MARL phal ker,

Loc. waa phal mé, in a fruit.

Voc. ua he phal, O fruit.

Inst.

bot a fruit.

14 DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

PLurAL qeqaa Bahuvachan.

Nom. wea aa phal sabh, fruit.

mat aa phal sabh,

Ace. } x fruit

me aaa a phal sabh ke,

wa aa phal sabhe,

i e i by fruit.

mea aaa a phal sabh sa,

Dat. waar a phal sabh ké, to fruit.

Abl. 9 qwaaa a phal sabh sa, from fruit.

wma aan phal sabhak,

Gen. } a

ma aaat phal sabh'ker,

Loc. wa aaa phal sabh mé, in fruit.

Voc. Baa aa he phal sabh, O fruit.

CLASS III.

ALL NOUNS NOT ENDING IN &t dG, OR SILENT Ha,

§ 33. (1) Example of a masculine noun, ending in = 7

aif pdni,* water.

SINGULAR wRaaa Lh’ vachan.

Inst.

of fruit.

Nom. atfa pani, water.

uta pan, water,

Ace. Reve Teta ie water.

uta a pani ke,

uifaz panie,

¥ es by water.

ufa & pani sd,

Dat. ofa ® pdni ké, to water.

Inst

Abl. — atfa @ pdni sd, from water.

ata panik,

Gen ia of water.

atfaae paniker,

Loc. aif A pani mé, in water.

Voc. Butta he pani, O water.

[§ 33.

* The @ in the termination of this word is pronounced,

DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 15

PruraL equa Bahuvachan.

utfa aa pant sabh, waters.

utfa aaq pani sabh,

urfa Bat a pani sabh ke,

utfa aa pani sable,

utfa aa a pani sabh sa,

ufa aa a pani sabh ké, to waters.

waters.

§ by waters.

utfa eat @ pani sabh sd, from waters.

arf aaa pani sabhak,

tts BaKz pani sabl’ker,

uifa aa A pdni sabh mé, in waters.

of waters.

= uta aa he pdni sabh, O waters.

(2) Example of a feminine noun ending in ¥ 7.

N , :

ait neni, a girl.

SINGULAR waqaa Lh’vachan.

Hit nent, a girl.

aat neni, 7

LN a girl.

aat a neni ke, =

oN w Op

afaz nenieé, . oa

é ean: a girl.

aat @ neni sa, yes

~ ny y ps °

aat a neni ké, to a girl.

NS yw 4 ~ ©

aat a neni sa, from a girl.

of a girl.

oN Ny A PeateG °

avait A neni mé, in a girl.

aata nenik,

aAaAtRe neniker,

R Aas gai nenid, O cirl.

16 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [ § 35.

Prurat weaqa Bahuvachan.

Nom, at aq neni sabh, girls.

aat Haq neni sabh,

Ace e x girls.

aat aaa neni sabh ke,

aat aa neni sabhé, 1 :

~ : by girls.

aat aa a neni sabh sa, i

Dat. Fat Sa RW neni sabh keé, to girls.

Abl. dat eat & neni sabh sd, from girls.

aat aaa neni sabhak, l :

a A, ; : of girls.

Fat AyARE neni sab ker, J

Loc. Fat aa A neni sabh mé, in girls.

Voc. & Afast aa gai nenid sabh, O girls,

§35. (3) Example of + masculine proper noun ending in § %._

ta* Raght a proper noun.

Nom. «a Raghi, Raghu.

Ace, ey a Raghi ke, Raghu.

Inst SE by Raghu.

wa @ Raghi: sa, a

Dat. «zaaH Raghi ke, to Raghu.

Abl. aq @ Raghi sd, from Raghi.

Gen. wan Raghik, of Raghu.

Loc, =F # Raghi mé, in Raght

Voc. tt eqat rau Raghud, O Raght (or respectfully) et rac

hau Raghi.

* Usualy spelt thus in Maithili.

§§ 36—40. ADJECTIVES. 17

CHAPTER V.

pDJECTIVES TMA AR Gunavichak.

§ 36. The Maithil adjective is not declined. It sometimes is liable how-

ever to a change on account of gender.

§ 37. As the rules for the formation of the feminine of adjectives are the

same as those for the formation of the feminine of substantives, it will be con-

venient to treat the whole subject of gender at the present opportunity.

I must, however, preface my remarks by confessing that this will be

found, I fear, to be the most incomplete part of this grammar. As a matter

of fact the distinction of gender is observed but loosely: except to pandits

grammatical gender, as distinct from natural gender, is almost unknown ;

that is to say, adjectives only become feminine when applied to female

living creatures, and hence I have found considerable difficulty in collecting

sufficient examples to warrant me in forming general rules.

§ 38. It is a well known fact that in High Hindi the adjectives which

are derived from the praékrit stock of the language, and which end in 31 @

are in reality the only ones in that language which are affected by gender.

Adjectives imported direct from the Samskrit, and forming their feminines

after the model of that language, do not form part of the living spoken stock

of the Hindi dialect, but belong rather to the dead language of the books.

The same is only partly true in Maithili. In this language we find not

only prakrit but even some Samskrit adjectives forming feminines distinctly

the property of the language in which they have been adopted.

§ 39. The genitival terminations of High Hindi, at ka, a ke, and at ki

evidently correspond to the pra/rit derived adjectives ending in °3T-4@, °U-e, and

°z-2. In fact the genitive of a substantive may be considered as, and is liable

to the same changes as, a prakrit derived adjective in °4T-4, °F-e,and °F-?.

§ 40. Without wishing it to be supposed that Maithili is in any way -

whatever derived from High Hindi, it may be taken as a general rule that

wherever a prakrit derived word occurs both in High Hindi and in Maithili,

if that word ends ina long vowel in High Hindi, the wsus loguendi of

Maithili tends to shorten that vowel. Thus we have

High Hindi. . Maithilé.

Wat pani. utfa pane, water.

Ural aT pdni kd. uf pane h(a) of water.

ast bard. as bar (a) great.

The above rule is not universal, for we have in Maithili words like #ar7

nena a boy, tat nenz a girl, F21 beta a son, and 42} het? a daughter ; but it

is nearly so, and may be taken as general.

18 ADJECTIVES. L§§ 41—44.

§ 41. It may be therefore remembered that what corresponds to the

prakrit derived termination °3T-4 in High Hindi, is the prakrit derived

termination °3-@ in Maithili; both corresponding tothe prékrit nominative

in °3T-0, and both apparently derived from it.

§ 42. Similarly prakrit derived nouns, adjectives, and genitives in

High Hindi ending in °a-é, form their feminines by changing this °T-4 into

»3-¢, while prakrit derived nouns and adjectives in Maithili ending in °3-a, form

their feminines by changing the °¥-ainto °¢-2. This ruledoes not, be it

observed, apply to the genitive in Maithili, which has lost all trace of its

former adjectival form. That the termination of the genitive °@-k (a) was

originally an adjective, and derived from the Samskrit ya /r7ta, through the

prakrit #«a heraka or Hawa kelaka as suggested by Mr. Hoernle cannot I

think admit of a doubt; for we have even at the present day the form o#@<

-ker used alongside of °%-ka, and astudy of the older Maithili poems, shows

that the former termination is the more ancient, and has only been sup-

planted by, or contracted into the latter in comparatively modern times.

§ 43. To return, however to the subject of gender, the first rule to be

observed is that in Maithili, Praékrit-derived words ending in short °-a,

Sorm their feminine in short °¥-i.

Examples :

Mase. Fem.

WIZ gor fair UtfE gor’.

ag bar great afs bar’.

afaste budhitr wise afeartte budhiar’

Note.— it~ gor also has an irregular feminine @1f<at gored.

§ 44. Thesecond rule is peculiar to Maithili, and isas follows. Many

pure Samskrit words ending in °%-a, adopted unalter ed in Maithilt, form

their feminines in short °¥-i; and that, whether in Samskrit these words

Sorm their feminines in long °%-¢ or not.

Examples :

Mase. Fem.

Samskrit

eae aafe sundar’.

2 yar, dhiisar ( weet dhisard. or weet dhisart.

. wate dhusar’.

coe § Baar atyantd.

= ( safe atyant.

aratt sundari.

eat sundar beautiful

dusty

| rin atyant excessive

§§ 45—46.]

ADJECTIVES. 19

The following may here be noted as irregular :

§ 45. Ruxe III.

Mase.

aara subodh wise

their feminines in og-2,

Examples :

§ 46. Ruce IV.

Mase.

et betd a son

wat nend a boy

Seminines as follows :

Mase.

SHE war

SHIT W711

Sarat war ka

atemt karikkd

WIT pid

WTAE pear

fascat poar ka

feat hariar

eleazat hariar ka

aTat hive

atest haria black

Fem.

aaa subodhd.

qafy subudh’.

A. few prakrit-derived words ending in °I-a, form

Fem.

wet bett a daughter.

Hat neni a girl.

white

yellow

green

Prakrit-derived words signifying colour form their

Fem.

( THT wre

or BHLAT war hi.

afcat harikhi,

facet piar ki.

efeqcat hariar ki.

20 ADJECTIVES. [ § 47

Mase. Fem.

ater lal } es

vas j red aearmt lal’ ki.

or wernt lal kd

Exouprion,—rt gor fair, which makes 41 gor’, or WAT gored.

Note also that #tq nl, dark blue, which is adopted direct from the

Samskrit and which in that language forms its feminine #fqt 22/d, or atett

nilt, in Maithili adopts ate#t nz/é as its feminine form.

§ 47. Rute VY. The following classes of words, adopted directly from

Samskrit, form their feminines generally as in that language.

a. Verbal adjectives in °J-7, and °$-2, corresponding to Samskrit adjec-

tives in FA 7.

Examples :

Mase. Hem.

S attaa manin arfaat manini

ae proud wees

M. atta mdni or attata manin’.

( atifaat bhavini

(or wtfafa bhavin’.

ce | eifeay hdrini

seizing a

- Cor wstfefa havin’.

S. afar bhavin

M. artat bhavi

M. stat hari

S. etter harin

atte dharin ; ( atfeart dhdrini

’ bearing ae

M. -yret dhari Cor urfefa dharin’.

S. attca havin Be } artfeat kariné

oing pia

M. oar havi - Cor atfefa kdrin’.

SS. Patsitfaa, chiranjivin Fatsitfa chiranjth’ or

M. faesttat chiraiyjibi eee Fatsittast chiraiyibini.

or = faefara chiranjib or Fatsitfafa chiraijibin’,

§§ 48—50. | ADJECTIVES. 21

As an irregular under this head falls,—

Mase. Fem.

WS LN ,

S. a@aaasudharman ). auat sudharmd.

xs ? @ virtuous A ;

M. quat sudharma aulaat sudharmint.

§ 48. (b) Participles of the Reduplhiated perfect in °7*qa-vas, and com-

paratives in °aa-eyas.

Examples :

Mase. Bon

S. faze (faeta_) vidas, (vidven) l

a, Gee ae wise fazat vidushi.

S. TeTAS_ gariyas

M. nets garian

5. aataa laghiyas

M. watsatalaghian

heavier TAS gariyase.

lighter aetret laghiyast.

§ 49. (¢) Nomina agentis terminating in oR ak(a).

Examples :

Mase. Fem.

area kdral: a doer atfeat harika.

qTaa pdlak a protector = uttwat palikd.

can rakshak aguardian that rakshikd.

ura pachak a cook attaat pachikd.

aetan sahdyak a helper aerqat sahdyakd,

§ 50. (d) Gerundials and past participles passive.

Examples :

Mase. Kem.

aaa mantaby to be remarked Raat mantabyd.

aema dandanty praiseworthy aaattat bandaniyd.

UWA jogy worthy awa jogyd.

ara miiny reverend ATT mand.

ara sddhy easy aram sddhyd.

9»)

ADJECTIVES. [§§ 51—53.

Mase. Fem.

qa juke joined qa juktd.

qe (xe) suddh (suddh) pure at suddha.

aa drt pained srat arté.

twa khinn broken feat khinnd.

§ 51. (e) Other nouns and adjectives as,—

Mase. Fem.

wat dhiirt a knave dat dhirtd.

WUT syd dark WAT sydmd.

afee garishth heaviest (venerable) west garishthd.

eZ sreshth excellent. Bsr s reshthd.

Zz vrind numerous zat vrindd.

sry drjy respectable sreat drjyd.

§ 52. Rute VI. The following anomalous forms should be noticed.

(a) Wat rajd, a king, makes trait ranZ a queen.

(6) Forms borrowed from Samskrit nomina agentis in °@ tri present

some curious anomalies.

Examples.

Mase. Kem.

S. ata dhatre arat dhatri.

ia creator Baal

M. so utat dhdid ata dhatr.

S. STI jnatrr STAT pnuittri.

ieee knower Lee

M. -WtaT jnata ATA pndire.

S. uta patr Wat piers.

a) aS protector ee

M. WtTat pata utd patrr.

CoMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

§ 53. (a) Comparative. As in High Hindi, the comparative is formed,

not by any change in the adjective, but by putting the word for the thing

§§ 54—60. | PRONOUNS. 23

with which the comparison is made in the athstive ease. Hxample, = ret

athe aret a ae oH d gachht oh’ gachht sa sundar chhatk. “This grove

is more beautiful than that.”

§ 54. (b) Superlative. This is formed either by prefixing aw 4 sabh

s@, the ablative case of aH sabh all, or the adjective as bar (which is

liable to inflection according to gender) to the principal adjective. Examples ;

—% wal wa FH Aet ea t gachht sabh s& sundar chhaik “thisis the most

beautifil grove ;” or = mat TS Het BR ¢ gadchht bar sundar chhaik

“this grove is very beautiful.”

§ 55. Certain comparatives and superlatives are also borrowed direct

from theSamskrit, which need not be noted here.

Craprer VI.

¢ 4

PRO NOUNS @aata Sarvandm.

§ 56. The declension of Pronouns presents some important points of

difference from that of nouns, which must be carefully noticed.

§ 57. While nouns remain unchanged before postpositions, pronouns

always change to some other form. They have an inflected base which is

different from the nominative, and which is used before all postpositions.

§ 58. The accusative singular of pronouns is never the same as the

nominative. The pronoun of the second person aya apne or Het ahan,

and the interrogative adjectival pronoun at kt, what? are the only exceptions

to this rule. In circumstances corresponding to those in which the accusa-

tive of a noun takes the nominative form, the accusative of a pronoun takes

the form of the inflected base without any postposition.

The genitive form of pronouns in <7 is also to be noticed.

In pronouns not only the accusative, but also the dative, is allowed to

drop the postposition @ /<é.

§ 59. Pronouns have the same form whether referring to masculine or

feminine nouns. They are declined throughout in the singular and plural

numbers.

§ 60. With the exception of the pronouns of the second person, they all

want the vocative case.

24 PRONOUNS. §§ 61—64. |

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

iv 5) Z

QRaaaR Baars purush vichak sarvandm.

§ 61. There are three sets of personal pronouns, the first set referring

to the first person, the second to the second person, and the third to the

third. Each of the two last sets consists of two divisions—an honorific,

and anon-honorifie division. In other words, the pronouns of the second and

third persons have each two forms, an honorific and a non-honorific form.

§ 62. ‘To people accustomed to deal with eastern languages, I need do

no more than point out the fact, except to notice en passant, that in no

Indian language which I have studied, is this distinction carried to a greater

length* than in Maithili.

§ 63. The following are the personal pronouns in use at the present

day :—

Direct Form. Oblique Form.

( Honorifie eq ham saat ham’rd

ist Rerson.a— .

( Non-honorifie a ham saat ham'rd

Bua ap'ne wae ap’ne

Honea ee ee

ond Person | or HET aha or Bet aha’

\ Non-honorifie at= toh ateat tohard

: Honorifie ato waar hunka

38rd Person ; :

Non-honorifie #t 0 staat okard

I now proceed without further premise to give their declension.

First PERSON, SAH Yea uttam purush,

§ 64. wa ham, I.

SINGULAR.

Nom. ea ham, |.

eat ham’rd,

Aico c ie ? me,

l-waet A ham’rd ke, J

(eat ham ré,

Inst. : ae by me.

/ SAI S ham 7a sa,

* {Tt will be seen further on, that some verbs have not only a honorific and a non-

honorific form depending on the subject, but have a!so another pair of honorific and non-

honorific forms depending on the object.

§ 64.]

Dat.

Abl.

Gen.

Loe.

Nom.

Acc.

Inst.

Dat.

Abl.

Gen.

Loc.

PERSONAL pronoun’, 95

SINGULAR.

( Saat ham’ rd,

~ Ades to me.

(-eaxt a ham ra ke,

waa a ham’rd sa, from me.

eae hamar, or Fate hamar, of me, my.

waa a ham’'rd mé, in me.

PLURAL.

{ea eax ham sabh,*

{ gaat au, wate, Stata ham’rd sabh, or we.

| sabah’, or lokani, |

SAU TAAR, AISA, Arata A ham’ra sabhke,

us.

or sabah’ ké, or lokani ké,

[ eae aay, Wafea, atataz, ham’rd sabhé, oF}

’ ry ") by} oy

| sab’lié, or lok’né, | by us.

| SHU Ba a, aafe a, Stata @ ham’rd sabh

Sa Soe ie

sd, or sabah’ sd, or lokani sa, 3

PAL TAR, Gals K, Stata RK ham’rd sabh ke, he

O US.

or sabah’ ké, or lokani ké,

or sabah’ sd, or lokani sa,

CHU GHA, Balen, Safa ham’rd sabhak, or } of us,

savhik, or lokanik, f our.

a aya, wate a, Safa A ham’rd sabh f

is aud, eats a, stata & ham’rd sabh sa,

in us.

mé, or sabal’ mé, or lokani mé,

“ea wate ham sabah’, and ea Atala ham lokani are not used.

; from us.

Cae a

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. [ §§ 65—66.

§ 65. a mé, I.

The following forms are used in poetry :—

SINGULAR.

Nom. @ mé, I.

Acc. at& moh’, me

Inst. At @t moh’ sd, by me.

Dat. @tf moh’, to me.

Abl. at€ at moh’ sé, from me.

Gen. @te, Att mor, or mord, of me, my.

Loc. atf At moh’ mo, in me.

The plural forms are not used. When necessary, the plural forrns of 74

ham are substituted. This, however, occurs but seldom.

SECOND PERSON aga gra madhyam purush.

ats toh, thou.

§ 66.

SINGULAR.

ats toh,

m. [ey ; thou.

lat to,

ateat tohara,

thee.

aTeat AR tohard ké,

are toharé,

Inst. at {oy thee.

areat a tohara sa,

areat tohard,

Dat. ie fo thee.

areat a tohard ké,

Abl. 9 atext & tohara sa, from thee.

Gen. ate tohar, of thee, thy.

Loc. areata tohard mé, in thee.

Voc. wate hau toh, O thou.

§ 66.] PERSONAL PRONOVES. 27

PLURAL.

*at = MI, Mt Bar l0h sadh, or t0 sabh,

area au, asfe, stata tohard sabh, sabah’, te on

or lokant,

ae aaa, uate, stata R tohard sabh ke,

Acc, you, ye.

sabah’ ké or lokani ké,

(area Ha, aster, atafae tohard sabhé or )

I | sab’ hié or lokanie, ‘ i

nst. ou.

area Ba a, aate a, atafa S tohard sabh sa =| Ma

sabah’ sa, or lokani sa,

aTEtT GH AR, Bats a, atata KR dohard sabh

Dat. to you.

ké, sabah’ ké or lokani ké,

Abl.

sabah’ sa, or lokani sa, ou.

of you,

ASU BA UG, Vasa, Gala S tohard sabh sa, -

Gen. ;

sab’ hik, or lokanik, your.

aTett aa a, vate a, Grafs A wohard sabh

mé, sabah’ mé, lokani mé,

Loe. in you.

SI ats BA haw toh sadh,

St ATER GU, aats, Safa hau toharé sabh, >O ye.

sabal’ or lokant,

Voce.

eal ava, aafen, staan tohard sabhak,

N.B.—For ae toharé,atert toharé, and atex tohar, arat tord, are

fore, and att tor are used by the vulgar.

*ate wate toh sabah’, and are erata toh lokani axe not used.

28 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. [s§ 67—68.

§ 67. at #6, thou.

The following are used in poetry :—

SINGULAR,

Nom. at 20, thou.

Ace. att toh’, thee.

Inst. athe at tol’ sd, by thee.

Dat. atte toh’, to thee.

Abl. arf at tol’ 8d, from thee.

Gen. 4%, at, ATEez, ATETE (wa, tor, tohar, or tohdr, of thee, thy.

Loc, atf¥ at toh’ mé, in thee.

The plural forms are not used. When necessary, the plural forms of dT#

toh ave substituted. This, however, occurs but seldom.

Srconp Person RESPECTFUL.

S 68. 7 ;

get aha, thou.

SINGULAR.

Nom. #8, Bua ahd, or apne, thou.

Ace. Bet HR, BAA AR ahd’ ke, or ap’ne ké, thee.

aw 1) w ~n & PEO =! ns 5 mm

Inst. Be, Hel a, BIA Bahn, ahd’ sa, or ap’ne sa, by thee.

Dat. set, waa R aha ke, or apne ke, to thee, thy.

Abl. seta saa & ahd sd, or ap’ne sd, from thee.

Gen. seta, zaan ahah, ap’nek, of thee.

Loc. @eTa, BIA A ahd mé, ap’ne mé, in thee.

Voc. at aet av ahd, O thou.

§ 68. | PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 29

PLURAL.

r") som s Hv ik Nagai

Nom os aay, aafe, atafa ahd sadh,sabah’, or lokani, ee

| sua aa, aafe, stata ap’ne sabh, sabah’, or lokani, ) ye.

(Her aun, aafea, arafa a ahd sabh ke,)

sabal’ ké, ov lokani ké, | you,

Nec, 4

| qua aaa, wate a, tata a ap'ne sabh ké, yee

l sabah’ ké, or lokani ké,

[ser a, ae GG, wa a 4, aate 4,

Inst. 4 atafa & ahd sabh sd, ahai sabh sa, ap’ne f me :

t sabh sd, sabal’ sd, or lokani sa, yy

ae ae au, sua aa a, aates A, Safa a eu ta

a Ms o

sabh ké, ap’ne sabh ke, sabah’ ké, lokane ke, ) Y ou.

Bet aa F, Bua wa a, wate a, stals S ala) :

5 ’ rm eae ron

Able 3 sabh sa, apne sabh sd, sabah’ sda, or "00,

{ lokani sd, 3

FE Ser TAA, Baa sas, walen, atafera aha sab-) of

en. be, : :

hak, apne sabhak, sab’ hik, or lokanik, if you.

7 ait aay A, Sua aH a, wate F, Stata Fo ald) in

oc. ; on Bata

sabh mé, apne sabh mé, sabah’ mé or lokani me, § you.

N.B.—=-a74% apne can be used throughout for 2ret aha’. It is the more

honorific term of the two. 2et ah@ is sometimes even used when talking

to inferiors. w¥t aha’, in fact, is polite, and ate toh is vulgar.

30 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. [§ 69

REFLEXIVE PRONOUN.

guate ap nal’n, self.

§ 69. SINGULAR.

Nom. suafe ap’nal’h, self.

Acc. 3uat he ap na ké, self.

Inst. sual a, suafs & ap’nd sd, or ap’nal’n sa, by self.

Dat. qUaTR ap’nd ké, to self.

Abl. saat a, suate a ap nd sd, or ap’nal’i sa, from self.

WTA apan,

= appan,

Gen. fot self.

e :

Loc. saat H ap'nd mé, in self.

PLURAL.

auate au, vate, stata ap’nal’nr sabh,

Nom : _¢ selves.

sabah’, or lokani,

SMa aa a, wats A, Atafst R ap’nd

Ace ; selves.

sabh hé, sabah’ ké, or lokani ke,

Bua ay a, ate a, wtafa @ ap'nd

Inst by selves.

sabh sa, sabah’ sd, or lokani sa,

sua aa HR, Bate R, sala R ap'nd)

Dat. : j to selves.

sabh ké, sabal’ hé, or lokani ké,

Sat aH , wate a, stata ap’nd sabh

Abl. sete from selves.

sd, sabah’ sé or lokani sd,

wat aaa, cafen, atafta ap’nd sab-

Gen _ ¢ of selves.

hak, sabahik, or lokantk,

sual aaa, wate F, stata A ap’nd) .

Loe in selves.

sabh mé, sabal’ mé, or lokani mé, )

§ 70. | DEMONSTRATIVE SRO MORINS: 31

Tarp Person wayygea anya purush.

PROXIMATE DEMONSTRATIVE NON-HONORIFIC.

§ 70. x dor XZ, this ; not used as an adjective,and only used when re-

ferring to animate objects.

SINGULAR.

Nom. x7 or $4, this.

Acc. art, THETA ckard, or ckard ké, this.

Inst. the. sane ' by this.

watt a ekari sa,

Dat. waar, THAT A chard, chard ké, to this.

Abl. zanat & ekard sd, from this.

Gen. ware ekar, of this.

Loc. waar a ekard mé, in this.

PLURAL.

zor § aa, wats, stata 7 orésabh, sabah’,

these.

or lokant,

Nom, .

TAIT GA a , wate a a alata & R, ekard sabh oe

ké, sabal’ ké, or lokani ke,

sal’ hié, or lok’ nie,

Inst. | é ‘ ;

TAU BAU, Bate a, tala | chard sabh

sa, sabah’ sé or lokani sa,

. au, aifea, stata’ chard eee

| | by these.

3 |

VALI GR, Tats R, Tata A chard sabh

to these.

ké, sabah’ ké, or lokani ké,

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. le Suvale

we)

PLURAL.

Abl we aa a, aafe a, staf | chard sabh

ol.

j es ge: {from these.

sd, sabah’ sa, or lokani sd,

G VALI THA, Gafea, atafaa chard sabhak, }

en.

. of these.

sab’ hik, or lokanik,

watt ana, wate a, atala a chard se

mé, sabah’ mé, or lokani mé,

Loe. in these,

PROXIMATE DEMONSTRATIVE Honortric.

SINGULAR.

Nom, x or &, 7 or 4, this.

Acc. Feaat, Fara & hin’kd, or hin’ka he, this.

Inst. Feat & hin'kd sa, by this.

Dat. feant, feat a hiv'kd, or hin’kd ké, to this.

Abl. Feaat & hin’kdé sd, from this.

Gen, } Feaa hinak,

; of this.

Feaaz hin’ kar,

Loc. feaat F hinkd mé, in this.

PLURAL.

rc or = au, aafe, ata Zor ¢ ot

Nom. these

sabah’, or lokani,

ae aa, ate R, wats F se

Ace. nese

sabh ké, sabah’ ké, or lokant ké.

§72.]

Tnst.

Dat.

Abl.

Gen.

Loc.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 3a

PLURAL.

feant aaa, aafe a, stata a hin hd

by these.

sabh sd, sabah’ sa, or lokani sé,

fern aaa, aafe a, stata a lin’'kd

to these.

sabh ké, sabah’ ké, or lokani ké,

from these.

sabh sd, sabal’ sé, or lokani sd,

feant aan, aafea, Tata hinkd sabh-

of these.

ak, sab’ hik, or lokanik,

feant aa a, wsfe a, mafa A hinkd

sabh mé, sabah’ mé, or lokant mé

these.

ee wid, wafea, stata e fink :

Tuirp Parson saygea anya purush.

Remote DemMonstRATIVE Non-Honoriric.

§ 72. 0, he, she, it, that, not used as an adjective, and only used

when referring to animate objects.

SINGULAR.

Nom. = 0, he, she, it, that.

Acc.

Inst.

Dat.

Abl.

Gen.

Loc.

area, wtaat a ckard, or okard k2, him, ete.

ginet @* okard sda, by him, ete.

Arar, BtALt HR okard, or okard ké, to him, ete.

staat a okard sd, from him, ete.

stax okar, of him, ete.

Nw 7) ake .

araat @ okard mé, in him, ete.

* The form arat okaré, is wanting.

Nom.

Ace.

Inst.

Dat.

Abl.

Gen.

Loc.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. [§ Ws

PiuRAt.

atau, safe, stata o sabh, sabah’, or lokani, they, those.

aime aa A, etc. okard sabh ké, etc., them, ete.

BIRT Ba a, cfc. okard sabh sa, etc., by them, etc.

SrA BA HR , etc. okard sabh ké, etc., to them, ete.

HALT A F, etc. okard sabh sd, etc., from them, ete.

staat aan, etc. okard sabhak, etc., of them, their, ete.

Stal Buy a, etc. okard sabh mé, etc., in them, ete.

REMOTE DEMONSTRATIVE HONORIFIC.

SINGULAR.

§ 73.

Nom.

Ace.

Inst.

Dat.

Abl.

Gen.

Loe.

Nom.

Acc.

Inst.

Dat.

Abl.

Gen.

Loc.

at 0, he, she, it, that.

BAM, SAAT A hun’'kd, or hun’kd ké, him, ete.

waat & huvka sd, by him, ete.

SAR, Baat a hun'kd, or hun’ka ké, to him, ete.

Eaat & hun'kd sd, from him, ete.

waa, Bat hunak, huvkar, of him, his, ete.

BAA A hun'kd mé, in him, ete.

BuuRAT:

St aa, aate, Tafa o sabh, sabah’, or lokani, they, those.

BAR Ta A, etc. hun’kd sabh ke, etc., them, ete.

BART TAG, cic. huvkd sabh sa, etc., by them, ete.

BART TA HR, ete. hun'kd sabh ké, etc., to them, ete.

BAR ay a, cic. hun’kd sabh sd, ete., from them, ete.

Barat aan, cfc. huvkd sabhak, etc., of them, their, etc,

BAR ay a, etc. hun'ka sabh mé, etc., in them, ete.

q Or

§§ 74—75.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 35

THe Revative PRonoun.

cy 5 Reales

aauqran waata Sawmbandh vichak sarvanim.

§ 74. Like the Personal and Demonstrative pronouns, the Relative also

has two forms—one honorific, and the other non-henorific.

The same observation applies also to the correlative 4 se and to the

Interrogative @ ke, and as attention is here drawn to the fact, the remark

will not be repeated.

Tur RevatrveE Pronoun, Non-Honoriric.

§ 75. st Je, who, which, that.

SINGULAR.

Nom. § je, who, which, that.

Acc. mE, HRT RH, Jakard, or jakard ké, whom, ete.

Inst. set a, ste a * jakard sa or jah’ sd, by whom, ete.

Dat. smHzt, aHeT HK Jakard or jakard ké, to whom, etc.

Abl. sate, sife ayakard sd, or gdh’ sd, from whom, ete.

Gen. wae jakar, of whom, whose, ete.

} y SN uae a 73 Oly SAO

Loc. aKa, safe a jakard mé, or jah’ mé, in whom, ete.

PLURAL.

N i: aa, wate, atataye sabh, sabal’, or i who, which,

om.

lokant, that.

ART or sifs a Rt etc., jakard or sch’

Acc whom, ete.

sabh ke, etc.,

* Other forms noted are 3"7é and jakaré.

r . . 1 i

+ The form sife jah’ is not used throughout the singular, but only in

those cases where it is specially given. In the plural it is used in all the

‘oblique cases,

7”

36 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. [§ 76

PEURAL-

Tet amar or wife ear a, etc. jakaré or gah vo whom,

nst.

sabh sd, etc.,

saat or athe wa a, etc. jakard or jah’) to whom,

Dat.

e sabh ké, etc.,

(

Abl.

sabh sd, ete.,

HAL or Hits TA a, ete. jakard or jah’ om whom,

amator atte aaa, cic. jakard or jal’

ies sabhak, etc., upon ely

aaa or aIfe ma a , etc. jakaré or jd’) in whom,

ee | sabh mé, ete.;

Tue Retattve Pronoun Honoriric.

§ 76.

SINGULAR.

Nom. 3 je, who, which, that.

Ace. afamt, afaat a janikd, or janikd ké, whom, ete.

Inst. sifaat a janikd sd, by whom, etc.

Dat. afaat, afaat & janika, or janikd kz, to whom, ete.

Abl. afaat & janiké sd, from whom, etc.

Gen. stan, afaane janik, janikar, of whom, whose, ete.

Opes ep

Loc. sfaat a szanikd mé, in whom, etc.

Nom.

Acc.

Inst.

CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS, 37

PLURAL.

way ye sabh, who, which, that.

aifaat aa & , etc. janikdé sabh ke, etc., whom, ete.

sfrat wat a, etc. zanikd sabh sd, etc., by whom, ete.

sifaat wa aA, etc. anikd sabh ké, etc., to whom, etc.

sifaat eat a, etc. janikd sabh sd, etc., from whom, ete.

sifaat aaa, etc. ganikd sabhak, etc., of whom, ete.

sifaat aa a , etc. janikd sabh mé, etc., in whom, ete.

Ture CoRRELATIVE Pronoun Non-Honogiric.

SINGULAR.

@ se, he, she, that.

AML, ARLT A takard, or takard ké, him, ete.

aR a, athe a* takard sd, or téh’ sa, by him, ete.

TRA, THAT A takard or takard ké, to him, ete.

anet , wifes a takaré sd, or téh’ sd, from him, etc.

amc takar, of him, his, etc.

nw wy eee, ~ BI) ne D e

aH H, ahs A takard mé,or tal’ mé, in him, ete.

PLURAL.

@ au, wate, cic. se sabh, sabah’, ete., they, those.

amet or athe aa AK, etc, takardé or tah’

them, those.

sabh ké, ete.,

oe or atte eq a, etc. takard or tal’ Ve them,

sabh s& ete. ) by those.

* Other forms are @ ¢é and qat takaré.

38 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. [§ 78.

Bat TRL or atts Tae ; etc. takaré or téh’ ie them,

a <

(

( sabh ké, etc., } to those.

aL: or af ea a etc. takard or téh’) from them,

sabh sd, etc., ) from those.

sabhak, etc., ) of those.

THT or als Baym, ede. takard or tél’ ae

- them,

i j THE or athe Ba a, ete. takard or tah’

40€.

sabh mé, etc., )in those.

THE CorrELATIVE Pronoun Hownorirtc.

§ 78.

SINGULAR.

Nom. @ se, he or that,

Ace. afaat, afaat # tanikd, or tanikd ké, him, ete.

Inst. afaat & tanikd sa, by him, ete.

Dat. afaat, afaat & danikd, or taniké ké, to him, ete.

Abl. afrat & tanikd sd, from him, ete.

Gen. afaa, afaaz tanik, tantkar, of him, his, ete.

Loc. aftrat A” taniké mé, in him, ete.

PLURAL.

Nom. @ au, aats, etc. se sabh, sabal’ etc., they, those.

Acc. afaat ay H, etc. tanikd sabh ké, ete., them, ete.

Inst. afaart aaz a, ete. tanikd sabh sd, ete., by them, ete.

Dat. ataat waz a, etc. tanikd sabh ké, ete., to them, ete.

Abl. afaat eat a, ete. tanikd sabh sd, etc., from them, ete.

Gen. afar aaa, etc. tanikd sabhak, ete., of them, their, etc.

Loc, afaat az FH, etc. tanikd sabh mé, ete., in them, ete.

§§ 79--80. | INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 89

TyrerroaartvE Pronoun Non-Honoriric,

Ly 4 ot ¥

Tara Baata prasnavdchak sarvaném,

§ 79. SINGULAR,

Nom. & ke, who? which?

Ace. matt, wRet a kalkard, kakaré k2, whom? which?

Inst. aaet a kakard sa, by whom? by which ?

Dat. Haat, HHT KR hakard, or kakard ké, to whom? to which?

Abl. aaat a kukard sd, from whom? from which ?

Gen. ax kakar, whose ?

nw , main ° .

Loc. Mata kakardé mé, in whom? in which?

PLURAL.

Nom. a au, aats, atata ke sabh, sabah’, or lokani, who? which?

Acc. wa aa HR etc. kakard sabh ké, etc., whom? ete,

Inst. amet eq &, etc. kakard sabh sd, ete., by whom? ete.

Dat. wat aa AR etc. kakard sabh k2, ete., to whom? ete.

Abl, wat aat a etc. kakardé sabh sa, etc., from whom? ete.

Gen. waRcT aaN etc. kakard sabhak, etc., whose ? ete.

Loc. waar aaa etc. kakard sabh mé, etc., in whom? ete.

The form atfe kah’ which might be expected, is not used so far as my

exper1lence goes.

INTERROGATIVE Pronoun Honortrrc.

§ 80. SINGULAR,

Nom. & ke, who? which?

Acc. afaat, afaat a kanihd, or kanikié ké, whom? ete.

Inst afaat a kanika sd, by whom? ete.

40 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. [ § 81.

SINGULAR.

Dat. afaat, afaeat a hanikd, or kanikd ké, to whom? ete.

Abl. afaat @ kaniké sd, from whom? etc.

Gen. afan, afane kanik, kanikar, whose?

Loc. afaata kanikd mé, in whom? ete,

PLURAL.

ce i aa, aafe, atafa ke sabh, sabah’ or

eae who? which 4

Acc fant aa H, etc. kaniké sabh ké, etc., whom? ete.

Inst. afaat aay a, etc. kanikd sabh sd, etc.,from whom? etc.

Dat. afaat eta ete. kanikd sabh ké, etc, to whom? etc.

Abl. afaeat ae detec. kaniké sabh sd, ete., from whom? ete.

Gen. afaat aaa, etc. kanikd sabhak, etc., whose ? etc.

Loc. afaat aa a, etc. kanikd sabh mé, ete., in whom? ete.

INTERROGATIVE Pronoun (used with inanimate objects.)

§ 81. at ké, what. (Irregular).

SINGULAR.

Nom. att ki, what?

Acc. wat R, at kathi ke, or ki, what? |

Inst. weft @ kathi sa, by what ? |

Dat. ait & kathé lai, to or for what? why? |

Abl. adit @ hkathi sa, from what? |

Gen. awita kathik, of what? |

Loc. aut a kathé mé, in what ?

Plural wanting. The singular is used instead. Note the form of the

Dative.

§§ 82—84. | INDEFINITE PRoNoU«s. Ad

Tue INTERROGATIVE PRoNoMINAL ADJECTIVE.

§ 82. ata kon, what ? referring te both animate and inanimate objects

is not declined.

INDEFINITE PRoNown.

§ 83. Rat keo, any one, some one. (Irregular. )

SINGULAR.

Nom. at keo, any one, some one.

O) way Way

K aes ance # kakaral’n, or kakara- Lo one, or

a CC.

Wi ké, J any one.

Inst. mace a kakarah’it sd, by any one, ete.

De oF RACE R kakarah’h or kakara- i any one,

at. :

ete.

Wir ké,

Abl. waxe a kakaral’i sd, from any one, ete.

Gen. aaet kakaro, of any one, ete.

Loc. amee a halkarah’h mé, in any one, etc.

INDEFINITE Pronoun.

§ 84. farg kichh’,any thing.

Nom. fag Aichh’, any thing.

Acc. fag % kichh’ ké, any thing.

Inst. fg a hichh’ sd, by any thing,

Dat. fag W Aichh’ ke, to any thing.

Abl. fig a kichh’ sa, from any one.

Gen. fag kichhuk, of any thing.

Loc, fag A kichh’ mé, in any thing.

4.2 ADJECTIVAL PROXIMATE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. [ § 85.

INDEFINITE PRONOUN.

fay kichh’, something,

Nom. fag kichh’, something.

Acc. YR kath ké, something.

Inst. wa et hath sa, by something.

Dat. wy kathi ké, to something.

Abl. ay a kath sd, from something.

Gen. ay kathik, of something.

Loc. aya kathi mé, in something.

ADJECTIVAL PROXIMATE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.

§ 85. =7 or &Z, this, used only as an adjective, when referring to

animate objects and used either as an adjective or substantive when referring

to inanimate objects.

SINGULAR.

Nom. = or & (fat) 7 or é (wend), this (boy).

Ace. zufe (4at) w ch’ (nend) ke, this (boy).

et ak (am), ufe (Hat) & eh’ (nené) or el’ ) by this |

(nend) sa, J (boy). |

Dat. ae (Hat) H ch’ (nent) ke, to this (boy).

Abl. af (at) & ch’ (nend) sa, from this (boy).

Gen. afe (tata) el’ (nendk) of this (boy). |

Loc. 2 (Fat) A ch’ (nend) mé, in this (boy).

. lod

§§ 86—87.] ApsECTIVAL PROXIMATE DEMONST€ATIVE PRONOUNS. 43

PLURAL.

x or $ @ay (Mat) 7¢ or é sabh (nend),

Nom. ) | these (boys).

E or $ (Far) ea 7 or 4 (nend-) sabh,

ute aay (Fat) & ch’ sabi ké

Ace. | ages) te | chose (boys).

ufe (Fat) aa aH ch’ (nend) sabh ké,

ca ufe aay (44) ch’ sabh (nené), eS these

ufe aa (Fat) Gch’ sabh (nend) sa, (boys).

Dat (ae ay (aat) BW ch’ sabh (nend) ke, to these

| labs Gat) aa R ch’ (nend) sabh ke, (boys).

ADI ae eq (Hat) & ch’ sabh (nend) sd, ee these

Cafe at) aa & ch’ (nend) saah sa, (boys).

G pon aa (ata) ch’ sabh (nendk), YF these

en.

ufe (Hat) aaa ch’ (nend) sabhak, (boys).

L i aa (aat) A eh’ sabh (nend) mé, y these

0c.

(ute (at) aa AF eh’ (nend) sabh mé, (boys).

§ 86. Similarly is declined the adjectival remote Demonstrative Pro-

noun 31 0, that, (oblique form 3tfe 0h’), used only as an adjective when

referring to animate objects, and either as an adjective or substantive when

referring to inanimate objects.

§ 87. Note with regard to S ye, who, which, that, @ se, he, she, # ke,

who, ? which? at £2? what, att eo, any one, some one, fare Aichh’, any

thing and fag kichh’, something. These words are only used, when de-

clined as above, as pronouns, and not as pronominal adjectives, agreeing with

any immediately succeeding noun.

When used as adjectives they discard inflections, and, if agreeing with

a noun in the direct form, they (except # ke, who? and at AZ, what ?) retain

4A: ADJECTIVAL PROXIMATE DEMONSTRATIVE PRoNowNS. [ § 88.

the forms of their respective nominatives. If, however, agreeing with a noun

in the oblique form, they themselves change as follows :—

sje, who, which, that, becomes atf¥ jdh’.

@ se, he, she, becomes atf? ich’.

at keo, any one, some one, becomes atat kono.

fag kichh’, any thing, remains fag kichh’.

fag fichh’, something, remains fag kichh’.

But & ke, who? which ? and at ki, what ? when used ad-

jectivally always become ata kon.

§ 88. Examples.

1. HF mea ga, & Wa ye del chhal, se gel ;—he who came,

went.

2 TalH Be Ha, S ata Wa je lok del chhal, se lok gel ;—

the man who came, went.

3. wae Ga, aHx ya jakar khet, takar dhén;—he who

owns the field owns the rice crop.

4. site stan aa, af stan uta yal’ lokak khet, téh’ lokak

dhdn ;—the man who owns the field, owns the rice

crop.

a wa ? kechhal ? ;—who was he ?

St ata aH Btn? o kon lok thik 2—what caste is he ?

RAL BS Sa kakar ghor chhaik ;—whose horse is it ?

oN SD MO

ala wl BTS ea ? kon lokak ghor chhaik ?—what_ per-

son is the owner of the horse ?

§ 89. | DERIVATIVE PRONOMINAL forms. 45

10.

Ile

15.

16,

18.

att ea? ki chhaik ?—what is it ?

ata Ta Sa ? kon briksh chhaik *@—what tree is it ?

HU a Ulla wea BE ? kathi mz pani ldel chhah?—n

what have you brought the water ?

ala zt a ofa wen ee? kon loté me pani ldel

chhah?—in what loté have you brought the water ?

aan afe area? keo nah’ del ;--no one came.

ata an ate azar kono nend nal’a del ;— no boy

came.

oife ara A wat fag ate Sa oh’ grain mé kakaro kichW?

naw chhaik ;—in that village no one has any

property.

site oma atatafien a fag afte Hea ol’ grémak

kono banid sa kichh’ nah’n bhétat;—he will get

nothing from any shopkeeper of that village.

fae wate usfas kichh’ amot pathabiha ;—send me

some mango conserve.

st Say RE a da stam o aukhadh kathtii mé dhail ho-

taik ;—that medicine must be kept in something.

DERIVATIVE PRONOMINAL Forms.

§ 89. The following table gives in a succinct form the various derivative

pronominal forms,

It explains itself, and further comment is unnecessary.

DERIVATIVE PRONOMINAL FORMS. [ § 89

‘Yonut os bb

‘oures oY} OI] BAL

‘os lbp

“Onur sv wep lo

"SY OYTT kalo

Sv lbjs

“TOU PAB

900} RPP

‘usyy kb

‘qeyy B

“QATIVTILMIOL)

“TOTJOYM Bole

“YOnUL MO wb

“QUAL OMT] We Rte

¢ MOY Hs te

‘TOAOTIOYM RIS

‘TOYA Erle

“YOY ‘oy is

“OATqe]OY

"youut yyy BU

“ACM 4VYZ UT Le lke

‘qeYy ONT] Alte

dG ToUyiypAr 22 Ye “TOYPYY BB

d olgtpa ee ‘atoyy RPL

¢ USM be Bele . “u9yy ee

¢ OUM Lelte 10 te “geyy Lhe

"AATIVSOIIOJUT Doig

“19q WAN NT

“Yonut sty] WP ke 6)

Ayuenty

“SIG OYT[ ban “sosUOyUT

‘snyy len *TOUUR AT

“Toyyy DBer |

( ‘aoe

‘atoy RPA J

“MOU LBD an

‘sly &

‘OATPV.IYSUOWO(T

180 NT

§ 90.]

CARDINALS, (

Cuaprer VIT.

NUMERALS.

§ 90. The following are the Cardinals up to 100.

that they differ from those in use in Hindi.

sary to transliterate them.

Q Bai

2 fF

R aif

3 aif

Yuta

¢ gt

c WIS

& aT

io al

AQ GE

WR ALE

U8 Ie

8 BIE

QU WHE

(¢ STE or HSE

(S ae

Ye BS

Ue Bast

x0 dla

It will be observed

It has not been thought neces-

RY EH

RR FTEE

23 aa

28 aaa

Ry Ute

ad wala

R98 AARa

R= Wsiea

Re Jadta

zo aa

BX Tada

22 ata

Ba aala

a8 alate

ane da

ag ala

20 a ha

av Faia

Re SAAT or SaTATHNa

go @Tata

48 CARDINALS.

Bt BHATIA éo urate or aaaly

a2 Fata €= asats or asafs or Beate

83 a atta ¢e saeute

ag ATaTHta eo Bute

ay Tata ot BaeTAe

ed SAMA 92 Teufs

go & aria 08 Feats

gt Wsatsla 98 aTeate

ge SaAUTS or VaaATa «sy qaeafs

we WUTa o¢ Heals

YR TATITT 99 Fats

YR ATT = ¥seute

us facaa oe Saat

us Baa co welt

yy Taga se warat

ud BUA <2 Fae or THe

YO Haat ca aaret

us Boras =e Feet

ve Saate <y TaTet

go atts sf Saret

€. umafs or umefe = $9. Bae

€z grate or atafe su Wsrit

€a facafs or facafe se aatet

és Fiat or Wate ce aa

éyiate or Wale 9 et aatay

é¢ Sarafs or Saale

€2 FUAT or Fla

[§ 90,

—

| a a Scat

§§ 91—93.] ORDINALS. 49

&3 aaag e9 Faaaa

oN N y nN

£8 UWRF és WoTag

euuaiaa ee faatat

ed SAT Xoo a

ORDINALS.

§ 91. Ordinals are simple in their formation and run as follows :—

afea first. ataa seventh.

Re :

eTaz second. saa eighth.

aa third ata ninth.

ais or afta fourth. aya tenth.

uraa fifth. auizea eleventh.

Sa sixth.

Etcetera; the ordinals of the remaining numbers being formed by adding

@ as a termination.

FRactTiIonAL NUMBERS.

§ 92. The following are useful: —

Wat a quarter.

ware a half.

‘Gta three quarters; or, less by a quarter.

aa at one and a quarter; or, plus a quarter.

Sart one and a half ; or, plus a half.

AGGREGATE NUMBERS,

§ 93. Note the form ¢a both.

50 THE VERB. [§§ 94—100.

PART EIT:

THE VERB.

CHaprer VIII.

PRELIMINARY,

§ 94. The Maithil verb delights in a redundancy of forms. Like

all partially cultivated languages, it has few parts of which there are

not two or three optional forms. These optional forms are not local pecu-

liarities, but are all used by the same speaker as his fancy or as the rhythm

of the sentence dictates. I cannot find out that they represent any

different shades of meaning. I shall throughout the following paradigms

give first the forms most commonly used, and shall then note after each

tense, the optional forms which I have been able to collect.

§ 95. The Maithil verb is of three kinds—active, neuter, and passive. I

shall not deal with the passive verb now but shall treat of its peculiarities in

another section. The difference between active (or transitive) and neuter

(or intransitive ) verbs will be treated of further on in this section.

§ 96. The verb has no moods, in the sense of those which we find in

Greek or Latin,—that is to say two or more moods, each with its own array

of tenses. It has, it is true, a conditional, an imperative, and an infinitive

form, but these have few tense forms, and it is more convenient to consider

them as tenses, like the alas (tempora) or tenses of Sanskrit.

§ 97. Taking them in this sense, there are nine commonly used tenses

in Maithili, corresponding to the nine tenses, mentioned by Mr. Ethering-

ton, as being commonly used in Hindi ;—vzz. 1. the Present, 2. the Imper-

fect, 3. the Past, 4. the Perfect, 5. the Pluperfect, 6. the Future. 7. the

Retrospective Conditional, 8. the Prospective Conditional, 9. the Im-

perative.

§ 98. These tenses have no number, but they make up for this by

having in transitive verbs each no less than twenty four personal forms,

each of which has many varieties. Intransitive verbs have half that number

of forms.

§ 99. Inthe first place, it has two genders, and hence there are

twelve pairs of forms, one member of each pair being used when the subject

of the verb is masculine, and the other when it is feminine.

§ 100. Again, there are three persons, the first person, the second

person, and the third person, each of which is determined also by the subject

of the verb. There are thus in transitive verbs four masculine and four

§§ 101—103. | THE VERB. ‘ 51

feminine forms, and in intransitive verbs two masculine and two feminine

forms (each with its varieties), for each person, and it now remains to consider

these personal forms.

§ 101. I shall first deal with the four personal forms of the transitive

verb. These four forms exhibit to a wonderful degree the luxuriance of the

language. They depend not only on the subject, buton the object of the

verb. We are accustomed, in languages like Bangali, to meet with so called

Respectful and Disrespectful forms of the verb, which are used according to

the social position in the kingdom of ideas of the subject of the verb,

but in Maithili this distinction of rank is carried to a much greater length,

for the form of the word is not only governed by the social position of the

subject, but by that of the object. We thus have four forms of each person—

1. When the subject and object are both superior.

2. When the subject is superior, and the object inferior.

3. When the subject and object are both inferior.

4. When the subject is inferior, and the object superior.

Examples in order would be,—

1. He (a king) sees him (a king).

2. He (aking) sees him (a slave).

3. He (a slave) sees him (a king).

4. He (a slave) sees him (a slave).

In each of these sentences the word “ sees’? would be rendered by a

different form of the verb.

§ 102. These different forms I have called as follows :-—

1. Double Honorific.

2. Honorifie-non-Honorifiec.

3. Double non-Honorific.*

4. Non-Honorific-Honorific.

The first is that form in which the subject and the object are both superior.

The second is that in which the subject issuperior and the object inferior.

The third, that in which subject and object are both inferior; and the fourth

that in which the subject is inferior, and the object superior.

§ 103. The intransitive verb has no object, and hence its form cannot be

determined by the object. It has hence for each gender and person only

two forms, depending only on the subject.—It prefers (but by no means

universally) forms corresponding to the Honorific-non-honorific and Double

non-honorific of the transitive verb. That is to say it prefers the forms

which, in a transitive verb, show the object to be inferior. The Honorific form

* This is the general rule. Practically, however, we often find the 1st and 3rd forms used,

when no special respect is attributed to the object.

52 THE VERB. [§§ 104—109.

of the intransitive verb, corrésponds to the Honorific non-honorific of the

transitive and similarly the non-honorific,to the double non-honorific. Besides

the above distinction there are some important differences of conjugation

between the transitive and intransitive verb, which will be noted further on.

§ 104. I shall commence by describing the formation of the transitive

verb, as being the fuller of the two, and shall then proceed to note the points

in which the intransitive verb differs from it.

§ 105. The infinitive of the verb ends in 774 ab, or owg eb, and the con- -

jugational base or root of the verb may be found by cutting off this 44 ad, or

uq eb, from the infinitive. Thus @aq dekhabd is the infinitive mood, and means

“to see.” Cutting off 374 ab we obtain @q dekh, which is the root.

§ 106. By adding, the termination tq ait to the root we obtain the

present participle. Example, aa dekhait, “seeing”.

§ 107. By adding the termination °=@ al to the root we obtain the

past participle. Example, @wa dekhal, “ seen”.

§108. From these four forms, the root, the present participle, and the

past participle, all the tenses of a verb are formed, viz.—

Four from the root,

1. The Prospective Conditional or Simple Present.

2: The Future.

3. The Imperative, and

4. The Retrospective Conditional.

Two from the present participle,

1, The Present (Periphrastic), and

2. The Imperfect.

Three from the past participle,

-od, "The Past:

2. The Perfect:

3. The Pluperfect.

Note that in the High Hindi the Retrospective Conditional is said to be

formed from the Present Participle. In Maithili it is apparently formed

from the root but the point is very doubtful.

. § 109. Before proceeding further, it is necessary to learn the conjuga-

tion ef the verb personal, which is as follows.

§§ 110—111.] THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 53

§110. The verb personal is irregular in many respects, different parts

being derived from three different roots, of which the infinitives are

or are supposed to be.

1. wachhab, to be.

2. faaa thikab, to stand (?)

3. «wea rahab, to remain.

It is also defective, only the present and imperfect forms existing. A past

participle is also borrowed from the irregular verb €@rzq hocd, to be.

Cuarrer VIII.

THE AUXILIARY VERB.

eq chhab §c., to be (not used in this form.)

Sielalale Present TrEnseE.

igamy ec.

Form I.

Used when no special respect ts attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

a. Honorifie.

Ist. P. ea, or waataa at ham, or ham ra sabh chhi,™ I

am, or We are.

2nd P. ret, or Bret aa Bt ahd, or ahd sabh chhi,{ you

are.

3rd P. st, or St aa Bfy 0, or 0 sabh chhath’, © he is, or

they are.

(1) Optional forms of et are fet chhiai, and feta chhiaik. The

forms feat chhiau, festa chhiauk and fesse chhiah’, are also used, but

only in the first person.

54. THE AUXILIARY VERBS. [§111.

b. Non-Honorifie.

Ist, P. wa, or watt aa Bt ham, or hamrda sabh chhi,” J

am, or we are,

29nd P. ate, or ateet aH we Oh, or tohard sabh chah

you are.

3rd P. gt, or wt aa ate 0, or o sabh achh’, he is or

they are.

(1) Optional forms for ¢t are fet chhiat, feta chhiaih, feat chhiau,

festa chhiauk, and fea chhiah’.

(2) Optional forms of @¥ chhah are & chhé, & chhai, eeR chhahak

and eta chhahih.

(4) Optional forms of =f aehh’ are® chhai, && chhaik, et chhau, and

aia chhauk.

FEMININE.

The feminine is the same as the masculine, except that in the 2nd

Person non-Honorific, the form efs chhah’h is substituted for ee chhak.

Form. II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASscULINE.

Honorific.

Ist. P. wa, or watt aa feats, ham, or ham ra sabh

chhiainh’, | am or we are.

2nd P. set, or wet aa feats ahd, or aha sabh chhiainh’,

You are.

3rd P. ait, or St aa watts 0, or 0 sabh chhathinh’, he is,

or they are.

(3) An optional form of eats chhathinh’, is waifes chhathinh’.

Non-Honorific.

Ist P. wa or gaat aa feet, ham or ham'rd sabh chhiainh’,

I am, or we are.

§ 112.) THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 55

Qnd P. ator ateat au Kul|e wh, or tohard sabh chha-

hinW, you are.

3rd. P. ait, or St aa Bele 0, or o sabh chhainh’, he is, or

they are.

FEMININE.

The Feminine is the same as the Masculine.

§112. Another form of the verb substantive present is derived from

the root fag thik It is conjugated as follows, personal pronouns and

meaning being omitted for the sake of brevity.

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MASscutine.

Honorific. Non-Honorijic.

Ist. P. fane thitah’n,* , Fane thikahi'

2nd P. fang thikal’n,’ faate thikch,

3rd P. faate thikdh, fam thik

(1) Optional forms for faare’ thikah’h are fafat thikiat, and fafau a

thikiaik. The forms fafaatt thikiau, fafaena thikiauk, and fafare thikiah’

are also used but only in the first person.

(2) Optional forms for faare thikadh (2nd Person non-Honorific) are

faa thiké, fan thikain, faaea thikahak, and faadta thikahtk.

(4) Optional forms for fear thik are ata thih, faa thikat, faaa thikatk,

faat thikau, and faata thikauk.

FEMININE.

Honorifie. Non-Honorifie.

Ist P. fawe thikal’ir,* fame thikal’n,:

2QndP. fan thikah’n,’ fants thokih,

8rd P. faate thikih,; atta thik’.

56 THE AUXILIARY VERBS. | [$s 1138—114.

(1) Optional forms of faawe thikah’n ave already given under the

masculine.

(2 & 3) An optional form of faaite thikth is faaiife thikth’.

(4) Optional forms of tf thzk’ are given under the masculine, as

optional forms of faa thik.

Form II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

Honorifie. Non-Honorvfic.

ist P. fafa fe thikiainh’,: fafaa tee thikiainh’,*

ond P. fufarfe thikiainh’, fanste thik’ hinh’ ,?

ard P. fanate thik thinh’ 3 fuatte thikainh’

(3) An optional form is faaetfe thik’thinh’.

FEMININE.

The Feminine is the same as the Masculine.

§ 113. wore. Wherever the persons of gt chhé can be used, the corres-

ponding forms of fae thikah’n can also be used. This rule is universal,

and must be noted. wt chhé is used as an auxiliary in forming the present

and perfect tenses of other verbs, and in those cases fame thikah’% can

always be substituted for it. In the verbal paradigms, I shall only give #

chhé asan auxiliary, but it must never be forgotten that faare can also be

used,

IMPERFECT TENSE.

§ 114. “] was” ete.

Foro I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

a. Honorifie.

Ist P. ea, or Batt Ha BA ham, or ham’rd sabh chhalal’n,

I was 07 we were.

§ 114.] THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 57

9nd P. wet, or Het wa ol ahd, or ahd sabh chhalalW’in,*

you were.

3rd P. ft, or Bt Ba Bare 9, or o sabh chhaldh3, he was or

they were.

(1) Optional forms of eae are Efat chhaliat, and wtatH chhaliaih.

The forms efaat chhaliau, efaata chhaliauk and wefaag chhaliah' are also

used, but only in the Ist Person.

b. Non-Honorijie.

Ist P. Ga, or Batt aa Bax ham, or ham’rd sabh chhalah’n,

I was, or we were.

2nd P. ats, or ateat aa Bare 0h, or tohari sabh chhaléh,

you were.

3rd P. gt, or at au wr 9, or 0 sabh chhal,* he was, or they

were.

(1) Optional forms of eq¥" chhalah’% are given above.

(2) Optional forms of wate chhaldh are Be chhalé, wa chhaldi, BqeH

chhaVhak, and BaetH chhal’ hih.

(8) Optional forms of @q chhal are wa chhalai, e4H chhalaik, Tat

chhalau, and watH chhalauk.

FEMININE.

‘Personal pronouns, and meanings are omitted to save space).

Honorific. Non-Honorifie.

Ist P. ware chhalal’n,: were chhalal’n,

Ind P. axe chhalal’n,’ eile chhalih,

3rd P. wate chhalihs ata chhal +

(1) Optional forms of eqs are given above,

(2&8) An optional form of ete chhalth is Batfe chhalth’,

(4) Optional forms of fq chhal’, are given under the masculine as

optional forms of ¢H chhal.

Form II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

a. Honorifie.

Ist P. wa, or waar aa alae ham, or ham’ré sabh

chhaliain’, Iam or we were.

2nd P. set or wet aa awlaefe ald, or ahd sabh

chhaliainh’, you were.

3rd PP. st or Bt aa wayte 0, or o sabh chhal thinh’.3 He

was or they were.

(3) An optional form of waar chhal’ thinh’, is watts chhal'thénh.’

6. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. wa or waar aa alaafe ham, or ham’ré sabh

chhaliainh’, Iwas, or we were.

Qnd P. ate, or areca aa gaat’ toh, or tohard sabh

chha’hinh’, You Hone.

3rd P. Sit, or Bt aa wate! o, or o sabh chhalainh’. He

was, or they were.

FEMININE,

The Feminine is the same as the Masculine.

§ 115. Another form of the imperfect of the verb substantive is formed

from the root t¢ rah. Itis conjugated as follows, Personal Pronouns

and meaning being omitted for the sake of brevity.

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MaAscunine

Honorifie. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. xetraht cet rah,

Qnd P. xet rahi? awe rahah,?

8rd PP. wefa rahath’? Bt rahau.'

58 THE AUXILIARY VERBS. [ §115,

§§ 116—117] THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 59

(1) Other forms are thet rahiat, tfetH rahiaih. The forms «feat

rahiau, feata rahiauk and tere rahiah’, are also used, but only in the

first person:

(2) Other forms are te rah, TeeH rahahak, and Testa rahahihk.

The Feminine is the same as the Masculine, except that the form téfe

vahah’% is substituted for te rahah of the 2nd Person non-Honorific.

Form IT.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

Honorifie. Non- Honorific.

ist P. <feefe rahiainh’, afte rahiainh’ |

Qnd P. «etfs rahiainh’,* ceulee ral’ hinh’?

3rd P. zeae ral’thinh’, Sle rahainh’.*

(8) Another form is teatfe rah’thinh’.

FEMININE.

The Feminine is the same as the Masculine.

§ 116. Norm. Wherever the persons of eqs chalah’n can be used, the

corresponding forms of tt rahé can also be used. This rule is universal,

andmust be noted. eae chhalah’% is used as an auxiliary in forming the

imperfect and pluperfect tenses of other verbs, and in those cases t¥t rahé

can always be substituted for it. In the verbal paradigms I shall only

give ae chhalah’h as an auxiliary, but it must never be forgotten that tet

vahé can also be used.

§117. The only remaining form in use is as follows :—

Past PARTICIPLE.

Masculine, 8a dhel.

Feminine, afa dhe’.

60 THE TRANSITIVE VERB. [§§ 118—12z2.

Cuaprer IX.

THE TRANSITIVE VERB.

§ 118. I now proceed to give the conjugation in full of the transitive

verb ¢aq dekhab to see. I shall not discuss the numerous personal termi-

nations, for they are too many, and their origin is too obscure for me to at-

tempt any satisfactory explanation concerning many of them. I shall

first, however, as briefly as possible describe the formation of the Tense

stems to which the personal terminations are attached.

§ 119. (1) Tenses formed from the Root.

a. The stem of the Prospective Conditional is the root itself unaltered,

to which the personal terminations are added directly.

§ 120. 6. The Future has two distinct stems, one formed by adding

°aq-ab directly to the root, and the second by adding °3q-a# either directly

to the root, or with anintermediate °¥-2 (in the latter case the initial °y-a@

of the stem termination being omitted). We thus get eqq dekhab, and eq

dekhat, or faa dekhit. To either of these stems the termination °a-ga,

can optionally be suffixed. It seems to me that one of these forms is

derived from the infinitive. That the future is frequently formed from

infinitives is well known to students of comparative philology. Familiar

examples are the Sanskrit wfaatfa bhavitasmi “I am to be’* or “T

shall be” and the French j’aimer-ai “I have to love’, or “I shall

love”. Inthe same way we have eqaq dekhab-ga “I go to see”, that

is “I shall see.” In ordinary conversation the final termination °7 ga

may be left out, but the above is the full form, and it is that to which we

must look for a derivation.

§ 121. With respect tothe stem @faaq dekhit or aq dekhat, I have no

distinct suggestion to make as to its formation. It seems to be connected

in some way with the present participle, but how I do not know.

§ 122. I venture to suggest one derivation of this form, which I only

put forward to invite discussion, and not with any persuasion as to its truth.

Is it possible that ¢faa dekhit may be connected with a low Sanskrit form of

efstat darsita, the less common form of the periphrastie future of gx dris

“to see ’P The derivation does not seem to me to be very violent, but I

have no proof to offer of it, and only put it forward asa suggestion and

nothing more.

* afaqt “a be-er” is evidently closely connected with the infinitive

afaq’ “to be”.

§§ 123—130. ] THE TRANSITIVE VERBS. 61

§ 128. The stem of the Imperative is the root itself, to which the

personal terminations are added direct.

§ 124. d. Thave been in some doubt as to whether I ought to class

the Retrospective Conditional as derived from the root, or from the present

participle. In the cognate modern languages the corresponding tense

is usually said to be derived from the latter, but I hesitate in following

suit in this case, the characteristic diphthong & ad, of the present participle

being absent from the tense, except in one form of the 8rd person non-

Honorific (aa dekhait). As the stem of this tense is similar in form to

the second stem of the future (viz. faa dekhit) I have classedit as a tense

derived from the root.

§ 125. Tenses formed from the Present Participle.

a6. Both Present and Imperfect are periphrastic; and are formed

by subjoining the conjugated Present and Imperfect tenses of the auxiliary

verb directly to the Present Participle.

§ 126. (8) Tenses formed from the Past Participle.

a. The stem of the past tense is formed by adding the personal

terminations to the Past Participle direct.

§ 127. b. There are two conjugational forms of the Perfect.

The first is formed by subjoining the word 3f&% achh’ “ he is ” to the

conjugated Past tense. How any meaning is arrived at out of this queer

compound I do not pretend to say.

§ 128. The second conjugational form of the Perfect is obtained by

subjoining the conjugated Present tense of the verb substantive to a slightly

modified form of the Past Participle.

§ 129 ¢. The Pluperfect is formed by subjoining the Imperfect tense

of the verb substantive to the same modified form of the Past Participle

which we observed in the Perfect.

§ 180. It will be convenient, as an aid to memory, to give the tenses in

the order given in § 108, and not in order of time.

62 THE CONJUGATIUN OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. L §§ 131—132.

CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB.

ACTIVE VOICE.

Model Verb @aaq dekhab, “to see’.

PRINCIPAL Parts.

§ 131.

Root 1 @q dekh, “see.”

Present participle... @@a dekhait, “ seeing”.

Past participle .. ea dekhal, “seen”.

1. Four tenses are formed from the root ¢q dekh.

§ 132. a. THE PROSPECTIVE CONDITIONAL 07 SIMPLE PRESENT.

“ (If) I see,” (If) I should see,” ete.*

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscumine.

Honorifie. Non-Honorifie.

Ast. P... Gt dekhi,’ eat dekhi.

2nd P. eat dekhi,’ eee dekhah,’

3rd P. Buty dekhath’,? Zuat dekhau.s

(1) Other forms are @fa@t dekhiai, fata dekhiaik. The forms 2faat

dekhiau, fasta dekhiauk, and fase dekhiah, are also used, but only in

the first person.

(2) Other forms are @q dekh, @aeaH dekhahak, Zasra dekhahth.

The Feminine is conjugated like the masculine; except that in the 2nd

person non-Honorific the form @a@e dekhah is not used, the form af

dekhah’n% being used instead.

* In poetry this tense is frequently used in the sense of tbe Present. It is then called

the Simpite Present in contradistinction to the PrrtpHrastic Present formed

from the Present Participle.

§ 133.] THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 63

Form. II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

Honorifie. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. feet dekhiainh’, efutfe dekhiainh’,*

Qnd P. ears dethiainh’,: euaEts| dekh’ hinh’,?

3rd P. 2waafee dekh’ thinh’ 3 2u\ fe dekhaunh’.*

(1) Another form is @faattfs dekhiaunh’, which, however, is only used

in the first person.

The FEMININE is the same as the masculine.

§ 133.

6. Tur Furoure.

“T shall or will see,” etc.

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MAScuUumInNE.

Honorific. Non-Honorifie-

Ist P. Gea dekhab, @uq dekhab,'

Qnd P. e@aaq dekhab, 2uae dek’ bah,’

3rd P. @uate dekh’tah,; aaa dekhat.4

(1) Other forms are @aa dekh’bai, Fata deh baik, Tafa dekW tia,

afata dekh’ tiaik, fade dekhitdh’n, and efaag dekhiah’ The forms

Saat dekh’ bau, asta dekh’ bauk, afaat dekl’tiau, Zafasta dekh’ tiauk,

Sfest dekhiau, festa dekhiauk, and eatq dekhiga, are also used, but only

in the first person.

(2) Other forms are qq” dekh’bé, GaaeH dekh’ bahak, and eaaetn

dekh bahth.

64 THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. § 134]

(4) Other forms are aa dekl’tat, Baia dekl’taik, Saat dekh’tau,

eaadia dekh’ tauk.

In the Femryiye the following forms are substituted.

For 2, ade dekh ban in.

For 3, aate deki’tih, or afate dekW tih’,

For 4, €afa dekhat’ instead of aq dekhat. The remaining forms are

common to both genders.

Form ITI.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASscuumine.

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

ist... zuate dekh’ bainh’ ,* zuate dekh’ bainh’,*

2nd P, uate dekh bainh y eusrete dekl’ bahunh’ ,?

Srd P. uate dekh thainh ,3 ewmatee dekh’ tainh’

(3) Another form is @aatfs dekh’ think’.

The FeMINIneE the same as the masculine.

Nore. That to all the above forms, with the exception of Gata dekhéqa,

the termination °q-ga, can optionally be added. In this syllable the in-

herent °4-a, is pronounced. E. g. aq dekhab, or Faaq dekhab'ga.

§ 134.

Tue IMPERATIVE.

“Let me see,” “See thou,” ete.

Fom I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscumine.

Honorifie. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. eq dekhi," eu dekhi,"

ond P. ea dekhi,* euz dekhah,?

8rd P. Seay dekhath’3 Sul dekhau.s

* Nore, The final °3-« in this form is pronounced.

235. ] THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 65

(1) Other forms are @fat dekhiat, @fata dekhiaih, and ?faxe

dekhiah’. The forms éfaat dekhiau, and éfaata dekhiauk, are also used,

but only in the first person.

(2) Other forms are @q dekh, ae dekhahak, and eaeita dekhahth.

The FeMmrntyz is conjugated like the masculine, except that in the 2nd

person non-Honorific the form ae dekhah, is not used, the form af?

dekhal’n or ats dekhah’n being used instead.

Form II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscuLine.

Honorifte. Non-Honoriyte.

Ist P. 2fetfe dekhiainh’, Bfetfe dekhiainh’,:

2nd P. efetfe dekhiainh’, audfe dekh’ Ininh’,’

Siael 12, auute dekh’ thinh 2ualfe dekhaunh’s

(1) Another form is @faatfe dekhiaunh’

The FEMININE is the same as the masculine.

§ 135. d. Tue Rerrospective Conpirionat.

“Tf I had seen,” ete.

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MaAscuLine.

Non- Honorific.

Sfaas dekhital’n,?

@faase dekhitah,’

Honorifie.

Ist P. @feass dekhitah’n,*

Ind P. efaas dekhitah’n,’

3rd P. 2faafa dekhitatl’ Zia dekhait.

66 THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. § 136]

(1) Other forms are @fafat dekhitiat, and @fafata dekhitiaik. The

forms @fafast dekhitiau, efafastta dekhitiauk, and éfaaz dekhitah’, are

also used, but only in the 1st Person.

() Other forms are faq dekhité, Zafaasa dekhitahak, and efaasta

dekhitahtk.

(4) Other forms are @fae dekhitai, @faan dekhitaih, efaat dekhitau

and @fadta dekhitawh.

The FEMININE is conjugated like the masculine, except that, in the 2nd

person non-Honorific, the form @faae dekhitah is not used; the form

yew

efante dekhitah’h or efaeate dekhitih’% being used instead. |

Form II. |

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscuLInNE.

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. @fafatte dekhitiainh’, fafatte dekhitiainh’

ond P, Bfafaate dekhitiainh’ afaasi dekhitahinh’,

Srd P. Sharaf dekhit tink’, — Baa dekhitainh’.'

(8) Another form is @f@atfe dekhit thinw’.

The FEMININE is the same as the masculine.

§ 136.

2. Two tenses are formed from the Present Participle aq dekhatt,

a. THE PRESENT.

““T see or am seeing,” ete.

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MASscumine.

Fonorific. Non- Honorific.

Ist P. Sea st dekhait chi. 2a Bt dekhait chhi,

ond P. tan Bt dekhait chhi,' 28a wee dekhait chhah,

3rd P, 28a wfa dekhait chhath 2a safe dekhait achh’s

§ 136.] THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 67

(1) For the auxiliary @t chhé may be used fet chhiat, and feta

chhiaik. The forms feat chhiau, fetta chhiauk, and fess chhiah’, ave also

used, but only in the first person.

(2) Other forms of the auxiliary are % chhé, chhai, BER chhahak,

and w¥ta chhahth.

(4) Other forms of the auxiliary are & chhat, eH chhaik, Bt chhau,

and eta chhauk.

FEMININE.

The Femryine is conjugated like the masculine, except that the feminine

form of the Present Participle, @afa dekhait’, is used instead of the mascu-

line form @aq dekhait. E. g. fafa et dekhait? chhé, instead of faq at

dekhatt chhé. The form @@fq we dekhait’ chhah (which might be expected

as the 2nd person non-Honorific) is not used, @afa af¥ dekhait’ chhah’ hi

or fafa ef dekhait’ chhal’ a being substituted.

Form IT.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

ITonorific.

Ist P. 28a fette dekhait chhiainh’,'

ond P. 2aa feefee dekhait chhiainh’,

3rd P. aa wate dekhait chhathinh’,°

Non-Honorific.

Ist P. aq feet dekhail chhiainh’,

2nd P. aa eels dekhait chhahinl ,’

Srdures 2aa ate dekhaitt chhainh’ 4

(8) Another form of the Auxiliary is etfs chhathinh’.

68 THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. [ § 137.

The FEMININE is conjugated like the masculine, except that the feminine

form of the Present Participle is used as explained above.

OxsERVE.—In all the above forms, when masculine, the final °@-é, of the

Present Participle may be, and usually is, omitted. The Participle and

auxiliary then form one word. E.g. faq wt dekhait chhi, or zaat

dekhaichht. Similarly, when feminine, the final °fe-?’ of the participle may

be omitted. E.g. eefa et dekhait’ chhi, or Gat dekhaichht.

§ 187. b. Toe ImMpPERFEcT.

“J was seeing,” etc.

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MaAscutLine.

Honorifie.

ist P. faq wast dekhait chhalah’n,*

ond P. fea way dekhait chhalah’ii,

8rd P. 2@a gare dekhait chhaldh,3

Non-Honorific.

Ist P. 28a eas dekhait chhalaWn,?

2nd P. faa ware dekhait chhalgh,?

8rd P. fea wa dekhait chhal.t

(1) Other forms of the auxiliary #43 chhalah’%, ave wfat chhaliai,

and wfqta chhaliaik. The forms efaat chhaliau, efatta chhaliauk, and

as chhalah’ are also used, but only in the first person.

(2) Other forms of the auxiliary are we” chhalé, ee chhalti, TARA

chhaVhak, eaetH chhal hik.

(4) Other forms of the auxiliary are ga chhalai, wan chhalaik, wat

chhalau, and eatH chhalauk,

§ 137] THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 69

FEMININE.

As explained under the head of the present tense, the Present Participle

takes the form 2afa dekhatt’ in the feminine. Also, in the feminine, the

form waite chhalth, or etfs chhalth’ is substituted for wate chhaléh, of

the 3rd person Honorific, and 2nd person non-Honorific, and the form @f¢

chhal’ is substituted for w¢ chhal of the 8rd person non-Honorific.

Form II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

Mascutine.

Honorific.

Ist P. 2aa wfeefe dekhait chhaliainh’ ,

Qnd P. faa wfaete dekhait chhaliainh’,’

3rd P. tea eayie dekhait chhal thinh’ 3

Non- Honorijic.

Ist P. 2a wfaetes dekhait chhaliainh’ ,"

2nd P. 2aa gues dekhait chhal hinh ,?

3rd P. uaa Sate dekhatt chhalainh’ +

(3) Another form of the auxiliary is eaeife chhal’thinh’.

FEMININE.

As in the Present Tense, the present participle takes the feminine termi-

nation °fq-¢’.. In other respects the feminine of this form is the same as

the masculine.

Observe.—As in the present tense, the masculine termination ° q-¢, and

the feminine termination ° fq-¢’ of the present participle may optionally

be omitted. E. g. @@a wae dekhait chhalah’ai or euae dekhai-

chhalah’%. The latter is the more usual form.

70 TILE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. [§ 138

§ 138.

3. Three tenses are formed from the Past Participle aq dekhal.

a. Tue Past.

“T saw,” ete.

Form I.

Used when no special vespect is attributed to the object.

MAscurine.

Honorific. Non- Honortfic.

Ist P. Seax dekl’lal’n,y eaas dekl lah’ i,"

2nd P. faax dekh’ lal’ ing emae dekl’lah,

3rd P. euaafee dekh’lanh’ 3 zuaaa dekhalakt

(1) Other forms are Zea dekhal, Zafat dekh'liat, FafataH dekhaliaik,

eaaq dekl’lai taaH dek’laik, and Zadt dekW’lé. The forms Zafer

dekh liau, Zafasta dekh liauk, tat dekh’lau, Faata dekl’lauk, and

zafaqas dekh'liah’ are also used, but only in the first person.

(2) Other forms are @@@ dekh’lé, aa’ dekh di, ZeaqeH dekh’ lahak,

and gaqeta dekh lahth.

(4) Other forms are Faqaq dehal’kai, ZaaHH dekhalhaik, Zaaat

dekhal kau, and aqua dekhal kauk.

FEMININE.

The following forms are substituted :—

In (1). For aq dekhal; Fafa dekhal.’

In (2). For @aa@u dekh’lah; efafetts dekh lih’, or Faq fe dekh lv'h’.

Form ITI.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

Fonovrifie. Non-Honorific.

Ist: &P. uae dekh lainh’, * uate dekh lainh’,*

Qnd P. twat dekh’lainh’,* 2urete dekh’lahiinh’,’

drd_ P. euaaie dekhal'thinl’ 3 Suantee dekhal’kainh’ +

§ 139.] THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB.

(1) Another form is @afqttes dekh liainh’.

(2) Another form is @aqutfe dekhal’thinh’.

FEMININE.

The FEMININE is the same as the Masculine.

§139. b. Tue Perrecr.

“ T have seen”, ete.

First ConsuGationan Form.

Formed by adding the third person present non-honorific of the auxi-

liary verb, as a suffix to the various forms of the past.

Form I. ~

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

Honoréfic.

Ist P. Senge ate dekh’lal’n achh’,:

2nd P. tuas ate dekl’lal’n achh’,

3rd P. Saas ate dekh'lanh’ achh’,

Non- Honorific.

Ist P. 2eax afte dekllal’in achh’,

Qnd P. eae she dekh’lah achh’,’

srd_ P. cuan afe dekh’lak achh’

(1) Other forms are aq afe dekhal achh’, Fafat afe dekh liaiachh’,

zafata afte dekh liaik achh’, aa afe dekl’lai achh’, aaa ale dekh’ laik

achh’, and @aet afe dekh’ lé achh’. The forms @afaan safe dekh’ liau achh’,

2ufaata ate dekh liauk achh’, act ate dekh’lau ach’, Zana ate dekh-

lauk achh’, and @afas ate dekh’ lial’ ach’, are also used but only in the

first person,

THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. [§ 189

be |

(2) Other forms are qa afe dekh’léachh’, eat’ afe dekh’l&i achh’,

eaqen ate dekh'lahak achh’, eaaqsta ate dekh’ lahik achh’.

(4) Other forms are aaa fe dekhal’ kai achh’, aaa afe dekhal -

kaik achh’, faaat ale dekhal’kau ach’, and qaata ate dekhal kauk

achh’.

FEMININE.

The following forms are substituted :—

In (1) For aq dekhal; Gafa dekhal’.

In(2) Foréa@as dekh’lah; Gafefe dekh lih’, or Saat fe dekV1e'h’.

Form II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MASCULINE.

Honorifie.

lst P. @uafie afe dekh’lainh’ achh’,

ond P. euaate afte deki’lainh’ achh’,

ard P. euaafe safe dekhakthinh’ achh’.

Non-Honorifie.

Ist P. feat ate deki’lainh’ achh’,

ond P. euadfe safe dekh’lahinh’ achh’,

3rd P. @uante ate dekhal’kainh’ achh’.

(1) Another form is @afatfe af dekh’'liainh’ achh’.

(3) Another form is @aaatfee fe dekhal’ thuil’ achh’.

FEMININE.

The Frminuye is the same as the Masculine,

§:140.] THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 73

§ 140. Seconp ConsuGATIonaL Form.

Formed by adding the present tense of the auailiary verb to an inflected

Sorm of the Past Participle.

Form I,

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscuLINeE.

Honorifie. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. Saa et dekh’le chhi,’ aaa at dekh’lé chhi,

Qnd P. See at dekh'la chit, Bae ee deki’le chhah,

38rd P. tua efy deki’lé chhath’3 tad ate dekh’lé achh’ 4

(1) Other forms of the auxiliary may be substituted, as in the Present

Tense. g. v.

(2) Other forms of the auxiliary may be substituted, as in the Present

Tense. g. v.

(4) Other forms of the auxiliary may be substituted, as in the Present

Tense. g. v.

FEMININE.

The Femrntnz is the same as the masculine, except that in the 2nd Per-

son Non-Honorific the form @aa” we dekh’lé chhahis. not used ; the form

faa afe dekh’ lé chhaWh or Saat &fE dekh’ lé chh&h’h being substituted.

Form II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscuLnineE.

Honorific.

Ist P. faa feefe deki’lée chhiainh’,

2nd P. euaa feefe dekl’le chhiainh’

3rd P. Bae Rafe dekl’le chhathinh’;

74 THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. [§ 141

Non- Honorific.

Ist P. @a@e feats dekh'lé chhiainh’,:

2nd P. 2aa eel dekh’lé chhahinh’,?

3rd P. 2@uaa’ Sf dekh’lz chhainh’ 4

(3) As in the Present, another form of the auxiliary is eaife

chhathinh’.

FEMININE.

The FremrINreE is the same as the masculine.

§ 141. ce. THE PLUPERFECT.

“T had seen,” ete.

Form I.

Used when no special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscULIne.

Honorifie.

ist P. @aaq was dekh’le chhalal’ny

Qnd P. @ae was dekh’lé chhalal’in,*

8rd P. @aa’ ware deki’lé chhaldl’ 3

Non-Honorific.

Ist P. Gea was dekh’lé chhalah’i,

Qnd P. 2ua’ ware dekh’le chhaldh,’

3rd P. faa wa dekh’lé chhal.*

(1) Other forms of the auxiliary may be substituted as in the Imper-

fect Tense. g. v,

§ 141] THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 75

(2) Other forms of the auxiliary may be substituted as in the Imper-

fect Tense. g. v.

(4) Other forms of the auxiliary may be substituted as in the Imper-

fect Tense. g, v.

FEMININE.

In the Frmuyine the following forms are substituted.—

In (2&8). For aq ware dekWlé chhaléh; Fae wets deklé

chhalth’, or aq weitfe dekh’ lé chhalth’. The remaining forms are common

to both genders.

In (4). For @@q@ ¢q deki’lé chhal; aq aia dekWlé chhal’.

Form II.

Used when special respect is attributed to the object.

MAscuuinge.

Honorifte.

ist P. 2ea afaete dekh’lé chhaliainh’

9nd P. eae wfaet dekh’lé chhaliainh’,:

3rd P. gua grate dekh’'lé chhal'thinh’

Non-Honorijie.

lst P. faa wtaefe dekh’ le chhaliainh’

ond P. eau Bante dekh'lé chhal hin,’

3rd P. Zea watts dekh’le chhalainh’

(3) Another form is eae waite dekl’lé chhal think’.

FEMININE.

The FEMININE is the same as the masculine,

76 THE CONJUGATION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. [ §§ 143—44.

§ 142. Participles —Declinable.

ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES.

Present, ‘seemg’.

MASCULINE.

Sua dekhait.

FEMININE.

Safa dekhait’.

Past, ‘seen’.

MascuLine.

zuu, fea Ha, dekhal, or dekhal bhel.

FEMININE.

zu, aaa af, dekhal’, or dekhal bhel’.

§ 143. Participles— Indechinable.

CoNJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES.

‘seeing’, ‘having seen’.

efea dekhika, Sfan’ dekhikai, Sfean dekhikaika,

ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES.

Sfaate dekhital’n, ‘on seeing’, ‘in the act of seeing’.

§ 144. Precative or Respectful Forms.

1 RESPECTFUL IMPERATIVE.

faa ata dekhal jdy and Gea sat dckhal jdo, ‘be you,’ or

‘ye pleased to see’.

§§ 145—48.] THE INTRANSITIVE VERE. 17

2. RESPECTFUL FuTURE.

Zan sua ackhal gdet, or aa BAN dekhal jdet'ya, ‘you

will see,’ or ‘will be pleased to see’.

33, Mitp IMPERATIVE.

SS °

ef dekhiha, ‘see you’, or ‘see ye’.

INFINITIVE ov VERBAL Nowun.

§ 145. aq dekhab, ‘to see’.

CHAPTER X.

THE INTRANSITIVE VERB.

§ 146. Theoretically speaking, as already pointed out, the Neuter Verb

should be wanting in all those tense-forms, which in the Transitive Verb

fall under Form II ; i.e. those in which special respect is attributed to the

object. Such, however, is not altogether the case, for the Neuter Verb, while

affecting most of the tense-forms of Form I, also indulges pretty freely in

those of Form II. What tense forms it uses and what it discards will be

learned from the following paradigms.

§ 147. The conjugation of the Past Tense, in the Neuter Verb, differs in

many respects from that of the same tense in the Verb Transitive, and

should be noted.

In the Transitive Verb there are two conjugational forms of the Perfect

Tense. In the Neuter Verb there is only one, It is formed by subjoining the

word 4f% achh’, to the conjugated Past Tense. Only one or two inflexions

of the second conjugational form are used in the 2nd person non-honorific,

$148. The verb aaq sétab ‘to sleep’, is an example of a verb whose

78 THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. [§ 149

root-vowel (& 7%) is long. When such a vowel is at & * $7 or %, it is liable

to be shortened in certain cases.

viz. It is shortened

(1) If it is followed in the same word by another long vowel or diphthong.

Example, adt sutau. The only exceptions to this are certain forms of the

first and second persons of the Prospective Conditional and the Imperative,

and the anomalous Future form a@tt sutéga.

(2) If it is followed in the same word by three syllables, any of which

contains either the vowel = 7, or the vowel J w. Example, fase sutiah’.

If neither of these vowels follows, the root-vowel may be long or short.

Example, qaea sdétahak, or FasH sutahak.

(3) Ifit be followed in the same word by any number of syllables more

than three. Example, qaaea sutabahak : but qaeH stétahak, where only

three syllables, none of which contains either <7 or 3 w, follow the root-vowel

Rt.

(4) Also in the Mild Imperative, the vowel is shortened in spite of the

foregoing rules. Thus:—

ufae sutiha, ‘be pleased to sleep’.

Model verb aaa sitab, ‘to sleep’.

§-149,- Roots iss ie: aussie “CSU... “sleeper:

Present Participle ... gaa sutait, ‘sleeping’.

Past Participle .,.. ... @ae sétal, ‘slept’.

* There is a considerable diversity of custom with regard to the shorten-

ing of =T d. Some speakers shorten it as often as & @ or & @ are shortened.

Others always keep it lengthened ; and others again only keep it lengthened

when 31 é& is the root-vowel of an Activeor Causal Verb, which has been

lengthened from the radical 4 a of a Neuter Verb, as will be seen later on.

An example of the last case is the aT in atta marab, ‘to kill’, which is Wine

Active form of the Neuter Verb axa marab, ‘to die’, This last custom 1s

probably the most correct of the three.

§§ 150—151.] THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. 79

§ 150. 1. Four tenses are formed from the root, Ta své.

a. Tur Prospective ConpDITIONAL 07 SIMPLE PRESENY.

‘(If) I see’, ‘I see’, etc.

Honorifie. Non-Honorifie,

Ist P. eat siti, Sat sviti,"

2nd P. eat siti," ae stitah,’

3rd P, aafa stitath’,3 Gat sutau.4

(1) Other forms are afat sutiai, and afata sutiaik. The forms afaatt

sutiau, Ofatta sutiauk, and efaas sutiah’ are also used, but only in the

first person. The form faut sutiainh’ is also used, but only in the

first and second persons Honorific.

(2) Other forms are qaxfe, sut’hinh’, qaeH sitahak, and atta

sutahth.

(3) Another form is Tag lrs sul’ think’.

(4) Another form is yates sutainh’,

The FEMININE is as the masculine, except that in the second person

Non-Honorific the form qa¥ séitah, is not used, the form wqafe sdtah’h or

uate suta@h’ 7 being used instead.

§ 151. 6. Tue Furure.

‘I shall or will sleep’, ete.

MASCULINE.

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. @aa sitab,’ aaa suitab,*

2nd PF, aaa sitab,’ ears sit bah,’

3rd P, gaare sut tah, Baa seitat 4

(1) Other forms are qaa suf’bai, qaaH sut’baik, qafad sul’ tial, qafats

sub tiaik, afaas sutitah’n, The form aaafe sut’bainh’ is used only in

“80 THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. [§ 152

the first and second person Honorific. The forms qaat sut’bau, qaara

sut bauk, aataat sul’ tiau, qafasta sut tiauk, afaat sutiau, afasta sutiauk,

afaas sutich’, and ata satiga, are also used, but only in the first person.

(2) Other forms are qa” sutbé, qaawaH sul’bahak, and qaaeta

sut bahétk.

(3) Other forms are qaatfs sud’thénh’, and aagie sul’thinh’.

(4) Other forms are qaafe sut’tainh’, Yadt sul’tau, qaata sul'tawk,

aad sul’tai, qaan sut’taik.

In the Femryrve the following forms are substituted.

For (2), qaafe su?’ bah’ i.

For (8), qadte sut’tth, or qafafe sut'tch’.

For (4), aafa sétat’,

Nore. That to all the above forms, with the exception of att sdtéga,

the termination 4 ga, can optionally be added. In this syllable the inhe-

rent 4a, is pronounced. E. g. aaa séitab, or qaaT séitab’ga.

§ 152. Cc. Tar IMPERATIVE.

‘Let me sleep,’ ‘Sleep thou,’ ete.

MAscuciIneE.

Honorifie. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. Sq suti," QI sti,

2nd P. eM sili,’ aa stitah,’

3rd P. eae siitatl’ 3 Bat sutaw.4

(1) Other forms @fat sutiai, afaten sutiack, afert sutiau, afastta su-

tiauk, and afaae sutiah’. The forms faite sutiainh’, and afaaite su-

tiaunh’, ave also used but only in the first person and second person Hono-

rific.

(2) Other forms are qaxfe sul hank’, wa sit, AAEH sttahak, and

Hasta sutahek.

(3) Another form is qaafe sud’ thinh’.

§ 1538—154.] THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. 8]

The Femintve is as the masculine, except that in the’ feminine of the

second person Non-Honorific the form #a¥ siétah, is not used ; the form

Wate sdétah’ hn or HAE sitdh’hR being used instead,

§ 153. d. ‘Tur Rerrospecrive ConpImrionan.

Tf I had slept,’ ete,

MASCULINE,

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. afaag sutiiah’n,’ gtaas sutitah’n,'

2nd P. afaas sutitah’n,: olare sutitah,’

srd P. gfaaty sutitath’,* aaa sutatt.t

(1) Other forms are @fafat sutitiat, afafata sutitiaik. The forms

afatast sutitiau, afafastta sutitiawk, and afaas sutitah, are also used but

only in the first person. The form @fafatfe sutitiainh’ is used in the

first person and second person Honorific.

(2) Other forms are fad sutité, afaazte sutitahinh’, afaaza suti-

tahak, afaadta sutitahik,

(3) Other forms are ~afrazife sutitathinh’, and afaaaies sutita-

thinh’,

(4) Other forms are afaa sutitai, afaaa sutitaik, afadt sutitau, ata-

Ga sutitauk, and afaates sutitainh’,

The FEMININE is as the masculine, except that in the second person

Non-Honorifie the form @faae sutitah is not used ; the form afqafe

sutitah ni or afaate sutitdh’ hr being used instead.

Met rte ee et

82 THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. [§ 154.

§ 154. 2. Two tenses are formed from the present participle qda sutait.

a. Tue PRESENT.

‘I sleep’, or ‘am sleeping’, ete.

Msscuine.

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. gaa xt sutait chhi, waa Bt sutait chhi,

Qnd P. gaa St sutatt chhi, Waa ee sutait chhah/

3rd P. gaa ety sutait chhath’ 3 aa safe sutait achh’ 4

(1) Other forms are aaa fet sutait chhiai, and qaq fetH sutait chhi-

aik. The forms gaa feat sutait chhiau, gaa festa sutait chhiauk, and

aaa fears sutatt chhiah’ are also used, but only in the first person. The

form wad fife sutatt chhiainh’ is used in the first person and second

person Honorific.

(2) Other forms are Waa ¥ sutait chhé, qia B sutait chhti, Baa

wea sutait chhahak, eaa BetH sutait chhahtk, and yaa “Eis sutait

chhahinh’.

(3) Other forms are Yaa Bes sutait chhathinh’, and gaa wate

sutait chhathinh’. a

(4) Other forms are Hea & sutait chhai, Baa FH sutait chhaik, qaa

Bt sutait chhau, aaa KH sutait chhauk, and qaa BS sutait chhainh’.

FEMININE.

The FEMININE is the same as the masculine, except that the feminine

form of the Present Participle, Bafa sutait’, is used instead of the masculine

aaa sutait. E. g. qafa at sutait? chhé, instead of gaa et sutait chhi.

The form gafa wE sutait? chhah (which might be expected as the 2nd

person Non-Honorific) is not used, and in its place is used qafa wf sutait’

chhal’ h or Bata whe sutait’ chhah ir.

Nore. In the above forms, when masculine, the final °@ -¢ of the present

participle may be, and usually is omitted. The Participle and auxiliary

then form one word. E. g. aca &t sutait chhé, or Fax sutaichhé. Similarly,

when feminine the final °fa -¢’ of the participle may be omitted. E. ¢. qafa

Bi sutait’ chhé, or qawr sutaichhi.

§§ 155—56. | THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. 83

§ 155. 6. Tue IMPERFECT.

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. qaa waste sutait chhalal’it aaa eis sutait chhalal’n,'

Qnd P. gaa wae sutait chhalal’h, Baa BAS sutait chhalah,?

3rd P. qaa BATS suitait chhalah gaa wa sutait chhal.*

(1) Other forms are yaa Zfat sutait chhaliat, and yaa BfatH sutait

chhaliaik. The torms Waa wat sutait chhaliau, qa wfasta sutait

chhaliauk, and aca wfaas sutait chhaliah’ are also used, but only in the

first person. The form gaa wfatfes swtait chhaliainh’ is used in the first

person and second person Honorific.

(2) Other forms are qaqa Ba sutait chhalé, Baa wa sutait chhala,

Baad SASH sutait chhal’ hak, Faa BASH sutait chhalhik, and Pata CARS

sutatt chhal hinh’.

(8) Other forms are gaa BAUS sutait chhal'thinh’, and gad eayire

sutait chhal’ thinh’.

(4) Other forms are qaa we sutait chhalai, qaa BAH sutait chhalaik,

Uda BMt sutait chhalau, Yaa SAH sutait chhalauk, and yaa wales sutait

chhalainh’.

FEMININE.

The FeMINIne is the same as the masculine, except that the feminine

form of the Present Participle qafa swtait’ is used. E. g. Bafa EAS stat

chhalaw ht. The forms for the 8rd Person Honorific and the 2nd Person

Non-Honorific, are yafa wate sutait? chhalth, and qdfa watts sutait’

chhaléW’ instead of Yaa BATE sutait chhaléh. The form gata wfa sutait’

chhal’ is substituted for gaa wa sutait chhal, in the 8rd Person Non-

Honorific.

Nore. As in the present tense the masculine termination ° a-¢, and the

feminine termination fq-2’ of the present participle may optionally be omit-

ted. KE. g. yaa wae sutait chhalah’h, ovr HtwAs sutaichhalah’n. The

latter is the more usual form.

84 THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. [§ 157

§156. 8. Three tenses are formed from the Past Participle aaa sdtal.

a. THE Past.

MaAscuLine.

Honorific. Non-Honorifie.

ist P. gauge sul lah’n,’ gaas sutlal’n,'

Qnd P. gaas sut lain,’ aaate sul léh,’

Sid P. gare suf dh, eau stital.'

(1) Other forms are qafat suf iat, and qafata sut’liaik. The form

gatas sut’'liah’ is also used, but only in the first person. qafautes sul’ l-

ainl’ is used in the first person and second person Honorific.

(2) Other forms are qaa@’ sut’lé, gaa sult’ lai, qaeen sut lahak, Faa-

gia sullahik, and qaaEtes sul’ lahinh’.

(8) Other forms are aaufe sut'lanh’, aaatite sutal thinl’, aud

qaaaies sutal thin’. S

(4) Other forms are aa@ sut’lai, BaaAH sut'laik, Hatt sut lau, FTAA

sul lauk, and qaafes sut’lainh’.

In the Femrytye the following forms are substituted.

For 2 & 3, aaate sut'léh, or aadtfs sut’léh’.

Por 4, qafa sétal’.

§ 157. b, Tur PERFECT.

‘I have slept’, etc.

MAscuLine.

Honorific.

ist P. gaase safe sut lal’ achh’,*

2nd P. gaasx wie sul’ lal’i achh’,*

3rd P. gaare ate sutldh achh’ 3

Non-Honorifie,

Ist P. qaas afe sutlah’i achl’,

Ond P. gaara Bs sul lah achh,”

ord P. gaan afe suf lak achh’.

§ 158.] THE INTRANSITIVE VERB, 85

1. Other forms are gafat afe swt’ lai achh’, gafata afte suet waik

achv’. he form qafaas afte sul’ liah’ achW’ is also used, but only in the

first person. qafatfe afe sut’liatnh' achh’ is used in the first person and

second person THonorific.

2. Other forms are qad we sul’lé chhah, qadt BER sut’'lé chhahak,

gat weian su’lé chhahth, qa wets sut’lé chhahinl’, qaaea ate

sul lahak achh’, qaaetn ale sutlahth achh’, and qaaRtes ate sul’ lahinh’

achh’.

3. Other forms are qaafee safe sutlanh’ achh’, qaattls afe suta-

Vthinh’ achh’, and qaaafe fe sutal'thinW achh’.

4. Other forms are qae afe sut’lat achh’, qaqa safe sut’latk achh’,

Gait ale sut’law achh’, Batt ale sullawk ach and yacfe ale sut’-

lainW’ achh’.

In the Femrntye the following forms are substituted.

For 2 & 3, qaeite afe sut’lih achh’ or qaattfe ate sut'léh’ achh.

§ 158. ¢: THE PLUPERFECT.

‘I had slept,’ etc.

MAScULINE.

Honorijic. Non-Honorifie.

Ist P. gaa was sut’lé chhalahns Aaa Bay sul’lé chhalal’n,

2nd P. qaw was sud’ lé chhalal’n,* Gat ware sulle chhalah,’

3rd P. gaa ware su’lé chhalth ae wa sulle chhals

(1) Other forms are qa Bfat sut’lé chhaliai, and gat BfatH sud’

le chhaliatk.

(2) Other forms are qqw we sut'lé chhalé, Gat HA sul’lé chhaldi,

qa waeH sut’lé chhal hak, qa KASH sul’lé chhal’ hik.

(3) Other forms are qaet waAfs sul’lé chhalthinh’ and aaa eae

sublé chhal’ thinh’.

(4) Other forms are qaei Ba sullé chhalai, Hat BAR sut’lé chhalaik,

Hae watt sut'lé chhalaw, and aaet KettH sulle chhalauk,

86 THE INTRANSITIVE VERB. [§§ 159—61

In the Feminrye the following forms are substituted.

For 2 & 3, qad wets sut’lé chhalth, or gat BAS sut'lé chhalth,

For 4, qae fe sut’lé chhal’.

9. 159: 1. Participles—Declinable.

ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES.

Present, ‘sleeping’.

MASCULINE. FEMININE.

aa sutait. Bata sutait’.

Past, ‘slept’.

MaAscunine. FEMININE.

aaa siital. eata sital’.

§ 160. Participles—Indeclinable.

CoNJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES.

‘sleeping’, ‘having slept’.

ala sil ka, afar sit kai, afaRae sit’ kaka,

ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES.

afaaté sutitah’n, ‘on sleeping,’ ‘in the act of sleeping’.

S716. Precative or Respectful Forms.

Ik RESPECTFUL IMPERATIVE.

Baa sy srital jay, and BAH Brat sdital jdo, ‘be you’, or

‘ye pleased to sleep’.

Die RESPECTFUL FUTURE.

Bast TVA sital fdet, or BAI ATBAM seital jdel'ga, ‘you will

sleep’, or ‘will be pleased to sleep’.

§§ 162—64. | OBSERVATIONS ON THE FOREGOING. S7

Mrrip IMPERATIVE.

afag sutiha, ‘sleep yow’ or ‘sleep ye’.

§ 162. Infinitive or Verbal Noun,

wag sutab.

CHAPTER XI.

OBSERVATIONS ON THE FOREGOING.

§163. Attentive consideration of the foregoing shews that the conjuga-

tional forms range themselves under one of two great classes according as

the object of the verb is Honorifie or Non-Honorific, It may indeed be

said that there are two distinct conjugations,—one in which the object is

Non-Honorific, and another in which it is Honorifie.

§164. In order to make this plain, I here give the more usual mascu-

line terminations of each conjugation, separately in a tabular form,

= “MOTUTALIOY OY OTOJOq poqAIUTO st HD yo JOMoA peuy OY} FLYY SOYLASIS 5 USIS OY,

— 7

co DBAS BIBS Ao] Bk aS BIB de cans Ale, | tke 6 Belle o UoStog ple

AlbBag ‘od SBD, ‘od Alle 5 0d ak. ‘od = |wosaag puz

cas ne LBRO Ske, Slo WOSlog 4ST

“OYMOUOH-TON) “OYMOUOTT =| -oyT4ouoF{-UON | “oylLoUOH, “OYMOUOF{—-UONT| = *ayTLOUO ‘OYMOUOF]-UON| ‘oyrtouo ZZ — ||

qoatqus qoatqus qoalqug | yoolqug qootqng MI soatqng” x qoalqng 3] qoalqng

‘qoogaodntg pug) Goa AIISURL, “qSUq oalqisueaquy “qse@q oalyisuray,

A DOYYep BEE o[droyaed qsed oy} wory pourtoy sesuay, (¢)

a wee

4 be Alpe | be ble wostag pag

fae} ieee yee

Bi Albe ‘od a8 ‘og wosI9g puz

a eerie

eB Sbs 2 | wosiog 4S]

A oyLtouoH]-uoN | “oytouOTy ‘SppOroHL TON “OY TAOUO PT

yoalqng qoatqus qoafqug qoalqngs

= :

A “qooytoduay quesorg

= .

= pemyyap bee opdioysed quasord oy, wo. povttoy sosuay, (Z)

a) a ‘ ;

g ba Rips Lhe fake bie Albk Le balk mosiag pac

avs od | ake og Able og Abe od UOstog Pug

S bs ts kk & uostag 4ST

‘9uHOuOH TON] OYLLOUOFT |[PHHOUOH-woN | “OYTOUoy ‘opOUOH TON sBWouoH = -oprowoFZ-uoNl| -oyrsou04xy i

yoatqng goatang | goalqng yootqng qoofqng __yootqns oafqns yoolqns

‘TeuopuUoD saroedsoayoy ‘aa eAad wy °8INIU ‘[8TOIZIPUODH eAtoadsorg

‘yyap B> oor oy} WoL; pauitoy sestiay (T)

ioe)

a ‘(sqtoA SATqIsURAQUT Jo uorqeenfuos ay} Surpnpout) oytouoZy-wo NE St qoalgo ayy your ur qeuy, ‘224

"NOILVONLNOO LSula

“WOWGVUTUTIO} OY} STOJOG P4AIUIO St HD JO [AMOA [LULL O44 4vYy4 SoylUSIs 4 USIS oI],

~ ~~) || :

S2|BB Do |BlebS ay, Je we Paes 25 Boltble 5 Blak . |WOStog pig

BIDE D5 od BBB DS ‘od BeBe 5 ‘OG ~~ |luostog puz

Se a SJOBI Ao BID > || Wostog 4ST

fOYMOUoH-UON| “OYMOUOH | -oyrsouoH-UON|{ ‘oytoU0H ||-gyrzowoFJ-WON|| “oyttOUO ae ae

joolqng qoatans Rae oe eater Wee)

oS 7 *(UIL0 FF ~ 5

Z qoosrodnyg pug) oopiog oArgtsueay, qsvq oArqisuvay,

iS)

S qwyyap Bae edited ysed ayy wor po UMtoy sosuay, (g)

(2) SS | e ae

oS Be] bas eS ASYs) Bol B Bo am uosieg plg

: ; —--—,

a |2 be ‘od Bo XB ‘0d mostad Pug

z _ S00 Nn _ —

: ars 2D)

a “OWIIOUOFJ-UONT| “OYIIOuUOFY =| |‘OYIAOUOPF[-UON | “OYLLOWOFL

me qoafqug qoalqng qoalqng qoatqng

= *qoojrodmy “quaselg

ral

al rl

E ‘qwyyap Ped opdioysced quosotd oy} Wo1y pIULtoF sesuay, (Z)

Bo] DE Sjeps | Bellic aie | soe | ake Bo Vie Bh | uosteg pag

= S = 2S = a | eee UG

B12bs od | Bete od Bo|¥ble od Bol Ske od WOsiag puz

2Job)s Bolas Bo} phe Be1ps wosiog 4ST

“OYMOUOH-UON| “OYMouoH = j;ayrtouoF{-uONT | ‘ouToucF =| -ayTIOUOF[-UON) ‘OYTIOUOFT —||‘oBMoWoF{-uONT] “oyr10UoTT |

qoalqug qoolqng ___ qoefqng | qoolqng qoolqns qoatqngs qoofqns goalqns |)

a ‘[euoIupuog saoodsoney saatyeroduly ‘omngn gy ‘TeEMoITPUOH earoadsorg

= ‘YYap WB YOOL O44 WOI, pouMIoZ sesuay, (T)

S20) * OWIMOUOFT St (oO OM Ae SS SS ie nn

ee (ev et tr yh ROSAS TO ONTO oa oo oe

50 VERBS WITH ROOTS ENDING 1N VOWELS: [§§ 165—66

Cuaprer XII.

VERBS WITH ROOTS ENDING IN VOWELS.

§ 165. The roots of both the verbs just conjugated end in consonants.

When the root ends in a vowel some slight difficulties occur, which require

to be noted, I therefore give two examples of such verbs, not conjugating

them fully, but giving, of one the first and third persons singular of the non-

honorific first form, and of the other a fuller conjugation : noting at the

same time any irregularities which may occur in the other forms.

T shall first give an example of a root ending in a vowel other than 1 4.

These verbs are nearly regular.

§ 166. EXAMPLE oF A ROOT ENDING IN A VOWEL OTHER THAN JT a.

Movi. vers fas siab “to sew”.

Principal Parts.

Root, fa sz, “sew,”

Present Participle, fade scaiz, or fasa siut, “sewing”,

Past Participle, fase sial, or fase sil, “sewn.”

First Form. Non-Hononriric.

Ist. Person. 3rd. Person,

ProsPEcTIVE CONDITIONAL.

s, ae

fat sii, fast siau.

Norre.—In the optional forms the letter ¢ bis inserted as follows.

Some writers use q v instead of ¥_6. In pronunciation, however, the sound

is something between 0 and v.

Ist Person. fafat(a) sidiai(h), fafasit(a) sibiau(h), fataas sibial’.

2nd Person. Non-Honorific. faa sibah, farsa sib’hak, fareta sib’-

hik, faartre sib’ hinh’,

§ 166.] VERBS WITH ROOTS ENDING IN VOWELS. 91

3rd Person. Honorific, faata sibatl’, or faafa siath’, faarafes sib’-

ac : = 2S

thin’. Non-Honorific, fast sibainh’,

FUTURE.

fags siab, farsa siat or Fasa siut.

Nore. In the Isr. Person instead of the forms faaa(@) siabai(k), the

forms faa(m) sébai(k) may optionally be used. The form fas4s szial’ is

seldom used.

ISIPERATIVE.

fas sii, fash SIQU.

Optional forms of the 1st Person are, fafat(—) sitiai(h), fafaat(a)

sitiau(k), fafaas sitiah’, and fafatfe sztiainh’, in all of which the letter

aq ¢ has been inserted.

2np Person. Non-Honerific, Optional forms are faa sit, faaen sit’-

hak, faasta si? hth, and feasts si? hinh’.

3rD Person. Honorific, The form for this person is faa stathinh’.

RETROSPECTIVE CONDITIONAL.

I conjugate this tense in full.

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

EP. a siital’n, or As in the Honorijic.

faas sital’i,

2nd P. As in the 1st, P., fasas siitah, or fare sitah,

_( faxafa svitath’ or fata siait,

a fon sitatl’,

Past.

Ist P, fase stalal’n, or Fass siulal’n.

3rd P. fas sia, or fase siul,

ral Sas

92 VERBS WITH ROOTS ENDING IN VOWELS. [§ 167.

The other tenses do not require explanation, being perfectly regular,

and presenting no difficulty.*

§ 167. EXAMPLE oF A ROOT ENDING IN LONG AT 4.

MopEL VERB. Uta ped “to obtain.”

Principal Parts.

Root, ase no UW. pd, “obtains?

Present Participle, uaa pavait, or utEa pdit, “obtaining”.

Past Participle, arate pdol, or area péel, “obtained.”

In order to show the conjugation of this class of verbs clearly, I de-

cline it throughout in the first conjugational fourm. I omit the first

Person non-Honorific, and the 2nd Person Honorific, as they are the same

in form as the lst Person Honorific. Note, however, that as usual, certain

optional forms are wanting in the 2nd Person Honorific.

PROSPECTIVE CONDITIONAL,

Honorific. Non-Honorific.

Ist P. at® pdi,* ——

2nd P. —— uae pdbah’t

8rd P. arate pdbath’ 3+ wat patau.s

Optional forms.

(1) Gta) paiai(k), Fat) paiau(k), Gas paiah’.

* Other examples are ¥aF chiab, “to drip”. 1. Imperative ya chibi;

2. Fut. asa chiib or aa chiab ; 3. Do. asa chiit or aa chiat ; Past

Part. FEet chiil, or qaa chial. aTyve Hs “to wash’. 1, Imperative

at dhobi; 1. Fut. area dhoeb or Waa dhoab; 8. do. auwq dhoét, or Waa

dhoat ; Past Part. dag dhoél, or Hq dhoal. Generally speaking 4, 6 or

4 v may optionally be inserted between concurrent vowels.

{In this and all similar cases, q v is written by some for 4 0, See § 166.

§ 167.] VERRS WITH ROOTS ENDING IN VOWELS. 93

(2) Ge paih, taeH paiahak, vast paiahtk.

The second conjugational forms are

(1) Gute paiainh’, (2) taafs paiahinh’, (3) ute pauithinh’.

(4) aati} pabaunh’.

FUTURE.

Ist P. gray pdcb," -———-

2nd P. ——— tae paibah,’

3rd P. Rave paitith, or rare pautdh,? awa pdet, or urate paot.!

Optional forms.

(Lda (a) paibai(k), Fat(H) paibau(h), afat(a) paitiai(k) Ffaait(a)

paitiau(k), Gate paiau(h), tars paial’a, Gas” paitah’n, asa pditga.

(2) aa paibé, GaeK pail’hak, Gara pail’hik.

(4) Wala) pactai(h), Gai(a) paitau(h),

The second conjugational forms are

(1) Gaffe paibainl’, (2) Gaxfe pail’hink’, (3) Gate paithinh’,

wafes paitainh’.

In all the above forms 3fta aut may be substituted for tq ait through-

out; as Uifat pautiat, aiates pautainh’, &e.

IMPERATIVE.

Ist. P. aS paw

and. P. % qtae pabal’,*

3rd. P. uray pabath’,* wat patau,'

Optional forms, as in the Prospective Conditional,

RETROSPECTIVE CONDITIONAL.

Ist P. tas paital’ir,

2nd P. —— qae pattah,?

8rd P. Rafa paitath’ yaa pavaits

*In this and all similar cases, 4 v is written by some for 4b, See § 166.

D4 VERBS WITIL ROOTS ENDING IN VOWELS, [§ 167.

Optional forms.

(1) faa(m) paitiai(h), afaat(a) paitiau(h), tas paitah’.

(2) tet paité, Gaea paithak, Gada pait lik.

(4) Fe(a) pattai(h), tata patau(k).

The 2nd. conjugational forms are,

(1) Ufatfee paitiainl’, (2) taxes pail hin’, (3) vaaie pat think’,

Gate paitainh’, :

For ta pat, ata paut or faa pavié may be used throughout; thus

was pautah pn, ufads pavital’ hi, &e.

The Present and Imperfect are regular and de not require comment.

Past,

Ist P.wWas paulal’n,'

2nd P. aa paulah’

Birt leet eae wate paulanh’ 3 aTan paulak 4

OPTIONAL FORMS

(1) arate paol, wifat (@) pautiai(h), dtat(m) paulai(k), Ft paulé, Se.

(2) Gta paulé, tra” paulai, ttaeH paul hak, Se,

(4) ttaa(ae) paul’ kai(k), traat(a) paul’ kau(h).

In older Maithili poetry we sometimes find t# pail instead of Ula paul,

but this never occurs nowadays: thus G48 pailah’h, &ec. The verb 4Taq

aéb, “to come,” however, still makes its 8rd P. Non-Hon. atvq él instead

of arate aol.

PERFECT.

) , EN w ~

uta’ st paulé chht, or tags ate paulal’n ach’.

PLUPERFECT.

Ta BAS paulé chhalah’n

Nore. Itis important to note the conjugation of yey paéd carefully ;

as it is the model of a large class of verbs, principally actives and causals.

The explanation of the seeming irregularities in the conjugation of yTZa

paed is this. As explainedin § 166, the letter 4 v (or 4d) may be inserted

after the final vowel of the root, before all vowel terminations. In the ease of

ut pa this is generally done, and hence we get a root 4T4 paw which forms the

real conjugational base. The rules in § 148 for the shortening of the long

§§ 268—70.] THE PASSIVE VOICE. 95

vowel of the root apply in this conjugation. Before a ¢ and ¢ J, immediately

following, this 4 is liable to be changed to 4t 6, which 6 it may be stated here

is pronounced short, which accounts for the forms grata pdaol and ytaita

pact, in which the & remains long in spite of § 148. 1, according to which

if o was a long vowel we should expect Gatq paol, and yatta paot. When,

however, the 41 @ is shortened to 4 a under § 148.2 or 3, this latter coalesces

with a following 4t 6, and the two together become the diphthong 3t aw,

Thus we get, in order, forthe Ist. sing, Past qaas, pav’lah’n, Titas

pala’ fi and finally ates”.

The forms containing @ paz, are those in which the euphonic letter 4 v

(or = 6) has not been inserted. In these the aT & of the root is first short-

ened under § 148.2 or 3, and then, combining with a following = z, forms a.

Thus 1st Retro. Conditional is at + sas pd + itah’R; then (§ 148) 7+

sas parital n, then finally Gas” paitah’hR. In the Future and Past an

= @ has been inserted first for the sake of euphony. In the Retrospective:

Conditional this has not been necessary.

Here it must be noted that the u é and 3{{ 6, which we find in the con-

jugation of verbs with vocalie roots, are always pronounced short, and do not

affect a preceding long vowel. They will, hence, always hereafter be marked

short; thus @, 6. ;

Cuaprer XIV.

THE PASSIVE VOICE.

§ 168. As in other Neo-Aryan languages the Passive voice is formed by

subjoining the conjugated verb aT¢q yaéb “to go’, to the past participle.

This participle is liable to inflection as to gender, in which respect it agrees

with the subject of the verb, but in other respects it remains unaltered.

Thus ¢aq, a1wq dekhal j4éb means “to be seen.”

§ 169. Itis needless therefore to conjugate the passive verb through-

out. As however sTua yééd is irregular in some of its forms, I here conjugate

it in its more usual tenses.

§ 170. srzq jaeb “ to go”,

Root, st jd.

Present Participle, STRAT Jal.

Past Participle, wa gel.

THE PASSIVE VoIcE. [§ 170.

PROSPECTIVE CONDITIONAL.

Honorific. Non- Honorific.

Ist. P. até ydé, ——

2nd. P. —— ate jah,

srd PP. arf jail’, aat jatau,

Furure.

ist. P. area yacb, —

nd) 2 Hae jaibah,

3rd. P. Hare jaitah, STA ile.

IMPERATIVE.

Ist. P. aH yds, —_——.

ond? BP: ate pith,

ard. P. arg yath’, sat jatar. *

RETROSPECTIVE CONDITIONAL.

Ist. P. Hass jaital’h,

2nd. P.—— Fae jaitah’,

3rd. P. Safe jaitatl’, sea dit.

PRESENT. BEA Bl JA chhi, Se.

IMPERFECT, Sika BAB dil chhalal’n, Se,

Past.

Ist. P. tas gélah’n,

ond. Ba—

ard. P. ware geldh, Te gel.

aware gilah,

Prrrecr. tas af gelah’a achh’, Se.

PLUPERFECT. Ta Bass gel chhalal’n, Se.

§§ 171—73.] IRREGULAR VERBS, 97

Cnaptrer XIV.

IRREGULAR VERBS.

§ 171. Besides s1ya Jaéb, already conjugated, I have noted the follow-

ing important verbs as irregular,

waza harab, ‘todo’,

yaq dharad, “to seize”, “place”.

sizgq déb, ‘to come”,

eq deb, “to give’,

wa eb, “to take’,

sium hoch, “to become”,

azq marab, “to die’.

It is not necessary to conjugate them throughout, and the following ta-

bles, showing their principal parts, must suffice.

§ 172, a. axa karab, “to do”.

Present Participle, ata karat,

Past Participle, aa kail,

ist. P. Honorific Past, ga Rae ham kailal it,

3rd. P. Non-Honorific Past, at Raa 0 kailak.

Note also the conjunctive participle @ae kai hah’, or WT] AZ kay

kan, “having done”,

b. ura dharab “to seize”, “place”, is conjugated exactly like axa hkarab,

“to do”, only substituting 4 dh for # & throughout.

§ 173. wsrza déb, “to come’.

Present Participle, gaa avait,

Past Participle, ara dé,

3rd. P. Non-Honorific Past, at ara o dé.

98 IRREGULAR VERBS. [§ 174—76 |

S742 “a: %q deb, “to give”.

Present Participle, 2a dail,

Past Participle, aq del,

Ist. P. Honorific Past, wa @a ham del.

(2a délah’i is seldom used)

3rd. P. Non-Honorific Past, Ht @aa o delak.

Note, that the 2nd person Non-Honorific Imperative, is ¢¢ dah, and not

ea deah ; also cea dahak, zeta dahth.

b. a leb “to take”, is conjugated exactly like 4 deb, “to give”, only

substituting q Z for ¢ d throughout.

Note that the 2nd Person Non-Honorific Imperative is we Jah, and

not #7e leah ; also aga lahak, and ata lahth.

§ 175. axa marab, “to die”.

Present Part., qa mutt, or ALA marae.

Past Part., qxa@ mui, or ATA maral.

1st P. Hon. Pros. Cond., a€ mari.

, Future, aca marab.

,, Imperative, we mari.

,, Retrosp. Cond., qzras muitah’’, or afeas marital’h.

Present, Aza St marait chhi.

, Past, aeay muilaW’n, or AeA mar lah’n.

Adverbial Participle, qxaf@ muitah’i.

§ 176. tea hocb, or Sa haib, “to become,”

Present Part., St@a hdazt, or etxa hoit.

Past Part., Ha del.

§§ 177—78.] THE FORMATION oF ACTIVE AND CAUSAL VERBS. 99

Ist . Hon. Pros. Cond., et& hos.

Future, #4 haib, (N. B. The form ¥t&a hoiga

is not used.)

ry)

= Imperative, ¥tH hot

ie Retrospect Cond., #tzas hoitah’i.

i Present, €t@a at hoatt chhi, or Sta Bt hort chhi.

A Past, Aas bhélah’in.

Perfect, Ha at bhel chhi, or Aas als bhdlah’nr

achh’.

Conjunctive participle, & % bhai ka, & # bhai kai.

Adverbial participle, etxafe hoitah’n,

CHAPTER XV.

THE FORMATION OF ACTIVE AND CAUSAL VERBS.

§ 177. Asin other Gaudian languages the neuter verb in Maithili can

be made active, and the active verb, causal.

§ 178. The active verb is generally formed by adding ° 4T4 dv to the

root, and the causal ° atTq vdv, but there are many exceptions. The roots

thus formed are then conjugated like the root 414 pav, the optional form of

the root aT pa, ‘obtain’. See § 167. Note,

The following are examples of the regular adoption of the rule.

NEUTER. ACTIVE, CAUSAL.

3aq wthab, to rise, 3sarzaq uthdeb, to raise, Ssatea uth’ vdeb,

to cause to rise.

100 THE FORMATION OF ACTIVE AND CAUSAL VERBS. [§§ 179—86

faea girad, to fall, fretea girded, to fell, — fatarea gir’ vad,

to cause to fell.

apa charhab, to ascend, aurea charhiéh, ~agaresa charh’vdeb.

waa pakab to ripen, warea pakdéb, yRatea pak’vdeb.

gag bajab, to sound, to speak, aataa bajdeb, aaatTea bay vded.

aaa lagab, to be applied, watea lagach, wratea lag vdeb.

faa pigh'lab, to melt, fraates pigh'ldcb, faasates pighal’ vided

aeana /at’kab, to hang, wearea lat’kdeb, wenates latak’ vac.

§ 179. Monosyllabic roots containing a long vowel, generally shorten

it in the active and causal forms ; but unlike Hindi, the guna diphthongs

ue, and © 3-0, are not shortened to their simple vowels ° ¢-2, and ° ¥-w

respectively ; they are, instead pronounced short, like é, & 6: thus :—

NEUTER. ACTIVE. CAUSAL.

sing jdgab, to be awake, wameayagdeb, sNaTeT jag’vdeb.

qaqa bdjab, to speak, aaraa biatch, gaat bay vided.

Htaa bhijab, to be wet, fasrea bhiyded, farsratas bhi vdeo.

gaa ghimab, to go round, qatea ghumdeb, waa ghum’vded.

But

etaa dolab, to be shaken, Stataa doldéh, staatza dol’ vdcb.

aza letab, to lie down, aes létdeb, szaraa lét’vadd.

Nore, that, unlike Hindi, monosyllabic roots, consisting of a consonant

and a long vowel, do not form actives in © at Jd, or causals in ° qat-lvd.

§ 180. The following are examples of monosyllabic roots of active verbs,

which become doubly active and causal.

§§ 181—82.] THE FORMATION OF ACTIVE AND CAUSAL VERBS. iol

ACTIVE. Dovsiy ACTIVE. CAUSAL.

aa deb, to give, fesrtza dideb, fesarza diavac.

utara dhodéb or

aaa dhoab, to wash, ate Thabécd

{tare dhoavaeb.

fastza pideb or

ab, to drink,

fasrq piad, to drin } Rt nib.

rrmares piavded.

aaa sikhab, to learn, fawrey sikhdch, fawataa sikh’vdeb.

Note also here,

faa jzad, to live, frarza jrdcd, Fraarea piavded.

§ 181. Many neuter verbs with a short vowel in the root simply leng-

then it to form the active, and form the causal regularly with ° aT-vé ; thus,

NEUTER. ACTIVE. Causat.

azq katab, to be cut, atey hdtab, aeqteg kat vdeb.

awsq garab, to be buried, atsa gdrab, Watzgy gar’vaeb.

axq marab, to die, alea marab, Hcaqeq mar’ vacb.

Wanting maa pdlab, to rear, WaaTay pal’vded.

Wanting arey ldédab, to load, agatea lad’ vaeb.

Bot,

waq khulab, to be open, waa kholab, wtaatea khol’vaeb.

§ 182. The following are irregular.

NEUTER. ACTIVE. CAUSAL.

ezq chhitab, to gooff, xtsa chhorub, etsatwa chhor'vded.

eza tuétab, to be broken, atsa torab, atsarea tor’vdeb.

neq phatab, tobe rent, wisa phdrab, weatea phar’ vdeb.

Beq atab, to be stopped, Bstea ardeb, Hawa ar’ vac.

102 COMPOUND VERBS. [§§ 188—85.

faaa dckab, or

fantasy bicded,

tq rahadb, to remain, away rékhab, wwaarea rakh’vdeb.

§ 183. Amongst others, the following verb takes the causal form, but

does not use it ina causal, but only in an active sense ; the Causal form

thus becomes an optional form of the Active.

bro be sold, #aq bechab, saataa Lech’ vdeb.

SIMPLE VERB, ACTIVE.

aetaa kahdeb, or

“eq kahab, to say,

Reaegq kal’ vied.

CHarTer XVI.

COMPOUND VERBS.

§ 184. The compound verbs in Maithili, do not range themselves un-

der such a simple classification as we find in Hindi. We find the root

appearing not only in its simple form, but in other modified forms, for the

use of which it is difficult to give any definite rule. I shall adopt as far as

possible the classification of Hindi grammars, and hence commence with

A. Compound Verbs formed from the root, whether simple or modified.

I. Inrenstves. Examples are,

§ 185. (a) From the simple root ;

wt sea kha jdeb, to eat up.

fa siza pi gach

fa aa pz led,

et saa ho jdéb, to become.

et cea ho rahab, to be.

est eq herd ded, to lose

Note here a kind of passive formed with qs4 parab, to fall. Example,

art asq mar parab, to be beaten.

ho drink up.

§§ 186—88.] COMPOUND VERBS, 103

§ 186. (b) From the modified root.

gate 33a pukdr’ uthab, to call out.

afta s1za ban’ jdéb, to be made.

atfe stxa kat’? ddrab, to cut off.

aa aa rdkh’ leb, to lay by.

afa tea sé’ rahab, to sleep on.

ata saa chal’ jdcb, to depart.

§ 187. II. Porznriars. Always formed from the modified root. Ex-

amples are,

afta ana chal’ sakab, to be able to move.

atfa aaa bdy’ sakab, to be able to speak.

fate aaa likh’ sakab, to be able to write.

= aaa dai sakab, to be able to give.

@ aaa lai sakab, to be able to take.

sz ana ydé sakab, to be able to go.

§ 188. III. Comprerrves. Sometimes formed from the simple, and

sometimes from the modified root, Examples are,—

wt aaa khd chukab, to have done eating.

= qua dai chukab, to have done giving,

arte wag mdi’ chukab, to have done beating.

The foregoing modified form of the root, is really an additional form of

the conjunctive participle, corresponding to the Bangdalé conjunctive parti-

ciple in °sat, Thus atfe at’ appears to correspond to the Bangalé

attest kdtiya.

104 COMPOUND VERBS. [§ 189

B. Compound verbs formed with the Verbal Noun.

§ 189. The following observations have been inserted here, although

they might, perhaps, be more logically placed in the Chapter on Simple

Verbs.

There are three forms of the Verbal noun. All these can be regularly

declined like nouns, but, unlike nouns, they have an oblique form, differing

from the nominative, to which the case terminations are attached.

(1.) The first form is that already given in this grammar, ending in

qb; as aq dekhab, “ seeing.” Its oblique form ends in at bé, as €aat F

dékh’ba* s& “ from seeing,” ¢aata dékh’bak, “of seeing,” &c.

(2.) The Second form is made by substituting q/ for | 6 in the first

form, as aq dekhal, oblique form e@at dékh’ld. Its nominative or direct

therefore generally, but not always (e. g. not in the case of qTUq 7aéb “to

go”) isthe same as that of the Past Participle. Sometimes, however, in

the case of irregular verbs, the form of the Past Participle is used by the

ignorant instead of the real form of the verbal noun. Thus, the proper

form of this variety of the verbal noun of the verb sTua jaéb “ togo”’ is

ava jaél, but the vulgar sometimes say 74 gel, which is the form of the

Past Participle. In the case of verbs whose roots end in 31 4, the obser-

vations in § 168 (note) apply; so that we find forms like qra@ péval,

and Gat H paula mé, beside forms like qtwq pdaél and Fat paild.

(3.) The third form of the verbal noun does not occur in the direct

form at all. It is only found in the oblique form, which is made by adding

3 a or & ai to the root. Thus Ace. Sing. aH’ dekha (not dekh) ké, or

z@ dekhdi ké: andsoon. The final & ai is pronounced short thus dekhdt

and does not affect a previous long vowel; cf. § 148. and § 167 (note). Thus

we have the verbal noun qatd pathdvat, while the Present Participle in the

Present tense is uaa (#t) pathavai (chhé) of qataa pathdeb, “to send”. When

the roct of the verb ends in 4 4, this form of the verbal nouns ends either

in 31a dvd? as above, or in Ue, as HTT pae, UTX paé. In irregular verbs,

as in the second variety, the vulgar use forms connected with the past

participle, instead of the regular ones, as q& mud?, instead of At marat

from Htq marab, “to die.”

* See addenda.

§§ 190—91. | COMPOUND VERBS. 105

§ 190. I. DestbeRartves, which are formed in two ways.

(a) By the phrase s=at 3fe ichehhé achh’ meaning “there is a desire”

following the -genitive of the first form of the verbal noun in @ 6.

(b) By the accusative, genitive, or simple oblique third form of the

verbal noun with the verb atea chaéhab, to wish :— Examples—

(a) Beare eat ats dékhabdk ichchhdé achh’, there is a desire

of seeing, 7 e. I wish to see.

With this phrase, compare the Bangali, @feate x=et

ate dekhibitr ichchha dchhi.

(b) ea zua aeat ham dekha ké chahaichhi, I wish to see.

at ast Tests 0 bdja chahaiachh’, he wishes to speak.

at aH aeata ghari baja’ chahaichhal, the clock was

about to strike.

at sz wealu o jdé chahaichhath’, he wishes to go.

at ae (vulgarly qz) asa site o marat (vulgarly mud*)

chahait ach’, he is at the point of death.

ufe Met RK apR TET Ch’ potht ké parhak chdht, one should

read this book. ;

ASAT Blay HATTER (or HT or HiT HR) Bet th’rd otay jdek

(or jaé or jie ké) chahi, you should go there.

§191. IJ. Prermrsstves are also formed from the third form of the

verbal noun, Examples are ; —

sI1z Sq dé deb, to allow to go.

ae eg kahdt deb, or

z to all alk

ae eq kaha (not kah) deb 0 allow to spea

St stax wiz Baan o ok’rd khdé dél’kaik, he allowed him

to eat.

1u6 COMPOUND VERRS. [§§ 192—95

§ 192. IIT. Aceuvrisirrves, are also formed from the same form.

Example.

SM 32 ate arate o uthat nal’n pdbath’, do not let him

rise.

§ 193. III. Frequenratives, are formed with the direct om of the

second variety of the verbal noun in ¢ 7. Examples.

sz axa dél karab, to come frequently.

aa aca hail karab, to do frequently,

St AeA Asif o kahal karaiachh’, he speaks frequently

ait saa aeaty o jdél karaiachh’, he goes frequently.

§ 194. IV. Inceprrves. In Maithili these are formed with the obli-

que form of the third variety of the verbal noun. Examples are

aE aTAT kaha (not pronounced kah) ldgab, to begin to

speak.

ata ataa dia lagab, to begin to give.

are aaa mérdt ldgal, he began to beat.

ara wre aaa bagh khdé ldgal, the tiger began to eat.

C. Compound verbs formed from the present participle.

These are, as in Hindi, Continuatives and Staticals. Examples are ;—

§ 195. I. ConrmnvuATIvEs.

faa srza likhait jaded, to continue writing.

Ga szq parhait jae, to continue reading.

ataa seq bolait jacb, to continue speaking.

§§ 196—97. | COMPOUND VERBS. 107

sixa tea pdt rahab, to continue going.

uaa BIZ pavait deb, to go on finding.

fa wea seats pant bahait jdiachh’, the water keeps

flowing away.

ag} We we wea wats nadi ker dhar bahait rahaiachh’,

the stream of the river keeps flowing on.

§ 196. II. Srarrceats.

aad aaa kanait chalab, to go along crying.

EN See Bees

Taq Bea gabart deb, to come singing.

wa wit nad Haale, ck strié gavait avaichhal’, a woman was

coming singing.

§ 197. D. Other compound verbs.

I. The following idiom with the Past Participle, making quasi statical

verbs may be noted,

mits qza stza fe pani bahal dit achh’, the water keeps

flowing away.

za aa aea fare ck bdgh paral phiraichhal, a tiger

was prowling about.

In connection with this note that the phrase 4at HTAaT chala jana, “to

go away”’, So common in Hindi, has no counterpart in Maithili, the Inten-

sive compound being used instead.

II. The Maithili equivalent to the Hindi @ atat le dnd, to bring, is

aria dnab, and to the Hindi ¢ HTAaT le jana, to take away, is the anomalous

aa aug lene jae.

108 ADVERBS, PREPOSITIONS, AND CoNJUNCTIONS. [§§ 198—99.

PART IV.

INDECLINABLES.

Cuaprer XVII.

ADVERBS, PREPOSITIONS, AND CONJUNCTIONS.

§ 198, Henceforth I shall not transliterate. It was necessary to do so

in the case of verbs, but Indeclinable words, as a rule, show their own pro-

nunciation.

The following lists of ADVERBs have been collected.

§ 199. I. ADVERBS OF TIME.

waa Now Haz )

awa } Then OTT ATA l ne

d rs Yarl t me,

area sa | arly, at dawn.

ae ' When? ane wig)

aPeat aethaa

Perhap .

ECG = aR Ps, some

' When, xifa times.

tSsat afeat

BATE Today. fara

ates Yesterday, tomorrow, ad At last.

ax ates Now-a-days. = iby

. afar

yea The day before yester- Often.

day, or the day after- ATLAS

tomorrow. we Quickly.

gfafea AAT

Instantly.

water Every day. acaa

aufer ) UST

is i Afterwards.

Seat UTRT

Always. He :

aaet mre Again.

fra Continually. THA e Once.

§§ 200—201. | ADVERBS, PREPOSITIONS, AND CONJUNCTIONS. 109

§ 200. II. ADVERBS OF PLACE.

waa Here. awe Thither.

ata There. aa On all sides.

aaa, wet Where? aay Near.

saa, wet = Where, ufeata On this side.

aaa, TET There. aifeata On that side.

uwet Hither. aaa

une Thither. ee Everywhere

ez Whither ? Wz Across.

HE Whither. fare Near.

§ 201. III. ADVERBs OF MANNER.

RATA i zut

.. ¢ Accidentally. < ;

Wa a wy In vain.

ata Very. ATER

Dum wat Thus,

Separately. Re

HEH alat, ata ace How ?

wuz aa, a ace Ass.

At once. ee

eS aa, ad ae So.

aaita 1,

aa Nevertheless el Lf

. aE, TER,

aL Gratis,

aaty aes a

a Although.

sat xatte, eatfe, Licetera.

L110 ADVERBS, PREPOSITIONS, AND CONJUNCTIONS. [$§ 202—204

§ 202. IV. ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION.

a Ves: ¥

ate

fsa Certainly. 2 No, not.

fawees Doubtlessly.

: sa No, do not.

waza Necessarily. ,

§ 203. The following are examples of CompounD ADVERBS.

afer atest Sometimes. ar naz Elsewhere.

ax ax aag ate Nowhere.

ae \ Gently.

Ga Ge wag uf< Hitherto.

wea fe Till now, yet. afe a If not, else

afeat ufe ) Till when? afest a afeat Sometime

aaa ute How long? or other.

afte afe Never. are a Mae Somewhere

gafen On both sides, all another.

round. wea aA awa now and then.

wea ated Indifferently. wat A wat Somehow or

aT afeat Whenever. other.

§ .204. The following are examples in which adverbs take the signs of

cases after them.

EN ; ; . ;

waaqa sfx ata ea Now is the best time. (Lit. The time of

now ws good).

afeat & ate He Ba Bis J have not seen you since then till

today. (Lit. From that time today a

(first) meeting has occurred.)

facta m Ware At last he came.

111 ADVERBS, PREPOSITIONS, AND ConJuNCTIONS. [§§ 205—208

WaT A STA Hatz At length he came to his senses.

St mz a alee wea Ble Me puts off from today to tomor-

row. (Lit. He calls tomorrow today.)

PARTICLES oF Empwasts.

§ 205. These are ¥ and ¥t or ¥1, only, even, and ff and ¥ or g, also,

even. They are always used enclitically, and when any of them is added to

a word ending in 41, that 4T is omitted. Examples, watt mine only

(SAX+ 3), or me only (SAT+%) ; PAT or CATS mine also, or me also. Sax,

a reply, Sat, even a reply. ATA, even one’s own.

PREPOSITIONS.

§ 206, The following is a list of the more usual Prepositions.

stat Before. arata Before.

utet Behind. aa Lor, on acconnt of.

Hux Above. faa, fat Without, Hacept.

atut Beneath. atee Out.

atae Within. aa With.

. } Facing.

The above all govern the genitive case.

CoNJUNCTIONS.

§ 207. The following are the more useful.

BiIsmMz or Ht And. at...at Bither...or.

fa That. qeg But.

Sit Else, even. at /f.

a Then.

§ 208, Inrersecrrons, see § 24. Others as in Hindi.

ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA.

INTRODUCTION.

I withdraw the remarks on Page 2 concerning the tract over which

Maithili is spoken. In Champaran a form of Bhojptri is spoken, with a

strong Maithili tendency, but not sufficiently strong to entitle me to class

the language as a sub-dialect of the latter. We must therefore deduct the

figures for Champaran from the foot note, but at the same time we must add

the figures for the whole of South Munger and South Bhagalptir, for the

Barh Subdivision of Patna, and for part of Pirniyaé, where subsequent in-

vestigations have shown me that Maithili in greater or less purity is

spoken.

The corrected figures, therefore, for the foot note will run as follows.

Muzaffarpir a re ... 28,15,267

Darbhanga aa oi ... 21,038,337

Munger i e ... 18,16,894

Bhagalpir sep aboub se3 .. 20,00,000

Araria Sub-division of Purniya’ .+; any UE ODO40

Barh rs Patna. vss w= 2,417,076

Toran, oes ... 87,87,614

§5, This Grammar went to the Printer more than a year andahalf ago.

When the manuscript was despatched, with the exception of Mr. Beames’

notes on the Bhojpiiri dialect there was no other philological work from

which I could obtain any help regarding the Bihar dialects. Under the

circumstances, I purposely avoided mentioning certain facts which I had

noticed, but which, mistrusting my own uncorroborated ear, I thought de-

manded consideration and reflection before stating. One of these, thanks to

Dr. Heernle’s Gaudian Grammar, has since become one of the commonplaces

of Eastern Hindi Grammar. I allude to the existence of the short vowels

é, 6, #,and ai, These vowels have no symbol in the alphabets of

Bihar, being represented like their long congeners as follows; ¥U e or é, 31,0

or 6, & ai or @, At aw or wi. The fact is, that just as the simple

ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. 113

vowels have each a short and a long form viz: a and 4, 7 and z &c, so also the

diphthongs have each a short and along form, viz: é and e, 6 and 0, di and ai

and d% and aw. Instances of these short diphthongs will be found in § 167

(note) ; and as diphthongs are liable to exactly the same rules as regards

shortening as the simple vowels, the rules in § 148 apply to them also.

Hence, subsequently to § 167, I have marked short diphthongs wherever

they occur. Note that the words ufx, this, and aif¥, that, (§§ 85 & 86) are

pronounced é/’ and oh’.

The rules as regards shortening of vowels and diphthongs in verbal in-

flections have been given by me in § 148 ; but another important rule, first

given by Dr Heernle, for the shortening of vowels and diphthongs in words

other than verbs, must be given here. As adapted to this Maithili Grammar

it is as follows :

(1) As regards 41 4, this vowel is always shortened if it comes in the

antepenultimate syllable or earlier in a word. Thus in the word ¥T3t chaur,

rice, the @ is long, because @ is only in the penultimate syllable; but the

longer form (see § 17) is quaat chairud (or contracted Fret chawrud) in

which the a is short, as it is in a syllable earlier than the antepenultimate.

Again thereis tat Rdmé a proper name, in which the first @ is long, but in

the vocative it is taaT ram’vd, in which the first a is shortened, it being in

the antepenultimate syllable.

(2) As regards other vowels and diphthongs they are liable to be shorten-

ed in the antepenultimate only if a consonant, which is not euphonic gy ya or

awa, follow. If, however, in asyllable earlier than the antepenultimate, they

are lable to be shortened no matter whether a consonant or a vowel follow.

Thus 3} 0, this, makes its genitive 4ta< okar, with a long o, but its accusa-

tive is Stat ok’ra with a short 6, as this 6 fallsin the antepenultimate

and is followed by a consonant. So also the é in aft (see § 84) nénia is

short.

In counting syllables for applying this rule, it must be remembered that

a final silent consonant (see § 7) mustnot be counted a syllable, as it is

counted in § 148. Thus #ta@< okar is only two syllables, while 4x

6k’ré is three syllables.

There is only one exception to this rule,—it is that the final syllable t é

of the instrumental case is not considered as part of the word, but as a

separate word. Hence we have ytfat pdénié, and not ufat panié with

the ashort. The word, however, though written panié is pronounced panié

with the a short.

ee ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA.

§ 70. An optional form of the instrumental singular of & @, “this”, is

uw é. I have not met any corresponding form for 41 0, “that”.

§ 85. For ufe eh’, we éh and US Zh are sometimes used.

§ 86. Similarly for aif oh’, we find are oh, and Are ah.

§ 104. Norn, as to spelling, that verbal forms containing & ai, are

frequently written with 4z ai. Similarly verbal forms in 3t aw are fre-

quently written with az aii. So that @¢@q dékhait is sometimes written

easaq dékhait, and éfaat dékhiau, sometimes faqs dekhiaii,

In poetry @ a when final is frequently written 44 ay: e.g. fat dékhiat

is written sometimes ¢faay dékhiay.

§ 111. Ihave omitted a common form for“ he is”, afe ah’. No other

forms from this root are, so far as my experience goes, in use.

§ 117. Add present participle =&%a achhait “ existing”

§ 132. The forms of the prospective conditional may also be used for

the imperative, and vice versa.

In poetry the prospective conditional is very commonly used as a simple

present. When this is the case, the third singular non-honorific may have also

the following additional forms, @a@ dekh, @ dekhe, gq dekh’, FS dekhai

(or aq dekhay), and at dékhaai. Soalso in intransitive verbs.

§ 133. 8rd Future Hon.—An optional form for this person is a7

dekhath’, frequently, however, written @@ae dékhat’h’.

§ 167. Past Tense—The use of the dipthongs ai and aw in this tense

is regulated by the following rules.

(1) Transitive verbs (including causals) generally take aw, and so also

does aTua gééb, “to sing’. Hence we havein the first person {tas paulah’h,

“J obtained”, ata gaulah’n, “I sang”, tetas charhaulah’h, “1 caused to

ascend”. The past participles of these verbs are Wate paol, WaTE gaol,

and werata charhdol. The principal exception which I have met is the

verb @tua khéébd, “to eat”, which makes its past tense Gas khatlah’A, and

its past participle atvq khaél: the form erate khaol, I have, however, met,

once or twice, though said to be incorrect.

(2) Intransitive verbs as arule use the diphthong a7. Thus 3aTea aghaéd,

“to be satiated”, past part, warveg aghdél, and its Ist pers. past, 7aaqe

aghailah’ nh, “I was satiated”, so also aastue ghab'rdél, “confused,” ATT

aél, “come”, and esastuq har’bardél, “agitated”, from the intransitive

verbs WasTea ghab’raéh, ATUA aed, and esastug har bardéb respectively.

§ 189-3. The verbal noun (oblique form in & az ) of the verbs ¢4 deb,

to give, and @@ Jeb, to take, inserts an @ m, thus, €4 demdi, aa lemai,

gen. zaa demaik &e. Verbs whose root ends in = 2, insert a 46 in this

form; £.g. faa pibai from fax piab, to drink.

Sei APPENDIX NI.

: saa aaeEe AES

SF werd v etaa ae ©

seboyg| BE ecto pre ests Be bE IS te be hy be feet bs

DUT |)

‘The semivowe a ts not used bop Keuy. sifis Ba Wreerneg ee ‘tls

whle shew tng the vartous alphabeis wsed in Mithila.

SUbsldieed for tL.

he vowel §. bung

Sa & 4 APPENDIX N21.

PUSS ist the three characters

SR MATA MAS (HS, ATM CLAA - |

RUSS TIT AMAT Is TSA Ee tee

SS Reamt

AAT RATATAT ATA At ec HATS IMS THA |

~ ; ‘nA

MEAT RAT AT SA SIM AH

The Kayathi character 7s rrot adapted for Wrialieg

Sanskrit. [thas no fori for skort rrediat i ard

has ro cemivowel ya.

TAT MMI SAH AMG S - lI

RUMAH HATA TRAST

) BSA RELA IesAa DIA bh

(BSA Db|ebR esa be Ibik b Mb] De

DhIS IIA PB Elle [ke Laie Dial Bijele PoUialle

Bp) | dblb BBtep bbls De “Bile

g LP Dbl: DPB BIB De “Aj. Ph} bEb

se |UD» [> Bie ab a® bb) Sr1aib

' ElbibBiie B Blk Mh e's Pb} he

Dib|D pp dSibee EB le b b1blp

Bey

Sib lcd] Bibl WbielB jib [edb len ble Sn

: “dh

; Me Sle Biel DAJB dMrEb) Jeb) bis Bibs

. hiibb “Sib db bb Ele 2)bLb

[ebb Dike PID d1PIP bie h)EL ye

bh ‘Bz ‘Bde dhs lbh} B bie}

| Ble}

Pd) bb BialP WIAID IeBylke PALE Ih}

Alb bHb f HEA bbb DELS DDR]

ipsa Sib pB plalp | Bikdib jeryBib ah 2B

PIbIA Rik Dis A wlalp Lh}

, dbp En ZleP i iie Ibi d1bIb “BEI e

—s WIAD B é wb) bik DAS “b>) Iplitie) Ips

ibis by >BBID

IbSih pl) fe Beg bee Le Ble

” iba bibjhe Zibb} Dele PA: PBI bh “S)

Eh Bho Dalb Bibb | Bij pre bleh Diels

DiAlp play | BSA HELA Psa MYA En

“BSA bri ehh Ins be ER SD dbl WBAle

VAjib Blk Dielle liedjib welelie Lebelte £ Die

Ibbjike JPrBle ah a2 dle | le> WeSih bih

Ye bile BA 212s br ‘[eldh Els

Uple\lle Dae b|h ob |eob “B2) Lele Uele2| pl

1ph} 21a1b

| Bey | Ale Die Melle DIESA bie) Ibe ER

Dblp “Bilpyiib hih bills Pielp diblp

Ye BBE) bE “bh) 2 “Alb plalp

LBP | >) be wiAlb Ih >}p IbIp DIAID ble}

IpS\\> bh “eA abllnolb Ihs1h ph\> bab Ih}

DAIP pibjip 23 pialp {oj bile Zip} >1Ph|

bhi IpPlS B ph | Pld bible bb >Bl> JAlblpe

Dipl “Alle dike Melle DIESA Pith} Leb |e

ER Diblb Blip} bib bie Pia 1p

Dib|b bh BUb) deb bh) A Seb] be

dele) Ziel} 21Ph) bhike IpP le Hy he

| BP>\e bipB plier bile Gob) Bp'sih kr Sip

PIB BIS jAlblb bib dIbh) dbl “Ali

ieSih lbbp be bb B hitch | le b>) wiaib

2b Bote) “b>|b Ue|ibie pojie mh >>e

J15/2 fi PID diy: B bib)

a oes

Isbli2ih bibib bhi Psl>b bib yr biAlb B

f SA [elleBle Deh Lite lie>

22 Ipsile B bbb | irl psih all p pIAlb

“BSA by beh eb XB dh BEA bho

Shp PAID | b>) IkSISS Lj hP Jol)

bole

DDbile DY Ab kip» dle £ b> )tb Lit 1pD>s

psi Ip >jlb bleh bh JbBP ER 2b) \b Sh dh

LA) Wale | D>) Ielb) bj hep Jol) elo >>I AIp

Jeb} piAlp f Je> Alb “b'sih Wille Ike fe

Phy

“bob © iby & “Bjlb Wibh) A Biel tal »D1BIb

‘lom@) kA 2S dire tin “Vet 2 Ub [feels leo)

pyung

uty 4 ces I] O[qIss0d s shape a SS

O18 SUOWWIOA OOLYY ONT, “WyoUVE puw FYI ‘purpy ‘soHunSuury o

| Be b2h Dh BS be alas

bS PbjJs ba DpJA brie Delle

Bodh | bb) DAlb B Bile 2A Bilb}-le Delle AB

bp Dba 1B AlD wElb B 2e}\pbAlb |bkS ble

| Ble 1b Ble Zi bie] |b) ie Lehi

AJP Dolls A}e Bile Die DIB bj he

hk PP AED Ire le 12S Wishle

Byh | Abd Bblie bP HP PL} lehie BA

fe b> All UePlih [ele DA hls

Diels Bib Alle LEBS MpLIEL Ie Wiehe

Uedjie Helle [eb ep bible B hyp

wpn ba BD | B}bd dhe Lehlb

Ue | ALP blbb Nees bile DAle bib

bd BaD Selb Alb lms llble |ebH) delle

AD Ble |e Boh | Dike Diielh WR) ke Wes

je bag Spe Bjbdib lle Zl ble

bh dele B® bhi: Dit bhis Be] tp eAte

B lbs Ue | bh} Le $ EEA pllce lp

lsh: lbh BEA} eR IER leh

Dlele | bb Ze bib delle Isle bb

BbSh hibP db Deke Dele |e PPI Diels BB

BLD 12k Plo Pib| le | Albis pie Deb lie

bbb |e bHb “Ble b2h dh BB HRISA Bj te

BEL dh BS HSB 2b dba Sb ob}

| Qt Bebe Delle SIP BA Dd} elle Adie

B|ike Jb 21H delle | APDAJh JAbh bYDIA

llelie [P)fe BRIA lib} d/lelke AbIOAlh Lela}

WrlAb Bb PLE PHP fb 2]b2b PHP eA} Lehi

hib Bh 112 Ajb Melb ela Ef

Weehie bth Dilells Bile Dib hih Bias behis *

Difelle Ble) Ubi BAELe Le Be] Ade ibleg

ib | Selim liebe Iib|le Alb wD dle Lele be

HA |> Pilelle Beli b> wehJ> Libis bib

Dible [lb be Alte th |e Boh |b hjbp Whip

hie Phe |e bY | [keliclo djl sb wbiba

PBAJER D1Ab)b bhie Iya | Alle Helle pla

2p Wblehle bth BA | Hje lb hih Bale

Wiebke [elle BW) Wie BA Tele [be Be] path p

Iibb 3 D[felis bolle ID Whib lehis b2}ho Ba

| [Be PMH HA dl ielie BIA 21> hie p

Yeh) tehB PIAL Ubplb Whip dA wbidAlb

Delis PH bbb J>tblis bP | BD Bib) Mb | be

Aj Uele Ditelie 1b HAIR dH 2h Lhe

BS DSlp Deb le BHP Ajb/D Allie [te d]fell

\ebiPh bei) pi>b deb BRED Iehis Itbl ie Js

biel AY Pitb eile bh PHHE | Bll) bind

Allie Welle Ye P| telte | Mole He 1B) [he Delta l be

Hh biible Dib His> Alle bhb beE jas

lb} HB ie Lhle | b> JAS bjmP bhis

Reh) b>) biehbD pits dLhlis Dlr Ip> >B

Albtb J2tbh Stbj eb 1b Mb21% Jib bbb} Aja

b>} b&b | Bel |bb 2p LJP bhi bbs

[fe kb | >) BA B LA Il DHA Jo

P PhjheB ele ke tio Alb Bhib Itb2lm BHAI Le

| BeJA> 12h WS th YhBie Meith Bel italrAre Le dJth

ene

_ ‘I XIGNwWday

| 2 Ube} Dh) La Lele [ee

B Les dh) Ip le BL Ip Ae te) [eb

Up PbJs lel PAJA dfs Lede Belelbe

Boh | A Dp bP 1p A Doe BE [le dle A

BD 2B 1>Pb Ef 2 lab BRS bIbh}

| A Dib “Seb 121 bb) BPS feblie

{Alp Lelke [2 lhe & Lele 1 bale b

Qeblte bb bliclbee Ye EA Ab lbhi te

Boh | lho Rbike WP IE) bhie

te} Ib>) be [ie lo ten Jil WB hte

De eth) b LBS [elite Lehi

[Wb dUe 2 b> IbP [ehl le BIBYE

BRS fb EDIE tb) I>] DLE LbiPb

BPS | lh blbb BS le dAlb lh]

JERS bbIp's Alb b bile D1 de

lish] blk bbe Boh | 2 Ielh eb IDR BE

te] EBIBE 2 lb “SR 12|b wibby

ibhie De B Ills S16 Ibhiie 1Atb

BBE LPS | & leb Ak 1Bh wie Blh

bhi: |Wibh PHILER bh BBA

Die | UbB els bb ile d)e Llelb bb

lb Sh Zibb} bye DS pile Ab blo dle la

BLP ER Ile WPS | eB bib Delelis

bbb “2 1B) Mh} Ie Ible |B a

Jis}ie th} Ia lie ER DB Ab tb} bb

| die Delos Slike BIB) A DI be Ue lle

wb MABE 12[s Us | Ualedjh Bis lblh

DLs [elle BRIA WPS dle |elbalh BE

ebb) bb bhe PEP JA BIBI> bhis

bibh} Boh | & Jab pelb belbalb ER

Mehils 2h} dle 2 ete) hth Bip White

Dye Bde} El bb lbh} 2 lab BAB

BER 116% Be hb) BoP bps

Wpa|> le $b] b> LD BA Libh}

PA tb} J JAYS Ab Dh IDB Blh 1Ph}

bh SPS Ab ED | ble} LIBR BLD

Bhd bh 4B 2 Jab hele Beblaw

EA itbhike Mh) B | A tele) hih stb tb

“bile Ds BOb) wie ble lbh} 2 Le Rib B

Be Di Lr elle Blh Lh} Bhs BES

| Rib> BPR b die a [PIA [2D hye B

biel [bi Neb bth} wibh) dB 1A BBS

De Ika be PH bP | la b> BB RS

ABE Site 21s Ip 1PAlb Ld 2h Lehis

bh Rim dh Bele) Ble} LB Ab de

[Us [bed DD bIPP Bhs BE LBls)

Jin BAD Jab Wlbh BRIRB) bl} ied

Be bile Ab dik | thle [A lle Ab DLs

Jdh bibs lk BRD BA bb LB IPS

BIB bB Ab ble |¥D) JAH bjmeP [ehh ai

pibb) b>) BuhbD Jab DI Lele 1b IRD 2S

Wb 18th MIP BR BA Lee wh) ple [Ake

b>) Sb | $B) 2] Bibb Lehb [thls

BPS bb “ple}\> WB LB bla Isfs De Ue

BPbjme ih} & Lab Pibh} weet Babs

| fa BB LD iB |b) Late fs 2th}

“pur

moo joyeavd Ur

ag TOE aR RRS

VOTO OUT,

ERRATA.

In spite of great care, the following errors of the press, which are owing

to the difficulty experienced by the printer in printing an entirely foreign

language, have been detected. The necessary corrections should be made, as

some are important. They are printed on one side only of the paper so that

each correction can be cut out and pasted in the proper place in the body

of the work.

For Reap.

P. 5 L. 2 from bottom Bengali Bangali.

Pde ie trom: top = aa

4 16 ,, 3 from bottom BT St

» » Foot Note Usualy Usually

» 20 The last three lines should be

S. faasitfat chiranzivin farsi fet chiranjibini.

Farsnrat chiranjibi De faisnitata chiraiyibin’.

or fartsa chiraiyib

P. 21 L.2 from bottom mdnd

eo? trom: top (suddh)

» 23 ” 5 ” which is

” 2a yp 19 ” atz

25 Spy Co ea qaqa

» 2% Foot Note ale

» 32 1 sata

, 36 4 from bottom janika

,, 43 11 from top saah

» » 6 from bottom hi ? what,

Last line and at kz, what?

or farsnifa chiranjib’.

4 ,

mManya

(s'uddh)

which is not

Gea

arate

jankd

sabh

kz, what ?

at ki, what ? and qT

keo, any one, some

one.

P. 44 L. 5 from top omit ast keo, any one, some one, becomes

¢ ° ~

» » 9 9 after “ata kon” insert “and at keo, any one,

some one, under similar circumstances

ERRATA,

atat kono.

always becomes atat “ono.

For

io). 0 trom top lota

99°99 16 9 amot

» 46 ,, 2 from bottom Likenses

” 09) ” like what

9) 99 : like the same

ee eluastaline how much

Numerals. pp. 47—49.

Re aa

ae aaa

aé Bala

é€3 atate

cy ulate

eV yaa

é= Boraa

P. 50 L. 15 & 16 from top _ section

» » » 6 from bottom it has

, 52 ,, 11 from top 34

op) ty pp de % Taq ait

; » » 14: ” o are al

4 8) a ¥5 Cuaprer VIII.

, 04 ,, 4 _ chah

5, » » 6 from bottom st

moo) 3 trom top gle

So Shon os

9 xy SB from bottom faa’ thikarn

,» 62 ,, 2&1 from bottom edf¥ dekhah'n

RBAD.

lotd

amot

Likeness.

like what ?

hike that.

how much ?

R° ata

ne wit

ad Sala

é3 wlats

dug ate

Guta

aaraa

chapter

the verb has

° we -att

o sreq —al

omit.

chhah

ate

faa thikai

Zufe dekhah’% or

Safe dekhah ni

—_——

ERRATA, 3

For READ.

P. 63 L. 6 from bottom efadd efaae

» 66,,4 from top @fad afua

Owls dehal’ kat dekhal’ kat

», 72 , 8 frombottom euautfe saa fe

doe eaeer tae : dekhal thuth’ dekhal’ thinh’

mie... 2 trom top aq 2uaa

6 SO pp eae 50 sut liaik sut liaik

» 89 , 4& from bottom q og

» 92 2nd line of footnote 2. Fut. 1. Fut.

hei o trom top or uTeet pdel, omit, but see addenda.

By Lo A ewphonie omit.

29 OD) pe ay wea etxas

,, 100 ,, 10 from bottom bdjdeb bay deb

ONS - after chhorab, insert or BIS4 chhdrab

| . after ardéeb insert, or BISa drab

4, LOKGERIa a after jéeb insert or AH Brag Lele facb

,, 109 ,, 3 from top for stra read tA

99 99 oP) 6 9? site ” ate

»110,,15 ,, BSA r atea

IL.L9 Py,

CONTENTS

OF THE

JOURNAL, Pr. For 1879.

1.—Rivett-Carnae, Prehistoric Remains in Central India.—

Rivett-Carnac. The Snake Symbol in India, especially in con-

nection with the worship of Siva—Pratapa Chandra Ghosha,

Note on the articles exhibited by Mr. Rivett-Carnac.—G rierson,

Some Further Notes on Kalidasa.

2.—Irvine, The Bangash Nawabs of Farrukhabad—A Chronicle,

(17183—1857).—G rowse, The Sect of the Pran-nathis.

8.—T em ple, Rough Notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes

about Kandahar.—_Brajanatha Bandyopadhyaya, Hamir

Rasé4, or a History of Hamir, prince of Ranthambor.

4,—Barbe, Pali Derivations in Burmese.—P eal, A peculiarity of

the river names in Asam and some of the adjoining countries.—

Growse, Bulandshahr Antiquities. —R4jendralala Mitra’s

Note to the above.-—Rodgers, Copper Coins of the old Mahdardjas

of Kashmir.—R od gers, The Copper Coins of the Sultans of Kash-

mir.—S mith, Observations on some Chandel Antiquities.

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

Journal, Asiatic Society, . Bengal, from Ate: XII to XVII (1843

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to XXII (1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XX VI,

XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols. XXXIIT to XLVIU, (1864

to 1879).

Asiatie Researches, from Vols. VI to XI and Vols. XVII to XX,

each at eocsoee eeeovereccoee e@eoereecceccee Poet ner e ese eeson

Ditto dino; Mandex: rales ey svslenetelcusheus ceietoremiare av siate e enugersrer stete ee A

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in Arabic, Persian, and Urdu,......

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translatedinto English, with notes and

indexes, by H. Blochmann, M. A., .......«0-. us migistels eae’

The Prosody of the Persians.—By H. Blochmann, Ae me sink

The Tabaqat-i-Naciri. Translated by Major H. G. ‘Raventy,

MO FASC Se winstace tein ait fondo neta arate njere tite cw aleve gaia ieretaenmenis seas

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodgson, Esq. 33 B. CUS crs bce’

NEW SERIES. VOL. XLIX.

ON eee

NE ea OE Skee tb

2, NW ES Le

3 3

A eS NR

JOURNAL

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Extra Number to Part I for 1880.

EDITED BY

JHE PHILOLOGICAL PECRETARY.

er i MEO MSL Nae BL

Tw 4

‘il | ai i

Male

PG eS ni iAH cut n

he bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

hin these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

or produced by nature.’—Sir Wiin1AM Jones,

* Oommuuvications should be sent wnder cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

don, core of Messrs. Tritbner and, Co., 57 S 59, Ludgate Hill.

CALCUTTA:

NTED BY }. Wy. JHOMAS, AT THE PAPTIST Niission PRESS,

f AND PUBLISHED BY THE

fsiaTic Society, 57, PARK STREET,

: 1881.

eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeaOOOeeeeOeOOOeOO TOO eee

fon 4

lusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. (——To Non-Subscribors, Rs, 2, bf

f Price in ee: Shillings. d /

CONTENTS.

A Grammar and Vocabulary of the Balochi ee ae M.

LonGwortH: “Danens; (C508. igor. dans eaestne renee eee

A SKETCH

OF THE

NORTHERN BALOCHI

mANGUAG EE

CONTAINING

A GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY

AND

SPECIMENS OF THE LANGUAGE

M. Loneworra Dames, Cx Sx

EXTRA NUMBER TO JOURNAL, ASIATIC SOCIETY, BENGAL, PART | FOR 1880.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED BY J. W. THOMAS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS,

PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET.

1881,

ZA\'3 HoMUSS

LESS. dg SEQ

INTRODUCTION.

1. The Balochi language belongs to the Iranian branch of the Aryan

family. It is found in two distinct forms; the Northern dialect which

is here treated of, and the Southern or Makrani dialect which has been

lately dealt with in Major Mockler’s Grammar. The Northern dialect

is spoken among the Rind Baloches living in the neighbourhood of the

Bolan Pass in Kachi, and on the Upper Sindh and South Panjab frontiers.

The tribes speaking this dialect are the Rinds, Dombkis, Maghasis, Jakranis,

Marris, Bugtis, Mazaris, Drishaks, Gorchanis, Lasharis, Durkanis, Legharis,

Hadyanis, Lunds, Khosas, Bozdars, and Kaisaranis. These tribes come

into contact with populations speaking Sindhi, Panjabi, Brahdi, and Pashto.

The Indian languages, Sindhi and Panjabi, have affected the Balochi

Vocabulary considerably, Pashto very slightly if at all, while Brahdi

has probably borrowed considerably from Balochi. The Brahdis commonly

understand Balochi, and it is the commonest medium of communication

between them and the Balochi speaking tribes. The best Baloch is pro-

bably spoken among the Dombkis and Bugtis, the most corrupt perhaps

among the Bozdars. But the differences in dialect between one tribe and

another are very slight, while between the Northern and Southern dialects

the difference is so great that the one is almost unintelligible to the tribes

speaking the other. The Sarawan and Jahlawan tribes of Brahéis occupy

a broad belt of country dividing one dialect from the other.

9. This dialect was first dealt with by Leech in the Journal of the

Bengal Asiatic Society for 1840. His sketch was commented on by

Lassen in the “Zeitschrift fiir die Kunde des Morgenlandes” for 1841.

Leech gives a small Vocabulary. Gladstone’s Bilichi Manual (Lahore,

1873) and Bruce’s Manual (Lahore, 1869) both include Vocabularies, but

no attempt has hitherto been made to compile a full or systematical

vocabulary. There is a scanty vocabulary of Southern Balochi in Masson’s

travels, but this dialect is fully dealt with by Major Mockler, and a

vocabulary is also promised. The difference between the dialects is so

2 INTRODUCTION [Extra No.

great however that Major Mockler’s works are of small value to the

student of Northern Balochi, which is of most importance politically speak -

ing. Partly to supply this want, and partly as a contribution to the study

of an interesting group of languages, I have compiled this vocabulary, for

which I have been collecting words for four years on the Southern Derajat

Frontier, and in the Sulaiman Hills, and for a short time in Sibi and Kachi.

83. Balochiis as regards vocabulary a mixed language. The original

old Persian stock has formed the nucleus round which the alien elements

have gathered. The principal borrowings have been from Sindhi or the

South Panjabi dialect which is nearly akin to it. Correspondences are

pointed out in the vocabulary, Indian words being generally marked as

Sindhi, as that is the source from which they are immediately derived.

But by pointing out the correspondence I do not mean to assert that in

every case Balochi has borrowed from Sindhi. Sometimes Sindhi may be

the borrowing language, and in many cases both languages are indebted to

modern Persian or Arabic. Though the numerical proportion of Sindhi

words as shown in the vocabulary may seem very large it is not so in actual

practice, asmany of these words are of rare occurrence, and others only

locally used. Nearly all the words in commonest use, especially the verbs,

are pure Balochi.

4. I prefix an outline of the grammar of Balochi. Lassen has

already treated of the sounds, but the materials furnished him by Leech

were too imperfect, and too full of misprints to be a safe foundation to

build on in every case. Although, however, he was led astray in individual

cases, the true character of the language did not escape him, and the

remarks that follow are based on his.

1880. ] :

BALOCHI GRAMMAR.

TABLE OF BALOCHI SOUNDS.

SURD. SONAN'T.

3 3

os; a : 2

a Bs ai a & ie is

5 | Aspirate.| $ | Aspirate.| 4 2 |vowels.| “B,

5 | Spirate 5 spirate.| 4 | iF E

cess tae Wik LPs JN a

Guttural ... os ( S | a é |e 5

k kh kh g eh gh n h

PEIN | PEAY lei UE, Set ACA ue,

aga YAS -

Palatal @ | eS ah es

ch | chh j jh 5 :

Cerebral ... | © | %#

Dental ea ne eae wt

Depa... Se | eel | S| fe] |e

p | ph| ft b | bh |y,w] m

{

ne er ee NR SE EE ESE SE

4 ALPHABET. [Extra No.

THE ALPHABET.

Balochi can hardly be called a written language. It is only within

the last few years that Balochis have begun to write it, Persian being

the ordinary medium of written communication and the Balochis consider-

ing their language to be merely a colloquial form of Persian. In writing,

uniformity of spelling is little attended to. As the Persian character is

the only one current in the countries where Balochi is spoken, I have

employed it in the Vocabulary, giving a transliteration of all words in the

Roman character. Short vowels are not marked in the Persian character, as

the transliteration renders it unnecessary. The Arabic letters & and 6 are

retained to represent certain Balochi sounds corresponding, or nearly so,

with their Arabic values, the representation of these sounds by (» and 3

being insufficient and misleading. The other Arabic letters TP, b,

&, ¢, and (3 are. omitted as unnessary having no distinct value in Balochi.

In the borrowed Arabic words phonetic correctness is all that is aimed at.

Aspirates are represented by & or h following the aspirated consonant.

The cerebrals are marked as in Urdu.

The Persian Alphabet as applied to Balocht.

Persian. Roman. Value.

{ Blsapt atlases As in Persian, an initial introducing all vowels.

b g

e, al, 0, au With the short vowel marks — — — it forms

a,i,u. With madda 7 it forms 4. With

cs following it forms i, e, ai. With » follow-

ing it forms t,o, au. Asa medial and final

it is always a.

e b As in English and Persian,

bes bh Aspirated 6,

Y Pp As in Persian and English.

Kes ph Aspirated p.

ew t Dental ¢ as in Persian.

&gs th Aspirated #.

& th As in Arabic, English ¢h in breath, health.

& t Cerebral ¢ pronounced as in Hindustani.

Ki th Aspirated ¢.

z J J as in English.

y= jh Aspirated 7.

Fc ch As in English church.

1880.]

Persian.

bam

Roman.

chh

ALPHABET.

Value.

Aspirated ch.

An aspirate guttural as in Persian, pronounced

without harshness as in Pashto.

Dental d as in Persian.

Aspirated d.

Cerebral d as in Hindtstani.

Aspirated d.

As in Arabic, or English ¢h in brother, breathe.

A clearly trilled 7, as in Persian.

Cerebral y as in Hindtstani, and like it nearly

connected in sound with 35 d.

As English z.

As in Persian, or s in English measure.

As in Persian. English s.

As in Persian, the palatal sibilant. English sh.

As in Persian. A slightly pronounced guttural,

not so harsh as in Arabie or Pashto.

A pure labial f, not partly dental as English f.

As English & without any palatalization as in

Persian.

G hard as in English and Persian without

palatalization.

As English m.

As English . Also as a slightly pronounced

guttural nasal, as in the final 2 of Persian or

Hindustani plurals.

Hither as English w or as a purely labial v, not

as English v.

As English h. Occasionally mute as a final.

When so mute it is not represented in

transliterations.

As English y. Sometimes pronouncd with a

shght tendency to become zh.

6 CONSONANTS. [Extra No.

BALOCHY SOUNDS.*

1.— Consonants.

k corresponds with Persian k, which however more usually appears

in Balochi as &@5 kh or ‘ad kh. :

45 Ich as an initial represents Persian oS k or ¢ kh; e. g.,

Balochi khush-agh Persian kush-tan

B. khar P. khar

B. khan-agh P. kun

As a final it sometimes represents S 2; e. g.,

B. gwankh P. bang

B. gurkh P. gurg

> kh seldom occurs initially, its place being taken by kh. As a final

it corresponds with Persian k or g; e. g.,

B. hakh

B. rekh

P. khak

P. reg

S ¢ corresponds either with Persian g or b. As an initial gw

to)

answers to b (original v); e. g.,

B. gandim P. gandum

B. gist P. bist

B. gwath P. bad

B. gwat-agh P. battan

B. geth P. bed

& oS gh does not seem to occur in true Balochi words, but to be confined

to words of Indian origin.

& gh hardly ever appears as an initial. As a medial it corresponds

with Persian g and h; asa final usually with h (whether pronounced or

mute in modern Persian, also occasionally with g; e. g., ‘

B. jaghar P. jigar

B. nighah P. nigah

B. dighar P. dibar

B. jigh P. zih

B. roshagh P. rozah

B. vagh P. rag

In the words saghar ‘head,’ P. sar, and naghan ‘bread,’ P, nan, the gh

has no consonant corresponding to it in the Persian.

* These explanations follow the order of sounds in the Table, p. 3.

1880. } CONSONANTS. 7

The gh appears to be inherent in past participles, answering to the

final h of the Persian, but it is not heard except in compound forms when

followed by a vowel. Thus khutha, p. p. of khanagh means ‘done,’ but

khutha-gh-ant ‘they have done.’

w n frequently occurs as a final, in the place of n or nt; e. g., |

khanaghen — khanaghant.

Occasionally owing to a nasal style of pronunciation, mw stands for m,

and m is interpolated as a final; e.g.,

nyanwan — nyama

@ ch generally corresponds with the same letter in Persian.

& = chh also represents Persian ch ; e.g.,

B. chhath P. chah

B. chham P. chashm

zJ corresponds either with original Persian j or z; e.g.,

B, jihan P. jahan

. B. jan P. zan

B., jigh P. zih

&g> jh is only found in words of Indian origin.

The cerebral consonants are found almost entirely in words of Indian

origin. Before a dental, yr is occasionally pronounced 3 y, as mard for

mard, gartha for gartha; but this is not universal and has not been marked

in the Vocabulary. Leech represents this by d, but I have never heard

it so pronounced,

« ¢ represents an original t, which however more usually becomes

&@3 th.

&¢5 th as an initial commonly represents an original t. As a final, and

after a consonant medially, it often corresponds with Persian d; e.g.,

B. thakhtha P. takhta

B. thafar P. tabar

B. arth P. arad

B. khanth P. kunad

B. burtha P. burda

& th (pronounced as in Arabic, like English ¢h in nothing, heath), does:

not occur initially. As a medial and final it corresponds with Persian d.

As a final it does not occur, unless preceded by a vowel; e

» Sy

B. brath P. birAdar

B. gwath P. bad

B. roth P. rida

B. roth P. ravad

B. sith P. sid |

B. rasitha P. vastida

8 CONSONANTS. [Extra No.

od corresponds with Persian d as an initial and occasionally after a

consonant ; e.g.,

B. dem P. adim

B. khandagh P. khand-idan

89 dh only occurs in words of Indian origin.

o dh (pronounced like English ¢h in mother, breathe) never occurs

initially. As a final and medial it corresponds with Persian d; e. ¢.,

B. didhar P. didar

B. sadh P. sad

B. rodh P. rod

In some verbs dh as a characteristic represents a consonant which is

lost in modern Persian ; e. g.,

B. rudh-agh, p.p. rustha P. rustan, Imp. ri

B. nyadh-agh P. nihadan, nih.

B. shodh-agh P. shustan, shu, p.p. shustha

In madhakh ‘locust’ dh corresponds with ] in Persian malakh.

In kaghadh 4s the Persian spelling is preserved, though ¢ is pro-

nounced dh not z.

In nadhra it represaents Arabic 6 in_,b.

n corresponds with Persian n.

& p corresponds with Persian p, also with f before a consonant ; e. g.,

B. hapt P. haft

B. gwaptha P. bafta

&g ph as an initial represents Persian p and f; e. g.,

B. phanch P. panj

B. phusht P. pusht

B. phur P. pur

B. phrah P. farakh

§ f seldom occurs initially, its place being taken by ph. As a medial

and final it commonly represents Persian b; e. g.,

B. thafar P. tabar

B. shaf P. shab

B. af P. ab

~ b corresponds with Persian b as an initia’ and when not preceded by

a vowel.

&g bh is found only in words of Indian origin.

4 Ww, v, has two sounds. The most usual is that of English w, which

it receives generally when followed by a vowel, and the other that of a

1880. ] CONSONANTS. 9

labial v (bh in Ellis’s paleotype), which it receives when followed by a

consonant or as a) final, and in borrowed words of Sindhi origin. With

both pronunciations it often corresponds with Persian b; e. g.,

B. zawan P. zaban

B. warna P. barna

B. savz P. sabz

B. whav P. khwab

Combined with h, w is pronounced like English wh in which ; wh and

w alone often correspond with Persian khw 5% or kh followed by a labial

vowel (u, t,o). The guttural is either preserved in the aspirate bk or more

frequently lost altogether (see h); e. g.,

B. whan P. khwan

B. whar P. khwar

B. wash P. khush

B. wan-agh P. khwan-dan

B. war-agh P. khur-dan

em corresponds with Persian m.

«» 8 corresponds with Persian s.

sh as an initial corresponds with Persian sh. As a final and medial

it corresponds either with sh or z; e. g

oO")

B. shaf P. shab

B. ash P. az

B. namash P. namaz

B. seshin P. sozan

B. rosh P. roz

Sher ‘below’ seems to correspond with Persian zer, but there is no other

ease of initial sh corresponding with z Sher may be a contraction of

ash-er ‘from below.’

5 z corresponds either with Persian s or z; e.g.,

B. zuwar P. suwar

In the following words z corresponds with Persian d; viz

Ys)

B: zi P. di roz

A. zan-agh P. dan-istan

B. zamath P. damad

Yn zi ‘yesterday,’ mazain ‘great,’ zinagh ‘know,’ and zirde, a poetical

word meaning ‘heart,’ the original Zend z is preserved, In zamath z

represents an original j.

10 CONSONANTS. [Extra No.

In zik and zaragh z corresponds with the j of Sindhi jik and jaru,

but these words may have been.borrowed by Sindhi. Cf. Pashto zik.

5 zh corresponds with Persian sh, z and j; e. g.,

B. duzhman P. dushman

B. azhman P. Asman

B. drazh P- daraz

B. wazha P. khwaja

cs y, 9%, and J 1 correspond with the same letters in Persian.

% h generally represents an old Persian h, modern Persian h or £h; e.g.,

B. hushk P. khushk

B. hon P. khun

B. hikh P. khik

B. phrah P. farakh

Borrowed Arabic words beginning with ¢ undergo a similar change, as :—

B. hair A. khair

B. hatar A. khatar

The above noted correspondences may be tabulated as follows :

Persian. Balochi.

k as an initial kh

medial

final et

kh initial h, kh

medial kh

final h, kh

g initial g

medial gh

final gh, kh

ch initial chh

t initial th

d Deak th, dh, th

P initial ph

£ initial ph

b ey fy. w

final

sh medial zh (occasionally)

4 ae z, zh (occasionally)

medial

Z initial j

1880. | VOWELS. 11

Persian. Balochi.

Z medial

sh, zh

final

h medial ‘

final

initial occasionally omitted

It will be noticed that the aspirates of the surd row (kh, chh, th)

are very common, replacing the corresponding unaspirated Persian conso-

nants, while those of the sonant row (gh, jh, dh, bh) seem to be entirely

confined to words of Indian and Brahui origin.

The letters kh, gh, th, dh, and f are usually medials or finals, re-

presenting the Persian letters, shown in the above table. Zh and dh are

never initials, and 4h, gh and f, when they occur in borrowed words of

modern introduction as initials, are usually pronounced kh, g and ph.

An initial h is occasionally lost altogether ; e. g.,

B. aster P. hastand

B. am P. ham

Il VOWELS.

The vowel sounds in Balochi generally agree with those of Khurasani

Persian. They may be arranged as follews :—

la , -

Long Ey hy A

Short Be ay ul

Diphthongs e, al, 0, au

The most noticeable point of difference from Persian is the frequent

substitution of the palatal series i, i, e for the labial series , u, 0; e.¢.,

B. sith P. sid

B. dir P. dir

B. seshin P. sozan

B. gandim P. gandum

‘ B, bitha P. biida

B. hikh P. khik

B. wasi P. khusi

B. sirmugh P. surma

A similar change sometimes affects borrowed Arabic words; e. ¢.,

B. malim A. malim

B. hir A. hir

In a few cases the change is reversed ; e. ¢.,

B. osht-agh P. ist-adan

B. stf P. sev

Other variations from the Persian vowel system are rare.

12 THE NOUN. [Extra No.

THE NOUN.

I—TERMINATIONS.

1. Balochi nouns in their formation correspond closely with Persian.

The original terminal vowels have been lost, and the majority of nouns

now terminate in consonants. ‘There is no distinction of gender.

2. Vowel-endings.

a. The majority of nouns ending in 4 are borrowed from Sindhi or

Arabic. In the former case 4 sometimes represents Sindhi o, therein

correspondinz more nearly with Panjabi; e. g.,

Ay. haya, dua.

Si. bha, jhera, thora, trama, vela.

The words wazha, z4, chawd, pdsna and begd are not borrowed. Of

these wazha (P. khwajah) and bega in inflected forms drop the 4, and take

the termination ah as a base of inflection; e. g.,

wazha, pl. wazhahan, lords

bega: abl. begaha, in the evening.

The borrowed noun veld time, is similarly treated. Other nouns

ending in 4 take no inflections. Some Sindhi nouns as jherd, thord have an

alternative form in o which can be inflected.

i. This is a common termination being commonly used as in Persian

to form abstracts as duzi, ‘ theft’ from duz ‘thief,’ saki strength from sak

‘strong’ &c., also as the termination of other abstract nouns not directly

formed from Balochi bases as shadhi ‘rejoicing,’ ziyani ‘injury.’ It occurs

also in other nouns as godi ‘lady,’ druhant ‘pistol,’ mavarki ‘assembly,’

pahli ‘rib’ (P. pahli). A as a termination of borrowed words i is also

found as in chari ‘spy,’ mehi ‘ buffalo,’ phalli ‘ section of a tribe.’

O is of frequent occurrence both in pure Balochi and in borrowed |

words; e. g.,

Balochi dithlo, mist (P. dud).

shathlo, dove

bathlo, mortar

nikho, uncle

gokho, span

mokho spider

go race, prize

jo watercourse

gwando alligator

duggo eagle

jaddo cave

phalo direction

1880.] THE NOUN. 13

surgo speech

lero camel

Borrowed

daddo, pony Si. dradro

paraddo, echo Si. parando

ghoro. a band of horse

shaddo a turban

Iekho reckoning.

This o nearly corresponds in sound to the close English 0, and never

has the open Italian sound. Most words ending in o change it to av when

followed by a vowel, whether this vowel commences a following word or

an inflectional suffix. The o of the first eight words in the above list

(dithlo to jo inclusive) does not undergo this change. Go and jo are

radical words, and the others end in the syllables lo and £ho which pro-

bably had originally a distinct force of their own; e. g.,

akh Akhoa

eee : form the plural Meta

jo joan

but phale : phalava

jaddo \ are inflected { saddiv

Dihav ‘leopard’ may be classed with words ending in 0, though I have

never heard the termination pronounced otherwise than ay. This v is a

purely labial sound, not the English v.

U. wt asa termination does not seem to occur in pure Balochi words.

It is found in a few words of Sindhi origin and undergoes no change in

inflections; e. g.,

ani, an egg

tilu, a bell

vari, a beam

limtia, lemon (Arable).

E has not been met with except in kahne ‘pigeon,’ also pronounced

kahni,

Au is only found in jaw ‘ barley.’

3. Special terminations.

(a). Verbal Nouns,

Agh. This is the termination of the infinitive, and verbal noun which

corresponds with it in form. It apparently corresponds with the Pashto

verbal noun in @h, as final gh in Balochi generally corresponds with Persian

h. Aghas a termination corresponds with the Persian termination ah in

many other nouns; e. g., ramagh “a flock of goats,” Ahanjagh “a sash” &e.

Some are verbal nouns in form as gwidnzagh “a swing.” The termination

agh also forms collective nouns as murdanagh “the fingers,” from murdan,

phadhagh “legs,” from phadh.

14 THE NOUN. [Extra No.

Okh. This termination forms the noun of agency from the Verbal

base, and may be used with almost any verb; e.g., thursokh “a coward,”

from thursagh “to fear ;” warokh “an eater,” from waragh. These nouns

of agency can be used and inflected as adjectives; e. g.,

mirokh, a fighter

mirokhen bing, fighting dog.

Okh is ocasionally found in other nouns besides those of agency as in

gannokh ‘ fool.’

(b) Abstract Nouns.

i. This is the commonest termination for abstract nouns, which may

. be formed from other nouns, or adjectives; e. g., duzi “theft,” sakmardi

“valour,” ghami “ grief.”

Adh. Used in forming abstracts from adjectives of dimension ; as,

ewandadh, shortness

drazhadh, length

phrahadh, breadth.

uta; as azmuta ‘examination’ from azmainagh.

ar; as didar ‘sight,’ raftar ‘ paces.’

(ce) Collective Nouns.

Agh. See above under verbal nouns.

gal. This is most usually employed to form collectives ; e. g.,

jangal, a band of women from jan.

zahgal, a flock of kids from gah.

pahar, as gwar-pahar, a flock of lambs.

(d) Diminutives.

Ak, akh, ikh. This termination is frequently employed to form

diminutives, sometimes modifying the base; e. ¢.,

janikh or jinkh girl, from jan woman

ewarakh lamb, from the base gwar—cf. gurand ram, and gwar-

papar flock of lambs.

kisanakh very small, from kisdin.

This termination is occasionally used when all diminutive signification

has been lost, as wasarikh, “ father-in-law,’’ (Persian £husar).

Ro, occasionally used, as in kisdnro, a diminutive of kisdin ‘small.’

Possibly the termination lo in dithlo, sha¢hlo had originally the force of a

diminutive. Compare also the adverbs khamro “a very little,” from khan,

and chiklo “a little.”

4. Compound nouns and adjectives.

Compounds are numerous, and may be classed under the Sanskrit

1880.] THE NOUN. 15

divisions of Dwandwa, Tatpurusha, Karmadharaya and Bahuvrihi, or

| Copulative, Qualifying, Descriptive and Possessive.

a. Copulative. This class consists of nouns inseparably coupled to-

gether, only the latter being subject to inflection ; e. g.,

| phol-phurs, enquiry

thaukh-tawar, conversation

chukh-chori, children.

6. Qualifying or dependent. In this class the latter member of the

compound is qualified by the former. The latter member may be either a

noun or a verbal roct, the verbal noun in okh being occasionally but not

often used; e. g.,

(1). When both members are nouns.

jogin-dar, a pestal (lit. mortar-stick).

mazar-dumb, a plant (lit. tiger-tail).

rosh-dsAn, sunrise.

chagé-halwar, a matter of jest.

chham-phusht, eyelid.

mah-ghuma, eclipse of the moon.

(2.) When the first member is a noun and the latter a verbal root.

shirwar, milk-drinking

rozh-gir, eclipse of the sun (sun-seizing).

eodhin-din, udder-tearing (name of a plant).

shav-khash, night-expeller (the planet Venus).

mar-khusho#h, man-slayer. '

sangband, connected by marriage.

e. Descriptive. In this class the first member is an adjectives, numeral

or other word simply describing or defining the second ; e.

syah-af, perennial stream, (lit. blackwater).

drazhdar, a beam (longwood).

madhgor, female wild ass.

ergwath, the leeside (lit. downwind).

chyar-gist, fourscore.

d. Possessive. These are formed in a similar manner to the last

class, with the force of adjectives or descriptive epithets, the possession of

the qualities described being implied ; e. g.,

hor-dast, empty-handed.

phash-phadh, barefoot.

sweth-rish, greybeard

sy4h-gwar, black-breast (e. g. the black partridge).

phodhan-demi, the name of a flower (lit. thither-faced).

dir-zinagh, far-knowing.

dast-basthagh, hands joined.

16 THE NOUN. : [Extra No.

5. Inflection of nouns.

The suffixes used in forming the different cases are 4, ar, egh, An, anrd

and ani, but these suffixes are put to a great variety of uses which will be

considered under the different cases.

The most usual inflection is that in 4. It may be used us an instru-

mental or nominative with verbs in a past tense, as an accusative, ablative,

and locative, its place is to a certain extent taken in the plural by the

suffix Ani, the use of which is however more restricted.

(1) Zhe Nominative. The nominative of all intransitive verbs, and

of transitive verbs in the present and future is the simple uninflected noun.

With transitive verbs in tenses derived from the past participle the instru-

mental construction is employed, the inflected form in 4 being used for the ©

agent while the object is left uninflected.

(2) Genitive. In most cases the simple base is used with a genitive

signification, but if greater precision is required the suffix egh is used, as

An mard bachh, that man’s son; but hawe bachh dzhi mardegh en,

he is the son of that man.

(8) Dative. The termination ar or aris employed for the dative, as:

Mardumar naghana datha-i, he gave the man bread.

(4) Accusative. The most usual ending of the accusative is 4, but

ar is frequently used, especially when emphasis is required or to distinguish

a nearer object from a more remote; e. g., ma Balochiya roti-ar naghan

khanuz. In Balochi we call “roti” naghan.

The uninflected noun is also sometimes used for the accusative.

(5) Ablative, Locative. The inflected form in 4 is used with the

prepositions go “ with,’ azh “ from,” pha “on,” man “in,” gwar “in

possession of,’ dan “ into,’ and avr “in, upon,” which alone precede the

noun. It also expresses without a preposition position, motion to or from,

time when. The meaning from is often implied without the use of theff!

preposition azh; e. g.,

An ki khai chi kadhira Whatever thing comes from God

Bahr-khanani go hadhira That I will divide with my heart.

Har shakha hazar shakh bitha On every branch a thousand branche

sprang.

Har shakha wathi gul bitha. On every branch its own flower.

Plural.

(6). An. The termination dm is used for the nominative and accusa

tive plural, but the singular forms are perhaps more frequently used

With numerals the singular is almost exclusively used.

dma. The plural dative in Azra is also of rare occurrence, the singula

being more frequently used.

1880. ] ADJECTIVES. 17

dnt. This is the most usual plural suffix, being always used for the

genitive and ablative; e. g.,

paxAtani khund, the vale of poplars.

(7). The suffix e.

e is used in the sense of an indefinite article; e. g., mard ‘man’;

marde ‘a man.”

The indefinite base formed by the suffix e is used as a base of inflec-

tion, the case endings following the e. Thus from mardo we get mardea

and mardear.

ADJECTIVES.

1. Adjectives are formed by the terminations 1, en, ena, agh, 0, and

egh from nouns and adverbs; e. g.,

i. demi, former from dem

A phadAi, hinder Bs phadha

en, ena. marden, manly S mard

UGC, i of silver ,, nughra

nughraena,

agh. gandagh, bad 3 gand

| 0. gwatho, windy 5 egwath

egh. daregh, wooden 5 dar

| 2. Adjectives precede nouns and generally take the termination en

when used with nouns, unless the original termination happens to be en ; as,

nughraew aden, a silver mirror

but

| gwathoen halwar, windy talk.

The adjectives jowain, good, kisain, small, and mazain, great, form respec-

tively before nouns jowanen, kisanen, and mazanen.

3. Comparison. The comparative degree is formed by the suflix

thar, thir, or tar; e. g.,

kisain comp. kisanthar and kasthar

burz 4 burzathir

mazalit oo masthar

jowalz = jowanthar

sak A sakthar,

the base being sometimes slightly modified. The word bathir (Pers. bihtar)

is sometimes used with other adjectives to express comparison ; as,

bathir gandagh, worse.

The word geshtar “more” corresponds to the Pers. beshtar, but the

positive is wanting in Balochi.

18 NUMERALS. [Extra No..

“Than” in comparison is expressed by azh, whether the adjective is

put in the comparative degree or not; e. g.,

Azh tho nekh en, he is better than thou.

There is no special superlative form. The comparative form may be

used, or the adverbs sakia “extremely”, hudhai “divinely” may be employed

to give emphasis to the adjective. The phrase azh thewaghen or azh kullan

“of all”, may also be used with the comparative to give a superlative

sense; €. g.,

Azh thewaghen masthar, the greatest of all.

NUMERALS.

1. Carprinat NuMBERs.

Yak ; One

Do Two

Sai Three

Chyar Four

Phanch Five

Shash Six

Hapt Seven

Hasht :

Hashd j ak

Nuh Nine

Dah Ten

Yazhdah

Vérdah Eleven

Dwazhdah

Dwazdah t Twelve

Senzdah Thirteen

Chyardah Fourteen

Phanzdah Fifteen

Shaazdah Sixteen

Havdah Seventeen

Hazhdah Eighteen

Nozd Nineteen

Gist Twenty

Gist-u-yak Twenty-one

Gist-u-do Twenty-two, and so on regularly

Si Thirty

Chhil Forty

1880. ]

NUMERALS.

Phanjah

Sai-gist

Saigist-u-dah

Chyar-gist

Chyargist-u-dah

Sadh

Shazh-gist

Hapt-gist

Hasht-gist

Nub-gist

Dosadh

Hazar

Hadhar ;

Lak

Khor

Fifty

Sixty

Seventy

Highty

Ninety

A hundred

A hundred and twenty

A hundred and forty

A hundred and sixty

A hundred and eighty

Two hundred

A thousand

One hundred thousand

An indefinitely large number.

The form ya “one” is used with nouns ; ya is used by itself.

Counting from sixty upwards is usually done in multiples of twenty,

intermediate numbers being reckoned on or back from the nearest

multiple; e. g.,

217 is sai kham yazhdah-gist, ¢. e., three less eleven-twenties.

923 is yazhdah-gist-o-sai, 7. ¢., eleven-twenties and three.

2. OrnbDINAL NUMBERS.

Pheshi First

Duhmi Second

Saimi Third

Chyarumt Fourth

Phanchumt Fifth —

Shashumi Sixth

Haptumi Seventh

Hashtumi Highth

Nuhmi Ninth

Dahmi Tenth

Yazdami Eleventh

Dwazdami Twelfth

Senzdami Thirteenth

Chyardami Fourteenth

Phanzdami Fifteenth

Shaazdami Sixteenth

Havdami Seventeenth

Hazhdami Eighteenth

20 NUMERALS. [Extra No.

Nozdami Nineteenth

Gistumt Twentieth

Stumi Thirtieth

Chhilumi. Fortieth

Sadhumi Hundredth

Hazarumi Thousandth

Compound numbers are treated as single words in forming the

ordinal; as,

Twenty-first

Twenty-fiftth

Gist-yakumi

Gist-phanchumi

8. Fractionan NUMBERS.

one-half (4) nem

one-third (4) saiak

one-quarter (4) pao, chyarak

one-fifth (4) phanjak

three-quarters (4) sai-pao

one and a half (14)

with one half more

e.g. four and a half (45)

5°

yak nem or dedh

sadhoan

sadhoan chyar

With minuter fractions the word bahr is employed with the ordinal

number, as Gistumi bahr, one-twentieth.

4. MULTIPLES.

a. Multiples of quantity, expressed in English by the word “fold.”

dura double

yake sai threefold

yake chyar ° fourfold

yake phanch fivefold

and so on as required.

6. Multiples of time expressed generally by the word bar correspond-

ing to the similar use of “times” in English. Bar is put in the plural

except in ya-bare “ once”, where it receives the indefinite suffixes. Thi-bare

“another time” is similarly constructed :

ya-bare onee

do-baraz twice

sai-baraz . thrice

ehyar-baran four times

and so on.

1880. | PRONOUNS. 21

PRONOUNS.

I.—Perrsonat PRonouns.

a. First person.

Singular.

Nom. man, mah I

Gen. mani, main my

maigh mine

Dat. \ mana me, to me

Ace.

Instr. ) man I, from me

As, 3) azh man, go man with me &e.

Plural.

Nom. ma we

Gen. main our

maigh ours

Dat. : ony!

} mar, mara us, to us

Ace.

Instr. i

ADL ; ma we, us, &e.

The plural ma is often used with a singular signification.

6. Second person.

Singular.

Nom. thau, tha thou

Gen. that thy

thaigh thine

DEMS \ thara thee, to thee

Ace.

ne } thau, tha thou, &e.

Plural.

Nom. shawa, sha you

Gen. shawai, shat your

shawaigh yours

eG \ shawar, shar

Ace. Oe a aa you

Instr. shawa, sha you

Abl. &C.

The singular and plural in the second personal pronoun are generally

confiued to their proper significations.

PRONOUNS.

[Extra No.

IL.—Tutrp Personat Pronoun snd DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

The demonstrative pronouns “ this” and “ that” take the place of the

3rd personal pronoun, which only exists independently in the form of

the pronominal suffixes to be noticed hereafter.

1. Proximate demonstrative pronoun.

Instr.

Abl.

Singular.

esh, e, 1

eshi, eshiya

eshiyar

eshiya, eshiyar

Oe 72

eshiya

’sh eshiya, go eshiya, &e.

Plural.

esh, eshan

eshani

eshanra

eshan, eshanra,

aes

eshani

’sh eshani &e.

this, he

of this, his

to this, to him

this, him

from this, fromhim &e.

these, they

of these, their

to these, to them

these, them

these, they

from them &e.

An intensive form is used with ‘the prefix ham, sometimes corrupted

to haw, as hawe, hamesh, hameshiya, hameshani &c., “ this very one, by

this one.”

2. Remote demonstrative pronoun.

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Acc.

Instr.

Abl.

Tustr.

Abl.

_ Singular.

anhi, anhiya

eae

anbiyar

anhiyar, anhiya

, * 2

anhiya

’sh anhiya &e.

Plural.

anhan, an

Anhani

Anhanra

Anhan, anhanra

Anhant

’sh Anhani &e.

that, he

of that, his

to him, that

that, him

that, he

from him &e.

those, they

of those, their.

to those, them

those, them

those, they

from them &e.

This pronoun has also an intensive form with the prefix ham or haw,

meaning “that one”, “that very one”, as hawan, hawanhiya &e.

5 ? > ?

1880. | PRONOUNS. 93

The compound forms imar and Ammar (for i-mard and 4n-mard) are

frequently used in the sense of personal pronouns and are applied even to

animals and inanimate objects.

3. Pronominal suffixes.

These are frequently employed with the verb when the regular pro-

nouns are not expressed. Those of the 3rd person, ¢ “he” and ish “they”

are most frequently employed, the distinction between the singular and plural

forms not being carefully observed. (For examples, see under the verb.)

The suffix 4 is also sometimes used in the 3rd person as khuthaghantan

“they did.”’ The 1st person has also a suffix tm, which is not so frequently

used. With this suffix the verb takes a peculiar form, a euphonic t being

inserted to strengthen the weak final nasal of the 1st person singular or

plural, as khushthaghantan or khushthaghintin “TI or we killed.”

JII.—Retattve Pronovns.

The word ki performs most of the duties of a relative pronoun, as in

Persian, and often merely has the meaning of a relative particle, being

indeclinable, so that the meaning is not complete without the use of other

pronouns ; e. g.,

E mard hameshen ki eshiya birath’ ma gipthaghin, this is the man

whose brother we have taken.

The following relative phrases are used :

har khas ki F whoever

har ki

pista whatever

har chi ki

an ki who, whoever, whatever

Cac,

har khas ki khakht, every one who comes

har ki thau gushe, whatever you say

an ki khai’ chi kadhiva, whatsoever thing comes from God,

IV.—REFLECTIVES.

Wath, self.

Singular.

Nom. wath self

Gen. wathi own, one’s own

Dat. i

wathar self

Acc.

Plural.

Nom. wathan selves

Gen. wathani own

Dat. Veer

wathanra selves

Ace,

24: PRONOUNS. : [Extra No.

The words jind and but are also used in the sense of “ self.”

oneself, wathi wath

or wathi jind

Anmar wathi jindir khushtha, he killed himself.

Jind is especially used in referring to one’s own private property, as the

Hindustani nij; e. g.,

hawe madhin mani jindeghen, this mare is my own property.

The phrase pha-wa¢han is used for among themselves, ourselves, your-

selves.

V.—INTERROGATIVES.

Who, khai ?

Sing. and Plur.

Nom. khai who?

Gen. khaigh whose ?

Dat. Ace. khaiar whom ?

what re chil

which, what (qualifying a noun) kithan than

how much chikhtar, chikar

how many ? \ (P. chi qadr ?)

VI.—CorRELATIVES.

so much ' ikAtar, ikar

so many \ (P. in qadr ?)

just so much hawikhtar (P. hamin qadr ?)

that much ankhtar

just that much hawankhtar

VIL— INDEFINITE.

khase any one, some one

har-khas every one

khas nez nobody

hech

hechi | any

chi

har. chi everything

*chie something

’chie-’chie a little

ine i nothing

1880. ] VERB. 25

baz many

kham few

geshtar more

kharde some

yak-aptiya ove another

Me F , other, another

phi

thi khase some one else

thi ’chie something else

thi ’chi-na nothing else

theghi \ all

thewaghen

drust

kull ; the whole

las

kullan-phajya altogether

hardo both

STRUCTURE OF THE VERB.

The simplest form or base of every verb is with one or two exceptions

identical in form with the. 2nd pers. sing. imperative. From this base are

formed immediately, by the addition of certain terminations, the imperative,

aorist, infinitive and present participle. The termination of the infinitive is

agh. From the base so obtained two more tenses, the present and imper-

fect, are formed, ‘The past participle is formed from the base in a manner

which will be described hereafter, and other past participles are formed from

it as a base.

(2). Forms derived immediately from the base.

The imperative, as observed above, generally is the simplest form of the

base. Verbs beginning with vowels take the prefix ba or bi, and the verbs

waragh “to eat” and ravagh “to go” also form their imperatives bawar and

baro. Verbs beginning with vowels take also the prefix bi or kh in the

aorist. These prefixes are not used either in the imperative or aorist when

a negative is expressed, the negative particles na, ni and ma taking their

place; e. g.,

riyar bring

mayar do not bring

bilan IT will let

nelan T will not let

khaith he will come

nayaith he will not come

26 VERB. [Extra No.

The prefix kh is most usually taken in the aorist, but the verb ilagh

“to let’? always takes b.

The aorist has both indefinite, present, future and subjunctive signi-

fications. The terminations are as follows :—

Singular. Plural.

dee ar tn, om

Zeane eth, edh, e

3: th, th, 1h, 1 ant

The most usual termination of the 3rd person singular is ith, which

often becomes simply i. The following take th :—

Infinitive drd pers. sing. aorist.

khanagh, to do khanth

janagh, to strike janth or jath

giragh, to take girth

baragh, to take away barth

waragh, to eat warth

In giragh, gir is the radical form of the verb. In baragh and waragh

the radical vowel is lengthened. The following take th ;—

biagh to be bith, bi

ravagh to go roth, ro

deagh to give dath, da

siagh to swell sith

The present participle used of a continued or repeated action is formed

from the base by the termination ana; e. ¢.,

Infinitive Present Participle.

biagh bidna

khanagh khandna

The infinitive in agh is a noun and can be inflected. The inflected

Form has a gerundial signification; e.g., ~

khanagh, to do, doing.

khanagha khapta-i, he began to do (lit. he fell a-doing).

The present and imperfect are formed from the infinitive by the

following terminations :

PRESENT.

Sing. Plur.

eran Aun, dom

2. e, eth

3. en ant, an, ez

IMPERFECT.

1. athan athin

2. athe athe

8. ath, eth athant .

1880. } VERB. 27

The past participle is formed by the addition of the suffix tha or

tha to the base which is liable to modifications to be noted below. for

purposes of composition the past base ends in gh. (See sounds, gh.) From

the base so formed the perfect and pluperfect are formed by the following

terminations :

PERFECT.

1. an un, om

2. e e, eth

3. — ant

PLUPERFECT:

1. athan athin

2. athe athe

3, ath, a athant

The 8rd pers. singular of the perfect is the simple form of the past

participle without the gh. In transitive verbs with an object and agent,

this form expresses the perfect throughout, the agent being in the inflected

or instrumental form, while the object is uninflected ; e. g.,

marduma naghan wartha, the man ate bread,

where marduma is the inflected form of mardum. But—

mardum naghanar warth, the man will eat bread.

Here mardum is uninflected and naghan receives the objective inflection.

The terminations of the present are nearly identical with those of the

perfect, and those of the imperfect, with the pluperfect. Both seem to

be formed by the addition of the present and past forms of the defective

verb to be to the infinitive base and the past base respectively. The

present with the infinitive base forms the present, with the past base

the perfect. Similarly the past forms the imperfect and plupertect.

These forms are as follows :

PRESENT.

Sing. Plur.

Tam dn we are tn

thou art e you are e

he is en they are ant

Past.

I was athan we were athin

thou wast athe you were athe

he was ath they were ‘athant

The plural forms ti, e, athin, athe, when used with a pronoun immedi-

ately preceding, take the prefix kh; ¢. 4.,

ma khi we are

ma khathin we were

But this prefix is never used when a noun or adjective immediately precedes.

28 VER®. [Extra No.

From the simple past participle which has both an active and passive

signification are formed two other participles; viz., (1) the active past

participle, used of a completed action and only found before a verb in a past

tense. Thisis formed by changing the termination tha, ¢hainto tho. (2) The

present participle used of a continued but not repeated action. This is

formed by changing tha or ¢ha in thiya, thiya or sometimes thigha, thigha.

The use of the four participles may be shown as follows:

daragh, to hold.

Past si, held.

dashto, having held.

dashthiya ae an

or olding, continuing to hold.

Present dashthigha, %

dardna, holding (with intervals), keeping on taking hold.

ForMATION OF THE Past PaRricreLe.

The termination is either tha or tha which is added to the base. ha

is the more usual. It is taken by all verbs whose bases end in a vowel.

Verbs ending in mutes take tha asa rule, with a short vowel inserted after

the characteristic ; e. g., bashkagh “to give,” P. P. bashkatha. When a verb

corresponds with a Persian verb in idan, a short i is sometimes inserted; e. ¢.,

rasagh, to arrive P. P. rasitha (P. rasidan).

thursagh, to fear P. P. thursitha (P. tursidan).

When tha is used it is always attached to the base without an inter-

vening vowel. ‘This leads frequently to the modification of the characteris-

tic of the base, the changes corresponding closely with those which take

place in Persian, In some verbs the vowel of the base is also changed, and

others are wholly irregular. Verbs whose characteristic is n (a class which

includes all causals) take the termination tha without any modification of

the base.

The most usual changes of characteristic letters are sh and zh to kh, £

to p, dh and z tos. Many verbs in sh and s, take the termination without

modifying the characteristic.

The following list gives the past participles of all the irregular verbs,

also most of those which form their past participle by taking tha without

modification of the base. The verbs beginning with vowels which take the

prefixes b, bi and kh in the imperative and aorist are also given.

Infinitive Past Participle

aragh to bring artha

asagh to rise astha

ashkhanagh to hear ashkhutha

agh to come akhtha, atka

1880.]

Infinitive.

aksagh

ilagh

oshtagh

VERB.

to sleep

to let

to stand

oshtalainagh (causal of oshtagh)

(The above take the prefixes b, bi, and kh.)

basagh

bagh

baragh

bresagh

bushkagh

bozhagh

bandagh

biagh

phadeagh

phrushagh

phashagh

thusagh

thosagh

thashagh

jagh

janagh

chinagh

dinagh

doshagh

dogh

deagh’

ravagh

rudhagh

radhagh

runagh

resinagh

rishagh

zagh

zanagh

zinagh

ziragh

sushagh

soshagh

sindagh

to low

to be killed

to take away

to spin

to discharge (a gun)

to open

to shut, tie

to be

to*run

to burst

to cook

to faint

to extinguish

to run, gallop

to gallop (a horse)

- to chew

to strike

to pick up

to tear

to milk

to sew

to fetch water

to give

to go

to grow

to tear up

to reap

to pursue

to scatter, pour

to bring forth

. to know

to snatch

to raise

to burn, be burnt

to burn (tr.)

to break

Past Participle.

akastha

ishtha

oshtatha

oshtalaintha,

bastha

baitha

burtha

brestha

buk/tha

bokhtha

bastha

bitha

phadatha

phrushtha

phakka

thustha

thostha

thakhtha

jaitha

jatha

chitha

dirtha

dushtha

dokhtha

dotha

datha

shutha, shudha, raptha —

rustha

rastha

rutha, runtha

resintha

rikhtha

zatha

_ zantha

zitha, zitha

zurtha

sukhtha

sokhtha

sistha

Tnfinitive.

slagh

shudhagh

shodhagh

shastagh

shamtshagh

shawashkagh

khashagh

khishagh

khushagh

khafagh

khanagh

kizagh

gagh

gradhagh

gardagh

giragh

giregh

guzagh

gushagh °

galagh

gindagh

gwatagh

gwaragh

gwatagh

gezhagh

eieshagh

lainagh

laghushagh

lawashagh

madhagh

miragh

misagh

mizhagh

mezagh

mishagh

mushagh

nigoshagh

nindagh

nyadhagh

wanagh

wapsagh

VERB.

to swell

to hunger

to wash

to send

to forget

to sell

to pull, turn out

to cultivate

to kill

to fall

to do

to allow

to copulate

to boil

to return

to take

to weep

to pass

to speak

to praise

to see

to summon

to rain

to weave

to bear abortion

to pay, pick out

to touch

to slip

to drink

to freeze

to die

to fight

; to urine

to suck

to rub

to listen

to sit

to post

to read

to sleep

[Extra No.

Past Participle.

sitha

shustha

shastatha

shamushtha

shawakhtha

khashtha

khishtha

khushtha

khaptha

khutha

kishtha

gatha

grastha

gartha

giptha

girentha

gwastha

gwashtha

galaitha

ditha

gwaptha

gwartha

gwaptha

gikhtha

gieshtha

laitha

laghushtha

lawashtha

mastha

murtha

miratha

mishtha

mushtha

nigoshtha

nishtha

nyastha

wantha

waptha

1880. ] VERB. 31

Infinitive. Past Participle.

waragh to eat wartha

hushagh to dry hushtha

Oausals. The causal is commonly formed by adding the suffix ain

to the root; e. g.,

tharagh, to return.

tharainagh, to cause to return, 7. e., to give back.

Oshtagh “to stand,” and nindagh “to sit,” form their causals thus :—

oshtagyh—oshtalainagh.

nindagh—nishtainagh (to lay, spread out.)

Some of the verbs given in the above list are causals, the intransitive

verb becoming transitive by a change in the radical vowel resembling the

Sanskrit guna or vriddhi, see—

sushagh, soshagh ; thashagh, thashagh ; thusagh, thosagh.

Compound Verbs. Verbs are compounded with prepositions, with

nouns and with other verbs. The most common of those compounded with

prepositions will be found under the words 2 er “down,” wle man “in ;”

yo dar “out ;” and w,S gon “with” in the vocabulary. In verbs which

take the prefixes bi, b, and kh these are inserted after the prepositions, as

are also the negative particles na and ma; e. g.,

phajya together. Aragh to bring.

phajya aragh, to recognize.

phajya kharith, he will recognize.

phajya nayartha, he did not recognize.

Compound phrases of a noun and a verb are common. The verb,

khanagh “todo,” deagh “ to give,” janagh “ to strike,” and giragh “ to take”

are most commonly used in this way ; e. g.,

sar giragh, to set out

dem deagh, to send

One verb frequently qualifies another, the two verbs being used in the

same tense and person throughout. ‘The active past participle is never

used unless followed by another past tense ; e. g.,

ilagh deagh, to let go

bilan dean, I will let go

ishtho datha, he let go

tharagh agh, to come back

tharan khan, I will come back

thartho akhthaghathan, I had come back

32 ADVERB.

The particles «and ish.

VS) ee ee

[Extra No.

These particles aré appended to verbs and

take the place of the pronouns of the 3rd person, when not ‘expressed

before the verb. The singular form is { and-the plural ish, but in practice

they are used almost indiscriminately. They express (1).the agent of the

verb in the 3rd person; (2) the object of an action, or the instrument by

which it was performed ; e. g.,

(1) khutha, did or done

An khutha

or he did

khutha-i,

ravaghathant-i, they were going

jatha-ish, they struck |

hechi nestath-i, there was none of it (lit. anything it was not).

(2) wath gindith-i, he will see himself

man khardn-i, I will bring it

harkhas phajya-khari¢h-i, every one recognizes him.

Verbal Noun.

From most verbs a verbal noun of agency can be

formed by the suffix o#h being added to the base; e. g.,

giragh, to take ; girokh, taker, creditor .

khushagh, to kill; khushoth, murderer.

ADVERBS.

A great part of the Balochi adverbs are more properly adverbial +

phrases, only a few being original adverbs.

cases, others phrases of several words.

Many are nouns in oblique

(1.)—ADVERBS oF TIME.

now

then

when P

to-day

yesterday

the day before yesterday

three days ago

dast night

night before last

to-morrow

the day after to-morrow

in the evening

ni, nin

hadhen, an-vakhta

khadhen

maroshi, mar’shi

phairi

phisphairi

doshi

pharandoshi

bangha, banghava

thi bangha, phithi-roshe

begaha

ADVERBS.

to-morrow evening

“now-a-days ©

formerly —

first, before,

afterwards’

hitherto

henceforward

yet, till now, hitherto

always, perpetually

now and then

at one time and another

once

at once

again

then, again

another time

at last

early

at daybreak

bangha-begaha, nawashi-begaha

ninavakhta, maroshi-nawasht

ola

phesha

phadha

shedh-phesha

shedh-phadha, shedh-dema

dain, dani, dankoh, danikar&

harro

damdame, dame dame

yabare

yabara

agh, aghdi, aghathan

guda

thibare

ahira

phage

rosh-tika

(2).— ADVERBS OF PLACE.

a. Rest in a place.

here

there

before, in front of

behind

near

far

out

outside

above

below

down

on, ahead

where ?

on this side

beyond, on that side

every where

nowhere

elsewhere

anywhere

in the middle

edh, edha, hamedh, hamedha

odh, odhd, hamodh, hamodha

dema

phadha, dima, pha-dima

nazi, nazikh

dir

dar

darra

khargha, burza

jabla, sher, bund

sara

bakhu ?

inbara, shinbara

Anbara, shanbara

harhanda

thihanda

hizhgarnen

hizhgar.

nyama

34 ADVERBS. [Extra No.

b. Direction to or from.

hither phedh, phedha, ingo, ingwar

thither phodh, phodha, ango, angwar,

phawazgo

hence shedh, shedha, shamedha, shingo

thence shodh, shodha, shamodha, shango

whither P thango ?

whence P ashkho ?

in this direction in-phalawa

in that direction an-phalawa

from this direction ’shin phalawé

from that direction *shan-phalawa

in every direction har-phalawa

in what direction P than-phalawa ?

onwards, upwards sara

downwards era, sheri -pahnadha

from above downwards sard-era

inwards andara

outwards darra

(3).— ADVERBS OF QUANTITY.

much, many baz

few, little, less kham

a little chiklo

very little khamro

more geshtar

enough gwas, bas

a great deal, any amount — khor

(4).— ADVERBS oF Manner, &c.

From most adjectives an adverb of quality or manner may be formed

by the sutlix zyd, the adjective being sometimes slightly modified ; e. g.,

gandagh, bad gandaghiya, badly

jowain, good jowaniya, well

Other adverbs of manner are :

very sakia, sakigha

together phajia

quickly zithen

1880. | PREPOSITIONS. 30

perhaps nawan, kaizan

why? pharche

altogether, certainly, doubtless mundo, be-shak

thus hanehho, hachho

how ? chachho ? chon P

in this way e-ranga, e-r’e,

in that way anranga, ar’ ga

every way harranga

in what way ?P thanranga

never hechi-na, ’china, mundo na

PREPOSITIONS.

There are few prepositions, properly speaking, in Balochi, as most of

the particles so used follow the noun and would be more correctly called

postpositions.

The following are prepositions proper and precede the noun which is

governed in the oblique form (ablative or locative).

exe) _ with, together with, in company with

gwar with, near, in possession of

pha on, for, among

man, man in, into

dan into, to, up to

azh, ash, shi from, than

avr on, into

From the above, some prepositional phrases are formed, of which the

first member precedes, and the last follows the governed noun.

go—gon in company with

go—phajya together

azh—siwa except

azh—darra without

pha—randa on the track of

azh—phalawa away, from.

azh—phadha behind

The postpositions do not put the noun governed in an oblique tense

in the singular. The force is often that of the genitive, which has no

distinct form in the singular, but as might be expected the genitive plural

| is often used. Pronouns also take the genitive in the singular.

CONJUNCTIONS. [Extra No.

on sara

on, upon chakha

towards nemgha, negha, phalawa

on account of sdnga

along with phajya

in nyama, nyanwan

out of darra

near khund, gwara

before, in front of dema

behind, after phadha

before (in time) phesha

over sara, khargha

under buna

beyond ’shanbara

on this side of ’shinbara

for, on account of phar

in the presence of ribarti

in, in the middle of lata

Examples.

khoh buna

khohani sara

go wathi sardara

drogh pha imana khataen

dast jant avr barziya

eshiya phadha

thai sanga

bozhi lafa

daula, wajh

under the hill

on the hills

with his own chief

falsehood is a blot upon honour

she puts her hand into the bag

after this

on your account

in the boat

CONJUNCTIONS.

also, too di

both, and di, di

and, then guda

and (copulative between

nouns)

when

whenever

wherever

vakhta-ki

An-vakhta-ki, har-vakhta-ki,

har-vela-ki

har-handa-ki, handa-ki

1880.]

INTERJECTIONS.

whithersoever

that

but

either, or

neither, nor

not

,», (with imperatives)

else, otherwise

lest

because, in order that

although

until

as, like as

har-phalawa-ki

lekin (rare)

ki, hai

hai, hai

na, na

cho-ma-vi-ki

hawe. sanga-ki

agharchi (rare)

dain ki

chon-ki, chachhon-ki

INTERJECTIONS.

yes

yes, certainly

see there

behold

yes, sir

my lord

welceme !

all’s well

well done

bismi’ 4h

salam alaik, alaik salam

phrr

hau !

bale !

na, inna

gind

marvehi

wazha !

wazha mani, sain !

biyd durr sh’dkhte, biyathai

mahaira

wah

in God’s name

greetings between Musalmans

fie !

halloa.

38 LIS? OF ABBREVIATIONS. [Extra No.

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.

A. Ay. Sa Arabic. Poet. Sie Poetical.

P; St Persian. Adj. “0 Adjective.

Panj. ae Panjabi. Adv. a Adverb.

PAP: den Past Participle. Prep. reg Preposition,

S. Ba Substantive. By. fee Brahoi.

Si. a Sindhi M. be Masculine.

Skr. nae Sanskrit. hy nae Feminine.

WV ais Verb. Cf. a Compare.

H. aes Hindi,

Note—The Arabic letters ¢ ue Wet ¢ Gare not used in this

vocabulary, having no distinct pronunciation. They are represented by

8 Cw} w& Sand! when they occur in borrowed words.

1880. | VOCABULARY, 39

VOCABULARY.

—~—

))

(Words beginning with vowels.)

wl Ab, P. (metaphorically) honour, dignity. Not used in

the meaning water. (Ab er-kanagh) to disgrace.

\y) Abba, A. Br. father, papa. (Used by children.)

ul Ubba, Si. north.

pe) Abtar, hyzna, (P. kaftar.)

et on! Abresham, P. silk.

cl Abnakh, P. honourable, worthy.

el Ubhar, Si. raising. (Poet. in the phrase ‘uchdl-ubhar’

lowering and raising.) .

ieeey Aptiyé. Only in the phrase ‘yak aptiya,’ among them-

selves.

x7) Aptrs, (P. dvran, arus) the Juniper tree. (Juniperus

excelsa.)

wv Aphan, a leather bag for flour.

eo) Aphiragh, p.p. dphirta, (Si. 4phirjnu) to swell.

) Ath, was. 38rd pers. singular of past indef. of the verb

to be. The complete tense is athan, athe, ath, athun,

athei, athant or athan.

ke1 Uchal. S. See Ubhér.

La} Acha, (Si. achho) clean.

pal Ajam, (P. anjaim) settlement, arrangement.

ten>) Ajab, (A. o=*) wonderful. Ajab-rang, beautiful, purple-

coloured.

|e] Akhira, A, utterly, extremely.

40 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

w' Adab, A. good manners.

ol Adit,

ipl Aditwar,

es! Adagh, v., to pitch a tent, encamp.

} Si. Panj, Sunday. 4

20 Aden, | a mirror.

ahs ¥1 Azina,

o] Ad, Si. a masonry watercourse.

Bye 3) Ad-deagh, v., to lean.

ld} Adda, Si. Br. brother (familiarly).

zs! Udragh, (Si udirnu,) to fly.

cee! Udohi, Si. a white ant.

7 usel Addi, S. Br. sister (familiarly).

ly! Aram, P. rest.

a) Arth (P. arad) flour.

ay! Urd, anarmy. (P. urdu.)

wiiy! Ayzan, adj. P. cheap.

ust)! Arsi, adj. Si. idle.

é J) Avagh, p-p. drtha; imp. bi-dr; fut. khdrdz. (P. dvardan,

bi-dr) to bring. Kara aragh, to use. Phajya aragh,

to recognize. Gir-dragh, to remember.

vu] Arman, pity. P.

cy Arokh, bringer. Verbal noun from aragh.

=)! Arikk, gums.

evo oI )) Azab-deagh, A. Bi. to offend.

3]j] Azad, free. P.

weHSy2 j] Izbokht, the ajwain seed.

i) | Azmén, the sky. (P. asmin.)

wij] Azhman, ;

zie] Azmainagh, to examine. P.

Gye ej Azmita, examination.

J Azh, from. (P.az. Pazand ezh.)

5] Azhgizh, flint and steel, (Cf. P. azkhash.)

we] Azhmain. See Azman,

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 41

Sj) izhwark,

yj) izhrak, (Br. shark.) Rhazya stricta.

Sj! izhg,

ww! as, fire. (P. dtish),

oy), Wl as-rokh, a platform erected where funeral ceremonies

have been performed.

8x5 Url s-khoh, flint (lit. firestone).

dsan, easy. P.

ui) asp, horse, (The generic term.) P.

ms] uspust, lucerne grass.

SL sau] isphulk, the spleen. Br.

el asté, ‘see ore een te b

tea te was. | arts ° the defective verb to be,

to exist.

piel asten, he are, | (P. hastan. Sk. As.)

CEs) astant, , J

jiu) astar, star. (P. sitdra.)

eee! istaragh, razor.

ei! Astagh, slowly. (P. ahista.)

Jyh] isttir, coarse, thick.

cl Astin, sleeve. P.

et! istin, a light cloud, cirrhus.

ye) asr (a. 43 | ), impression.

| asur, dawn, morning twilight. Si.

yl dsur (a. »e7), mercy.

Jl) isrdr, mystery, secret. A.

ol dsrokh, the third day of mourning. A platform erected

to commemorate it.

ew! dsagh, p.p. astha, fut. kh4sdn, imp. bids, to rise. Asan,

_ ‘ising. Rosh-dsdn, sunrise.

Su] dsk, a deer (f.) (P. hu.)

Sane Su) isk-mahisk, a kind of fly.

J) asul (a. Wet ), original.

Yu.) asuld, from the first. Asulé gannokh, a born idiot.

wl dsin, iron, (Cf. P, dhan.)

42 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

Lat} ashd, a. eight o’clock in the evening.

wa ash, from. (P. az.)

b98 ! ash-koh, whence P

Jdy0 vl ash-modha (for azh hamodha), thence.

Jdx-0 il ashmedhd (for azh hamedha), hence.

wgtths] ashtafi, s. quickness. (P. shitabi.)

“psa ashkanagh, p.p. ashkutha, imp. bi ashkun, to hear,

listen. Compounded of ash-knanagh. (Ash = Skr.

asru.)

ores) ishtha, p.p. of ilagh. q. v.

gia} ushtagh. See @dsf oshtagh.

él agh, adv. conj. again, then.

él igh, p.p. akhtha, imp. biyd, fut. khan, (P. 4madan, biya),

to come.

phedh aghen,

y is coming,

mana-aghen,

er-Agh, to come down.

dar-agh, come out.

man-agh, be applied, suit, hit.

Phadh-agh, rise.

dast-agh, get, come to hand.

kara-agh, be of use.

gt] aghahi, warning. (BP. gdh.)

i508) aghdi, again. Also gl agh. qv.

yl aghar, if. (P. agar.)

he yo agharchi, although (rare).

J) aghl (a. Jds), intellect.

Les] aghma, effort, endeavour.

_C3I af, water. (P. ab, Z. dfs.)

ee! ee ait Bl; water-bearer.

wil afi,

age ar) af-biagh, to melt, thaw.

syle 3} se dari, irrigation.

Ae An f ® O

Poo At-deagh, to irrigate.

VOCABULARY. 43

edna 5] af-shef, slope, watershed.

Bas ] Af-laghar, rapid, waterfall.

é ra el af-murgh, waterfowl.

29 —5) ff-drik, a kind of grass. (Panj. manihdr.)

«§] gfsin, pregnant. (Of. P. abista.)

CSRs} Stshil, s. soup. (CE. P. db-zah.) |

wl afkin, box for holding collyrium.

es dfim, opium. (A. afyun.) 5)

ph] iktar,

- SI ikav,

Us akas, envy.

end aksagh, p.p. akastha, fut. kaksi, imp. biakas, te sleep.

Vyaus) aksara, generally.

Js) akul (a, Ue), intellect, wits.

vs! Akhan, proverb, anecdote. Si.

gist dlchar, buttermilk. Si.

Dal akhero, nest. Si.

\aS] ukaiya, in that way, of that sort.

WW) akila (a. dare), celebrated,

S| ag, rate of sale.

@)! ildj, cure. (A. de)

%d2)) aldhida, separate. (A. sost*)

cel Alsi, idle. Si.

@! ilagh, p.p. ishtha, fut. kilf. imp. bil. (P. hishtan, hil),

so much, thus much. (? P. In kadr.)

to leave, abandon, ilagh-deagh, p.p. ishtho-dadha, to

let go.

ass] ulkah, the world, the universe,

ave] amb, mango. P.

csi ambazi, embrace, (P. ham, bazt.)

pel ambur, forceps. P.

sl,40! ambrah, servant, companion. (? P. hamrah.)

1] ambal, mistress, lover ; companion.

w~) fmdan, income. (P. dmdan, to come.)

44,

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

| yo} imar, he, this man, this. For in mard.

yl umar, age. (Ar. yes ).

y) dmur, slowly.

grew] amsaro, equal in age or otherwise.

J] amul, mistress (see ambal).

Sune] amsodh, grief. (Cf. P. afsos).

eis) anndm, namesake. (P. hamnam.)

eel amir, chief.

w! an, dem. pro. that, he.

3] ahi.

Sv oe Genitive of Az.

Lays] anhiya.

Jeyal anhiyar. Objective and dative of dz.

ol anbar, :

lish capuee { bepona on that side.

ly43) anbara,

a) inbard, on this side.

t="! anjir, s. fig ; khohi anjir, wild fig. P. see hinjir.

94) andara, adv. inside.

\s285] Andema, adv. thither, that side.

\e2d31 indemé, adv. hither, this side.

wilud] insif, s. justice. (A. Glail.)

usp) anzi, s.a tear. P.

val ae so much, as much as that. (?. P. dngadr.)}

Wy) angara, Tuesday. Si.

ee) angane, innumerable. Si.

aol dango, thither, in that direction.

ingo, hither, in this direction.

anmacha, an ammunition pouch. See hambdcha.

geil dnmar, he, that man, that. (For dz mard.)

yl ant, egg. Si.

Mel unhala, hot weather. Si.

e*s3) anishagh, s. (P. antisha), forehead ; fate, fortune.

yy! Away, spoil, plunder,

1880. | VOCABULARY. 45

3) awar, mixed. P. Awar biagh, to mix with, join.

BUI Awaz, voice. P.

woes) obasi, yawn.

er) obhar, east. Si.

O35] otak, s. a halt ; otak khanagh, to halt, encamp.

es) othar, s. a dust-storm.

ws oe fs tank.

(aise 9) oti, s.

they) ojagho, awake. Si.

C5 = 5) ojri, stomach. Si. Paj. See saghindan.

ules) avdari, s. irrigation.

yy) avr, on, upon, into. (Pazand, awar, on, over.)

1d, odha, adv. there.

is) auzar, tool,

oo)! iwazi, revenge, substitute. (A. (s5°.)

Vs) awarzi, pleasing, agreeable. ;

pit] oshtagh, v. p.p. oshtatha: imp. bosht, to stand, stay. (P.

istadan.)

gigi] oshtalainagh. Causal of oshtagh, to post, set up.

JS) ogél, chewing the eud. (Si. Ogér.)

Ys) ola, adv. formerly. (From A. Js.)

WSJ,) olak, beasts of burden, (? Turkish wuldgh.)

&J5) olah, west. Si.

ws) oli, adj. former.

293)) ondo, overturned. Si. Ondo khanagh, to upset,

Lay lard,

auhsin-khata, a puzzle.

ee) oe {ane

25] ohil,

ony) aver, late. Si.

s] dh, in, ab! alas!

J) ahr, the hot weather, the month Asdrh (Si, Panj. Ahar),

wy! ahsiin, mankind, (A. ahsin.)

BE pee

te) dhanjagh, a sash, kamarband. P,

46 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

us! e ort, prep, this.

a oust | in this way.

dy) erangd,

a! edb, adv. here. (Cf. Zend. aétadha.)

Jd2] edha,

ol er, adv. down, below. 3% sh’er, from below. (Cf. P. zer,

below.)

or er-dgh, to come down.

ern! er-baragh, to swallow.

BSyl er-janagh, to cast down, abase.

aed er-shafagh, to go down, set (of the sun). p.p. er-shutha.

ear er-ravagh, to go down.

w-2%52) er-shaf, s. going down. Rosh-er-shaf, sunset.

aor er-khafagh, v. to descend, alight.

gid $3] er-khanagh, v. to lay down, place. |

a} y5 53] er-gwath, the lee-side ; er-gwathA, to lee-ward.

‘dese rz! er-nindagh, v. to sit down.

ee esh, this. (Cf. Zend. aesha.)

whele iman, honour. |

os! in, pron. this.

x2) aiv, spot, bolt. ( A. ose.)

LS yal ewakha, alone. (Panj. hekwa.) .

;

~ B. |

slag badshah, king. P.

Je bar, s. burden, load. P. |

bar-bandagh, to load.

bar-er-khanagh, to unload.

Ee baragh, adj. fine, thin, lean. (P. barile.)

re a turn. Si,

2 bare,

4&2 barth, 8rd pers. sing. fut. of baragh.

1880.]

VOCABULARY. 47

Be baz, many, much.

bazen wajha, of many sorts.

bazen baran, often.

bazen ranga, many coloured.

dye bazar, bazaar. P.

yi baz, limb. P.

ro j& bazigar, juggler.

gels basagh, v. to low (of cattle).

eb bagh, s.a garden. P.

ee bagh, v. p-p. baitha &5ls, to be killed.

be baghar, s. a lizard.

wet baqi, adj. remaining. A.

T erpaly eecighe

bal-giragh, to fly, take flight.

bal-deagh, to let fly.

Ov bélddh, figure, shape, form.

Lvl, baladhiya, adv. from below, upwards,

rake: bdlagh, of age, A.

ws bindi, s. a hostage.

Siu bang, a voice, sound; cock-crow. P.

bl, bangd, { s. the morning. Bangawa, in the morning

gly bango, } to-morrow. Thi-banga, the day after to-morrow.

Lin gSty bangohind, in the early morning.

we baéndan, a rough table.

wih baut, refugee.

sigh bauti, shelter, refuge.

gprs bahrav, s. male calves.

Ya? bapha, seurf. Si. bapho.

2 but, self, oneself. (Si. butu, the body).

Ay bitdr, the two stars (forming the tail of Ursa major).

ye? bathir, better, very good. (P. bibtar. )

Pye bathlo, wooden mortar,

“*; batera, quail. Si.

48 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

y bij, seed. Panj.

bys? bachh, son. P.

ut? bakht, fortune. P.

My Wes? bakhtwili, fortunate, generous, (used in addressing

superiors).

ak? hukhta, p.p. of bushkagh. q. v.

LoS? bakhmal, velvet. (P. makhmal.)

od bad, bad (only in Persian compounds).

g23 bad-khi, ill-natured.

Jgdd2 bad-dua, curse.

JS4I2 bad-shakl, ugly,

Bye badragé, an escort.

usd badi, enmity. P.

ex budagh, v. p.p. 334 budatha, to drown, be flooded.

(Si. budanu.)

& badh, s. enemy. Generally in the plural wtSs badhan.

Jo badhal, s. a debt.

wy? bar, a time,a season. P.

ya-bare, once.

thi-bare, again. Bazen-baran, often.

uy? bar, s. fruit.

yt bar, s. a desert. A.

2), birdth, s. brother, Bird mani, my brother !

Je)y? barddhay, s. brother (poet). P.

2 bardkh, coarse grass found in the lower Sulaiman Hills.

usydly: baradhari, s. brotherhood,

— Myo birazakht, s.a nephew, (brother’s son). P. biradarzada. |

Dsl ye bardwar, adj. equal. |

Wt-wd 5 bardast, s. shoulder-blade (used in augury). |

jy burz, |

: Ving burza, adj. high. upper, loftyeies |

E ir? burzagh |

reuy burzthir, adj. very lofty, higher or highest. Comp. of |

burz.

1880. VOCABULARY. 49

sy y? barzi, s. a bag.

en baragh, v. p.p. burtha 4&3, to carry away, bear off, remove.

P. burdan.

Er-baragh, to swallow.

Dar-beragh, to defend, save.

é yt buragh, v. p.p. buritha 3,3, to cut. P. buridan.

492 burga, s. a veil. A.

er birinj, s. husked rice. P.

xy? baro, 2nd pers. sing. and plural Imperative of ravagh,

iii 97 baroeth, go,goye. P. burda. Skr. bhrd.

bas 3y? baroth, s. moustaches. (CE. Pashto bret.)

ety? bresagh, v. pp. brestha dkms >, to spin.

sy? buzi, s. a spring.

; jy? baz, adj. thick, coarse.

jy? buz,s.a goat. P.

pes bashim, the rains, the month of Sawan.

Sing bushk, s. a horse’s mane.

eS) bashkagh, v. p.p. bashkatha, to give. P. bakhshidan.

eS*2 bushkagh, v. p.p. bukhtha, to discharge a gun.

ley bagha, s. coward, runaway.

U*2 baghl, s. in the phrase baghl giragh, to embrace. Ar.

hte baghair, except, without. Ar.

=? bukchi, horse’s mane.

* JS: bakkal, a Hindu, a trader. Ar. Jl,

31S? bakhi, where ?

iS; bag, a herd of camels. Panj. bag. Si. vagu.

ret bil, imperative of ilagk. Bil-dai! let go!

ve bal, spear.

wy pill4, s. medal.

yh balrti, infant.

Sk balgo, dirt.

col baltighat, puberty. Ar.

50 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

Ks billi, cat. Hindi, Si., Panj.

ee ban, exposed surface of a stratum of rock, sandstone.

wy? bun, root, bottom. P.

Ly bund, below, at the bottom.

dd9 band, an embankment. P.

jos? bundar, the buttocks. Si. bundaru.

gor bandagh, v. p.p. bastha, to tie, bind. P. bastan.

Saren-bandagh, to help.

Drogh-bandagh, to lie.

dh) bandikh, thread. :

eh bunagh, baggage.

oy bani, an embankment round a field. $1. bano.

ws? binni, a donkey’s pack-saddle.

day bunyad, foundation. P.

3x bo, s. smell. P.

Gand-bo, stink.

Naz-bo, pleasant smell.

62 bot, vermin.

a x) bitagh, v. p.p. bitatha, to close (the eyes).

ra 5x bithagh, bracelet.

kid bokhta, p.p. of bozhagh. q. v.

dy bodh, a small tree producing Gigal gum, Balsamodendron

mukul.

Ax? bor, chestnut (of a horse); poetically a mare, horse Si.

boru.

Je? bir, a bud.

ser borchi, a cook. Turkish.

Jy? boz, the Gigal tree, also the drug obtained from it, Bal-

samodendron mukul. See bodh.

jx? biz, wild, savage.

& ix bozhagh, p.p. bokhtha, to open, untie. (Cf. pazand, bo-

zheshn, release.)

1880. ] VOCABULARY.

usix bozhi, a boat. A.

én bogh, a joint in wood.

wo? bauf, a pillow, mattrass.

eo? bokagh, (1) to bleat as a goat; (2) to be proud, frisky.

N59 bolak, a tribe.

ws) /y) buli, beestings.

og 54 boli, speech.

Lsy2y? bohari, sweeping. Si. buhari.

J2o2 bohtar, a host, entertainer.

57292 bohari, in front.

Pot bohal, a barren, salt mountain.

%y292 bohra, a vault, cellar.

\@ bha, s. price. Si. baba. bha-giragh, to buy,

\y baha, v. the River Indus.

oe bahadhur, brave, a hero.

\sStye bhagy4, rich, well off. Si. bhagyo.

wy? bihdn, a filly.

|Ss2 bhdnda, a fold, enclosure, pen. Si. bhando.

usty? bahai, sale.

ty? bhit, a wall. Si.

cov? bhatti, a kiln. Si.

uy? bahar, a share. P. Bahar-khanagh, to deal, divide.

\Syt baharkh4, the month of Chait. P. bahar.

ere bhuragh, p.p. bhuritha, to be crushed, burst. Si. bhuranu

42 bihisht, heaven. P.

x bholi, monkey. Si.

es Yet bhorenagh, v. to break, burst (transitive). Causal of

bhuragh.

Chham bhorenagh, to wink,

Khond bhorenagh, to kneel,

ust? bhedi, s. the ankle. Si. bhedi,

be, pr. without. P.

52 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

wey) L be-iman, faithless.

wd! 2 be-adab, rude.

el! be-aram, uneasy.

lanl] be-insdf, unjust.

Js! 2 be-akul, senseless.

us) 2 be-akuli, senselessness.

dy 2— be-phadh, a snake, (lit. withont feet).

wes L be-dihdn, thoughtless.

oli <— be-sandati, useless.

Saw 2 be-sek, weak.

Ss <2 be-shak, doubtless.

pro < be-shumar, innumerable.

LagS be-fahma, unintelligible.

JS & be-kdr, unoccupied.

sla <— be-gunah, innocent.

Jrs0 2 be-miyar,

\s> 2. be-hayd,

Wr) 2 be-was, helpless.

us? bai. Imperative.

us? bi, (es pers. sing. fut.

Lens bith, and subjunctive,

S319 bitha. Past Part.

J bair, revenge. Bair-giragh, to take revenge.

sys? bairi, revenge, enmity.

shameless.

of biagh. Cf. Pashto vi.

? berani, harm, damage.

eS ut? ber-khanagh, to surround, encompass.

ae) gy bero-deagh, to turn back.

uSz4? beri, a boat. Si.

s&s begdh, s. evening. Begaha, in the evening. P.

wt bilan, s. the small intestines.

Uw bel, (1) a friend; (2) ahoe. Si.

fae) benagh, s. honey. Benayh-mahisk, a bee. (Cf. P. angubin.)

Pashto gabina.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 53

Sir. bing, dog. Bing, the Dog, 7. e., the middle star of the

three forming the tail of Ursa Major. See under Gu-

rand. Bing-mahisk, a horsefly.

wlyt? bewan, wilderness. P. bayéban.

c 932 biokh, possible. Biokh-nen, impossible. Noun of agency

from biagh.

Face) biagh v. to be, become, p.p. bitha.

Biagh-ravagh, p.p. bitho-shutha, to become, to suffice.

wy patar, a hole dug for roasting meat over.

Vy para, hog-deer. Si.

wy parat, charge, entrusting, confidence. Si.

ks para, quicksilver. Si.

ly pad, root. Si.

Laws pasnd, a night attack.

wy yy pak, clean. P.

IySty pakra, camel’s riding-saddle. Si. pakhiro.

ph, palo, frost. P.

halls palenagh, to strain, sift, winnow.

cslls"l panjali, yoke (of oxen). Si. panj.

gly pina, lower, eastern. P.

pat, s. silk, Si.

= pat, s. confidence, trust.

J pat, s.a bare plain. Si.

Vay patafa, in the heat of the sun.

dK pital, brass. Si.

Sit, patang, s. a moth.

&ySis patsakh, oath. Si.

Js? pachul, curtain or side walls of a Baloch hut.

==" pukit, s, the Bhan tree (Popuius Euphratica). See phukht.

oer?

b ard

eos

wa Siliny

UyL

ery

eon,

coy

oyae)

Beyyd

Ewe?

e* 52

erty

rene

phys %o4

Estey!

Bud

eldlys

Weds dhys

JM ySdhg

yay

wldrolyy

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

paradday, =. echo. Si. parlau.

parla, s.

partita, adj. stale.

pazddagh, s. a step-son, (husband's son).

pashang, s. a wild man, savage, idiot.

pashi, s. a berry.

pakar, adj. necessary.

palan, camel pack-saddle. Panj.

paliita, curse.

palithagh, s. (p. falita). The slow-match of a matchlock.

pindagh, to beg. Si. pinanu.

pindokh, beggar. Noun of agency from pindagh.

panwar, (also much-panwar), the Pleiades.

por, s. a flood.

puragh, v. tobury. Si. ptranu.

poriyah, wages. Si. porhyo.

post, s. poppy. Post-doda, poppy-heads.

poshagh, to dress. P.

poshenagh, to clothe. (Causal of poshagh.)

pogokh, the gullet. |

poh, understanding. (Pashto poh.)

poh-khanagh, v. to explain.

poh-biagh, v. to understand.

pha, prep. on, upon,among. P.ba. Pashto. pah. Parsi pa.

Pha-wathan, among themselves.

phadh, s. foot, leg. Demi-phadh, forefoot.

Be-phadh, footless ; a snake.

P. pai. Z. padha. Skr. pada.

phadh-agh, to arise.

phadh-phusht, instep.

phadh-guzar, shoes.

phadh-muchh, ankle.

phadh-murdan, toe.

1880.]

e } dyadhy?

ushidly

jesdkes

ete

wyhyg

apne

cov}

wld

hye

avin

etl (3

us Shes

etl £9

oar

By;

Sry

Quypty

Ds aati ct

usted

ms13

uss

elisa

EPoy?

Veg de?

VOCABULARY.

phadh-murdanagh, toes.

phadh-nali, shin.

phadhi, ring worn on a woman’s toe.

phadhagh, wheel.

phar, leisure.

Si.

pharphugh, a tree, (Tecoma undulata).

pharat, charge. See parat.

phari, last year. P. par-sal.

pharez, temperate. PP. parhiz, safe.

phash, bare ; phash-phadh, barefoot.

phashan, the male markhor. P. pazan.

phagh, turban. Met. The succession to a chiefship. Si. pag.

LES

phaho, hanging ; a noose.

phanzdah, fifteen.

Si.

phiphar, lungs, lights, Panj. $1. phiphiru,

phut, hair,

phitki, alum. Si.

phit, prickly-heat,

phutur, original, genuine, thorough,

phitagh, to turn sour. Si. phitanu,

phutak, short, stunted ; a dwarf.

phatrik, a bush, (Grewia populifolia.)

phith, father. P. pidar. Pahl. pid.

phith-phirt, forefathers.

phi¢hi, other, another. (In Kachi.)

phukht. See pukht, (Populus euphratica).

haji

P a with, in company with.

phajya,

phajya-aragh, to recognize,

phado, pocket.

phadeagh, v. p.p. phadatha, to run,

phadima, adv. behind.

56 VOCABULARY. [Extra No,

Ides phadha, afterwards.

usd? phadhi, hinder, coming after.

wt? phar, prep. for, on account of.

Jt? phar, a wing, feather. P. par.

Jt; phur, full. P. pur.

Vy pahra, watch, guard.

eae Fe phuraf, a young female camel up to 8 years old.

ely pharamagh, to deceive, deceit,

wold pahrawan, long coat. Si.

Spy phrah, broad. P. farakh.

Sal phréhddh,

usm phrahi,

breadth.

usta; pharchhe, why? on what account ?

vz phurz, tinder. Si. purdu.

pia ‘yy? phirishtagh, an angel, P. firishta.

a ‘yy4 phrushagh, p.p. phrushtha, to break, burst (intr.).

Cf. P. furstidan.

wy pharmdn, command. P. farmén.

gry? phurd, a moth.

LSr¢? phuri, a musquito or sand-fly.

%35¢7 phroh, grey.

Srv? phuri,a drop. Si.

Sry? phroh, a plant, (Sagaretia Theesans ?).

Bove phirenagh, v. p.p. phirentha, to throw, cast. Cf. P. para-

nidan, to cause to fly.

jv? phur, ashes.

eelp~@ phizddagh, step-son, (husband’s son).

7 yr phazhm, wool. P. pashm.

Ut? phas, a sheep or goat. Pashto psah.

3” phaso, answer. Pahl. pasukho.

LSyti“try phisphairi, two days before yesterday. P. pas + phairi q. v.

E“¢2 phusagh, a son. P. pisar.

wens phusht, the back. P. pusht.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 57

csttiy phushti, a chaddar or sheet for wearing.

é“¢2 phashagh, v. p.p. phakkd, to cook, PP. pazidan and

H. pakka.

Kays phaskk, a woman’s garment, boddice.

Ky» phakké, (1) ripe, cooked ; (2) a boil. H. pakké.

hv phakki, anything reduced to powder, and taken down at a

: gulp with water.

é re phagaragh, to melt, thaw.

whee phagen, early in the morning. P. pagah, dawn.

vz phul, a flower. Si. Panj.

2 puhal, a bridge. PP. pul.

(Sole phulat, steel. P. pulad.

eye phullagh, to rob, plunder, p.p. phullitha. Si, phuranu.

oil phulkand, sugar.

ay phalo, direction, way, side. Si. palau, edge, border.

Pashto, ditto.

lobys phalwa, in a direction.

bohyy phuluh, nose-ring. Si. bulo.

usted phalli, section of a tribe.

sly? pahli, rib. P. pahli.

ibs phulli, the cap of a gun.

gales phalithagh, match of a matchlock. PP. palita or falita.

wily phalit, unclean. P. palid or paliz.

cst phimbli, eyelash. Si. pimbini.

i Mk pahnad, side, direction.

Jka pahnal, flank.

ene phanch, five. P. panj.

WSs*3 phanjak, one-fifth. (The share of plunder due to a chief.)

ss phanjih, fifty. P. panjab.

Sly4i2 pahnwal, shepherd.

ust phini, calf of leg. Panj.

shes phaner, curds, cheese. P. panir.

ate phanerpuch, rennet.

58 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

Nye phawad, a mountain, a peak.

° uss? phuphi, paternal aunt, Si. H.

} Lh

as: Bodie there, thither,

wre phodhan,

pstthy dor? phodhan-demi, the common white bindweed.

; Jx12 phor, a pipe made of clay, or a leaf of phish, Chamerops

ritchieana, twisted spirally.

-s1/ phost, poppy. P. post.

xt? phogh, s. chaff. (CE. P. pik).

442 phog, s. a bush, Oalligonum polygonoides. Si. panj.

us 8 sy? phogri, s. a goat given as wages to a goatherd.

Usi2 phol, s. search, enquiry, demand. Si.

Orr? Joe phol-phurs, s. questioning. Si. P.

@<° Usi? phol-khanagf, v. to ask, demand.

@ ‘x12 pholagh, v. to search for. Si. pholanu.

eo x2 pholokh, v. one who demands, a robber.

pre phonz, s. nose. (Cf. Pashto, pazah. Brahoi, bamas.)

pte phedaragh, v. p.p. phedashta, to show.

O42 phidh, s. heel.

Bhi? phedh,

wot phedhdn,

elody phedhagh, visible. P. paida.

wrote phedhaghen, is coming. See agh.

here, hither.

eohd phidhagh, a plant. A small species of Kuphorbia found in

the southern Sulaiman hills.

ge? phir, s. an old man; phirand, an old woman; adj. old.

BP. pir.

i? phir, s. the jal tree, Salvadora oleoides. Si.

esl ries phairari, adv. the year before last. P. pirar-sdl.

es yd phiruk, s. grandfather.

Corny phiri, s. old age.

eS; phairi, adv. the day before yesterday. P. pari-roz.

Et? phisagh,

: asmall plant. See ¢44

EXd phidhagh, P etd

1880.] VOCABULARY. 59

U* 4? phish, the dwarf palm, Chamerops ritchieana.

U4 phesh, first, before. P. pesh.

uss pheshi, adj. former, first.

“bay phesha, formerly, first ; phesha, bundainagh, to forestall.

Ei phigh, fat, grease. P. pih.

2x4 phifal, a bush, Daphne mucronata.

Wes phild, complete, full, perfect.

Droid phimaz, onion. P. piyaz.

Ech? phehagh, to thrust ; to enter forcibly. Si. pehanu.

usitid phehi, a scaffold (for watching crops). Si.

ecu piyddhagh, a footman. P. piydda.

yet pithar, a short grass found on the Sulaiman hills, growing

between the coarse tufts or gasht.

<td pech,ascrew. P.

ws lo4s paiddish, produce, P.

ere paigham, a message. P.

ees TD.

sNd6 t&biddr, obedient, A. P-

é as taphuragh, v. p.p. taphuritha, to stumble. Si. thabirjanu.

rae taj, a cock’s comb.

\3 tar, wire. H.

uss tari, clapping of hands. Si. tari.

gus tazim, reverence. A.

Ur tas, cup. (Rare.)

Er SEIY tak-khafagh, to flinch, shy (of a horse).

ILI t4]Abald, putting off, postponement. Si. talo.

ws talan, a push. Talan deagh, to push.

»S t4lo, the palate. Si. tart.

3 tah, odd (in numbers, as opposed to even).

a2 téha, inside.

GRU tihath, true, right, correct,

Und

43 tapal, post.

3 taragh, v. p.p. taratha, to swim.

3 tri, an aunt (paternal).

> till, palm of hand; sole of foot.

VOCABULARY,

tabiyat, temper. A.

Si. tapal.

trath, a plant (called maitr in the Derajat),

multiflora.

tran, counsel.

3 tirtha, mad.

trush, harsh, sour.

P. tursh.

Si. taranu.

3 tarkagh, p p. tarkatha, to cackle.

3 trund, cruel, fierce, passionate.

tarhan, a young camel.

Pan}. Skr. stri, woman.

3 tri-zikht, a cousin (paternal aunt’s son).

5 trer, dew. Si.

} trit, s. bread steeped in milk or soup.

3 tushna, s. frog.

3 taghdr, a small watereourse on low hills.

ba Seaitak and 441: Lhatag4.

tap-khafagh.

tikka, swift, sharp. Si.

3 tal, mole.

talab, pay. A.

> talagh, v. to fry. Si. taranu.

Panj. tari.

> tamakt, tobacco.

5 tambela, stable.

3 tumho, a plant, Crotalaria Burhia.

tund, maimed. Si. tudo.

tankh, narrow. P. tang.

tankh, a pass through a defile.

tang, girth of a horse.

ting-deagh, to drink up.

tung, a hole. See tong.

j tangagh, to hang. Si. tanganu.

[Extra No.

Anabasis

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 61

9 tawar, voice, call, speech. Si.

wx tawan, a vessel for baking bread. P. taba.

wy) tawan, battle, fight (poet).

lyy3 toba, a spring. Panj.

=» top, acap. Si. topu.

G53 tota, parrot. P.

ren tokh, a valley between two parallel ridges, a path through

ditto.

oP taukh, voice, speech ; taukh-tawar, conversation.

Jy tauzh, adj. bitter, brackish.

Jy tauzh, s. a bush, Salvadora Persica.

reais j tosagh, v. See thosagh.

raeseea tosenagh, v. Causal of tosagh.

—*,} tof, cannon. P. T. top.

UG tifak, gun, matchlock. P. tufang.

5,3 tawakkul, dependence, confidence. A.

eSin3 tong, hole. See tong.

che thakh, leaf.

Jue thay, dark. P. tar.

it that, heat. P. tab.

ws tihaf, waterless. (P. tah, low and 4b, water ?),

ee thafagh, oven. P. tabah.

pak thashagh, p.p. thakhtha, to gallop a horse. P. takhtan,

taz.

cst thashi, s. gallopping ; Galagh-thashi, horse-racing.

“alls thala, s. a company.

wt? thin, which? thdngo, whither ? than-ranga, how ?

wh? than, s. a pack-saddle.

wl? thanwan, s. damage.

ey) thap, wound.

xe thar, moist. P. tar.

wre thurs,

thars,

é“y? thursagh, v. p.p. thursitha, to fear. P. tursidan.

fear. P. turs.

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

tre thursokh, a coward. Verbal noun from thursagh.

E*s“ry? thursainagh. Causal of thursagh, to frighten.

é ae tharagh, to return; p.p. thartha ; tharagh-agh, to come back.

HKi5,3 throngal, hail.

Ep? tharainayh. Causal of tharagh, to give back, send back.

cet? thusi, a small bird.

ze thusagh, v. p.p. thustha, to faint; to go out (of a lamp).

Ue thash, an adze. P. tash.

ean thashagh, v. p.p. thakhta, to run, gallop. Zend. tach.

dg eq3 thaghdrshoz, a plant.

dy% thaghard, matting made of the leaves of the phish, (Cha-

merops ritchiana). Cf. Pashto taghar, carpet.

—5,) fever, heat. P. tap.

ee thafar, an axe. P. tabar.

er? thafagh, to become hot.

> thal, a valley, an alluvial plain surrounded by hills.

He) thul, a fort.

S53 tabling, face of an exposed rock-stratum.

pis thaltagh, v. to stammer.

Sits tahlishk, broken edge of an exposed rock-stratum.

ee tham, ambush. Si.

Tham-biagh, to lie in wait.

Ls-e.3 tuhmat, slander. A.

wt? thun, thirst.

ec thanakh, thin, fine.

9543 thango, gold. P. tanka, tanga.

ust thuni, thirsty.

ues thau, ) thou, 2nd pers. pronoun sing. nom, P. ti. Pash-

4&3 tha, to, tah.

Vous thora, quarter (in fighting). Si,

hater thosagh, v. p.p. thosta (causal of thusagh), to extinguish,

put out.

#r tholagh, jackal.

1880.] VOCABULARY. 63

ys urd tholagh-kunar, a bush, Zizyphus oxyphylla.

( ‘x7? thom, garlic. Si. Panj. Ar. Pe

cst? thi, other, another.

‘ Thi-bare, another time, again.

Thi-roshe, another day.

Thi-kase, some one else.

Thi-banga, day after to-morrow.

Thi-hande, somewhere else.

Thi-sal, next year.

ot thir, bullet, arrow ; thir-janagh, to shoot. P. tir.

vosd thir-dan, a bullet-pouch.

é sie thiragh, horse’s nose-bag.

Ee thegh, sharp, swift.

Theghaf, “swift water,” name of a stream.

ust? theghi, all.

43 thil, age (used of animals).

e435 thelagh, eyeball.

epere thewaghen, all, the whole.

& 413 thih, a slave (male). °

dd, Bry) tirband, the constellation Orion,

J» tez, sharp. P.

ee tezhagh, a melon.

S545 ust? tezhaghi-khoh, a hone, whetstone.

outs) telam, a push, shove. Si. thelho.

Telan deagh, to push.

iy TU,

us? tubi, advice. Si.

ips tapur, felt, namda, Si.

Lely 5 trama, copper. Si. tramo.

wy trapagh, to drop, drip.

poy trimagh, to drip. Si. trimanu.

“FZ *

wl, y trimu.-df, dripping well, or small waterfall. .

VOCABULARY.

en trakagh, to burst (used of boils).

JNo25553 troredar, a firelock.

553

oe?

xy!

ais

WS,5

gal?

See

els?

GB pace)

tilt, a bell.

tindint, firefly. Si.

tobi, dive. See tubi.

Tobi deagh, to dive.

topt, hat.

Si. topu.

tond, turban, met. a great man.

tong, a hole.

Si. tungu.

thahinagh, to make, construct.

Si. thahanu.

ther, a mountain peak. Panj.

thithal, female ravine deer.

thilagh, eyeball.

tituna, the bulbul.

titihar, the sand-piper, Tringa goensis.

(a ds

jabah, quiver.

jar, net. Si. jaru.

jar, twins. Si. jaro.

jasts, spy. A.

jagh, v. p.p. jaitha, to chew.

jagra, watch. Si jaga.

Jagri daragh, to keep watch.

jam, chief. Si.

j4n, body. P. jan, life.

jan-jebho, body armour.

jan-shodhagh, to bathe.

jan-khanagh, to dress.

[Extra No.

jangoh, arms and armour, when girt on the body.

janwar, domestic animals. P.

U2\= jahil, lower, east. See jabl.

Ot Pea ° «se

3y\> jdizo, promise, engagement. A. jdiz.

;

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 65

Lo-~> jat, camel-driver. Si.

oe jathir, millstone. $i. jandru.

jatha, p.p. of janagh.

E-S™ jubht, scabbard of a sword.

Grx> jukht, adj. even (in numbers, as opposed to odd). Pashto

jukht.

> jar, clothes, dress.

v2, jarida, a poor man, pauper.

é5> juzagh, to go, move.

gama juzagh, to walk (of a horse).

CIP juzokh. Verbal noun from juzagh, moving, the pulse.

wm jist, zinc. P.

JOD jaghdal, s. a Jat,

usloae jaghdali, s. the language of the Jats, viz., Panjabi or Sindhi.

*> jaghar, liver. P. jigar.

Lake juft, a pair. -

go gel an attack. Si, julah.

es juloh,

p> julgay, a crowd,

lex juma, Friday. Ar. jum’ah.

lox jamara, everlastingly. Si. jamar.

<-> jumb, moving, shaking.

Bho jumla, collection, total, amount. Ar,

w> jan, s. woman. P. zan.

jan-gal, a band of women.

eka jannat,

b> jantal,

aces janthir,

| heaven Ar, Ge,

re Be \a mill, millstone. Si, jandru,

} => jandar,

> jind, self, oneself. Si,

wathi jindeghen, one’s own.

E> janagh, v. p.p. jatha, to strike. P. zadan, zan.

tarf janagh, to clap hands.

chapol janagh, to slap.

Sia

Sie

lym

aly

etly>

Vail ge

Som

eice

Ciy>

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

dapura janagh, to stamp.

dighar janagh, to dig.

dafa janagh, to boast.

dak janagh, to solder.

dag janagh, to rob on the highway.

dil janagh, to vomit.

dang janagh, to

sting.

tifak janagh, to shoot.

khatr janagh, to breach a wall.

ladhagh janagh,

to kick.

sinda janagh, to whistle.

taukh janagh, to cry out.

goghra janagh, to snore.

chap janagh, to

gwankh janagh,

clap hands.

to call out.

jinkh, s.a daughter. Dim. of jan. Cf. Pashto jinai,

janikh, jinakat.

jang, s. war. P. jung-bila, a medal.

jo, s. a stream, canal.

Pehl. joi. P. jai.

syah jo, a perennial stream.

jau, s. barley. P.

jawadb, s. answer. A.

jawar, s. a pair, yoke of oxen mate. Hind.

jawadim, good.

jawaniya, adv. well.

jodh, a man, warrior.

jor, adj. well, strong, in health. Si. joru.

jaur, poison.

jaur, the oleander, Neriwm oderum.

jozho, a small fly.

joragh,

jorainagh,

jogh, yoke. Si. jog.

jufa, avarice, usury, A.

to make, construct, Si. joranu.

Si. jyafa.

1880.] VOCABULARY. 67

Jo=\Sq> juldkhor, a usurer.

er 7> jogin, a wooden mortar for cleaning corn.

9 o> jogindar, stick or pestal for ditto.

I> jal, a large bag.

w®)> jauhdn, a heap of corn at harvest. P.

col jhati, a peep. Si.

” lye jahdr, s. a flock of birds, Si. jhari.

ae jahaz, a ship. P.

y= jihdn, the world.

deha jiband, in the whole world.

&iy> jhapagh, to toss up. Si, jhapanu.

Ey > jhatkagh, to sob. (Cf. Si. jhatko, a fit of passion.)

atr> jhur, clouds. Si. jhuru.

USr> jhari, of more than one colour.

ples jhag, foam, scum, froth, bubbles. Si.

Sm jhul, carpet. Si.

y= juhul, deep.

> saph low.

em jahla, below.

wy eye jahl-burz, ups and downs, inequalities.

cshy> jhalli, a pankha, Si.

RE jhan, small bird (snipe ?)

ldt~> jhandé, a flag. Si.

Ip jhera, a quarrel, Si. jhero.

Xs> jebho, s. armour.

Le-A> jait, camel-saddle.

eam i (f£.) a companion, associate.

CoHjes> jediri

ave jidh, s. pasture.

Et> jigh, s. bowstring. P.zih. Pushto, jai. Si. jihu.

G Ch.

r= chabar, short grass.

ws chap janagh, to clap hands,

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

chapol janagh, to slap.

chath, a well. P. chah.

= charagh, v. p.p. charitha, to look out, spy.

chari, a guide, spy. Si.

Si. charhi.

chak-deagh, to split, rip up. P.

chari ascent,

chatit, threshold. Si. chautht.

chabha, sandals.

chup khanagh, to be quiet. Si.

chap, left. P.

chap-dust, left hand. P.

chap-chot, crooked.

chaprui, an English rupee.

chapi, adj. left, sinister, unlucky.

chit, woman’s petticoat.

EL.

chaté khanagh, to grasp, catch hold of with the arms.

chitar, matting.

chat, roof.

chatagh, p.p. chattha, to lick.

to flash in the pan.

Si.

Si. Chatanu. Lab chatagh,

chati, s. a fine.

chachho, how P

char, a path hemmed in by precipices on each side.

chur, a small hill torrent.

iP;

charpi, s. fat, grease.

charp, adj. fat.

charaz, the houbara, (otis houbara). P.

charagh, to wander, go about. Si. charanu.

chiring, s. a spark. Si. chinig.

charo, merely, only.

charokh, wanderer, vagabond.

chirra, shot.

charainagh, to watch cattle, to graze. Causal of charagh.

1880.]

VOCABULARY. 69

chari, madman.

charagh, to ascend, climb. Si. charhanu.

P. chashma.

chishagh, p.p. chishatha, to sneeze.

chighird, the babul bush, (Acacia Jacquemontii).

chughal, a spy.

chushma, a spring.

chaghal deagh, to throw away.

chiktar, )how much? How many? (Probably for chi

chikar, qadr). ;

chikagh, to pull, drag. Si. chhikanu.

chukagh, to kiss.

chukh, a child.

chukhchort, children,

chakha, on, upon.

chaga, testing. Chagd-halwar, a laughing matter.

chil, forty. P. chihal.

chillagh, to peel, scrape. P. chalidan.

chillur, peel, bark, scales.

chilkagh, to shine, glitter. Si. chilkanu.

chalgudhagh, bat.

chulumb, s. earring.

(Cf. Si. chumbulu. )

chalo, s. aring. Si. chhalo.

chamb, a spring.

chambaragh, v. p.p. chambaritha, to spring upon.

baranu.

Si. cham-

chambo, ball of foot, claw. Si.

chamra, bat. Si. chamiro.

chamagh, a spring, fountain. P. chashma. See ehhamagh.

(Cf. P, chanidan.) Main chané, in my

chana, opinion.

opinion.

chinjt, crowbar.

chund, )

_ } point of the compass.

ehundra, }

chinagh, p.p. chitha, to pick up, gather, collect. P. chidan,

Crt

Poe

Pie

CIT

S60I>

DIT

ore

Seat

mle

ibe

ace

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

chang, banjo or guitar. B.

chot, adj. crooked, bent.

Chot khanagh, to bend, tr.

Chot biagh, to bend, intr.

Chot chham, squinting.

choto, a horse-fly.

chawa, jest.

chawagar, jester.

chtich, little finger.

chaupher, round.

Si. chich.

choro, boy. Panj.

chori, orphan. Si. chhoro.

churi, chicken.

chofagh, v. p.p. chofitha, to pound, thump.

P. chah. Z. chittha, pit.

(Cf. P. koftan).

chhath, a well.

chih, what ?

ehhil, forty. P. chihal.

chhilav, cold weather (Jan. Feb.).

chham bhorainagh, to wink.

chham, the eye. chashm.

chham phusht, eyelid.

chhatar, s. joke.

chi for (.=** hechi, anything. P.

chi, s. a thing ;

chyar, four ; yake chyar, fourfold. P. chahar.

chie-chie, somewhat.

chyar gist, 80 ; chyar kund, four-conered.

chyar gist dah, 90.

chyar phadh, foor-footed.

chydrdah, fourteen.

chydrami, fourth.

chebar, news.

chit aragh, to be crushed. Si. chitaranu.

chetagh, to repair, mend. Si. chetanu.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 71

eote chedhagh, a cairn erected to commemorate any notable event,

oom chiklo, a little.

t Kh.

WE gies khazg, dirt.

(Ox eigiES khazg-barokh, sweeper.

rc khazgo, dirty.

w+ khin, chief. See Hin.

wld phdndan, family.

ina Lhidmat or khizmat, service.

y> khar, a donkey (female).

CAS khargoshk, a hare.

G y® Iharch, expenses.

Urse> khamis, Thursday.

goss khandagh, pp khanditha, to laugh. Su khandagh.

loys khoja, eunuch.

Ur > khush, happy. See wash.

sty khushi, happiness.

cry

o D.

hele dapura janagh, to stamp. Si. daphord.

us 10 dithgipt, dealings.

JO dar, wood.

ele daragh, v. p-p. dashta, to have, hold, hold in.

dashtiya quietly! P. dashtan, dav.

wld das, a grass-knife; sickle.

ele dagh,

pelo daghan,

Yd dala, thick.

wld dan, corn. P. dana.

brand, spots, blemishes. P.

VOCABULARY: [Extra No.

GIs dana, >

$0) dinkoh,

ale dani, until, up till, till when. (Cf. Si. dani, time.)

cithele ddhanthi,

wre dain, J

ere dahn, complaint. Si. danh.

cslé dai, nurse. P.

Bosse ddima, for ever. <A.

pile dawagar, s. champion.

we dathan, s. tooth. P. dandan.

dathan-dor, toothache.

an dikh, s. spindle. P. dik.

Eee didhagh, p.p. dakhta, to brand.

J° dar, prep. out, outside. (P. dar, door.)

ee dar-baragh, to defend.

eS J& dar-khafagh,

ele dar-agh,

&y JS dar-ravagh,

pAwyO dar-shafagh,

to come out.

to escape.

y2 dar-khanagh, to put out, expel.

ewe dar-saragh, to protect.

eve dargezhagh, to look out.

Ws dara, adv. outside.

ze drakh, s. vine. Si. drakh.

DD drazh, adj. long. P. daraz.

Slo drazhddh,

usjhe drazhi,

83 durdh, well, in health.

Keto durdhi, health,

Ww2he dardhiyd, a promise.

s. length.

J° durr, good, excellent.

J© durr, an earring worn in the lobe of the ear (P. durr, pearl),

Eye dirjagh, see dinagh, to burst.

Oyo dard, pain. P.

1880 ]

Nai d

VOCABULARY. 73

drust, all, the whole. (Pashto drast.)

drishagh, p.p. drishtha, to bite.

drushagh, p.p. drushtha, to grind.

darashk, tree. P. dirakht.

ee diragh. See dinagh, to tear. P. daridan.

wry

& 7/9

WS) 0

eye

darmin, s. medicine, spirits, gunpowder. P. dara, darman.

dranzagh, to vo swiftly (poet).

drang, precipice.

drosham, front, foremost part, shape, countenance.

drogh, false. P.

drogh-bandagh, to lie.

drogh-bandokh, liar.

droghvand, lying, deceit.

droh, false. Si.

druh, all.

druhani, pistol.

darri, out, outwards.

dris, a Baloch dance, at weddings, and also (called jhamar,)

rejoicings, accompained with shouting or groaning,

drin, rainbow.

duz, thief. P. duzd.

duzagh, to steal. P.

daz-wag, bridle. (For dast-wag-)

duzwahi, friendship.

duzi, theft. P.

dazhak, s. a snipe.

duzhman, enemy. P. dushman.

Cf. Zend. duzh, in duzhda, evil, &e.

duzhmani, enmity. P.

dast, s. hand. P.

dast-agh, é

dacteharaam to get, obtain, come to hand.

dast-lainagh, to touch.

dast-lath, walking-stick.

dast-Ahatt, signature.

TA VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

giwd dastagh, handle. P. dasta.

yyw? dastir, custom. P.

ee) dasht, a barren plain or tableland. P.

\cd du’d, prayer. A.

nekh-du’a, blessing.

bad-du‘a, curse.

yee dighar, land, ground, level country. PP. dihar,

dighar-wazha, landlord.

dighar-janagh, to dig the ground.

i359 daf, s. mouth.

daf-janagh, to boast.

daf-daragh, to be silent.

dafa-dar! be silent!

eo) ay

BOs | mouthful

Jigo dawar,

ey) Q ‘tar

Chai {bara P.

ye davtar,

yd dafsar, cover, lid.

aah) dak, join, mending.

i> EDK) dakjanagh, to solder.

&S9 dukh, necdle’s eye.

&S8 dukh, trouble. Si.

lade dukhya, with difficulty.

fs dag, road. Si. dagu.

dag-janagh, to rob on the highway.

95d duggay, s. eagle.

oe dil, s. heart, zeal. P.

dil-janagh, to retch.

dil-shuthi, retching.

dil-gir, sorrowful.

ws dalagh, s. boiled rice.

Evo, dalko-deagh, to threaten.

ye dillo, an earthenpot, ghard. Si. dilo.

te dumb, tail. P. dum.

mazar-dumb, tiger’s-tail (a plant).

1880.]

gad

Jx08

I Subse

Seo

Lass

3°

Krad ye)

BHj]pd

wesPd9°

i Disks

wld

22°

VOCABULARY. 75

dambiro, a Baloch banjo or guitar.

dambul, a cairn erected in irony to commemorate a shame-

ful action. P.

dan, a tax levied by Baloch chiefs. See dan.

danankara, till then.

dinagh,

diragh, (| p-p. dirtha, to tear. P. daridan, din.

dirjagh,

danz, dust. (Cf. Si. daj.)

danikar, till now.

dunya, the world, people. A.

do, two. P.

do-gist, forty. See chil.

dawar. See dafar.

dwazdah, twelve. P.

dwazdami, twelfth.

dobar, the chest.

dobaran, twice.

davtar, bard, reciter of genealogies. P. daftar.

dathan-dor, tooth-ache.

dor, pain, eee belly-ache.

daur, rich.

dora, double. Si. duhuro.

dorokh, ill, in trouble or pain.

lozakh

: Sei ? hell. P.dozakh. Z.duzhanha. Pashto dozhakh.

dozhi,

dost, friend. P.

doshagh, p.p. dokhtha, to sew. P.

doshagh, p.p. dushtha, to milk. P.

doshi, last night. P.

dogh, p.p. dotha, to fetch water.

doghin, pregnant.

daulat, wealth. <A.

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

dimandil, with two turbans, z. e., a man of distinction.

dihon, smoke, Si.

dah, ten. P.

dihan, thought, consideration.

dhak, hurt, injury. Si. dhaku.

dahagh, to get, touch.

dhul, drum. Panj. dhol.

dahmi, tenth.

dhing, powerful.

dhir, dust. Si. dhtri.

dahts, bastard, a term of abuse.

dhiliya, dust. Si.

Di—di.

deb, thumb.

dithlo, mist.

Si. dhyanu.

di, also. Both—and.

(P. dud, smoke.)

dikh, spindle. P. dik.

dedh, an earthen pot. See dez.

didh,

didhar,

didokh, eyeball.

dir, far, apart, separate.

sight. P. diddy, did. |

P. dir.

dir-zanagh, far-seeing, wise.

der, while, time. PP. der.

dez, pot.

P. adima.

deghra, large pot.

dem, face. Z. daemsa.

dema, before, in front,

dim, back.

dima, behind.

deh, country, land, tract, territory. Si. dehu.

Z. danha. Skr. dega.

deagh, v. p.p. datha, to give.

P. deh.

P. dadan.

dem-deagh, to send.

drik-deagh, to leap.

1880.]

VOCABULARY. 77

ilagh-deagh, to let go.

sar-deagh, to send away.

gon-deagh, to accompany.

man-deagh, to apply.

mokal-deagh, to dismiss.

Sa),

plo dato, dust.

uselé dachi, a female camel. Si.

csald dadi, grandmother. Si.

usyxs OF ojo dadepotre, descendants of the same ancestor. Si.

wld dan, desert.

iildsile dandali, a winnowing-sieve.

celled dani, time, a certain time. Si.

“3d dah, alarm, war news. Si.

pe ae frog. Si. dedaru.

od didar,

300 daddav, pony, nag. Si. dradro.

oD drattagh, v., p-p. dvattatha, to fall. Si. drahanu, p.p. dratho.

drik, jump, spring.

drikagh, to jump.

drakan, carpenter. Si. drakhanu.

Gi Gi

EVO dragagh, to canter. (Si. drak).

%9 droh, falsehood, lie. Si.

Ley ,0 droha, false, dishonest.

Eno dasagh, v., p.p. dasatha, to show, point out. _ Si. dasanu.

Jee dukal, dearth, famine. Si. dukaru.

S03 digh, pice, copper coin.

«© dan, by force, violently. Si. danu.

Dye danphir, a forcible contribution.

Byoso dandwar, a tooth-brush.

Sid dang, sting. Si. dangu.

dang-janagh, to sting.

1359 doda, poppy-heads.

coe

VOCABULARY.

dod, framework, bones. Panj.

hushken dod, a dry skeleton.

dor, a pond. Si. dhoro.

dol, a bucket. Si. dolu.

dauld, the forearm. Si. doro.

dolo, cooked.

dolo biagh, to be crooked.

dom,

bard, minstrel. Si.

domb,

{Extra No.

dombani-af, mirage (connected with a legend

domb-khushtagh, of a minstrel’s death).

dong, bottle.

dingdé, deep. Panj.

doh, sin, offence. i. dohu.

doi, spoon. Si.

dhaburagh, pp. dhaburtha, to stumb.

dhal, shield. Si. Panj.

dhakan, cover. Si.

dhakani, knee-pan. Si. dhakint.

dhind, skeleton. Si.

dhing, crane.

didar, muscles, biceps.

der, husband’s younger brother.

dir,

dil,

delhu, fruit of the khaler (capparis aphylla).

dembhu, wasp. Si.

dio, lamp. Si. dio.

x9 dihay, leopard.

use!) rachi, camel-driver.

Ly raza, painter.

body, form, shape. Si. dilu.

Si. delho.

1880. ]

VOCABULARY. 79

L)) rast, true. P.

vst!) rasti, truth. P.

es) rik, cheek-bone.

wv) ran, thigh, P.

sly rah, road. P.

cod) rdhdi, fate, death.

“eRPy rahzan, head of a band of robbers. P.

Ka), rahak, cultivator. Panj.

) rabb, God. A.

BAY ) rapta, pp. of ravagh, used in the sense of began, begun; its

place in the meaning went, gone being supplied by

shutha, P.

BSS.) yikhta, p.p. of rishagh. q. v.

o) rid, f. sheep (small-tailed). Si. ridh.

es radhagh, p.p. rastha, to tear up the ground.

&y radhagh, to be beaten, to lose (in war or play).

e> rudhagh, v. p.p. rustha, to grow, germinate, spring up

mount. P. rustan.

a) razainagh, p.p. razaintha, to make.

Ww ras, juice, sap. Si. rasu.

Jy rastar, wild beasts, game.

sydhen rastar, wild swine.

Ee”) rasagh, p.p. rasitha, to arrive. P. rasidan.

ee ‘y rasainagh. Causal of rasagh.

Wi) rashk, lice.

& ragh, pulse. P. rag, vein.

es) raghim, collection of clouds, threatening weather.

M3) raftar, paces. P.

&,S) rakh, s. lip.

teh) vikeb, stirrup. P. rikab.

rag, vein, pulse. See ragh,

rug, precipice,

ralagh, to mix, join. Si. ralanu.

LY ? >

80 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

beers rumb, a run.

rumb ziragh, to run, hurry.

e+) rumbagh, to run away, gallop, race (on foot).

4&4, ramba, chisel. Si. rambo.

uM rumal, towel. P.

ev ramagh, flock of goats. P. ramah.

w) ran, married woman. Panj. rand.

d3) rand, track, path. i. randu.

sar-rand, comb.

es) randagh, to comb, part the hair.

&) runagh, p.p. rutha, to reap. Cf. Pashto, ravdal. Skr. lt.

4) ro, contracted from roth, 3rd per. aor. of ravagh, will go,

goes, may go.

4) Yo, contraction for rosh, day, sun.

har-ro, every day, always.

ro-taf, heat of sun, glare.

Kany y) rophask, s. a fox (uncommon). P. rubah.

Exiy rophagh, a loud noise.

3yty) rubard, in the presence of. P.

3) roth, entrails. P. rida.

Jids) rodar, bowstring, fiddlestring.

é 3) rodh, high bank of a torrent or stream. P. rid.

eo rodhagh. See rudhagh.

ws) rvodhin, madder.

&249) rodhainagh, to bring up, educate.

dy) ror, calf.

ror-gal, herd of calves.

sy rozh-gir, eclipse of the sun (from rosh and giragh).

<3) rosh, day, sun. P. roz.

rosh-dsan, sunrise.

rosh-er-shaf, sunset.

rosh-tika, daybreak.

roshe-roshe, day by day.

roshe-velde, from time to time.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 81

ey) roshagh, a fast. PP. roza.

wy roghan, clarified butter, ghi. P.

& ravagh, p.p. shutha, to go. P. raftan, shuda.

dar-ravagh, to escape.

man-ravagh, to enter.

biagh-ravagh, to become.

9733) vofro, a fox. P. ribah.

Boy rokhanagh, v., p.p. rokhutha, to light, kindle.

449) romast, chewing the cud.

1G, 9) ringra, a narrow hill path.

39) rah, soul. A. rub.

%) rah, edge, edge of knife.

ESD) rahnagh, edge or bank of river.

O419) riband, fringe or horse’s forehead.

2) rit, custom. Si. riti.

e rekh, sand. -P. reg.

sar-rekh, cold in the head.

ye) rer. ,

2) ril,

J) rez, a rope (made of cotton thread).

(2) rezam, blight (of corn).

’ \ rags,

te“) resagh, p.p. restha, to spin, twist. Pashto reshal.

é*“2) resinagh, to pursue, chase ; p.p. resintha.

WY) rish, beard. P.

Uy resh, gall (on the back of a horse or beast of burden).

é“2y rishagh, p.p. rivhtha, to pour, spill, scatter, sow (seed),

P. rikhtan.,

Eden, rishainagh. Causal of rishagh.

(2) rem, grass.

¢2) rem, matter, pus. P. rim.

ed .

E22) riagh, cacare.

VOCABULARY. [Extra No

Fo a

F z4, abuse, bad language.

wl} zdt, tribe, caste. A.

=]; z&t, coloured cloth.

wend] zikht, son (in composition). P. zida. Sky. jata.

nakhozakht, nephew (son of paternal uncle).

trizikht, nephew (son of paternal aunt).

wasarzakht, brother-in-law.

8); 24d, many-coloured, variegated.

j zanagh, p.p. zantha, to know.

j zanmur.

) zaragh, leech.

; zigh, v. p.p. zatha, to give birth, bring forth. P. zadan.

zal, woman. P.

zamath, son-in-law. P.damad. Skr.jamatri. Pashto zim.

) zamur, s. name of a tree.

; zamin, surety. A.

zamingiri, bail, security.

j zn, thigh.

zantho, a., p.p. of zanagh, knowingly.

P. danistan. Z. zna.

Skr. jna.

See zamur.

zaifa,a woman. A.

j zakhm,a wound. P.

zadhagh, wounded. (P. zada.)

j zay,money. P.

(Si. jaru.)

zurth, jowar. (Cf. Pehl. jurdak, corn.)

j zard, yellow. P.

zardo, yolk of an egg.

zardoi, bile.

zirde, heart (poet.) Sky. hridi.

Pashto zrah.

zartr, necessary. A,

Zend. zaredhaya.

j zirih, armour. P.

1880. ]

) zaghar, adj.

VOCABULARY.

j) zirih, a well.

fresh, quick.

zagharen shir, fresh milk.

° ,

zamistan.

Pashto zilk).

zane,

j} zanakh, jaws.

P. janwar.

zanjir, chain, P.

) zindagh, living.

P. zinda.

forcibly. °

) zang, s. turnip.

rust.

zangal,

j zivir, rough, not smooth.

j zawadh, scent, smell.

j} zawar, pebbles.

) zawar, rider, horseman.

j zawan, tongue.

j zawistan, winter.

zab, kid.

j) zor, foree, might, violence, wrong.

) zorakh, powerful, violent.

j; zorwala, oppressor, tyrant.

P. zabad.

j) zawal, s. injury.

P. zaban.

P. zamistan.

zah-gal, flock of kids.

j) zabr, anger. P.

zahr-giragh, to be angry.

i zahr, bitter.

; zahrak, the gall-bladder.

) zahm, sword.

zahm-band, swordbelt,

(P. sawar).

P. zahra.

j zik, a bag or “ maskina” for holding ghi.

See zawistan, winter. P.

(P. zanakh, chin.)

j zandwar, animal.

(Cf. Pashto zig.)

(Si. jik.

j zinagh, v., p.p. zitha, zintha or zitha, to snatch, take away

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

zahm-janokh, swordsman.

zahm-hand, scar of a sword wound.

yh?) zahir, lonely, a stranger. A.

wsj zi, yesterday. P. di-riz.

vs sj ziydni, harm, injury. Pehl. ziyan.

ak; ziydrat, shrine, place of pilgrimage. A.

We-3j zith, quick. P. 2d.

wy?3 zithen, quickly.

soy zaikha, s. ferns, moss, &c.

é JY ziragh, v. p.p. zurtha, to raise, lift.

ziragh-aragh, to fetch.

lashkar ziragh, to lead an army.

sah ziragh, to draw breath.

rumb ziragh, to run, saughan ziragh, to swear.

¢2) zim, scorpion.

wi zen, saddle. P. zin.

zen-kanagh, to saddle.

60 Zhe

ej zhangagh, v. to bray.

e2)) zhalokh, adj. yellow.

tuo Wj chala deayh, v. to let go. (See ilagh.)

Iyroj zhamara, for ever. See jamara.

hd 4S} zhinga khanagh, to erect the tail (of a horse).

>; zhing, adj. erect, perpendicular, Also the name of a

Baloch sub-tribe.

Pin:

wy sdbiin, soap. Portuguese. Ar.

lw sith, a kéfila. Si. séthu.

ole sid, honest. (P. sda, plain (?)).

ol sddh, rope (of munj or dwarf-palm leaves).

Bay haw sarth, cold. BP. sard.

uo sari, rice growing or in husk. P. shali.

1880.]

D cts

VOCABULARY

siz-kanagh, to play (a musical instrument).

sikh, oath. $i.

sig, potherb. Si.

sdgi, that very one, the original. Si.

sal, a year. P.

sdlagh, parched corn.

sdlokh, bridegroom.

sdmbagh, to favour, nourish. Si. s4mbhanu.

san, stallion, bull. Si. sanu.

sing, betrothal. Si. sangu.

sdngi, spear. Si. sangi.

sth, shade. P. saya.

sdh, breath, life. P.

sih-ziragh, to breathe.

sahdar, domestic animals,

sahi, a pause, breathing space, fallow.

sahi-deagh, to let land lie fallow.

siim, sir, master. Si. Skr. swAmi.

sdinagh, v., p.p. saintha, to shave.

> b) ]

. , ia

Imperative, sa, sara sa, shave the head.

subi, autumn.

sippi, shell. Si.

sath, a deputation to ask pardon.

suti, a musquito.

sijji, roast meat,

sikh, barren land.

sidha, straight. Si. sidho,

sudkagh, to sob. Si. sudikanu.

sudh, :

knowledge, understanding. Si. sudhi. Pashto sud.

sudh,

sadh, a hundred. P. sad.

sar,aman. Pashto, sarai.

sar, s. head, front. P.

VOCABULARY.

sar-giragh, to set out.

sar-deagh, to send away.

sar-dar, bareheaded. (Pashto, sadar.)

sar-daty ) 5. chief.

sar-dar,

sarposh, covering.

sar-revh, cold in the head.

sar-rand, parting of hair.

sar-navagh, the morning star (poet.).

sara, adv. and prep. above, upon, ahead, in front.

sara-bai, go in front. |

sara-era, adv. from above, downwards.

sarbari, upper.

sarbari-pahnadha, on the upper side.

suupnall s. (Ar. ©4,0), understanding.

surpho,

surphadh biagh, to understand.

sarjah, pillow.

sursid, provisions, forage. Si. sursat.

saragh, p.p. saritha, to remember.

siragh, to leap, prance. Si. siranu.

suragh, to move. Si. suranu.

sarakh, a kneading-trough.

surgo, speech, song.

saral, a yearling colt. Si. sarlu.

surum, hoof. P. sum.

saring, a track. Si. suringh.

saring-janagh, to track.

sari, a woman’s chadar.

saren, loins.

saren-bandagh, to gird up the loins, help.

saren- bandi, assistance.

sarinda, )s. a sort of fiddle with seven strings

sarindo, gut played with a horsehair bow.

[Extra No.

of sheep's

Si. surundo.

1880.]

Bde au

een

Gia

how

Garw

BS ru

CSany

wy dda

Kus

uae

us ) S yoSwu

Bday Sw

Kae Dries

VOCABULARY.

sarina, upper; western. P.

sarodh, music.

sarosh, elbow.

sarak, road. Hindi.

saza, punishment. P.

susti. See suti.

sushagh, p.p. sukhtha, to burn. (Intransitive.)

saghar, adj. white-faced (of a horse).

saghdatta, a small thorny plant.

saghar, head.

sagharkha, a wild species of sinapis.

saghan, dung of cattle.

saghindain, paunch, stomach.

sak, strong, stiff, hard. P. sakht.

sakatar, a kind of partridge.

sakal, beautiful.

sakmardi, manliness, strength.

sakani, Wednesday.

sikhagh, tolearn, Si. Sikhanu.

sikhainagh, to teach. Causal of sikhagh.

saki, extreme, excess.

sakya

a ’ | very, extremely.

sakigha,

sag, skill, ability. Si. sagh.

sil, brick. Si. sir, Panj. sil.

silband, brick-maker. Pan}.

salam, salutation.

salam-alaik, (Ar. Sle} pile), salutation on meeting.

silhe, arms. A. salah.

silhe-gal, arms and accoutrements.

sama, understanding. Si. saméu.

samb, a hole, boring.

sumb-janagh, to bore.

VOCABULARY. [Extra No,

sambarai, preparation, readiness.

sambaragh, to prepare, be ready. Si. sambhiranu.

sumbagh, stitch in the side.

samundar, sea.

sand, barren (of offspring).

Si. sandhu.

sund, a basket of matting. Si. sundu.

Pashto shand. Si. shandhi.

sand, a joint.

sindan, anvil.

sindagh, v. p.p. sistha, to break.

P. shikastan, shikan.

sanj, harness. Si. sanju.

sanj-khanagh, to saddle, harness.

sang, stone (uncommon). P.

sangband, related by marriage (used of two tribes).

sangati, companions, following. Si.

sangad, companions, escort.

sani, hemp. Si. sini.

Si.

sawa, except, without.

sanghar, necklace.

sawad, sight, show.

sawarak, breakfast.

sawas, Baloch sandals, made of the leaves of the dwarf palm.

A. sabah.

sawal, question.

sawah, morning.

sobh, victory. A.

sud, interest. P.

sor, salt, brackish, saltpetre. P. shor.

soren-af, brackish water.

sauda, bargain. P.

strah, hero, warrior. Si. Strihu. Z. stra, strong.

sayz, green. P. sabz.

soshagh, v., p.p. sokhta, to burn. P. sokhtan, soz.

saughan, oath.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 89

sanghan-ziragh, to take an oath.

wo sif, apple. A.

ou sawakk, light (in weight).

Jo sol, the kanda or jhand tree. (Prosopis spiciyera.)

Jy” somar, Monday. Si.

yy» sonaro, goldsmith. Si.

wh Dgau sauhdn, file.

42, sohnd, beautiful. Panj.

329 sohay, guide, acquaintance.

39” savav, account, reason. A. sabab.

savava, on account of.

Liv saweth, white. P. safid.

Iho saharal, skilful.

WS byw suhdg, young unweaned camel up to six months old (f.)

sy suhbat, society. A.

sihari, an awl. Si, sirai.

sahth, jewels.

suhr, red. P. surkh,

sihr, magic. P.

sihr-khanokh, magician.

Vg sahra, manifest, known, evident. A.

3” suhv, morning. Ar. subh.

suhv-astar, morning star.

Dy suhel, autumn. The month Asstior Asoj. A. (Sept. or Oct.)

~ si, thirty. P.

» sai, three. P. sih.

sai-bara, thrice.

sai-kona, triangle.

sai-gist, threescore.

dliw syd, relation.

aw syil, relation, guest, enemy, equal. (Pashto sidl, equal.)

usjidtve sydldari, relationship.

dan sydh, black. P.

BSph gw

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

Sree perennial stream of water.

syah-jo,

syah-mar, snake.

sydh-gwar, “black breast.” The black partridge.

syahi, ink.

sebak, wholesome.

sith, profit, advantage.

ser, full, satisfied.

seraf, satisfied. P. serab.

P. std.

sir, marriage.

sir-khanagh, to marry.

sir-biagh, to be married.

sir-wajh, marriageable.

serab, shaving.

sirmugh, collyrium for the eyes. P. surma.

sistan, custom.

sesi, the chakor, also the sisi or Ammo Perdix Bouhami.

sishin, needle. P. sozan.

saiak, one-third.

sikun, ,

porcupine.

sikhun,

sikun-tir, poreupine-quill.

selhi, necklace of shells worn by mares, camels, oxen, &c. Si.

sim, boundary.

simandar, neighbour.

simstin. See sesi.

saimi, third.

sind, hissing. (Si. sindh, whistling.)

sinda khanagh, to hiss.

senz, whistling.

senza janagh, to whistle.

P. sina,

senzdah, thirteen.

senagh, breast.

1880.]

VOCABULARY.

sewal, s. rubbish left by a flood.

sih, spit. P. sikh.

tufak-sih, ramrod.

siha, lead. Si.

sehnagh, v. to bear, endure. Si. sahnu.

siagh, v., p.p. sitha, to swell. P. 4mé-sidan.

e Sh.

sha. See shawa, you. P.

shathlo, dove.

shakh, branch. P.

shadhi, rejoicing, merry-making. P. shadi.

shar, (Ar. _,**), poem.

shagh, a small tree (Grewia Vestita).

shagha, guitar or banjo. See dambiro.

shal, blanket. P.

sham, the evening meal. P.

shan, power, powerful, honourable. Ar.

% , ta

’shan, for ashan, from that.

’shan-go, thence.

’shan-phalawa, from that direction.

“ shand, sign.

shanzdah, sixteen. P.

shanagh, backbone, nape of neck. P. shana.

shaukh, stony ground at foot of hills.

shah, horn.

% shéh, king. P.

shih-murdan, forefinger.

% shahkaptar. See shafkdstir.

shahid, witness. Ar.

* shahidi, evidence.

shahi, a 2-anna piece. P.

% shair, (Ar. yel8), poet.

92 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

slree4 shabchiragh, firefly. P.

wot shiddat, disputing, argument. Ar.

g%% shaddo, a turban (poet). Si. shado.

gos shudhagh, v., p.p. shustha, to hunger.

got shudhagh, v., p.p. shustha, to wash, intr.

uso shudhi, adj. hungry.

yy sharr, good, fine, beautiful.

Le ptt shart, gambling. A.

gh y% shurdo, a small species of Dianthus found on the Sulaiman

Range.

|, shard, a law-case. A.

ar sharm, shame. P.

3y* shuri, beginning. A.

So yt sharik, partner. A.

Wc shist, sight of a gun. P.

‘ shikdr, hunting, sport.

% shastagh, v. p.p. shastdtha, to send. Cf. P. firistédan.

shash, jsix.. -P:

shashumi, sixth.

shar, poem. A.

shaghar, sharp, harsh (in speech). =

shaghan, scorn, mockery.

shighin, upside down, topsy-turvy.

shighin-biagh, to be upset.

P. shab.

shaf-chiragh, firefly.

shaf night.

shaf-kastir, a plant.

shaf-khor, nightblind.

shafankh, shepherd, goatherd. P. shaban.

Sophora Griffithiz,

“ shafak, s. iron peg on which a mill stone revolves.

shakk, doubt. A.

shikari, hunter.

shuky, thanks. A.

1880. ]

a °

shakhal, tamarisk sugar.

a ,

shalwar,

“ shalwar,

“ shamushagh, |

“ shamtishagh,

& shoragh, saltpetre.

“ shawashkagh, v., p.p. shawakhtha, to sell.

’ shtim, miser, avaricious.

shahtr, good manners.

“ shedh, hence, from here,

VOCABULARY. 93

(The manna produced in the hot

weather on Zamaria articulata and Lamari« gallica).

P. shakar.

% shakhal, adj. sweet, fair.

the loose trowsers worn by Balochis.

ewath-shalwar, puffed up, proud.

sham, boundary, water-parting.

shamb, branch.

p-p. shamushta, to forget. Cf. P. faré-

moshidan.

shamol, water-parting.

shinz, the camel-thorn.

Cf. Pashto, zoz.

(Alhagi Mauroram.)

% shanikh, kid (f.)

shav-kash. .For shaf-kash, the night-expeller, 7. e. Venus,

the morning stay.

& ,

shawa,

you. P. shuma.

sna,

shawankh.

See shafankh, shepherd.

* shodhagh, p.p. shustha, to wash. P. shustan.

jan-shodhagh, to bathe.

P. shora.

(C£. P. farokh-

tan).

shiikagh, to smell.

Ay.

* , , .

shihaz-khanagh, to like, prefer.

12,

Ayr.

Contraction for ash-i, from this.

shahr, town, village.

sh’i.

sh-i phalawa, from this direction.

Ar.

shidi, a negro.

(For ash-edh.)

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

ldysds& shedh-phadhd, henceforward.

pve shedha, hence.

et shikhan, s. cloth in which the flour from the mill is col-

lected.

ot shir, milk. P.

shir-war, suckling, unweaned.

shir-deokh, milch.

shir-doshokh, milker.

shir-dan, bladder.

pe sher, under, from under. (P. zer.)

sher-phalava, from the underside.

sher-gwath, leeward.

sher-tharagh, to be crushed beneath.

5a shezirk, a low furze-like shrub, (Caragana sp.)

2:4 shef, slope. P. shib, nishtb.

af-shef, watershed, slope of a drainage basin.

png shefagh, pin or rod for applying collyrium to the eyes.

é Gh.

Gr gharragh, to snore.

bent 5 gharib, poor, inoffensive. A.

wele ghalat, mistake, false statement. A.

pile ghulam, a slave. A.

ee gham, grief, sorrow. A.

HF lise ghamnak, sorrowful. A. P.

ot , ae

us ghami, mourning. A.

oso.

J’ fal, an omen. Ar.

t4 faida, advantage, profit. P.

p43 firishtagh, angel. See phirishtagh. P.

oy fark, difference. Ar.

05 fasl, harvest. Ar.

1880. ] VOCABULARY.

owls falasi, carpet, Ar.

419 fuldna, certain, such a one. Ar.

J K.

26 kabil, able. A.

yf katar, dagger.

iS kar, work, business. P.

@® karchy Yinite. P. kévad.

ba 6 karcha,

us)S kari, basket. See khari.

J? 6 kdrez, underground aqueduct.

hy’ karigar, ox.

usj® kkézi, the Qazi. A.

dul kAsa, a measure of corn, one-sixth of a harwavr.

about 6 sers, 9 chitaks Indian weight.

d46 kAshid, messenger. A.

d& kéghadh, letter. P.

wt kafir, unbeliever. A.

tk kak, Baloch bread baked round a heated stone.

IJ6 kélrd, flea. Si. kériro.

csitte8 kambanf, sling.

us kan, mine, P.

Eso «ander, thistle. Si. kanderi.

sii kanwni, cormorant.

es kdosh, the month of Asoj.

i528 kahi, ditch. See khahi.

ys kabr, tomb. A.

Jo kabiil, acceptance, agreement. A.

345 kubba, a domed building.

#425 kaptagh, v. to attack.

gyeas kapainagh, to expend.

Contains

96 VOCABULAUY. [Extra No.

w.$ kut, blunt.

ue kut, lap.

ph SUS Kutikhanagh, to adopt.

ys katar, string of camels. A.

eis kutb, the North Pole.

kutb-astar, the polestar.

usyh katre, a little while. A. qadr.

glS leuttigh, thorn.

es kuttanokh, thorny bushes. Two or three species of Cara-

gana.

aS kath, spinning. Si.

hs kithan, which ? what ?

wee kutti, death.

es kutragh, to gnaw.

ps katagh, to dig, conquer, overcome.

pis kutagh, to thrash. Si. kutanu.

7635 katakar, sand-grouse. Si. katangar.

ws kithan. See kithan.

t= kajagh, v., p.p. kajatha, to cover. Si. kajanu.

U=° kajal, coarse flood grass.

PSS kach-khanagh, to measure. Si. kachh.

usxt= kuchtoe, a plant.

Coes kachehri, an assembly, darbar. H.

Je kudal, a mattock. Si. kodari.

gas kadah, a cup. P.

elas kudham, s. nest.

236 kadhen, when?

Js kur, a stable, Si. kurhi.

1S karra, ring, link of a chain. S. karo.

(Cc)

ru karpas, cotton. Skr. karpasa.

L&.5],$ karakut, noise, rattling, clashing.

US kurtd, long coat. Si. kurto.

us kurti, short coat. Si. kurti.

1880. | VOCABULARY. 97

&. i karthagh, mongrel, of mixed breed.

Si,6 kirishk, a slip, stumble.

E48 kivishkayh, to slip, stumble. Si. khiskanu.

E255 karkavagh, a thorny plant.

thS karkani, a kind of grass.

¥ ars kirm, insect, worm. P.

By Sane 9S karmsakh, blackguard, a term of abuse.

usltar karveli, the caper bush. (Capparis spinosa.) Si. kalavari.

See godhan-din.

usys karri, an earring. Si.

usr kirri, a Baloch hut. Si. Pashto.

4435 kireh, hire, wages, P. kirdya.

7 kiy, ashes. Si. kiri.

& kizagh, p.p. kishtha, to leave.

us kas, any, any one. P. kas.

kase, some one,

har-kas, every one.

us kus, vulva.

eres kistin,

gS kisdn,

US kisdnak, very small.

bywS Ikissa, story. A.

Kits kashk, kauri.

Sis kshik, dog (m.)

SSeS kashkol, faqir’s begging dish.

JS lal, a wart.

JS kull, all, the whole. A.

kulla-phajya, altogether.

Js kal, knowledge, skill. Si.

os kildt. (Ar, & 8), a fort.

gslls kalai, tin. P.

little, small. P. kih, kihtar.

ceils kaltri, a saw.

lols kaldar, of European manufacture, as a gun, a rupee.

98 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

S46 kulishk, a kind of grass.

els kullagh, to cough. See khullagh.

eS kulaf, lock. P. kufl.

5 kulo, a small earthen pot. See khulo.

al$ kulla, cap.

al kulla, a warning.

ra kam, little, few. P. (Also kham.)

si kambakAt, unlucky. P.

Lanes kumb, tank, pool, rock hollow containing water.

pes kambar, variegated, stained. See khambar-kambar kha-

nagh, to write.

EdoS kumbigh, s. mushroom. 8. khumbi.

&s405 kamina, mean, low. P.

unns$ kunt, blunt.

Ens kuntagh, thorn.

us = kanjari, prostitute. Si.

‘Use kuniji, key. Si.

ii = ; kunchitha, a plant.

wis kunchith, sesamum. See kwenehigh. P. kunjid.

oss kund, near. See khund.

Eas kandagh, a mountain pass. See khandagh.

uss kandi, necklace.

esais kundi, a hook. Si.

geass kindagh, p.p. kindatha, to spread out. Si. khindanu.

ups kunar, the ber-tree, jujube-tree. P.

dig-kunar, Zizyphus jujuba,

khokar-kunar, Z. nummularia.

tholagh-kunar, Z. oxyphylla.

uh kany, a virgin. Si. kanya.

51,5 kawat, a young male camel up to 3 years. Si.

w)yS kawén, bow. Share of spoil taken in a raid. P. kaman,

75),5 kwantagh, to stoop.

als,s kotila, young camel from 6 months to 1 year old.

1830.]

VOCABULARY. 99

er kvich, s. pommel of saddle.

Kd95 kodi, metal cup for drinking.

Jld,5 kodal, mattock. See kudal.

95 kor. See khor.

jyS kaur, the phalahi-tree (Acacia modesta).

x95 koro, whip. H. kort.

sys korki, trap, snare. Si.

Us kaush, Baloch shoes. P. kafsh. Pashto, kogha.

WJeS kavg, the chakor. P. kabk.

prolyS kolmir, an aromatic plant; (Grantea, sp.) Si.

hig kontar, a bush. (Grewia, sp. ?).

pigs kontar, a pigeon. P. kabitar.

yy konar, the fruit of the dwarf palm (Ohamerops ritche-

eand).

$9$ koh, mountain; stone. P.

koh-guragh, raven.

Ks2oS kohi, the female marhor.

LNG - oh

Sea, swenchig!, til (Sesamum indicum). P. kunjid.

es kunchigh,

LS kaha, cause, reason.

uolyS khidi, chin. Si.

cos khari, a basket. Si.

ys kharighar, an ox.

bs khal, a species of salsola. Also the sajji or barilla manu

factured from it.

cots khihi, a ditch. Si.

Ha4S khaptagh, to attack.

corks khatri, a washerman. Si.

eS eae bedstead, charpoy. Si.

BydyS khatra,

khat-phadhagh, the four stars forming the body

of Ursa Major.

cee! khaji, the date palm (Phenix dactylifera). - Si.

100 VOCABULARY. [Extra N°.

SqS khad, hole, pit. Si.

ae khar, ass (f.). | P. char.

oe kahar, auger, curse. Ar.

yd khar, deaf. P. kar.

peed kharphaz, a mattock.

DyyS khard, separate.

khard-biagh, to be separated.

eo 45 khurdagh, to be scattered.

soy kharde, some. (Cf. A. P. qadre).

ex khuragh, a colt.

\Ey,8 khargha, above.

a kharag, the 4k-bush, (Calatropis procera).

prd khargaz, the vulture. Pashto, gargas.

wfi95 5 khargoshk, the hare. P. “hargosh.

EatyyrS kharo-biagh, to stand up. Si. B.

sre’ khurt, heel, hoof. Si. khuri.

x0 khur, stable.

ue khas. See kas. P.

JaS khishald, difficulty, trouble.

445 khishdr, cultivation, crops.

4S khushar, slaughter.

ptigs khashagh, v., p.p. khashtha, to draw, turn out, discharge,

blow (of the wind). P. kashtan.

phost-khashagh, to flay.

phor-khashagh, to smoke a pipe.

hon-khashagh, to bleed, tr.

likh-khashagh, to draw a line.

gwath-khashaghen, the wind is blowing.

ee,$ khishagh, v., p-p. khishtha, to cultivate. P. khishtan.

pany S khushagh, v., p-p. khushtha, to kill. P. kushtan.

EAS khafagh, v., p.p. khaptha, to fall, lie down. To begin (quali-

fying another verb in the gerund).

khanagha khafagh, to begin to do.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 101

er-khafagh, to descend, come down, alight.

dar-khafagh, to come out, issue.

dary4 dar-khaptha, the river has risen in flood.

rk khakhar, wasp. (Sindhi. See gwamz).

khakhar-manaro, wasp’s nest.

tS khil, peg or axle on which a millstone revolves.

ELS khullagh, to cough.

Shs khalgar, stony ground ; large stones.

oh S khulo, an earthen pot or /ofa.

csled khali, a small water skin (kid’s skin) carried on journeys.

i (Si. khaliri, skin).

pd khaler, the Capparis aphyila.

ayy khalero, wild asparagus.

ers kham, little, less. P. kam.

LoS khumb, pool ina stream. See kumb.

hey khambar, variegated, striped, spotted, piebald, stained, (of

animals).

44S khanawa, a sword, (poet.). Si. khano.

d5,S khund, adv. near. S. A piece of ground enclosed by a

bend in a torrent bed.

Eo4,$ khandagh, s. a pass over a crest or ridge.

Edd khandagh, v., p.p. khanditha, to laugh. P. khandidan.

eS khanagh, v., p.p. khutha, todo. P. kardan, kun. To be

able, can (qualifying a preceding verb in the past _parti-

ciple) ; e. g., khutha khanan, I can do.

er-khanagh, to lay down, place.

el-khanagh, to imprison.

Awar-khanagh, to mix.

bahr-khanagh, to divide.

phol-khanagh, to ask, enquire.

phur-khanagh, to fill.

jalo-khanagh, to attack.

kach-khanagh, to measure.

102 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

gur-khanagh, to run away.

much-khanagh, to collect.

phys kahnagh, old clothes, rags.

ed khanokh. Verbal noun from khanagh, doer.

- 44y$ kahna and kubna, old. P.

srs kahne, s. pigeon.

Cees kuhne, s. hip.

Es ots khopar, skull. Si. kopirt.

Vy 948 khopra. The Withiana coagulans used for curdling milk.

pas khokhar, a kind of wild turnips (Brassica, sp.)

SoS khiidagh, a tripod for cooking.

yo khaur, a large hill torrent. (Cf. Pashto Lhwar.)

axe khor, blind. P.

con khori, pursuit.

LeoyS khos, fever. Panj.

eigtd khofagh, shoulder.

khofagh juzainagh, to shrug the shoulders.

Lad oS khofagha, the shoulder muscles.

» loS khauli, a fawn.

rege khontar, a bush, (Carissa diffusa).

oer khawinjar, a partridge.

SigS khond, the knee.

khond bhorainagh, to kneel.

vse5 khat, who?

pend khaighen, ) whose P

td khair, ox.

ed kahir, the kanda or jhand tree, Prosopis spicigera. See

also Sol.

yd kher, the penis. P. kir.

wl jay5 khaizan, perhaps, may be.

pond khisagh, pouch, pocket. P. kisa.

wie khin, the anus.

khina-phur-biokh, a breechloader.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 103

jostys khindar, naked.

p44,S Ichent, a ball. Si. kheno.

ziss kitagh, a water-melon.

9345 Kaigho, itch, mange. Si khdji.

y%aS kildr, unripe fruit of Chamerops ritchieana,

$5 kinag, envy, grudge. P. kina.

1gaS kiwa, in exchange.

UF:

uso eAdi, pad, cushion. Si.

J gar, lost, destroyed.

gar-biagh, to be lost.

gdr-khanagh, to lose, make away with.

"6 gdr. See gal, speech. Si.

Ds gard, quarrel.

ef gagh, v., p.p githa, coire.

Js eal, speech. Si. galhu.

Jy'S gdlwar, conversation, matter of discourse.

eali, a visit.

aes gali, bedding.

6 gam, a pace.

edma juzagh, to walk (of a horse).

eS gap, quicksand, quagmire. i.

Jus gaphall, a piece, bit. Si. gapalu.

ght guttani, retreating.

LS oithd, cheek.

gat, chasm, precipice.

& cuttiyh, the kidney.

Je gattir, See ghattir.

Bias euth, the throat.

uss guthi, bridle.

us eatti, wooden handeuffs. Si.

€ gaj, a wooden arrow.

104 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

ss guch, the colocynth gourd, bitter apple. Cuewmis Colocyn- ;

44$98 gadikh, kernel. [ this.

95 gadobar, maize.

os gudi, a toy-kite.

Naat ace

> 5

en eas

ahs NEN UN

ae Sax met

(©

eth

NEON

a AN 2

ro. &:

AGG

(pp

g gad, female uridl. (See gurénd). (Cf. Pashto, gad ram).

euda, then, again, and.

gudagh, to chop, to kill animals, to butcher. Si. gudanu.

gadi, the middle finger.

gudh, cloth.

gar, a pimple, boil.

gur, s. kauri.

gur, running.

gur-khanagh, to run away. Cf. Pehl. girikht, fled.

garré, piebald, skewbald (of a horse).

eradhagh, v., p.p. grastha, to boil.

girdrth, a span (with the thumb and 8rd finger).

guragh, crow.

koh-guragh, raven.

PB.

gurand,aram. The male uridal.

giran, heavy, dear.

(Ovis cycloceros).

girdni, weight, dearth. P.

eranz, nostril.

gurbura, in a whisper. Si. gurburi.

gurphugh, small-pox.

garphil, a whirling cloud of dust or “ devil.”

girjagh, to catch, seize, p.p. girjitha.

gardagh, v., p.p. gartha, to return. P. gardidan.

gardan, neck. P.

gardainagh. Causal of gardagh.

gradhagh, v., p.p. grastha, to cook.

giragh, v., p-p. gipta, imp. gir. P. giriftan, gir, to take,

accept, seize, lay hold of.

bal-giragh, to fly.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 105

bo-giragh, to smell.

hal-giragh, to hear news.

zahr-giragh, to be angry.

sar-giragh, to set out.

& garragh, to roar or bellow.

e585 gurkagh, to growl. Si. guranu.

Ss gurkh, wolf. P. gure.

gurkh, the Wolf, z. e., the last star in the tail of

Ursa major. See under Gurand.

es garm, hot, warm. P.

es granch, a knot.

on § garand, thunder.

3318 gurand, (1) ram; (2) the male urial (Ovis cycloceros).

Gurand, the Ram, 2. e., the first star of the three

forming the tail of Ursa major. This is sup-

posed to be pursued by the second, the Dog,

which in its turn is pursued by the last star, the

Wolf.

Gurand-drikh, the Milky Way (lit. the Ram’s

leap). This refers to the legend of the Ram

brought from heaven to take the place of Ismail

when Abraham was about to sacrifice him. The

Milky Way is supposed to be the Ram’s track.

gai, garandagh, v., p.p. garandatha, to thunder.

on girokh, s. lightning.

oe girokh. Verbal noun from giragh, a taker, creditor.

%5y° giroh, s. fife, pipe.

usp gari, speech, song.

usys gari, bald.

uy garri, piebald, skewbald (of a mare).

tS giregh, v., p.p. girentha, to weep. P. girgan.

43,5 grih, voice, sound.

zor-griha, in a loud voice.

106 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

3 gar, a precipice, sudden descent, chasm. Pashto, garang.

3 gaz, tamarisk. Especially Tumarix gallica.

gith-gaz, Tamarix artiewlata, P.

x gaz, a yard.

ys guzar, makeshift.

wly5 guzran, maintenance.

wy7 gazarez, ought, is necessary.

es guzagh, v., p.p. gwastha, to pass. P. guzishtan.

guzagh-ravagh, to pass by.

xy gazir, miser.

apad gisar, mistake, forgetting. Si. bisiranu.

gisar-biagh, to forget.

yes gasur, 8. anger.

we ats gasht, coarse long grass on the hill side, not eaten by

eattle.

pas gushagh, v., p.p. gushtha and gwashtha, to speak, say, tell,

sing, recite. (Skr. vach},

gots gushokh, singer, reciter.

eS gishainagh, v., p.p. gishaintha, to choose. P. gizidan.

& guyh, owl. P. bub.

Jdsas euftar, speech, song. P.

E25 gufagh. See 95 gwafagh, to weave.

Js gal, cheek. Si. galu.

Js gal, a number, quantity. Used in composition to form

nouns of quantity as jan-gal, a band of women.

Js gil, clay, earth. P.

Js gul, a flower. P.

US calagh, p.p. galditha, to praise.

: gulalakh, long curls worn by Balochis.

why2ls galphan, a groom, syce.

bMS galatha, rotten. Hindi, gala.

ss gullar, dog’s pups. Si. guliru.

galagh, a band of mares, or of horsemen.

1880. ] VOCABULARY. 107

galagh-thashi, horse-racing.

ILS gulgul, water with which the mouth is rinsed after eating.

is galo, door.

als galla, a kadfila, caravan. Si.

wes gali, a street. Si.

els galim, a rug or blanket. P.

Jee ene) (tare) fault, sin. P. gunah.

8S oundh, (common) ‘

es gunj, crease, wrinkle. Si. gunyu. Pashto gunjah.

us > ganji, a measure of corn.

Bs gand, s. a branch water-course.

dis gand, s. filth, manure. P.

gand-bo, stink.

ais eund, testicles.

gundi, an entire horse.

pd ladis gandakho, Indian rue (Peganum harmala).

earyrrcs gandraf, sulphur. Si.

goss gandagh, bad,

eons gandagh, v., p.p. gandatha, to join.

goss gindagh, v., p.p. So ditha, imp. gind, to see. P. bin,

didan.

lass gandal, s. felt, namda.

W935 gandil, a short fodder grass in the lower Sulaimans and

plains. 8.

eros gandim, wheat. (P. gandum.)

SAS gand, Adain’s apple.

cris gannokh, fool, idiot.

asula-gannokh, a born idiot.

os go, prep. with, P. ba.

oS go, 8. race, prize.

go-bar, a race-winner.

IS owith, air, wind. P. bad.

gwach-ma, climate.

108 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

er-gwatha, on the leeside.

gwith-shalwar, puffed up.

231, gwathagh, a gelding.

91,5 gwatho, windy.

gwathen halwar khanagh, to talk big.

ewarish, rain. P. barish.

ghss ewaz, bark of a tree.

ly gwash, ground at the foot of a hill.

ee gwafagh, v., p.p. gwdptha, to call together, summon.

(Cf. P. guftan.)

Lz1,$ gwagha, immediately.

# 1s gwalagh, packsaddle for oxen, bags.

ganda-gwalagh, (lit. spoil-bags), the small red

ant. Also the name of a Baloch sub-tribe.

Uieel,S ewamesh, buffalo. P. gdv-mesh.

Unie Bs ewamish, a small plant used in washing.

g gcuwan, doubt, hesitation. P. guman.

& 9S gwanzagh, a swinging cradle.

Bi Si)9S gwankh, voice, sound. P. bang.

ewanehgenagt; pour out,

egwan’-janagh,

eos go-bar, a horse that has won a race.

wo,$ got, bridegroom. Panj.

or goj, a large lizard, “go-samp.” Si.

as gwach, a buffalo-calf. Si. vachhi. Skr. vatsa.

Er gokh, an ox, cow. P. gav.

Cr gaukh, nape of the neck,

a3} 3.55 gokhrand, dung-beetle.

gokho, a span with the thumb and forefinger. Si. gonkt.

ey godur, a plant.

sex godi, mistress, lady.

3,8 godh, menstruation.

wliss gwadhan or godhan, udder.

1880. | VOCABULARY. 109

gwadhan-din, the caper-plant. Oapparis spinosa.

(lit. udder-tearer).

33,5 godhar, wasp’s nest.

i gwar, adv. near. P. bar.

gwara, nearly.

Jy gor, wildass. P.

gor-dil, Daphne mucronata (so called from its red

berries).

Sop

iy om tomb,

whderyyd goristan,

ds gwar, woman’s breast. P. bar.

e@war-sar, nipple.

gwaran dir khanugh, to wean.

ewar-ambazi, embracing.

53),48 gorand, a ram, male urial.

diy)95 gwarband, path leading round the foot of a hill,

Ship ys gwarpahar, flock of lambs.

é98 gwaragh, v., p.p. gwartha, fut. 3rd pers. sing. gwart, to rain.

P. baridan.

BS) 4S gwarakh, a lamb.

ASS gorkha, a kind of coarse grass called in Sind and the

S. Panjab sin or sain, good for fodder.

ss goram, a herd of cattle. (P. gdv, rama.) (Si. goramu.)

OES gur, gur or coarse molasses.

es gwazagh. See zs guzagh, to pass. P. guzashtan.

Sjy gozhd, fiesh, meat. P. gosht.

us egwas, enough. P. bas.

=5 yhueyS goskari, crystal, felspar; fossils in rock.

ss gosh, ear. P.

gosh-deagh, to listen, attend.

Lis gosha, s. the pan of a matchlock.

ety S gwashagh. See 4S gushagh, to say.

rss goghra, s, a snore. Goghra janagh, to snore.

110 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

73,8 gwafagh, v., p.p. gwaptha, to weave. (P. baftan.)

SS gokurd, sulphur. P.

sle,S gomadh, a kind of grass, the seed of which is eaten in times

of scarcity, called in Sindh and the Derajat, gam. Pa-

aicum antidotale.

nar-gomadh, a kind of grass with star-shaped

flowers, found in the Upper Sulaimans.

ys ewamz, @ wasp.

os gon, with, together with.

gon-deagh, to overtake, .

gon-khafagh, to meet.

ES ewan or gon, the wild pistachio. Pistacia khinjuk.

598 ewand, short.

35,8 ewandadh, shortness.

35,8 ewando, an alligator.

wore g gondosh, s. a large needle.

ny :

5,6 etng, dumb. Si.

ayhis6 eungri, turnip. See zang. Si.

es goh, a large lizard. Si.

ra,$ gohar, sister. P. khwahar.

oy gwahar, cold.

Jay5 eoil, s. breakfast-time.

eS ghat, inaccessible place, precipice.

zi, S ehattagh, v. to smother.

rd ghatir, a lamb or young sheep suitable for eating. (Cf.

Si. ghato, ram).

guhar, adj. See e395 ewahar.

estarS ghuridi, s. a stranger.

uszd ghari, hour. Si.

ys ghal, a band, a raiding party, a raid. Si. ghali.

ent gahn, a pledge. Si. gahno.

ghoro. A band of horsemen. (Si. ghoro, horse.)

os gianch, a small bird found in sandy parts of the country,

called Maldla in the Derajat.

1880 | VOCABULARY. Apt

ayias getra, a kind of melon.

ees geth, the willow, Salia aemophylla, P, bed.

; Sais gethishk, the Sinetta or Bog-myrtle. Dodonea viscosa.

pe’ gith-gaz, a kind of Tamarisk, 7. articuluta.

Sonaehss eidh-mahisk, house-fly.

S ofr, Imp, of giragh, take.

os gir, s, memory.

etr-dragh, to remember.

girdr déagh, to remind.

Iyas eird, dove. Si. gero. (See shathlo )

é 58 gezhagh, v., p.p. gikhta, to bring forth dead offspring.

Lng cist, twenty, sai-gist, 60, chyar-gist, 80. P. bist.

ceianss gistumi, twentieth.

es: 3§ gish, s. a female kid.

ph eishtar, a shrub, Periploca aphylla,

= Pros geshtar, many, more. P. beshtar.

ee geshin, a sieve.

3825 eikér, belch.

lls gelar, a squirrel. Hindi galeri.

3S ein, life, breath.

do-gin, pregnant.

Las gcha, great, good.

géiaas gieshagh, v., p.p. gieshtha, to pick out, to pay.

dj be

ove ldphur, (1éf-phur), pot-bellied, pregnant.

o) lid, sport, play. Si. ladu.

lida khanagh, to play.

)» lar, s. crookedness.

e) lagh, a male donkey.

o>) laghar, thin, lean. P.

1) laf, belly, stomach,

laf-band, belt,

112

go)

ees)

bya)

ludagh, to move.

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

laf-dor, bellyache.

laf-ser, bellyful.

lakagh, to bark.

lal, ruby. P.

lanav, lana, (Salsola sueda). Si. lano.

landavy, adj. fat.

lank, a waistcloth, dhoti. Si. lang.

laward, young of animals.

ldinagh, v., p.p. laitha, to touch, apply. Si. ldinu.

Si. labu.

lab-chatagh, to flash in the pan.

lab, the priming of a gun.

labz, promise.

labh, obtaining, getting. Si.

lataragh, to rub off, dismiss, get rid of. Si. latayanu.

lath, stick, rod, flail. Si. lathi.

lath, embankment. Panj.

lathna, bag for drugs.

Si.

luch, wretch, profigate.

Si.

ladagh, v. to run away.

laj, shame.

Si. luchu.

lid, horse-dung,

See lodagh. Si. laranu.

ladagh, p.p. ladatha, to lade beasts of burden, to march,

start. Si. ladanu.

ladh, jungle.

ladhagh, kick. P. laghat.

ladhagh janagh, to kick.

lar, a branch of a tree.

lar, a sword.

larzagh, to tremble. P.

p-p. larzitha.

larkagh, to hang (intr.). Si. latkanu.

larkainagh, to hang (tr.).

las, all, the whole,

1880.] VOCABULARY. 118

yS4#3 Jashkar, army. P.

alas lagham, horse’s bit. P. lagam.

oJ laghadh, kick. See g3J ladhagh.

oe laghar, af-laghar, a rapid or water-fall.

gies laghushagh, v., p.p. laghushtha, to slip, slip out. (Ar. laghz,

slip).

Jy laghor, adj. wretched, mean, cowardly, poor.

laghoren dighar, poor ground.

laghoren daddav, a wretched pony.

SI lak, a hundred thousand. P.

& likagh, to hide (intr.). Si. likanu.

uo lakauri, butterfly.

aa likhagh, to write. Si. likhanu.

#449 likainagh, to hide, conceal. (Causal of likagh.)

aU lalla, s. lisping.

lalla khanagh, to lisp.

LJ lamma, south. Panj.

J lamb, a branch.

ust! lambi, s. a kind of grass, (Cenchrus eclimatus ?)

e* lanj, blood,

Si lang, adj. lame. P.

Si lang, s. a torrent.

E*ly) lawashagh, v., p.p. lawashtha, to drink.

hon-lawash, bloodthirsty.

mar-lawash, cannibal.

9) lop, s. branch of a valley ; a small alluvial plain in the bend

of a stream.

By3y loth, s. a bag.

By) lotagh, v., p.p. lottha, to demand, to want.

es lodagh, v., p.p. lodatha, to move, shake, (intr.). Si. lodanu.

BAOy! lodainagh, to shake (tr.). Causal of lodagh.

dy! lar, s. hot wind,

Jo lawar, s. a stick,

114 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

ld 9! larahaf, s. a stream which runs occasionally. Flood irri-

gation as distinguished from perennial stream irrigation.

Sy») lori, s. a minstrel.

es! logh, s. home, household ; (met.) family, wife.

logh-wazha, goodman, master.

logh-banukh, housewife, mistress.

65,3 laundri, s. the temples. Si. laundiri.

%5J loh, s. hot wind. Si. uh.

EA29/ lohigh, s. a small pond.

ay lahar, s. a hill-torrent.

ed lahm, adj. timid, bashful.

iF4dJ lihef, s. a blanket, quilt. P. lihéf.

ee letagh, v., p.p. lettha, to lie, recline. Si. letanu.

oy lero, s. a male camel (full-grown).

4S) likh, saline. Si. Mlk.

likh khashagh, to draw a line.

ane lekhagh, v., p.p. lekhtha, to count, reckon. Si. lekhanu.

Sa) lekho, s. account, reckoning. Si.

YW lilha, a bush, Daphne mucronata. (See phifal, gordil).

oN lmt, s. lemon. A.

o® lev, s. play, sport. A. la‘b. Pashto lobah.

levy khanagh, to play.

pM.

ma, pro. we, plural of maw.

matun, s. stepmother.

ule math, s. mother. P.mdadar. Pehl. mad,

math-phith, parents.

makhta, adv. immediately.

edle madhagh, adj. female. P. mada,

madhin, s. mare. P. madian.

ye mar, s. snake. P.

syahmar, cobra.

1880. ] VOCABULARY.

mar-val, a kind of creeper.

\43 le marifata, prep. by means of. A.

us. hve mari, a house with an upper storey. Si. mart.

wdljle maézath, s. a two-year-old camel. (Cf. Si. majadu.)

pgte masi, s. maternal aunt. Si.

cp mish, s. dal. P.

115

ple mashagh, s. the hammer which holds the match of a match-

lock. Si. masho.

IyySt~o makira, s. vermin. (Cf. Si. makoro, black ant.)

ike mal, s. cattle. A.

jidle maldar, cattle-owner. P.

ere malim, known, clear. A. malim.

Velo mdmd, maternal uncle. Si. mAmo.

wy man, prep. in, into.

elybe man-agh, to be applied, touch, reach (lagna).

Pye vw man-deagh, to apply (lagéna).

ey vy min-rashagh, to attack,

enue man-ravagh, to enter.

Eure mén-khanagh, to put in.

Es we man-guzdragh, to meet together.

Eile managh, v., p.p. mantha, to tire, become weary.

dan.

se mah, s. a month; the moon. P.

(ec xle madh-ghuma, eclipse of the moon.

pele mahigh, an udder.

bale mahkan, s. the moon.

mahkani shaf, a moonlight night.

plate mahlo, early in the morning.

vgrbe mahi, fish. P.

are matbal, meaning, selfishness. (Ar. matlab.)

Lahtte matbali, selfish.

& 4 math, death.

ty mathayh, vy, to shake (achurn), Si. mathanu,

P. man-

116

mat, equal.

VOCABULAUY.

Si. matu.

[Extra No.

mattainagh, v. to exchange, barter.

majal, power.

pentance. A.

majalis, society.

much, assembled.

(A. majlis.)

Si. matdinu.

Used as an expression of apology or re-

(Si. muchu, a heap.)

much-khanagh, to assemble, bring together.

much-biagh, to assemble, come together,

muchh, joint.

phadh-muchh, ankle.

dast-muchh, wrist.

muchi, assembly.

makhta.

mudd, season, time.

madrik, bead.

madi, goods and chattels.

madhakh, locust.

madhagh, v., p.p. mastha, to freeze, curdle.

P. mard.

mar, man.

See makita, immediately.

(A. muddat.)

Si.

P. malakh.

mar-khushokh, murderer.

mar-khushi, murder.

mar-lawash,

mar- war,

cannibal, man-eating.

murad, aim, object. A.

marai, gums.

murjan, pepper.

mard, man. P.

murdan, s. finger.

shah-murdan, forefinger,

nydmaghi murdan, middle-finger.

murdanagh, the fingers.

phadh-murdanagh, the toes.

mardum, a man, human being. P.

P: mastan.

1880.]

Bd3.S yr

coy"

ceibye

ply

Coe

ust”

us* gy?

dd }yv0

‘i

CD ies

é aS lyo

VOCABULARY. 117

marden :

3 é human, belonging to man.

mardena,

marzi, pleasure. A.

murgh, bird. P.

miragh, v., p.p. murtha. Imp. mir, to die. P. murdan.

marka, s. a deputation.

markhay, a horse. P. markab.

margévi, curse.

murvadhir or murwhédhir, pearl. P. marvarid.

maroragh, to twist. Si. maroranu.

marvehi, see! behold! (an expression of astonishment).

maroshi, to-day. P. imroz.

® ta

mirand

- ? ‘fight, battle.

mirdo,

marai, however.

miragh, v., p. p. miratha, to fight.

meet.)

(Cf. Si. midanu, to

mirokh, s. a fighter.

mazagiragh, to taste. P.

mazar, tiger, &e. Pashto mzarai.

mazar-trap, tiger’s leap! The name of a game

resembling draughts played on a board.

mazain 3 , :

’ | great, large. Zend. mazd4o. Skr.mahd, P. mih.

mazan,

mizil, stage, march. P. manzil.

muzh, mist after rain,

mizhagh, v., p.p. mishtha, to piss.

Cf. Pashto mital. Imp. mizhah.

mazhg, brain. P. maghz. |

mizhguzh, a small plant found in the Sulaiman range,

mizhagan. See mishadsh.

Si.

mastar, large, greater,

mas, ink.

(Comp. of mazain.)

118

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

(From masta, p.p. of madhagh.)

Si.

mastagh, curds.

musti, coarse sugar or molasses, gur.

masara, in front.

P. mushk.

misk. See mahisk, fly.

misk, s. musk.

masit, mosque. A. masjid.

mushadha, s. show.

mishash, eyelashes.

mashal, torch. A.

musht, s. fist. P.

musht, s. hilt of a sword.

(A. mashhir.)

mishagh, v., p.p. mishta, to suck,

mashar, celebrated.

(Cf. Ar. mizz.)

mushagh, v., p.p. mushta, to rub. (Cf. A. muzz.)

mashk, water-bag, mussuck. P,

mushk, See mushk,

mikraz, scissors.

makherna, fringe over horse’s eyes. See riband. B.

maldmat, rebuke, punishment, curse. <A,

malaikh, angel. A.

malandrf, warrior. (Poet.)

mam, the black bear.

man, Usa Jy

manna, forbidden. Ar. mana.

eae _ bease, security. (Poet.)

minniya,

manan, to me, me.

mind, daughter (among the Marris).

minnat, entreaties, supplication.

mund, spring of water.

mundri, ring. Si. mundri.

mundo, altogether, entirely.

mandil, turban, lungi.

1880.]

dye

VOCABULARY. 119

du-mandil, a respectable man.

munsif, just. A.

managh, v., p.p. manitha, to attend, mind. Si. mananu.

mani, my. See also main.

mavarki, congratulations.

moth, star on the forehead of a horse.

moth, moth. (Dal). (Phaseolus Aconitifolius) Si.

mochi, a leather worker. Si.

mokho, spider.

mokho-logh, spider’s web.

mor, ant. P.

morband, spotted.

mozhagh, a boot, legging. P. moza.

mosim, season. A. mausim.

mushk, rat, mouse. P.mtsh. Skr. mushika,

Pashto mazhak.

moshin, butter.

mokal, leave, permission to depart. A.

mokalainagh, to take leave. Old Hindi mukkalna,

molid, a female slave.

momrez, spur.

momand, merciful.

mah, I. See maz.

mihrvan, friendly, kind. P. mihrban.

muhari, foremost, in front. Si. muharo,

mahar, corpse.

mahisk, fly. (Cf. P. magas).

benagh-mahisk, bee.

bing-mahisk, horse-fly (lit. dog-fly).

gidh-mahisk, house-fly.

Ask-mahisk, blow-fly (lit. deer-fly).

mahl, patience, leisure. A.

mahla-dar, be patient.

120

VOCABULARY.

muhlat, time, while, opportunity. A.

mihman, guest. P.

mihmani, entertainment. P.

mahaira, in welfare, all’s well. Answer to the salutation

biyd durr’shakhtaghei.

mayar, shame. _

mech, hint, making signs. Si. mechh.

dast-mechdeagh, to beckon.

mekhmar, mallet. Si.

midh, goat’s hair or beard.

medh, a boatman.

mero, s. assembly.

mezagh. See mizhagh.

mesk, a small plant, also a kind of soap made from it, used

in cleaning jewellery.

mesh, sheep. specially dumbas.

maighi, pregnant.

mikagh, to mew.

megar, flock of sheep.

mel, meeting. Si.

menthagh, wet.

mainar, a kind of grass.

minhav,a tree. The wild horseradish tree, Moringa Con-

canensis.

maivar, a bush, (Grewia villosa ?).

mevo, a chief, leader.

meva, fruit. P.

P. mekh.

mehar, flock of sheep.

mehi, buffalo. Si.

main, my. See mani.

meh, peg.

[Extra No.

1880.]

ae)

pub

LS 10)

O20

ae)

cr’

VOCABULARY. y21

apes

3 nd, not, (un —, in composition).

) nd-baligh, minor.

) né-paid, uncommon.

) n4-durdh, ill.

} nd-sabi, unknown.

3 n4-kama, helpless, under compulsion.

) nd-ldik, unworthy.

§ nd-wash, unhappy.

n&chiken, a little.

} ndkhun, nail. P.

i nAkho, uncle (paternal).

nakhozakht, cousin. (Paternal uncle’s son.)

naragh, V., p.p. naritha, to groan.

naz, s. a horn (to blow).

naz, pleasant, pretty. P.

nazbo, sweet scent. P.

nazuk, delicate, tender. P.

nash, snuff. Si. nas.

nafagh, the navel. P. naf.

nal, horse shoe. A.

nam, name. P.

am-ndim, namesake.

nénd, maternal grandfather. Si.

ndni, maternal grandmother. Si.

navarish, anything eaten as a relish with bread.

nabi, prophet, A.

napt, s, lightning. (Met.) a gun. (P. naft, naphtha.)

niptiragh, v., p.p. niptiratha, to wring. Si. niptiranu.

nuth, s. face.

° nakhinbokh, s. bedclothes; clothes given by a host to a

guest.

—————

122

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

o . 3 ,

tPA" nakhit, slave.

silt 3&5

nar, male,

nirwar, justice, decision of a disputed case.

x? nazikh,

4) nishtainagh, to spread out.

nashk, mark, sign, distinction.

’ nafd, profit.

} nukra, white (of a horse).

nakl, imitation, copying.

) nadhakh, lemon-grass, (Cymbopogon iwarancusa).

nar, fife, pipe.

Si. nari.

narm, soft.

Si. nirwarv.

naryan, a horse (m.).

naz-khanagh, v. to close, bring together.

py) nazi,

near. P. nazdik, nizd.

“) nishdr, brother’s wife ; daughter-in-law. Skr. snusha.

Pashto, nzhor.

“} nishdn, mark, standard. P.

nishtejani, bedding.

Causal of nindagh.

A. naqsha.

) nighdh, sight, show. P. nigah.

nughur. See noghar.

nughra, silver. P. nukra.

nughraena, of silver.

naghan, bread. P. nan.

nighor, side, direction.

} nighoshagh. See nigoshagk.

A. nafa‘.

) nafuskh, stepdaughter.

les

nikragh, to separate, part (intr.).

A. naql.

nakl-khanagh, to imitate.

nakh, old woman.

nakho, ditto.

nigah, care. .P.

nigahbani, carefulness.

nali, s. the forearm.

} nali, s. the barrel of a gun.

namak, in namak-hardm, traitor.

namtina, pattern.

nawasagh, grandson, granddaughter.

} naukh, a bride.

nuzd,

VOCABULARY. 123

} nigoshagh, to listen, attend. Cf. Pashto, nghwatal.

p-p. nigoshtha.

Si. nari.

phadh-nali, the shin.

Si.

, e

namash, prayers. P. namaz.

> nambo, the bi plant, Orotalaria burhia.

nambi, s. fresh feeling in the air after rain.

nang, honor, dignity. P.

nangar, plough.

nangar bahagh, to plough.

} nindagh, v., p.p. nishtha, to sit, dwell, stay.

P. nishastan, nishin. Pashto, nastal.

er-nindagh, to sit down.

P. nawasa.

nawashi, to-morrow.

nawashi-bega, to-morrow evening.

nawan, perhaps.

nautiren, a game resembling gobang, played on a board.

nokh, new. The new moon, the moon. P. nau.

Pashto, nave.

nawad, felt. P. namda. Pahl. namad.

nodh, rain clouds, rain.

nor, mungoose, ichneumon, S. noru.

nura, silver.

A. nafs.

navz, pulse.

nineteen. P.

)

nuzdah,

noghar,

or skirt of the hills.

nughur,

124

naukar, servant.

nuh, nine.

nyam, middle.

43 nem, half.

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

3 nok, beak of a bird. P.

naukari, service. P.

iP:

nah, no, not.

nahar, canal.

nuhram, ugly.

nahmat, intention.

nuhmi, ninth.

™ (now. Pézand nun. Pashto nan.

niz,

nyddhagh, v., p.p. nyastha., to post, establish, appoint.

P. nihddan.

P. miyan.

nyama, in the middle.

nyamji, one who goes between, arbitrator.

nyamagh, middling, in the middle.

nyazwan, in the middle, in (from nyama).

niyat, object, desire. A.

P. nek.

nekhen du’a, prayer.

nekh, good.

nermosh, noon (for nem-rosh). P. nem-roz.

nir, s. roast meat.

nezagh, spear. P. neza.

nesta,

was not.

$3 nestath,

nesten, is not.

nestkar, poor, destitute. P.

nesh, tooth. (Si. Pashto, negh, tusk.)

neghar, in the direction of. See nemgha.

nékah, marriage ceremony. A. nikdh.

nilagh, blue.

1880. | VOCABULARY. 125

nem-rah, halfway.

nem-shaf, midnight.

es) nemagh, butter.

\xes} nemghd, in the direction of, towards.

wees) nimon, lemon. <A.

wt nem, no, not.

4443 nina, modern, belonging to the present time.

nina-vakhat, now-a-days. See ni.

=) mele, like, resembling.

&>]) wajh,

J') war. (In composition) eater. P. chor.

mar-war, man-eater.

shir-war, suckling.

‘wo waris, heir. .A. warith.

ly wazha, lord, master, sir. P. khwaja.

dighar-wazha, landlord.

logh-wazha, goodman.

PSP vagu, a large lizard, alligator. (S. vaghu, alligator.)

cel vagi, that very one. S&S.

“eh wam, debt.

Jl) waimdar, debtor.

Vy) el vanij-vapara, give and take, buying and selling (uncom-

mon.) Si.

35), wanda, leisure. Si. wando.

@) wanagh, v., p.p. wantha, to read. P. khwandan.

32!) waht, outery, the alarm.

vs) wabdh, cholera. (Ar. wabd, pestilence. )

tw?) wapsagh, v., p.p. waptha., to sleep. P. chuftan, “husp.

=>, wat, wick. Si. vati.

\b5 wattd, stone. Panj.

uss vitthi, space, interval. Si, vithi.

126 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

‘5 wath, self, oneself. P. khud. Skr. swad-tya.

ey wathi, one’s own, own.

WA) vakht time. Ar. waqt.

3, wad, increase.

BID, vaddinagh, to increase. Panj. vadawan.

usydy vadri, leather strap. Si. vadhi.

cay) vadri, bribery. Si. vadhi.

Oo; wadh. See xy wath, self. P. khud.

codes wadhi, birth.

j wadhi khanagh, to foal.

\y 5339 warbariya, excellently, stoutly.

yy ward, food.

& waragh, v., p-p. wartha, imp. bawar, to eat, drink.

P. khurdan, Sky. hvar.

Uys warna, youth, young man. P, barna.

39 wart, beam. Si, waro, rafter.

ey J3 warainagh, causal of waragh, to feed.

VU) was, strength. Si. wasu.

be-was, helpless.

yy wasar, wild onion. See whasar.

d\iws wastdd, master of a subject, skilful. P. ustad.

4); yy wasarzakht, brother-in-law. Cf. P. /husar, zdda.

ES pug wasarik, father-in-law. P. chusar.

Ly yy wasariya, in front, foremost.

ew) wasam, inhabited. Si. wasanw.

ws”) wasi, mother-in-law. P. khust. Skr. evagri.

es wash, sweet, happy. P. Akush. Skr. swadu.

uss washki, male of any beast of chase.

uss washi, sweetmeats.

aS, vakil, agent. <A.

% be creaper. Si. vali.

ws valan,

us) vanni, bride. Si

1880.]

eee)

ole 5

Sra

tas

Load

VOCABULARY.

vanni, name of a plant.

vanijagh, v. to yield up.

vinyainagh, v. to spoil. Si vinyainu.

whadh or wahadh, salt.

whar, dirty, foul. P. khor.

whan, tray, dish. P. khwan.

whav, sleep. P. “hwab. Z. qafna.

whard, food. P.

whasar, the wild onion, Allium rubellium.

ves, clothing. §i. vesu.

veld, time. Si. velo.

vehi, street. Panj.

x ER

haji, pilgrim. A. (al.

hakh, earth, clay. P. “hak.

hadhir, heart. Ar. /“hatir.

haragh, dates. P. “havik.

hazir, present, Ar, _,éle,

hash, double tooth. (Cf Pashto ghash).

hagha, awake.

hal, circumstances, new. A. Jie.

hala dai! give the news!

halwar, conversation.

hamagh, raw, unripe, uncooked. P. sham.

han, khan, chief. P. “han.

habdsi, (clase ’abbasi), an eight-anna piece.

habar, discussion, conversation. P. /habar.

habkag/, v. to stutter. Si. habak.

hapt, seven. P. haft.

haptagh, a week. PP. hafta.

128

® hachi, any. Often contracted to ’chi.

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

haptumi, seventh. P.

hatar, danger, apprehension. Ar. khatar.

hat, shop. Si. hatu.

hath, the wild olive, Olea cuspidata. P. zaitin.

huch, horse’s hough, Si. khuch.

hachho, thus, so. P.

P. hech.

hadiragh, to chop up.

had, bone. Si. hadu. Pashto, had.

hidki, hiccough. 81. hidiki. Pashto hatkai.

budh’s | God. P. khudé,

hudhai,

hadhen, then.

hir, a young male camel up to six months,

har, every, each. P.

har-do, both.

har-ranga, of every kind.

har-ro, daily, always.

har-sal, every year.

har-kas, every one.

har-ki, every thing that—, each.

har-vakhta,

har-vela, aay

har-handa, everywhere.

hur, adv. apart.

hur-janagh, to drag apart.

2 harb, jawbone.

Passe.)

Sse

vole opm

Wes”

hartal, arsenic.

(Si. hartalu, yellow orpiment.)

hartel, large saddle bags.

hurjin, saddle bags. P. khurji.

hirdik, squirrel.

hardhat, metal, Sky. dhatu.

hirs, avarice. A.

1880. |

SIP

Boh y BD

Gee

9 bd

$2) j0 yb

\y yp?

Pip

ere

VOCABULARY. 129

haven) a cubit.

harsha,

harragh, s. an infirm person.

harragh, s. a saw.

harf, letter. Ar.

harmzada, bastard, scoundrel. A. P.

harnoli, dhatura.

harwar, a measure of corn containing nearly 10 maunds

Indian weight. P. kharwar.

har mad (of dogs).

harriya,

hazhdah, eighteen. P.

hizhgar, anywhere.

has, an ornament, a “ hassi’’ or silver necklace. Si. hasu.

Uiw® hastal, mule.

px»

eee

cre

hla

dile

cotta

ho \ror

hasht, eight. P.

hushtur, camel, (the generic term). P. shutur.

Skr. ushtra. Brahui huch. Zend. ustra. Pashto tsh.

hashtumi, eighth.

hushagh, p.p. hushtha, to dry (intr.).

hushk, dry. P. #hushk. Skr. gushka. Z. huska.

hushken dod, skeleton.

hishki, scarlet.

hak, rights.

hakal, drawing.

hakalagh, v., p.p. hakalatha, to drive, to urge on.

hukm, (A. hukm), order.

hal, melting ; hal biagh, to melt, thaw.

hil, a kite. Si.

hulas, free. P. &hulas.

halk, village, collection of huts. (Cf. Ar. khalk, chalkat.)

haledh, spices.

haleni, adv. undoubtedly.

hambacha, ammunition pouch. Si. hambdcho.

130 VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

402 hambar, a collection of corn, and enclosure round it.

P. ambar.

Sgn hamodha, there, in that very place.

13402 hamedha, here, in this very place,

Used hamesh, this very one.

hameshiya phar, on this account.

w® han, neighing, whinnying.

han-khanag/h, to neigh, whinny.

cae hinjri, the shoulder-blade. See bardast. Si. hanjhi.

“pss hinjir, fg. (P. anjir.)

pe hanchho, thus, so. P.

O42 hand, s, place, dwelling. (P. ’hdna.) (Si. handhu.)

handa, in place, instead.

thi-handa, elsewhere.

har-handa, everywhere.

hech-handa, anywhere.

hech-handa nen, nowhere.

handiya, somewhere.

ya-handa, in one place, together.

As-hand, fire-place.

zahm-hand, scar of a sword-wound.

42 nind, bitch.

ceds2 hindi, weapon.

pienves handainagh, to be useful.

> hunar, skill.

#542 hinkagh, to neigh.

ohm hangar, charcoal. (Cf. Sindhi angaru.)

pce) hingalo, variegated. (Si. hingulu vermilion.)

>> hau, yes.

w'>2 hawdn, that. (P. ham-dn.)

ylp2 hawankar, as much as that.

lye hawango, thither.

»2 hot, hero, warrior.

1880. | VOCABULARY.

5 haud, tank. Ar.

$352 havdah, seventeen. P.

Jd 8392 hodadar, official (for P. uhdadar).

O,2 hod, hole, cave, den.

Jy hauy, rain. Si. horu.

dg hoy,

as horg, empty.

whi? horgin,

eter” horjin. See hurjin. Saddle bags.

Wau hosh, sense. P.

&%52 hoshagh, s. an ear of corn, (P. khosha.)

pate hoshyar, skilful. P.

250 hauf, leprosy ; a severe illness, violent fever.

Jy hol,

Lit Jy® hol-posh,

(7 hom, the air-plant.

wx hon, blood. P. chun.

W272 hawesh, this, this one.

armour, accoutrements. Si.

ver? hawen, adj. this.

ws? hi. See hidhishk,

ce? hai, or.

i hai hai, either, or, (P. khwah, khwah.)

\s> hayd, shame. A,

be-haya, shameless.

Lei hait, camel’s pack-saddle.

W-4® hith, green corn, khasil. P. khawid.

es” hech, any. P.

ues hechi, anything.

i hechi na, :

‘ nothing, none, not at all.

’chi na,

ee hikh, swine. P. khik,

J42 hedh, sweat. (Skr. svid. P. pa-sina.)

CS NAD hidhishk, the khip bush, Orthanthera viminea

131

VOCABULARY. [Extra No.

yt hir, a hour. (Ar. hur.)

ye hair, welfare, (Ar. £hair.)

hair khanagh, to salute.

ma-haira, all’s well.

wlyt2 hirdn, dish, plate.

4y3y42 hirth, fine, thin.

$742 haiza, cholera.

(Opie hizhokh, a waterfall.

Urs hes, rust, dirt.

D> hil, hope.

Bilan heldk, tame, subdued, accustomed. Si. heraku.

Aiglae hilwand, hopeful.

p42 hinz, a leather churn.

hinzar mathagh, to churn.

hina, weak. Si. hino.

Caigan«

a3 yamhdahs eleven. |B:

svoj yazhdumi, eleventh. P.

es*2 yatim, orphan. A.

ASAD

wt yakin, certain. A.

2 yak; one.7 are

yak-aptiya, one another.

yake, only one.

yake-chyar, fourfold,

yake-sai, threefold,

3 yala deagh, to let loose. See @ys Mt ilagh deagh.

Pashto, yalah.

Iyheg yamara, for ever. See jamara.

2 ya,one. Cf. Pashto yau, yavah.

ya-bara, at once.

ya-bare, once.

ya-ranga, of one sort.

ya-handa, in one place, together.

_-o—ern—neorreaeanaeaeaeeaeeeeeesss va aw

SPECIMENS

THE BALOCHI LANGUAGE.

SES

The Wanderings of the Rind Balochis.

[This poem is very widely spread, and Ihave met with it in almost

every Baloch tribe. The versions differ very slightly. The present one,

as the dedication in the last two lines shows, was recited to Jalal Ahan a

former Chief of the Legharis. Another version, from a Gurchani Dom,

similarly brings in the name Nihal Ahan. The poem is probably of consi-

derable age ; it is very elliptical in expression, many of the grammatical

forms are antiquated, and the versification is loose and formless. It gives

the legendary account of the Wanderings of the Baloches before they

settled in the countries they now inhabit, distinguishes the tribes entitled

to rank as Rinds from those not so entitled, and concludes with a catalogue

of their leaders. |

Shukr Allah hamda guzara

badshah mulka wathen

Thi jihin “rak o gilo bi

Heku nindo wash-dila.

Ma aulad Mir Hamzaigh-un

Sob dargaha gur en

Azh Halaba phadh khayan

go jazizan jheroen

Masara Miren Jalal Han

chhil-o-chyar bolak ex

Kalabalaé Bompttr ma-nyanwan

shahr Shistan mizile

Khakhtin Harina banda

Keech raster phalawa

)

134

SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Makurana Hot nindi

Khosagh man Kech-dehé

Azh Halaba, Chandiyegha

Kalamthi e logh pha-gurez

Jo mitaéf bahr-khanana

Kul sardar Shaihak en

Man Naliyé Noh nindi

Jistkani pha-gurez

Phuzh, Mirali, Jatoi

Drust man Sevi Dhadara

Drishak Khan, Mazdri

E go Rinda yagsar en

Azh bunyada Phuzh Rinde

Sar go Mir ex Chakur ew

Golo, Gopang, Dashti

Rind thaliya dar-ant

Thi Baloch baz bisharen

Drust maz Rindé manahé

Nashk-daur pha Gorgezan

E man Thaliya deha

Noh korai awarez

E go Rinda yagsaren

Rindam man Shoran nindi

Lashar man Gandavagh ea

E mani pera o rand en

E Balocha daptar ez

Ma det si sal janga

E Balocha shiddat es

Shaihak o Shahdad dani

Las sardar Chakar en

Chhil hazdr khai Mir gwankhé

Thewaghan dade-potar ex

Hol-posh dast-kalaya

Druh khawan o jabah en

Path pecha go khawa

Phadh lalen mozhagh en

arch katar nughraena

Dast mundri thangavez

Bakar o Gwaharam Ramena

Zar-zuwal Nodh bandagh en

Phuzhan Jaro jaur-jawav en

Hadden Dine bradhar en

18890.] BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 135

Pheroz o Bijar Rehan

Miran Rindén zahm-jan en

Sohbé, Mihan, Alf,

Jam, Sahak o Alan en

Haivtan Bivaragh man Rindan

Mir Hassan go Brahim en

Shair ki sheram jori

Mir Jalal Han surphadh en.

Translation.

Thanks and praise to God; himself he is Lord of the land. When

the rest of the word becomes dust and clay, alone He remains with serene

heart.

We are the offspring of Mir Hamza; victory is in the worship of

God. From Halab do we arise, there are fights with the unbelievers.

Foremost is Mir Jalal Ahan, there are four and forty tribes. By stages

(we march) from Kalabala (Karbala?) to Bompur and the cities of Sistdn.

We came to Hartin’s band, on the right side of Kech. The Hots settle

in Makran, the Khosas in the land of Keche From Halab come the

Chaéndyas, near the home of. the Kalamthis. Dividing out running water

and dry land, the chief of all is Shaihak.

In Nali the Nohs settle, close to the Jistkanis. The Phuzhes,

Miralis and Jatois, all in Sevi and Dhadar. The Drishaks, Khans and

Mazaris are one with the Rinds. In origin the Phuzhes are Rinds, they

were with Mir Chakar. The Golos, Gopangs and Dashtis are outside the

Rind circle (dish). The other very numerous Baloches are all included in

the Rinds. Distinguished for wealth among the Gorgezes are those in the

country of Thali. The Nohs and Korais are mixed together, they are one

with the Rinds. The Rinds settle in Shordn, the Lasharis in Gandava.

This is our foot-print and track, this is the Baloch record. For thirty

years we are engaged in battle, this is the Baloch struggle.

In the time of Shaihak and Shahdad, Chakar was chief of the whole.

Forty thousand come at the Mir’s call, all descendants of one ancestor.

All with armour upon their forearms, all with bows and quivers; with silk

scarves and overcoats, and red boots on their feet; with silver knives and

daggers, and golden rings on their hands. There were Bakr and Gwaharam

and Ramen, and the gold-scattering Nodsbandagh. Of the Phuzhes was

Jaro, venemous in reply, and Hadde his brother by religion. There were

Pheroz, Bijar, Rehan, and Miran, the swordsman of the Rinds. Thera

were Sohba, Mibaz, Ali, Jam, Ishak and Alan; Haibat Han and Bivaragh

of the Rinds, and Mir Hassan with Brahim.

It is the poet that composes the songs, and Mir Jalal Ahan compre-

hends them,

136 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Poems relating to Mir Chikar.

Mir Chakar is the great legendary hero of the Rind Baloches. He is

represented as having led them into the countries they now occupy from

Makran, and as having founded a kingdom with its capital Sevi (Sibi).

He waged war with the Turks under Humati Chughatta. On the civil war

between the Rinds and Lasharis breaking out, the Turks under their leader

Zunt joined the Rinds, and the Lasharis were defeated. The Turks seized

the Lashari women, but released them on the expostulation of Chakar,

who said that Baloches would be disgraced by being accomplices in such a

deed. At one time Chakar was a prisoner to Hum4u, who called him up

and asked him ‘‘ Whatis the best ofall weapons?” Chakar replied, “ Any-

thing that a man can lay hold of in a fight.” The king then had Chakar

brought unarmed into a narrow street, and a savage elephant turned loose

at the other end. As it rushed upon Chakar, he caught up a dog that was

lying in the road, and threw it in the elephant’s face with such violence

that it turned and fled. Chakar is said to have founded the old fort at

Sibi, which he ultimately abandoned at the end of the civil war on his way

to the Panj&b. His name has been given to several places in Balochistan,

among them Chakar-mari ‘ Chakar’s upper storey,’ a hill near Sangsila in

the Bugti country, from which he is said to have taken his last look back at

Sibi. This is a physical impossibility, but Chakar was a ‘godlike man’

Hudhai mard), and could do things which the present generation is not

capable of. Another place, named after him, is Chakar Tankh ‘Chakar’s

defile’ in the Marri country.

It is difficult to say how far any part of Chakar’s adventures are

historieal. Baloches began to arrive at Multdén and the neighbourhood

from Makran in the time of Hussain Langa, towards the end of the 15th

century. (Briggs’ Ferishta, Vol. IV, p. 388.) Soon afterwards came one

whose name is transliterated by Briggs Meer Jakur Zund, which should

probably be Mir Chakar Rind. He obtained a jagir in Uchh from Jam

Bayazid (1b. p. 896).

This Mir Chakar is said to have come from Solypur, but I have not

been able to discover this place. This was about 1520 A. D. About the

same time we find Baloches in the Panjab as far north as Babrah and

Khushab on the Jehlam. (Hrskine’s Baber, p. 256.)

This irruption of Baloches into the Panjab was probably caused by

the pressure on them of the Turks or Mughals who were then under the

Argitos invading Kachhi and Sindh. Shah Beg, son of Zélmuin Beg

Arghin, took Sibi first in A. D. 1479 and a second time about A. D. 1511.

This occupation may have been the cause of Chdkar’s emigration. Shab

Ce oe

1880. ] BALOCHI LANGUAGE. 137

Beg made Sibi his capital for some time, and it is probable that he and not

Chakar really built the old fort there (Erskine’s Baber and Humaytin. Kd.

1854, Vol. I, pp. 342, 347, 348.) There is no record of any collision

between Humaytin and the Baloches except during his flight in A. D. 1548,

when he seems to have been plundered by them in the Bolan Pass. (Baber

and Humaytin, Vol. II. p. 266) and again fell in with them between IKan-

dahar and Sistan (p. 271), This is perhaps sufficient for the introduction

of his name into the legends. Zunt, the Turk leader, perhaps stands for

Zilnin Beg in whose name Shah Beg fought.

The Quarrel of Mir Chakar and Gwaharim.

[This poem also seems from its language to be an old one. It de-

scribes the causes of the division between the Rinds and Lasharis, the two

sections into one of which all true Baloches fall. The Rinds were under

Chakar, the Lasharis under Gwaharim. Finally Chakar in disgust emi-

grated to the Panjab, and settled at Satghar in the Lahore District, where

he died and is said to be buried. ]

Klatt Haviv gushi: Sari Rind Ghulam Bolak gushi: Chakar Gwaha-

ram Karakutin gushi: Gohar bautiyé kharde gal gushi: philaven

si-sal-jang gushi.

Yad khandn name Taht

man awwal sar-navaghan

Haidar o phusht o phanah

sar hazrate akhir-zaman

Biya lori go sawaha

zir mani guftaraghan

Bar gwara belan dilegha

no salati bradharan.

Mangeha Rinda pha Bompur

Kech baghe Makuran

Mastaren logh Domki en

man Balochi meravaz

Rind Lashari award

tran bastha pha-wathan

‘ Biydeth, shedha biladin

bilux giyafer ulkahaz

Jo mitafa bi-kattive

bahr-khanti bi pha wathan.

138

SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Raji rana kadh ma lektin’

biyakhthan dan logh githan

Hukmi tonde nakhifan

nokh khuthantesh adimaz

Bozh boran baraghena

kotwéni andara

Saj khane bazen bihana

nuh-hazari markhavdag

Biyartn bagan girdaghen&

azh Naliya khaur dafa

Gwankh-jatha jodhan bi kadan

“er-khafe azh Chajua

Khash gali o palanga

jhul suhren kamalaz

Bauf morbandem lihefan

hingaloen manjavan

Sikh o tasan bijoren

Makurani kadahaz

Chakuri deh na nindi.

ro wathi diren dimilan. ’

Phoshitha Rindan wathi dir

pha khawah o shaddavaz

Phadh lalen mozhaghan

Rind kasathant pha Deravan

Dhadar o Sevi gwaltha

Dan Jhal o Nilahaé dafa,

Hab, Phab, Moh, Mali

dan Nali khaur dafa

Gaj shahra basthaghena

Dan Mardgaho deha

Sangar o khoh Sulema

Gwafthaghen sher-naran

Sang Mundahi dhaniya

Dan pa bi Methird

Baghchaen Kacho Sima

Dan Dhari o Bhanara

Nangare Bijar thegha

Jam Sulemaéna lura.

Gohar hauti ki azhtha

gwar Nawave Chakura

‘Mal mani othiya bag en

hande phe-dare manan’

1880.]

BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 139

Chakura dir-zanaghena

ewash bi durren Gohara

‘ Barav o Soran joa

Kachraki phalava,

He-miund baga bicharez,

nind be-anden shafa.’

Rosh azh Gwahardm shahra

rafthaghant kharde charian

Baraghen boran zawarant

pha shikdr o sailahan.

Hir khushthant juftaghiya

phar wathi laf-serihan

Raj bundadthant hazari

azh du-demi zidneha

Kahrava thekan khawaéthant

pha badhen kirdaraghan

’Shin-guré Gwaharam thegha

’shdn-gura Mir Chakura

Philaven si sal jang ath

Gohara hir phadha

Sar galoi baithaghanti

nesh rifhthant azh dafa

Mara di ekhawa di ishtha

pha Hudhai asura

Guda Sultane Balocha

sah] khutha bi pha wathan

Chakur azh brathi gastira.

Gwastha Satten Gharaz.

Translation.

Kildti son of Habib says: to the lofty Ghulam Bolak Rinds he says :

about the quarrel between Chakar and Gwaharam he says: of the refuge-

taking of Gohar in few words he says: of full thirty years war he says, as

follows:

First I remember the name of God, my morning-star of old; lord,

and support and protector to the most illustrious prophet.

Come minstrel at early morn, learn my sayings and carry them to the

friends of my heart, and the assembly of my brethren.

The bold Rinds came to Bompur, to Kech and fertile Makran, the

greatest family was the Domki in the Baloch assemblies.

The Rinds and Lashdris met together, they took counsel among

140 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

themselves. “Come, let us march hence, let us leave these widespread

lands. Let us conquer streams and dry lands, and deal them out among

ourselves. Let us take no count of rule or ruler.”

They came to their own homes. The chiefs (turban-wearers) ordered

their slaves to saddle their young mares. “ Loose the slender chestnut

(mares) from their stalls, saddle the numerous fillies, steeds worth nine-

thousand each. Let us bring in herds of camels from round about, from

the mouth of the torrent of Nali.”” The men called to the women “ Come

down from Chaju, take out your wrappings and beds, carpets and red

blankets, pillows, and spotted rugs, and many-coloured bedsteads, moulded

cups in abundance, and Makrani drinking vessels. Chalar will not stay in

this country, he will go to his own far land.”

The Rinds clothed their bodies in overcoats and turbans, with red

boots on their feet. The Rinds were distinguished for hospitality.

They called together Dhadar and Sevi, in Jhal and the mouth of the

Nilah ; Hab, Phab, Moh and Mali in the mouth of the Nali torrent. They

stayed at the city of Gaj in the land of Maragah. The tigers of men

assembled Sangar and the Sulaiman mountains, the rulers of Sang and

Mundahi became payers of tribute to our chief.

In the boundaries of fertile Kachhi, in Dhari and Bhanar. There was

generous Bijar with his scimitar, and the leader Sulaiman with his sword.

Gohar came for refuge with the Nawab Chakar, saying “Show me a

place for my cattle, and herds of camels.” The far-seeing Chakar said to

the fair Gohar “ Go to the streams of Shorau in the direction of Kachrak.

There stay at ease with your herds of camels, and have no anxiety by

night.”

One day some madmen went forth from Gwaharam’s city, they were

mounted on fine chestnut (mares), for the sake of hunting and exercise.

They killed a pair of young camels (of Gohar’s), to fill their bellies

withal.

The chief fell into a great rage (lit. rage of a thousand), on both sides

damage was done. A curse falls upon the wicked, upon the doers of evil.

On this side was Gwaharam with his sword, on that side Mir Chakar.

For full thirty years war continued about these young camels of Gohar’s,

All the excellent youths have been slain, the teeth have dropped from their

mouths, and God’s mercy has spared us only. Then the Baloch rulers made

peace among themselves, and Chakar on account of this feud among

brethren passed away to Satghar.

“i

1880. ] BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 141

Chakar’s denunciation of his foes on leaving Sibi.

Chakar Shaihak gushi: sari Rind Badshah gushi: 4a rosh ki Sevi

khili kharde gdl gushi: Gwahardmar phasave daéth gushi.

Bilam mar-lawashen Sevi

Gauren sadhani margdvi

Jame Nindava bhattiya

Sai-roshan Baharadm negha

Si-sal uvt o uzhméara

Jan-jebhavan jangiyd

Thegh azh balgavé honena

Chota cho kamandi boghan

Jukhtan na nashant lavend

Warnayan du-mandilena.

Lad ma deravan na rusthaut

Misk ma baritam na mushthant

Whard dumbaghan meshani

Karwali sharab sharr joshant

Shahan pha nishan yakhe nest

Drustan warthaghan hindiyan

Shartan dithaghan shimendn

Bachaki lawar banziya

Gwahardm muzhen Gandavagh

Singhe ma zirih phirentha

Machiya lawashtha lanjaith

Ali o Wali druh-daran

Yaki kilata beronen

Hagh kavali Turkanan

Rind baraghen boranan

Gwahardm azh dude hande bi

Ne Gor bi ne Gandavagh,

Translation.

Chikar son of Shaihak says: the exalted Ruler of the Rinds says: on

the day he leaves Sibi these few words he says: in reply to Gwaharam he

says (as follows):

I will leave man-devouring Sevi, curses on my infidel foes! For three

days shall the Jém Nindo from his oven (distribute bread) in honour of

Bahram (slain). For thirty years, for ever shall there be war with these

gigantic men, nor shall my sword be clean from stains of blood. I will

bend it like jointed sugarcane, so that through crookedness it will not go

into the sheath.

142 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

The distinguished (lit. two-turbaned) youths do not rise up to sport

among the houses, they rub no scent on their moustaches, but they eat

fat-tailed sheep and boil strong liquor in their stills. There is not one of

them with signs of a ruler about him. They have eaten all their weapons,

they have gambledaway their heads, they have children’s sticks in their hands.

Let Gwahardm stay in dusty Gandava, a stone thrown into a well. Machi

has drunk blood; Ali and Wali are traitors. The rebels’ fort has been

surrounded, and reduced to earth by the tyrannous Turks and the Rinds

on highbred mares (chestnuts). Gwahardm (will be expelled) from both

places, (and possess) neither a grave nor Gandava.

III.

Dosten and Shiren.

The legend on which the following poem is based is as follows :

During the war between Mir Chakar the Rind leader and Huma

Chughatta king of the Turks (¢. e. the Badshah Humaytin), Chakar was

forced to consent to give up some Rind maidens to Huma, but actually

sent instead young men in disguise. On this being discovered, they were

ordered to be kept in perpetual imprisonment in the fort of Harrand.

Among these prisoners was Dosten. He had been engaged to marry his

cousin Shiren, who remained faithful to him during his many years’ im-

prisonment. At last her parents said that she must no longer remain

unmarried, no hope being left of Dosten’s return ; so they found for her

another husband, also named Dosten. (This is alluded to in line 98, where

she says ‘ Not this Dosten, but the old one.’) Him she long refused to

marry, but at last yielded to the pressure put on her, and arrangements

were made for the ceremony. Meanwhile Dosten in prison at Harrand

had succeeded in gaining the favour of the Mughal or Turk Governor of

the fort, and some liberty was allowed him. His mare had died, but had

first borne a fine colt which had grown up, and which Dosten was allowed

to keep. One day games and races were going on, and Dosten asked and

obtained leave to join in the race. Mounting his horse, he said good-bye

to the Governor, turned its head towards the Chachar Pass and went off at

full speed. Several pursuers followed him, but no horse had the endurance

of his chestnut, At intervals along the rocky pass they stumbled and fell,

and these spots bear the horses’ names to the present day. At last he was

left alone, having wearied out all his pursuers, and travelled homewards.

On nearing his tribe, he overtook a minstrel (Dom or lori). He asked him

the news, and where he was going. ‘The minstrel told him of the impend-

1880. | BALOCHL LANGUAGE. 143

ing marriage of Shiren, and said that he was on his way to sing at tho

wedding. Dosten then told his story and prevailed on the minstrel to

change clothes with him. Thus disguised, he made his way into the assem-

bly with the other minstrels, and sang the poem which follows, bringing

in the substance of a message he had received in captivity from Shiren,

He was immediately recognized by Shiren, who declared that she would

marry him and no other, and they were happily married then and there,

In the poem Dosten first begins by saying how his mare could not

live in the heat of the plains, and then passes on to say how a Ahorasan

merchant brought him down Shiren’s message, which constitutes the

remainder of the poem, It begins with an animated description of a

Nomadic Baloch tribe in the hills moving to fresh pastures after rain, and

then turns to Shiren weeping in her little hut for her lost lover. Her

companions try to console her, but she will not be consoled, since he is in

captivity. She then describes how when she wanders over the hills with

the other Baloch women, according to their custom, she always picks a

flower for her lover’s sake, and ends with a prayer for his safe return home

again.

Lines 40-44 seem to be an interpolation. They have no connexion

with the subject matter of the poem.

Zangi mani badero

Gwaharam mani jam o bel

Whantkar Shihane Shahiye

Saughan pha thai rishana

5 Nokhi-akhthaghen masana

Sighen gor-khushen syahara

Afa na warth Bah negha

Kikh o Karjalan Sindeghan

Loti bahiran Dashteghan

10 Loti wadh-maharen jidhan

Phitokh data madh-goran

Dori phur kumavren afa

Suti phurt khaiav az.

Whava kalra nelan

15 Marwari jawaz zivirenan

Marde azh Hurasan akhtha

Leghar chadar o humboex

Bar rodhanani gonath

Hurjin maidhen bhangaéni

20 Sarbar Kandahari miskant

Phaigham gon-athi Rindani

144

SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Tahkiken shalam Shirene.

Nodhan shanz-jatha Konara

Dasht-o-damana Mungachar

25 Sanniya nughor humboen

Dor phurant-i amrezan

Larzant cho gwanani thakhan

Chotant cho kawandi boghan.

Ladi manchatha maldaran

30 Meshi buzi whantkaran

Mezhdar Sahak Yaran

Bumbar basthaghan binukhan

Sarbar larithan gwanechan

Bhawanar khandagh o Nagahi

35 Khondan phrushthaghan zardoan

Lokan phashavi kataran

Kadan go himaren phadhan

Shirena jatha sradhen kul

Ma Narmukh geaven reja.

40 Mesh azh dranina ser khaz

Buz azh gwarigha 1al phula&

Rind azh maidhen gandima

Pahnwal azh phanir poncha

Lahri azh gwan phothakha

45 Gwan’ janth dilsaren daiya

Ziri kadahe metei

Ro da shakhalen nokhafa

Malgor shusthaghen mahlija

Randith mushi malgoran

50 Khaithi da wathi chyar-kula

Kulla darriya bandi

Shiskant thaghard nishthent 4

Jhul phalava leteni

Dast janth avr barziya

55 Khashi nughraen Adena

Era Kamalt sar zana

Gindi droshama. heriyé

Gregh khant humdres chhamé

Anzi rishant pha drama

60 Jigh sar katika mend

Much ban janan jedi gohar

Sharren somaren chhil-o-ehyar

Biayant o gwara er-nindant

Shar phalava letena

1880. } BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 145

65 Phursant-i dila o hala.

‘Pharche khunalat khordema

Subren man makh o nilana

Brikh that bambaven danzena’

Gregh bith, janan telank dach

70 ‘Dir bith, o janan, jawan e na

Dir bith, o janan, dir ninde

Bilan khunal o khor-dema

Suhran man makh o nila bant

Brikh o bambaven danzen bant

75 Dost shume phakar nex

Anmar ki jana dozwaha

Suhra reé darkAra

Ditha harraghen bad-duayan

Turkaz azh hareb gwazentha

80 Ma zar-joshen Aranda shahra

Sunjez isp-tah’alez lata,’

Diing bant janikh Rindaat

Malani phadha shef ban.

Khayant khargazi kramana

85 Nekhen-niyaten gwandana.

Mauran azh kurmaén sindan&

Phatan gwaraghi lalphulan

Nem jamaven jigha jant

Nem khunal o sar-hoshaz

90 Nem pha sammaen khauliya

Yakhe pha mani niyata

Chitho ma wathi musht khan’

Ba phusht azh badhan jaurena

’Shith daz-gohar jediya

95 Dastan pha Hudha burzare

‘Allah ki biyar Malik Dostena

Sauter sammaen khauliya

Eshiya na, hawan oliya “

Bor pha lammaghan sheriyan

100 Baro mizilan direna

Biydr wazha amirena

Nind-o nyddh phith-o-mathani

Dima shakhalen bra¢éhant

Rozi ba Malik Dostena

105 Didar khasha rozi ba.

146 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Translation.

Zangi is my chief, Gwaharam my leader and friend, the owner of

excellent mares. I swear by your beard, by the new grown hair of your

face. My mare, hunter of wild asses, is sad, she will not drink water by the

Indus, nor eat the reeds and karjal grass of Sind. She longs for the herds

of wild asses of the Dasht, she longs for her own pleasant pastures, for the

female wild asses of the Phitokh Pass, and the pools full of fresh water ;

the sandflies and musquitos irritate her, the vermin will not let her sleep,

the Marwari barley is coarse to her.

A man came from Ahorasan, his clothes and face dirty; he brought

with him loads of madder, saddle-bags of fine bhang, and bales of Kandahar

musk.

He had with him a message from the Rinds, a true greeting from

Shiren.

The clouds have rained on Konar, on the plain and _ hill-skirts of

Mungachar, on the pleasant slopes of Sanni.

The pools are filled to over-flowing, (the water) trembles like the

leaves of the gwan-tree (Péstacia khinjuk), and bends like joints of sugar- —

cane. The graziers have given the word to march, the owners of the sheep

and goats, Mezhddr, Sahtk and Yar Khan; the housewives have tied

up their bundles, the camel-drivers have loaded their bales. On the _hill-

passes of Bhawnar and Nagahu, the yellowscamels bend their knees, the

male camels in long strings, the women with tender feet. Shiren has

pitched her fair tent on the wide spreading land of Narmukh.

Feed the sheep on dranin-grass, the goats on red-flowered gwarigh, the

Rinds on wheaten flour, the shepherds on curds, and the Lahris on gwan-

berries.

She calls her beloved nurse and takes up an earthen cup, she goes to

the sweet, fresh water, and her handmaiden washes her hair. She combs

and smooths her hair and comes to her four-sided hut. She closes the

door of the hut. They plait and spread the matting, and she reclines on

the carpet.

She puts her hand into her bag and takes outa silver mirror, rests it

on her shapely thigh and looks at her houri-like countenance. She weeps

with her tender eyes, tears drop upon her cheeks and on her variegated

breast-garment. Her companions and sisters assemble, fair comrades forty

and four; they come and sit down by her, they recline upon blankets,

they ask after her heart and condition.

They say, “ Why are your face and earrings uncleaned, your red and

blue clothes unwashed, your locks unkempt and dusty?” Weeping, she

pushes the women away and says, ‘“‘ Away from here, women, you are not

1880. ] BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 147

good. Away! sit far off! Let my face and earrings be uncleaned, my red

and blue clothes unwashed, my locks tangled and dusty ; I do not want

you for friends. He who was the friend of my heart, for whose sake I

should adorn myself, I saw carried off from his native land by evil cursed

Turks, shut up in the wealthy city of Harraud, within an empty stable.

The daughters of the Rinds form a band, (and wander) following in

the track of the showers. The vultures come croaking, invoking good

fortune. Breaking the Maur-flowers from their stems, and plucking the

red gwaragh flowers, some place them in their boddices and breasts, some

in their earrings, lower and upper, and some (keep them) for their true

love’s sake. Pluck one for my good luck, and keep it in your closed hand ;

and, secretly from my bitter foes, my own sister and love says, with hands

raised up to God. ‘‘ May God bring back Malik Dosten, according to his

true promise, not this one, but the old one. Swiftly, tiger-like chestnut

mare, bear him southwards, come by long stages, hring home my noble lord

to dwell with his father and mother and the assembly of his beloved brethren.

May Malik Dosten appear, may he appear to my sight.

NOTES ON THE TEXT.

The text of this poem is taken from two versions, one recited by a

Shambani, the other by a Marri. There are some variations which are

noted below, the Shambani version being marked (a), the Marri version (6).

The Shambani version is the base of the text. A fragment marked (c)

from a Gurehani Dom supplies a line or two.

Lines 10 and 15 are supplied from (e).

Line 11 is only found in (4) and (e).

Line 18. For rodhanani (6) reads mehlavani ‘ spices.’

Line 27. Larzant is from (6). (a) reads drafshant.

Line 32. For banukhan (0) reads godiydn, with the same meaning,

Lines 40—44: appear to be interpolated. They only occur in (a), which

contains several passages not in the other version.

Lines 46—48 are from (6). The whole passage from line 45 to line 57

is almost identical with one in the poem of Lailf and Majniin. Lines 56

and 57 are from (d).

(a) reads: ‘ Phullen zan sara er-khant

Gindi azh wath o gondfa

Line 62 is from (6). (@) reads ‘ Hirth jediri chhil o chyar’

Line 68. For danzena (6) reads be-zaunk-an, ‘ unornamented.’

Line 69, For gregh bith ‘weeps’ (b) reads zahr girth ‘is angry.

148 SPECIMENS OF THE

Line 75 is from (0).

Line 77 (6) reads ‘Suhrani riar rakhi.’

Line 79 from (6) (a) reads :

Turkan mughalaz giptha.

Between lines 72 and 80 (6) inserts

Ganjen ispahan phar bitha

the meaning of which is not clear. Also after 1. 81 (0) inserts,

Bakhta mir janegha khushtha

Dost o ispahana bokhtha,

which is equally unintelligible.

Line 99. For pha ‘towards’ (0) reads phalav ‘ direction.’

Line 100. From (b) (a) reads:

Khosara dehan direna

‘Swiftly to his distant country.’

IV.

The Rise of the War between the Rinds and Lasharis.

| Extra No.

[This poem is another fragment of the Chakar cycle, giving an

account of the spoiling of Gohar’s camels by the Lasharis, and Chakars’

vow of revenge.

The episode of the refugee-lizard is quoted by one of

the characters as an illustration of the extreme Baloch doctrine of hospi-

tality. Rehan and Jaro the Rind warriors mentioned were sister’s sons to

Chakar.

for the revenge he took for the spoiling of Sammi’s cattle. ]

Nodhk Bahram gushi: jarex Rashkani Baloch gushf:

Kalmat karakutin gushi: baghar bautian gusht.

Doda who is mentioned at the end is Doda Gorgez, celebrated

imar Bulmat

Whazh-gushen Lori biyar wathi shaghar

Ma sara charen bairame phaghar

Jawan mard datara gire dadha

Zi azh Sannia giyafena

Laditha durren Gohara shodha

Akhthagha bauti gwara Mira

Chakura shira zi gawar-zira

Goharaé durrena hawar datha

“ Bagavo Milaha avan danez

Go ma Lashari jherave manen’”’

Gohara lade sar-jamagh dashtha

Dasta Gohar maz Kacharak nyastha

1881.]

BALOCHL LANGUAGE, 149

Rapthaghant Shorana phare saila

Chakura Miri bandane shahra.

“Ma thashtim dan baghchaen Gaja

Gohar dachi ma beghavan danzent

Maigha shir dan nafaghan shanzant”’

Chakura phurs’ azh Malaven jata,

“ Zith khan jat, de manan hala,

Cho khutha khai go Gohara mala ?”

Cho jawab datha Melaven jata,

“ Akhthagha Lashari hame chindri

Khushthagha hir cho khenagha mardi

Chham jatha durrgoshen Maheriya

‘Jat, hame gala bile sheriya

Phuturen Rind ma deravan druab ant

Dachi pha hirdn hardame zahant? ”

Badh burtha Rehana Nawavena

Phuzh Jarava jaur-jawavena

“Ma phara durren Gohara hiran

Havbara shamalo jani shirdn

Shart khan haisi chotava bird’

Bagar Jatoi jawdb datha

“ Ba-khi-an durren Gohara Sammi

Hota pha bautan niyath khami.

Shah Hussain cheravé rosha

Bibari phesha nishtha ma logha.

Dar-shutha baghar azha geda

Choravan ilga bo#Atha pha dinia (or pha randa)

Gur-khanana daz medhira logha ;

Dema dar-khaptha mardume jawanen

Sharr kalanch ant cho dushthaghen shira

Dholant oshishe karaiyam.

Kidmaha minnate khutha-i bazen

‘Choravan, baghar bil, mani shamen

I-katar mara phar wathi namen’

Na-jdnen joraejaven jatan

Kalihén baghar khushtha pha lata

Odh niya’ logha Sammaven salo

Dast kauliyd phijatha damhi

‘ Agh phara baghara na-ro bai

Man thai bhen, tho mani bhav’

Hot mirani dara ak/tha

Stiwrihé pha dema jawab daidha

159 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

‘No Amul-main, no Amul-main !

Yarbare bosht, gal maya gona.

Man phara baghara khanan chona

An dighdy shahmi bith azh honda

Shingura shast shangura phanjah

Drust pha baghara bithagha yag-jah

Omarda nashke ishtha pha kauld

Hon gire Balacha phara honda

Surih Doda phara gokhan.

Translation.

Nodh son of Bahram sings: to the fieree Rashkani Baloches he sings:

of the war between the Bulmats and Kalmats, of the lizard becoming @

refugee he sings.

Sweet singing minstrel bring your guitar, bind a large pagri on your

head, let the good man receive gifts from the generous.

Yesterday thence out of fertile Sanni, marched the fair Gohar: she

eame for shelter to the Mir, to Chakar ever-victorious with the sword.

Then spake fair Gohar “The Lasharis are set on quarrelling with me, they

let not my camels remains in the Milah pass.”

He collected all Gohar’s camp and goods and placed her in the valley

of Kacharak. Then they (7. e. the Lasharis) came wandering to Shoran;

to a town under Mir Chakar’s rule (saying), “ We will gallop (our mares)

to grove-encircled Gaj; let Gohar’s female camels mourn for their young

in the evening; let the milk from their (unmilked) udders drip down to

their navels.

Chakar asked Mela the camel-herd, “Quick, camel-herd give me

tidings. Who dealt thus with Gohar’s cattle?” The camel-herd Mela

thus replied: “The Lasharis came down here in wrath, they slew the

young camels as if with the anger of men, Gohar the fair camel owner

hinted to me to be silent about it, saying, ‘Herdsman, keep this matter

quiet, let the true Rinds remain in peace, the female camels daily bear

more young ones.’”

Then Rehan the Nawab became angry, and Jaro the Phuzh bitter in

reply. “In exchange for fair Gohar’s young camels we will take a seven-

fold revenge with our swords, we will gamble with heads and hair and

turbans.” And Bagar Jatoi answered and said, ‘“‘ Where are the fair Gohar

and Sammi (her sister) ? When was a hero wanting to his refugees P As in

Shah Hussain’s day of trouble, Bibari sat in front of her house.

A lizard dropped out of a dwarf-palm, and the boys pursued it, chasing

it into the chief’s house. Then the good woman came out in front to meet

1881.] BALOCHE LANGUAGE. 151

them, wearing beautiful ivory bracelets, white as fresh drawn milk, slipped

-on over her soft arms. She entreated and implored them saying, ‘ Boys,

leave the lizard alone, it is my refugee. Do so much for me, for your own

honour’s sake.’

The boys, ignorant and boorish camel-herds, killed the lizard with

sticks. Her husband and lord was not there. She sent a complaint to

him by letter, saying, ‘If you do not go and fight on account of this lizard

Tam your sister and you are my brother!’ Hot returned to his home, and

the hero thus answered back ‘ Hear Amul-main! hear Amul-main ;’ stay

where you are, do not speak.

I will act in such a way about this lizard that the ground will be

filled with blood, and corpses lying sixty on one side and fifty on the other,

all collected into one place for the lizard’s sake, as when Omar was released

on his own promise, as when Baldch took his revenge for blood, or the

hero Doda for the cattle.

Vv.

The Competition between the Poets Sobha and Gah.

Part I. Sobha addresses Gahi on the question of the Laghari refugees

with Jawanak, and taunts his tribe on their modern origin.

[These four poems constitute a complete specimen of a kind of exer-

cise not uncommon among Baloch poets. Sobhaa Khosa and Gahi a

Laghiri draw comparisons between their tribes and chiefs, challenging

each other’s claim to have come in with the original settlers under Mir

Chakar, and taunting each other with failing in the exercise of the cardi-

nal Baloch virtue, hospitality to refugees. Relan the Dom minstrel is

commission by each poet to learn the words of his song, and to carry it

back, and recite it in the assembly of the hostile tribe. The Lagharis and

Khosas are old enemies, and their hostility still smoulders after thirty

years of British rule, ]

Sobha Thegh Ali gushi: Jarwdéren Baloch, gushi: Khosagh Kaloi

kardkuta gushi: Laghari bautiyan kharde gal gushi :

Whazh-gushen Relana shadhihani shagha bare

t=)

Main salam bi shairen Gahiya diye

Nishtho droghdni zawaéna wash khane,

Ewakhi ser4 go manan chachhon tule ?

Bhichari Daélan kilit nim gire

Nuh-manen baranra wathar kans diye

Jawanak urdani raghaza roshe khafe

152

SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Ahin shar hathi raghasd chit arthaghe

Sher chapula azh Kharra thala guze

Go manaz hair bi, zamina jahi lahe

Phesh gudaé main sailavani depanthave

Agh thara wahm bi zamina jaiz khane

Day-charen zahmani na-washen jaha rase

’Shingura ’shangur lashkaraz dem-o-dem khuthe

Zahranen mardan nodh-dila serafa jathe.

Jawanak urdani tawaren goshan khafi

Har-chydr dema ghoravani dato rudhi

Cho thai bachhani dafani gonaf hushi

Nodhi berana beghava biyayan thanahi.

Biya, O Lashari, azh gwareya dar-khapthaghe ?

Gude Zunuwa ghorava rosha gar athe

Sailai Miren Chakura phauzhaz ruthaghe

Rind nar-boraz azh zamina resinthaghe

Khushthagha Ramen damamo charenthaghe.

Dai manda nashkaz tho kithan rosh khard bithaghe,

Bakar O Rameni kithan ladd gon athe ?

Ghoravo urdaz phelatho Turkdni rukh ath

Doshi ma Jhalaé Turk ghorayén grandagha

An dem Gandavagh Hudha main dem bithagha

Turka# shad kama Rind ’shamedha zahr gipthaghant

Hon azh chamani chimaka dar-khapthaghant

Gwashtha Naydniyé ‘ Mazw hudhdbund go-khapthaghant.’

Lajavo, Shorani dhaniyan gran bithaghant

Bijar, Phuzh, Chakar Shahdhar akhthaghant

Allan o Miskani Sahak Madan athant

Bagavo lajjani sara katar dathaghant

Asp go sonden zariya bashkathaghant

Rind azh nokh-zenen bihana er-khapthaghant

Piyadhagha Rind azh takht Shorand akhthaghant

Thorave Rindara oli Lashdri war adh

Mir go Phula azh Kawara drikhenthaghant.

Whazh-ghushen Relan shadhihani shaghar bizir

Mard pha bautan choshaut, sard4re mani

Gaéhwar o Hanen Sahibana jag-sahi

Gwar Nawav Han kik burtha bazen bari

Gorishaniya singat o Kahan Marri

Burza go Summenzaiya bradhargari

Akhtha gwar Hanen Jawdnakaé bautan thaf

‘ Khosaghan, ki man neydn Laghari khadhi?

Go ma chyar sala nishthagha bauti sharikh

1881.] BALOCHE LANGUAGE. 153

Bandave khohen nashkato hapt phushti guzi

Manik logha har-khase omedha durdh

Manik kato bihisht jo sara

Gudi samma, kotai pahrde phadha

Do Balochani akhthaghant wakyai sara

Do shafan bitha gwar thei khanen Methira.

Chham anziyan rapthaghant grihdna phadha

Dobaha dathen markhave, paiddish khuthen

Lajji banukhan phar wathi shana bashkathen

Doda thei namtiz man jihénd mashhar athen

Guda drahiye basthai go Hanen Shakald

Tumi gwadhentha wa ganjen Bakara

Jawanak phauzhani sara GAji barbara

Shah mariyaé gonekhé go sheren Haidara

Ni ki akhtha dan Siri Mithawana

Niyamghi Zihar main sharifhan har do saré

Jahl-burziya hek-bya resintha jaran

Detini reba er-khafi jabiyé bund

Sher ki gwamesh phrushi lorhiyé dard

Banz ki simurgh jhatith maidana sara

Hanen Arziya gwankh be ambraya jatha

Khosagha nal bastha galaghé kurké khuthd

Laj whantkaran phil-athi simurghia burtha

Ispar 0 savzen nezaghan Bashkyé sth khutha

Hanen Dilshad mardiya bera tharatha

Shai phitha ashk en ki shawdr paid4 khutha

Har do urdani nyamagha sAmi suhr khutha

Doda Hanen Jawanakar zithen hair khutha.

Translation.

Sobha son of Thegh Ali sings: to the Jarwér Baloches he sings: of

the fight between the Khosas and Kalois he sings: of the Lag havi refugees

he sings, as follows :

Sweet singing Relin take away your guitar from the assembly, give

my salutation to the poet Gdhi (saying), Sit down and make clean your

tongue from falsehoods. How can you weigh single seers against maunds,

You mention the forts of Bhichari and Dalan, you are placing nine-maund

weights upon yourself. In the face of Jawdnak’s armies you will fall in a

day, beneath that elephant’s foot you will be crushed, beneath its blow

you will pass away from the valley of Kharr. Make peace with me that

your land and place may remain to you before you are again terrified by

154 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

my sword. If you are anxious, then legalize (the possession of) your

land, for when swords are biting you will be in an unpleasant place, when

on this side and on that armies stand face to face, and angry men are

satisfying their swords’ hearts (with slaughter).

When the shout of Jawanak’s hosts falls upon your ears, and the dust

of the horsemen rises on every side, so that the moisture of your sons’

mouths dries up, and the cloud-like (mares) come gallopping (loose) to

their stables in the evening.

Come O Lashari, where did you originate from? You were missing

on the day of Zuni’s horsemen ; did you reap (a harvest) of Mir Chakar’s

army? did you chase the Rind chargers (lit. male chestnuts) from the

land? When Ramen was killed you played the drum. Give me your

tokens (to show) when you became separate from us. Did you march

away with Bakar or with Ramen? Did you accompany the horsemen or

the army to meet the Turks? That night when the Turkish cavalry

thundered in Jhal, or towards Gandava when God was on our side, when

the Turks rejoiced and the Rinds became angry ; blood issued from their

eyelids, and the women said “ our lords have met them.”

The rulers of Shoran became heavy with shame; Bijar, Phuzh,

Chakar and Shahdhar arrived there, Allan and Sah4k Miskani were there;

they gave a string of camels to ransom the shame-faced ones (7. ¢., the

women taken by the Turks), horses they gave and bright gold, the Rinds

alighted from their newly-saddled fillies, and on foot (having given up

their horses) the Rinds returned from the throne of Shoran. Formerly the

Lasharis also showed kindness to the Rinds, when they let Mir (Chakar)

gallop away from Kawar on Phul (the name of a mare belonging to

Nodhbandagh).

Sweet-singing Relan,take up your guitar of merry-makings,(and declare)

what sort of man my chief is towards refugees. Gdhwar and the Chief

Sahib Ahan are the most trustworthy of men; many times did they com-

plain to the Nawab, that the Gurchanis had made a union with the Kahan

Marris, and a brotherhood with the upper Summenzais. Your refugees

came to our chief Jawdnak, saying, “we are Khosas, we are no longer

Legharis.” Four years did they stay with us, sharing in our protection.

The marks of their dwelling on the hills shall remain till seven gene-

rations pass. In Manik’s house every one lived in great hope; (for this)

Manik (shall have) a dwelling on the streams of Paradise.

(To your chief), in his latter age after the stage of deceit (in his

second childhood ?) came two Baloch women seeking for refuge; two

nights they stayed with your mighty lord. Tears fell from their eyes and

they cried aloud. He gave them the mares for twice their value, he made

a profit of it, to his own shame he gave them to the shame-faced women.

1881. | BALOCHI LANGUAGE. 155

Doda your chief became celebrated in the world! Then he made an agree-

ment with Shakal Khan, and made them pass on to Timi and wealthy

Bakar. ;

The helper of Jawaénak’s armies is the Pir -Gaji Barbar. The saint

accompanies us, riding on a swift camel, with the lion-like Ali. Now that

we are come into the Siri and Mithawan (names of torrents on the Derajat

frontier). Zihar is the arbitrator between the parties on both sides. Up

and down did the two bulls pursue each other (hek-byd a Punjabi

phrase). Let us deceive them that they may descend to a lower place.

Just as a tiger strikes down a buffalo outside its hedge, or as a Simurgh

strikes a hawk on the plain, so did the Ahan call Arzi and his compa-

nions. ‘The Khosas shod their horses, the troop made a rattling. Your

chiefs were ashamed, as when the Simurgh carries off an elephant.

With shields and grey spears Bashkyaé made a shade. Dilshad Ahan

heroically encompassed them about, honour to the father who bore you!

Between the two armies they made their graves red. Doda then quickly

made peace with Jawanak Ahan.

Part Il.— Ghd replies, praising bravery and taunting Sobha with being @

coward, and not a true Rind.

Gabi Gorish gushi: Kaloi gushi: Sobhdr phasave diith gushi.

Whazh-gushen Reldin shadhihani shagha biyar

Kaunsh bangavaé gwar mani baladha bidar

Chambare sak jan, malgi dil& gham guzar

Jangi katara dil machande : jawdndn bisdr

Nishthaghe sat&é whash nish ndmtidh-tawar

Azh waliyani khashthaghe rand o kissawan

Hair phadha: raj-han rosh ant, jang syahen shaf ant

Jang phadha mard o markhavén jawain rosh nayant

Gahwaren hindi bingaven hotan charant

Dhauraven kotani sawaéda zel khanant

Chandean warna pha dafa gozdn janant

Jangavo ninja bi, phadha pahnadh girant

Bingaven hotani rayhima ambrah nayant

Azh phadha guda nishtho amsodh warant

Go doen dastén sar o 24nd janant

Jangani dahka har-chyar khundén phirant

Gwadilen mar go gindayh& goriyé trahant

Ashikani kien medhana ravant

156 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Taukal beriya dilar telanka diant

Malgi dilé pha zirih o zirih-phosh khanant

Kadahaz zahrena sharabi nosh-khanant

Ma sagharani thafthaghen jhoram khafant

GAhwaren thegha phar wathi namidh janant

Go wathi khanen Methira miski zar ant.

. Whazh-gushen Reldn shadhihani shagha bare

Main salama bi shairen Sobhar diye

Met¢hira randa zir ki Bompura khai e

Man dila zan ki tho Khosagha mathi brath naye

Sov laban nydmaghi daran sushe

Armana! zanant azh sadhen sdlan gwasthaghe

Hai gannokh e hai zha thana kisthaghe

Bakar o Rameni shaghana mara jane

Tho khithan roshi Rind Lashari bithaghe.

Ki man darydyani lahravo chalan gar-athe

Beghava miren Chakura chaukidar athe

Ma wathi shan cho mastharen Rindan pholatha

Ewakhi ser go mana har-ro tolatha

Man thai hathi maghaza shon didn

Biyé medhana chambava simurgh bian jandn

Arava mardan Sawano lahri rasthaghe

Nokh-nochan phagh phithi mardum basthaghe

Mark ndsenthe, pha chihém roshe shadeha

Shan phirenthe, gandaghen gin dosteha

Man dila zan ki maut thard neli ddnsara

Dodai dang bithen man bawren chadhara

Medh Machiya Hamzaha jori na be

Khosagha Rinda manavo maniya dare

Phuturen Rindan cho khutha baut phadha

Gohare hirani sara cho khutha Miren Chakura

Sammiya gokhani phadha Doda lura

Khoh sardema keharen mana lura

Sar wathi dathai garimen mal sara.

Translation.

Gahi son of Gorish sings; the Kaloi sings; in reply to Sobha he

sings.

Sweet-singing Relan bring hither the guitar of rejoicings ; bring into

my life the fresh breeze of the morning; strike powerfully with your

fingers, drive out grief from the bright (coloured) body. Do not frighten

1880.] BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 157

the heart with battle-array ; praise heroes! Thou hast sat in the assembly

with an ever sweet song of praise, and from our forefathers hast drawn

forth our tracks and legends.

After greeting: The chief is the day, battle is black night; after a

battle for men and horses there is no blessed day. ‘The glittering weapons

devour youthful warriors, and make populous forts empty of display.

Some youths boast with their mouths, “ We will be bold in the fight,” but

afterwards they turn their backs and are not in the company of the

storm-cloud of young heroes. And afterwards they sit and lament and

strike their heads and thighs with both hands.

At war’s alarm they wander to all the four quarters. Cowardly men

flee like wild asses, at mere sight (of a foe). The business of strong men

is to go to the battle-field: they give their hearts a push off (from the

shore) in the boat of confidence: they clothe their bright bodies in helmets

and armour: they drain cups of fiery spirits; with burning white brands

they fall upon the crowds, they wield their glittering blades to their own

fame; with their own Lord and Chief they become like a sweet odour.

Sweet-singing Relan, take away your guitar of rejoicings; give my

greeting to the poet Sobha, and say ‘ Hxamine the tracks of our Chiefs, and

see who was at Bompur. Know in your heart that you are not whole

brother to the Khosas. A venal awarder of victory, you will be burnt

with wood. Wretched man! They know that you have past a hundred

years, that you are either a fool or have abandoned your home. And in

that you cast scorn ab me regarding Bakar and Ramen, when was it that

you breame a Rind or a Lashari ?

For you were lost in the waves of the river’s flood, you were Mir

Chakar’s attendant for your (daily) evening food, while we, like mighty

Rinds, sought for glory and every day weighed our single seers against

maunds. I will explain things to your elephant’s brain. Come into the

battle-field, and, becoming a Simurgh, I will strike you down with my talons,

as in Sawan (the rains) the torrent sweeps away the men of Aro. You

bind on the new and fine pagri of other men; you are gasping in death,

when can you have any pleasure? You have cast away honour and made

yourself a friend of worthless life ; know in your heart that at last death

will not spare you. There was disgrace on your head in the matter of

Dodi. Medhs and Machis are not fit companions for Hamzah. You are

excluded from home and food with Khosas and Rinds. For how did the

true Rinds act with regard to refugees ? How did Mir Chakar act with

regard to Gohar’s young camels; and about Sammi’s cattle, how acted

Doda with the sword ? when, like a tiger on the mountain tops, sword in

hand, he gave up his life to protect the cattle of the poor.

158 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

N. B.—Doda here alluded to is Dodé Gorgez, a legendary hero, not the

Dodd Kaloi mentioned in the former poem.

Ill.—Sobha’s rejoinder, going over the legendary adventures of the Rinds,

and asking what share the Kalois took in them.

Sobha Thegh Ali gushi: Jarwaren Baloch gushi: Gahiyaé phasave

dath gushi.

Kadir nama har sawahé yad khanaz

Sag-sataren bandagi ardase mandz

Relani Lori biyd hadisani durr-gehaz

Saz-khane shagh& gwash Balochani nugdahan

Dadima nyddhe bithen go Sultani saran

Rind o Lashari ma buna brathan daima

Ma khutha Lashari Baloch khaptha pha shaghan

Mehna e zanki roth Panjgtra dehan

Kech Panjgtr kissavan gosh dar ki gushan

Ma hawan Rind tn, azh Halaba phadh-akhthaghin

Dubaran jangi go jaziza man-akhthaghin

Dem rosh-dsan sarind er-khapthaghin

Hamzai aulad sobh rastla bashkathagh-tn

Hari malhana rabi shah-daga khapthaghin

Unguri dasta thibare janga gipthaghin

Pha Karim saz kuzratan shodha gwasthaghin

Shahr Istambol go Imama wath charthaghtin

Ma Jaghina gwar Shams-din Shah Akhthaghin

Shoda Harina pha tura jangi khashthaghun

Unguri Kech Makurana bahr bithaghin

Shahr Sistana o khamana bahr bithaghin

Shedh pha dema ma Baloch tala bithaghtin.

Shedh pha dema tho wathi nashkan de manan :

Rind maz Kecha ; Kech than dema nishthaghe ?

Chil o chyar halkan ; go khai laddé gon-athe ?

Ni ki ladana khauri sarhadda akhthaghin

Las-Beld o Kalmatiya giwar-thaghin

Habb Barana pha muvarik she-bithaghtin

Phesha Nthani azh Naliya er-khapthaghant

Jistkani ma Gaj sihaf aehthaghant

Lak Salari Chandeh azh Kacha khapthghant

Rind Lashari Narmukh rej budithaghant

1880. | BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 158

Rinde Dhadara sarina er-khapthaghant

Lashar pha Gandavagh sardera bithaghant

Jalikan Lot tho khith4n jodn bahr athe P

Gind! nawdn Gabi tho radhiyé gon khapthaghe

Arna Harin basthaghen baldan gon athe

Tho hawan roshe be-mayari akithaghe

Sahib rosh zurthaghen, zaran arthaghe

Shera man-datha pha do-handé khard bithaghe

Zindagh o druaha man dighara sar-bithaghe

Phurse Gahiya, tho chi maskifi zindaghe

Wapthaghen mardani tafakhan go man gane?

Tho go dah logha akhtho baut bithaghe

Han miriyé pha baratan chari athe

Tapak daste Umar Ham bashkathaghe

Man dilé zan ki tho mazain shan mat niye

Tho raj dhan-e, 4n thai sultani sar-ant

Gwar mani mira akhtho baut bithaghe

Har chydr khundadn har hami Rajan dithaghe

Kumbhi gokhani shaghana mara jane

Khoh phish-buren, ambarani sifat khane

Gwashthaghin galan Gabi, tho saharal na be

Medhira randa zir pha Bomptra khayant

Manika halka hon avo lajjan rikhthaghant

Dan phadh-o-pheshi chedhaghi nashk oshtathaghant.

Translation.

Sobha son of Thegh ‘ Ali sings ; to the Jarwar Baloches he sings; in

answer to Gahi he sings.

Every morning I remember the Creator’s name, my trust is in the

service of God.

Come, minstrel Relan with your beautiful legends, play on your guitar,

chant the praises of the Baloches. You have ever been a dweller with

kings, Rinds and Lasharis from the first have ever been your brethren.

I who called the Lasharis Baloches am scorned by you. Know that

the scorn will travel to the country of Panjgttr. Attend, then, while I tell

you the stories of Kech and Panjgtr. We are those Rinds who arose

from Halab, and twice joined battle with the infidels. Setting our faces

to the rising sun, we descended from the west; we are Hamza’s offspring,

the Prophet gave us victory. Leading our strings of camels, we pursued

our way along the highroad. Coming in this direction we fought again,

and by the might of the Merciful we passed on thence, At the town of

160 SPECIMEN OF THE [Extra No.

Ista4mbol we rode with the Imam himself; In Jaghin we met with Shams-

u’d-din Shah.

_ Thence we rapidly drove out Harin in fight. Hither Kech and Makran

we distributed, we divided the cities of Sistan by khamans (7. e. bows, a

bow representing a man’s share). Henceforward we Baloches separated,

henceforward do you give me information about your track. The Rinds

were in Kech: in what part of Kech did you settle? There were forty-

four settlements: with which camp were you? Now when marching on

we arrived at the torrent boundary, at Las-Bela and Kalmati we separated,

and we settled in prosperity at Habb and Baran. First the Nuhanis

descended by the Nali pass. The Jutkanis came to the running water of

Gaj. The Chandehs descended from Kach by the Lak and Silari passes.

The Rinds and Lasharis pitched on the irrigated lands of Narmukh. The

Rinds descended from the west to Dhadar, the Lashdris came from above

down to Ganddva. In Jalikaén and Loi what streams did you share in ?

Look! Gahi, perhaps you were with us by mistake. Or perhaps when

Farin was defeated, you were among the captives. You came shamelessly

on that day, when, having robbed Sahib of life (lit. day), you earried off

his wealth. Having attained the low-lands you separated into two parties,

alive and well you lay down (hiding yourselves) on the ground. Ask (and

find out), O Gabi, in what disgrace you are living ; will you compare with us

the dreams of sleeping men? You came with ten wives (lit. houses) and

became a refugee, you posted yourself on the look out for our Khan’s

charities ; you received a gun as a gift from the hand of Umar Khan;

know in your heart that you are not worthy of great honour: You are

their chief, and he is overlord of your chieftainship, for you came to our

chief and became a refugee, and it was seen by all the chiefs in all four

directions. You taunt me about the cattle at Kumbhi? You are but a

cutter of phish on the hills. (Lhe leaves of the phish or Chamerops

vitchicana are cut to make matting.) You extol servants (not chiefs).

My song is sung Gahi, though you may not understand it. Take up the

tracks of the chiefs who came to Bomptr. In Manik’s village blood has

been shamefully shed, and formerly and lately cairns have been erected in

memory of the slain.

IV.—Gahi’s final answer, following up the Rind legend, and taunting

Sobha with cowardice.

Gahi Gorish guslu: Kaloien Baloch gushi: Sobhdr phasave dath

gushi,

Biya o Relan shadhihani

Shahghazi charavani

1880.]

BALOCH{ LANGUAGE.

Majlis jawanen sarant

Zir mani guftar-galan

Bar gwar jang-dosten syalan

Band-bozh galan dahena

Phasavan sar pha sarena

Gondalan seram manena

Bar dan Sobhaen nighoshi

Oli guftaranm shamoshi

Ziri randaé phirukegha

Bahr khant milka phithegha

Chi gushan man shairara

Dil-harifen sughardra

Khashi Rindani shaghana

Yad khan’ oli jihana

Gosh sobha mangihaéni

Daftari e Khosaghani

Rand zurthe Makurani

Rind Lashar dehani

Rind Lashari awara

Rafthaghant azh Kech shahra

Akhthaghant Harin malana

Mulk mitafa girana

Brath-yari bahr-khanana

Bithaghin bahr khamana

Ma ki Jatoi yagsar athiin

Sim joa pha-do athtin

Mulk shahra nemagh athin

Roz bahr pha thir-daran

Chyarakhe ma Dhadar athant

Serma ma Khanpur athant

Hand ma Rej deh athant

E mani pera o rand-en

Phuturen Rindani hand-en

Nam ma raja buland-ex

Agh thara itibar na-bitha

Khasa go chaman na-ditha

Khatte kuhne gwar niydthen

Gawah shahid kadh niyathen

Kissavani kissay-athant

Har-khase ’shi hanchosh-athant

Man sahiyan Sobha, kap kate

Ne pha rand perowate

161

162°

SPECIMEMS OF THE

Sov drapé Jawanakegha

Juifo jhata wathiya

Drogh bande zahiriya

Rast gushagh rast riwdh-en

Drogh pha imana khata-en

Ar pha guftare taiyar be

Shedh-dema gawahiya de,

Khatte mara khash phe-de,

Biya, azh shairan karar khan,

Oli Rinddn pha-phadha khan

Ninavakhta kissava khan

Surphadheni pha-gwara khan

Main hadisdn maz dilaé khan

Sobha khapthaghe azh drikh-balaa

Thai nighwari sher nalan

Sunya thai ‘ltivi dalan

Zurthiya janga maniya

Zulm-zora sahibiya

Phrushthagha be-ronaghiya

Zurthaghe mardan gihena

Chandeha juhl-khenaghena

Ringhan Bador yaran

Sanghar ladi mazaran

Shan hilalex khohistana !

Muhammad Han druh-gihana

Zeb Buzdara hilal-an

Shaddav o khes go khawdhan

Nind-nyadh gwar Umaradhan.

Hal kharthan hanskari

Gwar mani Sardar Hand

Gwar ma bauti ki Avhtha

Azh thai janga rahetha

Ringhan o Kandor Bador

Shango Sanghar daz Siriya

Band Bazen Bakhariyé

Raj athant siman dariya

Drust khakhthaghant whazh-diliya

Gwankh Leghar chariy4

Phurs, Sobha shairara

Sughar o lekhi wathara

Whazha ’shi mehdhirara

Whazha thai dem ma shustai

[ Extra No.

1880. | BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. 163

Lashkaran Jame ma khushtai

Shakula ber shamushte

Mangehi shair pha hisav-ant

Gal pha uzhmar o kitav-ant

Majlise ma meravan bant

Dan nighoshan nishthaghen sat

Akhthaghen baut ki khaxyant

Gird sardaran gihena

Dostant cho chhaman doena

Azh bachh-brathan bingoena.

Sh’4 pha biutan wathiya

Lajj neshtha pha-phadhiya

Bakhoen shwaéi mangeho shaz

Kadh na khant chho ma Balochaz

Akhthaghe lajjan wathiya

Khashthaghant gudr lavilan

Mal madi go galiman

Basth-kharthant main vakila

Azh thai kota garhena

Thai mehdhira dir-zanaghena

Ditha go chhaman doena

Gosh Sobha o niyazf

Esh mani guftar-bazi

Tho ki guftare kahitha

Man di pha goshan sunitha

Tupaka danga ganitha

Chi ma shana sar-akhtha ?

Phurse’ sardara wathiya

Jawanaka be-amilena

Bakhmal o bor go khawahan

Dathaghen main Umara Han

Han Balochana Nawava

Nukari bokAtha azh thana

Datha hoten Jawanakara

Pholathi oli ba-nindan

Bithaghe baut go Rindan

Khoh phish-buren nihengan’

Phish phara khoha shaghan nest.

Translation.

Gahi, son of Gorish, sings to the Kaloi Baloches: in answer to Sobha

he sings :

164 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Come, O Relax, to the assembly, king and hero of song; In this

assembly of young chiefs, take my speech and song, carry them to our war-

loving foes. With propriety utter these few (lit. ten) words, answers

given categorically, (head on head). They are arrows, of which a ser

weighs a maund. Take them to Sobha, that he may listen to them, and

forget his former songs. He will, he says, take up the track of our

ancestors, he will distribute the paternal inheritance ; what shall I say to

the poet, to the cunning poet? Let him give up mocking at the Rinds

and remember the former world. Say, O brave Sobha, you are the bard of

the Khosas ; you took up the track in Makran, the lands of the Rinds and

Lasharis.

The Rinds and Lasharis together set out from the city of Kech. They

marched upon Harin, taking the land of the country and dividing it

among the brotherhood. We divided it by bows (7. e. a share to every one

armed with a khamén or bow). We and the Jatois were united. At the

border stream we separated into two parts, town and country we divided

into halves, distributing our substance by arrow-stems. One-fourth were

in Dhadar, we got our satisfaction in Khanpur, our dwelling was in an

irrigated country. ‘This is our track and trace, the abode of the true Rinds,

a name exalted among chiefs. If you do not believe it, no one has seen it

with his eyes, there are no ancient documents forthcoming, there were no

witnesses to attest it, but there are tales upon tales, every one says that so

it was,

I am right, Sobha, you are blind and deaf, nor is your footprint to be

found on the track. Fear to speak of the victory of Jawanak, take your

bribe quickly, for you are manifestly inventing falsehoods. ‘To tell the

truth is the true custom; falsehood is a blot upon honour. If you are

ready with a song, henceforth give your evidence, bring forth and show me

your documents. Come! desist from any further poems, let alone the

Rinds of bygone days, and tell stories of the present times. Surround

yourself with men of understanding and lay to heart our traditions.

Sobha, you have past the time for leaping and flying, your youth is under

your feet, bare are the branches of your Tuba-tree. You were carried

away in battle with us, by the fury and force of our chief, you were

broken ingloriously.

You were defeated by brave men, by the deeply-hating Chandyas, by

our friends of the Rtinghan and Vidor torrents, by the mighty tigers of

Sanghar. Honour to the faithful hill-country, to the perfectly-brave

Muhammad Khan, jewel of the loyal Bozdars, with silken turbans and

garments, dwelling with Umar Khan.

A sure message I brought to our chief ‘Those who have taken refuge

with me, have ceased to be with youin war. {he Ringhan, Kandor and

1880.] BALOCHI LANGUAGE. 165

Vidor territories, from Sunghar to the Siri torrent, the Band Baz and

Bakhar, who were outside your chief’s territories, have all come of their own

accord and mount at the call of the Layharis.

Ask, O poet Sobha! reckon yourself up in your mind and call our

ehief ‘Lord.’ If our chief has not washed your face, then you did not kill

Lashkarén and Jim. Have you forgotten the revenge taken for Shakul ?

An account is kept of good poems, their words are enduring and are

written in books, they are recited in the assembly and they remain firm in

the (recollection of the) listeners. Whenever refugees have come or shall

come to worthy chiefs, they are dearer to them than their two eyes or than

young sons and brothers. You, for those who take refuge with you, have

not given up shameful conduct for the future. Where is your great

honour? No one does so among Baloches. You brought your disgrace

upon yourselves (by the way you acted towards the refugees), They

displayed anger and rage.

Their cattle and property had been seized by the enemy. Our vakil

(demanded them) and brought them back bound from your fort! Your

far-seeing chief saw with both his eyes then! Listen Sobha and attend.

. This is all my song. The song that you sang I also have heard with my

ears. Ihave counted your gun-barrels. What honour isleft to you? Ask

your own chief, the unworthy Jawanak. Velvet and chestnut mares and

silk did our chief Umar Khan give him. The Baloch Khans and Chiefs

unloosed their white mares from their stables and gave them to the valiant

Jawanak !

Ask of your forefathers how refugees fared with the Rinds. It is the

phish-cutters on the hills that are the tigers. There is no disgrace in cut-

ting phish on the hills,

VI.—A love-song.

(Said to be by Jam Durrak a Dombki, a celebrated poet who lived in

the reign of Nasir Khan of Kalat in the last half of the eighteenth century.

He is said to have undergone great persecution from the Khan on account

of his love for a lady of the zanana.)

O Samin be-phursa bihishtiye

Azh latifa nemagha khaiye

Man guld dema mail khuthe doshi

Bairamo dsi sér khutho matos

Bo azh brikhan vapthaghan whashen

Hijr mandn momin janant pasin

Cho kahirani draven asan

Be-karar-4n ma nemshali pasaz

166

SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

Pha whashi o dost hubbo iklasda

Zillatan sahsdre dede jana

‘ Nah’ na khanaz pha dost pharmana

Cho isparan dempan mani jane

Chabuk o chashm did paikane

Kahr amulani girgiren nazant

Dadame gar-ant dadame baz-ant

Nain dafa gir ki gal khanda roshex

Nain mandm kurzat mazal chosh-ex

Pha dafa mahlija di jan ayan

Nishtho dud go hawam roshe

Wa hudha merhan man dila shefi

Er-khafi dost azh thangaven thakhta

Bidi rodhana cho chyardahi mahan

Masaron bi cho Akbare Shahaz

Guda azh durr-chiren dafa phursaz

‘O badhashkani gran baha ldlez

Mara thai loghwaren saren saughan

Irmiri gon-khaptoz annagahi

Phar thai sahth sakalen nyadhan

Hon baha ban pha sakalen khulkan.’

Another Song by Jim Durrak.

Doshi dil-ravahen jani

Sartaj o samand khadani

Gwashthom pha dafi phandni

Os thau machar haivani

Gird-i aravan phirwani

Chandi ashkanra ziyant

Kulfo phrushthaghan shakani

Ishk 0 mani¢ha hakani

Gwashthom keghadhen sdizara

Durchino hazar nazara,

Phulkand o shakar guptard

O hal i fakire esh-an

Zirde azh phiradhan resh-an

An ki malik dozdar-an

An azh munkiran bezdr-an

Jam jamavan khaksar-an

Harzata darid kar-an

1880. ] BALOCHE LANGUAGE. 167

Shahen kirdagar 4sar-an

Gwatshe nem-shatam nal-an.

Translation.

_ The rain that un-asked for falls from Heaven comes from the direction

of the beloved one. Last I met a love face to face. The lightning springs

forth, it is my love that has awaked me. The scent of her locks has sweet-

ly seized me. ‘The pain of separation sharply stings me in the night-watches,

I spring up like the flame of Kahir-wood (Prosopis spicigera), I am with-

out rest in the midnight watches, for the sweetness of meeting with my

love. Give my body some breathing-space from pain, I will not say ‘No’

to my loves command, my body is asa shield stretched forth. Let my

eyes be gladdened by the sight of my fair one, let the pain caused by

my lady bea little appeased ; sometimes it disappears, sometimes it increases.

I cannot use my mouth to speak by day, I have no strength, she is so strong,

to come to meet and speak to her.

I sit and pray for that day: ‘O God, be merciful, and incline your

heart to me.’ Let my love come down from her golden throne, let her

come growing like the waxing moon on its fourteenth day, let her be in

front of me, and I shall be king Akbar. Then I shall ask from her pearly

mouth ‘O priceless ruby like the badhashk fruit, make me your husband,

bound by oath, my heart has been irrevocably taken possession of, I will

live for the sake of your jewel-like beauty, I will spend my blood for you,

fairest of beings.’

Second Song.

Last night I saw my heart-enchanting Jove, the crown and ornament

of women. I spoke to her with my lips and said ‘ Do not behave foolishly,

like the moth flying round a flame, O bane of many lovers.’ The locks of

hesitation are burst open, I have obeyed the call of true love. I said to

my beautiful love, ‘O fair one of a thousand wiles and sweet sugared speech,

this poor wretch ’s state is this, his heart is galled with his complaints,

he who is a chief and true friend is apart and averse from the avaricious.

The heart of Jam is covered with dust. It remains but to say bism/il-

lah in the divine presence, to remember the King and Creator, and to pray

through the cold midnight.

Riddles, Proverbs, §e.

The Baloches are very fond of riddles, which are always in rhyme.

They are of a primitive type and generally defy solution. The more

far-fetched they are, the more appreciated. Those first given are by

Brahim a Shambani who died about two years ago. He was celebrated

for his riddles as well as for more serious compositions.

168 SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No.

1. Bujhérat.—Ya shai jawain ulkaha asta

Duzhmaned resentha-ish khashtha

Banghava pahre rah sara gwastha

Go minnat merhan niyadh dasta

E bujharat Brahima bastha.

Bozh. Warnai.

Riddlie-—There was one good thing in the world; an enemy has pur-

sued and turned it out. In the morning watch it passed along the road.

Neither begging nor praying will bring it back again. Brahim composed

this riddle.

Answer.—Youth. (The enemy is old age.)

2, Bujharat.—Hudhai kurzat o kara

Zamin nestath o dighara

Be khishthaghen khishara

Hudhai kurzat o kara

Sabz o phul bahara

Pha phashagha di taiydra.

Riddle.—By God’s might and power

With neither ground nor soil

Without a field being ploughed

By God’s might and power

A green plant has flowered

And now its fruit is ripening.

Answer.—This was composed on seeing an ear of corn growing on the

beam across the mouth of a well.

3. Bujhérat.—Brahima pairi gwashthagha gale

Dithaghtn ’chie ranga be hale

Rangen kojha andaren ladle

Bozh.—Askhohe.

Riddle.—Last year Brahim said ‘TI saw something of an indescribable

sort. Its appearance was foul, but there was bright red within.

Answer.—A flint.

4, Bujhérat.—Ya shai jawain ulkahé yaka

Go jherave jangéz sadhbare sak&

Har-khase khaith, jathi wathi chaka

Man na gindani jagahe dhakka

Gosh dnb Sh4ra bozh wa hakka

Bozh.—Chhath.

Riddle —There is one good thing in the world, a thousand times

attacked with disputes and quarrels; every one comes and throws it over

1880.]

BALOGH LANGUAGE. 169

himself, yet I cannot see anywhere a sign of hurt. Let the wise ear at-

tened and guess it right.

Answer.—A well.

5. Bujhirat.—Ya drashke jorentha paken hudhaya

Ma zamin phushta pha jinden razaya

Bund yaken-i lamb-en duaya

Yake rekh bitha, yake sawaya

God has planted a tree, of itself it has grown up on the face of the

earth ; the root is one, the branches two; one is dust, the other ashes.

Answer.—The tree is mankind, the branches Musalmans and Hindis,

Talabi naukarant kharde ajab bhat

Kadam pha lekhav-ant-ish kar o khidmat

Hame fauj dhura be hathyar ex

Phithi phoshindaghan yak o tawar en

Hamodha lashkar khosh o khushar ex

A few servants of strange forms

They step by calculation on duty and service

They are an army bare and unarmed

Moving at the voice and call of other men

And there the army meet death and slaughter.

Answer.—The pieces at chess.

Nishtho dithom pha nadhar

An shahr be sah watan

Ahani adh jang o jadal

Nyaémji nawant yake digar,

Sitting I saw with my sight

A city and masterless country.

There was war and strife between them

And no umpire betwixt the one and the other.

Answer,—A game at chaupar.

Wilayat thars-en, dost bar-karar-en

Ravagha gohar kisinaken taiyar-en

Na rothi math, bachh ola sawar-en

Phith nesteni, phiruk haiydt-en

The country (in) fear, the mistress in comfort

]

The little sister ready to start

The mother will not move, the son is already mounted,

The father does not exist, the grandfather is alive.

170

Answer.

SPECIMENS OF THE [Extra No

The above contains a series of puns on the names of a family, partly,

in Sindhi. The name of the country Dadar contains in the last syllable

‘dar’ the allusion to fear. The name of the mistress Begam, read as ‘ be-

gham,’ is the equivalent of ‘bar-karar.’ The sister’s name is Hauri, the

mother’s Gauri, meaning in Sindhi light and heavy. The son’s name Shah-

sawar, the fathers Gaibi, and the grandfather’s Haiyat explain themselves.

9. Hudha pakko kuzraten banda palith

Rustl Muhammad ex ummatwali

Hazaren bandagh yaken thali

Chamodha khas no roth horg o khali

Hamodha giptho harchi di wartha-ish

Hama whan zurtho logha di artha-ish

Guda jatho bhorentho thali ujartha-ish

After an invocation to God and the prophet—

There are a thousand men to one dish,

No one goes thence empty-handed

There they take and eat everything

They take up the dish and carry it home,

And having thrown it down and broken it they leave it bare.

Answer.—This contains a pun on thali, which means the hedge round

a threshing-floor as well asadish. After every one has carried away the

corn he wants, the hedge also is torn down and carried away.

10. Danki shahd parwaren khaptha maz logh buna

Ni ki bandaghan razentha bitha pha husn o pharén

Wash hadith o khush lisan

Roth go phulex ambalan

As long as God had charge of him he Jay at home ;

Now that men have constructed him he has become fresh and fair.

With sweet discourse and pleasant speech

He walks about with his fair companions,

Answer.—A man with a wooden leg.

Pydlde phuren ditha majai

Nishthagha lalo nestathi dai

Pydlde wartho 1a] shahid bitha

Chonan ki kullen alima ditha

T saw a cup in a certain place

A bright one sat down without an attendant

This ruby like one drank up the cup, and then died

So that all men saw it.

1880.] BALOCH{ LANGUAGE. kale

Answer.—The flame of an oil-lamp which goes out after having drunk

up the oil.

12. Do gohdran ditha ambazi

Ajab khush ant gwar ambazi

Naini surata khami

Yake khor digar chami

I saw two sisters embracing

Very happy at the embrace

There is not the slightest difference in their appearance

One is blind and the other has eyes.

Answer.—The reflection in a mirror.

18, Phairi khakhtan pha gidhar

Man Bakri shahr gwara

Boli athi washen tawar

Dastdn gipthi nar-mazar.

Yesterday as I passed along the road

Tn the town of Bakkar

I heard a very sweet voice

But when I seized it, it was a fierce tiger.

Answer.—A snake.

14. Proverbial sayings.

Kahne litir o phiren zal

Warna sara sar-bar.

Old shoes and an old wife

Are the burden of a young man’s life.

Savzen cho hithen, charpi cho meshi dumbaghan.

As green as young corn, as fat as long-tailed sheep.

This saying refers to the Gwar or wild pistachio (Pistacia khinjuk)

Khatan sokhtha 4f4 phiki warth.

One burnt by hot milk will not drink even water without blowine on

it. 2

This corresponds with the Hindustani proverb ‘Didh ké jaly4 chanchh

hi piwat phink,’ or the English. ‘A burnt child dreads the fire,’

MaAla sar-dai vara dosh.

Let the cattle go and milk the hedge.

This answers to ‘ Penny wise and pound foolish,’

38, transpose

ERRATA.

, read } for 5

pronounced for pronouncd.

nyaénwan for nydnwan.

rasida for rastida.

nadhar for nadhya.

2, aay and jawarah after zik.

18, read phalo for phale.

limi, a ,, limita,

shakhd ,, shdkha.

marde_,,

marda.

kithan, than for kithan than.

biyar for riyar.

see it himsel

f for see himself.

nowhere hizhgarnen.

elsewhere thihanda,

25, read welcome for welceme.

phadh-agh for Padh-agh.

bili for ili.

line 8

oy) 33, ”

” 9, ”

” 40, ”

» 19,

”

” 29, ”

” 33, ”

” 8, ”

” 18, ”

» 89, 5

” 14, ”

”

” 20, ”

” 24, ”

” 7, ”

” 10-14, ”

” 16, ”

” 12, ”

” 34, ”

” 5,

amndm for

an— ”

leeward ,,

54 baki ,,

batera

baragh ,,

annam.

an—

lee-ward.

(ie baqi.

batera.

beragh.

10, Hele P. burd, Skr. bhri.

10, after “49,2 baroeth add ely,3 barwan, s. the eye-brow.

P. burd, Skr. bhra.

13, read panwar for panwar.

phashk ,, phaskk,

4, 3

21, add cf. Pashto jowal after to chew.

23, read oxen, mate for oxen mate.

27, add Pashto after joru.

9, ”

P » world,

25, read dagh for dagh.

tear ,, burst,

33, ”

Page 74, line 12,

85,

87,

93,

95,

98,

105,

108,

109,

110,

ats

114,

115,

117,

119,

124,

125,

127,

129,

20,

32,

13,

10,

13,

31,

16,

”

read Wid3S for W595

”

Errata.

daragh for daragh.

saras& ,, sara sa.

sumb ,, samb.

Maurorum for

sixtieth _

Mauroram.

sixth.

khambar. Kambar for khambar—kambar.

BS for oi f

giryan 5 girgan. F

after 64855 gwankh insert ¢ 4355 owdnech, a camel driver.

flesh » fiesh.

° a , « . Ze . , . .

after 2S eidnch insert GUS giydf, fertile, extensive.

read Salix for Salia.

”

maz ,, Mav.

man-deagh for

mahkani __,,

leap. M5

mahisk 5

lead neghd ,,

nikah 65

vakhta a

P. khwaja ,,

man-deagh.

mahkant.

leap !

mahish,

pleas neghar.

nekah.

vakhat.

P. khwaja.

6, after wl) whan insert Silay whantkdr, master, owner.

26, read cewlas for cathe

33, after (.4® haleni insert 442 himar, tender, delicate,

beautiful.

No,

No.

CONTENTS

OF THE

JOURNAL, Pr. For 1879.

1.—Rivett-Carnace, Prehistoric Remains in Central India.—

Rivett-Carnac. The Snake Symbol in India, especially in con-

nection with the worship of Sivaa—Pratapa Chandra Ghosha,

Note on the articles exhibited by Mr. Rivett-Carnac.—G rierson,

Some Further Notes on Kalidasa.

2.—Irvine, The Bangash Nawdbs of Farrukhabad—A Chronicle,

(17183—1857).—G rowse, The Sect of the Pran-nathis.

. 3.—Tem ple, Rough Notes on the Distribution of the Afghan Tribes

about Kandahar.—Brajandtha Bandyopadhyaya, Hamir

Rasa, or a History of Hamir, prince of Ranthambor.

4—Barbe, Pali Derivations in Burmese.—P eal, A peculiarity of

the river names in Asam and some of the adjoining countries.—

Growse, Bulandshahr Antiquities. —Rajendralala Mitra’s

Note to the above.—R odgers, Copper Coins of the old Maharajas

of Kashmir.—R odgers, The Copper Coins of the Sultans of Kash-

mir,—S mith, Observations on some Chandel Antiquities.

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XVII (1848

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to XXII-(1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XXVI,

XXVIT (1857, 1858), and Vols. XX XIII to XLVIII, (1864

to 1879).

Asiatic Researches, from Vols. VI to XI and Vols. XVII to XX,

GACH Abiste tsetse hooo O00 0.0

Dittodittos Ender? 4.4 0. ye Ais che, 0 Sues SE

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in Arabie, Bowciia- and Urdus bis Stat

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated into English; with notes and

indexes, by H. Blochmann, M. A.,.......++ Seipiaiele pone ohipiee

The Prosody ot the Persians.—By H. Blochmann, M. A,

The Tabaqat-i-Naciri. Translated by Major Ge -Raverty,

10 fasc.,

eocecereereee ore eee sccoeee e282 Pee eee see eo sss

Rs.

ASe

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

WINE EID

PART II. (NATURAL History, &c.)

(Nos. I ro IV.—1880.)

EDITED BY

JHE NATURAL fiisTORY pECRETARY,

eee

“Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science

in different parts of Asa, will commit their observations to writing, and send them to

the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such communications shall be long '

intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shall entirely cease.” SiR WM. JONES,

LS Oe eee

CAULICIU ITAA

PRINTED BY J. W. THOMAS, AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

7, PARK STREWT.

ASIATIC SOCINTY,

1880.

—_ ne ae

~) ,

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS,

_—o—

Page

Branrorp, H. F. ;—On the High Atmospheric Pressure of 1876-78 in

Asia and Australia in Relation to the Sun-spot Cycle, (Plate I.) 70

Brayvorp, W. T. ;—On a Species of Trochalopterum oe Tra-

vancore, see 142

;— Contr Supine to Tain atecolog No. saan Deven i

. tions of new Land and Fresh-water Shells from Southern and

Western India, Burmah, the Andaman Islands, Sc. (Plates IL

& III.) See ie abe oo son ASHE

———-— ; — Description of an Arvicola ee the Panjab Hima-

layas, 244

DE NICh’VILLE, TRON; and Nusa euerrs G. r Sh, Cuenas R. Dh

—Some new Species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera from the

Indian Region, 245

, and Woov-Mason, v. ;—List of Dana) Trend ope

tera from Port Blair, Andaman Islands, with Descriptions of

some new or little-known Species and ve new Species of Hestia

JSrom Burmah, (Plate XIII.) a 223

Gopwiy-AvstrEn, H. H. ;—Wotes on and De awings of the Liebiprls

of various Indian Land Mollusca (Pulmonifera), (Plates X

and XT)... no) | ARDIL

LyprKkKcer, R. ;—On the Ohaipnenc of the ‘Musk Deen im Tibet, 4

— ;—WNote on some Ladik Mammals, 6

;—A Sketch of the History of the Fossil Ver Ae ata of

India, tee 8

— ;—On the oot paetiens of the Bevel, or Blue.

Sheep, of Tibet, : 131

oe ;—NVotes on the Dentition FrIRiinocetos. elute VII). 135

ManrsHatt, G. F.L.,Carrart, R E., and pn Nicr’vinie, LIoNEL ;—

Some new Species of Bie lneeere Lepidoptera from the

Indian Region, or F

Nevitt, Gnuorrrey ; —New Species of Br Cobia ater Motants, 159

Preptrr, ALEXANDER ; —On the past and present Water supplies

of Calcutta, ... 85

Scuwrnpirr, Lours ;—Ona Smpledietedopustngan Thee Roe

Fraction of the Main Current produced by a Be Blectrie

Machine for Telegraph Purposes, ... ove S00 1

iv List of Contributors.

Page

ScuwkEnDLER, Lours;—On some Eaperiments instituted to supply a.

all the Lines terminating at the Caleutta Telegraph Office with

Currents tapped from the Main Current produced by a Dynamo-

electrie Machine, Mee ae ee lO

Tennant, J. F., Coronet, R. EK. ;— Account of the Verification of

some Standard Weights, with Considerations on Standard

Weights in General, Be 41

Woov-Mason, J. ;—Synopsis of the Specses of Ghoeradodiea a

remarkable Genus of Mantodea common to India and Tr op teal

America, ... 82

——_ ———_ ;— Deseription Ra new Spentee of Diur nil Lepidopiers a

belonging to the Genus Hebomoia, ... 134

—;—On anew Species of Papilio from South India, ee

Remarks on the Species allied thereto, (Plates VIII and IX). 144

; —Description of the Female of Hebomoia Roepstorfii, 150

;—On the Lepidopterous Genus Aimona, with the

Deser mine of a new Species, (part of Plate VI). 175

ad ;—Description of a new Papilio from the Ananda

Tatas, (part of Plate VI.) th 178

; Description of Parantirrhea Marshalli, the Type of

a new Cue and Species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera from

South India,.. wate f 948

—, Or idon NICEVILLE, Ticoners ;—List of Due nal Tepe

doptera fr om Port Blair, Andaman Islands with Descriptions of

some new or ittlewmoun Species and of a new Species of

Hestia from Burmah, (Plate XIII). ... A ja 9223

Date of issue of the different numbers of Journal, Part IT, 1880.

No. I.— Containing pp. 1—84, with Plate I, was issued on June

26th, 1880.

No. II.—Containing pp. 85—184, was issued on August 30th, 1880.

No. I1].—Containing pp. 185—180, with Plates VII—XI, was

issued on December 14th, 1880.

No. [V.—Containing pp. 181—250, with Plates II, III, VI and

XIII, was issued on March 7th, 1881.

SSE

Elst OR PleAT ES.

—(——

J. Annual Variation of Barometer and Sunspots.

ete t Indian, Burmese and Andaman Mollusca.

By t Not issued.

VI. New Papilio from the Andaman Islands, &e.

VII. Abnormal Dentition of Rhinoceros.

Te ‘ New Papilio from South India.

a ‘ The Indian Land Mollusca.

XII. Not issued.

XIII. New Species of Hestia from Burmah.

p: 4.

p. 24.

”

p. 63.

”

p. 69.

ERRATA AND ADDENDA.

—_—e-—

Bones of fishes from the Trias of Tibet referred to under the head “ Cretaceous,’

should have been mentioned in the preceding paragraph.

At the time of writing the notice of Siwalik Carnivoras I had not seen the

paper by Mr. Bose on that subject, * and consequently was not aware that Felis

grandicristata and Canis cautleyi are merely provisional species. It should

also have been mentioned in treating of the genus Ursus, that there is in the

collection of the Indian Museum, a canine-tooth from the Irawadi Siwa-

liks probably belonging to this genus.

In treating of the Pleistocene Proboscidia it should have been mentioned that

the first described teeth of Mastodon pandionis are said to have been obtained

in the Deccan by Col. Sykes.

Line 5 from top for duvancellii read duvaucellit.

After Lutra paleindica, there should be mentioned the probable occurrence of a

second Siwalik species.

The name Clift, in place of Falconer and Cautley, should be appended to

Mastodon latidens,

After the name Chalicotheciwm sivalense add (¥. and C.)

Line 8 from top ; after Megaloscelornis sivalensis (Lyd.) add S.

», 21 from top; after Colossochelys atlas (F. and C.) add §. I.

For EVO, + 0°4775 P.o, read EISO0, + 0°04775 P.9,

Pi =20:009947 —,,_-—« P= 009956.

Tine 22, for “‘resect’” ,, “result.”

ee op Py rs P., in one place.

” 28, ” W ” O

23, ” W, ” 0,

5», from bottom for “,” read —

Last line for “Sq” read “SG”

Last line ,, 0°64475 P.o; read 0 60475 P.93.

”

Tn the right side of each equation of condition on p. 464, a decimal point has been

substituted in each for a space of separation, and the differences have thus been made

to appear as decimals forming the right sides to the corresponding equations,

Thus in line 8,

Diff.

vecsegressseeee + 0'020194 R, = 0:275 R,

Should -read

Diff.

Desleneeenienses + 0'020194 R, =O 275 R,

*Q.J.G.S. Vol. XXXVI, p. 119.

ADDITIONAL ERRATA.

Page 182, line 27 from top, for Five read Two.

”

186, ,, 8from top, ,, “angulata-lunaris” read “ angulato-luna-

ris.”

» 53 2 from bottom, omit “it is figured here’’.

190, ,, 19 from top, for “ contingens” read “ contingentibus”’.

191, Hn: 24 and 26 from top and in footnote, for “ Situla” read

“ Sitala’’.

192, bottom line, for “ponsa’” read “ pansa’’.

216, line 4 from top, for “specimen” read “ specimens’’.

221, ,, 4 from top, for “Ihave described the species” read ‘I

have never described the species.”

The mistakes on pp. 182 and 221 are important.

NEW SERIES. VOL. XLIX. No. COXOGI.

IOUIAIN AT,

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Vol. XLIX, Part II, No. 1.1880.

EDITED BY

JHE NatuRaL fiisTORY PECRETARY.

eee

eee ses oe ¢ ,

«“ The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

) within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

man or produced by nature.’—Sir WILLIAM JoNnEs,

SEE

s * (Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretari ies, Asiat, Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon:

don, core of Messrs. Triibner amd Co., 57 Y 59, Ludgate Hill.

CALCUTTA: ‘

PRINTED BY le yw. J HOMAS, AT THE BAPTIST Mission PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

fSSIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1880. |

Btico (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—To Non-Subscribers, Rs. 2,

Price in England, 4 Shillings.

Issued June 26th, 1880.

CONTENTS.

I.—On «a Simpie Method of using an Insignificant Fraction of the

Main Ourrent produced by a Dynamo-Electrie Machine for

Telegraph Purposes.—By Lovis ScHwENDLER, M. Inst. C. E.,

GEC. eg oe Be ets wan nates ae cider Natt magn, ast cic eer meee Napa ea

Il.—On the Occurrence of the Musk-Deer in Tibet—By R

LYDEKKER, B. A.,

T1l.—Wote on some Ladak Mole ay R. pepe a ae

1V.—A Sketch of the History of the Fossil Vertebrata OF indies —

By R. Lypexcker, B. A...

V.—Account of the Verijeution. ap some Spe Wage Si

Considerations on Standard Weights in General—By Cot.

J. F. Tennant, R. E., F. BR. S., Master of Her Majesty's

AIG Sa ao RE eT at oR pe OE oa GUT n gre Bioges co

VI.—On the High Atmospheric Pressure of 1876-78 in Asia and

Australia in Relation to the NSun-spot Cycle.— By HENRY

¥. Buanrorp, Met. Rep. to the Govt. of India, (with Pl. 1),...

VIil.—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis, a remarkable Genus

of Mantodea common to India and Tropical America.—By -

J. Woov-Mason, Officiating Superintendent of the Indian

Museum, and Professor of Comparative Anatomy, Medical

College; Calouttase nS wisicr, cnc sitedso+ss+ ts nvadiae saae ee rare tie ee

Title-page and Index to Vol. XLVIII, 1879.

Page

JOURNAL

OF THE

Site oociel OF BENGAL.

Part II.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

eee

No. I.—1880O.

1.—On a Simple Method of using an insignificant Fraction of the Main

Ourrent produced by a Dynamo-Electric Machine for Telegraph Pur-

poses.—By Lovis ScuwrenpurrR, M. Insp. C. H. &e.

(Received 29th October ; read November dth, 1879.)

The currents which a dynamo-electric machine is able to generate

through a small external resistance, are so enormously strong and also so

constant and exceedingly cheap, that [ have always thought it would be

of technical as well as of economical importance to use them for signalling

purposes, The difficulty only was how to solve the problem practically.

Manifestly, the currents could not be produced through the telegraph lines,

in the ordinary manner of applying dynamo-electrie machines, for, in the

first place, telegraph lines offer high resistance, and, in the second place,

the use of the closed-circuit system would become imperative. However,

some time ago a very simple method occurred to me which appears to con-

tain the germs of practical success, and, having lately made some experi-

ments on the subject, I do not hesitate to communicate the result.

Suppose we have a dynamo-electric machine, the two terminals of

which are connected by a resistance 7 through which any kind of useful

work is to be performed by the current.

For instance, during the night, » may consist of an electric are, and the

useful work done by the current is given out as light for the signalling

office ; or during the day-time 7 may consist of another dynamo-electric

machine which acts as an ordinary electromagnetic engine, performing

2 L. Schwendler—Telegraphy with Fractional Currents. [No. 1,

some useful mechanical work, @. e., pulling the punkhas, lifting messages,

producing a draught of cool air, &c. ; or the current may be made to pass

through a galvanoplastic apparatus in connection perhaps with the Survey-

or General’s Office, &e.

Now connecting the negative pole* of such a dynamo-electric ma-

chine to earth, the positive pole to all the lines terminating in a telegraph

office, while the two poles are permanently connected by the resistance 7

through which the current produces the useful work above-mentioned, then

it will be clear, without demonstration, that all the lines so connected can

be provided with signalling currents (which are exceedingly weak as com-

pared with the strong main current) by simply tapping the main current,

and that without perceptibly reducing it, 7. e., without affecting the useful

work performed by the main current through *. Supposing that the useful

work performed by the main current repays all the expenses connected

with the erection and working of the dynamo-electric machine, then

obviously this would be a method which would supply the signalling currents

for nothing. This might be an inducement for telegraph-administrations to

introduce the electric light, since they would get the signalling currents

into the bargain, and the costly and cumbersome galvanic apparatus might

be dispensed with.

An example will show this more clearly. A Siemens dynamo-electric

machine of medium size can easily be made to produce through an

electric are a current of 30,000 milli-oerstedts, of which not more than

3 milli-oerstedts are required to work the Siemens’s polarized relay with

engineering safety. Suppose that the sent current is made equal to

twice the current which is required to arrive, we have the following caleu-

lation for Calcutta office :—14 long lines terminate at Calcutta, hence 14 x

6 = 84 milli-oerstedts would (as a maximum) have to be tapped off from

the main current of 30,000 milli-oerstedts. This represents a loss of only

0:28°/, which is so small that not even the most sensitive eye would be

able to detect any variation in the light.

Hence in this case we would feed the Telegraph lines with currents

which actually cost nothing, as the electric light alone would repay all

expenses.

During my recent light experiments in London, it was experimental-

ly established that the current in milli-oerstedts which a dynamo-electric

machine is able to produce, can be expressed as follows :—

o=2} = x 1000

* In India we use positive signalling currents.

1880. ] L. Schwendler—Zelegraphy with Fractional Currents. 3

Hand x are two constants for any dynamo-electric machine. HF is an

electromotive force in volts; «K is of such dimensions that v / x repre-

sents an electrical resistance ; m is the internal resistance of the dynamo-

electric machine; 7 is the external resistance through which the useful

work by the main current has to be performed.

mand r are to be expressed in ohms. ‘The resistance of the leading

wires has been supposed nd.

If we call R the resistance of a telegraph line, which we wish to feed

from the main current, then the signalling current passing into that line

when the main current is tapped would be

v 2

Or _f haan G a =) 3 1000 r

R+# r+ m SATA R+~r

and this current, in the case of the Indian lines, should not be less than 6

milli-oerstedts. Hence we have the following equation :—

( v Ni

rR tg Ge MOORS

r+ m Rr

from which 7 can be caleulated, smee H, x, m, v and R are known.

I need scarcely point out, that as R is invariably so large that 7 can

be neglected in comparison with it ; the current in one line only depends on

the resistance of that line, and not on the resistance of the other lines in con-

nection with the dynamo-electric machine. Hence the signalling through

one line is not influenced by the signalling on other lines; and in this re-

spect the method is on a par with signalling through different lines by

separate batteries.

We will take a special case.—For a Siemens’s medium machine, making

9 = 8, we have a main current of about 17,710 milli-oerstedts, and the

current passing into a line of 8000 resistance (800 miles of 54 wire) would

be 6:6 milli-oerstedts. Supposing that all the 14 lines at Calcutta office

are to be supplied with 6°6 milli-oerstedts each, the current carried off

would be 66 x 14 = 92:4 milli-oerstedts, or 0°5 °/, of the main current,

It is best to make all the lines equal in resistance by adding to the

shorter lines some artificial resistance. This measure would prevent a dead

earth (occurring on one of the lines and close to Calcutta) from having any

effect on the working of the other lines. In Europe, where the lines are

much shorter, the signalling currents supplied by a given dynamo-eleetric

machine, working through a given resistance 7, could be much greater than

66 milli-oerstedts.

4 R. Lydekker—On the Occurrence of the Musk-Deer in Tibet. (No. 1,

For any given R (resistance of the line) the currents can be increased

by selecting a dynamo-electric machine with the right internal resistance.

The advantages of the method appeared to me sufficiently great to

justify a practical trial :—

Experiment, October 11, 1879. With a Siemens’s dynamo-electric

machine (medium size) I produced a powerful electric light ; and between

the poles of the dynamo-electric machine I connected up four artificial

lines, each of 10,000 units resistance, with relays ranging between 500 to

1000 units. These four parallel circuits worked very well, singly and

simultaneously. No variation of the electric light during telegraphing

could be noticed, even when the line resistance was reduced to L000 units.

Further, the resistance of one line was increased to 20,000, and the

signalling currents were still sufficiently strong (1°6 milli-oerstedts).

Experiment, October 14,1879. Same as above ; but a branch current

was conveyed by the store-yard line (from the store-yard where the dynamo-

electric machine with its electric light was put up) to Calcutta signalling-

office (4 miles), and one of the Agra lines (850 miles in length) worked by

this current.

The sent current, measured at Calcutta, was 9°6 milli-oerstedts; the

received current, measured at Agra, 1°85. ‘The great loss was due to the

exceedingly low insulation of the line near Calcutta, It is now the break-

ing up of the monsoons, when the climate in lower Bengal represents almost

a hot vapour bath.

Several messages were sent to Agra, but no variation in the electric

light could be observed.

IIl.—On the Occurrence of the Musk-Deer in Tibet.

By R. Lypexxer, B. A.

(Received November 17th, 1879.)

Some degree of doubt seems, hitherto, to have prevailed among natura-

lists whether the Musk-Deer (JZoschus) occurs on the Tibetan plateau, or

whether it is confined to the wooded districts of the Alpine Himalaya.

Thus in a paper contributed by Mr. W. T. Blanford to the ‘ Proceedings

of the Zoological Society of London,’* the author says that he has grave

doubts whether the Musk-Deer occurs anywhere on the Tibetan plateau. In

a paper published by myself in the Society’s Journal,+ I mentioned that,

from having seen skins in Ladak, as well as from the fact of the Ladakis

* 1867, p. 634, t+ 1877, Pt. II, pp. 287-8.

1880.] BR. Lydekker—On the Oceurrence of the Musk-Deer in Tibet. 5

having a name for the animal, I was of opinion that the Musk-Deer must

occur somewhere in Tibet, though I had at that time no positive proofs to

offer. Lately, however, I have obtained such evidence as seems to leave

no doubt that this animal should be reckoned among the fauna of

Tibet.

Firstly, it will, I think, be generally admitted that the musk-pods of

the Musk-Deer are an important article of export from Tibet to India.*

Although this affords primd facie evidence that the Musk-Deer occurs in

Tibet, yet it might be objected that this musk was first taken from China

to Tibet, and thence exported through Nepal or Ladak to India; I, there-

fore, now proceed to bring forward the more direct proofs of the occur-

rence of the animal in Tibet proper.

The earliest evidence which I have to notice, is that of the great tra-

veller Marco Polo.+ That writer mentions the occurrence of the Musk-

Deer at a place which he calls Ergiul, which Colonel Yule locates to the

north of Tibet, and south of the great Gobi desert, in latitude 40°. From

Marco Polo’s description, there can be no doubt of the identity of the ani-

mal referred to with the Musk-Deer, though he commits the error of men-

tioning a pair of lower as well as upper tusks. Again, the same traveller

mentions the occurrence of the same animal in eastern Tibet, probably

somewhere near the longitude of Lhasa, and also that the Tibetans call

the animal Gureri.

A later traveller, Mr. Bogle, the envoy of Warren Hastings, describes§

most circumstantially the hunting and capture of a Musk-Deer (or, as he

ealls it, Musk-Goat) at Rinjaitzay, which is situated north of the Tsanpu

river near Shigatze in Tibet. Mr. Bogle describes the animal as being

hornless, coated with stiff hair, and with tusks depending from the upper

jaw of the male: he also mentious that the Tibetan Musk-Deer is of a

lighter colour than the Musk-Deer of Bhutan. This description leaves no

possible doubt as to the animal referred to.

General Cunningham|| mentions that the Musk-Deer (known to the

Ladakis as La) is found in Tibet as well as in Kashmir.

During the past summer, I met in Lahtl with a Tibetan who had

formerly occupied a high official position at Lhasa, and who informed me,

* Markham, ‘Tibet.’ Int. p. cxxii, p. 197.

Hodgson ‘Trade of Nepal.’

Cunningham. ‘ Ladak,’ p. 242.

+ Yule’s ‘Marco Polo, Vol. I, p. 267.

{ Yule, loc. cit., Vol. IT, p. 37.

§ Markham, loe. cit., p, 114,

|| Loc. cit., p. 202.

6 R. Lydekker—Note on some Ladak Mammats. [No. 1,

that the Musk-Deer was of common occurrence on the Tsdnpti river in the

neighbourhood of Lhasa.

Mr. W. H. Johnson, the Governor of Laddk, informs me that the

Musk-Deer is found in the country below and to the east of Lhasa, along

the course of the T'sanpt river. The musk brought from this district, Mr.

Johnson says, has wrongly acquired the name of Khoten musk; this seems

to have originated from the fact that when Khoten was a large Buddhist

city, and important trading place, the musk was carried there from Lhasa,

and thence to India. Mr. Johnson also observes that the Musk- Deer occurs

only where the birch tree grows.

The whole of this evidence taken together appears to me to afford

abundant evidence as to the occurrence of a species of Moschus in Tibet,

though I have no means of knowing whether it be the same as JL. moschi-

Serus. The Musk-Deer is of common occurrence in Bhitan, and it appears

to me to be probable that it extends north of that district in most of the

open countries up to Tibet, and thence across, or round, the Gobi desert into

Siberia.

The occurrence of the Musk-Deer far in on the Tibet plateau is a fact

of considerable importance, as it is the only instance of any of the large

mammals of the forest clad Alpine Himalaya extending its range into the

dry and desert regions to the north.

In my former paper, quoted above, I thought it probable that the

Musk-Deer occurred in Ladaik; this, however, I now find is not the case ;

I can find no evidence of the animal occurring anywhere in the upper Indus

valley.

III.—WNote on some Ladék Mammals.—By R. LypexKer, B. A.

Otter.—In his report on the Mammalia of the second Yarkand Mis-

sion* (p. 82), Mr. W. T. Blanford mentions that the late Dr. Stoliczka, in

his notes, referred to the occurrence of a small species of otter (Lutra)

in the Indus at Leh, but was unable to procure a specimen.

During the past summer I purchased at Leh a flat skin of an otter,

said to have been obtained from the Indus at Shushot, near Leh. This skin

is of very dark colour superiorly, and the length of the body-part is about 30

inches ; the tips of the hairs are paler. Unfortunately, neither the skull

nor the claws remain in my specimen, so that specific determination is quite

impossible. The skin, however, seems to be very like that of the European

* ‘Scientific Results of the Second Yarkand Expedition,’ Mammalia, by W. tT.

Blanford, Calcutta, 1879.

1880. } R. Lydekker—Wote on some Ladik Mammals. 7

otter (LZ. vulgaris), and the animal, therefore, may very possibly belong to

the same species as a skin obtained by Major Biddulph in Gilgit (? from

the Indus), and which Mr. Blanford, in the above-quoted note, thinks is

very like L. vulgaris.

T learn from Mr. Elias, the British Joint-Commissioner at Leh, that

otters are said to be of common occurrence at the bridge which spans

the Indus below Leh; these otters live in the stone-work piers of the

bridge. I may add that Mr. Elias has promised to endeavour to procure

a specimen of the skin and skull of one of these animals.

Dr. Stoliczka speaks of the Leh otter as being a small species; since,

however, he never procured a specimen, and as my specimen is a large skin,

it is probable that Stoliezka’s estimate of size was not exact.

Marmots.—I cannot quite agree with Mr. Blanford* in calling the

Red Marmot (Arctomys caudatus) the common marmot of Ladak, as it

appears to me that the species is only found on the outskirts of that region.

I have procured specimens of that species on the range between Kashmir and

Tilel (Kishenganga valley), on the pass between Tilel and Dras, and on both

sides of the Zoji-La, separating the latter place from Kashmir. I have,

however, never seen this species in the more interior parts of Ladak,

where it appears to me to be replaced by Arctomys himalayanus, or the

Yellow Marmot, which appears to me to be entitled to be called the

“Tadik Marmot” par excellence. I have seen or procured specimens of the

latter species, from the mountains above Khalchi, on the Indus; on the

pass separating the Markha river from the Gia river, to the south of Leh ;

and, still further south, on Kiang-Chu Maidan, in Rapsu; to the north

of the Indus in Ladik, on the Chang and Kai passes, forming the water-

shed of the Indus and Shyok rivers ; around the Pangong lake ; and in the

Chang-Chenmo valley. Arctomys caudatus seems to me to be confined to

the country on the confines of the rainless districts, while A. himalayanus

occurs only in the inner, and thoroughly Tibetan, districts.

In the field, the two species can be at once distinguished by their re-

spective cries. The ery of the Red Marmot is a peculiar long screaming

whistle of great shrillness: the Yellow Marmot on the other hand utters

a short chirping bark. It is not easy to convey an idea of the two sounds

to the reader, but when they have been once heard in the field, they never

can be mistaken for one another.

I should be much inclined to doubt the suggestion of Mr. Blanford+ that

the marmot said by Dr. Stoliczka to range up to a height of 17,000 feet

in Ladak is A. cawdatus ; 16 is much more likely to be A. himalayanus, which

I have killed above 18,000 feet ; the former I have never seen above 14,000

feet (Dras and 'Tilel pass).

* Loe, cit. p. 37. + Loe. cit. p. 39.

8 R. Lydekker—A Shetch of the [No. 1,

IV.—A Sketch of the History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India —

By R. Lypexxer, B. A.

(Received January 6th; read February 4th, 1880.)

As far as I am aware, there has not hitherto been written a complete

history of the whole Fossil Vertebrate Fauna of India, as far as it is at present

known to us, and I have, therefore, thought that it may interest many

members of this Society, as well as others, to know something of the extent

and affinities of this fauna, without the labour of wading through the

various works in which its history is recorded. The history of the Fossil

Vertebrata of India is, indeed, intimately connected with this ancient

Society, since some of the earliest workers in this branch of enquiry were

formerly among its members, and many of the results of their labours are.

to be found scattered through its earlier records. Pre-eminent among those

workers will always stand out the names of Baker, Durand, Cautley, Colvin,

Falconer, Hislop, M’Clelland, and Spilsbury. And it must always be

remembered, to their honour, that these workers in this most interesting

department of paleontology were solely amateurs, and that in their time

the study of vertebrate paleontology in this country was encumbered

with difficulties of which we, at the present day, can have no adequate

conception. The labours of Mr. Hislop were mainly expended in searching

the Gondwana rocks of the Central Provinces, from which he obtained

many interesting remains of reptiles, batrachians, and fishes; Col. Sykes’

collections were chiefly made among the fossil fishes of the Deccan ; while

the field of labour of the other workers lay mostly among the mammali-

ferous beds of Northern India, and the Narbada (Nerbudda) valley.

I very much regret to say that since these illustrious workers, no

amateurs in India seem to have entered upon this interesting field of

research, and during the five years which I have been upon the staff of the

Geological Survey of India, we have not, I believe, received, in the Indian

Museum, a single fragment of a fossil vertebrate from a non-professional

worker. It is partly in the hope that this paper may reach the eye of

amateurs interested in natural science, and especially of those who lead a

wandering life in India, and induce them to endeavour to collect specimens

of vertebrate fossils for the Indian Museum, that it has been penned.

Apart from members of the Geological Survey of India, to whom I shall

refer presently, there are other workers who, though not members of

this Society, have contributed largely to the history of the extinct verte-

1880. ] History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 9

brate life of India. Noticeable among these are the names of Buckland,

Crawfurd, and Clift. Crawfurd, on his return from his mission to the court

of Ava in 1826, brought back some Tertiary mammalian remains from the

valley of the Irawadi, which were among the first obtained in Asia by

Huropeans,and which were subsequently described by the late Mr. Clift in the

‘Transactions of the Geological Society of London.’* In the same volume

of the ‘ Transactions,’ a memoir was also published by the late Dr. Buckland

on the Ava bones. Another memoir also appeared in the same volume by

Mr. Pentland, on certain mammalian remains from the Siwaliks of Sylhet,

collected by Sir T. Colebrooke. As you are doubtless aware, the fossil

vertebrate fauna of the Siwaliks and the newer Narbadas, were subsequently

fully illustrated, and in part described, by our former illustrious associates,

Falconer and Cautley, the results of whose labours are abundantly dispersed

through our Society’s publications, and displayed in that now classic work

the ‘Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis.’

Dr. Charles Murchison, the editor of the ‘ Paleontological Memoirs’

of Dr. Falconer, has rendered one of the most important services to the

cause of vertebrate paleontology in this country, by collecting and publish-

ing the scattered notes and memoirs of that distinguished paleontologist.

Professors Owen and Huxley have contributed largely to our knowledge

of the fossil Reptilia and Batrachia of India; while the fossil fish have

been enriched either by the discoveries or the writings of Messrs. Egerton,

Miall, Sykes, and Walker.

A valuable memoir on the extinet Siwalik genus Stvatherium was

contributed to the ‘ Geological Magazine’ by Dr. Murie ; another on Bra-

matherium, by My. Bettington and Professor Owen, to the ‘ Journal of the

Royal Asiatic Society.’ A few Siwalik fossils collected by the Messrs.

Schlagintweit were described in the German ‘ Palwontographiea’ by the

late H. von Meyer. The late Dr. J. E. Gray also determined a few of

the Indian fossil reptiles. Professor A. Milne-Edwards determined some

Siwalik bird-bones. Some mammal-bones from the Tibet Tertiaries were

determined by Mr. Waterhouse.

Among the later contributors to our knowledge of the fossil verte-

brata of India must be mentioned Professor Riitimeyer, who has afforded

valuable information on the Siwalik ruminants in the British Museum ;

and Mr. P. N. Bose, who has described some of the fossil Siwalik Carnivora

in the same collection. Mr. Davies, of the British Museum, has also

contributed to the ‘Geological Magazine’ a valuable paper on Siwalik

birds. Professor Leith Adams has published some notes on Hlephas nama-

dicus in the Paleontographical Society’s publications.

The above names are only the chief among the workers in Indian

* Sor. 2, Vol. II.

10 R. Lydekker—aA Sketch of the [No. 1,

vertebrate paleontology who are unconnected with the Geological Survey

of India, Of the former or present officers of that department,

I must mention, among discoverers, the names of Messrs. W. T. and

H. F. Blanford, Fedden, Foote, Hacket, Hughes, Medlicott, Theobald,

Tween, and Wynne, and, among writers, Messrs. W. T. and H. F. Blanford,

Foote, Oldham, Stoliczka, Theobald, Waagen, and, lastly, myself.

Minor contributions, in the way both of specimens and papers, have

been made by other gentlemen, all of whose names it would be both tedi-

ous and difficult to bring together, but for whose exertions the workers

in this branch of enquiry have, none the less, good cause to be grateful.

Among these names I may mention, Bell, Dr. (Ichthyolite from Kach);

Blyth, E. (Siwalik Mammals) ; Burney, Col. (Ava Vertebrates); Burt,

Lieut. (Jamna Bones); Cantor, T. (Siwalik fish-skull); Carter, Dr. ;

Colebrooke, Sir T. (Tibet Tertiary Mammals) ; Dawe, W. (Tertiary Verte-

brates) ; Dean, E. (Jamna Mammals) ; Everest, Rev. R. (Siwalik Verte-

brates); Felix, Major, (Narbada Mammals); Foley, Capt. (Diodon from

Ramri Island) ; Frazer, Capt. (Narbada Mammals) ; Fulljames, Capt.

(Perim Mammals) ; Godwin-Austen, Col. (Siwalik Mammals) ; Gowan,

Major (Archegosawrus from Bijori) ; Hiigel, Baron (Perim Fossils) ; Ewer,

W. (Siwalik Vertebrates); Lush, Dr. (Perim Vertebrates); Ousely, Col.

(Narbada Mammals) ; Pepper, Miss (Perim Mammals) ; Phayre, Sir A.

(Ava Mammals); Prinsep, J. (Tertiary Mammals); Rivett-Carnac, H.

(Archegosaurus from Bijori) ; Royle, (Siwalik Mammals); Sim, Lieut.

(Archegosaurus from Bijori); Smith, Capt. E. (Jamna Mammals); Stra-

chey, Genl. (‘Tibet Tertiary Mammals); Trail, Dr. (Tibet Tertiary Mam-

mals) ; and Verchere, Dr. (Siwalik Mammals).

The extinct vertebrate fauna of India, with the noticeable exception

of the mammalian upper Tertiary fauna, is generally remarkable for its

extreme poverty; a poverty which may be due in some cases to the want

of adequate research, and in others to the small number of fossils preserved

in the different strata. Only here and there, in the great Gondwana

series of India—which, as far as regards its higher and fossiliferous part,

in serial position, in mineralogical composition, and in its fresh-water

character, seems to correspond very closely with the Trias-Jura of the

Connecticut valley in America,—do we find fossils locally abundant, as the

reptiles of the Panchet group, and the fish and reptiles of the Kota-

Maleri and neighbouring groups. With the exception of a few Cretaceous

reptiles, the fossils from the above-mentioned groups, which are really very

few, are the only representatives of the Pre-Tertiary land and fresh-water

vertebrate fauna of which we have any traces in India.

In place of the numerous and gigantic dinosaurs of the secondary lands

of Europe and America, we have in India only here and there a few bones,

1880. | History of the Fossil Vertebrata in India. 11

indicating the former existence of a small number of species; while of

the more specialized and bird-like dinosaurs of those countries, we have as

yet no trace in India; neither of the toothed birds, which present so

remarkable a feature in the secondary epoch of America, are there any

vestiges in India. The numerous species of the volant and toothed

pterodactyls of Hurope, and of their toothless representatives in America,

are also totally unknown from Indian strata.

Of the gigantic estuarine or marine saurians, so characteristic of the

secondaries of Kurope and America, Indian strata have hitherto only yielded

a few remains of a single Ichthyosaurus and Plesiosawrus. Of the lower

batrachians, only a few species are known from the (probably) Triassic

rocks of India, and the great number of species so characteristic of the

Carboniferous and Trias of Europe are almost totally unrepresented in this

country. The marine fish fauna is likewise remarkable for its general

poverty.*

It must, however, be observed that many of the vertebrates which do

occur are only known by a single skull, or a tooth, or a few bones or

scutes, and it, therefore, seems probable that many other species must have

left similarly scattered remains through the strata of India, which from

their extremely local distribution have hitherto escaped detection.

No distinctly recognizable traces of mammals have been as yet de-

tected in India below the Nummulitic rocks, and in the latter only by a

few generically undeterminable bones; indeed, we meet with no well-

developed mammalian fauna till the period of the Upper Miocene and

Lower Pliocene, when we suddenly come upon the evidence of the former

existence of a vast and varied fauna which is, probably as numerically

abundant in its species and genera as any known fossil fauna in the world.

Previous to the Tertiary, the whole history of mammalian life in India

is a complete blank. The bird-fauna of India, with a few exceptions, ‘is

almost totally unknown previously to the present epoch.

The above remarks have an important negative bearing on evolution.

We know that the greater part of the peninsula of India has existed as land

for an inealeulable period of geological time,—at all events from the Triassic

epoch, and we further know that in other regions mammals have existed on

the globe since the Triassic, and birds since the Jurassic, period. As regards

the above two groups of vertebrates, India throws not a single ray of light

on their origin. We have not a trace of any one of the curious generalized

forms of the Eocene mammals of North America in the strata of India,

and yet we cannot think that ancient India was almost without mam-

malian life till the upper Miocene. It is indeed probable that the lost

* Marine rocks are absent over most parts of peninsular India, though present in

force in Trichinopoli, Kach, Sind, and the Himalaya.

12 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No 1,

mammals of Secondary and early Tertiary India may have filled many a

puzzling gap in the animal series.

It isthe same with the reptiles, which were doubtless the dominant forms

during the epoch of the Trias-Jura, and which have only here and there

left a trace of their former existence in this country. Why may not many

forms of those half-birds, half-reptiles have inhabited Secondary India of whose

existence we have ample proofs in other countries; and why may not many of

such Indian forms have still more closely bridged the gap which even yet exists

between birds and reptiles ? Great and numerous as are the advancements

in uniting the scattered links of the broken chain of vertebrate evolution,

it must ever be borne in mind that, while we have evidence of a large Secon-

dary land-surface like India, which has hitherto yielded scarcely any links

to this wondrous chain, we must never despair if we find that other coun-

tries are still of themselves unable to make the chain extend across all the

gaps, owing to the want of a few links. Who shall say that such missing

links never inhabited Secondary India, where their remains either still lie

buried, or have been for ever lost beyond recovery ? I, indeed, imagine that

early India must have teemed with reptiles, and perhaps with higher forms

of lite, for it is inconceivable that this country was once mainly a mere

forest of plants, of the existence of which we have such ample evidence in the

Trias-Jura, unenlivened, except in one or two small spots, by vertebrate life.

I now proceed to sketch what is known of the fossil vertebrates of

India, commencing with the lowest class, and tracing it through the various

formations from the lowest in which it occurs to the highest ; and similarly

with the higher classes. I must premise that very many of the Indian

“fossil vertebrates are only known by extremely scanty remains, and that

their affinities are consequently obscure. Of others, again, only very slight

preliminary descriptions, without figures, have yet been published, and con-

sequently foreign palxontologists have not yet had the opportunity of

comparing them with other species, by which their affinities might be

more fully illustrated.

Fosstn Frsuus.

Carboniferous.—The earliest fishes of which we have at present any

record in India are only known by some few teeth and fin-spines, collected by

Dr. Waagen and Mr. Wynne of the Geological Survey, in the Salt-Range of

the Punjab, and described by the former writer in the ‘ Paleontologia Indi-

ca.’* These fish remains were obtained from strata termed by Dr. Waagen

the “ Productus-Limestone,” corresponding in the main to the Carbonife-

rous. Sigmodus dubius is a fish belonging to a new genus founded upon

a single tooth ; this tooth is of an elongated conical form, and much resem-

* Ser. XIIT, parts 1 and 2, 1879-80; the latter part in the press. .

1880. | History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 13

bles the teeth of some saurians; it is referred by Dr. Waagen to the

ganoids. Another tooth, referred provisionally by Dr. Waagen to the genus

Poecilodus, under the name of P. paradoxus, is of the flattened cestraciont

type. Psephodus indicus is a species formed upon the evidence of another

tooth. Both these genera belong to the Cochliodontide, which Dr. Waagen

classes among the Dipnoi, though they are more generally referred to the

Elasmobranchii. Of the undoubted Elasmobranchii (Selachii), Dr. Waagen

describes four species, belonging to three genera, from teeth, and four

species, belonging to two genera, from fin-spines (ichthyodorulites). Of

the teeth, two are referred to a genus (Helodopsis) allied to Helodus,

under the names of H. elongata and H. abbreviata. A fragment of a

tooth is referred, without specific determination, to the European genus

Psanmodus, characteristic of the Carboniferous. A fourth tooth is refer-

red to the European genus Petalorhyncus, with the specific name of P.

indicus: it is extremely doubtful whether Petalorhynchus is really distinct

from Petalodws of the Carboniferous. Of the spines, or “ ichthyodoru-

lites,” three specimens are referred to the American Carboniferous genus

AXystracanthus, under the names of X. gracilis and X. major and X. gigan-

teus. If I rightly understand Dr. Waagen’s notes, he thinks it possible

that these spines may belong to Helodopsis. A third spine is referred

to a new genus under the name of Lhaumatacanthus blanfordi.

As far as the evidence of these fishes goes, we find that the cestraciont-

toothed sharks were the dominant forms in the Indian, as well as in the

European and American Carboniferous.

Trias-Jura.—In the upper part of the great Gondwana system of In-

dia, which, as I have said, probably corresponds as a whole to the Trias-

Jura of other countries, remains of fishes have been found in some abun-

dance, all of which, as far as determined, are of fresh-water types, and belong

to the Ganoidei and Dipnoi, no traces of the more modern Teleostei having

yet been found in these rocks. The earliest groups of rocks in the

Gondwana system in which fish remains have been detected are the Mangli

and Sripermattir groups; but these remains have not yet been even generi-

eally identified. In the Kota-Maleri* group there occur nine species

of Ganoids and three of Dipnoi; the former from the Kota beds have been

described under the genera Dapedius, Lepidotus,and Tetragonolepis by Messrs.

Egerton and Sykes ;+ many of them show Liassic affinities: the three genera

* Mr. King has lately shown a distinction between the Kota and Maleri beds ;

confirming the original distinction as to the Liassic affinities of the fossils of the former,

and the Rheto-triassic of those of the latter.

+ Quar. Jour. Geol, Soc, of London, Vols, VII, IX, X. Paleontologia Indica,

Ser. LV, part 2.

14 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [Now 1,

have a united range in Europe from the Lias to the Eocene: Lepidotus is very

characteristic of the Wealden of England. Of the Maleri Dipnoi, teeth of four

species of the living Queensland genus Ovratodus were named by the late

Dr. Oldham, three of which have lately been figured by Professor Miall,*

who does not admit the fourth species, C. oblongus.

Cretaceous.—A few fish-remains have been obtained from the Lameta

rocks (of middle Cretaceous age), but are not yet determined. The next group

of rocks in which fish-remains have been obtained are the upper and middle

Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoli; these remains have been described by the

late Dr. Stoliczkat and Sir Philip Egerton.{ They comprehend seventeen

species of elas nobranchs, ranged under the genera Corax, Enchodus, Lamna,

Odontaspis, Otodus, Oxyrhina, Ptychodus, and Spherodus, and one ganoid

doubtfully referred to Pycnodus. No Teleostei have been described, which is

very probably owing to the less facility with which their remains are pre-

served ; it being almost certain that they must have been represented in the

Indian Cretaceous seas. The above-named genera are mainly characteristic of

the Cretaceous rocks of Europe: two species are common to Europe and

India. Bones, apparently of fishes, have been lately obtained by Mr. Gries-

bach from the Trias of Tibet. Mr. Griesbach tells me that these bones

are not uncommon in the Trias limestone, but that he has not yet been

able to extract any specimens in a determinable condition.

Eocene.—From the probably Nummulitic rocks of Port Blair, in the

Andamans, and Raémri Island, off the Arakan coast, there have been obtain-

ed the oral teeth of a large species of Diodon, which I have lately provi-

sionally called Diodon foleyi, after Captain Foley, the discoverer of the

Ramri Island specimen.§ The living Diodon hystrix is now abundant off

the coasts of the Andamans and Arakan, where the genus has doubtless

lived since the Eocene. From Nummulitic rocks in the neighbourhood of

Thyatmyo, cycloid fish-scales have been obtained,|| but are not generically

determined.

From the Nummulities of the Punjab, some fish-scales and the dental

plate of a species of ray (Myliobatis) have been obtained by Mr. Wynne.4

From strata immediately overlying the Nummulitics of Kohat, Mr. Wynne

has obtained the incisor of a sparoid fish belonging to the genus Capitodus,

which has been recently described by myself as C. indicus ;** the genus

* Palwontologia Indica, Ser. IV, part 2.

+ Ibid., Cretaceous Fauna of S. India, Vol. IV.

{ Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lon. Vol. VII.

§ R. G.S. I. Vol. XIII, part I.

|| Manual of Geology of India, p, 716,

4 RB. G. 8. I. Vol. X, p. 43.

** Tbid. Vol, XIII, part I,

1880. | History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 15

Capitodus was previously only known from the Miocene of Vienna and

Silesia, and is allied to the living genus Sargus.

Mio-Pliocene.—FK rom the Siwalik rocks there were, I believe, a consi-

derable number of fish-remains procured by Falconer and Cautley, but these

were never described: the collection of fossil fish-remains from the Siwaliks

in the Indian Museum is but small. Among the Teleostei, we have the

siluroids represented by a very perfect skull, originally described in the

Society’s Journal* by Dr. Cantor as the skull of a huge frog: subsequent-

ly this skull was referred by M’Clelland+ to the siluroid fishes. The lat-

ter writer describes the skull as being remarkable for its great breadth, and

as carrying teeth on the jaws, but not on the palate: M’Clelland also

thought that the skull might belong to a species of Pimelodus : this deter-

mination is, I think, certainly erroneous, because the latter genus, with one

African exception, is entirely West Indian, and it is unlikely that a fresh-water

genus of fishes should be found in the Pliocene of India, and now only in Africa

and the West Indies. Many of the living Indian siluroids (Clarius, Hetero-

branchus, Siiurus, Silurichthys) have palatal teeth, and the fossil cannot,

therefore, belong to any of those genera. The Indian genus Ohaca, on the

other hand, is characterized, according to Dr. Giinther,{ by its exceedingly

broad and depressed head, and absence of palatal teeth, and I think, therefore,

it is not improbable that the fossil may belong to that genus, though, in the

absence of specimens for comparison, I cannot be sure. Detached vertebrae,

from the Siwaliks, also indicate the existence of teleostean and, probably,

fresh water fishes, but of what group is uncertain. Of the Hlasmobranchii,

a few teeth indicate the former existence of a Siwalik Lamna, which proba-

bly inhabited the larger rivers: a single tooth from the mammaliferous beds

of the Irawadi belongs to a species of Carcharias, and large squaline vertebrae

have been obtained from Perim Island. From the Siwaliks of Sind and

the Punjab, we have some crushing palatal teeth of an undescribed fish,

which I have lately sent home for determination.

Seales of teleostean fishes have been obtained by Col. Godwin-Austen

from the Tertiaries or post-Tertiaries of Kashmir; they are not, however,

determined.

The above notes indicate the extreme poverty of the fossil fish-fauna

of India—a poverty, I think, in great part due to the want of suflicient

search,

* Vol. VI, p. 583.

t+ Cale. Jour. Nat. Hist. Vol. IV, p. 83.

$ Brit. Mus. Cat. of Fishes, Vol. V, p. 29,

16 R_ Lydekker—A Shetch of the [No. 1,

Fossin BatracHIANs.

Trias-Jura.—We now come to the history of the fossil Batrachia

(Amphibia), where we shall find an equal poverty of species and genera; such

as are known being merely, in all probability, a few relics left from a large

fauna. The oldest Indian batrachians, like their European and American

contemporaries, belong to the labyrinthodont order, characterized by the

peculiarly infolded structure of their teeth. The oldest form of the order

in India is only known from an undescribed skeleton obtained from a group

of the Gondwana system at Bijori, hence named by Mr. Medlicott the

Bijori group.* This skull was originally exhibited before our Society in

1864, and commented upon by Mr. H. F. Blanford, who thought that it

should be referred either to Archegosaurus or Labyrinthodon,+ adducing some

evidence to shew that it belonged to the former genus. Subsequently, the

specimen was alluded to as a true Archegosaurus by the late Dr. Oldham,

and still later by Mr. Medlicott.§ I cannot discover what has become of

this most interesting fossil, which is certainly not in the collection of the

Indian Museum, where it is only represented by a cast. Judging from this

east, I think it not improbable that the specimen really does belong to

Archegosaurus : it much resembles a skull of that genus from the European

Carboniferous figured by H. von Meyer.|| The European species being from

the Carboniferous rocks does not at all preclude the Indian species from being

of Triassic age, since there is considerable difference in the range in time of

the Pre-Tertiary land faunas and floras of the two countries ; genera having

very frequently survived to a later period in India than in Europe.

From the Panchet group of the Gondwanas, we have two labyrintho-

donts, to which the generie names Pachygonia and Gonioglyptus have

been applied by Professor Huxley ;4| these genera are only known by frag-

mentary skulls and jaws; they were slender-jawed forms and allied to the

labyrinthodonts of the Keuper. They are classed by Professor Miall in

the group Euglypta with Mastodonsaurus and Capitosaurus. The fossils on

which the two above-named Indian genera were founded are in the collection

of the Indian Museum. From the nearly contemporaneous Mangli group, we

have another labyrinthodont, Brachyops laticeps of Owen, also belonging

to a genus otherwise unknown, and allied to European Jurassic, and African

* M.G.S. 1. Vol. X, p. 159, (art. IT, 27.)

+ J. A.S. B., Vol. X XXIII, p. 337.

if RuG. S.L Vol. wep. 70:

§ Loe. cit.

|| Paleeontographica, Vol. VI, pl. XI, fig. 5.

9 Pal. Ind, Ser. LV. part 1.

1880. ] Tistory of the Fossil Vertelrata of India. 17

and Australian (probably) Triassic forms. The skull on which the genus is

founded was described by Professor Owen.* The European Jurassic genus

to which it is allied is Rhinosawrus, the African (Triassic ?), Micropholis,

and the Australian, Bothriceps; the genus seems to me to be also closely

alhed to Duditanus radiatus of the American Carboniferous. Brachyops

belongs to the short-jawed group of labyrinthodonts; and, with the first

three above-mentioned genera, constitutes the group “ Brachyopina’’ of

Professor Miall. The skull of Brachyops is, I believe, in the collection of

the Geological Society of London: it is represented by a plaster cast in the

Indian Museum.

Tertiary.—¥ rom the Trias to the Tertiary is a long leap, but hitherto

no batrachian remains have been found in India between these two forma-

tions. In the lower Tertiaries of the island of Bombay, there occur a large

number of the remains of frogs belonging, apparently, to two species, ‘The

smaller of these two species was first described by Professor Owen? under

the name of Rana pusilla ; subsequently, however, Dr. Stohezka,t from

the absence of vomerine teeth and from the structure of the limbs, referred

the species to the genus Oxyglossus, at the present time living in China and

Siam, and, possibly, in India. A larger frog from the same beds, noticed by

Professor Owen in the same paper, has not yet been generically determined.

I believe that these Bombay frogs are the oldest representatives of the

group.

Fossin Reprives.

Trias-Jwra.—The oldest members of the class Reptilia hitherto found

in India belong to the orders Dinosauria and Dicynodontia (Anomodontia),

and occur in the presumably Triassic rocks of Panchet near Réniganj, in

the horizon known as the “ Panchet group” The Dicynodon was origin-

ally described by Professor Huxley§ under the name of D. orientulis ;

additional remains have subsequently been described by myself,

| which

show that this species belonged to the sub-genus Péychognathus of Profes-

sor Owen. Other remains noticed in the latter memoir, seem to indicate

the former existence of a second and larger species of Dicynodon. This

eroup of reptiles seems, on the whole, to be characteristic of the Trias of

India, Russia, and Africa. ‘The dinosaur has been named Ankistrodon

indicus by Professor Huxley,4) and is the only known represeutative of the

HQ de Gisela. Oly Solas oie

+ Ibid. Vol. V, p. 173.

+ M. G.S.I. Vol. VI, p. 387.

§ Pal. Ind. Ser, TV, Vol. I, part I.

|| Lbid. part 3.

{| Loc. cit.

18 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the ™ (aNowne

genus. The teeth of Ankistrodon, of which only two are known, have

laterally compressed crowns, with serrated edges, like those of the dino-

saurian Jegalosaurus and the mammalian JZacherodus, and are implanted

in distinct sockets. The genus is allied to the Jurassic and Cretaceous

Megalosawrus, and to various Triassic genera.

From the Denwa group of the Gondwana system, a large crocodilian

scute has been obtained by Mr. Hughes,* which seems to belong to Pro-

fessor Huxley’s undescribed genus Parasuchus.

From the neighbouring Kota-Maleri group, we have the crocodilian

Parasuchus and the lacertian Hyperodapedon. The genus Parasuchus

has never been described, but only incidentally alluded to by Professor

Husxley+; it was formed for the Kota-Maleri bones: it seems to have been

closely allied to the Triassic Belodon and Stagonolepis. On labels attach-

ed to the bones of Parasuchus, now in the Indian Museum, there occurs

the specific name of his/opii, in Professor Huxley’s handwriting. Hypero-

dapedont, is closely allied to the living genus Hatteria (Sphenodon), represen-

ted by two species in the New Zealand Islands, and, according to Professor

Huxley, to the Triassic Rhynchosaurus, though this is doubted by Professor

Owen,

From the undoubtedly Jurassic rocks of Kach (Cachh), there has been

obtained (Chari group) a vertebra which I think very probably belongs to

Parasuchus, though I cannot be certain ;§ and (Umia group) a fragment

of a lower jaw of a Plestosaurus, which I have named P. zndicus :|| the

specific affinities of the latter cannot be fully determined from the

fragment.

Cretaceous.—F rom the Cretaceous rocks of India, we have, among the

Dinosauria, a species of Megalosaurus, certainly from the Trichinopolli,

and probably from the Lameta rocks (middle Cretaceous) ;§ this genus is

only known in India by detached teeth; in Europe, it ranges from the

Jurassic to the lower Cretaceous (Wealden). From the Lameta rocks, there

have also been obtained the remains of another gigantic genus of dinosaur,

allied to the Wealden Pelorosaurus and the Jurassic Cefiosaurus, which I

have named, from the great size of the bones, Titanosawrus ;** from the evi-

dence of the vertebrz, there appear to have been two species, 7. indicus and T.

* Pal. Ind. Ser. IV. part 3.

+Q.J3.G.S.L. Vol. XXVI, p. 49, XXXI, p. 427.

{ Ibid. XXV, p. 151.

§ R.G.S. I. Vol. X, p. 35.

|| Pal. Ind. Ser. LV, part 3.

4 Ibid,

** Jbid.

1880. | History of the Hossil Vertebrata of India. 19

blanfordi. Titanosawrus was a gigantic and, probably, land reptile, but whe-

ther bipedal or quadrupedal is not known. Remains of another, but much

smaller, reptile have been also obtained by Mr. Hughes from the Lameta

rocks ; the remains are, however, not sufficient for generic determination,

but I think it not impossible that they may have belonged to a dinosaur.

Of the Cretaceous Crocodilia, we only know of one species by some

amphicoelian vertebra and scutes obtained by Mr. W. T. Blanford from

the upper Cretaceous rocks of Sind.* As far as I can judge, from these

imperfect remains, they appear to indicate an animal allied to Suchosaurus

of the Wealden of England.

The Chelonia are only known to have existed in India during the Ore-

taceous period by the evidence of some broken plates, in the collection of the

Indian Museum, obtained from the Lameta group, from the intra-Trappeans

of Rajamahendri (Rajamundry), and from the upper Cretaceous rocks of

Sind. These remains are in far too imperfect condition for even generic

determination.

A large species of Ichthyosaurus, which I have called L. indieus,+ is

known solely by a few vertebre collected by Mr. Foote in the middle

Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoli. JIchthyosawrus, in England, ranges from

the Lias to the Chalk.

Hocene.—The only specifically known Hocene Indian reptile with which

I am acquainted, has been referred by the late Dr. Gray to the genus

Hydraspis belonging to the family Hmydide. The specimen on which the

determination rests is a carapace, from the intra-Trappean rocks of Bombay,

originally named by Mr. Carter Lestudo leithit. The genus Hydraspis is

now found living exclusively in Tropical America. From the Nummulities

of the Punjab, remains of Crocodilia have been obtained by Messrs. Theo-

bald and Wynne, of the Geological Survey, but are not generically deter-

mined.

Mio-Pliocene and Pleistocene.—From the Mio-Pliocene Siwaliks and

from the Pleistocene Narbadas, a considerable number of reptilian remains

have been obtained, but, in many cases, have not yet been described.

Remains of Crocodilia have been obtained in considerable numbers from

the Sub-Himalayan Siwaliks and from the corresponding rocks of Burma,

Perim Island, and Sind; and many of them have been named by Falconer.

Of the genus Crocodilus, a Siwalik species has been identified with the

living ©. palustris (bombifrons, Gray).§ Remains of a crocodilian have

* Pal. Ind. Ser. IV. part 3.

+ Ibid.

~ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. IV, Vol. VIII, p. 339.

§ Cat. Foss. Vert, A. 5S, B. p. 200. The cranium there named @. paleindicus seems

to belong to C. palustris.

20 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

also been obtained from the TIrawadi and the Narbada, but their speci-

fic determination is difficult. .Of the genus Gharialis (Leptorhynchus),

one Siwalik species has been identified with the living G. gangeticus; a

gharial from the Manchhars of Sind also belongs to this species. Ano-

ther long-jawed Siwalik crocodile with slender teeth has been named

Ghirialis leptodus; and another with much shorter jaws and teeth, G.

crassidens; the latter has been obtained from the Siwaliks and from

Sind.

Of the order Lacertilia, only one Siwalik representative is known, be-

longing to the genus Varanus, and named by Falconer V. sivalensis.*

This determination was made on the evidence of a distal extremity of the

humerus, now in the British Museum.

The Ophidia are only known by some vertebrae, much like those of the

genus Python, obtained from the Siwaliks of the Punjab and Sind: these

vertebree have not yet been generically determined.

The Chelonia are known by a considerable number of Siwalik, and two

Narbada, species. Of the land tortoises, we have, firstly, the gigantic extinct

species, Colossochelys atlas of Falconer and Cautley, from the Siwaliks and the

Trawadi. Falconer says that the fossil species is mainly distinguished from

the living genus Lestudo by the thickening of the anterior (episternal) por-

tion of the plastron ; this character was considered to be only of subgeneric

value, and I think the species might well be named Zestudo atlas. The length

of the carapace, according to Falconer’s restoration, is 12 feet 3 inches,

and of the entire animal. with the head and tail extended, 22 feet.

Tn addition to Colossochelys, there is good evidence of the former existence

of other gigantic tortoises in the Siwalik period. In the Indian Museum,

there are several specimens of the ankylosed episternals of tortoises belong-

ing to two distinet species. These bones are as thick, but not so elongated,

as the episternals of Colossochelys ; they have diverging but shorter extre-

miities than in the latter genus. The animals to which these bones belonged

must have been, I think, two-thirds as large as Colossochelys, and may not

improbably have belonged to Zestudo. A broken episternal indicates a

third, but smaller species. A fourth species is indicated by three episternals,

which are not bifureated at their free extremities: these bones indicate

a smaller animal ‘The episternal bones, from their solidity, seem more

frequently preserved than any others. A single carapace of a small

tortoise in the Indian Museum, from the Siwaliks, seems to belong

to the genus Zestwdo. Among the hard-shelled emydine tortoises,

we have, from the Siwaliks, a species of Bellia described by Mr.

* Pal. Mem, Vol. I, pl. XXXII, figs. 4-7,

1880. } TTistory of the Hossil Vertebrata of India. 21

Theobald* under the name of B. sivalensis. This species, aceording to

Mr. Theobald, is very closely allied to B. erassicollis, which, according to

the same writer,+ inhabits Tenasserim, Siam, and Sumatra. The other

living species (B. nuchalis) inhabits Java. Another carapace of a Siwalik

emydine, in the Indian Museum, seems to belong to a second species of

Bellia. In labels on the casts of Siwalik fossils from the British Museum,

a three-ridged carapace of an emydine bears the name of Himys hamiltonoides

(Hale. and Caut.): this name was doubtless given from the resemblance of this

carapace to that of the living Damonia (mys) hamiltonii, now inhabiting

Lower Bengal: the generic name of the fossil should probably be Damonia.

An imperfect carapace, collected by Mr. Theobald in the Siwaliks of the

Punjab, and now in the collection of the Indian Museum, seems to belong

to LMmys proper. Mr. Theobald has lately desecribed,{ under the

name of Cautleya annuliger, a gigantic Siwalik emydine, from the evi-

dence of a single marginal bone; the genus is said to be distinguished

from all other emydines by the cartilaginous, in place of osseous, union

of the marginal with the adjoining bones. In the fainily Bata-

guride, Dr. Falconer determined the identity of a Siwalik emydine with

Pangshura (Emys) tectum of- Bell§; subsequently, the species was

shown by Dr. Stoliezkaj| to occur in the newer Narbada deposits also:

Pangshura tectum now inhabits Lower Bengal. Of the genus Batagur, a

part of a plastron from the Narbada has been thought by Dr. Stoliezka]

to belong very probably to B. dhongoka, now found living in the Narbada.

Remains of a large Batagur, from the Siwaliks, are contained in the collec-

tion of the Indian Museum, but have not yet been specifically determined.

A small carapace, with a ridge on the vertebral plates, lately presented by the

Riki Museum to the Indian Museum, very probably belongs also to Batagur.

Of the soft-shelled river-tortoises, a Zrionyx from the Narbada has been

thought by Dr. Stoliczka** to be not improbably identical with the living

L. gangeticus. Plates of an undetermined Zrionyx have been obtained in

considerable numbers from the Sub-Himalayan Siwaliks, and from those of

Burma and Perim Island. A carapace of an Hmyda in the British Museum,

from the Siwaliks, has been identified by Dr. Gray with the living Hmyda

vittata (ceylonensis, Gray). This species, according to Mr. Theobald, inha-

WOR Greeks ViOl. x ps 4c:

t+ Catalogue of Reptiles of India, p. 10.

rR. GS Sok. Vol. XID; p. 186:

§ Pal. Mem. Vol. I, p. 382.

| ROG.S. I. Vol LI, p: 39.

{| Loc cit.

** Toc. cit.

22 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

bits Central and Southern India and Ceylon. In the Indian Museum there

are numerous remains of Hinyda from the Siwaliks of the Punj4b, Burma,

and Perim Island, which may or may not belong to the last-named species.

General Remarks.—The foregoing notes will show that the fossil

reptiles of India are noticeable for the extreme paucity of species known,

and for the fragmentary remains of the known species. The Mesozoic

Reptilia belong, as far as described, to extinct genera: the one known Eocene

reptile (Hydraspis) belongs to a living genus, but one which is now far

removed from India. The Siwalik (Mio-Pliocene) reptiles appear in great

part to belong to living Indian genera, and in many cases to living species ;

the modern representatives are, however, in most cases, found no longer in

the Sub-Himalayan disticts, but are now confined to Southern India. The

Narbada fossil reptiles, in all probability, belong altogether to living

species, and probably to species inhabiting the same district.

Fosstz Brrps.

Mio-Pliocene.—Fossil remains of birds have hitherto been found in

India only in the Sub-Himalayan Siwaliks, and there only in comparative-

ly small numbers. Some of their remains are in the Indian Museum, and

have been partly described by myself,* while others are in the British

Museum, and have been lately described by Mr. Davies.+ Among the

carinate birds, a tarso-metatarsus is considered by Mr. Davies to belong to

a cormorant, possibly of the genus Graculus.t A species of pelican (Pele-

canus cautleyt) is indicated by a fragment of an ulna; this bird, according

to Mr. Davies, must have been somewhat smaller than the living Indian P.

mitratus. Another part of an ulna has been referred to a new species

(Pelecanus sivalensis) by My. Davies, with a reservation as to the generie

determination. A gigantic wader has been described by myself, under the

name of Megaloscelornis sivalensis, from the evidence of a sternum and tibio-

tarsus. A distal extremity of a large bird humerus in the Indian Museum,

collected by Mr. Fedden in Sind, has a diameter of 2 inches across the

condyles: I cannot at present identify this bone with the humerus of

any living genus of bird: from its size it might belong to Mega-

loscelornis ; it makes some approach to the humerus of Ploteus. A

species of adjutant has been named by Milne-Edwards Argala falconeri.§

< RiGee, Vols Xl 262;

t+ Geol. Mag. January 1880, p. 18.

tI This bone was doubtfully referred by M. Edwards to Phaéton.

§ The bone in the British Museum referred to by myself on page 56 of the above

quoted paper belongs to this species,

1880. | History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 23

There are also two small undetermined bird bones in the Indian Museum.

The Struthioid or Ratitian modification of bird structure appears to have

been represented by three Siwalik species ; v7z., an ostrich (Struthio asiaticus)

indicated by some of the bones of the lower leg and foot and by vertebra :

anemeu (Dromeus sivalensis), by bones of the foot : and, according to Mr.

Davies, a three-toed bird, intermediate between these two genera, by a

single phalangeal bone. The living ostrich is confined to the African con-

tinent, and the emeu to New-Holland ; the occurrence of fossil species of

these genera in the higher Tertiaries of India, probably points to a late land

connection between these countries,

Fosstiz MamMats.

Hocene.—No traces of mammals have hitherto been detected in India

below the Hocene, and in the latter formation only some fragmentary bones

have been obtained by Mr. Wynne in the Nummulitics of the Punjab. The

only determinable bones consist of the distal portion of the femur and meta-

tarsals of a probably perissodactyle animal, and the astragalus of an artiodac-

tyle.* The femur was obtained from the Nummulitic (Subatht) zone of the

Punjab, while the astragalus was obtained immediately above the Nummulitic

clays of Fatehjang in the Punjab, which are probably of upper Hocene age.

The astragalus seems certainly to be that of a ruminant, as it belonged to

an animal in which the navicular and cuboid bones were united, If this

determination be correct, ruminants existed in the wpper Hocene period.

Mio-Pliocene.—The Tertiary ossiferous rocks of Perim Island, Sind,

the Punjab, the Sub-Himalayan Siwaliks, Sylhet, Tibet, and the valley of

the Irawadi, have yielded a large number of mammalian and other verte-

brate fossils, many of which are represented in the collection of the Socie-

ty, now transferred to the Indian Museum. The fossils of the Irawadi

valley were first brought to notice by Crawfurd and Clift, while those

of the typical Siwaliks were rendered classic by the labours of Falconer and

Cautley, and other former members of this Society. Some of these fossili-

ferous beds are of Miocene, and others of Pliocene age, and an admirable

resumé of their distribution and relations are given in the ‘Manual of the

Geology of India,’ to which work I must refer my readers desirous of

further information on this subject.

The Siwalik Primates are at present known merely by a few frag-

ments of upper and lower jaws and teeth, and it is probable that more

species remain to be discovered. The known forms comprehend a large

anthropoid ape, which has been named Pa/eopithecus sivalensis ;+ this

* R. GS. I. Vol. TIX, p. 92. In that passage the words “ mamimatliferous clays,”

should be “ nwnimuliferous clays.”

ae (En te dis WO OHI joe, Bi,

24 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

species is known by the palate of a female and the canine of a male, and

seems to have been allied to the living orang of Borneo, but is distinguished

by the form of its premolars; two species of (probably) Semnopithecus

and two of J/acacus* have also been determined.

Among the Carnivora, we have a large tiger (Helis cristata)+ charac-

terized by its large sagittal crest ; a second species has lately been described

by Mr. P. N. Bose under the name of & grandicristata,~ with a still

larger crest ; while a third and much smaller species is indicated by a lower

jaw in the Indian Museum. Of the genus MMachairodus (Macherodus),

there is JZ. sivalensis of Falconer and Cautley, said by Mr Bose to be

equal in size to the jaguar, and a larger species described by the same

writer under the name of JL paleindicus. The genus Pseudelurus, dis-

tinguished from Felis by the presence of an additional lower premolar, is

known by one lower jaw, which I have referred to a new species under the

name of P. sivalensis.§ Among the civet-like animals, we have Viverra

bakert of Mr. Bose, said to be closely allied to the living civet, and

Lctitherium sivalense described by myself from a lower jaw.|| The hyenas

are represented by Hyena sivalensis of Falconer and Cautley, said by

Mr. Bose to present relationship both to the Indian H. striata and the

African H. crocuta; and H. felina of Mr. Bose, distinguished by the

absence of the first upper premolar. The dogs, according to the same

writer, are represented by two species of Canis (C. curvipalatus and C.

cautleyi), the latter closely allied to the wolf; there is a specimen of

the palate of a Canis in the Indian Museum, but I am at present unable to

say whether it belongs to either of the above species. The genus Amphi-

cyon, distinguished from Cunis by the presence of an additional upper molar,

is represented by A. pal@indicus,4 remains of which have been obtained

from Sind and the Punjab. The bears are known by a single undescribed

cranium of Ursus in the Indian Museum, and by the remarkable genus

Hyanaretos, of which two species are known: &. stvalensis** was the origin-

al species on which the genus was founded, and has the upper molars with

quadrangular crowns ; a tooth apparently belonging to this species has been

described by Professor Flower from the newer Phocene (Red Crag) of

* R.G.S. 1. Vol. XII. p. 92.

+ Pal. Mem. Vol. I, p. 315. In manuscript the name of Felis palcotigris occurs.

{ Of this and five other species of Siwalik Carnivora, described by the same writer,

T have only seen the notice given in ‘ Nature,’ Jan. Ist, 1880.

§ RuGaSu Te Vols Xp. 83.

|| Ibid. p. 32.

€ Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I, p. 84. Alegalotis (Otocyon) normally agrees with

Amphicyon in having three upper true molars; it may, however, according to Prof,

Flower, have four of these teeth.

Ke PALS. pl O.

1880. ] History of the Fossit Vertebrata of India. 25

England: the second species, named by myself H. paleindicus,* is known

only by an upper jaw, not yet figured; the upper molars of this species

have triangularly shaped crowns, somewhat like those of Amphicyon. Of

the subursoid Carnivora, we have the living Indian and African genus

Mellivora, represented by MM. sivalensis,+ apparently very closely allied

to the living Indian species. A species of badger (MZeles) is indicated

by one lower jaw collected by Mr. Theobald.{ Of the otters, one species

of Lutra (L. paleindica) has been named by Falconer and Cautley from a

skull and lower jaw§ ; another lower jaw in the Indian Museum, collected

by Mr. Theobald, not improbably belongs to a second Siwalik species.

Enhydriodon|| is a genus peculiar to the Siwaliks, and is allied to the living

sea-otter (Wnhydris) now inhabiting the shores of the North Pacific ; the

Siwalik genus was not improbably a river-dwelling form.

Of the Proboscidia, now represented only by the Indian and African

elephants, there were a large number of Siwalik species, belonging to the

genera Hlephas, Mastodon, and Dinotherium. Of the first-named genus,

there were three sub-genera living in Siwalik times, viz., Huelephas, Loxodon,

and Stegodon. Huclephas was represented by H. hysudricus, provided with

simpler molars than the living representative of the sub-genus ; Loxodon was

represented by L. planifrons, remarkable for being the only species of

elephant in which premolars are known to have been developed. The sub-

genus Stegodon is peculiar to South-Eastern Asia, and was represented by four

species in the Sub-Himalayan and other Indian Siwaliks: these species

are named S. ganesa, S. insignis, S. bombifrons, and S. cliftii. The molars

of the two first are more complex than those of either of the other two,

and are indistinguishable from each other ; the skull of the first species is

distinguished by its enormously developed tusks. The intermediate molars of

S. eli/tvi have not more than six ridges each. From (probably) Pliocene

deposits in China, two stegodons have been described by Professor Owen

under the names of S. sizensis and 8S. orientalis, which appear to be

respectively the same as S. eliféii and S. insignis. Of the mastodons,

five species, JL. stvalensis, M. latidens, MW. perimensis, IM. pandionis, and

MM. falconeri, have been described from the Mio-Pliocene of India: the

three first-uamed species belong to the tetralophodont, and the two last to

the trilophodont, sub-division of the genus: the two first-named species

have a tendency to a pentalophodont molar formula. Of the European

* R. GS. I. Vol. XI, p. 108.

+ Ibid. p. 102: named in ‘FI’. A. S’ Ursittaxus.

af Metin e sh dhs Wolk 200, joy, UOPX.

§ F. A. S. supl. pl. Pl,

|| Tbid.

{1 Pal, Ind. Ser, X, Vol, I. pt. 5 (in the press.)

26 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

Miocene genus Dinotherium, three species, D. indicum, D. pentapotamia,

and D. sindiense, have been described from the Indian Mio-Pliccene: the

last species presents a remarkable approximation to the mastodons in the

form of its mandible.*

The perissodactyle modification of the great order Ungulata is well

represented, both in genera and species, in the Indian Mio-Pliocene. Of

Rhinoceros there are four named species, R. iravadicus, R. sivalensis, R.

paleindicus, and R. platyrhinus ;+ the molars of the two first are constructed

on the type of those of 2. swmatrensis; those of the last on the type of those

of R. indicus; R. sivalensis and R. paleindicus were unicorn, and f#.

platyrhinus was bicorn. Bones of one species have also been obtained from

Tibet. The hornless rhinoceroses were represented by <Acerotherium peri-

mense, of which there is a fine undescribed skull from the Punjab in

the Indian Museum.{ It is doubtful if the genus Tapirus is represented

in the fossil state in India; a symphysis of a mandible has been figured

in the second volume of the second series of the ‘Transactions of the

Geological Society of London’ by the late Mr. Clift, and referred to

Tapirus, but I think the determination is at least open to doubt. Molars

of Listriodon were described in MSS. by Falconer under the name

of Zapirus and so published in the ‘ Paleontological Memoirs.’§ The

genus Listriodon|| is represented by two species, LZ. pentapotamic« and

LZ. theobaldi. The genus Chalicotherium is represented by one species

(C. sivalense),§| presenting some peculiar points in its dentition : this genus

has till lately been classed with Anoplotherium among the Artiodactyla,

but Professor Cope has lately come to the conclusion that it is a perisso-

dactyle allied to Palaeotherium. 'The horses are represented by the genera

Equus and Hippotherium (Hipparion). Equus is known by a Siwalik

species (LE. sivalensis),** never fully described, and by one from the Tibetan

* For figures and descriptions of the Indian fossil Proboscidia, see F. A. 8. and

Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I, pt. 5 (in the press) : a jaw of D. pentapotamie was described

as Antoletherium by Falconer.

+ F. A. S. and Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I.

t{ Some molars of this species were described by myself under the name of Phino-

ceros planidens. R. Sivalensis has lately been made the type of a new genus Zalabis

by Prof. Cope, but on insufficient grounds.

§ Vol. I, p. 415.

|| Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I. and R. G. S. I. Vol. XI, p. 98 I have followed Pro-

fessor Cope in classing this genus with the tapirs; Kowalewsky was inclined to place

it among the artiodactyles.

{7 Pal. Mem. Vol. I, pl. XVII.

** Professor Huxley (Q. J. G. S.L. 1870, Presid. Address) remarks that some of

the Siwalik horses show traces of a “larmial’ cavity on the skull. Ido not know

whether this remark applies to the Siwalik or Narbada horse, but probably the former

as the older.

1880.] History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 27

Tertiaries : of Hippotherium, there are two Siwalik species, HZ. antilopinum

and H. theobaldi*: remains of the genus have also been obtained from

Tibet. M. Gaudry remarkst that the Siwalik Hippotheria have no lateral

digits ; this may possibly be the case with . antilopinum, but it is

certainly not so with the larger H. theobaldi, of which there is a nearly

complete tridactyle foot in the Indian Museum, JH. theobaldi has not

yet been fully described; it is very like H. gracile, to which species some

Siwalik molars were referred by H. von Meyer{ under the name of Hguus

primigentus.

Of the artiodactyle modification of the Ungulata, there is a still longer

list in the Indian Mio-Pliocene. In the bunodont sub-division, we have

Hippopotamus represented by two species (H, iravadicus and HH. sivalen-

sis), both belonging to the hexaprotodont sub-genus. A Siwalik bunodont

(Letraconodon magnum) § is noticeable for its enormous conical premolars ;

this genus is probably related to Hntelodon (Hlotherium) of the Ter-

tiaries of Hurope and America. The true pigs (Sws) are represented by

three species, S. giganteus, S. hysudricus, and S. punjabiensis; the two

former were named by Falconer and Cautley, while the last name was applied

by myself. || Sanitheriwm is a small suine animal, only known by the lower

molars. Hippohyus is a genus of suine animals whose molars present a pecu-

liar complexity of pattern, recalling that of the molars of the horse ; the

genus is peculiar to the Siwaliks, where it appears to have been repre-

sented by two species. The Huropean Miocene genus Hyotherium is

represented in the Tertiaries of Sind and Perim Island by a species which I

have provisionally named HZ. sindiense.** Of the suine animals with sele-

nodont teeth, we have, among the forms with five cusps on the molars, a

species of Anthracotherium (A. silistrense)++ from Sind, the Punjab, and

Sylhet, and a species of Hyopotamus (H. sindiense) tt from Sind: among the

forms characterized by having only four cusps on the molars, we have four

genera, Merycopotamus, Cheromeryx, Hemimeryx, and Sivameryx,§§ all

peculiar to the Sind and Punjab Siwaliks, and each known only by a single

species :|||| the two last genera are at present undescribed.

* Milk-molars of this species were at first referred toa new genus, Sivalhippus,

by myself (R. G. S. I. vol. X. pp. 31. 82).

+ ‘“ Animaux Fossiles and Geologie dé PAttique” p. 231,

{ Paleontographica, Vol. XV, p. 17.

§ Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I.

|| R.G.S. 1. Vol. XT, p. 81. A suine animal has been named by myself Hippo-

potamodon, but I am now not certain of its generic distinctness.

M Ibid. p. 82. ** Tbid p. 77.

tt Ibid. p. 78, a jaw of this species was described by me as JA. punjadbiense.

tt Ibid. Vol. X, p. 77. §§ Ibid. Vol. XI, pp. 78, 80.

|||| Falconer in a MS. note described some teeth of Doreatherivm, under the name

of Merycopotamus nanus. (Pal. Ind, Ser. X, Vol. I.)

28 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

Among the true ruminants, we have the deer family represented by

several species of Cervus, namely, O. triplidens, C. simplicidens, and C.

latidens ; the genus of the last being somewhat doubtful. A fourth

undescribed species has been named C. stvalensis.* The genus Dorca-

therium is represented by the two species, D. majus and D. minus.}

At least one of the Siwalik deer had branching antlers with a flattened beam,

somewhat like those of the living C. duvaucellit. Cervus triplidens had a

large accessary column in the molars, while C. s¢mplicidens was a species as

large as the Kashmir stag, with a much smaller accessory molarcolumn. A

single molar in the Indian Museum seems to indicate a Siwalik representative

of the genus Paleomeryx. The giraffes were represented in India by pro-

bably two species, one of which has been named Oamelopardalis sivalen-

sis.t Of the family Sivatheriide, which, with the exception of Hedladothe-

gium§ from the Pikermi beds of Attica, is peculiar to India, we have four

genera in the Mio-Pliocene. Hydaspitheriwm is represented by probably

three species, H. megacephalum known by the skull, which carried a

massive conjoint horn-base above the occiput; and H. leptognathus and

HI. grande, by lower jaws and teeth. Bramatheriwm perimense is known

by the skull, teeth, and jaws; this species seems to have carried a pair

of horns over the occiput and a large conjoint horn-base on the fron-

tals. Vishnutheriwm wravadicum is at present only known definitely

by a fragment of a lower jaw from Burma of much smaller size than any

of the other genera: it is not impossible, however, that some nondescript

upper molars, in the Indian Museum, from the Punjab, may belong to this

genus. Sivatheriwm giganteum was the first known of this group of ani-

mals, and was originally described in the Society’s Journal] as a fossil elk :

several skulls of this species are known; the male carried two pairs of horns,

placed like those of the living Indian four-horned antelope (Zetraceros),

while the female was hornless. An elaborate memoir on this interesting

animal has been published by Dr. Murie. The molar teeth seem to be

nearest to those of the giraffes, and also approach those of Cervus

megaceros and Alces: Dr. Murie comes to the conclusion that the horns of

Sivatherium were intermediate in structure between the antlers of deer

and the horns of the true cavicorn ruminants, and that they probably

* Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I, Preface (in the press).

+ Ibid.

{~ Remains of this species were described under the names of @. sivalensis and C.

afinis by Falconer. See R. G. 8. I. Vol. XT, p. 83.

§ Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I, R.G.S. 1. Vol. XI, p.90. M. Gaudry in his work,

‘Tes Enchainements du Monde Animal,’ mentions that Helladotheriwn occurs in

India: I am unacquainted on what grounds.

{| Vol. IV, p. 506.

@ Geol, Mag. Vol. VIII, p. 438.

1880. ] History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India, 29

carried a deciduous sheath like those of the living American prong-buck

(Antilocapra). Of the antelopes, several species have been described, the

largest of which (4. paleindica,)* is supposed to have presented affinities

to some African forms; A. szvalensis} is allied to the Indian blackbuck

(A. cervicapra) ; while A. patulicornis and A. acuticornis do not appear

to come close to any living forms. Other molar teeth belong to a

species of Portaxr, now only represented by the living nilghai of India.

Others again are like those of Palgoryx, a genus of antelopoid ani-

mals described from the Pikermi beds of Attica; this determination,

owing to the absence of skulls and the great difficulty of precisely deter-

mining isolated ruminant teeth, is only provisional. The oxen are repre-

sented by five genera, among which Hemzbos is represented by three species,

HH. occipitalis, H. acuticornis, and H. antilopinus :~ this genus is peculiar to

the Siwaliks, and connects the oxen and antelopes. Leptobos falconeri is

another species of antelopoid oxen, known by some crania. The genus

Bubalus is represented by Bubalus platyceros, a species with horns concave

superiorly ; and, in the highest Siwalik, by B. paleindieus, which is extreme-

ly close to the living wild buffalo of Assam. Of the genus Bison, there

is only one species in the Siwaliks, which has been named B. szvalensis, and

which seems to have been related to the extinct European B. priscus. Of

the true oxen (Bos) there are three Siwalik species, namely, Bos acutifrons

remarkable for its enormous horns and angulated forehead; B. planifrons

with shorter horns and a flattened forehead, and allied to the gigantic Bos

primigenius of Europe; and Bos platyrhinus only known by the lower half

of a skull, and of which the generic affinities are doubtful. There seem to have

been four species of goats in the Indian Tertiaries, most of which are probably

of Pliocene age, viz., an unnamed species with horn-cores very like those

of the Himalayan Capra falconeri (markhor), and two named species,

C. sivalensis and C. perimensis, both of which are only known by front-

lets and horn-cores: the fourth species has been described by Professor

Riitimeyer under the name of Bucapra daviesii. No remains of the

genus Ovis have hitherto been described from the Sub-Himalayan or

other Indian Siwaliks, but a cranium obtained from the presumably

Siwalik strata of Tibet has been referred by the late Mr. Blyth to this

genus. The genus Camelus is known by C. sivalensis, which presents a pe-

* Pal. Mem. Vol. I, pl. 23.

t+ Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I. Two species (A. picta and A. gyricornis,) were named

in MSS. by Falconer.

{£ These three species have been also described under the generic names of Probu-

balus, Amphibos, and Peribos ; the synonomy will be found in the first volume of the tenth

series of the ‘Paleeontologia Indica,’ where all the other Indian fossil ruminants aré

noticed. Part of this volume is still in the press,

30 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

culiarity in the lower molars, connecting it with the American auchenias,

and distinguishing it from the other old-world camels.* The similarity of

the lower molars of the Siwalik camel and Auwchenia is very noteworthy,

since America is supposed to have been the original home of the Camelide :

this supposition is supported by the connection between the living Ame-

rican camels (Auchenia) and the Pliocene old-world camels.

The other orders of Mammalia are only represented by a few species

of Rodentia and one of Edentata. Among the rodents, a rat (Jus) is

mentioned by Falconer as a member of the Siwalik fauna. A species of

bamboo-rat (Lhizomys sivalensis)+ has been named by myself, from some

lower jaws collected by Mr. Theobald in the Punjab. A porcupine (Hystria

stvalensis) is known by a part of a cranium and a lower jaw.

The edentates are only known by one species of pangolin (Manis

sindiensis), which has been named on the evidence of a solitary phalangeal

bone from Sind. f

The Mio-Plocene mammalian fauna of India, as a whole, is charac-

terized by the great number of forms belonging to the orders including

animals of large corporeal bulk, and also by the admixture of modern Afri-

can and Miocene European genera with those now peculiar to India. The

Proboscidia and the perissodactyle Ungulata, now so sparingly represent-

ed on the globe, were abundant in Mio-Pliocene India, and were probably

the dominant forms: the ruminants have now diminished somewhat in num-

bers in several groups, but not to such a striking extent as the proboscidians.

The selenodont hogs, like Merycopotamus and Anthracotheriwm, belong

to a group which has completely passed away, while their congener the

hippopotamus is now confined to Africa. Of the larger mammals now

inhabiting India, nearly all are generically represented in the Pliocene,

while forms, like Anoa (the living representative of Hemibos), inhabiting

neighbouring countries seem to have descended from Indian ancestors.

The micro-mammalia are practically unrepresented in the Mio-Pliocene,

but this is probably due to the smaller chance of their remains being pre-

served in a fossilized condition, or, if so preserved, of being discovered.

PLEISTOCENE.

The mammals of the Pleistocene of India are as yet even less well

known than those of the Mio-Pliocene, owing to the smaller areas in which

* A second species of Siwalik camel was named in MSS. C. antiqguus by Falconer.

This species cannot now be identified,

t+ For descriptions of this and other Siwalik rodents, see R. G. S. I. Vol. XI, p.

100. Lhizomys is probably the same as Typhlodon of Falconer,

t Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I,

1880. ] History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 31

they are found. It seems, however, even with our present knowledge, to

be pretty safe to say that the numerical strength of species of the

larger mammals so characteristic of the Mio-Pliocene had disappeared in the

Pleistocene. From the older alluvium of the Jamna river, mammalian bones

have been obtained in considerable quantities, but only two species have been

satisfactorily determined ; the remaining bones have only been generically

named, and are, therefore, not referred to here, as it is in many cases

impossible to say whether they belong to living or to extinct species.

The presence of Hippopotamus yemains in a stratum is pretty good

evidence of such stratum being not newer than the Pleistocene. The

discovery of a molar and canine of this genus in the alluvia of the Pem-

ganga river, by Mr. Fedden, consequently shows that some of those deposits

should be referred to the Pleistocene. In many cases, as in the delta of

the Ganges, it is often most difficult, or impossible, to draw the line between

the Pleistocene deposits and the Recent alluvium of the same area.

Tn the laterite of Madras, stone implements, and a human tibia have

been found by Mr. Foote, and are assigned to the Pleistocene by Profes-

sor Boyd-Dawkins. Stone implements have likewise been obtained from

the ossiferous beds of the Narbada valley, in association with the remains

of extinct mammals. The mammalian fauna of the Narbada beds comprises,

among the Carnivora, a species of bear (Ursus namadicus), named by the

authors of the ‘ Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis’ on the evidence of a portion of

the maxilla with the molar dentition: this specimen is now in the British

Museum, presented by Captain Frazer.* Among the Proboscidia, we have

the extinct Huelephas namadicus, characterized by the extraordinary ridge

on the forehead ; the molars of this species are very like those of the Eu-

ropean Hlephas antiquus, from which Professor Leith Adams has thought that

the Indian and European forms might belong to the same species. Stegodon

was represented by S. ganesa and, possibly, by S. nsignis. Among the fossil

perissodactyles of the Pleistocene, we have Rhinoceros deccanensis} of Mr.

Foote from the Deccan, a species without permanent lower incisors, and

shewing African affinities; and from the Narbada the living &. indicus,

remains of which were at first named R. namadicus. A third species

(2. namadicus) probably also existed in the Pleistocene. The horses are

represented by Hguus namadicus,{ as yet not. fully described. Among

* BF. A. §. plate O. I have elsewhere mentioned a species of Felis from the Nar-

bada beds, the determination having been made on the evidence of the olecranal por-

tion of an ulna in the old collection of the Geological Survey; the history of the

specimen is, however, unknown, and from its mineral condition I am by no means sure

that it is from the Narbada.

+ Pal. Ind. Ser. X, Vol. I.

f{ Faun, Ant. Siv. ZL. paleonus seems to be the young of LZ. namadicus,

32 R. Lydekker—A Shetch of the [No. 1,

the artiodactyles, we find two species of Hippopotamus, one of which

(H. namadicus) belongs to the hexaprotodont type, while the other (A.

paleindicus) is. tetraprotodont, like the larger living species;* HH.

paleindicus has also been found in the older alluvia of the Jamna.

The pigs seem to have been represented by Sus giganteus.t A species of

stag was named by Falconer Cervus namadicus, but never described ;

a single molar from the Narbada in the Indian Museum is indistin-

guishable from the corresponding tooth of the living C. (ucervus)

duvaucellit. Three species of Narbada oxen have been described, v7z.,

Bos namadicus of Falconer and Cautley, a taurine ox showing some affini-

ties to the living Asiatic genus Bibos, also occurring in the Pem-ganga

alluvium and, possibly, in the Deccan; Bubalus paleindicus of the

same authors, very closely allied to the living wild Indian buffalo, also

found in the Jamna alluvium; and Leptobos frazeri of Professor Riiti-

meyer. A species of nilghai (Portax) has lately been described by

the same writer from the Narbada rocks, under the name of P. namadicus ;

teeth of the same genus have also been obtained from the Pem-ganga allu-

ium.

The Pleistocene rodents are only represented by some incisors proba-

bly belonging to the genus dZus, obtained from the Narbada valley, and

now in the Indian Museum.

JECENT.

The Recent deposits have not yet, as I have said, in many eases been

satisfactorily separated from the Pleistocene, and the very local occurrence

of mammalian bones renders this point of doubt one not likely to be soon

cleared up. Any alluvial deposits of bones from which Hippopotamus is

absent, and which do not contain any other extinct animals, I should be

disposed to class as Recent.

Human remains have been obtained in the alluvium of the plains in

various localities, at considerable distances below the surface, but generally

in very imperfect condition. Specimens of the teeth and jaws of Macacus

rhesus ave exhibited in the Indian Museum, obtained from the alluvia

of Assam and Madras; those from the former locality are in a highly

mineralised condition. Molars of the Indian elephant have been obtained

in the alluvium of the plains of India, and in that of the delta of the

Trawadi. A last upper molar of Rhinoceros indicus has been obtained

by Mr. Foote in the alluvium of Madras: this specimen is very interesting

as shewing the former range of that species far to the south of its present

habitat, which Jerdon gives as “the Terai from Bhotan to Nepal.” Sus

* The smaller Liberian hippopotamus (Che@ropsis) has only two lower incisors.

+ The authority for introducing this species in the Narbada fauna is the specimen

drawn in plate LXX, fig. 8. of the F. A, 8S.

1880. | History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 33

indicus has also been obtained by Mr. Foote in the same formation. Antilope

cervicapra is represented by a fossil horn-core in the Indian Museum whose

exact locality is uncertain. Antlers, horn-cores, and teeth of species of Bos

and Cervus have been obtained from alluvia of various parts of the plains,

and from raised beaches on the Kattiawar (Kattywar) coast; as, however,

these specimens are not yet specifically determined, no more can be said

about them.

List oF THE Fosstn VERTEBRATA oF INDIA aND BurMa.

The following list exhibits in a systematic form all the well-establish-

ed species of Indian and Burman fossil vertebrata, together with the best

authenticated of the unnamed species with which I am acquainted. For

the great divisions of geological times, the terms Anthropozoic (Age-of-

Man), Theriozoic (Age-of-Mammals), Saurozoic (Age-of-Reptiles), and

Ichthyozoic (Age-of-Fishes), have been employed in lieu of the old terms

Post-Tertiary, Kainozoic, Mesozoic, and Palaeozoic, as being more applicable

to a chronology of vertebrate evolution, and as forming a series of symme-

trical terms.

I. ANTHROPOZOIC (POST-TERTIARY).

1. Recent Atuvta.

MAMMALIA. Primares. Homo (sapiens ?). Plains.

Macacus rhesus. Gtilpara and Madras.

Proposcrp1a. Euelephas indicus. India and Burma.

Uneunara. Rhinoceros indicus. Madras.

Sus indicus. Madras.

Cervus. Kattiawar.

Antilope cervicapra. Ganges Valley. (?)

Bos. sp. Kattiawar and Plains.

REPTILIA. Cueronta. ? (plates) Calcutta.

Other undetermined remains of, probably, recent species.

2. PLEISTOCENE.

MAMMALIA. Primares. Homo. sp. Narbada (weapons) and Madras

(weapons and bones).

Carnivora. Ursus namadicus. (FF. and C.) Narbada.

Proposcipra. EHuelephas namadicus. (F. and C.) Narbada.

Stegodon ganesa. (F. and C.) Narbada.

—— P insignis. (F. and C.) Narbada.

? Mastodon pandionis. (Fale.) Deccan.

UNGULATA. Rhinoceros deccanensis. (Foote.) Deccan.

indicus. (Cuv.) Narbada.

namadicus. (F. and C.) Narbada.

Equus namadicus. (I. and C.) Narbada.

34 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

MAMMALIA. Uneunata. Hippopotamus namadicus. (F.and C.) Narbada.

paleindicus. (F. and C.) Nar. and J.

———_ sp. ReeGs

Sus giganteus. (IF. and C.) Narbada.

Cervus sp. (? duvancellii) (Narbada).

Bubalus paleindicus (fF. and C.) Narbada and J.

Bos namadicus. (F. and C.) Narbada. P: G.

. and (?) Deccan.

Leptobos frazeri. (Riit.) Narbada.

Portax namadicus. (Riit.) Narbada. and P: G,

Ropentra. Mus, sp. Narbada.

REPTILIA. Crocoprnta. Crocodilus (?) sp. Narbada.

CueEtonr1a. Pangshura tectum. (Bell. sp.) Narbada,

Batagur (? dhongoka ) Narbada.

Trionyx (? gangeticus.) Narbada,

II. THERIOZOIC (KAINOZOIC.)

1. Puxi1o-MrocEne.

MAMMALIA. Primates. Palzopithecus sivalensis. (Lyd.) S.

Macacus sivalensis. (Lyd.) §.

— sp. 8.

Semnopithecus subhimalayanus. (Myr.) S.

—_—_——_—_———— sp. S.

Carnivora. Felis cristata. (F. and C.) 8.

—— grandicristata. (Bose.) S.

—— sp. 8.

Machairodussivalensis. (F. and C.) S.

——— paleindicus. (Bose) 8.

Pseudelurus sivalensis. (Lyd.) 8.

Ictitherium sivalense. (Lyd.) S.

Viverra baker. (Bose.) 8.

Hyena sivalensis. (F. and C.) 8.

felina. (Bose.) S.

Canis curvipalatus. (Bose.) 8.

cautleyi. (Bose.) 8.

Amphicyon paleindicus. (Lyd.) 8. Sd.

Ursus. — sp. S.

— sp. T:

Hyenarctos sivalensis. (fF. and C.) 8. Sd.

— palxindicus. (Lyd.)S.

Mellivora sivalensis. (F. and C.) 8.

Meles, sp. (Lyd.) S.

1880. ] History

of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 85

MAMMALIA. Carnivora. Lutra paleindica. (I. and C.) S.

PROBOSCIDIA.

UNGULATA,

Perissodactyla.

Artiodactyla.

Enhydriodon sivalensis. (IF. and C.) S.

Euelephas hysudricus.. (F. and C.)8.

Loxodon planifrons. (FF. and C.) S.

Stegodon ganesa. (F. and ©.) S.

insignis. (F. and C.) S.

bombifrons. (F. and C.) S.

— cliftii. (F. and C.)S.

Mastodon sivalensis. (I, and C.) 8.

latidens. (F. and C.) S. I. Sd. P.

perimensis. (I. and C.) 8, Sd. P.

pandionis. (F.) Sd. 8. P.

— falconeri. (Lyd.) Sd. 8S.

Dinotherium indicum. (Fale.) S. P.

pentapotamiz. (Falc.) 8.

~— sindiense. (Lyd.) Sd. 8.

(Chalicotherium sivalense. S. Sd.

Rhinoceros iravadicus. (Lyd.) I.

paleindicus. (I. and C.) S.

platyrhinus. (I. and C.) 8.

sivalensis. (IF. and C.) 8. Sd.

——— _ sp. Tibet.

Acerotherium perimense. (F. and C,) P.Sd.8.I.

+ Listriodon pentapotamiz. (Fale. sp.)

theobaldi. (Lyd.) 8.

(?) Tapirus, sp. (Clift.) I.

Equus sivalensis. (I. and C.) S.

sp. Tibet.

Hippotherium antilopinum. (F. and C.) S.

theobaldi. (Lyd.) P. 8. Sd.

| ————__ sp. Tibet.

( Hippopotamus iravadicus. (F.andC.) I.

——_———— sivalensis. (F. and C.) S.

Tetraconodon magnum. (Falc ) 8S.

Sus giganteus. (IF. and C.) 8.

|— hysudricus. (FF. and C.) S. P. Sd.

. ae punjabiensis. (Lyd.) 8.

Hippohyus sivalensis. (I. and C.) S.

sp. S.

Sanitherium schlagintweitii (Myr.) S.

Hyotherium sindiense(Lyd.) Sd.

Anthracotherium silistrense. (Pent.) Sy,S.Sd.

| Hyopotamus paleindicus, (Lyd.) Sd.

R. Lydekker—A Shetch of the

[No. 1,

MAMMALIA. Unevrats. ( Meryeopotamus dissimilis. (F. and C.) S.

Artiodactyla.

Cheromeryx silistrensis. (Pom.) Sy.

Hemimeryx, sp. (Lyd.) Sd.

Sivameryx, sp. (Lyd.) Sd.

Cervus triplidens. (Lyd.) S.

sivalensis. (Lyd. Mss.) S.

simplicidens. (Lyd.) S.

(?) latidens. (Lyd.) S.

Dorcatherium majus. (Lyd.) S.

— minus. (Lyd.) 8.

Palezomeryx, sp. (Lyd.) 8. Sd. (?)

Camelopardalis sivalensis. (I. and C.) S. P.

sp. 8.

Hydaspitherium grande. (Lyd.) 8S.

ee leptognathus. (Lyd.) S.

megacephalum. (Lyd.) 8.

Bramatherium perimense. (Fale.) P.

Sivatherium giganteum. (F. and C.)S.

Vishnutherium iravadicum (Lyd.) I. 8. (?)

Antilope paleindica. (F. and C.) S.

patulicornis. (Lyd.) S.

porrecticornis. (Lyd.) S.

sivalensis. (Lyd.) 8S.

? Paleoryx, sp. (Lyd.) S.

Portax, sp. (Lyd.) 8.

Hemibos occipitalis.

(Fale. sp.) 8S.

(Fale. sp.) S.

(Riit.) S.

(Lyd.) S.

paleindicus. (F. and C.) 8S.

Bison sivalensis. (Fale. MSS.) 8.

(Lyd.) S.

(Lyd.) 8.

(Riit.) S.

(Lyd.) P.

(Lyd.) 8.

acuticornis.

antilopinus.

Leptobos falconeri.

Bubalus platyceros.

Bos acutifrons.

planifrons.

—— platyrhinus.

Bucapra daviesii.

Capra perimensis,

sivalensis.

sp. (Lyd.) 8.

? Ovis, sp. (Blyth.) S. T.

\_Camelus sivalensis, (IF. and C.) 8.

1880.]

MAMMALIA. Ropentta.

EXDENTATA.

AVES. CARINATS.

Ratiraz.

REPTILIA. Crocopirta.

LACERTILIA.

OPHIDIA.

CHELONTA.

PISCES. ELASMO-

BRANCHIT.

TELEOSTET.

History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India.

Mus. sp. 8.

Rhizomys sivalensis. (Lyd.) S.

Hystrix sivalensis. (Lyd.) S.

Manis sindiensis. (yd.) Sd.

Graculus (?), sp. (Dav.) S.

Pelecanus cautleyi. (Dav.) S.

? sivalensis. (Dav.) S.

Megaloscelornis sivalensis (Lyd.)

Megaloscelornis. (?) sp. Sd.

Argala faleoneri (M. Ed.) 8.

Struthio asiaticus. (M. Ed.) S.

Dromeus sivalensis. (liyd.) S.

Gen. indet. (Brit. Mus. Col.) 8.

Crocodilus palustris (Less.) S. P.

—— sp. _I.

Gharialis gangeticus (Gmel.) 8. Sd. I.

leptodus (F. and C.) S.

erassidens. (F. and C.) S. Sd.

Varanus sivalensis. (Fale.) S.

Gen. indet, S. Sd.

Colossochelys atlas. (I. and C.)

Testudo (?), 5 sp. 8.

Bellia sivalensis. (Theo.) S.

sp. 8.

Damonia hamiltonoides. (Fale. sp.) S,

Emys, sp. 8.

Cautleya annuliger, (Theo.)S.

Pangshura tectum. (Bell. sp.) S.

Batagur, sp. 8.

Trionyx, sp. 8. I. P.

Emyda vittata. (Pet.) S.

— sp. Sa B:

Carcharias, sp. I.

Lamna, sp. Sd.

? (vertebre.) P.

? (palatal teeth) S. Sd.

Chaca (?), sp. 8.

? (vertebre.) S. Sd.

2. Eocene (INTRATRAPPEAN AND NUMMULITIC),.

MAMMALIA. Unavrata,

(perissodactyle femur). Punjab.

(artiodactyle astragalus) Punjab.

R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the [No. 1,

REPTILIA. Crocoprra. (teeth and vertebre) Punjab.

CHELONIA. Hydraspis leithii (Carter sp.) Bombay.

BATRACHIA. Ayoura Oxyglossus pusillus. (Owen. sp.) Bombay.

———- _(?) sp. Bombay.

PISCES. ELASMOBRAN-

cuit. Myliobatis, sp. (luyd.) Punjab.

TELEOSTEI. Diodon foleyi, (Lyd.) Ramri I. and Pt. Blair.

Capitodus indicus. (Lyd.) Punjab.

P (Cycloid scales) Nr. Thayetmyo,

III. SAUROZOIC (MESOZOIC).

1. CreEtacrous SERIES.

REPTILIA. Dinosavrta. Megalosaurus, sp. (Lameta and Trichinopoli)

Titanosaurus blanfordi. (Lyd.) Lameta gp.

————-— indicus. (Lyd.) Lameta gp.

? (unknown reptile.) Lameta gp.

CROCODILIA. (amphiceelian sp.) (Lyd.) Sind.

CHELONTA. ? (plates.) Lameta, Rajamahendri, and Sind.

Icuryosavria. Ichthyosaurus indicus. (Lyd.) Trichinopoli.

PISCES. Etasmoprancuit. Corax incisus. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

REPTILIA.

pristodontus. (Ag.) Trichinopoli.

Enchodus serratus. (Hg.) Trichinopoli.

Lamna complanata. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

sigmoides. (Eg.) Trichinopoli. --

Odontaspis constrictus. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

oxypeion. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

Otodus basalis. (Hg.) Trichinopoli.

divergens. (Kg.) Trichinopoli.

marginatus. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

—— minutus. (KEg.) Trichinopoli.

nanus. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

—semiplicatus. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

Oxyrhina triangularis. (Eg.) Trichinopoli.

—— sp. (Stol.) Trichinopoli.

Ptychodus latissimus. (Ag.) Trichinopoli.

GANOIDEI. Pycnodus (?), sp. (Stol.) Trichinopoli.

? ? (scales) Lameta.

? ? (scales) Intratrappean. Rajamahendri.

2. Jura-Triassic SERIES.

Dinosavria. Ankistrodon indicus (Hux.) Panchet gp.

Crocopinia. (amphicelian sp.) (Lyd.) Chari gp.

1880. } History of the Fossil Vertebrata of India. 39

REPTILIA. Crocopir1a. Parasuchus, sp. (Hux.) (hislopii. MSS.)

Maleri gp.

—— ? sp. (Lyd.) Denwa gp.

Lacervinta. Hyperodapedon, sp. (Hux.) Maleri gp.

Dicynopon- Dicynodon orientalis. (Hux.) Panchet gp.

TTA, ——— sp. Panchet gp.

PLESIOSAU-

KIA. Plesiosaurus indicus (Lyd.) Umia. gp.

BATRACHIA. Laspyrintruo- Brachyops laticeps. (Ow.) Mangli. gp.

DONTIA. Gonioglyptus longrostris. (Hux.) Panchet gp.

Pachygonia incurvata (Hux.) Panchet gp.

Archegosaurus (?) Bijori gp.

PISCES. Dipnot. Ceratodus hislopianus. (Old.) Maleri gp.

— hunterianus. (Old.) Maleri gp.

—virapa. (Old.) Maleri gp.

GanorpEI. Dapedius egertoni. (Syk.) Kota gp.

Lepidotus breviceps. (Eg.) Kota gp.

— calcaratus. (Kg.) Kota gp.

———— deccanensis. (Kg.) Kota gp.

——— longiceps. (Eg.) Kota gp.

pachylepis. (KHg.) Kota gp.

Tetragonolepis analis. (Kg.) Kota gp.

—w—— oldhami. (Hg.) Kota gp.

rugosus. (Hg.) Kota gp.

ie ? (Seales) Sripermatir gp. Kota gp.

Iv. ICHTHYOZOIC (PALMOZOIC).

1. CARBONIFEROUS.

PISCES. GANOIDET. Sigmodus dubius. (Waag.) Salt-range.

ELASMOB- Poecilodus paradoxus. (Waag.) Salt range.

RANCHI, Psephodus indicus. (Waag.) do.

Helodopsis elongata. (Waag.) do.

—— abbreviata. (Waag.) do.

Psammodus, sp. do.

Petalorbyncus indicus. (Waag.) do.

Xystracanthus gracilis. (Waag.) do.

major. (Waag.) do.

ss giganteus.(Waag.) do,

Thaumatacanthus blantordi. (Waag ) do.

Abbreviations used in the above.

Ag. = Agassiz; Dav. = Davies; Eg. = Egerton; F. and C. = Fal-

coner and Cautley; Gmel. = Gmelin; Hux. = Huxley; I. = Ivrawadi

40 R. Lydekker—A Sketch of the History, Se. [No. 1,

(Irrawaddy) valley, Burma; J. = Jamna; Less.) = Lesson; Lyd. =

Lydekker ; M. Ed. = Milne-Edwards ; Myr. = Herman von Meyer ; Old.

= Oldham; Ow. = Owen; P. = Perim Island, gulf of Cambay; Pent.

= Pentland; P: G. = Pem-ganga; Pet. = Peters; Pom. = Pomel;

Riit. = Riitimeyer; 8. = Siwaliks (including Punjab); Sd. = Sind;

Stol. = Stoliczka; Sy. = Sylhet; Syk. = Sykes; T. = Tibet; Theo. =

Theobald ; Waag. = Waagen.

CoNCLUSION.

In the foregoing sketch of the fossil vertebrata of India, but few

new facts have been recorded, and, indeed, the main objects in penning it were

the hope, firstly, of inducing persons interested in scientific enquiries to

aid us in our endeavours to increase our knowledge of this interesting

branch of science, and, secondly, of making one of those landmarks, so neces-

sary in an ever-increasing subject like the present, from whence new

advances can again be made. With regard to the first object, it may be

observed that District Officers in India, and other officials, in the course

of their periodical professional tours through the country, have far greater

opportunities of collecting the larger and more conspicuous fossils than can

possibly fall to the lot of the officers of the Geological Survey of India,

who are few in number, and who, for years together, are not called upon to

visit many parts of the country. To all who have opportunities of travelling

through unfrequented parts of India likely to contain fossil remains,

the appeal is here made for assistance in our endeavours to obtain a more

complete knowledge of the fossil vertebrata of India. Any fossils sent

to the Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India (Calcutta) will

be most gratefully received, and, after comparison or description, either

returned to their owners, or, if presented, carefully preserved in the

collection of the Indian Museum.

Note.—Additions to this paper have been made while it was passing through the

press, bringing it up to date.

——— eeeEeSeSeSeeeSeeeees-_0reeeem—s*”

1880. ] J. FB. Tennant—On Standard Weights. Al

V.—Account of the Verification of some Standard Weights with consi-

derations on Standard Weights in general.—By Cou. J. EF. Tannann,

R. E., F. BR. 8., Master of Her Majesty's Mint.

(Recd. Jan. 5th ;—Read Feb. 4th, 1880.)

When I first contemplated the verification of a series of weights from

a primary standard, I had little information as to procedure, and indeed

T have till now had little as to details. I had intended in this paper to deal

with the verification of a whole series of ounce weights ; but circumstances

beyond my control have delayed the latter portion, and I think that probably

this shorter paper will be as much as the patience of my readers will stand:

in it are described, with examples, all the cases I shall meet ; while the ex-

planations will, I trust, enable any one to follow my procedure and some-

how to verify any other set of weights. This end being gained, the delay

of the paper to add the numerical results of farther work, would add little

to its popular, or even scientific value, and this circumstance has induced

me to offer it in its present state to the Asiatic Society.

IT am aware that I am open to the charge of excessive (factitious)

accuracy, and I freely admit that I have used an excessive number of

decimal places ; but the number was originally fixed by the fact that it caused

no trouble and saved thought. The difference between the trouble of

dealing with 5 or 6 figures and 4 with an arithmometer is, in my case, more

than compensated by the absence of the absolute necessity of watching

the increase of the last figure: and too, I had not, till I had gone some

way with these weighings, so clear an idea of the probable errors as I now

have. ‘The systematic calculation of these is, so far as I know, new:

it has taught me much, and guided me where I might have gone wrong.

I think that it should always be carried out ; but of course, the foundation

of the caleulation—the estimation of the probable error of one comparison,

will not commend itself to all men:—those who in other respects may

follow my procedure may prefer a different course in this, and, when the

system of weighment is different, this datum must be determined in a cor-

vespondingly different manner. Hven then, I hope, that the conclusions

I have come to may have their use, for the evidence they offer of the rapid

accumulation of error in multiplying fromasmall primary standard, is quite

independent of the amount ascribed to the error of one comparison.

I have added the Tables requisite in reducing the comparison of weights

of varying density and in determining specific gravity. These are deduced

from the same data precisely as those used in the British Standards Depart-

ment, but I have employed Fahrenheit’s thermometer, the English inch, and

42 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

the English grain, because, to me, those units were more accessible (as they

will be to most readers of the English language) and not because I prefer

them. I have thought that it was more important to avoid conversions

of the data before using them than to adhere to general considerations ;

just as (with the late Warden of the Standards) I have preferred uniformity

of data for reduction; rather than a possible scientific accuracy, which is,

after all, not demonstrably gained.

Srcrion I.—On Weights.

In May 1879, I received from England a set of Bullion Weights of

gilt bronze, with their errors on the Commercial Standard of England

roughly given, and a Troy Ounce of Platinum-iridium, with its error in va-

cuo in terms of the Parliamentary Standard Pound PS. I at the same

time received a set of Metric Weights of Platinum-iridium from 100 grammes

to one milligram, with their errors in terms of the Kilogramme des Archives,

which is the Normal Standard weight of France. My paper here will be

confined to dealing with some of the Bullion Weights: and it will be neces-

sary in order to understand the procedure I follow, and also the scientific

principles of weighing, that I should give an account of the English

system of weights.

Ordinary weights are made of brass, iron, or some other cheap metal,

but all these are liable to oxidation, and thus none of these metals is suitable

for a Standard. The metal chosen for the English Standard was platinum,

which is nearly indestructible. Since then it has been found that, whereas

platinum is soft, an alloy with iridium is hard, has the other advantages

of platinum, and can be made with sufficient readiness for the purpose

required: this alloy is used in my Primary Standards as itis in the European

Standards now being made in Paris. The use of such substances for

Standard Weights, however, leads to some complication: these metals are

heavy ; while the metals and alloys ordinarily used are comparatively light.

Now the weight of a body in air is different from its weight in vacuo by

the weight of the air displaced, and this varies with the state of the atmos-

phere: consequently the relative weight of a pound of brass and one

of platinum, which are alike in vacuo, will, in air, be found to vary con-

tinually relatively to each other. In order to avoid the inconvenience of

this, it has been found desirable that the Commercial Standard should be

of brass or bronze ; both of which, having nearly the same density as the

metals used in ordinary weights, will show the same differences at all times

and places, with sufficient accuracy for commercial purposes; and which,

moreover, are cheap enough to allow of the weights of all sizes being made

of them. For general Standard purposes, weights are now made of gilt

bronze, the gilding preserving them to a great extent from changing by

oxidation,

1880. | J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 43

As the Parliamentary Standard of Hngland P S. has its true weight

in vacuo,* the first impression would be, that the Commercial Standard in

ordinary air should weigh the same as PS. in vacuo: but this has not been

the practical solution. When the Houses of Parliament were destroyed in

1834, the English standards were destroyed in them, and the new Standard

was meant to be a restoration of the old one. Now the old Standard

was a brass Troy Pound made in 1758, of which there were a variety of

copies more or less accurate. On the evidence from these, and some other

sources, was determined the difference between the lost pound and a piece

of platinum, both taken in vacuo. Then (the Government of the day

having determined that the new Standard should represent the Avoirdupois,

and not the Troy Pound as before), a second piece of Platinum P S. was

made which should weigh very nearly 7000 such grains as those of which

the destroyed Pound (U) contained 5,760, both being taken in vacuo, and it

is believed that the result was accurate toa very small fraction of a grain,

thanks to the great labours of Professor Miller. In reverting to the

Commercial Pound, that would be 7,000 grains of which U weighed 5,760,

both taken in air, and then, as the density of the new commercial Pound

was very close to that of U, all sensible uncertainty arising from the de-

struction of U and the impossibility of knowing its exact density would

vanish.

Professor Miller found the Platinum Pound PS. to be 7000-00098

grains of U both weighed in vacuo, and by Act of Parliament, this was

declared to be the true standard of weight, and that one grain should be a

seven-thousandth part of it. The Commercial Pound W was an imaginary

Pound, supposed to be made of brass of a density of 8:15034, which was

what Professor Miller estimated as the density of the lost Pound U.

Though the standard in vacuo was changed, as above, by a minute quan-

tity, it would have been wrong to change the weight of W in air. In

order then that its weight in vacuo should become that of the Pound P S.,

it became necessary to suppose that this weight in vacuot, and consequently

its density, were changed, and to ascribe to it a new density of 81480.

The present definition of the English Commercial Pound then is—

* T have followed the wording of my predecessors, but I should prefer to call the

“weight in vacuo” the ‘ Mass,’ and restrict the term “ weight” to the apparent force

exercised. If this distinction were made, the questions involved would be much clearer,

The Parliamentary Standard has been treated as one of Mass ; hence two of the gilt

secondary standards, cach of the same Mass as P.S., will not have ordinarily the same

weight, unless they have the same specific gravity.

+ The weight in vacuo was 7000 grains of U, and in consequence of the Act of

Parliament it became necessary that it should be the same as that of P 8. or 70U0:00098

grains of U.

44 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

The weight in standard air of a piece of brass whose weight in vacuo

is the same as that of PS., and whose density, compared with that of water

at its maximum density (the brass being at the freezing point), is 8'1430.

If we know the value of a weight in terms of P 8, we shall be able

to find its value in terms of W by adding the weight of air displaced by

the same weight of brass similar to that of which W is supposed to be made,

and deducting that actually displaced by the weight to be determined.

The Standard Platinum-Iridium ounce sent me is certified to weigh (in

vacuo) 479°95979 grains in terms of P S., and the density has been assumed

as 21°414, which is that of the 100 gramme weight. In English Standard

Air its weight is given as 48000502 grains, but that datum is useless for

purposes of reference. It is called E I in the books of the Standards

Office in London, and I propose to retain this name.

The ounce weight of the bullion set was certified to weigh 480:00145

grains in vacuo in terms of P S. and 480°00203 grains in English Standard

Air in terms of W.

The following matter must be borne in mind in order that the

procedure in my weighments may be understood :

The sign = means that the weights on each side of it are equal in

vacuo.

The sign = means that these are equal in air at the time; and, in the case

of Commercial Weights, that they are sufficiently equal

for practical purposes at all times.

The sign means that the weights on each side being in the respective

pans of the balance there would be equilibrium. When no

division of the scale is mentioned as the resting point, it

is assumed to be 10 for Oertling No. 1 and 15 for Oertling

No. 2.

Oy is one of the set of Gilt Bullion Weights—the subscript number denotes

its nominal value in Troy ounces.

Pn is one of a set of grain weights which have been used for small quan-

tities, and 7 is the number of grains nominally : all weights

not less than 1 grainare of platinum and have been cleaned

by incandescence in a spirit-lamp. The tenths of grains

are of aluminum and the hundreths of uncertain material.

R, and R, are two riders (approxinately of one-tenth of a grain each) used

with the balance Oertling No. 1.

The Tables I have used in my reductions have been calculated by my-

self to the units of the Barometer and Thermometer scales commonly

used in England, and which it was most easy for me to refer to. That

for the density of air, has been calculated from the formula given by Pro-

fessor Miller, in his paper in the Philosophical Transactions, with the neces-

1880. ] J. ¥. Tennant—On Standard Weights. AD

sary changes for units, and for the position of Her Majesty’s Mint at

Caleutta. The density of water has been calculated from a formula similar

to Professor Miller’s; but with the constants deduced from the new Tables

of the British Standards Office, ‘The other Tables, for the expansion of

metals, are deduced from the same data as those of Professor Miller, but the

form makes them more compact and convenient without any loss of accu-

racy. All will be found at the end.

Secrton I].—The Balances.

Oertling No. 1 is a chemical balance by Oertling with a beam 365

m. m. (14°56 inches) between the extreme knife edges. The principal

knife edge is 28 m.m, (1:1 inches) long and the smaller ones 165 m. m.

or 0°65 inches; all are of agate resting on agate planes. The beam is

divided for the use of riders, and I have satisfied myself that the divisions

are sufliciently accurate for this purpose. ‘The scale is placed on the lower

part of the pillar, and is read by a long index attached to the centre of the

beam: this is in my opinion, the best arrangement.

Oertling No. 2 is a balance whose beam carries knife edges 404 m. m

(15:9 inches) apart. The central knife edge is 88:4 m.m (14 inches)

long and those at the ends, 22 m.m or U'87 inches. They are all of

agate and rest on agate planes. The beam is very strong, and divided with

sufficient accuracy for the use of arider. There is an index of soft iron

at each end of the beam to read an ivory scale. The left scale had very

fine graduations and appeared to me useless. I have substituted a better

one and removed the right scale.

Srcrron ITI.—Density of O Set of Weights.

In order to compare O; with EI it is necessary to have a density of

O,: Ihave determined that of O; and assumed it to be the same as that

of O, and of the other O weights.

It appears from the papers received from the Standards Office that

O, = 3 Troy ounces = 1440 grains with suflicient accuracy for this

purpose, its exact value will be seen later.

On July 4th 1879, the balance Oertling No. 1 having been prepared

for taking specific gravities, and a platinum hook, intended to support O,

in water, having been hung bya fine wire of platinum so as to be immersed

in distilled water ; O, was placed in the pan in air, and counterbalanced

with weights. O, being then placed in the hook, and all air bubbles care-

fully removed, it was found that ; X being about 1490:2 grains:

X ~ O, in water (temp. = 84°. 1) + hook &c. in water + (O.3 +

10 at 10:02 divisions of the scale—

O.4, + Ovgos + Ovoog) in air + 4.

46 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

then, removing O, from water, carefully drying it, and placing it in the

pan, I found after adding 180 minims of water

X O, in air + hook &. in water + 2°72 = at 10°02 divisions.

Hence the loss of weight apparently = O.3 + Ogg + Ogos + O-ooy +

My approximate calculations gave me the sum of the above four

weights as 167°5400 grains, and the value of the rider is approximately th

of a grain, the difference from the true value being negligible. Hence the

loss of weight between air and water was 167°5528 grains, and, though I

did not observe the Barometer, it may be considered as 29°46, and the tem-

perature 87°°5; this gives AO, = 8'5649.

Again on July 7th, I found in the same way.

(A) X¥ + 5 a x O, in water + hook &c. in water )

‘ Ry :

+ 167°54 grains + 38 — at 13°30 Div.

7 10 Temp.

(B) X + OF ae x O, in water + hook &e. in water water SiZoy:

+ 167°54 grai

and, after adding 169 minims ae water.

eee 29° 445.

(D) X+5 2 O, inair + hook &c. in water + 9 0

Temp. 85°°7 F.

Hence by interpolating between (A) and (B)

R :

X45 a x O, in water + hook &e. in water

R, | Temperatures

+ 167S4grs. + 41475 | | Water84°-25F.

and from (C) and (D) Air 85:7

Ry in.

X+5 Saar O, + hook &c. in water + 8: 1973 | Bar. 29:445

Thus the ae of weight was apparently 167-4965 grains, and A O, = 8'5676.

Giving this last result triple weight, on account of better observing, we have

as a mean; AO, = 85669: which may be considered the density for all

the weights of this set ; and which will not be altered by the true values of

the weights used, being substituted for the approximate ones,

1880. | J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 47

Section IV.—System of Weighments.

I have adopted a uniform system of weighment for comparing the

weights, Some years ago I made a considerable number of experiments

on the species of errors which occurred in practice, and the present system is

the outcome: there have been minute deviations, but in all material points the

procedure has been uniformly followed, and I think it has been successful

in eliminating all progressive errors. The principal of these is the ten-

dency of the arms of the balance to expand unequally with temperature,

but there are others which have occasionally been found. [annex specimens

of the form I have used in work.

The weights to be compared being placed in the pans, a preponderance

is given to one side of the balance ; so as to make the resting point, when

the whole is in equilibrium, lie on one side of the centre point ; yet so slightly,

that the weight used to get the value of the scale, shall deflect the resting

point to the other side. In the first example with Oertling No. 1, it will

be seen, that with EI in the left pan and O, in the right, the Right Rider

was placed at 1:2 of the beam scale; in this state the index had its

resting point at 7:54 divisions (10 being the middle). ‘Then the weight

P.9, was added to the left side and the resting point became 15°81 Div.

Hach resting point is deduced from 4 readings, two low @, and /,, and

two high #, and h,. The beam having been carefully released, the

first excursion outwards, and the return towards the scale centre, are neglec-

ted; and the next four readings of the extremes of oscillation taken. The

first reading wiil thus usually be low, if the resting point be low ; and high,

if that be high: but, when signs of irregularity occur, this may not be the

case, as I have always, in such eases, freely omitted readings tillthe oscillations

i+ 24+ h

have become regular. Then, supposing a low reading first and

te} a to) to) ? ,

hy + 22, + ho : . Q

So —— would be readings of the resting points, and the sums in the nu-

merators have been rapidly formed separately during the work, added, and

At hy + 3 (4 + fy) |

of course, when / comes first, the h’s take the place of the 2’s in these

formule, and vice versa.

We thus have two “partial weighments’’

18%

EI =o 1

ae 10

divided by 8. This has been afterwards checked by

at 7°54 divisions and

El} oP =O) 2 - at 15-81 divisions

48 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

from which I get, by interpolation, as a result of the “ weighment’

BE = 0, 2p Po aro

: OMe 4 Born TO oO

The second weighment is made after the weights are interchanged in

the pans and the result deduced the same way. These together make one

“comparison ;” and then a second comparison is made, every operation being

followed, but precisely in the reverse order, to make a “ complete compari-

son.” The result of the four equations when summed is

4. KT. = 40, + 0-191 P.) or

EI O, + 0:04775 P..

The interpolations are made with suflicient accuracy with a slide

rule.

In all the comparisons of the O set and P set, except those of EI

with O,, which were made with the balance Oertling No. 1, I have used

one of the riders (the right) to add a constant weight to one side and

the other in variable positions. Assuming that the rider can be accurately

placed on the divisions, and that these are sufficiently accurate, it seems

to me that I may safely use the rider in this way, and that the error of

determination of the weight of the rider will thus be of less importance

than that of a small weight,

In the case of the very small weights I have added the weight P,, to

one pan, and P,* to the other, in order to steady them, with great ad-

vantage.

Section V.—Determination of O,, in terms of the English

Commercial Pound

I have before mentioned that [ have received as a Standard a Troy

ounce of Platinum-Iridium, whose weight in terms of the Parliamentary

Standard Pound PS. is 479:95979 grains of PS.; and I have explained

the relations between the English Standard Pound and the commercial

Pound. In order that I may determine the errors of the Bullion set of

Weights, it is necessary that I should determine O, in terms of the English

Commercial Pound: I have it is true the determination made in London,

but it is necessary to verify this, not only to make the standard of weight

now, identical with that I should get again, but also because the gilt

weights may have slightly changed in the long voyage.

The Barometer I have used is an Aneroid Barometer by Brown-

ing, which I have found give corrected Barometer readings without

sensible error. I have, except in the first comparison, used two Ther-

mometers which were examined for me some years ago at Kew, and

whose zero point I have recently re-determined: these were suspended in

the balance case of Oertling No, 1, so as to hang about half way between

1880. ] J. BF. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 49

the pillar carrying the central plane, and the suspensions of the scale pans.

The Humidity has been deduced from a new Masons Hygrometer: I have

not the errors of its Thermometers, but they are modern, and not likely to

have any producing sensible corrections to my result.

The following is a specimen of computation for the comparison of EI

and O, which is entered in the type form ; in it, v EI = volume of water

at its greatest density which is displaced by HI at 32°. F.

wt. EI _ 479:95979

: es BID999TI ed anor

it therefore = ALES = OL4l4 [135051]

nee 479:99760

similarly » O, = 8.5669 [1°74842

May 24th, 1879 a. u.

Commenced at 6h. 48 m. Ended at 7h. 33m.

Dry Bulb 85.9 F. Dry Bulb 85-4

Vapour Tension

0960 in.

Wet do. |

0:998 in. 5-3

Wet do. 80:1

Diff, 4:9

° in.

Mean of Thermometers 85'5 Mean Red. Barometer 29:605

Correction 0:00 0:189(0'993 +0-960) =0'369

Mean Temperature 85°50 h. = 29236 log — 1:46592

log At (Tab I.) 5°59005

TOBY ~~ soosecsooscoadgade coviebdcoospodoo | Obes

log v EI ...... 1°35051 log v O, ... 1°74842

(Tab. ILI.) log(1 + HE Pt) 000035 (Tab. III.) log (1 + EH By) ... 0:00066

Air displaced by HI PAGE 3 Air displaced by O, i aneaeyayys -

= 0025517 grs. i poche anos ENO OGaCadiars ye

grains.

Weight EI in Vacuo = 479:95979 of PS.

— 0:025517

Air displaced

EI = 479934273

Air displaced byO,;= + 0°068854:

Op = 10 0:000475*

0; = 479:997632

* In section LV, I found EI = O, + 0°4775 P.o, and (Sec, VI) P.o, = 0°009947 grains.

50 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

Abstract of Comparisons.

1879 May 24, O, = 479:997632 P S. grain.

¥ 38-3 ‘997489 ce

4 30) -996732 is

¥ Bide ‘997266

ove yanet eee ‘996911

Mean O, = 479°997206 + 0:000115 PS. grains.

I have received, from the Meteorological Reporter to the Government

of Bengal, the following mean data for Calcutta which I take as the defini-

tion of Standard Air

in.

Reduced Barometer,... 29°787

° h AA

Temperature,...:.. 00+ 790 F. eerie

Humidity, ............... 0:76 pereent.

Hence I have weight of O,; = 479°997206 grains of P S,

Deduct displaced Standard Air = — 0:065178

Add Standard Air for 2.595 + 0:068571

O, = 480°000599 grains of English Com-

— mercial Pound.

This valve differs slightly from that sent me and which I have quoted

before.

Section VI.—On the determination of the errors of single weights.

In the interval between O, and Oj, there are, in all English bullion sets,

weights O;, O,, O3, and O,; so between Oy and Ojo) come Ogy Os) Ow

and O;), and so on.

Between these weights we may make comparisons giving the following

equations :

Oy = O; + O, + O, + m + e (2)

= 0, + 0, + O2 + a, + e (0)

= 0, + 0; + O. + 0, + 2”) + e (¢)

O, = 0, + O, + &@+e e being the p. e. of one com-

O; = O, + Og + #, +e [ parison,

O, = O03 + Oj 7

O, = O35 + O; +a, +e

Hence we have O, = 2 0, + 7,— #3 + # te /3_

0, =8 0, + 2; + %,— %y + ay te W/4

O, = 40, + #5 .+ 2%, — #3 + % + ern/7

O;=5 0, +a, + 2x, — ay + 2ay + e 4/10

1880. ] J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 51

= 10 O) + 2a, + 4a, — 27, + 84, +a, te n/ 34 from (*)

= 10 O, + 2a; + 4a, — 8a, + 4a, + x + e 4/46 from (5)

= 10 0, + 2a; + 4a, — 83 + 8x, +2,” + e «/39 from (c)

which equations give the ascending series ; and it is important to note, that

if the probable error of the observations be alike, there is a disadvantage in

using any comparison but (@), and that even if (b) and (c) be observed as

checks, they should not be used in computing, as they will lower the weight

of Oj), on the accuracy of which we are dependent for continuing the up-

ward series; thus the mean value of O,, from (@) and (ec) will be

Oy = 10 0, +4 a, + 4a, — 5a, + 6a, + #, + a,”) + @ 9/248

and if the series (0) had been involved the loss of probable accuracy would

O19

have been greater.

Next as to descending or decreasing series from Wyp.

1sé. Descending through (a)

0, = 1501. + 5 te V/H

O, = 0) OF al ste (22, al An ts, 22, — 275 — 4z,) =e /

O, = 35 015 + do (47, — Qn, —4ae, + , —8a,) + 0 a/ 88

oO, = to O10 ScG (42, — 20, at 6a, Seals ts 20) te A/a

O, = 2) %10 > we (20, + 4, — 2, + 8, + 2.) to / 3h.

Again descending through (0)

0, = 75915 +a, —2,’) t @ 4/20

0, = To O10 sti To Qe, ah dar, at; 20, — 62, ce A) stage, / 78

O; = ws Ore + ro Ge,;'— 27, — 2, — 24, — 32,’) te / 3

O, = 3 0,, — as (40, — 2a, + 4e, — Qn, + Qx,!) + 0 Af 38

O, = 75019 — ay (Qu, + de, —8e, + de, + a,') + 0 45,

Also descending through (¢)

v, +2, —e# ——

5 3 2 1 =

= 35, 0,5 + ———— + 6/75

O, 5

=e 1 , me feta

oO, = re) Onc oT TO (22, ate Ae 4 al 22, =a 2%, =a He ) ae M2

AV , 5 O a!

OF = 0 Oo as to (Ca a, ce big BR) ae) / 28

= + uv , . y , at 56

O, = 3% 0., — vo Ge, — 2u, + de, —4e, + 2¢,") t+ ec / 58

1 A ‘ ; W\ ° ison

O, = 01. — we (4, + 4a, —327, + 82, + @,") “te J/ 22,

If we were to be guided here by the same consideration as before, we

should absolutely prefer the use of series (a) alone, but it is easy to see,

that as the probable error of O, involves only 5 of that of O,,; the

52 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

determination of its weight will be almost entirely dependent on the error

generated in the comparisons of the group* of the series, and not on that

derived from the starting weight: this renders the choice less important.

As a matter of fact I have worked both through (a) and (6) taking

the mean result and in this case.

O, = 15 015 + 2 +, + 4-1 @;’) ¥ e af 25

fi is 910 + vo (4a, als 8x4 — 8x, — 42, eS) ze CfA

ro O10 + to (8a, — 4n, — dr, — &, — 3x, 3050) re we

to Ors ap zo (8x, — 4x, ay 10x, —6x, an 2a, cE 22,’) te / $2

1 = ts O10 — ao (Ae, + 84, —5a, + TH, + x, + x,') + e A/ 32,

My choice was a matter of accident, but it turns out that the sum of

the squares of the probable errors of all the deduced weights is less than for

any one of the single series.

The other system of weights, which I have in this paper slightly to

deal with, is what I shall call the “ English grain system.’ In it the weights

interpolated between 10 and 1 are 6,3 and 2. Thus starting from either

end of the decad there are four weights to be derived; but among these

weights alone, only three equations can be obtained.

Poses Bie ae ee tea aes

IPs =P, +P. + Py. x,

| earl eter ae a + x5.

To make a definite resect the best plan is to use a second P, called

P,’: P.. + P., + P., from the next lower decad height be used but the

equations would not be independent for the separate decads.

PoP Pee wand tke eae

and we now have 5 equations to determine 5 quantities, and the result is

definite. Of course by substituting P’, for P,, we can get 3 more equations

like the first three, but the labour would be increased, and the result would

still be definite, though slightly more accurate, especially as regards the

spare weight P,’.

From the equations we have ; 7x ascending (increasing weights)

Pa! = Pee tae:

P,=2P,—2, +2, +eV/2

Pr = PP, — 2, an, iy tie V8

* T use the term decad to include the weights from 0:1 to 1, or from 1 to 10, &c.,

the last being ten times the first; and a group of equations consists of those connecting

the weights of a decad,

1880. ] J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 53

P, =6P, —2e, + 2a, +a, +2, +er/10

P= 10P, —3n, + 8”, + 20, + x, + 2, tor/ 24.

While descending, we have

P, = vy Pio — wy (2x, — 2, + 20, — do, + Ox) 0 TS

P, = 3 P..— dv @, — %, — 4a, + 3a, + 8x,) + @ </ 38

P, = Yo Pio — vo Aw, — 4a, + do, + 2a, + 2x,) te Vie

Pro Pio te oes = 82,4 = 22, — %, — #1) te J te

P,!= ty Pio — th (Te, + 82, + 2x, +, + a,)t0V/ HB

Section VII.

T now proceed to the determination of the actual values of the weights

below O,, and of the P set, in commercial grains. The equations have all

been determined in terms of the rider R,, in the balance Oertling No. 1, and

they are given in this way. Of course the whole of the computations were

made with this unknown factor, but it has been determined (see page 56)

and the value has been substituted in the results to save repetition.

The differences between the two determinations of the constant term in

each equation are given, and from them is derived a probable error of one

equation. I had intended that the observations in each decad should be

separately valued, but when that is done the results are so nearly alike

that it seems unnecessary to adhere to this. The mode of determining the

probable error of each weight is the subject of the next section, but the

values are given in this.

Value of Weights of W set below W, with Balance Oertling No. 1.

T have here the following equations :

Oo, =0., +0., +0., —0213325R, Difference = 2600

O,. =O, +O, =O, =Ormrws, » = 1450

On) SO) 2G. —0:001800 ,, 3. = 850

Ox, =OF, 20) — 0:124325 ,, ee R500

Oh TO SHO, — 0:002918 ,, yoy een 825

ONO =O. —0:011118 ,, ye eG

0., =90.,, +0... + 0.., —0°033200 R, Difference = 200

On Opn “On, Ons OW PPI > = 2925

Ol = On mesons — 0-020938 ,, y= 45

Ones SOR tO — 0032138 ,, » = 1475

On =O PO — 0-030838 ,, a t= aS

Onn = Orr tiOtae — 0:035763 ,, A = 475

5 4 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

0.5, =O0.505 + O-o04+90-001 ——0°012263R, Difference = 425

Ogg <= Oss 5g tO aac OFng, —- 070215007, » °= 150

O:jes = 0.95, 20) — 0-0769683 ,, » = 1625

Og SO: e8 Ores — 0:040638 ,, i 675

0.5 0.0 nO ae — 0-093775 ,, » = 100

Oroag = Olgs —t Orod's —0.016100R, Difference = 200

From these equations I deduce

gers. grs.

O.. 240:000300 + 0:056006 R, 240:005927 p.e. = 0:000064

Or, 192:000240 + 07127762 ,, 192:0138076 », 0:000060

Oo: 144000180 + 0:1006381 ,, 144010290 » 0°00004:7

0:; 96:000120 + 0:081700 ,, 96:008328 », 0:000048

Ox 48:000060 + 0:080044 ,, 4:8°003078 5, 0°000037

Ove 24000080 + 0°020606 _,, 24002100 » 0°000033

OF, 19:200024 + 0:015988 _,, 19°201630 5, 9°000040

14402155 » 0°000033

9-603180 4 0000042

4802574 » _0:000035

2-403111 » 0:000033

1926559 » 0°000040

1:438193 » 0:000033

0:963329 0000042

0:484284 » 0:000035

12-003642 » _0:000077

14°400018 + 0:021269_,,

9600012 + 0:031475 ,,

4800006 + 0:025537 ,,

2-400003 + 0-030932._,,

1:920002 + 0:065261 ,,

1:440002 — 0:018011 ,,

0960001 + 0:033130_,,

0-480001 + 0:042634. ,,

coos = 12-000015 + 0:036101 ,,

The two largest weights P,, and P;*, of the P set are each approxi-

mately equal to 24 grains and their sum is of course nearly = O., but

they are of platinum while O., is of gilt bronze. Small as these are the

errors cannot be neglected when accuracy is required. The purpose of

the determination being mainly to get the values of the small weights of

the P set with accuracy so that they may be used to determine differences,

it is enough to correct the value above given of O., so that the deduced

value of P.,, + P34 may be the same as if the comparison had been

made in standard air. For all ordinary purposes the resulting values of

these weights may be used without correction.

I have found that 48 grains of platinum would weigh less in my

standard air than under the circumstances of the observation by 0.000063

grains. AlsoO, =P,, + PX, + 0:050288 R,.

oO °o (sy atc} wey KS}

oo oF Nw

to cs) a

ro)

Heo hte

2999999090

grs.

The value of O., is = 48'000060 + 0:030044 R,

“. in actual air P,, + P35 = 48:000060 — 0:020194 R,

and the correction to standard air is — 0°000063 .

Hence in standard air P,, + P3 = 47:999997 — 0:020194 R,

1880.]

J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights.

Diff.

Bee te —M + 0:020194 R, = 0:275

‘Py Ie — 0:006438 ,, = 0-475

ie —a P, 12, —0:012918 ,, = 0°1125

Do soles =p. =P + 0:000125 ,, = 0.650

Lill A —P, —P, + 00101388 ,, =0°900

Pes —P,,—P,—P, —P, —0008500 ,, =025

Pie Pg re — 0.018400 ,, = 01700

Pio—P,—Ps —P, — 00048138 ,, =0775

P,—P,—P.,—P, + 0:018908 ,, =0375

P,—P,—P, + 0015463 ,, =01075

P,—P, —P’, + 0009388 ,, =01175

P, — P’,—0°005838 ,, = 01275

T have tried various ways of dealing with these equations but, when

the probable errors are wanted, the method of least squares is the easiest.

I thus get—

grs. grs.

P,, = 23'999999 — 0:006997 R, = 28:999296 p. e. = 0:000042

P*, = 23:999999 — 0:003185 ,, = 23°998679 ,, 0:000042

P,, = 19:999999 — 0:014515 ,, = 19998541 ,, 0:000050

P,, = 15:999999 — 0:006007 ,, = 15:999396 ,, 0:000049

P,, = 9999999 — 0009026 ,, = 9:999092 ,, 0:000043

P, = 6:000000 — 0:0155381 ,, = 5998440 ,, 0-000013

P, = 8:000000 — 0006360 ,, = 2999361 ,, 0:000035

P, = 2:000000 + 0:001871 ,, = 2:000187 ,, 0:000050

P, = 1:000000 + 0:008077 ,, = 1000811 ,, 0:000039

P’, = 1:000000 + 0:002461 ,, = 1:000247 ,, 0:000048

Further P, = P., + P., + P., + 0:000088R, Diff. 725R,

Po=P., + P., + P., + 0:005525 ,, 55 OF;

Bo = Pe P., — 0:004675 ,, e 500 ,,

Pig = Rt By + 0:006963 ,, el o2om,.

P= Pee + 0:005818 ,, 55 525 ,,

ers.

Whence P., = 0°600000 + 0 002673 R, = 0:600269 p.e. = 0:000056

P., = 0°300000 + 0:005647 ,, = 0800567 ~—,, ~—- 0000035

P., = 0:200000 + 0:002832 ,, = 0:200285 ,, 0:000042

P., = 0°100000 + 0:000842 ,, =0100085 ,, 0000028

P’., = 0:100000 — 0:004971 ,, = 0:099501 ,, 0:000045

T shall for convenience write M for 47-999997 grains and place the equations so far as

they are necessary to determine the weights down to P, in a form suitable for use thus—

56 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

By weighing the riders against the nearly equal weight P., I have

R P., + 0:008813 R, Diff. 425

R, = P., + 0000875 R, sa), 000

Substiguting Brecon for “the value of R,, of P.,, and of R,

we get

ers.

R, = 0.1003814 + 0 000847 R, = 0-100466 grs. p. e. = 0:000062

R, = 0100000 + 0:001217 R, = 0100122 ,, ,, =0-000062

MiP. =P. 4 P.,, - 0080088R, = Dit ms

P.oe = Prog + Prog: + 0'104750 ,, ice clB5O

P.,, = Pop + 0:105075 ,, : 900

P.., = 0:099438 ,, ‘ 137

Whence P.,, = 2 P., — 0:059467 R, = 0:060769 p. e. = 0:000047

P.o, = 2P., — 0029571 ,, =0-030400 ,, — 0:000034

P.,, =+P., —0:134646R, =0-019881 ,, 0000047

Po. = 0.099438 , =0009956 ,, 0:000056

Section VII1.—Determination of the probable errors of the values of the

O and P sets.

In Section VI, I have shown that if the probable error of the constant

terms in the equations of a group be known, we can determine the probable

errors of the determinations in the group, so far as they depend on it: and

we have now to consider what may be taken as the probable error of one

determination.

Each coefficient of R is derived in the preceding work from two

determinations which rarely agree. The differences are noted in terms

of the 6th decimal place of the coefficient. If we were certain that the

true values of the constants lay between the determinations, then, calling

the difference of the two 2a, we should have ae = the mean of errors

Sa,

and p. e. of an equation =e = 0°8454 Tae but this value is clearly too

small; because, if the occurrence of positive and negative errors be equally

probable, then there is an even chance that a fourth of the values of 2a

will be the difference and not the sum of the two actual errors.

I prefer therefore to use the formula

a/m (m—t1)

mean of errors = : m being the number of complete

comparisons

and probable error = 0°8454. ——=====

; n/m (m—1) c=

applying this to any one determination we shall have its probable error

= 0°8454 —— = 0:8454. J/2a = = 11955 @

1880. ] J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 57

Of course this is a very uncertain estimation, but we have a good

many such equations, and the mean of the values may I think be taken as

the fairest estimate. If then m be the number of equations, I take

p. é. of any one determination is 171955 ora

The group of equations determining the P weights would give the probable

error from their residuals ; but, there being only 12 equations to determine 10

quantities, I do not think this is so satisfactory as the above method; and I

have used, for evaluating the errors in them, the weights of the results,

deduced as usual, combined with the p. e. of an equation derived as above.

Assuming that we may neglect the difference between the values of R,

and R, in these differences, we have 41 values of 2 a; and it does not seem

that there is any marked tendency to decrease with the weights: I therefore

take the mean of all and I get

= = 463'538 R p. & = 55416 R = 55°651 = e of Section VI

s6R, + 5R,

_ Hence e? is 8097:0

The probable error of any determination as of that of O.,, for in-

stance, depends :—

in which R is taken 0:100464 =

1st on the amount arising from its own group.

2nd probable error of the value assumed as known: in this case O.,

38rd on the probable error of the rider which was employed in taking

the difference of weights in the pans.

Lastly O, itself has its probable error 0:000115 grains from the deter-

minations ; but there is also a portion dependent on P.,,, which is involved

in determining the difference between it and EI, the mean factor of P.,,_

being 0:0877. It is necessary, therefore, to start our evaluations with

values of the probable errors of R, R, and P.,,; and, fortunately, these

are readily determined.

Let E be the p. e. of P., from all sources except R,

e as before the p. e. of one determination

e the p. ce. of R,

Tt will be seen from the table of deduction of probable errors that the

value of H? is 758:2 and that it involves nothing unknown.

Hence (p.e. R,)? = ¢?

= (1:003813)? EH? + (0:000842)? «2 + e

= 764:0 + 00000007 «? + 3097:0 = 38861:0

1 SS

“.€ = 0:000062 = 7; / 38610

58 J. ¥. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

il: ees deveulLss

mae o/ 3861-0 = 0.000062

p.e. Pio, = Se? + 0:0994382 (R,)? = 4/3135°2 = 0000056

Determination of Probable Hrrors.

again p. e. Ry = »/ B® + e® + 0-000375? &?

Squares of Probable Errors (unit is 6th decimal place).

From Probable

From : From From From error.

au seree preceding EL a Pus Total.

grouy ; : 1 o1

groups.

O, 13225:°0 ae 24-1 | 132491 |0:000115

O;; 7743 aS 3306°2 12-1 6-0 4098'6 64

Oey, 1362°7 aes 21160 64:2 39 35463 60

O., 960°1 oy 1190°3 41-1 2:2 2193°7 47

On 17343 sf 529°0 257 iLO 2290:°0 48

Oe 1207'8 ae 132°3 35 0:2 1343°8 37

Oi 7743 301:9 33°1 16 OL 1111°0 33

O15, | 1862°7 193:2 21:2 1:0 % 15781 40

O55 960'1 108°7 11:9 189 7/ re 1082°4 33

O.,, | 17843 48°3 53 3°8 5 1791-7 42

One | 12078 12:1 1:3 2°5 $ 1223°7 35

Opel TAtS 305:0 0:3 3°7 ry 1083°3 33

Ono4| wBG27 195:2 0-2 16°4: “ 15745 40

O.56s)-, 9004 109°8 O1 1:2 Pr 1071:2 33

O.565| 173843 48°8 O1 42 55 1787°4 42

Oe ln L208 12:2 be 7:0 FA 1227:0 30

Oe cis 80920) |22861:9 8:3 19°8 ss 5987°0 rie

Pi, | 14475 301°9 331 0-2 Ol 1782'8 42,

PA, | 1447-5 301°9 33°1 3 O1 1782°6 42

Po Wee l0e 209°7 22:9 % a 2543°2 50

Pas 2229°2 1842 14-7 O-1 53 2378'2 49

Pi, | 1806-4 52°4 57 5 5 1864:5 43

tea 148-1 189 0-9 0:5 . 168°4 13

Pe 1245°2 47 05 Ol 3 1250°5 35

P, | 2541°5 24 0-2 = i 2543'8 50

ips 14905 0-5 - 0:3 Fe 1491°3 39

127 1836:0 05 Bs a 5 1836°5 43

Re 2601°5 53869 * Pe 5 31388°4 56

P., | 11149 | 184-2 i o is 1249°1 35

ips. 17346 59°6 Ss a + 17942 42,

ps 743°3 14:9 ff fs i 7582 28

P., | 1982-1 14-9 és ‘ - 19970 45

1880. ] J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 59

Also p.c.P.95 = a / 20646 +169°5 +136 = aw 22477 = 0-000047

p.e.P.os = are / 10823 + 8424133 = =, 11298 = 0000034

p.e.P.y, = oe / 20646 + 8424700 = =. a/ 2218'8 = 0:000047

Sucrron IX.—Determinations of the Weights O, toO,,. and also Prinsep’s

Bronze Troy Pound.

The comparisons of the weights from O, to O,, have been made with

the balance Oertling No. 2. ‘Three complete comparisons were made in

each case, and the weight P.,, has been always used for valuing the scale.

I have deduced the following equations of condition :—

ers.

O, =0,+0, — 037200 P.,, =0,+0, 0:000000—0-37200 P.,,

O, =0,+0,+P.,,+0°74542 P.,, = 0, +0, +0:060769 +0-74542 P.,,

O, =0,+0,+P., +0°37867 P.,, =O0,+0, +0:100085 + 0:37867 P.,,

=0,+0,+P.,,+0°60467 P.,, = 0,+0, +0°019881 +0-60467 P-,.,

O,,=0,+0,+0, —P., — P.., + 045742 P.,, =O, + 0, +0,—

0°160854 + 0:45742 P.,,

Whence I deduce by the Formule in See. VI.

O, = 20,+ P.o,+ P.o.— P., + 0:97142P.,, = 960:011294 ers.

(p. €.—0:°000757 _,,

Ono OF TE. +.) Pos — Ba, + 059942 ~~) = 1440-000584.

p.e.=0'000900__,,

O, = 40,4+2P.,,+ P.o.— P., + 134484 ,, =1920:084613 ,,

p.e.=0°001194 ,,

O, = 50,+2P.,,+2P..,— P., +194951 ,, =2400°123435 _,,

p.€.=0:001438 ,,.

0,,=100,+3P.,, +3P.,.,—3P., + 375167 ,, =4800-061736 ,,

p. €.=0:002795 _,,

In the last Section, I have given a general formula for finding a

probable error of observation. In this case, I have } (0) = 3941-2 as,

whence the probable error of one equation of condition will be

gonehy Bow = 0:000413'5

n/ 3:2 10°

The probable error of each determination of a weight depends—-

Ist, on its error derived from O, of which it is nearly a multiple,

2nd, on the error derived through the weights of the P set used to

nearly counterbalance,

= 0°8454

60 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

8rd, on the error due to the fraction of P.,, which is involved in

its determination,

4th, on the error generated in the weighings of the series.

The following Table shows the error from each source separately.

Weights. Eauil Weijol Probable

quil. eighments Tare

Os Weights. Pros | of Series. Total.” | Error x 10%.

O, 52900 5225 | 1179 514116 573420 757

O, 119025 5225 44.9 685488 810187 900

O, 211600] 11968 | 2259 1199600 | 1425427 1194

O, 330625| 18624 | 4747 1713720 | 2067716 1438

O,, |1922500| 47022 | 47581 5826648 | 7818751 2795

In making these calculations, I have neglected to attend to the fact

that the P weights used have a common origin; the sum of the squares

of the probable errors given in the Table at the end of Section VIII

is taken, and here (as will be seen by turning back) the error from their

common origin O., is unfelt, but this is not always the ease.

Among the weights in the Assay Office is a bronze Standard Troy

J. FTELD ; , and in ink

Pound in a wooden ease, on which case is stamped { Fécit

is written

J. age |

Std. 1 tb

On the weight itself is engraved—

British Troy Pound,

= 65760 grains.

Boval fHint.

The surface of the weight is thinly oxidized, but it seems to be quite

uninjured. I some time ago compared it, as well as I could, with the

weights of the Gilt Troy set belonging to the Assay Office, which were

supplied many years ago, and which were made by Bates in 1824. No

record of any previous comparisons of these exists. ‘Che conclusion I

came to was, that Prinsep’s Troy Pound was about a mean of all the Gilt

Pounds, the latter weights having sensible errors. JI have then thought

it worth while to determine the value of the Prinsep’s Pound, and I find—

Prinsep’s Pound =O0,, + O, + P, + P.,, — 0487 P.,,

= 5760°148354 grains,

from a single complete comparison.

1880. | J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 61

To find the probable error of this we must substitute in the above equation

the symbolic values of O,, + O, and thus we have—

Prinsep’s Pound =120,+ P.,., + 4P.., +4P.,, —3P., +4 23606 P.,,

from which the probable error will (when the errors generated in deter-

mining O, and O,,, and also in the single comparison of this weight are

allowed for)

1 aa

= 750/ 8878998 = 0:002890

and we may consider Prinsep’s Pound = 57607148 + 0.003 grains.

Sncrion X.—Oonsiderations as to the Weights which should be made use of

in @ series.

The only generally used decimal system of weights, is the metric,

which is so largely diffused. In it the weights between W, and W,, are

W., W, in duplicate, and W,. When the system was adopted in England

permissively, the intermediate weights chosen were W, W, and W,. The

other series in use, are those I have described before as the Bullion, and the

English Grain Series. In making a series of weights of tolahs for the use

of the Indian mints, I have therefore a choice ; and it is worth considering

which series is the best.

Oommercially, the fewer weights required to make any weighment, the

better. I think, too, that-commercially it is undesirable to have duplicate

weights, and of course none should be superfluous. In the strict Hrench

Metric system there are 3 weights required to weigh 9 and 8, while two are

wanted for 7, 6, and 3, and the 2 is in duplicate ; and in the Hnglish modifi-

cation there are 3 weights wanted for 9 only, while 8, 7, 6, and 4 require

two each, and there is no duplicate: I think then that the English modi-

fication is preferable to the original system.

In our Hnglish Bullion system there are never 8 weights wanted for

any purpose; and 9, 8, 7, and 6 require two weights. But there are more

weights than are wanted, there being 5 weights in each decad instead of 4.

Inthe English Grain system there are never 3 weights wanted; 9, 8, 7, 5.

and 4 require two each, there are no duplicates, and none superfluous. I think

then that the English Grain system is the best for commercial purposes.

Scientifically, the best system is that of which the values can be most

accurately deduced from the standard Prototype. It is worthy of note,

that neither of the Metric systems, nor the English Grain system, admit

of the weights of a decad being completely determined without a second

unit in each decad.

This is not an unmixed disadvantage. The 1, 10, &c., being necessary

for this purpose only, and not used in common, may be kept separately, and

referred to for verifications whenever desired, and by such use the errors

of the weights of any decad, can be determined with comparatively little

62 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. (No. 1,

labour and without its being necessary to refer back to a primary weight.

Thus, checking becomes much more manageable, and, by such a plan

as I have adopted in dealing with the P set, one of the duplicates is far

more accurately determined than the other, and can be laid aside for re-

ference ; the accuracy of the second being ordinarily sufficient.

The English Bullion system, as we have seen, contains the means of

determining the values of all the weights without duplicates, and it is

possible to have one weight practically unused, if we consent to make either

8 or 9 by three weights ; this reference weight, however, is not so convenient

for use as in the other cases.

The English Grain system has this advantage over all the others, that

any weight from 1 to 10 requires at most two weights to make it. It has

the disadvantage that 6 is not the half of ten, but, on the other hand, 3 is

the half of 6; and I do not see the great gain of this relation, unless it be

admitted that the system of division should be binary. In France, it was

proposed that each multiple of a unit by ten, and each division by ten,

should be a new unit. Some slight gain might have come if this had

become a thoroughly practical procedure ; but, in fact, one rarely hears of

any but the kilogramme, gramme, and milligramme, and so of the other

numbers of the series. I think, then, that the advantage of being able to

have a single weight for half a hectogramme, &c. is dearly purchased, if

there be a disadvantage in the determinations ; and, in deciding on a system

of weight, it is necessary to consider the probable errors of these deter-

minations.

In each of these proposed systems, 5 comparisons, giving 5 equations,

are enough to connect all the weights in a decad. If this number be

alone used, then the probable errors of W,, derived from W, will be

English Grain System...... 6 / 24

” —— (if the best equa-

» Bullion ............ en/ tion be taken.

Sean Wet rick eases 6 a/ Bo

Original Metric ............ e RYE 26

In this respect the English Grain system seems best, and the Modified Metric

System the worst. The Original Metric system is nearly as good as the

English Grain system, and it is possibly better if a good deal more labour

be given to each ; but I think—when it is considered that weighing by the

English Grain system requires only two weights iu each decad, and that

the standard system should coincide if possible with that in use—the palm

will be assigned to the Grain system.

I think, too, that those who have gone with me so far, will feel as

strongly as myself the great gain of a “large primary unit.” It has

1880. | J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. 63

always been considered necessary to have the primary unit very indestructi-

ble, and no doubt this is a very important point: the lead was taken in

France, where the Normal IGlogramme was made of platinum ; platinum was

again used in England for the Standard Pound, and now standards of re-

ference are made of a Platinum-iridium alloy. The cost of the mere metal

is very heavy (a kilogramme is at present worth £60 for mere material),

and the use of such a metal for large weights is of course out of the ques-

tion. It seems to me doubtful whether equal accuracy could not be

obtained by employing a large weight of gilt or nickelized bronze; from

which copies could be made with far greater accuracy than they could be

separately deduced from the small primary. It is possibly too late to

change the material of Primary Standards now, but at all events the

standard of Commercial Weight should be a large mass of gilt bronze.

Acting on these principles, I have nearly made a set of weights from

1000 tolahs to 0-001 tolah from these bullion weights, There will be

several copies of the largest, carefully compared, some of which I trust

Government will allow me to distribute. The individual weights are on

what I have called the English Grain system: that is, there are—

1000 tolahs. 100 tolahs. 10 tolahs. 1: tolahs. 0°10 tolahs. 0:010 tolahs.

600 __,, 60. =, CE On msn O;0G7 1 i O;006U 58

- SOME Mom a jee Orome es (O05...) es OM03) =)

200) >}; PAO) 6p Ze een Osten O; 02m uw an O;O02K)) 2.

I0O > 1) 55 As ates Opler smd Of OBrien OO a gees,

The final adjustments and deductions have yet to be made; but after what

T have said, there will be little new in this. I have been very greatly

assisted by Mr. Durham, Senior Assistant in the Assay Office, who has

superintended all of the gilding; and to whom I owe devices which will

allow the gilt weights to be made true almost to the accuracy of a single

comparison by substitution.

Tasre I.

Logarithms for calculating the Weight of the Air adapted to Fahrenhett’s

Thermometer.

This Table gives 10 + the logarithm of the ratio which the weight of

air at the temperature named and at Calcutta bears to that of the same

volume of water when at its maximum density, the logarithm of the height

of the barometer,

If B be the reading of the barometer reduced to freezing point ; the

temperature and V the elasticity of the vapour in the air

then log sq. of air = Ay + log (B — 0:238 V).

64 J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

The value of At at sea-level in latitude 45° can be got from these

numbers by adding 0:000785:7 to each and thence the value for any other

place.

a Ay [AM Ag, el Ar AMAL] 2 At [AM Ag,

= = =

30° | 5°6866164 | 8848 | 55°| 56150200 | 8419 | 80°|5-5944469 | 8080

1 | 6857316 | 8880 | 6] 6141781 | 8402 | 1] 5936489 | 8015

32 | 6348486 | 8812 | 7 | 6183379 | 83887 | 2 | 5928424 | 8000

3 | 6339674 | 8794} 8 | 6124992 | 83871] 38 | 5920423 | 7985

4 | 6330880 | 8776 | 9 | 6116621 | 8354] 4 | 5912438 | 7971

35 | 5°6322104 | 8759 | 60 |5°6108267 | 8338 | 85 | 55904467 | 7957

6 | 63138345 | 8741 | 1 | 6099929 | 8323 | 6} 5896510 ; 7942

if 6304604 | 8724 ] 2 | 6091606 | 8806] 7 5888568 | 7927

8 | 6295880 | 8705 | 38 | 6083300 | 8291} 8] 5880641 | 7913

9 | 6287175 | 8689 | 4 | 6075009 | 8275 | 9 | 5872728 | 7899

40 |5°6278486 | 8671 | 65 | 56066734 | 8258 | 90 | 55864829 | 7884

1 | 6269815 | 8654] 6 | 6058476 | 8244] 1 | 5856945 | 7870

2 | 6261161 | 8687 | 7 | 6050232 | 8227 | 2] 5849075 | 7856

3 | 6252524 | 8619} 8 | 6042005 | 8212] 38 | 5841219 | 7841

4 | 6248905 | 8603 | 9 | 6033793 | 8197 | 4 | 5838378 | 7828

45 | 5°6235302 | 8585 | 70 | 56025596 | 8181 | 95 | 5°5825550 | 7813

6 | 6226717 | 8569 | 1} 6017415 | 8166 | 6 | 5817787 | 7799

7 | 6218148 | 8552 | 2] 6009249 |-8151 | 7 | 5809938 | 7785

8 | 6209596 | 8535 | 3 | 6001098 | 8185 | 8 | 5802153 | 7772

9 | 6201061 | 8518 | 4 | 5992963 | 8120] 9 | 5794381 | 7757

50 | 56192543 | 8502 | 75 | 55984843 | 8105 |100 , 55786624

1 | 6184041 | 8485 | 6 | 59767838 | 8090

2| 6175556 | 8468 | 7 | 5968468 | 8074

38 | 6167088 | 8452 | 8 | 5960514 | 8060

4 | 6158636 | 8486 | 9 | 5952514 | 8045

1880. | J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights.

Tasce II,

Logarithm of the Ratio of the Density of Water to its Maximum Density

Sor each degree of Kahrenheit’s Thermometer,

This Table is founded on that given at page 66 &c. of the Report of

the Warden of the Standards for 1871-72. Certain values of the Table

there given, were taken and the constants found to express them in a

series of the form A (¢—~,)? + B (¢—~n,)', and, these having then

been suitably modified to change the scale of the thermometer from

Centigrade to Fahrenheit, the present Table was computed.

q' |Log. Ratio. A® R.| &" |Log. Ratio,A® RJ &' | Log. Ratio. AM R,

a = a

30 55° | 00002400 |+302 | 80°|0:0014313 | 639

1 6 0002702 318 1 |0:0014952 650

2 |0:0000546 |—143] 7 0003020 335 2 0015602 659

3 0000404 |—121] 8 0003355 350 3 0016261 670

4.| 0000283 |— 99] 9| 0003705 | 367] 4 | 0016931 | 679

35 |0:0000184 | — 78] 60 |0-:0004072 | 381 | 85 |0:0017610 | 688

6 OOOOLOG |— 56] 1 0004453 397 6 0018298 698

Uf 0000050 |— 385] 2 0004850 412 Uf 0018996 706

8 0000015 |-— 15] 38 0005262 426 8 0018702 715

9 | 0000000} + 06] 4| o005688| 441] 9] 0020417 | 723

40 |0:0000006 | + 27| 65 |0-0006129 | 455 | 90 |0-0021440 | 732

1 00000383 47| 6 0006584: 469 1 0021872 739

2 OOO00080 66] 7 0007053 483 2 0022611 TAT

3 0000146 86] 8 0007536 497 3 0023358 754

4 0000232 1¢c5| 9 0008083 509 4 0624112 762

45 |0.:0000337 | 124] 70 |0:0008542 | 523 | 95 |0-0024874 | 768

6 O0B00461L 144] 1 | 0009065 535 6 0025642 775

7 CO00605 162] 2 0009600 548 Uf 0026417 782

8 0000767 180] 38 0010148 560 8 0027199 787

9 OOO00947 198| 4 0010708 572 9 0027986 794

50 | 0:0001145 216] 75 |0:0011280 584 }100 | 0 0028780

1 | 0001861 234] 6 0011864 596

2 000 1595 251 7 | 0012460 607

38 | OOOLS4G 269) 8 0013067 617

4 | OOO2115 285] 9 | OO18684 629

Tapin LET

J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights.

[No. 1,

Logarithms for facilitating the Calculation of the Oubical Bupension of

G=M

Gold

— 339'14

1 0000010598

2 | 21196

3 | 31794

4 42392

5 52990

6 63588

7 74186

8 84784

9 95382

Metals.

Log. (1 + EM.)

S=M p= sVi

‘Silver | Platinum

— 441-41) — 20832

0000013794. 0 000006510

27588 13020)

41382 19530

55176) pee

68970 32550

82764 39060

96558 45570

110852 52080

124046) 58590

B=M

Baily’s metal

— 39498.

0 000012343

24686

029

4.9372

61715,

74058

86401

98744:

111087

Br = M

Brass

— 398:27

0:0000 124.46

24892

37338

112014

This table is founded on the supposition that up to 100° of Fahrenheit’s

Thermometer ; log expansion for n° = 2 x log expansion for 1°; which is

true sufficiently. The linear expansions of Gold and Silver have been taken

from Vol. I of Professor Miller’s Chemistry; the others from the paper

in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ on Standard Weights.

The argument of this Table is to be T — 82°; or T itself can be

taken if the number at the head of the column be applied.

Thus for brass at 85°35° we have

Br 50°

0:3

0:05

0:000622°30

37°34

3°73

0°62

0:000663°99

or Br 80° 0:000995:68

5 62:23

3 3°73

05 0:62

Const. — 398:27

0:000663°99

1880.]

J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights.

May 24th, 1879.

Tyee Comparison I.

Comparisons of EI with O,.

Oertling, No. 1.

SCALE

Weight Weight READINGS. | Deduced

on left side. | on right side. Mean. ASL

Low. | High.

R, h. m.

EI O, +1 25 5:7 9°5 7-54 |Commenced at 6-48 A. M.

6:1 9:2 ae :

ae ee, A. Bar. 29:60. Temp. 85:0 fF.

EI+P Do. ISO MSO|. Gea, f ‘ :

13:7 | 17:8 Dry Bulb 85:9. Wet Bulb 810.

> IO | ew | aaa) Ae et

0, | Do. 34 | 107.

38 | 10:3 | §&%

Do. | Foye 3-4} 10-0 <7,

Bo | Oa) | 2ey

OTs Eon Do. 13.3] 16-6 Sets

| 1G | 168 |) 282

JON ae lene O45 jl 1 12°8 | 18:9 ~

sie a i

Bu Do. ae ee 7-6] | Bar. 2961. Temp. 86:0 F.

Dry Pas oe “4 Wet Bulb £01

Ended at m 33 A. M.

k, 2-46 R

Hence EI = O, + 1:2 i 0 Gay on + 1255 — 0297 P.o,.

is a 3.05 e Pele es

EI+0, — 1255 + 3:9 Pion £0 Sa + 0369 P.,,.

R, 3°40 = :

EI + 0, — ———— |B — 4 040402: .

1255 + Zag Fooa a5 (0). 125 a5 On

R, 2:39 R. he

BI = 0, + 127% ——— P.,, +0, + 127% — 0285 P.,,.

4 ET=40, +0191 ace :or EI = 0, + 0:01775 P.,,.

Note.—In the original the succession of observations has been distinguished, but

want of space rendered it necessary to give this up.

68 J. F, Tennant—On Standard Weights. [No. 1,

Type Comparison II.

June 5th, 1879. Oertling No. 1.

Comparisons of O, with O., +O, + 0., =S.

SCALE

Weight Weight | Reraprnes. | Deduced

on left side. on right side. ————j———_| Mean. REMARKS.

| Low. | High.

R R

O; +5 —) |S, +42—"1°' 63.) 102

O ig es D 13:0) |) W920

— oO. mi t

10 13°4| 19-6 129°

06 — pees .

S+06 oy + 497° 30 10-6 ae

S$4+16 R, D Dal a 17-6

— 0. ‘ :

10 (edie) aiz-on) ta 40

Do Do 99 | 19.4

10'4 | 18°8 1449

S +06 ee D 41 9:7

— 0. : i

10 Ga! dda ° 28

O ee S + 42 12°8 | 17:9

1 K 5

10 10 | 33-1 | 17-4 |- 18°40

pe alae! GO ioan wees

10 62| 96

R 1:66\ R R,

H a 92 _ (5-0 fool 23, - gino ;

enceO, =8 4+ 4 i0 (5 +ralies S+ 42 70 05226 R,

hy R, 1 MeSSIONTR: deo RA ee

0,48 427¢ + (06+ 75) ¢ +S—42 7 + o1015R,.

R, 3:02\ R z

“AS — = 0: — —— 2 2

0, 284295 + (00+55)Ga S—4272 +0 .002R,.

18% 201\ R R

Oe 28542 = 950 eee ‘2-2 0:52

1 Te To (5 +a); S+4 i0 0:5272 R,

40, = 48 — 08481 R, or 0, =0., + 0., + O.,.— 0:212025 RB,

1880.]

J. F. Tennant—On Standard Weights.

Tyee Comearison III.

October 22nd, 1879.

Comparisons of O, with O, +0, + P.,, =S.

Oertling No. 2.

ScaLE

Weight Weight Reapinas. | Deduced RaNucnics

on left side. | on right side. Mean. conak

Low. | High

S 0, 95 | 141...

Of) || ES) ates

gi, Pape, 15-0 | 22-7

; 15-5 | 29-2) 18%

o, S +P. 120 146 :

area ree| Tea 618 34

Do. Ss 16°3 | 23:0 10:

167 22:6 |? °°

Do. Do. 16'1 3:3 :

166)| 298|| 2° °°

Do. S+P.,. 12:2 | 14-1 '

ea rae

SDs, lk Oy 15-4 | 21-0

; 15-7 | 207| 1818

s Do. 10:8 | 13:0 3

OG) nee) |) Ae

3:09

Hence 0, = S 669 Fos =S$ + 0-453 P.,..

4°55

0O,=S+ 691 P.o, =S + 0'732 P.,..

4°58

0,48+ = P.,, 48 + 0787P.,,.

3.09

O,=S + G99 108 =§ + 0497 Rare

~ 40, =48+2-419 P.,, and 0, =

S + 060175 P.,,.

0, +0,+P.,,+0°G4475P.,,.

70 H. F. Blanford—On High Atmospheric Pressure [ No.4;

P. 8. June 29th, 1880.—After the earlier part of this paper was

drafted, I learnt that M. St. Claire Deville had proposed to make standards

of the Commercial Kilogram in a new manner. The metal is to be the

Platinum-iridium alloy so as to secure hardness and indestructibility, but, in

order that the density may be nearly that of brass, it is to be hollow, the

parts are to be soldered together by fusion so as to enclose a constant

mass of air, which, of course, will be included in the weighings. This plan

has been adopted by the International Commission for making the Euro-

pean Metric Standards, and will no doubt be a great improvement on the

old Commercial Standard of France, which is made of brass. The volume

of these weights is to be 125 cubic centimetres, so that the density will be

8:0; which is a little lower than that of good sound weights of brass, and

materially lower that that of gilt bronze; while it is greater than that of

iron.

Certainly, the visible Commercial unit, to which reference can be made,

appears preferable to the imaginary unit of England. Such a weight

would vary in Calcutta with respect to the scientific unit to the extent of

about 11 milligrams, and it would be needless to take notice (for commer-

cial purposes) of the much smaller variations with respect to such weight

as may be compared with it.

VI.—On the High Atmospheric Pressure of 1876-78 in Asia and Australia,

im relation to the Sun-spot Cycle.—By Henry F. Buanrorp, Met.

Ltep. to the Govt. of India.

(Received December 24th, 1879 ; Read January 6th, £880.)

(With Plate I.)

The three years 1876, 1877, and 1878, more especially the two former,

were characterized by a deficiency of rainfall in one or many parts of India,

and by a more general and very persistent excess of atmospheric pressure.

With but slight and local interruptions, from August (in some parts of

India from May) 1876 to August (in some cases only to May) 1878, over

the whole of the Indian area, the barometer ranged above the average of

many years. Nor was this excess of pressure restricted to the land. The

the Nicobars, shew that, at these insular stations, the excessive pressure was

of greater duration and more persistent and intense than at any continen-

tal station at or near the sea-level ; indeed, with one striking exception,

more intense than at any other station in the entire region. At these

islands, the pressure rose above the average in May 1876; and, from that

time to August 1878 inclusive, the mean pressure of every month was from

004" to ‘071” in excess of the average ; derived, in the case of Port Blair

“HF BLANFORD, Journ As. Soc. Bengal Vol XLIX.Pt.II. 1880.

8 é 5 S = FS ® 3 x 5 3 2 3 g é é 5 Z -! g eg :

2 2 = % & Ee ® % 2 2 2 & 2 z Ee E z 2 3 z 5 E z

a = Tee 1 a = = Ss ne Lae (ene aot ape St

ia Ak | | —t + : +—- + + ++} —t_ | - | - | pales ———— -—+

| NNUAL! | [VARIATION (OF. BAROMETER | ||AND| |SUNSPOTIS.| |_| a bb

+04 =| i | | | | |

=02 - P

—04 a ul

. sf joes } ee | | es

2 “athe? perch urg| ed Yeh

: (pee anna nacal

| | | | |

VARIATION

+O0A

i sageerae Gar

ats SE JIS SY

DIRECT

os VW. |

CNSR aI

Sul | |

r —

1880. | in Relation to the Sun-spot Cycle. 71

from eleven, and, in that of Nancowry, from six years’ registers. On the

mean of the whole period and of the two stations, the excess amounted

to 0327’.

The single exceptional station, which shews a greater average excess

than the Bay islands, is the hill station of Darjiling in the Sikkim Hima-

laya, at an elevation of nearly 7000 feet above the sea. At this station,

where the barometer has been registered steadily for upwards of 12 years,

the mean excess of the same period of 28 months was not less than -0382’ ;

or, since the first rise took place in August 1876, the mean of the whole

unbroken period of 25 months’ excess was ‘0379”. On the plains of Bengal,

the mean excess (average of six stations) was only ‘0298 on the 28 months

and 0354 on the 25 months, a reduction, as compared with Darjiling, which

is probably explained by the fact that, in Bengal, as indeed generally in

India, the mean temperature of the air was also on the whole considerably

in excess of the average; so that the stratum of air resting on the plains

had less than the average density. This fact is of pregnant importance ;

for it shews that the excessive pressure in question was due to the condition

of the higher atmosphere ; of those strata, at all events, that lay above the

elevation of 7000 feet ; and that, in fact, the prevailing excess, instead of

being caused by the conditions recorded at observatories on the plains, was

to some extent counteracted by a deficiency in the mass and static pressure

of the lower strata.

In his report on the Meteorology of India in 1877, Mr. Eliot drew

attention to the persistently high barometric pressure of that year, and

pointed out that the barometric registers of Sydney and Melbourne in

Australia also “indicated, on the whole, a marked tendency to excessive

pressure ; and that, therefore, there is a slight probability that this is a

feature of the whole area, from India southwards to Australia, including

the sea area of the Indian Ocean.” Furthermore, that it appeared, from

the register of Hongkong, “that the pressure in that part of China was as

markedly and persistently in defect as it was in excess in India.”

A re-examination of the data shews, however, that this latter conclu-

sion is extremely doubtful, and indeed probably mistaken. I find that the

Hongkong barometric registers of past years have been so variously treat-

ed that no trustworthy comparison can be instituted on them; and, on the

other hand, I find that the excellent registers of Zi-ka-wei near Shanghai

point to an opposite conclusion, and shew that here also, on the east coast

of China, the pressure was excessive during the greater part of the period

in question, though to a much less degree than in the Indian region.

In the case of Australia, Mr. Eliot compared the registers of Sydney

and Melbourne only. I have examined that of Adelaide in addition, and

find that not only does it confirm the general conclusion .drawn from the

two former registers, but, further, shews that in South Australia the excess

72 H. F. Blanford—On High Atmospheric Pressure [No. 1,

was more intense than at any other station yet examined either in Australia

or India. At this station, the pressure rose above the average in May 1876

(as at the islands in the Bay of Bengal) and, with the exception of 4 months,

remained in excess until June 1878 ; the average excess of the whole period

being not less than 0681" or =; of an inch of the barometer. At Mel-

bourne, during the same period, it averaged 0387” and was less prolonged.

lor Sydney, I have registers only up to September 1878, and these shew an

excess much below that of Melbourne. It would seem, therefore, that in

Australia asin Asia the excessive pressure diminished towards the east

coast of the continent.

As a link between the data of the Indian and Australian regions, I have

the registers of Singapore and Batavia; for the latter of which I am

indebted to the kindness of Dr. Bergsma. At Singapore, the same barome-

ter has not been in use throughout. The barometer registered in 1869 and

1870 having been injured, was replaced by another in 1871 which had never

been compared directly or indirectly with the former ; and the relative values

of the registers in the two former and subsequent years are, therefore, more

or less open to doubt. The position of the instrument also has been

changed once or twice ; but, in comparing the registers of past years, I

have applied an appropriate correction for the changes of level. The

registers extend from May 1869 to the present time. According to these,

during the four and a half years, from May 1869 to October 1873, and

certainly from July 1871, in only two months, was the mean pressure of

any month slightly above the general average of the month, as deduced

from the whole series of years; whereas, from November 1878 to February

1875 (16 months in all), ten months ranged above it, and six only below it ;

and from March 1875 to June 1878, every month shews an excess, except-

ing April 1876 (which was the same as the average) and November 1876

and December 1877, which were slightly below it. Hence, it appears that

the excessive pressure began earlier and was more prolonged at Singapore

than at any other station yet examined ; but it was less than half as intense

as at Adelaide; the average of the 26 months, May 1876 to June 1878,

being only -0293".

The register of Batavia affords evidence very similar to that of Singa-

pore. Here also from November 1869 to August 1873, a period of 3 years

and 10 months, in only four months did the pressure range slightly above

the average ; from the latter date to April 1876, in ten months it exceeded

the average ; and from May 1876 to August 1878, it was above the average

in every month except three. The average excess of this period was 0256.”

Thus, at these two sub-equatorial stations, there is evidence of a gradual rise

of atmospheric pressure since 1870; and the Batavian register recorded

under the careful superintendence of Dr. Bergsma is of the highest validity.

In Ceylon and Southern India, the excessive pressure was of shorter

1880. | in Ieelation to the Sun-spot Cycle. 73

duration than at the Bay islands, and on the average of the whole period

not more than half as great; viz., ‘020’.

As far as can be judged, then, from the available evidence, the excess

appears to have been greatest (in the Indian region) on an axis lying

between the Nicobars and Bengal. And, in Australia, at Adelaide, or possi-

bly to the westward of that station. In the absence of any suflicient

registers for Western Australia, this must remain an open question. To

the eastward, however, it certainly diminished greatly at Melbourne, and

still more at Sydney. Whether, however, the condition of excessive pres-

sure was continuous between Batavia and South Australia or otherwise,

there is no distinct evidence to show.

In Asia, the excess was less in Assam than in Bengal, and was compara-

tively small at Shanghai (Zi-ka-wei). To the westward, it also diminished,

but not quite regularly ; since, in Orissa and on the Gangetic plains, it was

less than on the plateaux of Chutia Nagpur and Bundelkand, and slightly

less than in Rajputana and Sind. Some of these irregularities probably

depend on variations of the temperature, and therefore density, of the lower

atmosphere ; and partly also are apparent only, and owing to the fact that

the averages which have served as the standaid of the comparison are

derived, in some cases, from longer series of years than in others. That,

notwithstanding these irregularities, there was, on the whole, a general

decrease of the excessive pressure to the westward of the axis above defined,

appears, however, pretty clearly, from the following average values of this

excess for the whole period of the 28 months of its duration.

{ Gangetic + :0191”...Punjab +'0132”

plain

Chutia Rajputana

Bengal ‘+ 10298” Nagpur ONGOID ED

Arakan + Odie. Gime pS Ee

Bay islands + 0327” kand and Sind

| , Nagpur and

+0219’ Bombay + *0196”

Orissa + 0164” Berar

| | Dakhan +0127” W.Coast +*0102”

‘Carnatic +:'0199” Ceylon +:020”

It may here be observed that this axis or ridge of greatest intensity,

if prolonged, lay across the middle of the two great continental masses,

Asia and Australia, from Western Siberia to South Australia; a position

which suggests the probability that the phenomenon was in some measure

dependent on the presence and position of these large land masses.

The variation of the anomalous pressure from month to month, at all

the stations above referred to, is given in the accompanying Table J, which

shows the deviation of the pressure, in each month, from the average of that

month and place (or district), as derived from the registers of many years.

1876.

1877.

H. F. Blanford—On High Atmospheric Pressure

April,

May,

June,

July,

August,

September, ..

October,

November, ..

December,

January,

February,

March,

April,

May,

June,

July,

August,

[No. 1,

TABLE I.—Deviation of pressure in each month from the

September, ...

October,

November, ...

December, ...

January,

February,

March,

April,

May,

June,

July,

August,

September,

+ + +

+ + + |

+ 4+ + + 4+ + + 4+ *'|

+ + + |

+t ttt ttt

+++ 4 4

Gangetic plain.

J) ++ tt ++ + + | + + 4

+ + +

t+ t+ b+ + + + + |

Bundelkand, &e.

033

037

008

049

015

‘016

044:

004:

042

‘069

054

033

065

055

038

040

005

051

053

016

004:

044.

034:

‘062

050

048

“020

035

002

023

South Central Pro-

+t bb ttt tt tt tet eee + t+ t+

vinces and Berar.

+ + |

++ tet e te tte ttt et '

Dakhan and Mysore.

043

‘018

“002

026

005

020

028

‘009

032

030

004

005

025

‘010

026

054

032

028

033

032

003

‘O11

0388

031

027

‘012

‘010

015

030

039

East Coast and Carna-

tic.

— 054

— 029

— ‘008

— 025

— 015

— ‘001

+ °022

— ‘004

+ 044

+ *056

+ ‘021

+ :026

+ 045

+ ‘019

+ *033

+ °038

+ *022

+ 045

+ 067

+ ‘031

+ ‘009

+ ‘030

+ :046

+ ‘046

+ 038

+ °023

— ‘008

— ‘005

— ‘009

— ‘028

1880. ] in Relation to the Sun-spot Cycle. 75

average of the month and place.

San WERNER Pemmemeeemeneeeeen eee

ep op e 3 E

me ieee) ao Bb a a

g 8 & q S 4 a ap =;

fs) 4 =) <q < aa) a) Q 65

— 062 | — 052 | — 016 | —-048 | —-044 | — 023 0 — ‘037 | — ‘040

— 037 | —-017 | —-005 | —-002 | —-012 | + :025 | + 033 | + -008 | — 025

— 003 | + 014 | + -004 | —-002 | +012 | + -023 | +030 | + ‘001 | + ‘002

— 050 | — -045 | —-018 | —-035 | —-027 | + -019 | + -032 | + 009 | — 047

— 017 | + :005 | + 025 | —-018 | —-olo | + :009 | + :023 | — ‘003 | + -002

— 017 | + 014 | + -046 | + -003 | + 013 | + °033 | + 025 | + 003 | + ‘030

+ 022) + 047 | + 060] + 058 | + 048 | + 034] + 040] + 012 | + ‘036

— 036 | — 029 | + -002 | —-029 | —-030 | + 008; —:014 | + 004 | + -009

+ 034 | + 028 | + -043 | + 030 | + 042 | + 049 | + 037 | + -033 | + ‘038

+ 064 | + 065 | + +107 | + 084 | + -073 | + 066 | + -:060 | + 054] + ‘054

+ 062 | + 072 | + -031 | + :065 | + 060 | + 039] + 043 | + 047 | + :023

+ 034 | + -038 | + 029 | + -027 | + -044 | + 029 | + 026} + 028] + ‘014

+ 065 | + :070 | + -028 | + 061 | + :058 | + 034 | + 029 | + 030] + ‘039

+ 041 | + -042 | + -019 | + 032 | + -037 | + 027] + 020 | +016] + ‘047

+ 015 | + 032 | + 041 | + -022 | + -014 | + 049 | + 049 | + 051 | + ‘034

+ 032 | + :023 | + 015 | —-001 | + :002 | + -045 | + 045 | + 057 | + °065

— 032 | —:032 | + -012 | —:037 | —-040 | + 0384] + 054] + 066 | + ‘044

+ 057 | + 058 | + 037 | + :051 | + -078 | + -056| + 040] + 054 | + °055

+ 062 | + 077 | + 066 | + -081 |} + 082 | + -071 | + 049 | + 058 | + °032

+ ‘008 | + 008 | + 028 | + -017 | + -031 | + -042 | + °036 | + 033 | + ‘017

— ‘018 | —:003 | + 011 | —-004 | + 016 | + :015 | —:003 | + -008 | — 008

+ 019 | + 045 | +021 | + 044 | + 054 | + 085 | + 015 | + :026 | + :038

+ ‘017 | + -030 | + 042 | + 035 | + 062 | + 046 | + 083 | + ‘051 | + 037

+ 036 | + 050 | + ‘068 | + 069 | + :073 | + 051 | + 036 | + °089 | + ‘041

+ 040 |] + 055 | + 059 | + 058 | + 042 | + :032 | + 016 | + 012 | + :029

+ 035 | + 060} + 029 | + 049 | + :0385 | + :004 | + ‘002 | —-002 | + 013

— O11 | + 015 | + 026 | + 011 | + 019 | + 007 | + 005 | +006 | + -017

+ 024 | + :067 | + 056 |] + 066 | + 071 | + 012 | — ‘014 | —-022 | + ‘001

+ 003 | + 047 | + 047 | + 050 | + 061 | + :021 | + 014] + ‘002 | —-036

— 042 | — 023 | — 009 | — 028 | — 025 | — -014 | —-01] | —:015 | — 040

H. F. Blanford—On High Atimespherie Pressure

[No. 1,

Taste I.—Deviation of pressure in each month from the average of the

month and place.—(Continued.)

1876.

1877.

1878.

April, 500

May, toe

June, wee

July,

August, 00d

September, ...

October, ..

November, ...

December, ...

January, ...

February, «9.

March, o6c

April, one

May, tea

June, nee

July, ees

August, ...

September, ...

October, ...

November, ...

December, ...

January, eee

February, ...

March, ees

April, sue

May, nth

June, 500

July, tee

August, 700

September, ..,

ep pp Ee Ee OE

+ ++ ++ +

Zi-ka-wel.

Not received.

Melbourne.

Adelaide.

tet tettee tte t+ |

[Pesiacteee

002

110

094

072

“101

‘100

‘O31

"053

077

040

026

057

‘079

112

285

‘090

118

162

“101

‘081

063

114

“092

013

025

104

014

‘161

“003

1383

1880. ] in Relation to the Sun-spot Oycle. 77

Evidence bearing on the northern prolongation of the axis of maximum

pressure across Central Asia (at least up to the end of 1877) is afforded

by the old established observatories of the Russian empire ; the registers of

which, since 1847, are given in the ‘Annales de l’Observatoire Physique

Central de Russie’. Before, however, proceeding to notice the barometric

condition of this region during the special period in question, I must draw

attention to another class of facts, which have an important bearing on the

subject, and which, although not entirely new, have been brought out in the

present investigation with remarkable clearness and prominence.

I have already noticed the evidence furnished by the registers of

Singapore and Batavia, of a persistently low pressure from 1869 to the

latter part of 1878, of its gradual rise during the subsequent years, and its

culmination in 1877. The Batavian register extends as far back as 1866 ;

comprising, therefore, a period of 13 years, and somewhat more than a com-

plete cycle of sun-spot variation. The deviation of the mean pressure of

each year from the general average of the whole period is given in

the second column of Table II; and, in the first, I have given the

variation of Wolf’s sun-spots numbers up to 1875, the latest date for which

I have them. I need only add that from 1875 to the early part of the

present year, was a prolonged period of minimum solar activity. The

coincidence of the barometric variation with that of the sun-spots is too

obvious to need comment; and it is emphatically to be noticed that the

minimum of pressure coincides with the maximum of spots, and vice versé.

The remaining columns of the table give the annual deviation of the mean

pressure of each year from the general local averages, for the stations

Singapore, Port Blair, Colombo, Akyab, Chittagong, Calcutta, and Darjiling,

from 1867 to 1878; and the accompanying plate represents graphically the

course of variation at each station from year to year. All these exhibit,

more or less distinctly, an oscillation similar to that of Batavia ; being most

pronounced at insular and sub-equatorial stations. Table III gives the

annual barometric variation of Calcutta and Bombay from 1848 and 1852

respectively, and Plate I, the corresponding curves.

[No. 1,

H. F. Blanford—On High Atmospheric Pressure

T10-— | GIO. + | FIO. + | BO. + | STO. + | OLO- + 0 600° == +] TOO" s | 8 8k.

LE0. + | GEO. + | PRO. + | 6E0- + | 960. + | GSO. + | 480. + | LEO. + | SHO. + oh Lh.

400. + | 900. + | 600-— | €00-— | 600-— | OLTO. + | GOO. + | GTO. + | ZO0-— on 92.

“ATWO syyuow xis ysvrT (9) | OTO-— | TOO. + | 800.-— | 200. + | TZ0.-— | et0.-— | g00-— | 410-— | OT

‘Arenuve SuyuvA (4) | PIO-— | 600. + | FOO. + | Too-— | 410.-— | 0Z0-— | 0Z0-— | z0-— | 0Z0-— |} 4-66 Che

"Ioq 700-— | 400:— | g00-— | 800-— | ¢to.-— | 900-— ea 110:— | 600:-— | 8-€1T | Tk

-woo0q, pue Arvniqog SuryusA\ (Pp) (g) (z)

Z10-— | 600-— | IT0-— | 920-— | Too.-— | ZF0-— ee 7p0-— | €20-— | 8-TeT | OL

"sy uOUL (¢)

XIs 4st puv Arenaqoq ‘Arenuve (g) | god. + | 6TO-— | 900. + | 610-— ae + | 900. + ss er ILO. + | 9-84 69.

P I

“syyuour xis qse'T (z) | LZ0- + | L£10-— | ZZ0- + | 610-— | E00- + | 6Z0- + oe a 0z0' + | 8-98 89.

‘syyuoUr 4yste ysvT (T) | STO. + Se 660. + | 410-— | 600- + ty ue a 900. + | 8-8 LOST

a a ee ———

td - = Q fo) > ty 2 Th Ss) 4 =

cS rs) 2 [Sr om ° 2) 5 2 oO

8 & 5 aa 4 ee 5 09 s EO 2

a E: S fae = =} 2 < 5 re A

oes 5 S 3 =. } g . 5 2

We : 5 EB G 3 fe

2 : ; oa

‘uorhat unkvjopp-opuy wr aunssaud orsjawoing fo uounriwwa qonuup— TT LIAVI,

1880. | in Relation to the Sun-spot Cycle. 79

TasLe II].—Annual variation of pressure at Calcutta and Bombay.

Years. Calcutta. Bombay. Years. Calcutta. Bombay.

1847 vee — 012 1858 — ‘003 + °003

748 ae — 004 59 + ‘009 + 004

"49 — ‘O11 60 — 019 — ‘005

’50 — ‘001 61 — '023 — 012

51 a — ‘013 62 — 017 — 026

52 moe — ‘004 63 — ‘024 — ‘017

53 — ‘013 + °005 64, — 011 + 02

54, — ‘002 — ‘005 65 + 018 + ‘002

a5}5) + 005 + 015 66 + -004; + 013

56 — 004 — ‘003 67 + 022 + 015

67 — ‘013 — ‘001 ’68 + '022 + '027

From these facts, it may be concluded that, in the Indo-Malayan

region, the pressure of the atmosphere is subject to a cyclical variation,

coinciding in period with that of the sun-spots; and such that the epoch

of maximum pressure corresponds to that of minimum sun-spots and that

of minimum pressure to that of maximum sun-spots. When, however, we

turn to Western Siberia, we find an oscillation, not less, nay, far more

pronounced, and precisely of the opposite character ; the maximum of pres-

sure there coinciding with the maximum of sun-spots, and vice versd. The

station which exhibits this most prominently, is Ekaterinenburg at the

eastern foot of the Oural. But it is also very distinctly recognizable at

Bogolowsk to the North, at Slatoust to the South-west, at Barnoul at the

northern foot of the Altai, and, as Mr. Archibald pointed out some time

since in the pages of ‘ Nature,’ at St. Petersburg. The annual differences

at these stations are given in Table IV, and the corresponding curves in

the accompanying plate.

80 H. F. Blanford—On High Atmospheric Pressure [No. 1,

Taste 1V.—Annual variation of barometric pressure in Russia and

Western Siberia.

8 a ep

g 2 2 4 El

@ 8 & é Bs 3 = eee

S,\ 8 i: ep x = 5

A e D a) ica n af)

1847 97°4 + 045 — 034 + +022 +097 —011

"48 124-9 + 044 — +027 + 049 + 078 + 028

749 95-4 + 003 + 053 + ‘O11 + +033 — ‘017

50 69'8 — 027 — 009 + 006 + ‘037 + ‘O11

51 63.2 + ‘036 + 023 + 014 — +055 + ‘007

52 52-7 —-012 —-012 —--015 —-+118 + ‘019

53 38°5 + -065 + 059 + 065 — 074 + 023

54 21-0 —-081 — ‘034 — 032 — ‘019 — 013

55) eld + 008 — 003 — +023 — 024 — 013

"56 51 —-104 — ‘087 — ‘087 — +069 — 024,

57 22:9 + 064 — 032 — +029 + ‘009 — 040

58 56-2 —.010 — ‘062 — +045 —-010 — ‘031

"59 90:3 — +022 — 016 — 004 + 015 + .008

60 94:8 + ‘061 +171 + 046 + 028 + 055

"61 T7-7 — +005 + 014 — ‘016 —-021

62 61:0 + ‘086 + 022 + 006 + 014

63 45°4 — 049 — +064 —-031 — 023 — ‘062

64. 45-2 + 021 —-014 — 034 + ‘O21 + ‘013

65 31:4 + ‘018 — ‘018 — +056 — +036 —-017

66 14-7 —-071 — 004 — 052 — 025 + 008

67 8:8 — ‘073 — 052 —-053 — 035 — 003

68 36°'8 — ‘017 — ‘017 + 008 + 017 + 030

69 78-6 — ‘034. — 019 +071 + 082 + 050

270 131°'8 + 023 —-001 + °030 + *025 + 002

"71 113'8 —-012 — 029 — 009 — +007 — 011

72, 997 + 070 + '030 + ‘017 P — 020

"73 67:7 — 040 — 033 — +038 — +034, — 001

74 43°1 — 087 + -066 + ‘016 — 060 + 019

"75 18-9 + 051 +022 — ‘007 — .088 + .003

"76 ee + 031 + *015 (0) —:080 —-001

dirty vee + °008 + 121 + :095 + .010 + ‘098

All these stations, be it observed, are in Western Siberia or European

Russia; and it now becomes of interest to ascertain over what area this

kind of oscillation obtains. To do this, I have tabulated the barometric

data for Tiflis on the South-west, and Nertschinsk and Pekin on the East.

No one of these stations exhibits characters resembling those of the stations

in Western Siberia; and the curve of Pekin, which is fragmentary, seems

rather to exhibit the Indo-Malayan type of variation than that of the

Ural stations. Hence, it would seem there is a reciprocal oscillation of

atmospheric pressure between Western Siberia and the Indo-Malayan region

1880. ] in Relation to the Sun-spot Cycle. 81

(perhaps including China) having a period which coincides with that of

sun-spot variation ; and that Tiflis on the one hand and Nertschinsk on the

other lie beyond the limits of its influence.

Now, seeing that the Indo-Malayan barometric maximum of 1876-78

coincided with a portion of the prolonged sun-spot minimum of 1876-79,

the facts detailed above would lead us to expect a corresponding deficiency

of pressure in Western Siberia. Strange to say, however, this was not the

ease. The registers of Bogolowsk, Ekaterinenburg, Slatoust, and Barnoul

agree in showing a great excess of pressure in 1877, which in the

ease of Ekaterinenburge was greater than that of any Indian stations,

and nearly as great as that of Adelaide. I have not yet received

the volume of the ‘ Annales’ for the year 1878; but, on the average of the

20 months from May 1876 to December 1877, it amounted to :0611.” The

great excess appears to have been restricted to the stations in Western

Siberia. At St. Petersburg, although the pressure was above the average

in 1876 and 1877, the excess was far less striking ; and that of 1877 was

less than that of 1876. At Tiflis, the pressure of the two years was either

about the average or below it; and, at Pekin and Nertschinsk, it was

not greater than at Shanghai [Zi-ka-wei].

Hence, there prevailed in Asia generally, in 1877, an anomalous (7. e.,

apparently non-periodic) accumulation of atmospheric pressure, culminat-

ing in Western Siberia, and diminishing both to Hast and West, and also to

South. And this seat of maximum lies on the prolongation to the North-

west of the Indo-Malayan axis of excessive pressure noticed in the earlier

part of this paper. It is at least probable that this anomalous accumula-

tion of pressure extended in a much diminished degree to the Indo-Malayan

region, where it was superimposed on the normal periodic excess of that

region, and produced a maximum which was more intense than any pre-

viously recorded. Also that the excessive pressure of Australia was a

phenomenon of the same order as that of Siberia; indeed its southern

counterpart. It is at least certain that they exhibit a resemblance in

certain not unimportant features to which I shall draw attention in a sub-

sequent paper; merely remarking that, in both cases, these great oscillations

of pressure, both periodic and non-periodic, appear to depend mainly, perhaps,

indeed, entirely, on the variations of the winter season. Of this, in the case

of Kkaterinenburg more especially, the evidence is most striking and con-

vineing, and, as far as I have yet examined the Australian registers, it

appears to hold good in their case also.

82 J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis. [No. 1,

VII.— Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis, a remarkable Genus of Man-

todea common to India and Tropical America.—By J. Woov-Mason,

Officiating Superintendent Indian Museum, and Professor of Com-

parative Anatomy, Medical College, Calcutta.

(Received May 1st ;—Read June 2nd, 1880.)

The paper of which the following is an abstract, will be published in

full as soon as the illustrations which have been drawn on the wood under

my supervision and sent to London to be cut are returned to this country.

The remarkable distribution of this genus of JMantodea is exactly

paralleled by that of another genus of Orthoptera, namely Mastax, species

of which from the southern slopes of the Peruvian Andes have recently been

described by Dr. 8. H. Scudder.

The nearest allies of Charadodis are the Australian Orthoderas, which

its young ‘larve’ resemble in the form of the pronotum.

Genus CHoERADODTS, Serville.

A. Fore femora without a black blotch on the inner side.

1. CHOERADODIS STRUMARIA.

Madame Mérian, Ins. de Surinam, 1726, tab. 27, 2 et nymph.

Roesel von Rosenhof, Der monatlich-herausgegebenen Insecten Belustigung, 2ter

Theil, 1749, Locust. tab. iii, fig. 1 et 2, 9 et nymph (copied from Mérian).

Mantis strwnaria, Linn., Syst. nat. Ins. t. i, pt. ii, 1767, p. 691, no. 13, 9.

Fabr., Ent. Syst. ii, 1793, p. 18, no. 21.

? —— cancellata, Fabr., 1. c., 23.

, Stoll, Spectres et Mantes, pl. xi, fig. 42, 9.

, Lichtenstein, Trans. Linn, Soc. Lond. vol. 6, p. 26.

Cheradodis cancellata, Serville, Hist. nat. des Orthopt. 18389, p. 206, 9.

Craurusa cancellata, Burmeister, Handb. d. Entom, 1839, Band ii, p. 542, (Syn.

Serv. et Stoll. fig, 75, exclus.)

Choeradodis canceliata, Saussure, Mant. Americ. p. 19, ¢, 2.

Has. Cayenne (¢, Serville); Surinam (9, Meérian, Stoll; $ @,

Saussure).

B. Fore femora with a black blotch on the inner side.

(a.) The blotch on the lower half of the joint (American).

In the females of the following two species, the posterior angles of

the pronotal expansions are broadly rounded and are not produced backwards

beyond the level of the hinder end of the primitive pronotum.

2, CHOERADODIS RHOMBICOLLIS.

Mantis rhombicollis, Latr, in Voy. de Humboldt, Zool., Ins. p. 108, pl. 39, figs. 2,

8, 3:

1880.] J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis. 83

Choeradodis peruviana, Serville, Hist. nat. des Orthopt. 1889, p. 207, @.

strumaria, Stal, Syst. Mant., 1877, p. 15, Gees

The blotch commences, in both sexes, near the base of the femur,

extends through the ungual groove nearly to the middle of the joint, and

is there succeeded by a marginal row of black pomee in contact with the

bases of alternate spines.

Has. ¢g ¢, Guayaquil, in the collection of the British Museum ;

nymph, Santa Fé de Bogota, in the collection of the Indian Museum,

Caleutta ; New Granada ( & ¢?, Std/).

3. CHOERADODIS SERVILLEI, n. sp.

?. Closely allied to the preceding, from which it differs in having

the marginal field of the tegmina proportionately narrower, and in the smaller

size, as well as in the different shape, of the femoral blotch, which is

small and oval, commences just beyond the ungual groove, and is follow-

ed by a marginal row of small black points.

Has. 2 2, Cache, Costa Rica, in the collection of Messrs. Godman and

Salvin ; nymph, Chiriqui, in the collection of the Indian Museum, Calcutta.

In the females of the next two species, and in all probability in those

of Ch. rhomboidea also, the posterior angles of the pronotal lamelle are

rounded-angulate and produced backwards so that the hinder end of the

primitive pronotum projects in the bottom of an angular emargination.

4, CHOERADODIS LATICOLLIS.

Choeradodis laticollis, Serville, Revue p. 24; Hist. nat. des Orthopt. 1839, p. 208,

pl. iv, fig. 2, 2.

Saussure, Mantes Americ. p. 20, 2.

strumaria, Id., ibid. p. 18, ¢.

laticollis, Stal, Syst. Mant, 1877, 17, 9.

The blotch is situated, in both sexes, just beyond the ungual groove,

is oblong-rhomboidal in shape, and is followed by two black points on the

bases of alternate spines ; there is a fuscous speck at the end of the stig-

matal spot of the tegmina ; and the antero-lateral margins of the pronotal

lamella are arcuate or convex, especially in the female.

Has. 5 8,5 2, Ecuador (Buckley), in the collection of the Indian

Museum, Calcutta; Peru (9, Séal) ; Cayenne (2, Serville et Stal) ;

Surinam (¢, Saussure).

5. CHOERADODIS STALII, n. sp.

Differs from the preceding in the shape of the blotch (which is

pointed at both ends and commences in the ungual groove, and on either

side of which the femur is pale luteous-yellow instead of being clouded with

84 J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis.

fuscous) ; in being without a fuscous speck at the distal end of the

stigma ; in its shorter and differently shaped facial shield ; and in having

the antero-lateral margins and the lateral angles of the pronotal expan-

sions sinuous-concave and more broadly rounded off respectively.

Has. 1 6,4 2, Ecuador (Buckley), in the collection of the Indian

Museum, Calcutta.

6. CHOERADODIS RHOMBOIDEA.

Mantis rhomboidea, Stoll, Spectres et Mantes, pl. xi, fig. 45, @.

The male insect from Para, in the British Museum, agrees neither with

Saussure’s description (doc. supra cit. p. 18), nor with any of the specimens

in the Indian Museum; it more nearly approaches Stoll’s figure, agreeing

therewith in the points in which it differs from them,

The blotch commences in the ungual groove, thence extending as far

along the femur as in the preceding four species, but it is not followed by

a marginal row of black points. The pronotal lamella have no posterior

angles.

Has. 6, Para, in the collection of the British Museum, A nymph,

from Ega, in the same collection, probably also belongs to this species.

This species is nearest allied to Ch. laticollis.

(8) The blotch on the upper half of the joint (Indian.)

7. CHOERADODIS SQUILLA.

? Mantis cancellata, Fabr. Ent. Syst. 11, 1793, p. 18.

Choeradodis squilla, Saussure, Mél, Orthopt. t.i, 8me fasc. p. 161, pl. iv, figs. 3,

3a, ¢ et nymph.

— —— Lucas, Ann. Entom. Soc. Fr. 5 sér, t. ii, 1872, p. 32, 9.

Has. India generally, from Ceylon (¢ et nymph, Saussure ; larva,

in TJ. M. Cale.) ; Madras (2, Lucas) ; Central India (in coll. Hop. Oxon.) ;

to the banks of the Killing River, in the N. Khasi Hills, on the N. E.

Frontier (nymph, 4. W. Chennell).

Obs. A specimen of this species in the British Museum is errone-

ously marked “ Brazil.”

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PY. II.) OF THE

| JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1879.

No. 1, (issued June 10th, 1879). On new species of the Genus

Plectopylis of the Family Helicide.—By Linur.-Conone, Gopwin-Avs-

mEN. On the Operations for obtaining the Discharges of the large Rivers

in Upper Assam, during Season 1877-78.—By Lieut. H. J. Harman.

Hemiptera from Upper Tenasserim.—By W. L. Distant. Communicated

by J. Woov-Mason. On the Diurnal Variation of Rainfall Hrequency

at Oaleutta.—By H. F. Buanrorp. Record of the Occurrence of Harth-

quakes in Assam during 1878.—Oommunicated by the Curnr Commts-

SIONER OF Assam. On some experiments made at H, M.’s Mint in Cal-

eutta on coining Silver into Rupees—By Cou. J. F. Tennant. (With

three Plates and seven Woodcuts).

No. 2, (issued September L5th, 1879). Note on the old Burmese route

over Pathai vid Nongyang (viewed as the most feasible and direct route,

Strom India to China) —By 8. EH. Pua. On a new Standard of Light.—

By Lovis Scuwenpter. A second note on Mammalia collected by Major

Biddulph in Gilgit—By W.T. Buanrorn. A Description of some new

Species of Hydroid Zoophytes from the Indian Coasts and Seas.—By Sur-

auon J. Armstrone, Murine Survey Department. Notes on the Forma-

tion of the Oountry passed through by the 2nd Column Tal Ohotiali Field

Koree during its march from Kala Abdullah Khéin in the Khdjak Pass to

Lugirt Barkhin. Spring of 1879.—By Lrevn. R. C. Tempte, lst Ghoorkas.

Note on a collection of Reptiles and Frogs from the neighbourhood of

Eilore and Dumagudem.— By W.T. Buaxrorp. Preliminary Notice of a

new Genus (Parectatosoma) of Phasmide from Madagascar, with brief

Descriptions of its two Species—By J. Woov-Mason. (With eight

Plates and two Maps).

No. 3, (issued November 28th, 1879). Notes on a collection of Rep-

tiles made by Mason O. B. Sx. Jonun, at Ajmere in Rdjputana.—By W.

T. Buanrorp. Notes on Reptilia—By W. T. Buanrorp. Notes on

Stone Implements from the Khasi Hills, and the Banda and Vellore Dis-

tricts.—By Joun Cocxsurn, Late Curator of the Allahabad Museum,

Officiating Assistant Osteologist, Indian Museum, Calcutta, The Ravages

of Rats and Mice in the Dakhan during the Harvest of 1878-79.—By the

Rey. S. B, Farrpanx. Wotes on the Survey Operations in Afghinistan in

connection with the Oampaign of 1878-79. Compiled from Letters and

Diaries of the Survey officers by Mason J. Watrrnouse, Assistant Swr-

veyor General.— Communicated by Masor-Grunerat J.T. Watker, Sur-

veyor General of India. (With three Plates and one Map).

CONTENTS.

5 Page

VIII.—On the past and present Water supplies of Calcutta.—By ne qi

1X.—On the Zoological Position of the Bharal, or Blue-Sheep, ae

of Tibet.—By R. Lypexxnr, B. A.,...... PR iat Teal

X.— Description of a new Species of Diurnal Lepidoptera belong- ee

ing to the Genus Hebomoia.— By J. Woop-Mason,,,..+++-+5 134 :

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

=o.

Part II].L—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. I1.—1880.

VIII.—On the past and present Water supplies of Ouleutta—By

ALEXANDER PepiEer, F. I. C., F. C. 8., London and Berlin.

At the present day it is I believe universally acknowledged, that every

town should be provided with a pure and suflicient supply of water for

drinking, domestic and sanitary purposes. If the quantity be not sufficient

or if the quality be not good, it may be safely asserted that injury,

more or less profound, to the general health of its inhabitants will be the

consequence, The very great importance which is attached to the quality

and quantity of the water supply of towns, is clear from the prominence

which this subject has attained throughout the civilized world during the

past few years. In the present paper, it will be my purpose to contrast

the nature of the water employed in Calcutta in former years (before

the introduction of the present hydrant water) with the supply as it has

been since the introduction of the Hooghly water, which is collected and

filtered at Pultah, and then distributed by the hydrants, ete. It will be

my endeavour to show that the old supply was deficient in quantity, and

filthy and abominable in quality, whilst the present supply, though perhaps

not so abundant in quantity as it ought to be, isin quality very good and

wholesome.

Before proceeding to the discussion of the question of the two supplies,

it will perhaps be well to consider what is the general history of natural

waters, as this will enable us to understand some of the actual results which

have been found by analysis.

86 A. Pedler-—On the past and present [No. 2,

The primary form of natural water is rain, and although at first sight

it might appear that rain water should be very pure, yet it has been clearly

shown* that it is very seldom that such is the case, and that rain

water almost always contains, as impurities, small quantities of organic

matter, ammonia, and ammonium salts, derived from the atmosphere.

In large towns especially, the rain water is so impure, that it cannot be con-

sidered a safe water supply for drinking and other domestic purposes. On

reaching the ground the water becomes charged to a greater or less extent

with the various soluble constituents of the soil, and with any other

matters which may have accumulated in it. If it falls on land either

cultivated or uncultivated, it rapidly drains off, and finds its way into

streams and rivers, which in the earlier parts of their course certainly, will

be tolerably free from organic impurity, except that derived from any

manure, etc. which may have been on the land. Unless the river water

is subsequently rendered impure by the admission of sewage from towns,

villages, ete., or by the admission of manufacturing refuse, it will form,

generally speaking, a comparatively pure and wholesome supply of water.

In some cases, however, such water is used by the inhabitants of towns on its

banks, and is after use returned to the river in the form of sewage, which

will be charged with impurity derived from animal excreta, household and

manufacturing refuse, soap, and other filth. Water contaminated in such

a way is clearly unfit for domestic use. After returning to the stream it will

perhaps in its course towards the sea become partially purified by slow oxida-

tion of the organic matter and by the absorbent action of vegetation, but

as will be subsequently shown this process of purification is an extremely

slow one.

In the case of rain water falling in towns such as Calcutta, it will, as

pointed out previously, be impure from the presence of organic matter,

ammonia, ete.; of this impure water a considerable proportion of it as before

shewn will find its way into the river or into smaller streams communicating

with it, but another portion will be collected in the tanks, which are dug for

this purpose, and a third portion after percolating through the soil will find

its way into numerous shallow wells. These tanks and shallow wells may

therefore be considered as being merely pits for the accumulation of drainage

from the immediately surrounding soil. In the case of Calcutta the town

is densely populated, and as the manners and customs of the native inhabi-

tants are in many respects very primitive, the soil must be inevitably

charged with excretal and other refuse, so that the water when it reaches

the tank or well, will be largely contaminated with the impurities deri-

ved from these sources. In the absence of any system of drainage, as was

the case in Calcutta some years ago, such tank or well water could only

* Angus Smith on Air and Rain,

1880. ] Water supplies of Calcutta. 87

after use be thrown on the surface of the ground, or into the nearest ditch,

from which it would either run or percolate into the tank or well a

second time, and would naturally be in a still more impure condition. Such

would appear to be the natural conclusions as to supplies of water derived

from rivers, and from tanks and shallow wells in towns, and it will be sub-

sequently seen that the quality of the Hooghly river water, and of the

water of the tanks and wells within Calcutta, as deduced from numerous

analyses fully bears out the above suggestions.

In speaking of the former supply of water to Calcutta, I have assumed

that it was confined to the various tanks and wells distributed throughout

the town; for though there is no doubt that the river water was used consi-

derably by the inhabitants who lived near the banks of the river, yet the

greater number of the inhabitants living as they did at a distance from the

river, must have depended for their supply of household water on the tanks

and wells nearest to them. The modern water supply of Calcutta which we

have to consider is of course the Hooghly water collected at Pultah and,

after filtration, ete., distributed through the ordinary mains.

For the purposes of this paper I have not thought it necessary to analyze

all the tank and well waters in the town, which amount to many hundreds,

but as I have examined 200 samples, some from the crowded districts of the

northern part of the town, and some from the open maidan, I think a fair con-

clusion can be derived from them. I have also to mention, that a very large

number of the well and tank waters which I have analyzed, have been

noticeable for their bad quality, and for having apparently given rise to

disease of one kind or another to the persons who were living in the neigh-

bourhood. Therefore the numbers usually obtained represent the bad

rather than the good waters of the old supply. I should however wish

to point out, that there is every probability, that the water in the tanks and

wells now, is of a much better quality then formerly it was, for by the present

system of drainage and conservancy, a vast amount of excreta and filth of

all kinds is removed from the town, which in former days must have remain-

ed to choke up the soil, and to render the tank and well water very much

more impure than at present.

I will attempt first to shew, that, when the inhabitants of this town

depended for their water supply on the tanks and wells, the quantity was

decidedly insufficient during at least one half of the year.

With regard to the necessity of a sufficient supply of water being given

to a town for domestic and sanitary purposes, a well known author on Hy-

giene, writes—*

“Jt was there shown that want of water leads to impurities of all

kinds ; the person and clothes are not washed, or are washed repeatedly in

* Parkes’ Hygiene, 5th edition, p. 37.

88 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

the same water ; cooking water is used scantily, or more than once ; habi-

tations become dirty, streets are not cleaned, sewers become clogged ; and

in these various ways a want of water produces uncleanliness of the very

air itself.

“The result of such a state of things is a general lowered state of health

among the population ; it has been thought also that some skin diseases—

scabies, and the epiphytic affections especially—and ophthalmia in some

cases, are thus propagated. It has also appeared to me that the remark-

able cessation of spotted typhus among the civilized and cleanly nations, is

in part owing, not merely to better ventilation, but to more frequent and

thorough washing of clothes.

“The deficiency of water leading to insufficient cleansing of sewers has

a great effect on the spread of typhoid fever and of choleraic diarrhea; and

cases have been known in which outbreaks of the latter disease have been

arrested by a heavy fall of rain.”

In judging of the quantity of water necessary to be supplied to a town,

notice must be taken of the purposes for which the water is used. These

we may roughly summarise by saying that water is required for drinking,

cooking and the washing of persons, clothes, utensils and houses, for the

flushing and cleansing of sewers and drains and for the watering of streets,

for the drinking and washing of animals, the cleansing of carriages and

stables, for trade purposes, etc.

From European statistics given by the authority just quoted, it would

appear to be generally admitted, that a fair allowance of water for the pur-

poses above enumerated is 25 gallons per head of population per day. Thus

taking some of the largest towns in England and including Paris, each in-

habitant receives 27} gallons per day ; the average daily supply of 14 English

towns of second rate magnitude was 24 gallons per head, and that of 72

English and Scotch towns was found to be 26°7 gallons per inhabitant.

Let us now see the amount of water available in Calcutta during cer-

tain portions of the year when the old supply was depended upon. The

tanks and wells in any town can of course only receive their supply of water

from rain, and the rainfall of Calcutta is so unequally distributed, that

almost three quarters of the whole fall takes place within 4 months of the

year, whilst within 6 months, ten-elevenths of the rain falls. Thus the

annual rainfall of Calcutta from 49 years’ observation, has been found to be

65°85 inches, and during the months from November to April inclusive,

only 6:03 inches fall on the average.

If we exclude from our calculation the months of heaviest rainfall,

when the water would almost entirely run off into the river and be

lost, and assuming for a moment that during these six months from Novem-

ber to April, the whole of the water which fell could be collected and

1880. | Water supplies of Calcutta. 89

stored for use ; then knowing that, according to the last Calcutta Census, the

density of the population was 109 persons per acre, it is easy to calculate

that each person could receive but 6°8 gallons of fresh water daily. In all

probability, however, not one-fifth of the rainfall finds its way into these

tanks and wells, and this would leave the inhabitants less than 14 gallons

of fresh water per day during the hot season of the year. In the Coomar-

tolle Section of the town where the density of the population is 214 per

acre, this supply must be reduced to one half or to about three quarters of a

gallon of fresh water per day.

If even we were to assume, that it was possible to store up the water

which fell during the rains, for use during the dry season of the year,

and granting as before that one fifth found its way into the tanks and

wells, even then each inhabitant of the town could not have had more

than 6 or 7 gallons of fresh water daily, and an inhabitant of some parts

of the northern division, could not have had more than 3 or 4 gallons.

The conclusion seems te me to be inevitable, that at the time when

Calcutta depended for its water supply on its tanks and wells, the

inhabitants must have used the same water over and over again though of

course without knowing it, not only for such purposes as bathing, washing

clothes ete., but probably also for cooking and even for drinking, and it

would also appear that there could have been absolutely no water for

necessary sanitary measures.

That Caleutta, under these circumstances, should have had a high rate

of mortality is scarcely surprising.

I will now endeavour to show that the quality of the old water supply

was even less satisfactory than its quantity, and that in a large number of

instances of tank and well water, if not in the majority of cases, the water

was, and still is, simply sewage, sometimes concentrated, sometimes dilute.

That impure water may be the source of disease is, I believe, now

admitted on all hands, and if confirmation were required, abundant evidence

to this effect is given in the various reports of the Rivers Pollution Com-

missionersin England. The researches too of Chauveau, Burdon, Sanderson,

Klein and others scarcely leave room for doubt that the specifie poisons of

the so-called zymotie diseases consist of organized and living matter; and

it is now certain that water is the medium through which some at least of

these diseases are propagated. There does not appear indeed to be any

doubt whatever that such diseases as cholera, typhoid fever, dysentery and

diarrhoea may be produced by drinking impure or infected water. An excel-

lent and most conclusive instance of the propagation of typhoid fever by

water from one infected case near Basel in Switzerland is admirably de-

scribed by Dr. Hagler, and is given in the sixth report of the Commissioners

above referred to.

90 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

It is then evident that, in the analysis of water, the point to be aimed

at would be, the detection of the presence of those impurities whether they

be of the nature of germs or not, which would give rise to the diseases just

mentioned, but unfortunately in the present state of science, we are quite

unable even to say with any certainty whether such germs of disease will ever

be isolated, and it is therefore clearly out of the power of the chemist to

detect their presence in any sample of water. Failing therefore in this

endeavour, the chemical analyst has to rest content with the detection and

estimation of other substances, such as organic nitrogenous matter etce.,

which cannot be present in water, unless it has previously been in contact

with the various forms of impurity, which we denominate sewage; and if

such bodies are present in quantity, it is fair to infer that these germs or

other bodies which produce the zymotic diseases, and which are undoubted-

ly present very frequently in sewage, may also be present in the sample of

water. It has also been clearly shown, that in many instances water which

is impregnated with animal or vegetable organic matter, even assuming

any specific poison to be absent, will give rise to various unpleasant

symptoms, such as diarrhea, etc. It is therefore quite permissible and

necessary to condemn any sample of water which is to be used as a potable

or domestie supply, if it contains any quantity of organic matter, more

especially if the organic matter be of animal origin.

The methods of water analysis have been improved very greatly during

the past fifteen years, but even now there is a very warm discussion being

carried on as to the respective merits of at least three distinct processes, and

opinions differ materially as to which method gives most accurate and relia-

bleresults, The twomethods for the determination of the amount of organic

matter present in water, which have met with the greatest amount of

support, are those of Professors Wanklyn and Frankland.

The method proposed by Prof. Wanklyn, which consists in the conver-

sion of the nitrogenous organic matter into ammonia by boiling with an

alkaline solution of potassium permanganate, has the immense advantage

of being quickly performed with tolerably simple apparatus, and a whole

water analysis by this method does not occupy more than a few hours.

Against this method there is the well recognized fact, that it sometimes fails

to detect and estimate the whole of the nitrogenous organic matter present

in the water. It is therefore possible that a water may escape the con-

demnation which it deserves, but I believe it is generally accepted that

a water which is condemned by this process must be really of very bad qua-

lity.

The method of analysis which was introduced by Dr. Frankland is

an extremely elaborate one, and requires the use of very delicate and expen-

sive apparatus. The greatest drawback to this process is however, the

1880. ] Water supplies of Calcutta. 91

amount of work and time which is required for it, as a satisfactory analysis

by it cannot be performed in less than 4 or 5 days. On the other hand the

results obtained by Frankland’s process are eminently trustworthy, and the

character of a water is determined by it with great precision.

As [have been obliged to perform the work of analysis of the tank and

well waters of Calcutta during the spare time from my current duties, and.

as some two hundred analyses had to be made by my own hands, it was

clearly impossible for me to use Frankland’s more accurate process,and I was

compelled rather against my own notions of scientific accuracy to work with

Wanklyn’s process, which as I have pointed out is not so trustworthy asthe

other. In addition to this reason, I found that my predecessor in the office of

Analyst to the Corporation had been in the habit of testing the Calcutta

hydrant water by Wanklyn’s process. As I had to carry on this method of

analysis on behalf of the Corporation, this therefore formed a very intelli-

gible standard of comparison for my work with the former water supply

of Caleutta. In addition however to these analyses of the hydrant water,

as will be seen subsequently, I have carried out for the last four years

menthly analyses of the hydrant water by Frankland’s process, and it is

upon these numbers that I shall base my conciusions as to the character

and quality of the present water supply.

In Wanklyn’s process there are two principal determinations. The firstis

the estimation of the free ammonia present in the water, and of the albumi-

noid ammonia obtained by distillation with alkaline potassium permanganate.

In India, I have frequently combined these two processes, and the ammonia

from both is called the “ Total Ammonia.” The reason why these two pro-

cesses have been combined is, that in almost every case when I have tested

the potable waters of India for free ammonia, I have found it to be almost

entirely absent. The fact appears to be, that at the very high temperature

which here obtains, the ammonia oxidizes with such extreme rapidity, that if

any free ammonia were present at the collection of the water, it would become

partially or wholly converted into inorganic nitrogenous matters before the

analysis could be performed, or, if the whole of the free ammonia were not

thus oxidized, the changes which go on from day to day are so great, that

for any true comparison in respect of this constituent between the sam-

ples of water analyzed, it would be necessary to analyze them at definite

intervals after collection. The “total ammonia” then, which is spoken of

subsequently, is the free ammonia present, if any, added to the ammonia

produced from the nitrogenous organic matter by the oxidizing action of

alkaline potassium permanganate. As pointed out before, it frequently hap-

pens that the whole of the nitrogenous organic matter present in the water

is not decomposed, and therefore the numbers obtained always represent the

minimum amount of impurity which can be present in the water,

92 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

Professor Wanklyn says with regard to this method of analysis, that

by the aid of the ammonia process, we are now able to divide potable waters

into three broad classes :

(1) Waters which are of “extraordinary organic purity,” 7. e., those

which are almost free from any nitrogenous organic matter, and which con-

ain less than 0:05 parts of albuminoid (or total) ammonia per million of

water.

(2) “Safe waters,’ which are devoid of any excess of nitrogenous

organic impurity, and which contain from 0°05 to 0°10 parts per million

of albuminoid ammonia.

(8) Waters which are “ dirty,” 7. e. charged with an abnormal quantity

of organic matter, and which contain more than 0:10 parts of albuminoid

ammonia per million of water.

The second important consideration is the determination of the

amount of chlorine present in the water. Chlorine occurs in potable water

in combination with several metals (as chlorides), such as sodium, magnesium,

calcium and possibly potassium. The amount of chlorides or of chlorine

present in drinking water is in itself of little importance, for as most people

are aware, common table salt is simply sodium chloride, and this substance

is a necessary ingredient of our food. The water analyst determines the

amount of chlorine present in water because the presence of this substance

in water is in most instances a clear indication of contamination by sewage

in some form or another.

It will be understood how this is the case when we consider that rain

water, which is the source of all water supplies when collected in the open

country and at inland stations is practically free from chlorine. Drink-

ing water also which is uncontaminated by sewage is comparatively free from

this substance, but sewage and urine,* are highly charged with chlorides, of

which common salt is probably in largest quantity. If then a given sample of

water contains no chlorine or very little, it cannot have been in contact with

sewage, but if any considerable amount is present in a water, which is

known not to have come from a tidal river or from any geological for-

mation where deposits of salt are found, such a water would be viewed

with the gravest suspicion, and if this were supported by other

evidence, the water would at once be condemned. Unpolluted river and

spring waters ‘usually contain less than ten parts of chlorine per million

of water, average town sewage in England about one hundred and ten

parts ; shallow well water may contain any quantity from a mere trace

up to 500 parts or even more. The amount of chlorides is scarcely

affected by any degree of filtration through soil; thus the effluent water

from land irrigated with sewage contains the same proportion of chlorine

* Human urine contains about 5000 parts of chlorine per million of liquid,

1880. ] Water supplies of Ouleutta. 93

as the sewage, unless it has been diluted by subsoil water or concentrated

by evaporation.

As an illustration of the quantities of total ammonia and of chlorine

as chlorides found in samples of good or fairly good drinking water, I may

quote some numbers taken partly from Prof. Wanklyn’s work on water

analysis, and partly from other sources such as the Rivers Pollution Com-

missioners’ Reports. The numbers given in the following table show the

number of parts of total ammonia and of chlorine in every million parts of

the water, and the samples of water it will be seen are selected from a variety

of sourees, such as lakes, rivers, wells, springs, &e.

Total Ammonia} Chlorine parts

Description oF WATER. parts per per million

million of water. of water.

London water, Kent Company, aie 000 0:03 235

», New River Company, ... 500 0:08 15°7

Glaseow water from Loch Katrine, ... me 0:08 76

Edinburgh town water, nae me 300 0:07 14°3

Manchester town water, “6 cod 900 0:07 9:0

Chester (Dee) town water, ... ase 600 0:07 5:0

Oxton (Birkenhead) town pee ere 000 0-02

Guildford water, ee vee 0-01 12°6

Caterham water from deep spring, we vee 0°04 15°5

Deep spring at Dorking, ... 00 vee 0-01

Deep Well at Chatham, | dg 500 50 0:06

As an additional comparison of the quantities of ‘ Total Ammonia”

and of Chlorine, which a good potable water should yield, I will quote the

amounts of these substances which have been obtained during the last

four years from analyses of the Calcutta Hydrant water made twice in

each week. In the following table there are given the average results

obtained for each of the last four years, as well as the general average for

the whole of this period.

Calcutta Hydrant Water.

y ,

| No. of days No. of days} Total : :

_.| when : ‘ ; Chlorine

No. of days Dee ayes when not | ammonia |. ai i

“3. |transparent : : s in parts per

of Analysis. anal perfectly jin parts per alleen

bir .| filtered. million.. 3

colorless.*

fe | — ee

merase L876, vi sce 155) ee 187 18 0:037 10°65

fs ISS» oo vee 104 72 32 0:046 10°40

NS 7.8,~. sd, ,uinatys 103 75 28 0:084 | 8:37

rf W879), sce on 103 91 12 0:085 8°50

Sums, ves vee 465 375 90 0°152 37°92

Avorago, ... : 116 94 22 0-038" | 9°48

* When al by transmitted light in a tube three feet in length,

94 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

In passing I may here remark, that a comparison of these numbers *

with those of the previous table, shows that the present water supply of

Caleutta is really of excellent quality, and that very few of the good

waters selected from those given in the works alluded to, are as pure as

our hydrant water. That the purity of the hydrant water as determined

by this process of analysis is not merely exceptional, is clear from the

close agreement of the results of each year with the average of the four

years. It will also be noticed that the hydrant water will fall in class

one of Prof. Wanklyn’s classification, as being a water of extraordinary

organic purity.

On the other hand as examples of waters which are considered in

England to be exceptionally bad, and which are at once condemned as

sources of water for domestic purposes, and as examples of the results

obtained from sewage, I may quote the following from Prof. Wanklyn’s

work on water analysis.

Total ammonia | Chlorine parts

Description or WATER. parts per per million

million of water. of water.

Unfiltered Thames water at Hampton Court, 0°32 11:4

Thames water at London Bridge, AO 211 abril

Well at Leek Workhouse Cetin 0°36 Gol

Well in Windsor, on 1:28 80:0

Well in Eton, ... Act cco 0°84 80:0

Pump in Drapers Hall, London, ED pox 6°31

» 9) Bishopsgate St., London, one Ee 775

» ~~) Goodge St., London, ab eee bee eeealss 177:0

5.5) Oxford Market, <<. odd dem |[P > Akeaonn 4743

Sample of Sewage, oo te 500 17:10 141°4

In addition to these examples I have analysed the Calcutta sewage

by the same process. Thus on December 18th, 1877, samples of sewage were

collected at each hour from 6 a. M. to 6 Pp. M. at the Pumping Station, and

the amounts of total ammonia obtained from three of the samples showed

84:0, $7°0 and 145°6 parts per million of water. The average amount of

chlorine was 170-4 parts in the same volume. This shows a much more

concentrated sewage than that analysed by Prof. Wanklyn, but it is fair

to state that the three samples of Calcutta sewage were of extreme con-

centration, and of a most repulsive and disgusting character.

If we take the first two tables above given as representing good drink-

ing waters, and the last as representing sewage, either dilute or concentrated

as the case may be, we are now in a position to understand the meaning

of the numbers obtained by the analyses of two hundred. samples of

Calcutta tank and well waters, which are given in the tables below.

1880.] Water supplies of Caleutta, 95

I have previously noticed the three standards of purity suggested by

Prof. Wanklyn, but as in the case of these Calcutta tank and well waters,

we shall be dealing with very impure samples, it will be well to adopt some

standards of greater impurity than before given. I think it will be

well within the mark to consider, that any sample of water which pro-

duces more than 10 parts of total ammonia should be classed as a sewage

and not as a water, and that if the amount produced is between 10 and

5 parts, the sample may be called a dilute sewage; from 5 parts to

1 part we have a water considerably contaminated with sewage, and from

1 part down to Prof. Wanklyn’s limit of 0°10 parts of total ammonia,

we have the class of Dirty Waters, which represent water contaminated

more or less with organic or sewage matter. In the same way we may

adopt a classification of the amounts of chlorine present, and there is

apparently no doubt that a Calcutta tank or well water which contains

more than 250 parts of chlorine per million should be classed as a sewage ;

that a water containing from 250 to 150 parts of chlorine may be looked

on as a dilute sewage; that with from 150 to 100 parts of chlorine present

we have a water considerably contaminated with sewage; and when from

100 to 50 parts are present a water may be said to be slightly contaminated,

whilst if less than 50 parts of chlorine are present, the water may be

considered moderately safe.

The first of the two following tables contains the results obtained

from the analysis of the tank waters, and the second the numbers obtained

from the well waters. The tables contain 9 columns, most of which are

explained by their headings. Column 1 gives the date on which the water

was analysed, 2 and 3 the locality from which the sample was drawn and

the section of the town in which the tank or well is situated. Column

4 gives the reason why my attention was called to the state of the

tank or well, and which lead to the water being analysed. Column 5 gives

a very brief description of the physical characters of the sample, prin-

cipally as to colour, smell, presence or absence of solid matters in

suspension, presence of animal life etc., and under this head it may be

mentioned that as most of the waters were extremely dirty and thick,

the examination as to colour was made in a glass cylinder only six inches

high standing ona white surface. Columns 6 and 7 give the amounts of total

ammonia and of chlorine present in every million parts of water. Column

8 gives the decision as to whether the water was considered fit for

potable purposes or whether it was condemned for such uses, and the last

column shews whether the tank or well has been subsequently filled up

or dewatered.

Most of these results have been submitted to the Health Officer to the

Municipality in my capacity of Water Analyst, and it is due to the courtesy

of Dr. McLeod that Iam able to give the columns 4, 8 and 9.

On the past and present

A. Pedler

“OUTIL

<n porta

‘dn port

“OUTTA

‘dn port

“dn pod

“dn porn

‘dn port

“YAR, oy} 0F

BVA BULAN

auop

“og

‘od

“og

‘og

“od

‘og

“od

‘od

“og

‘pouumep

-u0g,

‘you ro sasodamd

J orsouop «a0F po

lee.te

GL-6LE

$6-996

00-6PL

09-P8T

09.96

ST-9P

00-P8Z |

96-996

0¢-61€

00-0T2 |

09-99 |

09.0

g9.2

OFS

GE.

9-1

89-0

08-1

09-6

CL-81

00:06

06-4

GL-PTS

GL-PTS |

GL-SPPF |

0S-068 |

GZ-06¢

00-896 |

00-689

}- UML PUOD TAYJOT AA,

F ‘wore aod syavd

} oULLOTYD jo ywuy

00-6

00-4

OF-G

00-0T

00-81

08-96

06:96

63-81

TP4OL,

vruowmUuLy

| -worjrur tod syavd

“Aqryyaenb oSavy ur you Ayyuoredde

qngq ‘oFtT TeuITUY surBzUOO “prqang “LOTOo YSIGA v FO

ORT [VUULUB Fo [TMF “prqany

AIA T[ous Juvsvotdun ATA ‘LOTOO oFITLA\ YStud14)

Rod aT SUL

JO [OF “prqany ‘ffours yurey ‘ToTOO Ystu9e1s FYSITG

*OTQISTA OTT TeurUY AUL JT

op ‘toyyeur popuedsns suruqzwoo ‘ssoL1O[OO JSOULW

‘OFT] [BUMLEY Jo yUNOUTV oTqRAapIsMod

pur 41033vu popuodsns sureyu0o ‘xo[oo YsTUAoIg

“prqany ATFULSITS “LOTOO YSTALOT[O A

*piqany ATPPLSITS ‘LOTOO YSruseLs FEO

‘aTqejo.soA pure

Teurur ‘eytt Fo TNF ‘ATqruaoy syUNs ‘xto[oo uwoarsy

Ui ecard

jo [TUF ‘YUNSs Stoys OYyZwx “LOTOO UdeLG YS AL

OFT Tere

‘yuaurpos jo Tug ‘AyTqr10y syuYs ‘1ojoo wee14)

‘oFI] TRUULUY pu r0y4yvIU popuod

-sns jo [[ny ‘A[qIIOY syUTyS “OTOO WIS YSLAOT[OX

‘OTT [BULLUB SUTLITO ‘pIqang ‘LO[OO OFT AL YSLAsoTpo A

“SUMIOM SUI}LOT [TVs {ITO TOyyeY

“OFT JO TM ‘prqang Axoa ‘xopoo ystusetry

‘oF JO [TM “Twopo Ajqvaopoy,

“OFTT FO TMT “prqany AtaA *LOTOO OFAN WALT,

‘10}}3euL popuedsns ‘[fous yuvsveTdun ‘10foo weet

‘OPI [VUTU Jo [TNF “LOTOO YsSruear4

‘OFT, JO TMT“ prqang AoA ‘1oToo WaeIrS YSTAOT[O

‘OPT JO TMT ‘*prqany Aroa ‘xopoo Weis YSLAoTyo A

‘uoydraiose(y

“9181 ‘Siang, Yung

“pooyanog tEstow

UE Yywop wLO[OYD

“o(L

‘od

“od

‘od

‘oyeys AUT

*pooytnoqys1ou

UL [yvop vaIsTOy/

‘od

‘oyeys AULA

‘qurivpduLoo pure ‘oq

‘pooyanoqy.sreu Ur

Yjyeop wvxlapoyo 10,7

*stsATBUB OF

poqgtuiqns svar

qoyea AYA WOSBay

MHA4ePAA ZZ

4qARAddoO DO

‘wooog, | Omo

“TOV AVBT, CT

*BAOTIOT, ooIvAy Yu,

“URL,

e[qnog ‘uvseg uepruoyy

‘yuvy,

yynog ‘euvyy, 4g svexyoo0g

“URL,

Yyto NT ‘vueyy, "49 8,vexoog

‘yuu, [ep orodipy

‘yuey pee Aousprsorg

‘qooryg rvzeg unve ‘ZOT

Po0aZS YLTPOPUMAIMY (| ‘THT

‘ouv'T S LIOy

‘qooayg Lary *y,

"YUL, YO WOT

‘gooryg quingfey vley

“qooI}g Ssoyy uBIOpog

‘ouvy Ss yjnevurdnazyyp

*yooT}g Ss ueg UTeIOpuUN Ny

“yervdoorvyi Ny

‘poureztoose AT

-IVOTO Jou AFI[ROOT JO oUIV NT

“yu, Ynog

QoolJg UBSe VOX) ‘GT ‘ON

“YOR L TAO N

GooTyQ UBSVG VOX) ‘GT ‘ON

“AqTPVOO'T

“SE

“

‘OL *09(T

61 ‘ado

‘ST “Suy

‘OT ec

“

°g Avy

“0g [dy

0g “oe

“

LT ‘Qore yy

—_—_—_

‘aye

for)

“dn port

“dn poh

“dn pod

‘eg ‘ON

. “dn petty

S “dn perd

S ‘0g ON

& *poroyeAr

[o)

° Qu

fo}

(o>)

1880.]

‘Od = 08,86

‘og ~=s«|0¢-61E

‘od |¢L-681

‘0d = |Ga-LEe

“Od =s|¢L-086

‘0ds|00-GFT

‘od = |¢L-08%

‘“Ood~=s«|00-¢¢E

‘od =| gL-086

9€-GE

19-99

00-TL

‘ods |€%-€61

‘od = |OF-OLT

‘og |o2-sLr

“pouulep

“uo, [02-9ST

>a\|sF

225/28

ame | ao

ge |e

R foFKe) 3

ee | se

Bee | ae.

ee | 82

GS-6

90-&

TOL }

‘wor tod szred |

VIOWLUL Wy

“plqany ATEATssaoXO ‘SYUTS ‘TOTOO oFIT[A\ YSTUMOIG ‘od VY | Tsgymeg ssog 100yey, ‘et | 0c *

‘1oqyeuL pepuedsns ‘ouvry

[Uy “prqmy Aroa ‘syuys ‘copoo youtq sou umorg | ‘oweys ANITA | M | Suepprng MypopH ‘s1}| 61 *

“pooymmoqy.s1ou

“piqany ‘TPouls yurvy “TOTOO O4ITAr YStMoory) | UL YZLop BLOPOYD | WM ‘ouvT s4juq my ‘GT | ‘st “

srayyvul popuoedsns wears

‘piqany AroA “Mopo Jury “IOTOO oyTYAr Ystuatp) ‘od N | come -A\ toyndrsoay ‘ot | LT“

“prIq.iny ATYYSTTS ‘Tous JUIVF “LOTOO YstuMorLg ‘aqeqys ATYTLL N ‘ouvry vavdoorwyy ‘0g | “91° “

“prqany ‘sxurs ‘10yyvuL popuedsns “xo[oo wWoa.tf) ‘od N |ouey qseq rayndrsoayy ‘Ze | er “

‘OFTT TRUIU

FO TINE prqamy ‘syurys “194y Bur popuedsns ‘10p00 weary) ‘od N | ‘peoy avjmomy rao07y ‘Z9 | ‘FT

“prqany Area ‘ATpeq sT[ows “LOTOO WALI YSIALY AA ‘od N ‘ouvy vavdoorey ‘Zp | st =“

“10}yeur popuedsns “pooymmoqy.stou

uoorS Jo [[NF ‘prqany ‘ATqM10Y syUurTys “TOpTOO Maer | UL Ywop vAePoyD | N | OULT SvoT qoqudtsoan ‘Te | "2~ “

OSE) pats

pue Iozea sly] UseAy

“plq.iny puev “10[09 YSTFIYA B FO ‘od WY | eq woyR} YrPMN Ss Aoypoy, | “9 “IPT

“prqiny pue ‘LOT[OO YStLIYA\ B JO ‘0d ap | “(Fo Joos) ‘asprag SSULISe AL uy

“piqany pur ‘1opoo ySHIGA VIO | ‘oyeas AUITLT WU “YBN s.Aoqqoy, | “ez “

“piqany puv ‘LoToo YSiIYA v JO | “op Jo yuryduoy | q{ | Jog YeooyummyY “py | “ST “Gd

‘aaqsug

“oue'T

‘pooymoqysrou SSPYN]L unqepurrg

“oJIT TRULLUG FO [TNF puw ‘prqiny “Topoo ystuoors v JQ | Ul Yyeop vropoyD | @ | UF AVL ston qedoy | ‘et “

aul EME)

eUTUL JO [TMF pue ‘prqany “ToOpOO ozTYAr YsrUse.cy) ‘aqyeys AUITLAL QO | ®uryT svuesueyy wpoy}| 6 ‘ure

‘stsATeur 0} o

poytmqnus sea | 7 “AqyeVoorT ‘aye

‘morydr10sa(T

"LIST ‘SHAD YURL

19jva. AYA. WOSvYT)

—————————

‘od

‘dn por

‘od

“pouultop

a 00@)

A. Pedler—On the past and present

“dn por

‘you 10 sosodand

oNsoulop «oF po

UMP) TOYJOU AA,

0¢-06€

GL-108

GL-S89

0¢-8h6

09-066

G6-996

0¢-L9F

00-411

00-G¢8

00-92F

CC-6LF

¢L.6ST

GL.0&6

0-618

0G-80F

00-786

CL-6S1

00-9¢8

G6-996

THO FO “FUIW

‘uorpm sod szavd

auLLO

\00-8

00:06

99-86

09-61

F8-61

00-8

00-9T

8P-0

00-8

OF-96

08-1

00-006

OF-8

00-0F6

9T1-9T

00-9T

00-91

00-09

00-F6

TPL,

‘wort od syred

BIUOULULY

“10}yvur popuodsns ‘sTfouls ‘LO[Od AVLOTTO XK

+1094 RUL

popusdsns “uoosoyedo ‘sqpours ‘tofoo uMoIg

‘royyeu popuedsns youut ‘ywaoseTedo

Apomoryxa ‘ATqMIoy «syuys ‘aojoo uMoIg

“109 yeUL

popuodsns ‘sxyurys ‘to[0o Youtq ysourye YSstuMoIg

“royyeu popuedsns “yuaosapedo

Ajouoryxo ‘ATqLuIoy syurys ‘topoo usead 4uLSrag

*TOYPLUL [BUILT puL

popuodsns ‘yuaosoredo ‘sqfouts ‘xofoo ystuMorg

‘Ieyyeur popuadsns 973411

‘qusosorvdo ‘sT[awWIS ‘COTO WALOAG YSTAOT[I

*1oqyVUL popuodsns YALA prqany

AyySys ous ou ‘Aopoo uUAOoIq YSTAoT[IX

“piqiny ATA ‘SYUYS ‘1OTOO WoIAS YSTPITE AA

“1oyyvuL popuadsus Waer8 YULSLaq

jo [uF ‘prqmmy Ajpoatssooxe ‘Ayqta1oy syuyg

“prqing ‘sypours ‘topoo YstuMOrE,

‘rayyeu popuodsns of4}1] “uoredsuvsy ysoupy

‘1oqyyeu papuodsns

OT “Prqmy ApyYSs “opoo oyrya. Ystumorg,

“prqany

Ajaatssooxe ‘ATqIIIOY syUs “MMoIq Ystusety

"prqany APOAISsooXo ‘SYUT}S ‘TOTO OFTTEA YSTUAMOIT

“prqamy ATIWST[S ‘spTous “topoo o4ITpAr YSULMoIg

“plqany ‘sxYUTYS “TOTOO oZLTPAL YSrUda.c4)

od ‘od 0d

“prqang ATaATssooxa

‘syuys “1O[OO oa}IYAX YSryovpq IO ystuMorg

“uorydraoso(y

“od

“og

“od

‘pooymmogysiou UL

Yyvop vlo[Oy IOV,

‘y1oder 8° “H UO

“Yyeop valoloyO,

“purepdunog

‘og

“og

“od

“og

‘pooyinoqy.sieu utr

Yyeop wvxopoyg 10,7

‘sisATeur 04

poqyyruaqns svar

ToYVA ATAX WOSBaY

‘PANU2JUOQ— LIST ‘swajyny, Yyunz

OG 0 :O:. 0 1: .OR ome

KEM

Na}

MOIqDIG

‘qooryg qeaedoolima ‘TE

“OuBTT

Seolreyyeyy ynavy, “Lz

“qoaayg sol

~ToHEYO puvyo sooyny “¢

‘poolyg sesoyn Aun ‘eg

‘qooryg ooraeqpoolsnyy ‘ZZ

“peoy exrodyryy zoddg ‘eT tT

*qooryg Lowy ‘y

“peoy oxodyryy ‘06

‘ouvry ouryuadag ‘6

“OUv'T 8,eyvT O4sty ‘8

‘OUvT Sqn, nz ‘8

‘ouvy vavderyper ‘1%

‘ouury

Suvppng Mypopyy “6 Vz

‘ouvry ourquadi19g ‘FOT YeOT

‘OUvT FROpeyurg ‘gg

‘ouv'T Sosoyy) InyuNg ‘Zz

"4OOI4Q ST[VAUILOLD ‘QT

‘ouvry vavdyri1o(¢ ‘CT

‘ouvry Sqn MYAQ ‘OL

“AYROO'T

“ce

“1g a

«cc

ES “

0G TPIL

‘oyeqy

ies of Calcutta.

Water suppl

1880.1

“dn poy

“dn poly

“dn por

‘dn polhy

pertoyeaop

‘LON

‘dn poly

96 pure F

61 SON

‘Oo /6%-S8T

‘oq = |ez.¢81

‘od |e4-T08

‘od = (¢3-992

‘od 00-81%

‘Od —00-2FT

‘od = 00-TL

‘0d 06-922

‘Od 00-8FT

‘Od (S461

‘od 09.18

O¢-PL

0d S8-F2T

‘Od 08-441

‘0d G3. 188

“pouulep

“00 00-98F

“OFT [eUMTUY Fo TNF “Toqyvur pa

-puodsns Ay4yuUenb [wus “yuoosetedo ATYSTS

‘Tjews guvsvetdun ‘xojoo ogityA. yYsTuaMorg

cOF IRC e SOFT:

‘roqyeum popuodsns Aq1yUeNb T[euurs ‘yusosoyedo

ASS ‘Tfows ySys “opoo uses YSLAoT[a

‘oyT] TRUITUR ‘104

-yeu pepuedsns ‘syurys ‘10[00 UMOIG YSTUIdL

‘oyTT [BUILUY ‘1043vUL

popusdsns ouros ‘syurys ‘toToo WaaIS YSTAMOT[I T

‘1O]JVUL [VUITUB PUB IOIZVUT papuedsns Jo

Tey ‘ATpeq syuys “topoo aqrya. yYstuerty

‘oFT] TeUIUY ‘yUAOSET

-edo ATyYSTIS ‘ATIYSITS sT[ours ‘top[oo YStAvo|[a A

‘FIT [VULTUR

sureyu0o “uoosetedo ‘syurys ‘LO[OO YSLAMOoT[A A

‘oJT] [VULTUB TON ‘[TouIS

guesvatdun yurey “tojoo Ystaropjad B JO TOI AL

‘OFT] [VULLUY TONUE ‘1oqyvu popusdsns

pue ‘qqows quvsvotdun qurey ‘ssapcopoo ysowpy

‘ro}yeu popued

-sns sureyuoo ‘ATWYSTTS sT[ouIs ‘10[OO AVoT[a x

“109 BUL

pepuedsns yonta ‘emsodxe uo yusdsetedo

seuloveq + ‘uasorpAY poyomnydqns jo syuryg

‘Ioyyvut papuedsns Tonur

‘Ayuvseoydun syjous pue ssep1ojoo ysoupy

‘OFT, [PUITUY OsSTR x 1033vUI popuadsns ‘prqany

AWYSTs fous quvsvoydun ‘1opoo YStAsoy[az

“10]jVU [BUITUR PUB 10};vUL papued

“SNS TONU Y}IA ‘syUTys “TO[OO agIYA\ YsTUseTH

“10}yvu popuedsns Jo [INF “41100

-sopedo ATaatssaoxe ‘syUT}s ‘IO[OO WeeTs JUS

‘Ioq}vu pepuedsns

JO [UF ‘quoosojedo ‘syurys “topoo Yourq ystusary

“410d

-01 §,90}}TUIMOK,

UPL uo

*pooymoqy ston

tt ge Peele |Ou@)

‘yure;duroy

‘023s AULT

*pooymMogy.srow

UL Y}vop vIOTOYHO

“qure[ duno,

“od

“*pooymmoqy.siou

Way EAD CREILOULG)

*oyeys MOT

*oye4s [NOT

“og

“eIO[OYO Sur

+S¥I Jo yurepdutoy

‘ouRvT qounyy s,Aarey ‘TT

ouvry-aNg “yg swayoog ‘)

‘9S S.doyITT AouowyiN ‘gg

‘qooryy Arreqpoolsugy ‘pF

“qooI}g Ivzeq vooyoryy ‘Z9

‘ouv'T STITH ‘9

"PLOY SJONLA “ZI Y OT

‘ouv'T Jseq mnyndiSoayy ‘gz

‘uURSeg soysuIg

“49 S.asoyy) dasouvieg ‘FZ

‘49 BSUTpOD YyNog ‘91 2 CL

“E TUL

"Vy Wuey, |

‘qooryg Iezeg unee ‘66

‘eT[OpVIO LP “UBSBT

Ivpeuoy ‘yu, elqnoq

‘og ‘od ‘9T

“eared

-PT[VOH “Al ULseg voy ‘gz °

"g “

‘og “

“LS “ce

OZ «

‘OL “

6 PO

83 “

‘OL “

“

9L a3

“

OL [dy

Ud |

‘dn port

‘dn porta

‘Pe ‘ON

A. Pedler—On the past and present

‘pouwurep

-u0K

sosodand

Loy po

‘Jou IO

olsouLop

UULI PO) LOOT AA

G6-PPG |9T-1T

GO-IST |OF-S

OL-G9Z |GE-8S

06-G0Z |99-83

CE-20G |9L-3

09-ETT [00-8

CL-6SL 08-1T

CO-IST F8-6

Z-C61 00-81

Sb | ie

BEES

ae | ts

aren fae aS

Beg:

Bo | EB

Ol see

Oo. Eee

BE | ges

‘oFIT TRUUIUE FO [INF ‘1oyyvuL popuod

“sng Ton ‘ATqIAIIOY 4SOU SYULYS “LOTOD WoIT¥)

“OFTT [RUUTUY TONUL

‘royyeut «=pepuedsns jo yunowe eyvslopour

{jouls guvsvoydun sey ‘LO[OO o4IT[AX YSIU9aL¥)

‘OFIT [RUILUR suUTRJTOD ‘109}BUL po

-puodsns wooas Jo [nF ‘Tous peq AoA v sv

step Mof B4doy WoT ‘IO[OO UAOIG SIFT AL

‘oFT] TRUITUY pu ‘10}yeUL

popuodsns woo Jo [THF ‘ATqri0y syurys sAvp

Ao v ydoy Suteq Wo ‘LOTOO UMOIG WoeIs yarvqy

‘oFTT [RUTUR

Jo TF ‘xoyyvur popuodsns jo Ayryuvnb Tpeus

‘quaosoedo royyer ‘syuTys “LOTOO MOTLAA YsTUITy)

‘OTT [RUTUY pure ‘104}vUT

popuodsns yon ‘fJews qurey ‘10[09 uwaeT4)

SOF TATE OAT arity:

‘quoosoTedo {TOUS FSIS “LOTOO WALOIG YSLMOTLO A

‘OFT TRUIIU

pur r0yxutr popuodsns users jo [nF “U9

-sopzdo ATVISI[S [fous FUSS “xopoo Ystuseaty

‘ofI] TBULLUY PUB 10yyvUL popuadsns Wo0IS Jo

[uy ‘Quoosetedo ‘syuys ‘1o[0o o4ryA YstuoeT4)

‘morpAL1089 (T

‘oquys AIT

‘Qo}JTUIMLOD, YU,

jo gaodor oy} UG

‘od

*pooyamnoqystou

UL BIO[OYO

“yurepduoy

*pooymmoqy.srou

UL WLP VA9TOYD

‘stsATRUB 0%

poqyturqns svar

“papnjauog—LLSt ‘saya yuny

jroyva AYA WOSvory

“MOTJOIG |

lode §

qSoAX aoyndtSoon ‘GT

pure ‘ouvy vavdoornyy ‘gT

‘oun

Syvyuquznyy =amznN ‘ZT

‘peoy avpnorrg soddg ‘FOr

"ig sgqjnq pesorg ATTeyy ‘OF

‘qyooryg iezeg unee ‘c)

‘ouvT pug Snequivungy ‘9

“yooayg Iezvg vooyoryy ‘eg

‘qooryg aoynduvyy ‘6

“yuBy, oojsug ULATOD

———

“Aqrpeoory

QT 74

“

‘TL “

‘OT “90g

TOA “

‘ol “

Silt “ce

‘OL “

*Q “AON

ou @ §

5 ‘oJIT TeUTUY ‘10};etL popuedsns

cal ‘Od §=/0G-T9F |FL-88 | Yonur “yuoosoyedo Axoa ‘syUTs “LOTOO YSTMMOIg ‘od fe ‘qoI4Q Yepoyporaryy ‘g} 8“

*10}{VUI pa

-puedsns qonur ‘4yuoosezedo ‘uoSorpAy poqyor

‘Od = |E%.80F |0S-1T | -nydqns jo ATqrat0y syuT4s “tofoo mMoTTox User 0d i ‘uvseg nysur | “¢ “Ie]T

‘OFT, [RUITUY “194

-yeur popuadsns Yonur “Quaosoredo ‘aasorpAq a

‘Od = 62-647 |0Z-% | peygemydins jo ATpeq syUNs ‘10,00 UMOIG ‘og gq ‘ouUvT S,UTeSOX) OOWIDNY ‘T

‘OFT, OU ‘1093vuL papusedsngs

‘Od = |6Z.99z |99.0F | Youur “uoosoredo ‘syurys “tooo UMOIq MOTD 0g T ‘rezeg Mog “ZT | °L6 “Ww

‘oyT] [wu ‘1043vU popuodsns

6 ‘0d )~=s«|06-922 |6F-T SUIeIUOD Jaws yuBsvoTduN ‘1OTOO WALoI B Sey ‘0g 9 “LOPVM YUL, VlVIB ST ss

~ ‘OJT] [BULLY OTQISTA OU ‘1994,vUT ‘OUvrT

3 ‘Od =|¢a-F2T/LZF-L | popuedsns AyQuenb y[eus ‘syus ‘AvoT[a x od 9 | sayuq wepunygnedon 2z] ‘0g “

S ‘OFT, [eu Yonur ‘1943vur

d ‘Od = /00.ZF1T\Z4-e | pepuodsns op Fews YSIS ‘xoToo AoT[O A 0g Vv ‘qooaqg anygoodureyg ‘Tg | “6t “

—~ “CRAG heteeg ans

Ss ‘reyyeu papuadsns op4I1] “yuoosezedo ATW YSTIs

8 ‘Od =(|08-22T|02-F | ‘Tews yuesvetdun ‘10joo woeers YSTAoT[a x ‘od a war ar war See Te

S “Ouv'T

Sy ‘Od = |O1-6FT |00-Z1 | *199}8ur popuodsns oumos “roToo YstMOTTAA 104R A, ‘od CA | 840 puvyg sooyng ‘F] 6 =“

= <‘dupoyny ‘oPT] [VUUTUY YONUE ‘x9q3RUT

& ‘0€ “ON| ‘oq |eF.ogzl90.Tz | popucdsns yontz ‘syuys “1ofoo woerS qySirg ‘od rf) ‘qooI}S sTVAUIOD ‘6zI| “s “

s ‘oFT] [RUIIUR suIeyWOD ‘1934vUL popuadsns ouvT

iS 0d) «08-26 |9F-S | OT99TT [lows guesveydun “to[od wears YSLAOT[O A ‘og qa | 8.400 puryp moyng ‘e| “4 “

‘pouuep ‘ofIT [BUTTER pue 10}{vUL pepmodsns Jo [uF *pooymnoqystou

“U0 |02-C2F |08-TS | ‘Tous quvsvoydun Artoa “topoo ystmored dea | ut yyvep vaopoyg | W | ‘goog quynqfey vley Go| *-g ‘ure

| Q pe]

se | 2282/22/22 g

act Samet] Ge | ae ss

eS 886 | FE ls ‘stsATeUR 04 3

me Be || Pryde & “mo ditosaqy poqraqns sea | ¢ “Aqryeo0ry ‘owed «ot

ee gs £| BE zoqva TM Wosvayy

Fe lege| @| 8

B | +8 PoalnGees

os 5 > ©

1880. ]

“SL8T ‘S4aq0g4 YUN,

[No. 2,

A. Pedler—On the past and present

102

“yuBy oy} OF

ouOp SVM AVILA

‘od

‘you ro sosodand

oYs9uULop OJ pa

-UULAPWOd. LATOU AA,

G-8L86

89-291

08-6

OT-06

G6:20T

00-S96

GL-0&6

GL. 108 |

0¢-618

OS-8PG |

MOTE

rod syavd our1opyO

L1.0

Vé-0

08-0

91-3

T&T

99-6P

60-&

89-4

00-21

62.6

T?7O.L

‘mora rod syavd

VIOULUL

‘royyeu popuodsns youu ‘uaSorpAy

poyqgornydyus Jo [OWS FSIS ‘WAOIG YStAoT[a A

‘yoyyou popuoedsns

Ayyuenb ][euUs Ffows Fysrs ‘Aojoo OTTER

“Ayuend

UL toyyeur peurue ‘AyyWUeNb osavy UT 104yeUE

popuodsns woos ‘syuys ‘tooo Ystuoaerty

‘oyT] TRUILUY ‘10438vuL popuodsns

Ayyuenb qpeus ‘Tows yurey ‘1o[oo yYstuse.ry)

‘OJT] [BUILUR TOUT

‘royyeu ~popuodsns Yonut ‘sus ‘LO[Oo UMOIG

‘OFTT [VUIIUB OTGISTA ‘1944vUL popuodsns

Aqyuenb oSiwp ‘syUTys ‘tO[OO OFITLA YSTMOTTO A

‘oFT] [wUTue ‘10443vuT popuodsns AqryUEND T[peuULs

‘quoosotedo AroA Tous pwq “XOTOO YStuMOIgG

NSH MO

‘royyeud popuadsns woes Fo [NJ “yuoosetedo

Aron ‘ATQUMIOY syUys ‘ooo woests 4yysiug

AAG Rees

‘IoJoo §=ysTuaeT

‘yuaosoqedo AOA ‘sxUTgS

“morydr108e (f

*pooymmoqystou

UL Y}Vep BLOPOYO

“gurepdutoy

*pooyamnoqy.sreu

Ur YywVop vAlolOyy)

‘sisATeue 04

poyyttuqns svar

Jozwa AYA WOsvary

“Panwlzuog—SL8I ‘sHawy yoy,

‘oS pl §,Loueg

‘porg AoqsoT[o MA | ‘OT Avy

‘UB oqug yeypoyumany) *2z pady

‘peoy avmnormrg zasdd gq

‘eg ‘yuny, uvseqtoopeg

‘yuvy, oqng orodezaryy

‘qoo14Q Ivzeg

yeueyyonyAog §=plO ‘Fg

‘oury inyoodumyy ‘ep

“P2948

SLOFFTT TPL 0H “Gs

*yooT]G §9108Vq,

Iwulo0y + ouUNssOIg ‘9%

*JO0T4G STT[CMULOD “FEZ

“AYTROO'T

(13

“

“TT “eT

‘oyeqy

103

‘dupeyta| “od |0¢-6T¢ |98-8T

‘0d (08-8FZ |6¢- IT

OG = /0S-44T 09-44

BS ‘Od = |0S-L41 |OF-66

S “OT |S9-823 |06-4

> ‘od = (00-812 |a4-8

LZ}

S ‘0d = |SF-602 |86-T

& ‘0d = (08.692 |06-F

IN od ~=—(00-81z [00-6

*poumep

“U0 |06-8hS |89-2

SS (225) ee lees

a @ Eo re)

BS o &8 mo | 8

Las RES =| B

& |See\85)] Be

Bless] es | ge

1880.]

OFT] [RUITUY TONUE “1044vUL

pepusdsns yonu ‘mopo 4ysris ‘10joo Aer *eLOTOUD

‘OSST

‘roq4yeur popuodsns jo Aqyyuenb osavy “4u990

-soedo Aroa ‘ATQvUTUTOGe SYUT}S “OTOO WAOIG “yurey,duio,)

‘doqyvum popuodsns Jo AyyURNb oSavp ‘yuoosoy

-edo Aroa ‘ATpeq syULs ‘O[OO UMOIG YSIyOR[_ “eIO[OUO

“1047 BUL

pepusdsns jo Ayyuenb osie, “Guaosatrdo

Azoa lous yuvsvetdun ‘ropoo yovyq ystumo4rg ‘yureldu0g

‘194yeu popuodsns jo AztyUeNnb

Tews “Yuaoseyedo {ows peq ‘xojoo ystumorg ‘0g

"1094 8UL

popuadsns yonur ‘ATpeq syurs “tofoo ysrumorg ‘od

‘Ioqyeu popued

-sns yonur ‘Ay;qvuruioqe syurs “ojoo ysryoRlq od

“Ayryuenb

Tews UL oft, TeULUe ‘Z0y;eT papusdsns jo

Ayyuenb [[vus “Mopo zYPSTIs “Topoo YStaoyyo A

“OFT, [VUILUY SUTBIWOD *1904)RUT

popuedsns yonu ‘A[peq syuNs ‘10[oo MoTIAK ‘0d

‘opT] [RUILUR SUTR{WOO ‘104;vUL popuod ‘pooymoqystou

“sus jows peq AoA “10TOO Users yYsSIyovlg | Ul yyBep varo[oyO

‘sisATeuR 04

pezpiaiqnus svat

Joye AYA Wosvary

‘worydtrosaqy

‘GLSI ‘SvaqoM Yun

‘uoyoog_| 4Z4Aeo A<z#aaAaH

“poy Ueseg wor “6 ‘oN

‘Iezeg sneg

‘oUvT 8.10} YON ‘OMT

‘ouv'Ty

doyndeioe ‘{~ pue gt

“oue'T

Sneq wmnyoyy Atvoeg ‘g

‘ouRTy

SAPTMIL unqepuyg |

‘qooryg s val

“IoyNyy uMYD wsang ‘zz

‘ouvy s Arp

-neyg prsordoo1ooy ‘9¢

‘qo01]Q Topaeryy

‘peoy rvjnomg roddy ‘eg

‘peoy remo soddy ‘Zg

*Aqrpeoory

Sn | SN NRIT | MRSS ST eA So a aE UTORC O TaeOC SW SCC ESE SNS oS SSOP SSDS SR SS wre C—p er emeeoeeaereererepeeeoee

‘aye

4s 0d

~yD

Qy ‘0d

S ‘Od

7 “

aS od

as *pouutop

jal) -mw0pn

sa | ead

a5 ra oO

Bt Som

+4 ® g

poe) 7)

Bb 2 a0

Re 2°98

a p Be

° ou

5 ta 8B

@ oB

104

VLG

89-91

99:66

9T-8

V8-€T

09-996

S1-TOP

00-966

GS-LEE

00-61

GL-6S1

C6-S6T

“TOYVM JO WOTTTUL

tad syred ourtopyy

IL-0

40-0

O10

OT-0

60-0

9T-O

00:8

08:9

06-86

00:9

00:7

06-ST

*TOYLAL JO

Te}O.L

wor azod szyavd

CTUOULU

‘oyT] [etary Jo AqryUenb Tpeus

quorvdsuer1y JSOWTL ‘TOUIS OU ‘ssoTLOTOO ySOWITY

jeurrue jo AyyUenb ypeus AroA Guoredsuvsy

puv Ivopo ysowype ‘[[oUIs OU ‘sseTLOTOO 4ysouTy

-oyT] Teuuruy Jo AyyueNnb

Tres ‘piqany aoyyer ‘Tjous ou ‘topoo Ary

*oyIT Teuutuy Jo AyyUeNp Tpeus

prqany oyyva ‘Tfous ow ‘Topo ystAors 4yLSTTG

‘op Tetra yo Aqryuenb

Treus “prq.my «oyyer Tpous ou “topoo ystéony

‘opTy TRUTUe Jo AqryUNNhH Tews “uoredsuvzy

pUL Ivo] JsouNTe ‘T[ous OU ‘TOTOD MOTTAA 4ILSTTG

say] TRUATUY “19yyeuI popued

-sns ‘piqiny Aqoa ‘ATpeq syUys “Lofoo Wae14)

‘oJT] [lau Yon ‘r0y;vUL

popuoedsns Gots guvsvordun ‘xofoo weeL4

‘oyT] [eTUTUY Yonur ‘194yvt popuod

-sns ‘qjows juvsvetdun ‘rojo morppos yysitg

‘OFIT ToUIU ‘1oyyvuL popued

-sns yout ‘A,qvurmoqe syurys “to[oo weer

“oFTT TBUUTUY ‘royyvUI popued

“sns Wd0IS Fou “INopo 4YySsT[s ‘Lo[oO Waar)

‘OPI TRUITER TONuE “1944vUL pa

-puodsns Tonur ‘mopo yuesvezdun ‘1opoo Aorry

tory di1ose(y

“og

“qyurepdunoy

‘od

‘IOAO SUITOMG

jo d0UdTRADIT

‘sisk[eue 04

pojyrurqns Svar

Toya ATLA WOsvery

“uepre yy

‘opeurdsy ojtsoddo yuvy,

“qooayq Avspury oytsoddo

yuey, ssseq rvyouoyy

"quig Tesuog

oytsoddo yuvy, serous

‘Terpoyyey

quer, Sqonley

sLEZPOUTEA)

‘quey, nlarg

*ATaZoULa/)

PLO PONS WT FO YG

“yooryg

swolreyeyQ ooyorg ‘TE

jo qyI0u

jo ynos

‘ouvTT Sosog Yeurypery

‘ou

SuIvssoxyy vaIPUOyORL ‘TT

“peoy 849M “SE

“Peo §.49ONl “TS

“peory § FIONA ‘GE

“APPLOOT

“PG “uve

‘aqeg

“panurquvng—OSST ‘StazD44 Yuan,

105

Water supplies of Calcutta.

1880.]

TOA oy} 0%

oUoOp SBA FBTEAL

‘og

‘poumep

-w0g

‘you ro sosodamd

OSouLop LOZ po

UUAPUOD LOYJOY AA,

¢9-T6L

0-068

O4-L0€

00-0TL

0S-Z2T

09-6€

00-96P

00-6PT

0S-896

G6-169

GL-P1S

00-812

0S-8%

09-441

TO) $O) UL Vi

OULLO

wort tod syrvd

89-€

OV-G

SLD

08-0

OF-0

0S-0

06-0

92-T

0¢-0

69-0

06:8

OF-0

08-0

89-T

“wort cod szavd

We E38

BIUOULUL

“10338 popuodsns

guvsvotdun yurey ‘ssopto[oo 4soulLy

*109}vUL popuoedsns

oT ‘Tous yuvsveydun yurey ‘to[OO YSTAoT][A A

‘roqyyeu popuedsns jonur

{youls qurez ‘LoTooD wAOIG YstMoyjaf suoayg

+109 eUL

popuedsns qonur {ots yurez ‘TO[OO YSTAVoT[e A

"104}vUI popuadsns [aus yUTYF ‘IOTOO YSTUAOIG

‘roqyeut popuodsns

jo JUNOUIY [VIS “TOUS JUTLT ‘sso[LO[OD soul WY

*10}48U popuedsns Jo yunourle

Tews ‘Tous yurez ‘1opoo ystaoypat 4ST

“roqyvuL popuod

-sns Quoosetedo {jams Aysvu ‘xopoo YstuAorg

‘Iayyeur popuedsns

JO JUNO [[VUIS [ows yUIey “TOTOD YSTUAOIG

“1oyyeur popusdsns

JO JUNO [[eUS ‘T[OUIS JULIET ‘sso[LO[OO ysouITY

“1097 eu

popuedsns jo saovaz} ‘TTous ou ‘IO[OO YSTAOT[A A

‘jours

*104}vUL popuadsns ow ‘ssapIO[O9 ysouLy

“19qyvur popued

“SMS OT]IIT ‘TJows ou “TOTOD YSsTUAMOIG AYSITG

‘1oyyeur papuodsns Fo [ny ‘yuaoseyedo

AWS ‘ATqIIIOY SYUTs “ooo Yov[q Ysrusety,

—s —

‘uorjdt1ose(y

soyeys AULA

oqeys AUNT

ami

‘oqeys AUT

“od

oyeys AYIA

*pooymoqy.s1eu

UL Yyeep wIO[OYO

“stsATeuR 04

poqjturqns svat

Toyea ATA WOSBdzT

“LLSL “84020 112M

wos | gm oF A A A A A Oo mM A OO

‘Ivzeg elmMg ‘CFT

"qooT]G IBzZVq vooyovyy ‘ECT

“ATT nyoodsuvyy ‘e

“Ayqndvyooy en AL

“Ayqudvourg rezeqevaimg ‘6

‘qo0N49 YeTo}N ‘og

‘ATMH sokgq vurvyg ‘6

‘aojsng 8,ssoq Tv] o10ff ‘)

“qooI]g Uvseqeior ‘9

‘qool]g URseqrior Pz

‘oojsng Iezequnee

“Aqqnd

-vepAoy, rIezeqvamg ‘9T

‘OUBT S.ssoq [vy o10FF ‘T

‘uBRsRqeIor ‘ce

*ApPVOOTT

OT “ony

“er

‘gr

“

YT 6

‘or

-r

‘at

‘or

6 «

*g Avy

‘oye

A. Pedler—On the past and present

106

‘om ([ge-129

; ‘Od = 08-896

‘od |8a-96T

‘od |g4-88

od [08-241

‘Od = 0-44

‘om |S4-68T

‘od |09-80F

‘od |0S-6Te

"od |e4-6ST

‘Od = |0S-06€

*pouuep

“u0) |¢2-992

s3 |yed| Ze

FS [ound] a?

2 See |e

ad | Bais ea

fe ices (ae

Fe eee Pee

® 31 GUE Bo

0-9

CEP

86-6

08-ST

€8-4

$6-§

OV-LT

V9.4

94-€

CVT

T8-6

Vo POL,

‘mori rod syavd

‘erTuouluL

‘OTT [RUUTUY TONUE ‘x944vUL pa

-puodsns 9}9IT ‘[[ows yuesvotdun “1opoo MOT[I A

‘royyeut popuod

-sns ‘Tjows yuvsvetdun poprosp ‘IoToo MOTO A

‘oyTT TRUIIUY ‘104yvuL popuodsns

{lows guesvodun yurey ‘ssoptojoo ysowyy

‘oF, [RULE

jo soovry pur ‘1943vur popuadsns ‘yus0soTvdo

‘Ayjyuvsvotdun syjous ‘“xofoo avoyad YStyITL AA

“Ioqyeut popuodsns

guesvotdun yurey ‘ssop1ojog

‘IoyeuUL popuadsns Jo

Ayyuenb yeus [fous yurey ‘ssopxtojoo ysourpy

‘OFT, [RUTTER YouTySIp ‘x0y4yvuUL popuodsns Youu

‘quoosotedo Axoa ‘ATpeq syuNs ‘tojoo wAOIg

‘royyeur popuodsns Azryuenb Tpeurs

Tews yuesvojdun yurey ‘ssoptofoo soupy

‘OFTT [BUIIUY JouTystp ‘194ynuL pepuadsns Jo

Aqyuenb eSavy [ous yuvsvotdun yurey ‘ssopxopo9

ze)

[elute yourystp ‘19443vu1 popuodsns fiemend

Tews ‘Tous guvsvotdun yureyz “10,09 YSTAOT[OX

*roqyeut popuodsns

Aqryuenb T[eus Fours yurey ‘ssoytopoo ysourry

*JOUTYSIP ofl, TBUIIUY ‘194;vUL popuodsns

Tous yuRsvotdun qurey ‘LOTOO WAaTS YSTAOT[I

oy = ‘Tous

uoryditosa (7

“yyeop Biloloyy

“yyeop wIOTOYO

‘pooymoqystou

Ur YPVSp BLeTOUH

‘sisATeur 04

poyjiuiqns svar

Toywa AYA Wosvary

“WOT}OIG | (co <> a =>]

‘ouvTT ouTyModu0g ‘geT

‘ouRT

8 Ssoq TI®T o10yT oaysnq

“Aqyndvourg rezeqvaing “6

“Joo1]Q uBseqrto pr ‘¢

“4qqynd

-epAoyl aezegq wimg ‘9]

‘ouv'T S.Ssoq Tv] 01079 ‘T

‘qoor4G UBqvior soqsug ‘FZ

‘ouvy s Avg vureyg “6

"poor4s Yop ‘Og

‘ooIyg URseqvior ‘9

‘ouv'yT myoodsuvpy ‘¢

Joo] UvSvqvIlopr ‘Fz

*ApTTVOO'T

"OG “

‘61 “

*g T “

Ti “

‘OT «

‘ep

‘zr

eT “

‘948

“panurzUuog—LLS ‘84agvg 112A

Water supplies of Calcutta. 107

1880. ]

‘dnupeytd} “od |¢4.FT¢|

‘od = 0g.g09

‘oq |0g.9T8

“0d~=s|¢g.0cF

‘0d =((09.4gF

‘od |oz.zs¢

‘0d ~—-|S9.2ST

0d |S.6LF

‘od =—|00-689

‘0d =|. 1F8

“poumep

U0) /S4.88

use| Q

g8 | eae | 22

2 ZHe | Be

al Bee | og

a Peas ie

8 | 948 3

@ * 6-8 8

6G-L2T

V6.0

00-89

09-0

08-0

08-61

66-1

08-§

08-€

0¢-T¢

OP-T

TOL

uoTpLu od sqyaed

BTULOULUL

‘OJT] TBUITUL OTQISTA OU “10q}vUE po

-puadsns youu {jaws uvsveTdun “1ojoo aoT[a K

‘OJT] [BUILUR OTQISTA Ow ‘1944;vUL popuedsns

Aqyuenb [[eus ‘Tous FSIS ‘sseptofoo ysourry

“OI [BUITUR ‘104yvUT po

-puedsns qonut ‘qjeus yuvsve[dun “xoTOo MOTTA X

‘OTT [RUIUY dTQISTA Ou ‘193;vUT popuodsns A414

-uvnb [ems Axoa Tous ou ‘ssapIoTOO ysoupy

‘OFT [BUMIUY dTQISTA Ou ‘10}38uUL popuoedsns

Ayryuenb TpPeUs ‘TOUS FYST[S ‘ssepLo[Oo ysoupy

ROTEL

[BUTE oT qISTA OU ‘19};vU popuedsns yunoWe

ayeropour [pats JuRsveTdun ‘1O[OO YSTAMOT[A A

ayI] TVULUR youT}sIp ‘109}vU papuedsns A71}

-uenb [Bus ‘Tjows yuesvetdun ‘10,0O AOT[OX

‘ofI] [VUIIUR JO sadvI} T[BUIS “1094vUI

popuodsns owos [[aws 4YySs ‘1ofoo MOTTA A

‘OFT, [euuTUe

eTqIsTA ou ‘1oqyvtL popuedsns AzMWUeNd

Tews Tews yysys “sur ysrumorq yySITg

“oFT] [RuTEE “Prqany

Ajpatssooxe Tams guesvotdun ‘yoxyq ysourpy

" ‘otqrydeoasod

ey, [eure ou ‘109yeuL popuedsns AytyUvNd

Trews ‘Tews yjuvsvotdun yurey ‘ystaoro£

‘Og da

‘od N

0d a

Wal Dy

‘od \/

0g 9)

0d N

0d d

‘0d a

‘pooymoqystou

sivodde aaputjAo Suoy Ur ynq ‘sse[10[Oo ysowmpy | UL yywop vzejoyD | O

*worydr10se(q

‘sisf[eur 04

poyytaqns svar

Joywa AYA WOSBerT

"S481 ‘81020 112M

‘ouRT

Sqyesavy ooweN ‘q-T

‘ouv'T S.SuBIEg “Fe

“poyg Yeyojnueg ‘QZ

“Poy Ieze_q Mog ‘e-SZT

“Yepleog ‘yuey, Avarery

‘ouvT

89soqg OJURy Wey ‘OT

"499.149

s4juqg puneyg nedony ‘oe

‘ouv'T S,qyIMg ‘FT

‘uvseg men ‘q-eT

‘used mgyeN “W-eT

490 9149

SMT uMYyQ vs100q

“AqrTRoorTT

“ST

“

“OT

8G ‘Uee

oye

“ *19RUL

fe) 0d =(|¢2.082/8F-6 | popucdsns oT]4I TJows ou “TOTOO YSLAo[[o x ‘od I ‘ouvry uvseg Auoyuy ‘else “

A, ‘oFIT [eULUY ou ‘x9}4;vUL popuodsns 07941] ‘qoo14Q §,10SUy,

‘od =«|00-F82 00.2 | ‘Toms ass AoA “IoToo YstaorpeA FYSITS ‘od mW | s~avAreuodmcy “Go-LT cf

‘oFIT TEULTUY OTCISTA OU ‘199}vUL popuodsns

‘og =«(|e2-FI¢ 08-FL | yout ‘qfows yysrys AtoA ‘ssopxo[oO ysowmlW ‘od Wm jouvy suvdrvuodma ‘6-23 | °¢ ~ “

‘odoosoxorur

Iopun ofr] eUaraY yourystp ‘1oy4vut popuodsns *49014Q

‘od =«(10¢-6TE/09-8T | ODI ‘Tews yysys AtoA ‘ssoptoToO 4ysourTW ‘od d |savong Ayemouog ‘27 /'g “

-odoosororut

8 IOPUN OTGISIA OFT [VUTUR youTsIp ‘1049vUL

2 ‘OG = |00-TSL00-22S, popuodsns Youur ‘Tfous yy STs “topo AoTTaA TTY ‘od ce ‘qooayg YeTpoyng “¢-Zg s

= “oFT] [VUITUY OTGISIA OU

X ‘od = |¢z.e¢ 10.2 ‘royyvum popuodsns AyryUeNh T[VuUIs ‘TTous ON ‘od mH | yooryg Yeppoyamany “ett cs

SS *royyvut popuodsns

S 62-461 |0Z-0 | ODT ‘Toms Fuss “oSuy ysraorped FISTS ‘od a "qooryg 109400 ‘goT | "L “

> +10} CUL

= popuodsns youu ‘yneosotedo AoA ‘uo.sorpAy *4o014G

ae ‘od =«'00-Z6P|ZL-IL | poyommydrns Jo yousys o[qitaoy “tofoo yovpg ‘od q | Saepuioozopy werzopog ‘6 oe

Ss ‘OFT TVUAIUY ou ‘10}3vUT popuedsns

2 ‘od =«(j0g.-6te 9¢-¢ | Apyuenbd q[eus qpous yYSTs ‘opOO MOTTO A ‘od q | ‘yooyg yepoyammy ‘Ty |p “rey

S ‘oyI] [RUIUY TONUL

‘od =—«|0&.068 |96:9 pur ‘1094vu popuodsns ‘syurs ‘1ofoo YsIUMOTg ‘od q | ‘ouery s,uresox) our Ny ‘T oe

a ‘roqyvur popuedsns Ayryuenh Tews “yueosoy

SS ‘og = 0¢.ze¢ 90.Tp | -vdo AT ySrIs ‘TTours yuvsvoydun ‘xopoo YsraMorg ‘og q ‘uvseg nyyeN ‘TZ Me

< *pouuep ‘OF IT TVULLUL OTISTA ou ‘x09;vUE popuedsns Jo *pooymoqrysrou

; ‘uo 09-809 |F6-0 | ApFUUND [TEMS [fous FASTS “LoTOo YstArorjaX| UL yywop vxopoyD | T ‘ueseg Taye “P-ET | 8S “47

ei |yad) ee) ee Fs

aD 5 Q SiS) a 2 °

Bct como jorge! held a

2 8.85 | OB |g ‘stsATVUL OF g

a3 B ees Tog | oe morydr10se(T poyyturqns svar | * «“Aqvoory ‘aqyey

pe e3e08 ee 5 5 Joywar ATAL WOsvory

So B88) ie | Fe

Bed leiee ule eo eee

“panurguwog—SL8T ‘s422vmy 112M

109

174

“

‘EI “

“

‘OJT] [RUITUY OTQISTA ot 41094vUT ‘qooyg rezeg

‘Od = |0¢-2ES 29. | Pepuedsns opp] ‘TTows ou ‘ssoptofoo ysowyy 0d J | vueypnysog plo ‘Fg

‘ojTT [vUITUY ‘19}yvUE popuad

‘Od = |¢.6Z0T |0P-4a | -SNS TonuT TfouIs 4ULSI[S “LOTOO WoeTS YSTA\OT[O X ‘od WL |'}99149 rvzeg vooyoryt ‘eet

5 ‘oyT] TBuITUe ‘1aq3vur popued ‘our

s ‘Od =|0G-6T€ |F0-E | “SNS eT}TT Guoeosezedo ATyY Sts “Topoo oF A, OG 0 | sae AuowpN ‘eT

3 ‘Ioqyeu popuedsns

~ ‘Od =«'¢z-48 |FO-G | Gonur {ows yuvsveydun “topoo aozjod Ysttoery) ‘0g Tt *4o0TJY [OOTPOY oo1q ‘Zz

5 *10}yeUL popuadsns OUuLT

oN 0¢-¢g [09.0 | 97991, AtoA Guoredsuvy pue ssoptojoo ysoupy 0d J | seltourg ropunyg wey ‘T

S. ‘oJT] [eur ‘1044vuL popuodsns

8 0d) =/0-L4T|89-4 | OTN7TE ‘Tfows guvsvozdun Axroa ‘x0[00 YSTAoT[O A 0d a "400I49 STTTBVMUIOD ‘ZG

Ss *194}VUL

S ‘0d «=(|¢4.12L/18- | pepuodsns 07491] ‘Tous Aysvu “tooo YstAvoT]a X ‘og 9) ‘oUuvT MSUL004 ‘9-FT

a = “10yyeut popuedsns

S ‘od = |ezoget|9r-0 | AqHuunb qpeus Tous 4ySys ‘ssoptoqoo ysoumpy od GE ‘qoorpS YRTO}M “L1-Z8

8 “oJTT [VUIUY OU ‘1999vUr papuod “ouvT

& ‘d= =(00-92F |ZS-8 | “8S OTIIT TTous yySYs AtoA ‘sso[10[00 ysouly ‘og 9 |ssoymy Auowry ‘ZT

‘oJTT TVUIIUY ‘19}}8UL popuodsns Fo [UF

‘Od =|e%-0¢¢ 00-89 | ‘Quoosetedo Arzea ‘ATpeq syuys ‘xo[oo YSToRT_ 0g M ‘ouv'TT Sing ‘¢

‘OTT] TRUITUY OTGISIA Ou

‘Od = 08-61¢ 96-6 | “1093euA popuedsns 0979417 ‘[[ours 4ILSTIS ‘ssoTTOTOR ‘0d J} ‘ou s.Aoq ysoqnysy ‘9

: ‘OJT] [RUITUY O[GISLA Ou ‘Tous

‘Od = (00-812 |F3-G | OU ‘sSeTIoToo pu gueredsuvs4y ‘1ea[o ysoupy ‘og A} 4oog syeq ooyoryy ‘1g

‘OFT, [RUMMY OU *1997RUL

‘OG = (SL-L2L|FL-S8 | pepuedsns op31] ‘ATpeq syuys ‘tooo Moro 5G | “9944S TOPpPMLyT “FST

*yu900

ou ‘Od ~=-(G-F8E1 |00-61z| -sopedo Fjams guesvetdun ‘10,00 uAoIq doag OCT - cl ‘ouvry syjovsig ‘v-)

SB *pouutep ‘1eqyvuL popuedsns Yonut ‘yusoseTedo ‘pooymmoq y.stot “400149

ae “UO 00-TLZ '26-T | At0a ‘ATpeq syuys “Tojoo oy ysrhery | Ul Yyvop viepoyQ | gq | s Osoyxy) aosouvivgq ‘cZ

[No. 2,

A, Pedler—On the past and present

110

‘og

uo‘)

‘TPA OT 04

SUA. FTL AL

‘jou 10 sosodand

oysomop «of pe

UULpUOd LOYJOY AA,

“pouutep

$4,698

00:96P

0Z &8

"uOTTT TU

rod syavd ourt0py9

word rod szred

06-4

OT-0

TOL

RIUOWULY

= R= oa

‘roqjuur popuodsns Jo Ayryuenb Tews “sur

-doay Wo Tpous yuvsveTdun 4ILST]S “LoTOO ALOT[O A

-xoyyeur popued

-sns OU ‘[fows qunsveydun qurey “LOTOO LOTTO

srayyeun popuodsus Jo Ayyuenb

e[qedopisuoo ‘suideoy wo syUurys “Lo[0o 4USITS

‘OFT [CULLUY oTqISTA Ou ‘19y4vUL popuedsns

jo AyyuUnb [peuls ‘[[OwWs ou ‘sso[to[oo JSOULLW

‘OFT [eur

“uv 9TqIsta ‘1oyyvur popuodsns Jo Ayryuenb

Trews ‘Tous quesvoydun ‘ojoo Warorq AOT[OX

‘opIT TRUER

oTqIstA. ou ‘xoyyvur popuodsns jo Aquenb

Tus Tous FYySys ‘xojoo umoaq MoppoA doo

“OFT

yeurrae ‘1033vut popuedsns Jo Ayryuunb OSIV]

‘Pows juvsvetdun ‘XoTOO UALOIG Mores deog

‘OFIT [VUILUY ‘199YBUL

popuodsns Yonur ‘Tjows yULYF “LO[OO YSLUAMOIT

——————

‘word aose(y

“pooy«nog yp stou

Ur VLOLOY

‘yur, duos)

*pooytnoqips1ou

Ul BIO[OYD

‘ooJSN BTRMOD

SuLAOIAC UL LOT

9a4SN BRAD

SULAOLAUL 10 J

“qurepdu0g,

“gure, duog,

*stsA[vuR 03

poyjrumqns svar

Toywar AYA WOSvoyy

*papnjouUuvg—SLsl ‘822A 112A

nes

q@ | ‘peoyy orodyryzg soddg ‘ore

re)

*MOTJOIG | ks ica] ica

‘ouvyT § Sursamyy “F

‘qooryg’ tavIyNG ‘T

‘qooryg vavdoolima ‘6T

‘ouv'yT uvseg youskg

‘, ‘ooze WVN vipuesor

‘ouvry uvseg youskg ‘pF

TPM §poleg werwsouesy

"9g s Ao, weIO][Ng ‘G-G-8F

rouvry Bez, Siz, ‘22

*AqrpRoory

‘oqeqy

Water supplies of Calcutta. LiL

1880.]

I EIN

‘opty [eultuY ‘1934vuUr poptedsns jo

‘od =«(|¢2.-F1¢ }00-49 | Aqyuenb oSivz ‘ATqvurmoge syuys ‘10[00 yourg “quiet duroy

‘OS8T

‘orTT [eurue ou ‘1a44vur popusdsns AyYUPND

‘od =(|GZ-108 |Z6-2 [[eus ‘[[ous yuvsvoydun ‘xofoo morTped FUSAg 0d

*Ia}}vuUL popuedsns

‘Od = |GL.618|09-21 | Sureyuoo “yuooseTedo ‘Tews ou ‘IOTOO MOT[OA ‘od

*IOYVMOD

0} TOUAO oy

*pouurep ‘oFTT [RUTTER ‘10}3vuT popuodsns | wor MOTyoOo[qo

“0g =00-6¢9!¢2-0 | AyQUenb TRUS ‘JouIs ou ‘sseptofoo ysowpy | Jo ydrooer oy} UC

eS | g25/ 28) 3

as ei || Eee aa

3 4 g ae | eS B 3 ‘sis{yTeuR 04

o, 8 a6 ]| a5 | Sb “mordtaosa(y poqyturqns svar

= S cageleans BE Tozva AYA WOsvayy|

a |pe2| se] Be

oO on @ o EZ 9S

5 Satee le) | yas |) [eb

® Ss | He es

“UOTJIOg

“ouR'yT

SATMM unqepurg ‘9

“OuR'T

sqneg oysity codon “q ‘6z

“qaaT4G

Sysouy) urereuLyg “69

"400199

Iezeg wooyoeyy ‘G8-Z-FT

}

*AYTTBOOTT

"eG “UR

“JL oune

(OLR Vee

"oye

‘6LS1 ‘sLaqv dy 112M.

112 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

Taking the results obtained by the Total Ammonia Test, and judged

by the standards which have been put forward by Prof. Wanklyn, and the

additional somewhat rough ones suggested by myself, it will be seen, as

might be expected, that no single tank or well water was of extraordinary

organic purity, and that there were only seven tank waters included under the

head of “safe” waters, five of which were from tanks on the maidan. Of

dirty waters there were 26 out of the 200 or 18 per cent. ; of waters con-

siderably contaminated with sewage matter 64 were found, or 32 per cent. ;

of dilute sewages there were 82, or 16 per cent.; and of real genuine

sewages 71 were found or 353 per cent., that is rather more than one

third of the whole number.

In the following table these results are separated into the two classes

of tank and well waters, and it will be seen that the impurity of both

descriptions of waters is nearly equal when judged by this test.

Iga | Eos feeces | 8° | Bea | See

SS |Aas |Se seek | fea | AAS | SAS

; neo |G 25 re n S| Bio g

o oS amo ea Ry

oH reg |Sorad Hey vow <e) HO I Soats|

ONO ee SOIR Ue Sa clic cee ecomaatcy Wl eon tes os

Hne| € A |/85s8 C6) 8H ZO i) Total.

fa; 6° 4S |S.d eo “| SSA] b ote l 8 So

nH 56] 2 Sos | BOs os 2 S's

OS F| Dow |n'f - Dag = $s | ads

POE Ses (Be See eH ee | Soe ae

= S 7 ‘ 3 or :

Poa| B23 |SSSEERR P48 | des | bes

| A A >

: —

Tank waters, ......) 52 19 36 10 Hf 0 124

Percentage, ......06 42 15 30 7 6 0 100

Well waters, ......| 19 13 28 16 0 0 76

Percentage, .........| 25 17 37 21 0 0 100

Percentage of both

well and tank

water, wo} 854 16 82 13 35 0 100

In considering the quantities of chlorine present, notice must be taken

of the fact that in a well water the amount of chlorine will be relatively

greater than that of the total ammonia derived from the organic matter,

because in the filtration of the water through the soil to reach the well,

all the insoluble portions of the organic matter present in the sewage, etc.,

will be stopped, whilst the chlorides will readily pass through in solution.

Again in the filtration of contaminated water through layers of earth or

soil, a certain proportion of the organic matter will be oxidized and convert-

ed into inorganic compounds such as nitrates, which will not yield any

ammonia on distillation with alkaline potassium permanganate. Thus we

may expect, that a larger proportion of the well waters will be condemned

by the chlorine process than would be condemned by the total ammonia test.

1880. | Water supplies of Calcutta. 113

The following table will show the classification of the tank and well waters

according to the amounts of chlorine.

No oO Of ey Ce) 20 i Gath Oey 0 1 Lo ama Alawo

Ao (SO od Wee o a= S lass ee ole Om

aA gan q Sg 2's ad Sig 8) aca s4i4.,4

= es a saeaes ae os gS og Soa ace

8 aq ./28 8.8 aes HS daa So g |

Siro) cil eaie) ane Bios S a Oa ia Ocal aa nao

ODay, |e =| 3S 92 pA amo Pip

hla Mo q OB GOs ClE MS VB aSs SIENA

Bae Gla a ie-d = one SA qf aeals 410 9 oe,

an sg god Ae S "AS ola .o 9a qd:

Nee |e 4 Oodle SEno Cl. AS SIS e ass og 0

SSa SiS 2 og Seseh Pod oso S/S cfu lsaqs| BS

PARR Se ROS So's aA Hh BSH IS EA O|SS Oa os

LB a = A & a

Tank waters,... 56 38 14 6 7 3 124

Percentage, ... 45 30 11 5) 6 3 100

Well waters,... 49 18 1 5 2 1 76

Percentage, ...| 64 24 1 7 3 1 100

Percentage of

well and tank

WALCIS) sc. .0. 523 28 (p 54 4t 2 100

It would of course be quite permissible to consider waters which have

been condemned by etther of these two methods to be sewages, dilute

sewages or unfit for domestic use, ete., but on inspection of the tables

it will be seen, that as a general rule a water which is condemned by the

total ammonia test is also condemned by the amount of chlorine present.

The results, however, are sufficiently startling, if we only take the

mean of the results of the two determinations ; and at the very lowest esti-

mate it must be said, that of the 200 samples of Calcutta tank and well

waters examined by me, forty-four per cent. were true sewages, twenty-two

per cent. were dilute sewages, twenty per cent. of the waters were contami-

nated with considerable quantities of sewage, nine per cent. were ‘ dirty

waters,’ and about four or five per cent. only were moderately safe waters.

These last consisted principally of the well kept tanks on the maidan, and

two or three others in the southern part of the town.

In the next table I have grouped the well and tank waters according

to the sections of the town to which they belong ; in this table I have

given, first the name of each section and its population per acre according

to the census of 1876, then the total number of waters analysed from each

section, with their classification according to the plan before adopted.

There is also given the average composition of all the waters analysed in

each section. It will be strikingly seen from this table, how much more

impure the tanks and wells of the northern divisions are, than those of the

southern sections of the town.

114 A. Pedler—Onx the past and present

[No. 2,

NAME or SECTION.

A. Tank Waters.

Shampooker, ...

Koomartooly, ...

Burtolla, ats

Sookea’s Street, ...

Jorabagan, ise

Jorasanko, 600

Burra Bazar, ...

Colootollah,

Moocheeparra, ...

Bow Bazar, Res

Puddopooker, 3

Waterloo Strect,...

Fenwick Bazar, ...

Taltollah, ase

Colinga, Nes

Park Street, anO

Bamun Bustee, ...

Hastings, bo0

Maidan, Nee

B. Well Waters.

Shampooker, ...

Koomartooly, ..

Burtolla, 508

Sookea’s Street, ...

Jorabagan, eae

Jorasanko,

Burra Bazar,

Colootolah, ;

Moocheeparra, ...

Bow Bazar, ABO

Puddapooker, .

Fenwick Bazar, ...

‘Taltollah, 400

OZ EH RYUHTOHHOOWP

ARB RAYHMOSENOWE

Sectional letter.

No. of waters analysed.

Population per acre by Census of 1876.

Pee

SwWOWwWKkDNYRrNGA

woo

Ore

COUN COUN

NN ARNYTHOY

No. classed as Sewages.

SCORCHNHORPNRR HE BH OUIW EA

CrFNONDOMUNEHE OH

OO FiOlwite.S Oly oreo oimloinoroiena No. classed as Dilute Sewages.

PROF NOFHENOFWO

No. classed as waters containing consi-

FONONEFWHRAOWHO

SOSCODBRODONCODOFORDELON

derable quantities of sewage.

| No. classed as Dirty waters.

SOFOFONDOCOOCOCOFROOCORFROCCO

SOoorFCONONOCOOCSO

No. classed as Moderately Safe waters.

WNOCDOCCOCCCCOCCCOCOCOCS

SOoCOrFCCOCCOCCOO

WHOSSDOOOC OOOO COCO SC COS No. classed as Good waters.

Se900900CCCCCOCCO

AVERAGE

COMPOSITION

ALL WATERS.

million.

Chlorine parts per million.

Total ammonia parts per

1880. ] Water supplies of Calcutta. 115

Tn classifying these waters I have not separately considered the two

numbers I obtained by analysis for the total ammonia and chlorine, but

have decided on the character of each water from the amounts of both these

substances, and this table would therefore show the exact character which

I have attached to the waters which I have analysed.

I scarcely think that it is necessary to criticise in detail the numbers

which I have obtained in these analyses. In some instances the results of

analyses showed that the tank and well waters are considerably more im-

pure than the very concentrated Calcutta sewage, which was collected at

the Pumping Station on December 18th, 1876, I have indeed never read in

any work or research of such horribly filthy waters as these are, and they

are waters which are now, or have been formerly used for domestic purposes

by many of the poorer inhabitants of Calcutta.

Taking the numbers given in the foregoing tables, it may be said as a

general result of the whole of these analyses, that an average Calcutta tank

or well water contains 16:2 parts of total ammonia and 38206 parts of

chlorine per million of water. This it will be remembered from one of the

previous tables, is if anything rather more impure than ordinary English

sewage as obtained and analysed by Prof. Wanklyn. In the table referred to

Prof. Wanklyn found in a sample of sewage 17:10 parts of Total Ammonia

and 141°4 parts of Chlorine. We may also say that the average Calcutta

tank or well water contains more than 400 times as much organic nitrogenous

matter as is usually present in the hydrant water.

I have, however, no wish to enlarge to any extent on this decidedly

nauseous topic, but perhaps the most striking condemnation of the well

and tank waters of Calcutta, and which will appeal to every inhabitant,

whether scientific or otherwise, is to say, that a good average quality of

Calcutta tank or shallow well water may be made, by mixing six parts of

our present hydrant water with from one to two parts of the most

concentrated Calcutta sewage. This artificial tank or well water will be of

about the average composition ; it will also be so far as can be judged,

equally healthy for potable and domestic purposes, and as for its taste,

odour, ete., it will probably be rather superior to the general run of Caleutta

tank and well waters.

So far as I can ascertain this was the kind of water which was com-

monly used for drinking and domestic purposes in Calcutta in former days,

and which may to a certain extent be still used by the poorer inhabitants of

the northern quarter of the town.

The present water supply, t. e., the Hydrant water.

I need scarcely mention that our present hydrant water consists of the

Hooghly water pumped from the river at Pultah; it is there collected in

116 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

settling tanks, and after subsidence it is filtered through sand and then sup-

plied to Calcutta. As I have made some remarks as to the quantity of the

former water supply of Calcutta, this paper would not be complete if I did not

refer to the quantity of our present supply. From the Report of the

Municipality for the year 1879, I find that as the average for the whole year,

7,464,159 gallons of filtered water were daily supplied to the town, Accords

ing to Mr. Beverley’s Census of 1876, the number of inhabitants was

429,535, and each inhabitant would therefore receive 17:4 gallons of filtered

water daily. But in addition to the filtered water, there is an unfiltered

supply pumped up at Chandpal Ghat which is widely distributed through the

town, where it is I believe used for such purposes as watering the roads and

streets, flushing latrines and sewers, filling reserved tanks, ete. The daily

unfiltered supply was on the average of the whole year, 1,091,866 gallons,

and therefore the total daily supply in Calcutta for the past year was

8,556,025 gallons, equivalent to 19:92 gallons per head, or practically there

were 20 gallons of water available for domestic and sanitary purposes for

each inhabitant. This though perhaps not an abundant supply is a fairly

liberal one, and is very much larger than the quantity of the old supply from

tanks and wells. It is, however, not equal to the quantity allowed in most

European towns, for as pointed out in a former part of this paper the average

daily water supply of English towns is at least 25 gallons per head of popula-

tion. In this country, however, it would appear that a more liberal supply

would be required than in a European climate, and it has therefore been

proposed to double the present amount of filtered water, in which case

Caleutta would receive a daily supply of 16,000,000 gallons equivalent to

37:2 gallons per head. If this proposal is carried out, the supply of filtered

water will be most abundant, and it will be amply sufficient for every possible

waut of the town so long as it keeps to its present dimensions.

The quality of the hydrant water as I mentioned before has been

determined for four years, month by month, by Dr. Frankland’s process of

analysis. This is certainly the most elaborate and complete method dis-

covered, and it is believed to show the quality of a water, not only as regards

its present actual constituents, but also to indicate to a certain extent, what

its previous history has been. In this process it may be stated the follow-

ing operations are performed: first the amount of total solids dissolved

in the water is estimated, then the amounts of carbon and nitrogen

present in the organic matter are determined (these are called organic

carbon and organic nitrogen in the following tables); next the amount of

free ammonia present (if any) is determined, and the amount of nitrogen

contained in the form of nitrates or nitrites is estimated; the amount of

chlorine present as chlorides is also determined, and finally the hardness of

the water, temporary, permanent and total is estimated. Of these deter-

oe ie a ee ee eee

1880. ] Water supplies of Calcutta. 117

minations the second, third, fourth and fifth are the most important

from a hygienic point of view. Thus the amounts of organic

carbon and nitrogen represent the organic matter existing as such in

the water, at the time of analysis. The ammonia may to a certain

extent be due to the original ammonia we find in rain water, but more

generally it may have been produced by the introduction of sewage

matter into the water. The nitrates and nitrites present in water are

derived from the oxidation of nitrogenous organic matter ; this oxidation

may have taken place either in the water itself, or in the soil on which the

rain water fell. These last constituents are to be looked on with suspicion

unless the water is derived from a deep well, when it may contain consi-

derable quantities of these substances without giving rise to any alarm.

It is not that nitrates in themselves are injurious in any way, but their

occurrence in any quantity in river or shallow well waters shows, that the

water must have been either contaminated with some nitrogenous organic

matter in a state of decomposition, or in some circumstances where decom-

posing nitrogenous organic matter had been previously present. It is

pointed out that it must be more or less dangerous to drink water that has

thus been contaminated with organic matter or with nitrates derived from

organic matter, for it is possible if not probable that in such a water the most

noxious of all its constituents would entirely escape oxidation or any kind of

change. ‘The reason for this opinion is very clearly expressed in one of

Dr. Frankland’s papers on potable water. In the Journal of the Chemi-

eal Society, March 1868, at page 31 of his Memoir, he says—“ There

is also another aspect in which the previous sewage contamination of a

water (¢. e., the presence of large quantities of nitrates etc.) assumes a

high degree of importance ; if the shell of an egg were broken, and its

contents beaten up with water, and thrown into the Thames at Oxford, the

albumen would probably be entirely converted into mineral compounds

before it reached Teddington, but no such destruction of the nitrogenous

organic matter would ensue, if the egg were carried down the stream

unbroken for the same distance; the egg would even retain its vitality

under circumstances which would break up and destroy dead or unorganised

organie matter. Now excrementitious matters certainly, sometimes, if

not always, contain the germs or ova of organized beings, and as many of

these can doubtless retain their vitality for a long time in water, it follows

that they can resist the oxidizing influences which destroy the excremen-

titious matters associated with them. Hence great previous sewage con-

tamination in a water means great risk of the presence of these germs,

which, on account of their sparseness and minute size, utterly elude the

most delicate determinations of chemical analysis.” A considerable number

of chemists have put forward the statement, that a river water which has

118 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

been contaminated with sewage matters will entirely purify itself in a flow

of a few miles, and will thus again become fit for potable and domestic

purposes. The weight of the evidence appears however to disprove this

statement, and further experiments made by Dr. Frankland have shown

that this oxidation of sewage matter when present in running water is a

process of extreme slowness, Thus in the report of the Rivers Pollution

Commissioners, he writes:

“ Assuming, however, that if the polluted water had been constantly

exposed to the air, a portion at least of the oxygen used would have been

replaced, and assuming further that the oxidation proceeded during 168

hours at the maximum rate observed, then at the end of that time, only

62°3 per cent. of the sewage would be oxidized.

“Tt is thus evident that so far from sewage mixed with 20 times its

volume of water being oxidized during a flow of 10 or 12 miles, scarcely

two-thirds of it would be so destroyed in a flow of 168 miles, at the rate

of one mile per hour, or after the lapse of a week. But even this result

is arrived at by a series of assumptions which are all greatly in favour of

the efficiency of the oxidizing process. Thus, for instance, it is assumed

that 62:3 per cent. of sewage is thoroughly oxidized, and converted into

inoffensive inorganic matter, but the experiments showed that, in fact, no

sewage matter whatever was converted or destroyed even after the lapse

of a week, since the amount of carbonic acid dissolved in the water

remained constant during the whole period of the experiment, whilst, if the

sewage had been converted into inorganie compounds, the carbonic acid, as

one of these compounds, must have increased in quantity.

“Thus, whether we examine the organic pollution of a river at dif-

ferent points of its flow, or the rate of disappearance of the organic matter

of sewage when the latter is mixed with fresh water, and violently agitated

in contact with air, or finally, the rate at which dissolved oxygen disappears

in water polluted with 5 per cent. of sewage, we are led in each ease to the

inevitable conclusion, that the oxidation of the organic matter in sewage

proceeds with extreme slowness, even when the sewage is mixed with a

large volume of unpolluted water, and that it is impossible to say how far

such water must flow before the sewage matter becomes thoroughly oxidized.

Tt will be safe to infer, however, from the above results, that there is no

river in the United Kingdom long enough to effect the destruction of

sewage by oxidation.”

Thus Dr. Frankland is of opinion that a river water once largely

contaminated with sewage or organic matter can never of itself become

sufficiently pure again to be a safe water supply. To this point I shall

again have occasion to refer, when speaking of the proposed sources of the

new supply.

1880. ] Water supplies of Calcutta. 119

From these remarks it will be seen that in judging of the quality of

a potable water by Frankland’s process of analysis, we pay the greatest

amount of attention to the amounts of ammonia and of organie carbon

and nitrogen, as representing organic matter actually present, whilst we

depend upon the amount of nitrates (and to a considerable extent also

on the amount of chlorides as explained in the previous part of this paper)

to indicate organie contamination which has become oxidized. The amounts

of total solids and of Hardness although important from a manufacturer’s

point of view, do not seem to have any marked action on the health of

persons drinking such water, exeept when such constituents are present

in very large quantities.

Dr. Frankland has unfortunately not fixed upon any very definite stan-

dard as to the amounts of the above substances which may be present in

water and yet not render it dangerous, and in fact it is almost impossible

to draw any hard and fast rule; but so far as ean be ascertained from his

writings, Dr. Frankland appears to think that a supply which contains

0°10 parts of organic carbon and nitrogen in every hundred thousand parts

of water is of “great organic purity,” whilst one containing 0°30 parts of

the same substanees in the same volume should be considered a water of

“fair organic purity.’’ If the quantity is above this a water would be of

doubtful purity, and if in still larger quantities the water would be

recognized as impure.

In order to give an idea of the quantities of these various substances

present in the water supplies of many of the large towns in England, and to

show the average composition of different samples of water from various

sources, Lappenda table giving the results by this method of analysis of the

London water supply from the rivers Thames and Lea, and from the deep

wells in the chalk, also the results of the Edinburgh, Glasgow, Liverpool,

Manchester and Dublin water supplies, and the average composition

derived from the analysis of a large number of samples of rain water,

upland surface water, spring water, and sea water. Most of these numbers

are taken from the various reports of the Royal Commissioners who

were appointed to investigate the Pollution of Rivers in England, but

some of the numbers come from the article on Water Analysis given in

“Sutton’s Volumetric Analysis.”

See Table, page 120.

Having thus settled our standards for compariscn, we ean now discuss

the present water supply of Calcutta. The results obtained by the analysis

of the Hydrant water are given in the following table; the numbers

shown for each month are the averages for the past four years, and at the

foot of the table, the general average for the whole of the four years is

appended,

See Luble, page 121.

[No. 2,

A. Pedler—On the past and present

“‘SHUVNAY

06-964

0-81

00-96

08-4

0&-

TOL

00-8PL lie

0¢-4 \00-TT

0@6 |08-ST

08-F = j0S-T

1L9 \66-€

16-6 |00-0

04-6 |\00-0

O48 j08-0

06:0 {00:0

08-b jOP-P

fas) i]

far) QO

B = |e

~ 3

Bo) &

SaNaUuv yy

'9-CL6T or

6V-6 | L68-

IL-G |€c&.

SLL |€po-

G60 |GPO-

48-01 |090-4

02-0 |STO-

PS-L |S20-

06:0 |€&0-

€&-L |T€0-

G8:0 |§60-

68:0 ZPd-

SFG S&P

641 ‘G6:

LLL (88s.

Boles

} 6 2,

Bie

® BQ

‘SOLIN' pure

SOYVIJINE SV UWoSOALN

goo. |S9T-

TO0- /€TO-

OO: |STLO-

\200- = |GE0-

7oO. |SLlO-

196.9 |PgP-z

§00- GLO-

TOO- pGO-

G00: T&§0-

GOO. |660-

100: GGO-

000- |ZPO-

000. = |éT0-

000. Pao.

too. /§&0-

B | &

erie oe:

ey leee

Pl og

iefe)

MOGIVD OUBSIO,

0¢-79

08:ST

vE-9

00-4

99:6

OV-G

OL-PL

96-0P

64-16

96-46

“Aytanduy prpos [eyo

500 me ge Iya Bod

eee od “ S61 ToyBA sundg

0 vee aT Toywar [Jaa doacy

GGT Toye oovjins puedy

ose ‘soydures 6¢ TOYA ULEIT

‘UMLVM GaLATIOUNA fo worrsodmon abvsovp

‘asvaog Wopuory

TosnVyYVyog oaoqe ournpy oy} puvprozjiag

. oe eee “op ulrqn(y

eee eee wee “op IoysoyouR TL

00 ot + yddus royea toodaoarry

+ Sutayeyy Yor] woaz ATddns r0yvar MOSsepsy

orks ‘Atddns 10yvai Ysanqurpop

ais WeyO oyy Ur sqpeai-daaqy oy wor

wae eat dda nee ‘vary oy} woI sy

‘SOUVy,T, OY} WoL

‘supah ) of abnasan ‘hjddns san yy wopuoy

wee eee see

120

‘000‘O0T “ad spund we passaudwa sishwup fo syynsagy

121

SFG |60-€ |9P-6

66:0

SPIT

88-0

61-0

19.0

8¢-0

49-0

£8-0

LE-1.

LE-1

GEL

06-T

00-T

48-0

TIO

*OULIO

T80-

¢L6-

190.

¢L0-

L10-

¢60-

éOL:

€60-

FSO.

¢LO-

080:

IIT:

€60-

60:

UdSO1}

“IN pourqMoy [eyo

PE0-

SOP:

¢c0-

120-

160.

970-

Sco.

670:

LT0-

060-

PS0-

870:

cE0-

9T10-

“SOPLTIN' PUL

SOJLIYINT SB WO.GOTIN

‘od

‘og

‘od

‘og

“OT10 NT

*eTuOULUL

‘UOSOIJIN OTUBSIC,

IT:

SOF-T

060-

SIT:

660:

VOT:

180:

€60-

SST:

OcT-

izes

PIL:

641-

Ist:

‘WOgIVD OTUVSIC)

08-LT

$S-L06

PV-61

LG-6L

08-TT

98-TL

10-6

0-§T

€P-6L

€6-16

89-16

18-66

64-16

LS-16

“Aqytmmdwy] prpos [e4O J,

‘1oqu1s09

aq ula AO NT

*19q0J0Q,

‘requieydag

qsnsny

wee ‘Ame

"une

vee Ker

eee Tdy

qoreyl

Areniqo,f

reok IO} VSvIOAY

eos ‘suimg

“og

“Oo

“og

‘og

“og

‘Arenuvp JO 4ST Iof osvIOAW

: re-F (00-8 |Pe-T

3 16-8 |F9-6 |\€6-0

3 SPF |€8-% |S9-T

S €@-9 |6L-8 PPS

S 7-9 OTe |soe"

> 64-9 |2he |L0-8

oS 19:9 |L6-% |P9-8

8 8F-9 |666 99-8

S 69-9 |L6-2 |ZL-8

Sie eee ee ne are ee

s a Se

S = 8 E

& rs 2 3

e a

Boe hs ace

*SMUVNAY 5 :

“SSUNGUV HL

(Taal

(oo)

‘00000 “ad spund wm passasdua sishjoup fo synsayy

‘SUVEA UNOT FO SISAIVNY BHL WOAT SLIASMA ANVUAAY

‘UaALVM LNVYGAH VLLQOTVO

122 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

Taking the numbers representing the general average for the year and

comparing them with the standards which I have suggested from Dr.

Frankland’s works, we find that the Caleutta water falls just outside the

class of waters of “ great organic purity,” but that it is well within the

class of waters of “ fair organic purity.”

Comparing again the numbers with those given in the previous

table we find that the Calcutta Hydrant water though not so pure as the

London waters derived from the deep wells in the Chalk, is certainly

purer than the waters derived from the Thames, and perhaps also from the

Lea. It is also decidedly more free from impurity than the water supplies

of Edinburgh, Liverpool and Dublin, but taking all the constituents into

consideration, it is not so pureas the Glasgow or Manchester supplies, or as

the Rhine water above Schaffhausen. Comparing the Hydrant water with

the average composition of wnpolluted upland surface water as given by Dr.

Frankland, we find that it is scarcely so pure as unpolluted water should be,

and we are therefore compelled to admit that the Hooghly water has been

slightly contaminated before it reaches Pultah. The amount of contami-

nation is, however, not very great and as pointed out before, the Caleutta water

falls well within the class of waters of medium purity. That the Calcutta

water must be contaminated toa certain extent will be I think obvious

to any one who is acquainted with the customs of the inhabitants of India,

and more particularly of the inhabitants of villages and towns on the

banks of the rivers. This contamination is a drawback to the complete

safety of our water supply, for as pointed out previously, Dr. Frankland

is of opinion, that a water once contaminated is always dangerous, and

that the self-purification of a river which is so strongly insisted upon by

certain persons is exceedingly slight. It does not however at present appear

to be possible to cut off these sources of contamination, and the Hydrant

water though good is nota perfect supply. Every effort however should

be made to keep this previous contamination down to the lowest possible

point, and it is to be hoped when systems of drainage are being introduced

into the up-country towns, that the sewage from them will not be allowed

to find its way into our river. Speaking generally the sewage from any

one town should not be allowed to find its way into a river which is used as

a source of water supply for other towns lower down.

It is not my intention to criticise these average numbers in detail,

but it will suffice to say that from the absence of ammonia and from the

smallness of the amounts of organic carbon and nitrogen, and of nitrates

and nitrites, and also of chlorine, it is clearly evident that the contamination

of the Calcutta water is really much smaller than might have been ex-

pected under the circumstances, and we may rest assured that our water

supply is of fairly good quality, better in fact than that received by the

majority of large towns in Europe.

1880 ] Water supplies of Calcutta. 123

In considering the results of the analysis of the Calcutta water

month by month, we find that its composition varies considerably at

different parts of the year. A close inspection of the table will show

that apparently there are two distinct causes at work in modifying the

composition of the water. ‘The first prominent cause, and the one which has

by far the greater influence, is to be found in the commencement,

and during the continuance of the rainy season; the second and smaller

cause appears to be the melting of the Himalayan snows by the burning

sun of March, April, May and June. These changes are most clearly noticed

in the column of Total Solid Impurity, and here we read that starting in

January the amounts of total solids gradually increase up to March, when

22°37 parts are present in every hundred thousand parts of water; in April

and May the quantities steadily and gradually diminish, the numbers being

21:68 and 21°23 respectively ; this decrease continues until June Ist when

there are only 19:43 parts of solid impurity present. These numbers of

course correspond with the gradual and increasing diluting effect due to the

admixture of pure snow water with the ordinary river water. Inthe middle

of June, however, the rainy season usually commences, and there is a sudden

decrease in the solids owing to the diluting action of the enormous volumes of

rain water, and we find only 13°04 parts on July Ist; from this time there

is a slight but steady decrease until October, when the water contains the

smallest amount of solids present at any time of the year; the average for

October Ist showing 11°30 parts. After the complete cessation of the

rains (after November lst) there is again a sudden rise in the total solids,

and on December Ist, 19-44 parts are present. Some of the other columns of

figures show a somewhat similar change, butin the case of the organic

matter the changeis not very marked. In the amount of nitrates

present in the water, there appear to be two distinct maximum quanti-

ties during the year, one in March at the time of greatest concentra-

tion of the water as before mentioned, and the second at the commence-

ment of the rains. This second maximum is readily accounted for when

we consider, that the first effect of the rains will be to dissolve out the

nitrates which have been accumulating in the soil of the drier parts of

the country during the hot season; the amount of nitrates, however, it

will be seen, steadily decreases towards the end of the rains, and this to a

certain extent confirms the explanation.

Indeed during the first weeks or even days of the rainy season, the

composition of our water supply is undergoing very rapid change, owing to

the diluting action of the rain, and to the fact that the first showers of rain

will wash out considerable quantities of soluble organic matter, nitrates

ete,, from the soil; afterwards, however, the rain water will run off com-

paratively pure. We shall therefore expect that the first action of the rain

124 A. Pedler—On the past and present [No. 2,

will be to decrease the total solids, and to increase the amounts of organic

impurity and of nitrates, and that afterwards all the constituents will

decrease in quantity.

That such is the case may be seen by the following analyses made on

June Ist, 28rd and 26th and July 1st of last year. Hach of the analyses

shows the gradual dilution of the water by the heavy falls of rain in the

districts from which our supply is collected, and the increase of organic

matter and of nitrates due to the washing out of the substances from the

soil by the first showers of rain.

HOOGHLY WATER.

Results of Analysis expressed in parts per 100,000.

Se S A '

(5) ° ~~ A 2 pret

nate A 3 [ g S A HARDNESS.

‘=I AS} 2 =| an Sti 3

3 3 5 3 S 43 |

na 3 Ra 1 BS ga es :

8 Sg Sato. re ao eee | EN Sree eee

5 on 3 2 | ..8 eo] SAB) 8 eee

aI og ps A a S My | | ] os eral Giallt 5c

f| 23 B fo |e |B eee ae les. ea dieaes

3 py a= ma 3 6

A A A |Ol.o. ot ee. ae 6S ia lale

1 June lst,1879,| 19°56 | 0°130 | 0:052 | -000 |Traces| 0:052 | 1°32 | 4-24) 2°45) 6-79

only. :

2 June 28rd, ,, | 17°08 | 0'148 | 0°099 | *001 | :023 | 0:128 | 0:923 | 3:46) 3:25! 6°71

8 ‘June 26th, ,, | 16°68 | 0°1388 | 0-075 | +002) +053 | 0:180 | 0°852 | 3°33) 3°38) 6°71

4 July Ist, ,, | 12°48 | 0:113| 0-093} -000} -039 | 0-132] 0-89 oe 4°57 5°29

Extension of the Present Water Supply.

As pointed out previously it is now proposed to double the supply of

filtered water for Calcutta, and recently a proposal has been urged on the

Corporation to collect the new supply of water at Cossipore or Dukhinsahar

instead of as at present at Pultah. As I was consulted on this subject and

gave a strong recommendation that the water should not be taken from any

place near to Calcutta, but that the present source at Pultah should still be

used, I may perhaps be allowed to give the substance of my arguments against

the two proposed sources of supply at Cossipore and at Dukhinsahar.

My opinions on this point are to a great extent founded on some

previous analyses of the river water taken at various points near to Calcutta,

which were made by Dr. Macnamara and Mr. Waldie, when the Calcutta

supply was first being introduced, but in addition I have myself made a few

analyses which have confirmed me in my conclusions, |

1880. ] Water supplies of Culcutta. 125

The usual time for pumping up the water from the river into the

settling tanks is at five hours’ ebb ; this is of course done so as to avoid

the possibility of taking in any tidal water and as far as possible to secure

only the true river water. The proposals for taking the water for these

two places appeared then to resolve themselves into two questions.

(a) Whether at five hours of ebb the water off Cossipore, at all

seasons of the year can be relied on as a safe source of water-supply.

(b) Whether at five hours of ebb, the water at a distance of two or

three miles above Cossipore, at all seasons of the year, can be relied on

as a safe source of water-supply. For I think it will be generally admitted,

if at either place, at any one season of the year, the quality of the water

cannot be relied on, this would be equivalent to a condemnation of the

proposed place of supply.

Before proceeding to deal with the actual results of the analyses

which have been previously made by the two gentlemen abovementioned, it

will be well to take a general review of the conditions of our river from which

the water-supply is to be derived. The river, as is well known, is a tidal

one to a considerable distance above its mouth, and it appears certain that

the tidal water does not at any season of the year, or under any ordinary

circumstances, reach higher than Chinsurah. I have already shown in a

previous part of this paper that the true river water, as it has been delivered

of late years in Calcutta, is a tolerably pure and reliable supply, and that

there has never been the slightest suspicion of any appreciable admixture

of tidal water with the natural river water, in the hydrant water now

supplied from Pultah. This of course, is because the water is collected

at a considerable distance up the river, and that it is taken at five

hours’ ebb.

The tidal water however, in flowing up past Calcutta undoubtedly,

must become contaminated with a variety of impurities. It may be true

that a large proportion, or perhaps nearly the whole of the sewage, as

collected in the drains of this town, is now carried to the Salt Water Lakes,

but no one, knowing the habits of the lower orders of the natives of this

country, will believe, that this represents the sum total of the sewage.

In all probability, there is a large amount of filth of various kinds, which

finds its way direct into the river. Again, on the banks of the river

numerous factories have now sprung up, and it will be quite unlike the

usual experience in England if these factories, unrestrained by Acts of

Parliament, do not also send a large amount of filth, refuse, &e., into the

running stream beside them, I am not aware what sanitary arrangements

are made on the Howrah side of the river, but it has always appeared

to me, that a large amount of drainage reaches the river from that

source.

126 A. Pedler—On the past and present -[No. 2,

Also it must be remembered that Calcutta is a large shipping port ;

thus on the average I believe there are about 2,000 vessels annually

arriving and departing from the port, aggregating nearly two and

a half millions of tons; to these must be added the very large numbers of

country boats, dinghis, &c., which line the shores and which help to carry

on the great and increasing trade of Calcutta. Omitting the actual business

operations carried on, it must be admitted, that the crews of these vessels

will add a not inconsiderable amount of sewage contamination to the river

water. The tidal water, in flowing past Calcutta, must of necessity then

earry with it all such contamination, and will in that state be probably, if

not certainly, unfit for drinking, or even for domestic purposes.

I think it cannot be disputed that, in selecting a site from which to

collect water for drinking and domestic purposes, it will be essential, that

at all seasons of the year, at the ordinary time of collection, (five hours’ ebb)

there shall be practically no admixture of tidal water with river water

proper ; for it is evident, that the tidal water will always be contaminated

with various kinds of organic matter.

The two questions which I suggested previously, thus become limited

to the consideration of whether at Cossipore, or at two or three miles

above it, the water at five hours’ ebb is free from contamination with tidal

water at all seasons of the year. It would be bad enough to supply

brackish tidal water for drinking purposes, but far worse to supply tidal

water, which had collected all sorts of filth and abomination on its way

up.

Having suggested what it appears necessary to prove, we can now

pass on to the consideration of the analyses which have been made on this

point. Most of these analyses were made from 12 to 18 years since, when

comparatively little attention had been given to the subject of water

analysis, and an important part of the method of analysis then employed

has been since shown to be eminently untrustworthy and unreliable. The

suitability of a water for domestic purposes is (as pointed out previously)

believed to depend principally on its freedom from organic contamination,

Tam sorry to say that the methods for the determination of organic

matter in water, used in the old analyses under notice, have been since

shown to give at the best but very rough indications, which do not at all

represent the absolute amounts of organic matter present. Though these

methods of analysis failed to give thoroughly reliable information, yet I

do not think it too much to assume that, to a certain extent, they gave

information as to comparative purity of samples of the same variety of

water, and valuable information may thus be extracted from them, By

this I do not mean to say that the exact proportional freedom of the water

from organic matter will be represented by the figures given in these analyses,

1880. ] Water supplies of Calcutta. 1,

but I do think that they may indicate that certain samples are less pure than

others, and so on. For the purpose of a simple comparison, these results

will be almost as useful as absolute statements, for we may work on the

basis, that the good quality of our Hydrant water has been satisfactorily

demonstrated.

In passing I may mention that Mr. Waldie disputes the correctness

of Dr. Macnamara’s results as to amount of organic matter present in the

water, but it would be quite as easy for me, with a knowledge of the

progress of the last ten years, to dispute the correctness of Mr. Waldie’s

results, so that in both cases, the results of the old analyses as to organic

matter are to be accepted as comparative statements, rather than actual

truths. It must be clearly understood, however, that I have no wish to

under-rate the value of the work done by Dr. Macnamara and by Mr.

Waldie ; far from it, I believe that the results criticized are as accurate

and reliable as could be obtained by the processes then known, and in

those portions of the work, where the methods of analysis have not been

changed, I think we may rely, with certainty, on the accuracy of the

results given,

In the face of the above facts, I may be pardoned, if in considering

these old analyses I draw more particular attention to the determination

of the inorganic substances present, where the methods of analysis have

scarcely changed, and refer less to the determinations of the organic

substances present in the water.

In tidal water, that is water of which a part at least has been derived

from the sea, sodium chloride, or common salt, is a prominent ingredient.

In the table given on p. 120, it will be seen that sea water contains no less

than 19756 parts of chlorine per hundred thousand of water ; this substance,

on the other hand, is present in very minute quantities in the true river

water, and hence we have a crucial test to apply, in order to determine the

presence or absence of tidal water in the samples in question. It may here

also be well to remark that the process of analysis for the determination

of chlorine in waters has not changed since the period when the analyses

by Dr. Macnamara and Mr. Waldie were made, and therefore we may

entirely rely on the accuracy of the resulés given as to the amounts of this

constituent present in the samples of water analysed.

In the following table I quote four sets of analyses made by Dr.

Macnamara of water collected, af low water in each case, from three

different points in the river, namely, at Chinsurah, Pultah and off Cossi-

pore, (one mile above Baug Bazar Bridge). For the sake of comparison I

have added to the table some of the numbers obtained in the regular analysis

of water for the year 1878.

128 A. Pedler—On the past and present

[No. 2,

ANALYSES OF WATER TAKEN IN THE MIDDLE OF STREAM SIX FEET

FROM SURFACE.

Results expressed in parts per 100,000 of water.

Low Low Low Low

WATER. | WATER, | WATER. | WATER.

mR a

ConsTITuENT. 2 a a 2

gg Baer

86. |- SS) Se | ees

AS | a2 | a2 | 22

= x = eI

Cl lee)

¢ | Total solid residue from filtered water .... 26°6 27°9 ee 12°9

ge | Organic matter ...... crefbfeilovel{olers s:fvemiere ei 6:0 5°6 OU 26

5 Insoluble Carthiy, Salts aiveatcieiecieleitionte siete. 16:9 19:9 ‘fe 8-0

SeuleSoluble/=salts.ciaisisrein evsicierere/oie crejetoletere cvelere 3°6 1:9 ws 15

Fs (| Sodium. chloride so. vio »oojmaieins «) onieittsie te ie ne 08

_ | Total solid residue from filtered water .... | 28°1 27°38 26'3 14°6

J | Organic matter cc csececes cone ccecoese 6:0 56 50 21

4 || Insoluble earthy salts’... 0.2 sce essere 14-1 19.0 17:0 87

PunlkSolublersalts weucwaweeaten secs: ere 27 TY 36 2-0

Sodium’ chloride! reer rersceleterenoreeje sie ceistere sie ve 11 3°6 0-9

g | Total solid residue from filtered water .... 24°6 34:7 97:1 13°3

Bel OroamicAmatberi wr oysteiece ease siencnrena cies 50 56 11:9 pil

a= Insoluble CarthyiSalts. Acictice eciie/eisieciererere 16°7 19°3 16:4 9:0

Al Soluble sal taievercreye olerel telsfelefoleie etotstere steer: 2'6 8:9 67°6 13

Qe Sodium \Chloride!irciaisjeieleseietetescienecsie apy sssieule : 76 55°7 :

A Be

2 a & ze

E Scales A

se | Se | Se ieee

an Taye Ba 2

ae 4 rl

4 is

2 Total ‘solid residue cesr creer cctersecene| 16°80 24°34 15°16 11°12

+2 | Carbon and nitrogen of organic matter .. | 0°158 0°164 O1ll 0°124

=, | Sodium CHIOTIGO revert srersuaversten overavercreteleneiontrs 101 1°87 1:70 0°79

iss

An examination of this table and of the numbers given in previous

parts of this paper shows clearly that the pure river water, ¢. e., the present

oe Se ee ee. |e

1880. ] Water supplies of Caleutta. 129

hydrant water never contains more than two or at the outside three

parts of sodium chloride per 100,000 of water. This is proved by Dr.

Macnamara’s analyses of the water at Chinsurah and Pultah, and also by

the numbers obtained weekly and monthly by myself.

When however the analyses of Cossipore water are considered, it will

be seen that, whilst at low water in September and December, its com-

position is very similar to that of pure river water collected higher up : in

March and more particularly in June, there are very striking differences.

Thus on June 12th 1862 whilst at Pultah, there were only 26 parts of

solid impurity and 3°6 parts of sodium chloride or salt in every 100,000 |

parts of water, at Cossipore (one mile above Baug Bazar Bridge) on the |

same day, and at low water, in the same volume there were no less than

97:1 parts of solid impurity, of which 55-7 parts were sodium chloride. |

This clearly indicates that on this occasion, there was a very large admixture

of tidal water with the river water. Dr. Macnamara’s results, as to the

amount of organic matter, also appear to show that in June, there was

much more present in the Cossipore water than in that collected at

Pultah, and this is really what would be expected to be the case. The

ratio of the organic matter shown in the two instances is greater than 2

to 1, and I think that this difference must indicate that the water at Cossi-

pore did contain an excess of organic matter over that contained at Pultah.

The absolute amounts of organic matter were, we now know, very much

smaller than the numbers given in the table, but we can probably rely, to

a certain extent, on the relative correctness of the numbers given.

There appears then to be no escape from the conclusion which Dr.

Macnamara draws in his criticism of these results when he says—“.the water

(at Cossipore) during March, April, May and June is largely intermixed

with the saline matters of the sea water and the sewerage of Calcutta, and

during that time is unfit for human consumption.”

As before pointed out the sewage contamination would be very much

less at the present time than it was then, but I have tried to prove that

we cannot have an admixture of tidal water without at the same time

having organic and sewage contamination. I have no doubt that during

the rains when a powerful stream is running down, the water at Cossipore

may be nearly as pure as that at Pultah, but I think that Dr. Macnamara’s

analyses alone prove that, during the hot weather months, the water at

Cossipore is by no means pure enough to be selected as a water-supply.

Turning now to the analyses made by Mr. Waldie, it appears to me

that they essentially confirm the results given by Dr. Macnamara. The

water tested by Mr. Waldie was taken usually from the river at Burranagur,

which is said to be two miles above Cossipore. Here on June 14th, 1866 at

11-5 a. m., (at low water) 30°7 parts of solid matter, of which 14:5 parts

130 A. Pedler—On the past and present Water supplies of Calcutta. [No. 2,

were sodium chloride, were found; again on May 1866, two hours before

the commencement of tide, there were 21°50 parts of salt present ; on

May 2nd 1866, there were 15°50 parts of salt at ebb-tide, and on June 1st

1866 at nearly low water, 16°50 parts of sodium chloride were found ;

these numbers being the quantities present in 100,000 parts of water.

With regard to organic matter also Mr. Waldie’s results, though

showing much less organic matter than Dr. Macnamara’s analyses, to a

great extent confirm his statements, and prove that asa rule, there is a

larger amount of organic matter in the water collected at ebb-tide off

Burranagur, than in the water collected at higher points of the river. The

numbers above quoted show unmistakeably that at two miles above Cossi-

pore during the hot season, there is a decided admixture of tidal water

and probably of sewage contamination with the pure river water, and that

this is the case even with samples collected at low water.

The opinion of Dr. Macnamara as to the suitability of Cossipore

water for drinking purposes, has already been given. I will now quote

Mr. Waldie’s remark in his general summary of results—‘Can the supply

be safely taken from the river at Cossipore? We can scarcely answer in

the affirmative.”

In conclusion, then, I may say that, so far as can be ascertained from

the old analyses by Dr. Macnamara and Mr. Waldie, and from my own

results, it is my opinion—

That during the rainy season, and whilst the river is in fwil stream,

the water collected two miles above Cossipore, or perhaps even at Cossipore,

could probably be used as a fairly safe water-supply.

That during the hot weather months, if the water is collected two

miles above Cossipore, even at five hours’ ebb, there will frequently, if

not always, be contamination with tidal water to an extent, which unfits

it fora safe water-supply, and the water will be contaminated to a still

greater degree if collected at Cossipore.

That this tidal contamination would involve also organic contamination

to a considerable extent, and that, as pointed out in a previous part of

this paper, such organic or sewage contamination cannot become oxidized

or destroyed during the flow of the water, nor can the water be purified

by the ordinary processes of settling, filtration through sand ete. so as to

render it a safe supply for domestie purposes. Such water therefore would

be eminently unsafe for potable purposes and should be at once condemned.

That unless contrary evidence is furnished, the proposed new sources

of supply are too near to the mouth of the river and to Caleutta, and

consequently that it is strongly desirable that the extension of the water

supply should be carried out on the same principle as formerly, and that

the water should always be collected at Pultah, and not at the other points

which have been suggested.

1880.] R. Lydekker—On the Zoological Position of the Bharal. 131

IX.—On the Zoological Position of the Bharal, or Blue-Sheep, of

Tibet.—By R. Lypexxer, B. A.

(Received Jan. 4th ;—Read Feb. 4th, 1880.)

The Bharal or Blue-Sheep of the Tibetan region is one of those animals

which are peculiarly interesting, and at the same time peculiarly puzzling,

to the naturalist, on account of its presenting affinities to two distinct

groups of animals, whereby the determination of its position in the zoolo-

gical scale is a matter of some considerably difficulty.

As I shall show below, the bharal presents points of resemblance both

to the sheep and the goats, and this intermediate character of the animal

seems to have been the cause of considerable diversity of opinion among

naturalists, as to what genus the animal should be referred. The late Mr.

Bryan Hodgson, in the Society’s Journal,* proposed the generic name

Pseudois for the bharal. Mr. Hodgson, however, together with the late

Mr. Blyth, thought that there were two species of the genus, to which

were given the names P. nahura and P. barhal. The latter writer, how-

ever, according to the late Dr. Jerdon, seems finally to have come to the

conclusion, that there was only one species of the genus, known as P. nahura.

The late Dr. Gray, and, I believe, all subsequent writers, have adopted the

view of there being but one species of bharal. Hodgson’s generic distince-

tion was adopted by Dr. Gray.¢ The late Mr. H. N. Turner,t however, and

Mr. W.'T. Blanford,§ class the bharal in the genus Ovis, though the last

named writer does not give his reasons for so doing.

In the present paper, I shall notice certain points in the osteology of

this animal, which indicate its close relationship to the goats, and which, I

venture to think, are sufficient to confirm its generic distinction from Ovis.

Mr. Hodgson, in his above quoted paper, first pointed out that the

bharal differed from all the true sheep in having no “ eye-pits,”’ but did not

point out that the absence of these “ eye-pits” was a character common to

the bharal and the goats. ||

The so-called “ eye-pits’” are the depressions which occur in the lachry-

mal bones of many ruminants for the gland known as the “ larmier.” In

all the true sheep, the lachrymal bone has a very considerable larmial

depression, and the greater part of the outer surface of that bone is placed

* J. A.S. B., Vol. xvi, p. 702.

+ Cat. of Mammalia in Brit. Mus. Pt, iti, p. 177, 1852.

{ ‘Scientific Results of 2nd Yarkund Mission,’ Mammalia, p. 85, Calcutta, 1874.

§ Pro. Zool. Soc. Lon. 1850, p. 176.

|| I exclude the genus Wemorhaedus from the goats.

132 R. Lydekker—On the Zoological Position of the Bharal. |No. 2,

more or less nearly at right angles to the surface of the frontals ; the suture

connecting the lachrymal with the maxilla is placed in advance of the

suture between the maxilla and the malar. In the goats, the outer surface

of the lachrymal has no larmial depression, and the greater part of such

surface is continuous with the plane of the frontals ; the lachrymo-maxilla-

ry and malo-maxillary sutures are in one oblique line. In the bharal, there

is likewise no larmial depression on the lachrymal and the outer surface of

this bone slopes gradually away from the plane of the frontals ; while the

lachrymo-maxillary suture is only slightly in advance of the malo-maxillary

suture. In the form and relations of the lachrymal, therefore, the bharal

is decidedly much nearer to the goats than to the sheep.

The next most important caprine character presented by the bharal

skull, is in the basioccipital. Inthe true goats this bone is oblong in shape,

with a pair of tubercles at the posterior and anterior extremities ; of these,

the posterior pair are considerably the larger and more prominent, but both

are situated on the same antero-posterior line. In the true sheep, on the

other hand, the basioccipital is always considerably wider in front than

behind, while the anterior pair of tubercles are much larger than the poste-

rior, and are placed wider apart. The basioccipital of the bharal agrees

exactly with the basioccipital of the goats, and is, consequently, widely

different from this part in the sheep.

In the form of its lower jaw, the bharal agrees with the sheep, and

differs from the goats.

In the structure of its horns, the bharal again presents caprine affini-

ties. Inthe true sheep the horns are always thrown into parallel transverse

wrinkles extending completely round the horns ; the colour of the horns is

light brown, or greenish brown, and the direction of the extremity of the

first curve is always downwards and forwards.

In the goats, on the other hand, the horns are never thrown into coarse

and parallel transverse wrinkles, but are marked by finer striz, and may or

may not carry knobs anteriorly. Their colour is dark blackish brown : they

are always more or less angulated ; and the extremity of the first curve is

directed backwards and upwards.

In the bharal, the structure and colour of the horns is the same as in

the goats ; the extremities of the horns are directed backwards and upwards ;

their angulation is less marked than in the goats. The horns of the bharal

are indeed directed more outwards than those of the goats, and in this re-

spect they present some points of resemblance to the sheep; the upward

twist of their extremities, however, shows an approximation to the curved

horn of the Markhoor and is quite different from the curve of any sheep’s

horn,

1880.] R. Lydekker—On the Zoological Position of the Bharal. 133

The profile of many goats, like the Ibex, is markedly concave ; in

others, however, as the Thar, it is nearly straight ; the profile is also nearly

straight in the sheep and bharal, and we cannot, therefore, draw any classi-

ficatory inference from this character.

In other cranial characters, there do not seem to be any well marked

distinctions between sheep and goats. It, therefore, seems pretty evident

that as far as cranial characters go, the bharal is undoubtedly much more

closely related to the goats than to the sheep.

The bharal is, however, externally distinguished from the goats, by

the absence of any odour or any trace of a beard or mane in the males

There are feet-pits (interdigital pores) in all the feet of the bharal, in which

respect it agrees with the sheep, and differs from the goats, in which these

pits are either absent (Hemitragus), or present only in the fore feet

(Capra). ‘The tail, according to Mr. Hodgson, is unlike that of the sheep.

From the above comparisons it will be seen that in the osteological

characters of the head, the bharal is nearer the goats than the sheep, while

in its external characters it is nearer to the sheep. The cranial characters

pointed out above appear to me to be of such importance as to preclude

classing the bharal in the genus Ovis, and I accordingly think that Mr.

Hodgson’s genus Pseudois should be retained for its reception, The ani-

mal most certainly forms a very closely connecting link between the genera

Capra and Ovis, and it seems to be very difficult to say to which it is most

nearly related,

134 J. Wood-Mason—On a new Lepidopterous Insect.

X.—Deseription of a new Species of Diurnal Lepidoptera belonging to the

Genus Hebomoia.— By J. Woop-Mason.

The beautiful insect described below has been recently received by the

Indian Museum from the Andaman Islands, where it was obtained by Mr.

A. de Roepstorff, after whom I have named it.

Hezsomota RoEpstTorrit, n. ‘sp.

$. Differs from H. glaucippe, the only species of the genus with

which I have been able to compare it, on the upper side, in having the

apical orange patch of the fore-wing larger, extended into the cell, and less

broadly bordered with black, both internally and externally ; the submar-

ginal black spots smaller and completely isolated from the black of the outer

margin ; the fore-wing at the posterior angle tinged, and the hind-wing

externally broadly bordered, with bright sulphur-yellow, which colour is

shaded off into the cream-colour of the rest of both wings; and the outer

margin of the hind-wing narrowly edged with black, which gradually

broadens from the anal to the anterior angle and extends inwards in points

at the veins :—and, on the under side, in having the brown mottling of the

fore-wing arranged in the form of a tolerably conspicuous band coin-

cident with the macular band of the upper side ; and the ground-colour of

the hind-wing, as also that of the mottled portion of the fore-wing, of a

rich golden-luteous colour.

Expanse 3°5 inches.

Has. 8S. Andaman.

The place of this species would seem to be between H. vossi?, (Mait-

Jand) and H. sulphurea, Wallace.

VAs eG

8 MAY 1°35

Slnky bby eee

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. II.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1879.

No. 1, (issued June 10th, 1879). On new species of the Genus

Plectopylis of the Family Helicide.—By Lizur.-Cononrn Gopwin-Avs-

TEN. On the Operations for obtaining the Discharges of the large Rivers

in Upper Assam, during Season 1877-78.—By Lirut. H. J. Harman.

Hemiptera from Upper Lenasserim.—By W. L. Distant. Communicated

by J. Woov-Mason. On the Diurnal Variation of Rainfall Frequency

at Oalcutta.—By H. F. Buayrorp. Record of the Occurrence of Harth-

quakes in Assam during 1878.—Communicated by the Cutrr Commts-

stONER OF Assam. On some experiments made at H. M.’s Mint in Cal-

cutta on coining Silver into Rupees—By Cou. J. KF. Tunnanr. (With

three Plates and seven Woodcuts).

No. 2, (issued September 15th, 1879). Note on the old Burmese route

over Pathai vid Nongyang (viewed as the most feasible and direct route,

from India to China)—By 8. E. Prat. On a new Standard of Light.—

By Louis Scxwmnpier. A second note on Mammalia collected by Major

Biddulph in Gilgit—By W.T. Buanrorp. A Description of some new

Species of Hydroid Zoophytes from the Indian Coasts and Seas.—By Sux-

azon J. Armsrrone, Marine Survey Department. Notes on the Forma-

tion of the Country passed through by the 2nd Column Tal Chotiali Field

Force during its march from Kala Abdullah Khin in the Khdjak Pass to

Lugért Birkhan. Spring of 1879.—By Lreve. R. C. Tempe, lst Ghoorkas.

Note ona collection of Reptiles and Frogs from the neighbourhood of

Elllore and Dumagudem.—By W.T. Buanrorp. Preliminary Notice of a

new Genus (Parectatosoma) of Phasmide from Madagascar, with brief

Descriptions of its two Species—By J. Woov-Mason. (With eight

Plates and two Maps).

No. 3, (issued November 28th, 1879). Notes on a collection of Rep-

tiles made by Mason O. B. St. Jonny, at Ajmere in Rajputana—By W.

T. Buanrorp. Notes on Reptilia—By W. T. Buanrorp. Notes on

Stone Implements from the Khasi Hills, and the Banda and Vellore Dis-

tricts —By Joun Cocxnurn, Late Curator of the Allahabad Museum,

Officiating Assistant Osteologist, Indian Museum, Calcutta. The Ravages

of Rats and Mice in the Dakhan during the Harvest of 1878-79.—By the

Ray. S. B. Farrpanx. Notes on the Survey Operations in Afghinistén in

sonnection with the Oampaign of 1878-79. Compiled from Letters and

Diaries of the Survey officers by Mason J. Warernouse, Assistant Sur-

veyor General.— Communicated by Mason-GEnERat J. T. WALKER, Sw,

veyor General of India. (With three Plates and one Map).

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

BS. AS,

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XVII (1848

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to Our (1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XX VI,

XXVIT (1857, 1858), and Vols. XXXIIT to XLVIU, (1864

to 1879).

Asiatic Researches, from Vols. VI to XI and Vols. XVII to XX,

GACH ab isle teres wire’ e eielercioteluels.c weteeie satel Samia. Ter ree eee LOL LG

Drbbo dittos tandext. 2. stevec.scveu vein svete eis esse oie sie ceeterasiers For OF O

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in Arabic, pecan and mca AiO LP =O7e.

Vhe Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated te English, with notes and

- indexes, by H. Blochmann, M. A., ...... BAGO samo SS: 12 4

The Prosody ot the Persians.—By H. Blochmann, M. A. stu OO

The Tabaqat-i-Naciri. Translated by Major He ’ Raverty,

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodgson, Esq., B.C. S., esis 3 6

Just Published.

HISTORY OF THE BIRDS OF CHYLON,

Parr I.

By Captain W. V. LEGGH, pz. a., F. L. 8.

345 pages, Royal 4to., with 10 plates by Keulemans. To be comple-

ted in two more parts, price £2 each. In this work the geographical range,

habits and nidification of each species is fully worked out.

Intending subscribers should communicate with the author, whose

address is Aberystwith, Wales.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Vol. XLIX, Part II, No. IIJ].—1880.

EDITED BY

JHE Natorar flisTORY PECRETARY.

SPS — eee

- EE ESE

<2 I$ OOO ~—~ a=

« The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Agia: and

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

man or produced by nature.’—Sir Wint1am Jonus, ~

*,* Commuumications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat, Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India ; or, m Lon-

don, care of Messrs. Tritbner and Oo., 57 Sf 59, Ludgate Hill.

A RS

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED BY J, yW. JHOMAS, AT THE PAPTIsT MISSION PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

Asiatic Society, 5j, PARK STREET,

1880.

he oo oe,

Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—-To Non-Subscribers, Rs, 2,

Price in England, 4 Shillings.

Issued December 14th, 1880.

CONTENTS.

XI.—Wotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros.—By R. LypExxer,

B.A.; (Gvith Phe VEL) Sei ce oie secant os aon eee eae

XII.—On a Species of Trochalopterum from Tr avancore.—By W. T.

IBLANTORD, GH Ri Sy se: sec aderzs are {eins ot ecledooaiearaeas nenaarecens

XIII.—On a new Species of Papilio from South India, with RKe-

marks on the Species allied thereto.— By J. Woop-Mason, Offici-

ating Superintendent, Indian Museum, and Professor of

Comparative Anatomy and Zoology, Medical College, Calcutta,

(with Pls. VIPT and 1X). 0 soos toca sce ues eee

XIV.—Description of the Female of Hebomoia Roepstorfii—By

J. WOOD=MLASON, .otca.ceneuiccne fre sence tite cone ol ate cae ae: er arene

XV.—Notes on and Drawings of the Animals of various Indian Land

Mollusca (Pulmonifera).— By Linvr.-Con. H. H. Gopwiy-

Austin, F. R. 8. F. Z. S8., &., (with Pls. X and XI), ......

XVI.—Wew Species of Brackish-water eS es GEOFFREY

Nevinn, €F aM Ais Sim scents:

XVII.—On some Hxperiments ied. ip, ena ly ail “the ines

terminating at the Calewtta Telegraph Office with Currents

tapped from the Main Current produced by a Dynamo-electric

Machine.—By Lovis Scuwenpurr, M. Inst. C. E., :

XVIII.—On the Lepidopterous Genus mona, with the Deg "eption

of a new Species.—By J. Woov-Mason, (with part of Pl. Vip:

XIX.—Deseription of a new Papilio from the Andaman Islands.—

By J. Woop-Mason, (with part of Pl. VI),.........

Page

135

142

144

150

151

159

167

175

178

Plate VI, illustrative of the Editor’s Papers on the Genus mona and

on a new Papilio from the Andaman Islands, will be issued with the next

Number.

eee

JOURNAL

OF THE

AARC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

——<>—

Part II.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

eee

No. III.—1880.

X1.—WNotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros.—By R. LypeKKer, B. A.

(Received March 9th ;—Read June 2nd, 1880.)

(With Plate VII.)

A recent examination of the dentition of the fine series of skulls of

Rhinoceros indicus contained in the collection of the Indian Museum,

has brought to my notice several very interesting facts in regard to the de-

velopment and serial homology of certain of the teeth of that and other

species which I have thought of sufficient importance to be put on re-

cord, whence the following notes have been penned. My remarks will

mainly refer to the dentition of Rhinoceros indicus, but some points

relating to that of other species of the genus will be incidentally referred

to in the course of the paper.

To illustrate my subject, I have had lithographed (through the cour-

tesy of Mr. J. Wood-Mason) the left upper dentition of two adolescent

skulls of 2. indicus, from the collection of the Indian Museum, each of

which is remarkable for an abnormality. The dentition exhibited in fig. L

of the accompanying plate belongs to a young animal, and comprises two

incisors (7.1, ¢.”), the milk-molar series (m.m.! to m.m.*), and the true molars

(m.1 to m.°), the last of which is still in its alveolus. ‘The second specimen

(fig. 2) belongs to a somewhat older animal, and exhibits the alveolus of an

incisor (.'), two premolars (p.m.', p.m.*), two milk-molars (m.m.3, m.m.*),

and the three true molars (m.! to m.*), the last of this series, in this in-

stance also, not having yet eut the gum, ‘The grounds on which these

teeth are assigned to their respective serial positions will be found in the

sequel.

136 R. Lydekker—Wotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros. [No. 38,

The true molars (m.1, m.”, m.*) in all species of Rhinoceros, whether

living or extinct, are invariably three in number, corresponding with the

typical mammalian series, and, therefore, require no further notice on this

occasion. In advance of the first of the three true molars, there occur, in

all young skulls of &hinoceros, four teeth in serial apposition, but in older

skulls there may be only three. It is to these anterior teeth of the milk-

molar and premolar series (the one or the other present, according to the

age of the animal) to which I now desire to draw attention.

An examination of the skull of which the left dentition is drawn in

fig. 1, shows that, of the four teeth (m.m.1, m.m.?, m.m., m.m.*) in advance

of the first true molar (m.1), the three last (m.m.*, m.m., m.m.*) have

their fangs and bases absorbed away by the germs of other teeth, which are

succeeding them from above: there can, therefore, be no doubt that these

three teeth are the three last milk-molars of the typical series. This is

also shown by the last tooth of the anterior series (m.m.*) being more

worn than the first of the true molar series (m.1): if the tooth preceding

the latter were a premolar, it would be the less worn of the two, The first

tooth of the whole series (i.m.!) shows, however, no signs of being about

to be replaced by a vertically succeeding premolar. I have carefully

examined another skull of the same age, in which the alveoli of the teeth

havé been opened, and I can find there no trace of a replacing premolar

above the first of the seven teeth of the molar series. “Were this tooth to

be replaced by a premolar, such replacement would take place before that

of the tooth next in the series. Several other adolescent skulls of RB. cadi-

cus which I have examined show no trace of the replacement of the anterior

tooth, and it may, therefore, be considered to be proved that in many

instances no such replacement ever takes place.

From the development of the tooth in question with the milk-molar

series (though it sometimes appears rather later than the next tooth),

there would seem to be no doubt that it is the first of that series, and I

shall show below that such is undoubtedly the case. From the fact of

this tooth having in most instances no vertical successor and persisting

for a considerable time during the period of use of the permanent denti-

tion, it is not unfrequently referred to as the first premolar, and though,

as I shall show, such a nomenclature is altogether inaccurate, yet it has a

certain amount of convenience which may justify its conditional use.

The dentition drawn in fig. 2 also exhibits four teeth in front of the

first true molar (m.!), but they are not all homologous with those in the

preceding specimen. The two teeth (m.m.°, m.m.*) in advance of the first

true molar (m.!.) in fig. 2 are more worn than the former, and will conse-

quently be the third and fourth milk-molars, or the homologues of the

corresponding teeth in fig. 1. The first and second teeth (p.m.', p.m.”),

1880. ] R. Lydekker—Wotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros. 137

however, in fig. 2 are still in germ, and as being totally unworn must be

of a later development than the third and fourth milk-molars : consequent-

ly, the former must be the first and second premolars, which have replaced

the first and second milk-molars. In this instance, therefore, the first

milk-molar, which, as we have seen, is normally persistant, has been re-

placed by a vertically succeeding premolar, from which replacement there can

be no question as to the correctness of the serial position assigned to the

former tooth. The replacing premolar (fig. 2, p.m.1,) is of considerably

larger size and more complex structure than the replaced milk-molar

(fig. 1, m.m.).

In the lower jaws of all the skulls of &. indicus which have come

under my notice, I cannot find any instance of the vertical replacement of

the first milk-molar, which generally persists until the permanent dentition

is well in wear, and subsequently falls out at a comparatively early period.

Neither can I find any instance of the replacement of the first milk-molar

of either jaw in 2. suwmatrensis (sumatranus) or FR. javanicus (sondaicus).

The formula of the molar dentition of . indicus, taking into account

the abnormal form, may be written as follows :—m.m. — p.m. oon

m, >—3 ; the adult molar dentition of the normal form, m.m. Spm. =

38 Fiiee : 0-0 4—4 3-8

Ml 5s 3 and of the abnormal form, m.m. ay Pe. gay 5p

The succession and homology of the anterior tooth of the molar series

appears to have given rise to a certain amount of confusion among natura-

lists. Thus Professor Huxley when treating of the dentition of the genus

Rhinoceros, observes:* “Of the four milk-molars, the first, as in the

Horse, is smaller than the others, and is not replaced ;”’ two pages back in

the same work, however, the Professor gives the formula of the premolars

as = which would imply either that the first tooth of the molar series |

is replaced, or else that it is reckoned as a premolar, in which case there

would be only three milk-molars.f Professor Owen appears to have come

to a conclusion totally opposite to that of Professor Huxley, aud seems to

consider that the first milk-molar is always replaced. Thus on page 592

of his ‘Odontography’ the Professor observes that “the first of the

* ‘Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals,’ p. 362.

+ In a work explanatory of the homology of the teeth, as is Professor Huxley’s,

there can be no doubt that this homology should be given with the most strict accu-

racy. In descriptive zoology and paleontology, however, it will still be convenient,

in referring to the dentition of the genus 2hinoceros, to count the first milk-molar, when

persistent, as a premolar, in order to avoid introducing another term into the dental

series. The same conventional arrangement may be adopted in regard to the perma-

nent and milk-incisors, referred to below.

188 R. Lydekker—Wotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros, [No. 8,

permanent series of seven molar teeth is very small in both jaws, and is

soon shed ;” and again on page 599, “the first milk-molar soon yields

place to the first premolar.” The above given instances of the dentition

of 2. indicus show that this view cannot be normally correct: the difference

in the form of the first upper milk-molar (s.m.1) and the first premolar

(p.m.1) shows, in cases where the former tooth persists, that it cannot be

a premolar which has supplanted a milk-molar zz utero, as might otherwise

be the explanation according to Professor Owen’s views.

I now come to the consideration of the non-molar dentition, and shall

first treat of the teeth of the upper and secondly of the lower jaw.

According to Professor Owen,* there is developed in the feetal skull

of R. indicus, immediately behind the maxillo-premaxillary suture, a very

small tooth, which, from its position must be the milk-canine: this tooth

disappears at an extremely early age, and no permanent successor is ever

developed. I can find no record of an upper canine ever having been

observed in the foetus of any other species of the genus, and no permanent

upper canine occurs in any species.

In a very young skull of 2. indicus, figured by Cuvier,+ there appear

in the premaxilla the alveoli of two tecth, which must be those of the first

and second milk-incisors. Two, indeed, appear to be the normal nuin-

ber of upper milk-incisors developed in the genus, though Professor

Husleyt speaks of there being three on either side in some species.§

Normally, in &. zndiews there is only one permanent incisor developed,

succeeding the first (innermost) milk-incisor; the former tooth is easily

recognized by its lateral elongation. Occasionally, however, as in the skull

of which the left upper dentition is represented in fig. 1, a second upper

incisor (¢.”) is developed, replacing the second milk-incisor. In the figured

specimen, the two incisors (7.1, 7.*) are still in the condition of germs just

protruding from their alveoli; from the condition of wear of the molar

series it is quite evident that the two incisors belong to the second series,

which is also shown by the characteristic form of the innermost (7.!) ; the

second incisor (7.2) is not lengthened laterally like the first. In the right

premaxilla of the same skull, only the first incisor is developed. Another

instance of the development of the second incisor of one side of the upper

jaw is afforded by the skull belonging to a mounted skeleton of an old

individual of &. tndicus in the Indian Museum, in which all the teeth of

the permanent series are much worn. In the right premaxilla of that skull

* ‘Odontography,’ p. 592.

+ ‘Ossemens fossiles,’ Ed. 1836. Atlas, pl. xliii, fig. 3.

{ Loc. cit. p. 362.

§ I am not aware which species is referred to.

1880. ] R. Lydekker—Wotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros. 139

there occur two large and well-worn permanent incisors not differing to

such an extent in size as do those of the figured specimen. No trace of a

second incisor is to be found in the left premaxilla, and I cannot, indeed,

find any instance of the development of the two upper incisors of both

sides in the same individual of £&. tndicus. The occasional development

on one side only of the second permanent incisor in the last-named species,

would seem to be a pretty clear indication that it is descended from an

ancestor in which two pairs of upper incisors were normally present. It

seems, indeed, that, when teeth normally absent do present themselves,

they usually appear only on one side, as in the instance of the lower jaw of

a tiger with an extra premolar, described by myself in a former volume of

the Society’s Journal.*

In all species of the genus, the normal number of permanent upper

incisors (if any are present) appears to be one only on either side, and I

have not come across any instance of the abnormal development of the

second upper incisor in any species but 2. indicus. It may not improba-

bly be, however, that such abnormal development may occur in other

species.

It has, indeed, been stated on the authority of the late Dr. Faleconert

that the extinct Indian R. sivalensis was furnished with three pairs of

upper (and lower) permanent incisors ; none of the numerous specimens of

the skull of this species figured in the ‘ Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis,’ how-

ever, exhibit any incisors at all, and we have, therefore, no tangible evidence

whatever to support the new genus Zalabis lately proposed by Professor

Copet for the reception of this species on the ground of the unusual

number of incisors with which it was provided.

Turning now to the lower jaw, we shall find that there is some consi-

derable difficulty in arriving at a satisfactory conclusion as to the homo-_

logies of the teeth in advance of the molar series.

In Ze. crdicus, there normally exist in the young animal an inner pair

of very small conical teeth, and an outer pair of larger teeth. The outer

pair are succeeded from below by a pair of much larger triangular and pointed |

teeth, which, therefore, evidently belong to the permanent series. Normally,

I believe, the inner pair are not succeeded by permanent teeth, as I can

find no trace of such in most lower jaws; in the lower jaw of the skull

drawn in fig. 1, however, there occurs, a little above and internal to the

middle pair of teeth, a second pair of small teeth, which are less protruded

from the jaw, and which, I think, certainly belong to the second dentition.

* Vol. xlvii, pt. ii, pl. 2.

t Owen, loc. cit. p. 589.

+ Bul. U. S. Geol. Geog. Surv, Vol. v, p. 229.

140 R. Lydekker—Wotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros. _[No. 8,

We may, therefore, say that in R. zndicus there are always developed in

the symphysis of the mandible two pairs of milk-teeth, and always one, and

occasionally two pairs of permanent teeth. When the middle’ pair of

milk-teeth are not replaced, they remain during the permanent dentition,

as in the analogous ease of the first upper milk-molar.

It now remains to consider the serial position of the teeth in question.

With regard to the middle pair of teeth, there can be no question but that

they are incisors, and probably the first of that series. With regard to

the homology of the larger outer pair of teeth, two views are entertained.

By the older writers, this pair of teeth were unhesitatingly classed as

incisors ; a view adopted both by Prof. Huxley and by Prof. Owen. Lat-

terly, however, some writers, among whom may be mentioned Professors

Cope* and Gaudry,} have come to the conclusion that this outer pair of teeth

are really canines, apparently from their resemblance to the undoubted

canines of certain genera of extinct Mammals. To distinguish between a

canine and an incisor tooth in the lower jaws of animals in which the

incisors are reduced and-no upper canine is present, is indeed a matter of

extreme difficulty, and I do not desire on the present occasion to enter into

the reasons either for or against the innovation. I provisionally, however,

adopt the old nomenclature. With this view of the homology of the

teeth in question, the elenee milk dentition of R. indicus may be formu-

lated as follows:—e. = = is fies = the adult dentition will be normally ce. a ;

- 0-0. 1-1 0—0 . 2-2

m.t. —— t. =, or abnormally ¢. — 2. 5.

In treating of the milk dentition of Rhinoceros, Professor Huxley§

remarks of the two pairs of lower incisors that ‘it seems probable that

only one pair, in any case, are permanent teeth.” I have shown that

occasionally in &. indicus both pairs may be replaced by permanent teeth,

and I now proceed to show that such is at all events sometimes the case in

another species. In a lower jaw of R. javanicus figured by De Blainville,||

there are the germs of two incisors on each side iz alveolo, below protruded

incisors; the former, therefore, are clearly permanent teeth. I have no

means of knowing whether this replacement is abnormal or normal. In

* Loc. cit.

+ ‘Les Enchainements du Monde Animal: Mammiféres Tertiaries,’ p. 50, et seq.

} Imay perhaps observe that there seems te be some discrepancy in M. Gaudry’s

nomenclature, since on page 58 of his work quoted above, he speaks of there being two

pairs of small incisors in the lower jaw of R. bicornis (africanus), and yet does not pro-

duce any evidence to show that these tceth are not the homologues of the two pair of

teeth in the mandible of R. indicus, which are reckoned as incisors and canines.

$ Loc. cit. p. 362.

|| ‘ Osteographie,’ Atlas, Rhinoceros, pl. viii.

yes

noe:

val De le] 7. Schaumberg

WW. Newman & G2imp

Abnormal Dentition of’

RHINOCEROS INDICUS

1880.] R. Lydekker—WNotes on the Dentition of Rhinoceros. 141

R. sumatrensis, there is in the adult state no median pair of lower

incisors,* and it is, therefore, probable that permanent middle lower

incisors are never developed in this species.

In the living African species of Rhinoceros, in the extinct Indian

R. deccanensis, and other extinct species, no permanent incisors, in either jaw,

were ever developed, and in the adult the symphysis of the mandible and

the premasille are consequently edentulous. It has been said that three

pair of lower incisors were developed in &. sivalensis, but none of the

lower jaws of the genus figured in the ‘Fauna Ant. Siv.’ show more than

two pairs of these teeth, and none are present in the specimen referred to

R. sivalensis.

From the foregoing brief notes it will be gathered that the dental

system of the genus 2hinoceros presents very considerable differences in

different species, and occasionally in different individuals of the same

species. These differences are mainly due to the varying extent to which

specialization has operated in the genus, and to the occasional develop-

ment by ‘reversion’ of teeth normally absent.

The genus Rhinoceros (using the term in its original comprehensive

sense) is indeed one of those in which the dental system may be said to be

in a condition of change, and this variability in the matter of the develop-

ment or suppresion of certain teeth in species and individuals, appears to me

to render the splitting up of the old genus into a number of new genera

or subgenera (except in the case of Acerotherium) a very questionable

measure. The relative prominence or insignificance of the anterior teeth

may be traced in a graduated scale from one species to another as has been

most ably done by M. Gaudry in his invaluable work already quoted in

this paper.

EXxpLanation oF Prate VII.

Fig. 1, The left upper dentition of an immature specimen of R. indicus, showing

the germs of two permanent incisors (7.}, 7.2), four milk-molars (#.m.!, mm, m.m.3,

m.n+), first and second true molars (m.1, m.*), and the alveolus of the third (m.°).

(The animal to which this skull belonged was killed by Mr, W. T. Blanford.)

Vig. 2. The left upper dentition of a somewhat older individual of the same spe-

cies, showing the alveolus of the first permanent incisor (7.'), the first and second pre-

molars (p.m.!, p.m.”), the third and fourth milk-molars (m.2.°, m.m.4), the first and

second true molars (m.', m.”), and the alveolus of the third (m.%),

Both specimens are drawn one half the natural size.

* Professor Cope (loc. cit. p, 229) isin error when he gives two pairs of mandi-

bular teeth to this species.

¢ I should doubt if the lower jaw drawn in fig. 15 of plate 188 of Owen’s

‘Odontography’ as of &. swnatrensis belongs to that species,

142 W. T. Blanford—On a new Species of Trochalopterum. _[No. 8,

XII.—On a Species of Trochalopterum from Travancore.

By W. T. Buanrorp, F. R. S.

(Received Sept. 2nd ;—Read November 3rd, 1880.)

A very interesting series of bird-skins obtained in Southern Travan-

core has recently been brought to England by Mr. F. W. Bourdillon.

Collections previously made by the same gentleman in the locality named

have been described by Mr. Hume in Stray Feathers, Vol. [V, p. 351, and

Vol. VII, p. 83. One of the species noticed in the second paper is Zrocha-

lopterum fairbanki, a bird originally obtained by Mr. S. Fairbank on the

Palni hills, about 100 miles north of the range, east of Trevandrum, on

which Mr. Bourdillon’s skins were collected. Mr. Hume, 1 ce. p. 87, points

out some differences between the Travancore and Palni forms, but remarks

that he has not a sufficient series to determine whether these differences

are constant. ;

In the collection now brought are three skins of the Travancore

Trochalopterum, and on comparing them with the original type of

T. fairbanki in the British Museum, I find, besides the differences noticed by

Mr. Hume, a few other distinctions, sufficient, I think, to justify a separate

title being bestowed on the Travancore bird. The following is a full de-

scription of the latter.

TROCHALOPTERUM MERIDIONALE, sp. nov.

fT. Trochaloptero fairbanki peraffine, sed dorso grisescente, abdomine

medio albo, supercilio albo haud post oculum producto, regione postoculart

grisea nec fusca, rostroque robustiore distinguendum : pileo brunneo, dorso

griseo-olivaceo, postice olivaceo, coloribus transeuntibus ; supercilio. brevi

albo, loris brunnets, cum pileo concoloribus ; capitis lateribus cum regione

parotica pallide rufescenti-griseis, colli lateribus cinereis ; rectricibus

remigibusque brunneis, tllis remigibusque secundariis ultimis subobsolete

transfasciatis ; mento, gula, atque pectore albescenti-griseis, conspicue

Susco-striatis, media gula fere alba; abdomine medio albido, lateribus

cum pennis subcaudalibus tectricibusque inferioribus alarum ferrugineis,

tibiis olivaceis ; rostro nigro, pedibus fuscis, tridibus saturate rufis.

Long. tota exempli masculini 9, alee 3°5, caude 3°6, tarsi 1°45, rostri

a fronte 0°8, ejusdem a rictu 1, culminis 0-9 poll. Angl.

Has. In summis montibus provincie Travancore, ad extremitatem

meridionalem peninsule Indice.

Head above hair-brown, the feathers rather pale-shafted, the colour

passing gradually into that of the back, which is greyish olive, becoming

greener on the rump ;.a very short white supercilium, only extending from

——

1880.] W. T. Blanford—On anew Species of Trochalopterum. 143

the base of the bill to above the middle of the eye; lores the same colour

as the crown; sides of head, including the ear-coverts, grey, with a slight

rufescent tinge; sides of neck purer grey; wing and tail-feathers brown

with olivaceous margins, all the tail-feathers and the last (proximal)

secondary quill-feathers with faintly marked narrow transverse bars on the

upper surface ; chin, throat, and breast pale grey, with conspicuous dusky

striz, the central portion of each feather being much darker than the edges ;

the middle of the throat is very pale, almost white, middle of abdomen

white, lateral portions and flanks with the under tail-coverts and under

wing-coverts ferruginous ; thigh-coverts olivaceous. Inides dark red,* bill

black, legs dusky.

The three specimens were all shot at an elevation of 4000 feet. Two

are from Mynall, one from the Travancore and Tinnevelly boundary. Two

are males; of the third, the sex has not been ascertained. ‘The differences

in measurement are trifling : the wing is 3:4. to 3:55 inches ; tail, 3:4 to 3°65 ;

tarsus, 1'4 to 1:45; culmen, 09 to 0:95. The length is given by Mr.

Bourdillon from 85 to 93 inches in different specimens.

T. meridionale is distinguished from T. fairbanki by (1) the much

shorter white superciliary stripe terminating above the eye, whereas, in

T. fairbanki, it extends back above the ear-coverts ; (2) by there being no

brown band behind the eye, the feathers immediately behind the eye being

rufescent grey like the cheeks in 2. meridionale, whilst they are brown like

the lores and the crown in Z fuirbanki ; (3) by the back and upper parts

generally being much-greyer and by the brown colour of the crown passing

gradually into the olivaceous tinge of the back and not being separated by

a distinct margin; (4) by the tail-feathers being browner and more dis-

tinctly transversely barred above ; (5) by the striation on the throat and

breast being more strongly marked; (6) by the middle of the abdomen

being white instead of ferruginousy ; and (7) by the rather stouter bill. I

consider the differences marked 1, 2, and 8 characteristic ; the others taken

alone would scarcely justify the separation of the two forms.

From 7. jerdoni the present species may be known by the absence of

a black chin{, by the flanks and under tail-coverts being rufous instead of

* Noted by Mr. Bourdillon, as also are the dimensions taken in the flesh. Tho

length above quoted is from these measurements.

+ This may not be constant ;.I have an indistinct recollection of having seen a

specimen of 7. fuirbanki with the middle of the abdomen whitish, but I am not sure.

{ With reference to this distinction between Z. jerdoni and the two Southern

forms 7. fairbanki and T. meridionale, it is as well to note that the presence of a black

chin in the former is mentioned by Blyth in his original description J. A. S. B., 1851,

xx, p. 622. I call attention to this distinction, as Mr. Hime has overlooked it in his

note on the species (Stray Feathers, vii, p. 36).

144 J. Wood-Mason—On a new Papilio from South India, [No. 8,

olivaceous, and the middle of the abdomen white instead of rufous. Tt is

greatly to be regretted that 7. jerdonz has never been collected again, so

far as can be judged by published accounts, since Jerdon first procured it.

XIII.—On a new Species of Papilio from South India, with Remarks on

the Species allied thereto.—By J. Woov-Mason, Officiating Superin-

tendent, Indian Museum, and Professor of Comparative Anatomy

and Zoology, Medical College, Calcutta.

(Received Oct. 16th ;—Read Nov. 8rd, 1880.)

(With Plates VIII and IX.)

In December last, the Indian Museum received from Mr. F. W. Bour-

dillon of Trevandrum, a small collection of diurnal Lepidoptera, amongst

which was a much worn and tattered example of a female insect evidently

closely allied to the North Indian P. Oastor and to the Burmese P. Mahadeva,

with the same sex of the latter of which it turned out on examination to

agree in having the discal markings of the hind-wing confined to the

median region of the organ, where they form a transverse band of lanceo-

late spots, instead of being diffused over the whole disk and extending into

the cell, as in the former.

About a month ago, a few species of butterflies were received from

Mr. G. H. Kearney of the Berkodee Coffee Estate, Koppa Anche, Mysore, and

amongst them is a fine specimen of the male, which proves that the species

is, as the above-mentioned female specimen had already indicated, more nearly

related to P. Mahadeva than to P. Castor, and enables me to deseribe it.

Parinio DravipaRvuM, n. sp., Pl. VIII, Fig. 1, ¢.

Allied to P. Castor and to P. Mahadeva,+ but more closely so to the

latter, with which it agrees in the form of the wings in both sexes.

Sexes alike, having not only the same form of wings but also the

same general type of coloration as the females of the two described

species; the male differing from the female only in the darker and richer

tints of its upper surface.

$. Upprrstve rich fuscous of a much lighter shade than in P. Cas-

tor, or even than in P. Mahadeva, and more densely powdered with fulvous

scales than in either. Anterior wing with the basal area of a richer and

darker shade of brown than the rest of the organ; with four distinct

longitudinal lines of fulvous scales in the cell, at the extremity of which is

a minute but distinct cream-coloured speck ; with the outer portion beyond

* Moore, P. Z, 8. 1878, p. 840, pl. li, fig. 1.

1880. ] with Remarks on the Species allied thereto. 145

the cell very densely covered with fulvous scales between the veins; with

a marginal row of ochraceous-white spots placed at the incisures ; and with

a submarginal series of nine conical or sublanceolate ochraceous ones ;

each series decreasing at either end and paling towards the costal margin.

Posterior wing with the anterior third of its surface devoid of fulvous

scales; with the incisures of the outer margin very narrowly edged with

ochraceous-white ; with a sub-marginal series of seven strongly and angu-

larly curved lunules or arrow-shaped spots, the four posterior of which are

ochraceous-white, and the three apical ones cream-coloured; and with a

discal band of seven externally-dentate lanceolate cream-coloured spots all

irrorated with fuscous scales except the anterior two; with the cell and the

parts of the wing-membrane external and internal to it tolerably thickly

sprinkled with fulvous scales. The wing-membrane being in both wings

devoid of fulvous scales in the intervals between the sub-marginal and

incisural markings presents the appearance of having a sub-marginal row of

dark blotches. UNDERSIDE less richly and deeply coloured, with the markings,

especially the spot at the end of the eell, all slightly larger and white, with

the exception of the discal series of the hind-wing, which are tinged with

cream-colour at their inner points; and with the fulvous scales similarly

though not quite so thickly distributed over the fore-wing, but evenly

sprinkled over the whole of the hind-wing. Body lighter-coloured than in

P. Oastor, but marked in identically the same manner.

Length of fore-wing 2°2 ; whence expanse = 4°65 inches.

Has. Koppa Anche, Kadur District, Mysore, S. India, at about 2,500

feet elevation. Obtained by Mr. G. H. Kearney.

¢. Marked above and below, spot for spot, as in the male, but

lighter and less richly coloured, with the spot at the end of cell larger and

apparently more distinctly visible on the upper side, and with all the

markings (except the sub-marginal series of the underside of the hind-

wing, which are white) straw-coloured.

Length of fore-wing 2°3; whence expanse = 4:7 inches.

Has. ‘Trevandrum. Obtained by Mr. F. W. Bourdillon.

Inthe male of P. Dravidarwm, there are visible upon the upper surface

of the fore-wing a spot at the end of the cell, a sub-marginal row of coni-

eal or sub-lanceolate spots, and a marginal row of incisural spots; and upon

that of the hind-wing a discal row of lanceolate spots, a sub-marginal series

of lunules, and incisural spots as in the fore-wing.

In the male of the darker-coloured P. Mahadeva, the incisural spots

of the fore-wing alone remain, but the hind-wing retains its three series of

spots, which, however, are all smaller and apparently less clouded with

dark scales than in the preceding species.

In the fuscous-black male of P. Castor, the fore-wing may be said to

be uniform black, the incisural spots, which alone remain, being so reduced

146 J. Wood-Mason—On a new Papilio from South India, [No. 3,

in size as to be barely visible, being, in fact, mere specks confined to the

fringe; the hind-wing has lost all but the incisural specks (which are

similarly confined to the fringe) and the first three or four spots of the

discal series, which together form a large and conspicuous cream-coloured

blotch divided by the veins: P. Castor may, in fact, be described as a rich

dead-black insect with a conspicuous cream-coloured blotch near the outer

angle of each hind-wing.

In P. Castor, then, the sexes are, as regards colour and markings, as

strongly differentiated from one another as in any species with which

I am acquainted; they also differ to some extent in form, the male

having the fore-wing narrower, with the external margin obviously emar-

ginate, and the hind-wing also narrower and produced, with the same margin

more deeply incised and lobed than in the female, both pairs of whose wings

in form more or less closely* resemble those of both sexes in the other two

species.

In P. Mahadeva, the sexes are also tolerably well, though not so con-

spicuously, differentiated in point of colour and markings as in P. Castor,

but not at all in form, the wings being of the same shape in both sexes.

In P. Dravidarwm, the sexes agree perfectly both in form of wings and

markings, differing very slightly in colour only ; so that but little sexual

differentiation has here taken place.

The female of P. Dravidarwm is scarcely distinguishable, as far as one

ean tell from a description alone, from that of P. Mahadeva, the only

differences that I can make out being that in the latter “the fore-wings

have very small and less distinct sub-marginal white spots, and no spot at

the end of the cell.” From that of P. Castor, however, it is readily distin-

guished by having, as I have already pointed out, the discal markings of the

hind-wing in the form of a transverse band of short lanceolate spots.

At the meeting of the Linnean Society of London held on the 18th

March last, a paper by Prof. Westwood, on a supposed polymorphic butter-

fly from India, was read. In this memoir the following conclusions are

said (vide abstract in ‘Nature’ Vol. XXI, p. 531, April Ist, 1880) to have

been arrived at by the author :—(1) “ That Papilio Castor is the male of a

species whose females have not yet been discovered; (2) that the typical

P. Pollux are females of which the males with rounded hind-wings having

a diffused row of markings has yet to be discovered; and (8) that the

coloured figures given by the author represent the two sexes of a dimorphic

form of the species.”

* The females present an inconspicuous dimorphism, some having retained the

primordial form of hind-wing, while others have the outer margin of this wing toothed

as in the male (vide infra).

1880. | with Remarks on the Species allied thereto. 147

With regard to the last of these conclusions I cannot speak, because

neither the paintings nor the specimens in question are accessible to me ;

but, having spoken above as if the opposite sex of P. Castor were perfectly

well-known to naturalists, while, according to Prof. Westwood, it is still

undiscovered, I ought perhaps to say a few words about the material on

which my remarks are based.

Papilio Castor is restricted in its distribution to the slopes and valleys

of the hill-ranges of North Eastern India and to the parts of the plains in

immediate contiguity with them; its place being taken elsewhere, as in

«Southern India, by the new species described in the preceding pages, and,

in Burmah, by P. Mahadeva. The Indian Museum possesses specimens

from the Southern slopes of the Khasi Hills (Silhet), from the Sikkim

Hills (Darjiling), Cherra Punji in the Khasi Hills, and the Naga Hills ;

and three males were taken by Lieut.-Col. Godwin-Austen during the

Dafla Expedition ; in these last, in a large male from Cherra Punji, and in

two specimens of the same sex from the Naga Hills the upper surface is

dark brown of a much lighter tint than in nine males recently received

from Sikkim (2) and Silhet (7), which are all brown-black of so dark a shade

as to appear quite black except when a strong light falls upon them when

their colour appears brownish ; in fact, the brown of the former is to that of

the latter series of specimens what dark green is to the colour known as

“invisible-green.” In the large Cherra Punji specimen, the short tooth,

or rudimentary tail, into which the third branch (d.*, pl. ix, fig. 1) of the

median vein of the hind-wing is usually produced, does not extend beyond the

line of the other lobes of the outer margin, and one of the three dwarfed

winter specimens* captured by Col. Austen approaches it in this respect ;

moreover, one of the Silhet specimens has this tooth smaller in one wing

than in the other, so that this, like secondary sexual characters in general,

is subject to variation. It is possibly to difference of station, but probably

to long exposure to the vicissitudes of the Calcutta climate, and to the

applications of benzine and other noxious substances to which they were

subjected before I took over charge of the collection of Lepidoptera, that

these brown specimens owe their lighter coloration. However this may be,

it may confidently be asserted that it would be impossible for the most

inveterate species-maker to discover any character by which to separate

them as a distinct species or race from the fresh and consequently dark

Sikkim and Silhet specimens. So much for the males.

Of the nine females in the collection referred by me to P. Castor,

seven being perfect can readily be divided into two sets according to the

form of the outer margin of the hind-wing—three (one from Assam, one

* The insect figured by Westwood (Arcana Entom. vol. ii, pl. 80, fig. 2) seems to

have been a similarly dwarfed and faded individual.

148 J. Wood-Mason—On a new Papilio from South India, [No. 8,

from Cherra Punji,* and a large one from Silhet) having the third branch

(d.°, pl. viii, fig. 2) of the median vein not produced and the outer margin

of the wing consequently ‘rounder,’ being, in fact, typical P. Pollua—

and four (two from Silhet? and two from Sikkim{) having that veinlet

produced into a small tooth (d.3, pl. ix, fig. 2) as in the male. I consider

that these two different forms are both females of P. Oustor, and that the

slight differences they present are explained on the supposition, warranted by

numerous analogous facts in nature, that the secondary sexual characters ac-=

quired by the male have been partially transmitted to some females but not to

others (P. Pollux), which have retained the primordial rounded form of wing.

The fact that the discoidal markings of the hind-wing in the two Silhet

females with toothed wings are lighter and more distinctly cream-coloured

than in any of the females with rounded wings; that the malformed speci-

men from the same locality (which certainly belongs to the form with toothed

hind-wings) has these markings in the fourth, fifth, and sixth interspaces,

those, that is to say, corresponding to the ones forming the principal part

of the blotch in the male, of almost as rich and pure a colour as in that sex ;

and that one of the two former has the spot at the end of the cell and the

submarginal markings of both fore-wings obsolete and is thus still further

approximated to the male; do certainly seem to me to tell rather for than

against the above supposition.

The Helenus-group of Papilios, to which Papilio Castor and its allies

* There is another specimen from Cherra Punji, the largest of all in the collec-

tion, with the outer margins of its hind wings so ragged that it is impossible to be

quite sure to which form it belongs, though, from its close agreement in other respects

with Westwood’s figure in the ‘Arcana’ as well as with the other insect from the

same locality, I should say it is a typical P. Pollux.

+ There is a third specimen from Silhet in the collection, taken at the same time

and place as the other two, but it unfortunately has the hind-wings symmetrically mal-

formed at their outer margins, the third lobule on each side being short and angulated

and the fourth being somewhat longer than usual and also angulated. This malformation

is interesting as showing in the same specimen the instability of this character, the

strong tendency to the assumption of the male form of wing exhibited in the lengthen-

ing of the lobule next in order, and the unmistakable ‘reversion’ to the rounded |

form of wing in the suppression of the rudimentary tail.

It should be mentioned that a gynandromorphous example of the form of female

described by Prof. Westwood as P. Pollux has been figured and described as P.

Castor by G. Semper in Wien. Entom. Monatschr. 1863, Band vii, p. 281, Taf. 19.

In this specimen both the wings of the left side are truly female, but on the opposite

side the posterior portion of the fore-wing from the first discoidal veinlet to the inner

margin on the upper side only, and the anterior portion of the hind-wing from the

costal margin to the second branch of the sub-costal on both sides, exhibit the masculine

livery not unmingled with female characters (Conf. Westwood in Thes. Ent. Oxon.

p. 187).

{ The two Sikkim specimens have the tooth less developed and the discal mark-

ings of the hind-wings exactly like those of the other form (P. Pollux).

X. Pt. Il. 1830

Bengal. Vol, XLI

rn. AS

»,vOU

J.WOOD-MASON

Hawinds

WOOD-MASON. Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XLIX, Pt. 1, 1880.

del J. Schaumburg Lith

7 Newman & C

1880. ] with Remarks on the Species allied thereto. 149

unquestionably belong, taken as a whole, presents us with a remarkable series

of gradations in the amount of difference between the sexes, comprising as

it does: one species (P. Dravidarum) in which the sexes closely resemble one

another in the form of the wings and in colour and markings, and there is only

an incipient sexual differentiation : another (P. Mahadeva) in which, while

agreeing in structure, they differ to a considerable extent in markings and

colour, and the secondary sexual characters of the male are much more

pronounced: another (P. Castor) in which they differ from one another

to such a remarkable extent that no lesser an authority than Prof.

Westwood originally described them under different names and still main-

tains their distinctness, and Mr. Wallace* placed them in different groups

of the genus; the male having acquired the most pronounced secondary

sexual characters (including rudimentary tails), which have been partially

transmitted to some females but not to others; and the two forms of

female having retained, one of them the form of wings, and both the

general style of colouring, characteristic of both sexes in the first-

named species: and, finally, others (P. Helenus, P. Ohaon, etc.) in which

the male has perfectly transmitted to the opposite sex all the secondary

sexual characters (including the long tails) that he had acquired, the female

only differing from him in such trifling points as the lighter coloration of the

outer half of both wings and the dingier shade of her upper surface generally.

From these and other facts, we are, I think, entitled to infer the pro-

bable descent of all the members of this group from an ancestor with

tailless, rounded wings in both sexes, closely resembling P. Dravidarwm, but

with diffused discal markings in the hind-wings and probably also in the

fore-wings ; the conspicuous wing-blotches of P. Helenus, P. Castor, etc.,

having apparently resulted from the concentration, so to speak, of such

diffused colouring in the direction of the breadth of the wing, just as have

the discal bands of short spotsin P. Dravidarum and P. Mahadeva from

a similar process of modification in the opposite direction.

If his conclusions are correctly reported, Prof. Westwood’s draw-

ings must represent a species different from either of those alluded to herein,

and I look forward with much interest to the appearance of his paper.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Plate VIII.

Fig. 1. Papilio Dravidarum, W.-M., @.

Vig. 2. Papilio Castor, Westw. 9 2nd Form (P. Pollux, Westw.), from Silhet,

Plate IX.

Fig. 1. Papilio Castor, Westw. ¢, from Silhet.

Fig. 2 Y 1st Form, from Silhet,

d.5 = third branch of the median vein,

* In his well-known memoir ‘On the Phenomena of Variation and Geographical

Distribution as illustrated by the Papilionide of the Malayan Region’ in Trans, Linn

Soc. Lond., vol. xxv, pp. 88, 34,

150 J. Wood-Mason—On Hebomoia Roepstorffi. [No. 3,

XIV.—Deseription of the Femaie of Hebomoia Roepstorffii.

By J. Woop-Mason.

(Received October 27 ;—Read November 3rd, 1880.)

Hezomora RopprstorFrii.

H. Roepstorfii, Wood-Mason, antea, p. 134, ¢.

?. Upprrsmpe. Pore-wing with the orange patch devoid of amethys-

tine gloss, externally more broadly bordered with fuscous (which at each

veinlet gives off inwards an angular process the extremity of which is

continued on as a very narrow edging to each side of the veinlet), but inter-

nally much less distinctly so than in the male ; with the cell more clouded

with dark scales; and with the sulphur-colour at the inner angle more

diffused. Hind-wing with a marginal row of large subtriangular fuscous

spots placed upon the veinlets from the first subcostal to the first median

(the two last obsolete), decreasing from the second in the direction of

the anal angle, and connected together at the extreme margin of the wing

by a narrow edging of the same colour, which extends to the anal angle ;

with a submarginal series of six roundish spots, similarly decreasing from

the first, and alternating with those of the marginal series, each being

placed upon a fold, the first and largest on the fold between the costa and the

first branch of the subcostal, and the last on that between the first and

second median veinlets; and with the sulphur-colour around the four inter-

mediate submarginal spots stained with orange. UnprrsIpE of both wings

paler.

Length of fore-wing 1°7 ; whence expanse = 3°5 inches.

Haz. South Andaman.

Described from a specimen in the collection of Captain G. F. L.

Marshall, R. E., who courteously offered me the loan of the insect for

description as soon as he had seen the description of the male published in

the last number of this Journal.

In Captain Marshall’s specimen of the male the submarginal spots

of the fore-wing are obsolete.

OD Oeeeuouorese ee eee 2

1880. ] Godwin-Austen— On Stoliczka’s MSS. Drawings, &e. 151

XV.—Wotes on and Drawings of the Animals of various Indian Land

Mollusca (Pulmonifera).— By Lizur.-Con. H. H. Gopwin-Ausren,

Jy Tn tshy dle Mushy Gwe:

(Received July 15th ;—Read Noy. 8rd, 1880.)

(With Plates X and XI.)

Previous to his appointment to the Yarkand Mission, Dr. F. Stoliczka

had been working for some years at the animals of the Indian land Mol-

lusca, and had enriched this Journal with many valuable papers. Among

the numerous MSS. he left behind him in Caleutta, there were found, after his

death, some very excellent drawings that had been made under his superin-

tendanece from the living animals; they had been drawn on scattered

sheets of paper, and remarks on the colour and other characters of the soft

parts had been made in pencil on the margins, which were fast becoming

illegible. I, therefore, with the concurrence of Dr. J. Anderson, pasted

these interesting drawings into a scrap-book* and copied into it, as well

as I was able to decipher them, the names, localities, and remarks noted.

As it may be some years before many of these species are obtained

again by any naturalist with the means or talent to correctly draw them,

T have thought that lithographed copies published in this Journal would not

only be preserving, but in a measure carrying out the work of so good an

observer, and would be of use to those in India who are interested in the

land-shells of the country. ‘There is an immense amount of work to be done

in this particular branch of Natural History. We know as yet very little

of the relationship of the many species, especially among the Zonitide

(Semper) ; the anatomy of most of them has never been examined, and, until

this is done, or at least more careful descriptions and sketches of the out-

ward form of the animals are made, our attempts at a satisfactory classifica-

tion must fail.

I have to each species figured given Stoliczka’s remarks and identifica-

tions in full, and added a few notes extracted from my field-book wherever

I could do so, and I also distinguish a few identifications by Messrs. W. T.

Blanford and Geoffrey Nevill.

The plates that will be given contain species of the family Zonitide

variously assigned to the genera Ariophanta, Hemiplecta,+ Rhysota, Xesta,

and Rotula ; and one plate has been required for the Heleide of such very

different genera as Plectopylis, Fruticicola, &e ; those of the genus MMacro-

chlamys, I have also copied, but as Iam engaged on a paper treating of this

group more in detail, which I propose to send to the Zoological Society of

London, the plate will I hope appear in the Journal of that Society.

* In the Library of the Indian Museum, Calcutta.

t Onyles.

152 Godwin-Austen—On some of Stoliczka’s [No. 3,

Genus ARIOPHANTA, Des Moulins.

Bull. Soc. Bord. ITT, p. 227, (Nov. 1829).

With plate giving three figures of shell and two of the animal from

life ; type levipes, Miller, Bombay.

The description by Albers (Die Heliceen, p. 62, 1860) is as follows:

“Testa sinistrorsa, umbilicata, tenuis, diaphana; anfractus ultimus angu-

latus vel carinatus ; apertura obliqua, lunaris, peristoma simplex, acutum,

margine columellari reflexo” ; in the sub-genus, thus defined by shell alone,

this writer places the following species :—

himalayana, Lea = interrupta, Bs. Bengal.

leevipes, Miill. Bombay.

retrorsa, Gould (Hemiplecta, Sect. E of Theobald) Tavoy.

janus, Chem. Malacca.

rumphii, v. d. Busch. Java.

Adams adds to these :—

ryssolemma, Albers (? Thyreus, Bs.) Java ?

trifasciata, Chemn, = levipes, vay. Malabar.

and he figures levipes, quoting M. E. Gray, Fig. Moll. Anim. pl. 288, fig.

7, which is a trace of Des Moulins’ original drawing (I. ¢.).

Mr. Geoffrey Nevill, in his Hand-List of Shells in the Indian Museum

Calcutta, adds to the above :—

laidlayana, Bs. Lower Bengal.

kadapaensis, Nevill, Madras.

= nicobarica, Chemn. re-named, as it is not found in the Nicobar Islands.

cysis, Bs. Nilgiris.

thyreus, Bs. Nilgiris.

intumescens, W. T. BIf. Bombay.

immerita, W. T. Blf. (in eoll. Beddome) South Canara.

near interrupta.

cambojensis, Reeve Siam.

regalis, Bs. Borneo.

= vittata, Adams and Reeve, (vide Adams. Gen. Moll. pl. Ixxix, fig. 5, as

Nanina).

bajadera, Pfr. = ammonia, Valenciennes Bombay.

Mr. William Theobald (Cat. Land and Freshwater Shells of Brit.

India) includes—

awris, Pfr. (? eysis, Bs.) Kundah Hills, Madras.

eyclotrema, Bs. Sumeysar Hills, North of Tirhoot.

a true Helix belonging to the delibrata-group.

1886. | MSS. Drawings of Indian Land-mollusks. 153

foveola for foveata, Pfr. Java.

Mr, Edgar Smith agrees with me, on a comparison of the species in the

British Museum, that this is rwmphi, Mus. Cuming.

saccata, Pfr. Tavoy.

and this is only the young of re¢rorsa, Mus. Cum.

Dr. C. Semper (Reis. Arch. Philip. p. 50, 1870), on the character of

the horn above the tail-gland and foot, places one sinistral species (rumphd,

v. d. Busch.) and the following dextral shells in the sub-genus :—

martini, Pfr. Sumatra,

nemorensis, Mill.

javanica, Lamark Java.

rareguttata, Mouss. (Xesta) Adenare, near Timor.

striata, Gray (Nanina) Singapure

atrofusca, Albers. Singapur.

It is very unlikely that these last six species from the islands of the

Malay Archipelago have any very close relationship to the typical sinistral

Bombay species /evipes, although the tail-gland does assimilate, and it

would be better to keep them, as well as all the other species from the

same region, separate for the present, as nothing is yeb known of the anatomy

of the Indian species. Only those purely Indian forms which I distinguish

by antique type can be with certainty placed in this sub-genus,

Pfeiffer has also, besides typical forms and others (Zeits. 1855) :—

ammonia, Valenciennes, (sp. in Brit. Mus.) Habitat ?

vegalis, Bs., (1 do not consider should be included.) Borneo.

sannio, Pfr. Habitat ?

ampullarioides, Reeve (Mus. Taylor = cysis.) Nilgiris.

linstedti, Pfr. (Mus. Cum.) Malacca.

is closely allied to rwmpht, but it is sharper keeled, and, if the latter should

prove a true Ariophanta, it should also be included.

Des Moulins founded his genus on the animal of a specimen which

had been sent to him alive from the island of Elephanta, Bombay, by

M. Théophile Laterrade in March 1829. The mollusk lived some short

time and two drawings of it were made. Previous to this the shell only

had been described by Miiller.

To M. Des Moulins, therefore, belongs all the eredit of first noticing

and distinguishing the very distinct and large group of Asiatic Helices

possessing a mucous pore at the extremity of the foot, and for which group

so characterized he proposed the title Purrrrorm, placing the Bombay

shell in his sub-genus Ariophanta.

Dr. J. EH. Gray four years afterwards, on the similar characters of

another but very distinct species, created the genus Manina, for Asiatic

154 Godwin-Austen— On some of Stoliczka’s [No. 3,

Helices of this type, and his genus was adopted by Adams and others,

although Thos. Hutton first, and Benson afterwards, had pointed out the

distinction in the sub-genus Macrochlamys ; I do not, therefore, see how in

fairness and by all rules of nomenclature Mr. Gray’s title can be adopted, as

it has been, for the whole group (Indian and Malayan) of these Eastern

Helices provided with a mucous pore which Des Moulins described so well

and so accurately ; the latter saw at once the important differences such an

organ implied in the general anatomy of the animal and understood its great

value in classification, and he shewed also its affinity in this respect to Arion

by the title he gave it (wide, pp. 280, 235, where he gives in full the

description of the animal, his remarks on which are well worthy of perusal).

H. (AniopHanta) tavires, Mill, var. rrrrasctata, Chemn.

P]. X, Fig. 3, 3a.

H. levipes, Miller, Hist. Verm. 2, p. 22, no. 222.

7 Gmelin, Syst. Nat. p. 8616, no. 18.

Chemnitz, Conch. 9, t. 108, fig. 915, 916.

sub-genus, Hélicelle, 2me group Aplostomes, 8me Sect. rubannées.

5 Férussac, Hist. Moll. pl. xcii, fig. 8 a 6.

es Férussac, Tabl. Syst. p. 41, no. 229.

Sub-genus Ariophanta, Des Moulins, var. a. all white, without bands, from Island

of Elephanta ; var. b,c. banded, from the same locality (only this banded var. trifase

eiata figured in the Conch. Ind. pl. cxxxi, fig. 4.)

The figures are taken from No, 57a and 576 of the MSS. drawings

representing specimens from Bombay.

| |

ARIOPHANTA INTERRUPTA, Bs., Pl. X, Fig. 1, la.

Helix interrupta, Bs. Zool. Jour. Vol. V, p. 461, (1884), from Sikrigalli and on

the Jellinghy river (tributary of the Ganges).

= Himalayana, Lea.

These figures have been reproduced from No. 44 in MSS. in Ind. Mus,

Library ; the specimens from which the original drawings were made were

obtained in the Botanical Gardens, Calcutta.

Benson’s description of this last in above Journal applies to A, levipes,

but in his description of the animal, he says the excrements are “ voided

from an opening in the terminal and posterior part of the foot instead of

from the foramen commune” he must here evidently be mistaking the

mucous gland for the anal orifice, although on the previous page (460),

describing the genus Nanina, he shews that they are distinct openings.

ED: Conch. Ind. Hanley, fig. 3, plate xxvii. Specimens from

Faqirabunda, Jessore District, are thus described in my note-book—* The

animal being of a pink colour the same tint is given to the shell, while black

mottlings shew through the body whorl. The head is dark-coloured up to

a well defined black line (extending from posterior part of the neck to

below the oral tentacles), thence light-coloured with a pink tinge, which

1880. ] MSS. Drawings of Indian Land-mollusks. 155

is more intense near the extremity of the foot. The mucous gland has the

form of a long slit with a very small lobe above.”

Hertrx (ARIoPHANTA) LAIDLAYANA, Bs., Pl. X, Fig. 2.

Ann. Nat. Hist. Ser. 2, Vol. 18, (1856) p. 253.

The figure is a copy of fig. 80 of MSS. drawing of a specimen from

Manbhum.

Helix laidiayana, Bs. Hanley, Conch. Ind. Pl. lviii, fig, 3, 4,5:

figure 4, from Cuttack would appear to be a different species from fig. 3,

Orissa, which agrees with the original description, fig. 5.

H. (Artopuanta) mntumeEscens, W. T. BIf. Pl. X, Fig. 4.

J. A. S. B. 1866, p. 83, type from Mahableshwar, Western Ghats of Hindustan.

The figure is from fig. 17 of MSS. drawings and bears the following

remark “ WV. Canarica from Fairbank” [Stoliczka].

Mr. Blanford writing of the animal and comparing it with baadera

says—“ The animals also shew a difference in colour, that of zxtwmescens

is uniformly, so far as I have seen, dark cinerous, while that of bajadera

is much lighter, but very variable. The latter shell is found mostly on

shrubs, the former on the ground, and while cntwmescens has as yet only

been found at Mahableshwar 4,500 feet above the sea, bajadera (which

is rare ab Mahableshwar) abounds on the equally or nearly equally high

hills of Singhur and Poorundhur, and along the summit of the Western

Ghats at about 2000 feet. It abounds at Khandalla at the top of the

Bore Ghat.”

Genus HEMIPLECTA, Albers.

Die Heliceen, p. 60, (1850).

Founded on the shell alone; type humpfreysiana, Lea, from Singapur.

“ Testa supra granulosa vel decussatim striata; subtus polita, anfrac-

tus ultimus plus minusve angulatus vel carinatus.”’

Albers gives for the distribution of the species of this group the large

islands of the Malay Archipelago, Java and the Philippines, New Ireland,

&e.; only one species labiata (= monticola, Hutton) being from India,

and that not agreeing with the description, the last whorl being well

rounded. ‘The two characters given would embrace a vast number of species

having a much wider geographical range, and I should be inclined to restrict

it to the Malay region and not to include any of the Indian forms, until

other characters in common can be found after examination of the

animals.

To Albers’ list, Adams added, it is difficult to say why, several other

species, among them J/igulata, semirugata, and tranquebarica, shells

widely differing in their very globose form from the generic description.

Semper does not follow Albers, but places many of the species under

156 Godwin-Austen—On some of Stoliczha’s [No. 3,

Rhysota, on the character of the odontophore ; these I have marked with

an asterisk,

Albers refers the following species to Hemiplecta :—

*bulla, Pfr. (Ethysota, Albers) Luzon.

Sulvida, Pfr. Mindanao.

biamensis, Mouss. Java.

halata, Mouss. Java.

rufa, Less. New Ireland.

awanthotricha, Pfr. Guimares Is. and Negros.

*setigera, Sow. Luzon.

*gummata, Sow. Luzon.

theodori, Phil. Mergui.

bataviana, v. d. Busch. Java.

centralis, Mouss. Java.

cuvieriana, Lea Luzon.

nove-hiberniea, Quoy. New Ireland.

humphreysiana, Sea Singapur.

var. gemina, v. d. Busch. Java.

? lJabiata, Pfr. Landour.

semigranosa, Sow. Phillippines.

panayensis, Brod. Panay, do.

*semiglobosa, Pfr. Samar, do.

Adams gives some others, three of which are Indian :—

blainvilliana, Lea,

conoidalis, Adams and Reeve Mindoro.

densa, Adams and Reeve Philippines.

_? ligulata, Férus. Bengal.

limaénsis, Mouss.

lurida, Gould Feejee.

rubricata, Gould Feejee.

rufescens, Gratel. Madagascar ?

P semirugata, Beck. . Bengal.

steursit, Shuttl. Amboina.

? tranquebaricha, Fabr. India.

velutina, Sow. = axanthotricha, Pfr. Philippines.

Theobald has included a large number of Indian species in this sub-

genus, with forms so varied he subdivided it into 5 sections; he does not

give the characters, but notes the typical species in each (vide Suppl. Index,

Conch. Indica).

Nevill in his Hand-List makes it much more circumscribed and admits

distincta, Pfr. Saigon.

neptunus, Pfr. Cambodia.

1880. ] MSS. Drawings of Indian Land-mollusks.

*eymatium, Bs.

sylvicola, W. Blt. MSS.

basileus, Bs.

beddomet, Blk.

basilessa, Bs.

? undosa, W. Bit.

chenui, Pir.

joxytes, Bs.

yeycloplax, Bs.

? teastor, Theobald

? +pollux, Theobald

? blanfordi, Theobald

orobia, Bs.

Genus OXYTHES, Pfeiffer.

Zeits, 1855, p. 188 [Without description. ]

1. Nanina oxytes, Bs. (type.)

2. thyreus, Bs.

is a true Ariophanta.

3: avus, Pir?

157

Penang.

Naga Hills.

Annamullys,

Travancore.

Annamullys.

Mandalay.

Ceylon.

Khasi Hills.

Do.

Darjiling.

Do.

sinistral and it is difficult to understand on what grounds it is placed here.

4. pallasiana, Pfr. ?

This sub-genus would be the same as Hemiplecta (Sec. D) of Theobald

(1. c. p. 22): who places therein :—

basilessa, Bs.

Travancore.

this should not be included. I do not recognize any resemblance even

in form of the shell.

blanfordi, Theob.

castor, Theob.

var. a. cherraensis, W. BIE.

cycloplax, Bs.

oxytes, Bs.

pollux, Theob.

Darjiling.

Khasi. |

Do.

Darjiling.

Khasi.

Hemretecta orosia, Bs., Pl. XI, Figs. 1 and le.

No locality given.

Hewix (Hemretecta P) trauLata, Fér., Pl. XI, Fig. 3.

No locality given.

Vide Nevill’s Hand-List (1878), p. 50, No. 284, as Xesta? his notes

on the animal are taken from this drawing. Madras ranging to Bhagulpur

and Patna. (4. H. G.-A.)

* Placed in Rhysota by Stoliczka, J. A. S. B. 1878, p. 11.

tT Sub-genus Oxyes, Pfr, (see further on) forms a very recognizable group.

158 Godwin-Austen— On Soliczkka’s MSS. Drawings, §e. —[No. 8,

Heir (Oxyrus) oxyres, Benson, Pl. XI, Fig. 2.

“No projection above the gland which is rather small; sole broadly

margined, and with a double line,” (w. tT. B.) Nevill’s Hand-List (1878)

p. 47, No. 261.

I would call attention in this drawing to the close contiguity of the

base of the eye-tentacles.

Hetix (OxytEs) portux ?, Theobald, Pl. XI, Fig. 4

“‘Cherra Poonjee from Godwin-Austen’’ [Stoliczka].

“ Animal of a pale light yellowish ochre. Head rather darker, eye

pedicels long and rather thick at the base. Extremity of foot and under

part of it very pale, short, flat and rounded, the mucous gland has a very

small lobe above it.

“T found this shell very abundant on the limestone in the forest below

Nongkulang in the West Khasi Hills, and it ranges westward to the Garo

Hills following the band of the Nummulitie rocks. The very peculiar

thick shape and drooping form of the tentacles is to be noted in the draw-

ing, their bases adjacent as in H. owytes.” (H. H. @.-A.)

“A small lobe above the mucous pore ; margins of mantle not produc-

ed over the edge of the shell, sole of foot narrowly margined.” (w. T. B.)

Nevill’s Hand-List, p. 48, No. 264.

EXPLANATION OF THE PuaTEs,

Plate X.

Fig. 1, la. Helix (Aviophanta) interrupta, Bs.

Fig. 2 — laidlayana, Bs.

Fig. 3. — —— Jevipes, Miller, var. trifasciata.

Fie. 4 — intumescens, W.'T. Blg,

Plate XI.

Fig. 1, 1a. Hemiplecta orobia, Benson,

Fig. 2. Helix (Oxytes) oxytes, Benson.

Fig. 8. Helix (Hemiplecta ?) ligulata, Fér.

Fig. 4 Helix (Oxytes) pollux ?, 'Theob.

a a a a

Austen, Jour. Asrat.Soc. Bengal. Plate x |

Fig. 1.

Fig. 4:

INDIAN ARIOPHANTA.,

Austen.Delt. Maclure & Macdonald Imp

Jwin-Austen Jour Asiat Soc. Bengal. a Plate X1.|

Fig.l.

Fig. 4.

INDIAN HEMIPLECTA.

* .

lwin- Austen. Delt Maclure &Macdonald Imp.

1880. ] G. Nevill—Wew Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. 159

XVI.—Wew Species of Brackish-water Mollusks.

By Guorrrey Nevin, C. M. Z. 8.

(Received November 1st ;—Read December 1880.)

Subfamily BYTHINIINA, Troschel [emend.].

Gebiss der Schnecken, I, 1857, as Group “ Bythiniae”’ ; emend. Stimpson, 1865,

and Clessin, Malak. Blat. 1880, as subfamily of the Rissoide.

STENOTHYRA WOODMASONTIANA, Nl. Sp.

T. parva, imperforata, ovato-acuta, solida, crassa, pallide viridula,

polita, nitida, (swb lente) obsolete submalleata ; spira aculetformis, sub-

concava, producta, apice peracutissimo; anfr. 6, haud convexi, ultimus

pertumidus, medio subangulatus, basi applanatus, antice ad aperturam

abrupte et valide deflectus ; apertura percontracta, perfecte rotundata,

marginibus continuis, valide incrassatis.

Long. 31, diam. vix 2 mill.

Has. Port Canning.

This interesting form is easily recognized by the very acute and con-

cavely-excavated spire, the subangulate last whorl, flattened round the

umbilical region; it is not spirally pitted, as in most species of the

genus, but appears obsoletely malleated or indented under a powerful lens.

This is one of Mr. Wood-Mason’s interesting discoveries from the

still imperfectly explored brackish-water Sunderbunds (embouchure of the

rivers Hooghly, &c.).

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta ; also in coll. Dohrn, Beddome, Theo-

bald, Blanford, and Hungerford,

STENOTHY RA. HUNGERFORDIANA, nN. Sp.

T. parva, imperforata, ovato-elongata, solidiuscula, viridula, vix nitida,

(sub lente) lineis impressis ac dense puncticulatis confertim cingulata ; spira

paululum elongata, ovato-convexa, apice obtuso, sutura profunda ae obsoleta

marginata; anfr. 4, convexi, ultimus compresse ovuliformis, antice sub-

applanatus, valde -descendens ; apertura perpusilla, suboblique rotundato-

ovata, superne leviter angulata, suleo profwndiort ab anfractu ventrali

separata, peristomate obtuso.

Long, 25, diam. 14 mill.

Has. Andaman Islands.

160 G. Nevill—New Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. [No. 8,

This is one of the most distinct and interesting species of the genus

as yet discovered: the few imperforate whorls, with markedly obtuse apex ;

the distinct, though minute, close punctulation; the unusually convex

whorls, with the remarkable leng, compressed, slightly flattened, and egg-

shaped last whorl are all good characters. ‘The suture is very distinct and,

on the last whorl, distinctly marginate below. The operculum is normal.

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta; also in coll. Dohrn, Warneford,

Theobald, Blanford, and Hungerford.

STENOTHYRA BLANFORDIANA, 0. sp.

T. minima, superficie rimata, subventricoso-ovata, vie solidiuscula,

nitida, laevis, paliide cornea, subpellucida ; spira subacuta, apice minuto,

subobtuso; anfr. 45, convexi, ultimus magnus, subsolutus, tumide-ventrico-

sus, subbiangulatus, antice subapplanatus ; apertura subovalis, paululum

postice retrorsa, peristomate continuo, superne angulato. Operculwm ovale,

superne leviter acuminatum, vix erassiusculum, subtranslucidum, spirale,

apice subcentrali, interne testaceo-costatum.

Long. 8, diam. 23, mill.

Has. Chilka-lake (type); also Port Canning and Madras.

I am indebted to Mr. Wood-Mason for a careful examination of the

operculum of this small form: “itis oval, subtransparent, spiral, of few

whorls, with the apex almost central, on the inner side three ridges, one

semicircular and two short ones with a slight S-curvature, for the attach-

ment of the animal.”

The species is somewhat variable, especially as regards size and the

greater or less distinctness of the angulation of the last whorl. Specimens

from Port Canning agree better with the above-described typical form than

do those from Madras.

I have named this species in honour of its first discoverer, Mr. H. F.

Blanford. It appears to be abundant at Port Canning, Chilka Lake, and

Town of Madras; living with it there occurs another form, nearer

St. minima, Sow. (but I think distinct), with more produced spire than

St. blanfordiana, less tumid last whorl, without any trace of biangulation,

with the aperture rounder, and not angled above; there is yet another

still smaller decollate form from Port Canning, probably also a distinct

species. :

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta; also in coll. Hungerford, Theobald,

Beddome, Blanford, and Dohrn.

Subfamily HYDROBIINA, Trosche/ [emend.].

Gcbiss der Schnecken, I, 1857, as Group “ Hydrobiae” ; emend, Stimpson, 1865.

1880.] G. Nevill—WNew Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. 161

Hyprosia (BELGRANDIA) MILIACEA, n. sp.

T. minuta, vie rimata, conico-elongatula, solida, parum nitida, albido-

viridula, levigata ; spira paululum producta, apice minuto, acutiusculo ;

anfr. 5, convexiusculi, ultimis duobus rapide acerescentibus, ultimo bast

subplanulato, ad aperturam gibbositate crassa circumscripto ; apertura

ovato-rotundata, intus tncrassata, peristoma continuum, valide incrassatum,

margine externo arcuato, bast sinuato, margine columellart subangulatim

contorto, subreflexo. Operculum sat profunde immersum, tenue, pelluci-

dum, vitreum.

Long. vix 24, diam. 13 mill,

Has. Port Canning.

Var. minor ; long. 2, diam. 13 mill.

Has. Port Canning.

Found in great abundance in brackish-water ponds, associated with

Valvata (?) microscopica, Nev., new species of Bythinia, Martesia, Teredo

(7), Pharella, Theora, Stenothyra blanfordiana, &c. From the last-named,

the remarkable callosity behind the outer lip, besides many other charac-

ters above recorded, at once distinguishes it.

This interesting shell is the first extra European species described of

the genus (? ) Belgrandia, Bourg.

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta; also in coll. Beddome, Theobald,

Hungerford, Joly, Dohrn, and Blanford,

Subfamily ASSIMINEINA, [emend.].

Group Lithoglyphi, 'Troschel, Gebiss der Schnecken, I, 1857 [pars].

Fam. Assiminidae, H. and A, Adams, Genera Moll. 1858,

Fam. Assimineidae, Clessin, 1880.

Section of sub-fam. Pomatiopsinae, Stoliczka, Gast. I, 1868.

ASSIMINEA SINENSIS, n. sp.

T. imperforata, ovato-conica, solidula, nitida, subglabra, eastaneo-

Jusea, linea impressa infra suturam subobsolete notata ; spira producta,

coniea, apice subucuto ; anfr. 7x, subplaniusculi, ultimus compressus, via

convexiusculus, carina nulla munitus ; apertura parva, subverticalis, mar-

ginibus callo subobsolete junctis, margine externo tenut, margine columel-

lari arcuato, incrassato, saturate castaneo-fusco, inferne subangulato.

Long. 5, diam. 3 mill.

Has. Hongkong.

I am indebted for this, as for many other novelties, to Surgeon-Major

R. Hungerford.

162 G. Nevill—Wew Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. [No. 8,

Type Indian Museum, Caleutta ; also in coll. Hungerford.

ASSIMINEA PEASEANA, H. Nevill, MSS.

T. peranguste perforata, ovato-conica, notabiliter tenuis, glabra, nitida,

vivide straminea, ad suturam fascia livida (plus minusve subobsolete) mar-

ginata ; spira convexo-conica, producta, apice acuto ; anfr. 7, convextuscult,

ultimus rotundatus, inferne convexus, circa perforationem haud carinatus ;

peristoma perregulariter rotundatum, ad basim haud angulatum ; margo

columellaris late dilatatus, subduplex, castaneo vivide tinctus ; apertura

subrotundata, marginibus callo swbobsolete castaneo junctis.

Long. 54, diam. 383 mil.

Has. Lake Negombo, Ceylon.

Named in manuscript by my brother, in honour of the late Harper

Pease of Honolulu ; it is a very distinct species, easily distinguished from

Ass. subconica, Ass. marginata, &c., by its thin texture, peculiar coloration,

absence of any trace of sculpture, rounded margins of the aperture, &c.

Specimens of rather larger size than that of which the measurements are

above recorded occasionally occur.

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta; also in coll. H. Nevill and H.

Dohrn.

ASSIMINEA BIFASCIATA, 0. sp.

T. imperforata, ovato-conica, solida, viv glabriuscula, subnitida, sordide

viridula, fasciis binis fuscis et subobsoletis cincta ; spira moderate pro-

ducta, convexo-conica, apice subacuto ; anfr. 63, convexiuscult, ultimus

tumide ventricosus, ad peripheriam subangulatus ; apertura ampla, sub-

verticalis, marginibus callo pervalido fusco-limbato junctis, margine colu-

mellari fere recto, valide incrassato, sordide Jusco, inferne subrotundato.

Long. 54, diam. 33 mill.

Has. Brackish-water lagoon, Port Natal.

A common species, quite distinct from the three forms described by

Krauss.

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta.

ASSIMINEA DOHRNIANA, 0. Sp.

T. parva, solidiuscula, ovata, fusco-virideseens, anguste wmbilicata,

laevigata, sutura lineart, haud marginata; spira curta, apice perobtuso ;

anfi. 4, rotundato-conveut ac tumidi, ultimus inflatus, subtus convexus, bast

prope regionem umnbilicalem subexcavate depressus ; apertura subverticalis,

ovato-pyriformis, dimidiam totius longitudinis aequans, intus pallide

_ 1880.] G. Nevill—Wew Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. 163

viridescens ; margo columellaris superne valide intortus, refleaus, inconspicue

fulvo tinctus, inferne vie rotundatus.

Long. 3, diam. 23 mill.

Has. Hongkong.

The short spire, with obtuse apex, the depression of the last whorl

round the narrow umbilicus, the bent columella, and the thick somewhat

eroded texture, of a greenish colour unusual in the genus, are the best

characteristics of this small species, for which I am indebted to my friend

Surgeon-Major R. Hungerford; Ihave named it after my esteemed

correspondent Dr. Henry Dohrn of Stettin.

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta ; also in coll. Dohrn and Hungerford.

ASSIMINEA WOODMASONIANA, N. sp.

L. imperforata (vel ad regionem umbilicalem mintissime perforata),

carina parva ac subobsoleta circumscripta, lanceolata, coniea, solidiuscula,

nitida, subglabra, dilecte castanea, prope sutwram pallide rubido fasciata

ac linea impressa marginata ; spira conico-elongata, anfractum ultimum fere

aequans, apiceperminuto, acutissimo ; anfr. 74, vix convexiusculi, regulariter

erescentes, ultimus subcompressus, obscure subangulatus ; apertura parva,

subverticalis, ovata, marginibus callo tenui junctis, margine columellari

pallide castaneo, paululum incrassato, subrecto, inferne subangulato.

Long. 4, diam. 2+ mill,

Has. Port Canning, near Calcutta.

I have named this pretty and very distinct species after my friend

Mr. J. Wood-Mason, to whose very successful researches in the Sunder-

bunds the Museum is indebted for so many interesting mollusks, as I have

already pointed out in my Catalogue, Fase. E, p. 22, when describing the

operculum of Larina burmana. The small, almost obsolete, keel round the

very minute perforation (which is sometimes completely covered) is very

characteristic.

Mr. Wood-Mason has favoured me with the following extract from

his note-book on the animal of this species—‘“ Hyes large, intensely black,

situated on the upper side and near the extremity of the peduncle ; animal

transparent, above very slightly greyish, between the tentacles reddish,

which are so transparent that the eye-spots can be seen very nearly as well

from the under side.”’

Type Indian‘Museum, Calcutta ; also in coll. Beddome, Hungerford,

Blanford, Dohrn, Theobald, and Joly.

ASSIMINEA BEDDOMEANA, Ni. Sp.

LT. depresso-turbinata, quoad formam species generis Collonie quo-

dammodo memorans, peculiariter obscure sed profunde wmbilicata, de-

164 G. Nevill—New Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. [No. 8,

presso-conoidea, solida, crassiuscula, nitida, subglabra, ad basim (sub

lente) striis inerementi subobsoletis munita, saturatissime fulvo-livida, infra

suturam albo fasciata, fascia prope aperturam plus minusve evanescente ;

sutura vix distineta, linea obscure impressa et subobsoleta notata; spira

obtuse depresso-conoidea, apice minutissimo ; anfr. 5, ultimus subtus per-

globose ventricosus, ad peripheriam obsolete subsubangulatus, infra sub-

planulatus, circa umbilicum callo lato pallide fusco et obscure albo-limbato

munitus ; apertura ampla, subrotundata, intus incrassata, marginibus callo

albido prope aperturam valido ae distincto (interdum subobsoleto) junctis ;

columella pernotabiliter et valide incrassata, inferne abrupte retrorsa,

triangulari-linguiformis, applanata ac excavate rugosa, superne in unbilicum

abrupte desinens. Operculum tenue ac corneum; anfr. 3 (sub lente via

distinguendi) in umbonem subcentralem ac prominentem desinentes.

Alt. 8, diam. 34 mill.

Haz. Port Canning.

The most remarkable and abnormal species of the genus as yet de-

scribed. The animal is that of a typical Assiminea, both the late Dr.

Stoliczka and myself having examined numerous specimens, The Museum

is indebted for its extensive series of this and the following species to

Mr. Wood-Mason,

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta; also in coll. Dohrn, Hungerford,

Blanford, Theobald, Joly, and Beddome.

ASSIMINEA THEOBALDIANA, 0. Sp.

T. parva, anguste wmbilicata, ovato-conica, solidiuscula, via nitida,

corneo-fulvida, sub lente spiraliter minutissime confertimque sulcata,

striis inerementi plus minusve obsolete decussata ; spira conica, via producta,

apice acuto; anfr. 64, convext, supremt sublaeves, caetert infra suturam

distincte angulati, superne sublaeves, inferne spiraliter confertimque sulcatt,

oblique subgranulatim decussati, ultimus globose subrotundatus, in medio

striis decussantibus plus minusve subobsoletis, prope umbilicum dis-

tinctioribus, notatus ; apertura sat ampla, subverticalis, marginibus callo

nitido junctis, margine columellart supra leviter contorto, vifra rotundato.

Long. 43, diam. 3 mill.

Has. Port Canning.

In old specimens, the last two or three whorls have a pitted appear-

ance, asin many species of Stenothyra ; in younger ones, the two antepenul-

timate whorls have a beautiful granulose appearance under the lens.

The oblique and decussating striae are always obsolete on the last whorl,

1880.] G. Nevill—Wew Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. 165

except near the umbilicus and in the interstices of the spiral sulcations ;

the narrow smooth ledge below the suture, on the last two or three whorls,

formed by an abrupt cessation of the sculpture, is very peculiar and charac-

teristic. I need scarcely say that I have named this remarkable species after

my friend Mr, William Theobald of the Geological Survey of India,

Type Indian Museum, Caleutta ; also in coll. Theobald, Hungerford,

Beddome, Blanford, Dohrn, and Joly.

ASSIMINEA MICROSCULPTA, n. sp.

T. parva, vie perforata, cylindrico-conica, solidiuseula, viv nitida,

Sulvo-cinerea, spiraliter distincte suleata, striis longitudinalibus obliquis

ac flecuosis decussata, apice acuto ; anfr. 53, gradato-cylindrici, supremt

laeves, 2dus spiraliter sulcatus, dtuis et Atus insigne equaliterque decussate

(quasi gemmulati), ultimus subbiangulatus, supra peripheriam angu-

latus, striis decussantibus paululwin subobsoletis notatus, sculptura infra

evanescente ; apertura subverticalis, parva, marginibus callo indistincto

junctis, margine colunellart haud contorto, leviter rotundato.

Long. 2%, diam. 1; mill.

Has. Port Canning.

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta; alsoin coll. Dohrn, Joly, Hunger-

ford, Theobald, Blanford, and Beddome.

It presents some resemblance to the preceding species in the sculpture,

which in Ass. microsculpta, however, is much more strongly developed,

the difference in young specimens being especially marked. 'The shape

is quite different, the whorls being cylindrically-gradated, instead of con-

vexly-swollen, &e.

ASSIMINEA HUNGERFORDIANA, 0. Sp.

T. imperforata, ovato-conica, solida, nitida, glabra, polita, omnino laete

castanea, sutura subindistincta ; spira brevis, apice vix acuto; anfr. 6,

sublumide convexiusculi, ultimus magnus, regulariter ovuliformis, infra

suturam linea impressa subobsolete notatus ; apertura verticalis, margint-

bus callo castaneo junctis, margine externo tenui, margine columellart

incrassato, recto, paululum retrorso, ad basim subabrupte angulato.

Long. 4, diam, 23 mill.

Has. Mouth of the Rangoon River.

I have much pleasure in naming this beautiful and very distinct spe-

cies after its discoverer, Surgeon-Major R. Hungerford, who has lately been

most successful in collecting and dredging Mollusca both at Hongkong

and the Philippine Islands. The rich chocolate, or chesnut, colour of the

166 G. Nevill—Wew Species of Brackish-water Mollusks. [No. 3,

species is very characteristic; there is a slight tendency on the upper

portions of the whorls to be of a darker and duller shade ; the indistinct

suture, short but produced spire, large and regularly egg-shaped last whorl,

straight and slightly twisted columella, forming an angle at its base, are all

well-marked characters. Under a very powerful lens, strize of growth

are discernible, which become more developed behind the outer lip.

Type Indian Museum, Calcutta ; also in coll. Hungerford.

ASSIMINEA TEMPLEANA, 0. sp.

T. imperforata, ovato-conica, persolida, crassa, nitida, laevis, fusco-

cornea, sutura distincta, haud marginata ; spira conica breviter producta,

apice acuto ; anfr. 55, conveaxtusculi, rapide crescentes, ultimus magnus,

tumide ventricosus, ad peripheriam subangulatus, bast subapplanatus ; aper-

tura sat magna, marginibus callo acuto valido et albo junctis, Mar gine

externo regulariter convexo-rotundato, columellart subrotundato, duplice

ac valide reflexo, regionem wmbilicalem tegente, supra distincte transver-

simque unisuleato.

Long. 3%, diam. 23 mill. :

Has. Nicobar Islands.

Temple, who has presented the Museum with many valuable shells from

the Andamans, Ferozepore, and other places. It is eminently characteriz-

ed by the remarkable callously-reflected, duplex columella, transversely

notched or suleated above.

1880. } Louis Schwendler—On the Employment of, Se. 167

XVII.—On some HLuperiments instituted to supply all the Lines termi-

nating at the Caleutta Telegraph Office with Ourrents tapped

from the Main-OCurrent produced by a Dynamo-electric Machine.*

—By Lovis Scuwenpurr, M. Inst. C. Hi.

TIntroduction.—On the 5th November 1879, I had the honour to read

a short paper before this Society entitled,s “On a simple Method of

using an insignificant Fraction of the Main-Current produced by a

Dynamo-Electric Machine for Telegraphic Purposes.”

In the present paper, I wish to record some more experiments on the

same subject. As stated in my former paper, the dynamo-electric machine,

during this first experiment, was placed at the store-yard, and was driven

by the steam engine of that place. The telegraph current was conveyed

to the Caleutta Telegraph Office by the store-yard line, which is about

4 miles in length. This first trial proved so successful that I ventured to

propose a larger trialto supply @// the lines entering the Caleutta Telegraph

Office with signalling currents derived in this manner. But I could not

then execute the new trial, as in the first place there were no proper driving

arrangements at the store-yard (the erection of these would have cost

money), and in the second place the dynamo-electric machine at my disposal

had, by an accident, been temporarily spoiled. It was thought advisable,

therefore, to postpone the suggested trial on a larger scale until the electric

light arrangements at Howrah{ should be completed, when an easy oppor-

tunity would offer itself for trying different dynamo-electric machines for

the purpose. Besides, telegraph lines being already up between the Howrah

Railway Station and the Calcutta Telegraph Office, no additional expense

would need to be incurred.

New trial on a larger seale.—The preliminary trial was instituted on

the 28th August, the final one on Sunday the 29th August 1880.

In the accompanying diagram, JZ is the dynamo-electric machine

which produces the main current to be made use of for any required

purpose ; the negative pole of the dynamo-electrie machine is connected

* The results given in this paper are taken from’ my report submitted to the

Director General of Telegraphs in India on the 7th September 1880.

+ J. A. S. B., Vol. xlix, part ii, 1880, and Phil. Mag. No. 52. Suppl., Decem-

ber 1879.

+ Mr, Bradford Leslie, Agent of the East Indian Railway Company, gave me

permission to use the electric light arrangements at Howrah for the purpose. He

also kindly permitted the use of the telegraph line connecting his office at Calcutta

with the Railway Station at Howrah. ‘his line was required to give orders during

the experiment. :

168 Louis Schwendler—On the Employment of [No. 3,

permanently to earth. The earth consists of 8 copper plates* joined

parallel and offering a parallel resistance of 1°67 ohms.+

T is a tangent galvanometer for measuring the main current. In this

case it was the tangent galvanometer employed in my electric light

experiments in London in 1878. ‘The resistance of the copper ring of this

instrument is 222. ‘Taking the late Mr. Brough’s value for H, the hori-

zontal component of the Harth’s magnetic intensity at Calcutta to be

H = 0°37158 dynes, the formula for calculating the currents c from the

deflections observed by this tangent galvanometer, is :—

¢ = 47330 tang a (milli-oersted).

ris acoil of iron wire (No. 24 i. w. g., 0°21" diameter) offering a

resistance of 1:517 ohms at 85° F. The wire is coiled on a large wooden

drum and serves as the constant resistance by which from time to time

the efficiency of the dynamo-electric machines at Howrah can be gauged.

\ Y

Electrte_Ligttb. Calder £F; Teh.

f° O OFT OKE a

J represents an electric hight, in this case produced by a large Serrin-

lamp.

In the following experiments, either 7 or J was used as the external

resistance for closing the poles of the dynamo-electric machine to produce

the main current ; but never the two joined parallel.

L is the telegraph line from the dynamo-electric machine to the

Caleutta Telegraph Office. This line is 1°75 miles in length and consists,

from the electric light room to the Howrah Railway Station, of Hooper’s

india-rubber cable core, from the Howrah Station to the Kirk, of No. 6

* The three single earths measured gave: 7°7, 3:1, and 6:9 B. A. U.

+ The dimensions are 4” x 2’ and 7”.

1880. ] - ~ Dynamo-electrie Currents in Telegraphy. 169

i. w. g., and thence to the Calcutta Telegraph Office it is American com-

pound wire of the same resistance as iron wire of No. 27 i. w. g.

At the Calcutta Telegraph Office, the battery wire* could at a moment’s

notice be connected with the key of each instrument, after throwing off the

copper of the signalling battery in ordinary use. The telegraph lines

terminating at the Calcutta Office were therefore all connected parallel to

the battery wire, as is indicated in the foregoing diagram.

Tn order to enable me to directly compare the signalling current sent

into the lines by batteries and by a dynamo-electric machine, each line

is as tested for sent current at Calcutta, and for received current at the

out- station.

Preliminary trial on 28th August 1880.—The line used for tapping

the signalling current was No. 5, Calcutta to Allahabad, 577 miles in length,

worked direct and having a real conduction resistance of about 3075 ohms.

(taken from the August 1880 tests). The resistance of the relay at

Allahabad equals 492 ohms.

lst Hxperiment.—This consisted in taking the sent current at Cal-

eutta and the recewved current at Allakabad as produced by a battery of

60 minotti-cells connected up in series. This is the usual signalling bat-

tery during the monsoon. ;

2nd Experiment.—The main current in this experiment was produced

by dynamo-electric machine Ay through the resistance vr. The resistance

in circuif was not measured, but may be taken to be as follows :—

m = 0°652 \ internal.

7 = 1:517 ) ohms at 85° BF.

= 1°543

Leading wire to tangent galv. 1 = 0:026 external.

Total, 27195 ohms.

: : i 9

The main current gave a mean deflection of 37:9°; ae = ouk: :

min. 36:2

: 6 ; max. 62

mean speed of engine 60°3 revolutions per minute; —— = ——. The

: min. 58:5

variation of the current corresponds with the variation of the speed.

3rd Experiment.—The main current in this experiment was produced

by dynamo-electric machine E.} through the resistance 7, This experi-

* The Telegraph line conveying the current produced by the dynamo-electric

machine to the Telegraph Office may be called most appropriately the battery wire.

+ This is a Siemens’ dynamo-electric machine called medium size (see my précis

of report on the electric light experiments in London).

~ This is a Siemens’ medium machine altered according to my specification

(See précis of report on the electric ight experiments in London). :

170 Louis Schwendler—On the Employment of [No. 8,

ment was made in order to see whether A or E machine would suit the

circumstances best.

The resistance in circuit was not measured, but may be taken to be

the same as given for A. The main current gave a mean deflection of

, Senex: 3377 3

306° ; re te 570° mean speed of engine = 59:9 revolutions per

max. 66

minute ; ee ed rt The variation of the current corresponds with that

of the speed.

The results of the preliminary trial are given in the following table :—

= Speed of engine | Mean speed | Mean of | Current in milli-

% FI Mode of pro- per minute. per minute | main cur- oersteds.

2 o> ducing the of dynamo- rent in

5) current. WEES. electric milli- Received

SI Mean. Tin. machine, oersteds. Bs antes at

saan Fs ‘| Allahabad

1 60 Minotti ae ao an 9°8 9°8 5:1

Dyn. el. ae 62} : ;

Py ape il OEE rer 783 36,846 | 14:5 77

Dyn. el. Ba 66} " :

3 Phachine Es 59°9 rat 641 27,991 9°4, 66

The three experiments were made in the order given. Nos. 2 and 3

were made from 11 to 11:44 hours, during which time messages were

sent. The insulation of the battery wire L was variable from 71,000

to 95,000 ohms absolute.

From Experiments 2 and 8, it will be seen that A machine produces a

larger main current than EF, which is due to the higher speed of A; further,

that the sent current tapped from the main current of A is larger than the

sent current tapped from that of E, just as it ought to be. In fact, if the

line during the two experiments had kept constant, and if also » had kept

constant (7 increases considerably by heating), the proportion of the two

main currents would have been the same as that of the two sent currents,

and this is very nearly the case.f No. 3 Experiment with E machine gives

about the same result as No. 1 Experiment with battery. To produce the

* The small numbers in the form of exponents mean the number of observations

made.

A ;

uF y_ main currents = 1°32,

= sent currents = 1°55.

1880. } Dynamo-electric Ourrents in Telegraphy. 171

main current by A is therefore more advantageous than to produce it

by E. Hence I employed A in the final trial.

The final trial on Sunday 29th August 1880.—The battery wire, before

the trial began, was tested for insulation, and gave an absolute insulation

greater than 1 Q ohm, The main current, as already mentioned, was

produced by dynamo-electrie machine A; @. e., from 8-45 to 11:5 hours

through the wire coil of resistance 7, and from 11°5 to 11°32 hours

through the are of an electric lamp producing the light J. The light of

the lamp was not measured, but may have been equal to about 6,000

standard candles.* The first line was connected to the battery wire at

8:45 hours; the last line at 1053 hours. The whole trial was completed

at 11°32 hours.

The change from 7 to lamp (J) was made in so short a time that none

of the out-stations noticed it. Messages were sent and received in the

usual regular style.

Mr. C. B. P. Gordon, the Superintendent of the Bengal Division,

attended at the Signal Office.

At the beginning of the experiments, the resistances in circuit were

measured.

Internal resistance. of dynamo-electric

: m = 0:652 internal -

machine A in a Baas | %o

ioe)

Wire coil r = 1517 r 3

Leading wire to tangent ) 1:543 external | |

8 1 = 0:026 3

galvanometer JSS

After the experiments were over, these resistances were not measured

again; however, on account of the very considerable heating by the strong

main current, they must, we know, a// have increased considerably.

When » closed the poles of the dynamo-electric machine (8°45 to

11:5 hours) the mean speed of the engine was 60! revolutions per

max. _ 64’

minute ; —— = ——; while the mean deflection of the main-current was

min. 506

SI SCE a 40725"

> sanoe, Ee SBOE

When the lamp was in cireuit (from 11:5 to 11°32 hours), the mean

max. 61 ;

— ==; while the mean deflec-

min. 59

} ; max. 4.62

tion of the main-current was 4417, —~ = :

min. 422

In the following table all the results are given :—

speed of the engine was again 60} ;

* When measured under 45° with the horizon,

172

Louis Schwendler—On the Employment of

[No, 3,

Table shewing the Sent and Received Currents and other particulars.

| No. of Experiment. | -

III

2 3 4 5 6 a 8

Nambex & g cS s Currents in milli-

and name |Sa, |S ep . oersteds. Mode of pro-

oflineand|3 § |8.8 5 ducing the Remarks,

length in. |8 9 5/9-2 4 Received | currents.

miles. [52 4.4 3.c| Sent at | Ui

gud aA Calcutta. SEAtiGnl

No.1 7 6°18 4:00 | 100 cells

Jubbulpore} 4,412 | 905 9°81 7°60 |Dyn.-el. m. A) The several lines

738 5°89 4:45 100 cells were connected to

— —_|-————_ _|_—_——-——|_ the battery wire

No. 4 7:07 3°60 60 cells in the order given

Jubbulpore} 5,795 | 406 10:23 4:71 |Dyn.-el.m.A} inthis table. The

803 TAL 3°50 60 cells first line, Jubbul-

— ——— pore No. 1, was

No. 5 9°81 6.50 60 cells connected at 8°45

Allahabad | 8,075 | 492 13°79 8:57 |Dyn.-cl.m. A} hours; the last

577 9:41 508 60 cells line No. 3, Agra,

— - — at 10°53 hours.

No. 6 714 4°09 20 cells Before the actual

Sahibeunge] 2,000 | 506 21°65 11:40 |Dyn.-el.m. A] experiments be-

225 6:63 4°23 20 cells gan, @. e., before

— -—— - 8°45 hours, all

Not 7 6°63 3°00 35 cells the lines were

Cuttack | 2,800 | 953 11-00 6:00 |Dyn.-el.m. A} tested for sent

400 6°63 3°38 385 cells currents at Cal-

— —---- —;————_——|_ cutta, and received

No. 8 4:00 3°60 | 119 cells currentsatthe out=

Coconada | 7,000 | 3,711 8:15 7:20 |Dyn.-el. m. A) stations, when the

800 4:00 2°01 | 119 cells usual signalling

== - - —_—_—— battery was on.

No. 9 7°69 4:00 | 120 cells Directly after

Akyab | 3,460 |3,470 677 3:90 |Dyn.-el. m. A] each line had been

560 6°18 5°35 | 120 cells connected to the

— - - battery wire of the

No. 11 6:40 5°00 40 cells dynamo - electric

Dhuie 1,427 11°78 11:45 |Dyn.-el. m. A] machine, the sent

6°42 5°73 40 cells currents at Cal-

—— — = —|—— ————| cutta and the re-

No. 10 15°39 3°10 80 cells ceived currents at

Akyab | 4,400 an5 15°39 390 |Dyn.-el. m. A} outstations were

561 17:43 3°30 80 cells taken.

No. 2 15°39 6°40 195 cells

Agra 6,700 829 714 3°90 |Dyn.-el. m. A

915 14°52 615 195 cells

No. 3 13°54 3°25 100 cells

Agra 5,800 | 1,959 13°38 3°10 |Dyn.-el. m. A

850 9°41 414} 100 cells.

1880. } Dynamo-electric Currents in Telegraphy. 173

After the dynamo-current was stopped at 11°32 hours, and the bat-

teries had been connected up again, the sent currents at Calcutta and

the received currents at outstations were again ascertained Hence columns

5. and 6 contain 3 readings of sent and received currents for each line ;

first, with battery, secondly, with the dynamo-electric machine, and, thirdly,

with the battery again. All the readings of the currents tapped from the

main current of the dynamo-electric machine were taken between 8:45

and 10°53 hours, when the iron wire coil of resistance 7 was connected to

the poles of the dynamo-electric machine. From 11:5 to 11:32 hours,

when the lamp was substituted for 7, no current readings at Calcutta and

the outstations were taken.

The main current of the dynamo-electrie machine, when 7 was in

circuit, was 36,801 m. 6; when the lamp was in circuit, 45,706 m. 6.*

From this it does not follow, however, that the tapped currents in the

second case were larger than in the first, because it would also depend on

the resistance offered by the arc, which isnot known. The resistance of

the are, as more current was produced with the same speed of the dynamo-

electric machine, must naturally have been smaller than 7 = 1°517 b. a. u.

(iron wire coil), especially as there is an e. m. f. in the are opposite

to the e. m. f. of the dynamo-electric machine.

To produce 86,801 milli-oersteds through an external resistance of

about 1543 b. a. u., a total energy is consumed by the dynamo-electric

machine of about 27,000 Q ergs per second (representing about 3h. p.

per second).

Conclusions.—These experiments shew that it is perfectly possible

and practicable to tap from the main current produced by a dynamo-elec-

tric machine @// the signalling currents required at the Caleutta Telegraph

Office. These currents were for the 11 lines connected up = 129-1 m. 6,

if all keys were simultaneously and permanently sending. This represents

only 0°35 °/, of the main current (36,801 m. 6) with 7 in circuit, and

28 °/, of the main current (45,706 m. 6) with lamp in cireuit. Further

it will be clear that such a small variation of the main-current could not

influence the regularity of any work done by that main-current.

Further, it will be seen that in all the experiments the sent currents

tapped from the main current of the dynamo-clectrie machine were

considerably larger than when produced by the large batteries at present

in use. Experiments IX and X only form an exception. However,

I think these exceptions are in both cases due to errors of observation, be-

cause the battery readings in Hxperiment IX do not all agree. The

dynamo-current readings in No. X must be wrong, because in No. XI,

for a total circuit resistance of 7759 units, the sent current is 13°38 m. 6,

* Calcutta by the formula: ¢ = 47330 to (m. 0”).

174 Louis Schwendler— On the Employment of, Se. [No. 3;

while in No. X, for a total circuit resistance of 65:29, the sent current is

only 7:14. The error of observation is therefore obvious.

That with such strong received currents as are produced when the

dynamo-electric machine is used, the lines should work well, is not to be

wondered at. But it was also confirmed by the outstations having to

adjust their relays much more unsensitively.

Supposing now that we had useful work day and night for the strong

main current, and that on the whole the new method could be always

depended upon, I believe these experiments have proved that the signal-

ling currents required in telegraph stations could be had for nothing, and

that the method would be quite practicable.

The useful work for the main current at night would most conveniently

take the shape of an electric light to illuminate very efficiently the Signal

Office. The electric light, besides being more powerful, would possess the

additional advantage of being produced by at least 50 times less heat

than if the same light were obtained by combustion. This is no doubt a

great advantage ina hot climate. During the daytime, I would use the main

current for pulling punkhas, lifting messages, or, more generally, for work-

ing a pneumatic system of sending and receiving messages, &c., &e. If

Caleutta had the good fortune to possess a colder climate, it might he

suggested that the heat developed in the coil of wire should be used for

warming rooms. It would then only be necessary to lead the wire along

the walls, in a manner similar to that in which hot water pipes often are

for heating rooms; the electric method being only far more economical.

The heat given up by the wire, after dynamic equilibrium of the system has

been established, is quite regular, and the method is obviously exceedingly

clean and very convenient for domestic purposes. The wire attained

its constant temperature of 93° C. after the current had acted for about

half an hour, the air of the room having a temperature of 30° C.

The heat given out by the wire is by no means small. For instance,

in our case, the average current working through a resistance 7 = 1'548

b. a. u. was 86801 milli-oersteds. This represents work done at a rate

of 20473 Sv ergs per second, and supposing the wire has obtained its

constant temperature, this whole energy is developed into heat emitted by

20473

the wire into space at a rate of ADaihon 488 gramme-degree-centigrade

per second, This is equal to the heat produced by an ordinary German

stove consuming 6lbs of coals per hour; supposing that the loss of heat

when coals are burnt under a steam-boiler is four times as great as when they

are burnt ina German stove. It appears, therefore, that the heat developed

by the wire would be sufficient to keep a moderately sized and ordinarily

ventilated room at a comfortable temperature even when situated in the

highest latitudes.

JI.WOOD-MASON.Journ.As. Soce.Bengal Vol XLIC Pe Mh lsSs0 seine

Behou-i Lal Dos. del. T.W-M. direxit .

~} aAS

~ 1880. ] J. Wood-Mason—On the Lepidopterous Genus Aimona. 17

XVIII.—On the Lepidopterous Genus Mmona, with the Description

of a new Species.— By J. Woov-Mason,

(With Part of Plate VI).

Several years ago, three plain pale-fulvous butterflies of moderate size

were forwarded to the Indian Museum by Mr. S. E. Peal of Sibsagar,

Assam. All three are of the male sex, and they agree so remarkably

closely in size and colour as to have been taken for specimens of one and

the same species. On examination, however, I find that, though super-

ficially so similar to one another, they differ in structure and represent two

distinet but closely-allied species, one of them being a male (hitherto

undescribed) of Admona Amathusia, and the other two, males of an

undescribed form belonging to the same genus. For the benefit of

naturalists in India to whom the costly works in which they occur are

inaccessible, I have extracted the original descriptions of the two described

species.

The genus mona was established by W. C. Hewitson in 1868

for the reception of an insect from Northern India which he had pre-

viously described under the name of Olerome Amathusia. Hewitson appears

to have had some misgivings as to the propriety of this step, but, as_ will

be seen from the following amended diagnosis, the genus is at least

as distinet from Clerome as this is from Lhaumantis, or as Zeuxidia from

Amathusia.

Genus Alona, Hewitson.

Head small. Antenne rather short. Anterior wing acutely pointed

and produced, or sharply angulated, at the apex ; its inner margin straight

in both sexes, not being lobed at the base in the male as it is in Olerome

and less distinctly in Phawmantis; the costal vein reaching to the end -

of the fifth seventh of the length of the anterior margin; the subcostal

4-branched, the first branch given off just before the end of the cell,

and, after running free for nearly the same distance beyond that point

as it originates before it, completely coalescing with the costal, but again

becoming free just before this last-named vein turns off to the anterior

margin, the three remaining branches free. Posterior wing more elongated

than, and not quite so rounded as, in Clerome; without the pencil of

erectile setze which, in the males of Olerome and Lhaumantis, arises from

the wing-membrane of the discoidal cell close to the subcostal vein and lies

obliquely across a patch of elevated and crowded scales on the other side

of this vein, the male scent-fans, if such are really present in this genus,

being situated in a different part of the wing, véz., in the anal region,

176 J. Wood-Mason—On the Lepidopterous Genus mona. — [No. 3,

where a line of sete running along the anterior side of the submedian vein

ends in a curled whisp which, when at rest, lies in a siight groove or fold

of the wing-membrane.

Plain and delicate butterflies of a pale fulvous colour inconspicuously

or obsoletely ocellated on the underside.

In the form of the hind-wings and in the position of the male scent-

fans Aimona agrees with Xanthotenia, and in its pointed fore-wings with

Zeuxidia, Enispe,and Discophora, but it differs from these and from all the

other Indian genera of Morphine in the relations of the costal and subcostal

veins to one another, and in other respects.

(a.) Fore-wing produced and pointed at apex with its outer margin concave-sinuous.

1. Amona Amaruusta. Pl. VI, Figs. 3,4,¢.

Clerome Amathusia, Hewitson, Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond. ser. 3, vol. iv, 1867,

p. 566, Q.

Amona Amathusia, Id., Exot. Butt. vol. iv, 1868, Zeux. et Aim. pl. i, fig. 3—4,¢.

?. “UpprrstpE rufous-brown, the bands of the underside seen

through. Anterior wing crossed beyond the middle by a band of orange-

yellow: the apex dark brown. Posterior wing with some arcuate spots

near the apex.

“UNDERSIDE rufous, tinted with darker colour. Both wings crossed

at the middle by a common rufous-brown band: both with a band of

minute rufous ocelli some of which are pupilled with white: both with a

submarginal band rufous. Anterior wing with a pale rufous band near the

base and a spot of the same colour at the end of the cell.

with a dark rufous band near the base.

“ Hxpanse 3,2, inches

“ Has. Northern India.”

The female is only known to me from Hewitson’s description and

figures.

$. Lighter-coloured than the female. UpprrsIpbE pale fulvous, the

strigee or bands of the underside showing through. Anterior wing darker

at the base and at the tip, between which darker parts the colour is very

pale yellowish-fulvous. Posterior wing of the same shade as the base of

the anterior one to within a short distance of the margin, whence it is

paler, and with an indistinct submarginal series of arcuate marks extending

from the apical to the anal angle. UnprrsipE uniform pale fulvous; the

strige as in the female ; the ocelli (one, the second and largest, perfect, the

remaining five rudimentary) of the posterior wing also as in the female,

but in the anterior wing only the one between the first and second median

veinlet and faint traces of that between the first median veinlet and

the submedian vein are present; the thin submarginal brown line more

obviously engrailed than in the female.

Posterior wing

1880. ] J. Wood-Mason—On the Lepidopterous Genus mona. 177

Length of anterior wing 14; whence expanse = 2°9 inches.

Has. Naga Hills (8S. 2, Peal). A single specimen,

2. Muona Lena.

4G. lena, Atkinson, Proc, Zool, Soc. Lond. 1871, p. 215, pl, xii, fig. 1, ¢.

6. “Upperstpe. More wing pale brownish grey, crossed by a

dark brown band, interrupted by the nervures from before the apex to near

the posterior margin at two-thirds of its length from the base, beyond the

band darker, with a slightly marked and incomplete submarginal line,

before which is a series of five pale lanceolate blotches between the nervures

directed towards the outer margin. All the nervures tinged with yellow

and more or less dark-bordered. Hind wing: anterior portion from base

to outer margin pale, posterior portion bright yellow, crossed by a sub-

marginal series of three dark-bordered white blotches, and a fourth fainter

blotch between the nervures, forming a short interrupted band from near

the apex to the second median nervure. The submedian nervure fringed

from its origin to near its extremity with long yellowish hairs, longest and

most conspicuous towards its extremity.

“Unperstpe. Both wings crossed by a dark ferruginous band with

sharply defined outer edge from the costa of the fore-wing near the

apex to near the extremity of the submedian nervure of the: hind-wing,

and having a faintly traced submarginal line, before which is a series of

blind white-centred ocelli. The cell of the fore-wing crossed near its

middle by a curved ferruginous band. Hind-wing crossed by a ferruginous

band near the base.

“ Antenne ferruginous ; palpi and legs tawny yellow.

“ Hxpanse of wings 34 inches.

“Wap. Yunan.” Moolai, Upper Tennasserim 3,000—6,000 ft. (Moore).

Atkinson does not give the sex of the specimen described and figured

by him, but, as the two specimens in the Indian Museum obtained at the

same time are males and agree perfectly in size and markings with his

fizure, he may be presumed to have described a male. Ina specimen of the

male recently received from the upper Thoungyeen forests, British Burmah,

by Captain G. F, L. Marshall, the three white spots on the anterior half of

the hind-wing are larger, forming a band divided by the veins.

(8.) Fore-wing sharply angulated at the apex with tts outer margin arched.

8, Almona Pratt. Pl. VI, Figs. 5,6, 3d.

BH, Pealii, Wood-Mason, Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, July 1880, p. 123.

&. Closely allied to Am. Amathusia. Uprnrstpr coloured and

marked in the same manner, but with the ocelli as well as the strige of

178 J. Wood-Mason— Description of a new Papilio [No. 3,

the underside showing through. Anterior wing with the apex angulated

but not produced, the outer margin arched instead of concave-sinuous, and

the inner angle not so broadly rounded. Posterior wing darker-coloured

and also paling towards the outer margin, but with the submarginal series

of arcuate marks smaller and less distinct. UnNpErstpE coloured and

marked in much the same manner, but with more perfectly formed and more

numerous ocelli; the anterior wing having three (the first between the

submedian vein and the first median veinlet, the second the largest and best

defined) perfect ocelli and two or three rudimentary ones following them,

and the posterior wing, one rudimentary (close to the submedian vein) and six

(the first in the same interspace with the rudimentary one, and the second

the largest. of all) perfect ones; each ocellus dark brown encircled by

a very fine line of the colour of the strigz and pupilled with iridescent

silvery-white; the thin submarginal brown line rather more deeply

engrailed.

Length of anterior wing 1°35 ; whence expanse — 2'8 inches.

Has. Sibsagar, Assam (S. H. Peal). Two specimens.

XIX.— Description of anew Papilio from the Andaman Islands.—

By J. Woov-Mason.

(With Part of Plate VI.)

Papitio Lzstryconum, Pl. VI. Figs. 1,2, 6.

P. Laestrygonum, Wood-Mason, Proc. Asiat: Soc. Bengal, June, 1880, p. 102.

é. Wings above cretaceous-white, the anterior ones black at the

insertion, scarcely tinged with greenish at the base, with five black bands

commencing at the anterior margin and cutting the cell, the first basal,

extending to the inner margin, the second rather broader, also extending

to the inner margin, and emitting a short conical process at the origin of

the first median veinlet, the third scarcely broader, extending to the median

vein, the fourth narrower, triangular, reaching or all but reaching the

median vein, the fifth much the broadest of all, triangular, divided anterior-

ly into two forks by a curved narrow decreasing and interrupted band of

the ground-colour running from the costal vein to the third median veinlet,

extending to the inner margin, separated from the black outer marginal

band by a band of the ground-colour divided by the black veins and very

slightly if at all narrowing from the anterior margin up to the second median

veinlet, whence it gradually decreases in width and distinctness to the inner

1880. | from the Andaman Islands. 179

angle ; all these black bands connected at the anterior margin, and the first,

second, and fifth of them at the inner margin also, by a very narrow edging

of black.

Posterior wings with two black bands commencing and connected at

the anterior margin and coinciding with bands of the underside, one

basal, extending to the end of the first half of the first median veinlet, and the

other discal, extending a short distance into the space between the 2nd and

8rd median veinlets; with a small black spot near the end of the cell

scarcely distinct from the discal band ; with four discal spots immediately

beyond the cell running nearly parallel with the band, the first and largest

transversly elongated and coinciding with a spot on the underside, the rest

smaller than the corresponding ones on the underside, which latter are

consequently seen through the wing-membrane beyond the margins of the

former ; with a black spot succeeded by one of luteous at the anal angle ; with

a marginal and submarginal series of black lunules coalescent in the anterior

third but more distinct in the posterior two-thirds of the wing, where the

two series are more or less separated from one another by ashy-grey scales

continuous with the ashy patch occupying the outer third of the wing and

extending also along so as to obscure the ultra-cellular part of the basal

black band; with the discal band and spots more or less irrorated and

obscured with ashy-grey scales so that the disk of the wing appears mottled

with black and grey ; and with the black tails, as also the incisures, margined

with cretaceous-white.

Wings below pure white, anterior ones marked as above, with the

ground-colour at the base and between the black bands as far as the

median vein and its second branch yellowish ; with the band of ground-

colour separating the fifth black band from the black outer border distinct,

and not decreasing but on the contrary rather increasing in breadth, to the

inner angle; and with the curved line dividing the fifth black band into

two forks more distinct and less discontinuous.

Posterior wings, from the base up to the median vein and the discal black

band, yellowish, with three black bands, one narrow running from the

insertion along the inner margin close to the abdominal fold, and two broader

commencing and connected at the anterior margin and cutting the cell, one

of these latter basal, extending nearly to the end of the basal half of the first

median veinlet, and the other discal, some distance into the space between

the 2nd and 3rd median veinlets, the two first of the three bands connect-

ed together at their outer extremities and with two largish coalescent

black spots in the anal region; with a small black spot near the extremity

of the cell, and six of the same colour immediately beyond it disposed in a

line which runs straight from the costal vein as far as the cell, but then curves

1£0 J. Wood-Mason—Deseription of a new Papilio, fe. [No. 3,

abruptly inwards, the first of these spots transversely elongated, extending

from vein to vein, and connected with the second, which is roundish and

itself connected with the discal band, the third oval, about one-third

the size of the second, and touching the discocellular veinlet, the fourth

twice the size of the third, in contact with the median vein and its two

last branches, the fifth rather smaller than the third, the sixth crescentie

and connected with the two above-mentioned large spots in the anal region ;

with six large diffused luteous blotches externally margined with black,

and increasing in size and depth of colour from the anterior to the inner

margin; with the ground-colour between these blotches and the discal

black spots pure white ; with an increasing series of six marginal lunules,

between which and the wavy black margins of the luteous blotches the

ground-colour is white in the anterior and grey or greyish-white in the

posterior portion of the wings; and with the incisures and the tails mar-

gined with lutescent.

Head black with two white frontal bands ; collar with a luteous spot

on each side; thorax above jet-black ornamented at the sides with long

grey sete, below cretaceous-white ; abdomen cretaceous-white with a taper-

ing dorsal black band and two lateral fuscous ones.

Length of anterior wing 1-7 ; whence expanse = 3°5 inches.

Has. South Andaman. ‘Two specimens, both males, obtained by Mr.

A. R. de Roepstorff.

To mark its close relationship to P. Antiphates, I have called the

species P. Laestrygonum after the mythical people over whom Antiphates

is supposed to have reigned. It differs from its nearest ally in having the

upperside much blacker (the bands of the forewing being broader, and the

first, second, and fifth of them with the marginal one extending to the inner

margin where they are all connected together by a very narrow black edg-

ing, and the disk of the hindwing mottled as it were by black and grey) and

a much greater extent of grey and more highly developed marginal and

submarginal lunules on the hind-wing; in the abdomen being dorsally

banded with black and the thorax ornamented with grey sete, &c.

P. S.—On the 17th Nov., after the above had been sent to press, the

fourth part of M. Oberthiir’s work entitled ‘ E’tudes d’ Entomologie’ was

received in the Indian Museum, and in it I find the same species described

and figured under the name of P. Epaminondas ; but, as it seems to me

not quite certain whether this name was actually published before mine, I

have left it to M. Oberthiir to effect the change of names that will become

necessary if the fourth part of his work should really have been issued to

the public before June, 1880.

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL» HISTOY PART (PT. Il.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1879.

No. 1, (issued June 10th, 1879). On new species of the Genus

Plectopylis of the Family Helicide.— By Linur.-CoLtonen Gopwin-Avs-

mEN. On the Operations for obtaining the Discharges of the large Rivers

in Upper Assam, during Season 1877-78.—By Linut. H. J. Harman.

Hemiptera from Upper Tenasserim.— By W. L. Distant. Oommunicated

by J. Woop-Mason. On the Diurnal Variation of Rainfall Frequency

at Oaleutta.—By H. ¥. Buanrorp. Record of the Occurrence of Hurth-

quakes in Assam during 1878.—Oommunicated by the Curnr Commis-

SIONER OF ASSAM. On some experiments made at H. M.’s Mint in Cal-

cutta on coining Silver into Rupees—By Cou. J. BF. Tennant. (With

three Plates and seven Woodcuts).

No. 2, (issued September 15th, 1879). Note on the old Burmese route

over Patkai vid Nongyang (viewed as the most feasible and direct route,

From India to Ohina)—By 8. HK. Peat. On a new Standard of Light.—

By Lovrs Scuwenpier. A second note on Mammalia collected by Major

Biddulph in Gilgit.— By W.T. Branrorp. A Description of some new

Species of Hydroid Zoophytes from the Indian Coasts and Seas.—By Suxr-

axon J. Armsrrone, Marine Survey Department. Notes on the Forma-

tion of the Oountry passed through by the 2nd Column Tal Chotiali Kield

Force during its march from Kala Abdullah Khin in the Khéjak Pass to

Lugtrt Barkhan. Spring of 1879.— By Lint. R. C. Tamenn, 1st Ghoorkas.

Note on a collection of Reptiles and Frogs from the neighbourhood of

Eillore and Dunagudem.—By W.T. Buayrorp. Preliminary Notice of a

new Genus (Parectatosoma) of Phasmide from Madagascar, with brief

Descriptions of its two Species.—By J. Woop-Mason. (With eight

Plates and two Maps).

No. 3, (issued November 28th, 187 9). Notes on a collection of Rep-

tiles made by Mason O. B. St. Joun, at Ajmere in Rajputina.—By W.

T. Branrorp. Notes on Reptilia—By W. T. Buanrorp. Notes on

Stone Implements from the Khasi Hills, and the Banda and Vellore Dis-

tricts—By Joun Cocxpurn, Late Curator of the Allahabad Museum,

Officiating Assistant Osteologist, Indian Museum, Calcutta. The Ravages

of Rats and Mice in the Dakhan during the Harvest of 1878-79.—By the

Rey. 8. B. Farrpank. Wotes on the Survey Operations in Afghdnistin in

connection with the Oampaign of 1878-79. Compiled from Letters and

Diaries of the Survey officers by Mason J. WatErnousE, Assistant Sur-

veyor General.—Communicated by Mason-GEenerat J. T. Warker, Sur-

veyor General of India. (With three Plates and one Map).

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

RS. AS.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XVII (1843

to 1848) ; Vols. XIX to XXII (1850 to 1852) ; Vols. XX VI,

XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols. XXXIII to XLVIII, (1864

to 1879).

Asiatic ee from Vols. VI to XI and Vols. XVII to XX,

EaCieabicasctsiater eveiel icieiieeisiieietiore eee is ecenelcheteistare cysteine 10 4

Ditto dittos dnd exis shcicjale ces cle s cle tite wisi siste serena eee nO ACO

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in Arabic, Bec Gad rd Fac 1 O

The Ain-1-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated me English, with notes and

imdexes, by-.4:; Blochmaan, MAS, 3 cri. secs see gee come 12 4

The Prosody of the Persians. —By H. Blochmann, M. Ad, re aiertan anes

The Tabaqat-i-Naciri. Translated Dy Major H. G. ’ Raverty,

OAS Cais sec ais ore icnayene toes sst atylievoha etemunonakeete tebe) erate cope Argo = AOD

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodg oson, Ksq., B. 6. S., 3 3 8

Just Published.

HISTORY OF THH BIRDS OF CEYLON,

Parr I.

By Captain W. V. Lucen, R. A., F. L. S.

845 pages, royal 4to., with 10 plates by Keulemans. To be comple-

ted in two more parts, price £2 each. In this work the geographical range,

habits, and nidification of each species is fully worked out.

Intending subscribers should communicate with the author, whose

address is ‘‘ Aberystwith, Wales.”

oad

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

Vol. XLIX, Part II, No. IV.—1880.

EDITED BY

JRE Naturar fiisTORY PECRETARY.

1) z

i mui vii deni nv

« Tho bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

man or produced by nature.’”’—Sir WiLLIamM Jongs,

*,* Commumications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, im Lon-

don, cure of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 5 59, Ludgate Hill,

— eee eee

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED BY J, W. JHoMas, aT THE PaPTIST MISSION PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

fstaTic Society, 57, PARK STREET,

1880. i

Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—To Non-Subscribers, Rs, 2,

Price in England, 4 Shillings.

Issued March 7th, 1881.

CONTENTS.

XX.— Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. XII. Descriptions

of new Land and F#resh-water Shells from Southern -and

Western India, Burmah, the Andaman Islands, &c.—By

W. T. BuanForp, F. R. §., (With Plates II & III), ........

XXI.—List of Diurnal Lepidoptera from Port Blair, Andaman

Islands, with Descriptions of some new or little-known Species

and of a new Species of Hestia from Burmah.—By J. Woov-

Mason, Deputy Superintendent, Indian Museum, and L. pE

Nice’vite, (With Plate XIII), ...... BDO Es SOU A +

XXII.—Deseription of an Arvicola from the Punt Himalayas.—

By W.T. Buawnrorp, F. R.S.,......5. sUwa eens, ol nla eee ee

XXIII.—Some new Species of iioaiers? ous liepdopters Srom the

Indian Region.— By Captain G. F. L. Marswant, R. E., and

LUTON: 0) Ee NGO VALINE te eh efearaieleetoral ocere w @hanevepe aieie sete oratetetate

XXIV.— Description of Darmheentiecn Mar salts ie Type of 2 a

new Genus and Species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera from

South India.—By J. Woov-Mason, Deputy Superintendent,

Indian Museum, Calcutta, »...scvse.se0s ROOD OOOO OG

Page

181

223

24d

945

248

Plate VI, illustrative of ma in the preceding number, is issued

herewith,

OO OO OO a eee.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—o-—

Part II.—PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

No. IV.—1880.

XX.— Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. X11. Descriptions of new

Land and Freshwater Shells from Southern and Western India, Bur-

mah, the Andaman Islands, §e.—By W. T. Buanrorp, F. R. 8.

(Received Noy. 20th ;—Read December 1st, 1880.)

(With Plates II and IIT.)

More than ten years have elapsed since the last number of these ‘ Con-

tributions’ was published.* The time that I have been able to devote to

Zoology in the interim has been occupied with other subjects, and several

forms of Indian land-shells that have been in my possession for years have

remained undescribed. Of a number of these, I had drawings made some

years ago, and several of the figures that accompany the present paper were

included in a plate prepared for publication as long since as 1871, but

never lithographed.

These ten years have seen so many additions to the literature of Indian

land and freshwater shells that the whole aspect of the study has been

changed. Foremost in importance are the late Dr. Stoliczka’s papers in

this Journalf on the anatomy of several forms of Helieide. The un-

timely death of Dr. Stoliczka, one of the most able and energetic workers

who ever devoted his attention to Indian Mollusca, has prevented the

design he had formed of publishing a monograph of Indian Cyclostomacea

; * J. A.S. B., 1870, xxxix, pt. 2, pp. 9—25.

¢ Vol. xl, 1871, pt. 2, pp. 148, 217, and xlii, 1873, pt. 2, p. 11.

182 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

from being carried out, A considerable number of drawings had been made

for the work, in the preparation of which I had agreed to join, but of these

drawings the most important, those representing the anatomy of the various

genera, are not, I fear, sufficiently clear for publication in their present

form, and notes to explain them are wanting. Some of the most useful

of Dr. Stoliczka’s anatomical studies, those on the structure of various

Helicide, have, however, I am much pleased to say, been continued by

Colonel Godwin-Austen with important results.

The same decade has seen the completion of a series of illustrations,

many of them well executed, of Indian land and freshwater shells, the

“Conchologia Indica’ of Hanley and Theobald. The work is mainly due

to Mr. Hanley, upon whom the whole of the editorial labour has fallen,

Mr. Theobald having been absent in India during the publication. Whilst

it is impossible to avoid regretting that more complete illustrations of most

of the species have not been given, and that some additional details have

not been furnished in the accompanying letterpress,* it is unquestionable

that the plates are a valuable contribution to the knowledge of Indian Mol-

lusca.

Two other rather important works on Indian land and freshwater

shells have been issued since the completion of the ‘ Conchologia Indica.’

One of these is Mr. Theobald’s ‘ Catalogue of the Land and Freshwater Shells

of British India’}+, the other, Mr. G. Nevill’s ‘ Hand-list of the Mollusca

in the Indian Museum, Calcutta’, Part I.f The value and accuracy of the

first-named work are unfortunately seriously diminished by the great num-

ber of misprints, errors, and omissions, partly due to the author’s absence

from Caleutta when the list was printed. Five quarto pages in small print

are filled with additions and corrections ; this list, however, is not only far

from being exhaustive, but contains some additions to the catalogue of

mistakes.§ The ‘ Notes on the ‘ Conchologia Indica,’’ p, 50, contain some

important corrections of localities cited in that work.

* One most important omission might yet perhaps be rectified. A large number

of the figures are from types, or from typical examples, and, in such cases, if the figure

is correct, there can be no question as to the determination of the species. But many

of the figures are from shells that, although doubtless in general correctly identified,

are not the specimens originally described, nor even in all cases from the same locality.

A list of the figures taken from actual types would be useful in cases of disputed iden-

tity.

t+ Calcutta, 1876, published by Thacker, Spink and Co.

t Calcutta, 1878.

§ To justify my criticism of my friend Mr. Theobald’s ‘Catalogue’, I will give two

instances of the errors it contains. At p, 15, the genus Omphalotropis (with two species

O. distermina, B. and O. awrantiaca, Desh., is placed in the family Rissoidae, subfamily

Pomatiopsinae. At p. 48, the same genus Omphalotropis (with but one species O. dister-

mind, B.) is repeated as a member of the family Melicinide, subfamily Hydroceninae.

1880. ] W. T. Blanford— Contributions to Indian Malacology. 183

Mr. Nevill’s ‘ Hand-list of the Mollusca in the Indian Museum’ is espe-

cially important for the large number of localities given. In some few

instances (asin all such lists), some names will be found to require revision,

and one or two instances will be given in the present paper. I have already*

expressed my reasons for dissenting in some respects from the classification

adopted. But it would be unfair to convey the impression that mistakes

are numerous, indeed, considering that Mr. Nevill had not the advantage of

correcting the proof-sheets himself, errors, so far as I have examined the

work critically, appear singularly few in number, and in many points the

classification adopted for the Helicide of India is a considerable improve-

ment on anything that had previously been published. At the same time,

there is, I believe, very much more to be done before these puzzling shells

are properly arranged.f

In the various works just mentioned, some species are quoted by names

given by me, at various times, in manuscript, but never published. Of

these forms I have given descriptions in the following pages. In several

instances, the shells have been figured in the ‘ Conchologia Indica.’ One

form thus figured (Spiraculum mastersi), I have already described in this

Journal (vol. xlvi, 1877, pt. 2, p. 313), and two other species (Oremnocon-

chus fauirbanki and Oorbicula iravadiea) represented in the same work

require explanation. ‘'T'o facilitate reference, this is given below under the

name of each shell.

This mistake is not corrected in the long list of ‘Addenda et Corrigenda.’ To

shew how grave the error is, it is only necessary to mention that the Rissoidae are as

distinct from the Helicinidae in organization as are the Littorinidae from the Neritidae,

and that Omphalotropis has been clearly proved to belong to neither, but to the Cyclos-

tomidae (See Ann. Mag. & Nat. Hist. May, 1865, ser. 4, vol. iii, p. 341). Moreover,

the Indian locality of Omphalotropis aurantiaca had been shewn to be erronéous by

Hanley in the ‘ Conchologia Indica,’ The error was long since suggested by Benson

(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Sept. 1851, ser. 2, vol. viii, p. 194).

The other error that I shall notice occurs in the ‘ Addenda et Corrigenda’ and runs

thus :—‘“ Page 15, add Acmetta uypria, Godwin-Austen. North Kast Bengal.’ The

reference quoted is ‘Minutes of the Trustees, Imperial Museum,’ Calcutta, vol. vii,

p. 162. Now the minutes quoted are not published, but merely printed for record,

and the notices contained in them of additions to the Museum are mere lists of the names

that happen to be attached to specimens, inserted without any attempt at verification.

Precisely the same is the case in the ‘ Register’ at the British Museum. Had Mr.

Theobald looked at the specimens, or had he made any enquiry about the shell, he

would, I think, have easily learned that no such name as ‘ demella hydria was ever

published, and that the shell so-called, was, if I am not mistaken, Z'ricula montana.

* Proc. A. S. B., 1879, p. 55.

+ For instance, I cannot help doubting whether any of the numerous forms refer-

red by Mr. Nevill to Merocystis are really congeneric with L, ornatedla the type of the

gonus,

184 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

Of the remaining species here described, the majority have been collec-

ted by Colonel Beddome in the hill-tracts of Southern India. Some of these

were sent to me as long as 9 or 10 years ago, others have been received more

recently. I feel that I owe many apologies to Col. Beddome and to the

other gentlemen, Dr. Anderson, Col. Evezard, and Col. Godwin-Austen,

who have kindly entrusted me with the description of their discoveries, for

leaving these so long unnoticed.

The plates accompanying the present paper are unfortunately deficient

inmany respects. Several species are not represented, and some of the repre-

sentations given are far from being good. ‘The original drawings were, in

all cases, excellent, but some of them may, after being kept for several years,

have become indistinct in parts, and as the lithographer had not the shells

for comparison, he may have misunderstood the details. The larger shells

represented in plate iii. are fairly well delineated, but several of the small

forms in plate ii. are more or less faulty.

The importance of a careful study of the anatomy in the different

forms of Helicide has already been mentioned. Very much remains to be

done before anything like a correct classification of the family can be prac-

ticable. That all the forms referred to Manna (a name which has no

claim to recognition) must be separated from Helix is clear enough; the

animals belong to different subfamilies at least, but it is by no means cer-

tain how many real generic groups there are in the so-called Nanina. 1

suspect that Macrochlamys, very possibly with some of the forms referred

by Stoliezka to Rotula,* will have to be separated generically from another

eroup comprising the sections known as Hemiplecta and Ariophanta, which

are very closely allied to each other, and which are probably congeneric

with Xesta and several other forms. For the present, I have simply refer-

red the species described to the sections to which they appear to belong, as

Stoliczka did, but Iam by no means prepared to follow him in accepting

such sections as of generic rank. The difficulty is to determine what generic

name or names should be adopted. Wanina is utterly bad; it offends every

law ; the name had been used previously by Risso ;+ the type is the same

as that of Benson’s genus Macrochlamys ; and the term is objectionable on

account of its signification. All this has been pointed out by Martens,

but still he and others employ the name because it has crept into use.

Now, in such difficult matters as these generic terms, unless rules are

strictly attended to, utter confusion must result, and undoubtedly it

bas resulted. When, however, a search is made for a better found-

ed term then WVanina, endless difficulties are encountered. The ear-

* These appear, however, to deserve distinction from true Rotwla, see after.

+ See Stoliczka, J. A. S. B., 1871, xl, pt. 2, p. 47.

f{ Albers Heliceen, 2te Ausgabe, p. 46, where the synonymy is fully discussed,

1880. | W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Malacology. 185

liest name is ZHelicarion of Ferussac (1822), but it is far from clear

that this is not generically distinct from both Macrochlamys and Ariophan-

ta. Thenext termis Stenopus of Guilding (1828), applied to a West Indian

shell. This genus is evidently closely allied to the so-called Nanina: the

only distinction pointed out by H. and A. Adams* is that the sole in

Stenopus is narrower than the sides of the foot, but this does not hold good

universally.f A better difference is probably the position of the genital

orifice, which appears to be, in Stenopus, some distance behind the head, as

in Zonites, and not just behind the right tentacle, as in ‘Wanina.’ After

Stenopus follow Macrochlamys of Benson (1832) and Ariophanta of Des-

moulins (1833), the first founded on H. indica (Benson nec. Pfr.), believ-

ed by many authors to be the same as H. witrinoides, the second founded

on HI. levipes. The name Nanina was given in 1834. My impression is

that Helicarion, Macrochlamys, and Ariophanta willhave to be accepted as

genera, WVanina being merely a synonym of JZacrochlamys.

I must apologize for taking up space by repeating what has been often

written before, but it is only right to explain why I now describe as Hemz-

plecta, Huplecta, &c. shells allied to others formerly in these ‘ Contributions’

called WManina.

1. AntopHanta IMMERITA. Plate III, Fig. 4, 4a.

Nanina (Ariophanta) immerita, W. Blanf., J. A. S. B., 1870, xxxix. pt. 2, p. 17.

Helix immerita, Pfr., Mon. Hel, vii. p. 128; Hanley & Theobald, Conch. Ind. pl.

cl, fig. 7.

This shell was originally described from an immature specimen, and

the same was figured in the ‘ Conchologia Indica.’ Subsequently, Col. Bed-

dome obtained an adult shell from the same locality, South Canara. Of

this example a figure is now given. The species only differs in sculpture

from A. interrupta, which is found in various parts of Bengalt and Orissa,

and has been procured by Col. Beddome as far south as the Goleondah

range of hills in Vizagapatam. The two forms replace each other in the

eastern and western parts of the Indian peninsula, precisely as do their

allies A. /evipes and A. laidlayana.

2. OXYTES SYLVICOLA, sp. nov.

Testa perforata, depressa, carinata, solidula, olcoso-micans, epider-

mide erassiuscula obtecta fulva vel luteo-fusca, striis obliquis increment

* Gen. Rec. Mollusca, ii, p. 221.

+ £. g. in Macrochlamys, some forms of which at least have the central tract nar-

rower than the lateral.

{ Amongst the localities given in the ‘Hand-list of Mollusca in the Indian

Museum,’ part i. p. 19, is Singhar. This cannot be Sinhgarh near Poona, in the Dec-

can.

186 W. T. Blanford— Oontributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

atque lineis impressis minutis spiralibus subdistantibus superne decussata

(nucleo sublevigata), subtus levior sed distinete decussato-striata. Spira

parum elevata depresso-conoidea, fere convexa, apice obtuso, sutura linear,

antice vie impress. Anfr. 54, sensim acerescentes, primi planulati, ultimt

convexiuscult, ultimus haud descendens, subtus convexus, modice inflatus,

sed infra carinam, nisi juxta aperturam, leviter compressus. Apertura

obliqua, angulata-lunaris, intus livido-albida ; peristoma acutum, intus swb-

incrassato-labiatum, marginibus callo tenui junctis, columellart eurvato,

breviter reflexo. Diam. maj. 82, min. 29, axis 17 mm. Apert. 163 mm.

lata, 13% oblique alta.

Hap. In montibus ‘ Burail Range’ dictis, ad alt. 83000-4000 pedum,

in provincia ‘ North Cachar’ Bengaliz orientalis (. H. Godwin-Austen).

Shell perforate, depressed, carinate, not very thin, having a greasy

lustre, and a thick epidermis, tawny or yellowish brown, marked with ob-

lique raised strize of growth decussated by fine subdistant spiral impressed

lines above (the nucleus almost smooth), and with fainter radiating strize

and concentric impressed lines below. Spire but little raised, almost con-

vex, depressedly conoid, apex obtuse, suture linear at first, but slightly im-

pressed near the mouth. Whorls 54, gradually increasing, the inner nearly

flat above, the outer slightly convex; the last not descending, convex and

moderately swollen below, but slightly compressed just below the keel,

except near the mouth. Aperture oblique, angulately lunate, a little

broader than high, pale livid within. Peristome sharp, with a slightly

thickened lip inside, the margins joined by a thin callus, columellar mar-

gin curved, reflected for a short distance at the perforation. Major diameter

1:26 inches, minor 1:14, axis 0°69, breadth of aperture 0°65, height (measur-

ed obliquely) 0°53.

There is a very remarkable resemblance between this shell and that

described by me as Manina koondacnsis (J. A. S. B., 1870, xxxix, pt. 2,

p. 16, pl. iui, fig. 12), yet I am by no means sure that both belong to the

same section or subgeneric group. WV. koondaensis is an ally of NV. indica

(Pfr.) and WV. shiplayi, shells doubtless nearly allied to Hemiplecta, and

very possibly belonging to that subgenus, but hitherto referred to Rotwla,*

or to other sections. O. sylvicola is larger, more solid, and covered with

a distinct epidermis, and the sculpture is less granulate above, the spiral

impressed lines being more distant.

I have seen but one specimen of O. sylvicola, for which I am indebted

to Col. Godwin-Austen. It is figured here. Other specimens, I learn, are

larger.

* Stoliczka, J. A. 8. B., 1871, xl, pt. 2, 231.

1880. } W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 187

3. HEMIPLECTA TINOSTOMA, sp. nov., Plate III, Fig. 1.

Testa anguste wnbilicata, convexo-depressa, confertim striis spiralibus

minutis lineisque incrementi decussata ; fulva, lined pallidd angusté supra

peripheriam, alterd fusca infra, cincta ; subtus pallidior, levior, nitidula.

Spira convexa, apice obtuso, suturd primum lineart, antice impressd. Anfr.

5, planiusculi, sensim accrescentes ; ultimus convexior, antice latior sub-

ascendens, ad peripheriam angulatus, subtus convexus, aperturam versus

planulatus. Apertura obliqua, multo latior quam alta, lunato-oblonga,

intus albescens, fascia peripherali albidd conspicud ; peristomatis margini-

bus subparallelis, callo tenw junctis, basali albo, recto, crassiusculo, longe

obliquo, ad umbilicum subreflexo, supero arcuato, leviter inflexo. Diam.

maj. 50, min. 89, axis 21 mm. ; apert. 28 mm. lata, 18 oblique alta,

Has. In montibus ‘ Tinnevelly Ghats’ dictis Indize meridionalis, ad

latus orientale provinciz Travancore (4H. Beddome).

Shell narrowly umbilicate, convexly depressed, closely decussated with

fine spiral striz and lines of growth, smoother beneath, yellowish brown

above, paler below, surrounded by a narrow pale line just above the peri-

phery and a dark line below. Spire convex, apex obtuse; suture at first

flat, becoming impressed towards the mouth. Whorls 5, the first nearly

flat; the last convex above, becoming more so towards the aperture, where

it is rather broader and rises a little ; below, the shell is convex, but flatten-

ed near the mouth, and the greater breadth of the last whorl near the

aperture is more conspicuous than above. Aperture oblique, much wider

than high, brownish kivid, with a whitish enamel within, the pale peripheral

band being conspicuous ; peristome slightly sinuate, the upper and lower

margins nearly parallel, the former slightly inflexed, the latter oblique,

straight, white, and somewhat thicker than the other margins. Major

diameter 2 inches, minor 1°55, axis 0°85; breadth of aperture 1:1, height:

(measured obliquely) 0°72.

This shell somewhat resembles H. basilessa and H. beddomet, but

differs from both in the peculiar form of the aperture and the great flatten-

ing of the last whorl beneath. The fine, decussated, almost granulate

sculpture of the present species, and the less rapid increase of the last

whorls would serve to distinguish it from either of the forms named, even

if the peculiar shape of the aperture proved to be an individual peculiari-

ty—not a very probable supposition, as there is a faint approach to the

same change of form in the last whorl in H. basilessa..

But a single specimen has been procured by Col. H. Beddome, and

entrusted to me for description. ‘This shell was obtained on the Tin-

nevelly Ghats, between Tinnevelly and Travancore, at a spot east of Papa-

nassam, and at an elevation of 5000 feet.

188 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

4. HEMIPLECTA ENISA, sp. nov., Plate III, Fig. 2, 2a.

Testa anguste umbilicata, depressa, subcarinata, fulvo-castanea, subtus

pallidior ; fascid exigué peripherali albidd circumdata, confertim striis

incrementt lineisque minutis spiralibus subgranulatim decussata, circa

umbilicum levior. Spira depresso-convexa, apice obtuso, suturd primum

lineart, antice impressd. Anfr. 45, planiuscult, sensim accrescentes : ulti-

mus superne magis convexus, ad peripheriam subangulatus, antice latior,

subtus convexus, juxta aperturam paululo compressus. Apertura obliqua,

latior quam alta, lunato-oblonga, supra peripheriam subangulata, intus

pallide livida, fascia peripherali albescente conspicua ; peristomatis mar-

ginibus subparallelis, callo tenut granulato junctis, supero externoque

arcuatis, haud inflexis vel incrassatis, basali albo, recto, obtuso, longe obli-

guo, ad umbilicum subreflexo. Diam, maj. 425, min. 36, axis 20 mm. ;

apertura 23 lata, 17 oblique alta,

Has. In montibus ‘Aghastyamullay’ dictis, inter provincias Tinne-

velley atque Travancore, in India meridionali (H. Beddome).

Shell narrowly umbilicate, depressed, subcarinate, yellowish chestnut,

paler and dull yellow below around the umbilicns, surrounded by a narrow

pale band, which is only well marked near the mouth ; the sculpture is fine

and subgranulate, formed by decussating striae of growth and fine spiral

lines, the latter disappearing below near the umbilicus. Spire depressedly

convex, apex obtuse ; suture linear, and not impressed, except in the ante-

rior half of the last whorl. Whorls 4, all except the last flat, gradually

increasing ; the Jast whorl more convex above, especially towards the mouth,

where it is slightly broader, subangulate at the periphery, convex below,

but a little compressed close to the mouth. Aperture oblique, broader than

high, lunately semioval, subangulate at the upper portion of the outer edge,

pale livid within, with the narrow whitish band along the blunt keel very

conspicuous. The peristome is not thickened, except very slightly along

the basal margin, which is white, oblique, and straight for a considerable

distance, being very slightly reflected at the umbilicus; the other margins

are regularly convex, the upper and lower margins being subparallel ; the

callus connecting the free margins of the aperture is thin, but granular.

Major diameter 1:72 inches, minor 1°4, axis 0°8 ; aperture 0°95 inch broad,

0°68 high (measured obliquely).

Col. Beddome has sent to me two specimens of this shell, one adult,

the other not quite fully grown. The species is near H. tinostoma, but is

considerably smaller, and the peculiar flattening and compression of the

last whorl, near the mouth, is far less, the aperture being, in consequence,

not nearly so broad in proportion to the height. Another allied form, also

1880. ] W. T. Blanford— Contributions to Indian Malacology. 189

from Travancore, is H. basilessa ; but this is a thicker shell, with broader

whorls and rather a thick lip to the aperture ; the sculpture, too, is differ-

ent. None of the remaining species of MHemiplecta occurring in the Mala-

bar province have the mouth compressed.

5. XuEsTINa* aLBaTa, sp. nov., Pl. III, Fig. 3, 3a., 3d.

Testa angustissime atque subobtecte wmbilicata, depresso-globosa, solt-

diuscula, rugoso-striata, lineis impressis distantibus spiralibus superne

circumdata, albida, eburnea. Spira depresso-conica, apice obtuso, suturd

impressd. Anfr. 53, convexiuscult, sensim accrescentes, primi translucen-

tes, sublevigati ; ultimus primum, nec antice, ad peripheriam subangulatus,

aperturam versus latior, via descendens, subtus subinflatus. Apertura obli-

qua, late lunaris ; peristomate superne simplict, extus subtusque subreflexo,

juataumbilicum reflexo atque subincrassato, margine basalt arcuato. Diam.

maj. 29, min. 235, axis 175 mm. ; apert. intus 15 lata, 14 oblique alta.

Has. Ad Papanassam, in montibus ad latus occidentale provincie

Tinnevelly, Indiz meridionalis (HI. Beddome).

Shell very narrowly and subobtectly umbilicate, depressedly globose,

subangulate at the periphery, rather solid, ivory-white, the surface wrinkled,

forming a coarse oblique striation across the whorls, with fine spiral distant

impressed lines on the upper surface only of the two last whorls. Spire de-

pressedly conical, apex obtuse, suture impressed. Whorls 5, slightly convex,

regularly increasing, the first almost smooth and translucent; the last

whorl at first subangulate at the periphery, the angulation disappearing

some distance behind the mouth, the lower portion inflated near the aper-

ture, which is oblique and broadly lunate. Peristome simple above, subre-

flected on the outer and basal margins, rather thicker and turned back near |

the umbilicus, which it partly covers; the basal margin is curved forwards.

Major diameter 1-5 inch, minor 0:95 axis 0°7; breadth of aperture inside

0:6, height (measured obliquely) 0°56.

This form is allied to X. maderaspatana (Helix maderaspatana, auct.),

but it is thicker, much more coarsely sculptured, and white in colour. The

peristome too is slightly reflected. There is some resemblance also to X.

belangert in form, but the mouth is somewhat differently shaped, and the

sculpture of YX. albata is coarser. X. belangeri appears to be a near ally

of X. tranquebarica, semirugata, and bombayana, forms differing in shape,

but so variable and so closely allied that it is very doubtful whether they

really merit distinction. All of these forms have a horny shell differing

from the ivory-white substance of the species now described.

“ Pfeiffer, J. B. Jahrbuch d, Mal. Ges. v, p. 257.

190 W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Maulacology. [No. 4,

Buta single specimen has been sent by Col. Beddome. I think I have

seen the same, or a very similar form, from either the Pulneys or some

other range of Southern India; but I cannot find specimens in my collec-

tion.

6. Euprecta vinvsa. Plate II, Fig. 5.

Helix vidua, W. Bl., MSS.; Hanley, Conchologia Indica, pl. exxx. figs. 2, 3.

Nanina climacterica, Bens., var. vidua, Nevill, Hand-list Mollusca, Indian Museum,

Calcutta, pt. i. p. 30.

Testa imperforata, conoideo-depressa, superne oblique confertim atque

arcuatim filiformi-costulata, subtus loevigata, polita, radiatim striatula,

superne pallide cornea, subtus pallidior. Spira depresso-conica, lateribus

subrectis, apice acutiusculo, suturd impressd. <Anfr. 8, convext, arcti, lente

accrescentes ; ultimus superne ad peripheriam angulatus, antice vix descen-

dens, subtus convexus. Apertura obliqua, lunaris, latior quam alta. Peris-

toma obtusum, leviter sinuatum, intus via albo-labiatum, margine basalt

arcuato, columellari vie reflexo. Diam. maj. 17, min. 15%, axis 93, mm.

Has. In montibus Garo Khasi et Naga dictis, vallem Assamensem

meridiem versus contingens (Masters, Godwin- Austen).

Varietas minor, depresso-turbinata, spirad conicd. Diam. maj. 14,

min. 124, axis 9 mm. (PIL. II, Fig. 2.)

Has. Cum precedente.

Shell imperforate, conoidly depressed, above ornamented with oblique,

close, and arcuate fine hair-like costulation, smooth and marked with radia-

ting strizw below; pale horny, paler beneath. Spire depressedly conical, the

sides nearly straight, apex rather sharp, suture impressed. Whorls 8, convex,

narrow, slowly increasing in size, the last angulate above at the periphery,

scarcely descending towards the mouth, convex below. Aperture oblique,

lunate, broader than high. Peristome not sharp, slightly wavy, witha very

slight white thickening inside, the basal margin curved forward, the colu-

mellar scarcely reflected. Major diameter 0°67, minor 0°62, axis 0°38 inch.

The above is the typical form; but there is a smaller variety, depress-

edly turbinate in shape, with the spire conical, measuring 0°55 inch in its

major diameter and 0°36 in height. This form passes by insensible grada-

tions into the type.

The shell represented in the ‘ Conchologia Indica’ is intermediate

between the two varieties here described and figured; the apex in the

‘ Conchologia’ figure is more prominent and blunt than in the specimens

now before me. These were procured from the Naga hills, south of Gola

Ghat, Assam, by Mr. Masters in 1859; other specimens were subsequently

1880. ] W. T. Blanford—COontributions to Indian Malacalogy. 191

found on the Garo, Khasi, and Naga hills by Colonel Godwin-Austen. The

shells from the Khasi hills have the filiform costulation on the upper sur-

face finer and less regular than those from the Assam side of the Naga

hills. In Khasi shells 2, 3, or 4 ribs occur at nearly regular intervals, and

then a rib appears to be omitted; this is not the case with those from up-

per Assam.

The species scarcely differs from #. crnatissima, found on the other

side of the Brahmaputra valley at the base of the Sikkim hills, except in

being imperforate. 2. climacterica, of which Mr. Nevill considers the

present shell a variety, is always sharply keeled at the periphery. The two

forms may pass into each other, but I have never seen any intermediate

links ; and as they differ from each other much more than H. vidua does

from ZH. ornatissima, or EH. climacterica from EH. austeni, it is better to

have distinctive names for them.

I am indebted to Col. Godwin-Austen for the following note on the

animal of H. vidua observed at Cherra Poonjee, Khasi hills.

“ Animal of a neutral grey tint about the neck and eye-tentacles, which

ave rather long and fine, the oral tentacles are also of a dark tinge. Extre-

mity of foot truncated, with mucous gland. Body long and thin. No

tongue-like processes to the mantle observed.”

The genus Huplecta was proposed by Semper* for two Ceylonese shells

Felix subopaca and LH. layardi. The latter of these is referred by both

Theobaldy and Nevill£ to Sc¢w/a, a position which is scarcely tenable, for

the animal of AH. layardi is destitute of shell-lobes, whilst these are present

in Situla§ ; and the odontophores are very different, neither the shape nor

number of the teeth being similar. At the same time, I am rather doubt-

ful whether H. layardi should not be placed in a separate section from A.

subopaca on account of differences both in the shell and odontophore. The

last-named species, however, is, I think, to be accepted as type. It is great-.

ly to be regretted that Semper should have adopted so loose and uncertain

a proceeding as to name two distinet forms as types of one genus. In such

a case, the only plan is to take the first-named—in this case, H, subopaca—

as the type of Huplecta.

The genus is thus defined by its author in German:—On the mantle

edge only neck-lobes are present, the left is divided into two separate lap-

pets (as in many Helices). Above the caudal gland there isa short horn.

The shell entirely exterior, ribbed or striated above, smooth below. On the

* Reisen im Archipel der Philippinen, 2te theil, Wis. Res. vol. iii, p. 14.

+ Cat. p. 20.

{ Hand-list, p. 34,

§ Sce, for description of the animal and odontophore of Situla (or Conulema, which

is the same), Stoliczka, J. A. S, B., 1871, vol. xl, pt. 2, p. 286.

192 W. T. Blanford— Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

genitalorgans a cylindrical female supplementary gland (Anhangsdriise) with

a cartilaginous point (analogous to the dart?) ; on the vas deferens (Samen-

leiter) a closed appendage, in which calcareous concretions are formed, and a

Slagellum.

The odontophore is not noticed in the generic description. In Z. swb-

opaca, the number of teeth in each cross-row is about 100, central tooth

tricuspid, the neighbouring laterals 12 in number distinctly bicuspid, from

the 18th to the 24th almost without a trace of the little lateral point, which,

however, reappears in the outer laterals. Hwplecta belongs to Semper’s

subdivision Ceratophora with a horn-like lobe above the caudal gland, and

the sole of the foot divided into a central and two lateral regions as in

Macrochlamys (and Stenopus).

In the characters of both shell and animal, so far as we know the

latter, there is a remarkable resemblance between ZH. swbhopaca and EF.

vidua. The connection between L. vidua and LE. climacterica has already

been noticed, and in the latter the odontophore (of which Col. Godwin-

Austen has kindly furnished me with notes and drawings) agrees very

closely with that of £. subopaca. The following is a description of the

teeth in L. climacterica :—

“ Median tooth tricuspid, the central point very long, the lateral cusps

very small. The first 14 laterals are long and broad with a single short

small cusp on the lower outer margin, the 25 outermost are long narrow,

curvilinear, bicuspid, the outer point the shorter, being less than half as

long as the inner. Jaw slightly curved, the front edge a little convex.”

The number of teeth in a row is apparently 79. A sketch shews that

the form of both central tooth and laterals is very similar to that in 2.

subopaca.

Euplecta is by Semper classed apart from Rotula. The animal of the

type of this latter genus (ZH. detecta, from Bourbon) is still unknown. Sem-

per has described the anatomy of two very different species, and there is no

proof that they are congeneric. It is also extremely doubtful whether, of

the forms referred to Rotula by Stoliczka,* any belong really to the section ;

and I am disposed to believe that Nevill was right in removing them in

his ‘Hand-list,’ where, however,} he simply classes them in MVanina without

specifying any subgeneric group. Judging, itis true, chiefly from the shells,

I should class the following Indian and Burmese species in Huplecta :—

Helix ponsa,t Benson ; from Burma.

« J. A.S.B., 1871, xl, pt. 2, p. 231; 1873, xlii, pt. 2, p. 14.

t lc. pp. 28, 29, 30, &e.

{ I find this short note on specimens of this species obtained in upper Burma in

1861:—Animal of the vitrinoides type, but the projecting lobe (7. e., that above the

caudal gland) is small,

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 193

Nanina sikrigallensis, Nevill; Bengal, Behar (Hand-list, p. 28).

Helix climacterica, Benson ; Assam hills, Burma.

Euplecta vidua, Assam hills.

Nanina austeni, W. Bl.; Garo hills, Assam.

NV. falcata, W. Bl.; Garo hills, Assam.

Helix ornatissima, Benson; base of Himalayas, Sikkim and Nipal.

Helix serrula also probably belongs to the same genus. About H.

anceps and its near ally, H. arata, 1 am more doubtful; for there are shell-

lobes to the mantle in the former, and the teeth of the odontophore differ

in several particulars.*

As regards H. indica (Pfr. nec Benson), H. shiplayi, and H. acuducta,

I cannot now find the notes I made many years since on the animals, but

I believe they belong to the forms allied to Ariophanta, in which the foot

is broad with the sole undivided, and there is no projecting lobe above the

caudal gland. The shells present much resemblance to the type of Albers’

section Thalassia. H. tugurium and H. camura from Sikkim are still more

like H. subrugata from Australia, the type of Lhalassia.

7, SESARA? INGRAMI,

Helix ingrami, Blanford, Hanley, Conchologia Indica, pl. lx. figs. 9, 10.

Rotula diplodon, Bs., partim, Theobald, Cat. Land & Freshwater Shells Brit. Ind.

p. 21.

Nanina (Sesara ?) diplodon, Bs., partim, Nevill, Handlist Moll. Ind. Mus. pt. i. p. 58.

Testa imperforata, trochiformis, tenuis, diaphana, pallide cornea, minu-

tissime atque confertissime granulatim decussato-striata. Spira subconica,

lateribus eonvexiusculi, apice obtuso, suturd parum impressa, lined filiforme

marginatd. <Anfr. 6, regulariter accrescentes, vie convexiuscull, superiores

levigati; ultimus acute carinatus, non descendens, et supra et infra

carinam compressus, basi extus decussato-striatus, atque, presertim antice,

aperturam versus, planulatus, intus convexiusculus atque levigatus, striis

medium versus evanescentibus, regione umbilicali impressd. Apertura dia-

gonalis, incurvo-triangularis, intus tridentatus, dentibus lamelliformibus

omnibus basalibus, duobus in peristomate, uno majori falcato intrante, extus

convexo, in medio margine basali, alio minort obliquo subcolumellari, tertio

profundo, incurvo, transversim post majorem posito. Peristoma album,

modice incrassatum, margine basali sinistrorsum arcuato, dextrorsum sub-

angulatim sinwato, columellari vie reflexo. Diam. maj. 63, min. via 6,

alt. Ay.

Has. In montibus ‘Yoma’ dictis, Pegu ab Arakan secernentibus,

haud procul a vico Tongoop.

* Stoliczka, J. A. S. B., 1871, xl, pt. 2, pp. 234, 236.

194 W.T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology.. [No. 4,

Shell imperforate, trochiform, thin, translucent, pale horny, very

minutely and closely striated both obliquely and spirally, so as to be cover-

ed, except on the upper whorls, with fine almost granular decussated sculp-

ture. Spire nearly conical, with the sides slightly convex ; apex obtuse ;

suture very little impressed, and with a filiform line above, the continua-

tion of the keel on the last whorl. Whorls 64, increasing regularly, nearly

flat, only a little convex, the uppermost quite smooth, the sculpture grow-

ing stronger on the lower whorls; the last whorl sharply keeled, not

descending, compressed both above and below the keel, with the outer por-

tion of the base flat, especially towards the mouth, and decussated, the inner

portion moderately convex and smooth, the sculpture gradually disappearing

towards the middle; umbilical region impressed. Aperture diagonal, trian-

gular with the sides curved, with three lamelliform teeth inside, all palatal,

and in the basal margin: the largest is in the middle of the margin, and

is much curved, with its convex side outwards ; it begins by forming a kind

of thickening to the lip, and then curves away into the interior of the

whorl ; the second is smaller, oblique, and situated near to the columellar

margin ; the third is at some distance within the aperture, it is curved, and

placed transversely behind the first. Peristome white, somewhat thickened,

the basal margin curved forwards near the umbilical region, and angulately

curved back near the periphery of the shell; columellar margin scarcely

reflected. Major diameter 0:25, minor 0°23, height 0°18 inch.

In the figure in the ‘ Conchologia Indica,’ the internal tooth is not

shown, although all the teeth are clearly seen through the semi-transparent

base of the shell.

The caudal pore in the animal is very small, and furnished with a lobe

in front of it, but the tail is not truncated abruptly as in Macrochlamys.

This is the only note I can find on the soft parts.

This shell was named in MS. in the year 1861, and a specimen trans-

mitted to Mr. Benson, who, however, doubted whether it could be distin-

euished from the Khasi-hill form described by himas Helzx diplodon. The

typical specimen of the latter must, I think, have been in poor condition, for

it was described as “ laevigata, parum striatula’, whereas fresh specimens

exhibit nearly the same fine subgranulate decussating striation as S. ? éngra-

mt, and Mr. Benson very probably, and very justly, thought that fresh

specimens might agree with the Arakan shell in other characters. Subse-

quently, fresh specimens of S. ? diplodon were obtained from the original

locality by Colonel Godwin-Austen; and I find that they differ from

S.? ingramt not only in being minutely perforate, a character to which by

itself I should attach little or no importance, but also in having but two

teeth in the aperture instead of three, the internal transverse tooth of

S. 7 ingrami being deficient in 8.? diplodon, whilst the other teeth are

Contributions to Indian Matacology. 195

1880. | W. T. Blanford

differently shaped. The sculpture is somewhat finer in S. ? diplodon, and

the basal margin of the aperture is subangularly concave, without the curv-

ing forwards due to the transverse portion of the larger tooth in 8. cngrami.

The last character is well shown in the ‘ Conchologia’ figure.

8. MacrocuLaMys ? PLATYCHLAMYS, sp. nov., Plate 11, Fig. 9.

Testa perforata, conoideo-depressa, pertenuts, nitida, levigata, sub lente

obsolete striatula, fulvo-cornea. Spira parum elevata, apice obtuso, suturd

levi aliquando marginata. <Anfr. 5, vie convexiusculi, regulariter accres-

centes ; ultimus non descendens, peripherid rotundatus, subtus convexus.

Apertura obliqua, lunaris, latior quam alta. Peristoma tenue, simplex,

leviter sinuatum, marginibus remotis, callo tenwissimo junctis, columellart

brevissime verticali, peranguste reflexo. Diam. maj. 11, min. 94, axis 54.

Animal pallio maximo indutum, duos lobos latos linguiformes emitten-

te, qui sprram teste omnino circumtegunt.

Has. Ad Bombay.

Shell perforate, conoidly depressed, very thin, smooth, and _ polished,

obsoletely striated beneath the lens, fulvous horny in colour. Spire sub-

conical, but little raised, apex obtuse ; suture smooth, scarcely impressed,

sometimes marginate. Whorls 5, very slighly convex, regularly increasing

in size, the last not descending, rounded at the periphery, convex below.

Aperture oblique, lunate, broader than high. Peristome thin, simple, slight-

ly curved when viewed from the side; margins distant and united by a

thin callus ; the columellar border vertical for a very short distance, slight-

ly reflexed. Major diameter 0°44, minor 0°38, axis 0°22 inch.

This shell belongs to the group of thin, more or less depressed forms

allied to the type usually known as I. vitrinoides (IL. indicus, Benson)..

It appears, so far as I can see, to be undescribed, as is also, I believe, an

allied form of darker colour, and with a subangulate periphery, occurring

at Trichinopoly and elsewhere in the neighbourhood of the Coromandel

coast south of Madras.

The animal of JL. platychlamys is chiefly distinguished by the peculiar-

ly broad shell-lobes, which, instead of being narrow and attenuate towards

the ends, as in most allied species, are broad and flat, so as sometimes to

cover the whole spire, and usually to conceal all except a narrow band.

These lobes somewhat resemble those in the genus Helicarion. ‘The lobe

above the caudal gland is very much smaller than it usually is in Mwero-

chlamys and rounded, not horn-shaped.

This shell is common in the island of Bombay and neighbouring low-

lands on the west coast of India, and I have seen a form from the hills of

196 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

the Wynaad in Southern India that appears undistinguishable. I have also

several specimens of a Macrochlamys from the ancient town of Cham panir,

near Broach, that may very possibly be a variety of MZ platychlamys. The

specimens are larger than the Bombay types, an adult measuring 16 mm.

by 14 in its two diameters, and some individuals attain even greater dimen-

sions ; the mouth too is rather more convex beneath, but otherwise the two

forms agree very closely.

The figure gives the idea of a rather thick shell, and the form of the

mouth is incorrect, being too convex below and, consequently, too high in

comparison with the breadth.

9. Macrocutamys tTenvrcuna. Pl. II, Fig. 8.

Macrochlamys tenwicula, H. Ad., P. Z. S. 1868, p. 14, pl. iv, fig. 9.

Helix tenuicula, Pfr, Mon. Hel. vii. p. 94.—Hanley, Conch. Ind. pl. Ixxxix,

figs. 7, 10.

Macrochlamys effulgens, W. Bl., MSS.—Theobald, Cat. Land and Freshwater Shells

of British India, p. 18.

Nanina (Macrochlamys) effulgens, Nevill, Hand-list Mollusca, Indian Museum, Cal-

cutta, part i. p. 26.

Nanina (Microcystis 2) tenuicula, Nevill, ib. p. 36.

Testa aperte perforata, turbinata, tenuis, flavo- vel fulvo-cornea, levi-

gata, nitida, diaphana, oblique striatula, sub lente lineis impressis confertis

minutis in anfractibus superioribus subtilissime decussata. Spira subconi-

ea, lateribus convexiusculis, apice obtuso, suturd leviter impressd. Anfr.

53-6, convexiusculi, regulariter crescentes, ultimus non descendens, ad

peripheriam obsolete subangulatus, angulo omnino antice evanescente, sed in

testis gunioribus validiore, subtus conveaus, radiatim striatulus. Apertura

obliqua, ovato-lunaris, latior quam alta. Peristoma tenue, rectum, margi-

nibus subconniventibus, columellari subverticali, breviter reflexo. Diam.

mia. 9, min. 84, axis 6 mm.

Has. Ad Bombay et in terris vicinis, neenon in montibus ‘ Western

Ghats’ seu ‘Syhadri’ dictis.

Shell openly perforate, turbinate, thin, yellow or fulvous horny, smooth,

polished, transparent, obliquely striated, and under the lens finely decussat-

ed on the upper whorls with minute, close, impressed spiral lines. Spire

subconical, the sides a little convex, apex obtuse, suture slightly impressed.

Whorls 53-6, rather convex, regularly increasing, the last not descending,

obsoletely subangulate at the periphery (in immature shells distinctly angu-

late), the angle disappearing near the mouth, convex below and radiately

striated. Aperture oblique, ovately lunate, broader than high. Peristome

thin, straight, the margins approaching each other slightly, columellar

1880. ] W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Malacology. 197

margin subvertical, reflected for a short distance. Major diameter 0°36,

minor 0°83, axis 0:24 inch. The foot of the animal is very long and narrow,

and there are the usual pointed shell-lobes to the mantle. The colour of

the body is almost black.

The shell described by the late Mr. H. Adams as Macrochlamys tenui-

cula appears to me almost certainly to be the immature form of a species

common in Bombay. ‘This form I have had for many years; and I former-

ly distributed specimens under the MSS. name of Helix effulgens, a name

which has unfortunately got into print. The adult shell has never been

described ; but the specimen figured in the ‘ Conchologia Indica’ must have

been nearly full-grown. Mr. Adams’s original types were said to be from

Sattara. It is probable they came from the Western Ghats in the Sattara

district ; but the species may extend to the damper portions of the Deccan

plateau.

The figures herewith given are very unsatisfactory; the left-hand

figure is quite inaccurate. This, however, is of less importance, as the shell

is very fairly represented in the ‘ Conchologia Indica.’

10. MacrocHLAMYS P PLICIFERA.

Nanina plicatula, W. Bl. J. A. 8. B., 1870, xxxix, pt. 2, p. 13, pl. iii, fig. 7. nec

NV. plicatula, Mart., Nachrichtsbl. mal. Gesellsch., 1869, i, p. 149.

Helix plicatula, Hanley, Conch. Ind., p. 14, pl. xxviii, fig. 1.

Macrochlamys plicatula, Theobald, Cat. Land and Freshwater Shells Brit. Ind. p. 19.

Nanina, n. sp., Nevill, Hand-list Moll. Ind, Mus. Calcutta, p. 27.

T am indebted to Mr. Nevill for calling attention to the fact that the

name I gave to this shell was pre-occupied. I propose to change the speci-

fie title to plicifera.

11. Macrocunamys? wywnnel, sp. nov., Plate III, Fig. 5, 5a.

Testa perforata, subturbinato-depressa, striatula, nitida, albido-cornea,

diaphana, fascia rufa supra peripheriam circumdata, Spira depresso-cont-

ca, apice obtuso, suturd leviter impressd, fascid rufé intus marginaté.

Anfr. 5%, lente accrescentes, ultimus peripherid rotundatus, subtus modice

convecus, aperturam versus vie descendens. Apertura late lunaris, obliqua,

diagonalis ; peristoma tenue, intus haud incrassatum, margine basali sub-

recto obtuso, columellari reflexo. Diam. maj. 19, min. 175, axis 95 mim.

(ex icone). In exemplo minore diam. maj. 135, min. 12%, axis 75 mm.

apert. 7 lata, 6 oblique alta.

Has. Ad Mari (Murree) in montibus Himalayanis occidentalibus

inferioribus haud procul a flumine Jhelum (4. LB. Wynne).

198 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. (No. 4,

Var. major, depressa, anfractibus 6, spird convexd, parum elevatd :

diam. maj. 215, min. 193, axis 10 mm., apert. 11% lata, 10 oblique alta.

Hab. Etiam ad Mari.

Shell perforate, subturbinately depressed, faintly striated, polished

white, translucent, surrounded by a narrow rufous band above the periphe-

ry. Spire depressedly conical, apex obtuse, suture slightly impressed, and

with a rufous margin inside. Whorls 53, increasing slowly and regularly,

the last rounded at the periphery, moderately convex beneath, scarcely

descending towards the mouth. Aperture broadly lunate, oblique, diagonal ;

peristome thin, not thickened inside, basal margin almost straight, columel-

lar reflected. Major diameter 0°76, minor 0°7, axis 0°37 inch (taken from

the figure). A smaller specimen measures :—major diam. 0°54, minor 0°5,

axis 0°3, breadth of aperture 0°27, height (obliquely measured) 0°23 inch.

There is a larger variety, more depressed, with the spire convex and

six whorls. it may possibly be a distinguishable form, but I think not.

A specimen measures :—major diameter 0°85, minor 0°78, axis 0°42, breadth

of aperture 0:45, height (obliquely measured) 0-4.

¥ greatly question whether this form is really a MJacrochlamys, and

cannot help suggesting the possibility of its belonging to a different sub-

generic group, or even to Zonites. However, it is associated at Mari with

a true Macrochlamys (IM. prona*) and two or three species of Helicarion ;

so it is evident that a few of these tropical types extend to this extreme

north-western portion of the Himalayan range, where, however, the majori-

ty of the mollusea consist of Bulimini of the Petraeus section.

The specimen of JZ. wynnei from which the accompanying figure was

taken has been mislaid or lost, and the description is drawn up from a

smaller individual. I have named the shell after Mr. A. B. Wynne of the

Geological Survey of India, to whom I am indebted for several mollusca

from the neighbourhood of Mari.

I have been in some doubt as to whether this might not be a form of

the shell described by Prof. v. Martens as Nanina jacquemonti (Malak. Bl.

xvi. 1869, p. 75; Pfr. Nov. Conch. iv. p. 48, pl. exviii, figs. 6-8) ; but, in

the first place, it can scarcely, I think, be the species figured by Jacque-

mont (Voyage dans I’Inde, Atlas, pl. xvi. fig. 2), and, secondly, MW. jacque-

montt is described as having ‘ peristoma obtusum, intus incrassatum, mar-

gine...basali leviter arcuato,” none of which can apply to the present species.

Pfeiffer’s figure in the ‘ Novitates’ shows a very much less oblique mouth

than is found in Macrochlamys ? wynnet. Now, I have another species

from Mari, which agrees admirably with Marten’s description in these re-

* Nevill, ‘Scientific Results of the Second Yarkand Mission,’ Mollusca, p. 17.

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 199

spects, and which resembles Jacquemont’s figure also, but it wants the red

band round the periphery shown in Pfeiffer’s figure. It is just possible

that two species are included by Martens. The true WN. gacquemonti is

probably a Bensonia.

12. Popa (PUPISOMA) EVEZARDI.

“ Pupa (Pupisoma) evezardi, Blanford,” Nevill, Hand-list Moll. Ind, Mus. Calcutta,

pt. i. p. 192.

2“ Pupa evezardi, Blanford MS.,’? Hanley, Conch. Ind. p. 41. pl. ci, figs. 5, 6.—

Theob. Cat. Land & Freshwater Shells Brit. Ind. p. 30.—Pfr. Mon. Hel. viii. p. 416.

Testa imperforata, vie subrimata, conoideo-ovata, tenuis, cornea, lineis

elevatis irregularibus filiformibus obliquis ornata. Spira subtus subcylin-

dracea, superne conoidea, lateribus convexis, apice obtuso, suturd impressd.

Anfr. 45, convent, requlariter crescentes, ultimus parum major, peripheria

atque basi rotundatus, haud antice descendens. Apertura diagonalis,

truncato-rotunda, edentula ; peristoma tenue, rectum, expansiusculum, mar-

ginibus conniventibus, columellart verticali, ad basin subtorto, adnato-reflexo,

regionem umbilicalem tegente. Long. 2%, diam. fere 2, long. ap. 1 mm.

Haz. In cortice arborum ad Khandalla inter Bombay et Poona

(G. Hvezard).

Shell imperforate, with scarcely even a trace of rimation in the umbili-

eal region, conoidly ovate, thin, horny, with raised hair-like oblique lines,

rather irregularly disposed, on all the whorls. Spire nearly cylindrical below,

conoidal above, the sides convex, apex blunt, suture impressed. Whorls 45,

convex, increasing in size regularly ; the last but little larger than the

penultimate, rounded at the periphery and below, not descending in front,

Aperture diagonal, nearly circular, but truncated above, without teeth;

peristome thin, all in one plane, slightly expanded, margins converging ;

columellar vertical above, slightly twisted below, reflected and united to

the whorl so as completely to cover the umbilicus. Length 0-11, diameter

0:08, length of aperture 0-04 inch.

If the form represented by Hanley in the ‘ Conchologia Indica’ be

precisely the same as that described above, I am inclined to question the

locality given, “Singhur,”’ or, as Mr. Theobald prefers writing it, ““Synghar,”

presumably Sinhgarh, near Poona. ‘The original specimens were found by

Colonel Evezard at Karkalla, near Khandalla, at the head of the Bor-ghat ;

and I suspect that Hanley’s figure was taken from one of them, ‘There

are two or three allied forms found in the Syhadri range and the Nilgiris,

forms that do not appear hitherto to have been described.

The subgenus Pupisoma was proposed by Stoliczka* for the Moulmein

® J. A. 8. B., 1873, vol. xlii. pt. 2, p. 32.

200 W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Malucology. — [No. 4,

P. lignicola,* a form very closely resembling P. evezardi, but rather

shorter and less ovate. It is by no means improbable that intermediate

varieties may be found; indeed, so much do I doubt whether the two are

really worthy of distinction that I should not have described the present

species if the name had not already crept into print.

Mr. Nevill, in his Hand-list J. ¢., has referred the Helix orcula of

Benson to the same section of Pupaas P lignicola ; and in this he is, I

think, unquestionably right.

13. SUcCINEA COLLINA.

*¢§. collina, Blanford, MS.,” Hanley, Conch. Ind. p. 80, pl. Ixviii. figs. 8, 9, 10;

Theobald, Cat. Land and Freshwater Shells Brit. Ind. p. 81; Pifr., Mon. Hel. viii.

p. 658; Nevill, Hand-list Moll. Ind. Mus. pt. i. p. 212.

Testa conico-ovata, tenuiuscula, parum nitida, distincte atque flexuose

striata, viridescenti-cornea. Spira sealaris, apice acutiuscula, suturd valde

impressd. <Anfr. vix 3, perconvexi, ultimus $ longitudinis subequans.

Apertura ovata, obliqua; peristoma tenue, margine dextro mediocriter

arcuato ; columella arcuata, recedens, callosa. Long. 17, diam. 10, alt.

(v. diam. min.) 6 mm., apertura 138 mm. longa, vix 9 lata.

Has. Saxis rupibusque adherens prope Mahabaleshwar ad summos

montes ‘Syhadri’ seu ‘ Western Ghats’ dictos Indiz occidentalis.

Var. aurantiaca v, rufo-cornea; habitat in colle ‘Torna’ dicto, inter

Mahabaleshwar atque urbem Poona.

Shell conically ovate, rather thin, but little polished, distinctly and

flexuously striated, greenish horny in colour. Spire step-like, apex rather

pointed, suture much impressed. Whorls scarcely 3, very convex, the last

about ¢ of the length. Aperture oval, oblique; peristome thin, the right

margin moderately curved forwards; the columella arcuate, receding, and

covered with a thin callus. Length 0°76, diameter 0-4, height (when laid

mouth downwards) 0°24 inch ; length of aperture 0:52, breadth 0°36 inch.

The largest shell I possess measures 20 mm. in length (0°8 inch). A

rufous variety occurs at Torna Hill, near Sinhgarh, west of Poona.

This is a rock-inhabiting species, found on cliffs and large blocks

of basalt at Mahabaleshwar and Torna, and is allied to S. girnarica, a

larger and thicker form, rather differently shaped, found by Mr. Theobald

* J. A.S.:B., 1871, vol. xl. pt. 2, p: 171.

t It is rather difficult to understand why Swccinea should be placed amongst fresh-

water shells in the ‘ Conchologia Indica.’ Most of the Indian forms are found either

on trees (often on palms) or on rocks, and generally at a distance from water. Lithotis

and Camnptonyx are also, I think, incorrectly classed as freshwater shells, both being

found on basaltic cliffs,

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 201

on the basaltic rocks of Girnar Hill, in Kattywar. The animal of S. colina

bears a considerable external resemblance to that of the subgenus Lithotis,

which has a similar habitat.

The figures in the ‘ Conchologia Indica’ give a fair idea of the species,

but the spire in fig. 8 is rather too large.

14. SrrREPTaAXxIs COMPRESSUS, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 13.

“ 8. compressus, W1. B1.,” Theobald, Cat. Land and Freshwater Shells Brit. Ind.

p. 33.

Testa subaperte sed non pervie unbilicata, valde depresso-ovata, cerco-

albida, diaphana, nitida, vix striatula. Spira vie convexa, fere plana,

suturd parum impressd. Anfr. 43, penultimus postice compressus, obtuse

sed prominenter carinatus ; ultimus valde eccentricus, antrorsum devians,

subtus planulatus politusque, circa umbilicum, presertim antice, angulato-

coarclatus, pone aperturam fossiculis impressis constrictus. Apertura dia-

gonalis, semiovalis, lamind und validé subbifidd intrante parietali, dente

wno duplict columellart, tribus palatalibus in margine dextro, coarctata,

Peristoma incrassatum, undique sublate expansum, postice juxta angulum

mediocriter sinuatum, marginibus callo lamellifero junctis. Diam. maj. 64,

min. 8%, alt vie 3; ap. long. 25, lat. 2 mm.

Has. In montibus ‘Sivagiri’ dictis (Tinnevelly) Indiz meridionalig

(H. Beddome).

Varietas anfractibus quingue, superne et in umbilico confertim fili-

Sormi-striata, lamind parietali duplict, in montibus habitat prope urbem

Oumbum. Exempli majoris diam. maz. 63, minoris 54, diam. min. 4 et 34,

alt. 22 et 2%.

Shell rather openly but not perviously umbilicated, depressed, oval,

yellowish white, translucent, glossy, scarcely striated. Spire almost flat,

suture but little impressed. Whorls 43, the penultimate compressed and

prominently but bluntly keeled posteriorly ; the last very eccentric, flat-

tened and smooth below, and angulately compressed around the umbilicus,

and especially near the mouth, where there are indentations corresponding

to the teeth inside. Aperture diagonal, semioval, and furnished with five

teeth, one strong re-entering bifid plait on the parietal callus uniting the

margins of the peristome, one large double tooth on the columellar side,

three palatal teeth on the right side. Peristome thickened and expanded,

curved back near the posterior angle. Major diam, 0:25, minor 0°15,

height 0:11 inch.

A variety from the Cumbum hills has distinct but very fine close fili-

form raised lines on the upper surface and inside the umbilicus, and the

202 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

parietal lamina is double. Some specimens are rather smaller than the

type. It is doubtful whether these differences justify a separate name.

15. . STREPTAXIS PERSONATUS, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 10.

“8. personatus, WI, Bl.,’”’ Theobald, Cat. Land and Freshwater Shells Brit. Ind.

p- 33.

Testa wmbilicata, depressa, spheroideo-ovata, levigata, nitidula, diap-

hana, cereo-albida. Spira depressa, apice vix exserto, suturd impressd. Anfr.

5, convexi, penultimus postice rotundatus, vix ultra ultimum (a basi spec-

tatus) projiciens ; ullimus eccentricus, antrorsum devians, subtus convexus,

circum umbilicum compressus, post aperturam fossiculis impressis constric-

tus. Apertura obliqua, fere semiovalis, lamina und valida flexuosa intrante

parietali, dentibusque 5, tribus in margine columellari, duobus in dextro,

harum uno inferiore majore lamine parietali opposite, alio minore superiore,

coarctata. Peristoma incrassatum continuum, fere solutum, album, undique

late expansum, postice juxta angulum subprofunde retrosinuatum, margine

parietali valido, coneavo. Diam. maj. 5, min. 3%, alt, 25.

Has. In montibus haud procul ab urbe Cumbum (Madura) Indie

meridionalis (H. Beddome).

N. B. In nonnullis exemplis peristoma quadri-vel tridentatwm nee

quinguedentatum est, dente uno columellari et aliquando uno palatali

carens.

Shell umbilicated, depressed, spheroidally ovate, smooth, moderately

polished, translucent, pale yellowish white. Spire depressed, the apex

scarcely exserted, suture impressed. Whorls 5, convex, the penultimate

rounded behind, scarcely projecting beyond the last when seen from below ;

the last eccentric, convex below, compressed around the umbilicus, and

constricted by pits corresponding to the teeth inside, just behind the

mouth. Aperture oblique, irregularly semioval, and furnished with one

strong re-entering parietal lamina, curved inside, and with five teeth, three

on the columellar margin, two on the right ; of the latter the lower is larger

and opposite to the parietal lamina, the smaller is above, nearer to the

angle. Peristome thickened, continuous, almost free (the thick callus which

unites the columellar and dextral margins projecting from the last whorl,

in a hollow curve, the concavity corresponding to the parietal lamina) ; the

outer margins expanded, the right margin deeply recurved close to the

posterior angle. Major diameter 0:2, minor 0:15, height 0-1 inch.

In other specimens, rather worn, and with the peristome somewhat

less developed, the teeth are rather smaller, the upper columellar tooth is

wanting, and in one case the upper tooth on the right margin is also de-

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Malacology. 203

ficient. All, however, are characterized by the great development of the

parietal callus.

16. SPREPTAXIS CONCINNUS, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 11.

Testa umbilicata, depressa, globoso-ovata, striatula, nitidula, diaphana,

ecreo-albida. Spira depresso-conica, parum exserta, apice obtusiusculo,

suturd impress. Anfr. 5, convexi, penultimus postice rotundatus, haud

ultra ultimum (a basi spectatus) projiciens ; ultimus inflatus, multo major,

eccentricus, antrorsum devians, subtus convexus, levigatus, politus, circum

umbilicum praesertim antice compressus, post aperturam fossiculis impres-

sis constrictus. Apertura obliqua, fere semiovalis, lamellis duobus intran-

tibus parietalibus, sinistra longiore, intus tortd, dentibusque 5, duobus

columellaribus, superiore minore juxta wumbilicum, inferiore magno duplict,

uno basali lamelliformi transverso, duobusque in margine dextro, inferiore

subbifido, superiore minore, coarctata. Peristoma album expansum, ad

angulum postice viv sinuatum, marginibus callo duas lamellas ferente junc-

tis. Diam. maj. 54, min. 4, alt. 8% mm.

Has. In montibus ‘ Balarangam’ dictis (Mysore) Indie meridionalis

(H. Beddome).

Shell umbilicated, depressed, globosely ovate, rather indistinctly striat-

ed, shining, translucent, pale yellowish white. Spire very low, scarcely

exserted, apex blunt, suture impressed. Whorls 5, convex, the penultimate

rounded behind, and not projecting, when viewed from below, beyond the

lower whorl ; the last whorl much larger than the others, eccentric, convex

below, smooth and polished, compressed around the umbilicus, especially

near the mouth, and constricted by indentations, corresponding to the teeth

inside, just behind the lip. Aperture oblique, nearly semioval, and furnish-

ed with two plaits on the parietal side, that to the left (nearest to the

umbilicus) longer than the other and bent inside ; there are five teeth in

the peristome, one on the columellar margin near the umbilicus, a second

large and double nearer the base, one lamellar and transverse at the base,

two inside the right margin, the lower being larger than the other and

almost bifid inside. Peristome white, slightly expanded, scarcely sinuate

near the angle, margins joined by a callus bearing the two parietal plaits.

Major diameter 0°23, minor 0:2, height 0°13 inch.

This is the only known species from Southern India, so far as I am

aware, in which, when the shell is viewed from below in the direction of the

axis, the penultimate whorl does not project at all beyond the body-whorl.

The transverse lamellar tooth at the base of the aperture is also peculiar.

204 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Mulacology. [No. 4,

17. SrREPTAXIS PRONUS, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 12.

Testa wmbilicata, depresso-ovata, superne confertim atque arcuatim

costulato-striata, nitidula, diaphana, cerco-allida. Spira depresso-conica,

parum exscrta, apice obtuso, suturd parum impressd. Anfr. 54, superiores

convexiusculi, penultimus postice rotundatus, longe ultra ultimum (a basi

spectatus) projiciens ; ultimus valde eccentricus, antrorsum devians, subtus

subplanulatus, levigatus, in umbilico striis filiformibus flexuosis ornatus,

circum umbilicum compressus atque aperturam versus angulatus, juata

peristoma scrobiculis constrictus. Apertura obliqua, truncato-ovalis, lamel-

lé validé parietali intrante flexuosa, antice subbifida, dentibusque quatuor,

uno columellari, alio basali, duobus in margine dextro, coarctata. Peris-

toma incrassatum, subcontinuum, album, expansum, marginibus callo crasso

lamellifero junctis, dextro prope angulum sinuatum. Diam. maj. 6%, min.

4, alt. 3 mm.

Has. In montibus haud procul ab urbe Tinnevelly Indie meridio-

nalis (H. Beddome).

Shell umbilicated, depressedly ovate, closely and arcuately ornamented

above with subcostulate striation, polished, translucent, pale yellowish

white. Spire low, conical, but little exserted, apex obtuse, suture but little

impressed. Whorls 5}, the upper slightly convex, the penultimate rounded

behind and projecting considerably beyond the lower whorl when viewed

from below ; last whorl very eccentric, somewhat flattened beneath, smooth,

except within the umbilicus, where there are fine, irregularly flexuous

filiform raised lines on the surface, compressed around the umbilicus and

angulate near the aperture, where there are deep indentations correspond-

ing to the teeth inside. Aperture oblique, truncately oval, furnished with

a strong re-entering parietal plait, curved within and subbifid in front, and

with four teeth—one columellar, one basal, and two (of which the upper

is small) inside the right margin. Peristome thickened, subcontinuous,

white, expanded, the margins joined by a thick callus projecting from the

body-whorl and bearing the parietal lamella, Major diameter 0:26, minor

0:16, height 0°12 inch.

This shell resembles S. compressus in form, but it wants the angula-

tion of the penultimate whorl. The peristome is much thickened, as in

S. personatus.

The forms of Ennea and Streptawxis described in this paper are the

principal that have been collected in the Southern Indian mountains by

Colonel Beddome, from whom I have received specimens from various

localities from time to time. All of the species of Streptaxis are some-

what variable, and, with a large collection from South India, it would

1880.]_ W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 205

probably be found that many intermediate varieties occur. Asa rnle, the

general form appears more constant than any other characters, and the

teeth in the mouth vary considerably. The parietal lamellz are peculiarly

inconstant. Thus, the original type of Streptaxis perrotteti, the common

species on the top of the Nilgiri hills, has two lamelle*; but I have a

variety from Ootacamund in which the smaller of the two, that nearer to

the angle of the mouth, is obsolete, and in other specimens from the

same locality there is but a rudimentary representation of this plait. It

was the form with a single lamella which was compared with S. watsoni

when the latter was originally described (J. A. S. B., 1860, xxix, p. 127).

The variation in the teeth of Streptaxis has already been noticed in

these contributions J. A. 8S. B., 1861, xxx, p. 359.

The genus Streptaxis is abundantly represented on the various hill-

groups of Southern India, especially on the higher elevations of the

Syhadri, or Western-Ghat range. ‘The most northern locality from which

I possess a specimen is the hill-fort of Torna, near Sinhgarh, west of Poona,

in the Bombay Presidency. The shell in question is weathered, and not in

very good condition; it is a large form (that is, large compared to the

minute species described in the preceding pages), measuring 113 mm.

by 83, and it is nearly allied to the Nilgiri S. perrottet7, and perhaps still

more nearly to the Ceylon S. ecngalensis.

18. Ennra Macropon, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 15.

Testa flecuose rimata, subcylindrico-turrita, diaphana, nitidula, con-

Sertim capillaceo-costulata, cereo-albida. Spira elongata, sursum parum

attenuata, lateribus subrectis, apice obtuso, suturd impressd. Anfr. 7,

convert, duo superiores levigati : ultumus aperturam versus subascendens,

Apertura verticalis, oblique semiovalis, lamellé valida bicruri intrante

parietali, alia columellari profundd, dentibusque tribus, uno tuberculiformt

columellari, alio magno lamelliformi transverso basali latus dextrum versus,

tertio minore in margine dextro, coarctata. Peristoma album, expansum,

jucta anfractum penultimum sinuatum, marginibus callo lamellifero junctis.

Long. 5, diam. via 2, ap. long. 1¢ mm.

Has, Apud Pykara in summos montes ‘ Nilgiri’ dictos India meri-

dionalis.

Shell flexuously rimate, subcylindrically turreted, translucent, polished,

yellowish white, closely sculptured, except on the apical whorls, with fine

hair-like vertical costulation. Spire turreted, elongate, diminishing very

slowly in thickness upwards, the sides nearly straight, the apex blunt and

rounded, the suture impressed. Whorls 7, convex, the first two smooth,

* Petit, quoted by Pfeiffer, Mon. Hel. i. p, 9.

206 W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Malucology. [No. 4,

the last ascending very slightly near the aperture. Aperture vertical,

semioval, obliquely truncated above, and very much contracted by teeth,

consisting of a strong re-entering bifid parietal* plait on the callus con-

necting the margins of the peristome, an internal re-entering columellar

lamina, commencing at a distance within the mouth, and three teeth—one,

more or less tubercular, on the left or columellar side, a second tubercular

tooth on the right margin, opposite the parietal plait, and with it nearly

cutting off the posterior corner of the aperture, and a third, broad, lamelli-

form, and transverse (parallel to the plane of the mouth) on the right side

of the basal margin. Peristome white, expanded throughout, curved a

little back near the angle, where it meets the penultimate whorl, the mar-

gins united by a callus bearing the parietal lamella. Length 0°21, diameter

0:075, length of aperture 0-05 inch.

I obtained several specimens of this shell near Pykara, on the Nilgiri

hills of Southern India, in 1858, and for along time supposed it to be Z.

pirriet of Pfeiffer,s but I noticed it as a distinct form when deseribing

EE. sculpta (J. A. S. B., 1869, xxxviii, pt. 2, p. 141), and mentioned some

of its peculiarities. . macrodon is distinguished not only from £ pirriei,

but also from all other Indian species of the genus, by its strong basal

transverse lamelliform tooth. This character serves to distinguish the two

species at all ages ; for in the present species, as in L. sculpta, £#. pirriet,

and, doubtless, in the two forms (#. exilis and L. subcostulata) described

below, the apertural teeth, and especially the parietal lamella, are well

developed in immature shells even before all the whorls are completed.

E. macrodon, too, is only half the size of H. pirriei, and there appear to

be several slight differences in form, sculpture, and dentition,

19. EwnyEa suBcostuLaTa, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 14 (upper).

Testa arcuato-rimata, subcylindrico-turrita, diaphana, nitida, cereo-

albida, confertim subobsolete costulata. Spira parum attenuata, lateribus

convexiusculis, apice obtuso, suturd impressd. Anfr. 73, convexiuscult,

ultimus antice breviter ascendens. Apertura verticalis, oblique semiovalis,

lamella valida intrante bicruri, flexuosd, parietali juxta angulum, alid pro-

funda columellari, et quatuor dentibus, uno columellari, duobus basalibus,

quarto dextrali plice parietal opposito, coarctata. Peristoma expansum,

albidum, juxta anfractum penultimum sinuatum, marginibus callo lamelli-

Servo junctis. Long. diam. 2, ap. long. 1¢ mm.

* For the meaning of the terms palatal, parietal, and columellar, applied to teeth

within the mouth, see Pfeiffer, Mon. Hel. ii, p. 300, note.

+ It was quoted as that shell, J. A. S. B., 1860, xxix, p. 126, and 1861, xxx,

p. 364,

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 207

Has. In montibus ‘Shevrai’ vel ‘Shevroy’ dictis, haud procul ab urbe

Salem, Indiz meridionalis (H. Beddome).

Shell arcuately rimate, subcylindrically turreted, translucent yellowish,

white, finely and somewhat indistinctly ribbed. Spire turreted, elongate,

becoming rather smaller above, with the sides rather convex, the apex blunt,

and the suture impressed. Whorls 73, moderately convex ; the last whorl

ascending slightly close to the mouth. Aperture vertical, semioval, obli-

quely truncated, with a strong re-entering parietal plait, bifid and flexuous

within, near the posterior angle, a columellar lamina at a distance within

the mouth, and four tubercular teeth—one columellar, two basal, and the

fourth inside the right margin opposite to the parietal plait, so as partly

to cut off the upper (posterior) portion of the mouth. Peristome white,

expanded, except near the junction with the last whorl, where the edge is

curved back somewhat; margins united by a callus, on which is the parie-

tal plait. Length 0°22, diam. 0:075, length of aperture (including peris-

tome) °05 inch.

I have received from Col. Beddome three specimens of this species,

two of which are evidently immature ; the third I believe to be full-grown,

but the peristome may perhaps be more fully expanded in older examples.

LH. subcostulata is allied to Z. pirriei, H. sculpta, FE. macrodon, and

their allies, but is distinguished from all by sculpture and the form of the

teeth in the mouth. It was, I believe, this species which was erroneously

quoted as H. pirrie: from the Shevroy hills (J. A. 8. B., 1861, xxx. p. 364).

20. ENNEA EXILIS, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 14 (lower).

Testa rimata, subcylindrico-turrita, diaphana, levigata, nitidula, albi-

do-cerea. Spira elongata, sursum via attenuata, lateribus apicem versus,

convexis, apice obtuso, suturd parum impressd. Anfr. 64-7, con vexiuscult,

ultimus antice subascendens. Apertura fere verticalis, oblique semiovalis,

lamella valida intrante bicruri parietali, alid profundé columellari spirali,

dentibusque quatuor, uno columellari, duwobus basalibus quasijunctis, quar-

toque minore in margine dextro, coarctata. Peristoma expansum, albidum,

postice jucta angulum sinuatum, marginibus callo lamellifero junctis.

Long. 4%, diam. 13, ap. long. 1 mm.

Haz. In montibus ‘ Balarangam’ dictis provincia Mysore in India

meridionali (HZ. Beddome).

Shell rimate, subeylindrically turreted, translucent, smooth, polished,

yellowish white. Spire turreted, elongate, diminishing very slowly indeed

below, but more rapidly above, where the sides are convex, apex blunt,

208 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indiun Malacology. —[No. 4,

suture slightly impressed. Whorls 63-7, slightly convex, the last whorl

ascending very little near the mouth. Aperture nearly vertical, semioval,

obliquely truncated, with a strong re-entering bifid palatal plait on the

callus uniting the margins of the peristome, a spiral columellar lamina

commencing at a distance within the mouth, and four tubercular teeth just

inside the peristome*—one columellar, two joined together at their base,

at the lowest part of the aperture, and one, very small, inside the right

margin and opposite to the large parietal plait. Peristome white, slhghtly

expanded, except near the junction with the last whorl, where the margin

is slightly curved back. Length 0°18, diameter 0:06, length of aperture

0:04 inch.

This form, of which I have received four specimens from Col. Bed-

dome, is distinguished from its allies by being quite smooth. As in the

case of some of the allied forms, it is not improbable that in old specimens

the peristome may be more broadly expanded and the palatal teeth may-

become more or less obsolete.

21. Ennera stENostoma, Bedd. MS., Plate HI, Fig. 17.

Testa longe profundeque rimata, pupiformis, cylindraceo-ovata, solidu-

la, levigata (forsan aliquando oblique striata), impolita, haud nitida, albi-

da. Spira subeylindrica, lateribus convexiusculis, apice rotundato, obtuso,

suturd impressd. Anfr. 65, convext, quatuor penultimi subequales ; ulti-

mus post apertwram valde compressus, haud ascendens, eapillaceo-striatus,

lateribus ambobus juxta peristoma scrobiculis impressis constrictus. Aper-

tura verticalis, subaxialis, non lateralis, suboblonga, altior quam lata,

marginibus lateralibus concaviusculis, basali convexo, dentibus valde coare-

tata, plicd und valida simplici intrante parietali juxta angulum, tuberculis

duobus columellaribus, uno superiore profundo, alio majore inferiore in

peristomate, duobus minoribus basalibus, uno dextrali, alio sinistrali, uno

denique majore bifido in margine dextro, plice parietali opposito sed infe-

riore, munita. Peristoma album, reflexum, postice sinuatum, marginibus

callo lamellifero junctis. Long. 84, diam. 13, ap. long. 14 mm.

Has. In montibus‘ Golconda’ dictis, haud procul ab urbe Vizagapatam

(H. Beddome).

Var. minor, anfractibus 5%; long. 8, diam. 14, ap. long. 13 mm. (Pl. II,

Fig. 16.)

Has. In montibus hand procul ab urbe Karnul (Kurnool) Indie

meridionalis, (AZ, Beddome).

* None of the teeth are well represented in the figure.

1880. ] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Mulacology. 209

Shell with a long deep groove at the base, pupiform or cylindrically

ovate, rather thick, smooth (perhaps sometimes obliquely striated), dull,

destitute of polish, whitish. Spire subeylindrical, with the sides slightly

convex, the apex blunt and rounded, and the suture impressed. Whorls

63, convex, the four behind the last whorl subequal, the penultimate being

scarcely smaller ; the last strongly compressed behind the aperture, with

raised hair-like lines of sculpture, not ascending, deeply indented on both

sides. Aperture* vertical, nearly in the axis of the shell, not lateral, nearly

oblong in shape, higher than broad, both the right and left margins slight-

ly coneave, lower margin convex. Teeth in the mouth numerous, and

consisting of the simplef strong re-entering parietal fold near the posterior

angle, two columellar tubercles (the upper and smaller situated at some

depth inside the mouth, the smaller and larger in front close to the lip),

two small basal teeth right and left of the lowest portion of the mouth,

and one large bifid tooth on the right margin nearly opposite to the parie-

tal fold, but not very close to it, and rather inferior to it in position.

Peristome white, expanded throughout, curved back near the posterior

angle, the margins united by a thick callus, on which the parietal lamina

is situated. Length 0:14, diameter 0:06, length of aperture 0:05 inch.

The typical form was obtained in the Golcorda hills near Vizagapa-

tam, and the single specimen sent to me by Col. Beddome, from which the

accompanying figure was taken, was broken after being drawn, ‘The de-

scription is from a specimen in the British Museum.

A smaller variety with 53 whorls, arid measuring 0:12 inch in length,

0:06 in diameter, and 0:37 in length of aperture, was procured by the same

naturalist in the hills near Kurnool.

I have received three specimens of this variety from Colonel Beddome,

and there are others in the British Museum. All have the same dull wea-

thered appearance, though they look fairly fresh ; but on one there appear

what may be traces of sculpture, apparently striz similar to the fine raised

lines occurring on the last whorl near the aperture in all.

I am not acquainted with any species of Hnnea nearly allied to this

species. In form, the Sikkim and Khasi Z. stenopylis shows some resem-

blance ; but that shell is strongly costulate, and its curious aperture, with

the posterior portion almost cut off and forming a semi-detached tube, shows

the species to be merely an ovate form of the Himalayan and Burmese

group, comprising 7. vara, HB. blanfordiana, and 2. cylindrelloidea.

* Tt is too broad in figure 17, and the shape is incorrect. The teeth, however, are

nearly correct.

¢ Evroneously represented as double in fig. 17 on the accompanying plate.

210 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

22. ENNEA BEDDOMETI, sp. nov.

Testa rimata, subcylindraceo-turrita, cereo-albida, nitida, confertim

verticaliter costulata, costulis in anfractu ultimo plus minusve obsoletis.

Spira elongata, sursum attenuata, apice obtuso, suturd impressd. Anfr. 6,

conveaxi, ultimus antice ad aperturam vie ascendens. Apertura fere verti-

calis, semielliptica, lamellis duobus validis parietalibus, und anteriore dexs

trali intrante intus tortd, alid profunda sinistrali subcolumellart incurvd,

dentibusque lamelliformibus minoribus duobus vel tribus profundis palata-

libus coarctata. Peristoma albidum, expansum, postice guxta angulum

leviter sinuatum, marginibus callo lamellifero junctis. Long. 3%, diam. 14,

ap. long. 2 mm.

Has. In montibus ‘Sivagiri’ dictis (Tinnevelley) Indiz meridionalis

(i. Beddome).

Shell rimate, subcylindrically turreted, pale yellowish white, polished,

with close vertical ribbing on all the whorls, the ribs being more or less

flattened and obsolete on the last. Spire elongate, becoming more slender

above, apex blunt, suture impressed. Whorls 6, convex, the last scarcely

ascending in front at the mouth. Aperture nearly vertical, semi-elliptical,

with two strong re-entering parietal lamella—one of them in front to the

right near the angle of the mouth, slightly twisted inside, the other to the

left near the columellar margin, commencing at a distance within the

mouth, and curved ; there are also two or three small depressed lamelliform

palatal teeth ; but they are seen with difficulty from the front. Peristome

white, expanded, the margins united by a callus bearing the parietal folds,

the right margin curved back near the angle. Length 0°15, diam. 0:03,

length of aperture 0-025 inch.

I have named this shell after the discoverer instead of adopting the term

he had given to it in MS., as the latter might be objected to and changed.

I have no specimen myself at present, but there are four in the British

Museum. ‘The form is peculiarly distinguished by the absence of any

teeth in the peristome itself, although there are two or three at a little

distance inside the aperture, and two folds on the callus joining the margins

of the lip. In general form there is some resemblance to LZ. ewilis.

23. Ennera canarica, Beddome, MS.

Testa rimata, turrita, albida, solidula, confertim verticaliter costata.

Spira subregulariter attenuata, apice obtuso, suturd profundiusculd. Anfr.

53, conveat, infra saturam inflati, gradatim crescentes, ultimus antice vix

ascendens. Apertura subrotunda, superne truncata, lamella validé parie-

tali intrante sublortd, partem posterivrem aperturae fere discernente, alidque

1880. ] W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Mualazology. Q11

columellari profundd, vie in fauce conspicud, coarctata ; dentibus palatali-

bus in peristomate nullis, Peristoma continuum, longe adnatum, album,

incrassato-patens, undique expansum, intus granulatum, margine colwmel-

lari angulatim incisum, basali lato, dextrali intus jucta lamellam parieta-

lem breviter projiciente, angulum versus leviter retro-sinuatum. Long. 32,

diam. 2, ap. intus 2 mm. alta.

Has. In provincia ‘South Canara’ ad latus occidentale Indie meri-

dionalis (HI. Beddome).

Shell rimate, furreted, white (fresher specimens are probably yellowish

white and polished), all the whorls ornamented with close vertical ribs.

Spire almost regularly attenuate, apex blunt, suture rather deep. Whorls

4, convex, swollen, and projecting beneath the suture, increasing in size

by degrees, the last not ascending near the mouth. Aperture nearly round,

except above, with one strongly developed parietal lamella, commencing

in the front and re-entering deeply, a little twisted within, and so large

as almost to cut off the upper left or posterior portion of the aperture;

another smaller, deep-seated columellar fold is scarcely discernible from the

mouth ; no palatal teeth. Peristome continuous, attached for a considera-

ble distance to the last whorl, white, thickened, broadly expanded, granulate

inside ; the columellar margin with an angular incision, the basal margin

broader than the others, right margin curved back near the angle, and

having a blunt projecting tooth-like process inside, opposite the parietal

fold. Length 0°15, diameter 0:08, length of aperture within 0.025 inch.

The above description is taken from the only specimen I have ever

seen, which is in the British Museum. The shell is remarkable for its

peculiarly shaped whorls, each of which is suddenly swollen below the

suture, so as to give almost a step-like appearance to the spire. The round-

ed mouth, too, with the broadly expanded peristome is quite different from

that of any other Indian form of the genus. Perhaps the Khasi-Hill

Ennea vara is as closely connected as any of the South-Indian forms,

though there is but little resemblance between it and the present species,

except such as is due to both being strongly ribbed, and to the manner in

which the posterior or upper right-hand corner of the mouth is almost

isolated by the strong parietal lamella and a projection from the inner

margin of the peristome.

24, HELIX CALPIs.

Bens., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. iii, p. 268.—Pfr., Mon. Hel. v. p. 64,—

Hanley, Conch. Ind. pl. xvi. fig. 8.

Macrochlamys ealpis, Theobald, Cat. Land Freshwater Shells Brit. Ind. p. 19.

? Nanina (Microcgstis) calpis, Nevill, Hand-list Moll. Ind, Mus. pt. i. p. 38.

212 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. .[No. 4,

This species was described from specimens collected by myself in 1856.

I had but an imperfect knowledge of land mollusks at the time, or J should,

I think, have seen at once, as I did some years afterwards, when re-examin-

ing my collections, that the shells were all young specimens of Raphaulus

(Streptaulus) blanfordi. I had altogether a considerable number of speci-

mens of the supposed Helix calpis ; of these four were sent to England,

and were examined by Mr. Benson; and it is manifest, from his descrip-

tion, that there was no difference between his examples and mine. In some

of the latter I found the operculum still remaining.

In Mr. Nevill’s Hand-list of Mollusca in the Indian Museum, Calcutta

(l. e.), specimens of Manina calpis from the Naga and Khasi hills are

included. Streptaulus blanfordi has been found in Sikkim, and in the

Dafla hills, east of Bhutan ; and I learn from Col. Godwin-Austen that he

obtained a specimen from Brahmaktnd at the head of the Assam valley ;

but, as no example of the shell is known to have been found in the hill-

ranges south of Assam, I think the specimens in the Indian Museum must

be something different from the form described as Helix calpis by Mr.

Benson.

25. SPIRACULUM TRAVANCOoRICUM, Beddome, MS., Plate IIT, Fig. 6.

Testa late umbilicata, depresso-turbinata, in exemplo vetusto adhue

detecto laevis, albescens (junior forsan epidermide induta, colorataque).

Spira elevata, depresso-conica, suturad profundd, apice acuto. Anfr. 44,

rotundati, ultimus cylindraceus, aperturam versus descendens atque breviter

solutus, 38 mill. pone aperturam tubulo longiusculo antrorsum directo, anfrac-

tum penultimum tangente, munitus. Apertura diagonalis, circularis ; peris-

toma duplex, internum breviter porrectum, superne sinistrorsum leviter

sinuatum, externum expansum, atque, nist ad marginen sinistrum, undula-

tum. Operculum extus fere planum, marginibus anfractuum exteriorum

liberis, intus concavum. Diam. maj. 123, min. 105, axis 7, diam. apert.

53 mill.

Has. In montibus Travancoricis haud procul a Tinnevelly (4.

Beddome).

Shell broadly umbilicate, depressedly turbinate, and, in the single aged

specimen found, decorticated, whitish and smooth throughout. Traces of

a brown epidermis remain around the umbilicus, and younger specimens

are probably brown in colour, and perhaps ornamented with coloured bands,

like other species of the genus. Spire raised, depressedly conical, suture

deep, apex acute. Whorls 43, rounded ; the last cylindrical, descending, and

free near the aperture, and provided above, about three millimetres behind

the mouth, with a rather elongate tube, which projects forward, and is in

1880.]_ W. T. Blanford—Oontributions to Indian Malacology. 213

contact with the penultimate whorl throughout. The tube appears broken

at the end, and may have been even longer originally ; the anterior termi-

nation in the specimen is in a line with the oblique peristome of the shell.

Aperture diagonal, circular ; peristome double, inner lip sharp, not project-

ing much, curved backwards near the penultimate whorl ; outer peristome

expanded, and wavy above externally and below, straight and somewhat

narrower on the left margin. Operculum nearly flat externally, concave

within ; the outer margins of the whorls free and lamellar, except towards

the middle; the circumference surrounded by several fine raised lines, the

edges of the outermost whorls. Major diameter 0°5 inch, minor 0°42,

axis 0°3, diameter of the mouth 0:23.

This species differs from all others of the genus by its higher spire,

and by the combination of the mouth being free and the sutural tube being

directed forwards and attached to the last whorl. The solitary specimen

obtained was procured at a considerable elevation, 4000 or 5000 feet, in

the hills between Travancore and Tinnevelly, not far from Cape Comorin.

26. CaTAULUS COSTULATUS, sp. nov., Plate III, Fig. 7.

Testa subperforata, subovato-turrita, solida, subsinuate costulata, palli-'

de straminea. Spira convexo-turrita, apice obtusiusculo, suturd valde im-

pressa. Anfr. 73, convexi, ultimus arctius convolutus, antice porrectus

Sere solutus, carind basali validd, compressa, costulatd, antice dilatatd muni-

tus ; periomphalo mediocri, costulato. Apertura subcircularis, fere verti-

calis, canali ad latus sinistrum marginis basalis patente, ore subobliquo,

subtus spectante. Peristoma album, incrassato-expansum, revolutum, postice

dextrorsum atque antice sinistrorsum ad canalem basalem productwm, mar-

gine columellari angustiore, cwm anfractu penultimo breviter guncto. Long.

16, diam. (perist. incl.) 5, diam. min. 53, apert. intus 3 mm.

Has. In montibus ‘Tinnevelly Ghats’ dictis Indi meridionalis,

(ZH. Beddome).

Shell subperforate, subovately turreted, solid, rather coarsely and sub-

sinuately costulated, of a pale straw-colour. Spire turreted, with convex

sides, apex rather obtuse, sutures well impressed. Whorls 74, convex, the

last more closely wound than the penultimate, to which it is scarcely attach-

ed just behind the mouth ; the basal keel compressed, costulate, dilated in

front ; the space inside the keel and around the umbilicus is of moderate

size and ribbed. Aperture nearly circular and subvertical, with the opening of

the basal canal on the left side of the base, and not quite in the same plane

as the aperture, but turned rather downwards. Peristome white, thickened,

expanded, and turned back, produced above to the right of the penultimate

whorl and below around the canal, narrow on the columellar margin, and

214 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology.. [No. 4,

only united for a short distance with the penultimate whorl. Length 0°65

inch, breadth (including the peristome) 0:25, minor diameter from front

to back 0:23, width of aperture inside 0°13.

This species of Oataulus, the third hitherto obtained from the hills of

Southern India, is distinguished from all other known forms of the genus

by its comparatively coarse ribbing across the whorls. In other respects,

it closely approaches C. calcadensis, Bedd. (J. A. S. B, 1869, xxxviii. pt.

2, p. 187, pl. xvi. fig. 8), having a similarly shaped spire, aperture, and

basal channel. I have only seen one specimen of C. costulatus ; this differs

from C. ealeadensis not only in having stronger sculpture, but also in being

rather shorter and in having one whorl less in the spire. The colour of

C. costulatus also is paler than that of the Calead shell, and the lip of the

aperture is white.

Like the other Southern-Indian forms, C. caleadensis, C. recurvatus,

and the species hereafter described, C. costulatus has the canal a little to

the left of the lowest portion of the aperture, or nearer to the umbilicus than

to the outer margin. In most Ceylonese species of the genus, the canal is

nearly at the lowest portion of the mouth.* I find that in OQ. tortuosus

the position of the canal is precisely as in C. calcadensis and CQ. costulatus

27. CATAULUS ALBESCENS, sp. nov.

Testa subperforata, subovato-turrita, tenuiuscula, albido-cornea, subsi-

nuate costulato-striata. Spira turrita, lateribus convexis, apice obtusius-

culo, suturd valde impressd. Anfr. 7, convexi, ultimus arctius convolutus,

antice porrectus, fere solutus, viw descendens, carind basali transversim

striata, postice obsoletd, antice validd, juxta aperturam dilataté munitus ;

periomphalo mediocri, plicato-striato. Apertura subcircularis, fere vertica-

lis, canali ad latus sinistrum marginis basalis patente, ore antice spectante.

Peristoma album, incrassato-reflecwm, postice et ad canalem basalem produc-

tum, margine columellari angustiore, cum anfractu penultimo breviter june-

tum. Long. 13, diam. maj. 53, min. 45, apert. diam. intus vie 3 mm.

Has. In montibus Travancoricis haud procul ab urbe Trevandrum.,

Shell subperforate, subovately turreted, rather thin, whitish horny,

rather sinuately and costulately striated. Spire turreted, with the sides

convex, apex obtuse, suture much impressed. Whorls 7, convex, the last

more closely wound than the penultimate, to which itis but slightly attach-

ed just behind the mouth. Basal keel transversely striated, subobsolete on

the body-whorl near the junction of the peristome, becoming stronger in

* Tt is slightly to the left in C. pyramidatus, C. eurytrema, and C. austenianus ;

basal in the smaller forms, like C. templemanni and C. layardi.

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 215

front and dilated near the mouth ; the space inside the keel and around the

umbilicus is of moderate size and plicately striated. Aperture nearly circu-

lar and subvertical, with the opening of the basal canal to the left of the

base, and in nearly the same plane as the aperture. Peristome white,

thickened, expanded and turned back, produced slightly above to the right

of the penultimate whorl, and to a greater extent below at the mouth of

the canal; columellar margin a little narrower, joined for a short distance

only to the penultimate whorl. Length 0°53, major diameter 0:22, minor

0:18; breadth of the aperture within 0°12 inch.

This is the smallest form yet obtained of the peculiar group of Sou-

thern-Indian Catauli. I received three specimens some years ago from

Mr. Theobald, who supposed them to be C. caleadensis. Mr. Theobald, I

believe, procured them from Mr. F. W. Bourdillon, who obtained them near

Mynall, on the hills east of Trevandrum. ‘This shell is, I think, mentioned

as Cataulus calcadensis by Mr. Theobald in his description of Mr. Bourdil-

lon’s shells (J. A. S. B., 1876, xlv. p. 185). The present species, however,

has one whorl less, and is a much smaller shell, with proportionately shorter

whorls, the sculpture is less close and distinct, the colour whitish instead

of golden brown, the basal keel less developed, and its opening is in the

same plane as the aperture, instead of being turned downwards, &c. From

C. costuwlatus, the present form is chiefly distinguished by its much finer

sculpture and by the characters of the basal keel.

28. CATAULUS CALCADENSIS,

The original specimens of this species described by me in 1869 (J. A.

S. B., xxxviil. pt. 2, p. 187) were bleached and chalky. Subsequently, Col.

Beddome, who discovered and named this very interesting form of Cetaulus,

procured fresh living specimens of a golden-brown colour, with the aperture

of the same tint as the shell.* The peristome in these specimens is not

free from the last whorl. The operculum is normal, and precisely similar.

to that of Ceylonese species of the genus.

The specimens described by Mr. Theobald as Hapalus travankoricus

are, I am satisfied, immature shells, and I believe them to be the young of

this, of @. albescens, or of some nearly allied species of Cutaulus. Mr.

Theobald states that the types of his supposed Hapalus differ from the

young of Cataulus calcadensis, 7. e., O. albescens, but he omits to point out

the distinction. I had an opportunity of examining the types, which were

* JT have not seen specimens of the olive colour represented in the ‘ Conchologia

Indica,’ pl. evi, fig. 10.

+ J. A. S. B. 1876, xlv. pt. 2, p. 186, pl. xiv. fig. 5. The name should, in any

ease, be Latinized as travancoricus. There is no such place as Travankor, the common

English name Travancore being a corruption of the real name.

216 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

shown to me by Mr. Theobald, and I told him my views on the subject,

but he did not agree with me.

I have recently examined the specimen of C. tortwosus (two in num-

ber) at the British Museum, and find the views I expressed several years

since (J. A. S. B., 1869, xxxviii. pd. 2, p. 138) as to its alliance to C. cal-

cadensis fully confirmed. In form, OC. tortuosus, C. calcadensis, C. costula-

tus, and QO. albescens are closely allied, all being much more ovate than any

of the other species of the genus. The sculpture on C. tortwosus is much

finer than on C. calcadensis, or even than on C. albescens. The discovery

of two additional forms of this section of the genus in the hills of Southern

India, and the absence of the genus from the collections hitherto made in

the Nicobar Islands, tend to support the probability that C. tortwosus is

also in reality a Southern-Indian form. Nota single Cataulus has hitherto

been discovered in the Andaman Islands, in any of the countries to the east

of the Bay of Bengal, or in the Malay Islands, so that the existence of the

genus in the Nicobar Islands is extremely improbable.

29. REALIA (OMPHALOTROPIS) ANDERSONI, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 18.

Testa perforata, ovato-conica, tenuiuscula, rufescenti-fulva, levigata,

parum nitida, oblique striatula. Spira conica, lateribus subrectis, apice

acuto, suturd leviter impressd. Anfr. 7, planiusculi ; ultimus ad peri-

pheriam capillaceo-carinatus, subtus convexus, levigatus, radiatim striatulus,

carind cireumumbilicari obtusd, fere obsoletd instructus. Apertura ovata,

obliqua, fere diagonalis, spiram altitudine haud equans. Peristoma obtu-

sum, marginibus subconniventibus, callo tenui junctis, externo recto, basalt

expansiusculo, columellari subtus expanso, juxta perforationem emarginato,

angulatim inciso. Operc.? Long. 7, diam. vix 5; ap. long. 34, lat. 2% mm,

Has. In insulis Andamanicis (J. Anderson).

Shell perforate, ovately conical, thin, reddish brown in colour, smooth,

not polished, obliquely striated. Spire conical, with sides nearly straight,

apex acute, suture slightly impressed. Whorls 7, rather flat; the last with

a hair-like keel at the periphery (the keel sometimes appearing on the

upper whorls just above the suture), convex, smooth, and radiately striated

below, and furnished with an obtuse, subobsolete keel around the umbili-

cus, the space inside the umbilical keel being smooth, not ribbed. Aperture

ovate, oblique, nearly diagonal, a little shorter than the spire. Peristome

obtuse, the margins approaching each other, and joined by a thin callus;

outer edge straight, basal expanded, columellar expanded below, but emargi-

nate and cut away into a re-entering angle near the perforation. Length

0:29, diameter O19; length of aperture 0°18, breadth 0:11 inch.

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacoloqy. 217

This species closely resembles &. (O.) rubens of Mauritius in form,

but differs in sculpture, the shape of the whorls, &e. The umbilical keel

is but faintly marked. Several specimens were procured about ten years

ago by Dr. J. Anderson, Superintendent of the Indian Museum, to whom

I am indebted for the types. They were obtained, I believe, at some dis-

tance from the coast.

380. REALIA PALLIDA, sp. nov., Plate II, Fig. 19.

Testa perforata, ovato-conica, tenuis, albido-cornea, levigata, nitidula,

vie verticaliter striatula. Spira conica, apice acuto, suturd impressd.

Anfr. 6, convexiusculi ; ultimus ad peripheriam atque subtus rotundatus,

circa perforationem radiatim striatus. Apertura fere verticalis, ovata,

spiram altitudine haud equans. Peristoma tenue, marginibus subconniven-

tibus, callo tenui junctis, externo recto, columellari expansiusculo. Opere. ?

Long. 44, diam. 3; ap. long via 2, lat. 13 mn.

Haz, In insulis Andamanicis cum precedente (J. Anderson).

Shell perforate, ovately conical, thin, whitish horny, smooth, moder-

ately polished, with faint subobsolete vertical striation. (There is also,

beneath the lens, a faint indication of minute spiral striation, but I am not

sure that this is not an individual peculiarity.) Spire conical, apex acute,

suture impressed. Whorls 6, slightly convex, the last rounded at the peri-

phery and below, radiately striated around the perforation. Aperture near-

ly vertical, ovate, shorter than spire. Peristome thin, margins approaching

each other, joined by a thin callus; the outer lip simple, the columellar

slightly expanded. Length 0:17, diameter 0:12, length of aperture 0-075,

breadth 0:06 inch.

I have but a single specimen of this species, which wants both the

keels of the last species, and differs besides in size, colour, and sculpture.

The specimen is perhaps not quite adult, but there can, I think, be no-

question of its being a peculiar form.

Neither of the two species above described can be confounded with the

globose &. (O.) distermina (Benson, Ann. & Mag. N. H. Dec. 1863; Pfeif.,

Mon. Pneum. Suppl. i. p. 178) with its costulate striation near the suture

and inside the umbilicus, its rounded whorls, and its aperture equal in

length to the spire. A glance at the figure of this shell in the ‘ Concholo-

gia Indica,’ pl. elxv. fig. 10, will suffice to show how different it is from

either 2. andersoni or R. pallida. Even if, as is possible, Benson’s type

was a young shell, it was manifestly a very distinct species, and the adult

would probably resemble Realia (Omphalotropis) globosa of Mauritius in

shape.

218 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

Sl. REALIA DECUSSATA, Sp. nov.

Testa perforata, ovato-conica, tenuiuscula, striis obliquis incrementt,

aliisque spiralibus, minutis, sublente subtilissime decussata, in anfractibus

superioribus, nisi duobus supremis, undique, atque in inferioribus et supra

et infra sutwram costulato-striata, pallide rufescenti-fulva, anfractu ultimo

cingulo pallido cireumdato, Spira conica, apice acuto, sutura impressd-

Anfr. 6, convext ; ultimus ad peripheriam rotundatus, subtus convexus, ra-

diatim striatus, in umbilico costulato-striatus, lined impressd basali in loco

carine circum wnbilicum instructus. Apertura obliqua, rotundato-ovata, %

longitudinis subequans. Peristoma tenue, marginibus subconniventibus,

callo tenui junctis, externo basalique rectis, columellari subtus expansiusculo,

juata perforationem retrosinuato. Opere.? Long. 3%, diam. 2%; ap. long.

3, lat. 14 mm.

Has. Cum precedentibus in insulis Andamanicis (J. Anderson).

Shell perforate, ovately conical, rather thin, finely marked with oblique

strie of growth and minute decussating spiral lines (only visible beneath

the lens), costulately striated on the upper whorls (except the two upper-

most) and close to the suture on the lower whorls, pale rufescent brown,

with a pale band round the body whorl. Spire conical, apex sharp, suture

impressed. Whorls 6, convex ; the last rounded at the periphery and_be-

low, radiately striated beneath, more strongly in the umbilicus, and having

an impressed line at the base around the umbilicus in the place of a keel.

Aperture oblique, oval, but little higher than broad, about 2 of the length.

Peristome thin, the margins approaching each other and united by a thin

callus ; the outer and basal edges simple, columellar margin slightly expanded

below, curved back into a shallow re-entering sinus close to the perforation.

Length 0:15, diameter 0°11; length of aperture 0:07, breadth 0-06 inch.

This shell is distinguished by its fine decussated striation. I have but

a single specimen, received from Dr. J. Anderson, with the others. Un-

fortunately no figure has been given, as I did not observe the distinction

until after the accompanying plate had been drawn. Independently of

sculpture, the species may be distinguished from O. distermina by its less

globose form, and by the absence of the keel around the periphery ; from

k. andersont by its much smaller size, more rounded whorls, and by the

absence of the keel ; and from &. pallida by rounder whorls, by colour, and

by its rather more turreted form.

There is thus evidence of four different forms of Realia in the An-

daman Islands. The genus is absolutely unknown in either India or

Burma, the species of Omphalotropis (O. awrantiaca) once reported from

”

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. 219

Pondicherry being really from the island of Mauritius ;* and it is uncertain

that the forms reported from Cochin China, Siam, and Singapore are not

Assiminee. It is remarkable that the genus is almost entirely insular in its

known distribution, and that it is especially common in the Mascarene

Islands and in Polynesia.

32. Patupomus TRAVANCORICA, Beddome, MS., Plate II, fig. 22.

Testa imperforata, ovato-conica, solidula, epidermide fused induta, sub

epidermide albida, fasciis fusco-purpureis flexuosis verticalibus ornata,

costis spiralibus subconfertis circumdata, interspatis glabris, striis inere-

menti inconspicuis. Spira conica, subturrita, apice eroso, suturd impressd.

Anfr. superst. 3, convexi, ultimus dimidium teste superans. Apertura sub-

verticalis, ovata, postice angulata, intus cerulescenti-albida, strigis flecuosis

confertis conspicuis. Peristoma rectum, margine externo acuto, columellare

basalique albis, intus incrassatis, dilatatis. Operc. normale. Diam. maj,

16, min. 133, alt. 23 mm. (apice non eroso ad 25); apert. 12 mm. longa,

9 lata.

Has. In Travancore (H. Beddome).

Shell imperforate, ovately conical, rather thick, covered with a dark-

brown epidermis ; beneath the epidermis white, with narrow vertical, very

wavy dark purple stripes; all the whorls spirally ribbed, the ribs rather

close together, with the interspaces smooth, the striz of growth being

inconspicuous. Spire conical, apex eroded (doubtless acute when perfect),

suture impressed. Whorls remaining 3 (probably in the perfect shell 5 or

G6), convex, the last exceeding half the length of the shell. Aperture nearly

vertical, ovate, angulate at the posterior extremity, bluish white, with con-

spicuous, close, vertical, wavy, deep purple bands within ; peristome in one

plane, the external margin sharp, the columellar and basal margins white, |

thickened within, and dilated. Operculum normal. Major diameter 0°65

inch, minor 0°52, height (apex wanting) 0-9 (when perfect about an inch) ;

aperture 0°5 high, 0°36 broad.

In a young specimen of P. ¢ravancorica, there appears to be a ten-

dency to the development of minor parallel ribs between those forming the

spiral sculpture, and the latter are rather closer together near the suture.

* See Benson, A. M. N. H. Sept. 1851, Ser. II, Vol. 8. p. 194.—Nevill, Handlist

Moll. I. M. pt. i, p. 820. Hanley, Conch. Ind. Systematic list of Species, p. xiii, note 1,

whilst pointing out that the species is not Indian, states that it occurs in the Isle of

Bourbon. As he does not give his authority, the name of the island may have been

inserted by mistake for that of Mauritius, but it is possible that the form occurs, like

O. rubens and two or three other species, in both islands.

220 W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

This fine and well-marked from of Paludomus was procured by Colonel

Beddome in streams traversing the plains between Trevandrum and the

foot of the Aghastyamali hill.

So far as I am aware, none of the forms of true Paludomus hitherto

described from Southern India and Ceylon have the marked spiral suleation

of the present species. There is, however, a remarkable resemblance to

the Ceylonese Philopotamis sulcata, the shell of which is only distinguished

by wanting the conspicuous coloured bands within the peristome, although

the operculum is very different. Perhaps the nearest ally of P. travan-

corica is the Burmese P. regulata ; but that is a less conical form, and differs

both in seulpture and coloration, as may be seen by comparing the figure

of the present species with that of P. regulata in the ‘ Conchologia Indica’

(pl. evili. fig. 5). In form, P. travancorica has some resemblance to the

common P. tanjorica* (Helix tanshawrica, Gmelin, Syst. Nat. p. 8655).

383. BYTHINIA EVEZARDI.

Testa anguste wmbilicata, ovato-conica, solida, striis regularibus spi-

raliter cireumdata, albido-cornea, epidermide crassd olivaced obtecta, Spira

conica, apice eroso, suturd valde impressd. Anfr. superst. 3 (in testd in-

tegrd 4-5), convext, ultimus dimidiam longitudinis subequans, modice ven-

tricosus, subtus circa umbilicum angulatim compressus, umbilico conico,

intus levigato. Apertura subverticalis ovata, antice atque postice subangu-

lata; peristoma simplex, rectum, obtusum. Operculum normale. Long. 3%,

diam. maj. 34, min. 2 mm. ; apert. intus fere 2 longa, 1% lata.

Haz. Ad Lanowlee (Lanaoli) juxta.viam ferratum inter Bombay et

Poona (G@. Evezard).

Shell narrowly umbilicate, ovately conical, solid, surrounded by regular

spiral impressed lines rather close together, whitish horny, covered with an

olive epidermis. Spire conical, apex eroded, suture deeply jimpressed.

Whorls remaining 8 (in a perfect shell about 4 to 5), rounded, the last

about half the whole length, moderately ventricose, angulately compressed

at the base around the umbilicus, which is conical and smooth inside.

Aperture nearly vertical, oval, subangulate in front at the base and at the

posterior extremity ; peristome simple, straight, obtuse ; operculum normal.

Length 0:15, major diameter 0°18, minor 0:08 inch; aperture within 0:07

long, 0°05 broad.

This peculiar little species, distinguished by its distinct umbilicus

from all other Indian forms, was obtained by Colonel G. Evezard at Lanaoli,

a station on the railway from Bombay to Poona, situated a few miles east

of Khandalla at the top of the Bor-ghat.

* I think it is to be regretted that Gmelin’s spelling should be adopted for this

species, as the derivation of the name is thereby rendered obscure.

1880.] W. T. Blanford—Contributions to Indian Matlacology. 221

35, CREMNOCONCHUS FAIRBANKT.

“ Cremnoconchus fairbanki, Blanford,” Hanley, Conch. Ind. p, 58, pl. exlvi, fig. 7.

I have described the species here attributed to me, and I greatly

doubt my being responsible for the specific name, even in manuscript. I

_ find amongst my collection a small box of C. carinatus, labelled O, fuir-

banki, but I cannot recollect whence the name was derived. The shell

figured in the ‘Conchologia Indica’ resembles CO. carinatus in form, but

the angulation of the last whorl is not shewn, and the eoloured bands

represented are not, so far as I know, found in that species.

The shell figured in the same plate of the ‘ Conchologia Indica’ (pl.

exlvi, fig. 10) as C. carinatus, is certainly not that species, but O. conicus,

var. Some of the references in the letterpress, p. 58, to my descriptions

and figures of Cremnoconchus (J. A. 8. B. 1870, xxxix, pt. 2, pp. 10O—12,

pl. 3, figs. 3, 4, 5) are incorrect.

386. CoRBICULA IRAVADICA.

“ Cor. iravadica, Blanf. MSS.” Hanley, Conch. Ind. p. 62, pl. ely, fig. 8.

Testa fere equilateralis, rhomboideo-ovata, ventricosa, solidiuscula,

concentrice striata atque costulis subremotis, interdum plus minwsve obso-

letis, ornata, epidermide olivaced induta, intus violacea: latere antico ante

wmbones prominentes subhorizontali, tune fere requlariter convexo, postico

declivi, oblique subtruncatulo, demum subangulato, margine ventrali modice

arcuato ; ligamento postice subito contracto. Lat. 10} mm., long. 9, crass. 7.

In alio exemplo long. 11%, lat. 83, crass. 7.

Has. Ad Mandelay, urbem ecapitalem regni Ave,

Shell nearly cquivalve, rhomboidally ovate, ventricose, thickish, con-

centrically striated and ornamented with ribs rather wide apart often more

or less obsolete. The colour of the epidermis is olive, that of the shell

inside violet: Anterior side nearly horizontal in front of the prominent um-

bones, then almost regularly convex, the posterior side slopes away gently

at first, then sharply, almost as if truncated, and forms a rounded angle

with the ventral margin, which is gently arcuate. The ligament behind is

suddenly contracted and compressed, the hindermost portion, about a quarter

of the length being very much smaller than the rest.

Dimensions of one specimen :—length 0°42 inch, breadth from um-

bones to ventral margin 0°36, thickness 0:28; of another much longer

shell, the same measurements are 0:46, 0°34, and 0:28 inch.

It is very possible that this may not be separable from some of the

numerous other forms of the genus, but I can find none precisely agreeing.

The form is more ventricose and the umbones more prominent than in most

222 W. T. Blanford— Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

Indian Corbicule. The genus, like Unio, appears to have been designed by

a beneficent Providence for the amusement of species-makers. Many of

the described local races in all probability pass more or less into each other.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Plate II.

Euplecta vidua, var. minor, natural size.

This shell has not been described, the type having been mislaid, and one

figure, that shewing the shell from the mouth, omitted in the plate.

» 9. Buplecta vidua, typical form, natural size.

8. Macrochlamys tenuiecula, two views, natural size. In the left hand figure

one whorl too many is represented, and in the right hand figure the

peristome is represented as thick instead of very thin.

9 9 Macrochlamys platychlamys, two views, natural size. In the right hand

view the lip should have been represented as very thin.

» 10. Streptaxis personatus, three views, enlarged two diameters, fair.

» Ll. Streptaxis concinnus, three views, enlarged two diameters, teeth rather in-

distinct, otherwise good.

» 12. Streptaxis pronus, three views, enlarged two diameters, teeth not correctly

represented ; see description.

» 18. Streptaxis compressus, three views, enlarged four diameters; the teeth are

incorrect, especially in the middle figure, where three are represented

on the basal margin of the aperture instead of one only.

» 14 (Upper figure) Ennea subcostulata, enlarged four diameters. The columellar

tooth should be lower down.

» 14. (Lower figure) Ennea exilis, enlarged four diameters. All the teeth are

wrongly represented ; see description.

» 15. Enea macrodon, enlarged four diameters. The teeth in the peristome are

not distinct in the figure, and the large tooth inside the base is omitted

altogether.

» 16. Ennea stenostoma, var., enlarged four diameters. Teeth not correct, they

should be precisely the same as in fig. 17.

», 17. Ennea stenostoma, typical form, enlarged four diameters. The mouth too

broad, it should be of the same shape as in fig, 16. The teeth are

correct.

» 18. Realia (Omphalotropis) andersoni, enlarged two diameters: fair figure.

» 19. Realia pallida, enlarged two diameters, not good, the penultimate whorl

is by far too large, and the suture wrongly drawn.

5, 22. Paludomus travaneorica, natural size, good figure.

N.B. As already noticed in the text, several of the figures in this plate are

unsatisfactory. In especial, the teeth in the aperture of some forms of Hnnea and

Streptaxis are by no means accurately represented. The plate having been twice

lithographed, it appears hopeless at present to try to obtain greater accuracy. The

general form of the shells is as a rule correct. The imperfection of the plate is partly

due to its having been lithographed during the absence of the author of the present

paper.

me bo

oe anke;

Plate IIT.

TTemiplecta tinostoma.

Hemiplecta enisa.

Xestina albata.

Ariophanta immerita.

Macrochlamys wynnet.

Spiraculum travancoricume

Cataulus costulatus.

STO? IR go tO

N.B. The figures on this plate are all fairly good; all are of the natural size

except 7d.

ORD, Journ. As.Soc. Bengal, Vol.XLIX Pt ]l.1880. EU

ei in CRONE eter |

J. Schasnburg Lith: Printed by W. Newman ¢ C2 Coleutia

W.T.BLANF ORD, Journ. As, Soc. B engal, Vol. XLIX Pt.111880. PUI.

ris

J. Siammburg Lidy: Printed by W.Newman & Ce Calcutta,

1880.] J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—List of Butterflies, fe. 223

XXI.—List of Diurnal Lepidoptera from Port Blair, Andaman Islands,

with Descriptions of some new or little-known Species and of a new

Species of Hestia from Burmah.—By J. Woov-Mason, Deputy

Superintendent, Indian Musewm, and L. pe Nicn’vinus.

(With Plate XIII.)

The first collection of Andamanese Lepidoptera of any importance was

made by the native collector (Moti Ram) who accompanied Mr. Wood-

Mason on his first visit to the Andaman Islands in the year 1872; and

remained at Port Blair for some months after Mr. Wood-Mason’s return

to Calcutta, collecting insects in the immediate vicinity of the settlement.

This collection was entrusted for determination and description in this

Journal to the late Mr. W. 8. Atkinson, who, however, only described in

the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society’ two of the more obvious novel-

ties, and eventually returned a few of the specimens to Mr. G. Nevill, who

at that time had charge of the Museum collection of lepidopterous insects,

and who placed them in the collection. These specimens are included in

the present list.

Since 1872, numerous collections of Lepidoptera have been formed at

Port Blair and at Kamorta in the Nicobars by the officers of the Port

Blair establishment, and forwarded by them to England, where in 1877

Mr. F. Moore examined all the material that had been thus collected and

drew up a complete list of “ The Lepidopterous Fauna of the Andaman

and Nicobar Islands,” describing therein many new species and varieties

both of butterflies and moths. In this list, 71 species of rhopalocerous

Lepidoptera are recorded as inhabitants of the Andaman Islands. Since

Mr. Moore’s paper appeared, 4 new species and varieties of butterflies have

been described by as many different authors, bringing up this number to |

75. In the present list, 29 additional species, five of them described for

the first time, are recorded, making a total of 104,—a number which might

no doubt be largely increased by an experienced collector in a few weeks.

Several common species which occur everywhere in the neighbouring

regions are not recorded, and these are all the more conspicuous by their

absence from the circumstance that their supposed models are also absent ;

we allude to Zypolimnas misippus, Elymnias undularis, and the 2nd and 8rd

forms of the female of Papilio polytes, which respectively mimick Danais

chrysippus, Danais plexippus, Papilio hector, and Papilio aristolochiae,

It is a curious fact that both in the Kulu valley andin the Simla district

in the North-Western Himalayas, where Papilio hector and P. aristola-

chiae have never been found, the same forms of the female of Papilio

224 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—List of Diurnal [No. 4,

polytes are also absent : whether they are really absent from the Andaman

Islands and the other regions mentioned, and, if so, whether they ceased

to be developed or rather were exterminated as soon as the species spread

into regions wherein neither of the forms which its females mimick

exist, are interesting subjects for future enquiry.

Tribe PAPILIONES.

Family NYMPHALID.

Subfamily Danarna.

No representative of the genus Hestia has been received from Mr.

de Roepstorff, but we are indebted to Capt. G. F’. L. Marshall, R. E., for

the gift of a specimen which that gentleman had received from Colonel

Cadell, Chief Commissioner of the Andamans and Nicobars, but which

does not agree with Felder’s figure and description of Hest¢a agamarschana,

the only species of the genus hitherto recorded from those islands, either

in the extent and relations of the black markings or in the shape and

proportions of the wings; the former being larger, more or less coalescent

generally, and completely run together at the outer margin so as to form

a distinct black border to each wing, and the posterior pair of the latter

being broadly rounded off at the extremity and consequently not presenting

the peculiar egg-shaped outline so characteristic of these organs in all the

hitherto described Indian Hestias, e. g., H. Lynceus, H. Jasonia, ete., with

the latter of which Felder compares his species; the specimen apparently

also differs from Hl. agamarschana in having the white of all the wings

everywhere more or less clouded with minute black scales, HZ. agamars-

chana, it is true, to judge from Felder’s figure of it, has the posterior

wings a little less pointed, the anterior discal spots on the anterior ones

obviously more elongated, with more black in the cell and behind it, and

the markings generally larger than in Hl. Jasonia, and it is, as might

have been expected, more closely related to the specimen obtained by Col.

Cadell than to any other species; but, large series of specimens having

shown us how extremely constant the different species or local races of

Hestia are, we cannot unite the two, and we think that the differences they

present are in all probability due to a difference of station, and that Helfer

may have obtained the specimen that served Felder for type on a different

island ; all the lepidopterous insects of late years received from the Andamans

having been obtained in the immediate vicinity of the settlement at Port

Blair, in an area therefore which is a very small fractional part indeed of

the Andaman group of islands, which extends through nearly four degrees

of latitude. We, therefore, propose to describe the specimen as a new

species under the name of

1880, ] Lepidoptera from the Andaman Islands, Se. 225

1. Hestia CapEttt, n. sp., Pl. XIII, Fig. 1, 3.

$. Allied to Hestia agamarschana, Felder. Wings above pure

subpellucid white clouded, especially on the outer halves, with minute black

scales, and marked and veined with intense black ; all the markings larger,

more or less coalescent, and blurred or paler at the margins, the veins

more broadly black-bordered, and the marginal spots completely run

together so that the wings are all, especially the posterior ones, distinctly

bordered externally with black.

Anterior wings relatively narrower and longer, being more than twice as

long as broad, with the discoidal cell equal in length to the submedian vein,

that is to say, to the inner margin, and all but as long as the outer margin

measured in a straight line from the extremity of the submedian vein to that

of the subcostal ; with the anterior discal spots more elongated and more

completely coalesced, the spot between the first and second median veinlets

alone constantly free, and the large rounded one internal to it in the same

cell coalescent with the enlarged extremity of the cellular mark (which fills

the cell nearly to the level of the origin of the second median veinlet, and

is divided at the base of the wing by three indistinct longitudinal clouded

white streaks), and the large mark in front of the submedian vein larger,

triangular, and united by a black streak to the discal black spot beyond it.

Posterior wings shorter and broader, with the outer margin more

broadly rounded off, the cell and the interspaces beyond it broader, the

spot in it larger, and all those around it free, though exhibiting a tendency

to coalesce with the black margins of the veinlets.

Wings below dirty-white of a dull opalescent tinge, with fuscous-

black markings and veins.

Length of fore-wing 2°45; extreme length of discoidal cell, 1:38 ;

expanse 5 inches.

Haz. Port Blair, S. Andaman.

We have much pleasure in naming this species after Colonel Cadell,

Chief Commissioner of the Andamans and Nicobars, who obtained it, and

who has shown himself no less ready than his predecessors to help those

who are engaged in working out the interesting fauna of the islands under

his charge.

Obs. The specimens of Hestia which Hewitson, in his list of Butter-

flies from the Andamans (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. xiv, 1874,

p. 856), considers to be specimens of LZ. agamarschana remarkable for

their dark colour, doubtless belong here.

2. DANAIS MELANOLEUCA,

Danais melanoleuca, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 581, pl. lviii, fig. 3.

Numerous specimens of both sexes (4. de Roepstorff and Moti Ram).

226 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—List of Diurnal [No. 4,

3. EUpPLa@a CORE.

Papilio core, Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1782, vol. iii, pl. 266, fies. E, F.

Euplea core, Butler, Journ Linn. Soc. Lond., Zoology, 1878, vol. xiv, p. 301.

One female (Joti Ram) agreeing with Bengal specimens.

4. EUurpL@A ANDAMANENSIS.

Euplea andamanensis, Atkinson, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1873, p. 736, pl. Lxiii,

fig. 2, g. Butler, op. cit. p. 300.

Numerous males and females (A. de R. and Moti Ram).

This is one of the species described from the collection made by Moti

Ram in 1872.

Subfamily Saryriv a.

5. Letur EUROPA.

bee

Pap. ewropa, Fabr. Syst. Entom. 1775, p. 500.

Males and females, all remarkably fine specimens.

6. MELANITIS LUDA.

Males and females (A. de R. and ALoti Ram) and males of IL. ismene, Cr.

7. Mycatesis minevs, Linn.

mn prusta, Cr.

- BLASIUS, Fabr.

Males and females (A. de 2. and Moti Ram).

8. MycALrsiIs OTREA.

Pap, otrea, Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1782, vol. iv, pl. 314, figs. A, B.

francisea, Id., ibid., pl. 326, figs. E, F.

A female of one of the numerous varieties of this species.

8. MycabEsIs RADZA.

M. radza, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 583, pl. lviii, fig. 2.

One male and two females.

9. ELYMNIAS corronts.

IM. cottonis, Hewitson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1874, ser. 4, vol. xiv, p. 358, ¢ Q.

Numerous males (4. de 2. and Moti Ram); one female (A. de Z.).

Subfamily Morruina.

10. DiscorpHORA CELINDE.

Pap. celinde, Stoll, Pap. Exot. Suppl. 1790, pl. 37, figs. 1, 1 A.

One female.

1880. } Lepidoptera from the Andaman Islands, Se. =. 22%

Subfamily NympHarin a.

11. CrrHosiA NICOBARICA.

Felder, Verhand. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. Wien, 1862, vol. xii, p. 484; Novara Reise,

_ Lep. p. 8&4, pl. xlviii, figs. 7, 8, g.—MLoore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 583, 2.

Two pairs (Moti Ram) and one male (A. de &.) agreeing perfectly |

with specimens from the Nicobars.

12. ATELLA ALCIPPE,

Pap. aleippe, Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1782, vol. iv, pl. 389, figs. G, H.

Numerous specimens, male and female (4. de &. and Moti Ram),

13. CrrRHOCHROA ANJIRA.

C. anjira, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 584, ¢ 2.

Males and females.

14. CYNTHIA EROTA.

Pap. erota, Fabr., Fntom. Syst. 1793, vol. ii, p. 76.

Numerous males and females.

15. MerssarnaAS ERYMANTHIS, VAR. NICOBARICA.

Felder, Verh. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. Wien, 1862, vol. xii, p. 486.

Males and a female.

16. JUNONIA GNONE.

Pap. enone, Linn., Cramer, Pap. Exot, 1774, vol. i, pl. 35, figs. A, B, C.

Numerous males and females (4. de #. and Moti Kam).

17. JUNONIA ALMANA.

ira

Pap. almana. Linn., Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1775, vol. i, pl. 58, figs. I’, G.

One pair.

18. JUNONIA ASTERIE.

Pap. asterie, Linn., Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1775, vol. i, pl. 58, figs. D, E.

Three males and two females.

19. DoLESCHALIIA BISALTIDE.

Pap. bisaltide, Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1779, vol. ii, pl. 102, figs. C, D.

Numerous fine specimens of both sexes. Specimens were also obtained

by Moti Ram in 1872.

20. JKALLIMA ALBOFASCTATA.

EK. albofasciata, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond, 1877, p. 584.

Male and female.

228 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—List of Diurnal [No. 4,

21. EHURYTELA HORSFIELDII.

Eurytela horsfieldii, Boisduval, Faun. Ent. Madag, 1833, p. 54, ¢.

stephensii, Id., ibid. p. 54, @.

A single male.

22. CYRESTIS COCLES.

Pap. cocles, Fabr,, Moore, Proc. Zool Soc. London, 1878, p. 829,

? Cyrestis formosa, Felder, Reise Novara, Lep. p. 412, 3.

A single male of this delicately tinted butterfly.

23. CYRESTIS THYODAMAS.

Cyr. thyodamas, Boisd, in Cuy. R. A. 1836, Ins., pl. 138, fig. 4. Doubld. Westw.

and Hew. Gen. D. L., pl. 32, fig. 3.

Amathusia ganescha, Koll. in Higel’s Kaschmir, 1848, vol. iv, p. 480, pl. 7,

figs. 3, 4.

One male.

24. HYyPoLIMNAS BOLINA.

Pap. bolina, Linn., Clerk’s Icones, pl. 21.—Diadema bolina, Wallace, Trans, Ent.

Soc. Lond, 1869, p. 278.

Numerous male and females (4, de R. and Moti Ram).

25. HERONA MARATHUS, var. ANDAMANA.

Herona marathus, Westw. Doubl. and Hew. Gen. D. Lep. 1850, p. 293, pl. 41, fig. 3.

andamana, Moore, Proc. Zool, Soc. Lond, 1877, p. 585, 6 2.

Two males and a female.

26. PARTHENOS GAMBRISIUS.

Pap. gambrisius, Faby.

Numerous specimens of each sex (A. de R. and Moti Ram).

27. NEPTIS MANANDA.

QV. mananda, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 586, pl. lviti, flg. 4, @.

Two pairs (A. de R. and Moti Ram).

Seems very near to WV. khasiana.

28. NEPTIS ANDAMANA.

NV. andamana, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1£77, p. 586, 3 @.

Five males and a female (4. de R. and Moti Ram).

1880. ] | Lepidoptera from the Andaman Islands, Se. 229

29. ATHYMA SELENOPHORA.

Limenitis selenophora, Koll. in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, 1848, vol. iv, p. 426, pl. vii,

fess 2) 3.

A female, the only one in the Museum, was obtained by Moti Ram

in 1872.

30. SYMPHMHDRA TEUTA, var. TEUTOIDES.

S. teutoides, Moore, Proc. Zool, Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 586, 3 ?.

Males and females (A. de 2, and Moti Ram).

31. TANAECIA CIBARITIS.

Adolias cibaritis, Hewitson, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1874, ser. 4, vol. xiv, p. 358;

Exot. Butt. vol. v, Adolias, pl. iv, figs. 12, 18, 15, 3 @.

Tanaécia cibaritis, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 586.

Numerous males and females (4. de &. and Moti Ram).

32. TANAECIA ACONTIUS.

Adolias acontius, Hewitson, loc. cit. p. 357; Exot. Butt. vol. v, Adolias, pl. iv,

fig. 11, 9. Zunaécia acontius, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond. 1877, p. 586.

One female.

33, LIMENITIS PROCRIS, var. ANARTA.

L. anarta, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 585.

One female.

34. NYMPHALIS ATHAMAS.

Pap. athamas, Drury, Ul. Exot. Entom. 1773, vol. i, pl. ii, fig. 4,

One female.

Family ERYCINIDA.

385. ABISARA BIFASCIATA.

A, bifasciata, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 587, pl. lviii, fig. 1, 2.

Three females.

Family LYCAINIDZ.

386. LAMPIDES ARDATES.

Lycaena ardates, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1874, p. 574, pl. Ixvii, fig. 1, 3.

One female.

387. LAMPIDES BLIANUS.

Tesp. aelianus, Faby., Lycaena aelianus, Horsfield, Cat, Lep. E. I. Co., 1829, p. 78,

One male.

230 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—ZList of Diurnal [No. 4,

38. LAMPIDES ELPIS.

Polyomm. elpis, Godt., Encyclo, Méth. Ins. vol. ix, p. 654.—Zyeaena elpis, Horsfield,

opeit. p. 76, pl. 1, fig. 4, 2 o. :

One female and one male (A. de R. and Moti Ram).

89. LAMPIDES PANDAVA.

Lycaena pandava, Horsfield, op. cit. p. 84, 2.

One female.

40. Lamprpzs conf. PAcTOLUS.

@. Wings above much as in LZ. pactolus, differing in having the dark

fuscous outer border of the anterior wing spotless and that of the posterior

wing very much less distinctly marked in the same manner, no discocellular

mark in either wing, and the whole upperside apparently more clouded

with smoky fuscous scales.

Wings beneath very pale fuscous, with a submarginal fascia composed

of rhomboid spots and a marginal one of narrow oval spots fuscous of a

rather darker shade than the ground, both margined and connected together

by whitish, the latter of them developed, in the interval between the first

and second median branches, into a conspicuous jet-black circular spot

divided externally by a semicircle of pale blue metallic scales and encircled

internally by luteous white, and into two minute ones, one on each side

of the submedian vein, internally covered with blue scales.

Anterior wings with two small “subcostal spots, a short discocellular

fasciole, and a discal fascia strongly faulted at the second median veinlet so

that the. outer white margin of its posterior portion is in line with that of

its anterior portion, and the inner white margin of its posterior portion in

line with the discocellular veinlet.

Posterior wings with a similar discocellular fasciole, and complexly

faulted and contorted discal and basal fasciew ; all the fascia in all the

wings margined on both sides with fuscous of a very slightly deeper tint

than the ground and with whitish.

Since the above description was written, we have discovered that

five unnamed insects in the Museum from Cherrapunji in the Khasi Hills,

the Sikkim Hills, and Sibsagar (8. #. Peal) in upper Assam are males of

this species, and the following is a brief description of one of them :—

$. Wings above semitranslucent palish fuscous with a light and

tolerably brilliant amethystine lustre, edged with a darker anteciliary line.

Wings below much as in the female, with the macular submarginal

fuscous fascia of all the wings broader, and the anal and subanal black

spots rather larger and conspicuously encircled with fulvous internally.

1880. ] Lepidoptera from the Andaman Islands, Se. 231

Length of anterior wing @ ‘72, g ‘58—'68; whence expanse = 92

15, g¢ 1:2—1°4 inches.

41, LAMPIDES PLUMBEOMICANS, Nn. sp.

Closely allied to the preceding, but much smaller; with three instead

of two fascie on the underside of the anterior wings, with all the fascie

relatively broader, and with those of the posterior wings much less com-

plexly faulted and contorted.

é. Wings above dark amethyst-purple with a dull greyish leaden

metallic lustre, with a deep black anteciliary line and fuscous fringe.

Wings beneath pale fuscous of a purplish tinge, with a marginal and

a submarginal fascia composed of suboval spots of a darker shade

than the ground, both margined and connected by whitish, the latter

of them bearing in the posterior wings subanal and anal black spots in

every respect as in the preceding except that the luteous inner line is

rather more distinct.

Anterior wings with a basal fascia, a discocellular fasciole, and a discal

fascia faulted as in the preceding at the second median veinlet; with the

fascie as also the fasciole commencing at the costal vein where they are

all broken.

Posterior wings with corresponding fasciole and fascie, which latter

are more or less faulted at every vein though much less contorted and

consequently more easily traced than in the preceding ; fasciz and fascioles

of both wings margined on both sides with fuscous of a rather deeper

shade than the ground and with whitish.

@. Wings above dull smoky.

Anterior wings with a pale discal patch which has a brilliant metallic

pale bluish lustre in certain lights.

Posterior wings with a thin interrupted white line before the dark

anteciliary one and a submarginal row of dark spots before it, spots and line

increasing in size, breadth, and distinctness from the apical angle to the

subanal region, the former obscurely encircled internally with smoky

whitish. Pier

Wings beneath lighter, with all the markings more pronounced, being

margined with fuseous much darker than the ground and with pure white,

and the marginal and submarginal macular fascie, especially conspicuous

and coarse.

Length of anterior wing g °56, 2 ‘58, whence expanse = ¢ 1:12,

@ 1°16 inches.

Two males and a female.

232 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—List of Diurnal [No. 4,

42, PoLYOMMATUS SANGRA.

P. sangra, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1865, p. 772, pl. 41, fig. 8, ¢.

Innumerable males and females. The commonest ‘blue’ in Calcutta,

being obtainable in any number wherever there is a patch of grass.

_ 43. APHNEUS LOHITA, var. ZOILUS.

A, zoilus, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 588, ¢.

@. Larger than the male. Upprerstpg smoky brown, marked ob-

securely with darker bands corresponding to those of the underside.

UnpERSIDE with the intervals between the hands wider owing to the

greater breadth of the wings. In all other respects as in the male.

Length of fore-wing *7 ; whence expanse = 1°46 inches.

Males and one female.

44. HLYPOLYCHNA ERYLUS.

HT. evylus (Godart), Hewitson, Ill. D. Lep. Lye. p. 49, pl. xxi, fig. 1 6, 2,4 9.

H. andamana, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond, 1877, p. 589, ¢ ?.

Three males and a female. Absolutely indistinguishable from fresh

Sikkim specimens.

45. SITHON SUGRIVA, Var. ARECA.

Amblypodia sugriva, Horsfield, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. 1829, p. 105, pl. i, figs. 10, 10a, ¢.

Myrina sugriva, Horsfield and Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. p. 51, pl. 1a, fig. 12, ¢.

Myrina areca, Felder, Verhand, zool.-bot. Gesellsch. Wien, 1862, vol. xii,

p. 481, ¢.

@. Smaller than the male. UpprrsipE sepia-brown with a bronzy

gloss, the spots and fascize of the underside scarcely showing through.

Hindwing with a pure white patch divided by the brown veins, margined

externally by a fine and sharp dark brown or black anteciliary line, and

marked by a large circular black spot at the base of the tail on the

anterior side and by another smaller lighter and less distinct one on the

posterior side; with the caudal Jobe blackish, and the tails black with pure

white cilia. UNDERSIDE pure white marked as in the male with dark

sepia-brown fascise and spots, but with the black caudal spots larger and

the cilia of the posterior part of the hind-wing pure white like those of

the tails.

Length of fore-wing ‘66 ; whence expanse = 1°38 inches.

Tt differs from S. phocides 9 (= S. jolcus (Felder), Hew., Ill, D. Lep.

Lye. pl. xiii, figs. 16, 17) in the far less extent of the white patch on the

upperside of the hind-wing, and in the larger size and darker colour of

the spots and fasciw, as well as in the greater pureness of the white,

of the underside generally.

1880.] Lepidoptera from the Andaman Islands, Se. 233

One male and one female, the former differing from a specimen from

the Indian continent (Sylhet) only in its rather darker and more distinctly

marked underside. The lighter apical portion of the fore-wing in the

male has a beautiful bronzy gloss changing to dark purple according to

the incidence of the light. Both the insular and continental specimen,

but especially the former, present slight traces of the blue marginal band so

conspicuous in the hind-wings of Javan and Ceylonese examples, in the

shape of a small patch of metallic green scales on the anterior caudal

lobe. |

The male of this species, with its velvety black upperside, rich dark

brown underside, and elongated hind-wings produced into long robust buff

tails, presents a strong contrast to the dull-coloured female with her

pure dazzling white underside conspicuously spotted and banded with dark

brown, broader wings, and comparatively short and feeble white and black

tails.

Stthon kamorta is not the female of 8. sugriva, var. areca, as Felder

has suggested, but that of a distinct though closely-allied species peculiar

to the Nicobars, whence the Museum has recently received a specimen of

the true male differing from 8. famorta just in the same way as S. sugriva

$ does from its female, which appears not to have been previously described.

46. SITHON WESTERMANNII, var.

Dipsas westermannit, Felder, Reise Novara, Lep. p. 241, pl. xxx, figs, 21, 22, 9,

from Luzon.

A male and a female, the latter differing from the former in having

the upperside smoke-brown instead of purplish fuscous, no discal pale

patch in the fore-wing, the hind-wing devoid of blue, and the underside

ochraceous-brown instead of dark fawn-colour with a vinous tinge. The

male differs from the same sex of S. westermannii, in having less blue on

the upper surface, and the anal spot completely encircled with grey scales.

A comparison of Andamanese with Philippine specimens would, we

have no doubt, show that the former is just as much entitled to a name

of its own as the latter. Both are merely insular races of the Indian

continental S. jangala,

47, SITHON TARPINA.

Myrina tarpina, Hewitson, Il. D. Lep. Lye. Suppl. 1877, p. 28, pl. (Suppl.) iii a,

figs. 93, 94, 2.

6. Uprprstpe rich deep metallic violet-blue, with the anterior

margin of the fore-wing narrowly, and the external margin of both wings

more broadly and decreasingly bordered with black. UNpbgrstpe with

about the basal two-thirds of both wings ccerulescent or virescent opaque

dead white, the rich red-brown of the outer margins darker but similarly

234 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—Zist of Diurnal [No. 4,

banded and marked with white, and the orange spots smaller with a diffused

patch of greyish white scales between them and two or three in front of

them all somewhat confounded with the white marginal line.

Three specimens.

Length of forewing ‘84; whence expanse = 1°78 inches.

48. DErvuponIx EPIJARBAS.

Dipsas epijarbas, Moore, Cat. Lep HE. I. Co. 1857, vol. i, p. 32, #@.

Deudorix epijarbas, Hew., Il. D. Lep. Lye. pl. vii, figs. 16,18, ¢, 17, 2.

Very numerous specimens of both sexes.

49. DrEUDORIxX DIENECES.

D. dieneces, Hewitson, Ill. D. Lep. Lye. Suppl. 1878, p. 31, pl. v a, figs. 65, 67 g,

6698

Males and females,

The Museum possesses males from Silhet and Caleutta also.

50. DEUDORIx ORSETS.

D: orseis, Hewitson, Ill. D. Lep. Lyc. 1863, p. 28, @.

Q. Uprersipe lighter, with a distinct purple gloss which has a light

steel-bluish tint at the base of all the wings. Unperrsrpx lighter, with all

the markings more distinct.

Length of fore-wing ‘68; whence expanse = 1°42 inches.

Two males and two females.

51. Drvporix VaRuNa.

Thecla varuna, Horsfield, Cat. Lep. EH. I. Co. 1829, p. 91, 3 ?.

A single male.

52. MyRINA ATYMNUS, var. PRABHA.

Myrina prabha, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 589, pl. lviii, fig. 5, 2.

Males and female.

538. AMBLYPODIA NARADA, var. ERICHSONII.

Amblypodia narada, Worsfield, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. 1829, p. 98, pl. 1, fig. 8, d 2.

erichsonii, Felder, Reise Novara, Lep. p. 218, 9, from Luzon.

Two females.

54. ARHOPALA CENTAURUS, Var. CORUSCANS.

Pap. centaurus, Fabr. -Ambly. centawrus, Horsf., Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. 1829, p. 102.

Hewitson, Cat. Lyc. Brit. Mus. pl. ii, figs. 1O—13, ¢ @.

Male and female; the latter much smaller than the former. The

bases of both wings in both sexes, but especially in the female, lighter,

1880. ] Lepidoptera from the Andaman Islands, &. 235

with a greenish tinge, so that the whole central portion of the insects

appears brilliantly illuminated by a pale greenish blue reflection in most

lights.

55. SURENDRA QUERCETORUM, var. LATIMARGO.

S. latimargo, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1879, p. 142, g 2.

A male and two females. ;

Is A. qguercetorum itself more than a local race or variety of A. vivarna,

Horsfield, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. 1829, p. 99, from Java ?

Family PAPILIONIDA.

Subfamily Prerina,

56. ‘TERIAS HECABE.

Pap. hecabe, Linn.

Males and a female.

57. TERIAS HARINA.

T. harina, Horsfield, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. 1829, p. 137.

Males and females.

58. HEBOMOIA ROEPSTORIFII.

H. Roepstorfii, Wood-Mason, antea, p. 134 6, et p. 150, 9.

“@g. Differs from H. glaucippe, the only species of the genus with

which Ihave been able to compare it, on the UprERsIpE, in having the

apical orange patch of the fore-wing larger, extended into the cell, and less

broadly bordered with fuscous, both internally and externally ; the submar-

ginal fuscous spots smaller and completely isolated from the fuscous of the

outer margin ; the fore-wing at the posterior angle tinged, and the hind-

wing externally broadly bordered, with bright sulphur-yellow, which colour

is shaded off into the cream-colour of the rest of both wings; and the

outer margin of the hind-wing narrowly edged with fuscous, which gradually

broadens from the anal to the anterior angle and extends inwards in points

at the veins:—and, on the UNDERSIDE, in having the brown mottling of

the fore-wing arranged in the form of a tolerably conspicuous band coin-

cident with the macular band of the upperside ; and the ground-colour of

the hind-wing, as also that of the mottled portion of the fore-wing, of a

rich golden-luteous colour,

Length of fore-wing 1:76; whence expanse = 8 62 inches,

?. Uprrrstpe. ore-wing with the orange patch devoid of amethys-

tine gloss, externally more broadly bordered with fuscous (which at each

veinlet gives off inwards an angular process the extremity of which is

236 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—List of Diurnal [No. 4,

continued on as a very narrow edging to each side of the veinlet), but in-

ternally much less distinctly so than in the male; with the cell more

clouded with dark scales ; and with the sulphur-colour at the inner angle

more diffused. Hind-wing with a marginal row of large subtriangular

fuscous spots placed upon the veinlets from the first subcostal to the first

median (the two last obsolete), decreasing from the second in the direction

of the anal angle, and connected together at the extreme margin of the

wing by a narrow edging of the same colour, which extends to the anal

angle ; with a submarginal series of six roundish spots, similarly decreasing

from the first, and alternating with those of the marginal series, each

being placed upon a fold, the first and largest on the fold between the

eosta and the first branch of the subcostal, and the last on that between

the first and second median veinlets ; and with the sulphur-colour around

the four intermediate submarginal spots stained with orange. UNDERSIDE

of both wings paler.

Length of fore-wing 1:7; whence expanse = 3'5 inches.

Has. South Andaman.

In a specimen of the male from the collection of Captain G. F. L. Mar-

shall, the submarginal fuscous spots of the fore-wing are obsolete.

The place of this species would seem to be between H. vossii (Mait-

land) and H. sulphurea, Wallace.”

59. IxIaS ANDAMANA.

I. andamana, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 590, ¢ 2.

Numerous males and females (4. de &. and Moti Ram).

GO, CATOPSILIA CROCALE.

Pap. crocale, Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1779, vol. i, pl. lv, figs. C, D, 9.

Callidryas crocale, Butler. Lep. Exot. 1869-74, p. 22, pl. ix, figs. 1, 2, 3, 6, ¢ 9.

Two males.

Gl. PimRIS NADINA, var. NAMA.

Pieris nadina, Lucas, in Guérin’s Rev. et Mag. Zool. 1852, ser. 2, vol. iv, p. 333, g.

P. nama, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1857, p. 102, pl. 44, figs. 1, 2, d 2.

Hewitson, Ex, Butt. Pieridae, pl. 6, fig. 37.

Males and females.

62. PIERIS CORONIS, var. LICHENOSA.

Pap. coronis, Cramer, Pap. Exot. vol. i, 1776, pl. 44, figs. B, C.

Pier. lichenosa, Moore, Proce Zool. Soc, Lond. 1877, p. 591.

Two pairs.

1880.] Lepidoptera from the Andaman Islands, Se. 237

63. HERONIA VALERIA, var. NARAKA.

Pap. valeria, Cramer, Pap. Exot. 1779, vol. i, pl. 85, fig. A, @.

Eronia naraka, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 591, 3 9.

Males and a female.

; The Javan specimens of the male described by Horsfield and figured

by Cramer both have the black outer border of the anterior as well as the

posterior wings immaculate, and thus agree more closely with the S. Indian

(var. pingasa), Ceylonese (var. ceylonica), and Andamanese (var. narvka)

varieties. As might have been expected from its more northern station,

the Andamanese more nearly approaches the north Indian form (var. gaea).

64. TacHyRrISs PAULINA.

Pap. paulina, Cramer, Pap, Exot, vol. ii, pl. 110, figs. E, F, ?.

Pieris albina, Boisd., Sp. Gén. Lep. p. 480, fg.

Tachyris paulina, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1867, ser. 3, vol. iv, p. 369.

Two males and two (white) females differing in no respect from those

of continental India (Naga Hills, Cachar, Bhutan, and Madras).

Lachyris galathea, Felder, is a perfectly distinct race peculiar to

the Nicobars, whence we have specimens.

Subfamily Paprironin az.

65. ORNITHOPTERA HELIACONOIDES.

Orntth. heliconoides, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 592, d 2.

A male and a female.

66. Papilio CHARICLES.

P. charicles, Hewitson, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1874, ser. 4, vol. xiv, p. 356 ;

Exot. Butt. vol. v, Pap, pl. xiv, fig. 45, 2.

One female of the 38rd form (Joti Ram).

This is the Andaman representative of the continental P. androgeus ;

if is interesting to find that it has acquired the red tails of its model,

P. rhodifer, the slight Andamanese modification of the continental P.

douwbleduyt.

67. Papriio mayo.

P. mayo, Atkinson, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1878, p. 736, pl. Ixiii, fig. 1, ¢.

Two males (4. de &. and Moti Ram). The species was described by

Atkinson without acknowledgment from the specimens obtained by Moti

vam.

The Andamanese representative of the continental P. polymnestor.

68. PapimLtIo POLYTES, var. NIKOBARUS.

Felder, Verh. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. Wien, 1862, vol. xii, p. 483.

Males and females of the first form only (A. de &. and Moti Ram).

238 J. Wood-Mason & L. de Nicéville—List of Diurnal [No. 4,

69. PaprmLnio AGAMEMNON.

Males and females (4. de R. and Moti Ram).

70. PAPILIO EURYPYLUS.

One pair.

71. PAPILIO CLYTIA, var. FLAVOLIMBATUS.

P. dissimilis, var. flavolimbatus, Oberthiir, Etudes d’Entom. 4 me livr. p. 101, 9.

This variety agrees in the size and distinctness of the cretaceous white

markings of the upperside best with specimens from Silhet, Sibsagar, and

Burmah on the Indian mainland, but differs from them, as indeed it does

from all specimens in the Museum, in the large amount of rich golden

yellow at the outer margin on both sides of the posterior wings: the marginal

and submarginal flavous spots seen at the anal angle of the wing in most

continental specimens are in this case so completely run together on both

sides as to have left only a small central spot of the black ground-colour

that separates them from’ one another in continental specimens ; they are

succeeded by a series of six (incisural) marginal spots of the same colour ;

the submarginal lunules are much larger and more spear-shaped and, more-

over, sullied with yellow, especially the one near the anal blotch: on the

underside, the marginal golden yellow spots are larger and tend to coalesce

with the hastate submarginal markings, which consequently are more

suffused with yellow than they are on the upperside.

A single male.

49, PAPILIO LHSTRYGONUM.

P. laestrygonum, Wood-Mason, Proc, Asiat. Soc, Bengal, June, 1880, p. 102,

et antea, p. 178, pl. vi, fig. 1, la, @.

P. epaminondas, Oberthir, Etudes d’Entom. 4 me livr. p. 62, pl. iv, fig. 1, ¢.

“ g. Wings above cretaceous-white, the anterior ones black at the